JP7371947B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

For example, Patent Document 1 describes a gaming machine that includes a main control means for controlling the progress of a game, and a performance control means for controlling a performance according to a command (signal) from the main control means.

JP2020-163228A

However, in the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document, there is room for further improvement in the performance in terms of improving interest.

The present invention aims to improve the interest of gaming.

The present invention that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (for example, gaming machine 1) includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect control means that controls effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. (performance control board 130) In the gaming machine, the main control means acquires determination information upon establishment of a starting condition, and determines whether or not to play a special game based on the determination information . can be executed , a variable display can be executed based on the determination information , and it can be controlled into a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (for example, a variable probability gaming state) different from the normal gaming state, The performance control means is capable of executing a fluctuating performance in which a plurality of performance symbols (for example, the performance symbol 70a) are varied and then stopped based on the determination information , and executes a reach performance during execution of the fluctuating performance. a specific display that combines first identification information (e.g., characters) that can identify the performance design and second identification information (for example, a character image CG) that has a predetermined decorativeness that allows the performance design to be identified; In the variable performance in which the plurality of performance symbols can be displayed depending on the display mode (for example, the highly decorative display mode shown in FIG. 278(a)) and the ready-to-reach performance is not executed , the plurality of performance symbols in the specific display mode can be displayed. As one of the stop modes, it is possible to execute a specific sound effect (for example, outputting a sound effect accompanying a temporary stop) when the last effect pattern (for example, the effect pattern 70a in the middle area) stops, and the variable effect is It is possible to display a specific image that makes the performance pattern difficult to see in a customer waiting state that is not being executed, and even if the fluctuating display by the main control unit is started while the specific image is being displayed, the performance control unit If a predetermined state (for example, a state in which a command is not received normally, a state in which a start command is not received normally) occurs in which the fluctuation effect is not started, it is possible to continue displaying the specific image, and the predetermined state is If a predetermined signal (for example, a command, a stop command) is normally received during the continuation of the display of the specific image in the case where the specific image occurs, the specific image is hidden and the predetermined effect pattern is made visible.

In addition, the above-mentioned numerals in this column are added as examples when explaining the present invention, and the present invention is not limited or reduced by these numerals.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

FIG. 1 is a schematic front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a back view of the pachinko game machine when the pachinko game machine is seen from the rear side. (a) is an enlarged view showing an example of a display disposed at the lower left of the game board, (b) is a partial plan view of the pachinko gaming machine, and (c) is an enlarged view showing an example of the display disposed at the lower left of the game board. FIG. 2 is an enlarged view showing an example of a sub-information display device. It is a diagram showing the internal configuration of a control unit of the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of an image/sound control section and a lamp control section of the present embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the functional configuration of a game control section of this embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the operation of basic processing by the game control section. It is a flowchart showing the operation of processing when the power is cut off by the game control section. It is a flowchart showing the main control processing of the game control section. It is a flowchart which shows the content of a starting port switch process. 3 is a flowchart showing the contents of gate switch processing. It is a flowchart showing the contents of the second big prize opening switch process. It is a flowchart showing the contents of special symbol processing. It is a flowchart showing the contents of jackpot determination processing. 3 is a flowchart showing the contents of a variation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of processing during suspension. It is a flowchart which shows the content of a customer waiting setting process. It is a flowchart showing the contents of normal symbol processing. It is a flowchart showing the contents of the first big winning opening process. It is a flowchart showing the contents of the second big prize winning opening process. It is a flowchart showing the contents of gaming state setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the contents of electric tulip processing. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the random number used in this embodiment, (a) is a figure which shows the structural example of the jackpot random number, (b) is a figure which shows the structural example of the jackpot symbol random number, (c) is a diagram showing an example of the structure of a small winning pattern random number, (d) is a diagram showing an example of the structure of a reach random number, and (e) is a diagram showing an example of the structure of a winning random number. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of setting a variation pattern and a table used in variation pattern selection processing. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of setting a variation pattern and a table used in variation pattern selection processing. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of setting a variation pattern and a table used in variation pattern selection processing. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of setting a variation pattern and a table used in variation pattern selection processing. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of setting a variation pattern and a table used in variation pattern selection processing. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of setting a variation pattern and a table used in variation pattern selection processing. It is a block diagram explaining the example of composition of RAM of a game control part, (a) is a block diagram showing the composition of the storage area, and (b) is a block diagram showing the composition of each of the storage parts shown in (a). It is. It is a block diagram explaining the example of composition of RAM of a performance control part, (a) is a block diagram showing the composition of a reservation storage area, and (b) is a block diagram showing each composition of the storage part shown in (a). It is a diagram. It is a flowchart which shows the content of preliminary determination processing. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a setting example of a preliminary determination pattern and a table used in preliminary determination processing. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a setting example of a preliminary determination pattern and a table used in preliminary determination processing. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a setting example of a preliminary determination pattern and a table used in preliminary determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the operation|movement of a production control part, (a) is a figure which shows main processing, (b) is a figure which shows interrupt processing. 7 is a flowchart showing the contents of command reception processing. 38 is a flowchart showing the contents of the advance judgment performance selection process and the performance selection process of FIG. 37. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot effect selection process of FIG. 37. 38 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending effect selection process of FIG. 37. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the contents of the customer waiting command reception process of FIG. 37. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the content of specific time saving related production processing. It is a flowchart which shows the content of production button processing. It is a diagram showing display information on an information display in each game section. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing main processing of the overall control unit. It is a figure which shows the accessory initialization process of a lamp control part. It is a figure which shows the origin return process of a lamp control part. It is a figure which shows the initial operation process of a lamp control part. (a) is a figure which shows an example of a board accessory initial movement pattern determination table, (b) is a figure which shows an example of a frame accessory initial movement pattern determination table. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a case where various drive sources are initially operated during a setting change. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a case where various drive sources are initially operated during RWM clear preparation. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a case where various drive sources are initially operated during setting confirmation. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a case where various drive sources are initially operated after a setting change. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources after RWM clearing. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a case where various drive sources are initially operated after setting confirmation. This is a preliminary judgment effect pattern table used when a game ball enters the first starting hole in the normal gaming state. This is a pre-judgment performance pattern table used when a game ball enters the second starting hole in the special time-saving game state. This is a predetermined effect pattern table used when a game ball enters the second starting hole in a specific time-saving game state. This is a variable effect pattern table used when a variable effect is performed based on winnings in the first starting slot in the normal gaming state. This is a variable effect pattern table used when a variable effect is performed based on winnings in the second starting hole in the normal gaming state. This is a variable performance pattern table used when a variable performance is performed based on winnings in the second starting opening in the special time-saving gaming state. This is a variable performance pattern table used when a variable performance is performed based on winnings in the first start opening in the special time-saving gaming state. This is a variable performance pattern table used when a variable performance is performed based on winnings in the second start opening in a specific time-saving gaming state. This is a variable effect pattern table used when a variable effect is performed based on winning in the first start opening in a specific time saving game state. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit using the image display unit. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit using the image display unit. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit using the image display unit. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit using the image display unit. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit using the image display unit. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit using the image display unit. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit using the image display unit. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit using the image display unit. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit using the image display unit. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit using the image display unit. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit using the image display unit. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit using the image display unit. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit using the image display unit. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit using the image display unit. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit using the image display unit. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit using the image display unit. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit using the image display unit. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit using the image display unit. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit using the image display unit. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit using the image display unit. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit using the image display unit. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit using the image display unit. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit using the image display unit. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit using the image display unit. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit using the image display unit. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit using the image display unit. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit using the image display unit. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit using the image display unit. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit using the image display unit. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit using the image display unit. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit using the image display unit. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit using the image display unit. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit using the image display unit. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit using the image display unit. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit using the image display unit. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit using the image display unit. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit using the image display unit. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit using the image display unit. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit using the image display unit. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit using the image display unit. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit using the image display unit. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit using the image display unit. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit using the image display unit. (A), (B), (C), and (D) are explanatory diagrams of the execution time of each variable performance. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit using the image display unit. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit using the image display unit. It is a figure which shows the modification of the performance in the example of a variable performance. It is a figure which shows the modification of the performance in the example of a variable performance. It is a figure which shows the modification of the performance in the example of a variable performance. It is a figure which shows the modification of the performance in the example of a variable performance. It is a figure which shows the modification of the performance in the example of a variable performance. It is a figure which shows the modification of the performance in the example of a variable performance. It is a figure which shows the modification of the performance in the example of a variable performance. It is a diagram showing an example of processing performed by the performance control section when the radio wave detection sensor and the game control board are disconnected while the power of the pachinko game machine is turned on. It is a diagram showing an example of processing performed by the performance control section when the magnetic detection sensor and the game control board are not connected when the power of the pachinko game machine is turned on. It is a diagram showing an example of what happens when the game control board and the production control board become disconnected while the power of the pachinko game machine is turned on. It is a diagram showing an example of a front view of the gaming machine. It is a diagram showing an example of a block diagram of the entire gaming machine. It is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot determination table. It is a diagram showing an example of a special symbol determination table. It is a figure showing an example of a special figure fluctuation pattern judgment table. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of a preliminary determination table. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing main processing in the main control board. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing timer interrupt processing in the main control board. It is a figure showing input control processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 1st starting port detection switch input process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special figure special electric control process in a main control board. It is a diagram showing special symbol storage determination processing in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the main processing in a production control part. It is a diagram showing timer interrupt processing in the production control section. It is a diagram showing customer waiting performance processing in the performance control section. It is a figure which shows an example of a demonstration standby time determination table. It is a figure which shows the prefetch type|system|group performance process in a performance control part. It is a figure showing icon change production decision processing in a production control part. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of an icon final display mode determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a change scenario determination table. It is a figure showing icon change production execution processing in a production control part. It is a figure which shows an example of the change pattern determination table for pending icons. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a one-step change pattern determination table for the icon, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the two-step change pattern determination table for the icon. It is a figure which shows an example of the said icon change pattern determination table for abnormalities. It is a figure which shows the continuous preview performance determination process in a performance control part. It is a diagram showing an example of a continuous notice type determination table for performance modes A to C (normal game state). It is a diagram showing an example of a continuous notice type determination table for performance modes D to G (specific game states). It is a diagram showing an example of a continuous preview performance scenario determination table for performance modes A to C (normal game state). It is a diagram showing an example of a continuous preview performance scenario determination table for performance modes D to G (specific game states). It is a figure which shows the continuous notice performance execution process in a performance control part. It is a figure which shows an example of an alternative notice pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows lamp change production execution processing in a production control part. It is a figure showing the fluctuating performance pattern judgment processing in a performance control part. It is a diagram showing an example of a variable performance pattern determination table for performance modes A to C (normal gaming state). It is a diagram showing an example of a variable performance pattern determination table for performance modes D to G (specific game states). It is a diagram showing jackpot preview performance determination processing in the performance control section. It is a figure which shows an example of the pre-reach notice determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a dialogue notice pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a step-up notice pattern determination table. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of a pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of an advanced production pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a cut-in effect pattern determination table. It is a diagram showing an example of a fixed performance pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a re-lottery performance pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a fixed performance pattern determination table. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing main processing in the overall control unit. It is a figure showing accessory initial processing in a lamp control part. It is a figure which shows the origin return process in a lamp control part. It is a figure which shows the initial operation process in a lamp control part. It is a figure which shows an example of a board accessory initial movement pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the frame accessory initial movement pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the specific example when there is no recovery abnormality in various accessories after power-on. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a specific example when there is a return abnormality in the second movable member after power is turned on. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the 1st movable member has a return abnormality after power-on. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the production button has a return abnormality after power-on. It is a figure which shows the specific example when there is no recovery abnormality in various accessories after power restoration. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the 2nd movable member has a return abnormality after power restoration. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the 1st movable member has a return abnormality after power restoration. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the production button has a return abnormality after power restoration. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the state after a power supply restoration is in the midst of the variable display of a special symbol, and with reservation memory. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a case where a power-on designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a case where a power recovery designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a case where a power-on command (a power-on designation command, a power recovery designation command) cannot be normally received when the power is turned on. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a first example in which power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a second specific example in which power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a third specific example in which power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a fourth specific example in which power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped. It is a figure which shows the modification 1 in the case where only the power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped. It is a figure which shows the modification 2 in which only the power supply to a main control board is restarted after stopping. It is a figure which shows the modification when the 2nd movable member has a return abnormality after power-on. It is a figure which shows the modification of the accessory initial processing in a lamp control part. It is a figure which shows the specific example when there is no recovery abnormality in various accessories after power-on. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a specific example when there is a return abnormality in the second movable member after power is turned on. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the 1st movable member has a return abnormality after power-on. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the production button has a return abnormality after power-on. It is a figure which shows the specific example when there is no recovery abnormality in various accessories after power restoration. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the 2nd movable member has a return abnormality after power restoration. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the 1st movable member has a return abnormality after power restoration. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the production button has a return abnormality after power restoration. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the state after a power supply restoration is in the midst of the variable display of a special symbol, and with reservation memory. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a case where a power-on designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a case where a power recovery designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a case where a power-on command (a power-on designation command, a power recovery designation command) cannot be normally received when the power is turned on. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a first example in which power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a second specific example in which only the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped. 11 is a diagram showing a third specific example in which power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a fourth specific example in which power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped. FIG. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the connection state of various detection means changes in a customer waiting state. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a case where the operation unit is operated while waiting for a customer. It is a timing chart in which a variable performance is started from a customer waiting state. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance in which a variable performance is started from a customer waiting state. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of a performance in which a variable performance is started from a customer waiting state. It is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases during a variable performance. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance in which the number of reservations increases during a variable performance. It is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases immediately after decreasing. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance in which the number of reservations increases immediately after decreasing. It is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases during a specific reach performance. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance in which the number of reservations increases during a specific reach performance. It is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases and decreases before and after the end of a specific gaming state. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance in which the number of reservations increases and decreases before and after the end of a specific gaming state. It is a diagram illustrating a continuation of the production example in which the number of reservations increases and decreases before and after the end of a specific gaming state. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance when a look-ahead motion performance and a step-up notice performance are performed. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of a performance when a look-ahead motion performance and a step-up notice performance are executed. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance when a pre-reading vibration performance and a dialogue preview performance are performed. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of a performance when a pre-reading vibration performance and a dialogue preview performance are executed. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance when a pseudo continuous performance is performed before a reach performance. It is a figure showing an example of a performance in a case where a pseudo continuous performance is executed after a ready-to-win performance. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance when a development performance is executed and an SP ready-to-reach performance is executed. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance when the development performance is performed and the SPSP reach performance is performed. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance when a cut-in performance is executed during the SP reach performance and a jackpot is achieved. It is a diagram showing a continuation of the example of a performance in the case where a cut-in performance is executed during the SP reach performance and a jackpot is achieved. It is a figure showing example 1 of a performance in the case where a deciding performance is executed during the SPSP ready-to-win performance and a jackpot is achieved. It is a diagram showing a continuation of performance example 1 in the case where a deciding performance is executed during the SPSP reach performance and a jackpot is achieved. It is a figure showing example 2 of a performance in the case where a deciding performance is executed during the SPSP ready-to-win performance and a jackpot is achieved. It is a diagram showing a continuation of performance example 2 in the case where a deciding performance is executed during the SPSP reach performance and a jackpot is achieved. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance when a variable mission performance is executed during a jackpot. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance when the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted after being stopped during execution of the icon change performance and the lamp change performance. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of a performance when restarting after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped during execution of the icon change performance and the lamp change performance. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance when power supply to the gaming machine is restarted after being stopped during execution of a look-ahead effect performance, a pending icon change performance, and a lamp change performance. It is a diagram showing a continuation of the example of the effect when the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted after being stopped during execution of the look-ahead effect effect, the pending icon change effect, and the lamp change effect. This is a timing chart 1 when a command cannot be received normally. This is an example of performance at various timings of timing chart 1. This is a timing chart 2 when a command cannot be received normally. This is an example 1 of performance at various timings of timing chart 2. This is a second example of performance at various timings of timing chart 2. This is timing chart 3 when a command cannot be received normally. This is an example 1 of performance at various timings of timing chart 3. This is a second example of performance at various timings of timing chart 3. This is a timing chart 4 when a command cannot be received normally. This is an example of performance at various timings of timing chart 4. This is a timing chart 5 when a command cannot be received normally. This is an example of performance at various timings of timing chart 5. FIG. 6 is a timing chart 6 when a command cannot be received normally. It is an example of a performance at various timings of the timing chart 6. It is a timing chart 7 when a command cannot be received normally. It is an example of a performance at various timings of timing chart 7. FIG. 8 is a timing chart 8 when a command cannot be received normally. This is an example of performance at various timings of the timing chart 8. FIG. 9 is a timing chart 9 when a command cannot be received normally. This is an example of performance at various timings of the timing chart 9. It is a timing chart 10 when a command cannot be received normally. It is an example of a performance at various timings of the timing chart 10. This is a first modification example in which a command cannot be received normally. This is a second modification example in which a command cannot be received normally. This is a third modification example in which a command cannot be received normally. This is a fourth modification example in which a command cannot be received normally. This is a fifth modification example in which a command cannot be received normally. This is a sixth modification example in which a command cannot be received normally. This is modification example 7 in which a command cannot be received normally. This is a specific example 13 in which a command cannot be received normally. This is a 14th specific example in which a command cannot be received normally. This is a specific example 15 in which a command cannot be received normally. This is a specific example 16 in which a command cannot be received normally. This is a specific example 17 in which a command cannot be received normally. This is a specific example 18 in which a command cannot be received normally. This is a specific example 19 where a command cannot be received normally. This is a specific example 20 where a command cannot be received normally. It is a diagram showing an example of a variation effect. It is a diagram showing an example of a variation effect. It is a diagram showing an example of a variation effect. It is a diagram showing an example of a variation effect. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example of a variation effect. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example of a variation effect. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example of a variation effect. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example of a variation effect. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example of a variation effect. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example of a variation effect. It is a figure showing the relationship between the performance performed in the variable performance example and each modification, and the timing at which the performance is performed. It is a figure showing the relationship between the performance performed in the variable performance example and each modification, and the timing at which the performance is performed. It is a diagram showing an example of a variation effect. It is a diagram showing an example of a variation effect. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example of a variation effect. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example of a variation effect. It is a figure showing the relationship between the performance performed in the variable performance example and each modification, and the timing at which the performance is performed. It is a diagram showing an example of a variation effect. It is a diagram showing an example of a variation effect. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example of a variation effect. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example of a variation effect. It is a diagram showing an example of a variation effect. It is a diagram showing an example of a variation effect. It is a diagram showing an example of a variation effect. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example of a variation effect. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example of a variation effect. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example of a variation effect. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example of a variation effect. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example of a variation effect. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example of a variation effect. It is a figure showing the relationship between the performance performed in the variable performance example and each modification, and the timing at which the performance is performed. It is a figure showing the relationship between the performance performed in the variable performance example and each modification, and the timing at which the performance is performed. It is a diagram showing an example of a variation effect. It is a diagram showing an example of a variation effect. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example of a variation effect. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example of a variation effect. It is a figure showing the relationship between the performance performed in the variable performance example and each modification, and the timing at which the performance is performed. It is a diagram showing an example of a variation effect. It is a diagram showing an example of a variation effect. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example of a variation effect. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example of a variation effect. It is a diagram showing an effect performed when the jackpot determination result is a jackpot. This is a specific example 21 in which a command cannot be received normally. This is a timing chart 19 when a command cannot be received normally. This is a specific example 22 in which a command cannot be received normally. It is a timing chart 20 when a command cannot be received normally. This is a specific example 23 in which a command cannot be received normally. This is a specific example 24 in which a command cannot be received normally. This is a specific example 1 (timing chart 1) when a command is normally received. This is a specific example 25 (timing chart 21) in which a command cannot be received normally. This is a second specific example (timing chart 2) when a command is normally received. This is a specific example 26 (timing chart 22) of a case where a command cannot be received normally. This is a specific example 27 in which a command cannot be received normally. This is a specific example 28 in which a command cannot be received normally. This is a specific example 29 where a command cannot be received normally. This is a specific example 30 in which a command cannot be received normally. This is a specific example 31 where a command cannot be received normally. This is a specific example 32 where a command cannot be received normally. This is a specific example 33 in which a command cannot be received normally. This is a specific example 34 in which a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows an example of the front view of the gaming machine in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the fixed performance pattern determination table in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the frame accessory initial movement pattern determination table in 3rd Embodiment.

(First embodiment)
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the accompanying drawings.
[Basic configuration of gaming machine]
FIG. 1 is a schematic front view of a pachinko gaming machine 100 according to the present embodiment.
FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko game machine 100 when the pachinko game machine 100 is viewed from the rear side.
A pachinko game machine 100 as an example of a game machine shown in FIG. 1 is configured to pay out a prize ball when a game ball hit by a player's instruction operation wins a prize. This pachinko game machine 100 includes a game board 110 from which game balls are launched, and a frame member 150 surrounding the game board 110. The game board 110 is detachably attached to the frame member 150.

The game board 110 includes, on the front, a game area 111 for playing games with game balls, a rail member 112 that forms a passage through which game balls shot from below ascend to the upper position of the game area 111, and a game area 111 for playing games with game balls. A guide member 113 for guiding the game ball is provided on the right side of the area 111.
In this embodiment, an image display unit 114 that displays various images for presentation is provided at a position in the gaming area 111 that is easily visible to the player. The image display unit 114 includes a display screen such as a liquid crystal display, and displays, as the player progresses in the game, decorative patterns for notifying the player of the lottery results (symbol variation results) of the special symbol lottery, for example. or display effects images based on the appearance of characters or items.
Furthermore, the front surface of the game board 110 is provided with three movable accessories 115 and a board lamp 116 used for various effects. The three movable accessories 115 are arranged above the image display section 114 so as to be lined up in the left-right direction. In addition, when each of the three movable accessories 115 is explained individually, the movable accessory 115 arranged on the left side will be referred to as "left movable accessory 115A". Furthermore, the movable accessory 115 placed in the center is referred to as a "medium movable accessory 115B." Furthermore, the movable accessory 115 placed on the right side is referred to as a "right movable accessory 115C." Moreover, when each of the three movable accessories 115 is not particularly distinguished, they are simply referred to as movable accessories 115. The movable accessory 115 performs various effects by operating on the game board 110. Further, the board lamp 116 performs various effects by emitting light.

In the game area 111, game nails, windmills, etc. (not shown) are arranged to change the direction in which the game balls fall. Further, in the gaming area 111, various accessories related to winnings and lottery are arranged at predetermined positions. Further, the gaming area 111 is provided with a discharge port 117 for discharging out of the gaming area 111 game balls that have been launched into the gaming area 111 but have not entered the winning hole. The pachinko game machine 100 includes an out ball detection switch (SW) 227 (see FIG. 4, which will be described later) that detects an out ball made of game balls flowing into the discharge port 117.

In this embodiment, as various accessories related to winning and drawing, there are a first starting hole 121 and a second starting hole 122 which start a special symbol drawing (jackpot drawing) when a game ball wins, and a normal drawing when a game ball passes through. A starting gate (hereinafter simply referred to as gate) 124 for starting a symbol lottery (opening/closing lottery) is provided on the game board 110. In addition, in FIG. 1, the gates 124 are provided on the left and right sides of the gaming area 111, and the gate 124 on the left side is written as 124L, and the gate 124 on the right side is written as 124R. In addition, the first starting opening 121 and the second starting opening 122 referred to herein refer to a winning opening that triggers the activation of one predetermined special symbol display. Specifically, the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122 are provided with switches (first starting port switch 211 and second starting port switch 212, which will be described later) that detect the passing of a game ball when winning a prize. It is being Then, when a game ball enters the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122, this switch detects the passage of the game ball, which triggers the activation of the special symbol display.

The second starting port 122 is equipped with an electric tulip (opening/closing member) 123, which is a normal electric accessory that lights up as a pair of tulip flower-shaped blades are opened and closed by an electric solenoid. In the electric tulip 123, when the blade is closed, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 122, but when the blade is opened, the entrance of the second starting port 122 expands and the game ball enters the second starting port 122. It is designed for easy access. When the electric tulip 123 wins the regular symbol lottery, its wings open for a specified time (for example, 0.15 seconds to 1.8 seconds) and a specified number of times (for example, 1 to 3 times) while lighting up or blinking.

The pachinko gaming machine 100 has two gaming states: a no-power support state in which there are few opportunities to win a prize in the second starting port 122, and a power-support state in which there are more chances to win a prize in the second start port 122 than in a non-power support state. are doing. Then, under a predetermined condition, such as triggered by a jackpot or the number of special symbol drawings, it is controlled to be in either the electric support state or the electric support state. The electric support state is, for example, one or more of the following: shortening the normal symbol fluctuation time, extending the opening time of the electric tulip 123, and increasing the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery. This is a gaming state controlled by combinations.
Furthermore, the pachinko gaming machine 100 has, as game states, a time saving no state where the special symbol fluctuation time is long and a time saving state where the special symbol fluctuation time is shorter than the time saving no state. Here, the time saving state is a state more advantageous to the player than the no time saving state.
In this embodiment, it is assumed that the electric support state and the time saving state are controlled at the same time. Further, in the following description, a state with electric support and a time saving state is simply referred to as a time saving state, and a state with no electric support and no time saving is simply referred to as a no time saving state.

In addition, in this embodiment, as other accessories related to winnings and drawings, the first grand prize opening 125 and the second grand prize opening 126 as special electric accessories that are opened according to the result of the special symbol lottery, and the game A normal prize opening 127, which does not perform a lottery even if a ball wins, is provided on the game board 110. The first big winning opening 125 is provided with a first big winning opening door 125D that opens and closes the first big winning opening 125. Further, the second big winning opening 126 is provided with a second big winning opening door 126D that opens and closes the second big winning opening 126. In the following description, the opening/closing state and opening/closing operation of the first big winning opening door 125D may be explained as the opening/closing state and opening/closing operation of the first big winning opening 125 for convenience. In addition, in the following explanation, the opening/closing state and opening/closing operation of the second big winning opening door 126D may be explained as the opening/closing state and opening/closing operation of the second big winning opening door 126D for convenience.
In this embodiment, a display 130 is provided at the lower left of the game board 110 to display lottery results and the number of reservations.

By the way, in the pachinko gaming machine 100 shown in FIG. located in the area. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment, when trying to win a prize such as the second starting opening 122, gate 124R, first big winning opening 125, second big winning opening 126, etc. The game ball is made to flow down into the area on the right side. Here, the left side area of the game area 111 is regarded as the first game area. Further, the right side area of the game area 111 is regarded as a second game area.
In the illustrated example, the second starting port 122 equipped with the electric tulip 123, the gate 124R, the first big winning port 125, and the second big winning port 126 are arranged in the right region of the gaming area 111. However, it is not limited to this. A second starting port 122 equipped with an electric tulip 123, a gate 124R, a first big winning port 125, and a second big winning port 126 are arranged in the left side area of the gaming area 111, and the first starting port 121, the gate 124L and the normal winning opening 127 may be arranged in the left side area of the gaming area 111. In this case, the area on the right side of the gaming area 111 is regarded as the first gaming area. Furthermore, the left side area of the game area 111 is regarded as a second game area.

Further, on the back side of the game board 110, a game control board 200B that determines the winning of special symbols, etc., and a performance control board 300B that centrally controls the performance are attached. Further, on the back side of the game board 110, various boards (not shown) are attached, such as an image control board that controls effects using images and sounds, and a lamp control board that controls effects using various lamps and movable accessories 115. In addition, on the back side of the game board 110, there is a connector 200C that connects the game control board 200B and the performance control board 300B, and a switching power supply that converts the supplied 24V AC power into DC power and outputs it to various boards, etc. (not shown) is provided. The connector 200C is provided with a plurality of wirings (not shown) for connecting the game control board 200B and the production control board 300B.

When the player touches the handle 151 and rotates the lever 152 clockwise, the frame member 150 fires game balls at predetermined time intervals (for example, 100 balls per minute) with a batting force corresponding to the operating angle. It is equipped with a firing device (not shown) that fires electrically. The frame member 150 also includes a supply device (not shown) that sequentially supplies game balls one by one to the launch device at a timing linked to the player's operation using the lever 152, and a supply device (not shown) that sequentially supplies game balls to the launch device at a timing linked to the player's operation using the lever 152. A tray 153 for temporarily storing the water is provided. A ball is paid out to this tray 153 by, for example, a payout unit.
In this embodiment, the plate 153 is constructed by integrating the upper and lower plates, but a configuration example in which the upper plate and the lower plate are separated is also conceivable. Further, a configuration example may be considered in which the handle 151 of the firing device emits light under predetermined conditions.

The frame member 150 also includes a stop button 154 for temporarily stopping the firing of game balls even when the player is touching the handle 151 of the firing device, and a stop button 154 for temporarily stopping the firing of game balls accumulated in the tray 153. It is provided with an eject button 155 for dropping it into a box (not shown) and taking it out.
Further, the frame member 150 includes a speaker 156 and a frame lamp 157 for announcing the gaming status and situation of the pachinko game machine 100 and for performing various effects. The speaker 156 performs various performances using music, voices, and sound effects. The frame lamp 157 is composed of a light emitting body such as an LED, and performs various effects using light, such as lighting/blinking patterns and different emitted colors. Note that for the frame lamp 157, an example of a configuration is possible that makes it possible to perform an effect of changing the direction of light irradiation.
Further, the frame member 150 includes a transparent plate (not shown) for separating the game board 110 from the player.

FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating the pachinko gaming machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. FIG. 3(b) is a partial plan view of the pachinko game machine 100, and FIG. 3(c) is an enlarged view showing an example of the sub-information display 80 disposed at the lower left of the game board.
As shown in FIG. 3(a), the display 130 of the pachinko gaming machine 100 includes a first special symbol display 221 that operates in response to a winning at the first starting opening 121, and a first special symbol display 221 that operates in response to a winning at the second starting opening 122. It includes a second special symbol display 222 that operates in response to the passing of the gate 124, and a normal symbol display 223 that operates in response to passing through the gate 124. The first special symbol display 221 displays the special symbol in a variable manner and then stops displaying it to display the lottery result based on the winning of the first start opening 121. The second special symbol display 222 displays the special symbol in a variable manner based on the winning of the second starting port 122, and then stops displaying the symbol to display the lottery result. The first special symbol display device 221 and the second special symbol display device 222 perform cycle fluctuation (cycle display) in which the display mode changes for one cycle (=256 ms) multiple times, and stop when the special symbol fluctuation time has elapsed. indicate.
The normal symbol display 223, based on the game ball passing through the gate 124, displays the normal symbols in a variable manner and then stops displaying them to display the lottery result. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 221 and the second special symbol display 222 are each constituted by a display device in which LEDs are arranged, and the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is displayed depending on the lighting mode thereof. Similarly, the normal symbol display 223 is also constituted by a display device in which LEDs are arranged, and the lottery result of the regular symbol lottery is displayed depending on the lighting mode.

In addition, the display 130 includes a first special symbol reservation display 218 that operates in response to reservation on the first special symbol display 221, and a first special symbol reservation display 218 that operates in response to reservation on the second special symbol display 222. 2, a special symbol retention display 219 and a normal symbol retention display 220 that operates in response to reservation on the normal symbol display 223. In this embodiment, the first special symbol reservation display 218, the second special symbol reservation display 219, and the normal symbol reservation display 220 are each composed of a display device in which LEDs are arranged, and the number of reservations is indicated by the lighting mode. Is displayed.

Here, suspension will be explained. If a game ball further enters the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122 during the variable display operation of the special symbol (while the variable display for one win is being performed), the special symbol is in the process of changing. Also, it is not possible to start the variable display operation of special symbols based on subsequent winnings. Therefore, later winnings are stored up to a specified number (for example, 4), and the right to start the special symbol for the winning game ball is held until the variable display operation for the winning game ball ends. It will be put on hold.
Note that the same processing as that for special symbols is performed for normal symbols. The fact that such a reservation is made and the number of reservations (unchanged number) are displayed on the first special symbol reservation display 218, the second special symbol reservation display 219, and the normal symbol reservation display 220.

Furthermore, the display 130 includes a status display 224 that displays the status of the pachinko gaming machine 100. In this embodiment, the status indicator 224 is composed of a display device in which two LEDs are arranged. One of the two LEDs indicates whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a time saving state in which the special symbol variation time is short by lighting. The other one is to notify by lighting whether or not the player is in an advantageous state by hitting the game ball to the right (by changing the hitting force of the game ball).

In addition, the display 130 includes a round number display 225 that displays the number of rounds when the first jackpot 125 is activated in a jackpot game performed according to the lottery results of the special symbol lottery. The jackpot game will be described later. The round number display 225 is constituted by a display device in which LEDs are arranged, and the number of operating rounds of the first jackpot 125 in the jackpot game is displayed depending on the lighting mode.

The display 130 also includes a status confirmation display 226. The status confirmation indicator 226 is composed of one LED, and is used to indicate that the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is set. The LED starts lighting up, and when the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode ends, the LED is turned off. In this way, since the status confirmation display 226 is provided on the front (surface) of the gaming machine, it is possible to easily confirm whether the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set. . Note that the status confirmation display 226 may be installed at the front (surface) of the pachinko gaming machine 100, and may be installed at other locations.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the display is displayed in the same manner (lit display) regardless of whether it is set to setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, but it is difficult to recognize which mode it is set to. It may be displayed as possible. For example, the status confirmation display 226 may be lit in the setting change mode, and blinking in the setting confirmation mode, or vice versa.

Further, in this embodiment, the status confirmation display 226 is provided as a dedicated display to indicate that the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is set, but it may also be used as another display. For example, in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, the first special symbol display 221, the second special symbol display 222, the first special symbol reservation display 218, the second special symbol reservation display 219, the number of rounds display Since the status indicators 225 and 224 are off, one or more LEDs of these indicators may be turned on.

The frame member 150 of the pachinko game machine 100 is equipped with an input device for a player to input information regarding the performance. As shown in FIG. 3(b), in this embodiment, as an example of an input device, a production button 161, a production key 162 consisting of a plurality of keys adjacent to the production button 161 and arranged in a substantially cross shape, are arranged on the frame member 150. In the illustrated example, consider a case where an effect is performed that accepts an operation of selecting one image from a plurality of images. In this case, for example, by operating the effect key 162 consisting of four keys arranged in a cross pattern, the player instructs one of the plurality of images displayed on the image display section 114, and presses the effect button 161. By operating it, it is possible to perform effects such as selecting the designated image. Further, as the form of the input device, in addition to the illustrated performance button 161 and performance key 162, various input forms such as a lever or a handle can be adopted depending on the content of the performance.

Moreover, the pachinko gaming machine 100 of this embodiment has a sub-first fluctuation display 81, a sub-second fluctuation display 82, a sub-first reservation display 83, and a sub-second reservation display 84 inside the game area 111. , a sub-information display 80 consisting of a sub-normal figure fluctuation indicator 85, a sub-normal figure pending indicator 86, and a sub-right hit indicator 87.
This sub-information display 80 is basically composed of LEDs, and dynamic lighting is performed. Note that the sub-information display 80 is not provided with an indicator such as the status confirmation display 226 that indicates that the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is set.

The sub-first fluctuation display 81 is for displaying (notifying) whether or not the first special symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner, and the sub-second fluctuation display 82 is for displaying the second special symbol in a fluctuating manner. This is for displaying (notifying) whether the vehicle is inside or not, and is each composed of one LED. Then, when the variable display of the corresponding special symbol starts, the LED blinks at a predetermined period (1 second) (lights on for 0.5 seconds → goes off for 0.5 seconds), and lights up when the corresponding special symbol stops being displayed. do. In other words, the sub-first variable display 81 and the sub-second variable display 82 repeatedly display a cycle in which one blink is one cycle (=1 second), and when the corresponding special symbol is stopped and displayed, Light.

In addition, the result of jackpot determination of the special symbol may be notified by the sub-first fluctuation display 81 or the sub-second fluctuation display 82. In this case, it is preferable that the LED is turned on in the case of a jackpot and turned off in the case of a loss.

The sub-first reservation display 83 is for displaying the number of pieces of first reservation information (the number of first reservations) to be described later, and the sub-second reservation display 84 is for displaying the number of pieces of second reservation information (the number of second reservations to be described later) This is for displaying the second pending number), and is composed of two LEDs each. Then, when the number of reservations is "0", the left and right LEDs turn off, when the number of reservations is "1", the left LED lights up and the right LED goes out, and when the number of reservations is "2", the LED on the right turns off. The left and right LEDs light up, and when the number of reservations is "3", the left LED blinks and the right LED lights up, and when the number of reservations is "4", the left and right LEDs blink.

The sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the winning lottery, and is composed of one LED. Then, when the variable display of the normal symbols is started, the LED blinks at predetermined intervals (variable display). Then, when the normal symbols are stopped and displayed, an aspect indicating the result of the winning lottery (lights on in the case of a win, turns off in the case of a loss) is stopped and displayed.

In addition, in order to be able to grasp only whether or not the normal symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the sub-normal symbol fluctuation display 85 is configured to blink while the normal symbol is in the fluctuating display, and to turn on or off when the normal symbol is displayed in a stopped state. It's okay.

The sub-universal figure reservation display 86 is for displaying the number of ordinary figures pending memory (the number of ordinary figures pending), and is constituted by two LEDs. Then, when the number of reserved general drawings is "0", the left and right LEDs turn off, and when the number of reserved general drawings is "1", the left LED lights up and the right LED goes out, and the number of reserved general drawings is ``1''. The left and right LEDs light up when the number is "2", the left LED flashes and the right LED lights up when the number of reserved maps is "3", and the left and right LEDs light up when the number of reserved maps is "4". The LED flashes.

The sub-right hitting display 87 is for prompting the user to fire the game ball toward the right side area of the game area 111 (so-called right hitting), and is composed of one LED. Then, the LED lights up during the jackpot state (special game) and the time-saving game state, and turns off during the other game states.

[Control unit configuration]
Next, a control unit that performs operation control and signal processing in the pachinko gaming machine 100 will be explained.
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the internal configuration of the control unit of the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment.
FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram of the image/sound control section and the lamp control section of this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 4, the control unit includes a game control section 200 that performs determination of winning of special symbols, etc. as a game control means. Further, as a performance control means, a performance control section 300 that controls the performance in an integrated manner, and a payout control section 330 that performs payout control of the payout balls are provided.

[Configuration and functions of game control section]
The game control unit 200 includes a CPU 201 that performs arithmetic processing when determining the winning of special symbols, a ROM 202 that stores programs executed by the CPU 201, various data, etc., and a ROM 202 that is used as a working memory for the CPU 201. RAM 203 that can be used.

The game control unit 200 controls the game state of the pachinko game machine 100 in either a time-saving no state or a time-saving state. The gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 in which there is no time saving state may hereinafter be referred to as a normal gaming state. Further, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 that is in the time-saving state may be referred to as a time-saving gaming state below. Moreover, in this embodiment, the time-saving game state includes a special time-saving game state and a specific time-saving game state. The special time saving game state is a game state that is controlled via the jackpot game. In addition, the specific time-saving gaming state is activated when the number of times the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner after a predetermined condition is met (RAM clearing, reset of the number of variations) reaches a specific number (300 times in this embodiment). It is a controlled gaming state. As a result, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 becomes one of the normal gaming state, the special time-saving gaming state, and the specific time-saving gaming state. Then, the game control unit 200 switches between the normal game state and the special time-saving game state based on predetermined conditions. Furthermore, the game control unit 200 switches between the normal game state and the specific time-saving game state based on predetermined conditions. Furthermore, the game control unit 200 switches between the specific time-saving game state and the special time-saving game state based on predetermined conditions. In addition, in the time-saving game state, the game control unit 200 makes the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery higher than in the normal game state, shortens the normal symbol fluctuation time, extends the opening time of the electric tulip 123, etc. Take control.

The game control unit 200 performs a special symbol lottery when a game ball enters the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122. Then, special games such as a jackpot game or a small win game are performed according to the determination result of the special symbol lottery. In the jackpot game, the game control unit 200 plays a round in which the first jackpot 125, which is a special electric accessory, remains open until a predetermined condition (for example, 29.5 seconds elapse or 10 game balls are won) is held open. Control is performed to repeat a predetermined number of times. Then, the game control unit 200 controls the opening/closing operation interval when the first big prize opening 125 opens. In addition, in the small winning game, the game control unit 200 plays a predetermined number of rounds (e.g. control to repeat (twice). Then, the game control unit 200 controls the opening/closing operation interval when the second big prize opening 126 opens.

Further, the game control unit 200 performs a normal symbol lottery when the game ball passes through the gate 124. Then, the operation of the electric tulip is controlled according to the determination result of the normal symbol lottery.
In addition, the game control unit 200 also handles reservations that occur due to the game ball entering the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122 during special symbol fluctuations, and the game ball passing through the gate 124 during normal symbol fluctuations. Configure the hold settings that occur due to this.
Furthermore, the game control unit 200 transmits information associated with game control, such as the determination results of the special symbol lottery and the normal symbol lottery, information on changing the time-saving state and the time-saving state, and setting information on hold, to the performance control unit 300 by a command described later. send to

Furthermore, when the game ball wins in the first starting hole 121, the second starting hole 122, the first big winning hole 125, the second big winning hole 126, and the normal winning hole 127, the game control section 200 determines that the game ball has won. The payout control unit 330 is instructed to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls per game ball depending on the location. For example, if a game ball enters the first starting hole 121, you will receive 3 prize balls, if a game ball enters the second starting hole 122, you will receive 4 prize balls, and if a game ball enters the second grand prize opening 126, you will receive 9 prize balls. The payout control unit 330 is instructed to pay out 13 prize balls when a game ball enters the first grand prize opening 125, and 10 prize balls when a game ball enters the normal prize opening 127. Send an instruction (command). Note that even if it is detected that the game ball has passed through the gate 124, the payout control unit 330 is not instructed to pay out the prize ball in conjunction with the detection.
When the payout control unit 330 pays out prize balls according to the instructions from the game control unit 200, the game control unit 200 acquires information regarding the number of paid out prize balls from the payout control unit 330. Thereby, the number of prize balls paid out is managed.

As shown in FIG. 4, the game control unit 200 includes a first starting port detection unit (first starting port switch (SW)) 211 that detects winning of a game ball to the first starting port 121 as a detection means. , a second starting port detection unit (second starting port switch (SW)) 212 that detects winning of a game ball to the second starting port 122, an electric tulip opening/closing unit 213 that opens and closes the electric tulip 123, and a gate 124. A gate detection unit (gate switch (SW)) 214 that detects passage of a game ball is connected.
Furthermore, the game control section 200 includes a first grand prize opening detection section (first grand prize opening switch (SW)) 215 that detects winning of a game ball to the first grand prize opening 125, and a first grand prize opening detection section (first grand prize opening switch (SW)) 215. A first big winning opening door opening/closing part 216 sets the first big winning opening door 125D of 125 in a closed state and a protrudingly inclined open state, and a second big winning opening door opening/closing part 216 sets the first big winning opening door 125D of 125 in a protruding and inclined open state, and a second big winning opening door opening/closing part 216 sets the first big winning opening door 125D of 125 in a protruding and inclined open state. A second grand prize that sets the grand prize opening detection unit (second grand prize opening switch (SW)) 209 and the second grand prize opening door 126D of the second grand prize opening 126 to a closed state and a protruding and inclined open state. The opening/closing unit 210 is connected to a normal winning opening detection unit (normal winning opening switch (SW)) 217 that detects winning of a game ball to the normal winning opening 127.

Further, connected to the game control unit 200 are a magnetic detection sensor 207 that detects abnormal magnetism over a predetermined period of time, and a radio wave detection sensor 208 that detects abnormal radio waves over a predetermined period of time. The magnetic detection sensor 207 and the radio wave detection sensor 208 are connected to the game control board 200B via wiring (not shown).
In addition, the game control unit 200 includes a first special symbol retention display 218 that displays the number of retained unchanged pieces won in the first start opening 121 during the fluctuation of the special symbol, and a second special symbol retention display 218 that displays the number of retained unchanged pieces won in the first start opening 121 during the fluctuation of the special symbol. A second special symbol retention display 219 that displays the number of retained unchanged pieces that entered the starting slot 122, and a normal symbol retention display that displays the number of unchanged retained pieces that passed through the gate 124 during normal symbol fluctuations. 220 are connected.
Furthermore, the game control unit 200 includes a first special symbol display 221 that displays a variable display of special symbols performed by winning a game ball into the first starter opening 121 and a result of a special symbol lottery; A second special symbol display 222 that displays a variable display of special symbols and the result of a special symbol lottery performed by winning a game ball to 122, and a normal symbol display that displays a variable display of normal symbols and the result of a regular symbol lottery. The machine 223 is connected to a status display 224 that displays the status of the pachinko gaming machine 100.

And, the first starting opening switch 211, the second starting opening switch 212, the gate switch 214, the first big winning opening switch 215, the second big winning opening switch 209, the normal winning opening switch 217, the magnetic detection sensor 207, and the radio wave detection. A detection signal detected by the sensor 208 is sent to the game control section 200. In addition, control signals from the game control unit 200 are transmitted to the electric tulip opening/closing unit 213, the first big winning opening door opening/closing unit 216, the second big winning opening door opening/closing unit 210, the first special symbol reservation display 218, the second special It is sent to the symbol pending display 219, the normal symbol pending display 220, the first special symbol display 221, the second special symbol display 222, the normal symbol display 223, and the status display 224. Thereby, the game control section 200 performs various controls related to the above-described number of payout prize balls.

In addition, on the front side of the game control board, a signal is input for clearing the memory contents of the RAM 203 of the game control unit 200 or for updating the set value (probability of being judged as a jackpot), which is the stage of the advantage level of the game. A RAM clear switch 228 that inputs a signal to move to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, by operation using a setting key, a setting key switch 229 that inputs a signal to move to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, and performance information and settings that make it possible to grasp the actual performance of the gaming machine. An information display 230 for displaying values and other electronic components are mounted.

The information display 230 is composed of four 7-segment displays (230a to 230d, see FIG. 51 described below) arranged in the left-right direction. The two 7-segment displays 230a and 230b from the left constitute an identification segment for displaying identification information indicating the type of performance information (data type), and the two 7-segment displays 230c and 230d from the right constitute a setting. A numerical value segment is configured to display numerical information indicating a numerical value or performance information (see FIG. 50). Note that static lighting is performed when setting values are displayed, and dynamic lighting is performed when performance information is displayed.

Furthermore, an external information terminal board 350 for the board is connected to the game control section 200, which transmits various information to a host computer (not shown) installed in the hall. Then, the game control unit 200 transmits the information regarding the number of prize balls that have been paid out, the status of the game control unit 200, etc. obtained from the payout control unit 330 to the host computer via the board external information terminal board 350. do.

[Configuration and functions of payout control unit]
The payout control unit 330 includes a CPU 331 that performs arithmetic processing when controlling the payout of balls, a ROM 332 that stores programs executed by the CPU 331 and various data, and a RAM 333 that is used as a working memory for the CPU 331. It is equipped with.
Then, the payout control unit 330 controls the payout of the payout balls based on the command sent from the game control unit 200.
Specifically, the payout control unit 330 obtains a command from the game control unit 200 to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls according to the location where the game ball has won (first starting port 121, etc.). Then, the payout drive unit 334 is controlled to pay out the number of prize balls specified in the command. The payout drive section 334 here is constituted by a drive motor that sends out game balls from the game ball storage section.

The payout control unit 330 also includes a payout ball detection unit 335 that detects the number of prize balls actually paid out from the game ball storage unit by the payout drive unit 334, and a payout ball detection unit 335 that detects the number of prize balls actually paid out from the game ball storage unit by the payout drive unit 334, and A ball presence detection unit 336 detects whether or not there is a storage of balls, and a tray 153 that holds game balls used by a player when playing a game and paid-out prize balls is full. A full tank detection section 337 is connected. Then, the payout control unit 330 receives the detection signals detected by the payout ball detection unit 335, the ball presence detection unit 336, and the full tank detection unit 337, and performs predetermined processing according to these detection signals.
Furthermore, an external information terminal board 340 for slots is connected to the payout control unit 330, which transmits various information to a host computer installed in the hall. The payout control unit 330 then generates, for example, information regarding the number of prize balls that the payout driving unit 334 is instructed to pay out, information regarding the number of prize balls actually paid out detected by the put-out ball detection unit 335, etc. is transmitted to the host computer via the frame external information terminal board 340. Further, similar information is transmitted to the game control section 200 as well.

[Configuration and functions of production control section]
The production control unit 300 includes a CPU 301 that performs arithmetic processing when controlling production, a ROM 302 that stores programs executed by the CPU 301, various data, etc., a RAM 303 that is used as a working memory etc. of the CPU 301, and a date and time. A real-time clock (RTC) 304 for measuring.
The performance control unit 300 sets the content of the performance based on, for example, the determination result of whether or not the special symbol lottery is won or not and the fluctuation pattern sent from the game control unit 200. At this time, an operation input from the user using the effect button 161 or the effect key 162 may be received, and the effect contents may be set in accordance with the operation input. In this case, for example, a signal (operation signal) corresponding to the operation is received from a controller (not shown) such as the effect button 161, and the operation content identified by this operation signal is reflected in the setting of the effect.
Furthermore, when the game is interrupted for a predetermined period of time, the performance control section 300 instructs setting of a screen display for waiting for customers as one of the performances.
Furthermore, the performance control section 300 sets the performance content based on the change information of the time saving state and the time saving state received from the game control section 200.
Further, the effect control section 300 sends a command to the image/sound control section 310 and the lamp control section 320 to instruct execution of the set effect contents.

Furthermore, an image/sound control unit 310 that controls performances using images and sounds, and a lamp control unit 320 that controls performances using various lamps and movable accessories 115 are connected to the production control unit 300. has been done.

[Configuration and functions of image/sound control unit]
As shown in FIG. 5, the image/sound control unit 310 includes a CPU 311 that performs arithmetic processing when controlling images and sounds expressing the content of the performance, and programs executed by the CPU 311 and various data stored therein. It includes a ROM 312, a RAM 313 used as a working memory for the CPU 311, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 314, a CGROM 315, and an SNDROM 316.

Then, the image/sound control section 310 controls the image displayed on the image display section 114 and the sound output from the speaker 156 based on the command sent from the production control section 300.
Specifically, the CGROM 315 stores symbol images and background images to be displayed during the game on the image display unit 114, decorative symbols to notify players of lottery results, characters to display preview effects to players, etc. Image data such as items etc. is stored. Furthermore, the SNDROM 316 stores various types of audio data such as music, sounds, and sound effects such as jingles that are output from the speaker 156 in synchronization with the image data or independently of the image data.
The CPU 311 analyzes animation patterns, creates a display list that compiles drawing-related commands, and sends the display list to the VDP 314 based on the pending number command or variable performance start command sent from the performance control unit 300. conduct.

Based on the display list received from the CPU 311, the VDP 314 reads image data and audio data stored in the CGROM 315 and SNDROM 316, respectively. Furthermore, the VDP 314 performs drawing processing for background image display, pattern image display, pattern image variation, character/item display, etc. using the read image data, and audio processing using the read audio data. . Then, the VDP 314 controls screen display on the image display unit 114 using the image data that has been subjected to the drawing process. Further, the VDP 314 controls the sound output from the speaker 156 based on the sound data subjected to sound processing.
Note that in this embodiment, the VDP 314 is configured to perform audio processing in addition to drawing processing, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a separate processor that exclusively performs audio processing may be provided.

[Configuration and functions of lamp control unit]
The lamp control unit 320 includes a CPU 321 that performs arithmetic processing when controlling the light emission of the board lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157 and the operation of the movable accessory 115, and a program that is executed by the CPU 321 and various data stored therein. It includes a ROM 322 and a RAM 323 used as a working memory for the CPU 321.
Then, the lamp control section 320 controls the lighting/blinking, emitted light color, etc. of the panel lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157 based on the command sent from the production control section 300. Further, the operation of the movable accessory 115 is controlled.

Specifically, the ROM 322 of the lamp control unit 320 stores lighting/flashing pattern data and light emission color pattern data (light emission pattern data) are stored. The CPU 321 selects and reads out the light emission pattern data stored in the ROM 322 that corresponds to the command sent from the effect control section 300. Then, the lamp control unit 320 controls the light emission of the board lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157 based on the read light emission pattern data.
Further, the ROM 322 of the lamp control section 320 stores motion pattern data of the movable accessory 115 according to the presentation content set by the presentation control section 300. The CPU 321 controls the motion of the movable accessory 115 based on the read motion pattern data.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game control section 200, the effect control section 300, the image/sound control section 310, the lamp control section 320, and the payout control section 330 are each connected to a main board disposed on the rear surface of the game board 110. The game control board 200B as a sub-board, the production control board 300B as a sub-board, an image control board, a lamp control board, and a payout control board are individually configured.
Further, in the configuration example described with reference to FIG. 5, the production button 161 and the production key 162 are connected to the production control section 300 and controlled by the production control section 300, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The effect button 161 and the effect key 162 may be connected to the lamp control section 320 and controlled by the lamp control section 320.

[Functional configuration of game control unit]
Next, the functional configuration of the game control section 200 will be explained.
FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing the functional configuration of the game control section 200. As shown in FIG. 6, the game control unit 200 includes a random number acquisition unit 231, a normal symbol determination unit 232, a special symbol variation control unit 233, and a special symbol determination unit 234 as functional units that execute various lottery processes. , a normal symbol variation control section 236.
Furthermore, the game control section 200 includes a variation pattern selection section 235 as a functional section that executes processing associated with special symbol variations.
Furthermore, the game control unit 200 includes a large prize opening operation control unit 237, an electric tulip operation control unit 238, and a prize ball processing unit 239 as functional units that execute data processing related to operation control of various accessories and prize balls, etc. , an output control section 240 , and a random number control section 241 .

The random number acquisition unit 231 acquires a random number value used for the special symbol lottery and a random number value used for the normal symbol lottery. In the case of random numbers used for special symbol drawings, specifically, on the condition that a game ball has won in the first starting hole 121 or the second starting hole 122, a numerical value within a predetermined range is selected for each type of random number. One value (random value) is selected (obtained) from among them. The acquired random number value is used for determination by the special symbol determination section 234. As will be described in detail later, the random numbers used in the special symbol lottery include a jackpot random number that indicates whether or not it is a jackpot, a symbol random number that indicates the type of jackpot, a variable pattern random number, a reach random number, and the like.
In addition, in the case of random numbers used for normal symbol drawings, specifically, one number (random number) is selected (obtained) from a predetermined range of numbers on the condition that the game ball passes through the gate 124. ) to be done. The acquired random number value is used for determination by the normal symbol determination section 232. In addition, as the random number used for the normal symbol lottery, in addition to the winning random number that indicates whether or not it is a win, a symbol random number that indicates the type of win, a variable pattern random number, etc. may be set.
The special symbol variation control unit 233 controls the variation of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 221 or the second special symbol display 222 according to the lottery result when a special symbol lottery is performed.

The special symbol determination unit 234 uses a random number table as shown in FIG. 23, which will be described later, at the start of the variation of the special symbol to determine whether the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot or not, and whether it is a jackpot if the jackpot is won. ``type of winning'' and ``whether it is a small win or a loss in the case where the jackpot has not been won'' is determined. That is, the random number acquisition unit 231 acquires a random number value related to a special symbol when the passage of a game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 211 or the second starting port switch 212, which is a detection means, and makes a special pattern determination. The unit 234 determines whether or not to play a special game (such as a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, based on the obtained random number value. Note that the aforementioned special symbol lottery (jackpot lottery) refers to processing in the random number acquisition section 231 and the special symbol determination section 234.

The variation pattern selection unit 235 selects a variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbols to be displayed on the first special symbol display 221 or the second special symbol display 222. Specifically, the variation pattern selection unit 235 selects a variation pattern (for example, 15.0 seconds or more) that allows a reach effect in the decorative symbol variation production accompanying the special symbol variation and the determination result of whether or not to play a jackpot game. ), the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the determination result of whether or not. Then, based on the variation pattern selected by the variation pattern selection unit 235, the special symbol variation control unit 233 controls the variation of the special symbol. Details of the operations of the variation pattern selection section 235 and the special symbol variation control section 233 will be described later.
Here, "reach" is an effect to make the player expect a jackpot in a decorative pattern to be described later.

The normal symbol determination unit 232 uses a random number table as shown in FIG. 23(e), which will be described later, to determine whether the lottery result of the normal symbol is a hit or not when the variation of the normal symbol starts. That is, the normal symbol determination unit 232 determines whether or not to perform the auxiliary game of opening and closing the electric tulip 123 based on the random number value for the regular symbol lottery acquired by the random number acquisition unit 231. Further, when a plurality of types of winnings are set in the normal symbol lottery, the normal symbol determining unit 232 determines the "win type" when the determination result is a winning. Note that the normal symbol lottery is a process performed by the random number acquisition section 231 and the normal symbol determination section 232.
The normal symbol variation control unit 236 controls the variation of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 223 according to the lottery result when the normal symbol lottery is performed.
The electric tulip operation control unit 238 opens the electric tulip 123 for a specified time and a specified number of times when the normal symbol determination unit 232 determines that the normal symbol lottery is a “win”, and causes the game ball to enter the second starting port 122. To generate a state in which it is easy to win a prize. Moreover, when it is determined that the electric tulip 123 is "off", such an open state of the electric tulip 123 is not generated. The operation patterns of the electric tulip 123 will be described later, and include, for example, an operation pattern in which the electric tulip 123 opens once in an opening time of 0.15 seconds, and an operation pattern in which it opens three times in an opening time of 1.80 seconds.

When the special symbol determination section 234 determines that the special symbol lottery is a "jackpot", the big winning opening operation control section 237 controls the first jackpot operation pattern as a jackpot game, which is specified based on the type of jackpot won. Controls the opening operation of the prize opening 125. In addition, when the special symbol determination section 234 determines a "small win" in the special symbol lottery, the large winning opening operation control unit 237 operates the second large winning opening 126 for a specified time and a specified number of times as a small winning game. Open.
The prize ball processing unit 239 sets commands for managing the number of prizes won in various accessories related to winnings and drawings, and controlling the payout of prize balls according to winnings.
The output control section 240 controls the output of control commands from the game control section 200 to the production control section 300 and the payout control section 330.
The random number control unit 241 updates various random numbers that the random number acquisition unit 231 acquires at predetermined timings.

[Basic operation of gaming machines]
Next, the basic operation of the pachinko gaming machine 100 will be explained.
When the power is turned on, the game control unit 200 of the pachinko game machine 100 initializes and initializes various devices as basic processing at startup. After performing the basic processing, the game control section 200 repeatedly executes the main control processing, which is a series of processing related to the progress of the game. Furthermore, when shutting off the power, the game control section 200 executes a series of power-off processing.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the operation of basic processing by the game control section 200.
When the power of the pachinko game machine 100 is turned on, the game control unit 200 first allows access to the RAM 203 (see FIG. 4) (step (hereinafter referred to as "S") 701). Then, the game control unit 200 determines whether the RAM clear switch for clearing the RAM 203 is turned on (S702).
If the RAM clear switch is OFF (No in S702), then the gaming control unit 200 determines whether the backup flag regarding the operation at the time of power cut-off is ON (S703).
If the backup flag is ON (Yes in S703), then the game control unit 200 determines whether the checksum created at the time of power cutoff is normal or not (S704).
If the checksum is normal (Yes in S704), then the game control unit 200 executes a return process (S705). In this return processing, the game control section 200 performs settings of sub-control means such as the performance control section 300 in connection with the return from the power-off state. Specifically, the game control unit 200 determines the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 when the power is cut off (whether or not a jackpot game is being played, and whether it is a normal gaming state, a special time-saving gaming state, or a specific time-saving gaming state). ) is output to the production control unit 300 to set the sub-control means. Also, in this return process, the game control section 200 turns off the backup flag.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch is ON (Yes in S702), the backup flag is OFF (No in S703), or the checksum is abnormal (No in S704), then the gaming control unit 200 initializes the As a process, the storage contents of the RAM 203 are cleared (S706), and a work area of the RAM 203 is set (S707). Then, the game control section 200 outputs a command for setting (initializing) the sub-control means to the production control section 300, and sets the sub-board (sub-control means) (S708). The sub-board settings include clearing the RAM 303, RAM 313, and RAM 323 mounted on each sub-board.

After the return process (see S705) is completed, or after the sub-board setting (see S708) is completed, the game control unit 200 sets various counters and timers used for game control (S709). Then, the game control unit 200 performs interrupt permission (S710), interrupt prohibition (S711), symbol random number control processing (S712), initial value random number update processing (S713), and judgment as to whether or not the power cutoff flag is ON. (S714) is repeatedly executed as a loop process.
Here, interrupt enable (S710) and interrupt disable (S711) are provided to enable interrupt processing to be executed during execution of this loop processing (S710 to S714). In this embodiment, the main control process in game control is executed by this interrupt process. Details of the main control process will be described later.
In the symbol random number control process (S712), the game control unit 200 updates the variable pattern random number used in the special symbol lottery.
In the initial value random number update process (S713), the game control unit 200 updates the initial values of various random numbers used in game control.
In the determination of the power cutoff flag, if the power cutoff flag is OFF (No in S714), the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is not cut off, and the game control unit 200 performs main control using an interrupt as well as loop processing (S710 to S714). Repeat the process. On the other hand, if the power cutoff flag is ON (Yes in S714), the game control unit 200 starts a process for cutting off the power to the pachinko game machine 100 (power cutoff process).

FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the operation of the power cut-off process by the game control unit 200.
In the power-off processing, the game control unit 200 first clears the settings of the output ports for performing various outputs (S801). Next, the game control unit 200 creates a checksum and stores it in the RAM 203 (S802). Next, the game control unit 200 turns on the backup flag (S803), prohibits access to the RAM 203 (S804), and shifts to an infinite loop.

[Main control processing of gaming machines]
Next, the main control process of the pachinko gaming machine 100 will be explained.
In the main control process, the game control unit 200 controls the games in the pachinko game machine 100, instructs the performance control unit 300, which is a sub-control means, to control the performance, and issues prize balls to the payout control unit 330. instructs the control of payout.

FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the main control processing of the game control section 200.
The main control process consists of a series of processes in game control, and is repeatedly executed at preset fixed time intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds). In this embodiment, the game control unit 200 generates an interrupt at preset fixed time intervals, and when the interrupt is permitted (see S710) in the loop process shown in FIG. Execute processing. As shown in FIG. 9, in the main control process, a random number update process, a switch process, a symbol process, an electric accessory process, a prize ball process, and an output process are sequentially executed (S901 to S906).

In the random number update process (S901), the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the random number control unit 241, and updates the values of various random numbers used in game control by the game control unit 200. Details of setting the random number and updating the random number will be described later.

As the switch processing (S902), starting opening switch processing, gate switch processing, and second big winning opening switch processing are performed.
In the starting port switch process, the game control section 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the random number acquisition section 231, monitors the states of the first starting port switch 211 and the second starting port switch 212 in FIG. 4, and determines whether the switch is ON or not. When this happens, processing for special symbol lottery is executed. In addition, although details will be described later, when performing preliminary determination processing in the first starting port switch 211 and the second starting port switch 212, each function (subroutine) of the special symbol determining section 234 and the fluctuation pattern selecting section 235 is called, Execute processing for preliminary determination.
In the gate switch process, the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the random number acquisition unit 231, monitors the state of the gate switch 214 in FIG. Execute processing.
In the second big winning hole process, the game control unit 200 monitors the state of the second big winning hole switch 209 in FIG. 4, and when the switch is turned on, executes the process for playing the big winning game.
The detailed contents of these switch processes will be described later.

As the symbol processing (S903), special symbol processing and normal symbol processing are performed.
In the special symbol processing, the game control section 200 calls each function (subroutine) of the special symbol variation control section 233, the special symbol determination section 234, and the variation pattern selection section 235, and executes the special symbol variation and the processing associated with this symbol variation. do.
In the normal symbol processing, the game control section 200 calls the functions (subroutines) of the normal symbol determination section 232 and the normal symbol variation control section 236, and executes the normal symbol variation and the processing associated with this symbol variation.
The detailed contents of these symbol processing will be described later.

As the electric accessory processing (S904), a first large winning hole processing, a second large winning hole processing, and an electric tulip processing are performed.
In the first big winning hole process, the game control section 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the big winning hole operation control section 237, and opens the first big winning hole 125, which is a special electric accessory, based on predetermined conditions. control.
In the second big winning hole process, the game control section 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the big winning hole operation control section 237, and opens the second big winning hole 126, which is a special electric accessory, based on predetermined conditions. control.
In the electric tulip process, the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the electric tulip operation control unit 238 and controls the opening operation of the electric tulip 123, which is a normal electric accessory, based on predetermined conditions.
The detailed contents of these electric accessories processing will be described later.

In the prize ball processing (S905), the game control section 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the prize ball processing section 239, and sets a command for controlling the management of the number of prizes won and the payout of prize balls according to the winnings.

In the output process (S906), the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the output control unit 240, outputs a command for production control to the production control unit 300, and outputs a command for payout control to the payout control unit 330. Output. The production control command is generated in each process from S902 to S904, and stored (set) in a control command storage area provided in the RAM 203. The payout control command is generated in the process of S905 and stored (set) in a control command storage area provided in the RAM 203. Storage areas are set in the RAM 203 for each type of control command.

The output control unit 240 sequentially checks the storage areas of each control command in the RAM 203, and if the control command is stored in each storage area (that is, if the control command has not been generated in the processing of S902 to S905). ), the control command is read and output to the output destination (the production control section 300 or the payout control section 330).

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, output processing is performed at the end of a series of main control processing. That is, the commands generated in each process of S902 to S905 by each of the above functions as the first processing means are stored in the corresponding storage area of the RAM 203 in each process. After these processes, the output control unit 240 as a second processing means collectively outputs the commands generated in each process accumulated in the storage area of the RAM 203. In other words, in this embodiment, when the main control process is executed for one cycle, the commands generated during that one cycle of execution are output after the last command generation for that one cycle of execution is performed.

[Variations of basic operations of gaming machines]
In the operation examples described with reference to FIGS. 7 to 9, interrupts are permitted in the loop processing portion of the basic processing, and the main control processing consisting of a series of processing is executed as the interrupt processing. However, the main control process only needs to be configured to be repeatedly executed at regular intervals, and the specific implementation means (execution procedure) is not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 7 to 9. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the main control process is incorporated into a series of operations of the basic process, the elapsed time is measured at a predetermined timing, and the process returns to the main control process at fixed time intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds). Furthermore, while incorporating the main control process into the series of operations of the basic process, in the same way as the operations explained with reference to FIGS. 7 to 9, an interrupt is generated at regular intervals, and when the It may be configured to return to the main control process incorporated during the basic process.

In addition, when outputting a command generated by basic processing, in principle, each time a command is generated, it is stored in the command storage area of the RAM 203 and the function of the output control unit 240, which is the second processing means, is called. Output. The basic processing is different from the main control processing related to the progress of the game, and is special processing such as an initial operation that is performed only when the power is turned on. In addition, since the basic processing may vary due to branching based on conditions such as the state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 when the power is turned on, the generated commands should be output promptly to ensure that there is no omission in the output processing. It is processing. Note that, in response to specific processing requests, such as when commands are continuously generated by multiple related processes, a processing procedure is adopted in which multiple commands are stored in the command storage area of the RAM 203 and output at once. It's okay.

[Random number update processing by game control unit]
A random number value as determination information used for various kinds of lottery in game control such as special symbol lottery is counted by a counter, and starting from a predetermined initial value, the random number update process (S901) of the main control process shown in FIG. 9 is performed. Each time it is performed, it is incremented by 1. Then, the value at the time of each lottery is acquired in the starting gate switch process (Figure 10) and the gate switch process (Figure 11), and is used in the special symbol process (Figure 13) and the normal symbol process (Figure 18). Ru. This random number counter is an infinite loop counter, and after the counted random number reaches the maximum value of the set random number (for example, 299 for the jackpot random number shown in FIG. 23(a) described later), , returns to the initial value again. Further, since the random number update process is performed at regular intervals, if the initial value of each random number is specified, there is a risk that the winning value will be estimated based on the update interval and information on the initial value. Therefore, after returning from the main control process to the basic process shown in FIG. 7, in the initial value random number update process of S713, the initial value of each random number is randomly changed.

[Start switch processing by game control unit]
FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the contents of the starting port switch process of the switch process shown in S902 of FIG.
In this starting port switch process, processing for winning at the first starting port 121 and processing for winning at the second starting port 122 are sequentially performed. Referring to FIG. 10, the game control unit 200 first determines whether a game ball has entered the first starting port 121 and the first starting port switch 211 has been turned on (S1001). If the first starting port switch 211 is turned on, the game control unit 200 then determines whether the unchanged pending number U1 of winnings in the first starting port 121 is less than the upper limit (S1002). . In the example shown in FIG. 10, the upper limit is set to four. If the number of reservations U1 has reached the upper limit (No in S1002), the unchanged winnings cannot be held any longer, so the process for winnings at the first starting port 121 is ended.

On the other hand, if the number of reservations U1 is less than the upper limit value (Yes in S1002), the random number acquisition unit 231 of the game control unit 200 acquires a random number value for determination based on the current winning, and stores it in the RAM 203 (S1003). . Here, since the winning is for the first start opening 121, a random number value for the special symbol lottery is acquired. The random number value acquired at this time is the value updated in the random number update process of S901. Then, based on this random number value, the result of the special symbol lottery is determined in the later special symbol processing. The random numbers here include the jackpot random number that determines a jackpot, small hit, or miss, the symbol random number that determines the type of jackpot (jackpot symbol random number), and the fluctuation pattern random number that determines the fluctuation pattern in symbol fluctuations. It includes a numerical value, a reach random value that determines whether or not a fluctuation pattern (variation time) that allows the reach effect described later to be performed when the winning result is off.

Next, the game control unit 200 performs a preliminary determination process (S1004). Pre-judgment processing refers to winning balls (pending balls) for which random numbers have already been obtained due to winnings at the starting opening, but whose random numbers have not yet been determined by the special symbol processing described later. This is a process in which the random number is determined before it is determined (pre-determination).

Then, the production control unit 300 of the present embodiment determines a random number by a special symbol process based on the determination result (prior determination result) of the random number determined by the preliminary determination process, and notifies the result of the determination. It is possible to perform a preview performance that suggests the judgment result beforehand. For example, this preview effect is displayed on the image display screen in response to the occurrence of a winning ball (pending ball) whose random number has already been acquired by winning a prize at the starting hole, but whose random number has not yet been determined by special symbol processing. This is performed using a hold display effect (described later) displayed at 114. The advance notice performance based on this preliminary determination suggests to the player the determination result when random number determination is subsequently performed by special symbol processing regarding the reserved ball corresponding to the preliminary determination related to the advance notice performance. This allows the player to play the game while having high expectations for the reserved balls. Details of the preview performance based on the advance determination will be described later.

Then, the game control unit 200 adds 1 to the value of the pending number U1 (S1005).
After this, the game control unit 200 sets a preliminary determination result command including preliminary determination information obtained by the preliminary determination process of S1004 in the RAM 203 in order to notify the performance control unit 300 of the preliminary determination result (S1006).
Furthermore, the game control unit 200 sets a pending number increase command in the RAM 203 to notify the performance control unit 300 of the increase in the pending number U1 in S1005 (S1007), and ends the process for winning at the first starting port 121. .

Next, processing for winning at the second starting port 122 is performed. Referring to FIG. 10, next, the game control unit 200 determines whether a game ball has entered the second starting port 122 and the second starting port switch 212 has been turned on (S1008). If the second starting port switch 212 is turned on, next, the game control unit 200 determines whether or not the pending number U2 of the unchanged winnings in the second starting port 122 is less than the upper limit (S1009 ). In the example shown in FIG. 10, the upper limit is set to four. If the number of reservations U2 has reached the upper limit (No in S1009), the unchanged winnings cannot be held any longer, so the process for winnings at the second starting port 122 is ended.

On the other hand, if the number of reservations U2 is less than the upper limit value (Yes in S1009), the random number acquisition unit 231 of the game control unit 200 acquires the random number value for the lottery based on the current winning prize, and stores it in the RAM 203 (S1010). . Here, since the winning is from the second starting opening 122, similar to S1003 above, the random numbers for the special symbol lottery (jackpot random number, jackpot symbol random number, small winning symbol random number, reach random number, fluctuation pattern random number, numerical values, etc.) are obtained. The random number value acquired at this time is the value updated in the random number update process of S901. Then, the result of the special symbol lottery is determined in the later special symbol processing based on this random number value.

Next, the game control unit 200 performs preliminary determination processing (S1011). The contents of this preliminary determination process are the same as in S1004 above.
Then, the game control unit 200 adds 1 to the value of the pending number U2 (S1012).
After that, the game control unit 200 sets a preliminary determination result command including preliminary determination information obtained by the preliminary determination process of S1011 in the RAM 203 in order to notify the performance control unit 300 of the preliminary determination result (S1013).
Furthermore, the game control unit 200 sets a pending number increase command in the RAM 203 to notify the performance control unit 300 of the increase in the pending number U2 in S1012 (S1014), and ends the process for winning at the second starting port 122. .

[Gate switch processing by game control unit]
FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the contents of the gate switch process when a game ball passes through the gate 124.
In this gate switch process, the game control unit 200 first determines whether the game ball has passed through the gate 124 and the gate switch 214 has been turned on (S1101). Once the gate switch 214 is turned on, the game control unit 200 then determines whether the unchanged pending number G is less than the upper limit (S1102). In the example shown in FIG. 11, the upper limit is set to four. If the number of reservations G has reached the upper limit (No in S1102), the gate switch process ends because the unchanged winnings cannot be reserved any more.

On the other hand, if the number of reservations G is less than the upper limit value (Yes in S1102), the random number acquisition unit 231 of the game control unit 200 acquires the random number value for the lottery based on the current winning prize, and stores it in the RAM 203 (S1103). . Here, since it is a win at the gate 124, a random value (such as a winning random value) for the normal symbol lottery is acquired.

Next, the game control unit 200 adds 1 to the value of the number of reservations G (S1104).
After the value of the number of reservations G is added in S1104, the game control unit 200 sets a command to increase the number of reservations G in the RAM 203 to notify the production control unit 300 of the increase in the number of reservations G in S1104 (S1105), The process for winning at the gate 124 ends.

[Second major prize opening switch processing by game control unit]
FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second big prize opening switch process of the switch process shown in S902 of FIG.
In this second big prize opening switch process, the game control unit 200 first determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the second big prize opening 126 and the second big prize opening switch 209 has been turned ON (S1201 ). If the second big winning opening switch 209 is not turned on (NO in S1201), the current second big winning opening switch process ends.

On the other hand, when the second big prize opening switch 209 is turned on (YES in S1201), the game control section 200 determines whether or not a small winning game is being played (S1202). If the small winning game is being played (YES in S1202), the game control unit 200 sets a second large winning opening passage command in the RAM 203 (S1203). The second grand prize opening passage command is a command indicating that the game ball has passed through the second grand prize opening 126. The second grand prize opening passage command set in S1203 is transmitted to the production control unit 300 in the output process shown in S906 of FIG. On the other hand, if the small winning game is not being played (NO in S1202), the game control unit 200 causes the performance control board 300 to notify the second big prize opening passing error. The second grand prize opening passage error is an error that occurs when the game ball passes through the second grand prize opening 126 at an abnormal timing.

In addition, the area on the right side of the gaming area 111, which is different from the second big prize opening 126, is defined as a specific area, and the specific area switch that detects when a game ball passes through this specific area is a pachinko gaming machine. 100 may be provided. Then, instead of determining whether or not the second big prize opening switch 209 has been turned on, the game control section 200 determines whether or not the specific area switch has been turned on, and has been turned on during the small winning game. In this case, a jackpot game to be described later may be executed after the small win game ends. That is, the area for detecting whether or not a game ball has passed during a small winning game is not limited to the second big prize opening 126.

[Special symbol processing by game control unit]
FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol processing of the symbol processing shown in S903 of FIG.
In this special symbol processing, the special symbol variation control section 233 of the game control section 200 first checks whether the jackpot game flag is turned on in the flag setting (hereinafter referred to as flag setting) set in the RAM 203 ( S1301). Here, the jackpot game flag is a flag that is set to identify that the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.

If the jackpot game flag is ON, the pachinko game machine 100 has already won a jackpot, so the special symbol processing is ended without starting special symbol variation (Yes in S1301). On the other hand, if the jackpot game flag is OFF (No in S1301), then the special symbol variation control unit 233 determines whether or not the current state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is during special symbol variation (S1302). If the special symbol is not changing (No in S1302), then the special symbol fluctuation control unit 233 performs processing regarding the reserved numbers U1 and U2 (see FIG. 10) of the unchanged portion of the special symbol (S1303 to S1306). In this embodiment, since the number of reservations U1 related to winnings of the first starting port 121 and the number of pendings U2 related to winnings of the second starting port 122 are distinguished, this process is also performed individually for each corresponding starting port. .

Specifically, the special symbol variation control unit 233 first determines whether the pending number U2 related to winnings in the second starting port 122 is 1 or more (S1303). When the number of reservations U2 is 1 or more (Yes in S1303), the special symbol variation control unit 233 subtracts 1 from the value of the number of reservations U2 (S1304). On the other hand, if the number of reservations U2 = 0 (No in S1303), the special symbol variation control unit 233 next determines whether the number of reservations U1 related to the winning of the first starting opening 121 is 1 or more (S1305). When the number of reservations U1 is 1 or more (Yes in S1305), the special symbol variation control unit 233 subtracts 1 from the value of the number of reservations U1 (S1306). On the other hand, if the pending number U1 = 0 (No in S1305), it means that there is no winning to start the special symbol lottery, so the special symbol fluctuation is not started and the customer waiting setting process is performed in a separate routine. is executed and the process ends (S1319).
In addition, in this embodiment, the process regarding the pending number U2 related to the winnings of the second starting port 122 is performed with priority. That is, when the number of reservations U2 is 1 or more, processing related to the number of reservations U2 is performed, and when number of reservations U2=0, processing regarding the number of reservations U1 is performed (see S1303 to S1306). On the other hand, it is also possible to perform control such that the reserved numbers U1 and U2 are subtracted in the order of winning, regardless of which of the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122 wins.

After subtracting the pending number U1 or U2 in S1304 or S1306, the special symbol variation control unit 233 generates a gaming status command indicating the current gaming status of the pachinko gaming machine 100, and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1307). The game state command set in S1307 is transmitted to the production control unit 300 in the output process shown in S906 of FIG. Further, the special symbol variation control unit 233 turns off the customer waiting flag set in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1308). The customer waiting flag is a flag for identifying that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a customer waiting state, and is set in the customer waiting setting process (S1319, see FIG. 17 described later).

Next, the special symbol variation control unit 233 executes a jackpot determination process and a variation pattern selection process using a separate routine (S1309, S1310). As will be described in detail later, by this jackpot determination process and variation pattern selection process, setting information for variation of special symbols (jackpot symbols, game state, variation pattern, etc.) are determined. Note that these pieces of information are included in the variation start command sent to the production control section 300.

After this, the special symbol variation control unit 233 causes the first special symbol display 221 and the second special symbol display 222 shown in FIG. The special symbols start changing (S1311). Then, a fluctuation start command including setting information (jackpot symbol, gaming state, fluctuation pattern, etc.) indicating the setting contents is generated and set in the RAM 203 (S1312). The variation start command set in S1312 is transmitted to the production control unit 300 in the output process shown in S906 of FIG.
Next, the special symbol variation control unit 233 adds one to the number of times the special symbol variation display is executed after a predetermined condition is met (RAM clearing, resetting the number of variations) (S1313). Then, a variation number command indicating the added number of variation displays is generated and set in the RAM 203 (S1314). The variation number command set in S1314 is transmitted to the production control unit 300 in the output process shown in S906 of FIG.

If it is determined that the special symbol is changing in S1302 (Yes in S1302), or after the fluctuation number command is set in S1314, the special symbol fluctuation control unit 233 determines whether or not the fluctuation time has elapsed (S1315 ). That is, it is determined in S1311 whether the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol has reached the variation time set in the variation pattern selection process in S1310. If the variation time has not elapsed (No in S1315), the special symbol variation continues, and the special symbol processing ends as it is.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation time has elapsed (Yes in S1315), the special symbol fluctuation control unit 233 first performs the jackpot determination process in S1309 to control the fluctuation of the special symbols in the first special symbol display 221 and the second special symbol display 222. It stops at the symbol determined in (S1316). Then, the stop processing of another routine is executed (S1317). The details of the stopped processing will be described later. In addition, the special symbol variation control unit 233 sets a variation stop command to the RAM 203 for stopping the decorative symbol, which will be described later (S1318). The fluctuation stop command set in S1318 is transmitted to the production control unit 300 in the output process shown in S906 of FIG.
In addition, if a winning occurs in the second starting hole 122 while the special symbol is changing triggered by winning in the first starting hole 121, the special symbol triggered by winning in the first starting hole 121 changes. During the variation, the special symbol may be varied in response to winning in the second starting hole 122. For example, if a winning occurs in the first starting hole 121 while the special symbols are changing triggered by a winning in the second starting hole 122, a special symbol triggered by a winning in the second starting hole 122 is changed. During the variation of the symbols, a special symbol variation may be performed triggered by a winning of the first start opening 121.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 13, after subtracting the value of the number of reservations U2 or the number of reservations U1 (see S1304, S1306), the jackpot determination process and the fluctuation pattern selection process are executed (see S1309, S1310), It is not limited to this.
In the special symbol process, after the jackpot determination process and the variation pattern selection process are executed, a process in which the value of the pending number U2 or the pending number U1 is subtracted may be executed. In this case, in the variation pattern selection process, the variation pattern is selected based on the value of the pending number U2 or the pending number U1 before being subtracted.

[Jackpot determination processing by game control unit]
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot determination process (S1309 in FIG. 13).
In this jackpot determination process, the special symbol determination section 234 of the game control section 200 first determines the jackpot random number value in the current special symbol lottery (S1401), and determines whether there is a jackpot or a small win (S1402). , S1405). Whether there is a big hit or a small win is determined by whether the value of the jackpot random number obtained in S1003 or S1010 in FIG. (See FIG. 23(a)).

If the result of the random number determination in S1401 is a jackpot (Yes in S1402), then the special symbol determination unit 234 determines the jackpot symbol random number value (S1403). Depending on the result of this determination, the type of jackpot is determined. Which jackpot will occur is determined depending on which value of the jackpot symbol random number acquired in S1003 or S1010 in FIG. b)).
After the above determination, the special symbol determination unit 234 sets a symbol representing the type of jackpot (jackpot symbol) determined by the determination of the jackpot symbol random number in the RAM 203 as setting information (S1404).

If the result of the random number determination in S1401 is a small hit (No in S1402, Yes in S1405), then the special symbol determination unit 234 determines the small hit symbol random number value (S1406). Depending on the result of this determination, the type of small win is determined. Which small win will be determined is determined by which of the preset values for each type of small win matches the value of the jackpot symbol random number acquired in S1003 or S1010 of FIG. 23(c)).
After the above determination, the special symbol determination unit 234 sets a symbol representing the type of small win (small win symbol) determined by the determination of the small win symbol random number in the RAM 203 as setting information (S1407).

If the result of the random number determination in S1401 is neither a jackpot nor a small hit (No in S1402 and S1405), then the special symbol determination unit 234 stores a symbol representing a loss in the lottery (hereinafter referred to as a loss symbol) as setting information in the RAM 203. (S1408).

[Fluctuation pattern selection process by game control unit]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation pattern selection process (S1310 in FIG. 13).
In this variation pattern selection process, the variation pattern selection unit 235 of the game control unit 200 first determines the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 (which state is the normal gaming state, the special time-saving gaming state, or the specific time-saving gaming state)? (S1501). Then, using the determination result of S1402 of the jackpot determination process (FIG. 14), it is determined whether or not there was a jackpot in the current special symbol lottery (S1502). If it is a jackpot (Yes in S1502), the variation pattern selection unit 235 reads the variation pattern table for the jackpot from the ROM 202 and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1503).

On the other hand, if there is no jackpot (No in S1502), then the variation pattern selection unit 235 uses the judgment result in S1405 of the jackpot determination process (FIG. 14) to determine whether or not there was a small hit in this special symbol lottery. A judgment is made (S1504). If it is a small win (YES in S1504), the variation pattern selection unit 235 reads out the variation pattern table for the small win from the ROM 202 and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1505).

On the other hand, if there is no small win (NO in S1504), a random number value is determined to determine whether or not to perform a so-called reach effect to make the player expect a big win (S1506). Whether or not to perform the reach effect is determined by determining whether the value of the reach random number obtained in S1003 or S1010 of FIG. 10 matches a preset value (see FIG. 23(d)). .
As a result of the determination using the random number value, if the ready-to-win effect is to be performed (Yes in S1507), the variation pattern selection unit 235 reads the ready-to-reach variation pattern table from the ROM 202 and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1508). Moreover, when the reach effect is not performed (No in S1507), the variation pattern selection unit 235 reads the variation pattern table for losing from the ROM 202 and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1509).
Here, the fluctuation pattern table refers to a plurality of fluctuation patterns prepared in advance (fluctuation times of 3 seconds, 7 seconds, 13 seconds, 15 seconds, 30 seconds, 60 seconds, 90 seconds, etc.) and fluctuation pattern random number values. This is a table that maps .

Next, the variation pattern selection unit 235 determines the variation pattern random value using the variation pattern random value obtained in S1003 or S1010 of FIG. 10 and the variation pattern table set in S1503, S1505, S1508, and S1509. (S1510). That is, the variation pattern selection unit 235 refers to the variation pattern table set in the RAM 203 and selects a variation pattern according to the random value of the variation pattern random number. Therefore, even if the same random number value is obtained, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 (time saving state or no time saving state), the result of the special symbol lottery (whether or not it was a big hit, whether it was a small hit or not, whether it was a jackpot or not), Since the variation pattern table that is referred to differs depending on the difference such as whether or not to perform a reach effect when there is no small hit, the variation pattern that is determined differs.

Thereafter, the variation pattern selection unit 235 sets the variation pattern selected in S1510 in the RAM 203 as setting information (S1511). The setting information of the variation pattern set in S1511 is included in the variation start command set in S1312 of FIG. 13, and is transmitted to the production control unit 300 in the output process shown in S906 of FIG. Details of the variation patterns selected in this embodiment and their settings will be described later.

[Stopped processing by game control unit]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stopping process (S1317 in FIG. 13).
In this stopping process, the game control unit 200 first checks whether or not the flag indicating the time saving state (hereinafter referred to as the time saving flag) is turned on in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1601). When the time saving flag is ON (Yes in S1601), the game control unit 200 subtracts 1 from the value of the number of drawings (number of fluctuations) J in the time saving state (S1602), and determines whether the number of drawings J has become 0 or not. is checked (S1603). If the lottery number J=0 (Yes in S1603), the time saving flag is turned OFF (S1604). The operation of turning on the time saving flag and the setting of the initial value of the lottery number J are performed in the game state setting process (FIG. 21) in the first big prize opening process (FIG. 19), which will be described later.
Further, when the number of lottery numbers J is not 0 (NO in S1603), the game control unit 200 generates a time saving number command indicating the value of the number of lottery numbers J in the time saving state, and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1605). The time reduction number command set in S1605 is transmitted to the production control unit 300 in the output process shown in S906 of FIG.

If the time saving flag is OFF (No in S1601), after turning the time saving flag OFF in S1604, or after setting the time saving number command in S1605, the game control unit 200 generates a gaming state command, Set it in the RAM 203 (S1606). The gaming state command set in S1606 is transmitted to the production control unit 300 in the output process shown in S906 of FIG.
Next, the game control unit 200 determines whether or not there has been a jackpot in the current special symbol lottery (S1607). Here, whether or not it is a jackpot can be determined based on the judgment result of the jackpot judgment process (FIG. 14). For example, if any of the symbols shown in the chart of FIG. 23(b) to be described later is set, the answer is Yes in S1607. If a losing symbol or a small winning symbol is set in the RAM 203 by the jackpot determination process, the result is No in S1607.

If it is a jackpot (Yes in S1607), then the game control unit 200 turns on the jackpot game flag (S1608). As a result, the gaming state setting of the RAM 203 becomes the jackpot gaming state.
Next, the game control unit 200 initializes the value of the number of lottery numbers J (S1609). Further, the game control unit 200 turns the time saving flag OFF when the time saving flag is ON in S1601 and the number of lottery times J is not 0 in S1603 (S1610).

After initializing the value of the lottery number J in S1610, the game control unit 200 starts the opening operation of the jackpot game (S1611).
Thereafter, the game control unit 200 sets an opening command in the RAM 203 for performing a performance in the opening operation according to the jackpot game flag in the performance control unit 300 (S1612), and ends the stopping process. This opening command is sent to the production control section 300 in the output process shown in S906 of FIG.

On the other hand, if the result of this special symbol lottery is not a jackpot (No in S1607), then the game control unit 200 determines whether or not the result of this special symbol lottery is a small hit (S1613). ).
If it is a small win (YES in S1613), then the game control unit 200 turns on the small win game flag (S1614). As a result, the gaming state setting of the RAM 203 becomes the small winning gaming state. Furthermore, the game control unit 200 starts the opening operation of the small winning game (S1615).
Next, the game control unit 200 sets in the RAM 203 an opening command for performing a performance in the opening operation according to the small winning game flag in the performance control unit 300 (S1616). This opening command is sent to the production control section 300 in the output process shown in S906 of FIG.

On the other hand, if it is not a small hit (No in S1613), the game control unit 200 determines that the number of times the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner is a specified number of times since the predetermined condition is met (RAM clearing, resetting the number of variations). (300 times in this embodiment) is determined (S1617). When the specific number of times has been reached (YES in S1617), the gaming control unit 200 executes a gaming state setting process of another routine (S1618). The details of the game state setting process will be described later.
Further, if the number of times of variable display has not reached the specific number of times (NO in S1617), the stopping process is ended.

[Customer waiting setting process by game control unit]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the contents of the customer waiting setting process (S1319 in FIG. 13).
In this customer waiting setting process, the game control unit 200 first checks whether the customer waiting flag is turned on in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1701). Here, the customer waiting flag is a flag that is set to identify that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a customer waiting state.

If the customer waiting flag is ON, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a customer waiting state, and therefore the process ends (Yes in S1701). On the other hand, when the customer waiting flag is OFF (No in S1701), the game control unit 200 generates a customer waiting command and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1702), and turns the customer waiting flag ON (S1703). The customer waiting command set in S1702 is transmitted to the production control unit 300 in the output process shown in S906 in FIG. Note that the customer waiting flag is set when the special symbols have stopped changing and there is no hold.

[Normal symbol processing by game control unit]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal symbol processing of the symbol processing shown in S903 of FIG.
In this normal symbol processing, the normal symbol variation control section 236 of the game control section 200 first checks whether the auxiliary game flag is turned on in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1801). Here, the auxiliary game flag is a flag that is set when the player wins the normal symbol lottery. The state in which the auxiliary game flag is set is a state in which the electric tulip 123 is opened according to the electric tulip process (FIG. 22) described later, and it is easy to win a prize in the second starting opening 122 (auxiliary game state).

When the auxiliary game flag is ON, the auxiliary game state is already in place and the normal symbols are stopped, so the normal symbol processing is ended without starting the normal symbol fluctuation (Yes in S1801). On the other hand, if the auxiliary game flag is OFF (No in S1801), then the normal symbol variation control unit 236 determines whether the current state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the normal symbol variation state (S1802). If the normal symbol is not changing (No in S1802), then the normal symbol fluctuation control unit 236 determines whether the pending number G (see FIG. 11) of the unchanged portion of the normal symbol is 1 or more (S1803). If the pending number G=0 (No in S1803), it means that there is no winning for starting the normal symbol lottery, so the process ends without starting the normal symbol variation.

On the other hand, when the number of reservations G is 1 or more (Yes in S1803), the normal symbol variation control unit 236 subtracts 1 from the value of the number of reservations G (S1804). Then, the normal symbol determination unit 232 determines the winning random number in the current regular symbol lottery, and determines whether or not the regular symbol lottery has been won (S1805). Whether or not you have won is determined by determining whether the value of the winning random number obtained in S1103 of FIG. 11 matches the value set as the winning value in the table shown in FIG. 23(e) described later. It is determined.

Next, the normal symbol variation control unit 236 sets the normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol lottery (S1806). That is, when the normal symbol lottery is won, a symbol representing the winning (hereinafter referred to as a winning symbol) is set in the RAM 203 as setting information. On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is not won, a symbol indicating that the lottery was unsuccessful (hereinafter referred to as a "lost symbol") is set in the RAM 203 as setting information.

Next, the normal symbol variation control unit 236 sets the variation time of the normal symbol (S1807). This variable time is set based on a time saving flag set in processes such as S1604 and S1610 in FIG. 16 and S2101 in FIG. 21, which will be described later. That is, if the time saving flag is ON at the time of setting in S1807, it is set to a short time (for example, 1.5 seconds), and when the time saving flag is OFF, it is set to a long time (for example, 4.0 seconds). be done. After this setting, the normal symbol variation control unit 236 starts the variation of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 223 shown in FIGS. 2(a) and 4 based on the setting contents of S1807 (S1808). Note that the variation pattern of the normal symbols can also be determined by lottery. In this case, for example, when the game ball passes through the gate 124, the random number acquisition unit 231 acquires the fluctuation pattern random value of the normal symbol, and in S1807, the normal symbol fluctuation control unit 236 acquires the fluctuation pattern random value of the normal symbol. The fluctuation time is set by the determination.

After starting the normal symbol variation in S1808, or when it is determined that the normal symbol is changing in S1802 (Yes in S1802), the normal symbol variation control unit 236 determines whether or not the variation time has elapsed (S1809 ). That is, it is determined in S1808 whether the elapsed time since the start of the variation of the normal symbols has reached the variation time set in S1807. If the variation time has not elapsed (No in S1809), the normal symbol variation continues, and the normal symbol processing ends as it is.

On the other hand, when the variation time has ended (Yes in S1809), the normal symbol variation control unit 236 stops the variation of the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 223 (S1810). Then, the normal symbol variation control unit 236 determines whether or not the determination result of S1805 is a win (S1811). If it is a win (Yes in S1811), the auxiliary game flag is turned ON (S1812). On the other hand, if the lottery is unsuccessful (No in S1811), the normal symbol processing is ended without turning on the auxiliary game flag.

[First big prize opening processing by game control unit]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first big prize opening process of the electric accessory process shown in S904 of FIG.
In this first big winning hole process, the big winning hole operation control section 237 of the game control section 200 first checks whether the jackpot game flag is turned on in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1901). When the jackpot game flag is OFF, there is no winning in the first grand prize opening 125, so the first great winning opening process is ended (No in S1901). On the other hand, if the jackpot game flag is ON (Yes in S1901), then the jackpot operation control unit 237 controls the opening in the jackpot operation control started during the pachinko gaming machine 100 stop process (FIG. 16). It is determined whether or not an operation is in progress (S1902).

If the pachinko gaming machine 100 is opening (Yes in S1902), then the big prize opening operation control unit 237 determines whether or not a preset time for the opening operation (opening time) has elapsed. (S1903). If the opening time has not elapsed, the opening operation at the first big winning hole 125 is continued, so the first big winning hole process ends (No in S1903). On the other hand, if the opening time has elapsed (Yes in S1903), then the grand prize opening operation control unit 237 performs operation settings for the first grand prize opening 125 (S1904), and initializes the winning number C (C= 0) (S1905), add 1 to the value of the number of rounds R of operation of the first big prize opening 125 from the current value (S1906), and start operating (open) the first big prize opening 125 (S1907) .

In the operation setting of S1904, the operation pattern of the first big prize opening 125 and the number of rounds (operation round number) to be operated with that operation pattern are set. The operation pattern and the number of rounds are variously set depending on the type of jackpot in the special symbol lottery. In addition, in the jackpot game, it is stipulated that the first jackpot 125 be operated a plurality of times (multiple rounds) in succession. To give an example, 15 rounds (15R) are activated, and one round includes one release of 29.5 seconds. In addition, to give another example, the actuator is operated for two rounds (2R), and in one round, it is released once for 0.9 seconds. To explain further, it opens for 0.9 seconds, closes for 1.0 seconds, and then opens for 0.9 seconds.

Next, the big winning opening operation control unit 237 determines whether or not the opening time in the operation pattern set in S1904 has elapsed (S1908). If the open state of the first big prize opening 125 has not passed the opening time (No in S1908), then the big winning opening operation control unit 237 controls the number of winnings C to the first big winning opening 125 to be within the specified number of winnings. It is determined whether the number is greater than or equal to the number (for example, 9) (S1909). If the opening time has not elapsed and the number of winning prizes C is less than the specified number, the operating state (open state) of the first big prize opening 125 continues, so the first big winning opening processing ends. (No in S1909). On the other hand, if the opening time has elapsed (Yes in S1908) or the number C of winnings has reached the specified number (Yes in S1909), the grand prize opening operation control unit 237 terminates the operation of the first grand prize opening 125 ( (S1910).

Next, the big winning hole operation control unit 237 determines whether the number of rounds R of operation of the first big winning hole 125 has reached the maximum value set in S1904 (S1911). If the maximum value has not been reached, the remaining operations are performed, and the first big prize opening process ends (No in S1911).

If the number of rounds R of operation of the first big winning hole 125 reaches the maximum value (Yes in S1911), then the big winning hole operation control section 237 starts the ending operation (S1912). Here, the content of the ending action corresponds to the state of the jackpot game flag.
Thereafter, the big winning opening operation control section 237 sets an ending command in the RAM 203 for performing a presentation in the ending operation according to the jackpot game flag in the presentation control section 300 (S1913). This ending command is transmitted to the production control section 300 in the output process shown in S906 of FIG.

Next, the big winning opening operation control unit 237 resets the number of rounds R of the operation of the first big winning opening 125 to 0 (S1914), and then the ending operation for which the elapsed time from the start of the ending operation is set in advance is It is determined whether the time (ending time) to be performed has elapsed (S1917). If the ending time has not elapsed, the ending operation continues, and the first big winning opening process ends (No in S1917). On the other hand, if the ending time has elapsed (Yes in S1917), then the big winning opening operation control unit 237, after passing through the gaming state setting process by the gaming control unit 200 (S1918), turns off the jackpot game flag, The first big prize opening process ends (S1919). The details of the game state setting process will be described later.

If it is determined in S1902 that the pachinko game machine 100 is not in the opening stage (No in S1902), then the grand prize opening operation control unit 237 determines whether or not in the ending stage (S1915). If ending is in progress (Yes in S1915), the operations from S1917 onwards are executed.

On the other hand, if the pachinko gaming machine 100 is not in the ending stage (No in S1915), then the big winning opening operation control unit 237 determines whether the first big winning opening 125 is operating (opening) or not (S1916). . If it is not in operation (No in S1916), the operations from S1905 onwards are executed, and if it is in operation (Yes in S1916), the operations from S1908 onwards are executed.

[Second grand prize opening processing by game control unit]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second big prize opening process of the electric accessory process shown in S904 of FIG.
In this second big winning hole process, the big winning hole operation control section 237 of the game control section 200 first checks whether the small winning game flag is turned on in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S2001). When the small winning game flag is OFF (No in S2001), there is no winning in the second big winning hole 126, so the second big winning hole processing is ended. On the other hand, if the small winning game flag is ON (Yes in S2001), then the big winning opening operation control unit 237 controls the operation when the pachinko game machine 100 starts a small winning in the stopping process (FIG. 16). It is determined whether or not the opening operation is in progress (S2002).

If the pachinko game machine 100 is opening (Yes in S2002), then the big winning opening operation control unit 237 determines whether or not a preset time for the opening operation (opening time) has elapsed. (S2003). If the opening time has not elapsed, the opening operation at the second big winning hole 126 is continued, so the second big winning hole process ends (No in S2003). On the other hand, if the opening time has elapsed (Yes in S2003), then the grand prize opening operation control unit 237 sets the operation of the second grand prize opening 126 (S2004), and initializes the winning number C (C= 0) (S2005), add 1 to the value of the round number R of operation of the second big prize opening 126 from the current value (S2006), and start operating (open) the second big prize opening 126 (S2007) .

In the operation setting of S2004, the operation pattern of the second big prize opening 126 and the number of rounds (operation round number) to be operated with that operation pattern are set. The operation pattern and the number of rounds are variously set depending on the type of small win in the special symbol lottery. In addition, in the case of a small win, it is stipulated that the cumulative opening time of the second big prize opening 126 must be set within 1.8 seconds.

Next, the big winning opening operation control unit 237 determines whether or not the opening time in the operation pattern set in S2004 has elapsed (S2008). If the open state of the second grand prize opening 126 has not passed the opening time (No in S2008), then the grand prize opening operation control unit 237 controls the number of winnings C to the second grand prize opening 126 to be within the specified number. It is determined whether the number is greater than or equal to the number (S2009). If the opening time has not elapsed and the winning number C is less than the specified number, the operating state (open state) of the second grand prize opening 126 continues, so the second grand prize opening processing ends. (No in S2009). On the other hand, if the opening time has elapsed (Yes in S2008) or the number C of winnings has reached the specified number (Yes in S2009), the grand prize opening operation control unit 237 terminates the operation of the second grand prize opening 126 ( (closed) (S2010).

Next, the big winning hole operation control unit 237 determines whether the number of rounds R of operation of the second big winning hole 126 has reached the maximum value set in S2004 (S2011). If the maximum value has not been reached, the remaining operations are performed, and the second big prize opening process ends (No in S2011).

If the number of rounds R of operation of the second big winning hole 126 reaches the maximum value (Yes in S2011), then the big winning hole operation control unit 237 controls whether the game ball enters the second big winning hole during the small winning game. 126 is determined (S2012). This determination is made based on the determination of the second big prize opening switch process (S1202 in FIG. 12).
When the game ball passes through the second big prize opening 126 (YES in S2012), the game control section 200 turns on the jackpot game flag (S2013). As a result, the gaming state setting of the RAM 203 becomes the jackpot gaming state.
Next, the game control unit 200 starts the opening operation of the jackpot game (S2014). Then, the performance control unit 300 sets an opening command in the RAM 203 for performing a performance in the opening operation according to the jackpot game flag (S2015). Furthermore, the first big winning hole process (see FIG. 19) of another routine is executed and the second big winning hole process is ended (S2016).

On the other hand, if the game ball has not passed through the second big winning hole 126 (NO in S2012), the big winning hole operation control section 237 starts the ending operation (S2017).
After this, the big winning opening operation control section 237 sets an ending command in the RAM 203 for performing an effect in the ending operation according to the small winning game flag in the effect control section 300 (S2018). This ending command is transmitted to the production control section 300 in the output process shown in S906 of FIG.

Next, the big winning opening operation control unit 237 resets the number of rounds R of the operation of the second big winning opening 126 to 0 (S2019), and then the ending operation for which the elapsed time from the start of the ending operation is set in advance is It is determined whether the time for the ending (ending time) has elapsed (S2020). If the ending time has not elapsed (No in S2020), the ending operation continues, and the second grand prize opening process ends. On the other hand, if the ending time has elapsed (Yes in S2020), then the big winning opening operation control unit 237 generates a gaming state command and sets it in the RAM 203 (S2021). Further, the small winning game flag is turned OFF and the second large winning opening process is ended (S2022).

If it is determined in S2002 that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is not in the opening stage (No in S2002), then the grand prize opening operation control unit 237 determines whether or not in the ending stage (S2023). If ending is in progress (Yes in S2023), the operations from S2020 onwards are executed.

On the other hand, if the pachinko gaming machine 100 is not in the ending stage (No in S2023), then the big winning opening operation control unit 237 determines whether the second big winning opening 126 is operating (opening) or not (S2024). . If it is not in operation (No in S2024), the operations from S2005 onwards are executed, and if it is in operation (Yes in S2024), the operations from S2008 onwards are executed.

[Game status setting process]
The contents of the game state setting process (S1618, S1918) by the game control unit 200 are shown in FIG.
First, the game control unit 200 determines whether the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit or a small hit (S2101, S2103). These judgments can be made, for example, based on the type of symbol set as setting information in the RAM 203 in the jackpot judgment process (FIG. 14). In addition, since these determinations are generally the same as S1402, S1403, S1405, and S1406 of the jackpot determination process (FIG. 14), the determination results of S1402, S1403, S1405, and S1406 may be used.

If it is a jackpot (YES in S2101), the game control unit 200 sets an initial value of the number of lottery numbers J based on the type of jackpot symbol set as setting information in the RAM 203 (S2102). This initial value is, for example, 30 times. When the set J number of drawings is performed, the time-saving gaming state ends and the normal gaming state begins.
If it is a small win (NO in S2101, YES in S2103), the game control unit 200 sets an initial value of the number of lottery drawings J based on the type of small win symbol set as setting information in the RAM 203 (S2104). This initial value is, for example, 30 times.

Next, the game control unit 200 resets the number of times the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner after a predetermined condition is satisfied (RAM clearing, resetting the number of changes) (S2105). Furthermore, the game control unit 200 generates a fluctuation number command indicating the number of times of fluctuation display, and sets it in the RAM 203 (S2106). This variation number command is transmitted to the production control section 300 in the output process shown in S906 of FIG.
Next, the game control unit 200 turns on the special time saving flag (S2107). As a result, the gaming state of the RAM 203 is set to the special time-saving gaming state.

On the other hand, if it is neither a big hit nor a small hit (NO in S2101, NO in S2103), the game control unit 200 sets the initial value of the number of lottery numbers J (S2108). In this embodiment, the initial value of the lottery number J is 295 times. Therefore, when the 295th lottery is held in the time-saving gaming state, the time-saving gaming state ends and the normal gaming state returns.
Next, the game control unit 200 turns on the specific time saving flag (S2109). As a result, the gaming state of the RAM 203 is set to the specific time saving gaming state.

Next, the game control unit 200 generates a game state command and sets it in the RAM 203 (S2110). This game state command is transmitted to the performance control section 300 in the output process shown in S906 of FIG.

[Electric tulip processing by game control unit]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the contents of the electric tulip process of the electric accessory process shown in S904 of FIG.
In the electric tulip process, the electric tulip operation control unit 238 of the game control unit 200 first checks whether the auxiliary game flag is turned on in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S2201). If the auxiliary game flag is OFF, the electric tulip 123 will not be opened, so the electric tulip process ends (No in S2201). On the other hand, if the auxiliary game flag is ON (Yes in S2201), then the electric tulip operation control unit 238 determines whether or not the electric tulip 123 is in operation (S2202).

If the electric tulip 123 is not in operation (No in S2202), the electric tulip operation control unit 238 sets an operation pattern for the electric tulip 123 (S2203), and operates the electric tulip 123 in the set operation pattern (S2204). . Here, the operation pattern is set based on the time saving flag set in processes such as S1604 and S1610 in FIG. 16 and S2107 and S2109 in FIG. 21. For example, if the time saving flag is OFF at the time of setting in S2203, an operation pattern is set that opens once every 0.15 seconds, and if the time saving flag is ON, the operation pattern is set to open once for 1.80 seconds. An operation pattern is set in which the valve is opened three times in an hour. In this way, normally, when the time saving flag is ON (in the time saving state), the electric tulip 123 is opened multiple times for a long time, and the winning support (electronic chew support) that makes it easier to win at the second starting port 122 will be held. In addition, a plurality of operation patterns (auxiliary game types) of the electric tulip 123 are prepared when the time saving flag is ON or OFF, and the operation is performed according to the type of hit determined by the normal symbol processing (see Fig. 18). It may be configured to set a pattern.

If it is determined in S2202 that the electric tulip 123 is operating (Yes in S2202), or after operating the electric tulip 123 in S2204, the electric tulip operation control unit 238 determines whether the open time in the set operation pattern has elapsed. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (S2205). If the open time has not elapsed, the operating state (open state) of the electric tulip 123 is continued, so the electric tulip process is ended (No in S2205). On the other hand, if the opening time has elapsed (Yes in S2205), the electric tulip operation control unit 238 turns off the auxiliary game flag and ends the electric tulip process (S2206).

[Determination method using random numbers]
Here, a method of determination using random numbers, which is performed in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 14), the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 15), the normal symbol process (FIG. 18), etc., will be described in detail.
FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a configuration example of random numbers (determination table) used in the special symbol lottery and the normal symbol lottery in this embodiment.
Figure 23(a) shows an example of the configuration of the jackpot random number used in the special symbol lottery, Figure 23(b) shows an example of the configuration of the jackpot random number used in the special symbol lottery, and Figure 23(c) shows an example of the configuration of the jackpot random number used in the special symbol lottery. An example of the structure of the small winning symbol random number used, FIG. 23(d) shows an example of the structure of the reach random number used in the special symbol lottery, which is triggered by the winning of a game ball into the first starting hole 121 in the normal gaming state. 23(e) shows examples of the structure of the winning random numbers used in the normal symbol lottery.

Referring to FIG. 23(a), a jackpot and a small jackpot are set as the determination value of the jackpot random number. The range of random numbers (jackpot random numbers) is 300 from 0 to 299. In addition, while the jackpot winning value is set for each of the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122, which are the trigger for the special symbol lottery, the small winning winning value is only for the second starting port 122. is set. For the jackpot, three winning values are set for both the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122, and the winning probability is 3/300 (=1/100). Furthermore, 10 small winning winning values are set, and the winning probability is 10/300 (=1/30).
Here, to explain an example of the special symbol lottery, the jackpot random value (see S1003, S1010) obtained by winning the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122 is the jackpot in FIG. 23(a). It is determined whether the winning value matches one of the lottery winning values "8", "58", and "208". Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, the same applies to the special symbol lottery for small wins.

Referring to FIG. 23(b), there are five types of jackpot symbols: jackpot symbol A, jackpot symbol B, jackpot symbol C, jackpot symbol D, and jackpot symbol E. Here, the jackpot symbol A, the jackpot symbol B, and the jackpot symbol C are symbols that represent that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery that is triggered by winning in the first starting hole 121 is a jackpot. Symbol A indicates an 8-round jackpot. Jackpot symbol B indicates a four-round jackpot. Jackpot symbol C indicates a jackpot of 15 rounds. In addition, the jackpot symbol D and the jackpot symbol E are symbols that indicate that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winning in the second starting hole 122 is a jackpot, and among these, the jackpot symbol D is a jackpot of 15 rounds. Show that. The jackpot symbol E indicates an 8-round jackpot. The range of random numbers is 100 from 0 to 99.

In the jackpot symbol A, 20 values are assigned as winning values for the first starting opening 121. Therefore, if a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the first starting slot 121, the probability of winning with the jackpot symbol A is 20/100 (=2/10).
In the jackpot symbol B, 70 values are assigned as winning values for the first starting opening 121. Therefore, if a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the first starting opening 121, the probability of winning with the jackpot symbol B is 70/100 (=7/10).
In the jackpot symbol C, ten values are assigned as winning values for the first starting opening 121. Therefore, when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the first starting opening 121, the probability of winning with the jackpot symbol C is 10/100 (=1/10).

In the jackpot symbol D, 50 values are assigned as the winning value when the second starting opening 122 wins. Therefore, when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting hole 122, the probability of winning with the jackpot symbol D is 50/100 (=5/10).
In the jackpot symbol E, 50 values are assigned as the winning value when the second starting hole 122 wins. Therefore, when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting hole 122, the probability of winning with the jackpot symbol E is 50/100 (=5/10).

Here, to explain using the jackpot symbol A as an example, the jackpot symbol random value (see S1003) obtained by winning the first starting hole 121 is the winning value of the jackpot symbol A in FIG. 23(b). It is determined whether the number matches a certain number "0 to 19". Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, the same applies to the special symbol lottery of other jackpot symbols such as jackpot symbol B.

Here, the pachinko game machine 100 of this embodiment is capable of setting a set value that is a level of advantage of the game. In the pachinko game machine 100, the setting value can be set to one of six levels, for example, "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6".
In the pachinko gaming machine 100, when the setting value is set to "1", the probability of winning is the lowest. For example, when the set value is "1", the winning probability is 1/100.
Furthermore, in the pachinko gaming machine 100, when the setting value is set to "6", the probability of winning is the highest. For example, when the set value is "6", the winning probability is 1/95.
In this way, in the pachinko gaming machine 100, the winning probability is set to increase in the order of setting values "1"<"2"<"3"<"4"<"5"<"6".

Referring to FIG. 23(c), three types of small winning symbols are prepared: small winning symbol A, small winning symbol B, and small winning symbol C. Here, the small winning symbol A, the small winning symbol B, and the small winning symbol C all indicate two rounds of small winning. The range of random numbers is 100 from 0 to 99.

In the small winning symbol A, 20 values are assigned as winning values for the second starting opening 122. Therefore, when a small win is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting hole 122, the probability of winning with the small win symbol A is 20/100 (=2/10).
In the small winning symbol B, 50 values are assigned as winning values for the second starting opening 122. Therefore, when a small win is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting hole 122, the probability of winning with the small win symbol B is 50/100 (=5/10).
In the small winning symbol C, 30 values are assigned as winning values for the second starting opening 122. Therefore, when a small winning is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting hole 122, the probability of winning with the small winning symbol C is 30/100 (=3/10).

Next, determination of the reach random number will be explained. Note that the reach random number is set according to the number of reservations, as described later. Here, as an example, the reach random number when the number of reservations at the first starting port 121 is one will be explained.
Referring to FIG. 23(d), the range of random numbers is 250 from 0 to 249, and the lottery result (for example, 15.0 seconds or more) is set as a variation pattern (variation time) that allows the reach effect to be executed. 22 random numbers are assigned to the lottery result (with reach), and 228 random numbers are assigned to the lottery result (no reach) in which the variation pattern does not make the reach effect executable (for example, less than 15.0 seconds). That is, in the illustrated example, if there is no jackpot in the special symbol lottery, a reach effect is performed with a probability of 22/250 (=11/125). Here, the ready-to-reach performance is a performance performed on the image display section 114 when a special symbol changes. Hereinafter, the performance during special symbol fluctuations that does not make the reach effect an executable variation pattern will be referred to as a no-reach performance, and correspondingly, the performance during special symbol fluctuations that will make the reach effect an executable variation pattern will be referred to as a reach effect. It is called.

Here, to explain the case with reach as an example, the reach random value (see S1003) obtained by winning the prize in the first starting opening 121 is the winning value "0~" with reach in FIG. 23(d). 21'' is determined. Although detailed explanation will be omitted, the same applies to special symbol lottery without reach. Furthermore, the number of winning values is the same between the reach random numbers used in the special symbol lottery based on winnings in the first starting opening 121 and the reach random numbers used in the special symbol lottery based on winnings in the second starting opening 122. There may be one or different. In addition, the reach random numbers used in the special symbol lottery in the normal gaming state, the reach random numbers used in the special symbol lottery in the special time-saving gaming state, and the reach random numbers used in the special symbol lottery in the specific time-saving gaming state are different from each other. The number of values may be the same or different.

In many cases, when a special symbol changes, it is linked to the display control of the first special symbol display 221 and the second special symbol display 222 (hereinafter referred to as special symbol displays 221 and 222 if these are not distinguished). , an effect using decorative patterns is performed on the image display section 114. The decorative pattern is composed of, for example, three rows of symbols each consisting of a series of numbers 1 to 9 written consecutively in the vertical direction. Then, when variable display of the special symbols on the special symbol displays 221 and 222 starts, the decorative symbols displayed on the image display section 114 start scrolling. Further, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the special symbol (start of scrolling of the decorative symbol), the decorative symbol is also fixed and stopped. Generally, when the determination result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit or a small win, three identical numbers are lined up in a horizontal or diagonal straight line in the stop display of the decorative symbols. The performance performed along with the variable display of this special symbol is called a variable performance.

In the reach effect, the following operations are performed regarding decorative symbols as a variable effect. First, before the decorative symbols scrolling in the vertical (horizontal) direction are fixedly stopped, any two symbols (sequences of numbers) are first temporarily stopped. At this time, the same number is temporarily stopped on a horizontal (vertical) or diagonal straight line. To explain further, if the decorative pattern is scrolled in the vertical direction, the same numbers are temporarily stopped in a row in the horizontal direction.
Next, the last row gradually slows down the scrolling speed, giving the player a feeling of anticipation that three identical numbers will line up in a straight line. Then, after the last row is temporarily stopped, the three symbols are fixedly stopped.
Here, in the ready-to-reach presentation, the SP ready-to-reach presentation or the SPSP ready-to-reach presentation may be performed before the three symbols are fixed and stopped. In addition, SP Reach production is generally called Super Reach or Special Reach, and it is a production that makes you expect a bigger hit than Reach, and it is a production of moving images in which various characters appear and the story unfolds. . In addition, the SPSP Reach effect is generally called Super Super Reach or Special Special Reach, and it is a performance that makes you expect to win more than the SP Reach effect, and it features video images in which various characters appear and the story unfolds. This is a production of
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 24, which will be described later, in this embodiment, when the variation time is longer (for example, 90 seconds or 60 seconds), the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect is set to be executed.
On the other hand, in a no-reach performance, until the decorative pattern that scrolls in the vertical (horizontal) direction is confirmed and stopped, there is no performance that gives the player a sense of expectation like in a reach performance, and the horizontal (vertical) or horizontal (horizontal) The pattern is fixed and stopped when the same numbers are not aligned in a diagonal straight line.

In this way, the reach random number is used to determine whether the image display unit 114 performs a reach effect with a variable pattern that allows the reach effect to be executed, or allows the reach effect to be executed if the result of the determination of the jackpot random number is a loss. Decide whether to perform a no-reach performance with a variable pattern. In addition, the reach random number changes the execution rate of the reach effect depending on the number of reservations, thereby making it possible to proceed with the game efficiently and giving the player a moderate sense of expectation.
In addition, if you win the jackpot, a reach effect will be performed, and the decorative pattern will finally be fixed and stopped when the same numbers are aligned in a horizontal (vertical) or diagonal straight line. I can do it. On the other hand, in the reach effect in the case of winning a small hit or losing, the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped in a state where the same numbers are not aligned on the above-mentioned straight line.

Next, the determination of the winning random number used for the normal symbol lottery will be explained.
Referring to FIG. 23(e), the range of random numbers is 10 from 0 to 9, and one value is assigned as the winning value when the time saving flag is OFF, and one value is assigned as the winning value when the time saving flag is ON. Nine values are assigned. Therefore, when a game ball passes through the gate 124 and a normal symbol lottery is performed when there is no time saving state, the probability of winning is 1/10. On the other hand, if a game ball passes through the gate 124 during the time saving state and a normal symbol lottery is performed, the player will win with a probability of 9/10.

Here, to explain the case where the time saving flag is OFF as an example, the winning random number value (see S1103) obtained when a game ball passes through the gate 124, the first starting port 121, or the second starting port 122 is shown in FIG. It is determined whether it matches "0" which is the winning value of the time saving flag OFF in e). Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, the same applies to the normal symbol lottery with the time saving flag ON.

Further, although not particularly illustrated, it is possible to set a plurality of wins in which the content of the auxiliary game (opening pattern of the electric tulip 123) that is performed when a win is determined in the normal symbol lottery is different. In this case, for example, similar to the jackpot symbol random number (see FIG. 23(b)) that specifies the type of jackpot in the special symbol lottery, a winning symbol random number for specifying the type of win in the normal symbol lottery is set. Then, the game control section 200 causes the random number acquisition section 231 to acquire the random value of the winning random number as well as the random number of the winning symbol random number in the gate switch process (see FIG. 11), and the random number of the winning symbol random number is acquired by the normal symbol determination section 232. Identify the type of win based on random numbers.
Note that the range of random numbers, the proportion of winning values, and the values of winning values shown in the configuration example of each random number in FIG. 23 are merely examples, and are not limited to the values shown.

[Example of setting variation pattern]
Next, an example of setting a variation pattern and a table used in the variation pattern selection process shown in FIG. 15 will be described.
FIG. 24 is a diagram showing a setting example of a variation pattern and a table used in the variation pattern selection process shown in FIG. 15. Note that FIG. 24 shows a setting example in the case where the special symbols are changed based on winnings in the first starting hole 121 in the normal gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 24, if the determination result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot (Yes in S1502 of FIG. 15), the special symbol variation control unit 233 determines a variation pattern based on the jackpot symbol and the variation pattern random number. . Specifically, the special symbol variation control unit 233 determines whether the variation pattern random number value (see S1003) acquired together with the jackpot random number value by the random number acquisition unit 231 matches any of the variation pattern random numbers assigned to each jackpot symbol. Determine the fluctuation pattern based on whether For example, if the jackpot symbol is "jackpot symbol C" and the fluctuation pattern random number is "51", it matches the fluctuation pattern random number range "50 to 69" assigned to "jackpot symbol C" in FIG. "PB3" is selected as the variation pattern. The special symbol variation time in this "PB3" is "90.18 seconds".

In addition, if the determination result of the special symbol lottery is a loss (if both S1502 and S1504 in FIG. A fluctuation pattern is determined based on pattern random numbers. Specifically, when the pending number U1 of the first special symbol lottery is "1", the special symbol fluctuation control section 233 determines that the reach random number (see S1003) acquired together with the jackpot random number by the random number acquisition section 231 is "1". , it is determined whether it is allocated to the reach random number range "0 to 21", which is allocated to the "missing" pending number "1" in FIG. 23, or to the reach random number range "22 to 249". Then, when the obtained reach random number is included in the reach random number range "0 to 21", the fluctuation pattern random number (see S1003) obtained together with the jackpot random number by the random number acquisition unit 231 is included in the reach random number range "0 to 21". The fluctuation pattern is determined based on which of the fluctuation pattern random values assigned to "21" matches. For example, when the variation pattern random number is "51", it matches the variation pattern random number range "50 to 89", so "PR7" is selected as the variation pattern.

FIG. 25 is a diagram illustrating a setting example of a variation pattern and a table used in the variation pattern selection process. Incidentally, FIG. 25 shows a setting example in the case where the special symbols are changed based on winnings in the second starting hole in the normal gaming state.
In the table shown in FIG. 25, variation patterns are provided according to the determination results of the special symbol lottery and the variation pattern random numbers. More specifically, variation patterns are provided in which the "judgment result" is associated with a "big hit," a "small hit," and a "miss."
In the table shown in FIG. 25, a variation pattern in which the "time" is "7.00" is provided as the "jackpot symbol D". Further, a variation pattern in which the "time" is "7.01" is provided as the "jackpot symbol E". Further, a variation pattern in which the "time" is "6.00" is provided as the "small winning symbol A". Further, a variation pattern in which the "time" is "6.01" is provided as the "small winning symbol B". Further, a variation pattern in which the "time" is "6.02" is provided as the "small winning symbol C". Furthermore, a variation pattern in which the "time" is "0.50" is provided as a "deviation".

In addition, in this table, the winning value of the reach random number is not assigned to the "loser". Therefore, in the special symbol variation in which the lottery result based on winning in the second starting hole 122 in the normal gaming state is a loss, the reach is not performed.

FIG. 26 is a diagram illustrating a setting example of a variation pattern and a table used in the variation pattern selection process. In addition, FIG. 26 shows a setting example in the case where the special symbols are changed based on winnings in the second start opening 122 in the special time saving gaming state.
In the table shown in FIG. 26, fluctuation patterns are provided according to the determination result of the special symbol lottery, the pending number U2 of the second special symbol lottery, the reach random number, and the fluctuation pattern random number.
In the table shown in FIG. 26, variation patterns are provided in which the "number of reservations" is "1" and "no reach" is set, and the "time" is "2.50" and "4.00". The "time" of "2.50" and "4.00" is the "time" of the "variation pattern" set as "no reach" where the "pending number" is "1" in the table shown in FIG. " is shorter than "8.00". In addition, in the table shown in FIG. 26, there are fluctuation patterns in which "time" is "2.00" and "4.00" for "no reach" where "number of pending" is "2 to 3". . These “times” of “2.00” and “4.00” correspond to the “fluctuating pattern” set as “no reach” where the “pending number” is “2 to 3” in the table shown in Figure 24. It is shorter than "6.80" which is "time". Further, in the table shown in FIG. 26, variation patterns are provided in which the "number of reservations" is "4" and "no reach" and the "time" is "1.50" and "4.00". The "time" of "1.50" and "4.00" is the "time" of the "variation pattern" set as "no reach" where the "number of pending" is "4" in the table shown in Figure 24. " is shorter than "4.60".

FIG. 27 is a diagram illustrating a setting example of a variation pattern and a table used in the variation pattern selection process. In addition, FIG. 27 shows a setting example in the case where the special symbols are changed based on winnings in the first start opening 121 in the special time-saving gaming state.
In the table shown in FIG. 27, variation patterns are provided according to the determination result of the special symbol lottery, the pending number U1 of the first special symbol lottery, and the variation pattern random number. In addition, in this table, the winning value of the reach random number is not assigned to the "fluctuation pattern" whose "determination result" is "lost". Therefore, if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winning in the first start opening 121 in the special time saving gaming state is a loss, the reach is not performed in the special symbol variation.
In the table shown in FIG. 27, a variation pattern in which the "number of reservations" is "1 to 4" and the "time" is "14.00" is provided. The "time" of this variation pattern is longer than any "time" of the "variation pattern" provided as "no reach" in the table shown in FIG. In other words, if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery in the special time saving gaming state is "lost" and "no reach", the second start is longer than the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation based on the winning in the first start opening 121. The variation time of the special symbol variation based on winning in the mouth 122 is shorter.

FIG. 28 is a diagram illustrating a setting example of a variation pattern and a table used in the variation pattern selection process. In addition, FIG. 28 shows a setting example in the case where the special symbols are changed based on winnings in the second start opening 122 in the specific time saving gaming state.
In the table shown in FIG. 28, a variation pattern is provided according to the determination result of the special symbol lottery, the pending number U2 of the second special symbol lottery, and the variation pattern random number. In addition, in this table, the winning value of the reach random number is not assigned to the "fluctuation pattern" whose "determination result" is "lost". Therefore, if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winning in the second start opening 122 in the specific time saving gaming state is a loss, the reach is not performed in the special symbol variation.
In the table shown in FIG. 28, a variation pattern in which the "number of reservations" is "1" and the "time" is "2.01" is provided. This "time" of "2.01" is the "time" of "2. 50” and “4.00”. Further, in the table shown in FIG. 28, a variation pattern is provided in which the "number of reservations" is "2 to 3" and the "time" is "1.01". The "time" of "1.01" is the "time" of the "fluctuating pattern" set as "no reach" where the "pending number" is "2 to 3" in the table shown in FIG. 2.00” and “4.00”. Further, in the table shown in FIG. 28, a variation pattern in which the "number of reservations" is "4" and the "time" is "1.00" is provided. This "time" of "1.00" is the "time" of "1.00" which is the "time" of the "variation pattern" set as "no reach" where the "number of reservations" is "4" in the table shown in FIG. 50” and “4.00”. In other words, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is "lost" and "no reach", the special symbol variation time based on winning to the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving game state is longer than the specific time-saving game. The variation time of the special symbol variation based on the winning in the second starting port 122 in the state is shorter.

FIG. 29 is a diagram illustrating a setting example of a variation pattern and a table used in the variation pattern selection process. In addition, FIG. 29 shows a setting example in the case where the special symbols are changed based on winnings in the first start opening 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state.
In the table shown in FIG. 29, variation patterns are provided according to the determination result of the special symbol lottery, the pending number U1 of the first special symbol lottery, and the variation pattern random number. In addition, in this table, the winning value of the reach random number is not assigned to the "fluctuation pattern" whose "determination result" is "lost". Therefore, if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winning in the first start opening 121 in the specific time saving gaming state is a loss, the reach is not performed in the special symbol variation.
In the table shown in FIG. 29, a variation pattern is provided in which the "number of reservations" is "1 to 4" and the "time" is "14.01". The "time" of this variation pattern is longer than any "time" of the "variation patterns" that are set as "off" and "no reach" in the table shown in FIG. In other words, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is "lost" and "no reach", the specific time-saving gaming state is longer than the variation time of the special symbol variation based on winning to the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state. The variation time of the special symbol variation based on winning in the first starting hole 121 is longer.

The game control unit 200 controls a table used to select a variation pattern of special symbols based on which of the first starting hole 121 and the second starting hole 122 the game ball has entered and the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100. Determine. Then, as mentioned above, the fluctuation pattern random value obtained when the game ball enters the first starting hole 121 or the second starting hole 122 (see S1003 and S1010 in FIG. 10), the presence or absence of reach effect, the number of reservations, etc. The variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the conditions and the like. Then, information on the determined special symbol variation pattern is included in the variation start command and sent from the game control section 200 to the production control section 300. As will be described later, the production control unit 300 creates a production that corresponds to the variation time specified based on the information on the variation pattern included in the variation start command (that can be executed during that variation time) as a production when the special symbol changes. is selected and executed.

[Configuration of the RAM of the game control unit and the RAM of the performance control unit for performing preview performance based on advance determination]
Next, the configurations of the RAM 203 of the game control unit 200 and the RAM 303 of the performance control unit 300 in this embodiment for executing the preview performance based on the advance determination will be explained.
FIG. 30 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of RAM 203 (see FIG. 4) of game control section 200 according to this embodiment. FIG. 30(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the storage area 204, and FIG. 30(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of each storage section shown in FIG. 30(a).

As shown in FIG. 30(a), the RAM 203 includes a storage area 204 as a special symbol retention storage area that stores jackpot random numbers obtained by jackpot random number lottery. This storage area 204 has eight storage units corresponding to the maximum values of the number of reservations for the first starting port 121 and the number of reservations for the second starting port 122 (when the upper limit of each number of reservations is 4). . Specifically, the storage area 204 includes a first storage section 204a, a second storage section 204b, a third storage section 204c, a fourth storage section 204d, a fifth storage section 204e, a sixth storage section 204f, and a seventh storage section. 204g and an eighth storage section 204h.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 30(b), each of these storage units 204a to 204h is an area in which information representing the winning starting opening (first starting opening 121 or second starting opening 122) is stored. It has an area where the acquired jackpot random number is stored, an area where the symbol random number is stored, an area where the reach random number is stored, and an area where the fluctuating pattern random number is stored. That is, each of the storage units 204a to 204h stores a jackpot random number, a symbol random number, a reach random number, and a fluctuation pattern random number.

Here, each random number is stored in order starting from the first storage unit 204a. To explain more specifically, for example, when no random number is stored in any of the first storage section 204a to the eighth storage section 204h, the obtained random number is stored in the first storage section 204a. Further, for example, when random numbers are already stored in the first storage unit 204a to fourth storage unit 204d, the obtained random number will be stored in the fifth storage unit 204e.

FIG. 31 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of RAM 303 (see FIG. 4) of production control section 300 according to this embodiment. FIG. 31(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the reserved storage areas 305 and 306, and FIG. 31(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of each of the storage units shown in FIG. 31(a).
As shown in FIG. 31(a), the RAM 303 includes a first holding storage area 305 and a second holding storage area 306, which serve as holding status storage areas that store the status of holding balls. The first reservation storage area 305 and the second reservation storage area 306 respectively correspond to reservations for winnings to the first starting hole 121 and reservations for winnings to the second starting hole 122, and each store four storage sections. have. Specifically, the first reserved storage area 305 includes a first storage section 305a, a second storage section 305b, a third storage section 305c, and a fourth storage section 305d. Further, the second reserved storage area 306 includes a first storage section 306a, a second storage section 306b, a third storage section 306c, and a fourth storage section 306d.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 31(b), each of these storage units 305a to 305d and 306a to 306d includes a suspension flag storage area for turning on/off the suspension flag, and a notification flag storage area for turning the notification flag ON/OFF. It has an area. The reservation flag is a flag for identifying whether there is a reserved ball in each of the storage units 305a to 305d and 306a to 306d. That is, for example, when the number of reservations due to winnings in the first start opening 121 is 3, the reservation flags are turned ON in the three reservation flag storage areas of the first to third storage sections 305a, 305b, and 305c. The notification flag is a flag for setting whether or not to perform a preview performance based on the preliminary determination result for each reserved ball. In the pachinko game machine 100 of the present embodiment, the performance control section 300 can set whether or not to perform a preview performance based on the preliminary determination result depending on the game state and the performance situation. Therefore, the notification flag is turned ON when a preview performance is to be performed, and the notification flag is turned OFF when a preview performance is not to be performed. For example, when a preview performance is performed for the third held ball among the three held balls, the notification flag is turned ON in the notification flag storage area of the third storage section 305c.

Further, although not particularly illustrated, the RAM 203 has an area (hereinafter referred to as a preliminary determination information storage area) in which preliminary determination information is stored, in addition to the configuration shown in FIG. 30(a). The preliminary determination information is information obtained by the preliminary determination process (see S1004 and S1011 in FIG. 10) based on each random number described above. The contents of the preliminary judgment information are the same as the information obtained as various judgment results in the special symbol processing (see Figure 13), and specifically, whether or not there was a jackpot (and whether or not there was a small jackpot), and whether there was a jackpot or not. If so, this is information indicating the type of jackpot, whether the variation pattern (variation time) is long enough to execute a reach effect, and the content of the variation pattern. The advance determination information stored in the advance determination information storage area may be used together with information regarding reservation (hereinafter referred to as reservation information) corresponding to the winning ball (retention ball) for which advance determination processing has been performed, or in a unique manner separately from this reservation information. At the same time, it is included in the preliminary determination result command and sent from the game control section 200 to the performance control section 300.

[Advance judgment processing]
Next, the preliminary determination process (see S1004 and S1011 in FIG. 10) will be described in detail.
In the preliminary determination process in this embodiment, the game control unit 200 performs the preliminary determination as follows using a random number table similar to the random number configuration example described with reference to FIGS. 24 to 29.

FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the contents of the preliminary determination process (S1004 and S1011 in FIG. 10) according to this embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 32, the game control unit 200 first refers to the game state (S3201), selects a table according to the current game state of the pachinko game machine 100, and selects a table that corresponds to the current game state of the pachinko game machine 100 to determine the jackpot random number and the jackpot symbol random number in advance. A determination is made (S3202).
Next, the game control unit 200 selects a table according to the current gaming state of the pachinko game machine 100 and performs preliminary determination of the reach random number (S3203). Furthermore, a table corresponding to the current gaming state is selected, and a fluctuation pattern random number is pre-determined (S3204).
Although not shown, in S3202, S3203, and S3204, a dedicated table is selected depending on which of the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122 the preliminary determination process is based on. .

Next, the game control unit 200 selects a preliminary determination pattern according to the results of the preliminary determination in S3202, S3203, and S3204 (S3205).
Thereafter, the game control unit 200 receives the results of the preliminary determination of the jackpot random number obtained as described above, the preliminary determination result of the jackpot symbol random number, the preliminary determination result of the reach random number, the preliminary determination result of the fluctuation pattern, and the preliminary determination result of the reach random number. The determination pattern is stored as preliminary determination information in the preliminary determination information storage area (S3206). Furthermore, in order to transmit the preliminary determination information to the production control section 300, a preliminary determination result command including the preliminary determination information is set in the RAM 203 (S3207).

Here, the above-mentioned preliminary determination is performed using random numbers obtained in response to the winning of game balls in the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122 (see S1003 and S1010 in FIG. 10) and in the jackpot determination process. This was performed using a determination table having a similar configuration to the determination table shown in FIG. 23 (see FIG. 23). That is, the determination itself after selecting the determination table to be used is the same as the determination in the jackpot determination process (see S1401 in FIG. 14). Therefore, in this embodiment, the subroutine of the jackpot determination process (see S1309 in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14) used in the special symbol process (see FIG. 13) is called to determine the random number in the above-mentioned preliminary determination.

With this configuration, in this embodiment, in order to determine random numbers in the advance determination process, there is no need to prepare a processing function (subroutine) for determining random numbers separately from the jackpot determination process. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of control instructions and suppress an increase in the size of the program related to the jackpot determination process and the preliminary determination process. Further, as described above, when the determination table used in the preliminary determination has the same configuration as the determination table used in the jackpot determination, the determination table used in the jackpot determination may also be used in the preliminary determination.

In addition, although only the preliminary judgment regarding the special symbol lottery (whether it is a jackpot or not) has been explained here, in this embodiment, the variation pattern when performing the variable display and stop display of the special symbol is also read in advance (preliminary judgment). I do. The selection of the variation pattern in the special symbol lottery is performed using random numbers for variation pattern selection (see S1003 and S1010 in FIG. 10) obtained in response to winning of game balls in the first starting hole 121 and the second starting hole 122. This is performed using the variation pattern table (see FIGS. 24 to 29) (see S1310 in FIG. 13 and FIG. 15). Therefore, when pre-reading the variation pattern, the random value for variation pattern selection obtained at the time of winning a prize and the pre-read table having the same structure as the variation pattern table used in the variation pattern selection process of the special symbol processing are used to select the variation pattern. Fluctuation patterns can be predicted. That is, a different look-ahead table can be used for each gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100. Furthermore, different look-ahead tables can be used depending on which of the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122 has won.

In this case, in order to pre-read the variation pattern to be selected in the variation pattern selection process, the subroutine of the variation pattern selection process (see S1310 in FIG. 13 and FIG. 15) used in the special symbol process (see FIG. 13) is called and used. be able to. Also, regarding the pre-read table used for pre-reading the variable pattern selection, the variable pattern table used in the variable pattern selection process of the special symbol process may be used. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of control instructions related to prefetching of variation pattern selection, and to suppress an increase in the size of the program.

In addition, if the preliminary judgment process and the jackpot judgment process when special symbols change are performed in the same subroutine using the same judgment table group, the execution time of each process is different, so the preliminary judgment result and the jackpot judgment process when special symbols change The judgment result of the jackpot judgment process may be different. That is, this is a case where the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 (any state among the normal gaming state, special time-saving gaming state, and specific time-saving gaming state) changes after the preliminary determination process is executed and before the start of special symbol variation. . In this case, different types of determination tables are used depending on the gaming state, so the specific determination table used for determination will be different when executing the preliminary determination process and when executing the jackpot determination process. . Therefore, even if the same random number value obtained when winning in the first starting hole 121 and the second starting hole 122 is used, the preliminary determination result and the determination result of the jackpot determination process may differ. In such a case, in the performance control unit 300, if the game state changes after the execution of the preliminary determination process and before the start of the special symbol variation, the performance based on the preliminary determination result is not executed (prohibition) control, etc. You may do so.

In addition, according to the command output from the game control section 200 to the production control section 300 as described above, the production control section 300 controls, for example, the image display section 114, the board lamp 116, the speaker 156, the frame lamp 157, etc. For example, when the production control section 300 receives a command indicating the start of a door opening error, the production control section 300 displays a message such as "Please call the staff" or an image indicating an abnormal condition on the image display section. 114. Furthermore, the production control unit 300 causes the speaker 156 to output an alarm indicating an abnormal state, and restricts output of music, audio, sound effects, and the like. Furthermore, the production control unit 300 lights up the panel lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157 in red, for example, as a mode indicating the abnormal state.

Additionally, although it has been explained here that the production control section 300 uses all of the image display section 114, panel lamp 116, speaker 156, and frame lamp 157 to notify that an error has occurred, only one of these is used. It is also possible to use a part. Furthermore, the notification mode may be switched depending on the content of the error. For example, if a door opening error occurs, all of the image display section 114, panel lamp 116, speaker 156, and frame lamp 157 may be used as described above. Furthermore, when a payout error occurs, the image display section 114 and speaker 156 notify that the error has occurred. This makes it possible for a clerk at a gaming parlor (pachinko hall) to easily determine the degree of urgency of an error occurring in a gaming machine.

[Example of setting advance judgment pattern]
Next, an example of setting the preliminary determination pattern and table used in the preliminary determination process shown in FIG. 32 will be described.
FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a setting example of a preliminary determination pattern and a table used in the preliminary determination process shown in FIG. 32. Note that FIG. 33 shows a setting example in the case where the special symbols are changed based on winnings in the first start opening 121 in the normal gaming state.

In the table shown in FIG. 33, "judgment result", "design", "reach random number", "fluctuation pattern random number", "scheduled fluctuation pattern", and "prior determination pattern" are provided in association with each other. .
The game control unit 200 determines the scheduled fluctuation pattern and the preliminary determination pattern based on the preliminary determination results of the jackpot random number and the jackpot symbol random number, the preliminary determination result of the reach random number, and the preliminary determination result of the fluctuation pattern random number.

FIG. 34 is a diagram illustrating a setting example of a preliminary determination pattern and a table used in the preliminary determination process. In addition, FIG. 34 shows a setting example in the case where the special symbols are changed based on winnings in the second start opening 122 in the special time saving gaming state.
In the table shown in FIG. 34, "judgment result", "design", "reach random number", "fluctuation pattern random number", "scheduled fluctuation pattern", and "prior determination pattern" are provided in association with each other. .

FIG. 35 is a diagram illustrating a setting example of a preliminary determination pattern and a table used in the preliminary determination process. In addition, FIG. 35 shows a setting example in the case where the special symbols are changed based on winnings in the second start opening 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state.
In the table shown in FIG. 35, "judgment result", "design", "reach random number", "variation pattern random number", "scheduled variation pattern", and "pre-judgment pattern" are provided in association with each other. .

In addition, in this embodiment, as a setting example of the preliminary determination pattern and the table, a setting example where the special symbol is changed based on winning in the first starting hole 121 in the special time-saving gaming state, and a setting example when the special symbol is changed based on winning in the first starting hole 121 in the special time-saving gaming state, and No setting example is provided for the case where the special symbols are changed based on winnings in the first starting hole 121. That is, in the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting port 121 in the special time-saving gaming state, and when a gaming ball enters the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, in the preliminary determination process, A pre-judgment result command is not generated, and the pre-judgment effect described later is not executed. However, even if a game ball enters the first starting port 121 in the special time-saving gaming state, and even if a game ball enters the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the preliminary judgment result in the preliminary judgment process A command may be generated and set in RAM 203. As a result, a preliminary determination effect may be executed.

Furthermore, in the illustrated example, one "scheduled variation pattern" is associated with one "prior determination pattern," but the present invention is not limited to this. A plurality of "prior determination patterns" may be associated with one "scheduled variation pattern". When this "scheduled variation pattern" is selected, any one of the plurality of "pre-determination patterns" may be selected by lottery.

[Operation of production control section]
Next, the operation of the production control section 300 will be explained.
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the operation of the production control section 300.
The operation of the production control section 300 consists of a main process shown in FIG. 36(a) and an interrupt process shown in FIG. 36(b). Referring to FIG. 36(a), the production control unit 300 first performs initial settings at startup (S3601), and after setting the cycle of CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) (S3602), according to the set cycle. , while updating the random numbers used in production control (S3603), accepts interrupt processing.

Interrupt processing is performed periodically according to the cycle set in S3602. Referring to FIG. 36(b), in this interrupt process, the production control unit 300 receives a command from the game control unit 200 and performs a command reception process (S3611). In this command reception process, the performance content (performance pattern) is selected. Further, the performance control unit 300 performs specific time-saving related performance processing for executing a performance related to the specific time-saving gaming state (S3612). Further, the performance control unit 300 performs performance button processing for accepting operations of the performance button 161 and the like by the player (S3613). After that, the effect control unit 300 performs a command sending process to send a command including information on the selected effect pattern to the image/sound control unit 310 and the lamp control unit 320 (S3614). As a result, effects are performed by displaying an image on the image display section 114, outputting sound, moving the movable accessory 115, emitting light from the panel lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157, and the like.

[Command reception processing by the production control unit]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command reception process (S3611 in FIG. 36(b)).
In this command reception process, the production control unit 300 first determines whether or not a preliminary determination result command and a pending number increase command have been received (S3701). The preliminary determination result command and the hold number increase command are set in the game control unit 200 in the start switch processing shown in FIG. 10 (S1006, S1007, S1013, S1014), and are set in the output processing (S906 ) is the command sent to the production control unit 300.
When the production control unit 300 determines that the preliminary determination result command and the hold count increase command have been received (S3701: Yes), the effect control unit 300 adds 1 to the hold count held in the RAM 303 (S3702).
Furthermore, the production control unit 300 performs a pre-judgment production selection process based on the pre-judgment result command and the reservation number increase command (S3703). In addition, the content of the advance determination effect selection process will be explained later.

If the received command is not a preliminary determination result command or a pending number increase command (No in S3701), the effect control unit 300 determines whether the received command is a fluctuation start command (S3704). This fluctuation start command is a command that is set in the special symbol processing shown in FIG. 13 in the game control section 200 (S1312) and sent to the performance control section 300 in the output processing shown in FIG. 9 (S906).
If the received command is a variation start command (Yes in S3704), the effect control unit 300 executes effect selection processing (S3705). Moreover, when a fluctuation start command is received, a random value for effect control used in the effect selection process is acquired. This random number is a random number that is periodically updated in S3603 of the main process shown in FIG. 36(a). Details of the effect selection process will be described later.

If the received command is not a preliminary determination result command, a pending number increase command, or a fluctuation start command (No in S3701 and S3704), the production control unit 300 determines whether the received command is a fluctuation stop command (S3706). This fluctuation stop command is a command that is set in the special symbol processing shown in FIG. 13 in the game control section 200 (S1318) and sent to the performance control section 300 in the output processing shown in FIG. 9 (S906).
When the received command is a variation stop command (Yes in S3707), the production control unit 300 executes a process during the completion of variation production (S3707). In addition, in the fluctuating performance finishing process, the performance control unit 300 analyzes the received fluctuation stop command and sets in the RAM 303 a fluctuating performance end command for instructing the end of the symbol fluctuation performance.

If the received command is not a preliminary determination result command, a pending number increase command, a fluctuation start command, or a fluctuation stop command (No in S3701, S3704, and S3706), the production control unit 300 starts the opening operation of the jackpot game based on the received command. It is determined whether or not the opening command is for the purpose of doing so (S3708). This opening command is set (S1618) in the stopping process (S1618) shown in FIG. 16 or the second big prize opening process (S2015) shown in FIG. This is a command sent to the control unit 300.
If the received command is an opening command (Yes in S3708), the production control unit 300 executes a jackpot production selection process (S3709). Details of the jackpot performance selection process will be described later.

If the received command is not a preliminary determination result command, a pending number increase command, a fluctuation start command, a fluctuation stop command, or an opening command (No in S3701, S3704, S3706, and S3708), the production control unit 300 determines that the received command is a jackpot game. It is determined whether the ending command is for starting the ending operation of (S3710). This ending command is a command that is set in the first big prize opening process shown in FIG. 19 (S1913) and sent to the production control section 300 in the output process (S906) shown in FIG.
If the received command is an ending command (Yes in S3710), the effect control unit 300 executes an ending effect selection process (S3711). Details of the ending effect selection process will be described later.

If the received command is not a preliminary determination result command, a hold count increase command, a fluctuation start command, a fluctuation stop command, an opening command, or an ending command (No in S3701, S3704, S3706, S3708 and S3710), then the production control unit 300 , the received command executes a customer waiting command reception process for transitioning to a customer waiting state (S3712). Details of the customer waiting command reception process will be described later.

FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the contents of the advance determination effect selection process (S3703) and the effect selection process (S3705) in FIG.
In the advance determination performance selection process, the performance control unit 300 first analyzes the advance determination result command received from the game control unit 200 (S3801). Furthermore, the production control unit 300 analyzes the command to increase the number of reservations received from the game control unit 200 (S3802). Then, the performance control unit 300 selects a performance pattern (pre-judgment performance pattern) to be used in the pre-judgment performance based on the pre-judgment result command and the reservation number increase command (S3803).

Here, as the advance judgment performance pattern, various performance patterns can be provided that foretell the random number determination result by the special symbol processing before the start of fluctuation based on the random number determination result by the special symbol processing. For example, a performance such as a hold display performance or a continuous preview performance can be provided as a predetermined performance pattern. In this embodiment, when a reserved ball occurs, a display representing the number of reserved balls is displayed on the first special symbol reserved display 218 and the second special symbol reserved display 219 of the display 130 (see FIG. 3). At the same time, a hold display indicating the occurrence of hold and the number of holds is displayed on the image display unit 114 (hold display effect). Therefore, in this hold display performance, by reflecting the preliminary judgment result in the display mode of the hold display, the player can see the judgment result when the random number judgment is subsequently performed by special symbol processing regarding the held ball. It can be a pre-judgment performance that suggests.

In addition, here we have explained the case where the pending display effect is used as a preliminary judgment effect, but by reflecting it in the contents of various effects performed before the start of the fluctuation based on the random number judgment result by special symbol processing, it can be used for various preview effects. It becomes possible to do this. For example, a performance using a performance image displayed on the image display unit 114, a performance using light emission from the board lamp 116 or the frame lamp 157, a performance using the movement of movable characters, a performance using sound output such as music or sound effects, etc., can be prepared in advance. It can be set as a judgment performance pattern.

Further, the preliminary determination performance may be performed in conjunction with a symbol change for another winning ball that is performed before a symbol change for the winning ball (reserved ball) for which the preliminary determination has been performed. In this embodiment, the maximum number of retained balls is four per starting port (first starting port 121 or second starting port 122) (see FIG. 10). Furthermore, priority is given to extinguishing the reserved balls in the second starting port 122. In this case, for example, if a preliminary determination is made for a reserved ball with the second starting port 122, before a symbol variation is performed for that reserved ball, including the currently varying variation (referred to as the variation), Symbol changes will be made for a maximum of four winning balls. In a preview performance related to a reserved ball for which a preliminary judgment has been made, if multiple symbol changes occur before the symbol change for that reserved ball, a preview performance that spans the multiple symbol changes (continuous preview performance) ).

Then, the production control unit 300 sets in the RAM 303 a pending number command that includes the value of the pending number after addition and the information of the pre-determined performance pattern selected in the pre-determined performance selection process (S3804). Note that the reservation number command includes information indicating the selected predetermined effect pattern to the CPU 311 of the image/sound control unit 310. By receiving the pending number command, the CPU 311 creates a display list or the like for causing the VDP 314 to draw and output images and sounds corresponding to the selected predetermined performance pattern. Based on the display list, etc., the VDP 314 reads out image data and audio data representing the selected pre-judgment effect pattern from the CGROM 315 and SNDROM 316, and expresses the pre-judgment effect using the image display section 114 and the speaker 156. .

In the performance selection process, the performance control unit 300 first analyzes the received variation start command (S3811). Further, the value of the number of reservations held in the RAM 303 is subtracted by 1 (S3812). Then, the production control unit 300 displays the information on the image display unit 114 based on various setting information (information such as the type of jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot game, and the variation pattern) obtained from the analysis result of the variation start command. A variation effect pattern of symbol variation based on the image is selected (S3813). Note that after the variable effect pattern is selected, the value of the number of reservations held in the RAM 303 may be subtracted by 1. That is, the variable effect pattern may be selected in a state before the value of the number of reservations held in the RAM 303 is subtracted by 1.

Finally, the production control unit 300 sets in the RAM 303 a variable production start command that instructs to start executing the selected production (S3814). Note that the variable effect start command includes information indicating the selected variable effect pattern in order to notify the CPU 311 of the selected variable effect pattern. Upon receiving the variable effect start command, the CPU 311 creates a display list or the like for causing the VDP 314 to draw and output images and sounds corresponding to the selected variable effect pattern. Based on the display list and the like, the VDP 314 reads out image data and audio data representing the selected variable effect pattern from the CGROM 315 and SNDROM 316, and expresses the variable effect using the image display section 114 and the speaker 156.

Although not described in detail, in the process of selecting a variation effect pattern of symbol variation in S3813, a variation effect pattern is determined based on the variation pattern. Based on the variable effect pattern determined here, the variable display of decorative symbols, the background effect, the preview effect, etc. are determined. Note that the variable display of decorative symbols is an effect display performed on the image display unit 114 in conjunction with the variable display of special symbols performed on the first special symbol display 221 or the second special symbol display 222. In this fluctuating display of decorative symbols, a reach effect or the like is performed. Note that, unlike this embodiment, if a plurality of variable effect patterns are set for the variable pattern, the effect random number (one of the random numbers updated in S3603 of FIG. 36(a)) , the effect random value is obtained upon reception of the variation start command), and the variable effect pattern may be selected by lottery.

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot effect selection process (S3709) of FIG. 37.
In this jackpot performance selection process, the performance control unit 300 first analyzes the received opening command (including information about the type of jackpot symbol) (S3901), and selects a performance pattern (jackpot performance pattern) (S3902). . Then, the performance control unit 300 reads image data and sound data used for the performance according to the selected jackpot performance pattern from the ROM 302, sets in the RAM 303 a jackpot performance start command that instructs the selected performance together with these data, The jackpot effect selection process ends (S3903). This determines the performance during the jackpot. In addition, in selecting the jackpot performance pattern (S3902), a determination may be made based on a random number value obtained at the time of receiving the command.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending effect selection process (S3711) of FIG. 37.
In this ending performance selection process, the performance control unit 300 first analyzes the received ending command (including information about the type of jackpot symbol) (S4001), and selects a performance pattern (ending performance pattern) (S4002). . Then, the performance control unit 300 reads image data and sound data used for the performance according to the selected ending performance pattern from the ROM 302, and sets in the RAM 303, together with these data, an ending performance start command that instructs the selected performance. The ending effect selection process ends (S4003). In addition, in the selection of the ending effect pattern (S4002), a determination may be made based on a random value obtained at the time of command reception.

FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the contents of the customer waiting command reception process (S3712) in FIG. 37.
The production control unit 300 determines whether a customer waiting command for transitioning to a customer waiting state has been received (S4101). When the customer waiting command is received (Yes in S4101), the production control unit 300 starts measuring the elapsed time (S4102) and turns on the measurement flag in the RAM 303 (S4103). On the other hand, if the received command is not a customer waiting command (No in S4101), the production control unit 300 determines whether the measurement flag held in the RAM 303 is turned on (S4104). If the measurement flag is OFF (No in S4104), the customer waiting command reception process ends.

If the measurement flag is ON (Yes in S4104 or turned ON in S4103), then the production control unit 300 determines whether the measurement time has reached a predetermined time-up time (for example, 10 seconds). (S4105). If the time has not expired (No in S4105), the customer waiting command reception process ends. On the other hand, when the time is up (Yes in S4105), the effect control unit 300 turns off the measurement flag held in the RAM 303 (S4106).

Next, the production control unit 300 determines whether the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is a specific time-saving gaming state (S4107). If it is the specific time-saving game state (YES in S4107), the performance control unit 300 determines whether or not it is before the start of the first variable performance in the special time-saving game state (S4108).
If it is not before the start of the first variable performance (NO in S4108), the performance control unit 300 sets a customer waiting performance command for performing the first customer waiting performance in the RAM 303, and ends the customer waiting command reception process ( S4109).
Further, if the specific time-saving gaming state is not in effect (NO in S4107) or before the start of the first variable production in the specific time-saving gaming state (YES in S4108), the production control unit 300 controls the second customer waiting production (demonstration production). ) is set in the RAM 303, and the customer waiting command receiving process is ended (S4110). The second customer waiting performance is a performance different from the first customer waiting performance.

When the command reception process is completed as described above, any one of the variable performance start command, variable performance end command, jackpot performance start command, ending performance start command, and customer waiting performance command is set in the RAM 303.

FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the contents of the specific time saving related effect processing (S3612) of FIG. 36(b).
The performance control unit 300 determines whether the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is the normal gaming state (S4201). If it is the normal gaming state (S4201: YES), the performance control unit 300 determines whether or not the specific time saving gaming state has been controlled to the normal gaming state (S4202). When the specific time saving gaming state is controlled to the normal gaming state (YES in S4202), the specific time saving related performance processing is ended. Further, if the specific time saving game state is not controlled to the normal game state (S4202: NO), the performance control unit 300 determines whether or not a variable performance is being executed (S4203). If the variable performance is not in progress (NO in S4203), the specific time saving related performance process is ended.

On the other hand, if the variable performance is in progress (YES in S4203), the performance control unit 300 determines whether RAM clearing was executed when the pachinko gaming machine 100 most recently returned from a power-off state. (S4204). If RAM clearing has not been executed (NO in S4204), the production control unit 300 determines whether the number of changes in the decorative pattern after the most recent return is equal to or greater than the first number (S4205). In this embodiment, the first number of times is 50 times. However, the first number of times may be any value. If the number of fluctuations is less than the first number (NO in S4205), the specific time saving related effect process is ended. Note that the effect control unit 300 may set the condition for determining that the number of fluctuations is equal to or greater than the first number to be the completion of the first fluctuation, or the start of the first fluctuation. Good too.
When the number of fluctuations is the first number or more (YES in S4205), the production control unit 300 determines whether the number of fluctuations of the decorative pattern after the return is the second number or more (S4206). The second number of times is a greater number of fluctuations than the first number of times. In this embodiment, the second number of times is, for example, 101 times. However, the second number of times may be any value as long as it is a greater number of fluctuations than the first number of times. Note that the effect control unit 300 may determine that the number of fluctuations is equal to or greater than the second number of times as a condition that the second number of fluctuations has ended or that the second number of fluctuations has started. Good too.
If the number of variations is less than the second number (NO in S4206), the production control unit 300 determines whether the number of variations of the decorative pattern after the return is the third number (S4207). In this embodiment, the third number of times is 100 times. Note that the effect control unit 300 may set the condition for determining that the number of fluctuations is the third number to be that the third number of fluctuations has ended, or that the third number of fluctuations has started. You can also use it as

If the number of fluctuations is not the third number (NO in S4207), the performance control unit 300 determines whether or not to execute the clear negative performance by lottery (eg, 1/2 ratio) (S4208). The clear negative effect is a effect indicating that RAM clearing has not been executed. If it is determined not to perform the clear negative effect (NO in S4208), the specific time saving related effect process is ended.
When it is determined to perform the clear negative performance (YES in S4208), the performance control unit 300 executes the clear negative performance and the remaining number of times notification performance (S4209). The remaining number of times notification performance is a performance that notifies the number of variable performances necessary to reach a specific time-saving gaming state.

Further, when the number of fluctuations is the third number (YES in S4207), the performance control unit 300 determines whether the clear negative performance has been executed (S4210). If the clear denial effect has not been executed (NO in S4210), the effect control unit 300 executes the clear denial effect and the remaining number of times notification effect (S4211).

On the other hand, if RAM clearing was executed when the pachinko gaming machine 100 most recently returned from a power-off state (YES in S4204), the production control unit 300 determines that the most recent reset of the number of fluctuations was It is determined whether the reset is based on a jackpot (S2105 in FIG. 21) (S4212). If the reset is not based on a jackpot (NO in S4212), the production control unit 300 determines whether the number of fluctuations after the most recent return from the power-off state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is the fourth number or more. A judgment is made (S4213). The fourth number of times is a larger number of fluctuations than the first number of times. In this embodiment, the fourth number of times is 100 times. However, the fourth number of times may be any value as long as it is a greater number of fluctuations than the first number of times. When the number of fluctuations is less than the fourth number (NO in S4213), the specific time saving related effect processing is ended. Note that the effect control unit 300 may set the condition for determining that the number of fluctuations is the fourth number or more as the completion of the fourth fluctuation, or the start of the fourth fluctuation. Good too.

Further, if the number of fluctuations is the fourth number or more (YES in S4213), or if the most recent reset is a reset based on a jackpot (YES in S4212), the performance control unit 300 determines that the remaining number of times notification performance has been executed. It is determined whether there is one (S4214). If the remaining number of times notification effect has not been executed (NO in S4214), the effect control unit 300 executes the remaining number of times notification effect (S4215).
Further, if YES in S4206, YES in S4210, after executing S4209, after executing S4211, if YES in S4214, or after executing S4215, the effect control unit 300 executes the remaining number of update effect. (S4216). The remaining number of times update performance is a performance that notifies the number of times after updating the variable performance required until the specific time saving gaming state is reached.

On the other hand, if it is not the normal gaming state (NO in S4201), the performance control unit 300 determines whether the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is the specific time-saving gaming state (S4217). If it is not the specific time saving game state (NO in S4217), the specific time saving related production process is ended.
If it is the specific time-saving gaming state (YES in S4217), the performance control unit 300 determines whether or not it is before the start of the first variable performance in the specific time-saving gaming state (S4218). If it is before the start of the first variable performance (YES in S4218), the performance control unit 300 determines whether there is any pending performance (S4219). If there is a hold (NO in S4219), the specific time saving related effect process is ended.
Moreover, when there is no hold (YES in S4219), the production control unit 300 starts the right hit notification (S4220). More specifically, the performance control unit 300 starts notification to urge the player to shoot the game ball toward the right side in the game area 111.

On the other hand, if it is after the start of the first variable performance in the specific time-saving gaming state (NO in S4218), the performance control unit 300 determines whether or not it is before the start of the right hit notification (S4221). If it is after the start of the right-handed hit notification (NO in S4221), the specific time saving related effect process is ended.
If it is before the start of right-handed hitting notification (YES in S4221), the production control unit 300 starts right-handed hitting notification (S4222). Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 executes a specific time saving notification performance (S4223). The specific time-saving notification performance is a performance that notifies that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a specific time-saving gaming state.

FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the contents of the production button process (S3613 in FIG. 36(b)).
In this performance button process, the performance control unit 300 first determines whether or not the player operates the operation means such as the performance button 161 during a predetermined reception period (validity period) (S4301). Here, the operation of the operating means includes pressing the production button 161 and turning it on, and pressing the center key and the surrounding keys of the production key 162 and turning it on. Furthermore, if the pachinko gaming machine 100 is provided with an operation device such as a touch panel other than the performance button 161 and the performance key 162, this includes detection of the operation of the device. The performance control unit 300 receives operation signals from the controllers of these devices and detects that the operation has been performed.
If the operation means such as the effect button 161 is not operated (No in S4301), the effect button process is ended.

Further, if the operation means such as the production button 161 is operated (Yes in S4301), the production control unit 300 sets a production button command including information indicating the operation content of the operation means in the RAM 303 and performs production button processing. The process ends (S4302).

After that, the production control unit 300 performs the command transmission process (S3614) in FIG. The information is transmitted to the control unit 320. Then, based on the received command, the image/sound control section 310 and the lamp control section 320 display an image on the image display section 114, output sound, operate the movable accessory 115, emit light from the panel lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157, etc. to execute the set effects.

[Display information on the information display in each game section]
Next, the display information on the information display 230 in each game section will be explained using FIG. 44. In the display information table of FIG. 44, the section counter value (type of game section), the number of outs during normal play, the data selection counter value, and the display contents of the information display 230 are associated with each other.
Here, the first game section shown in FIG. 44 starts when the power is turned on for the first time. Furthermore, the setting of 60,000 total outs is a value that can approximately guarantee the daily operation of a pachinko game machine that produces 100 shots per minute. Normally, medium base values are always displayed in two digits in the numerical value segment. Further, when the number of outs during normal play is "0" and when the base value during normal play is 100 or more, "99." is displayed in the numerical value segment.

The identification information displayed in the identification segment of the information display 230 includes "bL.", which indicates the normal base value of the current gaming section, and "bL.", which indicates the normal base value of the previous gaming section. "b1.", "b2." indicating that it is the normal base value of the gaming section two times before, and "b3." indicating that it is the normal base value of the gaming section three times before.

The numerical information displayed in the numeric segment of the information display 230 includes "--" indicating that there is no calculated base value during normal play, and when the normal base value is "0" or the number of outs during normal play is "0". ``00'' indicates that there is, ``01'' to ``99'' indicate that the number of outs during normal is ``1'' or more and the normal base value is ``1'' to ``99,'' and the normal base value. There is "99." which indicates that the number is "100" or more. Note that if the normal base value is less than "10", the tens digit of the numerical information will always be "0" and will be displayed in two digits.

The numerical information displayed on the numerical segment does not change its display form (it is lit up) regardless of the game period or the number of outs during normal play, but the identification information displayed on the identification segment does not change regardless of the game period or the number of outs during normal play. The display mode changes (blinking display or lighting display) depending on the number of outs during normal play, etc. (the presence or absence of a calculated normal base value and the credibility of the calculated normal base value).

Specifically, in the first to fourth game sections, when displaying the identification information of the game section for which there is no calculated normal base value, the identification information will be displayed blinking. In addition, in the game sections after the second game section, when displaying the identification information ("bL.") of the current game section, the period when the credibility of the calculated normal base value is low (the number of outs during the normal 0 to 5999), the identification information will be displayed blinking. In other cases, the identification information is displayed by lighting.

Here, to give an example of the display on the information display 230, the section counter value is "1", the number of normal outs is within the range of 0 to 5999, and the data selection counter value is "0". When the normal base value stored in the first area of the base storage area is "35", "bL." is displayed blinking in the identification segment of the information display 230, and "35" is displayed in the numerical value segment. ' will be displayed.

In this way, when the normal base value is ``99'' or less, performance information that does not use the decimal point DP of the 7-segment display, ``00'' to ``99'', is displayed in the numeric segment, while the normal base value If the value is ``100'' or more, the performance information using the decimal point DP of the 7-segment display is displayed as ``99.'' in the numerical segment, making it easier to understand that it is an abnormal normal base value. .

Also, if the normal base value is less than 10, "0" is always displayed in the tens place of the numerical value segment, and it is displayed as two digits (for example, "01", etc.). It becomes possible to make an easy-to-understand display by effectively using two 7-segment displays.

Also, when displaying the normal base value of the current gaming section, if the number of outs during normal play in the current gaming section is 0 to 5999, which is not enough to calculate the normal base value. Since the identification information "bL." displayed on the identification segment is displayed blinking, it becomes easy to understand that the currently displayed normal base value is information with low credibility.

In addition, if there is no calculated normal base value, "--", which is not a numerical value, will be displayed in the numerical segment, so the normal base value will not be calculated in the game section corresponding to the identification information displayed in the identification segment. It becomes easier to understand what is not being done.

Note that the game ball counting process, performance information calculation process, and performance display data setting process are not executed as an information program, but one or two of them are executed as a game program (for example, game ball counting The processing may be executed within an input control process that monitors the presence or absence of signal input from various switches), while the rest may be executed as an information program.

Further, the process of outputting display data for displaying performance information on the information display 230 may be executed by a performance program instead of being executed by the output control process which is a game program.

In addition, the out ball detection switch 227 detects the game balls that have entered the normal winning hole 127, the first starting hole 121, the second starting hole 122, the first big winning hole 125, and the second big winning hole 126, and the discharge hole. Instead of detecting out balls made up of game balls that have flowed into the out port 117, the out ball detection switch 227 may detect only game balls that have flowed into the out port. In that case, play the game ball with the out ball detection switch 227, the normal winning opening switch 217, the first starting opening switch 211, the second starting opening switch 212, the first big winning opening switch 215, and the second big winning opening switch 209. It is preferable to add one to the number of outs (total number of outs, number of normal outs) each time it is detected.

(Main processing of the general control unit)
The main processing of the image/sound control section 310 will be explained using FIG. 45. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the image/sound control section 310. This main processing is performed by inputting a system reset to the CPU 311, which is generated by supplying a power supply voltage from a power supply board (not shown).

First, the CPU 311 prohibits all interrupts in step T1, and performs initial setting processing in step T2. Specifically, the CPU initial settings such as internal register settings, access permission to RAM 313, initialization (clearing to 0) of all RAM areas of RAM 313, and CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating timer interrupts. It starts up, etc., and in step T3, all interrupts are permitted.

The CPU 311 performs adjustment mode switching processing in step T4. Specifically, the volume (value) of the effect sound output from the speaker 156 and the light intensity (value) of the backlight of the image display section 114 are determined by referring to an input signal from a changeover switch (not shown) that can be operated by a game store clerk. ), and the adjustment mode related to adjusting the volume and light intensity (whether or not the volume can be adjusted, whether or not the light intensity can be adjusted, the initial value of the volume value (any one from 0 to 5) and the initial value of the light intensity value (from 0 to 5). (either), the volume value adjustment range (0 to 5 or 1 to 5) or the light amount value adjustment range (0 to 5 or 1 to 5)) is performed.

Here, the changeover switch (not shown) is provided on the game control board as the main board, and controls the volume of the effect sound output from the speaker 156, the display device (image display section 114, the sub display device (image display section 114), etc. In addition, the adjustment mode related to the adjustment of the light amount of the display device (which displays images related to the effect) and various lighting devices (frame lamp 157, board lamp 116) is switched.
Note that setting (adjustment) of the volume value and light intensity value using a changeover switch (not shown) can be performed at any time as long as the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a power ON state (after the image/sound control unit 310 is activated). It becomes.

The CPU 311 performs volume adjustment processing in step T5. Specifically, the volume of the effect sound output from the speaker 156 is determined based on the detection signal (left button detection signal, right button detection signal) from the detection switch that detects the operation of the effect key 162 that can be operated by the player. Perform processing to adjust (value).

The CPU 311 performs light amount adjustment processing in step T6. Specifically, the light intensity of the backlight of the image display section 114 ( value).

Note that the setting (adjustment) of the volume value and light intensity value using the production key 162 is regulated (limited) at the start of the variation production and at the end of the variation production (stopping of the decorative pattern 41). . In addition, during the period from when the power of the pachinko game machine 100 is turned on until the game progress control is started (specifically, during the setting change mode, RAM clear preparation mode, setting confirmation mode, various drive sources (until the timer interrupt starts on the game control board during initial operation, etc.), important (high security level) abnormalities that should be notified with priority over tray full errors and payout abnormalities (power-on, power restoration) , unauthorized winnings, abnormal winnings, magnetic errors, radio wave errors, door opening errors) are also regulated (restricted) during notification (output of notification sound).

Furthermore, while the abnormality notification sound is being output, even if the current volume value is lower than the maximum volume value, various performance sounds (BGM) output from the speaker 156 etc.) is lowered than the previous volume, and when the abnormality notification sound output ends, the volume of various performance sounds is returned to the volume before the reduction.

The CPU 311 performs eco mode control processing in step T7. Specifically, processing is performed to control the start and end of an eco mode that reduces power consumption by reducing the amount of light from the backlight of the image display unit 114.

In step T8, the CPU 311 determines whether or not the production instruction command or the notification instruction command transmitted from the production control section 300 has been received. If the production instruction command or the notification instruction command has not been received, the process moves to step T11, and if the production instruction command or the notification instruction command has been received, the process moves to step T9.

The CPU 311 performs animation pattern setting processing in step T9. Specifically, a process of determining an animation pattern from the type of animation group corresponding to the received production instruction command or notification instruction command and setting it in a predetermined area of the RAM 313 is performed.

The CPU 311 performs a sound pattern setting process in step T10. Specifically, a process is performed in which a sound pattern is determined from the type of sound group corresponding to the received production instruction command or notification instruction command and is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 313.

In step T11, the CPU 311 determines whether or not a frame switching flag is set in the RAM 313, indicating that it is a frame update timing for updating the display image of the image display unit 114. If there is a frame switching flag, the process moves to step T12, and if there is no frame switching flag, the process moves to step T4.

Note that the frame switching flag is set every time the image/sound control unit 310 receives a V blank signal that is transmitted from the VDP 314 every 1/30 seconds (the scheduled time when drawing and displaying one frame's worth of effect images is completed). It is set in the V blank interrupt processing executed in . Therefore, the processes of steps T12 to T15 described below are executed every time the V blank interrupt process is executed (frame update timing).

The CPU 311 clears the frame switching flag set in the RAM 313 in step T12, and performs scene update processing in step T13. Specifically, with reference to the scene switching counter, wait frame counter, and frame counter that are updated in the V blank interrupt processing described above, the address of the animation scene is updated based on the animation pattern determined in step T9 above. , performs a process of updating the address of the sound scene based on the sound pattern determined in step T10.

The CPU 311 performs drawing control processing in step T14. Specifically, it consists of a group of drawing control commands based on the display information (sprite identification number, display position, etc.) of one frame of the anime scene at the updated address, according to the priority order (drawing order) of the anime group to which the anime scene belongs. It generates a display list, outputs this display list to the VDP 314, and performs a process of instructing drawing of a display image based on the display list.

As a result, the VDP 314 performs a process of drawing a display image based on the display list on the drawing frame buffer and displaying the image (effect image, abnormality notification image) drawn on the display frame buffer on the image display unit 114. It will be done. In other words, the frame update timing is set to be the start timing and end timing of various effects performed on the image display section 114 (image display and sound output such as a pending display, a variable effect, a jackpot preview effect, a look-ahead effect, etc.). . Note that the effects directly controlled by the effect control unit 300 and the lamp control unit 320 (the effect movements of the movable accessory 115) may or may not coincide with the frame update timing.

The CPU 311 performs voice control processing in step T15. Specifically, a process is performed in which a voice control command is generated from the sound information at the updated address, and this voice control command is output to the image/sound control unit 310.

As a result, the image/sound control unit 310 performs a process of outputting various production sounds and notification sounds from the speaker 156 based on the audio control command. When this process is finished, the process moves to step T4.

In this way, at the start of the fluctuating performance and at the end of the fluctuating performance (stopping of the decorative pattern 41), it is possible to adjust the volume and light intensity using a changeover switch (not shown) that can be operated by a game clerk, but the player cannot Volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment using the operable production key 162 are regulated (restricted). Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to miss important points such as the start of the variable performance and the end of the variable performance, and it is possible to prevent the game from becoming less interesting.

In addition, important (high security level) abnormalities (power on, power restoration, unrecoverable error, unauthorized prize winning, abnormal prize winning, magnetic error, radio wave error, During notification (output of notification sound) of a door open error, it is possible to adjust the volume and light intensity using a changeover switch (not shown) that can be operated by a game clerk, but it is possible to adjust the volume and light intensity using a production key 162 that can be operated by a player. and light intensity adjustment are now regulated (limited). Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience of volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment on the game parlor side, while avoiding the inconvenience that a player who is trying to adjust the volume and light intensity does not notice the occurrence of an abnormality.

Furthermore, while the abnormality notification sound is being output, even if the current volume value is lower than the maximum volume value, various performance sounds (BGM) output from the speaker 156 etc.) is lowered than the previous volume, and when the abnormality notification sound output ends, the volume of various performance sounds is returned to the volume before the reduction. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not noticing abnormality notification sounds due to various performance sounds, and it is possible to ensure the security of the gaming machine.

Note that during abnormality notification (output of notification sound), setting (adjustment) of the volume value and light intensity value using the effect keys 162 that can be operated by the player may be disabled, or the adjustment range of the volume value and light intensity value may be disabled. may be limited to, for example, between 0 and 2.

(Initial processing of accessories in the lamp control section)
Accessory initial processing by the lamp control unit 320 will be explained using FIG. 46. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the accessory initialization process of the lamp control unit 320, and this process is executed within the timer interrupt process executed in the lamp control unit 320 at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds).

In step R101, the CPU 321 determines whether or not a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) has been received from the game control section 200. If the power-on command has been received, the process moves to step R102, and if the power-on command has not been received, the process moves to step R103.

In step R102, the CPU 321 executes origin return processing for the accessory (movable accessory 115, sub image display section (not shown), production button 161) at the initial processing number updated in each processing of the accessory initial processing. Set "1" for

In step R103, the CPU 321 determines whether the initial processing number is "1". If the initial process number is not "1", it is assumed that the origin return process of the accessory is not executed and the process moves to step R105, and if the initial process number is "1", the origin return process is executed in step R104. and complete the initial processing of this accessory. Specifically, based on the input signal from the position detection sensor, the accessory (movable accessory 115, sub-image display section (not shown), production button 161) is returned to its original position, or initial processing is performed. Perform processing such as setting the number to "2". Note that the details of the origin return process will be described later.

In step R105, the CPU 321 determines whether the initial processing number is "2". If the initial processing number is not "2", the initial processing for the accessory is not performed and the current initial processing for the accessory is terminated, and if the initial processing number is "2", the initial action processing is performed. , this time the accessory initial processing ends. Specifically, processing is performed such as performing an initial operation and initial light emission to check whether the accessory works normally or not, and setting the initial processing number to "0". Note that details of the initial operation processing will be described later.

As described above, according to the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. It is designed not to execute the operation process at the same time. Therefore, the movement of returning various accessories to their origin positions and the initial movements and initial light emission of various objects do not coexist, and it becomes possible to separate and check the return movement, initial movement, and initial light emission. .

Further, according to the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 46, the origin return processing is executed before the initial movement processing. Therefore, the various accessory objects will initially move from the origin position, making it easier to understand whether there is an abnormality in the operation of the various accessory objects.

(Lamp control unit return-to-origin processing)
The origin return process of the lamp control section 320 will be explained using FIG. 47. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the origin return process in the lamp control section 320.

In step R105-1, the CPU 321 determines whether the board accessory processing number indicating the transition of the origin return status of the board accessory (movable accessory 115, sub-image display section (not shown)) is "0". judge. If the board accessory processing number is not "0", the process moves to step R105-3, and if the board accessory processing number is "0", the drive target to be returned to the origin is moved in step R105-2. The accessory 115 (movable performance device) is set, and the process moves to step R105-5.

In step R105-3, the CPU 321 determines whether the board accessory processing number is "1". If the board accessory processing number is not "1", the process moves to step R105-12, and if the board accessory processing number is "1", in step R105-4, the drive target to be returned to the origin is The sub display device (not shown) is set, and the process moves to step R105-5.

In step R105-5, the CPU 321 determines whether the accessory to be driven is at the origin position (standby position). Specifically, an input signal from a position detection sensor that detects that each board accessory is at the origin position is determined. If the board accessory to be driven is not at the origin position, the process moves to step R105-6, and if the board accessory to be driven is at the origin position, the process moves to step R105-11.

In step R105-6, the CPU 321 drives the drive motor for moving the board accessory to be driven so that the board accessory to be driven returns to the origin position, and in step R105-7, the CPU 321 drives the drive motor for moving the board accessory to be driven so that the board accessory to be driven returns to the origin position. A board accessory abnormality determination timer for determining the occurrence of a return abnormality that does not return to the home position within a predetermined time is updated by +1.

In step R105-8, the CPU 321 determines whether the updated board accessory abnormality determination timer is at an upper limit value (for example, 5 seconds). If the board accessory abnormality determination timer is at the upper limit value, it is assumed that a return abnormality has occurred in the board accessory object to be driven, and the process is moved to step R105-9; if the board accessory abnormality determination timer is not at the upper limit value, , the process moves to step R105-12.

In step R105-9, the CPU 321 sets in the RAM 323 return abnormality information (movable performance device return abnormality information, sub-display device return abnormality information) indicating that a return abnormality has occurred in the board accessory to be driven, and then returns to step R105. At -10, clear the board accessory abnormality determination timer.

The CPU 321 updates the board accessory processing number by +1 in step R105-11. Specifically, if the board accessory processing number is "0", the board accessory processing number is updated to "1" so that the sub-image display part (not shown) is the driving target, and the board accessory processing number is If the processing number is "1", the board accessory processing number is updated to "2" to complete the process of returning the board accessory (movable accessory 115, sub-image display section (not shown)) to the origin. do.

In step R105-12, the CPU 321 determines whether the frame accessory processing number indicating the transition of the origin return status of the frame accessory (production button 161) is "0". If the frame accessory processing number is "0", the process moves to step R105-13, and if the board accessory processing number is not "0", the process moves to step R105-20.

In step R105-13, the CPU 321 determines whether or not the production button 161 is at the origin position (standby position). Specifically, an input signal from a position detection sensor that detects that the production button 161 is at the origin position is determined. When the effect button 161 is not at the origin position, the process moves to step R105-14, and when the effect button 161 is at the origin position, the process moves to step R105-19.

In step R105-14, the CPU 321 drives the production button drive motor for moving the production button 161 so that the production button 161 returns to the origin position, and in step R105-15, the production button 161 is moved within a predetermined time. The frame accessory abnormality determination timer for determining the occurrence of a return abnormality that does not return to the origin position is updated by +1.

In step R105-16, the CPU 321 determines whether the updated frame accessory abnormality determination timer is at an upper limit value (for example, 5 seconds). If the frame accessory abnormality determination timer is at the upper limit value, it is assumed that a return abnormality has occurred in the production button 161, and the process moves to step R105-17. If the frame accessory abnormality determination timer is not at the upper limit value, the current The return-to-origin process ends.

In step R105-17, the CPU 321 sets return abnormality information indicating that a return abnormality has occurred in the production button 161 in the RAM 323, and in step R105-18, clears the frame accessory abnormality determination timer.

The CPU 321 updates the frame accessory processing number by +1 in step R105-19. Specifically, if the frame accessory processing number is "0", the frame accessory processing number is updated to "1" to end the process of returning the frame accessory (performance button 161) to the origin.

In step R105-20, the CPU 321 determines whether the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number satisfy the end condition. Specifically, it is determined whether the board accessory processing number is "2" and the frame accessory processing number is "1". If the termination condition is satisfied, the process moves to step R105-21, and if the termination condition is not satisfied, the current origin return process is terminated.

In step R105-21, the CPU 321 clears the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number, and in step R105-22, the CPU 321 clears the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number, and in step R105-22, sets the above-mentioned initial processing number to " 2" and completes the current return-to-origin process.

In this way, according to the origin return process shown in FIG. 47, when the power is turned on, the movable accessory 115 and the sub-image display section (not shown) whose production positions (movement areas) overlap are at the origin position (standby position). If they are not in the original position, the controller is configured to return them to the original position in a predetermined order (in the order of movable accessory 115 → sub-image display section (not shown)) without returning both to the original position (standby position) at the same time (at the same time). It has become. Therefore, it becomes possible to easily confirm whether the various board accessories have returned to their original positions. In addition, when the movable accessory 115 and the sub-image display section (not shown) are in contact with each other in a way that makes it difficult to separate them, it is possible to prevent both accessories from applying load to each other, thereby preventing both accessories from being damaged at the same time. This makes it possible to suppress such inconveniences.

Further, according to the origin return process shown in FIG. 47, the return operation of the board accessory (movable accessory 115, sub-image display section (not shown)) to the origin position and the return operation of the frame accessory (direction button 161) It is possible to perform the return operation to the home position at the same time (at the same time). Therefore, the time required for the return operation of various accessories can be shortened, and it is possible to smoothly transition to the initial operation of various accessories to be executed next.

Further, according to the origin return process shown in FIG. 47, an upper limit is set for the time required for each accessory object to return to its origin position. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the return operation of various accessories does not end forever. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation where the various accessories are performing return operations even during the variable performance and the performance operation is not performed, and it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

Further, according to the origin return process shown in FIG. 47, the return operation of the board accessory (movable accessory 115, sub-image display section (not shown)) to the origin position and the return operation of the frame accessory (direction button 161) When both return operations to the origin position are completed, processing for transitioning to initial operation processing is performed. Therefore, the return movement of various accessories to their origin positions and the initial movements of various accessories are not executed at the same time, and it becomes possible to separately check the return movements and initial movements of various accessories. .

Note that the movable accessory 115 and the sub-image display section (not shown) are designed to return to the original position in a predetermined order (movable accessory 115 → sub-image display section (not shown)). At the same time, the operation of returning to the origin position may be started. In this way, the time required for the return operation of the movable accessory 115 and the sub-image display section (not shown) can be shortened, and it is possible to smoothly transition to the initial operation of the various accessories to be executed next. becomes.

(Initial operation processing of lamp control unit)
The initial operation process of the lamp control section 320 will be explained using FIG. 48. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing initial operation processing of the lamp control section 320.

In step R107-1, the CPU 321 determines whether the board accessory processing number indicating the transition of the initial operation status of the board accessory is "0". If the board accessory processing number is "0", the process moves to step R107-2, and if the board accessory processing number is not "0", the process moves to step R107-7.

In step R107-2, the CPU 321 determines whether return abnormality information of the board accessory (movable accessory 115, sub-image display section (not shown)) is set in the RAM 323. If the return abnormality information is not set, the process moves to step R107-4 assuming that the initial operation and initial light emission of the board accessory is performed, and if the return abnormality information is set, the process moves to step R107-3. In step R107-7, the board accessory processing number is set to "2", assuming that the initial movement of the board accessory is not performed.

In step R107-4, the CPU 321 selects the board accessory initial motion pattern determination table (see FIG. 49(a)) for determining the initial motion pattern of the board accessory. Note that details of the board accessory initial movement pattern determination table will be described later.

In step R107-5, the CPU 321 determines the initial movement pattern of the board accessory (movable accessory 115, sub-image display section (not shown)) and sets it in the RAM 323. Specifically, with reference to the table for determining initial movement patterns of board accessories shown in FIG. Determine one initial motion pattern.

The CPU 321 updates the board accessory processing number by +1 in step R107-6. Specifically, if the board accessory processing number is "0", the board accessory processing number is updated to "1" in order to execute the initial operation of the board accessory.

In step R107-7, the CPU 321 determines whether the board accessory processing number is "1". If the board accessory processing number is not "1", the process moves to step R107-11, and if the board accessory processing number is "1", it is set in the RAM 323 in step R107-8. The initial motion of the board accessory is executed according to the initial motion pattern of the board accessory.

In step R107-9, the CPU 321 determines whether all steps of the initial movement of the board accessory have been completed. If all steps of the initial movement of the board accessory have not been completed, the process moves to step R107-11, and if all steps of the initial movement of the board accessory have been completed, in step R107-10, the process moves to step R107-11. Update the processing number by +1. Specifically, if the board accessory processing number is "1", the board accessory processing number is updated to "2" in order to end the initial operation process of the board accessory.

In step R107-11, the CPU 321 determines whether the frame accessory processing number indicating the transition of the initial operation status of the frame accessory (production button 161) is "0". If the frame accessory processing number is "0", the process moves to step R107-12, and if the frame accessory processing number is not "0", the process moves to step R107-17.

In step R107-12, the CPU 321 determines whether return abnormality information for the production button 161 is set in the RAM 323. If the return abnormality information is not set, the process moves to step R107-14 assuming that the initial movement of the frame accessory is performed, and if the return abnormality information is set, in step R107-13, the frame Assuming that the initial movement of the accessory is not performed, the frame accessory processing number is set to "2", and the process moves to step R107-17.

In step R107-14, the CPU 321 selects the frame accessory initial movement pattern determination table (see FIG. 49(b)) for determining the initial movement pattern of the frame accessory. Note that details of the frame accessory initial movement pattern determination table will be described later.

In step R107-15, the CPU 321 determines the initial movement pattern of the frame accessory (performance button 161) and sets it in the RAM 323. Specifically, with reference to the frame accessory initial motion pattern determination table shown in FIG. 49(b), one initial motion pattern is determined from among a plurality of initial motion patterns based on the type of power-on command. .

The CPU 321 updates the frame accessory processing number by +1 in step R107-16. Specifically, if the frame accessory processing number is "0", the frame accessory processing number is updated to "1" in order to execute the initial operation of the frame accessory.

In step R107-17, the CPU 321 determines whether the frame accessory processing number is "1". If the frame accessory processing number is not "1", the process moves to step R107-21, and if the frame accessory processing number is "1", the frame accessory processing number is set in the RAM 323 in step R107-18. The initial motion of the frame accessory is executed according to the initial motion pattern of the frame accessory.

In step R107-19, the CPU 321 determines whether all steps of the initial motion of the frame accessory have been completed. If the initial motion of the frame accessory has not completed all steps, the process moves to step R107-21, and if the initial motion of the frame accessory has completed all steps, in step R107-20, the frame accessory Update the processing number by +1. Specifically, if the frame accessory processing number is "1", the frame accessory processing number is updated to "2" in order to end the initial operation process of the frame accessory.

In step R107-21, the CPU 321 determines whether the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number satisfy the end condition. Specifically, it is determined whether the board accessory processing number is "2" and the frame accessory processing number is "2". If the termination condition is satisfied, the process moves to step R107-22, and if the termination condition is not satisfied, the current initial operation process is terminated.

The CPU 321 clears the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number in step R107-22, clears the above-mentioned initial processing number in step R107-23, and ends the current initial operation processing.

As described above, according to the initial motion processing shown in FIG. 48, the initial motion of the board accessory (movable accessory 115, sub-image display section (not shown)) and the initial motion of the frame accessory (production button 161) is performed. It is possible to execute both at the same time (at the same time). Therefore, the time required for the initial movements of various accessories can be shortened, and it is possible to prevent the production operations of various accessories during the game from being inhibited.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 48, if there is a recovery abnormality in the movable accessory 115 and the sub-image display section (not shown) that constitute the board accessory, the movable accessory 115 and the sub-image display The initial operation of the section (not shown) is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the board accessory from completely failing or being damaged by forcing the board accessory in which the return abnormality has occurred to its initial operation.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 48, if there is a return abnormality in the effect button 161 forming the frame accessory, the initial operation of the effect button 161 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconveniences such as complete malfunction or damage of the performance button 161 by forcing the performance button 161 in which the return abnormality has occurred to be initially operated.

Furthermore, according to the initial motion process shown in FIG. 48, even if the initial motion of the board accessory in which the return abnormality has occurred is not executed, the initial motion of the frame accessory in which the return abnormality has not occurred is executed, and the return abnormality is executed. Even if the initial motion of the frame accessory in which the error has occurred is not executed, the initial motion of the board accessory in which the return abnormality has not occurred is executed. Therefore, it is possible to check whether there is any abnormality in the operation of the accessory object in which the return abnormality has not occurred.

Furthermore, according to the initial motion processing shown in FIG. 48, both the initial motion of the board accessory (movable accessory 115, sub-image display section (not shown)) and the initial motion of the frame accessory (production button 161) are performed. The initial operation process ends when the process ends. Therefore, even though one of the board and frame accessories is performing an initial action, the other may perform a production action, where it is unclear whether it is an initial action or a production action. It disappears.

(Board accessory initial movement pattern determination table)
FIG. 49(a) is a diagram showing a board accessory initial motion pattern determination table for determining the initial motion pattern of the board accessory (movable accessory 115, sub-image display section (not shown)).

The board accessory initial operation pattern determination table associates the type of power-on command, the presence or absence of return error information, and the initial operation pattern to be selected.For reference, the operation mode at the initial operation and the initial operation The number of steps is listed.

Initial operation patterns include patterns 01 to 03 that are determined when a power-on designation command is received, and patterns 01 to 03 that are determined when a first power restoration designation command indicating that the device is waiting for a customer is received. Patterns determined when receiving patterns 04 to 06, the second power recovery designation command indicating that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, or the third power recovery designation command indicating that the jackpot game is in progress. 07 to 09 are set.

"Small lowering of the movable performance device" is an operation in which the movable accessory 115 moves (descends) from the standby position to an intermediate position slightly below the standby position, and "large descent of the movable performance device" The movable accessory 115 moves (descends) from the standby position to a production position below the intermediate position, and the "return to origin of the movable performance device" refers to the action of the movable accessory 115 returning to the standby position. It has become.

"Sub display device movement" is an operation in which the sub image display section (not shown) rises from the standby position to the production position, and "sub display device return to origin" is an operation in which the sub image display section (not shown) The action is to return to the standby position.

"Movable performance device LED" refers to a plurality of LEDs provided on the movable accessory 115, and "sub display device LED" refers to a plurality of LEDs provided around the screen of the sub image display section (not shown). This refers to the LED.

In addition, in initial operation pattern 02, initial operation pattern 05, and initial operation pattern 08, the lighting color of the movable performance device LED is not described, but this point is due to the return abnormality of the first movable member 115a. This is because the light flashes red to indicate an abnormality.

Furthermore, in the initial operation pattern 03, the initial operation pattern 06, and the initial operation pattern 09, the lighting color of the sub-display device LED is not described, but this point is caused by the recovery abnormality of the sub-image display section (not shown). This is because the display device LED flashes red to notify of an abnormality.

The first feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 49(a) is that the board accessory is One point is that the initial operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the object (movable accessory 115, sub-image display section (not shown)) is the same. Therefore, regardless of whether the power is turned on or the power is restored, it is possible to appropriately confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the board accessory.

In addition, the movement mode of the initial movement is the same as long as at least the movement pattern of the board accessory in each process is the same, the movement time in each process may be the same, or the movement time in each process is the same. May be different.

Further, the initial operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of one of the movable accessory 115 and the sub-image display section (not shown) may be made different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored. The operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operation of both the movable accessory 115 and the sub-image display section (not shown) may be made different. In this way, it is possible to easily determine whether the initial operation is due to the power being turned on (the control state of the game has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the control state of the game has been restored). becomes.

In addition, when the initial operation mode (number of processes, operation of each process) of the movable accessory 115 and/or the sub-image display section (not shown) is different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored, An operation that is not included in the initial operation when the power is restored may be executed in the initial operation when the power is restored, or an operation that is not included in the initial operation when the power is restored may be executed in the initial operation when the power is turned on. In this way, it becomes easier to determine whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the control state of the game has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the control state of the game has been restored). .

The second feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 49(a) is that the board accessory (movable accessory 115, One difference is that the light emission mode of initial light emission during the initial operation of the sub-image display section (not shown) is different. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the gaming control state has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the gaming control state has been restored).

The third feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 49(a) is that the initial light emission of the movable production device LED is Although the aspects are the same, there is a difference in the light emission manner of the initial light emission of the sub-display device LED. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the gaming control state has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the gaming control state has been restored).

In addition, while the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the movable presentation device LED is the same when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to return to the customer waiting state, the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the sub display device LED is different. However, on the contrary, the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the movable presentation device LED differs between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the customer waiting state, while the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the sub display device LED is different. The aspects may be the same.

Further, both the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the movable presentation device LED and the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the sub display device LED may be made different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to return to the customer waiting state. . In this way, it is possible to easily understand whether the initial operation is due to the power being turned on (the control state of the game has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to the power being restored (the control state of the game has been restored). becomes.

The fourth feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. One difference is that the light emitting mode of initial light emission during the initial operation of the board accessory (movable accessory 115, sub-image display section (not shown)) is different. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the gaming control state has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the gaming control state has been restored).

The fifth feature of the board accessory initial movement pattern determination table shown in FIG. 49(a) is that when the power is restored to the customer waiting state, when the power is restored to the customer waiting state, when the power is restored when the special symbol is displayed fluctuating, or during the jackpot game. One point is that the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the board accessory (movable accessory 115, sub-image display section (not shown)) is different from when the power is restored. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether the initial operation is due to power restoration to restore to a customer waiting state, or the initial operation is due to power restoration to restore during a special symbol fluctuation display, or during a jackpot game.

In addition, both the movable presentation device LED and the sub-display device LED are designed to turn off during the changing display of special symbols or when the power is restored during a jackpot game, but the movable presentation device LED and the sub-display The device LED may be lit in the same light emitting manner as when the power is restored to restore the customer waiting state.

The sixth feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. If there is no return abnormality in the sub image display section (not shown), the initial operation of the sub image display section (not shown) is performed without performing the initial operation of the movable accessory 115, and the return abnormality is detected in the movable accessory 115. If there is a recovery abnormality in the sub image display section (not shown), the movable accessory 115 performs the initial operation and the sub image display section (not shown) does not perform the initial operation. Can be mentioned. By doing so, it becomes possible to perform a suitable initial operation depending on the presence or absence of a recovery abnormality.

(Frame accessory initial movement pattern determination table)
FIG. 49(b) is a diagram showing a frame accessory initial motion pattern determination table that is referred to when determining the initial motion pattern of the frame accessory (production button 161).

In the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table, the type of power-on command and the initial operation pattern to be selected are associated with each other, and the operation mode at the initial operation and the number of steps for the initial operation are listed for reference. ing.

"Production button large rise" is an operation in which the production button 161 rises from the standby position (initial position) to the production position (upper position), and "production button return to origin" is an operation in which the production button 161 is raised to the standby position. The operation is to return to .

The first feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 49(b) is that the frame accessory The difference is in the operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the initial operation of the object (production button 161). Therefore, it is possible to easily understand whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the control state of the game has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the control state of the game has been restored).

The second feature of the frame accessory initial movement pattern determination table shown in FIG. One point is that it is designed to perform actions. Therefore, it is possible to more easily understand whether the initial operation is due to the power being turned on (the control state of the game has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the control state of the game has been restored). .

Note that the initial operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the production button 161 may be the same when the power is turned on and when the power is restored. In this way, it becomes possible to appropriately confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the frame accessory, regardless of whether the power is turned on or the power is restored.

The third feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 49(b) is that the frame accessory (production button 161) One difference is that the light emission mode of initial light emission during initial operation is different. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the gaming control state has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the gaming control state has been restored).

The fourth feature of the frame accessory initial movement pattern determination table shown in FIG. The difference is that the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the frame accessory (effect button 161) is different. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the gaming control state has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the gaming control state has been restored).

In addition, the performance button LED is designed to turn off when the power is restored while the special symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner or during a jackpot game, but this is the same as when the power is restored to restore the performance button LED to the customer waiting state. It may be made to light up in a light emitting manner.

The fifth feature of the frame accessory initial movement pattern determination table shown in FIG. One point is that the number of emitted light colors is different between the two. Therefore, it is possible to more easily understand whether the initial operation is due to the power being turned on (the control state of the game has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the control state of the game has been restored). .

Note that the number of colors emitted in the initial light emission of the effect button 161 when the power is turned on is greater than the number of emitted light colors in the initial light emission of the effect button 161 when the power is restored, but this may be reversed.

As a sixth feature of the frame accessory initial movement pattern determination table shown in FIG. One point is that it includes luminescent colors that are not found in the luminescent colors in . Therefore, it is possible to more easily understand whether the initial operation is due to the power being turned on (the control state of the game has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the control state of the game has been restored). .

Note that the light emitting color in the initial light emission of the effect button 161 when the power is restored may include a light emitting color that is not included in the light emitting color in the initial light emission of the effect button 161 when the power is turned on.

The seventh feature of the frame accessory initial movement pattern determination table shown in FIG. This period differs from the period during which the performance button 161 vibrates during the operation performance that is executed by operating the performance button 161. Therefore, it is possible to understand that the vibration is caused by the initial operation of the effect button 161.

The eighth feature of the frame accessory initial movement pattern determination table shown in FIG. An example of this is that it is executed over the initial operation of the effect button 161 in which detection is performed. Therefore, the operation of the production button 161 and the button vibration motor can be checked at the same time, and the time required for operation confirmation can be shortened.

(Specific example of initial operation of various drive sources while changing settings)
A specific example of the case where various drive sources are initially operated during setting change will be described with reference to FIG. 50. FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an example of effect when various drive sources are initially operated during setting changes.

First, at timing T0, the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off. At this time, game results such as changing whether or not the game ball enters a predetermined area (second starting hole 122, first big winning hole 125, second big winning hole 126) (difficulty level of ball entering) Various drive sources (electric tulip opening/closing section 213, first grand prize opening door opening/closing section 216) for operating movable bodies (electric tulip 123, first grand prize opening door 125D, second grand prize opening 126D) that affect , the second big prize opening door opening/closing part 210) is in a stopped state.

In addition, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning hole (first big winning hole 125, second big winning hole 126) to emit light in a predetermined manner is off, and the display device 130 (first special winning hole 126) is turned off. Symbol display 221, second special symbol display 222, normal symbol display 223, first special symbol pending display 218, second special symbol pending display 219, normal symbol pending display 220, round number display 225, The status display 224, status confirmation display 226), image display section 114, and information display 230 are in a non-display state (non-operating, off, erased).

At timing T1, when a setting change operation (setting key switch 229 is turned on, RAM clear switch 228 is turned on) is performed when the power of the pachinko game machine 100 is turned on, a setting change mode is started in the game control unit 200. The state becomes a pre-start state before game progress control is started.

At this time, a status confirmation display indicating that the settings are being changed is displayed on the status confirmation display 226, and the various drive sources start operating (drive source=ON) as an initial operation. In addition, settings change notifications are provided to notify you that settings are being changed and to prompt you to check the operation of various drive sources (settings change screen display, settings change sound "Settings are being changed" and initial operation confirmation sound "Solenoid operation is also confirmed.") "Please confirm" is output alternately). Further, the current setting value (here, "6") is displayed on the rightmost 7-segment display 230d of the information display 230.

At the timing of T2, when the operating time of the various drive sources (0.512 seconds in this case) has elapsed, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF), and from then on, the various drives continue from the timing of T3 to the timing of T10. The source repeatedly turns on and off.

At timing T10, if the setting value confirmation operation (setting key switch 229 is OFF) is performed before the operating time of the various drive sources that started from timing T9 has elapsed, the setting change mode and setting change notification are activated. At the same time, the operation of the various drive sources immediately stops (drive source = OFF), the initial operation of the various drive sources ends, and the setting value is also displayed on the 7-segment display 230d at the right end of the information display 230. finish. Then, the game control unit 200 shifts from the pre-start state to a game ready state in which the progress of the game is controlled.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbols, displays of normal symbols, display of the number of special symbols reserved, display of the number of ordinary symbols reserved, etc.) on the display 130 are started, and the above-mentioned power-on notification is started. Ru. In addition, the return operation and initial operation of various accessories (movable accessories 115 (115a, 115b), sub-image display section (not shown), production button 161) controlled by the production control unit 300 are started, and information In the display 230, all seven segment displays 230a to 230d are fully lit and lighting confirmation is started. Note that the initial operations of the various accessories end after the lighting of the information display 230 is confirmed.

At timing T11, when a confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 230, all of the 7-segment displays 230a to 230d have finished lighting, and the performance information (here, the current The display of the normal base value of the game section starts. Thereafter, each time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and three past game sections will be displayed in order.

(Specific example of initial operation of various drive sources while preparing to clear RAM)
A specific example of the case where various drive sources are initially operated during RAM clear preparation will be described using FIG. 51. FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an example effect when various drive sources are initially operated during preparation for RAM clearing.

First, at timing T0, the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off. At this time, game results such as changing whether or not the game ball enters a predetermined area (second starting hole 122, first big winning hole 125, second big winning hole 126) (difficulty level of ball entering) Various drive sources (electric tulip opening/closing section 213, first grand prize opening door opening/closing section 216, the second big prize opening door opening/closing part 210) is in a stopped state.

In addition, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning hole (first big winning hole 125, second big winning hole 126) to emit light in a predetermined manner is off, and the display device 130 (first special winning hole 126) is turned off. Symbol display 221, second special symbol display 222, normal symbol display 223, first special symbol pending display 218, second special symbol pending display 219, normal symbol pending display 220, round number display 225, The status display 224, status confirmation display 226), image display section 114, and information display 230 are in a non-display state (non-operating, off, erased).

At timing T1, when the power of the pachinko game machine 100 is turned on and a RAM clear operation is performed (RAM clear switch 228 is turned on), the game control unit 200 starts the RAM clear preparation mode and controls the progress of the game. It is in the pre-start state before it is started.

At this time, a status confirmation display indicating that RAM clear preparation is in progress is displayed on the status confirmation display 226, and the various drive sources start operating (drive source=ON) as an initial operation. In addition, a RAM clear preparation notification (display of the clear preparation screen, a notification voice saying ``Please press RAM clear again'' and a message ``Check the operation of the solenoid. Alternate output of the initial operation confirmation voice "Please do so" will begin.

At timing T2, when the operation time (here 0.512 seconds) has elapsed from the start of operation of the various drive sources, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF), and from then on, the timing from T3 to T10 The activation and deactivation of various drive sources are repeated until

At timing T10, if the RAM clear approval operation (RAM clear switch 228 is ON) is performed before the operating time of the various drive sources that started from timing T9 has elapsed, the RAM clear preparation mode and RAM clear preparation are performed. When the notification ends, the operation of the various drive sources immediately stops (drive source = OFF), the initial operation of the various drive sources ends, and the game control section 200 controls the progress of the game from the pre-start state. Transition to possible state.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbols, displays of normal symbols, display of the number of special symbols reserved, display of the number of ordinary symbols reserved, etc.) on the display 130 are started, and the above-mentioned power-on notification is started. Ru. In addition, the return operation and initial operation of various accessories (movable accessories 115 (115a, 115b), sub-image display section (not shown), production button 161) controlled by the production control unit 300 are started, and information In the display 230, all seven segment displays 230a to 230d are fully lit and lighting confirmation is started. Note that the initial operation of the movable accessory 115 ends after the lighting confirmation of the information display 230 is completed.

At timing T11, when a confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 230, all of the 7-segment displays 230a to 230d have finished lighting, and the performance information (here, the current The display of the normal base value of the game section starts. Thereafter, each time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and three past game sections will be displayed in order.

(Specific example of initial operation of various drive sources while checking settings)
A specific example in which various drive sources are initially operated during setting confirmation will be described with reference to FIG. 52. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an example of effect when various drive sources are initially operated during setting confirmation.

First, at timing T0, the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off. At this time, game results such as changing whether or not the game ball enters a predetermined area (second starting hole 122, first big winning hole 125, second big winning hole 126) (difficulty level of ball entering) Various drive sources (electric tulip opening/closing section 213, first grand prize opening door opening/closing section 216, the second big prize opening door opening/closing part 210) is in a stopped state.

In addition, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning hole (first big winning hole 125, second big winning hole 126) to emit light in a predetermined manner is off, and the display device 130 (first special winning hole 126) is turned off. Symbol display 221, second special symbol display 222, normal symbol display 223, first special symbol pending display 218, second special symbol pending display 219, normal symbol pending display 220, round number display 225, The status display 224, status confirmation display 226), image display section 114, and information display 230 are in a non-display state (non-operating, off, erased).

At timing T1, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on and a setting confirmation operation is performed (the setting key switch 229 is turned on), the game control section 200 starts the setting confirmation mode and starts controlling the progress of the game. It will be in the pre-start state before it is started.

At this time, a status confirmation display indicating that the settings are being confirmed is displayed on the status confirmation display 226, and the various drive sources start operating (drive source=ON) as an initial operation. In addition, setting confirmation notifications are displayed to indicate that the settings are being checked and to encourage operation confirmation of various drive sources (setting confirmation screen display, setting confirmation voice ``Settings are being checked'' and initial operation confirmation voice ``Solenoid operation is also confirmed.'') "Please confirm" is output alternately). Further, the current setting value (here, "6") is displayed on the rightmost 7-segment display 230d of the information display 230.

At timing T2, when the operation time (here 0.512 seconds) has elapsed from the start of operation of the various drive sources, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF), and from then on, the timing from T3 to T10 The activation and deactivation of various drive sources are repeated until

At timing T10, if the confirmation end operation (setting key switch 229 is turned OFF) is performed before the operating time of the various drive sources that started from timing T9 has elapsed, the setting confirmation mode and setting confirmation notification will end. At the same time, the operation of the various drive sources immediately stops (drive source = OFF), the initial operation of the various drive sources ends, and the display of the set value on the 7-segment display 230d at the right end of the information display 230 also ends. do. Then, the game control unit 200 shifts from the pre-start state to a game ready state in which the progress of the game is controlled.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbols, displays of normal symbols, display of the number of special symbols reserved, display of the number of ordinary symbols reserved, etc.) on the display 130 are started, and the above-mentioned power recovery notification is started. Ru. In addition, the return operation and initial operation of various accessories (movable accessory 115, sub image display section (not shown), production button 161) controlled by the production control unit 300 are started, and all All of the 7-segment displays 230a to 230d are lit, and lighting confirmation is started. Note that the initial operation of the movable accessory 115 ends after the lighting confirmation of the information display 230 is completed.

At timing T11, when a confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 230, all of the 7-segment displays 230a to 230d have finished lighting, and the performance information (here, the current The display of the normal base value of the game section starts. Thereafter, each time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and three past game sections will be displayed in order.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, the movable bodies (the electric tulip 123, the first big prize opening door 125D, the second Various drive sources (electric tulip opening/closing part 213, first big winning opening door opening/closing part 216, second big winning opening door opening/closing part 210) for operating the big winning opening door 126D) are initially activated. Therefore, when the pachinko game machine 100 is shipped from the factory or replaced at a game parlor, it is possible to easily check the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the result of the game are initially operated (during the pre-start state), the display other than the status confirmation display 226 is displayed. Device 130 (first special symbol display 221, second special symbol display 222, normal symbol display 223, first special symbol pending display 218, second special symbol pending display 219, normal symbol pending display 220, Since the round number display 225 and the status display 224 are in a non-display (non-operating) state, it is possible to avoid placing unnecessary processing burden on the game control section 200, and also to check the operation of various drive sources. It becomes possible to concentrate on

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the result of the game are initially operated, the user is prompted to confirm that the settings are being changed and to confirm the operation of the various drive sources. Setting change notification (RAM clear preparation notification to indicate that RAM clearing is in progress and prompting to check the operation of various drive sources, setting confirmation notification to indicate that settings are being confirmed and to urge confirmation of operation of various drive sources) As a result, it is possible to notify the operator (worker, game store clerk) who is checking the operation of the pachinko game machine 100 that it is time to check the operation of various drive sources, and to check the operation appropriately. It becomes possible to perform the following.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the setting change mode (RAM clear preparation mode, setting confirmation mode), various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the result of the game are initially activated. There is no need to create a plurality of states in the pre-start state before game progress control is started, and it is possible to reduce the development cost (shorten the development period, etc.) of the pachinko game machine 100.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the pre-start state ends due to a setting value confirmation operation (RAM clear approval operation, confirmation end operation), the pre-start state is terminated immediately even before the operating time of each drive source has elapsed. Since the operation of the various drive sources is terminated, the initial operation of the various drive sources will not be performed in a state where the game is ready, and the operation of the various drive sources will not be confused with the operation of the various drive sources as the game progresses. This makes it possible to avoid inconveniences.

Further, according to the present embodiment, initial operations of various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the result of the game are performed in the pre-start state before the game progress control is performed, and the game progress control is performed. Since the initial motion of the movable accessory 115 that does not affect the result of the game is performed in the state where the game is possible, two types of initial motions can be confirmed in order, and the operation can be confirmed appropriately. becomes possible.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the various drive sources for operating the first big winning opening door 125D and the second big winning opening door 126D are initially operated, the big winning opening LED remains off. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it becomes difficult to check the operation of the first big winning opening door 125D and the second big winning opening door 126D due to the light from the big winning opening LED, and it is possible to properly check the operation. It becomes possible.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the various drive sources for operating the first big winning opening door 125D and the second big winning opening door 126D are initially operated, the first big winning opening 125 and the second big winning opening door 126D Since the opening signal is not output even though the big prize opening 126 is open, an unnecessary processing load can be avoided on the game control unit 200, and the pachinko gaming machine 100 can This makes it possible to avoid inconveniences such as an information collecting device such as a hall computer that collects information output from a hall computer collecting information that does not correspond to the progress of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is not displayed on the information display 230 until the gaming progress control is started after the gaming machine is powered on (the performance information is not displayed). Therefore, it is possible to avoid imposing unnecessary processing burden on the game control section 200.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is displayed after the game progress control is started (display of performance information is permitted), so that the game It is possible to confirm whether or not progress control has been started, and it is also possible to notify that the performance information is related to the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, performance information is not displayed on the 7-segment displays 230a to 230c other than the 7-segment display 230d on which the current setting value is displayed during the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode. By doing so, the current set value can be appropriately notified, and convenience for the game parlor side can be ensured.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the setting change notification, RAM clear preparation notification, and setting confirmation notification, "Drive source initial operation in progress" or "Please check solenoid operation" prompts visual confirmation of the initial operation of various drive sources. Although characters such as , etc. were not displayed, such characters may be displayed.

Further, in this embodiment, after the game progress control is started, all the 7-segment displays 230a to 230d of the information display 230 are turned on to confirm the lighting. The lighting confirmation may not be performed after the RAM clear preparation mode or the setting confirmation mode.

(Modified example of initial operation of various drive sources)
Hereinafter, modified examples of the initial operation of various drive sources will be specifically described with reference to the drawings. Note that this modification differs from the above embodiment in that the drive source processing operation process is performed after the setting change mode, RAM clear preparation mode, and setting confirmation mode are completed.

(Specific example of initial operation of various drive sources after setting changes)
With reference to FIG. 53, a specific example in which various drive sources are initially operated after the setting change in the modified example will be described. FIG. 53 is a diagram illustrating a timing chart and an example of effect when various drive sources are initially operated after changing settings in a modified example.

First, at timing T0, the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off. At this time, game results such as changing whether or not the game ball enters a predetermined area (second starting hole 122, first big winning hole 125, second big winning hole 126) (difficulty level of ball entering) Various drive sources (electric tulip opening/closing section 213, first grand prize opening door opening/closing section 216, the second big prize opening door opening/closing part 210) is in a stopped state.

In addition, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning hole (first big winning hole 125, second big winning hole 126) to emit light in a predetermined manner is off, and the display device 130 (first special winning hole 126) is turned off. Symbol display 221, second special symbol display 222, normal symbol display 223, first special symbol pending display 218, second special symbol pending display 219, normal symbol pending display 220, round number display 225, The status display 224, status confirmation display 226), image display section 114, and information display 230 are in a non-display state (non-operating, off, erased).

At timing T1, when a setting change operation (setting key switch 229 is turned on, RAM clear switch 228 is turned on) is performed when the power of the pachinko game machine 100 is turned on, a setting change mode is started in the game control unit 200. The state becomes a pre-start state before game progress control is started. At this time, a status confirmation display indicating that the settings are being changed is displayed on the status confirmation display 226, and the above-mentioned setting change notification is started. Further, the current setting value (here, "6") is displayed on the rightmost 7-segment display 230d of the information display 230.

At timing T2, when the setting value confirmation operation (setting key switch 229 is turned OFF) is performed, the setting change mode and setting change notification are completed, the initial operation of various drive sources is started, and the right end of the information display 230 is The setting values displayed on the 7-segment display 230d are erased and no longer displayed. At this time, the status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 226 ends, and an initial operation notification (initial operation screen display, initial operation confirmation voice "Check the operation of the solenoid" "Please" output) is started.

At the timing T3, when the operation standby time (7 seconds in this case) has elapsed after the initial operation notification was started, the first operation of the various drive sources (drive source = ON) is started, and at the timing T4, the various drive sources When the operating time of the drive sources (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed, the various drive sources stop operating (drive sources = OFF).

At the timing T5, when the stop time (0.512 seconds in this case) has elapsed after the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the second operation of the various drive sources starts, and at the timing T6, the operation of the various drive sources starts. When the operating time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed, the various drive sources stop operating (drive source=OFF).

At timing T7, when the stop time (in this case, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed after the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the third operation of the various drive sources starts, and at the timing T8, the operation of the various drive sources starts. When the operating time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed, the various drive sources stop operating (drive source=OFF).

At timing T9, when the stop time (in this case, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed after the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the initial operation and initial operation notification of the various drive sources are completed, and the game control unit 200 The state shifts to a playable state in which the progress of the game is controlled.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbols, displays of normal symbols, display of the number of special symbols reserved, display of the number of ordinary symbols reserved, etc.) on the display 130 are started, and the above-mentioned power-on notification is started. Ru. In addition, the return operation and initial operation of various accessories (movable accessory 115, sub image display section (not shown), production button 161) controlled by the production control unit 300 are started, and all All of the 7-segment displays 230a to 230d are lit, and lighting confirmation is started. Note that the initial operations of the various accessories end after the lighting of the information display 230 is confirmed.

At timing T10, when a confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 230, all of the 7-segment displays 230a to 230d have finished lighting, and the performance information (here, the current The display of the normal base value of the game section starts. Thereafter, each time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and three past game sections will be displayed in order.

(Specific example of initial operation of various drive sources after clearing RAM)
A specific example of the case where various drive sources are initially operated after clearing the RAM in the modified example will be described using FIG. 54. FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an example effect when various drive sources are initially operated after RAM is cleared in a modified example.

First, at timing T0, the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off. At this time, game results such as changing whether or not the game ball enters a predetermined area (second starting hole 122, first big winning hole 125, second big winning hole 126) (difficulty level of ball entering) Various drive sources (electric tulip opening/closing section 213, first grand prize opening door opening/closing section 216, the second big prize opening door opening/closing part 210) is in a stopped state.

In addition, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning hole (first big winning hole 125, second big winning hole 126) to emit light in a predetermined manner is off, and the display device 130 (first special winning hole 126) is turned off. Symbol display 221, second special symbol display 222, normal symbol display 223, first special symbol pending display 218, second special symbol pending display 219, normal symbol pending display 220, round number display 225, The status display 224), the image display section 114, and the information display 230 are in a non-display state (inactive, off, erased).

At timing T1, when the power of the pachinko game machine 100 is turned on and a RAM clear operation is performed (RAM clear switch 228 is turned on), the game control unit 200 starts the RAM clear preparation mode and controls the progress of the game. It is in the pre-start state before it is started. At this time, the RAM clear preparation notification described above is started.

When the RAM clear approval operation (RAM clear switch 228 is turned on) is performed at timing T2, the RAM clear preparation mode ends and the initial operations of various drive sources are started. At this time, initial operation notification (display of initial operation screen, output of initial operation confirmation voice "Please check the operation of the solenoid") is started to prompt operation confirmation of various drive sources.

At the timing T3, when the operation standby time (7 seconds in this case) has elapsed after the initial operation notification was started, the first operation of the various drive sources (drive source = ON) is started, and at the timing T4, the various drive sources When the operating time of the drive sources (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed, the various drive sources stop operating (drive sources = OFF).

At the timing T5, when the stop time (0.512 seconds in this case) has elapsed after the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the second operation of the various drive sources starts, and at the timing T6, the operation of the various drive sources starts. When the operating time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed, the various drive sources stop operating (drive source=OFF).

At timing T7, when the stop time (in this case, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed after the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the third operation of the various drive sources starts, and at the timing T8, the operation of the various drive sources starts. When the operating time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed, the various drive sources stop operating (drive source=OFF).

At timing T9, when the stop time (in this case, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed after the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the initial operation and initial operation notification of the various drive sources are completed, and the game control unit 200 The state shifts to a playable state in which the progress of the game is controlled.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbols, displays of normal symbols, display of the number of special symbols reserved, display of the number of ordinary symbols reserved, etc.) on the display 130 are started, and the above-mentioned power-on notification is started. Ru. In addition, the return operation and initial operation of various accessories (movable accessory 115, sub image display section (not shown), production button 161) controlled by the production control unit 300 are started, and all All of the 7-segment displays 230a to 230d are lit, and lighting confirmation is started. Note that the initial operations of the various accessories end after the lighting of the information display 230 is confirmed.

At timing T10, when a confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 230, all of the 7-segment displays 230a to 230d have finished lighting, and the performance information (here, the current The display of the normal base value of the game section starts. Thereafter, each time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and three past game sections will be displayed in order.

(Specific example of initial operation of various drive sources after checking settings)
With reference to FIG. 55, a specific example will be described in which various drive sources are initially operated after setting confirmation in the modified example. FIG. 55 is a diagram illustrating a timing chart and an example of effect when various drive sources are initially operated after setting confirmation in a modified example.

First, at timing T0, the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off. At this time, game results such as changing whether or not the game ball enters a predetermined area (second starting hole 122, first big winning hole 125, second big winning hole 126) (difficulty level of ball entering) Various drive sources (electric tulip opening/closing section 213, first grand prize opening door opening/closing section 216, the second big prize opening door opening/closing part 210) is in a stopped state.

In addition, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning hole (first big winning hole 125, second big winning hole 126) to emit light in a predetermined manner is off, and the display device 130 (first special winning hole 126) is turned off. Symbol display 221, second special symbol display 222, normal symbol display 223, first special symbol pending display 218, second special symbol pending display 219, normal symbol pending display 220, round number display 225, The status display 224, status confirmation display 226), image display section 114, and information display 230 are in a non-display state (non-operating, off, erased).

At timing T1, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on and a setting confirmation operation is performed (the setting key switch 229 is turned on), the game control section 200 starts the setting confirmation mode and starts controlling the progress of the game. It will be in the pre-start state before it is started. At this time, a status confirmation display indicating that the settings are being confirmed is displayed on the status confirmation display 226, and the above-mentioned setting confirmation notification is started. Further, the current setting value (here, "6") is displayed on the rightmost 7-segment display 230d of the information display 230.

At timing T2, when the confirmation end operation (setting key switch 229 is turned OFF) is performed, the setting confirmation mode and setting confirmation notification are finished, initial operations of various drive sources are started, and 7 at the right end of the information display 230 is The setting value displayed on the segment display 230d is erased and becomes hidden. At this time, the status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 226 ends, and an initial operation notification (initial operation screen display, initial operation confirmation voice "Check the operation of the solenoid" "Please" output) is started.

At the timing T3, when the operation standby time (7 seconds in this case) has elapsed after the initial operation notification was started, the first operation of the various drive sources (drive source = ON) is started, and at the timing T4, the various drive sources When the operating time of the drive sources (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed, the various drive sources stop operating (drive sources = OFF).

At the timing T5, when the stop time (0.512 seconds in this case) has elapsed after the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the second operation of the various drive sources starts, and at the timing T6, the operation of the various drive sources starts. When the operating time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed, the various drive sources stop operating (drive source=OFF).

At timing T7, when the stop time (in this case, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed after the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the third operation of the various drive sources starts, and at the timing T8, the operation of the various drive sources starts. When the operating time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed, the various drive sources stop operating (drive source=OFF).

At timing T9, when the stop time (in this case, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed after the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the initial operation and initial operation notification of the various drive sources are completed, and the game control unit 200 The state shifts to a playable state in which the progress of the game is controlled.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbols, displays of normal symbols, display of the number of special symbols reserved, display of the number of ordinary symbols reserved, etc.) on the display 130 are started, and the above-mentioned power-on notification is started. Ru. In addition, the return operation and initial operation of various accessories (movable accessory 115, sub image display section (not shown), production button 161) controlled by the production control unit 300 are started, and all All of the 7-segment displays 230a to 230d are lit, and lighting confirmation is started. Note that the initial operations of the various accessories end after the lighting of the information display 230 is confirmed.

At timing T10, when a confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 230, all of the 7-segment displays 230a to 230d have finished lighting, and the performance information (here, the current The display of the normal base value of the game section starts. Thereafter, each time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and three past game sections will be displayed in order.

As described above, according to the present modification, in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, the movable bodies (the electric tulip 123, the first big prize opening door 125D, the second Various drive sources (electric tulip opening/closing part 213, first big winning opening door opening/closing part 216, second big winning opening door opening/closing part 210) for operating the big winning opening door 126D) are initially activated. Therefore, when the pachinko game machine 100 is shipped from the factory or replaced at a game parlor, it is possible to easily check the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game.

Further, according to this modification, when various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the result of the game are initially operated (during the pre-start state), the display other than the status confirmation display 226 Device 130 (first special symbol display 221, second special symbol display 222, normal symbol display 223, first special symbol pending display 218, second special symbol pending display 219, normal symbol pending display 220, Since the round number display 225 and the status display 224 are in a non-display (non-operating) state, it is possible to avoid placing unnecessary processing burden on the game control section 200, and also to check the operation of various drive sources. It becomes possible to concentrate on

Furthermore, according to this modification, when the various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the result of the game are being initially operated, initial operation notification is performed to prompt the confirmation of the operation of the various drive sources. Therefore, it is possible to notify the operator (worker, game store clerk) who is checking the operation of the pachinko game machine 100 that it is time to check the operation of the various drive sources, so that the operation check can be carried out appropriately. It becomes possible to

Furthermore, according to this modification, even in the pre-start state before the start of game progress control, the result of the game is not affected after the setting change mode (RAM clear preparation mode, setting confirmation mode) ends. Since the various drive sources used to operate the movable body to be supplied are initially operated, there is no need to do complicated things such as checking the operation of various drive sources while changing settings (RAM clearing, setting confirmation). This makes it possible to perform proper operation checks.

Further, according to this modification, after the operation standby time has elapsed after the setting change mode (RAM clear preparation mode, setting confirmation mode) ends, various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the result of the game are activated. Since the operation is started, it is possible to have enough time between the end of setting changes (setting confirmation) and the operation confirmation of various drive sources, and it is possible to properly confirm the operation. becomes possible.

Also, according to this modification, the initial operation of various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the result of the game is performed after the setting change mode ends or after the RAM clear preparation mode ends. Since the same initial operation notification is performed regardless of whether the setting confirmation mode ends, the initial operation notification can be controlled easily and the development cost of the pachinko game machine 100 can be reduced. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of time required (shorten the development period, etc.).

Moreover, according to this modification, when the various drive sources for operating the first big winning opening door 125D and the second big winning opening door 126D are initially operated, the big winning opening LED remains off. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it becomes difficult to check the operation of the first big winning opening door 125D and the second big winning opening door 126D due to the light from the big winning opening LED, and it is possible to properly check the operation. It becomes possible.

Further, according to this modification, initial operations of various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the result of the game are performed in the pre-start state before the game progress control is performed, and the game progress control is performed. Since the initial motion of the movable accessory 115 that does not affect the result of the game is performed in the state where the game is possible, two types of initial motions can be confirmed in order, and the operation can be confirmed appropriately. becomes possible.

Moreover, according to this modification, when the various drive sources for operating the first big winning opening door 125D and the second big winning opening door 126D are initially operated, the first big winning opening 125 and the second big winning opening door 126D are activated. Since the opening signal is not output even though the big prize opening 126 is open, an unnecessary processing load can be avoided on the game control unit 200, and the pachinko gaming machine 100 can This makes it possible to avoid inconveniences such as an information collecting device such as a hall computer that collects information output from a hall computer collecting information that does not correspond to the progress of the game.

Furthermore, according to this modification, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is not displayed on the information display 230 until the gaming progress control is started after the gaming machine is powered on (the performance information is not displayed). Therefore, it is possible to avoid imposing unnecessary processing burden on the game control section 200.

In addition, according to this modification, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is displayed after the game progress control is started (display of performance information is allowed), so the game It is possible to confirm whether or not progress control has been started, and it is also possible to notify that the performance information is related to the game.

Further, according to this modification, during the setting change mode, RAM clear preparation mode, or setting confirmation mode, the 7-segment displays 230a to 230c other than the 7-segment display 230d on which the current setting value is displayed are displayed. By not displaying performance information, the current setting value can be appropriately notified, and convenience for the game parlor can be ensured.

Further, according to this modification, the setting values and performance information of the gaming machine are not displayed on the information display 230 during the initial operation of the various drive sources, so that it is difficult to check the initial operation of the various drive sources. This allows the employees of the game parlor to concentrate on this, making it possible to accurately determine failures of various drive sources.

[Pre-judgment performance pattern table]
FIGS. 56 to 58 are diagrams showing setting examples of the pre-judgment effect pattern and table used in the pre-judgment effect pattern selection (S3803) in the pre-judgment effect selection process of FIG. 38(a). Note that FIG. 56 shows a preliminary determination performance pattern table used when a game ball enters the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state. Further, FIG. 57 shows a preliminary determination performance pattern table used when a game ball enters the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving game state. Further, FIG. 58 shows a preliminary determination performance pattern table used when a game ball enters the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state.

A plurality of advance determination performance patterns are set in the advance determination performance pattern table shown in FIG. 56, which is used when a game ball enters the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state. For the advance determination patterns "JA1" to "JA6", "JB1" to "JB6", "JR1" to "JR3", and "JR6" to "JR13" set using the above Figure 33, The judgment effect patterns "AA1" to "AA6", "AB1" to "AB6", "AR1" to "AR3", and "AR6" to "AR13" are associated on a one-to-one basis. Further, the advance determination pattern "JR4" is associated with the advance determination effect patterns "AR4-1" and "AR4-2". Further, the advance determination pattern "JR5" is associated with the advance determination performance patterns "AR5-1" and "AR5-2".

When "JR4" is set as the pre-judgment pattern, the production control unit 300 determines the pre-judgment production pattern based on the number of times X of variable productions executed after the predetermined condition is met (RAM clearing, resetting the number of variations). Determine. More specifically, when the number of times X of variable effects is not within a specific range, the effect control unit 300 determines the pre-determined effect pattern to be "JR4-1". In this embodiment, the specific range is 297 times or more and 300 times or less. That is, the specific range is the range from the variable performance where the number of remaining variable performances until reaching the specific time-saving gaming state becomes a specific number to the variable performance that reaches the specific time-saving gaming state. However, the specific number of times may be any value. Furthermore, if the number of times X of variable effects executed after the establishment of a predetermined condition (RAM clearing, resetting the number of changes) is within a specific range, the effect control unit 300 sets the pre-determined effect pattern to "JR4-2". decided on. Note that even when "JR5" is set as the advance determination pattern, the advance determination effect pattern is determined by the same method.

Further, a plurality of advance determination performance patterns are set in the advance determination performance pattern table shown in FIG. 57, which is used when a game ball enters the second starting port 122 in the special time saving game state. For the advance determination patterns "JF1", "JF2", "JG1" to "JG3", and "JH1" to "JH8" set using FIG. 34 above, the advance determination effect patterns "AF1", ""AF2","AG1" to "AG3", and "AH1" to "AH8" are associated on a one-to-one basis.
Further, a plurality of advance determination performance patterns are set in the preliminary determination performance pattern table shown in FIG. 58, which is used when a game ball enters the second starting port 122 in the specific time saving gaming state. For the advance determination patterns "JK1", "JK2", "JL1" to "JL3", and "JM1" to "JM3" set using FIG. 35 above, the advance determination effect patterns "AK1", ""AK2","AL1" to "AL3", and "AM1" to "AM3" are associated on a one-to-one basis.

Here, the pre-judgment performance is a performance performed based on the pre-judgment process.
In addition, in the pre-judgment production pattern shown in the figure, "Hold image", "Display color", "Chance eye", "Zone", "Effect", "Sound", "Accessory object", and "Light emission" are set. ing. Note that "-" in each column of the illustrated table indicates that the corresponding effect is not executed.

Here, the "pending image" is an image indicating that the right to judge a jackpot is being held. The retained image will be explained in detail later.
“Display color” indicates the display color of the reserved image. In this embodiment, by changing the display color of the pending image, etc., the player is informed or suggested of the degree of expectation of winning a jackpot. In this embodiment, one of "blue,""green,""red," and "rainbow color" is selected as the display color. For example, the display colors of the pending images may be set in the order of white, blue, green, red, and rainbow colors, so that the later the order, the higher the expectation level. Further, the variable effect in which the rainbow-colored pending image is displayed may be a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. That is, the rainbow-colored pending image may have an expectation level of 100%.

“Chance eye” indicates the type of chance eye effect. The chance eye effect is an effect that displays a chance eye based on the preliminary determination result of the advance determination process. The chance pieces are three decorative patterns that are predetermined same color patterns and are combined by patterns that include different numbers. The chance effect, for example, notifies or suggests that there is a high possibility of a jackpot in the special symbol variations following the special symbol variation in which the chance effect was started. Furthermore, in the multiple fluctuating performances, the chance performance may be performed multiple times. In the illustrated example, either "RO1" or "RO2" is executed as the type of chance effect. Further, in the order of "RO1" and "RO2", the higher the number, the higher the expectation level.

"Zone" indicates the type of zone effect. The zone performance is, for example, a performance that makes the player expect a jackpot in the variation of special symbols. The zone performance performed based on the preliminary judgment result may be a performance that makes you expect a jackpot in the special symbol variation where the zone production has started, or it may be a production that makes you expect a jackpot in the special symbol variation where the zone production has started, or it may be a production that makes you expect a jackpot in the special symbol variation where the zone production has started. It may be an effect that makes the player expect a jackpot in the symbol variation. In the illustrated example, either "ZO1" or "ZO2" is executed as the type of zone effect. Further, in the order of "ZO1" and "ZO2", the higher the number, the higher the expectation level.

"Effect" indicates the type of effect production. The effect production is a production that displays an effect image on the image display section 114 to make the player expect a jackpot in the variation of special symbols. The effect image is an image used to enhance the effect of the effect image on the player's visual sense, such as an image of any one of a plurality of colors. For example, the colors of the effect image may be set in the order of blue, green, red, and rainbow colors such that the later the order, the higher the expectation level. Further, in the variable performance in which a rainbow-colored effect image is displayed, the lottery result of the special symbol lottery may be a variable performance in which the lottery result is a jackpot. That is, the rainbow effect image may have an expectation level of 100%. Further, the effect image may be, for example, an image imitating light. The effect performance performed based on the preliminary judgment result may be a performance that makes you expect a jackpot in the special symbol variation where the effect production has started, or a production that makes you expect a jackpot in the special symbol variation where the effect production has started. It may be an effect that makes the player expect a jackpot in the symbol variation. In the illustrated example, either "EF1" or "EF2" is executed as the type of effect production. Further, in the order of "EF1" and "EF2", the higher the number, the higher the expectation level.

"Sound" indicates the type of sound production. The sound performance is a performance that outputs sound from the speaker 156. The sound production performed based on the preliminary judgment result may be a production that makes you expect a jackpot in the special symbol variation that started the sound production, or a production that makes you expect a jackpot in the special symbol variation that started the sound production, or in the next special symbol variation that started the sound production. It may be an effect that makes the player expect a jackpot in the symbol variation. In the illustrated example, either "SO1" or "SO2" is executed as the type of sound production. Further, in the order of "SO1" and "SO2", the higher the number, the higher the expectation level.

“Yakuza” indicates the type of role play. The accessory performance is a performance in which the movable accessory 115 moves. The accessory performance performed based on the preliminary determination result may be a performance that makes people expect a jackpot in the special symbol variation that started the accessory production, or it may be a performance that makes people expect a jackpot in the special symbol variation that started the accessory production, or it may be a performance that makes people expect a jackpot in the special symbol variation that started the accessory production. It may be an effect that makes the player expect a jackpot in the next special symbol change. In the illustrated example, either "CH1" or "CH2" is executed as the type of accessory production. Further, in the order of "CH1" and "CH2", the higher the number, the higher the expectation level.

“Light-emission” indicates the type of light-emission effect when winning a prize. The winning lighting performance is a performance in which when a game ball wins in the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122, the winning first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122 is made to emit light with a lamp. For example, the luminescent colors may be set in the order of blue, green, red, and rainbow colors such that the later the order, the higher the expectation level. Furthermore, in the variable performance related to the winning light emission performance in which the emitted light color is rainbow-colored, it may be a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. That is, the expectation level of rainbow-colored luminescent colors may be 100%. In the illustrated example, either "LU1" or "LU2" is executed as the type of light-emitting effect upon winning. Further, in the order of "LU1" and "LU2", the higher the number, the higher the expectation level.

Now, the performance control section 300 determines a predetermined performance pattern based on the tables shown in FIGS. 56 to 58. Specifically, the performance control unit 300 selects a pre-judgment performance pattern corresponding to the pre-judgment pattern set in the pre-judgment process (see FIG. 32) based on the tables shown in FIGS. 56 to 58.
For example, in FIG. 56, when the "judgment result" is "miss" and the preliminary determination pattern is "JR6", "AR6" is selected as the preliminary determination performance pattern. In this pre-judgment production pattern "AR6", "Hold image", "Display color", "Chance eye", "Zone", "Effect", "Sound", "Accessory object", and "Light emission" are set. has been done. That is, in the advance judgment performance pattern "AR6", the "holding image" is displayed, the "display color" becomes "blue", "RO1" is executed as the "chance", and "ZO1" is executed as the "zone". is executed, “EF1” is executed as the “effect”, “SO1” is executed as the “sound”, “CH1” is executed as the “accessory object”, and “LU1” is executed as the “light emission”.

In addition, in this embodiment, a pre-determination effect pattern table is used when a game ball enters the first starting port 121 in the special time-saving gaming state, and a game ball enters the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. There is no pre-determination effect pattern table that is used in this case. That is, in the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting port 121 in the special time-saving gaming state, and when a gaming ball enters the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the pre-judgment performance is performed. is not performed. However, the pre-determined performance pattern table is used when a game ball enters the first starting port 121 in the special time-saving gaming state, and the pre-determined performance pattern table is used when a gaming ball enters the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. A predetermined performance pattern table may be provided. Then, using these pre-determined performance pattern tables, the production control unit 300 determines whether a game ball enters the first starting port 121 in the special time-saving gaming state or when a game ball enters the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. If a ball wins a prize, a preliminary judgment performance may be performed.

[Variable production pattern table]
FIGS. 59 to 64 are diagrams showing setting examples of variable effect patterns and tables used in the variable effect pattern selection (S3813) in the effect selection process of FIG. 38(b). Note that FIG. 59 shows a variable effect pattern table used when a variable effect is performed based on winnings in the first start opening 121 in the normal gaming state. Further, FIG. 60 shows a variable effect pattern table used when a variable effect is performed based on winnings in the second start opening 122 in the normal gaming state. Further, FIG. 61 shows a variable effect pattern table used when a variable effect is performed based on winnings in the second start opening 122 in the special time saving game state. Further, FIG. 62 shows a variable effect pattern table used when a variable effect is performed based on winnings in the first start opening 121 in the special time saving game state. Further, FIG. 63 shows a variable effect pattern table used when a variable effect is performed based on winnings in the second start opening 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. Further, FIG. 64 shows a variable effect pattern table used when a variable effect is performed based on winning in the first start opening 121 in the specific time saving gaming state.

A plurality of variable effect patterns are set in the variable effect pattern table shown in FIG. 59, which is used when a variable effect is performed based on winnings in the first start opening 121 in the normal gaming state. For the variation patterns "PA1" to "PA6", "PB1" to "PB6", "PR1" to "PR3", and "PR6" to "PR13" set using the above Figure 24, Patterns "EA1" to "EA6", "EB1" to "EB6", "ER1" to "ER3", and "ER6" to "ER13" are associated on a one-to-one basis. Further, the variable effect patterns "ER4-1" and "ER4-2" are associated with the variable pattern "PR4". Furthermore, the variable effect patterns "ER5-1" and "ER5-2" are associated with the variable pattern "PR5".

When “PR4” is set as the variation pattern, the production control unit 300 determines the variation production pattern based on the number of times X of variation production is performed after the predetermined condition is met (RAM clearing, resetting the number of variations). do. More specifically, when the number of times X of variable effects is not within a specific range, the effect control unit 300 determines the variable effect pattern to be "ER4-1". This specific range is the same as the range used in setting the pre-judgment performance pattern (see "number of fluctuations (X)" in "AR4-1" and "AR4-2" in FIG. 56). Furthermore, if the number of times X of variable effects executed after the establishment of a predetermined condition (RAM clearing, resetting the number of changes) is within a specific range, the effect control unit 300 changes the variable effect pattern to "ER4-2". decide. Note that even when "PR5" is set as the variable pattern, the variable effect pattern is determined by the same method.

Further, a plurality of variable effect patterns are set in the variable effect pattern table shown in FIG. 60, which is used when a variable effect is performed based on winnings in the second start opening 122 in the normal gaming state. For the variable patterns “PC1”, “PC2”, “PD1” to “PD3” and “PE1” set using the above-mentioned FIG. 25, the variable effect patterns “EC1”, “EC2”, “ED1” to "ED3" and "EE1" are associated on a one-to-one basis.
Further, a plurality of variable effect patterns are set in the variable effect pattern table shown in FIG. 61, which is used when a variable effect is performed based on winnings in the second start opening 122 in the special time saving gaming state. For the variation patterns "PF1", "PF2", "PG1" to "PG3", and "PH1" to "PH8" set using FIG. 26 above, the variation effect patterns "EF1" and "EF2" are set. , "EG1" to "EG3", and "EH1" to "EH8" are associated on a one-to-one basis.
Further, a plurality of variable effect patterns are set in the variable effect pattern table shown in FIG. 62, which is used when a variable effect is performed based on winning in the first start opening 121 in the special time saving gaming state. The variable effects patterns “EI1” to “EI3” and “EJ1” are associated on a one-to-one basis with the variable patterns “PI1” to “PI3” and “PJ1” set using FIG. 27 above. There is.

Further, a plurality of variable effect patterns are set in the variable effect pattern table shown in FIG. 63, which is used when a variable effect is performed based on winnings in the second start opening 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. For the fluctuation patterns “PK1”, “PK2”, “PL1” to “PL3”, and “PM1” to “PM3” set using the above FIG. 28, “EK1”, “EK2”, “EL1” ” to “EL3” and “EM1” to “EM3” are associated on a one-to-one basis.
In addition, a plurality of variable effect patterns are set in the variable effect pattern table shown in FIG. 64, which is used when a variable effect is performed based on winning in the first start opening 121 in the specific time saving gaming state. “EN1” to “EN3” and “EO1” are associated on a one-to-one basis with the fluctuation patterns “PN1” to “PN3” and “PO1” set using FIG. 29 above. .

Note that the number of variable effect patterns is not limited to the numbers shown in FIGS. 59 to 64.
For example, the number of variable performance patterns used when the lottery result of a special symbol lottery based on winning in the first starting hole 121 in the normal gaming state is a jackpot is higher than the number of variable effect patterns used when winning in the first starting hole 121 in the normal gaming state. The number of variable performance patterns used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on is a loss may be greater. In addition, the number of fluctuating effect patterns used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winning to the second starting hole 122 in the special time-saving gaming state is a jackpot is greater than the number of fluctuating performance patterns used in the second starting hole 122 in the special time-saving gaming state. The number of variable performance patterns used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winnings is a loss may be greater. In this case, the number of variable production patterns used in the case where the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winning in the first starting hole 121 in the special time saving gaming state is a jackpot is larger than the number of variable production patterns used in the special time saving gaming state. The number of variable performance patterns used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winning in the starting hole 121 is a loss may be smaller.
In this case, if a game ball enters the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state, or if a gaming ball enters the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state, the lottery result of the special symbol lottery will be a loss. Even in the case of a game, it is possible to improve the interest of the game through various performances. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning in the first start opening 121 is a loss in the special time saving game state, it is difficult to improve the interest of the game because the number of variable performance patterns is small. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, the game ball should be placed in the first starting port 121, and in the special time-saving gaming state, the game ball should be placed in the second starting port 122. Can be done.

Also, for example, the number of variable performance patterns used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning in the first starting hole 121 in the normal gaming state is a jackpot is greater than the number of fluctuating performance patterns used in the first starting hole 121 in the normal gaming state. The number of variable performance patterns used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winnings is a loss may be greater. In addition, the number of fluctuating performance patterns used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning to the second starting hole 122 in the special time saving gaming state is a loss, The number of variable performance patterns used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winnings is a jackpot may be greater. In this case, the number of variable production patterns used in the case where the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winning in the first starting hole 121 in the special time saving gaming state is a jackpot is larger than the number of variable production patterns used in the special time saving gaming state. The number of variable performance patterns used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winning in the starting hole 121 is a loss may be smaller.

Also, for example, the number of variable performance patterns used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning in the first starting hole 121 in the normal gaming state is a jackpot is greater than the number of fluctuating performance patterns used in the first starting hole 121 in the normal gaming state. The number of variable performance patterns used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winnings is a loss may be greater. In addition, the number of fluctuating performance patterns used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winning to the second starting opening 122 in the specific time saving gaming state is a jackpot is greater than the number of fluctuating performance patterns to be used in the second starting opening 122 in the specific time saving gaming state. The number of variable performance patterns used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winnings is a loss may be greater. In this case, the number of variable production patterns used in the case where the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winning in the first starting hole 121 in the specific time saving gaming state is a jackpot is larger than the number of variable performance patterns in the specific time saving gaming state. The number of variable performance patterns used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winning in the starting hole 121 is a loss may be smaller.
Also, for example, the number of variable performance patterns used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning in the first starting hole 121 in the normal gaming state is a jackpot is greater than the number of fluctuating performance patterns used in the first starting hole 121 in the normal gaming state. The number of variable performance patterns used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winnings is a loss may be greater. In addition, the number of fluctuating performance patterns used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning to the second starting opening 122 in the specific time saving gaming state is a loss, the second starting opening 122 in the specific time saving gaming state. The number of variable performance patterns used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winnings is a jackpot may be greater. In this case, the number of variable production patterns used in the case where the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winning in the first starting hole 121 in the specific time saving gaming state is a jackpot is larger than the number of variable performance patterns in the specific time saving gaming state. The number of variable performance patterns used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winning in the starting hole 121 is a loss may be smaller.

Here, the fluctuating performance is a performance for visually announcing the determination result of the special symbol lottery (that is, whether or not a jackpot has been won) by displaying the decorative symbols in a variable manner and then stopping and displaying them.
In addition, in the illustrated variation effect pattern, "Pseudo consecutive number", "Normal", "SP Reach", "SPSP Reach", "Final display color", "Zone", "Reach stimulation", "Effect", " The following are set: ``Accessories'', ``Sounds'', ``Buttons'', ``Promotion Instigation'', and ``Promotions''. Note that "-" in each column of the illustrated table indicates that the corresponding effect is not executed.

Here, the "number of pseudo consecutive performances" is the number of pseudo continuous performances (pseudo consecutive performances). This pseudo-continuous performance is a performance that makes it appear as if a plurality of variable displays of decorative symbols are being displayed in a variable display of one variation of a special symbol. In the pseudo-continuous performance, the performance control unit 300 changes the decorative pattern before entering the ready-to-win state, temporarily stops the decorative pattern, and then starts the variable display of the decorative pattern again. In other words, in a pseudo-continuous performance, after the decorative pattern starts to fluctuate, the decorative pattern temporarily stops and fluctuates again for the set number of pseudo-successive times, and then it is finally stopped, so that one fluctuation of the special symbol is Finish the variable display. Here, the term "temporary stop" refers to a pseudo-stopping state in which the symbols appear to be stationary at first glance, but are actually slightly oscillating. In other words, the temporary stop of the symbols is a state in which the fluctuations are treated as continuing in terms of game control. Further, the term "determining and stopping a symbol" refers to a state in which a special symbol is determined as a symbol in a variable display of one variation of a special symbol. In addition, in the pseudo-continuous performance, the performance control unit 300 may start the fluctuating display of the decorative symbols again after the ready-to-win state is achieved. Furthermore, in the pseudo-continuous performance, after changing the decorative pattern, the performance control unit 300 may start the variable display of the decorative pattern again without temporarily stopping the decorative pattern.
In the illustrated example, the "pseudo consecutive number" is set to "-", "1", "2", and "3", that is, between 0 and 3 times. Further, the number of pseudo consecutive runs is set in association with the degree of expectation (reliability) that is the degree to which the player expects to win a jackpot. In other words, it is set so that the higher the number of pseudo-consecutive times, the higher the expectation level.

“Normal” indicates the type of reach effect. In the illustrated example, one of "N1", "N2", and "N3" is executed as the type of reach effect.
“SP reach” indicates the type of SP reach effect. In the illustrated example, one of "SP1", "SP2", and "SP3" is executed as the type of SP reach effect. Further, in the order of "SP1", "SP2", and "SP3", the higher the number, the higher the expectation level.
“SPSP reach” indicates the type of SPSP reach effect. In the illustrated example, one of "SPSP1", "SPSP2", and "SPSP3" is executed as the type of SPSP reach effect. Further, in the order of "SPSP1", "SPSP2", and "SPSP3", the higher the number, the higher the expectation level.

"Final display color" indicates the final display color of the variable image (described later). In this embodiment, by changing the display color of the variable image, etc., the player is informed or suggested of the degree of expectation of winning a jackpot. In the illustrated example, one of "blue," "green," "red," and "rainbow color" is selected as the final display color. For example, the display colors of the variable image may be set in the order of white, blue, green, red, and rainbow colors such that the later the order, the higher the expectation level. Further, the variable effect in which the rainbow-colored variable image is displayed may be a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. That is, the rainbow color variation image may have an expectation level of 100%.

"Zone" indicates the type of zone effect. In the illustrated example, one of "ZO3", "ZO4", and "ZO5" is executed as the type of zone effect. Further, in the order of "ZO3", "ZO4", and "ZO5", the higher the number, the higher the expectation level.
“Reach promotion” indicates the type of reach promotion. The reach promotion performance is a performance that stimulates whether or not the reach performance will be executed. In the illustrated example, any one of "RE1", "RE2", and "RE3" is executed as the type of reach promotion effect. Further, in the order of "RE1", "RE2", and "RE3", the higher the number, the higher the expectation level.

"Effect" indicates the type of effect production. In the illustrated example, either "EF3" or "EF4" is executed as the type of effect production. Further, in the order of "EF3" and "EF4", the higher the number, the higher the expectation level.
“Yakuza” indicates the type of role play. In the illustrated example, one of "CH3", "CH4", and "CH5" is executed as the type of accessory production. Further, in the order of "CH3", "CH4", and "CH5", the higher the number, the higher the expectation level.
"Sound" indicates the type of sound production. In the illustrated example, one of "SO3", "SO4", and "SO5" is executed as the type of sound production. Further, in the order of "SO3", "SO4", and "SO5", the higher the number, the higher the expectation level.

“Button” indicates the type of button operation effect. The button operation performance is a performance that prompts the player to operate the performance button 161. The button operation effect may be executed based on the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination process. The button operation performance performed based on the preliminary determination result may be a performance that makes you expect a jackpot in the special symbol variation that started the button operation performance, or a performance that makes you expect a jackpot in the special symbol variation that started the button operation performance. It may be an effect that makes the player expect a jackpot in the next special symbol change. In the illustrated example, one of "BU1", "BU2", and "BU3" is executed as the type of button operation effect. Further, in the order of "BU1", "BU2", and "BU3", the higher the number, the higher the expectation level.

"Promotion agitation" means promotion agitation production. Promotion promotion performance refers to temporarily stopping the decorative pattern that informs that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, and then changing it to a decorative symbol that notifies the player that the game will be in a more advantageous gaming state. It is a performance that stirs up excitement.
"Promotion" means promotion performance. The promotion performance is a performance that temporarily stops the decorative pattern that informs that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, and then changes it to a decorative pattern that notifies the player that the game will be in a more advantageous gaming state. . In this promotion performance, for example, after "555" is temporarily stopped as a decorative symbol, a decorative symbol "777" is displayed as a stopping symbol.

Now, the effect control section 300 determines a variable effect pattern based on the tables shown in FIGS. 59 to 64. Specifically, the effect control unit 300 selects a variable effect pattern corresponding to the variable pattern set in the variable pattern selection process (see FIG. 15) based on the tables shown in FIGS. 59 to 64.
For example, in FIG. 59, when the "jackpot symbol" is "jackpot symbol C" and the variation pattern is "PB1", "EB1" is selected as the variation effect pattern. In this variable performance pattern "EB1", "-" is set for "pseudo consecutive number", "zone", "reach promotion", "promotion promotion", and "promotion". That is, when "EB1" is selected as the variable performance pattern, pseudo-continuous performance, zone performance, reach promotion performance, promotion promotion performance, and promotion performance are not executed. In addition, in the variable effect pattern "EB1", "N1" is executed as "Normal", "SP1" is executed as "SP reach", "SPSP1" is executed as "SPSP reach", and "Final display color " becomes "red", "EF3" is executed as "effect", "CH3" is executed as "accessory", "SO3" is executed as "sound", and "BU1" is executed as "button". executed.
In addition, in the variable performance pattern table shown in FIG. 64 used when a variable performance is performed based on winnings in the first start opening 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, ""Pseudo consecutive number", "Normal", "SP Reach", "SPSP Reach", "Final display color", "Zone", "Reach stimulation", "Effect", "Accessory object", "Sound", "Button" , "-" is set for "promotion promotion" and "promotion". In other words, when a variable performance is performed in which the judgment result of the special symbol lottery based on winnings in the first starting opening 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state is a loss, pseudo continuous performance, reach performance, SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance, fluctuation None of the image display color change, zone effect, reach promotion effect, effect effect, character object effect, sound effect, button operation effect, promotion promotion effect, and promotion effect is executed.

[Produced image]
FIG. 65 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance that the performance control unit 300 performs using the image display unit 114 and the like.
Next, the effect image displayed on the image display unit 114 by the effect control unit 300 will be explained.
As shown in FIG. 65, the effect image is displayed on the image display unit 114 under the control of the effect control unit 300. In this embodiment, the effect images displayed on the image display section 114 include a decorative pattern 41, a fluctuation image 51, a pending image 52, a pending number display 55, a small pattern 56, a stage image 61, and an execution number image 501. . The image display unit 114 also includes a change image 62, a precursor image 502, a remaining number of arrivals image 503, a chance image 63, a zone notification image 64, a zone identification image 65, a zone effect image 66, an SP reach image 67, and an SPSP reach image. Image 68, button operation image 69, menu display image 504, customer waiting image 505, menu image 506, clear negative image 507, pseudo series image 70, pseudo series effect image 71, pseudo series number image 72, opening image 74, promotion image 508, specific area image 509, first right-handed hitting image 75, round in-round image 76, round number image 77, special time-saving selection image 510, special time-saving start image 78, second right-handed hitting image 511, special time-saving remaining number of times image 79, Reach stimulation effect image 94, first transition image 512, result image 513, left-handed image 514, winning notification image 515, continuation image 516, specific time saving start image 517, third right-handed image 518, second transition image 519, mode Start image 520, specific time saving selection image 521, specific time saving remaining number of times image 524, fourth right hit image 525, arrival notification image 526, end image 527, first winning suggestion image 528, remaining time image 529, second winning suggestion image 91, an accessory effect image 92, a second start effect image 93, a radio wave error notification image 530, a returning image 531, and a magnetic error notification image 532 may be displayed.

(Decorative pattern 41)
As shown in FIG. 65(1), three decorative patterns 41 are displayed on the image display section 114. In addition, when explaining each of the three patterns that make up the decorative pattern 41, the pattern placed on the left side will be referred to as the "left decorative pattern 41", the pattern placed in the center will be referred to as the "middle decorative pattern 41", and the pattern placed on the right side will be referred to as the "left decorative pattern 41". The pattern placed on the right side is sometimes referred to as the "right decorative pattern 41." Furthermore, when the left decorative pattern 41 and the right decorative pattern 41 are collectively described, they may be referred to as "left and right decorative patterns 41." Furthermore, when describing the left decorative pattern 41, middle decorative pattern 41, and right decorative pattern 41 all together, they may be referred to as "three decorative patterns 41." Furthermore, the three decorative patterns 41 with matching numbers may be referred to as the "zero-numbered decorative pattern 41."

In this embodiment, the display mode of the decorative pattern 41 includes a highly decorative display mode in which characters such as numbers and images of characters are displayed (see FIG. 65(1)), and a display mode in which characters such as numbers are displayed. There is a less decorative display mode (see FIG. 68 (20) and FIG. 74 (22)) in which the main character is displayed. Images such as characters provided on the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 are different for each character of the decorative pattern 41, and it is possible to identify which pattern it is based on the image of the character. Further, in the decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness, the proportion of the area occupied by characters in the decorative pattern 41 is higher than that in the decorative pattern 41 with high decorativeness.
Here, the display mode of the decorative symbols 41 is switched according to changes in the game state or progress of the performance. Details will be described later, but for example, decorative symbols 41 with low decorativeness are displayed in SP reach effects, special time-saving game states, specific time-saving gaming states, etc., and decorative symbols 41 with high decorativeness are displayed in cases other than these. Is displayed. Furthermore, the display mode and display size of the decorative symbols 41 may be different between the special time-saving game state and the specific time-saving game state.
Note that, in addition to letters such as numbers, images such as simple pictures and characters may also be displayed on the decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness. In other words, the "low decorative pattern 41" shown in FIG. 68 (20), FIG. 74 (22), etc. is more decorative than the "high decorative pattern 41" shown in FIG. 65 (1), etc. It is sufficient if the value is low.

In the variable presentation of the decorative patterns 41, the presentation control unit 300 first changes the display of the three decorative patterns 41 by, for example, vertical scrolling (downward scrolling), and then displays the left decorative pattern 41 (for example, the number "2"). ") is temporarily stopped, then the right decorative pattern 41 (for example, the number "3") is temporarily stopped, and then the middle decorative pattern (for example, the number "1") is temporarily stopped. In this way, all the decorative patterns 41 go through a state where they are temporarily stopped, and finally all the decorative patterns 41 are finally stopped in response to the stop display of the special pattern. Note that the combination "213" of the decorative symbols 41 that are stopped and displayed, shown in FIG. 65(1), is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss.

(Variation image 51)
As shown in FIG. 65(2), the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (the decorative symbol 41 is being displayed in a variable manner) by the special symbol variation control unit 233 (see FIG. 6, etc.) on the image display unit 114. A fluctuation image 51 showing . That is, the variable image 51 is displayed as an image related to the variable display of the special symbol during the variable display of the special symbol. Then, when the variable display of the special symbol starts, the variable image 51 is displayed in the area where the variable image 51 is displayed (in the illustrated example, the lower part of the display area of the image display section 114), and the special symbol is When the display stops, the display disappears. In the illustrated example, the fluctuation image 51 has a spherical shape. Furthermore, a variable pedestal is displayed in the area where the variable image 51 is displayed.

In addition, the variable image 51 changes its display mode, such as display color, for example, to notify or suggest the degree of expectation of winning a jackpot. Furthermore, it is set so that when the judgment result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, colors of types with higher expectations are displayed than when it is a loss. For example, when white, blue, green, red, and rainbow are set as the colors of the variable image 51, the later the order, the higher the expectation level may be. Furthermore, the expectation level of the rainbow-colored variation image 51 may be 100%.

(Pending image 52)
As shown in FIG. 65(3), the reserved image 52 is displayed on the image display unit 114 based on the information of the storage area corresponding to the currently reserved ball in the RAM 303 (see FIG. 4, etc.). In other words, the pending image 52 is an image indicating that the right to determine a jackpot is reserved. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the pending image 52 on the screen is determined based on the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination process.
The pending image 52 has a smaller display size than the variable image 51. Further, in the illustrated example, the reserved image 52 has a spherical shape. Further, in the area where the pending image 52 is displayed, a pending pedestal is displayed. The variable pedestal of the variable image 51 and the pending pedestal of the pending image are displayed in different manners. In addition, below, the display mode of the fluctuation image 51 which is white, and the display mode of the pending image 52 which is white may be referred to as a normal display mode.

Here, as described above, a maximum of four reservations occur due to winnings in the first starting port 121. Therefore, by winning a prize in the first start opening 121, a maximum of four pending images 52 are displayed on the image display section 114. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the plurality of pending images 52 generated by winning in the first starting port 121 are arranged in an area to the left of the variable image 51 in order from a position close to the variable image 51 to a position farther away from the variable image 51. That is, they are displayed side by side from right to left.

Incidentally, although a detailed explanation is omitted, a maximum of four reservations occur even when a game ball enters the second starting port 122. Therefore, by winning a prize in the second start opening 122, a maximum of four pending images 52 are displayed on the image display section 114. In the present embodiment, the plurality of pending images 52 generated by winning a prize in the second starting port 122 are arranged sequentially from a position close to the variable image 51 to a position away from the variable image 51 in an area on the right side of the variable image 51, that is, on the left side. They are displayed side by side from side to right.
Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 are each basically configured in the same or similar form. However, the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 may be configured in different forms. Furthermore, the variable image 51 and pending image 52 that are displayed when winning a prize at the first starting port 121 are different from the variable image 51 and pending image 52 that are displayed when winning a prize at the second starting port 122. Good too.

In addition, in the following explanation, regarding the maximum of four pending images 52 that are displayed, "first pending image 52", "second pending image 52", and "third "Pending image 52" and "fourth pending image 52."

(Pending number display 55)
As shown in FIG. 65(1), a pending number display 55 is displayed on the image display unit 114 based on the information of the storage area corresponding to the held balls in the RAM 303 (see FIG. 4, etc.). This pending number display 55 is an image showing the pending number. Here, the number of the above-mentioned pending images 52 displayed on the image display section 114 changes depending on the number of pending prizes for each of the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122. In the pending number display 55, the number of pending prizes for winnings to the first starting port 121 is displayed on the left side, and the number of pending prizes for winnings to the second starting port 122 is displayed on the right side.

(Small pattern 56)
As shown in FIG. 65(1), a special symbol is displayed on the image display section 114 based on the winning in the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122 by the special symbol variation control section 233 (see FIG. 6, etc.). A small pattern 56 is displayed indicating that the decorative pattern 41 is being displayed in a variable manner (the decorative pattern 41 is being displayed in a variable manner). The small symbols 56 are controlled by the production control section 300, and are displayed in a variable manner as the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and are stopped and displayed in response to the stopped display of the special symbols.

In the illustrated example, the small patterns 56 are three images each corresponding to the decorative pattern 41, and are displayed on the right side of the image display area of the image display section 114. This small pattern 56 is displayed as an image smaller in size than the decorative pattern 41. Further, as described above, the decorative pattern 41 may be displayed in a highly decorative display mode or in a less decorative display mode, but the small pattern 56 is a decorative pattern mainly consisting of letters. Displayed only in a low-quality display mode. However, the small pattern 56 may be displayed in a display mode in which an image such as a picture or a character is displayed in addition to text. In other words, the small pattern 56 may be of a lower decorative quality than the decorative pattern 41, which is highly decorative.
In addition, when explaining each of the three patterns constituting the small pattern 56 individually, the pattern placed on the top side will be referred to as the "upper small pattern 56", the pattern placed in the center will be referred to as the "medium and small pattern 56", and the pattern placed on the bottom side will be referred to as the "upper small pattern 56". The pattern placed on the lower side may be referred to as the "lower small pattern 56". In addition, when the upper small pattern 56 and the lower small pattern 56 are collectively described, they may be referred to as "upper and lower small patterns 56." Furthermore, when the upper small design 56, the middle small design 56, and the lower small design 56 are collectively described, they may be referred to as "three small designs 56." Furthermore, the three small patterns 56 with matching numbers may be referred to as "Zero small patterns 56".

The small symbols 56 are displayed in a variable manner (for example, vertically scrolled) in a manner that indicates that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner as the first starting hole 121 or the second starting hole 122 is won. In the small pattern 56, during scrolling, the number images are displayed in increments of 1 from "1" to "9", and then are repeatedly displayed in increments of 1 from "1". Then, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the small symbol 56 is stopped and displayed. In the illustrated example, the number indicated by the small pattern 56 that is stopped and displayed matches the number indicated by the decorative pattern 41. To explain further, in the example of FIG. 65(1), a number corresponding to "213" of the decorative pattern 41 is displayed as the small pattern 56. Note that the small pattern 56 is also an example of a decorative pattern in a broad sense.

(Stage image 61)
As shown in FIG. 65(1), a stage image 61 is displayed on the image display section 114 as a background of the decorative pattern 41 and the like. The stage image 61 is, for example, an image (stage, etc.) related to content (idol, anime character, etc.) that is the subject matter of the pachinko game machine 100. Moreover, the stage image 61 may be a moving image. In the illustrated example, a moving image with a space theme is displayed as the stage image 61. The stage image 61 is switched, for example, when the variable performance on one stage is performed a predetermined number of times. Further, the stage image 61 may be switched, for example, when a specific variable effect (for example, a variable effect in which an SPSP reach effect is performed) is performed. Furthermore, the stage image 61 may be switched for each gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100. More specifically, the stage image 61 may be displayed in different display modes in the normal game state, the special time-saving game state, and the specific time-saving game state.

(Execution count image 501)
As shown in FIG. 65(1), an execution count image 501 is displayed on the image display section 114. This execution number image 501 is an image showing the number of new variable displays (the number of variable presentations of the decorative pattern 41) performed after the number of variable displays of the special symbol was reset. The display content of the execution number image 501 is updated every time a variable effect is performed. In the illustrated example, the execution number image 501 shows the text "99 GAME" including the number of times the variable effect has been performed. Note that the number of variable effects shown in the execution count image 501 may be the number of times the variable effect has been executed, or may be the number of variable effects including not only the number of executed changes but also the variable effect that is currently being executed. There may be. Further, the timing at which the display content of the execution number image 501 is updated may be during execution of the variable effect or after the end of the variable effect.

(Change image 62)
As shown in FIG. 66(7), a changed image 62 is displayed on the image display section 114. This change image 62 is an image displayed in the change image 51 or pending image 52, which is a display mode different from the normal display mode. The change image 62 is displayed, for example, when a change effect is executed. The change performance is a performance that changes the display mode of the variable image 51 and the pending image 52. More specifically, the change performance is a performance that changes the display color, pattern, shape, etc. (hereinafter referred to as "display color etc.") of the variable image 51 and the pending image 52. The change performance may be executed based on a preliminary determination result obtained by preliminary determination processing. Note that the change image 62 may be displayed without performing a change effect. That is, the change image 62 may be displayed when the change image 51 or the pending image 52 starts to be displayed. In the illustrated example, a blue image is displayed as the change image 62 in the third pending image 52 .
Furthermore, the change image 62 may be displayed overlapping the change image 51 and the pending image 52, or the change image 62 may be displayed instead of the change image 51 and the pending image 52. When a change image 62 is displayed instead of the change image 51 or the pending image 52, this change image 62 is captured as the change image 51 or the pending image 52.

(Omen image 502)
As shown in FIG. 66(7), a precursor image 502 is displayed on the image display section 114. This precursor image 502 is an image that is displayed before a remaining number of attainment image 503, which will be described later, is displayed when the remaining number of times notification effect (see S4215 in FIG. 42) is executed. The precursor image 502 is displayed on the image display section 114 in an area where the remaining number of arrivals image 503 is displayed. In the illustrated example, an image imitating light is displayed as the precursor image 502.

(Remaining number of arrivals image 503)
As shown in FIG. 66(8), the image display unit 114 displays a remaining number of arrivals image 503. This remaining number of attainment image 503 is an image showing the number of variable effects required to reach the specific time-saving gaming state. The remaining number of arrivals image 503 is displayed after the precursor image 502 is displayed when the remaining number of times notification effect is executed. Furthermore, the display content of the remaining number of arrivals image 503 is updated every time a variable effect is performed. In other words, the display content of the remaining number of arrivals image 503 is updated by the remaining number of times update effect (see S4216 in FIG. 42). In the illustrated example, the text "200 remaining" is shown as the remaining number of attainment image 503, which includes the number of variable performances required to reach the specific time-saving gaming state. Note that the number of variable effects shown in the remaining number of arrivals image 503 may include the variable effect that is being executed, or may be the number of times that excludes the variable effect that is currently being executed. Moreover, the timing at which the display content of the remaining number of arrivals image 503 is updated may be during execution of the variable effect or after the end of the variable effect.

(Chance image 63)
As shown in FIG. 66(9), a chance image 63 is displayed on the image display section 114. This chance image 63 is an image that is displayed when the chance effect is being executed. The chance image 63 is displayed on the decorative pattern 41. In the illustrated example, a blue image is displayed as the chance image 63 on each letter and character of the three decorative patterns 41. Note that the chance image 63 may be displayed on each character of the three decorative patterns 41, but may not be displayed on the character. Further, the chance image 63 may be displayed on each character of the three decorative patterns 41, but may not be displayed on the characters. That is, the chance image 63 only needs to be displayed on at least a portion of each of the three decorative patterns 41.

(Zone notification image 64)
As shown in FIG. 67(13), a zone notification image 64 is displayed on the image display section 114. This zone notification image 64 is an image that notifies that a zone effect is being executed. In the illustrated example, the text "Enter the Opportunity Zone!" is shown as the zone notification image 64.

(Zone identification image 65)
As shown in FIG. 67(14), a zone identification image 65 is displayed on the image display section 114. This zone identification image 65 is an image for identifying the type of zone effect being executed. In the illustrated example, the text "Opportunity Zone" is shown as the zone identification image 65.

(Zone effect image 66)
As shown in FIG. 67(15), a zone effect image 66 is displayed on the image display section 114. This zone effect image 66 is an effect image displayed when a zone effect is executed. The zone effect image 66 may be displayed based on the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination process. In the illustrated example, a blue image is displayed around the image display section 114 as the zone effect image 66 .

(SP reach image 67)
As shown in FIG. 68 (20), the SP reach image 67 is displayed on the image display section 114. This SP reach image 67 is an image showing that the SP reach effect is being executed. The SP reach image 67 is, for example, a moving image in which a character appearing in the content that is the subject of the pachinko gaming machine 100 plays a mini-game.

(SPSP reach image 68)
As shown in FIG. 68 (21), the SPSP reach image 68 is displayed on the image display section 114. This SPSP reach image 68 is an image showing that the SPSP reach effect is being executed. The SPSP reach image 68 is, for example, a moving image in which characters appearing in the content that is the subject of the pachinko gaming machine 100 fight.

(Button operation image 69)
As shown in FIG. 68(22), a button operation image 69 is displayed on the image display section 114. The button operation image 69 is an image displayed when a button operation effect is being executed. By displaying this button operation image 69, the player can recognize that it is the timing to operate the effect button 161. In the illustrated example, an image imitating the effect button 161 is displayed as the button operation image 69. In this embodiment, the button operation image 69 is displayed for a predetermined period of time, and if the effect button 161 is operated before this predetermined period elapses after the button operation image 69 is displayed, a predetermined effect is executed. That is, in the button operation effect, the valid period of operation of the effect button 161 is determined as the display period of the button operation image 69.

(Menu display image 504)
As shown in FIG. 69 (26), a menu display image 504 is displayed on the image display section 114. The menu display image 504 is an image that notifies the player that a menu image 506, which will be described later, can be displayed. In the illustrated example, the text “Display menu” is shown as the menu display image 504.

(Customer waiting image 505)
As shown in FIG. 69 (28), a customer waiting image 505 is displayed on the image display section 114. The customer waiting image 505 is an image for advertising the pachinko gaming machine 100 when it is in a customer waiting state. The customer waiting image 505 is displayed over the entire surface of the image display section 114. However, the customer waiting image 505 may be displayed on a part of the image display section 114 and not be displayed on the other part. The customer waiting image 505 is displayed when the second customer waiting effect (see S4110 in FIG. 41) is being executed. On the other hand, the customer waiting image 505 is not displayed when the first customer waiting effect (see S4109 in FIG. 41) is being executed. Further, the customer waiting image 505 may be a moving image. In the illustrated example, a moving image related to the content that is the subject of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is displayed as the customer waiting image 505.

(Menu image 506)
As shown in FIG. 69(30), a menu image 506 is displayed on the image display section 114. The menu image 506 is a screen on which performance items that can be set by the player's operation of the performance button 161 or the performance key 162 are displayed. In the illustrated example, the menu image 506 includes "start", "customize", "demo movie", and "favorite character" as production items. When any of the items in menu image 506 is selected, an image for setting the selected item is displayed on image display section 114. In this embodiment, when the effect button 161 is operated while the menu display image 504 (see FIG. 69 (26)) is displayed, the menu image 506 is displayed.

(Clear negative image 507)
As shown in FIG. 70(2), a clear negative image 507 is displayed on the image display section 114. The clear negative image 507 is displayed when the clear negative effect (see S4209 in FIG. 42) is executed. By displaying the clear negative image 507, it is suggested to the player that RAM clearing has not been executed. In the illustrated example, a character that appears in the content that is the subject of the pachinko game machine 100 is displayed as the clear negative image 507.

(pseudo continuous image 70)
As shown in FIG. 71(3), the pseudo linked image 70 is displayed on the image display section 114. This pseudo-continuous image 70 is an image indicating that a pseudo-continuous effect is being executed. In the illustrated example, the text “NEXT” is shown as the pseudo-continuous image 70.

(Pseudo connection effect image 71)
As shown in FIG. 71(3), a pseudo-connection effect image 71 is displayed on the image display section 114. This pseudo-continuous effect image 71 is an effect image that is displayed when a pseudo-continuous effect is being executed. In the illustrated example, a blue image is displayed around the pseudo-linked image 70 as the pseudo-linked effect image 71 .

(Pseudo consecutive number image 72)
As shown in FIG. 71(4), a pseudo consecutive number image 72 is displayed on the image display section 114. This pseudo-continuation count image 72 is an image showing the pseudo-continuation count. In the illustrated example, since this is the second variable display, the text "x2" is displayed in the pseudo consecutive number image 72.

(Opening image 74)
As shown in FIG. 73 (17), an opening image 74 is displayed on the image display section 114. This opening image 74 is an image for notifying the player of the start of the jackpot game or the start of the small win game. In the illustrated example, the text "BIG Bonus! Congratulations" indicating the start of a jackpot game is displayed as the opening image 74. This opening image 74 has content that suggests the type of jackpot (for example, the total number of rounds) and the gaming state after the jackpot game ends.

(Promotional image 508)
As shown in FIG. 73 (18), a promotion image 508 is displayed on the image display section 114. The promotion image 508 is an image for urging the player to shoot the game ball toward the right side in the game area 111. In the illustrated example, the text "Aim!!" and an image imitating the game area 111 are shown as the promotion image 508. Further, a specific area image 509 is shown in the promotion image 508 .
The specific area image 509 is an image for urging the player to let the game ball flow down into the specific area. In this embodiment, the specific area is the right side of the gaming area 111. In the illustrated example, an image of an arrow pointing to the right side of the gaming area 111 in the promotion image 508 is displayed as the specific area image 509.

(1st right-handed image 75)
As shown in FIG. 74 (19), the first right-handed image 75 is displayed on the image display section 114. This first right-hitting image 75 is an image for urging the player to shoot the game ball toward the right side in the game area 111. In the illustrated example, as the first right-handed image 75, an arrow mark pointing to the right and the text "Right-handed" are displayed. The first right-handed image 75 is displayed, for example, during execution of a jackpot game, in a special time-saving game state, and in a specific time-saving game state.

(Image 76 during the round)
As shown in FIG. 74 (19), an in-round image 76 is displayed on the image display section 114. This in-round image 76 is a moving image of a character appearing in the content that is the subject of the pachinko gaming machine 100. The in-round image 76 is displayed during a round in the jackpot game.

(Round number image 77)
As shown in FIG. 74 (19), a round number image 77 is displayed on the image display section 114. This round number image 77 is an image for informing the player of the number of rounds currently being executed in the jackpot game. In the illustrated example, the text “Round 1” is displayed as the round number image 77.

(Special time saving selection image 510)
As shown in FIG. 74 (20), a special time saving selection image 510 is displayed on the image display section 114. The special time saving selection image 510 is an image for allowing the player to select the mode of performance in the special time saving gaming state. In the illustrated example, two modes, "A" and "B", are selectable in the special time saving selection image 510. The player can select one of the modes by operating the effect key 162 while the special time saving selection image 510 is displayed.

(Special time saving start image 78)
As shown in FIG. 74 (21), a special time saving start image 78 is displayed on the image display section 114. This special time saving start image 78 is an image that notifies the start of the special time saving gaming state. In the illustrated example, the text "Enter A mode!!" is displayed as the special time saving start image 78. “A mode” displayed in the special time saving start image 78 is the mode selected in the special time saving selection image 510 (see FIG. 74 (20)).

(Second right-handed image 511)
As shown in FIG. 74 (21), the second right-handed image 511 is displayed on the image display section 114. The second right-handed image 511 is an image for urging the player to shoot the game ball toward the right side in the game area 111. In the illustrated example, as the second right-handed player image 511, an arrow mark pointing to the right and the text "Right-handed player" are displayed. The second right-handed image 511 has a larger display size on the image display section 114 than the first right-handed image 75 (see FIG. 74 (19)). Further, the second right-hand hitting image 511 is displayed when the special time-saving start image 78 is displayed, and is not displayed when the special time-saving start image 78 is not displayed. However, the second right-handed image 511 may be displayed when the special time saving start image 78 is not displayed.

(Special time saving remaining number of times image 79)
As shown in FIG. 74 (22), a special time saving remaining number image 79 is displayed on the image display section 114. This special time saving remaining number of times image 79 is an image showing the remaining number of times of special symbol lottery in the special time saving game state. In the illustrated example, the text "30" is displayed as the special time saving remaining number image 79, indicating that the remaining number of special symbol drawings in the special time saving gaming state is 30.

(Reach incitement effect image 94)
As shown in FIG. 77(13), a reach-increasing effect image 94 is displayed on the image display section 114. This reach-increasing effect image 94 is an image that is displayed when the reach-increasing effect is being executed. In the reach stimulation performance, after the left decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped, the scrolling right decorative pattern 41 is decelerated, and a performance is performed to stimulate whether or not the pattern matching the left decorative pattern 41 will stop.
The reach-increasing effect image 94 is displayed around the right decorative pattern 41. In the illustrated example, a blue image is displayed around the right decorative pattern 41 as the reach-increasing effect image 94 .

(First transition image 512)
As shown in FIG. 78(21), the first transition image 512 is displayed on the image display section 114. The first transition image 512 is an image displayed when the stage image 61 is switched. In this embodiment, the stage image 61 corresponding to the special time-saving gaming state is switched to the stage image 61 corresponding to the normal gaming state via the first transition image 512. Further, the stage image 61 corresponding to the specific time saving gaming state is switched to the stage image 61 corresponding to the normal gaming state via the first transition image 512. In the illustrated example, an image imitating a door is displayed as the first transition image 512. The first transition image 512 is displayed on the entire surface of the image display section 114. However, the first transition image 512 may be displayed on a part of the image display section 114 and not be displayed on the other part. In addition, the first transition image 512 that is displayed when switching from the stage image 61 corresponding to the special time saving gaming state to the stage image 61 corresponding to the normal gaming state, and the normal game from the stage image 61 corresponding to the specific time saving gaming state The display mode may be different from the first transition image 512 that is displayed when switching to the stage image 61 according to the state.

(Result image 513)
As shown in FIG. 78(22), a result image 513 is displayed on the image display section 114. The result image 513 is an image showing the result of the jackpot game. The result image 513 is displayed when the first transition image 512 is displayed when a jackpot game is played. Furthermore, if a plurality of jackpot games are executed before the first transition image 512 is displayed, the result image 513 shows the cumulative result of the plurality of jackpot games. In the illustrated example, the result image 513 includes the text "A mode" indicating that the special time saving gaming state was in effect, the text "TOTAL 3 times" indicating that the jackpot game was executed three times, and the text "TOTAL 3 times" indicating that the jackpot game was executed three times. The text "3024 Pt acquired" corresponding to the prize ball in is displayed.

(Left-handed image 514)
As shown in FIG. 80 (31), a left-handed hitting image 514 is displayed on the image display section 114. The left-handed image 514 is an image for urging the player to shoot the game ball toward the left side in the game area 111. In the illustrated example, as the left-handed player image 514, an arrow mark pointing to the left and the text "left-handed player" are displayed. The left hitting image 514 is displayed when switching from the special time saving gaming state to the normal gaming state or when switching from the specific time saving gaming state to the normal gaming state.

(Winner notification image 515)
As shown in FIG. 84 (21), a winning notification image 515 is displayed on the image display section 114. The winning notification image 515 is an image that notifies that a game ball has won in the second grand prize opening 126. The prize notification image 515 is displayed when a game ball wins a prize in the second large prize opening 126 in a small winning game. In the illustrated example, as the winning notification image 515, the text "Win!" and an image simulating a game ball winning in the second grand prize opening 126 are displayed.

(Continuation image 516)
A continuation image 516 is displayed in FIG. 84 (23). The continuation image 516 is an image that notifies the continuation of the special time-saving gaming state. In the illustrated example, the text “Continue A mode!!” is displayed as the continuation image 516.

(Specific time saving start image 517)
As shown in FIG. 86(6), a specific time saving start image 517 is displayed on the image display section 114. The specific time saving start image 517 is an image that notifies the start of the specific time saving gaming state. In the illustrated example, the text “Specific game START!” is shown as the specific time saving start image 517. Further, a third right-hand hitting image 518 is displayed in the specific time saving start image 517.
The third right-handed image 518 is an image for prompting the player to shoot the game ball toward the right side in the game area 111. In the illustrated example, an arrow mark pointing to the right is displayed as the third right-handed image 518. The third right-handed image 518 has a larger display size on the image display section 114 than the first right-handed image 75 (see FIG. 74 (19)). Further, the third right-handed image 518 is displayed when the specific time saving start image 517 is displayed, and is not displayed when the specific time saving start image 517 is not displayed. However, the third right-handed image 518 may be displayed when the specific time saving start image 517 is not displayed.

(Second transition image 519)
As shown in FIG. 87(7), the second transition image 519 is displayed on the image display section 114. The second transition image 519 is an image displayed when the stage image 61 is switched. In this embodiment, the stage image 61 corresponding to the normal gaming state is switched to the stage image 61 corresponding to the specific time-saving gaming state via the second transition image 519. In the illustrated example, an image imitating a shutter is displayed as the second transition image 519. The second transition image 519 is displayed on the entire surface of the image display section 114. However, the second transition image 519 may be displayed on a part of the image display section 114 and not be displayed on the other part.

(Mode start image 520)
As shown in FIG. 87(8), a mode start image 520 is displayed on the image display section 114. The mode start image 520 is an image that notifies that the production of the mode in the specific time saving gaming state is started. In the illustrated example, the mode start image 520 shows the text "Enter chance mode!".

(Specific time saving selection image 521)
As shown in FIG. 87(9), a specific time saving selection image 521 is displayed on the image display section 114. The specific time saving selection image 521 is an image for allowing the player to select the mode of performance in the specific time saving gaming state. In the illustrated example, in the specific time saving selection image 521, one of three modes "a", "b", and "c" can be selected. The player can select one of the modes by operating the production key 162 while the specific time saving selection image 521 is displayed.

(Specific time saving remaining number of times image 524)
As shown in FIG. 87(10), the image display section 114 displays a specific time saving remaining number image 524. The specific time saving remaining number of times image 524 is an image that suggests the remaining number of special symbol lottery in the specific time saving gaming state. In the illustrated example, the text "294" indicating that the remaining number of special symbol drawings in the specific time saving game state is 294 is displayed as the specific time saving remaining number image 524. Note that the specific time saving remaining number image 524 differs from the special time saving remaining number image 79 (see FIG. 74 (22)) in that the image does not include the text "times".

(4th right-handed image 525)
As shown in FIG. 87(12), the fourth right-handed image 525 is displayed on the image display section 114. This fourth right-hitting image 525 is an image for urging the player to shoot the game ball toward the right side in the game area 111. In the illustrated example, as the fourth right-handed player image 525, an arrow mark pointing to the right and the text "Right-handed player" are displayed. Furthermore, the fourth right-handed image 525 has a larger display size on the image display unit 114 than the first right-handed image 75 (see FIG. 74 (19)) and the third right-handed image 518 (see FIG. 85 (6)). .

(Arrival notification image 526)
As shown in FIG. 89(4), the arrival notification image 526 is displayed on the image display section 114. The arrival notification image 526 indicates the number of times the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner (the number of variable effects) that is required from the establishment of a predetermined condition (RAM clearing, reset of the number of variations) until the specific time saving gaming state is reached. This is an image that notifies you that the number of times has been reached. The arrival notification image 526 is displayed when the last round of variable effects necessary to enter the specific time-saving gaming state is completed. In the illustrated example, an image of "0" is displayed as the arrival notification image 526, indicating that the number of variable effects necessary to enter the specific time-saving gaming state is 0.

(End image 527)
As shown in FIG. 96(18), the end image 527 is displayed on the image display section 114. The end image 527 is displayed when the specific time-saving game state ends without a jackpot game being played. In the illustrated example, the text "End..." is shown as the end image 527.

(1st hit suggestion image 528)
As shown in FIG. 101(3), a first winning suggestion image 528 is displayed on the image display section 114. The first winning suggestion image 528 is an image that suggests that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winnings in the second starting hole 122 in the normal gaming state is a big hit or a small win. In this embodiment, when the determination result of the special symbol lottery performed while the first transition image 512 (see FIG. 100 (2)) is a jackpot or small win, the first win suggestion image 528 is displayed. Is displayed. That is, by displaying the first winning suggestion image 528, it is suggested to the player that the determination result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot or a small jackpot. In the illustrated example, as the first winning suggestion image 528, the text "It's still going on" and an image of a character appearing in the content that is the subject of the pachinko game machine 100 are displayed. In addition, the first winning suggestion image 528 is not displayed in the variable presentation based on winning in the first starting opening 121 in the normal gaming state, the variable presentation in the special time-saving gaming state, and the variable presentation in the specific time-saving gaming state. Good too. However, the first winning suggestion image 528 may also be displayed in the variable presentation based on winning in the first start opening 121 in the normal gaming state, the variable presentation in the special time-saving gaming state, and the variable presentation in the specific time-saving gaming state. .

(Remaining time image 529)
As shown in FIG. 102(8), a remaining time image 529 is displayed on the image display section 114. The remaining time image 529 is an image showing the remaining time until the second large prize opening door 126D shifts from the open state to the closed state. In this embodiment, if a game ball does not enter the second large winning hole 126 within a predetermined time after the second large winning hole door 126D opens, the remaining time image 529 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the text “3:00 seconds left” is shown as the remaining time image 529.

(Second hit suggestion image 91)
As shown in FIG. 109(3), a second winning suggestion image 91 is displayed on the image display section 114. This second winning suggestion image 91 is displayed when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot or a small win, and is not displayed when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is neither a jackpot nor a small win. Therefore, by displaying the second winning suggestion image 91, it is suggested to the player that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big win or a small win. This second winning suggestion image 91 may be a moving image. In addition, while the second winning suggestion image 91 is displayed in a variable performance based on winning in the first starting port 121 in the special time saving gaming state and in a variable presentation based on winning in the first starting port 121 in the specific time saving gaming state. , a variable performance based on winning in the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state, a variable presentation based on winning in the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state, and a winning in the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state In the variation effect based on , the second winning suggestion image 91 may not be displayed. That is, a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winning to the first starting port 121 in the special time-saving gaming state or winning to the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state is a jackpot or a small winning. Only in this case, the second winning suggestion image 91 may be displayed.

(Accessory effect image 92)
As shown in FIG. 112 (12), the accessory effect image 92 is displayed on the image display section 114. This accessory effect image 92 is an effect image that is displayed when the accessory effect is being performed. In the illustrated example, a blue image as the accessory effect image 92 is displayed on the image display section 114 around an area overlapping with the medium movable accessory 115B.

(Second start effect image 93)
As shown in FIG. 116(5), the second start effect image 93 is displayed on the image display section 114. This second start effect image 93 is displayed in a variable effect based on winning in the second start opening 122. That is, in the variable effect based on winning in the first start opening 121, the second start effect image 93 is not displayed.

(Radio wave error notification image 530)
As shown in FIG. 118(2), a radio wave error notification image 530 is displayed on the image display section 114. The radio wave error notification image 530 is an image that reports a radio wave error. In the illustrated example, the text "Radio wave error" is shown as the radio wave error notification image 530.

(Returning image 531)
As shown in FIG. 119(2), a returning image 531 is displayed on the image display section 114. The returning image 531 is an image showing that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is returning from a power-off state. In this embodiment, after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on and before the decorative pattern 41 is displayed, the returning image 531 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the text “Returning” is shown as the returning image 531.

(Magnetic error notification image 532)
As shown in FIG. 119(3), a magnetic error notification image 532 is displayed on the image display section 114. The magnetic error notification image 532 is an image that reports a magnetic error. In the illustrated example, the text “A magnet has been detected” is shown as the magnetic error notification image 532.

(Variable effect example 1)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 65 to 69, a variable presentation (variation presentation example 1) of the decorative pattern 41 performed by the presentation control section 300 using the image display section 114 will be specifically explained. Variation performance example 1 is a variation performance example of the decorative pattern 41 based on a game ball winning in the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state. In addition, in the variation performance example 1, the variation performance is performed five times.
Note that the five fluctuating performances shown in FIGS. 65 to 69 are selected in the order of "ER1", "ER3", "ER2", "ER2", and "ER6" as the "fluctuation rendering pattern" in FIG. 59. This is a variable performance that is performed depending on the situation. Furthermore, these five fluctuating performances are the 100th to 104th fluctuating performances after the number of fluctuating displays of the special symbol is reset by RAM clearing. Further, in these five variable performances, a preliminary determination performance is executed. This pre-determination performance is a performance that is executed when "AR1", "AR3", "AR2", "AR2", and "AR6" are selected in the order of "pre-determination performance pattern" in FIG. 56.

As shown in FIG. 65(1), the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped in the image display section 114 as the previous special pattern is stopped and displayed by the production control section 300. shall be. At this time, the image display section 114 displays a decorative pattern 41, a pending number display 55, a small pattern 56, a stage image 61, and an execution number image 501. Further, at this time, the pending number display 55 of the first starting port 121 indicates "0", which is the pending number of winnings to the first starting port 121, and the pending number display 55 of the second starting port 122 indicates the pending number of winnings to the first starting port 121. Indicates “0” which is the pending number of prizes for the 2nd starting slot. Further, the execution number image 501 shows the text “99 GAME”.

Then, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 121, as shown in FIG. 65(2), the decorative symbols 41 and the small symbols 56 begin to vary as the special symbols begin to be displayed. In this embodiment, the left decorative pattern 41, the middle decorative pattern 41, the right decorative pattern 41, and the small pattern 56 are displayed in a variable manner by sequentially displaying the numbers "1" to "9". That is, in this embodiment, the numbers of the left decorative pattern 41, the middle decorative pattern 41, the right decorative pattern 41, and the small pattern 56 can be changed individually. Note that the left decorative pattern 41, the middle decorative pattern 41, the right decorative pattern 41, and the small pattern 56 may display characters different from numbers, such as English letters, for example. Further, as the game ball enters the first starting port 121, a winning sound is outputted from the speaker 156 to notify that the first starting port 121 has won a prize. Further, in this embodiment, while the variable effect is being executed, the speaker 156 outputs effect sound corresponding to the variable effect that is being executed. Further, although not shown in the drawings, in this embodiment, while the variable effect is being executed, the frame lamp 157 and the board lamp 116 emit light in a light emitting manner according to the variable effect that is being executed.

In addition, when it is shown in the drawing that the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 are displayed in a particularly high-speed variable display (scrolling) and are difficult to see, the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 are Indicate by arrow (↓). Further, in the example shown in FIG. 65(2), the decorative pattern 41 is arranged such that the left decorative pattern 41, the middle decorative pattern 41, and the right decorative pattern 41 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and are moved in the vertical direction when displayed in a variable manner. (scrolling), but is not limited to this mode. For example, in the decorative pattern 41, the left decorative pattern 41, the middle decorative pattern 41, and the right decorative pattern 41 may be arranged side by side in the vertical direction, and each may be moved (scrolled) in the horizontal direction.
Further, the state in which the decorative pattern 41 is displayed by an arrow (↓) in the drawing is not limited to the state in which the decorative pattern 41 is difficult to see. For example, a state in which the decorative pattern 41 is displayed by an arrow (↓) in the drawing may be a state in which the decorative pattern 41 is not displayed. That is, the state in which the decorative pattern 41 is displayed by the arrow (↓) in the drawings may be any state in which the decorative pattern 41 is invisible or difficult to see.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 65(1), in a state where the winning of the first starting hole 121 is not pending and the special symbol is not changing, the game ball is placed in the first starting hole 121. When the player wins a prize, first, the winning to the first starting port 121 is suspended. In this state, a variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern table (see FIG. 24). Therefore, the "number of reservations" when the fluctuation pattern is selected is "1". Then, when the variation pattern is selected, the number of pending prizes for the first starting opening 121 is subtracted. Further, although not shown in the drawings, when a game ball enters the second starting port 122 in a state where there is no hold on the winning of the second starting port 122 and the special symbol does not change, first, the winning ball enters the second starting port 122. A hold is placed on winning a prize in the 2-starting slot 122. In this state, a variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern table. Therefore, the "number of reservations" when the fluctuation pattern is selected is "1". Then, when the variation pattern is selected, the number of reservations for winnings in the second starting port 122 is subtracted.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 65(1), in a state where the winning of the first starting hole 121 is not pending and the special symbol is not changing, the game ball is placed in the first starting hole 121. When the player wins a prize, "1" is displayed on the pending number display 55 of the first starting port 121, and the pending image 52 is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 65(2), "0" is displayed on the pending number display 55 of the first starting port 121. Further, the pending image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51.
In addition, when a game ball is won in the second starting port 122 in a state where there is no reservation of winnings in the second starting port 122 and the special symbols are not changing, the number of pending prizes in the second starting port 122 is displayed. 55 is displayed, and at the same time, the pending image 52 is displayed. After that, "0" is displayed on the pending number display 55 of the second starting port 122. Further, the pending image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51.

Next, when three game balls enter the first starting port 121, three pending images 52 are displayed as shown in FIG. 65(3). At this time, each time a game ball enters the first starting port 121, a winning sound is output from the speaker 156 to notify that the game ball has entered the first starting port 121. Further, “3” is displayed on the pending number display 55 of the first starting port 121.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(4), the left decorative pattern 41 scrolls at a low speed and then temporarily stops at the position where it was fixed and stopped until the start of the fluctuation. More specifically, the number "4" which is the left decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped. Also, at this time, a game ball enters the first starting port 121, and the fourth pending image 52 is displayed. Also, at this time, based on the winning at the first starting port 121, a winning light emission effect is performed. In the illustrated example, the first starting port 121 emits blue light due to the winning lighting effect. In addition, the speaker 156 outputs a sound effect for a lighting effect when winning a prize. This sound effect is a sound different from the winning sound that notifies the winning to the first starting port 121.
In addition, when it is shown in the drawing that the decorative pattern 41 or small pattern 56 is temporarily stopped, in order to make it easier to understand, a display similar to a double quotation mark is placed around the temporarily stopped decorative pattern 41 or small pattern 56. Expressed using.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(5), the right decorative pattern 41 scrolls at a low speed and then temporarily stops at the position where it was fixed and stopped until the start of the fluctuation. More specifically, the number "1" which is the right decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped.
Next, the medium decorative pattern 41 scrolls at a low speed and then temporarily stops at the position where it was fixed and stopped until the start of the fluctuation. More specifically, the number "2", which is the middle decorative pattern 41, is temporarily stopped. Then, after the three decorative patterns 41 temporarily stop, as the special pattern stops changing, the three decorative patterns 41 finally stop as shown in FIG. 65(6). The combination "421" of the decorative symbols 41 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss. Further, as the special symbols stop changing, the three small symbols 56 also come to a fixed stop. In other words, in this variable performance, all the small symbols 56 are fixedly stopped without temporarily stopping. At this time, the combination "421" of the small patterns 56 matches the combination of the decorative patterns 41. Also, at this time, the display content of the number of executions image 501 is updated to "100 GAME".

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(7), the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 start to change as the next special pattern starts to be displayed. Further, the pending number display 55 of the first starting port 121 switches from "4" to "3". Further, the second, third, and fourth pending images 52 are moved closer to the display position of the variable image 51. Also, at this time, the first pending image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51. Further, after the pending image 52 is moved, a change effect is executed, and a changed image 62 is displayed on the third pending image 52. In the illustrated example, a blue change image 62 is displayed on the third pending image 52 due to the change effect. Further, when the change effect is being executed, the sound effect of the change effect is output from the speaker 156. Further, after the start of this variation, the remaining number of times notification effect is started. In the illustrated example, a precursor image 502 is displayed by the remaining number of times notification effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(8), the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 continue to fluctuate. In addition, the remaining number of times notification effect continues to be performed. In the illustrated example, a remaining number of arrivals image 503 is displayed by the remaining number of times notification effect. Further, the remaining number of arrivals image 503 shows the text “200 more to go”.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(9), the three decorative patterns 41 "125" are displayed and fixed and stopped. At this time, the first chance effect is executed, and the chance image 63 is displayed on the three decorative patterns 41. In the illustrated example, a blue chance image 63 is displayed on the three decorative patterns 41 due to the first chance effect. Further, as the special symbols stop changing, the small symbols 56 are also displayed all together and are fixed and stopped. At this time, the combination "125" of the small patterns 56 matches the combination of the decorative patterns 41. Also, at this time, the display content of the execution number image 501 is updated to "101 GAME". Also, at this time, the display content of the remaining number of arrivals image 503 is updated to "199 remaining".

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(10), the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 start to change as the next special pattern starts to be displayed. Further, the pending number display 55 of the first starting port 121 switches from "3" to "2".
Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (11), the three decorative patterns 41 "853" are displayed and fixed and stopped. At this time, a second chance effect is executed, and chance images 63 are displayed on the three decorative patterns 41. In the illustrated example, a green chance image 63 is displayed on the three decorative patterns 41 due to the second chance effect. Further, as the special symbols stop changing, the small symbols 56 are also displayed all together and are fixed and stopped. At this time, the combination "853" of the small patterns 56 matches the combination of the decorative patterns 41. Also, at this time, the display content of the execution number image 501 is updated to "102 GAME". Also, at this time, the display content of the remaining number of arrivals image 503 is updated to "198 remaining".

Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (12), the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 begin to change as the next special pattern starts to be displayed. Further, the pending number display 55 of the first starting port 121 switches from "2" to "1".

Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (13), a zone effect is started. In the illustrated example, a zone notification image 64 is displayed by the zone effect. The zone notification image 64 includes the text "Entering the Opportunity Zone!". Also, at this time, a character performance is performed. In the illustrated example, the left movable accessory 115A moves to cover a part of the image display section 114 due to the accessory effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (14), the three decorative patterns 41 "553" are displayed and fixed and stopped. At this time, the third chance effect is executed, and the chance image 63 is displayed on the three decorative patterns 41. That is, the final chance effect out of the three chance effect effects is executed. In the illustrated example, a red chance image 63 is displayed on three decorative patterns 41 due to the third chance effect. Further, as the special symbols stop changing, the small symbols 56 are also displayed all together and are fixed and stopped. At this time, the combination "553" of the small symbols 56 matches the combination of the decorative symbols 41. Also, at this time, a zone identification image 65 is displayed. Also, at this time, the display content of the execution number image 501 is updated to "103 GAME". Also, at this time, the display content of the remaining number of arrivals image 503 is updated to "197 remaining".

Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (15), the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 start to change as the next special pattern starts to be displayed. Further, the pending number display 55 of the first starting port 121 switches from "1" to "0". Also, at this time, effect production is started. In the illustrated example, a zone effect image 66 is displayed by effect rendering. More specifically, a blue zone effect image 66 is displayed. Also, at this time, a sound effect is executed, and the speaker 156 outputs the sound "Let's go!". This sound production that outputs the sound "Let's go!" is a production that makes the player expect that the lottery result of the special symbol will be a jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (16), a role model is performed. In the illustrated example, the middle movable accessory 115B moves to cover a part of the image display section 114 due to the accessory effect. Also, at this time, a change effect is executed, and a change image 62 is displayed on the change image 51. In the illustrated example, a green change image 62 is displayed on the change image 51 due to the change effect. Further, when the change effect is being executed, the sound effect of the change effect is output from the speaker 156.
Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (17), the number "4" which is the left decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (18), a reach promotion effect is executed. In the illustrated example, a reach-increasing performance is performed using the number "4", which is the right decorative pattern 41.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (19), a reach effect is executed. More specifically, the number "4", which is the right decorative pattern 41, temporarily stops and enters the ready-to-reach state.
Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (20), the SP reach effect is executed. During execution of the SP reach effect, the stage image 61, the number of executions image 501, and the remaining number of reaches image 503 are hidden, and the SP reach image 67 is displayed. Further, when the SP ready-to-win effect is being performed, the display size of the left and right decorative symbols 41 becomes smaller and they are displayed in a less decorative manner. Further, the left and right decorative patterns 41 are displayed on the upper side of the image display section 114. In the illustrated example, the left decorative pattern 41 is displayed at the upper left corner of the image display section 114, and the right decorative pattern 41 is displayed at the upper right corner of the image display section 114. Note that the display positions of the left and right decorative symbols 41 when the SP ready-to-reach effect is performed are not limited to the illustrated example. When the SP ready-to-reach effect is being performed, the left and right decorative symbols 41 can be placed at any position in the image display section 114 if the display position is different from the display position before the SP ready-to-reach effect (see FIG. 68 (19)). may be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (21), the SPSP reach effect is executed. During the execution of the SPSP reach effect, the SPSP reach image 68 is displayed. Moreover, at this time, the number "4" which is the upper and lower small patterns 56 is temporarily stopped. On the other hand, the small and medium-sized symbols 56 maintain high-speed fluctuations. Moreover, at this time, the decorative pattern 41 and the variable image 51 are hidden.
Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (22), a button operation effect is executed and a button operation image 69 is displayed.

Then, when the player operates the effect button 161 while the button operation image 69 is displayed, the number "5" which is the middle decorative pattern 41 temporarily stops, as shown in FIG. 68 (23). At this time, the middle decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a less decorative display mode and in a larger display size than the left and right decorative patterns 41.
Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (24), three highly decorative patterns 41 are temporarily stopped. Also, at this time, the stage image 61, the number of executions image 501, and the remaining number of reaches image 503 are displayed again. In this case, the execution count image 501 is displayed according to the display content before being hidden (see FIG. 68 (19)). On the other hand, the remaining number of arrivals image 503 is displayed with updated content from the display content before being hidden (see FIG. 68 (19)). In the illustrated example, the text "196 remaining" is shown in the remaining number of arrivals image 503. Further, the fluctuation image 51 is not displayed.

Then, as the special symbols stop changing, the three decorative symbols 41 are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 69 (25). The combination "454" of the decorative symbols 41 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss. Further, as the special symbols stop changing, the small symbols 56 also stop. At this time, the combination "454" of the small patterns 56 matches the combination of the decorative patterns 41. Also, at this time, the variable image 51 is hidden. Also, at this time, the display content of the execution number image 501 is updated to "104 GAME". On the other hand, the display content of the remaining number of arrivals image 503 was updated when it was redisplayed (see FIG. 68 (24)), so it is not updated at this timing.
Note that the update timing of the display content when the execution count image 501 is redisplayed and the update timing of the display content when the remaining attainment count image 503 is redisplayed may be the same. In this case, both the number of executions image 501 and the remaining number of times reached image 503 may be re-displayed with the updated display content, or may be re-displayed with the display content before the update.

Next, when a predetermined period of time has passed after the special symbols stop changing, a menu display image 504 is displayed as shown in FIG. 69 (26). Note that at this time, the speaker 156 is outputting performance sound corresponding to the previous variable performance. Further, at this time, the frame lamp 157 and the board lamp 116 are emitting light in a color corresponding to the previous variable performance. In the illustrated example, the frame lamp 157 and the board lamp 116 emit blue light.

Next, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the menu display image 504 was displayed, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 157 and the board lamp 116 changes, as shown in FIG. 69 (27). In the illustrated example, the frame lamp 157 and the panel lamp 116 emit green light. Also, at this time, the effect sound from the speaker 156 according to the previous variable effect is smaller than when the variable effect is being executed or when the display of the menu image 506 has started (see FIG. 69 (26)). The output is based on the volume. Note that the effect sound corresponding to the previous variable effect may be output from the speaker 156 at a lower volume when the display of the menu image 506 is started than during execution of the variable effect.
After a further predetermined period of time has elapsed, a customer waiting image 505 is displayed as shown in FIG. 69 (28). Further, when the customer waiting image 505 is displayed, the number of executions image 501, the remaining number of arrivals image 503, the decorative pattern 41, the pending number display 55, the small pattern 56, and the stage image 61 are hidden. Moreover, at this time, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 157 and the panel lamp 116 changes. In the illustrated example, the frame lamp 157 and the panel lamp 116 emit red light. Also, at this time, no sound is output from the speaker 156. Note that even when the customer waiting image 505 is displayed, the pending number display 55 may be displayed.

Then, when the player operates the performance button 161 while the customer waiting image 505 is displayed, the customer waiting image 505 is hidden, as shown in FIG. 69 (29), and the stage image 61, A decorative pattern 41, a pending number display 55, a small pattern 56, an execution number image 501, a remaining number of times reached image 503, and a menu display image 504 are displayed.
Furthermore, when the player operates the effect button 161 while the menu display image 504 is being displayed, a menu image 506 is displayed as shown in FIG. 69 (30). When the menu image 506 is displayed, the number of executions image 501, the remaining number of attainments image 503, the decorative pattern 41, the pending number display 55, and the small pattern 56 are hidden. Note that the pending number display 55 may be displayed even when the menu image 506 is displayed.

In addition, in variation production example 1, the performance of the medium movable accessory 115B (see FIG. 67 (16)), the change performance of the fluctuation image 51 (see FIG. 67 (16)), and the reach stimulation performance (see FIG. 67 (18)) ), reach effect (see Figure 68 (19)), SP reach effect (see Figure 68 (20)), SPSP reach effect (see Figure 68 (21)), and button operation effect (see Figure 68 (22)). This is an effect that is executed in "ER6" (see FIG. 59), which is the variable effect pattern selected in the effect selection process (see FIG. 38(b)). On the other hand, there is a lighting effect when winning a prize (see FIG. 65 (4)), a change effect of the reserved image 52 (see FIG. 66 (7)), and a third chance effect (see FIGS. 66 (9), (11), and FIG. 67). (14)), the role performance of the left movable accessory 115A (see Figure 67 (13)), the zone performance (see Figure 67 (13)), the sound performance (see Figure 67 (15)), and the effect performance (see Figure 67 (15)). Refer to FIG. 67 (15)) is a performance that is not included in being executed in any of the variable performance patterns selected in the performance selection process. That is, each of the above performances based on the preliminary determination results may be executed in the preliminary determination performance pattern "AR6" (see FIG. 56) selected in the preliminary determination performance selection process (see FIG. 38(a)). This is the included performance.

As mentioned above, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can execute the special performance based on the number of times the variation is executed in the normal gaming state. Here, as the special effect, for example, the display of the remaining number of arrivals image 503, etc. can be mentioned. Then, the performance control unit 300 does not execute the special performance when the number of fluctuations in the normal gaming state is less than a predetermined number of times, and executes the special performance when the number of fluctuations in the normal gaming state is equal to or more than the predetermined number of times. It is doable.
In this case, compared to the case where the special effect is executed regardless of the number of times the variation is executed, it is possible to give the player a special feeling of executing the variation in the normal gaming state, and to execute a highly interesting production. It is possible to provide a pachinko game machine 100 that is possible.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a menu image 506 is displayed based on the operation of the production button 161 while the menu display image 504 or the customer waiting image 505 is displayed. On the other hand, for example, even if the performance button 161 is operated while the SP reach performance is being executed in the variable performance (see FIG. 68 (20)), the menu image 506 is not displayed. That is, in this embodiment, the period during which the menu display image 504 and the customer waiting image 505 are displayed is determined as the valid period of operation of the production button 161.

(Variable effect example 2)
FIG. 70 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, with reference to FIG. 70, another specific example (variation effect example 2) of the variation effect of the decorative pattern 41 will be described. Variation performance example 2 is a variation performance example of the decorative pattern 41 based on a game ball winning in the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state. Note that the fluctuating performance shown in FIG. 70 is a fluctuating performance that is executed when "ER3" is selected as the "fluctuating performance" in FIG. 59. Furthermore, this fluctuating performance is the 51st fluctuating performance since the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 was turned off without the RAM being cleared, and it is the 51st fluctuating performance since the number of fluctuating displays of special symbols has been reset. This is the 193rd variation performance. In addition, in the following explanation, the points that are different from the above-described variable effect example 1 will be mainly explained, and the explanation of the points that are the same as the variable effect example 1 may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 70(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 are fixed and stopped in the image display section 114 by the effect control section 300. There is. Also, at this time, a stage image 61, a pending image 52, and an execution number image 501 are displayed. Also, at this time, "4" is displayed on the pending number display 55 of the first starting port 121. Further, the execution number image 501 shows the text “50 GAME”.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(2), the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 start to change as the next special pattern starts to be displayed. Further, the number of reservations display 55 of the first starting port 121 switches from "4" to "3". Also, at this time, a clear negative effect is started. In the illustrated example, a clear negative image 507 is displayed by the clear negative effect.
Next, as shown in FIG. 70(3), the remaining number of arrivals image 503 is displayed in the area where the clear negative image 507 was displayed on the image display section 114. More specifically, the remaining number of arrivals image 503 is displayed in an area that includes at least a portion of the area where the clear negative image 507 was displayed. The remaining number of arrivals image 503 shows the text “108 remaining”.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(4), the three decorative patterns 41 "421" are displayed and fixed and stopped. Further, as the special symbols stop changing, the small symbols 56 also stop. At this time, the combination "421" of the small patterns 56 matches the combination of the decorative patterns 41. Also, at this time, the display content of the execution number image 501 is updated to "51 GAME". Also, at this time, the display content of the remaining number of arrivals image 503 is updated to "107 remaining".

(Variable effect example 3)
FIGS. 71 to 73 are diagrams showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 71 to 73, another specific example (variation effect example 3) of the variation effect of the decorative pattern 41 will be described. Variation presentation example 3 is an example of variation presentation of decorative symbols 41 based on a game ball winning in the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state.
Note that FIGS. 71 to 73 are variable effects that are executed when "EB4" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in FIG. 59. Further, in this variable performance, a preliminary determination performance is executed. This pre-determination performance is a performance that is executed when “AB4” is selected as the “pre-determination performance pattern” in FIG. In addition, in the following explanation, points that are different from each of the above-mentioned variable performance examples will be mainly explained, and descriptions of points that are the same as each of the variable performance examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 71(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 are fixed and stopped in the image display section 114 by the effect control section 300. There is. Also, at this time, a stage image 61, a pending image 52, an execution count image 501, and a remaining reach count image 503 are displayed. Also, at this time, "1" is displayed on the pending number display 55 of the first starting port 121. Further, the execution number image 501 shows the text “200 GAME”. Further, the remaining number of arrivals image 503 shows the text “100 more to go”.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(2), as the next special symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner, the decorative symbols 41 and the small symbols 56 begin to vary. Further, the pending number display 55 of the first starting port 121 switches from "1" to "0". Also, at this time, a sound effect is executed, and the speaker 156 outputs a voice saying "Jackpot!?". This sound performance that outputs the sound "Jackpot!?" is executed in a variable performance in which the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot, and is not performed in a variable performance in which the special symbol lottery result is not a jackpot. In other words, the sound production that outputs the sound "Jackpot!?" is a production that suggests that the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot. Note that the sound performance that suggests that the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot is not limited to the above-mentioned example, and may be any sound performance that outputs any sound.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(3), a pseudo continuous effect is executed and a pseudo continuous image 70 is displayed. Also, at this time, a pseudo-connected effect image 71 is displayed. In the illustrated example, a blue pseudo-link effect image 71 is displayed around the pseudo-link image 70. Also, at this time, the number of executions image 501 and the remaining number of times of reaching image 503 are hidden.
Next, as shown in FIG. 71(4), the variation of the decorative pattern 41 is started again. Also, at this time, a pseudo consecutive number image 72 is displayed. In the illustrated example, since this is the second variable display, the pseudo consecutive number image 72 includes the text "x2".

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(5), a zone effect is executed and a zone notification image 64 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the zone notification image 64 includes the text "Entering the Super Hot Zone!". This zone performance is a performance that makes the player expect a jackpot in the variation of the special symbol being executed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 71(6), the number "5" which is the left and right decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped, and the ready-to-win effect is executed. Also, at this time, a zone identification image 65 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(7), a change effect of the change image 51 is executed, and a change image 62 is displayed on the change image 51. In the illustrated example, a red change image 62 is displayed on the change image 51 due to the change effect. Further, when the change effect is being executed, the sound effect of the change effect is output from the speaker 156.
Next, as shown in FIG. 72(8), the SP reach effect is executed and the stage image 61 is hidden.
Next, as shown in FIG. 72(9), the SPSP reach effect is executed. Moreover, at this time, the number "5" which is the upper and lower small patterns 56 is temporarily stopped. On the other hand, the small and medium-sized symbols 56 maintain high-speed fluctuations. Moreover, at this time, the decorative pattern 41 and the variable image 51 are hidden.
Next, as shown in FIG. 72(10), a button operation effect is executed and a button operation image 69 is displayed.

Then, when the player operates the effect button 161 while the button operation image 69 is displayed, the accessory effect is executed as shown in FIG. 72(11). In the illustrated example, the middle movable accessory 115B moves and covers a part of the image display section 114 due to the accessory effect. Further, at this time, the small symbols 56 temporarily stop at the combination of "555", thereby informing the player that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.
Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (12), the decorative pattern 41 of the number zero is temporarily stopped. In the illustrated example, the decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a combination of "555". Further, at this time, the display size of the decorative pattern 41 is larger than that of the display mode during execution of the SP ready-to-reach effect (see FIG. 72 (8)).

Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (13), a promotion promotion effect is executed. In the promotion promotion performance, a button operation performance is executed. In the illustrated example, a button operation image 69 is displayed by the button operation effect.
Then, when the player operates the effect button 161 while the button operation image 69 is displayed, a promotion effect is executed as shown in FIG. 73 (14). In the illustrated example, the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 with low decorativeness are temporarily stopped by the combination of "777" due to the promotion effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (15), the three decorative patterns 41 are temporarily stopped in a highly decorative display mode. Also, at this time, the stage image 61 is displayed again. On the other hand, the fluctuation image 51, the number of executions image 501, and the remaining number of reaches image 503 are not displayed.
Then, as the special symbols stop changing, the decorative symbols 41 are fixed and stopped as shown in FIG. 73 (16). The combination of numbers "777" of this decorative pattern 41 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. Further, "777" is fixed and stopped as the small symbol 56. In other words, the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 are displayed in a matching combination of "777".

Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (17), an opening image 74 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (18), a promotion image 508 is displayed. In the promotion image 508, a specific area image 509 is displayed.

Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the promotion image 508 was displayed, the first right-handed image 75, the in-round image 76, and the number of rounds image 77 are displayed, as shown in FIG. 74 (19). In the illustrated example, the text “Round 1” is displayed on the round number image 77.
Next, when the final round ends, a special time saving selection image 510 is displayed as shown in FIG. 74 (20). In the illustrated example, the cursor is placed on the "A" mode in the special time saving selection image 510.
Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the special time saving selection image 510 was displayed, the special time saving start image 78 is displayed as shown in FIG. 74 (21). Also, at this time, the second right-handed image 511 is displayed together with the first right-handed image 75.

Next, in the special time saving game state, as shown in FIG. 74 (22), "777", which is a decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness, is fixed and stopped on the image display section 114. It should be noted that the decorative symbols 41 displayed at this time correspond to the sequence of numbers that are finalized and stopped before the jackpot game is executed, that is, when the jackpot is won. Similarly to the decorative pattern 41, the small pattern 56 is fixed and stopped by the sequence of numbers "777". Also, at this time, a stage image 61 corresponding to the special time-saving game state is displayed. In the illustrated example, a moving image with a sea theme is displayed as the stage image 61. Also, at this time, a special time saving remaining number image 79 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the text "30 times" indicating the remaining number of special symbol lottery in the special time saving game state is displayed as the special time saving remaining number image 79. Although not shown, the frame lamp 157 and the board lamp 116 are emitting light in a color (for example, blue) corresponding to the mode "A" at this time. Also, at this time, the speaker 156 outputs a sound effect corresponding to the most recent mode "A".

Furthermore, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the stage image 61 and decorative pattern 41 corresponding to the special time-saving game state were displayed, a menu display image 504 (see FIG. 69 (26)) may be displayed. Moreover, at this time, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 157 and the board lamp 116 may change. For example, the frame lamp 157 and the panel lamp 116 may emit green light in response to the menu display image 504 being displayed. Also, at this time, the performance sound from the speaker 156 is lower in volume than when the display of the stage image 61 and decorative pattern 41 corresponding to the special time saving game state is started (see FIG. 74 (22)). May be output.
Furthermore, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the speaker 156 may no longer output sound. On the other hand, the light emitting manners of the frame lamp 157 and the board lamp 116 do not need to change. Moreover, even if time passes after this, the customer waiting image 505 (see FIG. 69 (28)) does not need to be displayed. That is, in the special time-saving gaming state, regardless of whether before or after the first variable performance is executed, even if the variable performance is not performed and there is no hold, the customer waiting image 505 is not displayed, and the stage image 61, decorative pattern 41, small pattern 56, and special time saving remaining number image 79 do not have to be hidden. However, at this time, when the menu image 506 is displayed in response to the operation of the production button 161, the stage image 61, the decorative pattern 41, the small pattern 56, and the special time saving remaining number image 79 may be hidden. The first right-handed image 75 may be displayed even when the menu image 506 is displayed. Note that when sound is no longer output from the speaker 156, the light emitting manner of the frame lamp 157 and the panel lamp 116 may change, and emit light in red, for example.

Further, after this, when a game ball enters the second starting port 122, a variable performance based on the winning to the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state is started. If there is no hold when this variable performance ends, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 157 and board lamp 116 changes from blue to green as time passes, and the menu display image 504 is displayed. Further, as this time elapses, the effect sound corresponding to the previous variable effect is output at a lower volume, and then no sound is output from the speaker 156. Further, if there is no hold when the variable performance ends, the customer waiting image 505 is not displayed regardless of the length of time during which the variable performance is not performed.

In addition, in example 3 of variable effects, there are pseudo-continuous effects (see Figure 71 (3)), effect effects (see Figure 71 (3)), zone effects (see Figure 71 (5)), and reach effects (see Figure 71 (6)). ), change effect of the fluctuation image 51 (see Fig. 72 (7)), SP reach effect (see Fig. 72 (8)), SPSP reach effect (see Fig. 72 (9)), button operation effect (see Fig. 72 (10) )), the role performance of the medium movable role object 115B (see FIG. 72 (11)), the promotion promotion performance (see FIG. 73 (13)), and the promotion performance (see FIG. 73 (14)) are performed in the performance selection process. This is an effect that is executed in "EB4" (see FIG. 59), which is the variable effect pattern selected in (see FIG. 38(b)). On the other hand, the sound performance (see FIG. 71(2)) is a performance that is not included in the variable performance pattern selected in the performance selection process (see FIG. 38(b)). That is, this sound production based on the preliminary determination result includes being executed in "AB4" (see FIG. 56), which is the preliminary determination performance pattern selected in the preliminary determination performance selection process (see FIG. 38(a)). It is a performance that is very similar.

(Fluctuation effect example 4)
FIGS. 75 to 80 are diagrams showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 75 to 80, another specific example (variation effect example 4) of the variation effect of the decorative pattern 41 will be described. Variable performance example 4 includes a variable performance based on winning at the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state, a variable performance based on winning at the second starting port 122 in the normal gaming state, and a first variable performance in the normal gaming state. This includes a variable performance based on winnings in the starting slot 121. Furthermore, in the variation performance example 4, the variation performance is performed 10 times.

Incidentally, the first five variable performances out of the ten variable performances shown in FIGS. 75 to 80 are variable performances based on winnings in the second starting opening 122 in the special time-saving gaming state. These five fluctuating performances are the fluctuating performances that are executed when "EH1", "EH3", "EH2", "EH2", and "EH5" are selected in the order of "fluctuation performance pattern" in FIG. 61. . Further, in these five variable performances, a preliminary determination performance is executed. This pre-determination performance is a performance that is executed when “AH5” is selected as the “pre-determination performance pattern” in FIG. 57.
Furthermore, the 6th to 9th variable presentations out of the 10 variable presentations shown in FIGS. 75 to 80 are variable presentations based on winnings in the second start opening 122 in the normal gaming state. These 6th to 9th variable effects are variable effects that are executed when "EE1" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in FIG. 60.
Furthermore, the final variable performance among the 10 variable performances shown in FIGS. 75 to 80 is a variable performance based on winning in the first start opening 121 in the normal gaming state. This final fluctuating performance is a fluctuating performance that is executed when "ER2" is selected as the "fluctuating performance pattern" in FIG. 59.
In addition, in the following explanation, the points that are different from each of the above-mentioned variation presentation examples will be mainly explained, and the description of the points that are the same as each variation presentation example may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 75(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control section 300 displays the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 with low decorativeness on the image display section 114. Definitely stopped. Also, at this time, the stage image 61, the first right-handed image 75, and the special time saving remaining number image 79 are displayed. In the illustrated example, the text “5 times” is displayed as the special time saving remaining number image 79. Further, the pending number display 55 of the first starting port 121 indicates "3", which is the pending number of winnings to the first starting port 121, and the pending number display 55 of the second starting port 122 indicates "3", which is the pending number of winnings to the first starting port 121. Indicates "0", which is the pending number of prizes.

Then, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 122, as shown in FIG. 75(2), the decorative symbols 41 and the small symbols 56 begin to vary as the special symbols begin to be displayed. Also, at this time, the special time saving remaining number image 79 switches from "5 times" to "4 times". Also, at this time, a variable image 51 is displayed. In addition, as the game ball enters the second starting port 122, a winning sound is output from the speaker 156 to notify that the game ball has entered the second starting port 122.

Next, when four game balls land in the second starting port 122, four pending images 52 are displayed as shown in FIG. 75(3). At this time, each time a game ball enters the second starting port 122, a winning sound is output from the speaker 156 to notify that the game ball has entered the second starting port 122. Further, “4” is displayed on the pending number display 55 of the second starting port 122.
Next, as shown in FIG. 75(4), the three decorative patterns 41 "421" are displayed and fixed and stopped. Further, as the special symbols stop changing, the small symbols 56 are also displayed all together and are fixed and stopped. At this time, the combination "421" of the small patterns 56 matches the combination of the decorative patterns 41.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(5), as the next special symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner, the decorative symbols 41 and the small symbols 56 begin to vary. Further, the pending number display 55 of the second starting port 122 switches from "4" to "3". Further, the special time saving remaining number image 79 switches from "4 times" to "3 times".
Next, as shown in FIG. 75(6), the three decorative symbols 41 "125" are displayed and fixed and stopped. Further, as the special symbols stop changing, the small symbols 56 are also displayed all together and are fixed and stopped. At this time, the combination "125" of the small patterns 56 matches the combination of the decorative patterns 41.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(7), the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 start to change as the next special pattern starts to be displayed. Further, the pending number display 55 of the second starting port 122 switches from "3" to "2". Further, the special time saving remaining number of times image 79 switches from "3 times" to "2 times".
Next, as shown in FIG. 76(8), the three decorative patterns 41 "853" are displayed and fixed and stopped. Further, as the special symbols stop changing, the small symbols 56 are also displayed all together and are fixed and stopped. At this time, the combination "853" of the small symbols 56 matches the combination of the decorative symbols 41.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(9), as the next special symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner, the decorative symbols 41 and the small symbols 56 begin to vary. Further, the pending number display 55 of the second starting port 122 switches from "2" to "1". Further, the special time saving remaining number image 79 switches from "2 times" to "1 time".
Next, as shown in FIG. 76(10), the three decorative patterns 41 "731" are displayed and fixed and stopped. Further, as the special symbols stop changing, the small symbols 56 are also displayed all together and are fixed and stopped. At this time, the combination "731" of the small patterns 56 matches the combination of the decorative patterns 41.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(11), the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 start to change as the next special pattern starts to be displayed. Further, the pending number display 55 of the second starting port 122 switches from "1" to "0". Further, the special time saving remaining number image 79 switches from "1 time" to "0 time". Also, at this time, a character performance is performed. In the illustrated example, the left movable accessory 115A moves to cover a part of the image display section 114 due to the accessory effect. Also, at this time, a sound effect is executed, and the speaker 156 outputs the sound "Let's go!". In addition, when the last variable effect is executed in the special time-saving game state, the text "LAST" may be shown in the special time-saving remaining number 79 instead of the text "0 times".
Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (12), the number "4" which is the left decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (13), a reach promotion effect is executed. In the illustrated example, a reach-increasing performance is performed using the number "4", which is the right decorative pattern 41. Also, at this time, a reach-increasing effect image 94 is displayed. In the illustrated example, a blue reach-increasing effect image 94 is displayed around the right decorative pattern 41.
Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (14), the number "4" which is the right decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped, and a ready-to-win effect is executed. Also, at this time, a character performance is performed. In the illustrated example, the middle movable accessory 115B moves to cover a part of the image display section 114 due to the accessory effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (15), the SP reach effect is executed and the stage image 61 is hidden. When the SP ready-to-reach effect is executed, the display size of the left and right decorative symbols 41 becomes smaller and the display area on the image display section 114 changes. In the illustrated example, the left and right decorative patterns 41 are displayed on the upper side of the image display section 114.
Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (16), the SPSP reach effect is executed. Moreover, at this time, the number "4" which is the upper and lower small patterns 56 is temporarily stopped. On the other hand, the small and medium-sized symbols 56 maintain high-speed fluctuations. Moreover, at this time, the decorative pattern 41 and the variable image 51 are hidden.
Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (17), a button operation effect is executed and a button operation image 69 is displayed.

Then, when the player operates the effect button 161 while the button operation image 69 is displayed, the number "5" which is the middle decorative pattern 41 temporarily stops as shown in FIG. 77 (18). At this time, the middle decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a larger display size than the left and right decorative patterns 41. Moreover, at this time, the three small symbols 56 are temporarily stopped by the combination of "454". Further, at this time, when four game balls enter the second starting port 122, "4" is displayed on the pending number display 55 of the second starting port 122. Further, at this time, each time a game ball enters the second starting port 122, a winning sound notifying the winning to the second starting port 122 is outputted from the speaker 156. On the other hand, the pending image 52 is not displayed. Note that when a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122 while the SPSP ready-to-win effect is being executed, the winning sound may not be output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (19), the three decorative patterns 41 are temporarily stopped depending on the display size before the SP ready-to-reach effect is executed. Also, at this time, the stage image 61 and the special time saving remaining number image 79 are displayed again. On the other hand, the fluctuation image 51 is not displayed.

Then, as the special symbols stop changing, the three decorative symbols 41 are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 78 (20). The combination "454" of the decorative symbols 41 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss. In addition, as the special symbols stop changing, the small symbols 56 also come to a definite stop. At this time, the combination "454" of the small patterns 56 matches the combination of the decorative patterns 41. Further, as the final round of special symbol variation in the special time-saving gaming state ends, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is controlled from the special time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (21), the first transition image 512 is displayed. When the first transition image 512 is displayed, the decorative pattern 41, the variable image 51, the pending image 52, the stage image 61, and the special time saving remaining number image 79 are hidden. On the other hand, a pending number display 55 and a small pattern 56 are displayed.
Note that the first transition image 512 may be displayed while moving from one side (for example, the right side) to the opposite side (for example, the left side) of the image display section 114. In this case, the decorative pattern 41, the variable image 51, the pending image 52, and the stage image 61 can be hidden from view by being covered by the first transition image 512 so that they can be shown to the player.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (22), a result image 513 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (23), as the next special symbol starts to be displayed, the small symbol 56 starts to fluctuate. This variation is a variation based on winning in the second starting port 122 in the normal gaming state. Further, in this variation, the decorative pattern 41 is not displayed. That is, in this variation, a variation effect is performed using the small pattern 56 without using the decorative pattern 41. Further, in this variation, the variation image 51 and the pending image 52 are not displayed. Further, the pending number display 55 of the second starting port 122 switches from "4" to "3".
Next, as the special symbols stop changing, the three small symbols 56 are displayed together and fixed as shown in FIG. 78 (24). The combination "721" of the small symbols 56 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (25), the small symbols 56 begin to fluctuate as the next special symbol begins to fluctuate. Further, the pending number display 55 of the second starting port 122 switches from "3" to "2".
Next, as the special symbols stop changing, the three small symbols 56 are displayed together and fixed as shown in FIG. 79 (26). The combination "638" of the small symbols 56 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (27), as the next special symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner, the small symbol 56 starts to vary. Further, the pending number display 55 of the second starting port 122 switches from "2" to "1".
Next, as the special symbols stop changing, the three small symbols 56 are displayed together and fixed as shown in FIG. 79 (28). The combination "583" of the small symbols 56 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (29), as the next special symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner, the small symbol 56 begins to vary. Further, the pending number display 55 of the second starting port 122 switches from "1" to "0".
Next, as the special symbols stop changing, the three small symbols 56 are displayed together and fixed as shown in FIG. 79 (30). The combination "421" of the small symbols 56 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss.

Then, when the variable effect based on the winning at the second starting port 122 ends in a state where there is no reservation based on the winning at the second starting port 122, as shown in FIG. 80 (31), the image display section 114 shows "421", which is a highly decorative decorative pattern 41, is fixed and stopped. That is, the combination of decorative patterns 41 and the combination of small patterns 56 match. Also, at this time, a stage image 61 corresponding to the normal game state is displayed. Also, at this time, three pending images 52, an execution number image 501, and a left-handed image 514 are displayed. The number of executions image 501 shows the text "34 GAME" including the number of new variable presentations performed after the number of variable display of the special symbol was reset. At this time, the number of times shown in the number of executions image 501 is the number of times the variable performance has been performed since the pachinko gaming machine 100 was controlled to the special time-saving game state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80 (32), the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 start to change as the next special pattern starts to be displayed. Further, the pending number display 55 of the first starting port 121 switches from "3" to "2". Further, the second and third pending images 52 are moved closer to the display position of the variable image 51. Also, at this time, the first pending image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51. Also, at this time, the remaining number of times notification effect is started. In the illustrated example, a precursor image 502 is displayed by the remaining number of times notification effect.
Next, as shown in FIG. 80 (33), the remaining number of arrivals image 503 is displayed by the remaining number of times notification effect. The remaining number of times reached image 503 shows the text “266 remaining”.

Then, as the special symbols stop changing, the three decorative symbols 41 are displayed together and fixedly stopped, as shown in FIG. 80 (34). The combination "125" of the decorative symbols 41 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss. Further, as the special symbols stop changing, the small symbols 56 are also displayed all together and are fixed and stopped. At this time, the combination "125" of the small patterns 56 matches the combination of the decorative patterns 41. Also, at this time, the display content of the number of executions image 501 is updated to "35 GAME". Also, at this time, the display content of the remaining number of arrivals image 503 is updated to "265 remaining".

In addition, in the variation production example 4, the reach promotion production (see Figure 77 (13)), the effect production (see Figure 77 (13)), the reach production (see Figure 77 (14)), and the medium movable accessory 115B. Performance (see Figure 77 (14)), SP reach performance (see Figure 77 (15)), SPSP reach performance (see Figure 77 (16)), button operation performance (see Figure 77 (17)) is the performance selection process. This is an effect that is executed in "EH5" (see FIG. 61), which is the variable effect pattern selected in (see FIG. 38(b)). On the other hand, the accessory performance and sound performance of the left movable accessory 115A (see FIG. 76 (11)) are performances that are not included in any of the variable performance patterns selected in the performance selection process. . In other words, the above-mentioned role effects and sound effects based on the preliminary determination results are executed in "AH5" (see FIG. 57), which is the preliminary determination performance pattern selected in the preliminary determination performance selection process (see FIG. 38(a)). This is a production that includes things that will happen.

As described above, in the variable effect example 1, the display of the remaining number of arrivals image 503 starts at the 100th variable effect based on the winning of the first start opening 121 in the normal gaming state (see FIG. 66 (8)) ). On the other hand, in variable effect example 4, the display of the remaining number-of-arrivals image 503 starts in the first variable effect based on winning at the first start opening 121 in the normal gaming state (see FIG. 80 (33)) . That is, in the present embodiment, when the number of times variations are performed in the normal gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times, the performance control unit 300 can execute a special performance based on the number of fluctuations, and changes from the specific time saving gaming state to the normal game. When the game is controlled by the state, the special performance can be executed before the number of fluctuations in the normal game state reaches a predetermined number. As the special effect, for example, display of the remaining number of arrivals image 503 may be mentioned.

In this case, compared to the case where the execution condition of the special performance when controlled from the special time saving gaming state to the normal gaming state is that the number of times the variation is executed in the normal gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times, the special time saving It is possible to provide a pachinko game machine 100 that can give a player a special feeling of being controlled from a game state to a normal game state and can execute a highly entertaining performance.
In particular, when a variable effect is performed in the special time-saving gaming state, the number of variable effects required in the normal gaming state to reach the specific time-saving gaming state is greater than when RAM clear is executed. The number of times will decrease. In this case, if the remaining number of times reached image 503 is not displayed when the special time-saving gaming state is controlled to the normal gaming state, the player will not be able to perform the variable effects in the normal gaming state that are necessary to reach the specific time-saving gaming state. You may not be able to recognize that the number of times is decreasing. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the special time-saving gaming state is controlled to the normal gaming state, the remaining number of attainment image 503 is displayed before the number of fluctuations in the normal gaming state reaches a predetermined number. Thereby, the player can be made aware that the number of fluctuating effects required in the normal gaming state is decreasing before reaching the specific time-saving gaming state.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, if the RAM clear is not executed when the pachinko gaming machine 100 returns from a power-off state, the performance control unit 300 controls the performance control unit 300 so that if the RAM is not cleared when the pachinko gaming machine 100 returns from a power-off state, the number of fluctuations in the normal gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times. Before this, a special effect (display of the remaining number of attainments image 503) is performed for the winning variation in the lottery held for each variation (see S4207 in FIG. 42). In addition, if the RAM clear has not been executed when the pachinko game machine 100 is restored from a power-off state, and the remaining number of arrivals image 503 is displayed, the image 503 will be displayed before the power of the pachinko game machine 100 is turned off. At the start of display, a smaller number is displayed in the remaining number of arrivals image 503 by the amount of variation that has been executed.
In this case, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 returns from a power-off state, regardless of whether RAM clearing is executed or not, the execution condition for the special performance is that the number of fluctuations in the normal gaming state reaches the predetermined number of times. It is possible to make the player feel that the execution of the special performance is unexpected compared to the case where the special performance is executed.

In the present embodiment, the display of the remaining number of attainments image 503 has been described as an example of a special effect based on the number of executions of the variation, but the special effect is not limited to the display of the remaining number of attainments image 503.
For example, the effect control unit 300 does not display the execution number image 501 when the number of executions of the variation is less than a predetermined number of times, and displays the execution number image 501 when the number of executions of the variation is greater than or equal to the predetermined number. May be displayed. In this case, the display of the execution number image 501 can also be regarded as an example of special performance.
Further, the special performance is not limited to a performance performed over multiple variable performances. For example, when the number of fluctuating performances (fluctuations) in the normal gaming state or the number of fluctuating performances (fluctuations) remaining until reaching the specific time-saving gaming state reaches a predetermined number, the remaining number of fluctuating performances (fluctuations) until reaching the specific time-saving gaming state reaches a predetermined number. A suggestion effect may be performed which suggests that the number of times of variation effect (variation) is a predetermined number of times. This suggestive performance is executed during execution of one variable performance or at the end of one variable performance, and does not need to be executed over a plurality of variable performances. The special performance also includes this suggestive performance. This suggestive effect may be the display of an image including characters indicating the number of remaining variable effects (variations) until reaching the specific time saving gaming state, or may be the display of an image in a specific color or the like. Further, the suggestive effect may be a display of the stage image 61. For example, when the number of fluctuating performances (fluctuations) in the normal gaming state or the number of fluctuating performances (fluctuations) remaining until reaching the specific time-saving gaming state reaches a predetermined number, the performance control unit 300 controls the specific The display mode may be switched to the stage image 61 in accordance with the fact that the remaining number of variable performances (variations) until reaching the time-saving gaming state is a predetermined number of times. That is, the special effect may be not only an image display made of specific characters, but also an image display made of a specific color or an image display made of a specific background. Furthermore, when the number of fluctuating performances (fluctuations) in the normal gaming state or the number of fluctuating performances (fluctuations) remaining until reaching the specific time-saving gaming state reaches a predetermined number, the performance control unit 300 controls the frame lamp 157 and The board lamp 116 may be made to emit light in a manner that indicates that the remaining number of variable performances (variations) until reaching the specific time saving gaming state is a predetermined number. That is, the special effect is not limited to the effect by the image display unit 114, but may also be the effect by the frame lamp 157 or the panel lamp 116.

Furthermore, if the RAM clearing has not been executed when the pachinko gaming machine 100 returns from a power-off state, a special performance may be executed during the first variation in the normal gaming state. Furthermore, if RAM clearing has not been executed when the pachinko gaming machine 100 returns from a power-off state, a special performance may be executed before the first fluctuation starts in the normal gaming state. .

In addition, in variation performance example 4, the variation in the special time-saving game state is performed multiple times, so that the remaining number of special symbol drawings in the special time-saving game state is 3 (see FIG. 75 (4)). In this way, after the number of fluctuations in the special time-saving gaming state and the remaining number of special symbol drawings in the special time-saving gaming state reach the predetermined number of times, the production control unit 300 controls the special By displaying a number image showing the remaining number of special symbol drawings in the time saving gaming state, the remaining number of special symbol drawings in the special time saving gaming state may be counted down. This number of times image is not displayed until the number of changes in the special time saving game state or the remaining number of special symbol lottery in the special time saving game state reaches a predetermined number of times. In addition, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 returns from a power-off state, the changes required in the special time-saving gaming state to display the number of images depending on whether RAM clearing has been executed or not. The number of times remains unchanged. However, if the display condition for the number of times image is that the remaining number of special symbol drawings in the special time-saving gaming state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3 times), the initial value of the number of drawings in the special time-saving gaming state will be the first. When the initial value of the number of drawings in the special time-saving gaming state is set to the second number of times (for example, 30 times), which is larger than the first number of times, the number of times is higher than when it is set to the number of times (for example, 10 times). The number of changes required in the special time-saving gaming state to display images increases.

(Variable effect example 5)
FIGS. 81 to 85 are diagrams showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control section 300 using the image display section 114.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 81 to 85, another specific example (variation effect example 5) of the variation effect of the decorative pattern 41 will be described. Variation performance example 5 is a variation performance example of the decorative pattern 41 based on the game ball winning in the second starting port 122 in the special time saving game state. In addition, in the variation performance example 5, the variation performance is performed four times.
The four fluctuating performances shown in FIGS. 81 to 85 are executed when "EH3", "EH2", "EH2", and "EG2" are selected in the order of "fluctuation rendering pattern" in FIG. 61. It is a fluctuating performance. Further, in these four variable performances, a preliminary determination performance is executed. This pre-judgment performance is a performance that is executed when "AG2" is selected as the "pre-judgment performance pattern" in FIG. 57. In addition, in the following explanation, points that are different from each of the above-mentioned variable performance examples will be mainly explained, and descriptions of points that are the same as each of the variable performance examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 81(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control section 300 displays the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 with low decorativeness on the image display section 114. Definitely stopped. At this time, "4" is displayed on the pending number display 55 of the second starting port 122, and four pending images 52 are displayed. Also, at this time, the stage image 61, the first right-handed image 75, and the special time saving remaining number image 79 are displayed. In the illustrated example, the text “10 times” is displayed as the special time saving remaining number image 79.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(2), with the start of the variable display of the next special symbol, the decorative symbols 41 and the small symbols 56 begin to vary. At this time, the pending number display 55 of the second starting port 122 switches from "4" to "3". Further, the special time saving remaining number image 79 switches from "10 times" to "9 times". Also, at this time, a change effect of the pending image 52 is executed, and a changing image 62 is displayed on the third pending image 52. In the illustrated example, a blue change image 62 is displayed on the third pending image 52 due to the change effect. Further, when the change effect is being executed, the sound effect of the change effect is output from the speaker 156.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(3), the three decorative patterns 41 "125" are displayed and fixed and stopped. At this time, the first chance effect is executed, and the chance image 63 is displayed on the three decorative patterns 41. In the illustrated example, blue chance images 63 are displayed on the three decorative patterns 41 due to the first chance effect. Further, as the special symbols stop changing, the small symbols 56 are also displayed all together and are fixed and stopped. At this time, the combination "125" of the small patterns 56 matches the combination of the decorative patterns 41.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(4), as the next special symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner, the decorative symbols 41 and the small symbols 56 begin to vary. Further, the pending number display 55 of the second starting port 122 switches from "3" to "2". Further, the special time saving remaining number image 79 switches from "9 times" to "8 times".
Next, as shown in FIG. 81(5), the three decorative patterns 41 "853" are displayed and fixed and stopped. At this time, a second chance effect is executed, and chance images 63 are displayed on the three decorative patterns 41. In the illustrated example, a green chance image 63 is displayed on the three decorative patterns 41 due to the second chance effect. Further, as the special symbols stop changing, the small symbols 56 are also displayed all together and are fixed and stopped. At this time, the combination "853" of the small patterns 56 matches the combination of the decorative patterns 41.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(6), the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 start to change as the next special pattern starts to be displayed. Further, the pending number display 55 of the second starting port 122 switches from "2" to "1". Further, the special time saving remaining number image 79 switches from "8 times" to "7 times".
Next, as shown in FIG. 82(7), a zone effect is started. In the illustrated example, a zone notification image 64 is displayed by the zone effect. This zone performance is a performance that makes the player expect a jackpot in the next variation of the special symbol being executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(8), the three decorative patterns 41 "553" are displayed and fixed and stopped. At this time, the third chance effect is executed, and the chance image 63 is displayed on the three decorative patterns 41. That is, the final chance effect out of the three chance effect effects is executed. In the illustrated example, a red chance image 63 is displayed on three decorative patterns 41 due to the third chance effect. Further, as the special symbols stop changing, the small symbols 56 are also displayed all together and are fixed and stopped. At this time, the combination "553" of the small patterns 56 matches the combination of the decorative patterns 41. Also, at this time, a zone identification image 65 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(9), the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 start to change as the next special pattern starts to be displayed. Further, the pending number display 55 of the second starting port 122 switches from "1" to "0". Further, the special time saving remaining number image 79 switches from "7 times" to "6 times". Also, at this time, a zone identification image 65 is displayed. Also, at this time, effect production is started. In the illustrated example, a zone effect image 66 is displayed by effect rendering. More specifically, a blue zone effect image 66 is displayed around the image display section 114. Also, at this time, a sound effect is executed, and a sound saying "Jackpot!?" is output from the speaker 156. The sound production that outputs the voice "Jackpot!?" is a production that suggests that the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (10), a change effect is performed on the change image 51, and a change image 62 is displayed on the change image 51. In the illustrated example, a red change image 62 is displayed on the change image 51 due to the change effect. Further, when the change effect is being executed, the sound effect of the change effect is output from the speaker 156.
Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (11), the number "3" which is the left decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (12), the number "3" which is the right decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped, and the ready-to-win effect is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (13), the SP reach effect is executed and the stage image 61 is hidden.
Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (14), the SPSP reach effect is executed. At this time, the number "3" which is the upper and lower small patterns 56 is temporarily stopped. On the other hand, the small and medium-sized symbols 56 maintain high-speed fluctuations. Moreover, at this time, the decorative pattern 41 and the variable image 51 are hidden.
Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (15), a button operation effect is executed and a button operation image 69 is displayed.

Then, when the player operates the effect button 161 while the button operation image 69 is displayed, the accessory effect is executed as shown in FIG. 83 (16). In the illustrated example, the middle movable accessory 115B moves to cover a part of the image display section 114 due to the accessory effect. Moreover, at this time, the small pattern 56 of the number zero is temporarily stopped. In the illustrated example, the small symbols 56 are displayed in a combination of "333", thereby informing the player that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit or a small win.
Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (17), the decorative pattern 41 of the number zero is temporarily stopped. In the illustrated example, the decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a combination of "333", thereby informing the player that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit or a small win. Also, at this time, the stage image 61 is redisplayed.

Then, as the special symbols stop changing, the three decorative symbols 41 and the small symbols 56 with low decorativeness are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 83 (18). The combination of numbers "333" of this decorative pattern 41 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.
In addition, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, the stage image 61 does not need to be displayed even when the decorative symbol 41 of the number zero is displayed. That is, in a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery in the special time-saving gaming state is a jackpot or a small win, after the SP reach performance is started and the stage image 61 is hidden, the stage image 61 is redisplayed. The variable performance may end without any change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (19), an opening image 74 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the text "Bonus!" indicating the start of a jackpot game or a small win game is displayed as the opening image 74.
Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (20), a promotion image 508 is displayed. In the promotion image 508, a specific area image 509 is displayed.
Then, when a game ball wins in the second grand prize opening 126 while the promotion image 508 is displayed, a prize notification image 515 is displayed as shown in FIG. 84 (21).

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (22), a first right-handed image 75, an in-round image 76, and a round number image 77 are displayed. In the illustrated example, the text “Round 1” is displayed on the round number image 77.
Next, when the final round ends, a special time saving selection image 510 is displayed as shown in FIG. 84 (23). In the illustrated example, the cursor is placed on the "A" mode in the special time saving selection image 510.
Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the special time saving selection image 510 was displayed, a continuation image 516 is displayed as shown in FIG. 84 (24). Also, at this time, the second right-handed image 511 is displayed.

Next, in the special time saving game state, as shown in FIG. 85 (25), "333", which is a decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness, is fixed and stopped on the image display section 114. Similarly to the decorative pattern 41, the small pattern 56 is fixed and stopped by the sequence of numbers "333". Also, at this time, the text "30 times" is displayed as the special time saving remaining number image 79.

In addition, in the variable effect example 5, the change effect of the variable image 51 (see FIG. 82 (10)), the reach effect (see FIG. 82 (12)), the SP reach effect (see FIG. 83 (13)), and the SPSP reach effect (see FIG. 83 (13)). (see FIG. 83 (14)), button operation effects (see FIG. 83 (15)), and accessory effects of the medium movable accessory 115B (see FIG. 83 (16)), effect selection processing (see FIG. 38 (b)) This is an effect that is executed in "EG2" (see FIG. 61), which is the variable effect pattern selected in . On the other hand, there are changes in the pending image 52 (see FIG. 81 (2)), chance effects (see FIGS. 81 (3), (5), and FIG. 82 (8)), and zone effects (see FIG. 82 (7)). , effect production (see FIG. 82 (9)), and sound production (see FIG. 82 (9)) are productions that are not included in being executed in any of the variable production patterns selected in the production selection process. . That is, each of the above-mentioned effects based on the preliminary determination results may be executed in "AG2" (see FIG. 57), which is the preliminary determination performance pattern selected in the preliminary determination performance selection process (see FIG. 38(a)). This is the included performance.

In addition, in variable performance example 5, the promotion promotion performance (see FIG. 73 (13)) is not executed in the variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery in the special time-saving gaming state is a jackpot or a small win, but this is limited to Not done. In a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit or a small win, a promotion promotion performance may be always performed.

(Variable effect example 6)
FIGS. 86 to 88 are diagrams showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 86 to 88, another specific example (variation effect example 6) of the variation effect of the decorative pattern 41 will be described. Variable performance example 6 includes a variable performance based on winning in the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state, a variable performance based on winning in the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, and a variable performance based on winning in the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. This includes a variable performance based on winning in the 2-start opening 122.

Note that among the variable effects shown in FIGS. 86 to 88, the variable effect based on winning in the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state is selected as "ER5-2" as the "variable effect pattern" in FIG. This is a variable effect that will be executed when the Further, in this variable performance, a preliminary determination performance is executed. This pre-determination performance is a performance that is executed when “AR5-2” is selected as the “pre-determination performance pattern” in FIG. Further, this variation performance is the 300th variation performance since the number of variable display of the special symbol was reset by RAM clearing.
Furthermore, among the variable effects shown in FIGS. 86 to 88, "EM1" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in FIG. This is a variable performance that is executed when
In addition, in the following explanation, the points that are different from each of the above-mentioned variation presentation examples will be mainly explained, and the description of the points that are the same as each variation presentation example may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 86(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 are fixed and stopped in the image display section 114 by the effect control section 300. There is. Also, at this time, a stage image 61, a pending image 52, an execution count image 501, and a remaining reach count image 503 are displayed. Further, at this time, "3" is displayed on the pending number display 55 of the first starting port 121. Further, the execution number image 501 shows the text “299 GAME”. Further, the remaining number of arrivals image 503 shows the text “1 more to go”.
Next, as shown in FIG. 86(2), as the next special symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner, the decorative symbols 41 and the small symbols 56 begin to vary. Further, the pending number display 55 of the first starting port 121 switches from "3" to "2".

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(3), the three decorative patterns 41 "421" are displayed and fixed and stopped. Further, as the special symbols stop changing, the small symbols 56 are also displayed all together and are fixed and stopped. At this time, the combination "421" of the small patterns 56 matches the combination of the decorative patterns 41. Also, at this time, the display content of the number of executions image 501 is updated to "300 GAME". Also, at this time, the display content of the remaining number of arrivals image 503 is updated to "0 left". Also, at this time, the sub-right hit indicator 87 lights up. In addition, at this time, when the number of times the special symbol is displayed fluctuating after the predetermined condition is met (RAM clearing, resetting the number of fluctuating times) reaches a specific number of 300, the control is set to a specific time-saving gaming state. be done.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(4), the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 start to change as the next special pattern starts to be displayed. Further, the pending number display 55 of the first starting port 121 switches from "2" to "1".
Next, as shown in FIG. 86(5), the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 continue to fluctuate. Also, at this time, the first right-handed image 75 is displayed.
In addition, in the variable performance example 6, the first right-hitting image 75 is displayed after the decorative symbol 41 fluctuates at high speed and becomes difficult or impossible to see in the specific time-saving game state, but the present invention is not limited to this. . After the start of the first variable performance in the specific time-saving game state, the first right-hitting image 75 may be displayed before the decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a high-speed variable manner. That is, the first right-handed image 75 may be displayed when the decorative pattern 41 is easily visible.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(6), a specific time saving start image 517 is displayed. In the specific time saving start image 517, a third right hit image 518 is displayed. Moreover, at this time, the decorative pattern 41, the variable image 51, and the pending image 52 are hidden. On the other hand, the stage image 61, the pending number display 55, and the first right-handed image 75 are displayed. Moreover, the small pattern 56 continues to fluctuate.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(7), a second transition image 519 is displayed. When the second transition image 519 is displayed, the stage image 61 and the specific time saving start image 517 are hidden. On the other hand, the first right-handed image 75 is being displayed. That is, the display time of the first right-handed image 75 is longer than that of the third right-handed image 518. Moreover, at this time, the decorative pattern 41 is not displayed. However, the decorative pattern 41 may be displayed in a variable manner at high speed and may be difficult or impossible to see.
Note that the second transition image 519 may be displayed to move from one side (for example, the upper side) to the opposite side (for example, the lower side) on the image display section 114. In this case, the stage image 61 and the decorative pattern 41 can be hidden from view by being covered by the second transition image 519 so that they can be shown to the player.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(8), a mode start image 520 is displayed. When the mode start image 520 is displayed, the first right-handed image 75 and the second transition image 519 are also displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(9), a specific time saving selection image 521 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the cursor is placed on the "a" mode in the specific time saving selection image 521. Further, at this time, when four game balls enter the second starting port 122, "4" is displayed on the pending number display 55 of the second starting port 122. On the other hand, the pending image 52 is not displayed. Furthermore, each time a game ball enters the second starting port 122, a winning sound is output from the speaker 156 to notify that the game ball has entered the second starting port 122.

Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the specific time saving selection image 521 was displayed, a stage image 61 corresponding to the specific time saving game state is displayed as shown in FIG. 87 (10). In the illustrated example, a moving image with a park theme is displayed as the stage image 61. Moreover, at this time, the three decorative patterns 41 "125" are temporarily stopped. Also, at this time, four pending images 52 are displayed. These four pending images 52 are the pending images 52 that are displayed based on winnings in the second start opening 122. On the other hand, neither the variable image 51 nor the pending image 52 based on winning in the first starting slot 121 is displayed. Also, at this time, a specific time saving remaining number of times image 524 is displayed. The text “294” is shown in the specific time saving remaining number image 524.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (11), as the special symbols stop changing, the three decorative symbols 41 "125" are fixed and stopped. Further, the small symbols 56 are also displayed all together and are fixed and stopped. At this time, the combination "125" of the small patterns 56 matches the combination of the decorative patterns 41.
Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (12), the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 begin to change as the next special pattern starts to be displayed. Further, the pending number display 55 of the second starting port 122 switches from "4" to "3". Further, the specific time saving remaining number of times image 524 is switched from "294" to "293". Also, at this time, the fourth right-handed image 525 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 88 (13), the three decorative patterns 41 and the small pattern 56 "853" are displayed and fixed. Further, at this time, the fourth right-handed image 525 is not displayed. That is, the display time of the first right-handed image 75 is longer than that of the fourth right-handed image 525.

As mentioned above, in variable performance example 6, "ER5-2" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in FIG. 59 as a variable performance based on the game ball winning in the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state A production based on this is being performed. In addition, as a preliminary determination performance based on a game ball entering the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state, a performance based on "AR5-2" being selected as the "predetermination performance pattern" in FIG. 56 is executed. has been done. Here, when a game ball enters the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state, the number of variable effects that have been executed since the number of variable displays of the special symbol is reset by RAM clearing is less than 297 times. In this case, "ER5-1" (see FIG. 59) is selected as the "variable effect pattern" and "AR5-1" (see FIG. 56) is selected as the "pre-judgment effect pattern". Further, when "ER5-1" is selected as the "variable performance pattern", a reach performance, an effect performance, a button operation performance, etc. are performed in the variable performance. Furthermore, when "AR5-1" is selected as the "pre-judgment performance pattern", a zone performance, an accessory performance, a light-emitting performance upon winning, etc. are performed as the pre-determination performance. On the other hand, in variation production example 6, "ER5-2" is selected as the "variation production pattern" and "AR5-2" is selected as the "pre-judgment production pattern", so that the reach production, effect production, None of the button operation effects, zone effects, role effects effects, and winning light emission effects are performed.
That is, in the present embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can execute the predetermined performance when the variation is being executed in the normal gaming state, and the performance control unit 300 can execute the predetermined performance in the normal gaming state until the specific time saving gaming state is controlled. Execution of a predetermined performance is restricted from a variation in which the number of variations reaches a specific number.

If the predetermined effect is executed without being restricted even if the remaining number of fluctuations until the specific time-saving game state is controlled becomes small, the player will be distracted by the predetermined effect and will not be able to play the specific time-saving game. There is a possibility that the remaining number of fluctuations until the state is controlled is small, or that the player does not notice that the specific time-saving gaming state has been controlled. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the number of remaining fluctuations until the specific time-saving gaming state is controlled is reduced, the execution of the predetermined effect is limited, so that the remaining number of fluctuations until the specific time-saving gaming state is controlled. The game machine 100 can provide a pachinko game machine 100 capable of performing highly entertaining performances by increasing the player's excitement level regarding the fact that the amount of time is small and that the game state is controlled to a specific time-saving game state.

In addition, in variation performance example 6, "PR5" which is "with reach" is selected as the "variation pattern" in FIG. There is. Even in this case, as described above, the ready-to-win performance is not executed in the variable performance based on winning in the first starting opening 121 in the normal gaming state. That is, in the present embodiment, in the normal gaming state, from a variation in which the number of remaining variations until the specific time-saving gaming state is controlled becomes a specific number, the gaming control unit 200 selects a "variation pattern with reach". ” is selected, the performance control unit 300 performs a variable performance in which the reach performance is not executed.
In this case, even if the variation pattern set in the game control unit 200 is a variation pattern with "reach", the number of remaining variations until the specific time-saving gaming state is controlled is small, or the specific time-saving gaming It is possible to increase the player's level of excitement about being controlled by the state.

In addition, in this embodiment, as the predetermined effects, it has been explained that the execution of the reach effect, effect effect, button operation effect, zone effect, role effect effect, and winning light emission effect is limited, but the predetermined effects are limited to the above-mentioned effects. It is not limited to the performance of
The variable performance patterns of "ER4-1" (see Figure 59) and "ER5-1" include pseudo-continuous performance, SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance, change performance, zone performance, reach stimulation performance, and effects as predetermined performances. It may be set to perform any of the effects, role effects, sound effects, and button operation effects. Even in this case, when the variable effect pattern "ER4-2" or "ER5-2" is selected, the effect control unit 300 restricts the execution of any predetermined effect. Good too.
In addition, the predetermined performance patterns of "AR4-1" (see Figure 56) and "AR5-1" include change performance, chance performance, zone performance, effect performance, sound performance, character performance, It may also be set to execute any of the lighting effects upon winning. Even in this case, if the pre-determined performance pattern "ER4-2" or "ER5-2" is selected, the performance control unit 300 restricts the execution of any predetermined performance. You can.

In addition, the conditions under which the execution of the predetermined effect is restricted are that "PR4" or "PR5" (see Figure 24) is selected as a variation pattern, or that "JR4" or "JR5" (see Figure 33) is selected as a predetermined pattern. ) is not limited to being selected. In the case where a variation performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winnings in the first starting hole 121 in the normal gaming state is a loss, the number of remaining variations until the specific time-saving gaming state is controlled is the specified number of times. Based on the fluctuation, the performance control unit 300 may limit the execution of the predetermined performance regardless of which pre-determined performance pattern and variable performance pattern are selected. In addition, when a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning in the first starting hole 121 in the normal gaming state is a jackpot, the number of remaining fluctuations until the specific time-saving gaming state is controlled is Based on the fluctuation that reaches the specific number of times, the performance control unit 300 may limit the execution of the predetermined performance regardless of which pre-determined performance pattern and variable performance pattern are selected.

Further, in variable performance example 6, when the stage image 61 corresponding to the normal game state is displayed, the first variable performance based on winning in the first start opening 121 in the specific time-saving game state is executed. In this way, before the stage image 61 corresponding to the specific time saving game state is displayed (before the specific time saving start image 517 is displayed, before the mode start image 520 is displayed, the decorative symbol corresponding to the specific time saving game state) 41 is displayed), when a variable effect is executed based on a winning at the first start opening 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, even if a variable effect pattern different from the variable effect pattern shown in FIG. 64 is selected. good. That is, before the stage image 61 corresponding to the specific time-saving game state is displayed, a unique variable performance pattern is selected when a variable performance based on winning in the first start opening 121 in the specific time-saving game state is executed, A variable effect may be executed according to the selected variable effect pattern.

(Variable effect example 7)
89 to 91 are diagrams showing one aspect of the performance that the performance control section 300 performs using the image display section 114.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 89 to 91, another specific example (variation effect example 7) of the variation effect of the decorative pattern 41 will be described. Variable presentation example 7 includes a variable presentation based on winning at the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state and a variable presentation based on winning at the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state.

Of the variable effects shown in FIGS. 89 to 91, "ER1" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in FIG. 59 for the variable effect based on winning in the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state. This is a variable performance that is performed depending on the situation. Further, this variation performance is the 300th variation performance since the number of variable display of the special symbol was reset by RAM clearing.
In addition, in the following explanation, the points that are different from each of the above-mentioned variation presentation examples will be mainly explained, and the description of the points that are the same as each variation presentation example may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 89(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 are fixed and stopped in the image display section 114 by the effect control section 300. There is. Also, at this time, a stage image 61, an execution count image 501, and a remaining reach count image 503 are displayed. Also, at this time, "0" is displayed on the pending number display 55 of the first starting port 121. Further, the execution number image 501 shows the text “299 GAME”. Further, the remaining number of arrivals image 503 shows the text “1 more to go”.

When a game ball enters the first starting hole 121, as shown in FIG. 89(2), the decorative symbols 41 and the small symbols 56 begin to vary as the special symbols begin to be displayed. Further, as the game ball enters the first starting port 121, a winning sound is outputted from the speaker 156 to notify that the first starting port 121 has won a prize. In addition, in this fluctuating performance, the speaker 156 outputs a performance sound corresponding to the fluctuating performance that is being executed. Further, although not shown, the frame lamp 157 and the board lamp 116 emit light in a light emitting manner according to the variable effect that is being executed.

Then, as the special symbols stop changing, the three decorative symbols 41 and the small symbol 56 "421" are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 89(3). Also, at this time, the display content of the number of executions image 501 is updated to "300 GAME". Also, at this time, the display content of the remaining number of arrivals image 503 is updated to "0 left". Also, at this time, the sub-right hit indicator 87 lights up. In addition, at this time, when the number of times the special symbol is displayed fluctuating after the predetermined condition is met (RAM clearing, resetting the number of fluctuating times) reaches a specific number of 300, the control is set to a specific time-saving gaming state. be done.
Further, as shown in FIG. 89(4), a first right-handed image 75 is displayed. Also, at this time, the arrival notification image 526 is displayed.

Next, when a predetermined period of time has passed after the special symbols stop changing, a menu display image 504 is displayed as shown in FIG. 89(5). Note that at this time, the speaker 156 is outputting performance sound corresponding to the previous variable performance. Further, at this time, the frame lamp 157 and the board lamp 116 are emitting light in a color corresponding to the previous variable effect. In the illustrated example, the frame lamp 157 and the board lamp 116 emit blue light.

Next, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the menu display image 504 was displayed, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 157 and the board lamp 116 changes, as shown in FIG. 89(6). In the illustrated example, the frame lamp 157 and the panel lamp 116 emit green light. Also, at this time, the effect sound from the speaker 156 according to the previous variable effect is smaller than when the variable effect is being executed or when the display of the menu image 506 has started (see FIG. 89 (5)). The output is based on the volume. Note that at this time, when the menu image 506 is displayed in response to the operation of the production button 161, the stage image 61, the decorative pattern 41, the small pattern 56, the number of executions image 501, and the remaining number of arrivals image 503 are hidden. It's okay. Even when the menu image 506 is displayed, the pending number display 55 and the first right-click image 75 may be displayed. Moreover, when the menu image 506 is displayed, the arrival notification image 526 may be displayed or may be hidden.

After a further predetermined period of time has elapsed, a customer waiting image 505 is displayed as shown in FIG. 90(7). Moreover, at this time, the stage image 61, the number of executions image 501, the remaining number of times of reaching image 503, the decorative pattern 41, the pending number display 55, and the small pattern 56 are hidden. On the other hand, the first right hit image 75 and arrival notification image 526 are displayed. Moreover, at this time, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 157 and the panel lamp 116 changes. In the illustrated example, the frame lamp 157 and the panel lamp 116 emit red light. Also, at this time, no sound is output from the speaker 156. Note that even when the customer waiting image 505 is displayed, the pending number display 55 may be displayed.

Then, when two game balls enter the first starting hole 121, as shown in FIG. 90(8), the decorative symbols 41 and the small symbols 56 begin to vary as the special symbols begin to be displayed. Further, as two game balls enter the first starting port 121, a variable image 51 and a pending image 52 are displayed. Further, “1” is displayed on the pending number display 55 of the first starting port 121. Furthermore, each time a game ball enters the first starting port 121, a winning sound is output from the speaker 156 to notify that the game ball has entered the first starting port 121. Also, at this time, the stage image 61, the number of executions image 501, and the remaining number of times reached image 503 are displayed again.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(9), a specific time saving start image 517 is displayed. In the specific time saving start image 517, a third right hit image 518 is displayed. Moreover, at this time, the decorative pattern 41, the variable image 51, and the pending image 52 are hidden. On the other hand, the stage image 61, the pending number display 55, and the first right-handed image 75 are displayed. Moreover, the small pattern 56 continues to fluctuate.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(10), a second transition image 519 is displayed. When the second transition image 519 is displayed, the stage image 61 and the third right-handed image 518 are hidden. On the other hand, the first right-handed image 75 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 90(11), a mode start image 520 is displayed. When the mode start image 520 is displayed, the first right-handed image 75 and the second transition image 519 are also displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (12), a specific time saving selection image 521 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the cursor is placed on the "a" mode in the specific time saving selection image 521.

Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the specific time saving selection image 521 was displayed, a stage image 61 corresponding to the specific time saving game state is displayed, as shown in FIG. 91 (13). Moreover, at this time, the three decorative patterns 41 "125" are temporarily stopped. Also, at this time, the fourth right-handed image 525 is displayed. Also, at this time, a specific time saving remaining number of times image 524 is displayed. The text “294” is shown in the specific time saving remaining number image 524. Note that neither the variable image 51 nor the pending image 52 based on winning in the first starting slot 121 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (14), as the special symbols stop changing, the three decorative symbols 41 "125" are fixed and stopped. Further, the small symbols 56 are also displayed all together and are fixed and stopped. At this time, the combination "125" of the small patterns 56 matches the combination of the decorative patterns 41. At this time, the fourth right-handed image 525 is hidden.
Note that after this, when a game ball enters the second starting port 122, a variable performance based on the winning to the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state is started.

In addition, in variation performance example 7, the fourth right-hitting image 525 is displayed in the variation performance in which the mode start image 520 (see FIG. 90 (11)) is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. Also in variation production example 7, similarly to variation production example 6, the fourth right-hitting image 525 may be displayed in the variation production following the variation production in which mode start image 520 is displayed. In addition, in variation performance example 6, similar to variation performance example 7, when the decorative pattern 41 is redisplayed in the variation performance in which the mode start image 520 (see FIG. 87(8)) is displayed (see FIG. 87(10) ), the fourth right-handed image 525 may be displayed.

As mentioned above, in variation display example 7, after the number of variable displays of the special symbol is reset by RAM clearing, after the 300th variation display ends, and before the next variation display starts, the first right hit An image 75 is displayed (see FIG. 89(4)). That is, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 stores the pending memory in the game control unit 200 when the remaining number of fluctuations until the specific time-saving gaming state is controlled stops when the symbol in the final fluctuation stops. If not, it is possible to start a specific notification that urges the game ball to be launched to the right side of the game area 111 when the symbols in the final round of variation are stopped. As the specific notification, for example, display of the first right-handed hit image 75 can be mentioned.
In this case, before the variable production in the specific time-saving gaming state is started, the player recognizes that he should shoot the game ball to the right side of the game area 111, and shoots the game ball to the right side of the game area 111. can do. Therefore, the first variable performance in the specific time-saving gaming state can be changed to a variable performance based on winning in the second starting port 122, thereby providing a pachinko gaming machine 100 capable of executing a highly entertaining performance. be able to.

In addition, in this embodiment, although the display of the 1st right-handed hit image 75 was demonstrated as an example of specific notification, specific notification is not limited to the display of the 1st right-handed hit image 75. For example, the production control unit 300 may output from the speaker 156 a voice (for example, a voice such as "Please hit to the right") urging the player to shoot the game ball to the right side of the game area 111 as the specific notification. That is, the specific notification is not limited to displaying an image.

Furthermore, in the variation effect example 7, the first right-hitting image 75 is displayed before the start of the variation effect in which the specific time saving start image 517 (see FIG. 90(9)) is displayed. (See FIG. 89 (4)) Also, during the variable effect in which the specific time saving start image 517 is displayed, the third right-handed image 518 (see FIG. 90 (9)) and the fourth right-handed image 525 (see FIG. 91 (13) ) will be displayed. That is, in the present embodiment, the production control unit 300 can execute a specific notification that prompts the firing of game balls to the right side of the gaming area 111, and when controlled to the specific time-saving gaming state, the production control unit 300 can execute the specific notification to prompt the shooting of the game ball to the right side of the gaming area 111. It is possible to execute a specific performance to be notified. Here, as the specific effect, for example, displaying the specific time saving start image 517 can be mentioned. The specific notification includes a first notification that can be executed before the start of the specific performance, and a second notification that is executed after the start of the first notification and that can be executed in the variation in which the specific performance is executed. be. The first notification includes, for example, the first right-handed hit image 75. Furthermore, examples of the second notification include the third right-handed image 518 and the fourth right-handed image 525. Note that as the first notification, instead of the first right-handed image 75, a sound urging the player to shoot the game ball to the right side of the game area 111 may be output from the speaker 156. Further, as the second notification, instead of the third right-handed image 518 and the fourth right-handed image 525, a sound urging the player to launch the game ball to the right side of the gaming area 111 may be output from the speaker 156.
In the present embodiment, it has been explained that the second notification is a variation that is executed after the start of the first notification and is executed in a variation in which a specific effect is executed, but the second notification is not limited to this. The second notification may be executed in the next variation after the variation in which the specific effect is executed. In addition, the second notification may be executed at any timing after the change in which the specific performance is executed in the specific time saving gaming state. That is, in this embodiment, the specific notification includes a first notification that can be executed before the start of the specific effect, and a variation that is executed after the start of the first notification that can be executed after the specific effect is executed. There is a second notification.

Before the specific performance is started, even if the first notification is executed, the player may not be able to recognize that he should shoot the game ball to the right side of the game area 111. Therefore, in this embodiment, the specific notification is not only performed before the start of the specific performance, but also after the change in which the specific performance is performed. As a result, even if the player is unable to recognize that the game ball should be launched to the right side of the gaming area 111 before the specific performance starts, the player cannot continue playing the game after the specific performance starts. It can be recognized that the game ball should be launched to the right side of the area 111. Therefore, from an early stage in the specific time-saving gaming state, it is possible to perform a variable performance based on winnings in the second starting port 122, thereby providing a pachinko gaming machine 100 capable of executing a highly entertaining performance. can.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can execute the specific notification while displaying the specific image before the specific performance is started in the specific time saving game state. Examples of the specific effect include displaying a specific time saving start image 517. Furthermore, examples of the specific image include a customer waiting image 505 and a menu image 506.
Before the start of the specific performance, the player may not be aware that he or she will be controlled to the specific time-saving gaming state. In this case, if the specific notification is not executed while displaying the specific image, the player may not be able to recognize that the game ball should be launched to the right side of the gaming area 111. Therefore, in this embodiment, by executing a specific notification while a specific image is being displayed before the start of a specific performance, the player can pay attention to the image that is displayed only when a variation is not being executed. Even if the player does so, the player is made aware that he or she should shoot the game ball to the right side of the game area 111. Thereby, from an early stage in a specific time-saving game state, a variable performance can be made based on winnings in the second starting port 122, thereby providing a pachinko game machine 100 capable of executing a highly entertaining performance. I can do it.

In addition, in variable effect example 3, before the start of the variable effect performed after displaying the special time saving start image 78 (see FIG. 74 (21)), the specific area image 509 (see FIG. 73 (18)), the first right-handed An image 75 (see FIG. 74 (19)) and a second right-handed image 511 are displayed. In addition, in the variation effect example 7, before the start of the variation effect that is performed after displaying the specific time saving start image 517 (see FIG. 90(9)), the first right-hand hit image 511 (see FIG. 89(4)), the third A right-handed image 518 (see FIG. 90 (9)) and a fourth right-handed image 525 (see FIG. 91 (13)) are displayed.
That is, in this embodiment, the effect control section 300 can display on the image display section 114 a specific image that urges the shooting of the game ball to the right side of the gaming area 111. Further, the specific images include a first image that has a predetermined display size on the image display section 114, and a second image and a third image that have a larger display size on the image display section 114 than the first image. When controlled to the second mode, the effect control unit 300 can display the first image, the second image, and the third image before the start of the variation performed after the execution of the specific effect. Examples of the second mode include a special time-saving game state and a specific time-saving game state. Furthermore, examples of the specific effects include displaying the special time saving start image 78, displaying the specific time saving start image 517, and the like. Further, as the first image, for example, the first right-handed image 75 can be mentioned. Furthermore, examples of the second image include the specific area image 509 and the third right-handed image 518. Furthermore, examples of the third image include the second right-handed image 511 and the fourth right-handed image 525.

When only a single specific image is displayed, if the player recognizes this specific image as a decorative image, the player is made aware that the game ball should be launched to the right side of the gaming area 111. It may not be done. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a plurality of specific images having different display sizes are displayed before the start of the variation performed after execution of the specific effect. This makes it easier for the player who sees the specific image to recognize that they should shoot the game ball to the right side of the game area 111, and from an early stage in the second mode, based on winning to the second starting port 122. It is possible to provide a pachinko game machine 100 that can perform variable performances and can perform highly entertaining performances.

In addition, in variation performance example 7, in the first variation of the specific time-saving gaming state, the first right-handed image 511 (see FIG. 90 (8)), the third right-handed image 518 (see FIG. 90 (9)), and the fourth right-handed image 518 (see FIG. 90 (9)) A right-handed image 525 (see FIG. 91 (13)) is displayed.
That is, in this embodiment, the effect control section 300 can display on the image display section 114 a specific image that urges the shooting of the game ball to the right side of the gaming area 111. Further, the specific images include a first image that has a predetermined display size on the image display section 114, and a second image and a third image that have a larger display size on the image display section 114 than the first image. When controlled to the second mode, the effect control unit 300 can display the first image, the second image, and the third image in the first variation of the second mode. Examples of the second mode include a specific time saving gaming state. Further, as the first image, for example, the first right-handed image 75 can be mentioned. Further, as the second image, for example, the third right-handed image 518 can be mentioned. Further, as the third image, for example, the fourth right-handed image 525 can be mentioned.
Note that in the present embodiment, it has been explained that the first image, the second image, and the third image are displayed in the first variation of the second mode, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the next variation after the first variation in the second mode, the first image, the second image, and the third image may be displayed. In addition, the first image, the second image, and the third image may be executed at any timing after the first fluctuation in the second mode. Further, some of the first image, second image, and third image (for example, the first image and the second image) are displayed in the first variation of the second mode, and some of the other images ( For example, a third image) may be displayed in the next variation of the first variation in the second mode. That is, in this embodiment, when controlled to the second mode, the effect control unit 300 can display the first image, the second image, and the third image after the first change in the second mode.

When only a single specific image is displayed, if the player recognizes this specific image as a decorative image, the player is made aware that the game ball should be launched to the right side of the gaming area 111. It may not be done. Therefore, in this embodiment, after the first change in the second mode, a plurality of specific images with different display sizes are displayed. This makes it easier for the player who sees the specific image to recognize that they should shoot the game ball to the right side of the game area 111, and from an early stage in the second mode, based on winning to the second starting port 122. It is possible to provide a pachinko game machine 100 that can perform variable performances and can perform highly entertaining performances.

In addition, in this embodiment, it was explained that in the special time saving game state, the second right hit image 511 (see FIG. 74 (21)) is displayed before the start of the first variation, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the first variation of the special time-saving gaming state, the second right-hitting image 511 may be displayed. Further, in the first variation of the special time-saving game state, a third right-handed image 518 (see FIG. 90 (9)) and a fourth right-handed image 525 (see FIG. 91 (13)) may be displayed. In this case, the special time saving game state is regarded as the second mode. Further, the second right-handed image 511, the third right-handed image 518, and the fourth right-handed image 525 are captured as second images. Further, the second right-handed image 511, the third right-handed image 518, and the fourth right-handed image 525 are also captured as third images.

In addition, the fourth right-handed image 525 is displayed when a prize is won in the first starting slot 121 in the special time-saving gaming state or the specific time-saving gaming state, and is displayed when winning in the first starting slot 121 in the special time-saving gaming state or the specific time-saving gaming state. If not, it does not need to be displayed. That is, in the first variation of the second mode, if a prize is won in the first starting opening 121, the first image, the second image, and the third image may be displayed. Then, in the first variation of the second mode, if there is no prize in the first starting port 121, the first image and the second image can be displayed, but even if the third image is not displayed, good.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the first image is the first right-handed image 75. Here, a different image may be displayed as an image encouraging the shooting of the game ball to the right side of the game area 111 depending on whether it is the special time-saving game state or the specific time-saving game state. That is, as long as the first image has a smaller display size on the image display section 114 than the second and third images, even if the first image is a different image between the special time-saving game state and the specific time-saving game state. good. For example, the first image displayed in the special time-saving game state may have a larger display size on the image display section 114 than the first image displayed in the specific time-saving game state. Further, the first image displayed in the special time-saving game state may have a smaller display size on the image display section 114 than the first image displayed in the specific time-saving game state.

In addition, in variable production example 7, when the stage image 61 corresponding to the normal gaming state is displayed, the specific time saving start image 517 is displayed (see FIG. 90 (9)), and the stage image corresponding to the specific time saving gaming state is displayed. 61 is displayed (see FIG. 91 (13)), the specific time saving start image 517 is hidden. That is, in the present embodiment, the performance control section 300 can display the specific image on the image display section 114 in a display mode according to the controlled gaming state of the normal gaming state and the specific time-saving gaming state, When controlled to a specific time-saving gaming state, a specific effect that notifies the specific time-saving gaming state is started when a specific image corresponding to the normal gaming state is displayed, and a specific image corresponding to the specific time-saving gaming state is displayed. Quit before it is done.
Here, the specific image includes, for example, the stage image 61. Further, the display mode of the decorative symbols 41, the display mode of the variable image 51, and the display mode of the pending image 52 may be different between the normal game state and the specific time-saving game state. Therefore, the decorative pattern 41, the variable image 51, and the pending image 52 are also regarded as specific images.

In this case, compared to the case where the specific effect is started after the display of the specific image corresponding to the normal gaming state ends, the player can feel the surprise of the specific effect starting, and the interest level is increased. It is possible to provide a pachinko game machine 100 that can perform high performances.

In addition, in variable performance example 7, after the number of variable displays of the special symbol is reset by RAM clearing, when the 300th variable display ends, the specific time saving game state is controlled, and when the next variable display starts, the specific time saving A start image 517 is displayed (see FIG. 90(9)). That is, in the present embodiment, the game control unit 200 can control to the specific time-saving game state when the symbols in the last fluctuation of the predetermined number of times are stopped in the normal game state, and the performance control unit 300 When the next variation after the last variation is started, a specific performance for notifying a specific time-saving gaming state is started.
While the player may pay attention to the performance while the fluctuation is in progress, the player may not pay attention to the performance while the fluctuation is stopped. In this case, if the specific performance is started while the fluctuation is stopped, the player may not be paying attention to the specific performance and may not be able to improve his or her interest through the specific performance. Therefore, in this embodiment, the specific effect is started when the next variation after the last variation is started, thereby making it easier for the player to pay attention to the specific effect. Thereby, it is possible to improve interest through a specific performance, and it is possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine 100 that can execute highly entertaining performances.

(Variable effect example 8)
FIG. 92 and FIG. 93 are diagrams showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 92 and 93, another specific example (variation effect example 8) of the variation effect of the decorative pattern 41 will be described. Variable performance example 8 is a variable performance example based on winning in the second starting opening 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. This variable performance is the first variable performance in the specific time saving game state. In addition, in the following explanation, points that are different from each of the above-mentioned variable performance examples will be mainly explained, and descriptions of points that are the same as each of the variable performance examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 92(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 are fixed and stopped in the image display section 114 by the effect control section 300. There is. Here, the previous special symbol variation is the final variation of the number of variations required to reach the specific time-saving gaming state. Therefore, when this variation ends, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is controlled from the normal gaming state to the specific time-saving gaming state. Also, at this time, the stage image 61, the number of executions image 501, the remaining number of times of reaching image 503, the first right hit image 75, and the reaching notification image 526 are displayed. Further, the stage image 61 at this time is displayed in a display mode according to the normal game state. Further, at this time, "0" is displayed on the pending number display 55 of the first starting port 121. Further, the execution number image 501 shows the text “300 GAME”. Further, the remaining number of arrivals image 503 shows the text “0 left”.

Then, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 122, as shown in FIG. 92(2), the decorative symbols 41 and the small symbols 56 begin to vary as the special symbols begin to be displayed. In addition, as a prize is won in the second starting port 122, a notification sound is output from the speaker 156 to notify that a winning is entered in the second starting port 122. On the other hand, the fluctuation image 51 is not displayed. In addition, in this fluctuating performance, the speaker 156 outputs performance sound corresponding to the fluctuating performance that is being executed. Further, although not shown, the frame lamp 157 and the board lamp 116 emit light in a light emitting manner according to the variable effect that is being executed.
In addition, at this time, if a game ball further wins in the second starting port 122, the winning sound notifying the winning in the second starting port 122 is further notified from the speaker 156, and the second starting port 122 The pending number display 55 is updated. On the other hand, the pending image 52 is not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(3), a specific time saving start image 517 is displayed. In the specific time saving start image 517, a third right hit image 518 is displayed. Moreover, at this time, the decorative pattern 41 is hidden. On the other hand, the stage image 61, the pending number display 55, and the first right-handed image 75 are displayed. Moreover, the small pattern 56 continues to fluctuate.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(4), a second transition image 519 is displayed. When the second transition image 519 is displayed, the stage image 61 and the third right-handed image 518 are hidden. On the other hand, the first right-handed image 75 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 92(5), a mode start image 520 is displayed. When the mode start image 520 is displayed, the first right-handed image 75 and the second transition image 519 are also displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 92(6), a specific time saving selection image 521 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the cursor is placed on the "a" mode in the specific time saving selection image 521.
In addition, in the specific time-saving game state, when the display of the second transition image 519 is started (see FIG. 92 (4)), the third right-hitting image 518 may be displayed. Then, when the mode start image 520 is displayed, the third right-handed image 518 may be hidden.

Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the specific time saving selection image 521 was displayed, a stage image 61 corresponding to the specific time saving game state is displayed as shown in FIG. 93(7). Moreover, at this time, the three decorative patterns 41 "125" are temporarily stopped. Also, at this time, the fourth right-handed image 525 is displayed. Also, at this time, a specific time saving remaining number of times image 524 is displayed. The text “294” is shown in the specific time saving remaining number image 524. Incidentally, the variation image 51 based on winning in the second starting port 122 is not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93(8), as the special symbols stop changing, the three decorative symbols 41 "125" are fixed and stopped. Further, the small symbols 56 are also displayed all together and are fixed and stopped. At this time, the combination "125" of the small patterns 56 matches the combination of the decorative patterns 41. At this time, the fourth right-handed image 525 is hidden. On the other hand, the first right-handed image 75 is displayed. Further, at this time, the frame lamp 157 and the board lamp 116 are emitting light in a color corresponding to the most recent variable effect. In the illustrated example, the frame lamp 157 and the board lamp 116 emit blue light. Also, at this time, the speaker 156 is outputting performance sound according to the most recent variable performance.

Next, when a predetermined period of time has passed after the special symbols stop changing, a menu display image 504 is displayed as shown in FIG. 93(9). Also, at this time, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 157 and the board lamp 116 changes. In the illustrated example, the frame lamp 157 and the panel lamp 116 emit green light. Further, at this time, the speaker 156 outputs the effect sound corresponding to the previous variable effect at a lower volume than during the execution of the variable effect.

Furthermore, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 93(10), no sound is output from the speaker 156. On the other hand, the light emitting manner of the frame lamp 157 and the board lamp 116 remains unchanged. Further, even after time passes, the customer waiting image 505 (see FIG. 90 (7)) is not displayed, and the stage image 61, decorative pattern 41, small pattern 56, and specific time saving remaining number image 524 are Not hidden. However, at this time, when the menu image 506 is displayed in response to the operation of the production button 161, the stage image 61, the decorative pattern 41, the small pattern 56, and the specific time saving remaining number image 524 may be hidden. Then, even when the menu image 506 is displayed, the first right-handed image 75 is displayed.
Note that when sound is no longer output from the speaker 156, the light emitting manner of the frame lamp 157 and the panel lamp 116 may change, and emit light in red, for example.

As described above, in variable performance example 8, even if the variable performance ends with no reservations, the customer waiting image 505 is not displayed and the menu display image 504 continues to be displayed. On the other hand, in variable performance example 1, the menu display image 504 is hidden by displaying the customer waiting image 505 (see FIG. 69 (27) and FIG. 69 (28)). In addition, in variation performance example 7, the menu display image 504 is hidden by displaying the customer waiting image 505 (see FIG. 89 (6) and FIG. 90 (7)). In other words, in the present embodiment, the menu display image 504 is better when the variable effect is not performed after the first variable effect in the specific time-saving game state than when the variable effect is not performed in the normal game state. Display time is long. In addition, the menu is better when the variable performance is not performed after the first variable performance in the specific time-saving gaming state than when the variable performance is not performed before the start of the first variable performance in the specific time-saving gaming state. The display time of display image 504 is long.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can display a special image on the image display unit 114 based on the number of times the variation is executed, and display a specific image on the image display unit 114 when the variation is not executed. Yes, it is possible to hide a special image while displaying a specific image. Examples of the special images include the number of executions image 501, the remaining number of times reached image 503, the special time saving remaining number image 79, the specific remaining time saving number image 524, and the like. Furthermore, examples of the specific image include a customer waiting image 505, a menu image 506, and the like.
When a special symbol variation is not being executed, the player may be more interested in an image that is displayed only when a variation is not being executed, rather than an image related to the variation. In this case, if the special image is displayed even when the specific image is displayed, the special image may prevent the player from paying attention to the specific image, and the improvement of interest due to the specific image may be hindered. be. Therefore, in this embodiment, the special image is hidden when the specific image is being displayed, thereby suppressing the player's attention to the specific image from being obstructed. Thereby, it is possible to provide a pachinko game machine 100 that can improve interest with the specific image and can execute highly interesting performances.

In addition, in this embodiment, the execution count image 501, the remaining number of times reached image 503, the special time saving remaining number image 79, the specific time saving remaining number image 524, etc. have been described as examples of special images. but not limited to.
For example, when the number of fluctuating performances (fluctuations) in the normal gaming state or the number of fluctuating performances (fluctuations) remaining until reaching the specific time-saving gaming state reaches a predetermined number, the remaining number of fluctuating performances (fluctuations) until reaching the specific time-saving gaming state reaches a predetermined number. A suggestion image may be displayed that suggests that the number of fluctuation effects (fluctuations) of is a predetermined number of times. This suggestion image is displayed during execution of the first variable performance or at the end of the first variable performance, and does not need to be displayed over a plurality of variable performances. The special image also includes this suggestion image. This suggestion image may include characters indicating the number of remaining variable effects (variations) until reaching the specific time saving gaming state, or may be an image of a specific color or the like. Furthermore, a stage image 61 may be displayed as a suggested image. For example, when the number of fluctuating performances (fluctuations) in the normal gaming state or the number of fluctuating performances (fluctuations) remaining until reaching the specific time-saving gaming state reaches a predetermined number, the performance control unit 300 controls the specific The display mode may be switched to the stage image 61 in accordance with the fact that the remaining number of variable performances (variations) until reaching the time-saving gaming state is a predetermined number of times. That is, the special image may be not only an image made of specific characters, but also an image made of a specific color or an image made of a specific background. Then, while the customer waiting image 505 and the menu image 506 are being displayed, these special images may be hidden.

Further, in this embodiment, the special image is hidden when the customer waiting image 505 and the menu image 506 are displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, a special image may be displayed even when the menu image 506 is displayed. Furthermore, when the customer waiting image 505 is displayed, the special image may be hidden.

As described above, in variable performance example 1, if there is no hold when the variable performance ends, the performance sound changes from the sound corresponding to the variable performance to silence, and the customer waiting image 505 is displayed (Fig. 69 (28) )reference). On the other hand, in the variable performance example 3, it has been explained that if there is no hold when the variable performance ends, the performance sound changes from the sound corresponding to the variable performance to silence, but the customer waiting image 505 is not displayed. Furthermore, in variable effect example 8, if there is no hold when the variable effect ends, the effect sound changes from the sound corresponding to the variable effect to silence, but the customer waiting image 505 is not displayed (see FIG. 93 (10) ). That is, in the present embodiment, if the suspension is not stored in the game control unit 200 when the variation ends in the first mode, the performance control unit 300 changes the performance sound from the first mode to the second mode and performs a specific If the image can be displayed and the hold is not stored in the game control unit 200 when the variation ends in the second mode, the production sound may be changed from the third mode to the second mode and the specific image may not be displayed. It is possible. Here, the first mode includes a normal gaming state. Further, the second mode includes a special time-saving game state and a specific time-saving game state. Moreover, as the first aspect and the third aspect, for example, a sound according to a variable effect can be mentioned. Further, as the second mode, for example, there is a mode in which no production sound is output. Furthermore, the specific image includes a customer waiting image 505. Note that the first aspect and the third aspect may be sounds outputted from the speaker 156 depending on the stage image 61 being displayed, or sounds outputted from the speaker 156 depending on the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100. It may be a sound.

If the customer waiting image 505 is displayed when the player is in the specific time-saving gaming state, the player may be distracted by the customer-waiting image 505 and forget that the player is in the specific time-saving gaming state. Therefore, in this embodiment, in the specific time-saving gaming state, when the variation ends with no pending, the effect sound is the same as when the variation ends with no pending in the normal gaming state, while the specific By not displaying the image, the player is made aware that the fluctuation has ended and there is no hold, and that the game is in a specific time-saving gaming state. As a result, even if the variation ends in the specific time-saving gaming state without any reservations, the player can enjoy the next variation while recognizing that the player is in the specific time-saving gaming state, and the player can enjoy the next variation. It is possible to provide a pachinko game machine 100 that can perform high performances.

In addition, in this embodiment, it was explained that an example of the first aspect and the third aspect as the effect sound is a sound according to a variable effect. Here, the sound according to the fluctuating performance may be a sound according to the previous fluctuating performance, and may be a sound having a lower volume than during execution of the previous fluctuating performance. Further, the sound corresponding to the fluctuating performance may be a sound corresponding to the previous fluctuating performance and having the same volume as during execution of the previous fluctuating performance.
Further, although it has been explained that the second mode as the effect sound is a mode in which the effect sound is not output, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the second aspect may be specific BGM that is output from the speaker 156 only when the variable effect is not being executed.

In addition, in the variable performance example 8, it has been explained that if there is no hold when the variable performance ends, the menu image 506 is displayed (see FIG. 93 (10)), but the present invention is not limited to this. The effect control unit 300 changes the effect sound from the third mode to the second mode and does not display the menu image 506, if no hold is stored in the game control unit 200 when the variation ends in the second mode. You can. Therefore, the menu image 506 is also regarded as a specific image.

Further, in variation performance example 7, the customer waiting image 505 is displayed when the variation is stopped with no reservations. On the other hand, in variation performance example 8, the customer waiting image 505 is not displayed when the variation is stopped with no reservations. That is, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can display a specific image before the start of the specific performance in the specific time saving game state, and does not display the specific image after the start of the specific performance. An example of the specific image is the customer waiting image 505.
If the customer waiting image 505 is displayed while in the specific time-saving gaming state, the player may be distracted by the customer waiting image 505 and forget that the player is in the specific time-saving gaming state. By not displaying the customer waiting image 505, the player can recognize that the player is in a specific time-saving gaming state. On the other hand, if the customer waiting image 505 is not displayed even before the start of the specific performance, the player may notice that the customer waiting image 505 is not displayed and is controlled to a specific time-saving gaming state. In such cases, it may not be possible to improve interest even if the specific time-saving gaming state is notified by a specific performance. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by displaying the customer waiting image 505 only before the start of the specific performance in the specific time-saving gaming state, the player is in the special time-saving gaming state even though the specific performance has not started. When someone is controlled by someone else, they are suppressed from being noticed. Thereby, it is possible to improve the interest of a specific performance, and to provide a pachinko gaming machine 100 that can execute a highly entertaining performance.

In the variable performance example 8, while the stage image 61 corresponding to the normal game state is being displayed, the first variable performance based on winning in the second start opening 122 in the specific time-saving game state is executed. In this way, before the stage image 61 corresponding to the specific time saving game state is displayed (before the specific time saving start image 517 is displayed, before the mode start image 520 is displayed, the decorative symbol corresponding to the specific time saving game state) 41 is displayed), when a variable performance is executed based on winning at the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state, even if a variable performance pattern different from the variable performance pattern shown in FIG. 63 is selected. good. That is, before the stage image 61 corresponding to the specific time-saving game state is displayed, a unique variable performance pattern is selected when a variable performance based on winning in the second start opening 122 in the specific time-saving game state is executed, A variable effect may be executed according to the selected variable effect pattern.

In addition, in variable performance example 8, it has been explained that in the specific time saving game state, the menu image 506 is displayed after the start of the specific performance (see FIG. 93 (10)), but the present invention is not limited to this. The effect control unit 300 can display the menu image 506 before starting the specific effect, and does not display the menu image 506 after starting the specific effect. You can do it like this. Therefore, the menu image 506 is also regarded as a specific image.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display of the specific time saving start image 517 has been described as an example of the specific effect, but the specific effect is not limited to the display of the specific time saving start image 517.
In the specific time saving game state, an effect according to the mode selected in the specific time saving selection image 521 is performed. Here, the mode displayed in the specific time saving selection image 521 is a mode specific to the specific time saving gaming state. Therefore, the display of the mode start image 520 that notifies the mode to be started in the specific time-saving gaming state can also be regarded as a specific performance that notifies the specific time-saving gaming state. In addition, in the specific time saving game state, when the player shoots a game ball into the right area of the game area 111, it becomes possible to win a prize in the second starting opening 122. Therefore, in a broad sense, the display of the first right-handed image 75, third right-handed image 518, fourth right-handed image 525, etc., which are notifications for winning to the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state, is also limited to specific It can be seen as a specific performance that notifies you of a time-saving gaming state.
In addition to the above-mentioned production, when controlled to a specific time-saving gaming state, the production control unit 300 displays an image only when controlled to the specific time-saving gaming state, or is controlled to a specific time-saving gaming state. The frame lamp 157 and the board lamp 116 may emit light in a limited light emission mode. In this case, the frame lamp 157 and the board lamp 116 may display an image only when controlled to the second mode, or emit light from the frame lamp 157 or board lamp 116 in a light emission mode only when controlled to the specific time saving gaming state. It can be seen as a specific performance to inform people.

(Example 9 of variable effects)
94 to 97 are diagrams showing one aspect of the performance that the performance control unit 300 performs using the image display unit 114.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 94 to 97, another specific example (variation effect example 9) of the variation effect of the decorative pattern 41 will be described. The fluctuation performance shown in the variation performance example 9 is a fluctuation performance performed after the fluctuation performance shown in the fluctuation performance example 6 (see FIGS. 86 to 88). More specifically, the variable performance shown in the variable performance example 9 is a variable performance in the specific time-saving game state controlled in the variable performance example 6. This variable performance example 9 includes a variable performance based on winning at the second starting port 122 in the specific time saving gaming state, a variable performance based on winning at the second starting port 122 in the normal gaming state, and a variable performance based on winning at the second starting port 122 in the normal gaming state. This includes a variable performance based on winnings in the first opening 121. Further, in this variation performance example 9, the variation performance is performed seven times.

It should be noted that the first five variable performances out of the seven variable performances shown in FIGS. 94 to 97 are variable performances based on winnings in the second start opening 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. These five fluctuating performances are the fluctuating performances that are executed when "EM1", "EM3", "EM2", "EM2", and "EM1" are selected in the order of "fluctuation performance pattern" in FIG. 63. .
Furthermore, the sixth variable performance out of the seven variable performances shown in FIGS. 94 to 97 is a variable performance based on winning in the second start opening 122 in the normal gaming state. This sixth variation performance is a variation performance that is executed when "EE1" is selected as the "variation performance pattern" in FIG. 60.
Furthermore, the final variable performance among the seven variable performances shown in FIGS. 94 to 97 is a variable performance based on winning in the first start opening 121 in the normal gaming state. This final fluctuating performance is a fluctuating performance that is executed when "ER1" is selected as the "fluctuating performance pattern" in FIG. 59.
In addition, in the following explanation, points that are different from each of the above-mentioned variable performance examples will be mainly explained, and descriptions of points that are the same as each of the variable performance examples may be omitted.

In the variation performance example 6 (see FIGS. 86 to 88), it has been explained that in the normal game state, the game is controlled to the specific time-saving game state in a state where reservation is occurring based on winning in the first start opening 121. Thereafter, as the variable performance in the specific time saving game state is repeatedly performed, as shown in FIG. ``5'' is shown, which means that the remaining number of special symbol drawings is 5 times. Further, as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 with low decorativeness are fixed and stopped on the image display section 114 by the effect control section 300. Also, at this time, the stage image 61 and the first right-handed image 75 are displayed. Further, the pending number display 55 of the first starting port 121 indicates "1", which is the pending number of winnings to the first starting port 121, and the pending number display 55 of the second starting port 122 indicates "1", which is the pending number of winnings to the first starting port 121. Indicates "0", which is the pending number of prizes.

Then, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 122, as shown in FIG. 94(2), the decorative symbols 41 and the small symbols 56 begin to vary as the special symbols begin to be displayed. Also, at this time, the specific time saving remaining number image 524 switches from "5" to "4". Also, at this time, a variable image 51 is displayed. In addition, as the game ball enters the second starting port 122, a winning sound is output from the speaker 156 to notify that the game ball has entered the second starting port 122.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94(3), the number "4" which is the left decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped. Also, at this time, four game balls enter the second starting port 122, and four pending images 52 are displayed. At this time, each time a game ball enters the second starting port 122, a winning sound is output from the speaker 156 to notify that the game ball has entered the second starting port 122. Further, “4” is displayed on the pending number display 55 of the second starting port 122.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94(4), the number "1" which is the right decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 94(5), the number "2" which is the middle decoration pattern 41 is temporarily stopped.
Then, after the three decorative symbols 41 have temporarily stopped, the three decorative symbols 41 have finally stopped as shown in FIG. 94(6) as the special symbols have stopped changing. The combination "421" of the decorative symbols 41 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss. Further, as the special symbols stop changing, three small symbols 56 are also displayed and fixed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(7), as the next special symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner, the decorative symbols 41 and the small symbols 56 begin to vary. Further, the pending number display 55 of the second starting port 122 switches from "4" to "3". Further, the specific time saving remaining number of times image 524 is switched from "4" to "3".
Next, as shown in FIG. 95(8), the three decorative patterns 41 "125" are displayed and fixed and stopped. Further, as the special symbols stop changing, the small symbols 56 are also displayed all together and are fixed and stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(9), the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 start to change as the next special pattern starts to be displayed. Further, the pending number display 55 of the second starting port 122 switches from "3" to "2". Further, the specific time saving remaining number of times image 524 is switched from "3" to "2".
Next, as shown in FIG. 95(10), the three decorative patterns 41 "853" are displayed and fixed and stopped. Further, as the special symbols stop changing, the small symbols 56 are also displayed all together and are fixed and stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95 (11), the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 start to change as the next special pattern starts to be displayed. Further, the pending number display 55 of the second starting port 122 switches from "2" to "1". Further, the specific time saving remaining number of times image 524 switches from "2" to "1".
Next, as shown in FIG. 95 (12), the three decorative patterns 41 "712" are displayed and fixed and stopped. Further, as the special symbols stop changing, the small symbols 56 are also displayed all together and are fixed and stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(13), the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 begin to change as the next special pattern starts to be displayed. Further, the pending number display 55 of the second starting port 122 switches from "1" to "0". Further, the specific time saving remaining number of times image 524 switches from "1" to "0".
Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (14), the number "3" which is the left decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (15), the number "5" which is the right decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (16), the number "1" which is the middle decoration pattern 41 is temporarily stopped. Also, at this time, a game ball enters the second starting port 122, and the pending image 52 is displayed. In addition, as the game ball enters the second starting port 122, a winning sound is output from the speaker 156 to notify that the game ball has entered the second starting port 122. Further, “1” is displayed on the pending number display 55 of the second starting port 122.

Then, after the three decorative patterns 41 temporarily stop, the three decorative patterns 41 finally stop as shown in FIG. 96 (17) as the special pattern stops changing. The combination "315" of the decorative symbols 41 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss. Further, as the special symbols stop changing, three small symbols 56 are also displayed and fixed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(18), the first transition image 512 and the end image 527 are displayed. When the first transition image 512 is displayed, the decorative pattern 41, the fluctuation image 51, the pending image 52, the stage image 61, the first right hit image 75, and the specific time saving remaining number image 524 are hidden. On the other hand, a pending number display 55 and a small pattern 56 are displayed. Further, at this time, the result image 513 (see FIG. 78 (22)) is not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97 (19), the small symbols 56 begin to vary as the next special symbol starts to be displayed. This fluctuation is a fluctuation based on winning in the second starting port 122 in the normal gaming state. Further, in this variation, the decorative pattern 41 is not displayed. Further, in this variation, the variation image 51 and the pending image 52 are not displayed. Further, the pending number display 55 of the second starting port 122 switches from "1" to "0".
Next, as the special symbols stop changing, the three small symbols 56 are displayed together and fixed as shown in FIG. 97 (20). The combination "213" of the small symbols 56 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss.

Then, when the variable effect based on the winning at the second starting port 122 ends without reservation based on the winning at the second starting port 122, as shown in FIG. 97 (21), the image display section 114 shows "213", which is a highly decorative decorative pattern 41, is fixed and stopped. That is, the combination of decorative patterns 41 and the combination of small patterns 56 match. Also, at this time, a stage image 61 corresponding to the normal game state is displayed. Also, at this time, one pending image 52, the number of executions image 501, and the left-handed image 514 are displayed. This pending image 52 is based on the pending (see FIG. 86 (5)) that occurred when the pachinko gaming machine 100 was changed from the normal gaming state to the specific time-saving gaming state. Further, the execution number image 501 shows the text “596 GAME”. This value shown in the execution number image 501 is the total value of the number of variable performances performed in the normal gaming state and the number of variable performances performed in the specific time-saving gaming state. Further, the fluctuation image 51 is not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97 (22), the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 start to change as the next special pattern starts to be displayed. Further, the pending number display 55 of the first starting port 121 switches from "1" to "0".
Then, as the special symbols stop changing, the three decorative symbols 41 are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 97 (23). The combination "421" of the decorative symbols 41 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss. Further, as the special symbols stop changing, the small symbols 56 are also displayed all together and are fixed and stopped. Also, at this time, the display content of the execution number image 501 is updated to "597 GAME". On the other hand, the remaining number of times notification effect is not executed, and the arrival notification image 526 (see FIG. 86(1)) is not displayed.

As described above, in the variable performance example 4, the ready-to-win performance is executed in the variable performance based on the number of reservations at the second starting port 122 being "1" (see FIG. 77 (14)). Here, in the variation pattern table (see FIG. 26) used when a game ball enters the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state, the number of reservations is "1" and the "judgment result" is "lost". "PH5" and "PH8" are associated with the "variation pattern". Then, when "PH5" or "PH8" is selected as the fluctuation pattern, ""EH5" and "EH8", which are associated with "normal" meaning reach performance, are selected as "variable performance pattern". In other words, in a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 being "1" in the special time-saving game state is a loss, there is a possibility that a ready-to-win performance will be executed. On the other hand, in variable performance example 9, the ready-to-win performance is not executed in the variable performance based on the fact that the number of reservations at the second starting port 122 is "1". Here, in the variable performance pattern table (see FIG. 63) used when a game ball enters the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the "variable pattern" whose "judgment result" is "miss" is ""Normal" is not associated. In other words, in the variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the fact that the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 is "1" in the specific time saving game state is a loss, the ready-to-win performance is not executed.
That is, in the present embodiment, when a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is performed, the variation performance based on the fact that the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 is "1" in the specific time-saving gaming state is performed. In the special time-saving game state, the variable performance based on the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 being "1" is easier to execute the ready-to-win performance.

In this case, compared to the case where the ease of execution of the reach effect is the same between the variable effect in the special time-saving gaming state and the variable effect in the specific time-saving gaming state, the number of holds for the common starting opening is the same number. To provide a pachinko game machine 100 that can allow a player to enjoy performances with different characteristics depending on the type of time-saving game state even when a variable performance is performed based on a certain thing, and can execute a highly entertaining performance. can be provided.

In particular, in this embodiment, the ratio of the number of drawings in the time-saving game state being set higher is higher in the specific time-saving game state than in the special time-saving game state. In other words, in the specific time-saving game state, the number of special symbol drawings in the time-saving game state is more likely to be set to be larger than in the special time-saving game state. Therefore, in the specific time-saving gaming state, the production control unit 300 lowers the execution rate of the reach production and executes the variable production in the time-saving gaming state set to a large number of times, thereby creating a variable production with a sense of speed. We are trying to realize this.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is performed, the variation performance based on the fact that the number of reservations of the second starting port 122 is "1" in the specific time saving gaming state is performed. Although it has been explained that the ready-to-win performance is easier to execute in the variable performance based on the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 being "1" in the special time-saving game state, the present invention is not limited to this. If a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, the second start-up opening 122 in the special time-saving game state is more likely to be held than the variable performance based on the fact that the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 is a specific number in the specific time-saving game state. The variable effect based on the number of reservations of the starting port 122 being a specific number may be made easier to execute the ready-to-win effect. In this case, the specific number may be any value among "1", "2", "3", and "4". In addition, when a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is performed, the variable performance based on winning to the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state is more likely to be performed in the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state. The variable performance based on winnings may be made easier to execute the reach performance.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss based on the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 being a specific number in the specific time saving gaming state, the reach performance is not executed (0% ), but it is not limited to this. Even if a fluctuating effect is executed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss based on the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 being a specific number in the specific time saving gaming state, even if a reach effect is executed. good. Moreover, even if a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winnings in the second starting hole 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state is a loss, the ready-to-win performance may be performed.

In addition, in variation performance example 4, in the variation performance based on the number of reservations of the second starting port 122 being "1", a reach-increasing performance is executed (see FIG. 77 (13)). Here, in the variation pattern table (see FIG. 26) used when a game ball enters the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state, the number of reservations is "1" and the "judgment result" is "lost". "PH5" is associated with the "fluctuation pattern". When "PH5" is selected as the variable pattern, the "variable effect pattern" is selected from the variable effect pattern table (see FIG. 61) used when a game ball enters the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state. As such, "EH5" with which "reach boost" is associated is selected. In other words, in a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 being "1" in the special time-saving gaming state is a loss, there is a possibility that a reach stimulation performance will be executed. . On the other hand, in variable performance example 9, in the variable performance based on the number of reservations being "1" at the second starting port 122, the reach-increasing performance is not executed. Here, in the variable performance pattern table (see FIG. 63) used when a game ball enters the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the "variable performance pattern" in which the "judgment result" is "miss" is “Reach agitation” is not associated. In other words, in the variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 being "1" in the specific time saving game state is a loss, the reach promotion performance is not executed.
That is, in the present embodiment, when a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is performed, the variation performance based on the fact that the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 is "1" in the specific time-saving gaming state is performed. In the special time-saving game state, the variable performance based on the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 being "1" is more likely to execute the reach-increasing performance.

In this case, compared to the case where the fluctuating performance in the special time-saving gaming state and the fluctuating performance in the specific time-saving gaming state have the same ease of execution of the reach-inciting performance, the number of common starting openings held is the same. To provide a pachinko gaming machine 100 that allows a player to enjoy performances of different nature depending on the type of time-saving game state even when a variable performance is performed based on the above, and is capable of executing a highly entertaining performance. can be provided.

In particular, in this embodiment, the number of drawings of the special symbol lottery in the time-saving game state is more likely to be set in the specific time-saving game state than in the special time-saving game state. Therefore, in the specific time-saving game state, the performance control unit 300 lowers the execution rate of the reach promotion performance and executes the fluctuating performance in the time-saving game state set to a large number of times, thereby creating a speedy variation. I'm trying to make the performance come true.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is performed, the variation performance based on the fact that the number of reservations of the second starting port 122 is "1" in the specific time saving gaming state is performed. Although it has been explained that in the special time-saving game state, the fluctuating performance based on the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 being "1" is easier to execute the reach promotion performance, but the present invention is not limited to this. When a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, the second start-up opening 122 in the special time-saving game state is more attractive than the fluctuating performance based on the fact that the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 is a specific number in the specific time-saving game state. The variable performance based on the number of reservations of the starting opening 122 being a specific number may be made easier to execute the reach-increasing performance. In this case, the specific number may be any value among "1", "2", "3", and "4". In addition, regardless of the number of reservations, if a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is performed, the variable performance in the special time-saving gaming state is more favorable than the fluctuating performance based on winning the second starting hole 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. The fluctuating performance based on winning in the second starting opening 122 may be made easier to execute the reach-stimulating performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, in a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 being a specific number in the specific time-saving gaming state is a loss, the reach stimulation performance is not executed (0 %), but is not limited to this. Even if a fluctuating performance is executed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss based on the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 being a specific number in the specific time-saving gaming state, the reach stimulation performance is not executed. Good too. Moreover, even if a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winnings in the second starting hole 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state is a loss, the reach-increasing performance may be performed.

In addition, in variation performance example 4, in the variation performance based on the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 being "1", a performance is performed in which the display size of the decorative pattern 41 is changed (FIG. 77 (14) and (15)). Here, the effect of changing the display size of the decorative pattern 41 may be hereinafter referred to as a size change effect. On the other hand, in variable performance example 9, the size change performance is not executed in the variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 being "1" is a loss.
That is, in the present embodiment, when a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is performed, the fluctuation performance is performed based on the fact that the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 is "1" in the specific time-saving gaming state. In the special time-saving game state, the size change effect is easier to execute in the variable effect based on the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 being "1."

In this case, compared to the case where the ease of execution of the size change performance is the same between the variable performance in the special time-saving gaming state and the variable performance in the specific time-saving gaming state, the number of common starting openings held is the same. To provide a pachinko gaming machine 100 that allows a player to enjoy performances with different characteristics depending on the type of time-saving game state even when a variable performance is performed based on the above, and is capable of executing a highly entertaining performance. can be provided.

In particular, in this embodiment, the number of drawings of the special symbol lottery in the time-saving game state is more likely to be set in the specific time-saving game state than in the special time-saving game state. Therefore, in the specific time-saving gaming state, the production control unit 300 lowers the execution rate of the size change production and executes the variation production in the time-saving gaming state set to a large number of times, so that the speedy variation I'm trying to make the performance come true.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is performed, the variation performance based on the fact that the number of reservations of the second starting port 122 is "1" in the specific time saving gaming state is performed. Although it has been explained that the size change effect is easier to execute in the variable effect based on the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 being "1" in the special time-saving game state, the present invention is not limited to this. If a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, the second start-up opening 122 in the special time-saving game state is more likely to be held than the variable performance based on the fact that the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 is a specific number in the specific time-saving game state. The size change effect may be more easily executed when the variation effect is based on the number of reserved starting ports 122 being a specific number. In this case, the specific number may be any value among "1", "2", "3", and "4". In addition, regardless of the number of reservations, if a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is performed, the variable performance in the special time-saving gaming state is more favorable than the fluctuating performance based on winning the second starting hole 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. The size change effect may be more easily executed when the variable effect is based on winning in the second start opening 122.

In addition, in this embodiment, in a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 being a specific number in the specific time saving gaming state is a loss, the size change performance is not executed (0 %), but is not limited to this. Even if a variable performance is executed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss based on the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 being a specific number in the specific time-saving gaming state, the size change performance is not executed. Good too. Further, even if a variable performance is executed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winnings in the second starting hole 122 in the specific time saving gaming state is a loss, the size change performance may be executed.

In addition, in variable performance example 4, in a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the number of reservations of the second starting port 122 being "1" is a loss, the image display section of the temporarily stopped decorative symbol 41 An effect in which the display position at 114 changes is being performed (see (14) and (15) in FIG. 77). Hereinafter, the effect in which the display position of the temporarily stopped decorative pattern 41 on the image display section 114 changes may be referred to as a position change effect. On the other hand, in variable performance example 9, the position change performance is not executed in the variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 being "1" is a loss.
That is, in the present embodiment, when a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is performed, the variation performance based on the fact that the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 is "1" in the specific time-saving gaming state is performed. In the special time-saving game state, the position change performance is easier to execute in the variable performance based on the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 being "1".

In addition, in this embodiment, when a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is performed, the variation performance based on the fact that the number of reservations of the second starting port 122 is "1" in the specific time saving gaming state is performed. Although it has been explained that the position change performance is easier to execute in the variable performance based on the number of reservations of the second starting port 122 being "1" in the special time-saving game state, the present invention is not limited to this. When a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, the second start-up opening 122 in the special time-saving game state is more attractive than the fluctuating performance based on the fact that the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 is a specific number in the specific time-saving game state. The position change effect may be more easily executed if the variation effect is based on the number of reserved starting ports 122 being a specific number. In this case, the specific number may be any value among "1", "2", "3", and "4". In addition, regardless of the number of reservations, if a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is performed, the variable performance in the special time-saving gaming state is more favorable than the fluctuating performance based on winning the second starting hole 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. The position change performance may be made easier to execute when the variation performance is based on winning in the second starting port 122.

In addition, in this embodiment, in a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 being a specific number in the specific time saving gaming state is a loss, the position change performance is not executed (0 %), but is not limited to this. In the specific time saving gaming state, even if a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 being a specific number is executed, the position change performance is not executed. Good too. Further, even if a variable performance is executed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winnings in the second starting port 122 in the specific time saving gaming state is a loss, the position change performance may be executed.

In addition, in the fluctuation pattern table (see FIG. 26) used when a game ball enters the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state, the number of reservations is "1" and the "judgment result" is "lost". “PH8” is associated with a certain “variation pattern”. When "PH8" is selected as the variable pattern, the "variable effect pattern" is selected from the variable effect pattern table (see FIG. 61) used when a game ball enters the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state. As such, "EH8" with which the special effect at the time of variation is associated is selected. Here, the special performance at the time of variation includes, for example, SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance, change performance, zone performance, effect performance, character performance, sound performance, button operation performance, and the like. In other words, in a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 being "1" in the special time-saving gaming state is a loss, there is a possibility that the special performance at the time of fluctuation will be executed. be. On the other hand, in variation performance example 9, the special performance at the time of variation is not executed. Here, in the variable performance pattern table (see FIG. 63) used when a game ball enters the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the "variable performance pattern" in which the "judgment result" is "miss" is There is no special effect associated with the change. In other words, in a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 being "1" in the specific time saving game state is a loss, the special performance at the time of fluctuation is not executed.
That is, in the present embodiment, when a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is performed, the fluctuation performance is performed based on the fact that the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 is "1" in the specific time-saving gaming state. In the special time-saving game state, the variable performance based on the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 being "1" is easier to execute.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is performed, the variation performance based on the fact that the number of reservations of the second starting port 122 is "1" in the specific time saving gaming state is performed. Although it has been explained that in the special time-saving game state, the variable performance based on the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 being "1" is more likely to be executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. When a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, the second start-up opening 122 in the special time-saving game state is more attractive than the fluctuating performance based on the fact that the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 is a specific number in the specific time-saving game state. The special effect at the time of variation may be more easily executed when the variable effect is based on the number of reservations of the starting port 122 being a specific number. In this case, the specific number may be any value among "1", "2", "3", and "4". In addition, regardless of the number of reservations, if a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is performed, the variable performance in the special time-saving gaming state is more favorable than the fluctuating performance based on winning the second starting hole 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. The special performance at the time of variation may be more easily executed when the variation performance is based on winning in the second start opening 122.

In addition, in this embodiment, in a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 being a specific number in the specific time saving gaming state is a loss, the special performance at the time of fluctuation is not executed ( 0%), but the invention is not limited to this. In the specific time saving gaming state, even if a variable performance is executed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 being a specific number is executed, the special performance at the time of variation is executed. It's okay. Further, even if a variable performance is executed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winnings in the second starting hole 122 in the specific time saving gaming state is a loss, the special performance at the time of variation may be executed. In these cases, the special performance at the time of variation that is executed is any of the SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance, change performance, zone performance, effect performance, character performance, sound performance, and button operation performance. It's okay.

Moreover, in this embodiment, the size change performance and the position change performance are performances performed in conjunction with the SP reach performance. In other words, when the "variable effect pattern" (see FIGS. 59 to 64) in which "SP reach" is executed is selected, the size change effect and the position change effect are performed.
However, the size change performance and the position change performance may be performed independently of the SP reach performance. That is, even if the SP reach effect is not performed, the size change effect and the position change effect may be performed. Further, even if the SP reach effect is performed, the size change effect and the position change effect do not need to be performed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the specific time-saving gaming state is controlled to the normal gaming state without performing a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot in the specific time-saving gaming state, it is performed in the normal gaming state. Regardless of the number of executions of the variable performance, the remaining number of arrivals image 503 is not displayed (see FIG. 97 (23)). That is, in this embodiment, if the variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot is not performed in the specific time-saving gaming state that has transitioned from the normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is returned to, in the returned normal gaming state. Regardless of the number of times the variable performance is executed, the normal game state is not controlled to the specific time-saving game state after returning to the normal game state.

(Variable effect example 10)
98 to 100 are diagrams showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 98 to 100, another specific example (variation effect example 10) of the variation effect of the decorative pattern 41 will be described. Variation performance example 10 is a variation performance example of the decorative pattern 41 based on a game ball winning in the second starting port 122 in the specific time saving game state.
Note that FIGS. 98 to 100 show variable effects that are executed when "EK1" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in FIG. 63. In addition, in the following explanation, the points that are different from each of the above-mentioned variation presentation examples will be mainly explained, and the description of the points that are the same as each variation presentation example may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 98(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control section 300 displays the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 with low decorativeness on the image display section 114. Definitely stopped. At this time, "1" is displayed in the pending number display 55 of the second starting port 122, and one pending image 52 is displayed. Moreover, at this time, the stage image 61, the first right-handed image 75, and the specific time saving remaining number image 524 are displayed. The text “100” is shown in the specific time saving remaining number image 524.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(2), the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 begin to change as the next special pattern starts to be displayed. At this time, the pending number display 55 of the second starting port 122 switches from "1" to "0". Further, the specific time saving remaining number of times image 524 is switched from "100" to "99".
Next, as shown in FIG. 98(3), the number "4" which is the left decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 98(4), the number "4" which is the right decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped, and the ready-to-win effect is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(5), the SP reach effect is executed and the stage image 61 is hidden.
Next, as shown in FIG. 98(6), the number "4" which is the middle decoration pattern 41 is temporarily stopped. At this time, the middle decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a larger display size than the left and right decorative patterns 41. Moreover, this display size of the medium decorative pattern 41 is larger than the display size of the decorative pattern 41 before the SP ready-to-reach effect is started (see FIG. 98(4)). Moreover, at this time, the small pattern 56 continues to fluctuate.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99(7), the decorative pattern 41 of the double-digit number is displayed at the display size before the start of the SP ready-to-reach effect. That is, the left and right decorative patterns 41 are displayed in an enlarged manner, and the middle decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a reduced size. On the other hand, the small design 56 continues to fluctuate.
Next, as shown in FIG. 99(8), a promotion promotion effect is executed. In the promotion promotion performance, a button operation performance is executed. In the illustrated example, a button operation image 69 is displayed by the button operation effect.

Then, when the player operates the effect button 161 while the button operation image 69 is displayed, a promotion effect is executed as shown in FIG. 99(9). In the illustrated example, the decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness is displayed as a combination of "777" due to the promotion effect. Further, at this time, the decorative pattern 41 of the number zero is displayed in an enlarged manner. More specifically, the left and right decorative patterns 41 are displayed in such a manner that a part thereof does not fit within the display area of the image display section 114, and the middle decorative pattern 41 is displayed in its entirety on the image display section 114. In other words, the middle decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a larger area on the image display section 114 than the left and right decorative patterns 41. Moreover, at this time, the small pattern 56 is temporarily stopped by the combination of "777".

Next, as shown in FIG. 99(10), the decorative pattern 41 of the number zero is displayed in a reduced size.
Then, as the special symbols stop changing, the decorative symbols 41 are fixed and stopped as shown in FIG. 99(11). The number combination "777" of this decorative pattern 41 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. Moreover, "777" is fixed and stopped as the small pattern 56. In other words, the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 are displayed in a matching combination of "777".
Next, as shown in FIG. 99(12), an opening image 74 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (13), a promotion image 508 is displayed. In the promotion image 508, a specific area image 509 is displayed.
Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the promotion image 508 was displayed, the first right-handed image 75, the in-round image 76, and the number of rounds image 77 are displayed, as shown in FIG. 100 (14). In the illustrated example, the text “Round 1” is displayed on the round number image 77.
Next, when the final round ends, a special time saving selection image 510 is displayed as shown in FIG. 100 (15). In the illustrated example, the cursor is placed on the "A" mode in the special time saving selection image 510.

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the special time saving selection image 510 was displayed, the special time saving start image 78 is displayed as shown in FIG. 100 (16). Also, at this time, the second right-handed image 511 is displayed together with the first right-handed image 75.
Next, in the special time saving game state, as shown in FIG. 100 (17), "777", which is a decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness, is fixed and stopped on the image display section 114. It should be noted that the decorative symbols 41 displayed at this time correspond to the sequence of numbers that are finalized and stopped before the jackpot game is executed, that is, when the jackpot is won. Similarly to the decorative pattern 41, the small pattern 56 is fixed and stopped by the sequence of numbers "777". Also, at this time, a stage image 61 corresponding to the special time-saving game state is displayed. Also, at this time, a special time saving remaining number image 79 is displayed. The special time saving remaining number image 79 shows the text “30 times”.

As described above, in variable performance example 3, when a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot in the normal gaming state, the hidden stage image 61 is redisplayed after the SP reach performance is executed. (See FIG. 73 (15)). Furthermore, in variable performance example 5, when a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot in the special time-saving gaming state, the hidden stage image 61 is redisplayed after the SP reach performance is executed. (See Figure 83 (17)). On the other hand, in variable performance example 10, when a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot in a specific time-saving gaming state, the hidden stage image 61 is redisplayed after the SP reach performance is executed. Not done. However, when a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot in the specific time-saving gaming state, the hidden stage image 61 may be re-displayed after the SP reach performance is executed.

Further, when a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot in the normal game state, the hidden stage image 61 is re-displayed after the SP ready-to-win performance is executed. On the other hand, when a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot in the special time-saving gaming state and the specific time-saving gaming state, the hidden stage image 61 is not redisplayed after the execution of the SP reach performance. You can do it like this.

In addition, in the variable effect pattern table (see FIG. 63) used when a game ball enters the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the “judgment result” changes to a “variable effect pattern” in which the “jackpot” is a “jackpot”. A special performance is associated with it. Here, examples of the special performance at the time of variation include pseudo-continuous performance, SP reach performance, change performance, zone performance, effect performance, role performance, sound performance, button operation performance, and the like. In addition, in the variable performance pattern table used when a game ball enters the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the special performance at the time of fluctuation is associated with the "variable performance pattern" whose "judgment result" is "miss". It has not been done. In other words, the variable performance in which the variable time special performance is executed based on the winning in the second starting hole 122 in the specific time saving gaming state is a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.
On the other hand, in the variable performance pattern table (see FIG. 59) used when a game ball enters the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state, the "determination result" is changed to a "variable performance pattern" in which the "decision result" is "miss". A special performance is associated with it. In addition, in the variable effect pattern table (see FIG. 61) used when a game ball enters the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state, the “determination result” changes to a “variable effect pattern” in which the “determination result” is “miss”. A special performance is associated with it. In other words, a variable performance in which a special performance at variable times is executed based on a winning in the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state, and a special performance in variable times based on a winning in the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state. In the fluctuating performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, the fluctuating performance may be performed.
That is, in this embodiment, when a variable performance in which a special performance is performed at the time of fluctuation is executed, the second starting hole in the specific time-saving gaming state is more effective than the variable performance based on winning the first starting hole 121 in the normal gaming state. The variable performance based on the winning of 122 is more likely to be executed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. In addition, when a variable performance in which a special performance is performed at the time of fluctuation is executed, winning at the second starting port 122 in the specific time saving gaming state is higher than a variable performance based on winning at the second starting port 122 in the special time saving gaming state. It is easier to perform a variable performance based on the above in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.

In particular, in this embodiment, when a variable effect in which a special effect at the time of change is performed without an SPSP reach effect is performed, the specific effect is more effective than a variable effect based on winning in the first starting opening 121 in the normal gaming state. The variable performance based on the winning of the second start opening 122 in the time-saving gaming state is more likely to be executed as the variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. In addition, when a variable performance in which a special performance at the time of fluctuation is performed without the SPSP reach performance is performed, the variable performance based on winning in the second starting opening 122 in the special time-saving game state is more effective than the variable performance in the specific time-saving game state. A variable performance based on winning in the second starting hole 122 is more likely to be executed than a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.

In addition, when a variable performance in which a special performance is performed at the time of fluctuation is executed, the second start in the specific time-saving gaming state is more effective than the variable performance based on the fact that the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 is a specific number in the normal gaming state. A variable effect based on the number of reserved openings 122 being a specific number may be more likely to be executed than a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. In addition, when a variable performance in which a special performance is performed at the time of fluctuation is executed, the second starting point 122 in the special time-saving gaming state is more effective than the variable performance based on the fact that the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 is a specific number in the special time-saving gaming state. A variable effect based on the number of reservations in the starting opening 122 being a specific number may be more likely to be executed than a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. In these cases, the specific number may be any value among "1", "2", "3", and "4".
In addition, when a variable performance in which a special performance at the time of fluctuation is performed without a SPSP reach performance is performed, compared to a variable performance based on the fact that the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 is a specific number in the normal gaming state, The variable performance based on the fact that the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 is a specific number in the specific time-saving game state may be more likely to be executed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. In addition, when a variable performance in which a special performance at the time of fluctuation is performed without the SPSP reach performance being performed, it is more effective than a variable performance based on the fact that the number of reservations at the second starting port 122 is a specific number in the special time-saving gaming state. In the specific time-saving game state, the variable performance based on the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 being a specific number may be more likely to be executed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. In these cases, the specific number may be any value among "1", "2", "3", and "4".

In addition, in this embodiment, when a variable performance is executed in which a special performance at the time of fluctuation is performed based on winning in the second starting hole 122 in the specific time saving gaming state, a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot is executed. Although it has been explained that it is always executed (100%), it is not limited to this. Even if a variable performance is executed in which a special performance at the time of fluctuation is performed based on winning in the second starting hole 122 in the specific time saving gaming state, a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is executed. Good too. In addition, even if a variable performance is executed in which a special performance at the time of fluctuation is performed based on the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 being a specific number in the specific time saving gaming state, the lottery result of the special symbol lottery may be off. A variation effect may be executed.
In addition, in this embodiment, when the SPSP reach performance is not performed and the fluctuation performance is performed based on winning in the second starting port 122 in the specific time saving gaming state, the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is Although it has been explained that the variable performance that is a jackpot is always executed (100%), the present invention is not limited to this. Even if the SPSP reach performance is not performed based on winning in the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state, and the fluctuation performance is performed in which a special performance at the time of fluctuation is performed, the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss. A variation effect may be executed. In addition, even if the SPSP reach performance is not performed based on the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 being a specific number in the specific time-saving gaming state, and the fluctuation performance is performed in which the special performance at the time of fluctuation is performed, the special symbol A variable performance in which the lottery result is a loser may be executed.

In addition, in variable performance example 1, after the reach promotion performance (see Figure 67 (18)) is performed, the reach performance (see Figure 68 (19)) is performed, and after that, the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss. A decorative pattern 41 is displayed based on the combination that notifies the user of the situation (see FIG. 69 (25)). Here, in the variable performance pattern table (see FIG. 59) used in the normal gaming state, "reach boost" and "normal" are associated with the "variable performance pattern" whose "determination result" is "miss". In other words, in a variable performance in which a reach-to-reach performance is executed after a reach-increasing performance in a normal gaming state, a fluctuation performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loser may be performed.

On the other hand, in the variable performance pattern table (see Figure 63) used in the specific time-saving gaming state, "reach stimulation" and "normal" are associated with the "variable performance pattern" whose "judgment result" is "jackpot". "EK2" which is a "variable effect pattern" is provided. In the variation performance based on this "EK2", the variation performance starts as shown in variation performance example 10 (see FIG. 98 (2)), and after the left decorative pattern 41 temporarily stops (see FIG. 98 (3)), After the reach stimulation effect using the right decorative pattern 41 and the reach stimulation effect image 94 as shown in FIG. 77 (13) is executed, the reach effect is executed (see FIG. 98 (4)), and the SPSP reach effect (see FIG. 98 (5)) etc., the decorative pattern 41 of the double number temporarily stops (see Fig. 98 (6), Fig. 99 (7)), and the promotion promotion effect (see Fig. 99 (8)) and the promotion effect (see Fig. 99 (8)). (9)) is executed, the promoted decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped (see FIG. 99(10)), and then fixedly stopped (see FIG. 99(11)), which is a variable effect. In addition, in the variable performance pattern table used in the specific time-saving gaming state, the "variable performance pattern" whose "judgment result" is "miss" is the "variable performance pattern" with which "reach excitement" and "normal" are associated. is not provided. In other words, the variable performance in which the ready-to-win performance is executed after the execution of the ready-to-win promotion performance in the specific time-saving gaming state is a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.
That is, in the present embodiment, when a variable performance in which a reach effect is performed after execution of a reach promotion effect is performed, it is easier to execute a jackpot game with the variable effect in the second mode than with the variable effect in the first mode. .

In addition, in variation performance example 4, after the reach promotion performance (see Figure 77 (13)) is performed, the reach performance (see Figure 77 (14)) is performed, and after that, the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss. A decorative pattern 41 is displayed according to the combination that notifies the user of the situation (see FIG. 78 (20)). Here, in the variable performance pattern table (see FIG. 61) used in the special time-saving gaming state, "reach boost" and "normal" are associated with the "variable performance pattern" whose "judgment result" is "miss". . In other words, in a variable performance in which a reach-to-reach performance is executed after a reach-increasing performance in a special time-saving gaming state, a fluctuation performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loser may be performed.
That is, in the present embodiment, when a variable performance in which a reach effect is performed after the execution of a reach promotion effect is performed, a jackpot game is more likely to be executed with the variable effect in the specific mode than with the variable effect in the special mode. Here, the special mode includes, for example, a special time-saving game state. Furthermore, the specific mode includes, for example, a specific time saving gaming state.
In this case, the player can be made to strongly expect that a jackpot game will be executed when the reach effect is executed after the execution of the reach promotion effect in the variable effect in the specific mode. Therefore, it is possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine 100 that can perform highly entertaining performances.

In addition, when a variable performance that executes a reach effect after the execution of a reach promotion effect is performed, even if the variable effect in the special time-saving game state is made easier to execute the jackpot game than the variable effect in the first mode. good. In this case, the special time saving game state is regarded as the second mode.

In addition, when a variable performance that executes a reach effect after the execution of a reach promotion effect is performed, the number of holds is based on this specific number in the second mode, rather than a variable effect based on a specific number of holds in the first mode. A variable performance based on a certain fact may make it easier to execute a jackpot game. In addition, when a variable performance that executes a reach effect after the execution of a reach promotion effect is performed, the number of holds in a specific mode must be this specific number rather than a variable effect based on the number of holds being a specific number in a special mode. It may be possible to make it easier for a jackpot game to be executed with a variable performance based on the above. In this case, the specific number may be any value among "1", "2", "3", and "4".

In addition, when a variable performance that executes a reach effect after the execution of a reach promotion effect is performed, the second start opening in the second mode The variable performance based on the winning of the game ball to 122 may make it easier to execute the jackpot game. In addition, when a variable effect that executes a reach effect after the execution of a reach promotion effect is performed, the variable effect based on the fact that the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 is a specific number in the first mode is higher than that in the second mode. A variable performance based on the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 being this specific number may make it easier to execute the jackpot game. In this case, the specific number may be any value among "1", "2", "3", and "4".

Moreover, the rate of attainment of a reach in the fluctuating performance in which the reach promotion performance is executed may be higher in the first mode than in the second mode.
That is, when a variable performance that executes a reach promotion performance is performed, the variation performance in the first mode is easier to execute than the variation performance in the second mode, and the reach performance is executed after the execution of the reach promotion performance. When a variable performance to be executed is performed, the variable performance in the second mode may be easier to execute a jackpot game than the variable performance in the first mode.
In this case, in the first mode, the player can expect more of a reach than in the second mode because it is easier to execute a reach when executing the reach promotion effect. In addition, in the second mode, the jackpot game is more likely to be executed in the fluctuating performance where the reach effect is performed after the execution of the reach promotion effect, so that the reach effect is performed after the execution of the reach promotion effect than in the first mode. It is possible to make the player expect that a jackpot game will be executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide a pachinko game machine 100 that can provide players with a variety of entertainment depending on the mode and can execute highly entertaining performances.

In addition, when a variable performance that executes a reach promotion performance is performed, the game ball enters the first starting port 121 in the first mode more than the variable performance based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 122 in the second mode. It is easier to execute the reach effect when the variable effect is based on winning a prize, and if the variable effect is performed in which the reach effect is executed after the reach promotion effect is executed, the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 121 in the first mode The variable presentation based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 122 in the second mode may make it easier to execute a jackpot game than the variable presentation based on. In this case, the specific number may be any value among "1", "2", "3", and "4".
In addition, when a variable effect that executes a reach promotion effect is performed, the variable effect based on the fact that the number of reservations of the second starting port 122 is a specific number in the second mode is more than It is easier to execute a reach effect with a variable effect based on the number of reservations being this specific number, and when a variable effect is performed in which a reach effect is executed after a reach promotion effect is executed, the first starting port in the first mode is The variable performance based on the number of reservations at the second starting port 122 being this specific number in the second mode is better than the fluctuation performance based on the number of reservations at the second starting port 122 being this specific number, than the fluctuation performance based on the number of reservations at the second starting port 122 being this specific number. It doesn't have to be easy. In this case, the specific number may be any value among "1", "2", "3", and "4".

Further, the variable performance in the second mode may be more likely to be executed in which the reach-to-reach effect is performed after the reach-stimulating effect is executed than the variable effect in the first mode. Further, the variable performance in the first mode may be more likely to be executed in which the reach-to-reach effect is performed after the reach-increasing effect is executed than the variable effect in the second mode. Furthermore, the variable performance based on the winning of a game ball in the second starting port 122 in the second mode is more likely to stimulate the reach than the fluctuating presentation based on the winning of a game ball in the first starting port 121 in the first mode. It may be possible to make it easier to perform a variable performance in which a reach performance is performed after the execution of . Furthermore, the variable performance based on the winning of a game ball in the first starting port 121 in the first mode is more effective in stimulating the reach than the fluctuating presentation based on the winning of a game ball in the second starting port 122 in the second mode. It may be possible to make it easier to perform a variable performance in which a reach performance is performed after the execution of . Furthermore, in the second mode, the variable performance is based on the fact that the number of reservations at the second starting port 122 is this specific number, rather than the fluctuation performance based on the number of reservations at the first starting port 121 being a specific number in the first mode. It may be possible to make it easier to perform a variable performance in which a reach effect is performed after a reach promotion effect is performed. In addition, in the first mode, the variable performance is based on the fact that the number of reservations at the first starting port 121 is this specific number, rather than the fluctuation performance based on the number of reservations at the second starting port 122 being a specific number in the second mode. It may be possible to make it easier to perform a variable performance in which a reach effect is performed after a reach promotion effect is performed. In this case, the specific number may be any value among "1", "2", "3", and "4".
Moreover, the variable effect in the second mode may be more likely to be executed in which the reach-stimulating effect is performed than the variable effect in the first mode. Moreover, the variable effect in the first mode may be more likely to be executed than the variable effect in the second mode. Furthermore, the variable performance based on the winning of a game ball in the second starting port 122 in the second mode is more likely to stimulate the reach than the fluctuating presentation based on the winning of a game ball in the first starting port 121 in the first mode. It may be possible to make it easier to perform a variation effect in which a change is performed. Furthermore, the variable performance based on the winning of a game ball in the first starting port 121 in the first mode is more effective in stimulating the reach than the fluctuating presentation based on the winning of a game ball in the second starting port 122 in the second mode. It may be possible to make it easier to perform a variation effect in which a change is performed. Furthermore, in the second mode, the variable performance is based on the fact that the number of reservations at the second starting port 122 is this specific number, rather than the fluctuation performance based on the number of reservations at the first starting port 121 being a specific number in the first mode. It may be possible to make it easier to perform a variable performance in which a reach promotion performance is performed. In addition, in the first mode, the variable performance is based on the fact that the number of reservations at the first starting port 121 is this specific number, rather than the fluctuation performance based on the number of reservations at the second starting port 122 being a specific number in the second mode. It may be possible to make it easier to perform a variable performance in which a reach promotion performance is performed. In this case, the specific number may be any value among "1", "2", "3", and "4".

In addition, when a variable performance that executes a reach effect after the execution of a reach promotion effect is performed, the variable effect based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting hole 122 in the special mode is more likely to be performed than the variable effect based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting hole 122 in the specific mode. The variable performance based on the winning of game balls may make it easier for the jackpot game to be executed. In addition, when a variable effect that executes a reach effect after the execution of a reach promotion effect is performed, the second start effect in the specific mode is more effective than the variable effect based on the fact that the number of holds of the second start port 122 is a specific number in the special mode. A variable performance based on the number of pending slots 122 being this specific number may make it easier to execute a jackpot game. In this case, the specific number may be any value among "1", "2", "3", and "4".
Furthermore, the variable performance in the specific mode may be more likely to be executed in which the reach-to-reach performance is performed after the execution of the reach-stimulating performance. Further, the variable performance in the special mode may be more likely to be executed in which the reach-to-reach effect is performed after the execution of the reach-stimulating effect than the variable effect in the specific mode. In addition, the variable performance based on the winning of a game ball in the second starting port 122 in the specific mode is better than the variable performance based on the winning of the game ball in the second starting port 122 in the special mode. It may be possible to make it easier to perform a variable performance in which a reach performance is performed later. Furthermore, the variable performance based on the winning of a game ball to the second starting port 122 in the special mode is better than the variable performance based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 122 in the specific mode. It may be possible to make it easier to perform a variable performance in which a reach performance is performed later. Furthermore, the variable performance based on the fact that the number of reservations at the second starting port 122 is a specific number in the specific mode is better than the fluctuating performance based on the number of reservations at the second starting port 122 being a specific number in the special mode. However, a variable performance in which a reach effect is performed after a reach promotion effect is executed may be made easier to execute. Furthermore, the variable performance based on the fact that the number of reservations at the second starting port 122 is a specific number in the special mode is better than the fluctuating performance based on the number of reservations at the second starting port 122 being a specific number in the specific mode. However, a variable performance in which a reach effect is performed after a reach promotion effect is executed may be made easier to execute. In this case, the specific number may be any value among "1", "2", "3", and "4".
Furthermore, a variable performance in which a reach-increasing performance is performed may be more easily performed in a specific mode than a variable performance in a special mode. Further, a variable performance in which a reach-increasing performance is performed may be more easily executed in a special mode than a variable performance in a specific mode. In addition, the reach-increasing effect is better in the variable effect based on the winning of a game ball in the second starting port 122 in the specific mode than in the variable effect based on the winning of the game ball in the second starting port 122 in the special mode. It may also be possible to make it easier to execute a variable effect. In addition, the variable performance based on the winning of a game ball to the second starting port 122 in the special mode is better than the variable presentation based on the winning of a game ball to the second starting port 122 in the specific mode. It may also be possible to make it easier to execute a variable effect. Furthermore, the variable performance based on the fact that the number of reservations at the second starting port 122 is a specific number in the specific mode is better than the fluctuating performance based on the number of reservations at the second starting port 122 being a specific number in the special mode. However, it may be possible to make it easier to execute a variable performance in which a reach promotion performance is performed. Furthermore, the variable performance based on the fact that the number of reservations at the second starting port 122 is a specific number in the special mode is better than the fluctuating performance based on the number of reservations at the second starting port 122 being a specific number in the specific mode. However, it may be possible to make it easier to execute a variable performance in which a reach promotion performance is performed. In this case, the specific number may be any value among "1", "2", "3", and "4".

Furthermore, for example, when a variable performance is performed in which a reach promotion performance is performed in the first symbol based on the winning of a game ball to the first starting port 121 in the first mode, a reach production in the first symbol is performed. The percentage is the first percentage. The first pattern is, for example, a decorative pattern 41 consisting of even numbers such as "2", "4", "6", and "8". Then, when a variable performance is performed in which a reach promotion performance is executed in the second symbol based on the winning of a game ball to the first starting port 121 in the first mode, the rate at which the reach promotion performance in the second symbol is executed is , the second ratio may be used. The second symbol is a decorative symbol 41 that is more advantageous to the player if the second symbol is aligned than the first symbol, such that the number of rounds in a jackpot game played when the symbols are aligned is greater than the number of rounds when the first symbol is aligned. . The second pattern is, for example, a decorative pattern 41 consisting of "3" or specific characters. Moreover, the second ratio is the same or smaller value than the first ratio. Furthermore, when a variable performance is performed in which a reach promotion performance is executed in the third symbol based on the winning of a game ball to the first starting port 121 in the first mode, the rate at which the reach promotion performance in the third symbol is executed is , a third ratio may be used. The third symbol is a decorative symbol 41 whose alignment is more advantageous for the player than the third symbol, such as the number of rounds in a jackpot game played when the symbols align is greater than the number of rounds due to the second pattern aligning. . The third pattern is, for example, a decorative pattern 41 consisting of "7" or specific characters. Moreover, the third ratio is a value smaller than either of the first ratio and the second ratio.
Furthermore, for example, when a variable performance is performed in which a reach promotion performance is performed in the first symbol based on the winning of a game ball to the second starting port 122 in the second mode, a reach production in the first symbol is performed. The ratio may be a fourth ratio. The fourth ratio may be smaller than the first ratio, the same as the first ratio, or larger than the first ratio. Then, when a variable performance is performed in which a reach promotion performance is executed in the second symbol based on the winning of a game ball to the second starting port 122 in the second mode, the rate at which the reach promotion performance in the second symbol is executed is , a fifth ratio may be used. The fifth ratio may be smaller than the second ratio, the same as the second ratio, or larger than the second ratio. Furthermore, when a variable performance is performed in which a reach promotion performance is executed in the third symbol based on the winning of a game ball to the second starting port 122 in the second mode, the rate at which the reach promotion performance in the third symbol is executed is , the sixth ratio may be larger than the third ratio. Also, the rate of increase from the third rate to the sixth rate is greater than the rate of increase from the first rate to the fourth rate, and the rate of increase from the second rate to the fifth rate. Good too.
Further, for example, when a variable performance is performed in which a reach promotion performance in the first symbol is performed based on the winning of a game ball to the first starting port 121 in the second mode, a reach production in the first symbol is performed. The percentage may be a seventh percentage. The seventh ratio may be smaller or larger than either the first ratio or the fourth ratio. In addition, the rate at which a variable performance is performed in which a reach promotion performance (ready-to-reach performance) is executed in the first symbol based on the winning of a game ball to the first starting port 121 in the first mode, and the second startup in the second mode The rate at which a variable effect is performed in which a reach promotion effect (ready-to-reach effect) is executed in the first symbol based on the effect of a game ball entering the opening 122 is higher than the rate at which a game ball enters the first start opening 121 in the second mode. Based on this, the rate at which the variable performance in which the reach promotion performance (reach performance) is performed in the first symbol may be smaller.
Furthermore, for example, when a variable performance is performed in which a reach promotion performance is performed in the second symbol based on the winning of a game ball to the first starting port 121 in the second mode, a reach production in the second symbol is performed. The ratio may be an eighth ratio. The eighth ratio may be smaller or larger than either the second ratio or the fifth ratio. In addition, the rate at which a variable performance is performed in which a reach stimulation performance (reach performance) in the second symbol is performed based on the winning of a game ball to the first starting port 121 in the first mode, and the second startup in the second mode The rate at which a variable effect is performed in which a reach promotion effect (reach effect) in the second symbol is executed based on the effect of a game ball entering the opening 122 is higher than the rate at which a game ball enters the first starting opening 121 in the second mode. Based on this, the rate at which the variable performance in which the reach promotion performance (ready-to-reach performance) is performed in the second symbol may be smaller.
Further, for example, when a variable performance is performed in which a reach promotion performance is performed in the third symbol based on the winning of a game ball to the first starting port 121 in the second mode, a reach performance in the third symbol is performed. The ratio may be a ninth ratio. The ninth ratio may be smaller or larger than either the third ratio or the sixth ratio. In addition, the rate at which a variable performance is performed in which a reach promotion performance (ready-to-reach performance) is executed in the third symbol based on the winning of a game ball to the first starting port 121 in the first mode, and the second startup in the second mode The rate at which a variable effect is performed based on the winning of a game ball to the first starting opening 121 in the second mode is higher than the rate at which a variable effect is performed based on the winning of a game ball to the first starting opening 121 in the third symbol. Based on this, the rate at which the variable performance in which the reach promotion performance (ready-to-reach performance) is performed in the third symbol may be smaller.
Moreover, each of the above-mentioned ratios may be a ratio in a variable performance that is executed when the number of reservations of the target starting port among the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122 is a specific number. In this case, the specific number may be any value among "1", "2", "3", and "4".

Further, the performance control unit 300 may execute the first performance when the reach-increasing performance in the first symbol is performed based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 121 in the first mode. The first effect is, for example, an effect that displays a background image of a specific color or a specific character. The specific color is, for example, blue or yellow. Further, the performance control unit 300 may execute the first performance when the reach-increasing performance in the second symbol is performed based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 121 in the first mode. A second performance different from the first performance may be performed. The second performance is, for example, a performance that displays a background image made of a different color from that of the first performance or a character that is different from the first performance. The color different from the first effect is, for example, green or purple. Then, the performance control unit 300 may execute the third performance when the reach-increasing performance in the third symbol is performed based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 121 in the first mode. The third performance is, for example, a performance that displays a background image made of a different color from the first and second performances, or a character that is different from the first and second performances. The color different from the first effect and the second effect is, for example, red, gold, or the like.
Then, the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 121 in the first mode is better than the variable performance in which the reach stimulation effect in the third symbol is executed based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 122 in the second mode. The third performance may be more easily executed in the variable performance in which the reach promotion performance in the third symbol is performed based on. In addition, the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 121 in the first mode is better than the variable performance in which the reach stimulation effect in the first symbol is executed based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 122 in the second mode. The first performance may be more easily executed in the variable performance in which the reach-increasing performance in the first symbol is performed based on. In addition, the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 121 in the first mode is better than the variable performance in which the reach stimulation effect in the second symbol is executed based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 122 in the second mode. The first performance and the second performance may be easier to execute in the variable performance in which the reach-increasing performance in the second symbol is executed based on the above.
In addition, the execution rate of the third performance in the variable performance based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 122 in the second mode is the same as the execution rate of the third performance in the variable performance based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 121 in the second mode. It may be the same as the execution rate of the third performance. In addition, the execution rate of the first performance in the variable performance based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 122 in the second mode is the execution ratio of the first performance in the variable performance based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 121 in the second mode. It may be the same as the execution rate of the first performance. In addition, the execution rate of the second performance in the variable performance based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 122 in the second mode is the same as the execution rate of the second performance in the variable performance based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 121 in the second mode. It may be the same as the execution rate of the second performance.

In addition, in the variable performance example 3, when the promotion performance is executed, the decorative pattern 41 of the number zero is not enlarged and displayed (see FIG. 73 (14)), but the present invention is not limited to this. When the promotion effect is performed, the decorative pattern 41 of the number zero may be enlarged and reduced (see FIG. 99 (9) and FIG. 99 (10)). Further, when the promotion promotion performance is performed, the enlarged display and the reduced display of the decoration pattern 41 of the zero number may be performed after the promotion promotion performance is performed, even if the promotion promotion performance is not performed.

(Variable effect example 11)
FIG. 101 and FIG. 102 are diagrams showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 101 and 102, another specific example (variation effect example 11) of the variation effect of the decorative pattern 41 will be described. Variable performance example 11 is a variable performance example based on winning in the second starting port 122 in the normal gaming state.
The fluctuating effects shown in FIGS. 101 and 102 are the fluctuating effects that are executed when "ED3" is selected as the "fluctuating effect pattern" in FIG. 60. In addition, in the following explanation, points that are different from each of the above-mentioned variable performance examples will be mainly explained, and descriptions of points that are the same as each of the variable performance examples may be omitted.

First, as the variation of the special symbols in the last round in the special time-saving gaming state is completed and the pachinko gaming machine 100 is controlled from the special time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state, as shown in FIG. 101(1), A first transition image 512 and a resultant image 513 are displayed. Moreover, at this time, the decorative pattern 41, the variable image 51, the pending image 52, and the stage image 61 are hidden. On the other hand, the small pattern 56 is displayed. Further, the pending number display 55 of the first starting port 121 indicates "3", which is the pending number of winnings to the first starting port 121, and the pending number display 55 of the second starting port 122 indicates "3", which is the pending number of winnings to the first starting port 121. Indicates "1" which is the pending number of winnings.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(2), the small symbols 56 begin to vary as the next special symbol starts to be displayed. Further, the pending number display 55 of the second starting port 122 switches from "1" to "0".
Next, as shown in FIG. 101(3), the small symbols 56 are displayed in the combination "555" and temporarily stopped. Also, at this time, a first winning suggestion image 528 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(4), the decorative pattern 41 of the number zero is temporarily stopped by the combination of "555".
Then, as the special symbols stop changing, the three decorative symbols 41 and the small symbols 56 with low decorativeness are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 101(5). The combination of numbers "555" of this decorative pattern 41 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. Further, "555" is fixed and stopped as the small symbol 56. In other words, the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 are displayed in a matching combination of "555".
Next, as shown in FIG. 101(6), an opening image 74 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the text "Bonus!" indicating the start of a jackpot game or a small win game is displayed as the opening image 74.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(7), a promotion image 508 is displayed. In the promotion image 508, a specific area image 509 is displayed.
Then, when a predetermined period of time passes without a game ball winning in the second grand prize opening 126 after the promotion image 508 is displayed, a remaining time image 529 is displayed as shown in FIG. 102 (8). The remaining time image 529 shows the text "3:00 seconds left." After this, a countdown is performed using the remaining time image 529 until there is no remaining time until the second big prize opening door 126D shifts from the open state to the closed state.

After this, when the remaining time until the second big prize opening door 126D shifts from the open state to the closed state is exhausted, as shown in FIG. 102 (9), the remaining time image 529 shows "0 remaining: 00 seconds" is displayed. Also, at this time, the promotion image 508 is hidden and the end image 527 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (10), the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 "555" are fixed and stopped on the image display section 114. Also, at this time, a stage image 61 corresponding to the normal game state is displayed. Also, at this time, three pending images 52, an execution number image 501, and a left-handed image 514 are displayed. The number of executions image 501 shows the text "34 GAME" including the number of new variable presentations performed after the number of variable display of the special symbol was reset. Although not shown in the drawings, after this, a variable effect based on the holding of the first starting port 121 is started.

As described above, in this embodiment, a variable performance is executed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a small win based on winnings in the second starting port 122 in the normal gaming state, and the If the game ball does not win in the two major winning holes 126, before the start of the first variable performance based on the winning in the first starting hole 121 in the normal gaming state, the stage image 61 according to the normal gaming state and the decoration of the double number are displayed. A symbol 41 and a small symbol 56 of the number zero are displayed.

(Variable effect example 12)
FIGS. 103 to 107 are diagrams showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control section 300 using the image display section 114.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 103 to 107, another specific example (variation effect example 12) of the variation effect of the decorative pattern 41 will be described. Variation performance example 12 is a variation performance example of the decorative pattern 41 based on a game ball winning in the first starting port 121 in the specific time saving game state. Further, in the variation performance example 12, the variation performance is performed five times.
Note that the five fluctuating effects shown in FIGS. 103 to 107 are all fluctuating effects that are executed when "EO1" is selected as the "fluctuating effect pattern" in FIG. 64. In addition, in the following explanation, points that are different from each of the above-mentioned variable performance examples will be mainly explained, and descriptions of points that are the same as each of the variable performance examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 103(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control section 300 displays the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 with low decorativeness on the image display section 114. Definitely stopped. Moreover, at this time, the stage image 61, the first right-handed image 75, and the specific time saving remaining number image 524 are displayed. The text “294” is displayed in the specific time saving remaining number image 524.

Next, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 121, as shown in FIG. 103(2), the decorative symbols 41 and the small symbols 56 begin to vary as the special symbols begin to be displayed. Further, at this time, the specific time saving remaining number image 524 is switched from "294" to "293". On the other hand, the fluctuation image 51 is not displayed. Moreover, the winning sound notifying that the game ball has won into the first starting port 121 is not output. Also, at this time, the fourth right-handed image 525 is displayed. Further, at this time, a voice saying "Please hit to the right" is output from the speaker 156 to urge the user to shoot the game ball toward the right side area of the game area 111.

Next, when four game balls land in the first starting port 121, a fourth right-handed image 525 is displayed as shown in FIG. 103(3). In this embodiment, every time a game ball enters the first starting port 121, the fourth right-handed image 525 is displayed. Furthermore, each time a game ball enters the first starting port 121, a voice saying "Please hit to the right" is output from the speaker 156. On the other hand, the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 are not displayed. When winning a prize at the first starting port 121 four times, no winning sound is output. Also, at this time, "4" is displayed on the pending number display 55 of the first starting port 121. Moreover, at this time, the first special symbol reservation display 218 is displaying "4" corresponding to the number of reservations for winnings to the first starting opening 121. Also, at this time, the sub-first reservation display 83 is displaying "4".
Next, as shown in FIG. 103(4), the number "4" which is the left decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 103(5), the number "2" which is the right decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 103(6), the number "1" which is the middle decoration pattern 41 is temporarily stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (7), the three decorative patterns 41 "412" are fixed and stopped. Further, as the special symbols stop changing, the small symbols 56 also stop fixed. At this time, the combination "412" of the small symbols 56 matches the combination of the decorative symbols 41.
Next, as shown in FIG. 104(8), the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 begin to change as the next special pattern starts to be displayed. Further, at this time, the specific time saving remaining number image 524 is switched from "293" to "292". Also, at this time, the pending number display 55 of the first starting port 121 switches from "4" to "3". Further, at this time, the first special symbol reservation display 218 displays "3" corresponding to the number of reservations for winnings to the first starting opening 121. Also, at this time, the sub-first reservation display 83 displays "3".

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(9), the number "1" which is the left decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (10), the number "5" which is the right decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (11), the number "2", which is the middle decoration pattern 41, is temporarily stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (12), the three decorative patterns 41 "125" are fixed and stopped. Further, as the special symbols stop changing, the small symbols 56 are also displayed all together and are fixed and stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (13), the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 begin to change as the next special pattern starts to be displayed. Further, at this time, the specific time saving remaining number of times image 524 is switched from "292" to "291". Also, at this time, the pending number display 55 of the first starting port 121 switches from "3" to "2". Further, at this time, the first special symbol reservation display 218 displays "2" corresponding to the number of reservations for winnings to the first starting opening 121. Also, at this time, the sub-first reservation display 83 displays "2".

Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (14), the number "8" which is the left decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (15), the number "3" which is the right decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (16), the number "5" which is the middle decoration pattern 41 is temporarily stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (17), the three decorative patterns 41 "853" are fixed and stopped. Further, as the special symbols stop changing, the small symbols 56 are also displayed all together and are fixed and stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (18), as the next special symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner, the decorative symbols 41 and the small symbols 56 begin to vary. Further, at this time, the specific time saving remaining number image 524 is switched from "291" to "290". Also, at this time, the pending number display 55 of the first starting port 121 switches from "2" to "1". Further, at this time, the first special symbol reservation display 218 displays "1" corresponding to the number of reservations for winnings to the first starting opening 121. Also, at this time, the sub-first reservation display 83 displays "1".

Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (19), the number "7" which is the left decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (20), the number "2" which is the right decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (21), the number "1" which is the middle decoration pattern 41 is temporarily stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (22), the three decorative patterns 41 "712" are fixed and stopped. Further, as the special symbols stop changing, the small symbols 56 are also displayed all together and are fixed and stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (23), the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 start to change as the next special pattern starts to be displayed. Further, at this time, the specific time saving remaining number image 524 switches from "290" to "289". Also, at this time, the pending number display 55 of the first starting port 121 switches from "1" to "0". Also, at this time, the first special symbol reservation display 218 displays "0" corresponding to the number of reservations for winnings to the first starting opening 121. Also, at this time, the sub-first reservation display 83 displays "0".
Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (24), the number "1" which is the left decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (25), the number "6" which is the right decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (26), the number "3" which is the middle decoration pattern 41 is temporarily stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (27), the three decorative patterns 41 "136" are fixed and stopped. Further, as the special symbols stop changing, the small symbols 56 are also displayed all together and are fixed and stopped.

As described above, in the variable performance example 12, when a game ball enters the first starting port 121 while the first right-handed image 75 is displayed, the fourth right-handed image 525 is displayed, and the speaker 156 A voice saying "Please hit to the right" is output. That is, in this embodiment, it is possible to perform the first notification to urge the firing of the game ball to the right side in the game area 111 in the specific time-saving game state. When a game ball enters the first starting port 121 while the first notification is being performed, in addition to the first notification, a second notification is sent to urge the game ball to be launched to the right side in the gaming area 111. It is possible to do so. Here, the first notification is, for example, the display of the first right-handed hit image 75. Further, the second notification is, for example, the display of the fourth right-handed hitting image 525 or the output from the speaker 156 of a voice saying "Please hit right-handed."
In the specific time-saving gaming state, the first right-handed image 75 is displayed, but the player may shoot the game ball to the left side of the gaming area 111 without noticing the first right-handed image 75. Even in this case, when a game ball enters the first starting port 121, by displaying the fourth right-hitting image 525 and outputting the voice "Please hit right", a specific time-saving gaming state can be entered. In this case, it is possible to urge the player to enter the game ball into the second starting port 122.

In addition, in variable effect example 10, when a game ball enters the second starting port 122, the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 are displayed (see FIG. 94 (2) and FIG. 94 (3)), and the variable effect is performed. The display contents of the specific time saving remaining number image 524 are updated (see FIG. 94(2)). On the other hand, in variable effect example 12, even if a game ball enters the first starting port 121, the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 are not displayed, but when the variable effect is performed, the display content of the specific time saving remaining number image 524 is updated (see FIG. 103(2)). That is, in the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting port 122 in the second mode, the production control unit 300 displays the information display, updates the display mode of the special image, and displays the information display in the second mode. When a game ball enters the first starting slot 121, the information display is not displayed and the display mode of the special image is updated. Here, as the second mode, for example, a specific time saving gaming state can be mentioned. Furthermore, examples of the information display include a fluctuation image 51 and a pending image 52. Moreover, as a special image, the specific time saving remaining number of times image 524 is mentioned, for example.

In this case, even if a special symbol lottery is performed based on winnings in the first start opening 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the player is made aware that the remaining number of special symbol lottery events in the time-saving state is reduced. Can be done. As a result, in the specific time-saving gaming state, the player is prevented from winning a game ball into the first starting port 121, and the player can enjoy the variable performance based on winning in the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. You can do it. Therefore, it is possible to provide a pachinko game machine 100 that can perform highly entertaining performances.

Note that the number of executions image 501 may be displayed even in the specific time saving game state. Then, when a variable performance based on a winning at the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state and a variable performance based on a winning at the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state are performed, the execution number image 501 is displayed. Aspects may be updated. In this case, the execution number image 501 is also regarded as a special image.

Furthermore, in the variable performance example 1, the ready-to-reach performance is executed in the variable performance based on the number of reservations at the first starting port 121 being "1" (see FIG. 68 (19)). Here, in the fluctuation pattern table (see FIG. 24) used when a game ball enters the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state, the number of reservations is "1" and the "judgment result" is "lost". "PR5", "PR6", "PR7", "PR10", "PR13", etc. are associated with a certain "variation pattern". If "PR5", "PR6", "PR7", "PR10", or "PR13" is selected as the variation pattern, the variation used when a game ball enters the first starting hole 121 in the normal gaming state From the performance pattern table (see Figure 59), "ER5-1", "ER6", "ER7", "ER10", and "ER13" are associated with "normal" meaning reach performance as "variable performance patterns". ” is selected. In other words, in a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the fact that the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 is "1" in the normal gaming state is a loss, there is a possibility that a ready-to-win performance will be executed. On the other hand, in variable performance example 12, the ready-to-win performance is not executed in the variable performance based on the number of reservations at the first starting port 121 being "1". Here, in the variable performance pattern table (see FIG. 64) used when a game ball enters the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the "variable pattern" whose "judgment result" is "miss" is ""Normal" is not associated. In other words, in a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the fact that the number of reservations in the first start opening 121 is "1" in the specific time saving game state is a loss, the ready-to-win performance is not executed.
That is, in the present embodiment, when a variable effect is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, the variable effect based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being "1" in the second mode is In the first mode, the variable performance based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being "1" is easier to execute the ready-to-win performance. The first mode includes a normal gaming state. Further, as the second mode, for example, a specific time saving gaming state can be mentioned.

In this case, compared to the case where the ease of execution of the reach effect is the same between the variable effect in the first mode and the variable effect in the second mode, the variable effect is performed based on winnings in the common starting opening. Even in the case of a game, a player can enjoy performances of different nature depending on the mode. Therefore, it is possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine 100 that can perform highly entertaining performances.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when a variable effect is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, the variable effect based on the fact that the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 is "1" in the second mode is Although it has been explained that in the first mode, the variable effect based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being "1" is easier to execute the ready-to-win effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. When a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, the first starting port 121 in the first mode will The variable effect based on the fact that the number of reservations of 121 is a specific number may be made easier to execute the reach effect. In this case, the specific number may be any value among "1", "2", "3", and "4". In addition, regardless of the number of reservations, when a variable effect is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, the first variable effect in the first mode is higher than the variable effect based on winning the first starting hole 121 in the second mode. The variable performance based on winning in the starting opening 121 may be made easier to execute the ready-to-win performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the second mode, in the variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 being a specific number is a loss, the reach performance is not executed (0%). However, the invention is not limited to this. In the second mode, even if a variable effect is executed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 being a specific number is executed, the reach effect may be executed. . Further, even if a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winnings in the first starting opening 121 in the second mode is a loss, the ready-to-win performance may be performed.
In addition, when a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, the second start-up port 121 in the second mode is more likely to be The variable effect based on the number of reservations of the starting port 122 being a specific number may be made easier to execute the ready-to-win effect. In addition, when a variable effect is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, the winning effect in the second starting hole 122 in the second mode is higher than the variable effect based on winning in the first starting hole 121 in the second mode. It may be possible to make it easier for the reach effect to be executed with the change effect based on the above.

Further, in the variable performance example 1, the ready-to-reach performance is executed in the variable performance based on the fact that the number of reservations at the first starting port 121 is "1" (see FIG. 67 (18)). Here, in the fluctuation pattern table (see FIG. 24) used when a game ball enters the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state, the number of reservations is "1" and the "judgment result" is "lost". “PR4” and “PR6” are associated with a certain “variation pattern”. When "PR4" or "PR6" is selected as the fluctuation pattern, "Variation "ER4-1" and "ER6", which are associated with "reach stimulation", are selected as "effect pattern". In other words, in a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the fact that the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 is "1" in the normal gaming state is a loss, there is a possibility that a reach-increasing performance will be executed. On the other hand, in variation performance example 12, in the variation performance based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being "1", the reach-increasing performance is not executed. Here, in the variable performance pattern table (see FIG. 64) used when a game ball enters the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the "variable pattern" whose "judgment result" is "miss" is ""ReachIncitement" is not associated. In other words, in a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the number of reservations in the first start opening 121 being "1" in the specific time-saving game state is a loss, the reach promotion performance is not executed.
That is, in the present embodiment, when a variable effect is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, the variable effect based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being "1" in the second mode is In the first mode, the fluctuating performance based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being "1" is more likely to execute the reach-increasing performance. The first mode includes a normal gaming state. Further, as the second mode, for example, a specific time saving gaming state can be mentioned.

In this case, compared to the case where the fluctuating performance in the first mode and the fluctuating performance in the second mode have the same ease of execution of the reach-stimulating performance, the fluctuating performance based on winnings in the common starting opening is performed. Even when the game is played, the player can enjoy performances that differ in nature depending on the mode. Therefore, it is possible to provide a pachinko game machine 100 that can perform highly entertaining performances.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when a variable effect is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, the variable effect based on the fact that the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 is "1" in the second mode is Although it has been explained that in the first mode, the variable performance based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being "1" is more likely to execute the reach promotion performance, but the present invention is not limited to this. When a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, the first starting port 121 in the first mode will The variable performance based on the fact that the number of reservations of 121 is a specific number may make it easier to perform the reach promotion performance. In this case, the specific number may be any value among "1", "2", "3", and "4". In addition, regardless of the number of reservations, when a variable effect is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, the first variable effect in the first mode is higher than the variable effect based on winning the first starting hole 121 in the second mode. The fluctuating performance based on winning in the starting opening 121 may be made easier to execute the reach promotion performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being a specific number in the second mode is a loss, the reach stimulation performance is not executed (0% ), but it is not limited to this. In the second mode, even if a fluctuating effect is executed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 being a specific number is executed, or a reach-stimulating effect is executed. good. Moreover, even if a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winnings in the first starting opening 121 in the second mode is a loss, the reach-increasing performance may be performed.
In addition, when a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, the second start-up port 121 in the second mode is more likely to be The fluctuating performance based on the number of reservations in the starting port 122 being a specific number may be more likely to execute the reach-increasing performance. In addition, when a variable effect is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, the winning effect in the second starting hole 122 in the second mode is higher than the variable effect based on winning in the first starting hole 121 in the second mode. It may be possible to make it easier to execute the reach-increasing effect with the change effect based on the above.

In addition, as shown in variable performance example 9, in the variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss based on the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 being "4" in the specific time saving game state, three decorations The symbols 41 are displayed all together (see FIG. 95(8)). On the other hand, as shown in variable performance example 12, in the variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss based on the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 being "4" in the specific time-saving gaming state, three The decorative patterns are displayed in order (see FIGS. 104 (9) to (11)). That is, in the present embodiment, when a variable effect is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss in the specific time-saving gaming state, the variable effect is lower than the variable effect based on the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 being "4". , a variable effect based on the number of reservations of the second starting port 122 being "4" is a variable effect in which the display timings in which the three decorative patterns 41 change from an invisible or difficult-to-see state to an easily visible state are aligned. is easy to execute. Here, the state in which the decorative pattern 41 is not visible is a state in which the decorative pattern 41 is hidden. Moreover, the state in which the decorative pattern 41 is difficult to visually recognize is a state in which the decorative pattern 41 is displayed variably at high speed. Moreover, the state in which the decorative pattern 41 is easily visible is, for example, a state in which the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped. Further, in the case where the decorative pattern 41 is permanently stopped without temporarily stopping, the state where the decorative pattern 41 is easily visible is the state where the decorative pattern 41 is permanently stopped.

In this case, the number of reservations at the second starting port 122 is "4" in the specific time-saving gaming state, rather than the variable performance based on the number of reservations at the first starting port 121 being "4" in the specific time-saving gaming state. The fluctuating performance based on ``the powerful fluctuating performance in which the display timings of the three decorative symbols 41 are aligned'' can be enjoyed by the player with a higher probability. Therefore, even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss in the variable performance based on winnings in the second start opening 122 in the specific time saving game state, the interest of the game can be improved.

In particular, in this embodiment, as shown in example 1 of variable effects, in the variable effect where the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being "4" in the normal gaming state is a loss. , three decorative patterns 41 are displayed together (see FIG. 66(9)). That is, in the present embodiment, when a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is performed, the variation performance based on the fact that the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 is "4" in the specific time-saving gaming state is performed. In the normal game state, the variable effect based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being "4" is easier to execute in which the display timings of the three decorative symbols 41 are aligned.
In this case, rather than a variable performance based on the fact that the number of reservations at the first starting port 121 is "4" in the specific time saving gaming state, the number of reservations at the first starting port 121 is "4" in the normal gaming state. The variable effect based on this allows the player to enjoy ``a powerful variable effect in which the display timings of the three decorative symbols 41 are aligned'' with a higher probability. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, the game ball should be placed in the first starting port 121, and in the specific time-saving gaming state, the game ball should be placed in the second starting port 122. I can do it.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a variable effect is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss in the specific time-saving gaming state, the variation effect is lower than the variable effect based on the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 being "4". , a variable effect based on the number of reservations of the second starting port 122 being "4" is a variable effect in which the display timings in which the three decorative patterns 41 change from an invisible or difficult-to-see state to an easily visible state are aligned. explained that it is easy to implement. In addition, when a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is performed, the variable performance based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being "4" in the specific time saving game state is higher than that in the normal game state. Although it has been explained that the variable performance based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being "4" is easier to execute in which the display timings of the three decorative patterns 41 are aligned, the present invention is not limited to this.
When a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss in a specific time-saving gaming state, the hold of the second starting port 122 is higher than the variable effect based on the number of holds of the first starting port 121 being a specific number. A variable effect based on the fact that the number is a specific number may be more likely to be executed than a variable effect in which the display timings of the three decorative symbols 41 are aligned. In addition, when a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, the variable performance based on the fact that the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 is a specific number in the specific time-saving gaming state is higher than that in the normal gaming state. A variable effect based on the fact that the number of pending openings 121 is a specific number may be more likely to be executed than a variable effect in which the display timings of the three decorative patterns 41 are aligned. In these cases, the specific number may be any value among "1", "2", "3", and "4".

In addition, in this embodiment, in a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 being a specific number in the specific time saving gaming state is a loss, the display timing of the three decorative symbols 41 Although it has been explained that the variation effect in which the values are aligned is not executed (0%), the present invention is not limited to this. Even in a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 being a specific number in the specific time saving game state is a loss, the display timing of the three decorative symbols 41 is aligned. may be executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when a variable effect is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss in the specific time saving gaming state, the variable effect based on the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 being "4" is , the variable effect based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being "4" is a variable effect in which the display timing of the three decorative patterns 41 changing from the invisible or difficult-to-see state to the easily visible state is different. is easy to execute.
In this case, in the variable presentation based on winning at the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the number of reservations is "4" compared to the variable presentation based on winning at the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. The player can enjoy the fluctuating performance to the extent that the ``fluctuating performance lacking a sense of speed'' in which the decorative symbols 41 are sequentially displayed as a fluctuating performance based on the fact that it is difficult to execute is difficult. Therefore, even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss in the variable performance based on winnings in the second start opening 122 in the specific time saving game state, the interest of the game can be improved.

In particular, in the present embodiment, when a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is executed, the variation performance based on the fact that the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 is "4" in the normal gaming state is In the specific time-saving game state, the variable effect based on the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 being "4" is a display in which the three decorative patterns 41 change from an invisible or difficult-to-see state to an easy-to-see state. Variable effects with different timings are likely to be executed.
In this case, in the variable presentation based on winning the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state, the number of reservations is "4" compared to the variable presentation based on winning the first starting port 121 in the specific time saving gaming state. The player can enjoy the fluctuating performance to the extent that the "fluctuating performance lacking a sense of speed" in which decorative symbols 41 are displayed in sequence as a fluctuating performance based on a certain event is less likely to be executed. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, the game ball should be placed in the first starting port 121, and in the specific time-saving gaming state, the game ball should be placed in the second starting port 122. Can be done.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a variable effect is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss in the specific time-saving gaming state, the variable effect is lower than the variable effect based on the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 being "4". , the variable effect based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being "4" is a variable effect in which the display timing of the three decorative patterns 41 changing from the invisible or difficult-to-see state to the easily visible state is different. explained that it is easy to implement. In addition, when a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is executed, the specific time saving game state Although it has been explained that the variable effect based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being "4" is easier to execute in which the decorative symbols 41 are displayed in order, the present invention is not limited to this.
In the specific time-saving gaming state, when a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, the first starting port 121 is held on hold rather than the variable performance based on the number of holds on the second starting port 122 being a specific number. A variable effect based on the fact that the number is a specific number may be more likely to be executed with a different display timing in which the three decorative patterns 41 change from an invisible or difficult-to-see state to an easily visible state. . In addition, when a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is executed, the variable performance based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being a specific number in the normal gaming state is performed in the specific time-saving gaming state. A variable effect based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being a specific number is easier to execute a variable effect in which the display timing in which the decorative pattern 41 changes from an invisible or difficult-to-see state to an easy-to-see state is different. You can do it like this. In this case, the specific number may be any value among "1", "2", "3", and "4".

In addition, in the present embodiment, in a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being a specific number in the specific time saving game state is a loss, the decorative symbol 41 may be invisible or invisible. Although it has been described that a variable effect with different display timings from a difficult state to an easily visible state is always executed (100%), the present invention is not limited to this. Even in a variable performance where the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 being a specific number in the specific time saving game state is a loss, the decorative symbol 41 is not visible or difficult to see. It is not necessary to execute a variable effect with a different display timing to achieve an easily visible state.

In addition, in variation effect example 1, a size change effect is performed based on the fact that the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 is "1" (see FIG. 68 (19) and FIG. 68 (20)). ). On the other hand, in variable effect example 12, the size change effect is not executed in the variable effect based on the fact that the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 is "1." That is, in the present embodiment, when a variable effect is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, the variable effect based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being "1" in the second mode is In the first mode, the size change effect is more easily executed when the variable effect is based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being "1." The first mode includes a normal gaming state. Further, as the second mode, for example, a specific time saving gaming state can be mentioned.
In this case, compared to the case where the ease of execution of the size change effect is the same between the variable effect in the first mode and the variable effect in the second mode, the variable effect based on winning in the common starting opening is performed. Even when the game is played, the player can enjoy performances that differ in nature depending on the mode. Therefore, it is possible to provide a pachinko game machine 100 that can perform highly entertaining performances.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a variable effect is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, the variable effect based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being "1" in the second mode is Although it has been explained that the size change effect is easier to execute in the variable effect based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being "1" in the first mode, the present invention is not limited thereto. When a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, the first starting port 121 in the first mode will The size change effect may be more easily executed if the variation effect is based on the fact that the number of reservations in 121 is a specific number. In this case, the specific number may be any value among "1", "2", "3", and "4". In addition, regardless of the number of reservations, when a variable effect is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, the first variable effect in the first mode is higher than the variable effect based on winning the first starting hole 121 in the second mode The size change effect may be more easily executed when the variable effect is based on winning in the starting slot 121.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, in the variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 being a specific number in the second mode is a loss, the size change performance is not executed (0% ), but it is not limited to this. In the second mode, even if a variation effect is executed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 being a specific number is executed, or a size change effect is executed. good. Moreover, even if a variable effect is executed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winnings in the first start opening 121 in the second mode is a loss, the size change effect may be executed.
In addition, when a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, the second start-up port 121 in the second mode is more likely to be The size change effect may be more easily executed when the variation effect is based on the number of reserved starting ports 122 being a specific number. In addition, when a variable effect is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, the winning effect in the second starting hole 122 in the second mode is higher than the variable effect based on winning in the first starting hole 121 in the second mode. The size change effect may be more easily executed in the variation effect based on .

In addition, in variation effect example 1, a position change effect is performed based on the fact that the number of reservations at the first starting port 121 is "1" (see FIG. 68 (19) and FIG. 68 (20)). ). On the other hand, in variation performance example 12, the position change performance is not executed in the variation performance based on the fact that the number of reservations at the first starting port 121 is "1". That is, in the present embodiment, when a variable effect is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, the variable effect based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being "1" in the second mode is In the first mode, the position change effect is easier to execute in the variation effect based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being "1". The first mode includes a normal gaming state. Further, as the second mode, for example, a specific time saving gaming state can be mentioned.
In this case, compared to the case where the ease of execution of the position change effect is the same between the variable effect in the first mode and the variable effect in the second mode, the variable effect based on winning in the common starting opening is performed. Even when the game is played, the player can enjoy performances that differ in nature depending on the mode. Therefore, it is possible to provide a pachinko game machine 100 that can perform highly entertaining performances.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is performed, the fluctuation performance is performed based on the fact that the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 is "1" in the specific time-saving gaming state. Although it has been explained that the position change performance is easier to execute in the variable performance based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being "1" in the normal gaming state, the present invention is not limited to this. When a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, the first start in the normal gaming state is more effective than the variable performance based on the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 being a specific number in the specific time-saving gaming state. The position change effect may be more easily executed when the variable effect is based on the number of reserved mouths 121 being a specific number. In this case, the specific number may be any value among "1", "2", "3", and "4". In addition, regardless of the number of reservations, if a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is performed, the variable performance based on winning the first starting hole 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state is higher than that in the normal gaming state. The position change performance may be more easily executed when the variation performance is based on winning in the first opening 121.

In addition, in this embodiment, in a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 being a specific number in the specific time saving gaming state is a loss, the position change performance is not executed (0 %), but is not limited to this. In the specific time saving gaming state, even if a variable performance is executed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss based on the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 being a specific number, the position change performance is not executed. Good too. Furthermore, even if a variable performance is executed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winnings in the first start opening 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state is a loss, the position change performance may be executed.
In addition, when a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is performed, in the specific time-saving game state, the variable performance based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being a specific number in the specific time-saving game state is The position change effect may be more easily executed when the variation effect is based on the number of reservations of the second starting port 122 being a specific number. In addition, when a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is performed, the variable performance based on winning to the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state is more likely to be applied to the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. The position change performance may be more easily executed when the variation performance is based on winning a prize.

In addition, in the fluctuation pattern table (see FIG. 24) used when a game ball enters the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state, the number of reservations is "1" and the "judgment result" is "lost". “PR6”, “PR7”, “PR10”, “PR13”, etc. are associated with “variation pattern”. When "PR6", "PR7", "PR10", and "PR13" are selected as the variation patterns, the variation effect pattern table ( (See FIG. 59), "ER6", "ER7", "ER10", and "ER13", which are associated with special effects at the time of variation, are selected as the "variable effect pattern". Here, examples of the special performance at the time of variation include SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance, change performance, zone performance, effect performance, character performance, sound performance, button operation performance, and the like. In other words, in a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 being "1" in the normal gaming state is a loss, there is a possibility that the special performance at the time of fluctuation is executed. . On the other hand, in variation performance example 12, the special performance at the time of variation is not executed. Here, in the variable production turntable (see FIG. 64) used when a game ball enters the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the "variable production pattern" in which the "judgment result" is "miss" is selected. There is no special effect associated with the change. In other words, in a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the fact that the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 is "1" in the specific time saving game state is a loss, the special performance at the time of fluctuation is not executed. That is, in the present embodiment, when a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, the fluctuation performance is performed based on the fact that the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 is "1" in the specific time-saving gaming state. The special performance at the time of fluctuation is more likely to be executed when the variable performance is based on the fact that the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 is "1" in the normal gaming state.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is performed, the variation performance based on the fact that the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 is "1" in the specific time-saving gaming state is performed. Although it has been explained that the special performance at the time of variation is more likely to be executed when the variation performance is based on the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 being "1" in the normal game state, but the present invention is not limited to this. When a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, the first start in the normal gaming state is more effective than the variable performance based on the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 being a specific number in the specific time-saving gaming state. The special effect at the time of variation may be more easily executed when the variable effect is based on the number of pending mouths 121 being a specific number. In this case, the specific number may be any value among "1", "2", "3", and "4". In addition, regardless of the number of reservations, if a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is performed, the variable performance based on winning the first starting hole 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state is higher than that in the normal gaming state. The special performance at the time of fluctuation may be more easily executed when the fluctuation performance is based on winning in the first starting slot 121.

In addition, in this embodiment, in a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 being a specific number in the specific time saving gaming state is a loss, the special performance at the time of fluctuation is not executed ( 0%), but the invention is not limited to this. In the specific time saving gaming state, even if a variable performance is executed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 being a specific number is executed, the special performance at the time of variation is executed. It's okay. Further, even if a variable performance is executed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winnings in the first start opening 121 in the specific time saving gaming state is a loss, the special performance at the time of variation may be executed. In these cases, the special performance at the time of fluctuation that is executed is any of the SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance, change performance, zone performance, effect performance, character performance, sound performance, and button operation performance. It's okay.
In addition, when a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is performed, in the specific time-saving game state, the variable performance based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being a specific number in the specific time-saving game state is The special effect at the time of variation may be more easily executed when the variable effect is based on the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 being a specific number. In addition, regardless of the number of reservations, if a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is performed, the variable performance in the specific time-saving gaming state is better than the variable performance based on winning the first starting hole 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. The special performance at the time of variation may be more easily executed when the variation performance is based on winning in the second start opening 122.

Further, in this embodiment, even if a game ball enters the first starting port 121 in the specific time saving gaming state, the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 are not displayed. On the other hand, when a game ball enters the second starting port 122 in the specific time saving gaming state, the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 are displayed.
In this case, the variable image 51 and the pending image are more likely to be displayed when a game ball enters the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state than when the gaming ball enters the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. 52, it is possible to entertain the players. Therefore, when a game ball enters the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving game state, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In particular, in this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state, the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 are displayed.
In this case, when a game ball enters the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state, the variation image 51 and the pending image 52 This allows players to enjoy themselves. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, the game ball should be placed in the first starting port 121, and in the specific time-saving gaming state, the game ball should be placed in the second starting port 122. Can be done.

Further, in this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the pending image 52 is not displayed, while the pending number display 55 is updated.
In the case where a game ball enters the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, if not only the pending image 52 is not displayed but also the pending number display 55 is not updated, the player may place the game ball into the first starting port 121. You will not be able to recognize whether or not you have won a prize. Therefore, in this embodiment, by updating the pending number display 55, although the player cannot expect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery will be a jackpot through the pending image 52, It is made so that it can be recognized that the game ball has won a prize.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, it has been explained that each time a game ball enters the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the speaker 156 outputs a voice saying "Please hit to the right." Here, for a predetermined period after being controlled to the specific time-saving gaming state, even if a game ball enters the first starting port 121, the voice "Please hit right" may not be output. The predetermined period may be, for example, a period from when the specific time-saving gaming state is controlled until the end of the first variable production. Further, the predetermined period may be, for example, from when the specific time-saving gaming state is controlled until the fourth right-handed image 525 displayed in the first variable performance is hidden (see FIG. 91 (14)). There may be. That is, the predetermined period may be any period in the specific time saving gaming state.

FIG. 108(A) is an explanatory diagram of the execution time of the first to fifth variable effects in variable effect example 1. FIG. 108(B) is an explanatory diagram of the execution time of the first to fifth variable effects in variable effect example 4. FIG. 108(C) is an explanatory diagram of the execution time of the first to fifth variable effects in variable effect example 9. FIG. 108(D) is an explanatory diagram of the execution time of the first to fifth variable effects in variable effect example 12.

As shown in FIG. 108(A), in the normal gaming state, when the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 is "1", the variable pattern "PR1" (see FIG. 24) and the variable effect pattern "ER1" (see FIG. 59) is selected, and the first variation effect is started. The time from the start to the end of this first fluctuating performance, that is, the execution time of the fluctuating performance, is defined as time T1. This time T1 is 8.00 seconds (see FIG. 24), which is the same as the special symbol variation time. Further, the first variable performance is a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and the reach performance is not executed, and corresponds to FIGS. 65(2) to 65(6).
Thereafter, when the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 is "4", the variable pattern "PR3" and the variable effect pattern "ER3" are selected, and the second variable effect is started. The time from the start to the end of this second fluctuating performance, that is, the execution time of the fluctuating performance, is defined as time T2. This time T2 is 4.60 seconds, which is the same as the special symbol variation time. Further, the second variable performance is a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and the reach performance is not executed, and corresponds to FIGS. 66(7) to 66(9).
Thereafter, when the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 is "3", the variable pattern "PR2" and the variable effect pattern "ER2" are selected, and the third variable effect is started. The time from the start to the end of this third fluctuating performance, that is, the execution time of the fluctuating performance, is defined as time T3. This time T3 is 6.80 seconds, which is the same as the special symbol variation time. Further, the third variation performance is a variation performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and the reach performance is not executed, and corresponds to FIG. 66 (10) and FIG. 66 (11).
Thereafter, when the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 is "2", the variation pattern "PR2" and the variation effect pattern "ER2" are selected, and the fourth variation effect is started. The time from the start to the end of this fourth variable performance, that is, the execution time of the variable performance, is defined as time T4. This time T4 is 6.80 seconds, which is the same as the special symbol variation time. In addition, the fourth variation performance is a variation performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and the reach performance is not executed, and corresponds to Fig. 66 (12), Fig. 67 (13), and Fig. 67 (14). ing.
Thereafter, when the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 is "1", the variation pattern "PR6" and the variation effect pattern "ER6" are selected, and the fifth variation effect is started. The time from the start to the end of this fifth variable performance, that is, the execution time of the variable performance, is defined as time T5. This time T5 is 90.01 seconds, which is the same as the special symbol variation time. In addition, the fifth variation performance is a variation performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and a reach performance is executed, and is a variation performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and the reach performance is executed. 68 (24) and FIG. 69 (25).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 108(B), in the special time saving game state, when the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 is "1", the variable pattern "PH1" (see FIG. 26) and the variable effect pattern "EH1" are selected. ” (see FIG. 61) is selected, and the first variation effect is started. The time from the start to the end of this first fluctuating performance, that is, the execution time of the fluctuating performance, is defined as time T6. This time T6 is 2.50 seconds (see FIG. 26), which is the same as the special symbol variation time. Further, the first variation performance is a variation performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and the reach performance is not executed, and corresponds to FIGS. 75(2) to 75(4).
Thereafter, when the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 is "4", the variation pattern "PH3" and the variation effect pattern "EH3" are selected, and the second variation effect is started. The time from the start to the end of this second fluctuating performance, that is, the execution time of the fluctuating performance, is defined as time T7. This time T7 is 1.50 seconds, which is the same as the special symbol variation time. Further, the second variable performance is a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and the reach performance is not executed, and corresponds to FIG. 75 (5) and FIG. 75 (6).
Thereafter, when the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 is "3", the variation pattern "PH2" and the variation effect pattern "EH2" are selected, and the third variation effect is started. The time from the start to the end of this third variable performance, that is, the execution time of the variable performance, is defined as time T8. This time T8 is 2.00 seconds, which is the same as the special symbol variation time. Further, the third variation performance is a variation performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and the reach performance is not executed, and corresponds to FIG. 76 (7) and FIG. 76 (8).
Thereafter, when the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 is "2", the variation pattern "PH2" and the variation effect pattern "EH2" are selected, and the fourth variation effect is started. The time from the start to the end of this fourth variable performance, that is, the execution time of the variable performance, is defined as time T9. This time T9 is 2.00 seconds, which is the same as the special symbol variation time. Further, the fourth variation performance is a variation performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and the reach performance is not executed, and corresponds to FIG. 76 (9) and FIG. 76 (10).
Thereafter, when the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 is "1", the variation pattern "PH5" and the variation effect pattern "EH5" are selected, and the fifth variation effect is started. The time from the start to the end of this fifth variable performance, that is, the execution time of the variable performance, is defined as time T10. This time T10 is 60.02 seconds, which is the same as the special symbol variation time. In addition, the fifth variation performance is a variation performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and a reach performance is executed, and is a variation performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and a reach performance is executed. 77 (18), FIG. 78 (19) and FIG. 78 (20).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 108(C), in the specific time saving gaming state, when the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 is "1", the variable pattern "PM1" (see FIG. 28) and the variable effect pattern "EM1" are selected. ” (see FIG. 63) is selected, and the first variation effect is started. The time from the start to the end of this first fluctuating performance, that is, the execution time of the fluctuating performance, is defined as time T11. This time T11 is 2.01 seconds (see FIG. 28), which is the same as the special symbol variation time. Further, the first variation performance is a variation performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and the reach performance is not executed, and corresponds to FIGS. 94(2) to 94(6).
Thereafter, when the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 is "4", the variation pattern "PM3" and the variation effect pattern "EM3" are selected, and the second variation effect is started. The time from the start to the end of this second fluctuating performance, that is, the execution time of the fluctuating performance, is defined as time T12. This time T12 is 1.00 seconds, which is the same as the special symbol variation time. Further, the second variable performance is a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and the reach performance is not executed, and corresponds to FIG. 95 (7) and FIG. 95 (8).
Thereafter, when the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 is "3", the variation pattern "PM2" and the variation effect pattern "EM2" are selected, and the third variation effect is started. The time from the start to the end of this third fluctuating performance, that is, the execution time of the fluctuating performance, is defined as time T13. This time T13 is 1.01 seconds, which is the same as the special symbol variation time. Further, the third variation performance is a variation performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and the reach performance is not executed, and corresponds to FIG. 95 (9) and FIG. 95 (10).
Thereafter, when the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 is "2", the variation pattern "PM2" and the variation effect pattern "EM2" are selected, and the fourth variation effect is started. The time from the start to the end of this fourth variable performance, that is, the execution time of the variable performance, is defined as time T14. This time T14 is 1.01 seconds, which is the same as the special symbol variation time. Further, the fourth variable performance is a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and the reach performance is not executed, and corresponds to FIG. 95 (11) and FIG. 95 (12).
Thereafter, when the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 is "1", the variation pattern "PH5" and the variation effect pattern "EH5" are selected, and the fifth variation effect is started. The time from the start to the end of this fifth variable performance, that is, the execution time of the variable performance, is defined as time T15. This time T15 is 2.01 seconds, which is the same as the special symbol variation time. Further, the fifth variation performance is a variation performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and the reach performance is not executed, and corresponds to FIG. 96 (13) to FIG. 96 (17).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 108(D), in the specific time saving game state, when the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 is "1", the variable pattern "PO1" (see FIG. 29) and the variable effect pattern "EO1" are selected. ” (see FIG. 64) is selected, and the first variation effect is started. The time from the start to the end of this first fluctuating performance, that is, the execution time of the fluctuating performance, is defined as time T16. This time T16 is 14.01 seconds (see FIG. 29), which is the same as the special symbol variation time. In addition, the first variation performance is a variation performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and the reach performance is not executed, and corresponds to Figures 103 (2) to 103 (6) and Figure 104 (7). ing.
Thereafter, when the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 is "4", the variation pattern "PO1" and the variation effect pattern "EO1" are selected, and the second variation effect is started. The time from the start to the end of this second fluctuating performance, that is, the execution time of the fluctuating performance, is defined as time T17. This time T17 is 14.01 seconds, which is the same as the special symbol variation time. Further, the second variable performance is a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and the reach performance is not executed, and corresponds to FIGS. 104(8) to 104(12).
Thereafter, when the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 is "3", the variation pattern "PO1" and the variation effect pattern "EO1" are selected, and the third variation effect is started. The time from the start to the end of this third fluctuating performance, that is, the execution time of the fluctuating performance, is defined as time T18. This time T18 is 14.01 seconds, which is the same as the special symbol variation time. Further, the third variation performance is a variation performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and the reach performance is not executed, and corresponds to FIG. 105 (13) to FIG. 105 (17).
Thereafter, when the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 is "2", the variation pattern "PO1" and the variation effect pattern "EO1" are selected, and the fourth variation effect is started. The time from the start to the end of this fourth variable performance, that is, the execution time of the variable performance, is defined as time T19. This time T19 is 14.01 seconds, which is the same as the special symbol variation time. In addition, the fourth variation performance is a variation performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and the reach performance is not executed, and corresponds to Fig. 105 (18), Fig. 106 (19) to Fig. 106 (22). ing.
Thereafter, when the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 is "1", the variation pattern "PO1" and the variation effect pattern "EO1" are selected, and the fifth variation effect is started. The time from the start to the end of this fifth variable performance, that is, the execution time of the variable performance, is defined as time T20. This time T20 is 14.01 seconds, which is the same as the special symbol variation time. In addition, the fifth variation performance is a variation performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and the reach performance is not executed, and is a variation performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and the reach performance is not executed. This corresponds to (27).

In addition, in the explanation using FIG. 108, it was explained that the execution time of each variation effect is the same as the variation time of the special symbol, but it is not limited to this.
The execution time of the fluctuating performance only needs to be approximately the same as the fluctuation time of the special symbol related to this fluctuating performance, and does not have to match.

As described above, as shown in FIG. 108(D), in the variation effect example 12, time T16 and time T17 are the same length of time. Here, in the specific time saving gaming state, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and a variable performance is performed in which the reach performance is not executed, the selection is made based on the pending number of the first starting opening 121 being "1". The “fluctuation pattern” (see FIG. 29) that is selected based on the number of reservations at the first starting port 121 being “4” are fluctuation patterns with the same “time”. In other words, in the specific time-saving gaming state, if a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and no reach performance is executed, the variable performance is based on the fact that the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 is "1". The execution time is not longer than the execution time of the variable effect based on the fact that the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 is "4". On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 108(C), in variation effect example 9, time T11 is longer than time T12. Here, in the specific time saving gaming state, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and a variable performance is performed in which the reach performance is not executed, the selection is made based on the pending number of the second starting port 122 being "1". The "variation pattern" to be selected (see FIG. 28) includes a variation with a longer "time" than the "variation pattern" selected based on the number of reservations at the second starting port 122 being "4". A pattern is provided. In other words, in the specific time saving gaming state, if a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and no reach performance is performed, the variable performance is based on the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 being "1". The execution time may be longer than the execution time of the variable performance based on the fact that the number of reservations at the second starting port 122 is "4".
That is, in the present embodiment, when a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss in the specific time-saving gaming state and the reach performance is not executed, the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 is "4". The rate at which the execution time is longer for the variable effect based on the number of reservations at the first starting port 121 being "1" than for the variable effect based on the first starting port 121 is the first rate, and the rate is the second rate. A variable performance based on the number of reservations at the second starting port 122 being "1" has a longer execution time than a fluctuating performance based on the number of reservations at the starting port 122 being "4". The rate performed is the second rate. The second ratio is larger than the first ratio.

In this case, the number of reservations will be smaller in the variable presentation based on winnings in the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state than in the variable presentation based on winnings in the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. Since the execution time of the variable effect tends to be longer depending on the situation, even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a failure and the reach effect is not executed, it is possible to let the player enjoy various effects with high probability. can. Therefore, in the variable performance based on winnings in the second starting opening 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state, even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and the reach performance is not executed, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. can.

Further, as shown in FIG. 108(A), in the variation effect example 1, the time T1 is longer than the time T2. Here, in the case where a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss in the normal gaming state and the reach performance is not executed, the selection is made based on the pending number of the first starting port 121 being "1". The "variation pattern" (see FIG. 24) includes a variation pattern with a longer "time" than the "variation pattern" selected based on the number of reservations at the first starting port 121 being "4". is provided. In other words, in the normal gaming state, when a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and no reach performance is performed, the fluctuation performance based on the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 being "1" is performed. There is a possibility that the execution time will be longer than the execution time of the variable effect based on the fact that the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 is "4".
That is, in this embodiment, when a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and the reach performance is not executed, the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 is "4" in the specific time saving gaming state. The rate at which the execution time is longer for the variable effect based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being "1" than for the variable effect based on this is the first rate, which is usually In the gaming state, a variable performance based on the number of reservations at the first starting port 121 being "1" is more likely to be executed than a variable performance based on the number of reservations at the first starting port 121 being "4". The rate at which a long-time fluctuating performance is performed is the second rate. The second ratio is larger than the first ratio.

In this case, the number of reservations will be smaller in the variable performance based on winnings in the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state than in the variable performance based on winnings in the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. Accordingly, even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and the reach effect is not executed, the player can enjoy various effects with high probability to the extent that the execution time of the variable effect tends to be longer. . Therefore, in the variable performance based on winning in the first starting hole 121 in the normal gaming state, even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and the reach performance is not performed, the interest of the game can be improved. .

In addition, in this embodiment, in the case where the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning in the first starting hole 121 in the specific time saving gaming state is a loss and a variable effect is performed in which the reach effect is not executed, the first starting hole is The execution time of the variable effect based on the number of holds in 121 being "1" is not longer than the execution time of the variable effect based on the number of holds in the first starting port 121 being "4" (0%) However, the invention is not limited to this. Even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winnings in the first starting hole 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state is a loss and a variable performance is performed in which the reach effect is not executed, the pending number of the first starting hole 121 The execution time of the variable effect based on the fact that is "1" may be longer than the execution time of the variable effect based on the fact that the number of reservations at the first starting port 121 is "4".

Further, when comparing the time T2 in the variation performance example 1 shown in FIG. 108(A) and the time T17 in the variation performance example 12 shown in FIG. 108(D), the time T17 is longer than the time T2. Here, in the normal gaming state, if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss based on the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 being "4" and a variable performance is performed in which the reach performance is not executed, the "variable pattern ” (see FIG. 24), the “time” is either “4.60” seconds or “10.00” seconds. On the other hand, in the specific time saving gaming state, if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss based on the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 being "4" and a variable performance is performed in which the reach performance is not executed, the "variable pattern ” (see FIG. 29), the one whose “time” is “14.01” seconds is selected.
That is, in this embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and a variable performance is performed in which the reach performance is not executed, the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 is "4" in the first mode. A variable effect based on the fact that the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 is "4" in the second mode is easier to perform than a variable effect based on the fact that the execution time is longer. The first mode includes a normal gaming state. Further, as the second mode, for example, a specific time saving gaming state can be mentioned.

In this case, the fluctuating performance in the first mode and the fluctuating performance in the second mode have a common number of pending openings compared to the case where the ease of execution of the fluctuating performance with a long execution time is the same. Even when a variable performance is performed based on a number, a player can enjoy performances with different characteristics depending on the mode. Therefore, it is possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine 100 that can perform highly entertaining performances.

Further, when comparing the time T12 in the variation performance example 9 shown in FIG. 108(C) and the time T17 in the variation performance example 12 shown in FIG. 108(D), the time T17 is longer than the time T12. Here, in the specific time saving gaming state, if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the pending number of the second starting port 122 being "4" is a loss and a variable performance is performed in which the reach performance is not executed, the "variable A pattern in which the "time" is "1.00" seconds is selected as the "pattern" (see FIG. 28). On the other hand, in the specific time-saving gaming state, if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 being "4" is a loss and a variable performance is performed in which the reach performance is not executed, the "variable pattern ” (see FIG. 29), the one whose “time” is “14.01” seconds is selected.
That is, in this embodiment, in the specific time-saving gaming state, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and a variable performance is performed in which the reach performance is not executed, the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 is "4". A variable effect based on the fact that the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 is "4" is easier to perform than a variable effect based on the fact that the execution time is longer.

In this case, when the number of reservations is larger, the variable effect based on winning in the second starting hole 122 in the specific time saving gaming state is larger than the variable effect based on winning in the first starting hole 121 in the specific time saving gaming state. Since the execution time of the variable performance tends to be shortened, the player can enjoy a speedy performance with high probability when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and the reach performance is not executed. Therefore, in the variable performance based on winnings in the second starting opening 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state, even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and the reach performance is not executed, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. can. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, the game ball should be placed in the first starting port 121, and in the specific time-saving gaming state, the game ball should be placed in the second starting port 122. Can be done.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and a variable performance is performed in which the reach performance is not executed, the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 is "4" in the first mode. It has been explained that the variable effect based on the fact that the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 is "4" in the second mode is easier to perform than the variable effect based on the fact that the execution time is longer. In addition, in the second mode, when a variable effect is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and no reach effect is executed, than the variable effect based on the pending number of the second starting port 122 being "4". Although it has been explained that the variable effect based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being "4" is more likely to be performed with a longer execution time, the present invention is not limited to this.
When a variable effect is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and the reach effect is not executed, the second mode A variable effect based on the fact that the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 is a specific number in the mode may be made to be more likely to take a longer execution time. In addition, in the second mode, when a variable effect is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and the reach effect is not executed, than the variable effect based on the fact that the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 is a specific number, A variable effect based on the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 being a specific number may be more likely to take a longer execution time. In this case, the specific number may be any value among "1", "2", "3", and "4".

In addition, in this embodiment, when a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and the reach performance is not executed, it is based on the fact that the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 is a specific number in the first mode. It has been explained that the variable effect based on the fact that the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 is a specific number in the second mode is always performed (100%) with a longer execution time than the variable effect. In addition, in the second mode, when a variable effect is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and the reach effect is not executed, than the variable effect based on the fact that the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 is a specific number, Although it has been explained that the variable effect based on the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 being a specific number always takes a longer execution time (100%), the present invention is not limited to this.
Even if a variable effect is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and no reach effect is performed, the variable effect based on the fact that the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 is a specific number in the second mode However, in the first mode, a variable effect based on the fact that the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 is a specific number may be a variable effect that takes a longer execution time. In addition, even if a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss in the second mode and the reach performance is not executed, the fluctuation based on the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 being a specific number. There may be a case where a variable effect based on the fact that the number of reservations at the second starting port 122 is a specific number takes a longer execution time than the effect.

In addition, in the fluctuation pattern table (see FIG. 24) used based on the winnings in the first starting slot 121 in the normal gaming state, the number of reservations associated with "lost" and "no reach" is "1". "PR1" and "PR4" are provided as "variation patterns". Therefore, when a variable effect based on the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 being "1" is performed multiple times in the normal gaming state, there is a possibility that different variable patterns will be selected in these multiple variable effects. be. On the other hand, in the fluctuation pattern table (see FIG. 29) used based on winnings in the first start opening 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the number of reservations associated with "lost" and "no reach" is "1". Only "PO1" is provided as a certain "variation pattern". Therefore, when a variable performance based on the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 being "1" is performed multiple times in the specific time-saving game state, the same fluctuation pattern is selected in the multiple variable performances.
That is, in this embodiment, when a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and the reach performance is not executed, the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 is "1" in the first mode. The rate at which the same variation pattern is selected in the first variation performance and the second variation performance based on the first rate is the first rate, and is based on the fact that the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 is "1" in the second mode. The rate at which the same variation pattern is selected in the third variation performance and the fourth variation performance is the second ratio. The second ratio is larger than the first ratio.

In this case, compared to the case where the first ratio and the second ratio are the same, even if a variable effect is performed based on the number of holds at a common starting gate being a common number, the difference will be different depending on the mode. Players can enjoy performances with different characteristics. Therefore, it is possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine 100 that can perform highly entertaining performances.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and a variable performance is performed in which the reach performance is not executed, the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 is "1" in the first mode. The rate at which the same variation pattern is selected in the first variation performance and the second variation performance based on the first rate is the first rate, and is based on the fact that the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 is "1" in the second mode. Although it has been explained that the proportion of the same variation pattern being selected in the third variation production and the fourth variation production is the second proportion, and the second proportion is larger than the first proportion, the invention is not limited to this. .
When a variable effect is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and the reach effect is not executed, the first variable effect and the second variable effect based on the fact that the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 is a specific number in the first mode are performed. The rate at which the same fluctuation pattern is selected in the fluctuation performance is the first ratio, and the third fluctuation performance and the fourth fluctuation performance are based on the fact that the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 is a specific number in the second mode. The rate at which the same variation pattern is selected is the second rate, and the second rate may be larger than the first rate. In this case, the specific number may be any value among "1", "2", "3", and "4".

Further, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the second ratio is 1 (100%), but the second ratio is not limited to this. Even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and a variation performance is performed in which a reach performance is not executed, the third variation based on the fact that the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 is a specific number in the second mode Different variation patterns may be selected for the performance and the fourth variation performance.

Further, for example, if a variation performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and the reach performance is not executed, the first variation based on the fact that the number of reservations of the second starting port 122 is a specific number in the second mode The rate at which the same variation pattern is selected in the production and the second variation production is the first ratio, and the third variation production is based on the fact that the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 is a specific number in the second mode. In the fourth variation effect, the rate at which the same variation pattern is selected is the second rate, and the second rate may be larger than the first rate.

In addition, in the variation pattern table (see FIG. 26) used based on winnings in the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state, the number of reservations associated with "lost" and "no reach" is "4". "PH3" and "PH4" are provided as "fluctuation patterns". Therefore, when a variable effect based on the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 being "4" is performed multiple times in the special time-saving gaming state, there is a possibility that different variable patterns will be selected in the multiple variable effects. There is. On the other hand, in the fluctuation pattern table (see FIG. 29) used based on winnings in the second start opening 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the number of reservations associated with "miss" and "no reach" is "4". Only "PM3" is provided as a certain "variation pattern". Therefore, when a variable performance based on the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 being "4" is performed a plurality of times in the specific time-saving game state, the same fluctuation pattern is selected in the plurality of variable performances.
That is, in this embodiment, when a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and the reach performance is not executed, the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 is "4" in the special time-saving gaming state. The rate at which the same variation pattern is selected in the first variable performance and the second variable performance based on is the first ratio, and the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 is "4" in the specific time-saving gaming state. The rate at which the same variation pattern is selected in the third variation performance and the fourth variation performance based on is the second ratio. The second ratio is larger than the first ratio.

In this case, compared to the case where the first ratio and the second ratio are the same size, even if a variable effect is performed based on the number of reservations at a common starting port being a common number, the time-saving game It is possible to provide a pachinko game machine 100 that allows a player to enjoy performances with different characteristics depending on the type of state and that can execute highly entertaining performances.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and the reach performance is not executed, the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 is "4" in the special time-saving gaming state. The rate at which the same variation pattern is selected in the first variable performance and the second variable performance based on is the first rate, and the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 is "1" in the specific time saving gaming state. We have explained that the rate at which the same variation pattern is selected in the third and fourth variation effects based on the above is the second rate, and the second rate is larger than the first rate. Not limited.
When a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and the reach performance is not executed, the first variable performance and the first variable performance based on the fact that the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 is a specific number in the special time-saving gaming state are performed. The rate at which the same variation pattern is selected in the two variable effects is the first rate, and the third variable effect and the fourth variable effect are based on the fact that the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 is a specific number in the specific time-saving gaming state. In the variation effect, the rate at which the same variation pattern is selected is a second rate, and the second rate may be larger than the first rate. In this case, the specific number may be any value among "1", "2", "3", and "4".

Furthermore, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the second ratio is 1 (100%), but the second ratio is not limited to this. Even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and a variable performance is performed in which the reach performance is not executed, the third lottery based on the fact that the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 is a specific number in the specific time-saving gaming state Different variation patterns may be selected for the variation effect and the fourth variation effect.

In addition, in the fluctuation pattern table (see FIG. 29) used based on winnings in the first start opening 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the "fluctuation pattern" associated with the number of reservations "1" and "loss" is specified. Among the variable patterns that can be selected based on winnings in the first start opening 121 in the time-saving gaming state, only "PO1", which is the variable pattern with the shortest variation time, is provided. On the other hand, in the fluctuation pattern table (see FIG. 28) used based on winnings in the second start opening 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the "fluctuation pattern" associated with the number of reservations "1" and "loss" is specified. Among the variable patterns that can be selected based on winnings in the second starting port 122 in the time-saving gaming state, a variable pattern such as "PM1" that is different from the variable pattern with the shortest variation time is provided.
That is, in the present embodiment, when a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss based on the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 being "1" in the specific time saving gaming state, the specific time saving gaming state The rate at which the variation pattern with the shortest variation time among the selectable variation patterns based on winnings in the first starting opening 121 is selected is the first proportion. In addition, if a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss based on the number of reservations of the second starting opening 122 being "1" in the specific time saving gaming state, the second starting opening in the specific time saving gaming state is performed. The rate at which the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is selected among the selectable variation patterns based on winnings in 122 is the second rate. Further, the first ratio is larger than the second ratio.

In this case, when the number of reservations is smaller, the variable effect based on winning in the second starting port 122 in the specific time saving gaming state is better than the variable effect based on winning in the first starting port 121 in the specific time saving gaming state. To the extent that fluctuating performances with long fluctuation times are easily carried out, players can enjoy various performances with high probability even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a failure. Therefore, even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss in the variable performance based on winnings in the second start opening 122 in the specific time-saving game state, the interest in the game can be improved.

In particular, in the variation pattern table (see FIG. 24) used based on winnings in the first starting slot 121 in the normal gaming state, the "variation pattern" associated with the number of holds "1" and "loss" is Among the variation patterns that can be selected based on winnings in the first starting port 121 in the state, a variation pattern such as "PR1", which is different from the variation pattern with the shortest variation time, is provided. That is, in the present embodiment, when a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss based on the fact that the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 is "1" in the specific time-saving game state, the specific time-saving game The rate at which the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is selected among the selectable variation patterns based on winnings in the first starting port 121 in the state is the first rate. In addition, when a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss based on the fact that the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 is "1" in the normal gaming state, the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state The rate at which the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is selected from among the selectable variation patterns based on winnings is the second rate. Further, the first ratio is larger than the second ratio.
In this case, the variable effect based on winning in the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state changes when the number of reservations is smaller than the variable effect based on winning in the first starting port 121 in the specific time saving gaming state. As long-time variable performances are likely to be performed, players can enjoy various performances with high probability even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a failure. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, the game ball should be placed in the first starting port 121, and in the specific time-saving gaming state, the game ball should be placed in the second starting port 122. Can be done.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being "1" in the specific time saving gaming state, the specific time saving gaming state The rate at which the variation pattern with the shortest variation time among the selectable variation patterns based on winnings in the first starting opening 121 is selected is the first ratio, and the rate at which the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is selected based on winnings in the first starting opening 121 is If a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss based on the number of reservations being "1", one of the selectable variable patterns based on winning in the second starting hole 122 in the specific time saving gaming state. It has been explained that the rate at which the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is selected is the second rate, and the first rate is larger than the second rate. In addition, if a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss based on the fact that the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 is "1" in the specific time saving gaming state, the first starting in the specific time saving gaming state The rate at which the variation pattern with the shortest variation time among the selectable variation patterns based on winnings in the opening 121 is selected is the first proportion, and the number of reservations in the first starting opening 121 is "1" in the normal gaming state. ”, when a variable effect is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, the variable time is the longest among the selectable variable patterns based on winnings in the first starting hole 121 in the normal gaming state. Although it has been explained that the rate at which short fluctuation patterns are selected is the second rate, and the first rate is larger than the second rate, the present invention is not limited to this.
When a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss based on the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 being a specific number in the specific time saving gaming state, The rate at which the variable pattern with the shortest variation time is selected among the selectable variable patterns based on winnings is the first rate, and the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state is a specific number. When a variation performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss based on the above, the variation pattern with the shortest variation time among the selectable variation patterns based on winnings to the second starting port 122 in the specific time saving gaming state is The selected ratio is the second ratio, and the first ratio may be larger than the second ratio. In addition, if a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is performed based on the fact that the number of reservations in the first starting opening 121 is a specific number in the specific time saving gaming state, the first starting opening in the specific time saving gaming state The rate at which the variable pattern with the shortest variation time is selected among the selectable variable patterns based on winnings in 121 is the first rate, and the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 is a specific number in the normal gaming state. When a variation performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss based on a certain fact, the variation with the shortest variation time among the variation patterns that can be selected based on the winning in the first starting hole 121 in the normal gaming state is performed. The rate at which patterns are selected is a second rate, and the first rate may be greater than the second rate. In this case, the specific number may be any value among "1", "2", "3", and "4".

In addition, in the present embodiment, when a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss based on the fact that the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 is a specific number in the specific time saving gaming state, in the specific time saving gaming state Although it has been explained that the variation pattern with the shortest variation time among the selectable variation patterns based on winnings in the first starting opening 121 is always selected (100%), the present invention is not limited to this. Based on the fact that the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 is a specific number in the specific time-saving gaming state, even if a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, the first starting point in the specific time-saving gaming state A variation pattern different from the variation pattern having the shortest variation time among the selectable variation patterns based on winning in the starting slot 121 may be selected.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winning in the first starting hole 121 in the specific time saving gaming state is a loss and a variable performance is performed in which a reach effect is not executed, a variable pattern is selected. Regardless of the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 at the time, a variation performance (special symbol variation) whose execution time is the same is executed.
In this case, the variable performance based on winning at the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state is better than the variable performance based on winning at the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. Players can enjoy the performance. Therefore, in the specific time saving game state, the player can be made aware that he should win at the second starting opening 122 instead of the first starting opening 121.

In addition, in this embodiment, the number of variable patterns (variable performance patterns) that can be selected based on the winnings in the first starting opening in the specific time-saving gaming state is greater than the number of winnings in the second starting opening 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. The number of variable patterns (variable effect patterns) that can be selected based on is larger. In addition, in this embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winning in the first starting hole 121 in the specific time saving gaming state is a loss, the number of selectable variable patterns (variable performance patterns) The number of selectable variable patterns (variable effect patterns) is greater when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winning in the second start opening 122 in the time-saving gaming state is a loss. In particular, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winning in the first start opening 121 in the specific time saving gaming state is a loss, the number of selectable variable patterns (variable performance patterns) is one.
In this case, the variable performance based on winning in the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state is better than the variable performance based on winning in the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. can entertain people. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the variable performance based on winnings in the second start opening 122 in the specific time saving game state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the number of variable patterns (variable performance patterns) that can be selected based on the winnings in the first starting opening 121 in the normal gaming state is more There are more variable patterns (variable effect patterns) that can be selected based on the above. In addition, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winning in the first starting hole 121 in the specific time saving gaming state is a loss, the number of selectable variable patterns (variable performance patterns) is The number of variable patterns (variable effect patterns) that can be selected is greater when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winning in the first starting hole 121 in the gaming state is a loss.
In this case, the variable performance based on the winning of the first starting opening 121 in the normal gaming state is more flexible than the fluctuating performance based on the winning of the first starting opening 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. can be entertained. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, the game ball should be placed in the first starting port 121, and in the specific time-saving gaming state, the game ball should be placed in the second starting port 122. Can be done.

(Variable effect example 13)
FIG. 109 and FIG. 110 are diagrams showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 109 and 110, another specific example (variation effect example 13) of the variation effect of the decorative pattern 41 will be described. Variation performance example 13 is a variation performance example of the decorative pattern 41 based on the game ball winning in the first starting port 121 in the specific time saving game state.
The fluctuating effects shown in FIGS. 109 and 110 are examples of varying effects of the decorative symbol 41 when "EN2" is selected as the "fluctuating effect pattern" in FIG. 64. In addition, in the following explanation, points that are different from each of the above-mentioned variable performance examples will be mainly explained, and descriptions of points that are the same as each of the variable performance examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 109(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control section 300 displays the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 with low decorativeness on the image display section 114. Definitely stopped. Moreover, at this time, the stage image 61, the first right-handed image 75, and the specific time saving remaining number image 524 are displayed. The text “290” is shown in the specific time saving remaining number image 524. Moreover, at this time, the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 221. Further, at this time, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 has stopped.

Next, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 121, as shown in FIG. 109(2), the special symbols start changing on the first special symbol display 221. Also, at this time, variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 is started. Further, when the variable display of the special symbols starts, the decorative symbols 41 and the small symbols 56 start to vary. Further, at this time, the specific time saving remaining number image 524 is switched from "290" to "289". Also, at this time, the fourth right-handed image 525 is displayed. Also, at this time, the speaker 156 outputs a voice saying "Please hit to the right." On the other hand, the fluctuation image 51 is not displayed. Moreover, the winning sound notifying that the game ball has won into the first starting port 121 is not output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109(3), a second winning suggestion image 91 is displayed. At this time, the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 maintain a fluctuating state. Also, at this time, the special symbols continue to fluctuate on the first special symbol display 221. Further, at this time, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 continues.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109(4), the second winning suggestion image 91 is continuously displayed. Moreover, at this time, "135" is fixed and stopped as the small pattern 56. On the other hand, at this time, the decorative pattern 41 is neither temporarily stopped nor confirmed. Also, at this time, the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 221 in a manner that notifies that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. Also, at this time, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 stops.
In addition, when the second winning suggestion image 91 is a moving image, the display content of the second winning suggestion image 91 shown in FIG. 109 (4) has been updated from the second winning suggestion image 91 shown in FIG. 109 (3). You can.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109(5), an opening image 74 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the text "Bonus!" indicating the start of a jackpot game or a small win game is displayed as the opening image 74.
Next, as shown in FIG. 109(6), a promotion image 508 is displayed. In the promotion image 508, a specific area image 509 is displayed.

Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the promotion image 508 was displayed, the jackpot game is started, and as shown in FIG. be done. In the illustrated example, the text “Round 1” is displayed on the round number image 77.

Next, when the final round ends, a special time saving selection image 510 is displayed as shown in FIG. 110(8). In the illustrated example, the cursor is placed on the "A" mode in the special time saving selection image 510.
When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the special time saving selection image 510 was displayed, the special time saving start image 78 is displayed as shown in FIG. 110(9). Also, at this time, the second right-handed image 511 is displayed together with the first right-handed image 75.
Next, in the specific time saving game state, as shown in FIG. 110 (10), "135", which is a decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness, is fixed and stopped on the image display section 114. Similarly to the decorative pattern 41, the small pattern 56 is also fixed and stopped by the sequence of numbers "135". Note that the small symbols 56 displayed at this time correspond to the sequence of numbers that are finally stopped and displayed before the jackpot game is executed, that is, when the jackpot is won. Also, at this time, a special time saving remaining number image 79 is displayed. The text “30 times” is displayed on the special time saving remaining number image 79.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the variable performance based on winning in the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the variable performance based on winning in the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state and in the specific time-saving gaming state An original image that is not displayed in the variable effect based on winning the second starting opening 122 is displayed. Examples of the original image include the fourth right-handed image 525 and the second winning suggestion image 91.
In this case, by showing the original image to the player during the variable performance, it is possible to make the player recognize that this variable performance is a variable performance based on winning in the first start opening 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. can.

In addition, as shown in variable performance example 13, in a variable performance in which the lottery result of a special symbol lottery based on winning in the first starting hole 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state is a jackpot, the decorative symbol 41 causes a temporary stop or a confirmed stop. The jackpot game starts without any need to do so. In other words, in a variable performance in which the lottery result of a special symbol lottery based on winning in the first start opening 121 in the specific time saving game state is a jackpot, the decorative symbol 41 does not notify the jackpot. On the other hand, as shown in variable performance example 10, in the variable performance when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winning in the second starting hole 122 in the specific time saving gaming state is a jackpot, the decorative symbol 41 of the double After the jackpot is announced (see FIG. 99 (11)), the jackpot game is started.
In this case, the variable presentation based on winning the second starting port 122 in the specific time saving gaming state is better than the variable presentation based on winning the first starting port 121 in the specific time saving gaming state. The more that is displayed, the more excited the player can be. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the variable performance based on winnings in the second start opening 122 in the specific time saving game state.

In addition, as shown in variable performance example 13, in the variable performance when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winning in the first starting hole 121 in the specific time saving gaming state is a jackpot, the small symbols 56 including different numbers is stopped and displayed, and then the jackpot game starts. On the other hand, as shown in variable performance example 10, in the variable performance when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning in the second starting hole 122 in the specific time saving gaming state is a jackpot, the small symbols 56 with the same numbers After is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 99 (11)), the jackpot game is started.
In this case, the variable presentation based on winning in the second starting hole 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state is better than the variable presentation based on winning in the first starting hole 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. 56 is displayed, the player can be excited. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the variable performance based on winnings in the second start opening 122 in the specific time saving game state.

In addition, as shown in variation performance example 13, if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winning in the first starting hole 121 in the specific time saving gaming state is a jackpot, at the start of the next variation after the variation that is a jackpot, Decorative patterns 41 including different patterns are displayed (see FIG. 110 (10)). On the other hand, as shown in variation performance example 10, if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winning in the second starting hole 122 in the specific time saving gaming state is a jackpot, at the start of the next variation after the variation that is a jackpot. , the decorative pattern 41 of the number zero is displayed (see FIG. 100 (17)).
In this case, the variable effect based on winning in the second starting hole 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state is better than the variable effect based on winning in the first starting hole 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. Since the decorative pattern 41 of the number zero is displayed at the start of the variation, the player can be excited. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the variable performance based on winnings in the second start opening 122 in the specific time saving game state.

In addition, in the variable performance pattern table (see FIG. 64) used when a game ball enters the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the “judgment result” changes to a “variable performance pattern” in which the “jackpot” is a “jackpot”. A special performance is associated with it. Here, examples of the special performance at the time of variation include pseudo-continuous performance, SP reach performance, change performance, zone performance, effect performance, role performance, sound performance, button operation performance, and the like. In addition, in the variable performance pattern table used when a game ball enters the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the special performance at the time of fluctuation is associated with the "variable performance pattern" whose "judgment result" is "miss". It has not been done. In other words, the variable performance in which the variable time special performance is executed based on the winning of the first start opening 121 in the specific time saving gaming state is the variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.
That is, in this embodiment, when a variable performance in which a special performance is performed at the time of fluctuation is executed, the first starting hole in the specific time saving gaming state is more effective than the variable performance based on winning the first starting hole 121 in the normal gaming state. The variable performance based on the winning of 121 is more likely to be executed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. In addition, when a variable performance in which a special performance is performed at the time of fluctuation is executed, the winning in the first starting opening 121 in the specific time saving gaming state is higher than the variable performance based on winning in the second starting opening 122 in the special time saving gaming state. It is easier to perform a variable performance based on the above in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.

In particular, in this embodiment, when a variable effect in which a special effect at the time of change is performed without an SPSP reach effect is performed, the specific effect is more effective than a variable effect based on winning in the first starting opening 121 in the normal gaming state. The variable performance based on the winning of the first start opening 121 in the time-saving gaming state is more likely to be executed as the variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. In addition, when a variable performance in which a special performance at the time of fluctuation is performed without the SPSP reach performance is performed, the variable performance based on winning in the second starting opening 122 in the special time-saving game state is more effective than the variable performance in the specific time-saving game state. A variable performance based on winning in the first starting hole 121 is more likely to be executed than a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.

In addition, when a variable performance in which a special performance is performed at the time of fluctuation is executed, the first start in the specific time saving gaming state is more effective than the variable performance based on the fact that the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 is a specific number in the normal gaming state. The variable performance based on the number of reserved openings 121 being a specific number may be more likely to be executed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. In addition, when a variable performance in which a special performance is performed at the time of fluctuation is executed, the first variable performance in the specific time-saving gaming state is higher than the variable performance based on the fact that the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 is a specific number in the special time-saving gaming state. The variable performance based on the number of reservations in the starting opening 121 being a specific number may be more likely to be executed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. In these cases, the specific number may be any value among "1", "2", "3", and "4".
In addition, when a variable performance in which a special performance at the time of fluctuation is performed without a SPSP reach performance is performed, compared to a variable performance based on the fact that the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 is a specific number in the normal gaming state, The variable performance based on the fact that the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 is a specific number in the specific time-saving game state may be made easier to execute the variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. In addition, when a variable performance in which a special performance at the time of fluctuation is performed without the SPSP reach performance being performed, it is more effective than a variable performance based on the fact that the number of reservations at the second starting port 122 is a specific number in the special time-saving gaming state. In the specific time-saving game state, the variable performance based on the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 being a specific number may be more likely to be executed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. In these cases, the specific number may be any value among "1", "2", "3", and "4".

In addition, in this embodiment, when a variable performance is executed in which a special performance at the time of fluctuation is performed based on winning in the first starting hole 121 in the specific time saving gaming state, a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot is executed. Although it has been explained that it is always executed (100%), it is not limited to this. Even if a variable performance is executed in which a special performance at the time of fluctuation is performed based on winning in the first starting hole 121 in the specific time saving gaming state, a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is executed. Good too. In addition, even if a variable performance is executed in which a special performance at the time of fluctuation is performed based on the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 being a specific number in the specific time-saving gaming state, the lottery result of the special symbol lottery will be off. A variation effect may be executed.
In addition, in this embodiment, when a variable performance is executed in which a variable time special performance is performed without SPSP reach performance based on winning in the first starting port 121 in the specific time saving gaming state, the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is Although it has been explained that the variable performance that is a jackpot is always executed (100%), the present invention is not limited to this. Even if the SPSP reach performance is not performed based on winning in the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, and the fluctuation performance is performed in which a special performance is performed at the time of fluctuation, the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss. A variation effect may be executed. In addition, even if the SPSP reach performance is not performed based on the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 being a specific number in the specific time-saving gaming state, and the fluctuation performance is performed in which the special performance at the time of fluctuation is performed, the special symbol A variable performance in which the lottery result is a loser may be executed.

In addition, when a variable performance in which a special performance is performed at the time of fluctuation is executed, winning in the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state is higher than a variable performance based on winning in the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. The variable performance based on this may be more likely to be executed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. In addition, when a variable performance in which a special performance is performed at the time of fluctuation is executed, the winning in the second starting opening 122 in the specific time saving gaming state is higher than the variable performance based on winning in the first starting opening 121 in the specific time saving gaming state. The variable performance based on this may be more likely to be executed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.

Further, in a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winning in the first start opening 121 in the specific time saving game state is a jackpot, the special performance at the time of fluctuation may not be executed. In other words, when a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, the variable performance based on winning to the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state is compared to the variable performance based on winning to the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. The variable effect based on winning may be made easier to execute the special effect at the time of change. In addition, when a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, the effect on the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state is higher than the variable presentation based on winning the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. It may be arranged so that the special performance at the time of fluctuation is more likely to be executed when the fluctuation performance is based on winning a prize.

(Variation example of variation production example 12)
FIGS. 111 to 114 are diagrams showing modifications of the variation effect example 12.
In variable performance example 12, the variable performance based on winning in the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state was explained, but the variable performance based on winning in the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state is similar to the above example. but not limited to.
Hereinafter, a modification of the variation effect example 12 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 111 to 114. This modification is an example of a variation effect of the decorative pattern 41 based on the fact that a game ball enters the first start opening 121 in the specific time saving game state. In the following description, points that are different from each of the above-mentioned variation presentation examples will be mainly explained, and descriptions of points that are the same as each of the above-mentioned variation presentation examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 111(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control section 300 displays the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 with low decorativeness on the image display section 114. Definitely stopped. Moreover, at this time, the stage image 61, the first right-handed image 75, and the specific time saving remaining number image 524 are displayed. The text “294” is displayed in the specific time saving remaining number image 524.

Next, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 121, as shown in FIG. 111(2), the decorative symbols 41 and the small symbols 56 begin to vary as the special symbols begin to be displayed. Further, at this time, the specific time saving remaining number image 524 is switched from "294" to "293". Also, at this time, a variable image 51 is displayed. On the other hand, the winning sound notifying that the game ball has won into the first starting port 121 is not output.
Incidentally, the fourth right-hitting image 525 (see FIG. 103(2)) may be displayed in response to the game ball winning in the first starting port 121. Furthermore, in response to the game ball winning in the first starting port 121, the speaker 156 may output a voice saying "Please hit to the right."

Next, when four game balls land in the first starting port 121, four pending images 52 are displayed as shown in FIG. 111(3). Also, at this time, "4" is displayed on the pending number display 55 of the first starting port 121. On the other hand, even when any game ball enters the first starting port 121, the winning sound notifying that the game ball has entered the first starting port 121 is not output.
Note that the fourth right-hitting image 525 (see FIG. 103(2)) may be displayed every time a game ball enters the first starting port 121. Further, each time a game ball enters the first starting port 121, a voice saying "Please hit to the right" may be output from the speaker 156.

Next, as shown in FIG. 111(4), the three decorative patterns 41 "412" are fixed and stopped. Further, as the special symbols stop changing, the small symbols 56 also stop.
Next, as shown in FIG. 111(5), the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 start to change as the next special pattern starts to be displayed. Further, at this time, the specific time saving remaining number image 524 is switched from "293" to "292". Also, at this time, the pending number display 55 of the first starting port 121 switches from "4" to "3".

Next, as shown in FIG. 111(6), the three decorative patterns 41 "125" are fixed and stopped. At this time, the first chance effect is executed, and the chance image 63 is displayed on the three decorative patterns 41. In the illustrated example, blue chance images 63 are displayed on the three decorative patterns 41 due to the first chance effect. Further, as the special symbols stop changing, the small symbols 56 also stop.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112(7), the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 start to change as the next special pattern starts to be displayed. Further, the pending number display 55 of the first starting port 121 switches from "3" to "2". Further, the specific time saving remaining number of times image 524 is switched from "292" to "291".
Next, as shown in FIG. 112(8), the three decorative patterns 41 "853" are fixed and stopped. At this time, a second chance effect is executed, and chance images 63 are displayed on the three decorative patterns 41. In the illustrated example, a green chance image 63 is displayed on the three decorative patterns 41 due to the second chance effect. Further, as the special symbols stop changing, the small symbols 56 also stop.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112(9), the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 start to change as the next special pattern starts to be displayed. Further, the pending number display 55 of the first starting port 121 switches from "2" to "1". Further, the specific time saving remaining number of times image 524 is switched from "291" to "290".
Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (10), the three decorative patterns 41 "553" are fixed and stopped. Further, as the special symbols stop changing, the small symbols 56 also stop. At this time, the combination "553" of the small symbols 56 matches the combination of the decorative symbols 41. Note that in this variable performance, the third chance performance is not executed. In other words, in this variable performance, the final chance performance out of the three times is not executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (11), the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 start to change as the next special pattern starts to be displayed. Further, the pending number display 55 of the first starting port 121 switches from "1" to "0". Further, the specific time saving remaining number of times image 524 is switched from "290" to "289". Also, at this time, a zone effect is executed and a zone notification image 64 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the text ``Entering the super hot zone!'' is displayed, which makes you expect a jackpot in the variation of the special symbol being executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (12), an accessory effect is performed. In the illustrated example, the middle movable accessory 115B moves to cover a part of the image display section 114 due to the accessory effect. Also, at this time, an accessory effect image 92 is displayed. In the illustrated example, a blue accessory effect image 92 is displayed on the image display section 114 around an area overlapping with the medium movable accessory 115B. Also, at this time, a zone identification image 65 is displayed. Also, at this time, a sound effect is executed, and the speaker 156 outputs a voice saying "It's hot!?" This sound performance that outputs the voice "Hot!?" is a performance that makes you expect to hit the jackpot in the variable performance that is being executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (13), the number "4" which is the left and right decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped, and the ready-to-win effect is executed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (14), a change effect is executed, and a change image 62 is displayed on the change image 51. In the illustrated example, a blue change image 62 is displayed on the change image 51 due to the change effect. Note that when this change effect is being executed, the sound effect of the change effect is not output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (15), the SP reach effect is executed. Also, at this time, the stage image 61 is hidden.
Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (16), the SPSP reach effect is executed. Moreover, at this time, the number "4" which is the upper and lower small patterns 56 is temporarily stopped. On the other hand, the small and medium-sized symbols 56 maintain high-speed fluctuations. Moreover, at this time, the decorative pattern 41 and the variable image 51 are hidden.
Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (17), a button operation effect is executed and a button operation image 69 is displayed.
Then, when the player operates the effect button 161 while the button operation image 69 is displayed, as shown in FIG. Stop.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (19), the three decorative patterns 41 are temporarily stopped. Furthermore, the stage image 61 is redisplayed.
Then, as the special symbols stop changing, the three decorative symbols 41 are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 114 (20). The combination "454" of the decorative symbols 41 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss. Further, as the special symbols stop changing, the small symbols 56 also stop. At this time, the combination "454" of the small patterns 56 matches the combination of the decorative patterns 41. Further, the fluctuation image 51 is not displayed.

As described above, in the modified example, the change effect of the pending image 52 is not executed. On the other hand, in variation effect example 1, a change effect of the pending image 52 is executed (see FIG. 66(7)). That is, in the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state than when the gaming ball enters the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the pending image 52 It is easy to execute a change performance.
In this case, when a game ball enters the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state, there is a higher probability that the pending image 52 It is possible to entertain the players with the changing performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that when a game ball enters the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the change performance of the pending image 52 is not executed (0%), but the present invention is not limited to this. . Even if a game ball enters the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the change performance of the pending image 52 may be executed.

Furthermore, in the modified example, the change effect of the variable image 51 is executed after the start of the reach effect (see FIG. 113 (14)), while the change effect of the variable image 51 is executed before the start of the reach effect. do not have. On the other hand, in variation effect example 1, the variation effect of the variable image 51 is executed before the start of the ready-to-reach effect (see FIG. 67 (16)). That is, in the present embodiment, the variable performance based on winning the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state is more likely to be a reach effect than the variable presentation based on winning the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. It is easy to perform the change effect of the fluctuation image 51 before the start.
In this case, the variable performance based on the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state has a better reach than the variable presentation based on the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. To allow a player to enjoy a changing performance with high probability even when the performance is not being executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that in the variable effect based on winning in the first start opening 121 in the specific time saving gaming state, the change effect of the variable image 51 is not executed (0%) before the start of the reach effect. , but not limited to. Even if the variable effect is based on winning in the first start opening 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the change effect of the variable image 51 may be executed before the start of the ready-to-win effect.

In addition, in the modified example, while the first chance performance (see Figure 111 (6)) and the second chance performance (see Figure 112 (8)) are executed, the third chance performance is executed. It has not been. On the other hand, in variable performance example 1, the third chance performance is executed (see FIG. 67 (14)). That is, in the present embodiment, the variable presentation based on winnings in the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state is better than the variable presentation based on winnings in the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. It's easy to execute my chance performance in the final episode.
In this case, the variable performance based on the winning of a game ball in the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state is higher than the variable presentation based on the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. The player can enjoy the final chance performance based on the probability.

In addition, in the present embodiment, it has been explained that in the variable performance based on winning in the first start opening 121 in the specific time saving gaming state, the final chance performance among the plurality of times is not executed (0%), It is not limited to this. Even if it is a variable performance based on winning in the first start opening 121 in the specific time-saving game state, the final chance performance among the three times may be executed.

In addition, in the modified example, a zone effect is executed that makes people expect to hit a jackpot in the variable effect that is being executed (see FIG. 112 (11)), while a zone effect that makes people expect to hit a jackpot in the variable effect that follows the variable effect that is being executed is performed. The expected zone effect is not executed. Note that the zone performance that makes the player expect a big hit in the currently running variable performance may be referred to as a first expected performance hereinafter. Further, a zone performance that makes players expect to win a big hit in the next variable performance after the currently executed variable performance may be referred to as a second expected performance hereinafter. On the other hand, in variable performance example 1, the second expected performance is executed (see FIG. 67 (13)). That is, in the present embodiment, the variable effect based on winning in the first starting hole 121 in the normal gaming state is better than the variable effect based on winning in the first starting hole 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. The performance is easy to execute.
In this case, the variable presentation based on the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state is more likely to be a jackpot than the variable presentation based on the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. To make it possible for a player to enjoy a zone performance with a high probability even if it is a variable performance before a variable performance that makes the player expect that he will do something.

In the present embodiment, it has been explained that the second expected performance is not executed (0%) in the variable performance based on winning in the first start opening 121 in the specific time saving gaming state, but the present invention is not limited to this. The second expected performance may be executed even if it is a variable performance based on winning in the first start opening 121 in the specific time saving gaming state.

In addition, in the modified example, an accessory effect that moves the middle movable accessory 115B is executed (see FIG. 112 (12)), and a role that moves the left movable accessory 115A based on the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination process. No physical performance was performed. In addition, below, the accessory effect which moves the middle movable accessory object 115B may be called the 1st accessory effect. In addition, the accessory effect in which the left movable accessory object 115A is operated based on the result of the preliminary determination may be referred to as a second accessory effect hereinafter. On the other hand, in variable performance example 1, the second accessory performance is executed (see FIG. 67 (13)). That is, in this embodiment, the variable presentation based on winning the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state is better than the variable presentation based on winning the first starting port 121 in the specific time saving gaming state. It is easier to perform things.
In this case, the variable performance based on winning the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state has a higher probability of achieving the pre-judgment result than the variable presentation based on winning the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. The player can enjoy the performance based on the role model.

In addition, in the present embodiment, it has been explained that the second accessory performance is not executed (0%) in the variable performance based on winning in the first start opening 121 in the specific time saving game state, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even if it is a variable performance based on winning in the first start opening 121 in the specific time saving game state, the second accessory performance may be executed.

In addition, in the modified example, an effect production that displays the accessory effect image 92 is executed (see FIG. 112 (12)), while an effect production that displays an effect image based on the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination process is executed. It has not been. Hereinafter, the effect rendering that displays the accessory effect image 92 may be referred to as a first color rendering. Further, an effect presentation in which an effect image is displayed based on the result of the preliminary determination may be hereinafter referred to as a second color presentation. In variation effect example 1, a second color effect is executed to display the zone effect image 66 based on the preliminary determination result (see FIG. 67 (15)). That is, in the present embodiment, the variable effect based on winning in the first starting hole 121 in the normal gaming state is better than the variable effect based on winning in the first starting hole 121 in the specific time saving gaming state. The performance is easy to execute.
In this case, the variable performance based on winning the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state has a higher probability of achieving the pre-judgment result than the variable presentation based on winning the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. The player can enjoy the effect production based on the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the second color effect is not executed (0%) in the variable effect based on winning in the first start opening 121 in the specific time saving game state, but the present invention is not limited to this. The second color effect may be executed even if it is a variable effect based on winning in the first start opening 121 in the specific time saving gaming state.

Furthermore, in the modified example, a sound effect is executed in which the speaker 156 outputs a voice saying "It's hot!?" (see FIG. 112 (12)). This sound production is not based on the preliminary determination result, but is based on a variation production pattern corresponding to the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 16). This sound production may be hereinafter referred to as a first sound production. On the other hand, in the modified example, a sound production suggesting that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot based on the preliminary determination result is not performed. Note that, hereinafter, a sound production that outputs a production sound that suggests that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot based on the result of the preliminary determination may be referred to as a second sound production. In the example 3 of variable effects, the second sound effect is executed (see FIG. 71(2)). That is, in the present embodiment, the variable effect based on winning in the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state is better than the variable effect based on winning in the first starting port 121 in the specific time saving gaming state. The performance is easy to execute.
In this case, the variable performance based on winning the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state has a higher probability of achieving the pre-judgment result than the variable presentation based on winning the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. Players can enjoy the sound effects based on the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the second sound performance is not executed (0%) in the variable performance based on winning in the first start opening 121 in the specific time saving gaming state, but the present invention is not limited to this. The second sound performance may be performed even if it is a variable performance based on winning the first start opening 121 in the specific time saving game state.

In addition, in the modified example, even if a game ball enters the first starting port 121, a winning sound is not output (see FIG. 111 (3)), and even if a change effect is executed, the sound effect of the change effect is output. (See FIG. 113 (14)). On the other hand, in variable effect example 1, when a game ball enters the first starting port 121, a winning sound is output (see FIG. 65 (3)), and when a change effect is executed, a sound effect of the change effect is output. (See Figure 67 (16)). That is, in this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state, a winning effect sound is output, and when a gaming ball enters the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the game ball enters the first starting port 121. The winning performance sound will not be output. Here, the "winning performance sound" is the "sound encouraging the firing of the game ball to the right side in the gaming area 111" that is output when a game ball wins in the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. different. Furthermore, when a game ball enters the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state, it is possible to output a production sound of a change effect, and when a game ball enters the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, Do not output the production sound of the change production.
In this case, when a game ball enters the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state, it is more enjoyable for the player through the effect sound than when the gaming ball enters the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. You can do it. Therefore, when a game ball enters the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state, the interest in the game can be improved.

(Modification 2)
FIG. 115 is a diagram showing another modification of the variation effect example 12.
Next, another modification example (modification example 2) of the variation effect example 12 will be explained with reference to FIG. 115. This modification is an example of performance when a game ball enters the first start opening 121 in the specific time saving game state. In the following explanation, points that are different from each of the above-mentioned variation production examples and modifications will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as each of the above-mentioned variation production examples and modifications may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 115(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control section 300 displays the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 with low decorativeness on the image display section 114. Definitely stopped. Also, at this time, the pending number display 55, the stage image 61, and the first right-handed image 75 are displayed. Moreover, at this time, the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 221. Moreover, at this time, the first special symbol reservation display 218 is displaying "0" corresponding to the number of reservations in the first starting port 121. Further, at this time, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 has stopped. Further, at this time, the sub-first reservation display 83 is displaying "0".

Next, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 121, as shown in FIG. 115(2), the cycle of special symbols starts to change on the first special symbol display 221, and then the sub-first variation display The variable display at 81 is started. On the other hand, the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 maintain a fixed and stopped state. Further, the fluctuation image 51 is not displayed. Further, the winning sound notifying that the game ball has won into the first starting port 121 is not output. Furthermore, in the stage image 61, the display of the moving image is maintained. That is, in the image display section 114, only the display content of the stage image 61 changes.

Next, when a game ball enters the first starting port 121, as shown in FIG. will be displayed as “1”. On the other hand, the pending image 52 is not displayed. Further, the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 remains "0". Moreover, the winning sound notifying that the game ball has won into the first starting port 121 is not output. Further, the cycle of special symbols continues to fluctuate on the first special symbol display 221, and the variable display on the sub-first variation display 81 continues. Further, the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 maintain a fixed and stopped state. Further, in the stage image 61, a moving image is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115(4), the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 221, and then the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 is stopped. Further, the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 maintain a fixed and stopped state. Further, in the stage image 61, a moving image is displayed.

Next, the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 is subtracted, and as shown in FIG. The display 218 becomes "0". Thereafter, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 is started, and the sub-first pending display 83 becomes "0". On the other hand, the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 maintain a fixed stopped state. Further, in the stage image 61, a moving image is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115(6), the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 221, and then the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 is stopped. Further, the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 maintain a fixed and stopped state. Further, in the stage image 61, a moving image is displayed.

As described above, in the second modification, even if a game ball enters the first starting port 121 in the specific time saving game state, the decorative symbols 41 and the small symbols 56 are not changed.
In this case, the player cannot enjoy the effects of the decorative symbols 41 and the small symbols 56. Therefore, the player can recognize that in the specific time-saving gaming state, the game ball should not be placed in the first starting port 121, but should be placed in the second starting port 122.

In addition, in the second modification, even if the first starting port 121 is put on hold in the specific time-saving game state, the hold image 52 is not displayed and the hold number display 55 is not updated. That is, even if the first starting port 121 is put on hold in the specific time-saving gaming state, the image display unit 114 does not notify that the first starting port 121 is put on hold.
In this case, the player cannot recognize that the first starting port 121 is on hold even by looking at the display content on the image display section 114. Therefore, the player can recognize that in the specific time-saving gaming state, the game ball should not be placed in the first starting port 121, but should be placed in the second starting port 122.

In addition, in modification 2, when a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning in the first starting hole 121 in the specific time saving gaming state is a loss, the decorative symbol 41, the small symbol 56, and the number of pending While the display content of the display 55 does not change, the display content of the stage image 61 changes.
In this case, the player can recognize that the fact that the display contents of the decorative pattern 41, the small pattern 56, and the pending number display 55 do not change is not due to a malfunction in the image display section 114.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a prize is won in the second starting port 122 in the specific time saving gaming state, the pending image 52, the pending number display 55, the second special symbol pending display 219, and the sub-second pending display 84 information regarding the hold is announced. On the other hand, when a prize is won in the first start opening 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, information regarding the reservation is notified by the first special symbol reservation display 218 and the sub-first reservation display 83, but the reservation image 52 and Information regarding the hold is not reported by the hold count display 55. That is, in the present embodiment, in the specific time saving gaming state, more types of information regarding reservation are notified when a prize is won in the second starting opening 122 than when winning is won in the first starting opening 121.
In this case, the case where a game ball enters the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state is better than the case where the gaming ball enters the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state due to various information regarding reservation. Players can be entertained. Therefore, when a game ball enters the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state than when the gaming ball enters the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the interest in the game is increased through information regarding the hold. can be improved.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a prize is won in the first start opening 121 in the normal gaming state, the reservation image 52, the reservation number display 55, the first special symbol reservation display 218, and the sub-first reservation display 83 are displayed regarding reservations. Information will be announced. In other words, in the present embodiment, the type of information reported as information regarding reservation is greater when winning a prize at the first starting opening 121 in the normal gaming state than when winning at the first starting opening 121 in the specific time saving gaming state. many.
In this case, when a game ball enters the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state than when the gaming ball enters the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, it is easier to enter the game due to various information regarding the hold. can entertain people. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, the game ball should be placed in the first starting port 121, and in the specific time-saving gaming state, the game ball should be placed in the second starting port 122. I can do it.

In addition, in the modified example 2, it was explained that when a game ball enters the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 are not changed and the pending number display 55 is not updated. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, when a game ball enters the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the pending number display 55 may be updated while the decorative symbols 41 and the small symbols 56 are not changed. Further, in this case, a fourth right-handed image 525 (see FIG. 103(2)) may be displayed.
Furthermore, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the small symbols 56 may be varied while the decorative symbols 41 are not varied. Further, in this case, the fourth right-handed image 525 may be displayed.
In addition, when a game ball enters the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the decorative symbols 41 and the small symbols 56 are not changed, and the pending number display 55 is not updated, while the fourth right-handed image 525 may be displayed.

Further, in the second modification, an example was described in which the specific time saving remaining number of times image 524 is not displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this.
In the second modification, a specific time saving remaining number image 524 may be displayed. Then, when a game ball enters the first starting port 121 in the specific time saving game state, the display content of the specific time saving remaining number image 524 may be updated (subtraction display).

(Modification 3)
FIG. 116 and FIG. 117 are diagrams showing other modifications of the variation effect example 12.
Next, another modification example (modification example 3) of variation effect example 12 will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 and 117. This modification is an example of performance when a game ball enters the second starting port 122 during the variation of special symbols based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 121 in the specific time saving gaming state. In the following explanation, points that are different from each of the above-mentioned production examples will be mainly explained, and explanations about points that are the same as each of the above-mentioned production examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 116(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control section 300 displays the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 with low decorativeness on the image display section 114. Definitely stopped. Also, at this time, a pending number display 55, a stage image 61, a first right hit image 75, and a specific time saving remaining number image 524 are displayed. The text “290” is shown in the specific time saving remaining number image 524. Moreover, at this time, the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 221. Moreover, at this time, the first special symbol reservation display 218 is displaying "0" corresponding to the number of reservations in the first starting port 121. Further, at this time, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 has stopped. Further, at this time, the sub-first reservation display 83 is displaying "0". Also, at this time, the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 222. Moreover, at this time, the second special symbol reservation display 219 is displaying "0" corresponding to the number of reservations in the second starting port 122. Further, at this time, the variable display on the sub-second variable display 82 has stopped. Also, at this time, the sub-second reservation display 84 is displaying "0".

Next, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, as shown in FIG. The variable display at 81 is started. On the other hand, the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 maintain a fixed stopped state. Further, the fluctuation image 51 is not displayed. Further, the specific time saving remaining number of times image 524 is switched from "290" to "289". Moreover, the winning sound notifying that the game ball has won into the first starting port 121 is not output. Further, in the stage image 61, a moving image is displayed.

Next, when a game ball enters the second starting port 122, as shown in FIG. The variable display at 82 is started. Furthermore, after that, the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 start to fluctuate. Additionally, a fluctuation image 51 is displayed. Further, the specific time saving remaining number image 524 is switched from "289" to "288". On the other hand, the winning sound notifying that the game ball has won into the second starting port 122 is not output. Further, the cycle of special symbols continues to fluctuate on the first special symbol display 221, and the variable display on the sub-first variation display 81 continues.
Incidentally, in response to the game ball winning in the second starting port 122, a winning sound notifying the winning in the second starting port 122 may be output from the speaker 156.

Next, when a game ball enters the second starting port 122, as shown in FIG. will be displayed as “1”. Additionally, a pending image 52 is displayed. Further, “1” is displayed on the pending number display 55 of the second starting port 122. On the other hand, the winning sound notifying that the game ball has won into the second starting port 122 is not output. Further, the cycle of special symbols continues to fluctuate on the first special symbol display 221, and the variable display on the sub-first variation display 81 continues. Further, the cycle of special symbols continues to fluctuate on the second special symbol display 222, and the variable display on the sub-second variation display 82 continues.
Incidentally, in response to the game ball winning in the second starting port 122, a winning sound notifying the winning in the second starting port 122 may be output from the speaker 156.

Next, as shown in FIG. 116(5), a second start effect image 93 is displayed. Further, the cycle of special symbols continues to fluctuate on the first special symbol display 221, and the variable display on the sub-first variation display 81 continues. Further, the cycle of special symbols continues to fluctuate on the second special symbol display 222, and the variable display on the sub-second variation display 82 continues.

Next, as shown in FIG. 116(6), the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 222, and thereafter, the variable display on the sub-second variable display 82 is stopped. In addition, the three decorative patterns 41 "412" are displayed together and are fixed. Further, as the special symbols stop changing, the small symbols 56 also stop. At this time, the combination "412" of the small symbols 56 matches the combination of the decorative symbols 41. Further, the cycle of special symbols continues to fluctuate on the first special symbol display 221, and the variable display on the sub-first variation display 81 continues.

Next, the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 is subtracted, and as shown in FIG. The display 219 becomes "0". Thereafter, the variable display on the sub-second variable display 82 is started, and the sub-second hold display 84 becomes "0". After that, the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 start to fluctuate. Further, the specific time saving remaining number of times image 524 is switched from "288" to "287".
Thereafter, the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 221, and thereafter, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 is stopped. At this time, the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 continue to fluctuate. Further, the cycle of special symbols continues to fluctuate on the second special symbol display 222, and the variable display on the sub-second variation display 82 continues.

Note that after this, a game ball may enter the first starting port 121. That is, a game ball may win in the first starting hole 121 while the special symbols are changing based on winning in the second starting hole 122. In this case, the variation of the special symbol based on the winning to the first starting hole 121 may not be performed until the variation of the special symbol based on the winning to the second starting hole 122 is completed. Then, when the variation of the special symbol based on the winning into the second starting hole 122 ends, the variation of the special symbol based on the winning into the first starting hole 121 may be started.

As described above, in Modification 3, if a game ball enters the second starting port 122 during the variation of special symbols based on winnings to the first starting port 121 in the specific time saving gaming state, the game ball enters the first starting port 121. The variation of the special symbol based on winning and the variation of the special symbol based on the winning in the second start opening 122 are performed simultaneously. Furthermore, the decorative pattern 41, the small pattern 56, the pending number display 55, and the variable image 51 are displayed in response to winning in the second start opening 122. That is, a variable performance based on winnings in the second starting opening 122 is performed.
In this case, the effect on the image display unit 114 is better when a game ball enters the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state than when the gaming ball enters the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. can be enjoyed by players. Therefore, the player can be made aware that the game ball should be placed in the second starting port 122 in the specific time saving gaming state.

In addition, in modification 3, if a game ball enters the second starting port 122 during the variation of the special symbol based on the winning to the first starting port 121 in the specific time saving gaming state, the winning to the first starting port 121 does not occur. Although it has been explained that the variation of the special symbol based on the above and the variation of the special symbol based on the prize winning in the second starting hole 122 are performed simultaneously, the variation effect is performed based on the winning in the second starting hole 122, but it is limited to this. Not done.
For example, if a game ball enters the second starting port 122 while the special symbols are changing based on winnings in the first starting port 121 in a specific time-saving gaming state, the special symbols change based on winnings in the first starting port 121. And while the special symbols based on winnings to the second starting port 122 are simultaneously changed, the decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56 corresponding to winnings to the second starting port 122 are not changed, that is, the second There is no need to perform a variable performance based on winning in the starting slot 122. Also, for example, if a game ball wins in the second starting hole 122 during the variation of special symbols based on winning in the first starting hole 121 in the specific time saving gaming state, the special symbol based on winning in the first starting hole 121 The special symbols will not change based on winnings in the second starting port 122 until the variation of the special symbols based on winnings in the first starting port 121 ends. The variation of the special symbol based on this may be started, and the variation effect based on the winning in the second start opening 122 may be started.

(Processing example 1)
FIG. 118 is a diagram showing an example of processing performed by the performance control unit 300 when the radio wave detection sensor 208 and the game control board 200B are disconnected while the power of the pachinko game machine 100 is turned on. .
As shown in FIG. 118(1), as the previous special symbol is stopped and displayed by the production control section 300, the highly decorative decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 are fixed and stopped in the image display section 114. has been done. At this time, the image display unit 114 displays a pending number display 55, a stage image 61, an execution number image 501, and a remaining number of attained number image 503. Further, the execution number image 501 shows the text “199 GAME”. Further, the remaining number of arrivals image 503 shows the text “101 remaining”. Moreover, at this time, the radio wave detection sensor 208 and the game control board 200B are connected via wiring (not shown).

Then, when the radio wave detection sensor 208 and the game control board 200B are in a disconnected state, a radio wave error notification image 530 is displayed as shown in FIG. 118(2). Further, at this time, the speaker 156 outputs a warning sound along with a voice saying "Radio wave error." Also, at this time, a decorative pattern 41, a pending number display 55, a small pattern 56, a stage image 61, an execution number image 501, and a remaining number of attainment image 503 are displayed.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the radio wave detection sensor 208 and the game control board 200B are in a disconnected state, the production control unit 300 notifies the radio wave error notification regardless of whether or not a radio wave error has occurred. An image 530 is displayed, and a radio wave error warning sound is output from the speaker 156.

(Processing example 2)
FIG. 119 is a diagram showing an example of processing performed by the production control unit 300 when the magnetic detection sensor 207 and the game control board 200B are disconnected when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on.
When the power to the pachinko game machine 100 is turned off, no image is displayed on the image display section 114, as shown in FIG. 119(1). More specifically, the image display section 114 is turned off. Moreover, at this time, the magnetic detection sensor 207 and the game control board 200B are in a disconnected state.

Next, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on, a returning image 531 is displayed on the image display section 114, as shown in FIG. 119(2).
Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the returning image 531 was displayed, a magnetic error notification image 532 is displayed as shown in FIG. 119(3). Also, at this time, the speaker 156 outputs a warning sound along with a voice saying "A magnet has been detected." Also, at this time, a decorative pattern 41, a pending number display 55, a small pattern 56, a stage image 61, a number of executions image 501, and a remaining number of times reached image 503 are displayed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the magnetic detection sensor 207 and the game control board 200B are in a disconnected state, the performance control unit 300 issues a magnetic error notification regardless of whether a magnetic error has occurred. An image 532 is displayed, and a magnetic error warning sound is output from the speaker 156.

FIG. 120 is a diagram showing an example of what happens when the game control board 200B and the performance control board 300B are disconnected while the power of the pachinko game machine 100 is turned on.
As shown in FIG. 120(1), as the previous special symbol is stopped and displayed by the production control section 300, the highly decorative decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 are fixedly stopped in the image display section 114. It is assumed that At this time, the image display unit 114 displays a pending number display 55, a stage image 61, an execution number image 501, and a remaining number of attained number image 503. Further, the execution number image 501 shows the text “199 GAME”. Further, the remaining number of arrivals image 503 shows the text “101 remaining”. Moreover, at this time, the game control board 200B and the production control board 300B are connected via the connector 200C (see FIG. 2).

For example, due to a malfunction of the connector 200C, the game control board 200B and the production control board 300B may become disconnected. Even in this case, as shown in FIG. 120(2), the decorative pattern 41, the pending number display 55, the small pattern 56, the stage image 61, the number of executions image 501, and the remaining number of times reached image 503 are displayed. Moreover, at this time, a new image accompanying the state where the game control board 200B and the production control board 300B are disconnected is not displayed, and no warning sound is output.

In addition, the magnetic detection sensor 207 and the radio wave detection sensor 208 may be connected to the game control board 200B via a common connector (not shown). In this case, if a malfunction occurs in the common connector, both the magnetic detection sensor 207 and the radio wave detection sensor 208 become disconnected from the game control board 200B. In this case, both the radio wave error notification image 530 and the magnetic error notification image 532 may be displayed, and both the radio wave error warning sound and the magnetic error warning sound may be output from the speaker 156. In addition, when both the magnetic detection sensor 207 and the radio wave detection sensor 208 are disconnected from the game control board 200B, either the radio wave error notification image 530 or the magnetic error notification image 532 is displayed. may be displayed, and the other may not be displayed. In addition, when both the magnetic detection sensor 207 and the radio wave detection sensor 208 are disconnected from the game control board 200B, one of the radio wave error warning sound and the magnetic error warning sound is output, The other may not be output. When describing the radio wave error notification image 530 and the magnetic error notification image 532 without distinguishing them, they may be simply referred to as "error images." Further, when explaining the radio wave error warning sound and the magnetic error warning sound without particularly distinguishing them, they may be simply referred to as "error warning sound." Then, when both the magnetic detection sensor 207 and the radio wave detection sensor 208 are disconnected from the game control board 200B, an error image is displayed, but even if the error warning sound is not output. good. Furthermore, when both the magnetic detection sensor 207 and the radio wave detection sensor 208 are disconnected from the game control board 200B, an error image is not displayed, but an error warning sound is output. good. Further, the magnetic detection sensor 207 and the radio wave detection sensor 208 may be configured so that an error image is not displayed and an error warning sound is not output.

Furthermore, in the processing example 2, it has been explained that the error image is displayed and the error warning sound is output after the returning image 531 is hidden, but the present invention is not limited to this. If the magnetic detection sensor 207 or the radio wave detection sensor 208 and the game control board 200B are not connected when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on, an error image will be displayed when the returning image 531 is displayed. Alternatively, an error warning sound may be output. Furthermore, if the magnetic detection sensor 207 or the radio wave detection sensor 208 and the game control board 200B are not connected when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on, an error image is displayed before the recovery image 531 is displayed. A display or an error warning sound may be output. Furthermore, when the power of the pachinko game machine 100 is turned on and the magnetic detection sensor 207 or the radio wave detection sensor 208 is connected to the game control board 200B, the returning image 531 is displayed, while the pachinko game If the magnetic detection sensor 207 or the radio wave detection sensor 208 and the game control board 200B are disconnected when the machine 100 is powered on, the error image or error warning will not be displayed without the recovery image 531 being displayed. Sound may also be output. Furthermore, if the magnetic detection sensor 207 or the radio wave detection sensor 208 is not connected to the game control board 200B when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on, an error image is displayed or an error warning sound is output. The decorative pattern 41 does not need to be displayed when the user is in the room.

In addition, when the above-mentioned special images (special images based on the number of executions of the variation) such as the execution number image 501, the remaining number of times reached image 503, and the specific time saving remaining number image 524 are displayed, the magnetic detection sensor 207 and When the radio wave detection sensor 208 and the game control board 200B are disconnected, an error image is displayed, and the special image may be difficult or impossible to see. Difficulty in visibility means that an error image is displayed superimposed on the front side of a special image (an error image is displayed superimposed on a layer higher than the layer in which the special image is displayed among multiple layers in the image display section 114). Therefore, it is difficult for players to visually recognize the special image. In addition, "invisible" means that the special image is not displayed. Therefore, if the magnetic detection sensor 207 or the radio wave detection sensor 208 is disconnected from the game control board 200B, the special image may be difficult or impossible to see.

In addition, when the customer waiting image 505 is displayed (see FIG. 90 (7)) or when the first variable performance in the specific time-saving gaming state is finished and there is no hold (see FIG. 93 (10)), the magnetic When the detection sensor 207 or the radio wave detection sensor 208 and the game control board 200B are disconnected, an error warning sound may be output from the speaker 156. Therefore, when the customer waiting image 505 is displayed (see FIG. 90 (7)) or when the first variable performance in the specific time-saving gaming state has ended and there is no hold (see FIG. 93 (10)), , when no performance sound is output, a sound (error warning sound) may be output without a variable performance being performed.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, it has been explained that when a game ball enters the first start opening 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the fourth right-hitting image 525 is displayed. Here, when the fourth right-handed hitting image 525 is displayed, the speaker 156 may output a voice saying "Please hit right-handed." Moreover, instead of displaying the fourth right-handed hitting image 525, a voice saying "Please hit right-handed" may be output. The sound output instead of displaying the fourth right-hitting image 525 may be a warning sound in response to a game ball winning in the first start opening 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. In other words, the sound that is output when a game ball enters the first starting port in the specific time-saving gaming state is different from the sound that is output when a gaming ball enters the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state. Any sound is fine.
In addition, when a game ball enters the first starting port in the specific time-saving gaming state, the fourth right-hitting image 525 is not displayed and the sound prompting the game ball to be launched to the right in the game area 111 is not output. You can.

Further, when the decorative pattern 41 temporarily stops or permanently stops, the stop sound of the decorative pattern 41 may be output from the speaker 156. In other words, a sound effect accompanying the display of the decorative pattern 41 may be output from the speaker 156. Here, if a game ball enters the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state, if a gaming ball enters the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, and if a gaming ball enters the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state, In any case where the game ball wins, a sound effect accompanying the display of the decorative pattern 41 may be output.

In addition, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed both when a game ball enters the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state and when a gaming ball enters the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. A sound effect accompanying this may be output. On the other hand, when a game ball enters the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the sound effect of the display of the decorative pattern 41 may not be output.

Further, in the variable performance based on winning in the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state, when the variable special performance is executed, the sound effect of the variable special performance may be output from the speaker 156. Here, the special performances at the time of fluctuation include, for example, pseudo-continuous performances, reach performances, SP reach performances, SPSP reach performances, change performances, zone performances, reach promotion performances, effect performances, character performances, sound performances, button operation performances. etc. Further, the special performance at the time of fluctuation may include a preliminary determination performance. That is, the special performance at the time of variation may include a change performance based on the preliminary determination result, a chance performance, a zone performance, an effect performance, a sound performance, a role object performance, a light emission performance when winning, and the like. Also, in the variable presentation based on winning in the second starting port 122 in the specific time saving game state, the sound effect of the special presentation may be output from the speaker 156 when the special presentation at the time of variation is executed. On the other hand, in the variable performance based on winning in the first starting port 121 in the specific time saving game state, the sound effect of the special performance at the time of fluctuation may not be output from the speaker 156.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, it has been described that the pending number display 55 of the first starting port 121 and the pending number display 55 of the second starting port 122 are displayed on the image display section 114, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, only one pending number display 55 may be displayed on the image display section 114. In this case, in the normal gaming state, the pending number display 55 displays the pending number corresponding to the first starting port 121. In addition, in the specific time saving game state, the number of reservations corresponding to the second starting port 122 is displayed in the number of reservations display 55. That is, even if a game ball enters the first starting port 121 in the specific time saving gaming state, the pending number display 55 is not updated.

In addition, in this embodiment, if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winning in the first starting hole 121 in the specific time saving gaming state is a loss, it is possible to execute a variable performance in which no special performance at the time of fluctuation is executed. be. Examples of special performances during fluctuations include the above-mentioned advance judgment performances, pseudo-continuous performances, reach performances, SP reach performances, SPSP reach performances, change performances, zone performances, reach stimulation performances, effect performances, character performances, and sound performances. , and button operation effects. Note that a variation performance in which no special performance is executed at the time of variation may be hereinafter referred to as a specific variation performance. In addition, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winning in the first starting hole 121 in the normal gaming state is a loss, a specific variation effect can be executed. When a specific variation performance is executed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, a specific variation performance based on winning to the first starting port 121 in the specific time saving gaming state and the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state are executed. The execution time of the variable performance differs depending on the specific variable performance based on winning. More specifically, when a specific variation performance is executed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, the specific variation performance in the specific time-saving gaming state is more favorable than the specific variation performance based on winning the first starting hole 121 in the normal gaming state. A specific variable effect based on winning in the first starting opening 121 is easier to execute than a variable effect with a longer execution time. Here, if a specific variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is executed, the first variable performance in the specific time-saving gaming state is more effective than the specific fluctuation performance based on winning the first start opening 121 in the normal gaming state. "It is easier to execute a specific variable effect based on winning in the starting hole 121 than a variable effect with a longer execution time". A specific variable performance based on winning at the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state is always executed with a longer execution time than a specific variable performance based on winning at the first starting port 121 in the gaming state. (100%) is also included.
In addition, in this embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winning in the first starting hole 121 in the normal gaming state is a loss, the rate at which the specific variable performance is performed is the first rate, and the specific time saving effect is the first rate. The rate at which the specific variation performance is performed when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winnings in the first starting hole 121 in the gaming state is a loss is the second rate. The first ratio and the second ratio are different. More specifically, the second ratio is larger than the first ratio. Here, "the second ratio is larger than the first ratio" includes that the second ratio is 1 (100%).
Furthermore, when a specific variation performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss in the specific time saving gaming state, a specific variation performance based on the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 being "1", and a first The execution time of the specific variation performance based on the number of reservations of the starting port 121 being "4" is the same.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the preliminary determination performance based on winning includes a first performance and a second performance. Here, the first performance is a preliminary determination performance performed during execution of a variable performance based on winning. Further, the second performance is a predetermined performance whose execution timing is different from that of the first performance. The second performance is, for example, a preliminary determination performance performed before the start of a variable performance based on winning, such as a performance issued upon winning. Further, the first performance and the second performance each have a first aspect and a second aspect. Here, the first aspect is, for example, that the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, and the first starting port 121 emit light in a specific color, and that the pending image 52 and the variable image 51 are displayed in a specific color. Can be mentioned. Further, the second aspect includes, for example, that the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, and the first starting port 121 are off, and that the pending image 52 and the variable image 51 are not displayed. In the present embodiment, the rate at which the first effect of the first aspect is performed based on winnings in the first starting opening 121 in the normal gaming state is the first ratio, and the first starting opening in the specific time saving gaming state is The rate at which the first effect of the first aspect is performed based on winnings in 121 is the second rate. The second ratio is smaller than the first ratio. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the ratio at which the first performance of the second aspect is performed based on winnings in the first starting opening 121 in the normal gaming state is the third ratio, and The rate at which the first performance of the second aspect is performed based on winnings in 121 is the fourth rate. Further, the fourth ratio is larger than the third ratio. Note that "the second ratio is smaller than the first ratio" includes that the first ratio is 1 (100%) and that the second ratio is 0 (0%). . Furthermore, "the fourth proportion is larger than the third proportion" includes that the third proportion is 0 (0%) and that the fourth proportion is 1 (100%). .
In addition, the rate at which the second performance of the first mode is performed based on winnings in the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state is the fifth ratio, and the rate at which the second performance of the first aspect is performed based on winnings in the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state is The rate at which the second effect of the first aspect is performed based on this is the sixth rate. The sixth ratio is smaller than the fifth ratio. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the rate at which the second effect of the second aspect is performed based on winnings in the first starting opening 121 in the normal gaming state is the seventh rate, and The rate at which the second performance of the second mode is performed based on winnings in 121 is the eighth rate. The eighth ratio is larger than the seventh ratio. Note that "the sixth ratio is smaller than the fifth ratio" includes that the fifth ratio is 1 (100%) and that the sixth ratio is 0 (0%). . Furthermore, "the eighth proportion is larger than the seventh proportion" includes that the seventh proportion is 0 (0%) and that the eighth proportion is 1 (100%). .

In addition, in this embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winning in the first start opening 121 in the special time saving game state is a loss, the specific fluctuation performance can be executed. When a specific variation performance is executed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, a specific variation performance based on winning to the first starting port 121 in the specific time saving gaming state and the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state are performed. The specific variable performance based on winning is the same execution time of the variable performance from the first variation number (for example, the second time) to the second variation number (for example, the 99th time).
In addition, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winnings in the first starting hole 121 in the special time-saving gaming state is a loss, the rate at which the specific variable performance is performed is the first rate, The rate at which the specific variation performance is performed when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winning in the first start opening 121 in the time-saving gaming state is a loss is the second rate. And the first ratio and the second ratio are the same.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the preliminary determination performance based on winning includes a first performance and a second performance. Here, the first performance is a preliminary determination performance performed during execution of a variable performance based on winning. Further, the second performance is a predetermined performance whose execution timing is different from that of the first performance. The second performance is, for example, a preliminary determination performance performed before the start of a variable performance based on winning, such as a performance issued upon winning. Further, the first performance and the second performance each have a first aspect and a second aspect. Here, the first aspect is, for example, that the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, and the first starting port 121 emit light in a specific color, and that the pending image 52 and the variable image 51 are displayed in a specific color. Can be mentioned. Further, the second aspect includes, for example, that the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, and the first starting port 121 are off, and that the pending image 52 and the variable image 51 are not displayed. In the present embodiment, the rate at which the first effect of the first aspect is performed based on winnings in the first start opening 121 in the special time saving gaming state is the first ratio, and the first starting effect in the specific time saving gaming state is The rate at which the first performance of the first aspect is performed based on winnings in the mouth 121 is the second rate. Further, the first ratio and the second ratio are the same. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the ratio at which the first performance of the second aspect is performed based on winnings in the first start opening 121 in the special time saving gaming state is the third ratio, and the first performance in the specific time saving gaming state is The rate at which the first performance of the second aspect is performed based on winnings in the mouth 121 is the fourth rate. Further, the third ratio and the fourth ratio are the same. Note that "the first ratio and the second ratio are the same" includes that the first ratio and the second ratio are 0 (0%). Moreover, "the third ratio and the fourth ratio are the same" includes that the third ratio and the fourth ratio are 1 (100%).
In addition, the rate at which the second performance of the first aspect is performed based on winnings in the first starting port 121 in the special time-saving gaming state is the fifth ratio, The rate at which the second effect of the first aspect is performed based on is the sixth rate. The fifth ratio and the sixth ratio are the same. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the rate at which the second performance of the second aspect is performed based on winnings in the first starting port 121 in the special time saving gaming state is the seventh rate, and the first starting in the specific time saving gaming state is The rate at which the second performance of the second aspect is performed based on winnings in the mouth 121 is the eighth rate. The seventh ratio and the eighth ratio are the same. Note that "the fifth ratio and the sixth ratio are the same" includes that the fifth ratio and the sixth ratio are 0 (0%). Furthermore, "the seventh ratio and the eighth ratio are the same" includes that the seventh ratio and the eighth ratio are 1 (100%).

In addition, in this embodiment, when a specific variable performance is executed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, a specific variable performance based on winning to the first starting hole 121 in the specific time-saving game state and a special time-saving game state The execution time of the variable effect is different for the specific variable effect based on winning in the second starting opening 122 in . More specifically, when a specific variation performance is executed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, the specific variation performance is performed in the specific time-saving gaming state more than the specific variation production based on winning to the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state. The specific variation effect based on winning the first starting opening 121 in is easier to execute than the variation effect with a longer execution time. Here, ``If a specific variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is executed, the specific variable performance in the special time-saving gaming state is higher than the specific variable performance based on winning the second starting opening 122 in the special time-saving gaming state. 1. It is easier to execute a specific variation performance based on winning in the 1 starting hole 121 with a long execution time."When a specific variation performance is executed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, A specific variable performance based on winning at the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state has a longer execution time than a specific variable performance based on winning at the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state. It also includes that it is always executed (100%).
In addition, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winnings in the second starting hole 122 in the special time saving gaming state is a loss, the rate at which the specific variable performance is performed is the first rate, The rate at which the specific variation performance is performed when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winning in the first start opening 121 in the time-saving gaming state is a loss is the second rate. The first ratio and the second ratio are different. More specifically, the second ratio is larger than the first ratio. Here, "the second ratio is larger than the first ratio" includes that the second ratio is 1 (100%).

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the preliminary determination performance based on winning includes a first performance and a second performance. Here, the first performance is a preliminary determination performance performed during execution of a variable performance based on winning. Further, the second performance is a predetermined performance whose execution timing is different from that of the first performance. The second performance is, for example, a preliminary determination performance performed before the start of a variable performance based on winning, such as a performance issued upon winning. Further, the first performance and the second performance each have a first aspect and a second aspect. Here, the first aspect is, for example, that the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, and the first starting port 121 emit light in a specific color, and that the pending image 52 and the variable image 51 are displayed in a specific color. Can be mentioned. Further, the second aspect includes, for example, that the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, and the first starting port 121 are off, and that the pending image 52 and the variable image 51 are not displayed. In the present embodiment, the rate at which the first effect of the first aspect is performed based on winnings in the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state is the first ratio, and the first performance in the specific time-saving gaming state is The rate at which the first performance of the first aspect is performed based on winnings in the mouth 121 is the second rate. The second ratio is smaller than the first ratio. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the ratio at which the first performance of the second aspect is performed based on winnings in the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state is the third ratio, and the first performance in the specific time-saving gaming state is The rate at which the first performance of the second aspect is performed based on winnings in the mouth 121 is the fourth rate. Further, the fourth ratio is larger than the third ratio. Note that "the second ratio is smaller than the first ratio" includes that the first ratio is 1 (100%) and that the second ratio is 0 (0%). . Furthermore, "the fourth proportion is larger than the third proportion" includes that the third proportion is 0 (0%) and that the fourth proportion is 1 (100%). .
In addition, the rate at which the second performance of the first aspect is performed based on winnings in the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state is the fifth ratio, and the rate at which the second performance of the first aspect is performed based on winnings in the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state is the fifth ratio. The rate at which the second effect of the first aspect is performed based on is the sixth rate. The sixth ratio is smaller than the fifth ratio. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the rate at which the second effect of the second aspect is performed based on winnings in the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state is the seventh rate, and the first starting in the specific time-saving gaming state is The rate at which the second performance of the second aspect is performed based on winnings in the mouth 121 is the eighth rate. The eighth ratio is larger than the seventh ratio. Note that "the sixth ratio is smaller than the fifth ratio" includes that the fifth ratio is 1 (100%) and that the sixth ratio is 0 (0%). . Furthermore, "the eighth proportion is larger than the seventh proportion" includes that the seventh proportion is 0 (0%) and that the eighth proportion is 1 (100%). .

In addition, in the present embodiment, when a specific variable performance is executed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, a specific variable performance based on winning to the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state and The execution time of the variable effect is different for the specific variable effect based on winning in the second starting opening 122 in . More specifically, when a specific variation performance is executed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, the specific variation performance is performed in the specific time-saving gaming state more than the specific variation production based on winning the second start opening 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. The specific variation performance based on winning the first starting opening 121 in is easier to execute, as is the variation performance with a longer execution time. Here, if a specific variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is executed, the specific variable performance in the specific time-saving gaming state is higher than the specific variable performance based on winning to the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. 1. It is easier to execute a specific variation performance based on winning in the 1 starting hole 121 with a long execution time."When a specific variation performance is executed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, A specific variable performance based on winning at the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state has a longer execution time than a specific variable performance based on winning at the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. It also includes that it is always executed (100%).
In addition, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winning in the second starting hole 122 in the specific time saving gaming state is a loss, the rate at which the specific variable performance is performed is the first rate, The rate at which the specific variation performance is performed when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winning in the first start opening 121 in the time-saving gaming state is a loss is the second rate. The first ratio and the second ratio are different. More specifically, the second ratio is larger than the first ratio. Here, "the second ratio is larger than the first ratio" includes that the second ratio is 1 (100%).

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the preliminary determination performance based on winning includes a first performance and a second performance. Here, the first performance is a preliminary determination performance performed during execution of a variable performance based on winning. Further, the second performance is a predetermined performance whose execution timing is different from that of the first performance. The second performance is, for example, a preliminary determination performance performed before the start of a variable performance based on winning, such as a performance issued upon winning. Further, the first performance and the second performance each have a first aspect and a second aspect. Here, the first aspect is, for example, that the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, and the first starting port 121 emit light in a specific color, and that the pending image 52 and the variable image 51 are displayed in a specific color. Can be mentioned. Further, the second aspect includes, for example, that the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, and the first starting port 121 are off, and that the pending image 52 and the variable image 51 are not displayed. In the present embodiment, the rate at which the first effect of the first aspect is performed based on winnings in the second starting port 122 in the specific time saving gaming state is the first ratio, and the first starting effect in the specific time saving gaming state is The rate at which the first performance of the first aspect is performed based on winnings in the mouth 121 is the second rate. The second ratio is smaller than the first ratio. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the ratio at which the first performance of the second aspect is performed based on winnings in the second starting port 122 in the specific time saving gaming state is the third ratio, and the first performance in the specific time saving gaming state is The rate at which the first performance of the second aspect is performed based on winnings in the mouth 121 is the fourth rate. Further, the fourth ratio is larger than the third ratio. Note that "the second ratio is smaller than the first ratio" includes that the first ratio is 1 (100%) and that the second ratio is 0 (0%). . Furthermore, "the fourth proportion is larger than the third proportion" includes that the third proportion is 0 (0%) and that the fourth proportion is 1 (100%). .
In addition, the rate at which the second performance of the first aspect is performed based on winnings in the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state is the fifth ratio, and The rate at which the second effect of the first aspect is performed based on is the sixth rate. The sixth ratio is smaller than the fifth ratio. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the rate at which the second effect of the second aspect is performed based on winnings in the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state is the seventh rate, and the first starting in the specific time-saving gaming state is The rate at which the second performance of the second aspect is performed based on winnings in the mouth 121 is the eighth rate. The eighth ratio is larger than the seventh ratio. Note that "the sixth ratio is smaller than the fifth ratio" includes that the fifth ratio is 1 (100%) and that the sixth ratio is 0 (0%). . Furthermore, "the eighth proportion is larger than the seventh proportion" includes that the seventh proportion is 0 (0%) and that the eighth proportion is 1 (100%). .

In addition, the special pre-determination performance is more likely to be executed when a game ball enters the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state than when the game ball enters the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. You can do it like this. Examples of the special pre-judgment performance include pre-judgment performances such as a change performance, a chance performance, a zone performance, an effect performance, a sound performance, a character performance, and a light emission performance when winning a prize.
In addition, the special pre-determination effect is executed more when a game ball enters the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state than when the gaming ball enters the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. You can make it easier.
In addition, the special pre-judgment effect is executed more when a game ball enters the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state than when the gaming ball enters the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. You can make it easier.
In addition, the special pre-judgment effect is executed more when a game ball enters the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state than when the gaming ball enters the first starting port 121 in the special time-saving gaming state. You can make it easier.

In addition, in this embodiment, the variable effect based on winning the first starting hole 121 in the normal gaming state is better than the variable effect based on winning the first starting hole 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. Although it has been explained that the chance effect for the final round is likely to be executed, the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, the variable effect based on winning in the first starting hole 121 in the normal gaming state is better than the variable effect based on winning in the first starting hole 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. The chance effect may be made easier to execute. In other words, the variable performance based on winning in the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state is better than the variable performance based on winning in the first starting port 121 in the specific time saving gaming state. What is necessary is to make it easier for the chance effect to be executed. In addition, the variable performance based on winning the second starting port 122 in the special time saving gaming state is better than the fluctuating presentation based on winning the second starting port 122 in the specific time saving gaming state. It may be possible to make it easier for the chance effect to be executed. Further, in this case, the predetermined number of times may be any number of times.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, it has been explained that a chance effect is executed as a synchronization effect, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, instead of the above-described chance effect, a size change effect that changes the display size of the decorative pattern 41 based on the preliminary judgment result of the preliminary judgment process may be performed multiple times as the synchronized effect. And, the variable performance based on winning in the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state is better than the variable performance based on winning in the first starting port 121 in the specific time saving gaming state. The size change effect may be made easier to execute. In addition, the variable performance based on winning the second starting port 122 in the normal gaming state is better than the variable performance based on winning the second starting port 122 in the specific time saving gaming state. The size change effect may be made easier to execute.
For example, as a synchronization effect, instead of the above-mentioned chance effect, a position change effect in which the display position of the temporarily stopped decorative pattern 41 on the image display section 114 changes based on the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination process is performed multiple times. It may be carried out over a period of time. And, the variable performance based on winning in the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state is better than the variable performance based on winning in the first starting port 121 in the specific time saving gaming state. The position change performance may be made easier to execute. In addition, the variable performance based on winning the second starting port 122 in the special time saving gaming state is better than the fluctuating presentation based on winning the second starting port 122 in the specific time saving gaming state. The position change performance may be made easier to execute.

Further, the effects performed in the variable effects are not limited to the above example.
For example, an expectation effect may be performed that indicates the expectation level by the emitted light colors of the movable accessory 115, the board lamp 116, and the frame lamp 157. When blue, green, red, and rainbow colors are set as the emitted light color, the later the order, the higher the expectation level may be. Further, the variable effect in which the emitted light color is rainbow-colored may be a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. That is, the expectation level may be 100% for a variable effect in which the emitted light color is a rainbow color. Furthermore, an expectation level performance may be performed based on the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination process. Furthermore, the expectation performance includes a light emission performance when winning a prize.
In this embodiment, the expectation level performance is better based on the variable performance based on winning the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state than the fluctuating performance based on winning the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. may be made easier to execute. In addition, the expectation level before the start of the reach effect is higher for the variable effect based on winning at the first starting hole 121 in the normal gaming state than for the variable effect based on winning at the first starting hole 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. The performance may be made easier to perform. In addition, the expectation level after the start of the reach effect is higher for the variable effect based on winning at the first starting hole 121 in the normal gaming state than for the variable effect based on winning at the first starting hole 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. The performance may be made easier to perform. In addition, the luminescent color used in the expectation level effect is better for the variable effect based on winning in the first starting hole 121 in the normal gaming state than in the variable effect based on winning in the first starting hole 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. There may be many types. In addition, in the expectation level performance, the variable performance based on winning the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state is better than the fluctuating performance based on winning the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. 115, the board lamp 116, and the frame lamp 157, a large number of light emitting means may be used. Furthermore, it is expected that the emitted light color will be rainbow-colored in the variable effect based on winning in the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state than in the variable effect based on winning in the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. It may also be possible to make it easier for the performance to be executed.
Further, the expectation level effect is more easily executed in the variable effect based on winning in the second starting port 122 in the special time saving gaming state than in the variable presentation based on winning in the second starting port 122 in the specific time saving gaming state. You can do it like this. In addition, the variable performance based on winning at the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state is better than the fluctuating performance based on winning at the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. It may also be possible to make it easier for the performance to be performed. In addition, the variable performance based on winning at the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state is better than the fluctuating performance based on winning at the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. It may also be possible to make it easier for the performance to be performed. Furthermore, the variable performance based on winning in the second starting port 122 in the special time saving gaming state is better than the fluctuating performance based on winning in the second starting port 122 in the specific time saving gaming state. There may be many types of colors. In addition, the variable performance based on winning in the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state is better than the variable performance based on winning in the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state in the expectation level performance. Among the object 115, the board lamp 116, and the frame lamp 157, a large number of light emitting means may be used. Furthermore, the emitting color of the fluctuating performance based on winning the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state is more rainbow-colored than that of the fluctuating performance based on winning the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. The expectation level performance may be made easier to perform.

In addition, "the expectation level effect is more likely to be executed in the variable effect based on winning in the first starting hole 121 in the normal gaming state than in the variable effect based on winning in the first starting hole 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. ”, “The variable performance based on winning the first starting opening 121 in the normal gaming state is better than the fluctuating performance based on winning the first starting opening 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state before the start of the reach performance. ``It is easier to execute the expectation level effect'' and ``the variable effect based on winning in the first starting hole 121 in the normal gaming state is better than the variable effect based on winning in the first starting hole 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. , the expectation performance after the start of the reach performance is more likely to be executed," and "the winning performance in the first starting opening 121 in the normal gaming state is more likely than the variable performance based on winning in the first starting opening 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. There are many different types of emitted light colors used in the expectation level performance in the variable performance based on ``the first start in the normal gaming state than in the variable performance based on winning the first starting opening 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state''. In the expectation performance, the number of light emitting means used among the starting port lamp, the movable accessory 115, the board lamp 116, and the frame lamp 157 is larger in the variable performance based on winning at the starting port 121, “The expectation level that the emitted light color is rainbow-colored is higher for the variable effect based on winning the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state than for the variable presentation based on winning the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. ``The performance is likely to be executed'' includes that the expectation level performance is not executed (0%) in the variable performance based on winning in the first start opening 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state.
In addition, ``the expectation level performance is executed more with the variable performance based on winning the second starting opening 122 in the special time saving gaming state than with the fluctuating performance based on winning the second starting opening 122 in the specific time saving gaming state. It is easier to start the reach effect with the variable effect based on winning the second start opening 122 in the special time saving gaming state than with the variable effect based on winning the second starting opening 122 in the specific time saving gaming state. "The previous expectation performance is more likely to be executed," and "the variable performance based on winning at the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state is more likely than the fluctuating performance based on winning at the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state." It is easier to perform the expectation level performance after the start of the reach performance when the second starting opening in the special time-saving gaming state is executed than the variable performance based on winning the second starting opening 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. 122 has more types of emitted light colors used in the expectation level effect," and "The variable effect based on winning in the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state is more effective than the variable effect based on winning in the second starting port 122. The variable performance based on winning at the second starting port 122 in the gaming state is better because the number of light emitting means used among the starting port lamp, the movable accessory 115, the board lamp 116, and the frame lamp 157 is higher in the expectation level effect. ``There are a lot of changes in the emitting color in the variable effect based on winning in the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state than in the variable effect based on winning in the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state.'' The expectation level performance that is rainbow-colored is likely to be executed. However, in any case, the expectation level performance may not be executed (0%) in the variable performance based on winning at the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. included.
In addition, the above-mentioned relationship between the variable performance based on winning at the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state and the variable performance based on winning at the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state is as follows. , it may be a relationship regarding expectation performance based on the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination process. In addition, the above-mentioned relationships between the variable presentation based on winning to the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state and the variable presentation based on winning to the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state with respect to the expectation performance. may be a relationship regarding expectation performance based on the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination process.
Further, the expectation performance may be a performance performed by at least one of the starting port lamp, the movable accessory 115, the board lamp 116, and the frame lamp 157, or may be a performance performed by any of them.

Further, the display means on which the effect image is displayed is not limited to the image display section 114.
For example, a display means for displaying an effect image and smaller than the image display section 114 may be provided in front of the image display section 114 (on the player's side). Furthermore, a light guide plate serving as a display means for displaying an effect image may be provided on the front side (on the player side) of the image display section 114. Furthermore, a 3D image display means for displaying a 3D image may be provided in front of the image display section 114 (on the player's side). The display means, light guide plate, and 3D image display means smaller than the image display section 114 are hereinafter referred to as sub display means. In this case, a sub effect may be executed in which an expectation level image indicating the level of expectation is displayed on the sub display means.
In this embodiment, the variable performance based on winning the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state is better than the variable presentation based on winning the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. may be made easier to execute. In addition, the variable performance based on winning the second starting opening 122 in the special time saving gaming state is better than the fluctuating performance based on winning the second starting opening 122 in the specific time saving gaming state. The performance may be made easier to perform. Furthermore, the variable performance based on winning the second starting opening 122 in the special time saving gaming state is better than the fluctuating performance based on winning the second starting opening 122 in the specific time saving gaming state. The performance may be made easier to perform. Further, as the sub-effects, there may be a plurality of types of sub-effects with different types of expectation level images. The types of sub-performances to be executed are more variable effects based on winnings in the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state than variable effects based on winnings in the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. There may be many.
In addition, the sub-performance is made easier to execute in the variable performance based on winning the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state than in the variable performance based on winning the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. You can. In addition, the variable performance based on winning at the first starting opening 121 in the normal gaming state is better than the variable performance based on winning at the first starting opening 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, as the sub-performance before the start of the reach performance. may be made easier to execute. In addition, the variable performance based on winning at the first starting opening 121 in the normal gaming state is better than the variable performance based on winning at the first starting opening 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, which is a sub-performance after the start of the reach performance. may be made easier to execute. In addition, the type of sub-effects to be executed is greater in the variable effect based on winning in the first starting hole 121 in the normal gaming state than in the variable effect based on winning in the first starting hole 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. It may be more.

In addition, "the sub-performance is easier to execute in the variable performance based on winning in the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state than in the variable performance based on winning in the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state. ”, “The variable presentation based on winning the second starting port 122 in the special time saving gaming state is better than the variable presentation based on winning the second starting port 122 in the specific time saving gaming state before the start of the reach effect. ``It is easier to execute the sub effects in the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state than the variable presentation based on winnings in the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state. However, it is easier to execute the sub performance after the start of the reach performance, and ``the sub performance is more likely to be executed after entering the second start opening 122 in the special time saving gaming state than the variable performance based on winning the second starting opening 122 in the specific time saving gaming state. There are more types of sub-effects to be executed in the variable effects based on winnings than in the variable effects based on winnings.'' However, in the variable effects based on winnings in the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state, no sub-effects are executed. (0%) is also included.
In addition, "the sub-performance is easier to execute in the variable performance based on winning in the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state than in the variable performance based on winning in the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state." In other words, “the variable performance based on winning the first starting opening 121 in the normal gaming state is better than the variable performance based on winning the first starting opening 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. "The effect is easier to execute," and "the variable effect based on winning in the first starting hole 121 in the normal gaming state has a higher reach than the variable effect based on winning in the first starting hole 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. "The sub-performance after the start of the production is more likely to be executed" and "the variation based on winning in the first starting opening 121 in the normal gaming state than the variation based on winning in the first starting opening 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state""There are more types of sub-effects to be executed in the production", but in any case, in the variable production based on winning in the first starting opening 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the sub-production is not executed (0%). It also includes.
In addition, the above-mentioned relationships between the variable effects based on winnings to the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state and the variable effects based on winnings to the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state are as follows. , it may be a relationship regarding sub effects based on the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination process. In addition, the relationships described above regarding the sub-effects between the variable effects based on winnings in the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state and the variable effects based on winnings in the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state are as follows: The relationship may be related to sub effects based on the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination process.

Further, the performance performed multiple times is not limited to the above example.
For example, the effect presentation may be performed multiple times. In each of the plurality of effect presentations, the color of the effect image may be different. Furthermore, zone effects of different types may be performed multiple times. Further, the change effect of the pending image 52 and the variable image 51 may be performed multiple times. Furthermore, the pseudo-continuous performance may be performed multiple times. Further, the expectation level performance may be performed multiple times. Furthermore, the sub effects may be performed multiple times. Further, the role performance may be performed multiple times. In each of the plurality of accessory performances, the objects that move among the three movable accessories 115 may be different. The above performance that is performed multiple times is referred to as a multiple performance. The multiple performance may be performed in one variable performance, or may be performed over a plurality of variable performances.
In the present embodiment, the variable presentation based on winning the second starting port 122 in the special time saving gaming state is more frequent than the variable presentation based on winning the second starting port 122 in the specific time saving gaming state. The performance may be made easier to perform. In addition, the variable performance based on winnings in the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state is better than the variable performance based on winnings in the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. The predetermined performance may be performed more easily. Further, in this case, the predetermined number of times may be any number of times.
In addition, the variable effect based on winning at the first starting hole 121 in the normal gaming state is more likely to be executed multiple times than the variable effect based on winning at the first starting hole 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. You can also do this. In addition, the variable performance based on winning the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state is better than the variable performance based on winning the first starting port 121 in the specific time saving gaming state. The performance may be made easier to perform a predetermined number of times. Further, in this case, the predetermined number of times may be any number of times.

In addition, ``a variable performance based on winnings in the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state is more likely to be executed multiple times than a variable performance based on winnings in the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. "Easier" and "A variable performance based on winning in the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state is better than a variable performance based on winning in the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state in multiple performances. "A predetermined performance out of a plurality of times is likely to be executed" means that in the variable performance based on winning to the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the performance is not performed multiple times (0%). It also includes.
In addition, ``a variable effect based on winnings in the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state is more likely to be executed multiple times than a variable effect based on winnings in the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state.'' ”, “A variable performance based on winnings in the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state is better than a variable performance based on winnings in the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. ``It is likely that a predetermined number of presentations will be executed'' includes that the presentation will not be executed multiple times (0%) in variable presentations based on winnings in the first start opening 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. It will be done.
In addition, the execution ratio of multiple performances of the variable performance based on winning to the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state and the variable performance based on winning to the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state is described above. Each relationship may be a relationship regarding the execution ratio of multiple productions based on the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination process. In addition, each of the above-mentioned execution ratios of multiple performances of variable performances based on winnings in the first starting opening 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state and variable performances based on winnings in the first starting opening 121 in the normal gaming state. The relationship may be a relationship regarding the execution ratio of multiple effects based on the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination process.

Furthermore, the variable performance based on winning in the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state is more useful as an effect image in the effect performance than the variable performance based on winning in the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. There may be many types of colors. Furthermore, the variable effect based on winning in the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state is used as an effect image in the effect presentation more than the variable effect based on winning in the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. There may be many types of colors.
In addition, ``a variable effect based on winning in the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state is better as an effect image in the effect presentation than a variable effect based on winning in the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. ``There are many types of colors used'', and ``the variable effect based on winnings in the first starting hole 121 in the normal gaming state is better than the variable effect based on winnings in the first starting hole 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. , "There are many types of colors used as effect images in effect performances" includes the fact that effect performances are not executed (0%) in variable performances based on winnings in the first starting opening 121 in the specific time-saving game state. .

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, it has been explained that when a game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 122 in the special time saving game state, a winning sound notifying the winning is outputted, but the present invention is not limited to this. When a game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving game state, the winning sound may not be output.
Further, in the present embodiment, it has been explained that when a game ball wins in the second starting port 122 in the specific time saving gaming state, a winning sound notifying the winning is outputted, but the present invention is not limited to this. When a game ball wins in the second starting port 122 in the specific time saving game state, the winning sound may not be output.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, even if a game ball wins in the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, it has been explained that the sound accompanying the winning is not output, but the present invention is not limited to this.
When a game ball wins in the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, a sound accompanying the winning may be output. Then, a sound accompanying a winning may be output more easily when a winning is made to the first starting opening 121 in the normal gaming state than when winning is made to the first starting opening 121 in the specific time saving gaming state. In addition, the fact that "a sound associated with winning is more likely to be output when winning a prize in the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state than winning in the first starting port 121 in the specific time saving gaming state" This also includes the fact that even if a game ball wins in the first starting port 121 in the gaming state, the sound accompanying the winning is not output.

Further, in the present embodiment, it has been explained that the sound effects of the various effects described above are not output in the variable effect based on winning in the first start opening 121 in the specific time saving game state, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even if it is a variable performance based on winning in the first starting port 121 in the specific time saving game state, the sound effects of the various performances described above may be output. In the specific time-saving gaming state, the sound effects of various performances are more likely to be output when the variable performance is based on winnings at the second starting port 122 rather than when the variable performance is based on winnings at the first starting port 121. You may also do so. In addition, the sound effects of various effects are output more in the variable effect based on winning in the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state than in the variable effect based on winning in the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. You can make it easier.
In addition, ``In the specific time saving game state, the sound effects of various effects are easier to output for variable effects based on winnings in the second starting port 122 than for variable effects based on winnings in the first starting port 121.'' ”, “The sound effects of various effects are better in the variable effects based on winnings in the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state than in the variable effects based on winnings in the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. ``Easy to be output'' also includes that the sound effects of various performances are not output (0%) in variable performances based on winnings in the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving game state. In addition, ``In the specific time saving game state, the sound effects of various effects are easier to output for variable effects based on winnings in the second starting port 122 than for variable effects based on winnings in the first starting port 121.'' ”, “The sound effects of various effects are better in the variable effects based on winnings in the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state than in the variable effects based on winnings in the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. The sound effects of various performances are not outputted because various performances are not performed (0%) in variable performances based on winnings to the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. It also includes things.

In addition, in the specific time-saving gaming state, more types of pending images 52 are displayed when a prize is won in the second starting hole 122 than when winning in the first starting hole 121. You can. In addition, more pending images 52 of different colors are displayed when a prize is won at the first starting slot 121 in the normal gaming state than when winning at the first starting slot 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. You can do it like this. In addition, more types of pending images 52 are displayed when a prize is won at the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state than when winning at the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. You may also do so.
Furthermore, "in the specific time-saving gaming state, more types of reserved images 52 are displayed when a prize is won in the second starting hole 122 than when winning in the first starting hole 121." In other words, ``More types of pending images 52 are displayed in the case where a prize is won in the first starting hole 121 in the normal gaming state than in the case where the winning is won in the first starting hole 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. This also includes that the pending image 52 is not displayed when a prize is won in the first start opening 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. In addition, "the pending images 52 of more colors are displayed when a prize is won at the second starting hole 122 in the special time-saving game state than when a prize is won at the second starting hole 122 in the specific time-saving game state. "Being executed" also includes not displaying the pending image 52 when a prize is won in the second start opening 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state.

In addition, in the specific time saving game state, the variable images 51 of more colors are displayed when a prize is won in the second starting hole 122 than when winning in the first starting hole 121. You can. Further, more variation images 51 of different colors are displayed when a prize is won in the first starting hole 121 in the normal gaming state than when winning in the first starting hole 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. You can do it like this. In addition, more variation images 51 of different colors are displayed when a prize is won at the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state than when winning at the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. You may also do so.
Furthermore, "in the specific time-saving gaming state, more color types of variable images 51 are displayed when a prize is won in the second starting hole 122 than when winning in the first starting hole 121." In other words, "Fluctuation images 51 of more color types are displayed when a prize is won at the first starting slot 121 in the normal gaming state than when winning at the first starting slot 121 in the specific time saving gaming state. In any case, the variable image 51 is not displayed when a prize is won in the first start opening 121 in the specific time saving game state. In addition, "the variation images 51 of more color types are displayed when a prize is won at the second starting hole 122 in the special time-saving game state than when a prize is won at the second starting hole 122 in the specific time-saving game state. ``will be done'' also includes that the variable image 51 will not be displayed if a prize is won in the second start opening 122 in the specific time saving game state.

In addition, in the specific time-saving game state, a plurality of accessory productions in which different movable accessories 115 move are executed more when a prize is won in the second starting opening 122 than when winning in the first starting opening 121. It may be made so that it is easy to do so. In addition, when winning a prize at the first starting opening 121 in the normal gaming state, it is more likely that a plurality of accessory productions in which different movable accessory objects 115 operate, respectively, than when winning a prize at the first starting opening 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. may be made easier to execute. In the case where a prize is won in the second starting hole 122 in the special time-saving game state than in the case where a prize is won in the second starting hole 122 in the specific time-saving game state, a plurality of accessory performances in which different movable accessory objects 115 operate are performed. It may be made easy to execute.

Furthermore, in the accessory presentation, a plurality of movement patterns of the movable accessory 115 may be provided. In the specific time-saving game state, there may be more movement patterns of the movable accessory 115 in the accessory performance when a prize is won in the second starting opening 122 than when winning in the first starting opening 121. . In addition, the movement patterns of the movable accessory 115 in the accessory presentation are larger when winning the first starting opening 121 in the normal gaming state than when winning the first starting opening 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. Good too. In addition, there are more movement patterns of the movable accessory 115 in the accessory performance when a prize is won at the second starting hole 122 in the special time-saving game state than when a prize is won at the second starting hole 122 in the specific time-saving game state. It's okay.

Further, special symbols may be displayed in the variable performance. Examples of the special symbols include the pseudo-continuous image 70, the SP symbol, and the like. The SP symbol is a symbol that, when displayed, suggests that an SP reach effect will be performed. In the specific time-saving gaming state, a variable presentation in which a special symbol is displayed is executed more in a variable presentation based on winning in the second starting hole 122 than in a variable presentation based on winning in the first starting hole 121. It may be made so that it is easy to do so. In addition, in the specific time saving gaming state, there are more kinds of special symbols displayed in the variable effect based on winning in the second starting hole 122 than in the variable effect based on winning in the first starting hole 121. Good too. Furthermore, the variable presentation based on winning the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state is better than the variable presentation based on winning the first starting port 121 in the specific time saving gaming state, in which special symbols are displayed. may be made easier to execute. In addition, even if there are more types of special symbols displayed when a prize is won in the first starting hole 121 in the normal gaming state than in a variable performance based on winning in the first starting hole 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, good. In addition, the variable presentation based on winning the second starting port 122 in the special time saving gaming state is better than the variable presentation based on winning the second starting port 122 in the specific time saving gaming state, in which a special symbol is displayed. The performance may be made easier to perform. In addition, the types of special symbols displayed are better in the variable presentation based on winning in the second starting port 122 in the special time saving gaming state than in the variable presentation based on winning in the second starting port 122 in the specific time saving gaming state. There may be many.
In addition, in the specific time-saving gaming state, the variable effect based on winning in the second starting hole 122 is better than the variable effect based on winning in the first starting hole 121, in which special symbols are displayed. "Easy to execute" and "In the specific time-saving gaming state, the special symbol that is displayed is more likely to be displayed when the variable effect is based on winning to the second starting hole 122 than the variable effect based on winning to the first starting hole 121. ``There are many types of special symbols,'' and ``the variable effects based on winnings in the first starting hole 121 in the normal gaming state are better than the variable effects based on winnings in the first starting hole 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. ``It is easier to execute a variable effect in which `` is displayed,'' and ``a variable effect based on winning at the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state is more likely to be executed than a variable effect based on winning in the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. , there are more kinds of special symbols to be displayed.'' In both cases, in the variable presentation based on winning in the first starting hole 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the variable presentation in which special symbols are displayed is executed. This also includes not being done (0%). In addition, ``a special symbol is displayed more in the variable effect based on winning in the second starting hole 122 in the special time-saving gaming state than in the variable effect based on winning in the second starting hole 122 in the special time-saving gaming state. "It is easier to execute a variable performance" and "a variable performance based on winning in the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state is better than a variable performance based on winning in the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state. , there are many types of special symbols to be displayed.'' In any case, in the variable presentation based on winning in the second start opening 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the variable presentation in which special symbols are displayed is not executed (0 %) is also included.

Further, in the specific time saving game state, an effect in which the reserved image 52 moves may be more easily performed when a prize is won in the second starting opening 122 than when winning in the first starting opening 121. . The effect in which the held image 52 moves is, for example, the effect in which the second held image 52 moves to the display position of the first held image 52. Further, the effect in which the pending image 52 moves is, for example, an effect in which the first pending image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51. In addition, the effect in which the pending image 52 moves is better in the variable effect based on winning in the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state than in the variable effect based on winning in the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. It may be made easy to perform. Furthermore, the variable performance based on winning the second starting port 122 in the special time saving gaming state is better than the fluctuating presentation based on winning the second starting port 122 in the specific time saving gaming state, in which the pending image 52 moves. It may be possible to make it easier to perform.
In addition, "in the specific time-saving gaming state, an effect in which the reserved image 52 moves is more likely to be performed when a prize is won in the second starting hole 122 than when a prize is won in the first starting hole 121"; The effect in which the pending image 52 moves is performed more in the variable effect based on winning in the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state than in the variable effect based on winning in the first starting port 121 in the specific time saving gaming state. "Easy" also includes that when a prize is won in the first start opening 121 in the specific time-saving game state, an effect in which the reserved image 52 moves is not performed. In addition, if a prize is won at the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the effect of moving the pending image 52 is not performed. This also includes the case where the effect of moving the pending image 52 is not performed because the pending image 52 is not displayed. In addition, "the pending image 52 moves more in the variable effect based on winning at the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state than in the variable presentation based on winning in the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state. ``The effect is likely to be performed'' includes that the effect in which the reserved image 52 moves is not performed when a prize is won in the second start opening 122 in the specific time-saving game state. In addition, when a prize is won at the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the effect of moving the pending image 52 is not performed. This also includes the case where the effect of moving the pending image 52 is not performed because the pending image 52 is not displayed.

Further, when a highly decorative decorative pattern 41 (see FIG. 65(1)) is displayed, an action effect in which the decorative pattern 41 moves may be performed. The performance in which the decorative pattern 41 moves is a performance in which the display area of the decorative pattern 41 changes, such as a character in the decorative pattern 41 moving. Further, the motion performance may be performed before the fluctuating performance is started and the high-speed fluctuating display by the decorative pattern 41 is started. The motion performance may be performed immediately before the decorative pattern 41 is stopped and displayed. That is, an action effect may be performed when the decorative pattern 41 is stopped and displayed. Further, the motion performance may include a plurality of types of motion performance, each of which has a different motion.
In the present embodiment, in the specific time-saving gaming state, the movement performance is performed more in the variable performance based on winning in the second starting port 122 than in the variable performance based on winning in the first starting port 121. The variation effect may be made easier to execute. In addition, in the specific time-saving gaming state, the variable effect based on winning at the second starting port 122 is better than the variable effect based on winning at the first starting port 121, even if there are many types of action effects performed. good.
In addition, the variable performance based on winning in the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state is better than the variable performance based on winning in the first starting port 121 in the specific time saving gaming state. It may be made easy to execute. In addition, there are more types of action effects to be performed in the variable effects based on winnings in the first starting hole 121 in the normal gaming state than in the variable effects based on winnings in the first starting hole 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. It's okay.
Furthermore, the variable performance based on winning in the second starting port 122 in the special time saving gaming state is better than the variable performance based on winning in the second starting port 122 in the specific time saving gaming state. may be made easier to execute. In addition, the type of action performance performed is better in the variable performance based on winning in the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state than in the variable performance based on winning in the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. It may be more.

In addition, ``In the specific time-saving gaming state, a variable presentation based on a win at the second starting port 122 is performed more favorably than a variable presentation based on a winning at the first starting port 121. ``In the specific time-saving gaming state, the type of action presentation that is performed is more likely to occur when the variable presentation is based on winnings at the second starting hole 122 than the variable presentation based on winnings through the first starting hole 121.'' ``There are a lot of movement presentations'' and ``a variable presentation based on winnings to the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state is better than a variable presentation based on winnings to the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. "It is easier to execute a variable performance based on winning in the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state than a variable performance based on winning in the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. , ``There are many types of action presentations to be performed'' includes that no action presentation is performed (0%) in the variable presentation based on winning in the first start opening 121 in the specific time-saving game state. In addition, ``a variable performance based on winning in the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state is better than a variable performance based on winning in the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. The effect is easier to execute, and the variable effect based on winning in the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state is better than the variable presentation based on winning in the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state. ``There are many types of motion presentations to be performed'' includes the fact that no motion presentation is performed (0%) in the variable presentation based on winning in the second starting opening 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state.

Furthermore, when the variable performance is started, a variable performance may be performed in which the timings at which the high-speed variable display of the three decorative symbols 41 is started are the same for the three decorative symbols 41. In other words, a variable effect may be performed in which the display timings of the three decorative patterns 41 changing from an easily visible state to an invisible or difficult to see state are aligned.
In the present embodiment, when a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss in a specific time-saving gaming state, rather than a variable performance based on the fact that the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 is a specific number, A variable effect based on the number of reservations of the second starting port 122 being a specific number is a variable effect in which the display timings in which the three decorative patterns 41 change from an easily visible state to an invisible or difficult to see state are aligned. You can make it easy to understand. In addition, when a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss in the specific time-saving gaming state, a variable performance based on the fact that the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 is a specific number, and a variable performance based on the fact that the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 is a specific number, and the second starting port 122 is With a variable performance based on the number of reservations being a specific number, even if the execution rate of the variable performance in which the display timings in which the three decorative patterns 41 change from an easily visible state to an invisible or difficult to see state is the same, good. In this case, the specific number may be any value among "1", "2", "3", and "4".
In addition, when a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, the variable performance based on the fact that the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 is a specific number in the specific time-saving gaming state is higher than that in the normal gaming state. A variable effect based on the number of reservations of one starting port 121 being a specific number is a variable effect in which the display timings in which the three decorative patterns 41 change from an easily visible state to an invisible or difficult to see state are aligned. You can make it easier. In addition, when a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, a variable performance based on the fact that the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 is a specific number in the specific time-saving gaming state, and a first fluctuation performance in the normal gaming state. In the variable performance based on the number of reservations of the starting port 121 being a specific number, the execution rate of the variable performance in which the display timings in which the three decorative patterns 41 change from the easily visible state to the invisible or difficult to see state are aligned is the same. It may be. In this case, the specific number may be any value among "1", "2", "3", and "4".
In addition, when a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is performed, the variable performance based on the number of reservations of the second starting port 122 being a specific number in the special time-saving game state is more effective in the specific time-saving game state. A variable effect based on the number of reservations of the second starting port 122 being a specific number is a variable effect in which the display timings in which the three decorative patterns 41 change from an easily visible state to an invisible or difficult to see state are aligned. You can make it easy to understand. In addition, when a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, a variable performance based on the fact that the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 is a specific number in the special time-saving gaming state, and a In the variable performance based on the number of reservations of the 2 starting ports 122 being a specific number, the execution rate of the variable performance in which the display timings in which the three decorative patterns 41 change from the easily visible state to the invisible or difficult to see state are aligned. They may be the same. In this case, the specific number may be any value among "1", "2", "3", and "4".

In addition, if a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss in the specific time-saving gaming state, the second starting port 121 is It is easier to perform a variable effect based on the fact that the number of reservations of 122 is a specific number, in which the display timings in which the three decorative patterns 41 change from an easily visible state to an invisible or difficult to see state are aligned. , ``If a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss in a specific time-saving gaming state, a variable performance based on the fact that the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 is a specific number, and a variable performance based on the fact that the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 is a specific number, and in the second starting port 122. In the variable performance based on the number of pending numbers being a specific number, the execution rate of the variable performance in which the display timings of the three decorative patterns 41 changing from an easily visible state to an invisible or difficult to see state are the same. , ``If a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is performed, the first start opening 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state is more likely to be held than a variable performance based on the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 being a specific number in the normal gaming state. A variable effect based on the number of reservations of one starting port 121 being a specific number is a variable effect in which the display timings in which the three decorative patterns 41 change from an easily visible state to an invisible or difficult to see state are aligned. When a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, a variable performance based on the fact that the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 is a specific number in a specific time-saving gaming state, and a normal gaming state. In the variable effect based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being a specific number, the display timing of the three decorative patterns 41 changing from an easily visible state to an invisible or difficult to see state is aligned. "The percentages are the same" means that if a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, in a variable performance based on winning in the first starting hole 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, 3 This also includes the case where a variation effect in which the display timings of the two decorative patterns 41 changing from an easily visible state to an invisible or difficult to see state are not executed (0%).
In addition, if a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is performed, the specific time-saving game state is more effective than a variable performance based on the fact that the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 is a specific number in the special time-saving game state. In this case, the variable effect based on the number of reservations of the second starting port 122 being a specific number is better than the variable effect in which the display timings in which the three decorative patterns 41 change from the easily visible state to the invisible or difficult to see state are aligned. "Easy to be carried out", "If a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, a variable performance based on the fact that the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 is a specific number in the special time-saving gaming state, and a specific In the time-saving game state, the variation performance based on the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 being a specific number is a variation in which the display timings in which the three decorative patterns 41 change from a state where they are easily visible to a state where they are invisible or difficult to see are aligned. "The performance execution ratio is the same" means that in both cases, if a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, a variable performance based on winning in the second starting hole 122 in the special time-saving gaming state. This also includes the fact that a variable effect is always performed (100%) in which the display timings of the three decorative patterns 41 changing from an easily visible state to an invisible or difficult to see state are aligned.

Further, when the variable effect is started, a variable effect may be performed in which the display timing at which the three decorative patterns 41 change from an easily visible state to an invisible or difficult to see state is different for each of the three decorative patterns 41. .
When a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss in the specific time-saving gaming state, the first starting port 122 A variable effect based on the number of reservations being a specific number is more likely to be a variable effect with different display timings in which the three decorative patterns 41 change from an easily visible state to an invisible or difficult to see state. Good too. In addition, when a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is executed, the variable performance based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being a specific number in the normal gaming state is performed in the specific time-saving gaming state. A variable effect based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being a specific number is better than a variable effect in which the display timing of the three decorative patterns 41 changing from an easily visible state to an invisible or difficult to see state is different. You can make it easy to understand. In addition, when a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is executed, the variable performance based on the number of reservations of the second starting port 122 being a specific number in the special time-saving game state is more The variable effect based on the number of reservations of the second starting port 122 being a specific number is better than the variable effect in which the display timing of the three decorative patterns 41 changing from an easily visible state to an invisible or difficult to see state is different. It may be made easy to perform. In this case, the specific number may be any value among "1", "2", "3", and "4".

In addition, if a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss in the specific time-saving gaming state, the first starting port 122 A variable effect based on the fact that the number of pending items of 121 is a specific number is easier to perform a variable effect in which the display timing in which the three decorative patterns 41 change from an easily visible state to an invisible or difficult to see state is different. , ``If a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is executed, it will be executed in a specific time-saving gaming state rather than a variable performance based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being a specific number in the normal gaming state. A variable effect based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being a specific number is better than a variable effect in which the display timing of the three decorative patterns 41 changing from an easily visible state to an invisible or difficult to see state is different. What is easy to lose is that when a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss in a specific time-saving gaming state, three decorations are This also includes the fact that a variable effect is always performed (100%) in which the symbol 41 changes from a state where it is easily visible to a state where it is not visible or difficult to see.
In addition, when a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is executed, the special time-saving game A variable effect based on the fact that the number of reservations of the second starting port 122 is a specific number in the state is a variable effect in which the display timing of the three decorative patterns 41 changing from an easily visible state to an invisible or difficult to see state is different. "is likely to occur" means that when a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss in the special time-saving gaming state, three decorative symbols are This also includes the case that a variable effect is always performed (100%) in which the display timing of the 41 changes from a state where it is easily visible to a state where it is not visible or difficult to see.

Further, a vibration effect may be performed in which the effect button 161 vibrates. The vibration effect may be performed when the effect button 161 is operated, or may be performed when the effect button 161 is not operated. Further, the vibration effects may include a plurality of types of vibration effects each having a different mode of vibration.
In the present embodiment, in the specific time-saving gaming state, the vibration effect is performed more in the variable effect based on winning in the second starting port 122 than in the variable effect based on winning in the first starting port 121. You can make it easier. In addition, in the specific time-saving gaming state, the variable effect based on winning at the second starting port 122 is better than the variable effect based on winning at the first starting port 121, even if there are many types of vibration effects performed. good.
In addition, the vibration performance is made easier to perform when the variable performance is based on winning the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state than the fluctuating performance based on winning the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. You can. In addition, there are more types of vibration effects in the variable effects based on winnings in the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state than in variable effects based on winnings in the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. You can.
In addition, the vibration performance seems to be easier to perform in the variable performance based on winning in the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state than in the fluctuating performance based on winning in the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. You may also do so. In addition, the type of vibration performance performed is better in the variable performance based on winning in the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state than in the variable performance based on winning in the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. It may be more.

In addition, "in the specific time-saving gaming state, the vibration effect is more likely to be performed in the variable effect based on winning in the second starting port 122 than in the variable effect based on winning in the first starting port 121,""In the specific time-saving gaming state, there are more types of vibration effects that are performed in variable effects based on winnings in the second starting port 122 than in variable effects based on winnings in the first starting port 121,""The vibration effect is easier to perform in the variable effect based on winning in the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state than in the variable effect based on winning in the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state," “There are more types of vibration effects that are performed in variable effects based on winnings in the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state than in variable effects based on winnings in the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state.” In particular, in the variable performance based on winning the first start opening 121 in the specific time-saving game state, the vibration performance may not be performed (0%).
In addition, "the vibration effect is easier to perform in the variable effect based on winning in the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state than in the variable presentation based on winning in the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state. ”, “A variable performance based on a winning at the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state is more effective than a fluctuating performance based on winning at the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. "There are many types" includes that no vibration performance is performed (0%) in the variable performance based on winning in the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving game state.

Furthermore, a jackpot suggesting performance may be performed that suggests that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. As the jackpot suggestion performance, for example, after the start of the reach performance, when the role performance is performed by operating the performance button 161 (see FIG. 72 (11)), a vibration performance is performed, and the board lamp 116 and the frame A first effect is such that the lamp 157 emits rainbow-colored light and a rainbow-colored image is displayed on the image display section 114. Further, examples of the jackpot suggesting performance include, for example, a second performance performed at a timing different from the first performance. The second effects include, for example, a sound effect in which a voice saying "Jackpot!?" is output when the change starts (see FIG. 71 (2)), a effect in which a rainbow-colored change image 51 is displayed, etc. An example of this is an effect that suggests that the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 will shift to a special time-saving gaming state.

In the present embodiment, the execution of the first performance is different from the variable performance based on winning to the first starting port 121 in the specific time saving gaming state and the variable performance based on winning to the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state. The proportions are different. Further, the execution rate of the second performance is different between the variable performance based on winning at the first starting port 121 in the specific time saving gaming state and the variable performance based on winning at the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state.
In addition, in the variable performance based on the winning at the first starting opening 121 in the normal gaming state, both the first performance and the second performance can be executed, while the winning at the first starting opening 121 in the specific time saving gaming state In the variable performance based on , execution of at least one of the first performance and the second performance may be restricted. The restricted presentation may be the first presentation, the second presentation, or both.
In addition, the execution ratio of the first performance is smaller in the variable performance based on winning in the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state than in the variable performance based on winning in the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state. It's okay. Furthermore, the execution rate of the second performance is smaller in the variable performance based on winning in the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state than in the variable performance based on winning in the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state. It's okay.

In addition, in the specific time saving game state, the execution ratio of the first performance may be different between the variable performance based on winning in the first starting opening 121 and the variable performance based on winning in the second starting opening 122. In addition, in the specific time saving game state, the execution ratio of the second performance may be different between the variable performance based on winning in the first starting opening 121 and the variable performance based on winning in the second starting opening 122.
In addition, in the variable performance based on winning to the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state, both the first performance and the second performance can be executed, while the winning to the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state is possible. In the variable performance based on winning a prize, execution of at least one of the first performance and the second performance may be restricted. The restricted presentation may be the first presentation, the second presentation, or both.
In addition, in the specific time saving gaming state, the variable effect based on winning in the first starting opening 121 is better than the variable effect based on winning in the second starting opening 122, even if the execution ratio of the first effect is small. good. Furthermore, in the specific time-saving gaming state, the variable effect based on winning in the first starting port 121 is better than the variable effect based on winning in the second starting port 122, even if the execution rate of the second effect is small. good.

In addition, the execution rate of the first performance is different between the variable performance based on winning the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state and the variable performance based on winning the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state. Good too. In addition, the execution rate of the second performance is different between the variable performance based on winning the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state and the variable performance based on winning the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state. Good too.
In addition, in the variable performance based on winning to the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state, both the first performance and the second performance can be executed, while the variable performance based on winning to the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state In the variable presentation based on winning, execution of at least one of the first presentation and the second presentation may be restricted. The restricted presentation may be the first presentation, the second presentation, or both.
In addition, the execution rate of the first performance is higher in the variable performance based on winning in the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state than in the variable performance based on winning in the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state. It can be small. Furthermore, the execution rate of the second performance is higher in the variable performance based on winning in the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state than in the variable performance based on winning in the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state. It can be small.

In addition, "the execution ratio of the first performance is different between the variable performance based on winning at the first starting port 121 in the specific time saving gaming state and the variable performance based on winning at the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state." In other words, "The execution rate of the first performance is higher in the variable performance based on winning in the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state than in the variable performance based on winning in the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state. "In the specific time-saving gaming state, the execution ratio of the first performance is different between the variable performance based on winnings in the first starting port 121 and the variable performance based on winnings in the second starting port 122." That is, ``In the specific time-saving gaming state, the execution ratio of the first performance is smaller for the variable performance based on winning at the first starting opening 121 than for the variable performance based on winning at the second starting opening 122.'' In particular, this includes the fact that the first performance is not executed (0%) in the variable performance based on winning in the first start opening 121 in the specific time saving game state.
In addition, "the execution rate of the second performance is different between the variable performance based on winning at the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state and the variable performance based on winning at the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state." In other words, "The execution rate of the second performance is higher in the variable performance based on winning in the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state than in the variable performance based on winning in the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state. "In the specific time-saving gaming state, the execution rate of the second performance is different between the variable performance based on winnings in the first starting port 121 and the variable performance based on winnings in the second starting port 122." That is, "In the specific time-saving gaming state, the execution rate of the second performance is smaller for the variable performance based on winning at the first starting port 121 than for the variable performance based on winning at the second starting port 122." In particular, this includes the fact that the second performance is not executed (0%) in the variable performance based on winning in the first start opening 121 in the specific time-saving game state.
In addition, "the execution rate of the first performance is different between the variable performance based on winning to the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state and the variable performance based on winning to the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state. "The variable performance based on winning the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state is more effective than the variable performance based on winning the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state. "The proportion is small" also includes the fact that the first performance is not executed (0%) in the variable performance based on winning in the second start opening 122 in the specific time-saving game state.
In addition, "the execution rate of the second performance is different between the variable performance based on winning to the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state and the variable performance based on winning to the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state. "The variable performance based on winning the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state is more effective in executing the second performance than the variable performance based on winning the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state. ``The percentage is small'' includes that the second performance is not executed (0%) in the variable performance based on winning in the second start opening 122 in the specific time-saving game state.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss in the specific time saving gaming state, rather than a variable performance based on the fact that the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 is a specific number, It has been explained that the variable effect based on the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 being a specific number is easier to execute the ready-to-reach effect. Here, if a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss in the specific time saving gaming state, the second start The variable effect based on the number of holds of the mouth 122 being a specific number is easier to execute the reach effect.'' In the specific time-saving game state, a variable effect is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loser. In this case, the variable performance based on the number of reservations at the first starting port 121 being a specific number includes that the ready-to-win performance is not executed (0%).
In addition, in the present embodiment, when a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss in the specific time-saving gaming state, the variable performance based on the winning of the first starting port 121 is performed, and the second starting port 122 is selected. It has been explained that variable effects based on winnings are more likely to be executed as reach effects. Here, if a variable effect is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss in the specific time saving gaming state, the variable effect based on winning in the second starting hole 122 is more likely than the variable effect based on winning in the first starting hole 121. "The reach effect is more likely to be executed in the variable effect based on the variable effect", the reach effect is not executed in the variable effect in which the special symbol lottery result is a loss based on the winning in the first starting hole 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. (0%) is also included.
In addition, in the present embodiment, when a variable effect is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, the variable effect based on the fact that the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 is a specific number in the second mode is It has been explained that the variable effect based on the fact that the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 is a specific number in 1 mode is easier to execute the ready-to-reach effect. Here, if a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, in the first mode, it is better to The variable effect based on the number of holds at the first starting port 121 being a specific number is easier to execute the reach effect.'' In the second mode, the number of holdings at the first starting port 121 is a specific number. Variable performances in which the special symbol lottery result based on this is a loss include that the reach performance is not executed (0%).
In addition, in the present embodiment, when a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is performed, the first start in the first mode is It has been explained that the variable presentation based on the prize winning in the mouth 121 is easier to execute the reach effect. Here, if a variable effect is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, the variable effect based on winning to the first starting hole 121 in the first mode is more likely to be performed than the variable effect based on winning to the first starting hole 121 in the second mode. It is easier to execute the reach effect when the variable effect is based on the winning of the special symbol lottery.If the variable effect is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, it is easier to execute the reach effect if the variable effect is based on the winning result of the special symbol lottery. Variable effects based on this include that no reach effects are executed (0%).
In addition, in this embodiment, when a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, rather than a variable performance based on the fact that the number of reservations of the second starting port 122 is a specific number in the specific time-saving gaming state, It has been explained that the variable performance based on the fact that the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 is a specific number in the special time-saving game state is easier to execute the ready-to-win performance. Here, when a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, the special time-saving game is The variable performance based on the number of reservations at the second starting port 122 being a specific number in the state is easier to execute the reach performance. Variable effects in which the lottery result of the special symbol based on the number is a loss include that the reach effect is not executed (0%).
In addition, in the present embodiment, when a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is performed, the variable performance based on winning to the second starting hole 122 in the specific time-saving game state is more It has been explained that the variable performance based on winning in the 2-start opening 122 is easier to execute the reach-to-win performance. Here, if a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is performed, the second starting hole in the special time-saving gaming state will 122 is more likely to be executed as a reach effect.''In particular, when a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is performed, the second start opening 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state is Variable effects based on winnings include the possibility that reach effects are not executed (0%).

In addition, in this embodiment, when a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is executed in the specific time-saving gaming state, the variable performance based on winning in the first starting port 121 is performed more than the variable performance based on winning in the second starting port 121. It was explained that variable effects based on winnings are more likely to be executed to stimulate reach. Here, if a variable performance is executed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss in the specific time-saving gaming state, the winning result in the second starting hole 122 is higher than the variable effect based on winning in the first starting hole 121. It is easier to execute the reach-inciting performance in a fluctuating performance that is based on a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winning in the first starting hole 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state is a loss. This also includes the fact that the performance is not executed (0%).
In addition, in the present embodiment, when a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss in the specific time saving gaming state is executed, the variation performance based on the fact that the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 is a specific number is executed. , it has been explained that the fluctuating effect based on the number of reservations of the second starting port 122 being a specific number is easier to execute the reach-increasing effect. Here, if a variable performance is executed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss in the specific time-saving gaming state, the second The variable performance based on the number of reservations in the starting port 122 being a specific number is more likely to execute the reach stimulation performance. When executed, the fluctuating effect based on the fact that the number of reservations at the first starting port 121 is a specific number includes that the reach-stimulating effect is not executed (0%).
Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is executed, the fluctuation performance based on the fact that the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 is a specific number in the second mode, It has been explained that in the first mode, the fluctuating effect based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being a specific number is easier to execute the reach-increasing effect. Here, if a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is executed, the first mode In the second mode, the variable performance based on the number of reservations at the first starting port 121 being a specific number is easier to execute the reach-stimulating performance. In the variation performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the fact that the winning result is a loss, it also includes that the reach promotion performance is not executed (0%).
In addition, in the present embodiment, when a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is executed, the first variable effect in the first mode is more effective than the variable effect based on winning in the first starting hole 121 in the second mode. It has been explained that the fluctuating performance based on winning in the starting opening 121 is easier to execute the reach promotion performance. Here, if a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is executed, the first starting port 121 in the first mode It is easier to execute the reach-inciting effect in the variable effect based on the winning of the special symbol lottery.If the variable effect is executed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, the first starting port 121 in the second mode Variable performances based on winnings also include the fact that reach promotion performances are not executed (0%).
In addition, in this embodiment, when a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, rather than a variable performance based on the fact that the number of reservations of the second starting port 122 is a specific number in the specific time-saving gaming state, It has been explained that in the special time-saving game state, the variable performance based on the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 being a specific number is easier to execute the reach-increasing performance. Here, when a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, the special time-saving game is The variable performance based on the number of reservations at the second starting port 122 being a specific number in the state is easier to execute the reach promotion performance. Variable performances in which the special symbol lottery result based on a specific number is a loss include that the reach promotion performance is not executed (0%).
In addition, in the present embodiment, when a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is performed, the variable performance based on winning to the second starting hole 122 in the specific time-saving game state is more It has been explained that the fluctuating performance based on winning in the 2-start opening 122 is easier to execute the reach promotion performance. Here, if a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is performed, the second starting hole in the special time-saving gaming state will 122 is more likely to be executed as a reach-inciting effect.'' This means that when a variable effect is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, the second starting opening in the specific time-saving gaming state is The variable performance based on the winning of 122 also includes the fact that the reach promotion performance is not executed (0%).

In addition, in this embodiment, when a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss in the specific time saving gaming state, rather than a variable performance based on the fact that the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 is a specific number, It has been explained that the variable effect based on the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 being a specific number is easier to perform than the variable effect in which the display timings of the three decorative patterns 41 are aligned. Here, if a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss in the specific time saving gaming state, the second start The variable performance based on the number of reserved openings 122 being a specific number is easier to execute in which the display timings of the three decorative symbols 41 are aligned. The variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the number of reservations being a specific number is a loss includes that the variable performance in which the display timings of three decorative symbols 41 are aligned is not executed (0%).
In addition, in this embodiment, when a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, rather than a variable performance based on the fact that the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 is a specific number in the specific time-saving gaming state, It has been explained that the variable performance based on the fact that the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 is a specific number in the normal game state is easier to execute the variable performance in which the display timings of the three decorative symbols 41 are aligned. Here, if a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is performed, it is more important to note that in the normal game state In this case, it is easier to execute a variable effect based on the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 being a specific number than a variable effect in which the display timings of the three decorative symbols 41 are aligned. In a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the number of reservations of the 1 starting opening 121 being a specific number is a loss, a variable performance in which the display timing of the three decorative symbols 41 is aligned is not executed (0%). It will be done.
In addition, in this embodiment, when a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, rather than a variable performance based on the fact that the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 is a specific number in the special time-saving gaming state, It has been explained that the variable performance based on the fact that the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 is a specific number in the specific time-saving game state is easier to execute the variable performance in which the display timings of the three decorative patterns 41 are aligned. Here, if a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is performed, the specific time-saving game is more effective than the variable performance based on the fact that the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 is a specific number in the special time-saving game state. In a specific time-saving gaming state, it is easier to execute a variable production based on the number of reservations of the second starting port 122 being a specific number in a state where the display timings of the three decorative symbols 41 are aligned. In a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 being a specific number is a loss, a variable performance in which the display timings of the three decorative symbols 41 are aligned is always executed (100%) It also includes.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss in the specific time saving gaming state, rather than a variable performance based on the fact that the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 is a specific number, A variable effect based on the number of reservations at the first starting port 121 being a specific number is a variable effect in which the display timing of the three decorative patterns 41 changing from an invisible or difficult-to-see state to an easy-to-see state is different. I explained that it is easy to do so. Here, if a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss in the specific time saving gaming state, the first start A variable effect based on the number of reserved mouths 121 being a specific number is easier to perform a variable effect with different display timings in which the three decorative patterns 41 change from an invisible or difficult-to-see state to an easy-to-see state. Particularly, in a variable performance in which the lottery result of a special symbol lottery based on the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 being a specific number in a specific time-saving gaming state is a loss, the three decorative symbols 41 are invisible or difficult to see. This also includes the fact that a variable effect with a different display timing from a state to an easily visible state is always executed (100%).
In addition, in this embodiment, when a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is executed, rather than a variable performance based on the fact that the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 is a specific number in the normal gaming state, In the specific time saving game state, the display timing when the three decorative patterns 41 change from the invisible or difficult to see state to the easily visible state is better in the variable effect based on the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 being a specific number. It has been explained that different variation effects are likely to be executed. Here, if a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is executed, the specific time-saving game is more effective than the variable performance based on the fact that the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 is a specific number in the normal gaming state. A variable effect based on the fact that the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 is a specific number in the state is a variable effect in which the display timing of the three decorative patterns 41 changing from an invisible or difficult-to-see state to an easily visible state is different. "is likely to be executed" means that in a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss based on the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 being a specific number in a specific time-saving gaming state, three decorative symbols 41 are visible. This also includes the fact that a variable effect with a different display timing from an impossible or difficult to see state to an easily visible state is always executed (100%).
In addition, in this embodiment, when a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is executed, the variation performance based on the fact that the number of reservations of the second starting port 122 is a specific number in the special time-saving gaming state is executed. In the specific time-saving game state, the variable effect based on the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 being a specific number is the display timing where the three decorative patterns 41 change from the invisible or difficult-to-see state to the easy-to-see state. It has been explained that it is easy to execute variable effects with different values. Here, ``If a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is executed, the specific time is shorter than the variable performance based on the fact that the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 is a specific number in the special time-saving gaming state. In the game state, the variation effect based on the number of reservations of the second starting port 122 being a specific number is a variation in which the display timing at which the three decorative patterns 41 change from the invisible or difficult to see state to the easily visible state is different. "Easy to execute the performance" means that in the variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss based on the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 being a specific number in the specific time saving game state, the three decorative symbols 41 are This also includes the case where a variable effect in which the display timing from an invisible or difficult to see state to an easily visible state is different is not executed (0%).

In addition, in this embodiment, when a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is executed in the specific time-saving gaming state, the variable performance based on winning in the first starting port 121 is performed more than the variable performance based on winning in the second starting port 121. It has been explained that the special performance at the time of fluctuation is more likely to be executed when the fluctuation performance is based on winning a prize. In addition, in the present embodiment, when a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss in the specific time saving gaming state is executed, the variation performance based on the fact that the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 is a specific number is executed. , it has been explained that the special effect at the time of variation is more likely to be executed when the variable effect is based on the number of reservations of the second starting port 122 being a specific number. Here, if a variable performance is executed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss in the specific time-saving gaming state, the winning result in the second starting hole 122 is higher than the variable effect based on winning in the first starting hole 121. ``It is easier for the special effect to be executed at the time of variation in a variable effect based on the above,'' and ``If a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss in a specific time-saving gaming state is executed, the first start opening 121 is suspended. The fact that the special performance at the time of fluctuation is easier to execute is the case where the variable performance is easier to execute when the number of reservations at the second starting port 122 is a specific number than when the number is a specific number. This also includes that the special performance at the time of variation is not executed (0%) in the variation performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winning in the first starting hole 121 in the specific time saving game state is a loss.
In addition, in the present embodiment, when a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is executed, the variable performance based on winning to the first starting hole 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state is more effective than the variable performance in the normal gaming state. It has been explained that the special performance at the time of fluctuation is more likely to be executed when the fluctuation performance is based on winning in the first opening 121. In addition, in this embodiment, when a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is executed, the fluctuation performance based on the fact that the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 is a specific number in the specific time-saving gaming state is executed. It has been explained that the special performance at the time of variation is more likely to be executed when the variation performance is based on the fact that the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 is a specific number in the normal gaming state. Here, if a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is executed, the first starting hole in the normal gaming state will 121 is more likely to be executed as a special effect at the time of variation," and "If a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is executed, the first start in the specific time-saving gaming state. The special performance at the time of fluctuation is executed more easily when the fluctuation performance is based on the fact that the number of reservations at the first starting opening 121 is a specific number in the normal gaming state than the fluctuation performance based on the number of reservations at the opening 121 being a specific number. The variable-time special performance is not executed (0%) in a variable performance where the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winning in the first starting hole 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state is a loss. Also included.
In addition, in the present embodiment, when a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is executed, the variable performance in the special time-saving game state is more effective than the variable performance based on winning to the second start opening 122 in the specific time-saving game state. It has been explained that the special performance at the time of fluctuation is more likely to be executed when the fluctuation performance is based on winning in the second start opening 122. In addition, in the present embodiment, when a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is executed, the variation performance based on the fact that the number of reservations of the second starting port 122 is a specific number in the specific time-saving gaming state is executed. , it has been explained that in the special time-saving game state, the variable performance based on the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 being a specific number is easier to execute the special performance at the time of fluctuation. Here, if a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is executed, the second start in the special time-saving gaming state is more effective than the variable performance based on winning the second starting opening 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. It is more likely that the special effect at the time of variation is executed when the variable effect is based on winnings in the opening 122, and that ``If the variable effect is executed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, the second The variable performance based on the fact that the number of reservations at the second starting port 122 is a specific number in the special time-saving gaming state is better than the variable performance based on the number of reservations at the starting port 122 being a specific number. ``is likely to be executed'' means that in any variable performance where the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winning in the second starting hole 122 in the specific time saving gaming state is a loss, the special performance at the time of fluctuation is not executed (0% ) is also included.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is executed in the specific time-saving gaming state, the variable performance based on winning in the first starting port 121 is performed more than the variable performance based on winning in the second starting port 121. It has been explained that the size change effect is easier to execute when the variable effect is based on winning a prize. In addition, when a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is executed in the specific time-saving gaming state, the second starting port It has been explained that the size change effect is easier to execute when the variable effect is based on the fact that the number of reservations of 122 is a specific number. Here, if a variable performance is executed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss in the specific time-saving gaming state, the winning result in the second starting hole 122 is higher than the variable effect based on winning in the first starting hole 121. It is easier to execute the size change effect in the variable effect based on the ``size change effect'', and ``If the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss in the specific time-saving gaming state is executed, the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 The size change effect is easier to execute if the size change effect is performed based on the fact that the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 is a specific number than if it is a change effect based on the fact that the second starting port 122 is a specific number. The variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winning in the first start opening 121 in the specific time saving game state is a loss includes that the size change performance is not executed (0%).
In addition, in the present embodiment, when a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is performed, the first start in the first mode is It has been explained that the size change effect is easier to execute when the variable effect is based on winning in the mouth 121. In addition, in the present embodiment, when a variable effect is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, the variable effect based on the fact that the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 is a specific number in the second mode is It has been explained that the size change effect is easier to execute when the variable effect is based on the fact that the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 is a specific number in the 1 mode. Here, if a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is executed, the first starting port 121 in the first mode "It is easier to execute the size change effect in a variable effect based on the winning of the special symbol lottery," and ``If a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is performed, the first starting port 121 is suspended in the second mode. "The size change effect is easier to execute if the size change effect is performed based on the fact that the number of reservations at the first starting port 121 is a specific number in the first mode than the variable effect based on the fact that the number is a specific number." , all of which include that the size change performance is not executed (0%) in the variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winning in the first starting hole 121 in the second mode is a loss.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss in the specific time-saving gaming state, the variable performance based on the winning of the first starting port 121 is performed, and the second starting port 122 is selected. It has been explained that the position change effect is more likely to be executed when the variable effect is based on winning a prize. In addition, in this embodiment, when a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss in the specific time saving gaming state, rather than a variable performance based on the fact that the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 is a specific number, It has been explained that the position change effect is easier to execute when the variation effect is based on the number of reservations of the second starting port 122 being a specific number. Here, if a variable effect is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss in the specific time saving gaming state, the variable effect based on winning in the second starting hole 122 is more likely than the variable effect based on winning in the first starting hole 121. ``It is easier to execute a position change effect in a variable effect based on the change in position'' and ``If a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss in a specific time-saving gaming state is performed, the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 is specified. It is easier to perform a position change effect with a variable effect based on the number of reservations at the second starting port 122 being a specific number than with a variable effect based on a specific number.'' In the variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winning in the first starting hole 121 in the gaming state is a loss, the position change performance may not be executed (0%).
In addition, in this embodiment, when a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is performed, the first variable performance in the normal game state is more effective than the variable performance based on winning the first start opening 121 in the specific time-saving game state. It has been explained that the position change performance is easier to execute when the variation performance is based on winning in the starting port 121. In addition, in this embodiment, when a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, rather than a variable performance based on the fact that the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 is a specific number in the specific time-saving gaming state, It has been explained that the position change performance is easier to execute when the variable performance is based on the fact that the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 is a specific number in the normal gaming state. Here, if a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is performed, the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state is more likely to ``It is easier to execute a position change effect in a variable effect based on winning a prize in the special symbol lottery'' and ``If a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is performed, the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state The position change performance is easier to execute with a variable performance based on the number of reservations at the first starting port 121 being a specific number in the normal gaming state than with a fluctuation performance based on the number of reservations being a specific number. All of these include that the position change performance is not executed (0%) in the variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winning in the first starting hole 121 in the specific time saving game state is a loss.
In addition, in the present embodiment, when a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is performed, the variable performance based on winning to the second starting hole 122 in the specific time-saving game state is more It has been explained that the position change performance is easier to execute when the variation performance is based on winning in the 2-start opening 122. In addition, in this embodiment, when a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, rather than a variable performance based on the fact that the number of reservations of the second starting port 122 is a specific number in the specific time-saving gaming state, It has been explained that in the special time-saving game state, the position change performance is easier to execute when the variable performance is based on the fact that the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 is a specific number. Here, if a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is performed, the second starting hole in the special time-saving gaming state will 122, the position change performance is easier to execute," and "If a fluctuation performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. It is easier to execute the position change performance with the variable performance based on the fact that the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 is a specific number in the special time-saving gaming state than with the fluctuation performance based on the fact that the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 is a specific number. In particular, this also includes the fact that the position change performance is not executed (0%) in a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winnings in the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state is a loss. .

Further, the position change effect is not limited to the example described above.
For example, the display position of the decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness may be changed from the position shown in FIG. 68 (20) to a further different display position. In this case, the display position shown in FIG. 68 (20) is referred to as the first position. Further, a display position further changed from this first position is referred to as a second position. The second position is, for example, one side of the image display section 114 and a different area from the upper side. However, the second position may be any position as long as it is different from the first position. When a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, the effect on the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state is higher than the variable performance based on winning the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. A position change performance that changes the decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness from the first position to the second position may be more easily executed in the variation performance based on winning a prize. In addition, when a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, the variable performance based on the fact that the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 is a specific number in the specific time-saving gaming state is higher than that in the normal gaming state. Even if it is made easier to execute a position change effect that changes the less decorative decorative pattern 41 from the first position to the second position when the variation effect is based on the number of reservations of one starting port 121 being a specific number. good.
In addition, when a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, the variable performance based on the winning to the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state is more likely to be performed in the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state. It may be possible to make it easier to perform a position change performance in which the decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness is changed from the first position to the second position in the variation performance based on winning a prize. In addition, when a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, in the special time-saving game state, the variable performance based on the number of reservations of the second starting port 122 being a specific number is more favorable in the special time-saving game state. The position change performance that changes the decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness from the first position to the second position is made easier to execute when the variation performance is based on the number of reservations of the second starting port 122 being a specific number. Good too.
Here, if a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is performed, the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state is more likely to It is easier to execute a position change effect that changes the decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness from the first position to the second position when the variation effect is based on winning a prize, and ``the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss.'' When a variable performance is performed, the number of reservations at the first starting port 121 is a specific number in the normal gaming state, rather than a variable performance based on the fact that the number of reservations at the first starting port 121 is a specific number in the specific time saving gaming state. The position change performance that changes the less decorative decorative pattern 41 from the first position to the second position is easier to execute with the variable performance based on the first start in the specific time-saving gaming state. In a variation performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winnings in the mouth 121 is a loss, a position change performance that changes the decorative symbol 41 with low decorativeness from the first position to the second position is not executed (0%). Also included. In addition, when a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state is It is easier to execute a position change effect that changes the decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness from the first position to the second position when the variation effect is based on winning a prize, and ``the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss.'' When a variable performance is performed, the number of reservations at the second starting port 122 is a specific number in the special time-saving gaming state, rather than the variable performance based on the fact that the number of reservations at the second starting port 122 is a specific number in the specific time-saving gaming state. ``It is easier to execute a position change effect that changes the decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness from the first position to the second position when the variable effect is based on a certain thing.'' In a variation performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winnings in the starting hole 122 is a loss, a position change performance that changes the decorative symbol 41 with low decorativeness from the first position to the second position is not executed (0%) It also includes.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the specific time saving gaming state, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and a variable performance is performed in which the reach performance is not executed, the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 is the first specific number. The proportion of variable effects that take a longer execution time is higher than those based on the fact that the number of reservations at the first starting port 121 is a second specific number that is smaller than the first specific number. , the first ratio, and the variable performance based on the fact that the number of reservations at the second starting port 122 is the second specific number rather than the fluctuation performance based on the number of reservations at the second starting port 122 being the first specific number. It has been explained that the rate at which a variable effect with a longer execution time is performed is the second rate. It has also been explained that in this case, the second ratio is larger than the first ratio. Here, "the second ratio is larger than the first ratio" includes that the first ratio is 0 (0%).
In addition, in this embodiment, when a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and the reach performance is not executed, the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 is the first specific number in the specific time saving gaming state. The rate at which a variable effect based on the fact that the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 is the second specific number is longer than the variable effect based on a certain fact is the first rate. , in the normal gaming state, the variable performance based on the fact that the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 is the second specific number is better than the variable performance based on the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 being the second specific number. However, it has been explained that the rate at which variable effects with longer execution times are performed is the second rate. It has also been explained that in this case, the second ratio is larger than the first ratio. Here, "the second ratio is larger than the first ratio" includes that the first ratio is 0 (0%).
In addition, in this embodiment, when a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and the reach performance is not executed, the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 is the first specific number in the specific time saving gaming state. The rate at which a variable effect based on the fact that the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 is the second specific number is longer than the variable effect based on a certain fact is the first rate. In the special time-saving gaming state, the variable performance is based on the fact that the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 is the second specific number, rather than the variable performance based on the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 being the second specific number. It has been explained that the rate at which a variable effect with a longer execution time is performed is the second rate. It has also been explained that in this case, the second ratio is larger than the first ratio. Here, "the second ratio is larger than the first ratio" includes that the first ratio is 0 (0%).

In addition, in this embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss in the specific time saving gaming state and a variable performance is performed in which the reach performance is not executed, the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 is a specific number. It has been explained that a variable effect based on the fact that the number of reservations at the first starting port 121 is a specific number is more likely to be performed with a longer execution time than a variable effect based on the specific number. Here, "If a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss in the specific time saving gaming state and the reach performance is not executed, the variable performance is based on the fact that the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 is a specific number. ``It is easier to perform a variable effect with a longer execution time with a variable effect based on the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 being a specific number than with a special symbol lottery in a specific time-saving gaming state.'' When a variable performance is performed in which the result is a loss and no reach performance is performed, the number of reservations at the first starting port 121 is longer than the execution time of the variable performance based on the fact that the number of reservations at the second starting port 122 is a specific number. This also includes the fact that the execution time of the variable effect based on the fact that is a specific number is always longer (100%).
In addition, in this embodiment, when a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and the reach performance is not executed, it is based on the fact that the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 is a specific number in the first mode. It has been explained that the variable effect based on the fact that the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 is a specific number in the second mode is easier to perform than the variable effect which takes a longer execution time. Here, if a variable effect is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and the reach effect is not executed, the variable effect based on the fact that the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 is a specific number in the first mode Also, in the second mode, a variable effect based on the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 being a specific number is easier to perform a variable effect with a longer execution time. When a fluctuating performance is performed in which there is a miss and no reach performance is performed, the first starting port 121 in the second mode This also includes the fact that a variable effect based on the fact that the number of reservations is a specific number is always executed (100%), and the execution time is longer.
In addition, in this embodiment, when a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and the reach performance is not executed, the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 is a specific number in the specific time-saving gaming state. It has been explained that the variable performance based on the fact that the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 is a specific number in the special time-saving game state is more likely to be performed with a longer execution time than the variable performance based on this. Here, if a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and no reach performance is executed, the variable performance is based on the fact that the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 is a specific number in the specific time-saving gaming state. "It is easier to perform a variable performance based on the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 being a specific number in the special time-saving gaming state than a variable performance with a longer execution time." If a variable performance is performed in which the result is a loss and no reach performance is executed, the variable performance based on the number of reservations of the second starting port 122 being a specific number in the specific time-saving gaming state is higher than the variable performance based on the fact that the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 is a specific number in the specific time-saving gaming state. This also includes the fact that a variable effect based on the fact that the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 is a specific number is always performed (100%) and takes a longer execution time.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the specific time saving gaming state, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and a variable performance is performed in which the reach performance is not executed, the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 is the first specific number. The rate at which the same variation pattern is selected in the variation effect based on this and the variation effect based on the fact that the number of reservations at the first starting port 121 is a second specific number smaller than the first specific number is the first rate. , the same fluctuation effect is created based on the fact that the number of reservations at the second starting port 122 is the first specific number, and the fluctuation performance based on the fact that the number of reservations at the second starting port 122 is the second specific number. It has been explained that the rate at which patterns are selected is the second rate. It has also been explained that in this case, the first ratio is larger than the second ratio. Here, "the first ratio is larger than the second ratio" includes that the second ratio is 0 (0%) and the first ratio is 1 (100%).
In addition, in this embodiment, when a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and the reach performance is not executed, the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 is the first specific number in the specific time saving gaming state. The rate at which the same variation pattern is selected in the variable performance based on a certain fact and the variable performance based on the fact that the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 is the second specific number is the first rate, and the normal gaming state In , the same fluctuation pattern is created between the fluctuation performance based on the number of reservations at the first starting port 121 being the first specific number and the fluctuation performance based on the number of reservations at the first starting port 121 being the second specific number. It has been explained that the ratio at which is selected is the second ratio. It has also been explained that in this case, the first ratio is larger than the second ratio. Here, "the first ratio is larger than the second ratio" includes that the second ratio is 0 (0%) and the first ratio is 1 (100%).
In addition, in this embodiment, when a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and the reach performance is not executed, the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 is the first specific number in the specific time saving gaming state. The rate at which the same variation pattern is selected between the variable performance based on a certain fact and the variable performance based on the fact that the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 is the second specific number is the first rate, and the special time-saving game In the state, the fluctuation performance based on the number of reservations at the second starting port 122 being the first specific number and the fluctuation performance based on the number of reservations at the second starting port 122 being the second specific number, the same fluctuation. It has been explained that the rate at which patterns are selected is the second rate. It has also been explained that in this case, the first ratio is larger than the second ratio. Here, "the first ratio is larger than the second ratio" includes that the second ratio is 0 (0%) and the first ratio is 1 (100%).

In addition, in the present embodiment, when a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss based on the fact that the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 is a specific number in the specific time saving gaming state, in the specific time saving gaming state It has been explained that the rate at which the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is selected among the selectable variation patterns based on winnings in the first starting opening 121 in is the first proportion. In addition, if a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss based on the fact that the number of reservations in the second starting opening 122 is a specific number in the specific time saving gaming state, the second starting opening in the specific time saving gaming state It has been explained that the rate at which the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is selected among the selectable variation patterns based on winnings in 122 is the second proportion. It was also explained that the first ratio is larger than the second ratio. Here, "the first ratio is larger than the second ratio" includes that the first ratio is 1 (100%).
In addition, in the present embodiment, when a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss based on the fact that the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 is a specific number in the specific time saving gaming state, in the specific time saving gaming state It has been explained that the rate at which the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is selected among the selectable variation patterns based on winnings in the first starting opening 121 in is the first proportion. In addition, when a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss based on the fact that the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 is a specific number in the normal gaming state, the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state It has been explained that the rate at which the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is selected from among the selectable variation patterns based on winnings is the second rate. It was also explained that the first ratio is larger than the second ratio. Here, "the first ratio is larger than the second ratio" includes that the first ratio is 1 (100%).
In addition, in the present embodiment, when a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss based on the fact that the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 is a specific number in the specific time saving gaming state, in the specific time saving gaming state It has been explained that the rate at which the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is selected from among the selectable variation patterns based on winnings in the second starting port 122 in is the first proportion. In addition, if a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss based on the fact that the number of reservations in the second starting hole 122 is a specific number in the special time-saving gaming state, the second starting hole in the special time-saving gaming state It has been explained that the rate at which the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is selected among the selectable variation patterns based on winnings in 122 is the second proportion. It was also explained that the first ratio is larger than the second ratio. Here, "the first ratio is larger than the second ratio" includes that the first ratio is 1 (100%).

In addition, in this embodiment, when a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and the reach performance is not executed, the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 is a specific number in the specific time-saving gaming state. The rate at which the same variation pattern is selected in the first variable performance and the second variable performance based on the first rate is the first rate, and is based on the fact that the number of reservations in the first starting port 121 is a specific number in the specific time-saving gaming state. It has been explained that the rate at which the same variation pattern is selected in the third variation performance and the fourth variation performance is the second ratio, and the second ratio is larger than the first ratio. Here, "the second ratio is larger than the first ratio" includes that the second ratio is 1 (100%).
In addition, in this embodiment, when a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and the reach performance is not executed, it is based on the fact that the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 is a specific number in the first mode. The rate at which the same variation pattern is selected in the first variation performance and the second variation performance is the first rate, and the third rate is based on the fact that the number of reservations at the first starting port 121 is a specific number in the second mode. It has been explained that the rate at which the same variation pattern is selected in the variation effect and the fourth variation effect is the second rate, and the second rate is larger than the first rate. Here, "the second ratio is larger than the first ratio" includes that the second ratio is 1 (100%).
In addition, in this embodiment, when a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and the reach performance is not executed, the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 is a specific number in the special time-saving gaming state. The rate at which the same variation pattern is selected in the first variable performance and the second variable performance based on the first rate is the first rate, and is based on the fact that the number of reservations in the second starting port 122 is a specific number in the specific time-saving gaming state. It has been explained that the rate at which the same variation pattern is selected in the third variation performance and the fourth variation performance is the second ratio, and the second ratio is larger than the first ratio. Here, "the second ratio is larger than the first ratio" includes that the second ratio is 1 (100%).

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the specific time-saving gaming state, the variable effect based on winning in the second starting port 122 is executed more than the variable effect based on winning in the first starting port 121. I explained what was easy. Here, "in the specific time-saving gaming state, a variable performance based on winning at the second starting port 122 is easier to execute than a variable performance based on winning at the first starting port 121". This also includes that when a game ball enters the first start opening 121 in the specific time-saving game state, the changing performance of the pending image 52 is not executed (0%). In addition, "in the specific time-saving gaming state, the variable presentation based on winning at the second starting port 122 is easier to execute than the variable presentation based on winning at the first starting port 121." This also includes that even if a game ball enters the first start opening 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the change performance of the pending image 52 is not executed because the pending image 52 is not displayed (0%).
Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state, the pending image 52 It was explained that it is easy to execute the change production. Here, "change effect of the pending image 52 is better when a game ball enters the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state than when a gaming ball enters the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. ``is likely to be executed'' includes that when a game ball enters the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the changing performance of the pending image 52 is not executed (0%). In addition, "the change performance of the pending image 52 is better when a game ball enters the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state than when the gaming ball enters the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. "Easy to be executed" includes that even if a game ball enters the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the change performance of the pending image 52 is not executed because the pending image 52 is not displayed (0%). It will be done.
In addition, in this embodiment, when a game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 122 in the special time saving gaming state than when a game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 122 in the specific time saving gaming state, the pending image It has been explained that 52 change productions are easy to execute. Here, "the change in the pending image 52 is greater when a game ball enters the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state than when the gaming ball enters the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. ``The performance is likely to be executed'' includes that the change performance of the pending image 52 is not executed (0%) when a game ball enters the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving game state. In addition, ``change effect of the pending image 52 is better when a game ball enters the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state than when a gaming ball enters the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. "is likely to be executed", even if a game ball enters the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the pending image 52 is not displayed, so the change performance of the pending image 52 may not be executed (0%). included.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the specific time saving gaming state, the variable effect based on winning in the second starting hole 122 is faster than the variable effect based on winning in the first starting hole 121 before the start of the ready-to-win effect. It has been explained that the change production in is easy to execute. Here, ``In the specific time-saving gaming state, the variable effect based on winning at the second starting opening 122 is better than the changing effect based on winning at the first starting opening 121'' before the start of the reach effect. "is likely to be executed" includes the fact that in a variable performance based on winning in the first starting opening 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the change performance of the variable image 51 is not executed before the start of the reach performance (0%). . In addition, ``In the specific time-saving gaming state, the variable presentation based on winning at the second starting opening 122 is better than the changing presentation based on winning at the first starting opening 121 before the start of the ready-to-win presentation. "Easy to be executed" also includes that the change effect of the variable image 51 is not executed (0%) in the variable effect based on winning in the first start opening 121 in the specific time saving game state. Furthermore, ``In the specific time-saving gaming state, the variable presentation based on winning at the second starting opening 122 is better than the changing presentation based on winning at the first starting opening 121 before the start of the ready-to-win presentation. "Easy to be executed" means that the variable image 51 is not displayed in the variable effect based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, so the change effect of the variable image 51 is not executed (0%) It also includes.
Furthermore, in this embodiment, the variable presentation based on the winning of a game ball to the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state is more effective than the variable presentation based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. It has been explained that it is easier to execute the change performance before the start of the reach performance. Here, ``the variable effect based on the winning of a game ball in the first starting hole 121 in the normal gaming state is better than the variable effect based on the winning of the game ball in the first starting hole 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, The change performance before the start of the ready-to-win performance is likely to be executed.'' In the variable performance based on winning in the first start opening 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the change performance of the variable image 51 is not executed before the start of the reach-to-reach performance. (0%) is also included. In addition, "the variable performance based on the winning of a game ball in the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state has a better reach than the variable presentation based on the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. "The change performance before the start of the performance is likely to be executed" also includes the fact that the change performance of the variable image 51 is not executed (0%) in the variable performance based on winning in the first starting opening 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. It will be done. Furthermore, ``a variable effect based on the winning of a game ball in the first starting hole 121 in the normal gaming state has a better reach than a variable effect based on the winning of the game ball in the first starting hole 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. The reason for this is that the change performance before the start of the performance is likely to be executed because the change image 51 is not displayed in the variable performance based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. This also includes the fact that the performance is not executed (0%).
Furthermore, in this embodiment, the variable presentation based on the winning of a game ball to the second starting port 122 in the special time saving gaming state is more effective than the variable presentation based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 122 in the special time saving gaming state. It has been explained that in this case, it is easier to execute the change performance before the start of the reach performance. Here, ``the variable presentation based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state is better than the variable presentation based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state. , the change performance before the start of the reach performance is likely to be executed.'' In the variable performance based on winning in the second starting opening 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the change performance of the fluctuation image 51 is executed before the start of the reach performance. This also includes not being done (0%). In addition, “the variable performance based on the winning of a game ball to the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state is better than the variable presentation based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state, The change performance before the start of the ready-to-reach performance is likely to be executed.'' In the variable performance based on winning the second starting opening 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the change performance of the variable image 51 may not be executed (0%). included. Furthermore, “the variable performance based on the winning of a game ball in the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state is better than the variable presentation based on the winning of the game ball in the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state, The change effect before the start of the ready-to-reach effect is likely to be executed is because the variable image 51 is not displayed in the variable effect based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. This also includes the fact that the change effect is not executed (0%).

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the specific time saving gaming state, the variable effect based on winnings in the second starting hole 122 is more effective than the variable effect based on winnings in the first starting hole 121. It was explained that the final chance performance is likely to be executed. Here, ``In the specific time saving gaming state, the variable effect based on winning in the second starting hole 122 is better than the variable effect based on winning in the first starting hole 121 in the final round of multiple times. The fact that the chance effect is likely to be executed is that the final chance effect may not be executed (0%) in the variable effect based on winning in the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. included. In addition, ``In the specific time-saving gaming state, the fluctuating performance based on winning at the second starting opening 122 is better than the fluctuating performance based on winning at the first starting opening 121, which is the chance for the final round of multiple rounds. ``It is easy for the chance effect to be executed'' includes that no chance effect is executed (0%) in the variable effect based on winning in the first start opening 121 in the specific time-saving game state.
Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the variable effect based on winning in the first starting hole 121 in the normal gaming state is better than the variable effect based on winning in the first starting hole 121 in the specific time saving gaming state. I explained that my final chance performance was easy to execute. Here, ``the variable effect based on winning in the first starting hole 121 in the normal gaming state is better than the variable effect based on winning in the first starting hole 121 in the specific time saving gaming state. ``It is easy for the second chance performance to be executed.'' In the variable performance based on winning in the first start opening 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the last chance performance among multiple times is not executed (0%). It also includes. In addition, ``The variable effect based on winning the first starting hole 121 in the normal gaming state is better than the variable effect based on winning the first starting hole 121 in the specific time saving gaming state. ``It is likely that the chance presentation will be executed'' includes that no chance presentation will be executed (0%) in the variable presentation based on winning in the first start opening 121 in the specific time-saving game state.
Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the variable presentation based on the winning to the second starting port 122 in the special time saving gaming state is more frequent than the variable presentation based on winning to the second starting port 122 in the specific time saving gaming state. It was explained that the chance performance in the final round is easy to execute. Here, "the variable performance based on winning the second starting opening 122 in the special time saving gaming state is better than the fluctuating performance based on winning the second starting opening 122 in the specific time saving gaming state""The last chance effect is likely to be executed" means that in the variable effect based on winning in the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the final chance effect among the multiple times is not executed (0% ) is also included. In addition, “the variable performance based on winning the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state is better than the fluctuating presentation based on winning the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. ``It is easy for the second chance performance to be executed'' includes that no chance performance is executed (0%) in the variable performance based on winning in the second start opening 122 in the specific time-saving game state.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the specific time saving gaming state, the second expected performance is higher in the variable performance based on winning in the second starting port 122 than in the variable performance based on winning in the first starting port 121. I explained that it is easy to implement. Here, the fact that "the second expected performance is more likely to be executed with the variable performance based on winning at the second starting port 122 than the variable performance based on winning at the first starting port 121" includes the following: The variable performance based on winning in the first start opening 121 in the gaming state includes that the second expected performance is not executed (0%). In addition, the fact that "the second expected performance is more likely to be executed with the variable performance based on the winning at the second starting opening 122 than the variable performance based on the winning at the first starting opening 121" includes the specific time-saving game The variable performance based on the winning in the first starting port 121 in the state includes that no zone performance is executed (0%).
In addition, in this embodiment, the variable effect based on winning in the first starting hole 121 in the normal gaming state is better than the variable effect based on winning in the first starting hole 121 in the specific time saving gaming state. It was explained that the performance is easy to execute. Here, "the second expected performance is executed better in the variable performance based on winning the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state than in the variable performance based on winning in the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. "It is likely to occur" includes that the second expected performance is not executed (0%) in the variable performance based on winning in the first start opening 121 in the specific time-saving game state. In addition, "the second expected performance is executed more in the variable performance based on winning the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state than in the variable performance based on winning in the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. "Easy" includes that no zone performance is executed (0%) in the variable performance based on winning in the first start opening 121 in the specific time saving game state.
Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the variable performance based on winning to the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state is better than the variable presentation based on winning to the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. It was explained that the expected performance is likely to be executed. Here, "the variable performance based on winning the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state is better than the fluctuating presentation based on winning the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. "Easy to be executed" also includes that the second expected performance is not executed (0%) in the variable performance based on winning in the second start opening 122 in the specific time-saving game state. In addition, "the second expected performance is executed better in the variable performance based on winning in the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state than in the variable performance based on winning in the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. "Easy to be played" includes the fact that no zone performance is executed (0%) in the variable performance based on winning in the second start opening 122 in the specific time-saving game state.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the specific time-saving gaming state, the variable effect based on winning in the second starting port 122 is better than the variable effect based on winning in the first starting port 121. explained that it is easy to implement. Here, ``In the specific time-saving gaming state, the second role performance is executed more in the variable effect based on winning in the second starting opening 122 than in the variable acting based on winning in the first starting opening 121.''"Easy" includes the fact that the second accessory performance is not executed (0%) in the variable performance based on winning in the first start opening 121 in the specific time-saving game state. In addition, "In the specific time-saving game state, the second role performance is easier to execute when the variable performance is based on winning at the second starting opening 122 than when the fluctuating performance is based on winning at the first starting opening 121. In particular, this includes the fact that in the variable presentation based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving game state, none of the accessory presentations are executed (0%).
In addition, in this embodiment, the variable effect based on winning the first starting hole 121 in the normal gaming state is better than the variable effect based on winning the first starting hole 121 in the specific time saving gaming state. It was explained that it is easy to perform a physical presentation. Here, "the variable performance based on winning in the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state is better than the variable performance based on winning in the first starting port 121 in the specific time saving gaming state. ``Easy to be executed'' includes that the second role-playing effect is not executed (0%) in the variable effect based on winning in the first start opening 121 in the specific time-saving game state. In addition, "the variable performance based on winning the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state is better than the fluctuating performance based on winning the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. "Easy to be played" includes that in the variable presentation based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, no accessory presentation is executed (0%).
Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the variable performance based on winning to the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state is better than the variable presentation based on winning to the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. It was explained that it is easy to perform role effects. Here, "the variable performance based on winning the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state is better than the fluctuating presentation based on winning the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. ``is likely to be executed'' includes that the second role-playing effect is not executed (0%) in the variable effect based on winning in the second start opening 122 in the specific time-saving game state. In addition, “the variable performance based on winning the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state is better than the variable presentation based on winning the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. "Easy to be executed" includes the fact that none of the accessory effects are executed (0%) in the variable presentation based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving game state.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, in the specific time-saving gaming state, the second color effect is better in the variable effect based on winning in the second starting port 122 than in the variable effect based on winning in the first starting port 121. I explained that it is easy to implement. Here, ``In the specific time-saving gaming state, the second color effect is more likely to be executed when the variable effect is based on winning at the second starting opening 122 than when the variable effect is based on winning at the first starting opening 121.'' In particular, this includes the fact that the second color performance is not executed (0%) in the variable performance based on winning in the first start opening 121 in the specific time saving game state. Furthermore, "in the specific time-saving gaming state, the second color effect is more likely to be executed when the variable effect is based on winning at the second starting port 122 than when the variable effect is based on winning at the first starting port 121." In particular, this includes the fact that no effect presentation is executed (0%) in the variable presentation based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 121 in the specific time saving game state.
Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the variable effect based on winning in the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state is better than the variable effect based on winning in the first starting port 121 in the specific time saving gaming state. It was explained that the performance is easy to execute. Here, "the second color effect is executed better in the variable effect based on winning the first starting hole 121 in the normal gaming state than in the variable effect based on winning in the first starting hole 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. "Easy to be played" also includes that the second color effect is not executed (0%) in the variable effect based on winning in the first start opening 121 in the specific time-saving game state. In addition, "the second color effect is executed more easily in the variable effect based on winning in the first starting hole 121 in the normal gaming state than in the variable effect based on winning in the first starting hole 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. "Easy" includes that no effect presentation is executed (0%) in the variable presentation based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state.
Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the variable performance based on winning to the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state is better than the variable presentation based on winning to the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. It was explained that color rendering is easy to perform. Here, "the second color effect is better in the variable effect based on winning in the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state than in the variable effect based on winning in the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. "Easy to be executed" also includes that the second color effect is not executed (0%) in the variable effect based on winning in the second start opening 122 in the specific time saving game state. In addition, "the second color effect is executed better in the variable effect based on winning in the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state than in the variable effect based on winning in the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. "Easy to be played" includes that no effect presentation is executed (0%) in the variable presentation based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the specific time saving gaming state, the second sound effect is better in the variable effect based on winning in the second starting hole 122 than in the variable effect based on winning in the first starting hole 121. I explained that it is easy to implement. Here, ``In the specific time-saving gaming state, the second sound performance is easier to execute when the variable performance is based on winning at the second starting port 122, rather than the fluctuating performance based on winning at the first starting port 121. ” includes that the second sound performance is not executed (0%) in the variable performance based on winning in the first start opening 121 in the specific time saving game state. In addition, "In the specific time saving gaming state, the second sound performance is more likely to be executed when the variable performance is based on winning at the second starting port 122, rather than the variable performance based on winning at the first starting port 121." In particular, in the variable performance based on winning the first start opening 121 in the specific time-saving game state, it also includes that no sound performance is executed based on the preliminary determination result (0%).
In addition, in this embodiment, the variable effect based on winning in the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state is better than the variable effect based on winning in the first starting port 121 in the specific time saving gaming state. It was explained that the performance is easy to execute. Here, ``the second sound effect is executed more in the variable effect based on winning in the first starting hole 121 in the normal gaming state than in the variable effect based on winning in the first starting hole 121 in the specific time saving gaming state. "Easy to be played" also includes that the second sound performance is not executed (0%) in the variable performance based on winning in the first start opening 121 in the specific time-saving game state. In addition, "the second sound effect is executed more in the variable effect based on winning in the first starting hole 121 in the normal gaming state than in the variable effect based on winning in the first starting hole 121 in the specific time saving gaming state. ``Easy'' includes that in the variable presentation based on winning in the first start opening 121 in the specific time saving game state, none of the sound presentations based on the preliminary determination result is executed (0%).
Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the variable performance based on winning to the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state is better than the variable presentation based on winning to the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. It was explained that sound production is easy to perform. Here, "the second sound performance is better in the variable performance based on winning in the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state than in the variable performance based on winning in the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. "Easy to be executed" also includes that the second sound effect is not executed (0%) in the variable effect based on winning in the second start opening 122 in the specific time saving game state. In addition, "the second sound performance is executed better in the variable performance based on winning in the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state than in the variable performance based on winning in the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. "Easy to be played" includes that in the variable performance based on winning in the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving game state, none of the sound performances based on the preliminary determination result is executed (0%).

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, it has been explained that when a game ball enters the first start opening 121 in the specific time saving game state, the effect sound of the change effect is not output. Here, "not outputting the performance sound of the change effect when a game ball enters the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state" means that the game ball enters the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. This also includes not outputting the effect sound of the change effect because the change effect is not performed in the case of winning a prize. In addition, "if a game ball enters the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the effect sound of the change effect is not output" means that the game ball enters the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. In this case, since the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 are not displayed, the change effect is not performed, which also includes not outputting the effect sound of the change effect.
Furthermore, in the present embodiment, it has been explained that when a game ball enters the second starting port 122 in the specific time saving game state, the effect sound of the change effect is not output. Here, "not outputting the performance sound of the change effect when a game ball enters the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state" means that the game ball enters the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. This also includes not outputting the effect sound of the change effect because the change effect is not performed in the case of winning a prize. In addition, in "not outputting the effect sound of the change effect when a game ball enters the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state", a game ball enters the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. In this case, since the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 are not displayed, the change effect is not performed, which also includes not outputting the effect sound of the change effect.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, it has been explained that the sound effect of the chance effect may not be output from the speaker 156 in the variable effect based on winning at the first start opening 121 in the specific time saving game state. Here, "in the variable production based on winning at the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the sound effect of the chance production is not output from the speaker 156" includes the first starting port in the specific time-saving gaming state. In the variable performance based on winning in 121, it also includes that the sound effect of the chance performance is not output because the chance performance is not executed.
Furthermore, in the present embodiment, it has been explained that the sound effect of the chance effect may not be output from the speaker 156 in the variable effect based on winning in the second starting port 122 in the specific time saving gaming state. Here, "in the variable production based on winning at the second starting port 122 in the specific time saving gaming state, the sound effect of the chance production is not output from the speaker 156" means that the sound effect of the chance production is not output from the speaker 156. In the variable performance based on winning in 122, it also includes that the sound effect of the chance performance is not output because the chance performance is not executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the specific time saving gaming state, the variable effect based on winning in the first starting hole 121 is better than the variable effect based on winning in the second starting hole 122. Explained that the execution rate was low. Each production includes, for example, SP reach production, SPSP reach production, pseudo-continuous production, change production, chance production, zone production, character production, effect production, sound production, light emission production when winning, button operation production, and expectation level. Examples include a performance, a sub-performance, a multiple performance, a performance displaying a special symbol, a performance in which the pending image 52 moves, a motion performance, a vibration performance, and the like. Here, each of the above-mentioned effects may be executed even if it is a variable effect based on winning the first start opening 121 in the specific time saving gaming state, but when the fourth right-handed image 525 is displayed or , the above-mentioned effects may not be executed when the voice "Please hit right" is being output.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a variable performance is performed based on winnings in the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, and a variable presentation is performed based on winnings in the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state. We explained the execution rate of a specific performance depending on the situation. In addition, there are specific cases in which a variable performance is performed based on winnings in the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state and a case in which a variable performance is performed based on winnings in the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state. The execution rate of the production was explained. In addition, there are specific cases in which a variable performance is performed based on winnings to the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state, and a case in which a variable performance is performed based on winnings to the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state. We explained the execution rate of the performance. Specific productions include, for example, change production, chance production, zone production, role production, effect production, sound production, light emission production upon winning, button operation production, expectation production, sub production, multiple production, and special designs. Examples include a display displaying a , a motion display in which the pending image 52 moves, a motion display, a vibration display, and the like. Here, the execution rate of the specific performance mentioned above may be the execution rate of the specific performance before the start of the ready-to-win performance. Moreover, the execution rate of the specific performance mentioned above may be the execution rate of the specific performance after the start of the reach performance. Moreover, the execution rate of the specific performance mentioned above may be the execution rate of the specific performance when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss. Moreover, the execution rate of the specific performance mentioned above may be the execution rate of the specific performance when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. Moreover, the execution rate of the specific performance mentioned above may be the execution rate of the specific performance when a variable performance is performed based on the number of reservations being a specific number.
Furthermore, in the present embodiment, in the specific time-saving gaming state, the variable effect based on winning in the first starting opening 121 is more favorable than the variable acting based on winning in the second starting opening 122. explained that the execution rate is small. Here, in the specific time saving gaming state, the type of specific performance performed is more variable in the variable performance based on winning in the first starting opening 121 than in the variable performance based on winning in the second starting opening 122. It may be less.
In addition, in this embodiment, the variable performance based on winning the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state is better than the variable presentation based on winning the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state. It was explained that the execution rate of the performance is small. Here, the variable performance based on winning the first starting port 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state is better than the variable performance based on winning the first starting port 121 in the normal gaming state. The number of types may be reduced.
In addition, in this embodiment, the variable performance based on winning the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state is better than the fluctuating presentation based on winning the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state. It was explained that the execution rate of certain performances is small. Here, the variable performance based on winning to the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state is better than the variable performance based on winning to the second starting port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state. The number of types may be reduced.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, it has been explained that in the variable performance based on winning in the first start opening 121 in the specific time saving game state, the sound effect of the special performance at the time of fluctuation may not be output from the speaker 156. Here, "in the variable performance based on winning the first start opening 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the sound effect of the special performance at the time of variation is not output from the speaker 156" means that the first starting in the specific time-saving gaming state The variable performance based on winning in the mouth 121 also includes the fact that the special performance at the time of fluctuation is not outputted because the special performance at the time of fluctuation is not executed.
In addition, in the present embodiment, it has been explained that in the variable performance based on winning in the second starting port 122 in the specific time saving game state, the sound effect of the special performance at the time of fluctuation may not be output from the speaker 156. Here, "in the variable performance based on winning the second starting port 122 in the specific time-saving gaming state, the sound effect of the special performance at the time of variation is not output from the speaker 156" means that the second starting in the specific time-saving gaming state The variable performance based on winning in the mouth 122 also includes the fact that the special performance at the time of fluctuation is not outputted because the special performance at the time of fluctuation is not executed.

Moreover, the operation means used in this embodiment is not limited to the effect button 161, the effect key 162, etc.
For example, a production lever may be used as the operating means. The production lever is an operation means that can be pulled toward the player by the player. This production lever may be provided integrally with the production button 161, for example. For example, by protruding the production button 161 so as to extend upward, this protruding portion may become a production lever, which may be provided so that it can be operated by the player. Then, instead of displaying the button operation image 69 described above, a lever operation image that prompts the user to operate the production lever may be displayed as a lever operation production. Moreover, when the lever operation image is displayed, the effect button 161 may extend upward, thereby allowing the effect lever to be operated. Then, when the production lever is operated while the lever operation image is displayed, the production performed by operating the production button 161 during the button operation production described above is executed as the lever operation production. Good too. In other words, in the lever operation performance, the effective period of the operation of the performance lever is determined as the display period of the lever operation image. Below, the button operation performance and the lever operation performance may be referred to as the operation means operation performance.

Further, the performance performed when the operating means is operated during the operation means operation performance is not limited to the above example. For example, as shown in FIG. 72 (11), FIG. 83 (16), etc., when a role-playing effect is being executed by operating the operating means during the operating means operation effect, the effect control unit 300 A vibration effect that causes the button 161 to vibrate may be performed. The vibration effect executed in response to the operation of the operating means may be hereinafter referred to as an operation vibration effect.

Further, the vibration effect is not limited to the effect performed when the operating means is operated.
For example, as shown in FIG. 67 (13) and FIG. 76 (11), even if the vibration effect is executed while the accessory effect is being executed as a preliminary determination effect without any operation of the operating means, good. A vibration performance that is executed without an operation means operation performance may be hereinafter referred to as a non-operation vibration performance.

In this embodiment, the variable performance in which a non-operation vibration performance is performed is preferred to the fluctuation performance in which a non-operation vibration performance is performed, which is a performance in which a vibration performance is not performed and a suggestion performance suggesting that a jackpot game may be executed. The jackpot game may be more easily executed. Examples of the suggestive presentation include effect presentations, sound presentations, etc. as preliminary determination presentations, as shown in FIG. 67 (15). In addition, a variable performance in which a non-operation vibration performance is performed for a predetermined period after the start of a variable performance is more likely to lead to a jackpot game than a variable performance in which a suggestive performance is performed for a predetermined period after the start of the fluctuation performance. You can make it easier. Examples of the predetermined period after the start of the variable performance include a period from the start of the variable performance until the start of the ready-to-reach performance, or the first decorative pattern 41 (left decorative pattern 41) after the start of the variable performance. Examples include the period until temporary suspension.
That is, the performance control unit 300 can execute a suggestion performance and a vibration performance while executing a variable performance, and the vibration performance includes an operation vibration performance and a non-operation vibration performance, and the vibration performance includes an operation vibration performance and a non-operation vibration performance. In the subsequent predetermined period, the degree of expectation that a jackpot game will be executed is higher when the non-operation vibration effect is executed than when the suggestion effect is executed.
In addition, in the first mode such as the normal gaming state, the non-operation vibration performance is more likely to be executed during the predetermined period after the start of the variable performance than in the second mode such as the special time saving gaming state or the specific time saving gaming state. You can. In this case, even in the first mode, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a non-operation vibration performance will be performed, with a high degree of expectation that a jackpot game will be performed.
Further, in the second mode, the degree of expectation that a jackpot game will be executed when the non-operation vibration performance is executed in a predetermined period after the start of the variable performance may be higher than in the first mode.
Further, during a predetermined period after the start of the variable performance, the degree of expectation that the jackpot game will be executed may be higher when the non-operation vibration performance is performed than when the operation vibration performance is performed. Further, during a predetermined period after the start of the variable performance, the degree of expectation that the jackpot game will be executed may be higher when the operation vibration performance is performed than when the non-operation vibration performance is performed.

Further, when a vibration performance is executed while operating the performance lever, the vibration of the performance button 161 generated in the vibration performance may be transmitted to the player via the performance lever. On the other hand, even if a vibration effect is executed while operating the effect key 162, the vibration of the effect button 161 generated in the vibration effect may not be transmitted to the player via the effect key 162. . In addition, the effect button 161 that occurs in the vibration effect is better when the vibration effect is executed while operating the effect lever than when the vibration effect is executed when the effect key 162 is operated. The vibrations may be strongly transmitted to the player via the operation object.

Further, in this embodiment, the valid period of the operation of the production button 161 includes a first valid period and a second valid period. The first valid period is a period during which specific images such as the menu display image 504 and the customer waiting image 505 are displayed. Further, the second valid period is a period during which the operating means operation image is displayed. Examples of the operation means operation image include a button operation image 69, a lever operation image, and the like. The vibration effect may be more easily executed when the operating means is operated during the second effective period than when the operating means is operated during the first effective period. Furthermore, the maximum period of the first validity period may be longer than the maximum period of the second validity period.

In addition, in this embodiment, the execution rate of the third performance in the variable performance based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 122 in the second mode is as follows: It has been explained that it may be the same as the execution rate of the third effect in the variable effect based on. Here, "the execution rate of the third performance in the variable performance based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 122 in the second mode is the fluctuation based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 121 in the second mode. "The same execution rate as the third performance in the performance" means that the variable performance based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 122 in the second mode and the execution rate of the game ball to the first starting port 121 in the second mode. The variable performance based on winning a prize also includes the fact that the third performance is not executed.
In addition, in this embodiment, the execution rate of the first performance in the variable performance based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 122 in the second mode is as follows: It has been explained that the execution rate may be the same as the execution rate of the first performance in the variable performance based on. Here, "the execution rate of the first performance in the variable performance based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 122 in the second mode is the fluctuation based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 121 in the second mode. "The same execution rate as the first performance in the performance" means that the variable performance based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 122 in the second mode, and the execution rate of the game ball to the first starting port 121 in the second mode. The variable performance based on winning a prize may include the fact that the first performance is not executed.
In addition, in this embodiment, the execution rate of the second performance in the variable performance based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 122 in the second mode is as follows: It has been explained that it may be the same as the execution rate of the second performance in the variable performance based on . Here, "the execution rate of the second performance in the variable performance based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 122 in the second mode is the fluctuation based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 121 in the second mode. "The same execution rate as the second performance in the performance" means that the variable performance based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 122 in the second mode and the execution rate of the game ball to the first starting port 121 in the second mode. The variable performance based on winning a prize includes the fact that the second performance is not executed.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, it has been explained that an effect image is displayed in the effect production. Here, the effect image also includes a change image 62, a chance image 63, and the like.

In addition, in this embodiment, each of the above effects performed when the number of reservations at the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122 is "1" is The effect may be performed when the number of reservations is "2", "3", or "4". In addition, each of the above performances performed when the number of reservations at the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122 is "4", the number of reservations at the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122 is "1" ”, “2”, or “3”. In other words, it may be an effect that is performed when the number of reservations at the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122 is a specific number. In this case, the specific number may be any number of reservations.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, it has been explained that the non-operation vibration effect is more easily executed in the first mode than in the second mode during the predetermined period after the start of the variable effect. Here, the fact that "the non-operational vibration effect is more likely to be executed in the predetermined period after the start of the variable effect in the first mode than in the second mode" means that in the second mode, after the start of the variable effect, This also includes the fact that the non-operation vibration effect is not executed (0%) during the predetermined period of time.
Furthermore, in the present embodiment, it has been explained that the vibration effect is more likely to be executed when the operating means is operated during the second effective period than when the operating means is operated during the first effective period. . Here, the fact that "the vibration effect is more likely to be executed when the operating means is operated during the second effective period than when the operating means is operated during the first effective period" includes the first This also includes the case where the vibration effect is not executed (0%) when the operating means is operated during the valid period.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, an event has been described in which a variable effect is performed based on winning in the first start opening 121 in the specific time saving gaming state, but the present invention is not limited to this. Each of the above-mentioned events when a variable performance is performed based on winning in the first starting port 121 in the special time-saving gaming state is the same as when a variable performance is performed based on winning in the first starting port 121 in the special time-saving gaming state. It may be an event. That is, regarding the event where a variable performance is performed based on winning in the first start opening 121 in the special time-saving gaming state, the "specific time-saving gaming state" may be read as the "special time-saving gaming state". Further, regarding the event where a variable performance is performed based on winning in the second start opening 122 in the special time-saving gaming state, the "specific time-saving gaming state" may be read as the "special time-saving gaming state". Further, in these cases, the "specific time saving remaining number of times image 524" may be replaced with "special time saving remaining number of times image 79". For example, when a game ball enters the first starting port 121 in the special time-saving game state, the production control unit 300 does not display the information display and updates the display mode of the special time-saving remaining number image 79. good. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the above-mentioned "second mode" includes not only the specific time-saving game state but also the special time-saving game state. Further, the special image based on the number of executions of the variation also includes a special time saving remaining number image 79.

Furthermore, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 has a low probability state where the winning probability is low and a high probability state where the winning probability is higher than the low probability state based on the winning probability of the jackpot lottery, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a specific time saving gaming state. The events described above may be taken as events regarding high probability states. Furthermore, the above-mentioned events regarding the special time-saving gaming state may be taken as events regarding the high-probability state. The events described above regarding the normal gaming state may also be taken as events regarding the low probability state. In this case, the low probability state is considered as the first mode. Further, the high probability state can be regarded as a second mode that is more advantageous to the player than the first mode. The high probability state can also be considered as a special mode controlled via the jackpot game.
In addition, the events described above for the special time-saving gaming state and the events described above for the specific time-saving gaming state are defined as the high-probability time-saving gaming state, which is a high-probability state and a time-saving state, and the high-probability time-saving gaming state, which is a high-probability state and no time-saving state. It may be regarded as a probability time saving no game state and a low probability time saving gaming state which is a low probability state and is a time saving state. The events described above regarding the normal gaming state may be regarded as events regarding the low probability time saving no gaming state which is a low probability state and no time saving state. In this case, the low probability time-saving no-gaming state is regarded as the first mode. Further, the high probability time saving gaming state, the high probability time saving no gaming state, and the low probability time saving gaming state are regarded as a second mode that is more advantageous to the player than the first mode. Further, the high probability time saving game state, the high probability time saving no game state, and the low probability time saving gaming state can also be regarded as special modes controlled via the jackpot game.
Further, the events described above regarding the special time-saving gaming state and the events described above regarding the specific time-saving gaming state may be regarded as a high probability time-saving gaming state and a high-probability time-saving no-gaming state. The events described above regarding the normal gaming state may be taken as events regarding the low probability time saving gaming state and the low probability time saving no gaming state. In this case, the low probability time saving gaming state and the low probability time saving no gaming state are regarded as the first mode. Further, the high probability time saving gaming state and the high probability time saving no gaming state can be regarded as a second mode that is more advantageous to the player than the first mode.
Moreover, each performance explained in the specific time-saving game state and the special time-saving game state can also be regarded as a performance when the first right-hitting image 75 is displayed. Moreover, each performance explained in the specific time saving game state and the special time saving game state can also be regarded as a performance when a decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness is displayed at the start of the fluctuation.

In addition, even if the result of the jackpot determination is a loss (that is, even if the random value for the special symbol lottery obtained at the time of winning the starting hole is a value indicating a loss), the special symbol obtained at the time of winning the prize If the random number value for the lottery (jackpot symbol random number value) is a predetermined value, the game may be shifted to a time-saving gaming state a predetermined number of times. This time-saving game state may be referred to as a special time-saving game state below. In this case, after displaying three predetermined decorative symbols 41, a transition may be made to the special time-saving game state a predetermined number of times. The three predetermined decorative patterns 41 may be decorative patterns 41 that are not displayed when a jackpot is determined or when a jackpot is not determined and the normal game state does not shift to the time-saving game state. In other words, the three predetermined decorative symbols 41 may be the decorative symbols 41 that are displayed only when the normal gaming state is shifted to the time-saving gaming state when it is not determined that there is a jackpot.
Each of the events described in the specific time-saving gaming state and the special time-saving gaming state may be regarded as each event in the special time-saving gaming state.

In addition, in the case of transitioning to a specific time-saving gaming state based on the number of changes in the special symbol, the number of changes required to be controlled to the specific time-saving gaming state may be variable or fixed. . For example, if the required number of changes is variable, the specific time-saving gaming state is granted when the number of changes of the special symbol reaches the first number, and when the number of changes of the special symbol reaches the second number. There may also be times when a specific time-saving gaming state is granted. In this case, the number of time savings given may be varied depending on the number of variations of the special symbol, and the greater the number of variations, the greater the number of time savings may be set. Further, in the case of shifting to the special time saving gaming state based on the jackpot symbol random number value, the number of time reductions given may differ depending on the acquired jackpot symbol random number value. For example, if the obtained jackpot symbol random number value is the first value, the first time saving number is given, and if the obtained jackpot symbol random number value is the second value, the second time saving number is given. may be done. Further, the number of time saving times to be given may be made different depending on the case where the game state is transferred to the specific time saving game state based on the number of changes of the special symbol and the case where the game state is transferred to the special time saving game state based on the random value of the jackpot symbol. For example, if you want to move to a specific time-saving gaming state based on the number of changes of special symbols, you may want to move to a 50-time saving gaming state, and if you want to move to a special time-saving gaming state based on a random number of jackpot symbols, you can It is also possible to shift to a time-saving gaming state where the number of times is less than 30 times. On the contrary, the number of time-saving games may be made larger when the game state is shifted to the special time-saving game state based on the jackpot symbol random value than when the game state is shifted to the specific time-saving game state based on the number of changes of the special symbols. In addition, in the case of transitioning to the time-saving gaming state without going through the jackpot in this way, if the time-saving gaming state is further granted without going through the jackpot during the transitioned time-saving gaming state, a new The time-saving gaming state may continue for the number of time-saving times given to . For example, when 50 time-saving gaming states are granted without going through a jackpot, and the special symbol changes 30 times in the time-saving gaming state, if 50 time-saving gaming states are given without going through a jackpot, It is also possible to shift to a time-saving gaming state for 50 times. Alternatively, in this case, the number of time reductions may be added. For example, when 50 time-saving gaming states are granted without going through a jackpot, and the special symbol changes 30 times in the time-saving gaming state, if 50 time-saving gaming states are given without going through a jackpot, 50 newly awarded times may be added to the remaining 20 times to provide 70 time-saving gaming states. Further, during such a time-saving gaming state that does not involve a jackpot, a time-saving gaming state that does not involve a jackpot may not be provided. In addition, in a configuration in which the game state is shifted to the time-saving gaming state based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol or the random value of the jackpot symbol without going through the jackpot, a time-saving suggesting performance suggesting the shift to the time-saving gaming state may be performed. For example, when the number of changes in the special symbol is close to the predetermined upper limit number, the time-saving suggestion effect may be easily executed. Conversely, if the number of changes in the special symbol is close to the predetermined upper limit number, the time-saving suggestion performance may be difficult to perform. Further, the time-saving gaming state to which the game is transferred from the normal gaming state when it is not determined to be a jackpot may be a low-probability time-saving gaming state.

Although various performances of the pachinko gaming machine 100 have been described above, it is possible to apply or combine all or part of the explained contents to other performances even if there is no particular mention. In addition, although various examples of variable effects and modifications have been mentioned, it is possible to apply or combine the contents of such examples of variable effects and variations to other effects, etc., even if there is no mention in this document. It is. In addition, it is possible to combine various examples of variation effects and modifications, to replace parts of them, and to combine the configurations of the embodiments described above and each embodiment described below, even if this document does not mention it. It is.

(Second embodiment)
Hereinafter, a second embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings. Note that, in the following description, for convenience of explanation, each component is given a new reference numeral. That is, in the first embodiment, the second embodiment, and the third embodiment described below, the same reference numerals may be given to different structures.
Hereinafter, a second embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

(Configuration of gaming machine)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be explained using FIG. 121. FIG. 121 is an example of a front view of the gaming machine 1 in this embodiment.

The game machine 1 includes an outer frame 2, a game board mounting frame 3 rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 2, a glass frame 4 rotatably supported with respect to the game board mounting frame 3, A game board 5 is provided in which a game area 5a on which game balls flow down is formed.

The outer frame 2 has a rectangular base frame 2a whose central portion is open in the front and rear directions, and a decorative plate 2b attached to the lower front surface of the base frame 2a. ) is fixed via.

The game board mounting frame 3 has a mounting part (not shown) for mounting the game board 5 from the front, and is removable from the outer frame 2 via the first hinge mechanism part 6 at one end in the horizontal direction. The first hinge mechanism section 6 is rotatably supported using the first hinge mechanism section 6 as a fulcrum. Therefore, when the game board mounting frame 3 is rotated like a door with respect to the outer frame 2, the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 is exposed to the front, so that various devices installed on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 are exposed. It becomes possible to carry out maintenance, etc.

The glass frame 4 is removably connected to the front side of the game board mounting frame 3 via the second hinge mechanism part 7 at one end in the horizontal direction so as to cover the front of the mounting part of the game board mounting frame 3, It is rotatably supported using the second hinge mechanism section 7 as a fulcrum. Therefore, when the glass frame 4 is rotated with respect to the game board mounting frame 3 like a door, the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the front part of the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed.

An opening 8 (window) that opens in the front-back direction is formed in the approximate center of the upper part of the glass frame 4, and a transparent member 8a (glass plate, acrylic plate, etc.) is formed to close the opening 8 from the rear. is attached, and the game area 5a of the game board 5 mounted on the mounting portion of the game board mounting frame 3 can be viewed through the opening 8 and the transparent member 8a.

Around the opening 8 of the glass frame 4, there is an audio output device 9 consisting of a speaker, a frame lighting device 10 having a plurality of decorative lamps (LEDs), and game balls etc. put out from a payout device 100 to be described later. an upper tray 11 for storing a plurality of game balls; a lower tray 12 for receiving and storing game balls that do not fit into the upper tray 11 and have flowed into the overflow ball channel described later; and a game ball launching operation. A firing operation device 13 is provided for performing this operation.

The audio output device 9 is provided at two locations on the top of the glass frame 4 with an interval between them, and outputs BGM (background music), SE (sound effects), etc. to perform sound (music, voice) production. It has become. Further, a plurality of frame illumination devices 10 are provided around the opening 8, and produce effects by illumination by changing the irradiation direction and emitted light color of each lamp (LED). Further, the frame illumination device 10 includes a notification LED 10a that is controlled to turn on/blink when the glass frame 4 is opened or when a dispensing abnormality, which will be described later, occurs.

In the upper tray 11, the bottom surface of the game ball storage portion 11a is sloped downward toward the firing operation device 13 (rightward), and a ball feeding solenoid 11b is provided at the end of the downward slope. . When the game balls stored in the storage part 11a of the upper tray 11 flow down and reach the ball feed solenoid 11b, the game balls are sent out one by one toward the game board mounting frame 3 side by the operation of the ball feed solenoid 11b.

Furthermore, in the center front side of the upper plate 11, there are a production button device 16 and a selection button device 18 (see FIG. 121) that function as input devices for determining and selecting various productions to be described later. They are arranged side by side on the left and right.

The performance button device 16 includes a performance button 17 (not shown) that can perform a decision operation etc. (operation input), a performance button detection switch 17a (see FIG. 122) that detects an operation on the performance button 17, and a performance button A button driving device 17b (see FIG. 122) for driving the game machine 17 is provided, and the player can input predetermined information into the gaming machine 1.

The effect button 17 performs effect light emission by lighting the effect button LED (full color), which is a part of the frame lighting device 10 (see FIG. 122), in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, white, red, rainbow color). It is now possible. In addition, it is possible to move in the vertical direction between the standby position (origin position) located below and the production position located above by the driving force of the button drive motor that is a part of the button drive device 17b. The button position detection sensor (not shown) detects that the button is at the origin position. Furthermore, it is possible to perform a production operation by vibrating in a predetermined vibration mode using the driving force of a button vibration motor that is a part of the button drive device 17b, so that production can be performed even when the button vibration motor is vibrating. Button 17 can be operated.

The selection button device 18 includes a cross key 19 (not shown) capable of performing operations such as selection operations, and a cross key detection switch 19a (not shown) connected to the cross key 19 for detecting operations on the cross key 19. (see FIG. 122) is provided, allowing the player to input predetermined information into the gaming machine 1.

Further, on the right side of the upper tray 11, there is provided a rental operation section 20 that can perform operations for lending game balls and returning a storage medium such as a card storing a balance. When the lending button of the lending operation unit 20 is operated, the remaining amount stored in the storage medium accepted by the ball lending machine (not shown) attached to the gaming machine 1 is subtracted, and the game balls are lent out. When the return button of the operation unit 20 is operated, the storage medium is returned from the ball rental machine (not shown).

An overflow ball channel (not shown) is formed between the upper tray 11 and the lower tray 12 for receiving game balls that cannot fit into the upper tray 11 and guiding them to the lower tray 12. In addition, a tray full detection switch 32a (see FIG. 122) is provided in the middle of the overflow ball flow path to detect when the lower tray 12 is full of game balls. While this is being detected, the payout of game balls by the payout device 100, which will be described later, is stopped.

The firing operation device 13 includes a base body 14 fixed to the glass frame 4, a firing handle 15 rotatably provided on the base body 14, and a touch sensor that detects when the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15. 15a (see FIG. 122), a firing volume 15b (see FIG. 122) consisting of a variable resistor whose resistance value changes depending on the rotation angle of the firing handle 15, and a plurality of firing volumes 15b (see FIG. 122) for causing the firing handle 15 to emit light in a predetermined manner. A handle LED (frame lighting device 10) is provided. When the touch sensor 15a detects that the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15, the ball feeding solenoid 11b is activated and game balls are sent out one by one.

The game board mounting frame 3 includes a game board mounting part 25 for mounting the game board 5, a firing device 26 for firing a game ball toward the gaming area 5a, the game board mounting frame 3, and a glass frame. A locking mechanism 27 for locking the glass frame 4 in a closed state and an open detection switch 31a for detecting opening (opening/closing) of the glass frame 4 are provided.

The game board mounting portion 25 is formed in the shape of a concave chamber with a front opening at approximately the center near the top of the game board mounting frame 3, and the game board 5 can be stored from the front. An opening that opens in the front-rear direction is provided at the back of the concave chamber of the game board mounting portion 25, and various devices installed on the back side of the game board 5 can be installed at the rear of the game machine 1 through this opening. Coming.

The firing device 26 includes a firing member 28 for firing a game ball, a firing solenoid 28b (see FIG. 122) for driving the firing member 28, and a solenoid 28b (see FIG. 122) that extends upward from the firing member 28 toward the lower left end of the game board. An inclined firing rail 29 and a stopper 30 for stopping the game ball A at a firing position which is the inclined lower end of the firing rail 29 are provided. When the game ball sent out by the ball sending solenoid 11b is received at the shooting position, the game ball A is shot out toward the game area 5a by the operation of the shooting member 28.

The lock mechanism 27 is provided on the right side of the game board mounting part 25, and the front end of the cylinder in which the keyhole is formed is exposed on the front side of the glass frame 4. Then, when a special key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder and rotated in one direction, the lock of the game board mounting frame 3 is released and the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed, and when rotated in the other direction, the glass frame 4 is unlocked and the glass frame 4 can be opened and closed.

At a position near the outer edge of the game board 5, there are a curved inner rail 35, a curved outer rail 36 located outside the inner rail 35, and a guide member that guides the game ball toward the center of the game area 5a. 37 are provided. A firing ball guide path 38 is formed between the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36 for guiding the game ball fired by the firing device 26 to the upstream part of the gaming area 5a. Furthermore, an out port 39 is formed at the most downstream part of the gaming area 5a to guide the game balls that have flown down to the outside of the gaming area (to the collecting section of the gaming board mounting frame 3).

Approximately in the center of the gaming area 5a, a frame-shaped decorative frame 40, called a so-called center case, that restricts the entry of game balls into the interior is provided, and a performance space 40a is formed inside the decorative frame 40. Further, a warp device 41 is provided on the side of the decorative frame 40 to introduce the game balls flowing down the game area 5a into the decorative frame 40, and a warp device 41 is provided at the lower part of the decorative frame 40 to A stage section 42 is provided for rolling the game balls introduced into the interior and making them flow down below the decorative frame 40.

At the bottom of the gaming area 5a, a plurality of (four in this embodiment) general winning holes 43 in which game balls can always be entered are provided at intervals, and these general winning holes 43 When a game ball that has won a prize (entered a ball) is detected by the general winning hole detection switch 43a (see FIG. 122), a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are released from the payout device 100 (not shown) as prize balls. It is dispensed onto plate 11.

On both sides (left side area, right side area) of the game area 5a, there are provided normal game gates 44 (normal game start area) through which the game balls can pass, and the game balls that have passed through the general game gates 44 When detected by the gate detection switch 44a (see FIG. 122), a normal symbol winning lottery (auxiliary game determination) is performed. Note that the winning lottery for normal symbols will be described later.

At the lower part of the gaming area 5a and directly below the stage part 42, a first starting opening 45 (special figure starting area) is provided in which a game ball can always enter a prize (ball), and this first starting opening 45 When a game ball that has won a prize (entered a ball) is detected by the first starting port detection switch 45a (see FIG. 122), a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 3 balls) are transferred from the payout device 100 to the upper tray 11 as prize balls. It is about to be paid out. In addition to paying out prize balls, a jackpot determination (special game determination) of a first special symbol (identification information), which will be described later, is performed.

Below the first starting port 45, a game ball is placed in a closed state (basic mode) in which it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (winning a winning lottery with a normal symbol). A variable starting section 46 is provided which is converted into an open state (special mode) in which winning (ball hitting) is possible or easy.

The variable starting part 46 includes a second starting port 47 (special figure starting area) in which a game ball can enter a prize (ball entering), and a second starting port 47 (special figure starting area) that allows a game ball to enter a prize (entering ball) into the second starting port 47. A starting port detection switch 47a (see FIG. 122), a movable member 48 that converts (variably) the second starting port 47 between a closed state and an open state, and a second starting port opening/closing solenoid that opens and closes the movable member 48. 48b (see FIG. 122). When the second starting port 47 is in the closed state, it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to win, and when the second starting port 47 is in the open state, the winning of the game ball ( ball entry) becomes possible or easy.

Further, when a game ball that has won (entered) the second starting port 47 is detected by the second starting port detection switch 47a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, three) are delivered from the payout device 100 to the top tray as prize balls. It is set to be paid out on the 11th. In addition to paying out prize balls, a jackpot determination (special game determination) of a second special symbol (identification information), which will be described later, is performed.

A prize opening lamp NR (not shown) is provided between the first starting port 45 and the variable starting section 46 to illuminate the area around the first starting port 45 and the variable starting section 46 in a predetermined manner. It is possible to perform a light emitting effect by emitting light from a panel illumination device 76 having a plurality of lamps (full color LEDs, etc.).

Above the guiding member 37 and downstream of the right-hand general figure gate 44, there is a closed state in which it is impossible to win a game ball (ball) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (winning the jackpot determination of the special symbol). A variable winning section 49 is provided which is converted from the basic mode to an open state (special mode) in which a game ball can be won.

The variable winning part 49 includes a big winning hole 50 in which a game ball can be won (balls entered), and a big winning hole detection switch 50a (Fig. 122), an opening/closing member 51 for converting (variable) the big winning opening 50 between a closed state and an open state, and a big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b for opening and closing the opening/closing member 51. When the grand prize opening 50 is in a closed state, it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball, and when the grand prize opening 50 is in an open state, winning a game ball (entering a ball) is difficult. ) becomes possible or easy.

Further, when a game ball that has won (entered) the big winning hole 50 is detected by the big winning hole detection switch 50a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 15 balls) are transferred from the payout device 100 to the upper tray 11 as prize balls. paid out.

On the back side of the game board 5, there are a general winning opening 43, a first starting opening 45, a second starting opening 47, and a general winning opening detection switch 43a, a first starting opening detection switch 45a, An out ball flow path is provided that receives the game balls detected by the second starting port detection switch 47a and the big winning port detection switch 50a, and the game balls that have flowed into the out port 39, collects them, and allows them to flow down. An out-ball detection switch 52a is provided at the most downstream part of the ball flow path. The game balls flowing down this out ball channel and detected by the out ball detection switch 52a are discharged to the outside of the game machine 1 (island equipment) from the discharge port on the back side of the game machine 1.

Outside the gaming area 5a, there are a first special symbol display 60, a second special symbol display 61, a normal symbol display 62, a first special symbol reservation display 63, a second special symbol reservation display 64, as well as. A normal symbol holding display 65, a round number display 66 (see FIG. 122) that displays the number of rounds when a jackpot game (special game) is executed, which will be described later, and a time-saving game state during a jackpot game (special game). A right-handed display 67 (see FIG. 122) that prompts you to fire the game ball toward the right side of the gaming area 5a, and a status confirmation display that indicates that the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is set. A main information display device 59 consisting of a device 68 (see FIG. 122) is provided.

Further, a winning probability display sticker is attached near the main information display device 59 (not shown). On this winning probability display sticker, the jackpot winning probability (1/285 to 1/300) and set value (4 to 1) of the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment are printed. Note that the position where this winning probability display sticker 200 is pasted is just one example, and is not limited to the vicinity of the main information display device 59, but may be on the front (surface) of the gaming machine 1.

The first special symbol display device 60 is a variable display device for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot determination of the first special symbol, which is performed on the condition that a game ball enters the first starting port 45. The second special symbol display device 61 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot determination of the second special symbol, which is performed on the condition that the game ball enters the second starting port 47. The normal symbol display device 62 is a variable display for displaying (notifying) the result of the winning lottery of the normal symbol, which is performed on the condition that a game ball enters the prize gate 44. It is a vessel.

The jackpot determination of the first special symbol means that when a game ball enters the first starting hole 45, a random number value for jackpot determination, etc. (first special symbol determination information) is acquired, and the acquired jackpot determination This corresponds to comparing the random number value and the jackpot determination value to determine whether or not it is a "jackpot". In addition, when the jackpot determination of the first special symbol is performed, a variable display of the first special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display 60, and after a predetermined period of time, a stop display of the first special symbol indicating the lottery result is performed. be exposed. That is, the stop display of the first special symbol serves as notification of the lottery result.

Jackpot determination of the second special symbol means that when a game ball enters the second starting port 47, a random number value etc. for jackpot determination (second special symbol determination information) is acquired, and the acquired jackpot determination This corresponds to comparing the random number value and the jackpot determination value to determine whether or not it is a "jackpot". In addition, when the jackpot determination of the second special symbol is performed, a variable display of the second special symbol is performed on the second special symbol display 61, and after a predetermined period of time, a stop display of the second special symbol indicating the lottery result is performed. be exposed. That is, the stop display of the second special symbol serves as notification of the lottery result.

The first special symbol display device 60 and the second special symbol display device 61 are each composed of a plurality of LEDs, and in the variable display of each special symbol, the LEDs of the corresponding display blink at predetermined intervals or in a predetermined order. do. When the special symbols are to be stopped and displayed, the LEDs are lit in a manner that indicates the result of each jackpot determination (jackpot mode, loss mode).

In addition, in this embodiment, "jackpot" means executing a jackpot game (special game) in the jackpot determination (special game determination) of the first special symbol or the jackpot determination (special game determination) of the second special symbol. refers to the state in which one has acquired the right to do something. The term "jackpot game" refers to a game state in which a round game in which the jackpot 50 is opened in a predetermined manner is played a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 or 15 times).

In addition, although the maximum number of openings and the maximum opening time of the big prize opening 50 in each round game are predetermined, even before the maximum number of openings and the maximum opening time are reached, a predetermined number of game balls can be opened in the big winning opening 50. When (for example, 9 pieces) wins (balls entered), one round game ends. In other words, the "jackpot game (special game)" is a game state that is advantageous for the player in which the player can easily win the prize ball. In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to generate any of a plurality of types of jackpot games with different degrees of advantage to the player, which will be described in detail later.

The normal symbol winning lottery is to acquire a random number value for determining a hit when a game ball passes through the regular symbol gate 44, and compare the obtained random number value for determining a hit with the winning determination value to determine whether it is a "win". This corresponds to determining whether or not. In addition, when a winning lottery of a normal symbol is performed, a variable display of the normal symbol is performed on the normal symbol display 62, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, a stop display of the normal symbol indicating the lottery result is performed. That is, the stop display of the normal symbol serves as notification of the lottery result.

The normal symbol display 62 is composed of one or a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs blink at predetermined intervals or in a predetermined order in the variable display of the normal symbols. When the normal symbols are to be displayed in a stopped state, the LED lights up in a manner that indicates the result of the winning lottery (a winning manner or a losing manner).

In addition, in this embodiment, "winning" refers to a state in which the right to execute a winning state (auxiliary game) is acquired in a winning lottery of normal symbols. The term "winning game (auxiliary game)" refers to a game state in which the second starting port 47 is opened in a predetermined manner.

In addition, although the maximum number of openings and the maximum opening time of the second starting port 47 in the winning game (auxiliary game) are predetermined, the second starting port 47 may be opened even before the maximum number of openings or the maximum opening time is reached. The winning game (auxiliary game) ends when a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 9 balls) win a prize (balls entered). In other words, the "winning game (auxiliary game)" is a game state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is likely to be executed (the start condition for the variable display is likely to be satisfied). In addition, in this embodiment, a plurality of types of winning games (auxiliary games) with different degrees of advantage to the player are provided, which will be described in detail later.

The first special symbol holding display 63 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is used to determine the jackpot of the first special symbol that is stored when a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 (balls entered). This is for displaying the number of rights (first reserved memories) for performing a variable display), and lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of first reserved memories. Note that although up to four first reservation memories are stored, the number may be fewer or more than four.

The second special symbol holding display 64 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is used to determine the jackpot of the second special symbol that is stored when the game ball enters the second starting port 47 (balls entered). This is for displaying the number of rights (second pending memory) for performing the variable display), and lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of second pending memories. In addition, although up to four second reservation memories are stored, it may be fewer or more than four.

The normal symbol holding display 65 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and has the right to perform a normal symbol winning lottery (fluctuating display of normal symbols) that is stored when a game ball enters (passes) the common symbol gate 44. It is for displaying the number of (Fuzuzu pending memory), and lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of Fuzuzuzu pending memory. In addition, although up to four ordinary figures are stored in the storage, the number may be smaller or larger than four.

In addition, the 1st special symbol display 60 and/or the 2nd special symbol display 61 can also be comprised with 7 segment LED. For example, if you win a special symbol jackpot, "7" will be displayed as a stop sign, and if you lose, a "-" will be displayed as a stop sign, and while the variable display is in progress, the light will turn off and "-" will be displayed as a stop sign. ” should be repeated. In addition, before the start of the fluctuation display of the special symbol, the stop result of the previous fluctuation display is displayed by lighting the LED, so when the fluctuation display starts, the fluctuation display can be started by turning off the LED. It becomes easier to understand what has started.

The round number display 66 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is for displaying the number of rounds when a jackpot state (special game state) occurs. starts lighting up, continues lighting the LED during the jackpot game, and turns off the LED at the end of the jackpot game. For example, if it is a jackpot game with two rounds, only the fourth LED from the left will light up, and if it is a jackpot game with sixteen rounds, all the LEDs will light up.

The right-hand hitting indicator 67 is composed of one LED, and is a right-hand hitting indicator 67 that prompts you to fire the game ball toward the right side gaming area (so-called right-hand hitting) during the jackpot state (special game state) and during the time-saving game state. This is for displaying a winning display, and the LED lights up during the jackpot state (special game state) and during the time-saving game state.

The status confirmation indicator 68 is composed of one LED, and is for indicating that the setting change mode, which will be described later, or the setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is set. When the mode shifts to , the LED starts lighting up, and when the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode ends, the LED is turned off. In this way, the status confirmation display 68 indicating that the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is set is provided on the front (surface) of the gaming machine. It is possible to easily check whether the settings are set or not.

Note that the installation position of the status confirmation display 68 is just an example, and is not limited to the installation position of this embodiment, and may be at the front (surface) of the gaming machine 1.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display is displayed in the same manner (lit display) regardless of whether it is set to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, but the display is made so that it is possible to recognize which mode it is set to. You may. For example, when the setting change mode is set, the status confirmation display 68 may be lit, and when the setting confirmation mode is set, the status confirmation display 68 may be blinking. When the setting change mode is set, either the status confirmation display 68 or the second game information display device 69 lights up, and when the setting confirmation mode is set, the status is displayed. Only the confirmation display 68 may be displayed by lighting.

Further, in this embodiment, the status confirmation display 68 is provided as a dedicated display to indicate that the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is set, but it may also be used as another display. good. For example, in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the main information display device 59 and the second game information display device 69, which will be described later, are off, so these display devices may be used. Specifically, one LED of either the main information display device 59 or the second game information display device 69 may be turned on, or one LED of the main information display device 59 or the second game information display device 69 may be turned on. All LEDs may be turned on.

At the lower right inside of the gaming area 5a, there are a sub-first fluctuation display 81, a sub-second fluctuation display 82, a sub-first reservation display 83, a sub-second reservation display 84, and a sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85. A sub-information display device 80 is provided, which includes a sub-normal figure reservation display 86, and a sub-right-hitting display 87 that prompts the player to shoot the game ball toward the right side area of the gaming area 5a (so-called right-handed hitting). Note that the sub-information display device 80 is not provided with a display indicating that the sub-information display device 80 is set to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, such as the status confirmation display 68 described above.

The sub-first fluctuation display 81 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot determination of the first special symbol, and the sub-second fluctuation display 82 is for displaying the result of the jackpot determination of the second special symbol. (notification), and each is composed of one LED. Then, when the corresponding special symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner, the LED blinks at a predetermined interval (the first lamp symbol LZ or the second lamp symbol LZ is displayed in a variable manner), and when the corresponding special symbol is stopped and displayed, it is a jackpot. The result of the judgment (lights up if it's a jackpot, turns off if it's a loss) is displayed in a stopped state.

In addition, in the sub-first fluctuation display 81 and the sub-second fluctuation display 82, so that it can be grasped only whether or not the special symbol is being fluctuatedly displayed, it blinks and stops while the special symbol is being fluctuatedly displayed. It may be configured to turn on or off when displayed.

The sub-first reservation display 83 is for displaying the number of first reservation memories (number of reservations), and the sub-second reservation display 84 displays the number of second reservation memories (number of reservations). It is made up of two LEDs on the left and right. Then, when the number of reservations is "0", the left and right LEDs turn off, when the number of reservations is "1", the left LED lights up and the right LED goes out, and when the number of reservations is "2", the LED on the right turns off. The left and right LEDs light up, and when the number of reservations is "3", the left LED blinks and the right LED lights up, and when the number of reservations is "4", the left and right LEDs blink.

The sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the winning lottery, and is composed of one LED. Then, when the variable display of the normal symbols is started, the LED blinks at predetermined intervals (variable display). Then, when the normal symbols are stopped and displayed, an aspect indicating the result of the winning lottery (lights on in the case of a win, turns off in the case of a loss) is stopped and displayed.

In addition, in order to be able to grasp only whether or not the normal symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the sub-normal symbol fluctuation display 85 is configured to blink while the normal symbol is in the fluctuating display, and to turn on or off when the normal symbol is displayed in a stopped state. It's okay.

The sub-universal drawing reservation display 86 is for displaying the number of ordinary drawings (reservation number), and is constituted by two LEDs arranged on the left and right. Then, when the number of reserved general drawings is "0", the left and right LEDs turn off, and when the number of reserved general drawings is "1", the left LED lights up and the right LED goes out, and the number of reserved general drawings is ``1''. When the number of reservations is "2", the left LED blinks and the right LED lights up, and when the number of reserved ordinary cards is "4", the left and right LEDs blink.

A first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) made of a liquid crystal display is provided at the back of the production space 40a, and a , a second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) is provided, which is a liquid crystal display whose display area is smaller than that of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). A first movable member 73 is provided that resembles the same, and a circular second movable member 74 is provided on the right side of the performance space 40a.

The image display device consisting of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) displays various effects according to the progress of the game. Performance displays include customer waiting demonstration performances that are executed during a customer waiting state (standby state where the game is not in progress) where special symbols are not being displayed in a variable manner, and production symbols that are executed while special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner. There is a fluctuating effect accompanied by a fluctuating display of 70a.

The display section (effective display area) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is formed with three columns of variable display areas: a left area, a center area, and a right area. By scrolling the effect pattern 70a vertically (from top to bottom in this embodiment), the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a variable manner. In addition, a special symbol display area is formed in the lower right corner of the display section of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the special symbol TZ displayed in the special symbol display area is changed to a special symbol variable display. By correspondingly scrolling in the vertical direction (from top to bottom in this embodiment), the special symbol TZ is displayed in a variable manner.
Further, the first image display device 70 is composed of a plurality of layers, and can display an image on each of the plurality of layers.

In addition, the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are composed of, for example, patterns showing numbers from "1" to "9", and the special pattern displayed on the first special pattern display device 60 and the second special pattern display device 61. In response to (synchronized with) the fluctuating display of the symbols, the fluctuating display of the performance symbols 70a is performed. That is, in response to the start of the fluctuating display of the special symbol, the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a is started, and before the fluctuating display of the special symbol stops, the performance symbol 70a is temporarily stopped (swinging display), and the special symbol is fluctuating. In response to the stop display of the display, the fluctuating display of the effect pattern 70a is stopped (still display). Note that, in addition to the symbols indicating numbers, symbols indicating alphabets such as "A" to "F" may be provided as the effect symbols 70a.

Note that the "temporary stop display" is a display in which the performance symbols 70a are slightly swayed or deformed slightly to make it appear to the player that the performance symbols 70a are stopped (completely stopped). (not done).
On the other hand, a state in which the production pattern 70a completely stops after the "temporary stop display" is referred to as a "stop display." Note that although the expression "main stop" may be used below, it has the same meaning as "stop display."

In the stop display of the effect pattern 70a, the effect pattern 70a is stopped for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds) in a predetermined mode (loss mode, jackpot mode, etc.) indicating the result of jackpot determination. The jackpot mode (special result mode) is a combination of the same performance symbols such as "777" or the combination of regular performance symbols such as "357", and the loss mode is any other format. be. Note that the manner in which the performance symbols 70a are variably displayed is not limited to this, and may be one that scrolls in the left-right direction, or one that rotates (rotates) on the spot.

Also, during the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, various effect images such as reach effect, background images, characters, movies, etc. are displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) or the second image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), depending on the result of jackpot determination. By being displayed on the image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal), the player's expectations for a jackpot (special game) to be executed (hereinafter referred to as "jackpot winning expectation level") are increased. There is.

Here, "reach performance" is a jackpot game executed for the player in which a part of the combination of performance symbols 70a that informs a jackpot temporarily stops and other performance symbols 70a fluctuate. It means a pattern of variation that is expected to occur. For example, when a combination of 3-digit performance symbols 70a "777" is set as a combination of performance symbols 70a to notify a jackpot (jackpot result mode), two performance symbols 70a are displayed in the left and right regions. 7'', the game stops temporarily, and the remaining performance symbols 70a are fluctuating in the central area.

In addition, in this embodiment, there are six types of reach effects: "normal reach effect," "SP reach effect," "SPSP reach effect," "SPSP '7' reach effect," and "full rotation reach effect." be.

"Normal reach effect" is a reach state in which the background image before reach is displayed, two effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in the left and right areas, and the remaining effect pattern 70a is fluctuated in the center area. This is a reach performance that is performed with a .

"SP reach effect" is executed after the normal reach effect, and the effect pattern 70a with the reach state formed is displayed in a reduced size at the corner of the screen, and the effect is higher than the normal reach effect (the expectation of a jackpot is high) ) is a reach performance where the performance is performed.

"SPSP reach performance" is a reach performance that is executed after the normal reach performance or SP reach performance, and has a performance effect (higher expectation of a jackpot) than the normal reach performance or SP reach performance.

The "full rotation reach effect" is a reach effect that changes at a low speed when all the combinations of the plurality of effect symbols 70a that notify a jackpot are aligned. In this embodiment, this is a reach effect that is executed only when winning in the jackpot determination.

In this embodiment, the jackpot winning expectation degree related to the reach effect is higher in the order of normal reach effect<SP reach effect<SPSP reach effect<full rotation reach effect (jackpot confirmed).

In addition, at the bottom of the display section of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), a number of first special symbols with a number corresponding to the first reserved number of special symbols (U1), which is the number of the first reserved symbols currently stored in the normal gaming state, is displayed. A first reservation icon display area 70B for displaying reservation icons and a number of second reservation icons corresponding to the second special symbol reservation number (U2) which is the current number of second reservation storage in the specific gaming state. A second pending icon display area 70D for displaying the icon corresponding to (related to) the variable display of the special symbol (production symbol 70a) being executed in the normal gaming state and the specific gaming state. A region 70C is formed.

The first pending icon display area 70B is divided into a first display area 70B1, a second display area 70B2, a third display area 70B3, and a fourth display area 70B4 from the side closest to the icon display area 70C. The display units 70B1 to 70B4 display the number of first reservation icons corresponding to the number of first reserved special symbols (U1). In other words, the number of first reserved icons also increases or decreases in response to an increase or decrease in the number of first reserved special symbols (U1).

Specifically, the first display section 70B1 displays a first pending icon H11 indicating the first pending memory in which the variable display of the first special symbol is first performed, and the second display section 70B2 displays the first pending icon H11. The first pending icon H12 indicating the first pending memory is displayed on which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed third, and the third display section 70B3 displays the variable display of the first special symbol. A first pending icon H13 indicating the first pending memory is displayed, and the fourth display section 70B4 displays a first pending icon H14 indicating the first pending memory in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed fourth. be done.

The second pending icon display area 70D is divided into a first display area 70D1, a second display area 70D2, a third display area 70D3, and a fourth display area 70D4 from the side closest to the icon display area 70C. The display units 70D1 to 70D4 display second reservation icons in a number corresponding to the second special symbol reservation number (U2). In other words, the number of second reserved icons also increases or decreases in response to an increase or decrease in the number of second reserved special symbols (U2).

Specifically, the first display unit 70D1 displays a second hold icon H21 indicating the second hold memory in which the variable display of the second special symbol is first performed, and the second display unit 70D2 displays the second hold icon H21. A second pending icon H22 indicating a second pending memory is displayed in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed third, and the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed in the third display section 70D3. A second pending icon H23 indicating a second pending memory is displayed, and a second pending icon H24 indicating a second pending memory in which variable display of the second special symbol is executed fourth is displayed on the fourth display section 70D4. be done. In addition, in this embodiment, the "first reserved number of special symbols" may be referred to as the "first reserved number" and the "second reserved number of special symbols" may be referred to as the "second reserved number".

The icon display area 70C displays the first pending icon or the second pending icon that was displayed on the first display section 70B1 of the first pending icon display area 70B in response to the start of the variable display of the special symbol (production symbol 70a). As the second pending icon displayed on the first display section 70D1 of the pending icon display area 70D moves (shifts), the icon TI is displayed, and at the end of the variable display of the special symbol (production symbol 70a) The icon TI disappears (erases). Note that the icon may disappear during the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a). Note that in this embodiment, the "first pending icon", the "second pending icon", and "the icon" may be collectively referred to as "icon".

In addition, on the left side of the display section of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), a first pending number indicating the current number of first reserved special symbols (U1) is displayed in the normal gaming state and the specific gaming state. 1st special figure reservation number display area 70E for displaying the second special figure reservation number display area 70E for displaying the second reservation number indicating the current number of second special figure reservation number (U2) in the normal game state and the specific game state. A number display area 70F is formed.

The first movable member 73 is capable of emitting dramatic light by lighting the first movable member LED (full color), which is a part of the board lighting device 76 (see FIG. 122), in a predetermined light emission mode. The drive force of the first movable member drive motor, which is a part of the board drive device 75 (see FIG. 122), moves the vertical direction between the standby position (origin position) located above and the production position located below. By moving to , it is possible to perform a performance operation, and the first position detection sensor (not shown) detects that it is at the origin position.

The second movable member 74 can perform dramatic light emission by lighting the second movable member LED (full color), which is a part of the board lighting device 76 (see FIG. 122), in a predetermined light emission mode. The drive force of the second movable member drive motor, which is a part of the board drive device 75 (see FIG. 122), moves between the standby position (origin position) located at the upper right and the production position located at the lower left. It is possible to perform a performance operation by moving diagonally up and down, and a second position detection sensor (not shown) detects that it is at the origin position.

Since the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 partially overlap each other's production positions, basically the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 operate at the same time. By not doing so, they avoid conflict with each other.

Note that if the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 do not collide with each other, when one movable member moves to the production position and returns to a position that does not overlap with the production position of the other movable member, The other movable member may be moved to the presentation position.

In the following, when the frame lighting device 10, the board lighting device 76, the production button LED of the production button 17, and the first movable member LED of the first movable member 73 are collectively described, the lamp LA (Fig. 278(a)).

On the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 and the game board 5, there is a payout device 100 for paying out game balls based on the establishment of predetermined payout conditions (prize balls, ball rental), and game balls supplied from island equipment, etc. A game ball storage unit (not shown) that stores balls and supplies them to the payout device 100, a main control device 110A (not shown) that includes a main control board 110 that centrally controls the progress of the game, and a main control board 110. A payout control device 120A (not shown) incorporating a payout control board 120 that controls the payout device 100 according to a payout control command from the main control board 110, and a production that controls the production according to production control commands from the main control board 110. A production control device 130A (not shown) that includes a control board 130, a power supply device 160A (not shown) that includes a power supply board 160 that supplies power voltage to various control devices, and game information (not shown) external to the gaming machine. A game information output terminal board 90 (see FIG. 122) is provided for outputting a game signal (game signal).

Further, an opening/closing door-type cover member is provided that opens and closes the left and right sides in the left-right direction around a rotation axis set on one left and right side so as to cover the upper part of the main control device 110A and the entire production control device 130A from the rear. The production control device 130A includes the volume of production sound output from the audio output device 9 so as to be covered by the cover member, display devices (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and various lighting devices. A changeover switch 22 (see FIG. 122) is provided for switching adjustment modes related to adjustment of the amount of light of the devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76).

On the front side of the main control board 110, there is a main control unit 110m consisting of a one-chip microcomputer for controlling the game, and a main RAM 110c of the main control unit 110m to clear the memory contents or to indicate the level of advantage of the game. an RWM clear switch 111a that inputs a signal for updating the set value (different advantages); a signal for moving the set value to a state where the set value can be changed or a state where the set value can be confirmed by operation using the setting key; A setting key switch 112a for inputting information, an information display 113 for displaying performance information and setting values that allow the actual performance of the gaming machine 1 to be grasped, and the like are installed.

The information display 113 is for displaying setting values and performance information (normal base values to be described later), and is composed of four 7-segment displays having decimal points DP arranged side by side. There is. An identification segment for displaying identification information indicating the type of performance information (data type) is configured on two 7-segment displays corresponding to the upper two digits, and two 7-segment displays corresponding to the lower two digits. A numerical value segment is configured to display numerical information indicating numerical values of setting values and performance information.

(Control configuration of gaming machine 1)
Next, the control configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be specifically explained using FIG. 122. FIG. 122 is an overall block diagram of the gaming machine 1 in this embodiment.

The main control board 110 centrally controls the progress of the game (basic operations). The main control board 110 includes a main control unit 110m as a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a main CPU 110a that performs arithmetic processing, a main ROM 110b that stores game control programs, etc., and a main RAM 110c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing. It is equipped with an input port for main control, an output port, etc. The main CPU 110a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out a program stored in the main ROM 110b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the game while utilizing the main RAM 110c as a work area. and transmits predetermined commands based on the results of arithmetic processing to the payout control board 120, the production control board 130, etc.

Here, the communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 is configured to be able to communicate commands (data) in both directions, and the communication between the main control board 110 and the production control board 130 is It is configured so that commands (data) can be communicated only in one direction from 110 to the production control board 130.

The input ports of the main control board 110 include a general winning opening detection switch 43a, a gate detection switch 44a, a first starting opening detection switch 45a, a second starting opening detection switch 47a, a big winning opening detection switch 50a, and an out ball detection switch 52a. , a magnetic detection sensor 53a, a radio wave detection sensor 54a, an RWM clear switch 111a, a setting key switch 112a, an information display 113, a payout control board 120, and the like are connected. When detection signals and the like from various detection switches and various detection sensors are input to the main control board 110 via the input port, control processing is performed according to the detection signals.

The output port of the main control board 110 includes a second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, a winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, a main information display device 59, a game information output terminal board 90, a payout control board 120, a performance control board 130, etc. is connected. Drive control signals for controlling various solenoids, display control signals for controlling various indicators, and game notifications to the outside of the gaming machine (hall computer, etc.) from the gaming information output terminal board through the output port. Information etc. are output.

The payout control board 120 is a slave control board that controls the payout of game balls based on reception of the payout command from the main control board 110, and also controls the firing of game balls. The payout control board 120 includes a payout control unit 121 that drives the payout device 100 to control the payout of game balls, and a launch control unit 122 that drives the launch device 26 to control the launch of game balls.

The payout control unit 121 includes a payout CPU 121a that performs calculation processing, a payout ROM 121b that stores a payout program, etc., a payout RAM 121c that serves as a work area during calculation processing, an input port for payout control, an output port, etc. . The payout CPU 121a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator (not shown), reads a payout control program stored in the payout ROM 121b, performs arithmetic processing related to the payout of game balls while utilizing the payout RAM 121c as a work area, and operates the payout device 100. control, and transmits predetermined commands based on the results of arithmetic processing to the main control board 110, the production control board 130, etc.

The input port of the payout control unit 121 is connected to an open detection switch 31a, a saucer full detection switch 32a, a payout ball detection switch 100a provided in the payout device 100, a ball presence detection switch 101a provided in the game ball storage unit, etc. A dispensing motor 100b provided in the dispensing device 100 is connected to an output port of the dispensing control unit 121.

When the payout control unit 121 receives the payout command from the main control board 110, it drives the payout motor 100b provided in the payout device 100 to control the payout of a predetermined number of game balls, and controls the payout ball detection switch 100a to pay out a predetermined number of game balls. When the payout of game balls is detected, the control for paying out game balls is ended.

The firing control unit 122 includes a control circuit, an input port, an output port, etc. (not shown). A touch sensor 15a and a firing volume 15b are connected to an input port of the firing control unit 122, and a ball feeding solenoid 11b, a firing solenoid 28b, etc. are connected to an output port of the firing control unit 122. ing.

When the firing control unit 122 detects that the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15 based on the touch signal input from the touch sensor 15a, it allows the ball feeding solenoid 11b and the firing solenoid 28b to be energized. When it is detected that the rotation angle of the firing handle 15 has changed based on the detection signal from the firing volume 15b, the ball feed solenoid 11b is driven and the ball is fired so that the firing intensity corresponds to the rotation angle of the firing handle 15. The game ball is fired by driving the solenoid 28b.

The firing solenoid 28b is composed of a rotary solenoid, and the launching member 28 is directly connected to a rotating shaft, and as the rotating shaft rotates, the launching member 28 rotates and launches the game ball A. . Note that the operation of the firing solenoid 28b is set to approximately 99.9 times/minute based on the frequency based on the output cycle of the crystal oscillator provided in the firing control unit 122, so the firing of the game ball in one minute is approximately 99.9 times per minute. The number is approximately 99.9 (pieces/minute). That is, the game ball will be fired approximately every 0.6 seconds.

The performance control board 130 is a slave control board (slave control means) that controls the performance related to the game (performed in the gaming machine 1) based on the reception of the performance command from the main control board 110. The effect control board 130 includes a sub-CPU 130a that performs arithmetic processing, a sub-ROM 130b in which an effect control program is stored, a sub-RAM 130c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and an effect control unit 130m, and a first image display device 70 (main display control unit 140 that controls the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal), audio output device 9 (speaker), etc., the frame lighting device 10, the button drive device 17b, the panel drive device 75, and the panel lighting. It includes a lamp control section 150 that controls the device 76 and the like, and an input port, an output port, etc. for effect control.

The sub CPU 130a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads the game program stored in the sub ROM 130b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the performance while using the sub RAM 130c as a work area, thereby processing commands received from the main control board 110. In response to input signals from the display button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a, various control units (display control unit 140, lamp control unit 150) are controlled to execute various effects (data and commands are transmitted). Output).

A performance button detection switch 17a, a cross key detection switch 19a, a button position detection sensor (not shown), etc. are connected to the input port of the performance control board 130. In the production control board 130, a production button detection signal indicating that the production button 17 has been operated is input from the production button detection switch 17a, and a cross key detection signal indicating that the cross key 19 has been operated is input from the cross key detection switch 19a. When a signal (upper button detection signal, left button detection signal, lower button detection signal, right button detection signal) is input, processing is performed to execute an effect according to the detection signal.

The display control unit 140 receives a command from the production control unit 130m and controls the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) to display a predetermined image. or controls the audio output device 9 to output a predetermined audio.

The display control unit 140 includes a general control unit 141 that collectively controls image display and audio output based on reception of production control commands from the production control unit 130m, and a control unit 141 that controls display control commands (display list) from the general control unit 141. A video control unit 145 (VDP) that controls the first image display device 70 and second image display device 71 based on reception, a CGROM 146 that stores image data, etc., and a voice control unit that receives voice control commands from the general control unit 141. It includes an audio control unit 148 (audio LSI) that controls the audio output device 9 based on the audio data, and an audio ROM 149 that stores audio data and the like.

The overall control unit 141 includes an overall CPU 141a that performs arithmetic processing, an overall ROM 141b that stores an overall control program, an overall RAM 141c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, an image control unit 145 (VDP), and an audio control unit 148 (audio It has an input/output port to which LSI is connected.

The overall CPU 141a receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out an overall control program stored in the overall ROM 141b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the performance while utilizing the overall RAM 141c as a work area. Thereby, a control process for generating a display control command (display list) for instructing the effect image to be displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 and transmitting it to the display control unit 140, and an audio output device It performs control processing and the like for generating an audio control command instructing the effect sound to be output from the audio controller 9 and transmitting it to the audio control unit 148 (audio LSI).

The VRAM 143 provided in the image control unit 145 (VDP) is a display list storage area that temporarily stores the display list output from the overall control unit 141 (overall CPU 142a), and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). , and a frame buffer area corresponding to the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal).

This frame buffer area is a storage area for drawing or displaying images, and further includes a first frame buffer area and a second frame buffer area. The first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area are alternately switched to a "drawing frame buffer" and a "display frame buffer" each time drawing starts.

Therefore, the image control unit 145 (VDP) draws the drawing data stored in the CGROM 146 in the “frame buffer for drawing” in the frame buffer area of the VRAM 147 based on the instruction (display list) from the general control unit 141. The drawing data is read from the "display frame buffer" in the frame buffer area, and a video signal (RGB signal, etc.) is generated based on the read drawing data, and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second It is output to an image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) to display various images.

Note that the image control unit 145 (VDP) is supplied with an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, and by frequency-dividing this operating clock, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display Generates a synchronization signal (horizontal synchronization signal/vertical synchronization signal) for synchronizing with the device 71 (sub liquid crystal), and displays the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). Output to. In this embodiment, the frame rate of the image control unit 145 (VDP) is 30 fps (1/30 second = approximately 33 ms) so that drawing (image display) is performed 30 times per second. It may be set to 60 fps (1/60 second = approximately 16.6 ms) so that drawing (image display) is performed 60 times per second.

The audio control unit 148 is connected to the audio output device 9, and controls the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) based on various performance data (including commands) transmitted from the performance control unit 130m. Control is performed to output audio data, music data (BGM, SE), etc. from the audio output device 9 in accordance with the display on the two-image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal).

The lamp control unit 150 includes a lamp CPU 150a that performs calculation processing, a lamp ROM 150b that stores a lamp control program, a lamp RAM 150c that serves as a work area during calculation processing, and input/output ports.

The lamp CPU 150a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the lamp control program stored in the lamp ROM 150b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the effect while utilizing the lamp RAM 150c as a work area. In response to performance instruction commands and the like, control is performed to cause controlled devices such as various lighting devices and various driving devices to perform predetermined performances (data and commands are output).

The frame lighting device 10, button drive device 17b, panel lighting device 76, and sub information display device 80 are connected to the input/output port of the lamp control section, and the information is transmitted from the production control section 130m (sub CPU 130a). Based on the various production data (including commands), the lighting control of various LEDs of the frame lighting device 10, the board lighting device 76, and the sub-information display device 80 is performed, and the button driving device 17b and, It also performs drive control of drive sources such as motors and solenoids of the panel drive device 75.

The power supply board 160 generates the main power (operating power) necessary for the operation of the gaming machine 1 from the power supplied from the outside of the gaming machine 1, and supplies the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, production control (substrate 130 and various electronic components). The power supply board 160 includes a power outage detection circuit 162 that detects whether a power outage (power outage) has occurred and outputs a power outage detection signal to the main control board 110 based on the occurrence of a power outage (power outage). A backup power supply circuit 163 is provided for supplying backup power to the main control board 110 during a power outage (power outage).

In addition, the power supply board 160 is used to switch between an ON state in which main power is supplied to the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, performance control board 130, and various electronic components) and an OFF state in which the supply of main power is stopped. A power switch is provided so that it can be operated by a clerk at the game parlor, and when the power switch is turned on, supply of main power is started and the operation of the game machine 1 is started. Note that even if the power switch is in the OFF state, the supply of backup power to the main control board 110 is maintained.

The power outage detection circuit 162 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine 1, and outputs a power outage detection signal to the main control board 110 when the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined value. More specifically, the main CPU 110a becomes operational when the power interruption detection signal becomes high level, and the main CPU 110a enters an operational state when the power interruption detection signal becomes low level.

The backup power supply circuit 163 includes a capacitor that stores electricity when power is applied to the gaming machine, and when a power outage (power outage) occurs, the backup power supply voltage stored in the capacitor is transferred to the main RAM 110c of the main control board 110. supply As a result, even in the event of a power outage (power outage), the memory contents of the main RAM 110c and payout RAM 121c will be retained, and after recovery from the power outage (power outage), the gaming control state will be returned to the state before the power outage (power outage). It can be restored. Note that backup power may be supplied to the payout control board 120 and the production control board 130.

(Explanation of gaming status)
Next, the game state when the game progresses will be explained. In this embodiment, the states related to jackpot determination of special symbols include a "low probability state" and "high probability state," and the states related to the movable member 48 of the second starting port 47 include a "non-time saving state" and ""time saving state".

In this embodiment, the following three game states are provided.
(1) A low-probability non-time-saving gaming state (normal gaming state) that is a "low-probability state" and a "non-time-saving state"
(2) A low-probability time-saving gaming state (time-saving gaming state) that is a "low probability state" and a "time-saving state"
(3) High probability time saving gaming state (variable probability gaming state) which is a "high probability state" and "time saving state"

Note that the gaming state when the game is started, that is, the initial gaming state of the gaming machine 1, is set to the "low-probability non-time-saving gaming state." In addition, in this embodiment, the "low-probability time-saving gaming state" and the "high-probability time-saving gaming state" are gaming states that are more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, so they may be referred to as "specific gaming states."

In this embodiment, the "low probability state" means, for example, when the set value (jackpot probability in jackpot determination), which is the stage of advantageousness of the game, is "1", the first starting port 45 or the 2 Refers to a game state in which the probability of winning a jackpot is set as low as about 1/300 in jackpot determination of a special symbol performed on the condition that a game ball enters a starting hole 47. On the other hand, "high probability state" means that the probability of winning a jackpot is higher than in a low probability state, and when the setting value is "1", the probability of winning a jackpot is set as high as approximately 1/60. Indicates the game state.

Specifically, there are four setting values, ``1'' to ``4.'' When the setting value is ``1,'' the probability of winning the jackpot in a low probability state is approximately 1/300, which is a high probability. The probability of winning the jackpot in the state is approximately 1/60, and if the setting value is "2", the probability of winning the jackpot in the low probability state is approximately 1/295, and the probability of winning the jackpot in the high probability state is approximately If the setting value is "3", the probability of winning the jackpot in the low probability state is approximately 1/290, and the probability of winning the jackpot in the high probability state is approximately 1/58, and the setting value is "3". 4, the probability of winning the jackpot in the low probability state is approximately 1/285, and the probability of winning the jackpot in the high probability state is approximately 1/57.

Therefore, in the "high probability state", it is easier to win the jackpot than in the "low probability state". Further, the low probability state changes to the high probability state after the jackpot game described later is completed. Therefore, in this embodiment, a jackpot that triggers a transition to a high probability state is referred to as a "probable jackpot". In addition, a jackpot that triggers a transition to a low probability state is called a "normal jackpot."

In this embodiment, the "non-time saving state" refers to the average fluctuation time of the normal symbols corresponding to the lottery result in the winning lottery of the normal symbols that is performed on the condition that the game ball passes through the regular symbol gate 44. This is a game state that is set longer than the "time saving state" and in which the opening time of the second starting port 47 when winning is likely to be set short. For example, when a game ball passes through the normal pattern gate 44, a winning lottery for the normal pattern is performed, and a variable display of the normal pattern is performed on the normal pattern display 62, but after the variable display of the normal pattern starts, For example, the display stops after 30 seconds. If the lottery result is a win, the second starting port 47 is controlled to be open for, for example, 0.2 seconds after the normal symbols are stopped and displayed.

On the other hand, the "time saving state" means that in the winning lottery for regular symbols that is performed on the condition that the game ball passes through the regular symbol gate 44, the average fluctuation time of the regular symbols corresponding to the lottery result is " This is a game state in which the opening time of the second starting port 47 when winning is set to be shorter than the "non-time saving state" and longer than the "non-time saving state", for example, 2.5 seconds. Furthermore, in the "non-time saving state", the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is set as low as, for example, 1/128, and in the "time saving state", the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is set to be low, for example 127/128. is set high. Therefore, in the "time saving state", when the game ball passes through the regular game gate 44, the second starting port 47 is more easily controlled in the open mode than in the "non-time saving state". As a result, in the "time saving state", the player can advantageously proceed with the game in a state where it is difficult to consume game balls.

In addition, in the embodiment, the "time saving state" is set so that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the second starting port 47, and the probability of winning the normal symbol lottery are more advantageous than the "non-time saving state". has been done. However, the "time saving state" may be set so that only one of the normal symbol variation time, the opening time of the second starting port 47, and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is advantageous. Further, in the non-time-saving state, the probability of winning in the normal symbol winning lottery may be set to, for example, 0/128.

In addition, in this embodiment, a jackpot is determined in which the probability of winning a jackpot in a high probability state is five times the probability of winning a jackpot in a low probability state (common regardless of the setting value). The probability is not limited to 5 times, but may be set to any value such as 3 times or 8 times as long as it is 10 times or less.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the jackpot determination, a small win that is less advantageous to the winner than a jackpot is not won, but for example, a small win is set to be won with a probability of about 1/100. Good too. In this case, it is preferable that the small win probability be the same regardless of whether the set value is "1" to "4".

Also, the larger the setting value is, the more advantageous it becomes to the player (higher jackpot probability), but conversely, the smaller the setting value is, the more advantageous it becomes to the player (higher jackpot probability). You can also do this.

In addition, the probability of being judged as a jackpot in a low probability state and/or a high probability state may be set to be the same for all setting values (1 to 4), or for example, for two or three setting values (1 and 4), 2, 1 to 3, etc.), the probability of determining a jackpot in the low probability state and/or the high probability state may be the same. Furthermore, although the setting values in this embodiment are in four stages from 1 to 4, they are not limited to four stages, and may be more or less than four stages.

Next, details of various tables stored in the main ROM 110b will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 to 126.

(Jackpot judgment table)
FIG. 123(a) is a jackpot determination table for the first special symbol for determining (jackpot determination) the special symbol determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting port 45. , FIG. 123(b) is a jackpot determination table for the second special symbol for determining (jackpot determination) the special symbol determination information acquired based on the winning (ball entry) of the game ball into the second starting port 47. be.

As shown in FIGS. 123(a) and (b), the jackpot judgment table corresponds to the current setting value, the current probability state, the random value for jackpot judgment, and the jackpot judgment result (jackpot, loss). As a reference, the approximate probability of winning in the case of a "jackpot" is listed in the far right column.

The main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 123(a) or the jackpot determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 123(b), and determines the current setting value, probability state, and jackpot. Based on the random number value for determination, it is determined whether it is a "big hit" or a "loss".

For example, according to the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 123(a), when the set value is "1" and the normal gaming state is, 200 jackpots of "100" to "299" will be hit. The random number value for determination is determined to be a "jackpot". Then, random numbers for jackpot determination other than those determined to be jackpots are determined to be "losses".

Note that the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is stored in the first special figure determination information retention storage area of the main RAM 110c, The special figure determination information acquired based on the winning is stored in the second special figure determination information reservation storage area of the main RAM 110c. Then, when making a jackpot determination, the special symbol determination information stored in the first special symbol determination information retention storage area or the second special symbol determination information retention storage area is shifted to the special symbol determination information storage area of the main RAM 110c. , jackpot determination will be performed using the shifted special figure determination information.

In addition, the first special figure judgment information reservation storage area is divided into a first storage part to a fourth storage part, and the reservation corresponding to the special figure judgment information stored in these first storage part to fourth storage part is divided into the first to fourth storage parts. The icons are displayed on the first display section 70B1 to the fourth display section 70B4 of the first pending icon display area 70B, respectively. The second special figure determination information reservation storage area is divided into first to fourth storage sections, and the reservation icons corresponding to the special figure determination information stored in these first to fourth storage sections are They are displayed on the first display section 70D1 to the fourth display section 70D4 of the second pending icon display area 70D, respectively.

(Special symbol judgment table)
FIG. 124(a) is a special symbol determination table for jackpot for determining the type of special symbol when a jackpot is determined, and FIG. 124(b) is a special symbol determination table for determining the type of special symbol when a jackpot is determined. This is a special symbol determination table for losing to determine the type.

As shown in FIGS. 124(a) and 124(b), the special symbol determination table includes the type of special symbol to be stopped and displayed, the random value for special symbol determination, the determination result of the special symbol, and the information corresponding to the determination result. The stop special symbol data and the special symbol designation command corresponding to the determination result are associated.

The special symbols "00" and "10" are loss special symbols in which a jackpot game is not executed. Special symbols "01" and "04" are special jackpot symbols that execute the first jackpot game, and special symbols "02" and "05" are jackpot symbols that execute the second jackpot game. , the special symbol "03" is a jackpot symbol for executing the third jackpot game.

In the "first jackpot game", a round game in which the grand prize opening 50 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds and then closed for 2 seconds is executed up to six times. In addition, in the round game, one round game ends when a specified number (for example, 10) of game balls enter the big winning hole 50 even before the opening time has elapsed. Further, after the first jackpot game ends, the low-probability non-time-saving game state (time-saving game state) is set until the variable display of the special symbol is performed 100 times.

In the "second jackpot game", a round game in which the grand prize opening 50 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds and then closed for 2 seconds is executed up to 10 times. Furthermore, after the second jackpot game ends, the high accuracy time-saving gaming state (variable probability gaming state) is set until the variable display of the special symbol is performed 10,000 times. Therefore, judging from the jackpot winning probability in the high-probability gaming state, the next jackpot is almost guaranteed.

In the "third jackpot game", a round game in which the second jackpot 56 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds and then the jackpot is closed for two seconds is executed up to six times. Furthermore, after the third jackpot game ends, the highly accurate time-saving gaming state (variable probability gaming state) is set until the variable display of the special symbol is performed 10,000 times. Therefore, judging from the jackpot winning probability in the high-probability gaming state, the next jackpot is almost guaranteed.

Although one losing special symbol is associated with each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, a plurality of losing special symbols are associated with at least one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Good too.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol determination table shown in any one of FIGS. 124(a) to 124(b), and determines the type of special symbol based on the type of special symbol to be stopped and displayed and the random value for special symbol determination. The stop special symbol data and the special symbol designation command are determined, and the special symbol designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130.

The first feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 124 is that the type of jackpot special symbol and the type of loss special symbol do not change depending on the set value and are the same. By doing so, the player can play the game with peace of mind without having complicated gameplay.

A second feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 124 is that the selection ratio of various jackpot special symbols and the selection ratio of various losing symbols are constant without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, the degree of advantage of the player will not change drastically depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 4(a), the jackpot symbol corresponding to the "third jackpot game" is not provided in the second special symbol, but the invention is not limited to this. A "third jackpot game" may also be provided in the second special symbol. For example, in the second special symbol, the "random value for special symbol determination" is "95 to 99", the "stop special symbol data" is "06", and the "MODE" of the "special symbol designation command" is ” and “DATA” are “E0H” and “13H”, respectively, and a “special symbol 06 (third jackpot)” may be provided as a “judgment result”. In this case, the "random value for special symbol determination" in "special symbol 05 (second jackpot)" of the second special symbol may be "35 to 94".

(Special figure fluctuation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 125(a) is a special symbol variation pattern determination table for non-time saving states for determining the variation pattern of special symbols in non-time saving states, and FIG. 125(b) is a special symbol variation pattern determination table in non-time saving states. It is a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table for the time saving state for determining.

As shown in FIG. 125, the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table includes the type of special symbol (starting opening) that performs variable display, the jackpot determination result, the special symbol determination result (stop special symbol data), and the reach determination Random value, first special figure reservation number (U1) or second special figure reservation number (U2), random value for special figure fluctuation pattern determination, special figure fluctuation pattern as a judgment result, special symbol fluctuation time and a special figure variation pattern designation command indicating a special figure variation pattern.

Therefore, the "special symbol variation pattern" can be said to be one that can specify the type of special symbol, the jackpot determination result, the type of special symbol, and the variation time of the special symbol.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 2 Determine the special pattern fluctuation pattern based on the number of special pattern reservations (U2) and the random value for special pattern fluctuation pattern determination, and send the special pattern fluctuation pattern designation command according to the special pattern fluctuation pattern to the production control board 130 It looks like this.

In addition, the performance control board 130 determines the content (performance mode) of the variable performance accompanied by the variable display of the performance symbols 70a, in accordance with the fluctuation pattern designation command (jackpot determination result, special symbol determination result, etc.), as will be described later. Therefore, in the rightmost column of the special figure pattern determination table shown in FIG. 125, the production contents that can be executed with the variable production are described for reference.

As for the production contents shown in the variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 125, "normal variation", "shortened variation", "ultra shortened variation", and "long variation" are three production symbols 70a that vary at high speed apart. , which means stopping without reaching.

In addition, "reach" means that the player expects a jackpot game to be executed in which a part of the combination of presentation symbols 70a that informs a jackpot temporarily stops and other presentation symbols 70a change. means the manner in which it changes. For example, when a combination of three performance symbols 70a "777" is set as a combination of performance symbols 70a to notify a jackpot, the same performance symbols 70a in the left and right regions temporarily stop at "7". , refers to a mode in which the remaining performance symbols 70a are fluctuating in the central area.

It should be noted that "temporary stop" means that the performance symbols 70a are slightly swayed or deformed slightly to make it appear to the player that the performance symbols 70a are stopped (not completely stopped). refers to the manner in which the

In addition, "normal reach" means a reach effect in which the same effect pattern 70a temporarily stops in the left and right areas, and the remaining effect pattern 70a changes in the center area, and the expectation level of jackpot is the lowest. This is a reach production.

Moreover, "SP reach" and "special SP reach" are super reach effects that have a higher expectation of a jackpot than normal reach effects, and are performed after the normal reach effect and the extended effect. For example, the two performance symbols 70a are reduced in size and moved to the corners of the first image display device 70, and almost the entire display area of the first image display device 70 is used to perform a special reach performance. . Note that in the "Special SP Reach", a more special effect than in the "SP Reach" is executed.

Furthermore, "SPSP reach" and "SPSP '7' reach" are special reach performances that have higher expectations for a jackpot than super reach performances, and are executed after the normal reach performance or the super reach performance. For example, a normal reach performance is performed to a development performance, and then the three performance symbols 70a are reduced in size and moved to a corner of the first image display device 70, using almost the entire display area of the first image display device 70. It is designed to perform a special reach effect than "SP reach". In addition, in "SPSP reach", a reach effect is performed with the effect pattern 70a other than "7", and in "SPSP "7" reach", a reach effect is performed with a pattern of "7".

In addition, the "full rotation reach" is a reach that guarantees a jackpot, and is executed after the normal reach performance. For example, a development effect is executed from a normal reach effect, and then the three effect symbols 70a are all the same and change at a low speed, and "SPSP reach" is performed using almost the entire display area of the first image display device 70. It is designed to have a special reach effect (reach effect that guarantees a jackpot) than "SPSP '7' Reach".

The first feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 125 is that the type of special figure variation pattern to be determined is the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing this, it becomes difficult to discern the setting value from the special figure fluctuation pattern, and it becomes possible to provide a fair game.

A second feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 125 is that the selection ratio of each special figure variation pattern is the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing this, it becomes difficult to discern the setting value from the special figure fluctuation pattern, and it becomes possible to provide a fair game.

The third feature of the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 125 is that when the number of reserved first special symbols increases to 2 or 3 during a non-time saving state, a shortening variation is determined as the variation pattern of the first special symbol. On the other hand, even if the second special symbol reservation number increases to 2 or 3 during the non-time saving state, the shortening variation is not determined as the variation pattern of the second special symbol. By doing this, it is possible to increase the time efficiency (execution efficiency) of the variable display of special symbols when hitting left than when hitting right in a non-time saving state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

The fourth feature of the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 125 is that even if the number of reserved first special symbols increases from 1 to 3 during the time saving state, the variation pattern of the first special symbol is (super) shortened. While the fluctuation is not determined, when the second special symbol reservation number increases from 1 to 3 during the time saving state, the (long) shortening fluctuation becomes easier to be determined as the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol. By doing this, it is possible to increase the time efficiency (execution efficiency) of the variable display of special symbols when hitting right than when hitting left in the time saving state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. .

(Pre-judgment table)
FIG. 126(a) is a preliminary judgment table for the non-time-saving state for pre-judging (pre-reading) the special figure judgment information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 during the non-time-saving state. , FIG. 126(b) is a preliminary determination table for the time-saving state for pre-determining (pre-reading) the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 47 during the time-saving state.

As shown in FIG. 126, the preliminary determination table includes the type of special symbol (starting opening), the jackpot determination result, the special symbol determination result, the random value for reach determination, and the random value for special symbol fluctuation pattern determination. , a special figure scheduled variation pattern as a determination result and a prefetch designation command indicating the special figure scheduled variation pattern are associated.

Therefore, the "special pattern scheduled variation pattern" can be said to be able to specify the type of special symbol, the result of jackpot determination, the type of special symbol, and the special symbol variation pattern scheduled to be executed.

The main CPU 110a refers to the preliminary determination table shown in FIG. 126, and determines the planned special pattern fluctuation based on the random value for jackpot determination, the random value for special symbol determination, the random value for reach determination, and the random value for special pattern fluctuation pattern determination. The pattern is determined and a prefetch designation command corresponding to the special figure scheduled fluctuation pattern is sent to the production control board 130.

Next, the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1 will be explained using a flowchart.

(Main processing of main control board)
The main processing of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 127. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the main control board 110. This main processing is performed by inputting a system reset generated by supplying power supply voltage from the power supply board 160 to the main CPU 110a.

First, the main CPU 110a disables all interrupts in step S1, performs initial settings of the CPU such as setting of built-in registers in step S2, and performs startup wait processing for other boards in step S3. Specifically, in order to avoid missing commands from the main control board 110, the CPU waits for one second for the payout control board 120 and the performance control board 130 to start up.

The main CPU 110a allows access to the RWM area of the main RAM 110c in step S4, and transmits a firing permission designation command to the payout control board 120 in step S5. As a result, the payout control unit 121 performs processing to permit the shooting device 26 to shoot the game ball.

In step S6, the main CPU 110a determines whether a backup flag indicating that power has been restored is saved in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If the backup flag has been saved, it is assumed that the power has been restored, and the process moves to step S7; if the backup flag has not been saved, it is assumed that the power is turned on for the first time, and the process moves to step S8.

In step S7, the main CPU 110a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) of the gaming RWM area (excluding the setting value area) of the main RAM 110c.

The main CPU 110a determines whether a setting change operation has been performed in step S8. Specifically, it is determined whether the setting key switch 112a and the RWM clear switch 111a are in the ON state. If there is a setting change operation, the process moves to step S9 as a transition to setting change mode, and if there is no setting change operation, the process moves to step S10.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting change process in step S9. Specifically, a status confirmation display indicating that the settings are being changed or settings are being confirmed is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, and a setting value area of the gaming RWM area is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113. Displays the current setting values saved in and sends a setting change designation command to the production control board 130.

Furthermore, each time the RWM clear switch 111a is operated, the setting value is changed (updated) in the range of "1" to "4", the updated setting value is displayed on the 7-segment LED, and the setting key switch 112a is When there is a setting confirmation operation that changes the setting from the ON state to the OFF state, the changed (updated) setting value is saved in the setting value area to confirm the setting value, and the display of the setting value on the information display 113 is ended. At the same time, the status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 68 is terminated, and processing for terminating the setting change mode is performed.

In addition, in the production control board 130 which received the setting change designation command, processing for executing setting change notification for notifying that the setting value is being changed will be performed. Specifically, a settings change screen is displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71 to indicate that the settings are being changed, and the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 are displayed in a predetermined manner while the settings are being changed. All the lights are turned on with the same emission color (for example, white). Note that the audio output device 9 may output a settings change notification sound (“Settings are being changed”) indicating that settings are being changed.

The main CPU 110a determines whether the checksum is normal in step S10. Specifically, it is determined whether the checksum saved in the gaming RWM area matches the checksum calculated in step S7. If the checksum is normal (there is no abnormality in the data in the gaming RWM area), the process moves to step S11, and if the checksum is not normal (there is an abnormality in the data in the gaming RWM area), Assuming that it is not possible to normally return to the control state before power-off, the process moves to step S12.

Note that if the backup flag has not been saved, that is, if the power is turned on for the first time, the checksum is determined to be abnormal.

In step S11, the main CPU 110a determines whether the set value in the set value area is within an appropriate range (here, 1 to 4). If it is determined that the set value in the set value area is within the appropriate range, the process moves to step S13, and if it is determined that the set value in the set value area is not within the appropriate range, the process moves to step S12. Move.

The main CPU 110a performs unrecoverable error processing in step S12. Specifically, after displaying error information "E" indicating an unrecoverable error on the information display 113 and transmitting an irreversible error designation command indicating that an unrecoverable error has occurred to the production control board 130. , sets interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interrupts, and after clearing the output port, outputs a non-recoverable error signal (security signal) indicating the occurrence of a non-recoverable error from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90. Then, it waits until the power supply is completely cut off. As a result, the production control board 130 performs a process for notifying an unrecoverable error.

The "unrecoverable error" is an error state in which game control is no longer performed (no transition to game control occurs), and is not canceled unless a setting change process is executed. Therefore, if an unrecoverable error occurs, even if you turn off the power switch provided on the power supply board 160 and then turn on the power switch without changing settings, it will not be canceled and the It is now necessary to turn on the power switch in conjunction with the change operation. Note that during an unrecoverable error, the presence or absence of signal input from various input devices (various switches, various sensors) is not monitored at all.

Note that although the "unrecoverable error" is not cleared unless the setting change process is executed, it may also be cleared when RWM clear is executed without the setting change process.

"Unrecoverable error notification" is a notification to make the user aware that an unrecoverable error has occurred. "), the frame lighting device 10 and panel lighting device 76 are lit in a predetermined color (for example, red) until the power is turned off, or an unrecoverable error occurs from the audio output device 9. An unrecoverable error sound ("Unrecoverable error" + buzzer sound) indicating that the error has occurred is output until the power is turned off.
Note that the audio output device 9, the frame illumination device 10, the image display devices 70 and 71, and the board illumination device 76 may be collectively referred to as a "production device."

The main CPU 110a determines whether an RWM clear operation has been performed in step S13. Specifically, it is determined whether the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear operation, it is assumed that RWM clear is to be executed and the process moves to step S14, and if there is no RWM clear operation, the process moves to step S16.

The main CPU 110a performs RWM clear processing in step S14. Specifically, processing is performed to initialize the gaming control state (initialize the gaming RWM area other than the setting value area).

In step S15, the main CPU 110a sends a power-on designation command to the payout control board 120 and the power-on designation command indicating that the gaming control state has been initialized and the current gaming state (here, the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state as the normal gaming state). It is transmitted to the production control board 130, and the process moves to step S21. As a result, the production control board 130 performs processing for executing power-on notification.

The "power-on notification" is a notification for recognizing that the control state of the game has been initialized, and the initial screen (background image and initial effect pattern "135" ), the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 are all lit up in a predetermined color (for example, red) for a predetermined period of time (for example, 60 seconds), and the RWM area is displayed from the audio output device 9. This means outputting a power-on notification sound ("RWM has been cleared" + buzzer sound) for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) to indicate that the device has been initialized.
Note that in the power-on notification, instead of displaying the initial screen on the image display devices 70 and 71, a display notifying that RWM has been cleared may be displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71.

In step S16, the main CPU 110a determines whether a setting confirmation operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether the setting key switch 112a is in the ON state. If there is a setting confirmation operation, the process moves to step S17 as a transition to the setting confirmation mode, and if there is no setting confirmation operation, the control state of the game is returned to the state before the power was cut off. The process moves to step S18.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting confirmation process in step S17. Specifically, a status confirmation display indicating that the settings are being changed or settings are being confirmed is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, and a setting value area of the gaming RWM area is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113. Displays the current set values saved in and sends a setting confirmation designation command to the production control board 130.

Furthermore, when there is a confirmation end operation that changes the setting key switch 112a from the ON state to the OFF state, the display of the setting value on the information display 113 is ended, and the state confirmation display on the status confirmation display 68 is ended, Performs processing to end setting confirmation mode.

In addition, in the production control board 130 which received the setting confirmation designation command, processing for executing setting confirmation notification for notifying that setting confirmation is being performed will be performed. Specifically, the image display devices 70 and 71 display a setting confirmation screen indicating that the settings are being confirmed, and the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 emit a predetermined light while the settings are being confirmed. Turn on all lights in a color (for example, white). Note that the audio output device 9 may output a setting confirmation notification sound (“Setting values are being confirmed”) indicating that the settings are being confirmed.

In step S18, the main CPU 110a clears (clears to 0) the backup flag and checksum saved in the gaming RWM area, and sets the gaming RWM area when the power is restored. As a result, the progress state (control state) of the game is restored (restored) to the state before the power was turned off, so it is possible to resume the game from the state before the power was turned off.

In step S19, the main CPU 110a transmits to the production control board 130 a power recovery designation command indicating that the gaming control state has been restored and the gaming state before the power outage occurred. As a result, the production control board 130 performs a process for terminating setting confirmation notification, etc., which will be described later, and executing power recovery notification.

"Power restoration notification" is a notification for recognizing that the control state of the game has returned to the state before the power was cut off, and the initial screen (background image and initial effect The frame illumination device 10 and the board illumination device 76 are fully illuminated in a predetermined color (e.g. blue) for a predetermined period (e.g. 60 seconds), the audio output device 9 A power restoration notification sound ("power has been restored" + buzzer sound) indicating that the power has been restored (from a power outage) is output for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds).
Note that in the power restoration notification, instead of displaying the initial screen on the image display devices 70 and 71, a display notifying that the power has been restored may be displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71.

In step S20, the main CPU 110a executes other commands (a command for specifying the number of reserved special symbols (U1) and a second reserved number of special symbols (U2), and the number of reserved regular symbols (G)). A command for specifying the number of reserved general figures shown) is transmitted to the production control board 130. As a result, the performance control board 130 can grasp the number of reserved special symbols and the number of reserved regular symbols, and also perform processing for displaying the first reserved icon and the second reserved icon on the first image display device 70. It will be done.

The main CPU 110a transmits a setting value designation command to the production control board 130 in step S21. This makes it possible for the effect control board 130 to grasp the current set value. Note that this setting value designation command may be transmitted to the production control board 130 before the power-on designation command and the power recovery designation command are transmitted. Furthermore, the setting value designation command may be transmitted each time a variable display of special symbols starts, or each time a jackpot game starts.

The main CPU 110a activates a CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) in step S22, and permits all interrupts in step S23.

In step S24, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the random number value for reach determination and the random number value for special symbol determination to determine the variation mode (variation time) of the special symbol, and in step S25, An initial value random value update process is performed to update the initial value random value, the initial value random value for special symbol determination, the initial value random value for hit determination, and the initial value random value for normal symbol determination.

Next, the main CPU 110a determines whether a power outage (power outage) has occurred in step S26. Specifically, it is determined whether a power outage detection signal is input from the power outage detection circuit of the power supply board 160, and if the power outage detection signal is not input, the process moves to step S24, and the power outage detection is performed. If a signal is input, the process moves to step S27.

The main CPU 110a sets interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interrupts in step S27, clears the output port in step S28, and clears the gaming RWM area (set value area) of the main RAM 110c in step S29. In step S30, a process is performed to save a backup flag in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S31, Processing is performed to prohibit RAM access, and the process waits until the supply of power supply voltage is completely cut off.

In this way, since multiple conditions (operations) are set for setting change operations, it is not possible to change settings easily, which makes it possible to suppress fraudulent acts and improve the security of gaming machines. It becomes possible to do so.

In addition, the number of conditions (operations) set for the setting change operation is greater than the conditions (operations) set for the RWM clear operation and setting confirmation operation, making it possible to avoid the most fraudulent setting changes. It is possible to increase the security of events where acts are likely to be committed, and it is possible to effectively prevent fraudulent acts.

In addition, if the checksum is abnormal, unrecoverable error processing is executed and the progress of the game is stopped, causing the game machine to perform unexpected operations and causing inconvenience to the game parlor and players. This eliminates the need for overtime, making it possible to improve the reliability of the gaming machine.

In addition, if the value in the setting value area is not within the appropriate range, in other words, if the previous power-off may have occurred while changing the settings, irreversible error processing will be executed even if the checksum is normal. By stopping the progress of the game, it is possible to prevent the game from proceeding with setting values that are not intended by the game parlor, thereby improving the reliability of the game machine. Become.

Also, while changing settings (setting change mode) or checking settings (setting confirmation mode), on the front (surface) of gaming machine 1, there are a status confirmation display 68, image display devices 70 and 71, and a frame lighting device. It is possible to recognize that the settings are being changed by checking the information display 113 on the back side (back side). ing. In other words, it is possible to know whether the settings are being changed from either the front (front) or the back (back) of the gaming machine 1.

Note that the condition for the setting change operation, RWM clear operation, and setting confirmation operation may include that the open detection switch 31a is in the ON state. By doing so, the number of conditions increases, so fraudulent acts can be suppressed, and the security of the gaming machine can be further improved.

In addition, if it is determined that there is no backup flag (this is the first time the power is turned on) and there is no setting change operation, and if the checksum is determined to be abnormal in the subsequent step S10, an unrecoverable error process is performed. is executed, but when it is determined that there is no backup flag, the gaming program initializes the gaming RWM area (clears it to 0) and saves the initial value "1" in the setting value area. Then, the process may be moved to step S13.

Additionally, if it is determined that there is a backup flag (power has been restored) and there is no setting change operation, and if the checksum is determined to be abnormal in subsequent step S10, unrecoverable error processing is executed. However, when the checksum is determined to be abnormal, the gaming program initializes the gaming RWM area (clears it to 0) and saves the initial value "1" in the setting value area. , the process may be moved to step S13.

In addition, the power-on designation command and the power-recovery designation command are sent including information indicating the current gaming state, but after transmitting the power-on designation command and the power restoration designation command, the current gaming state Alternatively, a gaming state designation command indicating the game state may be transmitted.

In addition, when the power is turned off or turned on, the gaming program calculates the checksum of the gaming RWM area (excluding the setting value area) of the main RAM 110c, but the information program calculates the checksum. may be calculated. In this case, it is preferable to save the calculated checksum in the information RWM area.

Also, when the power is turned off or turned on, the checksum of the gaming RWM area (excluding the setting value area) is calculated, but even if the checksum of the entire RWM area is calculated. Alternatively, the checksum of the game RWM area and the checksum of the information RWM area may be calculated separately, and if either checksum is abnormal, the process may proceed to irreversible error processing.

Additionally, a settings change designation command is sent at the start of the settings change process, and a power-on designation command is sent after the settings change process ends, but instead of the settings change designation command, a settings change start designation command is sent. However, instead of the power-on designation command, a setting change end designation command may be sent. In this case, the settings change end designation command may be sent at the end of the settings change process, or may be sent after the settings change process ends.

Further, when a setting change is made, the RWM clearing process is performed after the setting change is made, but the RWM clearing process may be performed before the setting change is made.

(Timer interrupt processing of main control board)
The timer interrupt processing of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 128. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the main control board 110 at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds).

First, in step S100, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the register to the stack area, and in step S110, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the register to the stack area, and in step S110, updates the special symbol time counter, the special game timer counter such as the opening time of special electric accessories, etc. It performs time control processing for updating various timer counters, such as updating processing of , normal symbol time counter updating processing, and updating processing of opening/closing time of the movable member 48 . Specifically, 1 is subtracted from counters such as a special symbol time counter, a special game timer counter, a normal symbol time counter, a starting port opening timer counter, and a starting port closing timer counter.

In step S120, the main CPU 110a determines a random value for jackpot determination, a random value for special symbol determination, a random value for special symbol fluctuation pattern determination, a random value for hit determination, a random value for normal symbol determination, and a regular symbol fluctuation pattern determination. Performs specific random number update processing to update random numbers. Specifically, each random value and random number counter are updated by adding +1. In addition, if the added random number counter exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (when the random number counter completes one cycle), the random number counter is returned to 0, and when the random number counter returns to the initial value of the cycle, the corresponding The initial value random value is set as a new round initial value, and the random value is newly updated.

In step S130, the main CPU 110a, similarly to step S30, sets the initial value random value for jackpot determination, the initial value random value for special symbol determination, the initial value random value for hit determination, and the initial value random value for normal symbol determination. Perform initial value random value update processing to be updated.

In step S200, the main CPU 110a controls the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the big winning opening detection switch 50a, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, the second starting opening detection switch 47a, the gate detection switch 44a, the out ball detection switch 52a, etc. It determines whether or not there is an input to each switch, and performs input control processing to set predetermined data if there is an input. The details will be described later using FIG. 129.

In step S300, the main CPU 110a operates a special figure special electric line for determining the number of reserved special figures (judgment of jackpot, etc.), controlling the display of special symbols, controlling opening/closing of the grand prize opening 50 (opening/closing member 51), controlling the gaming state, etc. Performs control processing. The details will be described later using FIG. 131.

In step S400, the main CPU 110a executes a normal pattern and general electric power control process for determining the number of normal patterns stored (hit determination, etc.), controlling the display of normal symbols, controlling the opening and closing of the second starting port 47 (movable member 48), etc. conduct.

It should be noted that the type of winning normal symbol and the type of losing normal symbol determined as a result of the determination of the ordinary symbol determination information performed in the ordinary symbol and electric power control process are the same without changing depending on the setting value. By doing so, the gameplay is not too complicated and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, the selection ratio of various winning ordinary symbols and the selection ratio of various losing ordinary symbols, which are determined as a result of the determination of the ordinary symbol judgment information performed in the ordinary symbol general electricity control process, do not change depending on the setting value and remain constant. ing. By doing so, the degree of advantage of the player will not change drastically depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

Next, in step S500, the main CPU 110a transmits a payout state confirmation command to the payout control board 120 for checking the payout state of the payout control board 120, and sends a prize ball counter (3 prize ball counter, 10 award balls counter, 15 award balls counter), and performs payout control processing for transmitting payout number designation commands corresponding to various winning holes to the payout control board 120. As a result, the payout control board 120 executes control for paying out prize balls from the payout device 100.

In step S600, the main CPU 110a determines the occurrence of a magnetic abnormality or a radio wave abnormality based on the input signals from the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a, and issues a magnetic abnormality error specification command and a radio wave abnormality error specification command. Performs magnetic/radio wave abnormality determination processing for transmitting commands to the production control board 130. In addition, when the production control board 130 receives the error designation command for magnetic abnormality or the error designation command for radio wave abnormality, it performs control to perform magnetic abnormality error notification or radio wave abnormality error notification.

In step S700, the main CPU 110a outputs external information data (gaming information) from the gaming information output terminal board 90, starting opening opening/closing data outputting to the second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, and large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b. Winning opening/closing data, special symbol display data output to the first special symbol display 60 and second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display data output to the normal symbol display 62, first special symbol pending display 63, and performs data creation processing to create data such as special symbol pending display data to be output to the second special symbol pending display 64 and normal symbol pending display data to be output to the normal symbol pending display 65.

In step S750, the main CPU 110a performs port output processing to output signals such as the external information data, starting opening opening/closing data, and big winning opening opening/closing data created in step S700, special symbol display data, and normal symbol display data. , a display output process that outputs signals such as special symbol pending display data, normal symbol pending display data, etc., and a payout command transmission process that transmits a command set in the payout transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the payout control board 120. Also, an output control process is performed to execute a production command transmission process for transmitting a command set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the production control board 130.

The main CPU 110a performs information program call processing in step S800. Specifically, after disabling interrupts, the flag register is saved in the gaming RWM area, and processing is performed to call the target information program using a CALL instruction.

The main CPU 110a performs game ball counting processing (information program) in step S810. Specifically, the number of payouts during normal play, which is the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls to various winning holes (general winning hole, big winning hole, starting hole) during normal gaming state, Processing is performed to count the number of normal outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 52a, and the total number of outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 52a, regardless of the gaming state. .

In addition, the total number of outs, the number of payouts during normal play, and the number of outs during normal play are gaming information that is not affected (unrelated to the setting value) even if the setting value is changed, so these By counting, it becomes possible to calculate performance information (normal base value to be described later) that excludes the influence of the set value, and it becomes possible to use it for understanding the performance of the gaming machine 1.

The main CPU 110a performs performance information calculation processing (information program) in step S830. Specifically, the normal base value ((Number of payouts during normal play ÷ Number of outs during normal play) x 100) in the current game section divided by the total number of outs is calculated, and the base storage area set in the information RWM area is calculated. Processing is performed to save the normal base value rounded to the first decimal place in the first area.

The game section is updated every time the total number of outs reaches 60,000, and the base storage area is divided into a first area where the normal base value in the current game section is stored, and a one-time storage area. A second area for storing the normal base value in the previous gaming section, a third area for storing the normal base value in the two previous gaming sections, and a normal base value in the three previous gaming sections. A fourth area for playing the game is provided, and the base values for four game sections including the current one are saved in each area.

The main CPU 110a performs performance display data setting processing (information program) in step S850. Specifically, the normal base value (performance information) for four game sections calculated in the performance information calculation process and saved in the base storage area is displayed on the information display 113 while being switched every 5 seconds. Performs processing to set performance display data.

The main CPU 110a performs test data creation processing (information program) in step S870. Specifically, processing is performed to create test data (test information) to be output to test equipment used when testing the gaming machine 1.

The main CPU 110a performs output control processing (information program) in step S880. Specifically, display output processing is performed to output signals such as performance display data (performance information) set in step S850 above to various indicators, and processing is performed to output signals such as test data created in step S870 above. .

In step S890, the main CPU 110a performs processing upon returning to the gaming program. Specifically, processing is performed to restore the flag register from the gaming RWM area, enable interrupts, and return to the gaming program.

In step S900, the main CPU 110a restores the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a, and ends the current timer interrupt process.

In this way, the timer interrupt is not executed in the setting change processing, RWM clear processing, and setting confirmation processing, so it is not possible to count the number of payouts and outs, calculate the performance information of the gaming machine, and perform the processing of the gaming machine. Since the performance information is not displayed, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control board 110.

Although the performance information calculation process was performed in the timer interrupt process of the main control board 110, it may be performed in the main process of the main control board 110. Further, the game ball counting process may also be performed in the main process of the main control board 110. Specifically, it may be performed between step S25 and step S26.

(Input control processing of main control board)
The input control processing of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 129. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing input control processing in the main control board 110.

The main CPU 110a performs general winning opening detection switch input processing in step S210. In this general winning hole detection switch input process, it is determined whether a detection signal has been input from the general winning hole detection switch 43a, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning hole 43. If there is no detection signal input from the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the process moves to step S220.

When a detection signal is input from the general winning hole detection switch 43a, data indicating 5 prize balls is added to the prize ball counter (5 prize ball counter) for the general winning hole used for prize balls and updated. Then, after adding "1" to the winning ball counter (D) indicating the number of game balls that have entered the winning hole and updating it (D←D+1), the general winning hole detection switch input process is ended.

The main CPU 110a performs a big winning opening detection switch input process in step S220. In this big winning hole detection switch input process, it is determined whether a detection signal has been input from the big winning hole detection switch 50a, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the big winning hole 50. If there is no detection signal input from the big winning opening detection switch 50a, the process moves to step S230.

When the detection signal from the big winning opening detection switch 50a is input, data indicating 15 winning balls is added to the winning ball counter (15 winning balls counter) for the big winning opening used for winning balls. Update and add "1" to the winning ball counter (D) indicating the number of game balls that entered the winning slot and update (D←D+1) to determine whether the current jackpot game (special game) is in progress. Determine whether If you are currently playing a jackpot game, add "1" to the round winning counter (C) for counting the game balls that have entered the big winning hole 50 and update it (C←C+1). Detection switch input processing ends.

If the current gaming state is not a special gaming state, the number of illegal winning balls that have won (balls entered) in the specific winning opening (second starting opening 47, big winning opening 50) outside the winning winning period. Add "1" to the counter (E) and update it (E←E+1), determine whether the value of the illegal winning ball counter (E) is greater than the specified number (for example, 10), and If the value of the ball counter (E) is less than or equal to the specified number, the big winning opening detection switch input process is ended.

If the value of the illegal prize winning ball counter (E) is greater than the specified number, an illegal prize winning (unauthorized winning ball) in which a game ball wins a prize (balls entered) outside the winning period has occurred, and an error for fraudulent prize winning is designated. Set the command to the performance transmission data storage area. As a result, an error specifying command for fraudulent winning is transmitted to the production control board 130, and the production control board 130 issues a fraudulent winning error notification to notify that a fraudulent winning has occurred.

Then, external information data (output data) for outputting an illegal winning signal from the game information output terminal board 90 is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, the illegal winning ball counter (E) is cleared, and the big winning opening is detected. End switch input processing. As a result, a fraudulent winning signal is output from the game information output terminal board 90, and it becomes possible for an external device to grasp (specify) that a fraudulent winning has occurred.

The main CPU 110a performs a first starting port detection switch input process in step S230. In this first starting port detection switch input process, it is determined whether a detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a has been input, that is, whether the game ball has entered the first starting port 45 or not. The details will be described later using FIG. 130.

The main CPU 110a performs second starting port detection switch input processing in step S240. In this second starting port detection switch input process, substantially the same process as the first starting port detection switch input process shown in FIG. 130, which will be described later, is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs gate detection switch input processing in step S250. In this gate detection switch input process, it is determined whether a detection signal from the gate detection switch 44a has been input, that is, whether the game ball has passed through the regular figure gate 44 or not. If no detection signal is input from the gate detection switch 44a, the input control process ends.

When a detection signal is input from the gate detection switch 44a, it is determined whether or not the number of regular symbols held, which is the number of regular symbols stored in the normal symbol reserved storage area, is less than four. If the number of reserved general drawings is not less than 4, the input control process is ended.

If the number of reserved symbols is less than 4, the number of reserved symbols is updated by adding "1", and the ordinary symbol judgment information (random value for hit determination, random value for determining ordinary symbols, fluctuation pattern of ordinary symbols) is updated. Random value for determination) is acquired, and the vacant storage sections are searched in order from the first storage section in the normal symbol storage area, and the acquired ordinary symbol determination information is stored in the empty storage section and input. Control processing ends.

(Input processing of the first starting port detection switch on the main control board)
The first starting port detection switch input process of the main control board 110 will be described using FIG. 130. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing the first starting port detection switch input process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S230-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether a detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a is input (a game ball enters the first starting port 45). If the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a is input, the process moves to step S230-2, and if the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a is not input, the current 1 Finish the starting port detection switch input process.

In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the 3-prize ball counter used for prize balls by adding data indicating 3 prize balls, and in step S230-3, the main CPU 110a updates the 3-prize ball counter used for prize balls. A random value for jackpot determination, a random value for special symbol determination, a random value for reach determination, a random value for special pattern fluctuation pattern determination) is acquired.

In step S230-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether the first special symbol reservation number (U1) stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area is less than four. If the first special figure reservation number (U1) is less than 4, the process moves to step S230-5, and if the first special figure reservation number (U1) is not less than 4, the current first start The mouth detection switch input process ends.

In step S230-5, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding "1" to the first special symbol reservation number (U1) and updating it (U1←U1+1), and in step S230-6, the main CPU 110a performs processing to update the first special symbol pending number (U1). A first special figure reservation number designation command corresponding to the figure reservation number (U1) is set in the performance transmission data storage area. As a result, the first special figure reservation number designation command is sent to the production control board 130, and the production control board 130 can grasp the first special figure reservation number.

The main CPU 110a stores the acquired special symbol determination information in the first special symbol reservation storage area in step S230-7. Specifically, since the first special symbol holding storage area is divided into the first storage part to the fourth storage part, the empty storage parts are searched in order from the first storage part, and the empty storage part is searched in order. The special figure determination information obtained in the above is stored.

As a result of the above, the predetermined storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area stores special symbol determination information (random value for jackpot determination, random value for special symbol determination, random value for reach determination, and special symbol fluctuation pattern determination). A first pending memory consisting of random numbers, etc.) will be stored.

In step S230-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether the current gaming state is a non-time-saving gaming state. If it is in the non-time-saving gaming state, the process moves to step S230-9, and if it is not in the non-time-saving gaming state, the current first starting opening detection switch input process is ended.

The main CPU 110a performs a first preliminary determination process in step S230-9. In this first preliminary determination process, the preliminary determination table (not shown) is referred to, and the currently acquired special symbol determination information (first pending memory) is stored before the special symbol fluctuation display based on the determination information is performed. A planned variation pattern, which is a variation pattern scheduled to be executed, is determined.

In step S230-10, the main CPU 110a sets a first prefetch designation command corresponding to the schedule fluctuation pattern determined in the first preliminary determination process in step S230-8 in the performance transmission data storage area, and 1 Finish the starting port detection switch input process.

As a result, the first prefetch designation command is sent to the production control board 130, and the production control board 130 starts changing the special symbol corresponding to the first prefetch designation command. It is possible to execute a prefetched preview performance that executes a predetermined preview performance over a plurality of variable displays. Note that the pre-read preview effect is performed using one or more of the image display device, the audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10, the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74, and the board lighting device 76. This is done using

Regarding the second starting port detection switch input process, the first starting port detection switch 45a, the first starting port 45, the first special symbol reservation storage area, the first reservation memory, the first special symbol reservation number (U1), The first special symbol reservation number designation command, the first preliminary determination process, and the first prefetch designation command are respectively transmitted to the second starting port detection switch 47a, the second starting port 47, the second special symbol pending storage area, the second pending storage, What is necessary is to read it as the second special figure reservation number (U2), the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second preliminary determination process, and the second pre-reading designation command.

(Special figure special electric control processing of main control board)
The special figure special electric control process of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 131. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing the special figure special electric control process in the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a loads the value of the special figure special electric line processing data in step S301, refers to the branch destination address from the special figure special electric line processing data loaded in step S302, and executes the process corresponding to the branch destination address, The current special map special electric train control process ends.

Specifically, if the special figure special electric processing data = 0, the variable display of the special symbol is started based on the judgment result of the reserved memory (special figure judgment information), the variable time is set, and the variable display is started. Processing and special figure special electric processing data for transmitting accompanying start time commands (special symbol storage designation command, game state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command as start time signal) to the production control board 130 A special symbol storage determination process (step S310) is executed to change the value to "1". The details of the special symbol storage determination process will be described later.

If the special figure special electric processing data = 1, the variable display of the special symbol will be stopped as the variation time elapses, a stop time (for example, 0.5 seconds) will be set, and the stop command (special figure stop as a stop signal) will be executed. Special symbol variation processing (step S320) is executed to perform processing for transmitting a command) to the performance control board 130, processing for changing special symbol special electric processing data to "2", etc.

If the special pattern special electricity processing data = 2, the special pattern special electricity processing data will be changed to "0" if the special symbol is a loss as the stop time (0.5 seconds) of the special symbol has passed, and if it is a jackpot special symbol, it will be a jackpot. The opening time of the game is set, and processing for transmitting an opening designation command to the performance control board 130 and special symbol stop processing (step S330) for changing the special symbol special electric processing data to "3" are executed.

If the special figure special electric processing data = 3, the round game is started as the opening time of the jackpot game has elapsed, and the jackpot is executed based on the processing for transmitting the round number designation command to the production control board 130 and the end of the final round game. Executes jackpot game processing (step S340) for setting the ending time of the game and transmitting an ending designation command to the production control board 130, processing for changing the special figure special electric processing data to "4", etc. do.

If the special figure special electric processing data = 4, the process for ending the jackpot game as the ending time passes, and the game state after the jackpot ends (low-accuracy time-saving game state, high-accuracy time-saving game state, high probability number of times, time-saving number) ), a jackpot game end process (step S350) is executed to perform a process to set the special figure special electric line process data to "0", etc.

(Special symbol memory determination process of main control board)
The special symbol storage determination process (gaming program) of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 132. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing special symbol storage determination processing in the main control board 110.

First, in step S310-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. If the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the current special symbol storage determination process is ended, and if the special symbol is not in the variable display state, the process moves to step S310-2.

In step S310-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is 1 or more. If the second special figure reservation number (U2) is 1 or more, the process moves to step S310-3, and if the second special figure reservation number (U2) is not 1 or more, the process goes to step S310-4. move.

In step S310-3, the main CPU 110a updates the second special figure reservation number (U2) by subtracting "1," and in step S310-6, the second special figure reservation number (U2) corresponds to the second special figure reservation number (U2) after the subtraction. A special symbol storage designation command is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and processing for updating the pending icon displayed on the first image display device 70 and the display of the icon is performed.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets a gaming state designation command corresponding to the current gaming state in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S310-8, sets the gaming state designation command corresponding to the current gaming state in the production transmission data storage area. Shift processing is performed on the data stored in the storage section, and the special figure determination information stored in the first to fourth storage sections is shifted to the previous storage section.

For example, the special figure determination information stored in the fourth storage part of the second special figure determination information reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage part of the second special figure determination information reservation storage area. In addition, the special figure judgment information stored in the first storage part of the second special figure judgment information reservation storage area is shifted to the 0th storage part which is the special figure judgment information execution storage area, and is stored in the 0th storage part. The special figure determination information used in the previous game will be deleted.

On the other hand, in step S310-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is 1 or more. If the first special figure reservation number (U1) is 1 or more, the process moves to step S310-5, and if the first special figure reservation number (U1) is not 1 or more, the process goes to step S319-1. move.

The main CPU 110a updates the first special figure reservation number (U1) by subtracting "1" in step S310-5, and in step S310-6, the main CPU 110a updates the special figure reservation number (U1) corresponding to the first special figure reservation number (U1) after the subtraction. A symbol storage designation command is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and processing for updating the pending icon displayed on the first image display device 70 and the display of the icon is performed.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets a gaming state designation command corresponding to the current gaming state in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S310-8, stores it in the first special symbol holding storage area. Shift processing is performed on the data, and the special figure determination information stored in the first to fourth storage units is shifted to the previous storage unit.

For example, the special symbol determination information stored in the fourth storage part of the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage part of the first special symbol reservation storage area. In addition, the special symbol determination information stored in the first storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the 0th storage section, which is the special symbol determination information execution storage area, and is stored in the 0th storage section. The special figure determination information used in the previous game will be deleted.

In addition, with the shift processing of the special symbol determination information in step S310-8, the special symbol reservation display data indicating the first special symbol reservation number (U1) and the second special symbol reservation number (U2) after subtraction is stored in the main RAM 110c. set in a predetermined area. As a result, the display contents of the first special symbol reservation display 63 and the second special symbol reservation display 64 are updated.

In addition, in this embodiment, in steps S310-2 to S310-8, the second special figure determination information reservation storage area is prioritized over the first special figure determination information reservation storage area and shifted (the second special figure reservation number is However, in the order in which the game balls enter the starting hole, the first special figure judgment information holding storage area or the second special drawing judgment information holding storage area is It may be shifted (subtracting the number of reserved 1st special symbols and the number of reserved 2nd special symbols in the winning order), or the 1st special symbol determination information retention storage area may be prioritized over the 2nd special symbol determination information retention storage area. You may also shift (subtract the first special figure reservation number with priority over the second special figure reservation number).

The main CPU 110a performs jackpot determination processing in step S311. Specifically, the special figure determination information (random value for jackpot determination) stored in the 0th storage unit, which is the special figure determination information execution storage area, is checked against the jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 123, and a jackpot is determined. Determine whether or not. In addition, the special symbol determination information (random value for special symbol determination) stored in the 0th storage unit, which is the special symbol determination information execution storage area, is checked against the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 124, and the special symbol to be stopped is Performs processing to determine the type of.

In step S312, the main CPU 110a sets a special symbol designation command (first information signal) corresponding to the type of special symbol determined in the jackpot determination process in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a special symbol designation command (first information signal) is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and a process is performed to determine the performance symbol 70a that will be stopped and displayed as a result of the variable performance.

The main CPU 110a performs special figure fluctuation pattern determination processing in step S313. Specifically, the special symbol determination information stored in the 0th storage unit, which is the special symbol determination information execution storage area, is checked against the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 128, and the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined. Performs processing to determine the special figure fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time).

In step S314, the main CPU 110a sends a special pattern fluctuation pattern designation command (second information signal) corresponding to the type of special pattern fluctuation pattern determined in the special pattern fluctuation pattern determination process to the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. set. As a result, a special symbol variation pattern designation command (second information signal) is transmitted to the production control board 130, and processing for determining a variation production pattern, which is a production mode of variation production performed during the variation display of the special symbol, is carried out. It will be done.

In step S315, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol variation time (counter value) corresponding to the type of special symbol variation pattern determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S316. , starts changing display of special symbols. As a result, the LED lighting data for executing the variable display of the special symbol is created in the data creation process of step S700, and the created lighting data is output in the output control process of step S800, so that the first A variable display of special symbols will be performed on the special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61.

In step S317, the main CPU 110a clears the customer waiting state flag for ending the customer waiting state, and in step S318, sets the special symbol special electric processing data to "1", and ends the current special symbol memory determination process. do.

In step S319-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether a customer waiting state flag indicating a customer waiting state is set in the main RAM 110c. If the customer waiting state flag is set, the current special symbol storage determination process is ended, and if the customer waiting state flag is not set, the process moves to step S319-2. In addition, the customer waiting state refers to a state in which the special symbols are not displayed fluctuating and the special game (jackpot game) is not being executed, but the requirement also includes that the fluctuating display of the normal symbols and the auxiliary game are not being executed. It's okay.

In step S319-2, the main CPU 110a sets a customer waiting state flag in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S319-3, the main CPU 110a sets a customer waiting state designation command indicating that the customer is waiting for a customer in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. It is set in the transmission data storage area, and the current special symbol storage determination process is completed. As a result, a customer waiting state designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to execute a customer waiting demonstration performance to encourage the player to play.

(Main processing of the production control section)
Next, the main processing of the production control section 130m will be explained using FIG. 133. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the production control section 130m.

When power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the sub CPU 130a, and the sub CPU 130a performs the following main processing.

The sub CPU 130a sets interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interrupts in step E10, and performs initialization processing in step E20. Specifically, when the power is turned on, the main processing program is read from the sub ROM 130b, flags etc. stored in the sub RAM 130c are initialized, and processing such as initial settings is performed.

The sub CPU 130a sets interrupt permission to permit timer interrupts in step E30, and performs sub random number update processing in step E40. Specifically, processing is performed to update various random numbers stored in the sub-RAM 130c. Thereafter, the process of step E40 is repeated until a predetermined interrupt process is performed.

(Timer interrupt processing of production control section)
The timer interrupt process of the production control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 134. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds) in the production control unit 130m.

The sub CPU 130a saves the information stored in the register of the sub CPU 130a to the stack area in step E100, and performs timer update processing in step E120. In this timer update process, the sub CPU 130a performs a process of updating various timers.

The sub CPU 130a performs input control processing in step E130. Specifically, it is determined whether or not there is an input to various switches such as the performance button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a, and when there is an input, processing is performed to set predetermined data.

The sub CPU 130a performs command analysis processing in step E150. Specifically, the process determines whether or not various commands are being transmitted from the main control board 110, and stores the received commands in the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c when various commands are being transmitted. conduct.

The sub CPU 130a performs a setting change/confirmation process in step E170. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a setting change designation command or a setting confirmation designation command has been received by referring to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and if a setting change designation command has been received, the above-mentioned settings are A process for executing change notification is performed, and if a setting confirmation designation command is received, a process for executing the above-mentioned setting confirmation notification is performed.

The sub CPU 130a performs power-on processing in step E200. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a power-on designation command has been received by referring to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and if the power-on designation command has been received, processing is performed to execute a power-on notification. More specifically, a power-on notification command is sent to the display control unit 140 to display a power-on screen on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), and to output audio. For example, the device 9 may output a power-on sound.

The sub CPU 130a performs power failure recovery processing in step E250. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a power restoration designation command has been received by referring to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and if the power restoration designation command has been received, processing is performed to execute a power failure restoration notification. In detail, a power recovery notification command is sent to the display control unit 140 to display a power recovery screen on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), and to output audio. For example, the device 9 may output a power restoration sound.

Note that when the power-on process or the power failure recovery process is performed, for example, "135" is displayed as the initial symbol (also referred to as an initial roll) of the effect symbol 70a displayed on the first image display device 70.
The initial symbols (also referred to as initial numbers) may display different combinations of symbols depending on whether the power-on process is performed or the power failure recovery process is performed. For example, "135" may be displayed when power-on processing has been performed, and "357" may be displayed when power failure recovery processing has been performed.

The sub CPU 130a performs customer waiting effect processing in step E300. Specifically, it refers to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether or not a customer waiting state designation command has been received, and if a command has been received, performs processing to perform a customer waiting demonstration effect after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. conduct. To be more specific, a customer waiting production command is sent to the display control unit 140 to display a customer waiting demonstration screen on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), and to A customer waiting demo sound is outputted from the output device 9. The details of the customer waiting performance process will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a performs a gaming state update process in step E350. Specifically, it refers to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether or not a gaming state designation command has been received, and if it has been received, updates the gaming state information stored in the sub-RAM 130c. conduct.

The sub CPU 130a performs pending information update processing in step E400. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referred to, and it is determined whether or not a command for specifying the number of special drawings reserved or a command for specifying the number of regular drawings reserved is received, and if the command is received, it is stored (ascertained) in the sub-RAM 130c. ), the number of reserved first special symbols, the number of second reserved special symbols, the number of regular symbols, etc. are updated.

In step E500, the sub CPU 130a performs a prefetch effect process. Specifically, the receiving buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referenced to determine whether a prefetch designation command or a special figure variation pattern designation command is received, and if so, the icon changes as a prefetch-related effect. Performs processing related to production, continuous preview production, and lamp change production. Note that the details of the look-ahead performance processing will be described later.

The "icon change performance" is a type of pre-read preview performance that makes the player expect a jackpot game to be executed by changing the pending icon and the display mode of the icon. In the present embodiment, an icon change effect for a pending icon may be referred to as a "hold icon change effect" and an icon change effect for the icon may be referred to as "the icon change effect."

The "continuous notice performance" is a type of advance notice performance that makes the player expect a jackpot game to be executed by executing a predetermined performance over one or more variable performances.
The "lamp change performance" is a type of advance preview performance that makes the player expect a jackpot game to be executed by changing the light emission mode of the winning slot lamp over one or more variable performances.

The sub CPU 130a performs special figure special electric production processing in step E600. Specifically, with reference to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, a special symbol designation command, a special symbol variation pattern designation command, a special symbol stop designation command, a jackpot opening designation command, a round number designation command, and a jackpot ending designation command are executed. etc., and if so, performs processing to execute the effect corresponding to the received command.

In addition, if the special symbol designation command (first information signal) and the special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command (second information signal) as a start command (start time signal) accompanying the start of fluctuation display are successfully received. , a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of the performance symbols (a first variable performance corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, a second variable performance corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol) will be executed. However, there is an abnormality in the special symbol designation command or the special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command (the relationship between loss and jackpot does not match, the type of special symbol indicated by MODE in the command does not match, the DATA side of the command is damaged. (e.g., the content has changed to something that could not have occurred in the first place), the command is invalidated and the variation effect is not executed. Also, the special symbol designation command and the special symbol variation pattern designation command cannot be received normally (the special symbol designation command is not received within a predetermined time after receiving the special symbol designation command, or the special symbol designation command is not received. Even if a special figure variation pattern designation command is received when the special figure variation pattern designation command is not executed, the command is deemed invalid and the variation effect is not executed. In the following explanation, cases where there is an abnormality in the command and cases where the command cannot be received normally are referred to as "command abnormality."

In step E700, the sub CPU 130a performs a general figure and general electric display process. Specifically, it refers to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c and receives a normal symbol designation command, a regular symbol variation pattern designation command, a regular symbol stop designation command, a winning opening designation command, a winning ending designation command, etc. It is determined whether or not the command is received, and if the command is received, processing is performed to execute the effect corresponding to the received command.

The sub CPU 130a performs production mode update processing in step E800. Specifically, updating the production mode (production stage) in which production elements (background image, production image, production sound, etc.) in the audio output device 9, the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71, etc. are defined. It is determined whether the conditions (changes in the game state, winning of the mode update lottery, execution of SP/SPSP reach effects that result in a loss, etc.) are met, and if the update conditions are met, multiple production modes are executed. Perform processing to update to one of the modes.

"Production mode" includes production modes A to C set in the normal gaming state (low probability non-time saving gaming state), production mode D to E set in the variable probability gaming state (high probability non time saving gaming state), and production mode D to E set in the variable probability gaming state (high probability non time saving gaming state). A performance mode F is provided which is set in the gaming state (low-accuracy time-saving gaming state). In addition, when the power is turned on and the game is controlled to the normal gaming state (for example, after changing settings, clearing RWM, confirming settings, etc.), the first performance mode set is always performance mode A, and when the power is turned on, When the power is turned on, the production mode that is set first is always production mode D, and when the power is turned on and the time-saving gaming state is controlled, the production mode that is first set is always production mode D. is always in production mode F.

In addition, in production modes A to C, the production pattern 70a is composed of numbers (identification characters) + characters corresponding to the numbers (decoration part) + design effect images (decoration part) that decorate the backgrounds of the numbers and characters, Numbers and character designs differ between production modes. In the performance modes D to G, the performance pattern 70a is composed only of numbers (identification characters), and the design of the numbers is common among the performance modes.
In addition, the decoration part in the performance pattern 70a may be different for each number, and it may also be possible to identify which number (design) the performance pattern 70a is based on this decoration part.
The character (decoration part) of the effect pattern 70a described above corresponds to a character image CG (see FIG. 278(a), etc.) described later. Moreover, the design effect image of the production design 70a mentioned above corresponds to the design effect image ZE described later.

Furthermore, in the production modes A to G, a background image HG is displayed. The background image HG is, for example, an image (a cityscape, a landscape) related to the content (anime, story, etc.) that is the subject of the gaming machine 1. The background image HG is an image (video) that scrolls left and right (reciprocating motion), and when it is displayed from the beginning to the end, it continues to be played in a loop so that it is displayed again from the beginning. Furthermore, in this embodiment, background images HG corresponding to each of the production modes A to G are displayed. In other words, a different background image HG is displayed for each production mode. Moreover, the display content of the background image HG is switched when a specific effect (SP reach effect, etc.) is executed. The background image HG is played in a loop whether or not the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) is being executed or, for further explanation, even when the customer waiting effect is being executed. Always in motion. Furthermore, the background image HG is located in a layer of the first image display device 70 that is behind the performance pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, the first special pattern reservation number display area 70E, and the second special pattern reservation number display area 70F. Is displayed.

The sub CPU 130a performs error notification processing in step E850. Specifically, it refers to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether an error designation command or an error cancellation designation command has been received, and if so, an error notification effect corresponding to the received error designation command is performed. , or terminate the error notification effect corresponding to the received error cancellation designation command.

The sub CPU 130a performs output control processing in step E900. Specifically, it performs processes such as outputting signals such as predetermined data and transmitting various commands stored in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150.

In step E950, the sub CPU 130a restores the information saved in step E100 to the register of the sub CPU 130a, and ends the current timer interrupt process.

(Customer waiting performance processing by the performance control department)
The customer waiting performance processing of the performance control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 135. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing the customer waiting performance processing in the performance control section 130m.

In step E300-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether a customer waiting state designation command has been received from the main control board 110. If the customer waiting state designation command has not been received, the process moves to step E300-4, and if the customer waiting state designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step E300-2 until the start of the customer waiting demonstration performance. The demo standby time determination table (see FIG. 136) for determining the standby time of is selected. Note that details of the demonstration standby time determination table will be described later.

In step E300-3, the sub CPU 130a determines the demo standby time and sets it in the demo standby timer. Specifically, with reference to the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. 136, one demonstration standby time is determined from among a plurality of demonstration standby times based on the current gaming state and the current state.

Note that a demonstration standby timer is set, and a customer waiting effect is executed until the demonstration standby timer becomes 0. "Customer waiting standby effect" refers to the effect pattern 70a, special pattern TZ, the relevant icon display area 70C, first pending icon display area 70B or second pending icon display area 70D, first special symbol pending number display area 70E, 2 special figure reserved number display area 70F is visible, and in addition to this, a first image (effect button) indicating that a menu is displayed by operating the effect button 17 as shown in FIG. 17), a second image suggesting that the volume can be adjusted by operating the up and down buttons of the four-way controller 18 (an image imitating the four-way controller 18 whose up and down buttons are brightly colored), This is an effect that displays a third image (an image imitating the cross key 18 whose left and right buttons are brightly colored) suggesting that the amount of light can be adjusted by operating the left and right buttons 18.

In step E300-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not it is on standby for a demonstration. Specifically, it is determined whether a demonstration standby timer is set. If the demo is not on standby, the current customer waiting performance processing is terminated as not to execute the customer waiting demonstration performance, and if the demo is on standby, the demo waiting timer is updated by -1 in step E300-5. .

The sub CPU 130a determines whether the demo standby timer=0 in step E300-6. If the demo standby timer is not 0, it is assumed that the customer waiting demonstration performance has not yet been executed, and the current customer waiting performance processing is terminated.If the demo waiting timer = 0, the customer waiting demonstration performance is executed in step E300-7. The command is set in the transmission buffer and the current customer waiting performance process is ended. As a result, a customer waiting demonstration performance command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and lamp control unit 150, and a customer waiting demonstration performance that appeals to the player to play the game is executed.

(Demo standby time determination table)
FIG. 136 is a diagram showing a demonstration waiting time determination table that is referred to when determining the waiting time until the start of the customer waiting demonstration performance.

In the demo standby time determination table shown in FIG. 136, the gaming state, the current state, and the selected demo standby time are associated with each other. Four types of demonstration standby times from 30 seconds to 80 seconds are set for the demonstration standby time in the normal gaming state, and four types of demonstration standby times from 35 seconds to 85 seconds are set for the demonstration standby time in the specific gaming state. is set.

The first feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. 136 is the demonstration standby time after the performance symbols are statically displayed on the image display device immediately after power is turned on, and the demonstration symbols are displayed on the image display device immediately after the power is restored. The demonstration waiting time after the is displayed statically, the demonstration waiting time after the fluctuating display of the production symbol ends (the fluctuation time has elapsed) and the production symbol is statically displayed, and the demonstration symbol after the end of the customer waiting demo production. The difference is that the waiting time for the demonstration after it is displayed statically is different. Therefore, the customer waiting demonstration effect can be executed at an appropriate time depending on the current state, and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

The second feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. 136 is that the fluctuating display of the performance symbols ends (variation The point is that the demonstration waiting time is longer after the performance pattern is displayed statically after the time has elapsed. Therefore, the customer waiting demonstration effect can be executed at an appropriate time depending on the probability that the player is playing the game, and it is possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

The third feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. The difference is that the demonstration pattern waits for a longer time after the performance symbols are displayed statically on the image display device. Therefore, the customer waiting demonstration effect can be executed at an appropriate time depending on the probability that the player is playing the game, and it is possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

The fourth feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. The difference is that the waiting time for the demonstration after the design is statically displayed is longer. Therefore, the customer waiting demonstration effect can be executed at an appropriate time depending on the probability that the player is playing the game, and it is possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

A fifth feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. 136 is that the demonstration standby time is the shortest after the performance symbols are statically displayed after the end of the customer waiting demonstration performance. Therefore, the appeal of the game to players can be effectively increased, and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

The sixth feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. 136 is that each demonstration standby time in a specific gaming state (low probability time saving gaming state, high probability time saving gaming state) is longer than each demonstration waiting time in the normal gaming state. The point is that it is longer. Therefore, the customer waiting demonstration effect can be executed at an appropriate time depending on the probability that the player is playing the game, and it is possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

(Pre-reading performance processing by the performance control unit)
Using FIG. 137, the pre-reading performance processing of the performance control unit 130m will be explained. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the pre-reading performance processing in the performance control unit 130m.

In step E510, the sub CPU 130a performs an icon change effect determination process for determining whether or not to perform the icon change effect, the mode of effect of the icon change effect, and the like. Note that details of the icon change effect determination process will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a executes the icon change effect determined to be executed in the icon change effect determination process in step E520 (changes the already displayed pending icon or the display mode of the icon). Perform execution processing. Note that details of the icon change effect execution process will be described later.

In step E530, the sub CPU 130a performs a continuous preview performance determination process for determining whether to execute the continuous preview performance, the presentation mode of the continuous preview performance, and the like. Note that details of the continuous preview performance determination process will be described later.

In step E540, the sub CPU 130a performs a continuous preview performance execution process for executing the continuous preview performance determined to be executed in the continuous preview performance determination process. Note that details of the continuous preview performance determination process will be described later.

In step E550, the sub CPU 130a performs a lamp change effect execution process to execute a lamp change effect (lights up the prize opening lamp NR in a light emission mode corresponding to the icon whose display mode has changed), and The prefetching performance processing ends. The details of the lamp change effect execution process will be described later.

(Icon change performance determination process of the performance control unit)
The icon change performance determination process of the performance control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 138. FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing icon change performance determination processing in the performance control section 130m.

In step E510-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether a prefetch designation command has been received from the main control board 110. If the prefetch designation command is received, the process moves to step E510-2, and if the prefetch designation command is not received, the current icon change effect determination process is ended.

In step E510-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received prefetch designation command and grasps whether or not it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot game, and the performance contents (scheduled variation pattern).

In step E510-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current period is an executable period for the icon change effect. If it is the executable period for the icon change effect, the process moves to step E510-4, and if it is not the executable period for the icon change effect, the process moves to step E510-7.

The "executable period of icon change performance" refers to a case where a jackpot game is not being executed, an icon change performance is not being executed, or an icon change performance is not scheduled to be executed. Note that any one of the above three conditions or only two conditions may be provided. In addition, if the received prefetch designation command is based on winning at the first starting port 45, it is a normal gaming state, and the received prefetching designation command is based on winning at the second starting port 47. In some cases, it may be provided that the game is in a specific gaming state (a low-accuracy time-saving gaming state, a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state), or the like.

In step E510-4, the sub CPU 130a obtains a random value for determining the icon display mode for determining the final display mode of the icon to be additionally displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and in step E510-5. , selects the icon final display mode determination table (see FIG. 139) for determining the final display mode of the icon. Note that details of the icon final display mode determination table will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines the final icon display mode in step E510-6. Specifically, the sub CPU 130a refers to the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. One icon final display mode is determined from among the icon final display modes.

In step E510-7, the sub CPU 130a determines the normal icon (white icon), which is the normal display mode, as the final icon display mode.

In step E510-8, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the determined final icon display mode is a display mode (special icon) in which an icon change effect is executed. If the display mode is such that an icon change effect is executed, the process moves to step E510-9, and if the display mode is not a display mode that executes an icon change effect, the process moves to step E510-12.

In step E510-9, the sub CPU 130a selects a change scenario determination table (see FIG. 137) for determining a change scenario for the icon change effect. Note that details of the change scenario determination table will be described later. This change scenario indicates the transition of the display mode from when the pending icon appears until it disappears.

In step E510-10, the sub CPU 130a determines a change scenario and sets it in the prefetch information storage area corresponding to the pending number counter of the sub RAM 130c. Specifically, the change scenario determination table shown in FIG. One change scenario is determined from among the change scenarios.

In step E510-11, the sub CPU 130a identifies the winning icon, which is the icon display mode initially displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), from the determined change scenario, and displays the icon of the winning icon. The display command is set in the transmission buffer, and the current icon change effect determination process is completed. As a result, the icon display command is sent to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and the pending icon in the display mode corresponding to the icon display command for the winning icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). , a predetermined sound effect will be output.

In step E510-12, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-change scenario in which the icon change effect is not executed, and sets it in the prefetch information storage area corresponding to the pending number counter of the sub RAM 130c.

In step E510-13, the sub CPU 130a sets the icon display command for the normal icon in the transmission buffer, and ends the current icon change effect determination process. As a result, the icon display command is sent to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a pending icon with a display mode corresponding to the icon display command of the normal icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). A predetermined sound effect (first winning sound) will be output.

(Icon final display mode determination table)
FIG. 139 is a diagram showing an icon final display mode determination table that is referred to when determining the icon final display mode.

The icon final display mode determination table associates the scheduled fluctuation pattern indicated by the prefetch designation command, the selection rate (%) of each icon final display mode, and the selected icon final display mode. The type of notification sound when the icon is generated for each type is described.

The final icon display mode includes a white icon as a normal icon, and a blue icon, a red icon, and a rainbow icon as special icons that indicate the possibility of a jackpot (a jackpot game will be executed). has been done.

The expectation level of winning a jackpot related to special icons increases in the order of (white icon <) blue icon < red icon < rainbow icon, and the rainbow icon is an icon that is guaranteed to be a jackpot.

When the white icon is displayed on the image display device, the first occurrence alarm sound is output, when the blue icon is displayed, the second occurrence alarm sound is output, and when the red icon is displayed, the second occurrence alarm sound is output. , the third occurrence notification sound is output, and when the rainbow icon is displayed, the fourth occurrence notification sound is set to be output.

Here, the main feature of the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 139 is that the selection rate of the icon final display mode is varied according to the scheduled variation pattern. Specifically, in this embodiment, when the planned variation pattern is SP reach or SPSP reach, special icons are selected at a higher rate than when the planned variation pattern is normal variation, shortened variation, or normal reach that does not result in reach. It is supposed to be done.

In addition, in the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 139, in the case of a jackpot, the normal icon (white icon) is not selected as the icon final display mode, but it may be selected. .

Note that in this embodiment, different notification sounds are set for each of the plurality of icon display modes (4 types), but the notification sound when a white icon is generated, a blue icon, a red icon, and There may be two types of notification sounds, including a change notification sound when the icon changes to a rainbow icon, or the notification sound may not be output when a white icon occurs, but the notification sound may be output only when the icon changes to one of the modes. It's okay. Further, for the rainbow icon that is certain to be a jackpot, a dedicated notification sound may be provided and there may be three types.

(Change scenario determination table)
FIG. 140 is a diagram showing a change scenario determination table that is referred to when determining a change scenario.

The change scenario determination table is associated with the icon final display mode, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the prefetch designation command, the selection rate (%) of each change scenario, and the selected change scenario, and is used as a reference. Preliminary changes in each change scenario and how icons are updated in the changes are described.

"Pre-variation" is a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure judgment information stored earlier than the special figure judgment information corresponding to the newly received prefetch designation command. The "variation" is a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received prefetch designation command.

In the change scenario, the display mode of the icon does not change during the execution of the preliminary change (the pending icon change effect is not executed), but changes during the execution of the change (the icon change effect is executed). The scenario (for example, scenario 01, etc.) or the display mode of the icon changes during the execution of the preliminary variation (the pending icon change effect is executed), but does not change during the execution of the variation (the icon change effect is Scenarios (for example, Scenario 02, etc.) that are not executed) or the display mode of the icon changes during the execution of the preliminary variation and during the execution of the variation (pending icon change effect and the icon change effect is executed) ) scenario (for example, scenario 15, etc.) is set.

In addition, in the change scenario determination table of this embodiment, a scenario is determined in which the display mode of the icon is changed regardless of whether or not a reach effect (a reach effect other than a normal reach effect may be performed) is executed in advance variation. However, the display mode of the icon is changed by a change scenario determination table that uses as a determining factor whether or not a reach effect that suggests that a jackpot game may be executed in advance variation is executed. Alternatively, the scenario in which the When using such a change scenario determination table, the icon display mode does not change during the pre-variation in which the reach effect is executed, and the icon display mode does not change during the pre-variation in which the reach effect is executed. It is advisable to set various scenarios so that changes in the display mode occur. In addition, the display mode of the icon changes during the pre-variation in which a reach effect is executed, and the pre-variation in which a reach effect is not executed, but the reach effect is lower than during the pre-variation in which a reach effect is executed. Various scenarios may be set in such a way that changes in the display mode of the icon occur at a higher rate during the execution of the pre-variation in which the change is not executed.

(Icon change performance execution processing of the performance control unit)
The icon change performance execution process of the performance control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 141. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing icon change performance execution processing in the performance control section 130m.

In step E520-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a special figure variation pattern designation command has been received from the main control board 110. If the special figure variation pattern designation command is received, the process moves to step E520-2, and if the special figure variation pattern designation command is not received, the current icon change production execution process is ended.

In step E520-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the icon change scenario stored in the pre-read information storage area of the sub RAM 130c, and in step E520-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not to change (update) the display mode in the current variable performance. Determine whether there is an icon. If there is a pending icon that changes the display mode, the process moves to step E520-4, and if there is no pending icon that changes the display mode, the process moves to step E520-7.

In step E520-4, the sub CPU 130a selects a change pattern determination table for hold icons (see FIG. 142) for determining a change pattern (change mode) of the display mode of the hold icon to be changed. Note that details of the change pattern determination table for pending icons will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines a pending icon change pattern in step E520-5. Specifically, with reference to the change pattern determination table for pending icons shown in FIG. 142, one of the multiple pending icon change patterns is selected based on the mode of pending icon change in the current variation performance and the selection rate (%). One pending icon change pattern is determined from the following.

In step E520-6, the sub CPU 130a sets a change effect command corresponding to the determined pending icon change pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the change production command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and is displayed on the first image display device 70 according to the change timing according to the pending icon change pattern and the change stage in the change timing. The display mode of the pending icon will change, or a predetermined sound effect (change sound) will be output.

In step E520-7, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the scenario (change scenario, non-change scenario) of the icon is stored in the prefetch information storage area of the sub RAM 130c. If the scenario of the icon is stored, the process moves to step E520-8, and if the scenario of the icon is not stored, the scenario is cleared from the prefetch information storage area during power recovery or startup. This step assumes that a command error has occurred in which the scenario is not stored in the pre-read information storage area due to the inability to properly receive the command at the time of winning a prize (the command for specifying the number of special drawings reserved as a signal for winning a prize, the command for specifying pre-reading). Transfer processing to E520-11.

In step E520-8, the sub CPU 130a determines whether there is an icon whose display mode is to be changed (updated). If there is an icon whose display mode is to be changed, the process moves to step E520-9, and if there is no icon whose display mode is to be changed, the current icon change effect execution process is ended.

In step E520-9, the sub CPU 130a selects from among the change pattern determination tables for a plurality of icons for determining the change pattern (change mode) of the display mode of the icon to be changed in the current variation performance. A change pattern determination table (see FIG. 143) for the icon corresponding to the change stage at which the icon changes is selected. Note that details of the change pattern determination table for the icon according to the change stage will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines the icon change pattern in step E520-10. Specifically, with reference to the change pattern determination table for the selected icon, multiple icons are selected based on the mode of icon change in the current variation performance and the selection rate (%) of each icon change pattern. One icon change pattern is determined from among the change patterns.

In step E520-11, the sub CPU 130a performs an abnormality process to determine whether or not to execute the icon change effect as compensation for the icon change effect that may not have been executed due to power restoration or the occurrence of a command abnormality. Select the icon change pattern determination table (FIG. 144) for the icon change pattern. Note that details of the icon change pattern determination table for abnormal situations will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines the icon change pattern in step E520-12. Specifically, with reference to the icon change pattern determination table for the selected abnormality, based on the fluctuation pattern indicated by the current special figure fluctuation pattern designation command and the selection rate (%) of each relevant icon change pattern, One icon change pattern is determined from among the plurality of icon change patterns, and the final icon display mode is also determined.

In step E520-13, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the icon change pattern is a change pattern that changes the display mode of the icon. If it is a change pattern, the process moves to step E520-14, and if it is not a change pattern (non-change pattern), the current icon change effect execution process is ended.

In step E520-14, the sub CPU 130a sets a change effect command corresponding to the determined icon change pattern in the transmission buffer, and ends the current icon change effect execution process. As a result, a change production command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 according to the change timing according to the icon change pattern and the change stage in the change timing. The display mode of the icon will change, or a predetermined sound effect (change sound) will be output.

As described above, according to the icon change effect execution process shown in FIG. (change effect) may be executed again. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the feeling of dissatisfaction caused by the failure of the icon change effect due to power restoration or the occurrence of a command abnormality, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the icon change performance execution process shown in FIG. 141, the icon change performance is executed again in the variable performance that is newly started after the power is restored (the icon has become a special icon due to the pending icon change performance, but it becomes normal when the power is restored). Even if the icon change effect is executed for an icon that has returned to an icon, the change scenario before power restoration ( The process will not be executed from the point where it left off (the step that was suggested before the power supply was stopped). Therefore, it is possible to execute an icon change performance that matches the content of the current variation performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the power is restored or a command abnormality occurs while the icon change effect is being executed, in the variable effect that is newly started after the power is restored or the command abnormality occurs, the suspended memory (special figure) that triggered the execution of the icon change effect will be saved. The icon change effect is not executed in the variable effect corresponding to the pending memory (special figure judgment information) earlier than the judgment information), and the icon change effect is executed in the variable effect corresponding to the pending memory that triggered the execution of the icon change effect. It may be executable.

(Change pattern determination table for pending icon)
FIG. 142 is a diagram showing a change pattern determination table for hold icons that is referred to when determining a change pattern for hold icons.

The pending icon change pattern determination table is associated with the pending icon change mode in the current variation performance, the selection rate (%) of each pending icon change pattern, and the selected pending icon change pattern. For reference, the timing of occurrence of a pending icon change effect and the change stage in each pending icon change pattern are described.

The hold icon change pattern includes normal change pattern 01 in which the display mode of the hold icon changes with the output of a sound effect when the hold icon is shifted and displayed (at the start of variation) in response to the icon disappearing. , normal change pattern 02 in which the display mode of the pending icon changes while changing with the output of a sound effect, and the display of the icon as a character appears and an action effect that acts on the icon from the character as a starting point is performed. A character action change pattern 01 in which the aspect changes, and a change notification pattern indicating that the display form of the icon changes as a result of the fluctuation effect are temporarily stopped and displayed, and an effect effect that acts on the pending icon using the change notification pattern as a starting point. A symbol effect change pattern 01 is set in which the display mode of the pending icon changes as a result of this change.

The timing at which the pending icon change effect occurs is classified in relation to the progress state of the variable effect: when the variable effect starts (at the start of the change), when the change effect is being executed (during change), and when the change effect occurs during the change effect. There are times when the 70a temporarily stops ((temporarily) stopped).

The change stage of the pending icon includes 1UP, which changes the display mode of the jackpot winning expectation level to one level higher (for example, a change from a white icon to a blue icon, or a change from a blue icon to a red icon), and a jackpot winning expectation level. 2UP (for example, change from a white icon to a red icon) is set to change the display mode to a two-step higher display mode.

Note that, although the change effect generation timing of the pending icon is set to the above three timings, it is not limited to these timings, and other timings may be provided. For example, it may be provided that a variable performance is being executed (during variation) until a reach is established, a normal reach is being executed, an SP (SPSP) reach is being executed, etc.

(Change pattern determination table for the relevant icon)
FIG. 143 is a diagram showing a change pattern determination table for the icon that is referred to when determining the change pattern of the icon. This is a table to be referred to, and FIG. 143(b) is a table to be referred to when changing the display mode of the icon in two steps.

The change pattern determination table for the icon is associated with the mode of the icon change in the current variation performance, the selection rate (%) of each icon change pattern, and the icon change pattern to be selected. For reference, the timing at which the icon change effect occurs and the change stage in each icon change pattern are described.

The icon change patterns include normal change pattern 01 in which the display mode of the pending icon changes at the start of the variation accompanied by the output of a sound effect, and normal change pattern 01 in which the display mode of the pending icon changes during the variation accompanied by the output of a sound effect. A change pattern 02 and a character effect change pattern 01 are set in which a character appears and an action effect is performed that acts on the icon starting from the character and the display mode of the icon changes.

The timing at which the change effect of the icon occurs is classified in relation to the progress state of the change effect, and is classified as when the change effect is started (at the start of change), during the execution of the change effect (during change), and when the change effect is in progress. There are times when the 70a temporarily stops ((temporarily) stopped).

The change stage of the icon includes 1UP, which changes the display mode of the jackpot winning expectation to one level higher (for example, a change from a white icon to a blue icon, a change from a blue icon to a red icon), and a jackpot winning expectation. 2UP (for example, a change from a white icon to a red icon, a change from a blue icon to a rainbow icon) is set to change the display mode to a higher level by two levels.

Note that in the change pattern determination table for the icon of this embodiment, the symbol effect change pattern 01 is not selected, but may be selected. For example, in a fluctuating performance that performs a pseudo-continuous performance, when the temporary stop display of the performance symbol 70a before the pseudo-variation is performed, the change notification symbol may be temporarily stopped and displayed.

"Pseudo continuous performance" is a fluctuating display of performance symbols as if multiple times in response to a jackpot determination based on winning (ball landing) in one starting hole (first starting hole 45, second starting hole 47). In order to make it appear as if the game has been executed, all prizes will be awarded within the special figure fluctuation time determined for each winning (ball entering) into the starting hole (first starting hole 45, second starting hole 47). This is a special form of fluctuating display of the performance symbol in which a re-fluctuation display in which the performance symbol 70a temporarily stops and then starts fluctuating again is performed once or multiple times.

In addition, although the change effect generation timing of the said icon was set to the above-mentioned two timings, it is not limited to these timings, and other timings may be provided. For example, it may be provided that a variable performance is being executed (during variation) until a reach is established, a normal reach is being executed, an SP (SPSP) reach is being executed, etc.

(Icon change pattern determination table for abnormal situations)
FIG. 144 is a diagram showing the icon change pattern determination table for abnormal times that is referred to when determining the change pattern of the icon.

The icon change pattern determination table for abnormal situations includes the variation pattern indicated by the special figure variation pattern designation command, the selection rate (%) of the icon change pattern, the icon change pattern to be selected, and the icon to be selected. The final display mode of each icon is associated with the final display mode, and the change effect generation timing and change stage of the icon in each icon change pattern are described for reference.

Note that the icon change pattern includes a non-change pattern in which the icon change effect is not executed, but other icon change patterns, the timing of occurrence of the icon change effect, and the change stage of the icon are as described above. Since it is the same as that explained in the change pattern determination table for icons, the explanation here will be omitted.

(Continuous preview performance decision processing by the performance control unit)
The continuous preview performance determination process in the performance control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 145. FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing continuous preview performance determination processing in the performance control unit 130m.

In step E530-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether a prefetch designation command has been received from the main control board 110. If the prefetch designation command is received, the process moves to step E530-2, and if the prefetch designation command is not received, the current continuous preview performance determination process is ended.

In step E530-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received prefetch designation command and grasps whether or not it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot game, and the performance contents (scheduled variation pattern).

In step E530-3, it is determined whether or not the current period is an executable period for continuous preview presentation. If it is the executable period for continuous notice performances (pre-read action production, pre-read effect production, pre-read vibration production, pre-read zone production), the process moves to step E530-4, and if it is not the executable period for continuous notice production. , the process moves to step E530-16 assuming that the continuous preview performance based on the currently received prefetch designation command is not to be executed.

In the "pre-reading motion performance", a special game is executed by executing an operation performance (notice performance) that operates the second movable member 74 in a predetermined manner at the timing immediately after the start of the variable performance in one or more variable performances. It is a performance that intermittently hints at the level of expectation.

The "look-ahead effect performance" is a special game by executing an effect performance (notice performance) that displays an effect image of a predetermined color around the performance symbol 70a at the timing immediately after the start of the variable performance in one or more variable performances. The performance intermittently hints at the level of expectation that will be carried out.

"Pre-reading vibration performance" is the expectation level that a special game will be executed by executing a vibration performance (notice performance) that vibrates the performance button 17 in a predetermined manner at the timing immediately after the start of the variable performance in one or more variable performances. It is a performance that intermittently suggests that.

"Pre-reading zone effects" is a continuous indication of the level of expectation that a special game will be played by executing a mid-zone effect (notice effect) that displays a zone image from a predetermined timing in one or more variable effects. It is a performance that

The "executable period of continuous notice performance" means that there is no continuous notice performance in advance pending, that the jackpot game is not in progress, and that a prefetch designation command based on winning in the first starting opening 45 is received. In this case, it is a normal gaming state, and when a prefetch designation command based on winning to the second starting port 47 is received, it is a specific gaming state (low-accuracy time-saving gaming state, high-accuracy time-saving gaming state), etc. Can be mentioned.

In step E530-4, the sub CPU 130a selects the continuous notice type determination table (see FIGS. 146 and 147) according to the current production mode, and in step E530-5, refers to the continuous notice type determination table and The type of notice (whether or not to execute a continuous notice performance, and the type of continuous notice performance to be executed) is determined. Note that details of the continuous notice type determination table will be described later.

In step E530-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the type of continuous preview is to execute a continuous preview effect. If the continuous notice performance is not to be executed, step E53
If the process moves to step 0-16 and a continuous preview effect is to be executed, in step E530-7, a continuous preview scenario determination table (see FIGS. 148 and 149) corresponding to the current effect mode is selected. Note that details of the continuous notice scenario determination table will be described later.

In step E530-8, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the continuous preview type for which the prefetch action effect is to be executed has been determined. If the prefetching motion effect is not to be executed, the process moves to step E530-10, and if the prefetching motion effect is to be executed, in step E530-9, the continuous preview scenario determination table is referred to and the preview scenario of the prefetching motion effect is determined. is determined and set in the prefetch information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c.

In step E530-10, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the continuous preview type for which the prefetch effect production is to be executed has been determined. If the look-ahead effect performance is not to be executed, the process moves to step E530-12, and if the look-ahead effect performance is to be executed, the continuous preview scenario determination table is referred to in step E530-11, and the preview scenario of the look-ahead effect performance is determined. is determined and set in the prefetch information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c.

In step E530-12, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the continuous notice type for which the pre-read vibration effect is to be executed has been determined. If the pre-reading vibration effect is not to be executed, the process moves to step E530-14, and if the pre-reading vibration effect is to be executed, in step E530-13, the continuous notice scenario determination table is referred to and the preview scenario of the pre-read vibration effect is determined. is determined and set in the prefetch information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c.

In step E530-14, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the continuous preview type for which the look-ahead zone effect is to be executed has been determined. If the pre-reading zone effect is not to be executed, the current continuous notice effect determination processing is ended, and if the pre-reading zone effect is to be executed, in step E530-15, the continuous notice scenario determination table is referred to and the pre-read zone effect is determined. A preview scenario is determined and set in the prefetch information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c, and the current continuous preview performance determination process is completed.

In step E530-16, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-previous scenario for the continuous preview performance (a preview scenario indicating that the continuous preview performance will not be executed), sets it in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c, and executes the current continuous preview performance. End the determination process.

Note that the preview scenario or the non-previous scenario set in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c is referred to in the above-described continuous preview performance execution process of step E540, and the process for executing the continuous preview performance or the continuous preview performance is executed. Steps will be taken to prevent this from happening.

As described above, according to the continuous notice performance determination process shown in FIG. 145, in the normal game state, the pre-reading action performance is not executed in the variable display of the second special symbol (variable performance), so in the normal game state, The second movable member 74 operates (moves) more when the variable display of the first special symbol (variable effect) is executed than when the variable display of the second special symbol (variable effect) is executed. It's getting easier. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect related to the variable display of the first special symbol (variable presentation) in the normal game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the continuous notice performance determination process shown in FIG. 145, in the normal game state, the pre-reading vibration performance is not executed in the variable display of the second special symbol (variable performance). The vibration performance is easier to perform when the variable display of the first special symbol (variable performance) is performed than when the fluctuating display of the special symbol (fluctuation performance) is performed. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect related to the variable display of the first special symbol (variable presentation) in the normal game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the continuous notice performance determination process shown in FIG. 145, in the specific game state, the pre-reading action performance is not executed in the variable display of the first special symbol (variable performance), so in the specific game state, the first The second movable member 74 operates (moves) more easily when the variable display of the second special symbol (variable effect) is executed than when the variable display of the special symbol (variable effect) is executed. ing. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the performance effect related to the variable display of the second special symbol (variable performance) in a specific game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the continuous notice performance determination process shown in FIG. 145, in the specific game state, the pre-reading vibration performance is not executed in the variable display of the first special symbol (variable performance), so in the specific game state, the first The vibration performance is easier to perform when the variable display of the second special symbol (variable performance) is performed than when the variable display of the special symbol (fluctuation performance) is performed. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the performance effect related to the variable display of the second special symbol (variable performance) in a specific game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Continuous notice type determination table)
FIG. 146 is a diagram showing a continuous notice type determination table that is referred to in order to determine the continuous notice type in production modes A to C (normal gaming state), and FIG. ) is a diagram showing a continuous preview performance determination table that is referred to in order to determine the continuous preview type.

As shown in FIGS. 146 and 147, the continuous notice type determination table associates the look-ahead designation command (scheduled variation pattern), the selection rate (%) of each continuous notice type, and the selected continuous notice type. , Continuous notice types include ``non-execution'', which does not execute continuous notice effects, ``pre-read motion effect'', ``pre-read effect effect'', and ``pre-read vibration effect'', in which one type of continuous notice effect is executed. , ``Look-ahead zone performance'', ``Look-ahead effect performance & Look-ahead vibration performance'', and ``Look-ahead motion performance & Look-ahead zone performance'' in which two types of continuous notice performances are performed.

For example, if the prefetch designation command (scheduled variation pattern) is a loss and the SP reach effect is executed, "non-execution" is determined at 85%, "prefetch effect production" is determined at 5%, At 4%, "look-ahead motion effect" is decided, at 3%, "look-ahead vibration effect" is decided, at 2%, "look-ahead zone effect" is decided, and at 1%, "look-ahead effect performance & look-ahead vibration effect" is decided. be done.

(Continuous preview performance scenario determination table)
FIG. 148 is a diagram showing a continuous notice scenario determination table for performance modes A to C (normal gaming state), and FIG. 149 is a diagram showing a continuous notice scenario determination table for performance modes D to G (specific gaming state). It is a diagram.

The continuous notice scenario determination table is associated with the number of special symbols on hold, the look-ahead designation command (scheduled variation pattern), the selection rate (%) of each notice scenario, and the selected notice scenario. Preliminary fluctuations (before 4 fluctuations, before 3 fluctuations, before 2 fluctuations, before 1 fluctuation) and the performance mode of continuous preview performance in the fluctuations are described.

"Pre-variation" is a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure judgment information stored earlier than the special figure judgment information corresponding to the newly received prefetch designation command. The "variation" is a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received prefetch designation command.

The presentation mode of "weak notice" differs depending on the type of continuous notice, and in the case of a look-ahead motion production, the second movable member 74 emits blue light and performs a weak motion, and a weak motion sound effect is output. In the case of a look-ahead effect production, a blue effect image is displayed around the production pattern 70a, and a blue effect sound effect is output, and in the case of a look-ahead vibration production, the production button The vibrator for vibrating the zone 17 vibrates weakly for one second, and the production button 17 flashes white. In the case of a pre-read zone production, a blue zone image is displayed and a zone sound effect is output. It is to be done.

The presentation mode of "strong notice" differs depending on the type of continuous notice, and in the case of a look-ahead motion production, the second movable member 74 emits red light and performs a strong motion, and a strong motion sound effect is output. In the case of a look-ahead effect production, a red effect image is displayed around the production pattern 70a, and a red effect sound effect is output, and in the case of a look-ahead vibration production, the production button The vibrator for vibrating 17 strongly vibrates for 3 seconds, and the production button 17 flashes red. In the case of pre-read zone production, a red heat zone image is displayed and a heat zone sound effect is displayed. is output.

Continuous notice performance scenarios include scenarios in which weak or strong notices are not executed during advance fluctuations and weak notices or strong notices are executed during the fluctuations (for example, scenario 11), and scenarios where weak notices or strong notices are executed during the fluctuations in advance, A scenario (for example, scenario 22) in which a weak notice or a strong notice is executed is set therein.

The first feature of the various tables related to continuous preview effects shown in FIGS. 146 to 149 is that they are more useful when multiple types of continuous preview effects are executed than when a single type of continuous preview effect is executed. However, there is a point where the expectation of jackpot is high. Therefore, the expectations of the players can be effectively raised, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The second feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice performance shown in FIGS. 146 to 149 is that the performance modes D to G (specific game state) are better than the performance modes A to C (normal game state). One of the points is that continuous preview performances are likely to be executed (execution rate is high), that is, the expectation level of jackpot when continuous preview performances are executed is low. Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of production mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that instead of differentiating the execution rate of continuous preview performances between production modes A to C and production modes D to G, for example, continuous preview production is executed more in production mode B than in production mode A. For example, the execution rate of continuous preview performances may be made different between production modes A to C, or for example, continuous preview production may be made easier to execute in production mode E than in production mode D. The execution rate of the continuous notice performance may be made different between the performance modes D to G. In this way, the expectation of a jackpot in the continuous preview performance changes between performance modes, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice performance shown in FIGS. 146 to 149 is that in the performance modes A to C (normal gaming state), when the normal reach performance is scheduled to be executed (pre-read result), Also, in production modes D to G (specific gaming states), if the normal reach production is scheduled to be executed (pre-reading result), the continuous notice production (here, pre-reading effect production, pre-reading action production) is more likely to be executed. There are several points. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation performance from becoming monotonous in a specific game state where there are more (super) shortening fluctuations than in performance modes A to C (normal game state), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

The fourth feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice performance shown in FIGS. 146 to 149 is that in the performance modes A to C (normal gaming state), if the SP reach performance is scheduled to be executed (pre-read result) In performance modes D to G (specific game states), when SP reach performance is scheduled to be executed (pre-read result), continuous preview production (here, pre-read effect performance, pre-read movement performance, pre-read zone) One of the points is that it is easy to carry out the performance. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation performance from becoming monotonous in a specific game state where there are more (super) shortening fluctuations than in performance modes A to C (normal game state), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

The fifth feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice performance shown in FIGS. 146 to 149 is that in the performance modes A to C (normal gaming state), if the SPSP reach performance is scheduled to be executed (pre-read result) In performance modes D to G (specific gaming states), when SPSP reach performance is scheduled to be executed (preread result), it is better to use continuous preview effects (here, prefetch effect performance, prefetch action performance, prefetch zone). One of the points is that it is easy to carry out the performance. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation performance from becoming monotonous in a specific game state where super shortening fluctuations tend to occur more frequently than in performance modes A to C (normal game state), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

The sixth feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice performance shown in FIGS. 146 to 149 is that the full rotation reach performance is scheduled to be executed in performance modes A to C (normal gaming state) (pre-read results). In the production mode D to G (specific game state), the case where the full rotation reach production is scheduled to be executed (pre-reading result) is better than the continuous preview production (here, pre-reading action production, pre-reading zone production). One point is that it is easy to implement. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation performance from becoming monotonous in a specific game state where super shortening fluctuations tend to occur more frequently than in performance modes A to C (normal game state), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

The seventh feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice performance shown in FIGS. 146 to 149 is that the performance modes A to C (normal game state) are better than the performance modes D to G (specific game state). The point is that the pre-reading vibration performance (vibration performance without displaying the valid period of the performance button 17 or the operation promotion image) is easily executed (high execution rate = different jackpot expectation level). Therefore, in production modes A to C (normal gaming state) where the stay period is likely to be longer than production modes D to G (specific gaming states), it is possible to make it easier for the player to experience the pre-reading vibration production, and increase the interest of the game. It becomes possible to improve the In addition, in production modes D to G (specific gaming states) where the fluctuation time tends to be shorter than production modes A to C (normal gaming states), the pre-reading vibration production can be given rarity, improving the interest of the game. It becomes possible to do so.

Note that the pre-reading vibration performance may be executed more easily (the execution rate may be higher) in the performance modes D to G than in the performance modes A to C. In addition, in the normal gaming state, by making it easier to execute pre-reading continuous effects in production mode A than in production modes B or C, the execution rate of pre-reading vibration effects can be reduced between production modes A to C. In a specific game state, the pre-read vibration effect can be executed more easily in the effect mode D than in the effect modes E-G. The performance execution ratio may be varied. In this way, it is possible to vary the expectation level of a jackpot when the pre-read vibration performance is executed between the performance modes, so it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eighth feature of the various tables related to continuous notice performances shown in FIGS. 146 to 149 is that in production modes A to C (normal gaming state), specific reach performances (normal reach performance, SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance) ) is scheduled to be executed (pre-reading result), a specific reach performance (normal reach performance, SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance) is scheduled to be executed in performance modes D to G (specific game state) ( If the result is a pre-read result, the pre-read vibration effect is more difficult to execute (the execution rate is lower). Therefore, in production modes D to G (specific gaming states) where the fluctuation time tends to be shorter than production modes A to C (normal gaming states), it is possible to give rarity to the pre-reading vibration production and improve the interest of the game. It becomes possible to do so.

The ninth feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice performance shown in FIGS. 146 to 149 is that the performance modes D to G (specific game state) are better than the performance modes A to C (normal game state). One of the points is that the look-ahead motion effect is easily executed (execution rate is high). Therefore, in production modes D to G (specific gaming states) where the fluctuation time tends to be shorter than production modes A to C (normal gaming states), it is possible to give rarity to the pre-reading vibration production and improve the interest of the game. It becomes possible to do so.

The tenth feature of the various tables related to continuous preview performances shown in FIGS. 146 to 149 is that when a continuous preview performance that ends with one variable performance is executed in performance modes A to C (normal game state). In the case where a continuous preview performance that ends with one variable performance is executed in production modes D to G (specific game states), it is better to perform a reach performance (normal reach performance) in a variable performance that is the target of the continuous preview performance. , SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) are difficult to execute (the rate of execution is low). Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of production mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eleventh feature of the various tables related to continuous preview performances shown in FIGS. 146 to 149 is that when a continuous preview performance that ends with two variable performances is executed in performance modes D to G (specific game states). In the case where a continuous preview performance that ends with two variable performances is executed in production modes A to C (normal gaming state), it is better to perform a reach performance (normal reach performance) in a variable performance that is the target of the continuous preview performance. , SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) are easy to execute. Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of production mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The twelfth feature of the various tables related to continuous preview performances shown in FIGS. In modes A to C (normal game state), a continuous preview performance with only one variable performance is executed, while in performance modes D to G (specific game state), a continuous preview performance with only one variable performance is executed. If it is executed, it is difficult to execute the reach performance (normal reach performance, SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance) in the variable performance that is the preview target of the continuous preview performance. Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of production mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 13th feature of the various tables related to continuous preview performances shown in FIGS. , When a continuous preview performance that spans three variable performances is executed in production modes A to C (normal gaming state), the reach performance (normal reach performance, SP reach performance) in the variable performance that is the target of the continuous preview performance , SPSP reach performance) can be easily executed. Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of production mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourteenth feature of the various tables related to continuous preview performances shown in FIGS. , when a continuous preview performance that spans three variable performances is executed in production modes D to G (specific game states), it is better to perform a reach performance with a higher expectation of a jackpot in the variable performance that is the target of the continuous preview performance (for example, , SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) are easy to execute. Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of production mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fifteenth feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice performance shown in FIGS. 146 to 149 is that the movable members are the same in performance modes A to C (normal game state) and performance modes D to G (specific game state). (The second movable member 74) can be used to perform the pre-reading action effect, but the pre-reading action effect is not possible in the effect modes A to C (normal game state) and in the effect modes D to G (specific game state). The difference is that the expected jackpot when executed is different. Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of production mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 16th feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice performance shown in FIGS. 146 to 149 is that the pre-read motion performance is executed in performance modes A to C (normal game state) and performance mode D to G (specific game state). In this case, the ratio (100%) of operating the second movable member 74 not used in the final performance is higher than the ratio (0%) of operating the first movable member 73 used in the final performance described later. can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to avoid an inconvenience in which the player mistakenly assumes that there will be a jackpot just because the look-ahead motion effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that the first movable member 73 may be operated instead of operating the second movable member 74 at the strong notice of the pre-reading action performance. Even in this case, when performing the pre-reading action performance in performance modes A to C (normal gaming state) and performance modes D to G (specific gaming state), the ratio of operating the first movable member 73 is , it is preferable that the rate at which the second movable member 74 is operated becomes higher.

The seventeenth feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice performance shown in FIGS. 146 to 149 is that the pre-reading vibration performance is executed in performance modes A to C (normal game state) and performance mode D to G (specific game state). In this case, the percentage of the production button 17 in the normal state (0%) is higher than the percentage of the production button 17 in the protruding state (0%). Therefore, it is possible to ensure the rarity of the performance button 17 being in the protruding state (it is in the protruding state only in the fixed performance described later), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the strong notice of the pre-read vibration performance, the performance button 17 may not be vibrated in the normal state, but may be vibrated in the protruding state. Even in this case, when executing the pre-reading vibration performance in performance modes A to C (normal game state) and performance modes D to G (specific game state), the ratio of the performance button 17 to the protruding state is , it is preferable to set the ratio of the normal state to be higher.

The eighteenth feature of the various tables related to the continuous preview performance shown in FIGS. 146 to 149 is that the predetermined period after the start of the variable performance that is the target of the continuous preview performance (from the start of variation to the beginning of the performance pattern 70a) is During the high-speed fluctuation period), a weak preview of the look-ahead motion performance (weak motion of the first movable member 73 + blue light emission) and a weak notice of the look-ahead effect performance (display of a blue effect image around the performance pattern 70a) are executed. The point is that the expectation of a jackpot is higher when a weak preview of the pre-reading vibration effect (weak vibration of the effect button 17 for 1 second) is executed without displaying an operation promotion image than when the operation promotion image is displayed. can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectations by using the operating means that the player can operate, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 19th feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice performance shown in FIGS. 146 to 149 is that the predetermined period after the start of the variable performance that is the subject of continuous notice performance (from the start of variation to the beginning of the performance pattern 70a) is During the high-speed fluctuation period), a strong notice of the look-ahead action performance (strong action of the first movable member 73 + red light emission) and a strong notice of the look-ahead effect performance (display of a red effect image around the performance pattern 70a) are executed. One point is that the expectation level of a jackpot is higher when a strong preview of the pre-reading vibration performance (3 seconds of strong vibration of the performance button 17) is executed than when the pre-reading vibration performance is executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectations by using the operating means that the player can operate, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Continuous preview performance execution processing by the performance control unit)
The continuous notice performance execution process of the performance control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 150. FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing continuous preview performance execution processing in the performance control unit 130m.

In step E540-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a special figure variation pattern designation command has been received from the main control board 110. If the special figure variation pattern designation command is received, the process moves to step E540-2, and if the special figure variation pattern designation command is not received, the current continuous notice performance execution process is ended.

In step E540-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the preview scenario of the continuous preview effects (prefetch action effects, prefetch effect effects, prefetch vibration effects, and prefetch zone effects) stored in the prefetch information storage area of the sub RAM 130c, and executes the step E540-2. At E540-3, it is determined whether a preview scenario for continuous preview performance is stored. If the preview scenario is stored, the process moves to step E540-4, and if the preview scenario is not stored, the scenario is cleared from the prefetch information storage area or the winning command (winning command) is executed. It is assumed that a command abnormality has occurred in which the scenario is not stored in the pre-reading information storage area due to the inability to normally receive the command for specifying the number of reserved special drawings as a time signal, the pre-reading specifying command), and processing proceeds to step E540-6.

In step E540-4, the sub CPU 130a determines the preview pattern (type of continuous preview performance, weak preview, strong preview) to be executed in the current variable performance according to the preview scenario stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c. Then, in step E540-5, a continuous preview presentation command corresponding to the determined preview pattern is set in the transmission buffer. As a result, a continuous notice performance command is transmitted to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and a continuous notice performance according to the determined notice pattern is executed. When this process is finished, the current continuous notice performance execution process is finished.

In step E540-6, the sub CPU 130a creates an alternative notice pattern for determining whether to execute an alternative notice performance as compensation for a continuous notice performance that may not be executed due to power restoration or the occurrence of a command abnormality. Select the determination table (see FIG. 151) and determine the notice pattern. Specifically, with reference to the selected alternative notice pattern determination table, one alternative notice pattern is selected from among the plurality of alternative notice patterns based on the current variable performance pattern and the selection rate (%) of each alternative notice pattern. decide. Note that details of the alternative notice pattern determination table will be described later.

"Alternative preview performance" is a performance to compensate for a continuous preview performance that may not be executed due to power restoration or command abnormality, and is a performance that is used to compensate for a continuous preview performance that may not be executed due to power restoration or command abnormality. This is a type of preview effect that makes the player expect a jackpot game to be executed by displaying the following.

In step E540-7, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the determined alternative notice pattern is one for executing an alternative notice effect. If the alternative preview performance is to be executed, the process moves to step E540-8, and if the alternative preview performance is not to be executed, the current continuous preview performance execution process is ended.

In step E540-8, the sub CPU 130a sets an alternative preview effect command corresponding to the alternative preview pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the alternative preview performance command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the alternative preview performance is executed.

According to the continuous preview performance execution process shown in FIG. 150, if the performance scenario of the continuous preview performance is not stored in the prefetch information storage area due to power restoration or a command abnormality (missing a prefetch specified command, etc.), the continuous preview performance execution process will start from now. It is possible to perform an alternative preview performance different from the continuous preview performance without executing the continuous preview performance in the variable performance. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the feeling of dissatisfaction caused by the continuous preview performance not being executed due to power restoration or the occurrence of a command abnormality, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the continuous notice performance execution process shown in FIG. 150, if power is restored (power outage) occurs while the continuous notice performance is being executed, the continuous notice performance will not be restarted in the variable performance that is started after the power is restored. Additionally, it is possible to perform an alternative preview performance that is different from the continuous preview performance. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the feeling of dissatisfaction caused by the termination of the continuous preview performance due to the occurrence of power restoration (power outage), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Alternative notice pattern determination table)
FIG. 151 is a diagram showing an alternative notice pattern determination table that is referred to when determining an alternative notice pattern.

In the alternative notice pattern determination table, the type of variation pattern indicated by the special figure variation pattern specification command, the selection rate (%) of each alternative notice pattern, and the selected alternative notice pattern are associated. The presentation mode of the alternative notice pattern is described.

The alternative preview patterns include pattern 00 in which the alternative preview effect is not executed, pattern 01 in which mini character A is displayed on the image display device, pattern 02 in which mini character B is displayed on the image display device, and pattern 02 in which mini character C is displayed on the image display device. A pattern 03 in which the mini-character D is displayed on the image display device, and a pattern 04 in which the mini-character D is displayed on the image display device are set.

The jackpot winning expectation for the mini-characters increases in the order of mini-character A<mini-character B<mini-character C<mini-character D, and mini-character D is a mini-character that is guaranteed to win the jackpot.

The first feature of the alternative notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 151 is that a variation pattern with a high expectation of winning a jackpot is more likely to perform an alternative notice performance than a variation pattern with a low expectation of winning a jackpot. One point is that the pattern is easy to determine. Therefore, the more likely it is that the continuous preview performance was being executed before the power is restored or the command abnormality occurs, the more likely the alternative preview performance will be executed, reducing the feeling of dissatisfaction caused by the end of the continuous preview performance. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the alternative notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 151 is that when the variable performance corresponding to the hold that triggered the execution of the continuous notice performance is executed, the trigger for the execution of the continuous notice performance is One point is that an alternative notice pattern in which an alternative notice performance is executed is easier to be determined than when a variable performance corresponding to a hold that has not triggered the execution of a continuous notice performance before the hold is executed. Therefore, after the power is restored or a command abnormality occurs, it becomes easier to understand which variable performance corresponds to the hold that triggered the execution of the continuous notice performance, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. .

In addition, in the variable performance that is executed after the power is restored or a command abnormality occurs, it is decided whether or not to execute the jackpot preview performance (line preview performance, step-up preview performance, etc.) described later. Alternatively, the execution probability of the jackpot preview performance may be made higher than usual so that the alternative preview performance is not executed.

Even in this case, if the variable performance corresponding to the hold that triggered the execution of the continuous preview performance is executed, it is better to perform the execution trigger of the continuous preview performance before the hold that triggered the execution of the continuous preview performance. It is preferable to make it easier to execute a jackpot preview performance than when a variable performance corresponding to a hold that has not been achieved is executed. In this way, after the power is restored or a command abnormality occurs, it becomes easier to understand which variable effect corresponds to the hold that triggered the execution of the continuous notice effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

(Lamp change effect execution processing of the effect control unit)
The lamp change effect execution process of the effect control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 152. FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing the lamp change effect execution process in the effect control section 130m.

In step E550-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether an icon change scenario is stored in the prefetch information storage area of the sub RAM 130c. If the icon change scenario is stored, it is assumed that an icon change effect is to be executed and the process moves to step E550-2; if the icon change scenario is not stored, the change scenario is stored from the sub-RAM 130c. It is assumed that a command abnormality has occurred in which the scenario is not stored in the pre-read information storage area due to the power supply being cleared or the command at the time of winning a prize (special drawing reservation number designation command as a winning signal, pre-reading designation command) being unable to be received normally. The process moves to step E550-6.

In step E550-2, the sub CPU 130a determines whether it is time for the icon to change. If it is the icon change timing, the process moves to step E550-3, and if it is not the icon change timing, the current lamp change effect execution process is ended.

In step E550-3, the sub CPU 130a sets a lamp effect command corresponding to the color after the icon change in the transmission buffer. As a result, a lamp effect command is sent to the lamp control unit 150, and a lamp change effect is executed by changing the lighting mode (emission color, lighting/blinking) of the winning slot lamp NR in accordance with the color change of the icon. It turns out.

In step E550-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether a lamp changing flag indicating that a lamp changing effect is being executed is set in the sub RAM 130c. If the lamp changing flag is set, the current lamp change performance execution process ends; if the lamp changing flag is not set, the lamp changing flag is set, and the current lamp change performance is executed. End the execution process.

In step E550-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the lamp changing flag is set in the sub RAM 130c. If the lamp changing flag is set, the process moves to step E550-7, and if the lamp changing flag is not set, the current lamp changing effect execution process is ended.

In step E550-7, the sub CPU 130a clears the lamp changing flag set in the sub RAM 130c, and in step E550-8, sets a lamp effect end command in the transmission buffer, and executes the current lamp change effect execution process. finish. As a result, the lamp effect command is transmitted to the lamp control section 150, and the lamp change effect that was being executed is ended.

In this way, according to the lamp change effect execution process shown in FIG. 152, the lamp change is performed by changing the light emitting mode (light emitting color, lighting/blinking) of the winning opening lamp NR in response to the change of the icon in the icon change effect. It is designed to perform a performance. Therefore, the presentation effect can be enhanced by the synergistic effect with the icon change presentation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the lamp change effect execution process shown in FIG. 152, unlike the icon change effect or the continuous notice effect, even if the power is restored while the lamp change effect is being executed, the lamp change effect is executed again. The system is designed to prevent users from playing the game or performing alternative preview effects. Therefore, it is possible to ensure the rarity of the lamp change performance while reducing the control burden, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that when power is restored, such as in the icon change performance, the lamp change performance may be executed again in the variable performance that is started after the power is restored. In this case, it is preferable to perform the lamp change effect so as to correspond to the icon change effect that is started after the power is restored.

In addition, instead of executing the lamp change effect in response to the icon change effect, the final lighting mode of the prize opening lamp NR, the light emission scenario from the preliminary change to the relevant change, etc. are determined by lottery and the lamp change effect is executed. You can do it like this.

(Fluctuating performance pattern determination processing of the performance control unit)
The variable performance pattern determination process of the performance control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 153. FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing a variable performance pattern determination process in the performance control unit 130m, and this process is executed in the above-described special figure special electric performance process.

First, the sub CPU 130a refers to the special symbol designation command and the special symbol variation pattern designation command in step E610-1. Here, the sub CPU 130a determines whether each command of the special symbol designation command and the special symbol variation pattern designation command can be received in step E610-2. The sub CPU 130a can receive each command by determining whether an event such as not receiving a special symbol variation pattern designation command within a predetermined time after receiving a special symbol designation command has occurred. Determine whether the

If the sub CPU 130a determines that each command has been received, it determines in step E610-3 whether each command is damaged. The sub CPU 130a determines whether each command is corrupted, for example, by determining whether the DATA side of the command is corrupted and has changed to an impossible content.
If the sub CPU 130a determines that each command is not damaged, it determines in step E610-4 whether the special figure types of each command match. The sub CPU 130a may receive commands when the received commands are a special symbol designation command related to the first special symbol and a special symbol variation pattern designation command related to the second special symbol, or a special symbol designation command related to the second special symbol and a special symbol designation command related to the second special symbol. If the command is a special symbol variation pattern designation command related to one special symbol, it is determined that the special symbol types of each command do not match. That is, in the start commands (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, and special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal), there are two commands that correspond to the first special symbol and one that corresponds to the second special symbol. If there are a mixture of special symbols, it is determined that the types of special symbols of each command do not match. In addition, when each received command is a special symbol designation command related to the first special symbol and a special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command related to the first special symbol, or a special symbol designation command related to the second special symbol, the sub CPU 130a And if it is a special symbol variation pattern designation command related to the second special symbol, it is determined that the special symbol types of each command match.

When the sub CPU 130a determines that the special figure types of each command match, in step E610-5, it determines whether the wins and losses of each command match. The sub CPU 130a receives commands when each received command is a special symbol designation command related to a jackpot and a special symbol variation pattern designation command related to a loss, or a special symbol designation command related to a loss and a special pattern variation pattern designation command related to a jackpot. In some cases, it is determined that the hits and misses of the respective commands do not match. In addition, when each received command is a special symbol designation command related to a jackpot and a special pattern fluctuation pattern designation command related to a jackpot, or a special symbol designation command related to a loss and a special pattern fluctuation pattern designation related to a loss, the sub CPU 130a If it is a command, it is determined that each command matches.

If the sub CPU 130a determines that the wins and losses of the respective commands match, in step E610-6, it selects the variable performance pattern determination table (FIGS. 154 and 155) according to the current performance mode. The details of the variable effect pattern determination table will be described later.
In step E610-7, the sub CPU 130a refers to the selected variable effect pattern determination table, determines one variable effect pattern from among the plurality of variable effect patterns, and sets it in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 130c.

In step E610-8, the sub CPU 130a sets a variable effect pattern instruction command corresponding to the determined variable effect pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and ends the current variable effect pattern determination process. As a result, a variable effect pattern instruction command is transmitted to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and processing for executing the variable effect is performed.
On the other hand, when the sub CPU 130a determines that each command cannot be received, when it determines that each command is damaged, when it determines that the special figure types of each command do not match, or If it is determined that the wins and losses of each command do not match, the special symbol designation command and the special symbol variation pattern designation command are discarded in step E610-9. In this case, since the variable effect pattern is not determined and the variable effect pattern instruction command is not set, the variable effect will not be executed on the effect control board 130 side.

(Fluctuating performance pattern judgment table)
FIG. 154 is a diagram showing a variable performance pattern determination table for performance modes A to C that is referred to in order to determine a variable performance pattern in performance modes A to C (normal gaming state), and FIG. It is a diagram showing a variable performance pattern determination table for performance modes D to G (specific game states) that is referred to in order to determine a variable performance pattern in D to G.

As shown in FIGS. 154 and 155, the variable effect pattern determination table associates the special figure variable pattern designation command, the selection rate (%) of each variable effect pattern, and the selected variable effect pattern. The performance configuration for each variable performance pattern is described as follows.

"Variation" in the production structure column indicates that a normal variation display in which a ready-to-win state is not formed due to the production symbol 70a is executed.
"Short variation" indicates that a shortened variation display in which a reach state is not formed is executed for a shorter time than a normal variation display.
"L fluctuation" indicates that a long fluctuation display in which a reach state is not formed for a longer time than a normal fluctuation display is executed.

"Pseudo-failure" refers to a pseudo-successful performance after the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped during the fluctuating display of one special symbol, and then a pseudo-sequential performance is performed to determine whether or not a pseudo-sequential performance will be executed. This indicates that a pseudo consecutive failure effect is executed, which results in the failure of the sequence.
"Pseudo-success" indicates that, after performing a performance that incites whether or not the pseudo-successful performance will be executed, a pseudo-successful performance that results in the pseudo-successful performance is performed.
"(Fluctuation → Pseudo Success) x 2" means a performance in which a pseudo consecutive success performance that results in a pseudo consecutive performance is performed after an inciting performance that incites whether or not the pseudo consecutive performance will be executed. This shows that two sets of effects will be performed, with 1 set being 1 set.
"(Fluctuation → pseudo-success) x 3" is a performance in which a pseudo-successful performance that results in a pseudo-successful performance is performed after an inciting performance that incites whether or not the pseudo-successful performance will be executed. This shows that three sets of performances will be performed, with 1 set being 1 set.

"N reach" indicates that the above-mentioned normal reach effect is executed.
"N '7'reach" indicates that the normal reach effect described above is executed in a state where the reach state is formed by the effect pattern 70a of "7".
"SP reach" indicates that the above-mentioned SP reach effect is executed.
"Special SP reach" indicates that the above-mentioned special SP reach effect is executed.
"SPSP reach" indicates that the above-mentioned SPSP reach effect is executed.
"Full rotation reach" indicates that the above-mentioned full rotation reach effect is executed.

"SP development" indicates that a development effect that suggests that an SP reach effect will be executed is executed.
"SPSP development" indicates that a development effect that suggests that an SPSP reach effect will be executed is executed.
"Full rotation development" indicates that a development effect that suggests that a full rotation reach will be executed is executed.

"CI" indicates that one of a plurality of cut-in performances with different jackpot expectation levels will be executed in accordance with the operation of the performance button 17 during the validity period or the passage of the validity period.
"Decision" indicates that a determination performance that suggests whether or not a jackpot game will be executed is executed in accordance with the operation of the performance button 17 during the validity period or the passage of the validity period.
"Failure" indicates that as a result of the deciding performance, a deciding failure performance indicating that the jackpot game will not be executed is executed.
"Success" indicates that as a result of the winning performance, a successful winning performance that suggests that a jackpot game will be executed is executed.

"Loss" means a temporary stop after forming a losing number (a losing display mode such as "358" or "948" which is different from the initial number described later) by the performance pattern 70a that does not include a character but only numbers. It shows.
"c pattern loss" means to form a loss result (a loss display form such as ``358'' or ``948'' which is different from the initial appearance described later) by the performance pattern 70a of the display form including the character and temporarily stop. It is shown that.
"IC" indicates that an eye-catching effect is executed in which an eye-catching image suggesting that the effect pattern 70a is stopped and displayed is displayed on the image display device.
"Symbol alignment" indicates that a jackpot is formed (a jackpot display mode such as "222" or "777") by the effect pattern 70a that does not include characters and includes only numbers, and the game is temporarily stopped.
"C symbols aligned" indicates that a jackpot is formed (a jackpot display mode such as "222" or "777") by the production symbol 70a in a display mode including characters, and the game is temporarily stopped.

"Re-lottery" refers to whether or not the performance symbol 70a that is temporarily stopped at a jackpot (jackpot display mode) will become a jackpot that is advantageous for the player (from an even-numbered performance symbol that normally results in a jackpot, it will become a probability-variable jackpot). (Whether it will be an odd-numbered production symbol or not, or whether it will be a "7" production symbol where the most advantageous jackpot game will be executed), a promotion success production will be performed that will result in an advantageous jackpot. , indicates that a re-lottery performance is executed, such as a promotion failure performance that does not result in an advantageous jackpot.

"Strong vibration 4 seconds" indicates that a strong vibration performance (big hit confirmed vibration performance) is executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the performance button 17 strongly vibrates for 4 seconds.
"Strong vibration for 1 second" indicates that a strong vibration performance (big hit confirmation vibration performance) is executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the performance button 17 strongly vibrates for 1 second.

In the variable performance pattern determination table for performance modes A to C (normal gaming state) shown in FIG. In this case, the ratio of the ready-to-win performance is performed with the even-numbered performance symbols 70a is 70%, and the ratio of the ready-to-reach performance with the odd-numbered performance symbols 70a other than "7" is 30%.
In the case of special symbol 00 (loss) and variable performance patterns 07 to 11 (SP reach performance or SPSP reach performance), the ratio of reach performance with even numbered performance symbols 70a is 65%, and odd numbers other than "7" The rate at which the ready-to-reach effect is performed with the effect pattern 70a of "7" is 30%, and the rate at which the ready-to-reach effect is performed by the effect pattern 70a of "7" is 5%.

In the case of special symbol 01 (normal jackpot) and variable performance patterns 12 to 17 (normal reach performance, SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance), the ratio of reach performance with even numbered performance symbols 70a is 100%. .
In the case of special symbol 02 (probable variable jackpot) and variable production patterns 18 to 19 (SP reach production), the ratio of reach production with even number production symbols 70a is 60%, and odd number production patterns other than "7" The rate at which reach effects are performed in 70a is 40%.

In the case of special symbol 02 (probable variable jackpot) and variable performance patterns 20 to 22 (SPSP reach performance), the ratio of reach performance with even numbered performance symbols 70a is 6%, and with odd numbered performance symbols other than "7" The rate at which the ready-to-reach effect is performed with 70a is 4%, and the rate at which the ready-to-reach effect is performed with the effect pattern 70a of "7" is 90%.
In the case of special symbol 03 (probable variable jackpot) and variable performance patterns 12 to 17 (normal reach performance, SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance), the ratio of reach performance with even numbered performance symbols 70a is 60%, and “7 ” The proportion of reach effects performed with odd-numbered effect symbols 70a is 40%.

In the case of special symbol 01 (normal jackpot) and in the case of special symbol 03 (probable variable jackpot), reach production is performed with even numbered production symbols 70a, and the main stop is made with the combination of even numbered production symbols 70a (for example, 444). In both cases, a variable mission presentation (a bonus acquisition presentation), which will be described later with reference to FIG. 236, is executed.

In other words, in any case, the main stop will be made at the combination of even numbered performance symbols 70a (for example, 444) and the game will proceed to the jackpot game, so from the stop mode of the production symbols 70a, the special symbol 01 (normal jackpot), the special symbol It is difficult to know which of the 03 (probable and variable jackpots) the jackpot is.

In addition, in either case, a jackpot game is played six times in the round game, so it is possible to determine whether the jackpot is special symbol 01 (normal jackpot) or special symbol 03 (probable jackpot) from the number of round games. That is difficult.

Therefore, during the execution of the jackpot game, by executing the variable mission performance shown in FIG. 236, special symbol 01 (normal jackpot), special symbol 03 depending on whether the performance is "successful" or "failure". We are trying to inform you which jackpot (probable and variable jackpot) it is.

In addition, in the case of special symbol 01 (normal jackpot), the result of executing the variable probability mission performance is "failure", and in the case of special symbol 03 (probable variable jackpot), the result of executing the variable probability mission production is "success".
Thereby, it is possible to improve the game interest during execution of the jackpot game.

Note that FIG. 236 shows, as an example, a variable mission performance in a jackpot game where the round game is 10 times, but in the case of special symbol 01 (normal jackpot) and special symbol 03 (probable variable jackpot), It is sufficient to execute FIG. 236(f) in the fourth round game, FIG. 236(g) in the fifth round game, and FIG. 236(g) in the sixth round game.

In the case of special symbol 10 (loss) and variable performance patterns 26 to 27 (special SP ready-to-win performance), the rate at which the ready-to-win performance is performed with even numbered performance symbols 70a is 100%.
In the case of special symbols 04 (normal jackpot) & 05 (probable variable jackpot) and variable performance pattern 27 (special SP ready-to-win performance), the ratio of ready-to-win performance with even numbered performance symbols 70a is 100%.

In the variable performance pattern determination table for performance modes D to G (specific game states) shown in FIG. The rate at which reach effects are performed is 100%.
In the case of special symbols 01 (normal jackpot), 02 (probable variable jackpot), 03 (probable variable jackpot) and variable production pattern 33 (special SP reach production), the ratio of reach production performed with even numbered production symbols 70a is 100%. It becomes.

In the case of special symbol 10 (loss) and variable performance pattern 36 (normal reach performance), 38 to 42 (SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance), the ratio of reach performance with even numbered performance symbols 70a is 60%, The rate at which the reach effect is performed with odd numbered effect symbols 70a other than "7" is 40%.
In the case of special symbol 04 (normal jackpot) and variable performance patterns 43 to 48 (normal reach performance, SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance), the rate at which reach performance is performed with even numbered performance symbols 70a is 100%. .

In the case of special symbol 05 (probable variable jackpot) and variable performance patterns 49 to 50 (SP reach performance), the ratio of reach performance with even numbered performance symbols 70a is 60%, and with odd numbered performance symbols other than "7" The rate at which reach effects are performed in 70a is 40%.
In the case of special symbol 05 (probable variable jackpot) and variable production patterns 51 to 53 (SPSP reach production), the ratio of reach production with even number production symbols 70a is 3%, and odd number production patterns other than "7" The rate at which the ready-to-reach effect is performed with 70a is 2%, and the rate at which the ready-to-reach effect is performed with the effect pattern 70a of "7" is 95%.
In the case of special symbol 05 (probable variable jackpot) and variable production patterns 54 to 55 (full rotation reach production), the ratio of reach production with even number production symbols 70a is 20%, and odd number production other than "7" The rate at which a ready-to-reach effect is performed with the symbol 70a is 30%, and the rate at which a reach-to-reach effect is performed by the effect symbol 70a of "7" is 50%.

In the case of special symbol 06 (probable jackpot) and variable performance patterns 43 to 48 (normal reach performance, SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance), the ratio of reach performance with even numbered performance symbols 70a is 60%, and “7 ” The proportion of reach effects performed with odd-numbered effect symbols 70a is 40%.
In addition, in the case of special symbol 04 (normal jackpot), in the case of special symbol 06 (probable variable jackpot), in the case of special symbol 01 (normal jackpot) and special symbol 03 (probable variable jackpot), the jackpot game A variable mission performance is now executed while the game is running.

In addition, in the case of special symbol 01 (normal jackpot), in the case of special symbol 03 (probable variable jackpot), in the case of special symbol 04 (normal jackpot), and in the case of special symbol 06 (probable variable jackpot), the Although the probability-variable mission performance is executed, the performance executed during the jackpot game with these special symbols is not limited to the probability-variable mission performance, but may be another production.

For example, special symbol 01 (a round game of "6" times) and special symbol 04 (a round game of "6" times), whereas special symbol 03 (a round game of "10" times), special symbol 06 (“10” round game), a “MAX round acquisition mission performance” (privilege acquisition performance) may be executed during the jackpot game.
Specifically, in FIG. 236(b), a display such as "Max round by defeating the enemy" is displayed, and in the case of special symbol 03 and special symbol 06, "Success" in FIG. 236(d) and FIG. 236(e) is displayed. It is assumed that an effect indicating "failure" is performed in the case of special symbol 01 and special symbol 03.

The first feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 154 and 155 is that when the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect is executed, the eye catch effect that suggests that the effect pattern 70a is stopped and displayed is After execution, the effect pattern 70a returns to the display mode including the character. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to feel strange due to the change in the display mode of the performance symbols 70a, and it is possible to suggest in advance that the performance symbols 70a will be stopped and displayed, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

The second feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 154 and 155 is that in the case of a jackpot, there are variable effect patterns in which the winning effect is executed and the symbols are aligned, and variable effect patterns in which the symbols are aligned and the winning effect is successful. One point is that there is a variable performance pattern in which the performance is executed. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the production effect in the case of a jackpot, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 154 and 155 is that in the variable effect pattern that results in a jackpot, when the effect patterns 70a that do not include characters line up, the effect button 17 is pressed for 4 seconds. One point is that a strong vibration performance (big hit confirmation vibration performance) is performed in which the machine vibrates strongly. Therefore, it is possible to effectively produce a big hit, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A fourth feature of the variable performance pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 154 and 155 is that the production button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second when the production patterns 70a including characters are aligned (c symbols aligned). One point is that a performance (big hit confirmation vibration performance) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively produce a big hit, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fifth feature of the variable performance pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 154 and 155 is that the reach performance (normal reach The point is that the proportion of reach effects performed with even-numbered effect symbols 70a (the effect symbols that usually result in a jackpot when a jackpot roll is made) is higher than the proportion of effects that are performed (performance, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect). Can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the player's joy when a jackpot is achieved with an odd-numbered performance symbol 70a other than "7", and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The sixth feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 154 and 155 is that the rate at which reach effects are performed with even-numbered effect symbols 70a (effect symbols that normally result in a jackpot when the result is a jackpot) is The point is that the percentage of reach effects (normal reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) being performed is lower with the production pattern 70a of "7" (the production pattern that is the most advantageous probability variable jackpot by getting a jackpot). Can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the player's joy when the player hits a jackpot with the performance symbol 70a of "7", and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The seventh feature of the variable performance pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 154 and 155 is that the reach performance (normal reach Direction, SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance) One point to note is that the ratio of "reach performance" and "SPSP reach performance" is lower. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the player's joy when the player hits a jackpot with the performance symbol 70a of "7", and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As the eighth feature of the variable performance pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 154 and 155, when the ready-to-win performance is executed with an even-numbered performance symbol 70a or an odd-numbered performance symbol 70a other than "7", "7" When the ready-to-win effect is executed with the effect pattern 70a, the expectation of a jackpot is higher. Therefore, it is possible for the player to increase his or her expectations as to which type of performance symbol will be used to perform the ready-to-win performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The ninth feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 154 and 155 is that the effect modes D to G (specific game state) are the most advantageous than the effect modes A to C (normal game state). In the case of a probability variable jackpot, a reach performance (SPSP reach performance) is likely to be executed with the performance symbol 70a of "7" (the performance symbol which becomes the most advantageous probability variable jackpot when the jackpot roll is made). Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effects in performance modes D to G (specific game states), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The tenth feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 154 and 155 is that in the effect modes A to C (normal game state), even if the reach effect is executed with the effect symbol 70a of "7", the jackpot is guaranteed. However, in performance modes D to G (specific game states), if the ready-to-win performance is executed with the performance symbol 70a of "7", a jackpot is guaranteed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effects in performance modes D to G (specific game states), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the variable performance pattern in which the pseudo-continuous performance is executed, the ready-to-win performance is always performed, but a variable performance pattern may be provided in which the ready-to-win performance is not performed even if the pseudo-continuous performance is performed.

In addition, if you stop temporarily due to a loss after a cut-in performance or a failed decision performance, it is guaranteed to be a loss, but a resurrection performance that is guaranteed to be a jackpot after a cut-in performance or a failed decision performance. may also be executed.

(Jackpot preview production decision process by production control department)
The jackpot preview performance determination process of the performance control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 156. FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing jackpot preview performance determination processing in the performance control unit 130m, and this process includes a variable performance pattern determination process in the above-mentioned special figure special electric performance process (a variable performance pattern based on a special figure fluctuation pattern designation command). (determining process).

In step E650-1, the sub CPU 130a refers to the variable performance pattern to be executed in the current variable performance, and in step E650-2, determines that the jackpot game will be executed in the performance period (high-speed fluctuation period) before reach. A ready-to-reach pre-notice determination table (FIG. 157) for determining a notice pattern of a ready-to-reach pre-notice performance that the player expects is selected, and a notice pattern is determined. Note that the details of the pre-reach notice determination table will be described later.

In step E650-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the preview pattern of the ready-to-reach preview performance is one for executing a dialogue preview performance. If the dialogue preview performance is to be executed, the process moves to step E650-4, and if the dialogue preview performance is not to be executed, the process moves to step E650-6.

"Speech preview performance" means that a valid period occurs during a variable performance (high-speed fluctuation period), and according to the operation of the performance button 17 during the valid period or the elapse of the valid time, the image display device indicates the expectation of a jackpot. This is a type of jackpot preview performance in which a dialogue image is displayed and a sound corresponding to the dialogue image is output from the audio output device 9.

In step E650-4, the sub CPU 130a selects a dialogue preview pattern determination table (see FIG. 158) for determining a dialogue preview pattern for the dialogue preview performance to determine a dialogue preview pattern, and in step E650-5, Set a dialogue preview production command according to the preview pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, a line preview performance command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a line preview performance according to the line preview pattern is executed during the fluctuating performance (high-speed fluctuation period). Note that details of the dialogue preview pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the preview pattern of the ready-to-reach preview performance is one for executing a step-up preview performance. If the step-up preview effect is to be executed, the process moves to step E650-7, and if the step-up preview effect is not to be executed, the process moves to step E650-9.

"Step-up notice performance" means multiple steps from the 1st step (first stage) to the 5th step (final stage) without causing the effective period of the performance button 17 during the fluctuation performance (high-speed fluctuation period). This is a type of jackpot preview performance in which step performances are executed in a predetermined order until reaching one of the steps.

In step E650-7, the sub CPU 130a selects the step-up notice pattern determination table (see FIG. 159) for determining the step-up notice pattern of the step-up notice performance, determines the step-up notice pattern, and executes the step-up notice pattern in step E650-7. At step 8, a step-up notice effect command corresponding to the step-up notice pattern is set in the transmission buffer. As a result, a step-up notice performance command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a step-up notice performance according to the step-up notice pattern is executed during the fluctuation performance (high-speed fluctuation period). Note that details of the dialogue preview pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-9, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the current variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern that executes a pseudo continuous effect. If it is a variable performance pattern that executes a pseudo continuous effect, the process moves to step E650-10, and if it is not a variable effect pattern that does not perform a pseudo continuous effect, the process moves to step E650-12.

In step E650-10, the sub CPU 130a selects the pseudo continuous effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 160) for determining the pseudo continuous effect pattern of the pseudo continuous effect, and determines the pseudo continuous effect pattern, and in step E650-11. At , a pseudo continuous effect command corresponding to the pseudo continuous effect pattern is set in the transmission buffer. As a result, a pseudo continuous performance command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a pseudo continuous performance according to the pseudo continuous performance pattern is executed during the variable performance. The details of the pseudo-continuous performance pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-12, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variation performance pattern is a variation performance pattern that executes a development performance (SP development performance, SPSP development performance, full rotation development performance). If it is a variable performance pattern that executes a developed effect, the process moves to step E650-13, and if it is not a variable effect pattern that executes a developed effect, the process moves to step E650-15.

In step E650-13, the sub CPU 130a selects the development performance pattern determination table (see FIG. 161) for determining the development performance pattern of the development performance and determines the development performance pattern, and in step E650-14, the development performance pattern is determined. Set the advanced production command according to the pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the development effect command is transmitted to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and the development effect according to the development effect pattern is executed during the variable effect. Note that details of the advanced performance pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-15, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the current variable performance pattern is a variable performance pattern for executing a reach performance (post-reach performance). If it is a variable performance pattern that executes a ready-to-win performance, the process moves to step E650-16, and if it is not a variable performance pattern that executes a ready-to-win performance, the current jackpot preview performance determination process is ended.

In step E650-16, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the current variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern that executes a cut-in effect. If it is a variable effect pattern that executes a cut-in effect, the process moves to step E650-17, and if it is not a variable effect pattern that executes a cut-in effect, the process moves to step E650-19.

In step E650-17, the sub CPU 130a selects the cut-in effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 162) for determining the cut-in effect pattern of the cut-in effect, and determines the cut-in effect pattern, and in step E650-18. At , a cut-in effect command corresponding to the cut-in effect pattern is set in the transmission buffer. As a result, a cut-in effect command is transmitted to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and a cut-in effect according to the cut-in effect pattern is executed during the variable effect. Note that details of the cut-in effect pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-19, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the current variable performance pattern is a variable performance pattern for executing a fixed performance. If it is a variable performance pattern that executes a fixed effect, the process moves to step E650-20, and if it is not a variable effect pattern that executes a fixed effect, the process moves to step E650-22.

In step E650-20, the sub CPU 130a selects the deciding performance pattern determination table (see FIG. 163) for determining the deciding performance pattern of the deciding performance, and determines the deciding performance pattern. Set the determined production command according to the pattern in the sending buffer. As a result, a fixed performance command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a fixed performance according to the fixed performance pattern is executed during the variable performance. Note that details of the fixed performance pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-22, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the current variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern for executing a re-lottery effect. If it is a variable effect pattern that executes a re-lottery effect, the process moves to step E650-23, and if it is not a variable effect pattern that executes a re-lottery effect, the process moves to step E650-25.

In step E650-23, the sub CPU 130a selects the re-lottery effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 164) for determining the re-lottery effect pattern of the re-lottery effect, and determines the re-lottery effect pattern, and in step E650-24 At , a re-lottery performance command corresponding to the re-lottery performance pattern is set in the transmission buffer. As a result, a re-lottery performance command is transmitted to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and a re-lottery performance according to the re-lottery performance pattern is executed during the variable performance. The details of the re-lottery performance pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-25, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variable performance pattern is a variable performance pattern that allows execution of a confirmed performance (results in a jackpot). If the variable performance pattern is such that a confirmed performance can be executed, the process moves to step E650-26, and if it is not a variable performance pattern that allows a confirmed performance to be executed, the current jackpot preview performance determination process is ended.

In step E650-26, the sub CPU 130a selects the final performance pattern determination table (see FIG. 165) for determining the final performance pattern of the final performance and determines the final performance pattern, and in step E650-27, the final performance pattern is determined. A confirmed performance command corresponding to the pattern is set in the transmission buffer, and the current jackpot preview performance determination process is ended. As a result, a confirmed performance command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a confirmed performance according to the confirmed performance pattern is executed during the variable performance. The details of the confirmed performance pattern determination table will be described later.

Incidentally, the jackpot preview performance is not limited to the one listed in FIG. 156. For example, a jackpot preview performance (background preview performance) using a background image (for example, Mode A background) may be provided. Specifically, when a special character image is displayed in the background image, the degree of expectation that a jackpot game will be executed may be higher than when a special character image is not displayed.

Furthermore, when a special background image (for example, a secret base background image) is displayed, the degree of expectation that a jackpot game will be executed may be made higher than when it is not displayed.
In addition, when switching from the first background image to the second background image (background change), if a special switching image different from the normal switching image is displayed, it is expected that a jackpot game will be executed compared to when it is not displayed. The degree may be increased.

In addition, in these background preview performances, the expectation that the jackpot game will be executed may be high, or it may be that the execution of the jackpot game is confirmed, or that the execution of the jackpot game is not confirmed but the expectation level is high. You can also use it as

(Pre-reach notice determination table)
FIG. 157 is a diagram showing a ready-to-reach pre-notice determination table that is referred to when determining a notice pattern for a ready-to-reach pre-notice performance.

As shown in FIG. 157, the pre-reach preview determination table associates the performance mode, the jackpot determination result, the variable performance pattern type, the selection rate (%) of each preview pattern, and the selected preview pattern.

There are three pre-reach preview patterns: ``No notice'' in which the pre-reach preview is not executed, ``Speech preview'' in which the dialogue preview is executed, and ``Step-up notice'' in which the step-up notice is executed. The types are set, and the expectation level for the jackpot game to be executed (the rate at which the vibrating effects associated with the alignment of the symbols described above are executed) is as follows: no advance notice < dialogue advance notice performance < step-up advance notice performance.

The first feature of the pre-reach preview determination table shown in FIG. 157 is that the pre-reach preview performance is more likely to be executed when the jackpot determination result is a jackpot than when the jackpot determination result is a loss, and the expectation level of the jackpot is lower. The point is that the pre-reach preview performance is more likely to be executed when a variable performance pattern with a high expectation of jackpot is determined than when a variable performance pattern is determined. By doing so, it is possible to increase the player's expectations for the execution of the jackpot game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the pre-reach advance notice determination table shown in FIG. The pre-announcement performance (both the line preview performance that allows the vibration performance to be executed with the validity period of the performance button 17 and the step-up preview performance that allows the vibration performance to be executed without the validity period of the performance button 17) is executed. The problem is that it is difficult (the execution rate is low). Therefore, in performance modes D to G (specific game states) in which the variable time tends to be short, wasteful pre-reach preview performances are less likely to be executed, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the reach pre-notice determination table shown in FIG. However, when the variable performance pattern is a pattern for performing a normal reach performance and a pattern for performing a SP ready-to-reach performance, it is difficult to execute the ready-to-reach advance notice performance (the execution rate is low). Therefore, in performance modes D to G (specific game states) in which the variable time tends to be short, wasteful pre-reach preview performances are less likely to be executed, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a fourth feature of the pre-reach preview determination table shown in FIG. When it is executed, the expectation level of a jackpot (the rate at which the vibrating effects associated with the alignment of the symbols described above are executed, the rate at which the vibrating effects are executed in the deciding effects described below, etc.) is higher. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding the type of pre-reach preview performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, when the step-up notice performance is executed, the jackpot expectation level (the rate at which the vibration performance associated with the alignment of symbols mentioned above is performed, and the success performance described later) is higher when the dialogue preview performance is executed. (e.g., the rate at which accompanying vibration effects are performed) may be increased. Even in this case, it is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding the type of pre-reach preview performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Serif notice pattern determination table)
FIG. 158 is a diagram showing a dialogue preview pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a preview pattern for a dialogue preview performance.

As shown in FIG. 158, the dialogue announcement pattern determination table associates the performance mode, jackpot determination result, variable performance pattern type, selection rate (%) of each dialogue announcement pattern, and selected dialogue announcement pattern. For reference, the production structure (effective suggestive production, validity period, content of production) of each line preview pattern is described.

The "effective suggestion effect" is an introductory effect that suggests that a valid period may occur, and specifically, a plurality of translucent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are displayed on the first image display device. This is an effect in which translucent effect button images are moved and displayed at 70 and gathered toward a specific position.
"Validity period (single hit 3 seconds)" indicates that the validity period in the dialogue preview performance ends when the performance button 17 is operated once or 3 seconds elapse.

The "promotional performance" in the valid period column is a performance that encourages the operation of the performance button 17 during the valid period. Specifically, an opaque performance button image imitating the performance button 17 is displayed at a specific position, and The effect is to display a gauge image that indicates the remaining time of the validity period by the length of the gauge.

"Normal button white" in the promotion effect column means that a button image imitating the effect button 17 in its normal state without protrusion and emitting white light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image, and the effect button 17 indicates that white light is emitted.
"Button state" indicates the state of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and "normal" in the button state column indicates a normal state in which the effect button 17 does not protrude.

"Normal dialogue (black)" in the dialogue production mode column indicates that normal dialogue that does not suggest the possibility of a jackpot game being executed is displayed in black letters, and that the normal dialogue is output as audio. It shows.
"Chance speech (black)" indicates that a chance speech that has a possibility of executing a jackpot game is displayed in black letters, and that the chance speech is outputted as voice.
"Reach line (black)" indicates that the reach line that confirms the execution of the reach effect is displayed in black letters, and that the reach line is output as audio.
"Reach line (red)" indicates that the reach line that confirms the execution of the reach effect is displayed in red letters, and that the reach line is output as audio.

"Heat dialogue (red)" indicates that a heat dialogue that has a high possibility of executing a jackpot game is displayed in red letters, and that the heat dialogue is outputted as a voice.
The term "hot line (gold)" indicates that a line with a very high probability of winning a jackpot game is displayed in golden letters, and at the same time, the line is outputted as a voice.
The "confirmed line (rainbow)" indicates that the confirmed line that confirms the execution of the jackpot game is displayed in rainbow-colored characters, and that the confirmed line is outputted as voice.

"Weak vibration (1 second)" in the button vibration column means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the production button 17 starts from the time the lines start to be displayed (= when the production button 17 is operated or the validity period ends). This indicates that a weak vibration effect that vibrates weakly for seconds is to be executed.
"Strong vibration (1 second)" means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the production button 17 is strong for 1 second from the time the dialogue starts to be displayed (= when the production button 17 is operated or the valid period ends). This indicates that a strong vibrating effect will be executed.

The expected jackpot for each dialogue production mode is: "Normal dialogue" < "Chance dialogue (black)" < "Reach dialogue (black)" < "Reach dialogue (red)" < "Heat dialogue (red)" < "Extreme heat" ``Serif (gold)'' < ``Confirmed line (rainbow)''. In addition, the jackpot expectation of each vibration performance is "weak vibration performance" < "strong vibration performance".

The first feature of the line notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 158 is that when a line with high expectation of jackpot (hot line or higher) is displayed, a vibration effect can be executed in which the effect button 17 is vibrated. There are several points. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify the player that the expectation of a jackpot is high, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the line preview pattern determination table shown in FIG. 158 is that the line preview performance of the hot line, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the hot line, is executed, compared to the case where the line preview performance of the hot line is executed. In this case, the vibration effect of the effect button 17 (activation of the button vibration motor) is more likely to be executed (execution rate is high), and the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed when the dialogue preview effect of the heat dialogue is executed. One point is that the expectation of a big hit is higher when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed than when it is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectations as to whether or not the vibration effect of the effect button 17 will be executed when the dialogue preview effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the line preview pattern determination table shown in FIG. 158 is that the vibration effect that is executed when a line with a high probability of winning a jackpot (hot line or higher) is displayed has a relatively short duration. Can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to perform highly effective performances while suppressing inconveniences such as misunderstanding that the execution of the jackpot game has been confirmed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the dialogue notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. There are several types of points. Therefore, the degree of expectation of a jackpot can be indicated by the vibration intensity of the vibration effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that there are weak vibration effects and strong vibration effects as the vibration effects performed during the dialogue preview production, but it is also possible to use only the weak vibration effects or only the strong vibration effects, or the vibration effects may be stronger than the vibration duration of the weak vibration effects. The vibration time may be increased.

Furthermore, the expected level of jackpot when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed during the dialogue preview effect is the same in effect modes A to C (normal game state) and effect mode D to G (specific game state). However, the expectation level of jackpot may be higher in production modes A to C (normal gaming state), or the expectation level of jackpot may be higher in production modes D to G (specific gaming state). You can also do this. In this way, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of performance mode, and it is also possible to increase the expectations of the players in the performance modes D to G, which are advantageous to the player, and improve the interest of the game. becomes.

In addition, the effective period ends and the dialogue preview performance is executed by operating the performance button 17 or by elapse of the effective time, but if the effective period ends due to the elapse of the effective time, the dialogue preview performance is executed. You may choose not to execute it.

Also, although the dialogue preview performance is executed with a valid period, it is also possible to execute the dialogue preview performance without generating a valid period. It is also possible to perform only a weak vibration effect for 1 second or only a strong vibration effect for 1 second.

(Step-up notice pattern determination table)
FIG. 159 is a diagram showing a step-up notice pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a notice pattern for a step-up notice performance.

As shown in FIG. 159, the step-up notice pattern determination table is associated with the performance mode, jackpot determination result, variable performance pattern type, selection rate (%) of each step-up notice pattern, and selected step-up notice pattern. For reference, the performance structure of each step-up notice pattern (step-up (SU) performance mode, button vibration) is described.

"1→2" in the step-up performance mode column indicates that the first to second step performances are executed in order.
"1→2→3" indicates that the first to third step effects are executed in order.
"1→2→3→4" indicates that the first to fourth step effects are executed in order.
"1→2→3→4→5" indicates that the first to fifth step effects are executed in order.
"1→2→3→5" indicates that after the first to third step effects are executed in order, the fourth step effect is skipped and the fifth step effect is executed.
In each step-up performance mode, the performance time of the step performance before the last step performance is 1 second, and the performance time of the last step performance is 3 seconds.

"Weak vibration (1 second) at '5'" in the button vibration column means a weak vibration effect in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 vibrates weakly for 1 second from the start of the 5th step effect. indicates that it will be executed.

The jackpot expectation for each step-up production mode is "1 → 2" < "1 → 2 → 3" < "1 → 2 → 3 → 4" < "1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5" < "1 → 2 → 3 → 5".

The first feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. One point is that it is possible to perform a vibration effect that vibrates 17. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify the player that the expectation of a jackpot is high, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 159 is that the vibration effect that is executed when the step effect (fifth step effect) with high expectation of jackpot is displayed is for a relatively short time. There are several points that can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to perform highly effective performances while suppressing inconveniences such as misunderstanding that the execution of the jackpot game has been confirmed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 159 is the vibration mode (vibration intensity, vibration One point is that there is only one predetermined type of time (weak vibration (1 second)). Therefore, in the step-up preview performance in which the player does not operate the performance button 17 and it is difficult to grasp the type of vibration performance, it is possible to suppress the performance form from becoming complicated, and improve the interest of the game. becomes possible.

The fourth feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. , Step-up preview performances with low expectations are difficult to execute (execution rate is low). Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of production mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fifth feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. , the weak vibration effect is easily executed (execution rate is high). Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of production mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The sixth feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. One point is that the expectation of a jackpot is high when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 without a valid period (display of an operation promotion image) is executed. Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of production mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, performance modes A to C (normal game state) are better than performance modes D to G (specific game state) when the performance button 17 does not have a valid period (display of an operation promotion image) in the step-up notice performance. The expectation level of a jackpot may be increased when the vibration effect is executed. Even in this case, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of performance mode, and it is easy to increase the expectations of the players in the performance modes D to G that are advantageous to the players, thereby improving the interest of the game. becomes possible.

(pseudo continuous performance pattern determination table)
FIG. 160 is a diagram showing a pseudo-continuous performance pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a performance pattern for a pseudo-continuous performance.

As shown in FIG. 160, the pseudo continuous effect pattern determination table is associated with the effect mode, jackpot determination result, variable effect pattern type, selection rate (%) of each pseudo continuous effect pattern, and selected pseudo continuous effect pattern. The performance structure (effective suggestive performance, effective period, performance content) of each pseudo-continuous performance pattern is described for reference.

The "effective suggestion effect" is an introductory effect that suggests that a valid period may occur. Specifically, a plurality of translucent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are displayed on the first image display device. This is an effect in which translucent effect button images are moved and displayed at 70 and gathered toward a specific position.
"Validity period (single hit 3 seconds)" indicates that the validity period in the pseudo continuous performance ends when the performance button 17 is operated once or 3 seconds elapse.

The "promotional performance" in the valid period column is a performance that encourages the operation of the performance button 17 during the valid period. Specifically, an opaque performance button image imitating the performance button 17 is displayed at a specific position, and The effect is to display a gauge image that indicates the remaining time of the validity period by the length of the gauge.

"Normal Button White" in the promotion effect column means that a button image imitating the effect button 17 in its normal state without protrusion and emitting white light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image. 17 indicates that white light is emitted.
"Protruding button white" means that a button image imitating the effect button 17 that is in a protruding state and emits white light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image, and the effect button 17 emits white light. It is shown that.

"Button state" in the valid period column indicates the state of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and "normal" in the button state column indicates the normal state in which the effect button 17 does not protrude. "Protruding" indicates that the production button 17 is in a protruding state.

"Pseudo-failure" in the pseudo-sequence production mode column means that the normal production pattern 70a temporarily stops without the pseudo-symbol suggesting the execution of a pseudo-sequence as the central production pattern 70a, and the failure sound effect is emitted. This indicates that the outputted pseudo consecutive failure performance will be executed.
"Pseudo success" means that the pseudo symbol 70a in the center that suggests the execution of a pseudo series temporarily stops, a success sound effect is output, the second movable member 74 moves weakly, and the pseudo series is executed. This indicates that a pseudo consecutive success performance will be executed.

"Weak vibration (1 second)" in the button vibration column means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the production button 17 starts when the pseudo pattern temporarily stops (= when the production button 17 is operated or the validity period ends). This indicates that a weak vibration effect that vibrates weakly for one second will be executed.
"Strong vibration (1 second)" means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the production button 17 vibrates strongly for 1 second from when the pseudo pattern is temporarily stopped (= when the production button 17 is operated or the validity period ends). This indicates that a strong vibration effect will be executed.

The jackpot expectation level of each promotional performance is "normal button white" < "protruding button white". Moreover, the jackpot expectation level of each button state is "normal" < "prominent". In addition, the jackpot expectation of each vibration performance is "weak vibration performance" < "strong vibration performance".

The first feature of the pseudo consecutive performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. One point is that a vibration effect that causes the button 17 to vibrate may be executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify the player that the expectation of a jackpot is high, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the pseudo consecutive performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 160 is that the vibration performance that is executed when the pseudo continuous success performance is performed is a variable performance pattern with a high expectation of jackpot and is performed for a relatively short time. There are several points that can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to perform highly effective performances while suppressing inconveniences such as misunderstanding that the execution of the jackpot game has been confirmed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the pseudo consecutive effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 160 is that the vibration intensity of the vibration effect executed when the pseudo consecutive successful effect is performed is a variable effect pattern with a high jackpot expectation. There are two types of points depending on the situation. Therefore, the degree of expectation of a jackpot can be indicated by the vibration intensity of the vibration effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A fourth feature of the pseudo-continuous performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 160 is that the same performance device (performance button vibration Although it is possible to execute a pseudo consecutive performance (pseudo consecutive successful performance) using the motor, second movable member 74, etc., it is possible to execute a pseudo continuous performance using the performance modes D to G (specific gaming state) rather than performance modes A to C (normal gaming state). ) has a higher expectation of a jackpot when a pseudo consecutive performance (pseudo continuous success performance) using the same performance device (performance button vibration motor, second movable member 74, etc.) is executed. Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of performance mode, and it is easy to increase the expectations of the players in the performance modes D to G, which are advantageous to the players, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fifth feature of the pseudo continuous performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. There are cases in which a pseudo consecutive performance (pseudo consecutive success performance) is executed using a button vibration motor that vibrates. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the performance effect of the pseudo-continuous performance, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that the performance button 17 may be in a protruding state during the valid period when a pseudo consecutive success performance is performed in a variable performance pattern with a high expectation of a jackpot, but it may not be in a protruding state.

Further, although there are a weak vibration performance and a strong vibration performance as the vibration performance executed in the pseudo consecutive success performance, only the weak vibration performance or only the strong vibration performance may be used.

In addition, although a valid period is generated to execute a pseudo consecutive success effect or a pseudo consecutive failure effect, it is also possible to execute a pseudo continuous success effect or a pseudo continuous failure effect without generating a valid period. The vibration performance that is often performed during the pseudo consecutive success performance may be only a 3-second weak vibration performance or only a 3-second strong vibration performance, or only a 1-second weak vibration performance or only a 1-second strong vibration performance. You can also do this.

Furthermore, performance modes A to C (normal game state) are better than performance modes D to G (specific game state) because they are simulated using the same performance device (performance button vibration motor, second movable member 74, etc.). The expectation level of a jackpot when a consecutive performance (pseudo successive success performance) is executed may be set higher, and performance mode B or C may be higher than performance mode A using the same performance device (performance button vibration). The expectation level of a jackpot when a pseudo consecutive performance (pseudo continuous success performance) using a motor, second movable member 74, etc.) is executed may be made higher, and performance modes D~ than performance mode G may be set. Even if F is made to have a higher jackpot expectation when a pseudo consecutive performance (pseudo continuous success performance) using the same performance device (performance button vibration motor, second movable member 74, etc.) is executed. good.

Further, in the pseudo consecutive performance (pseudo continuous successful performance), the motion performance using the second movable member 74 is performed, but the motion performance using the first movable member 73 may be performed. In this case, it is preferable that the execution rate of the motion performance using the second movable member 74 is higher than that of the motion performance using the first movable member 73.

(Development performance pattern determination table)
FIG. 161 is a diagram showing an advanced performance pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a performance pattern for advanced performance.

As shown in FIG. 161, the advanced performance pattern determination table includes the performance mode, jackpot determination result, variable performance pattern type, advanced performance type for which the advanced performance pattern is determined, selection rate (%) of each advanced performance pattern, The selected advanced performance patterns are associated with each other, and the performance configuration (effective suggestive performance, valid period, and performance content) of each advanced performance pattern is described for reference.

The "effective suggestion effect" is an introductory effect that suggests that a valid period may occur. Specifically, a plurality of translucent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are displayed on the first image display device. This is an effect in which translucent effect button images are moved and displayed at 70 and gathered toward a specific position.
``None'' in the effective suggestion effect column indicates that the effective suggestion effect is not executed, and ``Yes (gase)'' indicates that the effective suggestion effect is executed but the validity period does not occur after that. This indicates that this is an effective suggestion effect, and "present" indicates that the effective suggestion effect will be executed and then a valid period will occur.

The "validity period (long press for 4 seconds)" indicates that the advanced performance progresses step by step by long pressing the performance button 17, and that the valid period of the advanced performance ends when 4 seconds have elapsed.
The "promotion effect" in the valid period column is a effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period. Specifically, as a result of a plurality of translucent effect button images gathering at a specific position, an opaque effect is created. The button image is displayed at a specific position, and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the validity period by the length of the gauge is displayed.

"Normal button white" in the promotion effect column means that a button image imitating the effect button 17 in its normal state without protrusion and emitting white light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image, and the effect button 17 indicates that white light is emitted.
"Normal button red" means that, as the opaque effect button image described above, a button image imitating the effect button 17 that is not protruding in its normal state and emits red light is displayed, and the effect button 17 also emits red light. It is shown that.

"Button state" in the valid period column indicates the state of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and "normal" in the button state column indicates the normal state in which the effect button 17 does not protrude. "Protruding" indicates that the production button 17 is in a protruding state.

"SP notification" in the column of development performance mode means that as a result of the development performance, an SP development design that suggests development to SP reach performance is derived and displayed, and an SP development performance that outputs the first development sound effect is executed. Which indicates that.
"SPSP notification" indicates that as a result of the development performance, an SPSP development design is derived and displayed that suggests development to the SPSP reach performance, and a SPSP development performance is executed that outputs a second development sound effect. .
"Full rotation notification" refers to the execution of a full rotation development effect that derives and displays a full rotation development symbol that suggests development to a full rotation reach effect as a result of the development effect, and outputs a third development sound effect. It shows.

The "weak motion" in the accessory motion column is a weak motion effect in which the second movable member 74 emits blue light and performs a weak motion with a small motion range when displaying various symbols (= at the end of the valid period). indicates that it will be executed.
"Strong motion" means that a strong motion effect is executed in which the second movable member 74 emits red light and performs a strong motion with a large swing width when various symbols are derived and displayed (= at the end of the valid period). It shows.

"Weak vibration (1 second)" in the button vibration column means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the production button 17 is weak for 1 second from the time when various advanced symbols are derived and displayed (= at the end of the valid period). This indicates that a weak vibration effect will be executed.
"Strong vibration (1 second)" is a weak vibration effect in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 strongly vibrates for 1 second from the time when various symbols are derived and displayed (= at the end of the valid period). indicates that it will be executed.

The jackpot expectation level of each action performance is "weak action" < "strong action". In addition, the jackpot expectation level of each vibration performance is "weak vibration" < "strong vibration".

The first feature of the advanced performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. One point is that a vibration effect may be executed in which the effect period of the button 17 is generated and the effect button 17 is vibrated. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify the player that the expectation of a jackpot is high, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the development performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 161 is that the case where the full rotation development performance, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the SPSP development performance, is executed is better than the case where the SPSP development performance is executed. , the vibration effect of the effect button 17 (operation of the button vibration motor) is more likely to be executed (execution rate is high), and when the SPSP development effect is executed, the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is more likely to be executed than when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is not executed. One point is that the expectation of a jackpot is higher when the vibration effect is executed. Therefore, when the SPSP development effect is executed, the player's expectation as to whether or not the vibration effect of the effect button 17 will be executed can be increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the advanced performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 161 is that it is a fluctuating performance pattern with a high expectation of a jackpot, and is executed when an advanced performance with a high expectation of a jackpot (SPSP notification, full rotation notification) is performed. One of the points is that the vibration performance is relatively short. Therefore, it is possible to perform highly effective performances while suppressing inconveniences such as misunderstanding that the execution of the jackpot game has been confirmed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the advanced performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 161 is the vibration of the vibration performance that is executed when the advanced performance (SPSP notification, full rotation notification) is performed in a variable performance pattern with high expectation of jackpot. There are two types of strength depending on the degree of jackpot expectation. Therefore, the degree of expectation of a jackpot can be indicated by the vibration intensity of the vibration effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fifth feature of the advanced performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 161 is that the same performance device (performance button vibration motor , second movable member 74, etc.), but the performance modes D to G (specific game state) are more effective than the performance modes A to C (normal game state). On the other hand, the expectation of a jackpot is higher when an advanced performance is executed using a performance device (performance button vibration motor, second movable member 74, etc.). Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of performance mode, and it is easy to increase the expectations of the players in the performance modes D to G, which are advantageous to the players, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that although there are weak vibration effects and strong vibration effects as the vibration effects executed in the advanced effect, only the weak vibration effects or only the strong vibration effects may be used.

In addition, production modes A to C (normal gaming state) are more advanced than production modes D to G (specific gaming states) using the same production device (production button vibration motor, second movable member 74, etc.). The expectation level of a jackpot when a performance (SPSP advanced performance, etc.) is executed may be set higher, and performance mode B or C may be set higher than performance mode A using the same performance device (performance button vibration motor, etc.). , the second movable member 74, etc.), the expectation level of a jackpot may be higher when an advanced effect is executed using the second movable member 74, etc. The expectation level of a jackpot may be increased when an advanced presentation is performed using the device (the presentation button vibration motor, the second movable member 74, etc.).

(Cut-in production pattern determination table)
FIG. 162 is a diagram showing a cut-in effect pattern determination table that is referred to when determining the effect pattern of the cut-in effect.

As shown in FIG. 162, the cut-in effect pattern determination table associates the effect mode, jackpot determination result, variable effect pattern type, selection rate (%) of each cut-in effect pattern, and selected cut-in effect pattern. The production structure (effective suggestive production, effective period, content of production) of each cut-in production pattern is listed for reference.

The "effective suggestion effect" is an introductory effect that suggests that a valid period may occur, and specifically, a plurality of translucent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are displayed on the first image display device. This is an effect in which translucent effect button images are moved and displayed at 70 and gathered toward a specific position.
"Validity period (single hit 4 seconds)" indicates that the validity period in the cut-in performance ends when the performance button 17 is operated once or when 4 seconds elapse.

The "promotional performance" in the valid period column is a performance that prompts the operation of the performance button 17 during the valid period, and specifically, as a result of executing the effective suggestion performance without performing the effective suggestion performance, An opaque effect button image is displayed at a specific position, and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the validity period by the length of the gauge is displayed.

"Normal Button White" in the promotion effect column means that a button image imitating the effect button 17 in its normal state without protrusion and emitting white light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image. 17 indicates that white light is emitted.
"Protruding button red" means that a button image imitating the effect button 17 that is in a protruding state and emits red light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image, and the effect button 17 emits red light. It is shown that.
"Protruding button rainbow" means that a button image imitating the effect button 17 that is in a protruding state and emitting rainbow light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image, and the effect button 17 also emits a rainbow light. It is shown that.

"Button state" in the valid period column indicates the state of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and "normal" indicates a normal state in which the effect button 17 does not protrude. "Protruding" indicates that the production button 17 is in a protruding state.

"Blue cut-in" in the cut-in effect mode column means that a blue cut-in effect is executed in which a blue frame cut-in image is displayed on the first image display device 70 and a first cut-in sound effect is output. This indicates that the
“Green cut-in” indicates that a green cut-in effect is executed in which a green frame cut-in image is displayed on the first image display device 70 and a second cut-in sound effect is output. .
“Red cut-in” indicates that a red cut-in effect is executed in which a red frame cut-in image is displayed on the first image display device 70 and a third cut-in sound effect is output. .

"Weak vibration (3 seconds)" in the button vibration column means when the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 starts displaying the cut-in image (= when the effect button 17 is operated or when the validity period ends) This indicates that a weak vibration performance in which weak vibrations are produced for 3 seconds is to be executed.
"Strong vibration (3 seconds)" means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the production button 17 vibrates for 3 seconds from the start of displaying the cut-in image (= when the production button 17 is operated or the validity period ends). This indicates that a strong vibration effect in which the camera vibrates strongly will be executed.

The expected jackpot for each cut-in is "Blue Cut-in" < "Green Cut-in" < "Red Cut-in". In addition, the jackpot expectation of each vibration performance is "weak vibration performance" < "strong vibration performance".

The first feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 162 is that when a cut-in image with high expectation of jackpot is displayed (cut-in effect is executed), the validity period of the effect button 17 is generated. One point is that a vibration effect that causes the effect button 17 to vibrate may be executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify the player that the expectation of a jackpot is high, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 162 is that the vibration effect that is executed when a cut-in image with a high expectation of jackpot is displayed (cut-in effect is executed) takes a relatively long time. There are some points that have been made. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify the player that the expectation of a jackpot is high, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 162 is that the vibration intensity of the vibration effect executed when a cut-in image with a high expectation of a jackpot is displayed (the cut-in effect is executed) is expected to be a jackpot. There are two types of points depending on the degree. Therefore, the degree of expectation of a jackpot can be indicated by the vibration intensity of the vibration effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Although there are weak vibration effects and strong vibration effects as the vibration effects executed in the cut-in effect, only the weak vibration effects or only the strong vibration effects may be used.

Also, although the cut-in effect is executed with a valid period, it is also possible to execute the cut-in effect without generating a valid period. It may be possible to have only a weak vibration performance for 3 seconds or only a strong vibration performance for 3 seconds, or only a weak vibration performance for 1 second or only a strong vibration performance for 1 second.

(Decision production pattern determination table)
FIG. 163 is a diagram showing a fixed performance pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a fixed performance pattern.

As shown in FIG. 163, the performance mode, jackpot determination result, variable performance pattern type, selection rate (%) of each successive performance pattern, and selected performance pattern are associated with the final performance pattern determination table. For reference, the production structure (effective suggestion production, validity period, production content) of each fixed production pattern is described.

The "effective suggestion effect" is an introductory effect that suggests that a valid period may occur. Specifically, a plurality of translucent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are displayed on the first image display device. This is an effect in which button images are moved and displayed at 70, and button images are gathered toward a specific position.
"Validity period (single hit 5 seconds)" indicates that the validity period in the final performance ends when the performance button 17 is operated once or when 5 seconds elapse.

The "promotional performance" in the valid period column is a performance that prompts the operation of the performance button 17 during the valid period, and specifically, as a result of executing the effective suggestion performance without performing the effective suggestion performance, An opaque effect button image is displayed at a specific position, and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the validity period by the length of the gauge is displayed.

"Normal Button White" in the promotion effect column means that a button image imitating the effect button 17 in its normal state without protrusion and emitting white light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image. 17 indicates that white light is emitted.
"Protruding button red" means that a button image imitating the effect button 17 that is in a protruding state and emits red light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image, and the effect button 17 emits red light. It is shown that.
"Protruding button rainbow" means that a button image imitating the effect button 17 that is in a protruding state and emitting rainbow light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image, and the effect button 17 also emits a rainbow light. It is shown that.

"Button state" in the valid period column indicates the state of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and "normal" indicates a normal state in which the effect button 17 does not protrude. "Protruding" indicates that the production button 17 is in a protruding state.

"Failure" in the column of winning presentation mode refers to a failed presentation indicating that the jackpot game will not be executed because the first movable member 73 does not operate and the screen of the first image display device 70 changes to a dark color. indicates that it will be executed.
"Success" means that the first movable member 73 moves to the maximum operating position and emits rainbow-colored light, and a success effect image is displayed on the first image display device 70, so that a jackpot game is executed. This indicates that a successful performance will be executed.

"Strong vibration (4 seconds → 5 seconds)" in the button vibration column is determined by the button vibration motor to vibrate the performance button 17 and is determined by the start of a successful performance (= when the performance button 17 is operated or the validity period ends. This shows that a strong vibration performance (decision success vibration performance) is executed in which the strong vibration is performed for 4 seconds from the time of 10 minutes, and then the strong vibration is performed for 5 seconds with an interval of 1 second in between.

"Rainbow light emission (11 seconds)" in the button light emission column is determined by the effect button LED for causing the effect button 17 to emit light and starts from the start of a successful effect (= when the effect button 17 is operated or the validity period ends). This shows that rainbow light is emitted for 11 seconds (longer period than the strong vibration of the production button 17).

The jackpot expectation of each promotional performance is ``normal button white'' < ``protruding button red'' < ``protruding button rainbow.'' Moreover, the jackpot expectation level of each button state is "normal" < "prominent".

The first feature of the final effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 163 is that when a successful successful effect is executed, a vibration effect that generates a valid period and vibrates the effect button 17 is executed. . Therefore, it becomes possible to effectively notify that a jackpot game will be executed, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

A second feature of the fixed performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 163 is that the valid period of the performance button 17 that occurs during the variable performance is the longest period. Therefore, inconveniences such as the player missing the operation of the performance button 17 can be suppressed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A third feature of the fixed performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 163 is that the performance button 17 vibrates for the longest period as a strong vibration performance that occurs during a variable performance. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the player's sense of exhilaration at the time of successful performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A fourth feature of the fixed effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 163 is that the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 is performed for a longer period than the vibration period of the effect button 17. Therefore, even after the vibration of the performance button 17 ends, the player's feeling of exhilaration can be maintained, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the decision performance (decision success performance), the motion performance using the first movable member 73 is performed, but the motion performance using the second movable member 74 may also be performed. In this case, it is preferable that the execution rate of the motion performance using the first movable member 73 is higher than that of the motion performance using the second movable member 74.

(Re-lottery performance pattern determination table)
FIG. 164 is a diagram showing a re-lottery effect pattern determination table that is referred to when determining the effect pattern of the re-lottery effect.

As shown in FIG. 164, the re-lottery effect pattern determination table includes the effect mode, the presence or absence of promotion (promotion is planned), the selection rate (%) of each re-lottery effect pattern, and the selected re-lottery effect pattern. They are associated with each other, and the performance structure (effective suggestion performance, validity period, performance content) of each re-lottery performance pattern is described for reference.

The "effective suggestion effect" is an introductory effect that suggests that a valid period may occur. Specifically, a plurality of translucent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are displayed on the first image display device. This is an effect in which translucent effect button images are moved and displayed at 70 and gathered toward a specific position.
"Valid period (single hit 3 seconds)" indicates that the valid period in the re-lottery performance ends when the performance button 17 is operated once or 3 seconds elapse.

The "promotion effect" in the valid period column is a effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 17 during the effective period, and specifically, displays an opaque effect button image at a specific position without executing the effective suggestion effect. At the same time, a gauge image is displayed that indicates the remaining time of the validity period by the length of the gauge.

"Normal Button White" in the promotion effect column means that a button image imitating the effect button 17 in its normal state without protrusion and emitting white light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image. 17 indicates that white light is emitted.
"Normal button red" means that, as the opaque effect button image described above, a button image imitating the effect button 17 that is not protruding in its normal state and emits red light is displayed, and the effect button 17 also emits red light. It is shown that.
"Normal button rainbow" means that, as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image, a button image imitating the effect button 17 in its normal state without protrusion and emitting rainbow light is displayed, and the effect button 17 also emits a rainbow light. It is shown that.

"Button state" in the valid period column indicates the state of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and "normal" in the button state column indicates the normal state in which the effect button 17 does not protrude. It shows.

"Promotion failure performance" in the re-lottery performance mode column refers to non-promoted symbols that do not result in a design that is advantageous to the player as a result of the re-lottery performance (for example, even number design → even number design, odd number design other than "7" → This indicates that odd number symbols other than "7" are derived and displayed (temporarily stopped) and a non-promoted sound effect is output.
"Successful promotion performance" means that promotion symbols that are advantageous to the player as a result of the re-lottery production (for example, even numbered symbols → odd numbered symbols, odd numbered symbols other than "7" → "7" symbols) are derived and displayed. (temporary stop) and a promotion sound effect is output.

"Strong vibration (3 seconds)" in the button vibration column means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the production button 17 vibrates strongly for 3 seconds from the time the promotion symbol is derived (= the end of the valid period). This indicates that a strong vibration effect will be executed.

"Rainbow light emission (4 seconds)" in the button light emission column means that the production button LED for causing the production button 17 to emit light is activated for 4 seconds (when the production button 17 is activated) from the time when the promotion symbol is derived (= the end of the valid period). This shows that rainbow light is emitted over a period longer than the period of strong vibration.

The expected jackpot for each promotional performance is ``normal button white'' < ``normal button red'' < ``normal button rainbow.''

The first feature of the re-lottery effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 164 is that when a promotion success effect is executed, a vibration effect is executed that generates a valid period and vibrates the effect button 17. It will be done. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify the player that the effect symbol has been promoted to an advantageous effect symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A second feature of the re-lottery effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 164 is that the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 is performed over a longer period than the strong vibration effect. Therefore, even after the strong vibration effect ends, the player's sense of exhilaration can be maintained, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that although the re-lottery effect (promotion failure effect, promotion success effect) is executed by generating a valid period, the re-lottery effect may be executed without generating a valid term.

(Fixed performance pattern determination table)
FIG. 165 is a diagram showing a confirmed performance pattern determination table that is referred to when determining the performance pattern of the confirmed performance.

As shown in FIG. 165, the confirmed performance pattern determination table is associated with the jackpot determination result, variable performance pattern type, selection rate (%) of each confirmed performance pattern, and confirmed performance pattern to be selected. The performance structure (execution timing, performance content) of each confirmed performance pattern is described.

"-" in the execution timing column indicates that the confirmed performance is not executed, and "○" indicates that the confirmed performance is executed.
The "confirmation sound" in the audio column indicates that a confirmation sound indicating that a jackpot game will be executed is output.
"Handle rainbow light emission" in the light emission column means that the handle LED for causing the firing handle 15 to emit light will emit rainbow colors from the time the final sound is output until the fluctuation stops (for more than 4 seconds until the production pattern stops displaying). It shows that.

"Strong vibration (3 seconds)" in the button vibration column means that a strong vibration effect is executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 strongly vibrates for 3 seconds from the time the final sound is output. It shows.

The first feature of the confirmed effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 165 is that when a confirmed effect is executed, a vibration effect that vibrates the effect button 17 without generating a valid period is executed. . Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that a jackpot game will be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A second feature of the confirmed effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 165 is that the rainbow emission of the firing handle 15 is performed over a longer period than the strong vibration effect. Therefore, even after the strong vibration effect ends, the player's sense of exhilaration can be maintained, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Summary of various tables shown in Figures 154 to 165)
Here, the first feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 154 to 165 is that a vibration effect (weak vibration for 1 second or strong vibration for 1 second) is executed in the dialogue preview effect with the validity period of the effect button 17. When the vibration performance (weak vibration 1 second) is executed as a step-up notice performance without the validity period of the performance button 17, the jackpot expectation level (vibration performance associated with pattern alignment (strong vibration 4) The high rate of performance (seconds) and the high rate of vibration performance (strong vibration 4 seconds → 5 seconds) in the final performance, etc. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding the type of pre-reach preview performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that the vibration effect (weak vibration 1 second) is more effective in a dialogue preview effect with a valid period of the effect button 17 than when the vibration effect (weak vibration 1 second) is executed in a step-up preview effect without the effect period of the effect button 17. 2 seconds or strong vibration 1 second) is executed, the jackpot expectation level (rate of execution of the vibration effect (strong vibration 4 seconds) accompanying the alignment of the symbols mentioned above, the vibration effect (strong vibration 4 seconds) with the deciding effect described later) 4 seconds → 5 seconds)) may be increased. Even in this case, it is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding the type of pre-reach preview performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A second feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 154 to 165 is that in the vibration performance executed as a jackpot preview performance, the first vibration performance with a relatively short vibration period (when the dialogue preview performance is performed, the step-up Vibration performance (1 second) during preview performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, etc.) and second vibration performance (during cut-in performance, decisive success performance) with a longer vibration period (performance period) than the first vibration performance There is a vibration performance (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds → 5 seconds) that is longer than 1 second, such as during the time and confirmed performance, and after the first performance period (pre-reach performance), there is a second performance period (normal reach performance). ) and a variable performance with a third performance period (SP/SPSP reach performance), the first vibration performance is more likely to be executed during the first performance period (higher execution rate) than during the second performance period. There are several points. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player without making him or her mistake that he or she will win the jackpot, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

Furthermore, regarding the look-ahead vibration performance, the first vibration performance has a relatively short vibration period, but even if the look-ahead vibration performance is included, the second performance will start after the first performance period (pre-reach performance). In a variable performance that has a period (normal reach performance) and a third performance period (SP/SPSP reach performance), the first vibration performance is easier to be executed (performed) during the first performance period than during the second performance period. The ratio is high). Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player without making him or her mistake that he or she will win the jackpot, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

The third feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 154 to 165 is that after the first performance period (pre-reach performance), the second performance period (normal reach performance), and the third performance period (SP/SPSP reach performance). In a fluctuating performance in which there is a vibration performance (direction), the first vibration performance (during dialogue preview performance, step-up preview performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, etc.) is more likely to occur during the first performance period than during the third performance period. An example of this is that the performance (1 second) is easy to execute (the rate of execution is high). Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player without making him or her mistake that he or she will win the jackpot, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

The fourth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 154 to 165 is that in the vibration performance executed as a jackpot preview performance, the first vibration performance with a short vibration period (during dialogue preview performance, step-up preview performance) , a vibration performance (1 second) during a pseudo continuous performance, a development performance, etc.) and a second vibration performance with a longer vibration period than the first vibration performance (such as during a cut-in performance, a successful decision performance, a confirmed performance, etc.) There are vibration effects that are longer than 1 second (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds → 5 seconds)), and after the first effect period (pre-reach effect), there is a second effect period (normal reach effect) and a third effect period ( In a variable performance with SP/SPSP reach performance), the second vibration performance is more likely to be executed (the rate of execution is higher) during the second performance period than during the first performance period. Therefore, the expectations of the players can be effectively raised, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The fifth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 154 to 165 is that after the first performance period (pre-reach performance), the second performance period (normal reach performance), and the third performance period (SP/SPSP reach performance). In a variable performance that has a second vibration performance (vibration performance that is longer than 1 second, such as during cut-in performance, successful decision performance, confirmed performance, etc.), the third performance period is longer than the first performance period. (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds → 5 seconds)) is easy to execute (has a high execution rate). Therefore, the expectations of the players can be effectively raised, and the interest in the game can be improved.

A sixth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 154 to 165 is that in the first performance period (pre-reach performance), the rate at which the first vibration performance (1 second) is executed with the performance button 17 in the normal state is This is higher than the rate of executing the first vibration performance with the performance button 17 in the protruding state. Therefore, the expectations of the players are not excessively aroused during the first performance period, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A seventh feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 154 to 165 is that during the third performance period (during SP/SPSP reach performance), the performance button 17 is in the protruding state and the second vibration performance (for 3 seconds or more) is activated. The point is that the rate of execution is higher than the rate of execution of the second vibration performance with the performance button 17 in the normal state. Therefore, the expectations of the players are not excessively aroused during the first performance period, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eighth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 154 to 165 is that in the vibration performance executed as a jackpot preview performance, the first vibration performance with a short vibration period (during dialogue preview performance, step-up preview performance) , vibration effects (1 second) during pseudo-continuous effects, development effects, etc.), and second vibration effects (during cut-in effects, successful performance, etc.) that have a longer vibration period (effect period) than the first vibration effects. There are vibration performances that are longer than 1 second (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds → 5 seconds)), and a continuous performance (pseudo continuous performance) is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, once or twice). In a variable performance in which a reach performance is executed, the second vibration performance is more likely to be executed when the first vibration performance is executed than when the first vibration performance is not executed (the rate of execution is high) ) points can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding whether or not the first vibration effect will be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A ninth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 154 to 165 is that the vibration performance executed as a jackpot preview performance includes a second vibration performance (performance period) that has a longer vibration period (performance period) than the first vibration performance. There are vibration effects that are longer than 1 second (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds → 5 seconds) during cut-in effects, successful decision effects, confirmation effects, etc., and during production modes A to C (normal gaming state). In the fluctuating performance, the reach performance using the second type of performance symbols (even numbered symbols) is more likely to be executed (the rate of execution is higher) than the reach performance using the first type of production symbols (odd numbered symbols other than "7"). ), the reach effect is more difficult to execute with the third type of effect symbol (the “7” effect symbol) than the reach effect with the second type of effect symbol (the rate of execution is lower), The point is that the second vibration performance is easier to be executed (the rate of execution is higher) when the ready-to-reach effect is executed using the third type of effect pattern than when the ready-to-reach effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding the type of effect symbols used to execute the ready-to-reach effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A tenth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 154 to 165 is that in the jackpot fluctuation performance in which the reach performance is executed, the vibration performance (display of the operation promotion image) without the validity period (display of the operation promotion image) during the pre-reach performance ( Vibration effects without a valid period (display of operation promotion images) during post-reach effects (development effect, pattern alignment, C pattern alignment, confirmation effect) are more effective than the number of executions of pre-reading vibration effects, step-up notice effects, confirmed effects). ) is likely to be executed more often. Therefore, it is possible to effectively increase the sense of expectation during the post-reach performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eleventh feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 154 to 165 is that a specific reach performance (SP reach performance) is more effective than a jackpot variable performance in which a predetermined reach performance (normal reach performance, full rotation reach performance) is executed. , SPSP reach effect) is executed more frequently than the jackpot fluctuation effect in which vibration effects without a validity period (development effect, pattern alignment, C pattern alignment, fixed effect) are more likely to be executed during the post-reach effect. can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the jackpot fluctuation performance from becoming monotonous, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The twelfth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 154 to 165 is that in the loss variation performance in which the reach performance is executed, the vibration performance (development performance, pattern alignment, C The point is that the number of executions of vibration effects without a validity period (pre-read vibration effect, step-up notice effect, confirmed effect) during the pre-reach effect tends to be greater than the number of executions of patterns matching, confirmed effect). . Therefore, the expectation level of a jackpot can be suggested by the vibration performance without a validity period, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

The thirteenth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 154 to 165 is that when a pre-reach preview performance (line preview performance, step-up preview performance) is executed in a variable performance, When a post-reach preview performance (cut-in performance) with high expectations for a jackpot is executed, the vibration performance of the production button 17 (operation of the button vibration motor) is more likely to be executed (execution rate is high), and a pre-reach preview performance When the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed, the expectation of a big hit is higher than when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectations as to whether or not the vibrating effect of the effect button 17 will be executed when the pre-reach preview effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A fourteenth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 154 to 165 is that the post-reach preview performance is better in performance modes D to G (specific game state) than in performance modes A to C (normal game state). In this case, the expectation level of a jackpot increases when a vibration effect accompanied by the valid period of the effect button 17 (display of an operation promotion image) is executed. Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of production mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in production modes A to C (normal gaming state) than in production modes D to G (specific gaming states), vibrations accompanying the validity period of the production button 17 (display of operation promotion image) in the post-reach preview production are more effective than in production modes D to G (specific gaming states). The expectation level of a jackpot when the performance is performed may be increased. Even in this case, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of performance mode, and it is easy to increase the expectations of the players in the performance modes D to G that are advantageous to the players, thereby improving the interest of the game. becomes possible.

A fifteenth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 154 to 165 is that during the first performance period (before reach) in the fluctuating performance, the vibration of the performance button 17 is lower than when the vibration performance of the performance button 17 is not executed. The jackpot expectation level is higher when the effect is executed, and in the jackpot variable effect, regardless of whether the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed during the pre-reach effect, the after-reach effect (decision success effect) In the later period), the vibration performance of the performance button 17 (vibration performance when the symbols are aligned or the C symbols are aligned) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player of a jackpot through the vibration effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A sixteenth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 154 to 165 is a vibration performance (during dialogue preview performance, pseudo One of the vibration performances such as continuous performance, development performance, cut-in performance, etc.) is executed in one of multiple types of vibration modes (weak vibration, strong vibration) with different jackpot expectations, A vibration performance that does not involve the valid period of the performance button 17 (display of an operation promotion image) that is executed during a variable performance (one of the vibration performances during a step-up notice performance, when the symbols are aligned, when the C symbols are aligned, etc.) is executed in one predetermined vibration mode. Therefore, in the case where it is difficult to grasp the type of vibration mode because there is no validity period, it is possible to suppress the presentation mode of the vibration performance from becoming complicated, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A seventeenth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 154 to 165 is that during the pre-reach performance period in the jackpot fluctuating performance, the vibration performance (line preview performance) with the valid period of the performance button 17 (display of the operation promotion image) After that, ( Vibration performances (vibration performances for 3 seconds or more such as successful execution, when the symbols are aligned, when the C symbols are aligned, etc.) are executed at different rates during the post-reach performance period) and are not accompanied by the valid period of the production button 17. (Vibration performance during step-up notice performance) is easier to execute (execution rate is higher) during normal game states (performance modes A to C) than during specific game states (performance modes D to G). can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the performance effect related to the vibration performance without the validity period of the performance button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 18th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 154 to 165 is that when the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed, the types of jackpot effect symbols (even number symbols, "7") that match the symbols (including the C pattern) It is possible to change the execution mode of the vibration effect (execution or non-execution, execution timing, etc.) in the jackpot notice effect depending on odd number symbols other than "7" symbol, but depending on the execution of the winning effect or confirmed effect. When performing the vibration effect, the vibration mode is the same regardless of the type of jackpot effect symbols that match the symbols (including the C symbols). Therefore, while increasing the expectation of a jackpot through the vibration performance, it is possible to uniformly celebrate the jackpot, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 19th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 154 to 165 is that after a vibration performance (decision success performance, etc.) with a validity period (display of an operation promotion image) is executed in a jackpot fluctuation performance, the validity period ( It is possible to perform vibration effects (symbol alignment, C pattern alignment, etc.) that are not accompanied by operation promotion images (display of operation promotion images), and vibration effects (decision effects, etc.) that involve a valid period (display of operation promotion images) can be performed by operating the effect button 17. The point is that while the timing to start the vibration varies depending on the timing, the timing to start the vibration is predetermined for vibration performances (symbol alignment, C pattern alignment, etc.) that do not have a validity period (display of operation promotion images). It will be done. Therefore, it is possible to perform the vibration effect at an appropriate timing depending on whether or not the valid period (display of the operation promotion image) is involved, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A twentieth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 154 to 165 is that the same movable member (second Although it is possible to perform specific performances (pseudo continuous performances, advanced performances, etc.) using the movable member 74), specific performances can be executed in performance modes A to C (normal game state) and performance modes D to G (specific game state). The difference is that the expected jackpot is different when executed. Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of production mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A twenty-first feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 154 to 165 is that the performance modes A to C (normal gaming state) and the performance modes D to G (specific gaming state) have multiple tables with different jackpot expectations. It is possible to perform stage performances (step-up preview performances, pseudo-continuation performances, etc.) that progress to any of the stages, but in production modes A to C (normal game state) and production modes D to G (specific game state). If the stage effects (step-up preview effects, pseudo continuous effects, etc.) are the same stage (if the step-up preview effects are any of the 3rd step effects, 4th step effects, or 5th step effects; if the pseudo continuous effects are the same, One point is that the expected level of jackpot is different if the game progresses to 1 or 2 times. Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of production mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A twenty-second feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 154 to 165 is that the performance modes A to C (normal gaming state) and the performance modes D to G (specific gaming state) have multiple tables with different jackpot expectations. In addition to being able to execute any of the operation promotion effects, it is also possible to execute operation effects (any of the development effects, cut-in effects, and final effects) according to the operation of the effect button 17, and the effect modes A to C (normal The expected level of jackpot when the same operation promotion effect (for example, normal button white) is executed is different between production modes D to G (specific gaming states) and production modes A to C (normal gaming state). ) and performance modes D to G (specific game states), when the operation performance is executed, the effective suggestion performance is executed and the operation is promoted more than when the operation promotion performance is executed without the effective suggestion performance. One point to note is that the expectation of a jackpot is higher when the performance is executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectations as to whether or not the effective suggestion performance will be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A twenty-third feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 154 to 165 is that the vibration performance with a relatively short vibration period (for example, 1 second) that is executed in conjunction with the jackpot preview performance is There are cases in which it is executed with a validity period and cases in which it is executed without a validity period, but vibration performances with a relatively long vibration period (more than 3 seconds) that are executed in conjunction with jackpot preview performances. is executed with a validity period. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect for the operation of the performance button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Main processing of the general control unit)
The main processing of the overall control unit 141 will be explained using FIG. 166. FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the overall control unit 141. This main processing is performed by inputting a system reset, which occurs when power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, to the central CPU 141a.

First, the supervising CPU 141a prohibits all interrupts in step T1, and performs initial setting processing in step T2. Specifically, the initial settings of the CPU such as the settings of built-in registers, permission to access the general RAM 141c, initialization (clearing to 0) of all RWM areas of the general RAM 141c, and CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating timer interrupts are performed. ), and in step T3, all interrupts are permitted.

The overall CPU 141a performs adjustment mode switching processing in step T4. Specifically, the volume (value) of the effect sound output from the audio output device 9 and the display devices (first image display device 70, second image display device 70, Adjustment of the light intensity (value) of the backlight of the image display device 71), and adjustment mode related to the adjustment of the volume and light intensity (whether the volume can be adjusted, whether the light amount can be adjusted, the initial value of the volume value (any one from 0 to 5) ), the initial value of the light intensity value (any of 0 to 5), the adjustment range of the volume value (0 to 5 or 1 to 5), and the adjustment range of the light intensity value (0 to 5 or 1 to 5)). Perform processing.

Note that setting (adjustment) of the volume value and the light amount value using the changeover switch 22 can be performed at any time as long as the gaming machine 1 is in a power-on state (after activation of the general control unit 141).

The supervising CPU 141a performs volume adjustment processing in step T5. Specifically, the sound is output from the audio output device 9 based on a detection signal (left button detection signal, right button detection signal) from the cross key detection switch 19a that detects the operation of the cross key 19 that can be operated by the player. Performs processing to adjust the volume (value) of the performance sound.

The supervising CPU 141a performs light amount adjustment processing in step T6. Specifically, the display device (the first image display A process for adjusting the amount of light (value) of the backlight of the device 70 and the second image display device 71 is performed.

In addition, the setting (adjustment) of the volume value and light intensity value using the cross key 19 is regulated (limited) at the start of the variable effect and at the end of the variable effect (stopping of the effect pattern 70a). . In addition, during the period from power ON to the start of game progress control (specifically, during setting change mode, RWM clear preparation mode, setting confirmation mode, initial operation of various drive sources of board unit 500, etc.) (until a timer interrupt is started on the main control board 110), important (high security level) abnormalities (power on, power restoration, unauthorized prize winning) that should be notified with priority over tray full errors and payout abnormalities , abnormal prize winning, magnetic error, radio wave error, door open error) are also restricted (restricted) during notification (output of notification sound).

In addition, while the abnormality notification sound is being output, even if the current volume value is lower than the maximum volume value, various performance sounds output from the audio output device 9 (BGM, etc.) is lowered than the previous volume, and when the abnormality notification sound output ends, the volume of various performance sounds is returned to the volume before the drop.

The overall CPU 141a performs eco-mode control processing in step T7. Specifically, processing is performed to control the start and end of an eco mode that reduces power consumption by reducing the amount of backlight of the display devices (first image display device 70, second image display device 71).

In step T8, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not the production instruction command or the notification instruction command transmitted from the production control unit 130m has been received. If the production instruction command or the notification instruction command has not been received, the process moves to step T11, and if the production instruction command or the notification instruction command has been received, the process moves to step T9.

The supervising CPU 141a performs animation pattern setting processing in step T9. Specifically, a process is performed in which an animation pattern is determined from the type of animation group corresponding to the received production instruction command or notification instruction command, and is set in a predetermined area of the general RAM 141c.

The supervising CPU 141a performs a sound pattern setting process in step T10. Specifically, a process is performed in which a sound pattern is determined from the type of sound group corresponding to the received production instruction command or notification instruction command and is set in a predetermined area of the general RAM 141c.

In step T11, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether a frame switching flag is set in the supervising RAM 141c, indicating that it is frame update timing to update the display image of the display devices (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). Determine whether or not. If there is a frame switching flag, the process moves to step T12, and if there is no frame switching flag, the process moves to step T4.

Note that the frame switching flag is a V blank signal transmitted from the image control unit 145 (VDP) every 1/30 seconds (the scheduled time when drawing and displaying one frame of effect images is completed) to the general control unit 141. It is set in the V blank interrupt processing that is executed every time a blank is received. Therefore, the processes of steps T12 to T15 described below are executed every time the V blank interrupt process is executed (frame update timing).

The supervising CPU 141a clears the frame switching flag set in the supervising RAM 141c in step T12, and performs scene update processing in step T13. Specifically, with reference to the scene switching counter, wait frame counter, and frame counter that are updated in the V blank interrupt processing described above, the address of the animation scene is updated based on the animation pattern determined in step T9 above. , performs a process of updating the address of the sound scene based on the sound pattern determined in step T10.

The supervising CPU 141a performs drawing control processing in step T14. Specifically, it consists of a group of drawing control commands based on the display information (sprite identification number, display position, etc.) of one frame of the anime scene at the updated address, according to the priority order (drawing order) of the anime group to which the anime scene belongs. It generates a display list, outputs this display list to the image control unit 145 (VDP), and performs a process of instructing drawing of a display image based on the display list.

As a result, the image control unit 145 (VDP) draws a display image based on the display list on the drawing frame buffer, and also transfers the image (effect image, abnormality notification image) drawn on the display frame buffer to the display device ( Processing for displaying on the first image display device 70 and second image display device 71) will be performed. In other words, the frame update timing is the start timing of various effects performed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 (image display and sound output such as pending display, variable effect, jackpot preview effect, look-ahead effect, etc.) The timing has come to end.

In addition, performances that are directly controlled by the performance control unit 130m and the lamp control unit 150 (a reservation display by the sub-first reservation display 83 and the sub-second reservation display 84, performances by the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74) (Operation) may match the frame update timing or may not match the frame update timing.

The overall CPU 141a performs voice control processing in step T15. Specifically, a process is performed in which a voice control command is generated from the sound information at the updated address, and this voice control command is output to the voice control unit 148 (audio LSI).

As a result, the audio control unit 148 (audio LSI) performs a process of outputting various performance sounds and notification sounds from the audio output device 9 based on the audio control command. When this process is finished, the process moves to step T4.

In this way, at the start of the variable presentation and at the end of the variable presentation (stopping of the presentation pattern 70a), it is possible to adjust the volume and light intensity using the changeover switch 22 that can be operated by the game clerk, but Volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19 are regulated (limited). Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to miss important points such as the start of the variable performance and the end of the variable performance, and it is possible to prevent the game from becoming less interesting.

In addition, important (high security level) abnormalities (power on, power restoration, unrecoverable error, unauthorized prize winning, abnormal prize winning, magnetic error, radio wave error, During notification (output of notification sound) of a door opening error, it is possible to adjust the volume and light intensity using the changeover switch 22 that can be operated by a game store clerk, but it is possible to adjust the volume and light intensity using the cross key 19 that can be operated by the player. has come to be regulated (restricted). Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience of volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment on the game parlor side, while avoiding the inconvenience that a player who is trying to adjust the volume and light intensity does not notice the occurrence of an abnormality.

In addition, while the abnormality notification sound is being output, even if the current volume value is lower than the maximum volume value, various performance sounds output from the audio output device 9 When the volume of BGM (BGM, etc.) is lowered than the previous volume and the output of the abnormality notification sound ends, the volume of various performance sounds is returned to the volume before the drop. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not noticing abnormality notification sounds due to various performance sounds, and it is possible to ensure the security of the gaming machine.

Note that during abnormality notification (output of notification sound), setting (adjustment) of the volume value and light intensity value using the cross key 19 that can be operated by the player may be disabled, or the adjustment range of the volume value and light intensity value may be disabled. may be limited to, for example, between 0 and 2.

(Initial processing of accessories in the lamp control section)
Accessory initial processing by the lamp control unit 150 will be explained using FIG. 167. FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing the accessory initialization process of the lamp control unit 150, and this process is executed within the timer interrupt process executed in the lamp control unit 150 at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds).

In step R101, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) has been received from the main control board 110. If the power-on command has been received, the process moves to step R102, and if the power-on command has not been received, the process moves to step R103.

In step R102, the lamp CPU 150a executes the return-to-origin process for the accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) at the initial processing number updated in each process of the accessory initialization process. Set "1".

In step R103, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the initial processing number is "1". If the initial process number is not "1", it is assumed that the origin return process of the accessory is not executed and the process moves to step R105, and if the initial process number is "1", the origin return process is executed in step R104. and complete the initial processing of this accessory. Specifically, based on the input signal from the position detection sensor, the accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) is returned to its original position, and the initial processing number is Perform processing such as setting it to "2". Note that the details of the origin return process will be described later.

In step R105, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the initial processing number is "2". If the initial processing number is not "2", the initial processing for the accessory is not performed and the current initial processing for the accessory is terminated, and if the initial processing number is "2", the initial action processing is performed. , this time the accessory initial processing ends. Specifically, processing is performed such as performing an initial operation and initial light emission to check whether the accessory works normally or not, and setting the initial processing number to "0". Note that details of the initial operation processing will be described later.

As described above, according to the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. It is designed not to execute the operation process at the same time. Therefore, the movement of returning various accessories to their origin positions and the initial movements and initial light emission of various objects do not coexist, and it becomes possible to separate and check the return movement, initial movement, and initial light emission. .

Further, according to the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 167, the origin return processing is executed before the initial movement processing. Therefore, the various accessory objects will initially move from the origin position, making it easier to understand whether there is an abnormality in the operation of the various accessory objects.

(Lamp control unit return-to-origin processing)
The origin return process of the lamp control unit 150 will be explained using FIG. 168. FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing the origin return process in the lamp control section 150.

In step R105-1, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the board accessory processing number indicating the transition of the origin return status of the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) is "0". do. If the board accessory processing number is not "0", the process moves to step R105-3, and if the board accessory processing number is "0", in step R105-2, the drive target to be returned to the origin is set to the first point. 1 movable member 73, and the process moves to step R105-5.

In step R105-3, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the board accessory processing number is "1". If the board accessory processing number is not "1", the process moves to step R105-12, and if the board accessory processing number is "1", in step R105-4, the drive target to be returned to the origin is The second movable member 74 is set, and the process moves to step R105-5.

In step R105-5, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the movable member to be driven is at the origin position (standby position). Specifically, an input signal from a position detection sensor that detects that each movable member is at the original position is determined. If the movable member to be driven is not at the origin position, the process moves to step R105-6, and if the movable member to be driven is at the origin position, the process moves to step R105-11.

In step R105-6, the lamp CPU 150a drives a drive motor for moving the movable member to be driven so that the movable member to be driven returns to the origin position, and in step R105-7, the movable member moves for a predetermined time. The board accessory abnormality determination timer for determining the occurrence of a return abnormality in which the board does not return to the original position within a certain period of time is updated by +1.

In step R105-8, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the updated board accessory abnormality determination timer is at an upper limit value (for example, 5 seconds). When the board accessory abnormality determination timer is at the upper limit value, it is assumed that a return abnormality has occurred in the movable member to be driven, and the process is moved to step R105-9, and when the board accessory abnormality determination timer is not at the upper limit value, the process is moved to step R105-9. , the process moves to step R105-12.

In step R105-9, the lamp CPU 150a sets return error information (first movable member return error information, second movable member return error information) indicating that a return error has occurred in the movable member to be driven, in the lamp RAM 150c. , In step R105-10, the board accessory abnormality determination timer is cleared.

The lamp CPU 150a updates the board accessory processing number by +1 in step R105-11. Specifically, if the board accessory processing number is "0", the board accessory processing number is updated to "1" in order to make the second movable member 74 the drive target, and the board accessory processing number is changed to "1". If it is "1", the board accessory processing number is updated to "2" to end the process of returning the board accessory (first movable member, second movable member) to the origin.

In step R105-12, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the frame accessory processing number indicating the transition of the origin return status of the frame accessory (production button 17) is "0". If the frame accessory processing number is "0", the process moves to step R105-13, and if the board accessory processing number is not "0", the process moves to step R105-20.

In step R105-13, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the production button 17 is at the origin position (standby position). Specifically, an input signal from a position detection sensor that detects that the production button 17 is at the origin position is determined. When the effect button 17 is not at the origin position, the process moves to step R105-14, and when the effect button 17 is at the origin position, the process moves to step R105-19.

In step R105-14, the lamp CPU 150a drives a button drive motor for moving the effect button 17 so that the effect button 17 returns to the origin position, and in step R105-15, the effect button 17 is moved within a predetermined time. The frame accessory abnormality determination timer for determining the occurrence of a return abnormality that does not return to the origin position is updated by +1.

In step R105-16, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the updated frame accessory abnormality determination timer is at an upper limit value (for example, 5 seconds). If the frame accessory abnormality determination timer is at the upper limit value, it is assumed that a return abnormality has occurred in the production button 17, and the process moves to step R105-17. If the frame accessory abnormality determination timer is not at the upper limit value, the current The return-to-origin process ends.

In step R105-17, the lamp CPU 150a sets return abnormality information indicating that a return abnormality has occurred in the production button 17 in the lamp RAM 150c, and in step R105-18, clears the frame accessory abnormality determination timer.

The lamp CPU 150a updates the frame accessory processing number by +1 in step R105-19. Specifically, if the frame accessory processing number is "0", the board accessory processing number is updated to "1" in order to end the process of returning the frame accessory (performance button 17) to the origin.

In step R105-20, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number satisfy the end condition. Specifically, it is determined whether the board accessory processing number is "2" and the frame accessory processing number is "1". If the termination condition is satisfied, the process moves to step R105-21, and if the termination condition is not satisfied, the current origin return process is terminated.

In step R105-21, the lamp CPU 150a clears the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number, and in step R105-22, the lamp CPU 150a clears the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number, and in step R105-22, sets the above-mentioned initial processing number to the initial operation processing of the accessory. Set "2" and end the current return-to-origin process.

In this way, according to the origin return process shown in FIG. (in the order of member 73→second movable member 74), the movable member 73 is returned to the original position. Therefore, it becomes possible to easily confirm whether the various board accessories have returned to their original positions. Furthermore, when the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are in contact with each other in a manner that makes it difficult to separate them, it is possible to prevent both movable members from applying loads to each other, and to prevent both movable members from being damaged at the same time. This makes it possible to suppress such inconveniences.

Further, according to the origin return process shown in FIG. 168, the operation of returning the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) to the origin position and the origin position of the frame accessory (direction button 17) It is possible to perform the return operation at the same time (at the same time). Therefore, the time required for the return operation of various accessories can be shortened, and it is possible to smoothly transition to the initial operation of various accessories to be executed next.

Further, according to the origin return process shown in FIG. 168, an upper limit is set for the time required for each accessory object to return to its origin position. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the return operation of various accessories does not end forever. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation where the various accessories are performing return operations even during the variable performance and the performance operation is not performed, and it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

Further, according to the origin return process shown in FIG. 168, the operation of returning the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) to the origin position and the origin position of the frame accessory (direction button 17) When both of the return operations are completed, processing for transitioning to initial operation processing is performed. Therefore, the return movement of various accessories to their origin positions and the initial movements of various accessories are not executed at the same time, and it becomes possible to separately check the return movements and initial movements of various accessories. .

Note that the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are designed to return to the origin position in a predetermined order (first movable member 73 → second movable member 74), but at the same time, the origin position It may also be possible to start an operation to return to . In this way, the time required for the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 can be shortened, and it is possible to smoothly transition to the initial motion of various accessories to be executed next. becomes.

(Initial operation processing of lamp control unit)
The initial operation process of the lamp control section 150 will be explained using FIG. 169. FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing initial operation processing of the lamp control section 150.

In step R107-1, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the board accessory processing number indicating the transition of the initial operating status of the board accessory is "0". If the board accessory processing number is "0", the process moves to step R107-2, and if the board accessory processing number is not "0", the process moves to step R107-7.

In step R107-2, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether return abnormality information for the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 is set in the lamp RAM 150c. If the return abnormality information is not set, the process moves to step R107-4 assuming that the initial operation and initial light emission of the board accessory is performed, and if the return abnormality information is set, the process moves to step R107-3. In step R107-7, the board accessory processing number is set to "2", assuming that the initial movement of the board accessory is not performed.

In step R107-4, the lamp CPU 150a selects the board accessory initial motion pattern determination table (see FIG. 170) for determining the initial motion pattern of the board accessory. Note that details of the board accessory initial movement pattern determination table will be described later.

In step R107-5, the lamp CPU 150a determines the initial operation pattern of the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) and sets it in the lamp RAM 150c. Specifically, one initial operation pattern is determined from among a plurality of initial operation patterns based on the type of power-on command and the presence or absence of recovery abnormality information by referring to the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table. do.

The lamp CPU 150a updates the board accessory processing number by +1 in step R107-6. Specifically, if the board accessory processing number is "0", the board accessory processing number is updated to "1" in order to execute the initial operation of the board accessory.

In step R107-7, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the board accessory processing number is "1". If the board accessory processing number is not "1", the process moves to step R107-11, and if the board accessory processing number is "1", the board is set in the lamp RAM 150c in step R107-8. The initial motion of the board accessory is executed according to the initial motion pattern of the board accessory.

In step R107-9, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether all the initial operations of the board accessories have been completed. If all steps of the initial movement of the board accessory have not been completed, the process moves to step R107-11, and if all steps of the initial movement of the board accessory have been completed, in step R107-10, the process moves to step R107-11. Update the processing number by +1. Specifically, if the board accessory processing number is "1", the board accessory processing number is updated to "2" in order to end the initial operation process of the board accessory.

In step R107-11, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the frame accessory processing number indicating the transition of the initial operation status of the frame accessory (production button 17) is "0". If the frame accessory processing number is "0", the process moves to step R107-12, and if the frame accessory processing number is not "0", the process moves to step R107-17.

In step R107-12, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether return abnormality information for the production button 17 is set in the lamp RAM 150c. If the return abnormality information is not set, the process moves to step R107-14 assuming that the initial movement of the frame accessory is performed, and if the return abnormality information is set, in step R107-13, the frame Assuming that the initial movement of the accessory is not performed, the frame accessory processing number is set to "2", and the process moves to step R107-17.

In step R107-14, the lamp CPU 150a selects the frame accessory initial motion pattern determination table (see FIG. 171) for determining the initial motion pattern of the frame accessory. Note that details of the frame accessory initial movement pattern determination table will be described later.

In step R107-15, the lamp CPU 150a determines the initial operation pattern of the frame accessory (performance button 17) and sets it in the lamp RAM 150c. Specifically, one initial motion pattern is determined from among a plurality of initial motion patterns based on the type of power-on command with reference to the frame accessory initial motion pattern determination table.

The lamp CPU 150a updates the frame accessory processing number by +1 in step R107-16. Specifically, if the frame accessory processing number is "0", the frame accessory processing number is updated to "1" in order to execute the initial operation of the frame accessory.

In step R107-17, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the frame accessory processing number is "1". If the frame accessory processing number is not "1", the process moves to step R107-21, and if the frame accessory processing number is "1", the frame accessory processing number is set in the lamp RAM 150c in step R107-18. The initial motion of the frame accessory is executed in accordance with the initial motion pattern of the frame accessory.

In step R107-19, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether all steps of the initial motion of the frame accessory have been completed. If the initial motion of the frame accessory has not completed all steps, the process moves to step R107-21, and if the initial motion of the frame accessory has completed all steps, in step R107-20, the frame accessory Update the processing number by +1. Specifically, if the frame accessory processing number is "1", the frame accessory processing number is updated to "2" in order to end the initial operation process of the frame accessory.

In step R107-21, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number satisfy the end condition. Specifically, it is determined whether the board accessory processing number is "2" and the frame accessory processing number is "2". If the termination condition is satisfied, the process moves to step R107-22, and if the termination condition is not satisfied, the current initial operation process is terminated.

The lamp CPU 150a clears the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number in step R107-22, clears the above-mentioned initial processing number in step R107-23, and ends the current initial operation processing. .

In this way, according to the initial motion processing shown in FIG. 169, the initial motion of the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) and the initial motion of the frame accessory (production button 17) are controlled. They can be executed at the same time (at the same time). Therefore, the time required for the initial movements of various accessories can be shortened, and it is possible to prevent the production operations of various accessories during the game from being inhibited.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 169, if there is a return abnormality in the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 that constitute the board accessory, the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, The initial operation of the second movable member 74 is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the movable member from completely failing or being damaged by forcing the movable member in which the return abnormality has occurred to undergo initial operation.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 169, if there is a return abnormality in the effect button 17 forming the frame accessory, the initial operation of the effect button 17 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconveniences such as complete malfunction or damage of the performance button 17 by forcibly initializing the performance button 17 in which a return abnormality has occurred.

Furthermore, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 169, even if the initial operation of the board accessory in which the return error has occurred is not executed, the initial operation of the frame accessory in which the return error has not occurred is executed, and the return error is performed. Even if the initial motion of the frame accessory in which the error has occurred is not executed, the initial motion of the board accessory in which the return abnormality has not occurred is executed. Therefore, it is possible to check whether there is any abnormality in the operation of the accessory object in which the return abnormality has not occurred.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 169, both the initial operation of the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) and the initial operation of the frame accessory (production button 17) are completed. In this case, the initial operation process ends. Therefore, even though one of the board and frame accessories is performing an initial action, the other may perform a production action, where it is unclear whether it is an initial action or a production action. It disappears.

(Board accessory initial movement pattern determination table)
FIG. 170 is a diagram showing a board accessory initial motion pattern determination table that is referred to when determining the initial motion pattern of the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74).

The board accessory initial operation pattern determination table associates the type of power-on command, the presence or absence of return error information, and the initial operation pattern to be selected.For reference, the operation mode at the initial operation and the initial operation The number of steps is listed.

Initial operation patterns include patterns 01 to 03 that are determined when a power-on designation command is received, and patterns 01 to 03 that are determined when a first power restoration designation command indicating that the device is waiting for a customer is received. Patterns determined when receiving patterns 04 to 06, the second power recovery designation command indicating that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, or the third power recovery designation command indicating that the jackpot game is in progress. 07 to 09 are set.

"Initial operation pattern 01" is determined when there is no return abnormality in the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, and the first movable member 73 moves in the order of small descent → return to origin → large descent → return to origin After operating, the second movable member 74 operates in the order of movement→return to the origin, and during this period, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED light up (light emit light) in blue and white.
"Initial operation pattern 02" is determined when there is a return abnormality in the first movable member 73, in which the first movable member 73 does not operate and the second movable member 74 operates in the order of movement → return to origin, During that period, the second movable member LED lights up (lights up) in blue and white.
"Initial operation pattern 03" is determined when there is a return abnormality in the second movable member 74, and after the first movable member 73 operates in the order of small descent → return to origin → large descent → return to origin, the second movable member 74 does not operate, and during that period, the first movable member LED lights up (lights up) in blue and white.

"Initial operation pattern 04" is determined when there is no recovery abnormality in the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, and the initial operation is performed except that the second movable member LED lights up (lights up) only in blue. This is the same as pattern 01.
"Initial operation pattern 05" is determined when the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality, and is the same as initial operation pattern 02 except that the second movable member LED lights up (lights up) only in blue.
"Initial operation pattern 06" is determined when the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, and the second movable member LED does not light up in blue, so it is ultimately the same as initial operation pattern 03.

"Initial operation pattern 07" is determined when there is no return abnormality in the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, and except for the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED being turned off, This is the same as initial operation pattern 01 or initial operation pattern 04.
“Initial operation pattern 08” is determined when the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality, and is the same as initial operation pattern 02 or initial operation pattern 05 except that the second movable member 74 is turned off.
"Initial operation pattern 09" is determined when the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, and is the same as initial operation pattern 03 or initial operation pattern 06 except that the first movable member 73 is turned off.

Note that in initial operation pattern 02, initial operation pattern 05, and initial operation pattern 08, the lighting color of the first movable member LED is not described. This is because the component LED flashes red to notify of an abnormality.

In addition, in the initial operation pattern 03, the initial operation pattern 06, and the initial operation pattern 09, the lighting color of the second movable member LED is not described, but this point is caused by the return abnormality of the second movable member 74. This is because the component LED flashes red to notify of an abnormality.

The first feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 170 is that the board accessory One point is that the operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operation of (the first movable member, the second movable member) is the same. Therefore, regardless of whether the power is turned on or the power is restored, it is possible to appropriately confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the board accessory.

In addition, the movement mode of the initial movement is the same as long as at least the movement pattern of the board accessory in each process is the same, the movement time in each process may be the same, or the movement time in each process is the same. May be different.

Further, the operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the initial operation of one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 may be made different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored. The operation modes (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operations of both the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 may be made different. In this way, it is possible to easily determine whether the initial operation is due to the power being turned on (the control state of the game has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the control state of the game has been restored). becomes.

In addition, when the initial operation mode (number of processes, operation of each process) of the first movable member 73 and/or the second movable member 74 is to be different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored, it is possible to An operation that is not included in the initial operation when the power is restored may be executed in the initial operation when the power is restored, or an operation that is not included in the initial operation when the power is restored may be executed in the initial operation when the power is turned on. In this way, it is easier to understand whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the control state of the game has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the control state of the game has been restored). It becomes possible.

A second feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 170 is that the board accessory (first movable member 73, second The difference is that the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the movable member 74) is different. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the gaming control state has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the gaming control state has been restored).

The third feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. Although they are the same, there is a difference in the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the second movable member LED. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the gaming control state has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the gaming control state has been restored).

It should be noted that while the light emitting manner of the initial light emission of the first movable member LED is the same when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to return to the customer waiting state, the light emitting manner of the initial light emission of the second movable member LED is different. However, on the contrary, the initial light emission mode of the first movable member LED is different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the customer waiting state, while the light emission mode of the second movable member LED is different. The light emission mode of the initial light emission may be the same.

Furthermore, both the light emission mode of the first movable member LED and the light emission mode of the second movable member LED are made different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to return to the customer waiting state. Good too. In this way, it is possible to easily understand whether the initial operation is due to the power being turned on (the control state of the game has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to the power being restored (the control state of the game has been restored). becomes.

The fourth feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 170 is that the board accessory The difference is that the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of (the first movable member and the second movable member) is different. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the gaming control state has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the gaming control state has been restored).

The fifth feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 170 is that when the power is restored to the customer waiting state, and when the power is restored when the special symbol is being displayed in fluctuation or during a jackpot game. The difference is that the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the board accessory (first movable member, second movable member) is different. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether the initial operation is due to power restoration to restore to a customer waiting state, or the initial operation is due to power restoration to restore during a special symbol fluctuation display, or during a jackpot game.

In addition, during the variable display of special symbols or when the power is restored during a jackpot game, both the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are turned off, but the first movable member LED The member LED and the second movable member LED may be lit in the same light emitting manner as when the power is restored to return to the customer waiting state.

The sixth feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. When there is no return abnormality in the movable member 74, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is performed without performing the initial operation of the first movable member 73, and when there is no return abnormality in the first movable member 73, the second movable member If there is a return abnormality in 74, the initial movement of the first movable member 73 is performed and the initial movement of the second movable member 74 is not performed. By doing so, it becomes possible to perform a suitable initial operation depending on the presence or absence of a recovery abnormality.

(Frame accessory initial movement pattern determination table)
FIG. 171 is a diagram showing a frame accessory initial motion pattern determination table that is referred to when determining the initial motion pattern of the frame accessory (production button 17).

In the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table, the type of power-on command and the initial operation pattern to be selected are associated with each other, and the operation mode at the initial operation and the number of steps for the initial operation are listed for reference. ing.

"Initial operation pattern 01" is determined when a power-on designation command is received, and the production button 17 operates in the order of large rise & continuous vibration → return to origin → intermittent vibration, and during that period, the production button LED is Lights up (lights up) in the order of red → green → blue.
"Initial operation pattern 02" is determined when the first power recovery designation command indicating that the customer is waiting is received, and the production button operates in the order of large rise & continuous vibration → return to origin, During that period, the production button lights up (lights up) in blue.
"Initial operation pattern 03" is determined when a second power restoration designation command indicating that a special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner or a third power restoration designation command indicating that a jackpot game is in progress is received; The production button operates in the order of large rise & continuous vibration → return to origin, and the production button LED turns off during this period.

Regarding the continuous vibration time (2.5 seconds) and the intermittent vibration time (2.5 seconds) of the performance button 17, the vibration time of the vibration performance executed during the variable performance (the vibration time during the dialogue preview performance) Vibration performance, vibration performance during step-up preview performance, vibration performance during pseudo continuous performance, vibration performance during development performance, vibration performance during cut-in performance, vibration performance during decisive performance, vibration performance during re-lottery performance, The time is different from the vibration performance (vibration performance at the time of confirmed performance).

The first feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 171 is that the frame accessory The difference is in the operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the initial operation of (production button 17). Therefore, it is possible to easily understand whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the control state of the game has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the control state of the game has been restored).

The second feature of the frame accessory initial motion pattern determination table shown in FIG. 171 is that the initial motion of the performance button 17 when the power is turned on includes an action that is not present in the initial motion of the performance button 17 when the power is restored. One of the points is that it is designed to allow Therefore, it is possible to more easily understand whether the initial operation is due to the power being turned on (the control state of the game has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the control state of the game has been restored). .

Note that the initial operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the production button 17 may be the same when the power is turned on and when the power is restored. In this way, it becomes possible to appropriately confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the frame accessory, regardless of whether the power is turned on or the power is restored.

The third feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. The difference lies in the light emission mode of the initial light emission. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the gaming control state has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the gaming control state has been restored).

The fourth feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 171 is that the board accessory The difference is that the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of (the first movable member and the second movable member) is different. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the gaming control state has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the gaming control state has been restored).

In addition, the performance button LED is designed to turn off when the power is restored while the special symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner or during a jackpot game, but this is the same as when the power is restored to restore the performance button LED to the customer waiting state. It may be made to light up in a light emitting manner.

The fifth feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 171 is the number of colors of light emitted in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on, and the color of light emitted in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored. One point is that the numbers are different. Therefore, it is possible to more easily understand whether the initial operation is due to the power being turned on (the control state of the game has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the control state of the game has been restored). .

Note that the number of colors emitted in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on is greater than the number of emitted light colors in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored, but this may be reversed.

As a sixth feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. One point is that it includes luminescent colors that are not present in other models. Therefore, it is possible to more easily understand whether the initial operation is due to the power being turned on (the control state of the game has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the control state of the game has been restored). .

Note that the light emitting color in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored may include a light emitting color that is not included in the light emitting color in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on.

The seventh feature of the frame accessory initial movement pattern determination table shown in FIG. This differs from the time during which the performance button 17 vibrates during the operation performance performed when the button 17 is operated. Therefore, it is possible to understand that the vibration is caused by the initial operation of the effect button 17.

The eighth feature of the frame accessory initial movement pattern determination table shown in FIG. 171 is that for the initial vibration of the button vibration motor, which does not detect whether it is at the origin position, it is determined whether it is at the origin position or not. One point is that the process is executed over the initial operation of the effect button 17 in which the detection of the process is performed. Therefore, the operation of the production button 17 and the button vibration motor can be checked at the same time, and the time required for operation confirmation can be shortened.

(Specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories after power is turned on)
FIG. 172 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) after power-on accompanied by initialization of main RAM 110c.

Note that power-on with initialization of the main RAM 110c includes power-on where the main RAM 110c is initialized after the setting change process is performed, and power-on where the main RAM 110c is initialized without the setting change process being performed. However, here, a case will be described in which the power is turned on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without any setting change processing being performed.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen on which the words "Reading" are displayed is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At timing T2, when the production control board 130 receives the power-on designation command sent from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and production button 17 are returned to their origin positions. The operation begins.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the image display device displays the performance symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and A first standby screen with the special symbol TZ displayed in a stopped state (static display) is displayed, and the audio output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared."

In addition, when receiving the special figure reservation number designation command (the first special figure reservation number and the second reservation number = 0) as the power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each of the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED light up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights up in the order of red → green → blue as initial light emission.

At timing T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 ends, the initial emission of light in the production button LED ends and turns on while waiting for a customer (lights white), and at timing T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At timing T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the LED lights are turned on while waiting for a customer (lighted white). ), and when the output period (for example, 60 seconds) of the initialization notification sound elapses at timing T8, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent.

At the timing of T9, when the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is The first hold number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 The winning sound “Pon♪” is output.

At timing T10, when a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reserved number in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED turn on during variation, and the sub-first pending display 83 , the display mode shows "0".

(Specific example when there is a return error in the second movable member after power is turned on)
FIG. 173 is a diagram illustrating a specific example where the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c. Here, a case will be described in which the power is turned on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without any setting change processing being performed.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen on which the words "Reading" are displayed is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At timing T2, when the production control board 130 receives the power-on designation command sent from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and production button 17 are returned to their origin positions. The operation begins.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the image display device displays the performance symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and A first standby screen with the special symbol TZ displayed in a stopped state (static display) is displayed, and the audio output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared."

In addition, when receiving the special figure reservation number designation command (the first special figure reservation number and the second reservation number = 0) as the power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each of the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T4, when the return-to-origin process ends with a return abnormality occurring in the second movable member 74, the second movable member LED blinks red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of a return abnormality, and the initial The operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights up in the order of red → green → blue as initial light emission.

At timing T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 ends, the initial emission of light in the production button LED ends and turns on while waiting for a customer (lights white), and at timing T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation process ends without performing the initial operation of the second movable member 74, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED ends and turns on (lights white) while waiting for a customer.

At the timing T7, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent, and at the timing T8, the game ball is not inserted into the first starting port 45. When receiving the first reserved number of special drawings designation command based on winning (first reserved number of special drawings = 1), the first reserved number in the first reserved number of special drawings display area 70E becomes "1", and the first reserved icon is displayed. The first hold icon is displayed in the area 70B, the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pon♪".

At timing T9, when a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reserved number in the first special symbol reserved number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and production button LED It lights up during fluctuation, and the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example when there is a return error in the first movable member after power is turned on)
FIG. 174 is a diagram illustrating a specific example where there is a return abnormality in the first movable member 73 after power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c. Here, a case will be described in which the power is turned on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without any setting change processing being performed.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen on which the words "Reading" are displayed is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At timing T2, when the production control board 130 receives the power-on designation command sent from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and production button 17 are returned to their origin positions. The operation begins.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the image display device displays the performance symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and A first standby screen with the special symbol TZ displayed in a stopped state (static display) is displayed, and the audio output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared."

In addition, when receiving the special figure reservation number designation command (the first special figure reservation number and the second reservation number = 0) as the power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each of the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed in a state where a return abnormality has occurred in the first movable member 73, the first movable member LED notifies the occurrence of the return abnormality. The second movable member 74 starts blinking in red (abnormality notification mode), and the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the second movable member LED and the production button LED maintain a state in which the lights are turned off.

At timing T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the production button 17 is started. At this time, the second movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights up in the order of red → green → blue as initial light emission.

At timing T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 ends, the initial emission of light in the production button LED ends and turns on while waiting for a customer (lights white), and at timing T6, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends. Then, the initial operation process ends without the initial operation of the first movable member 73 being performed, and the initial light emission of the second movable member LED ends and turns on while waiting for a customer (lights up white).

At the timing T7, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent, and at the timing T8, the game ball is not inserted into the first starting port 45. When receiving the first reserved number of special drawings designation command based on winning (first reserved number of special drawings = 1), the first reserved number in the first reserved number of special drawings display area 70E becomes "1", and the first reserved icon is displayed. The first hold icon is displayed in the area 70B, the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pon♪".

At timing T9, when a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reserved number in the first special symbol reserved number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and production button LED It lights up during fluctuation, and the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example of a case where there is a return error in the production button after the power is turned on)
FIG. 175 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is a return abnormality in the production button 17 after the power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen on which the words "Reading" are displayed is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At timing T2, when the production control board 130 receives the power-on designation command sent from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and production button 17 are returned to their origin positions. The operation begins.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the image display device displays the performance symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and A first standby screen with the special symbol TZ displayed in a stopped state (static display) is displayed, and the audio output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared."

In addition, when receiving the special figure reservation number designation command (the first special figure reservation number and the second reservation number = 0) as the power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each of the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed with a return error occurring in the production button 17, the production button LED flashes red ( abnormality notification mode), and the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED remain in the off state.

At timing T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started. The operation will not start. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED alternately light up in blue and white as initial light emission.

When the initial movement of the first movable member 73 ends at timing T5, the initial movement of the second movable member 74 starts, and when the initial movement of the second movable member 74 ends at timing T6, the initial movement process ends. Then, the initial light emission ends in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the light is turned on while waiting for a customer (white light), and at the timing of T7, the output period (for example, 60 seconds) of the initialization notification sound starts. After the time has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and the state becomes silent.

At the timing of T8, when the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is The first hold number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 The winning sound “Pon♪” is output.

At timing T9, when a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reserved number in the first special symbol reserved number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the production button LED ends, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and production button LED are fluctuating. The light is turned on, and the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

Note that in the specific examples shown in FIGS. 172 to 175, the case where the main RAM 110c is initialized when the power is turned on without any setting change processing being performed has been described; however, the main RAM 110c is initialized after the setting change is performed. In the case of power-on, after the initial screen is displayed, the production control board 130 receives a setting change designation command, and the setting changing screen is displayed, and then the production control board 130 receives the power-on designation command. By doing so, the first standby screen is displayed and the return operations and initial operations of various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, performance button 17) are started. Note that the first standby screen may be displayed by receiving the setting value designation command.

(Specific example when there is no abnormality in various accessories returning after power is restored)
FIG. 176 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) after power restoration without initialization of main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen on which the words "Reading" are displayed is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At timing T2, when the performance control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the return-to-origin process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are activated. A return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the image display device displays the performance symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and A second standby screen with the special symbol TZ displayed in a stopped state (static display) is displayed, and the audio output device 9 maintains silence.

In addition, when receiving the special figure reservation number designation command (the first special figure reservation number and the second reservation number = 0) as the power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each of the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights up in blue as initial light emission.

At timing T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 ends, the initial emission of light in the production button LED ends and turns on while waiting for a customer (lights white), and at timing T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At timing T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the LED lights are turned on while waiting for a customer (lighted white). ).

At the timing of T8, when the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is The first hold number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 The winning sound “Pon♪” is output.

At timing T9, when a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reserved number in the first special symbol reserved number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED turn on during variation, and the sub-first pending display 83 , the display mode shows "0".

(Specific example when there is an abnormality in the second movable member returning after power is restored)
FIG. 177 is a diagram illustrating a specific example where the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen on which the words "Reading" are displayed is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At timing T2, when the performance control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the return-to-origin process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are activated. A return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the image display device displays the performance symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and A second standby screen with the special symbol TZ displayed in a stopped state (static display) is displayed, and the audio output device 9 maintains silence.

In addition, when receiving the special figure reservation number designation command (the first special figure reservation number and the second reservation number = 0) as the power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each of the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T4, when the return-to-origin process ends with a return abnormality occurring in the second movable member 74, the second movable member LED blinks red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of a return abnormality, and the initial The operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights up in blue as initial light emission.

At timing T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 ends, the initial emission of light in the production button LED ends and turns on while waiting for a customer (lights white), and at timing T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation process ends without performing the initial operation of the second movable member 74, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED ends and turns on (lights white) while waiting for a customer.

At the timing of T7, when the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is The first hold number becomes “1”, the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing “1”, and the audio output device 9 The winning sound “Pon♪” is output.

At timing T8, when a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reserved number in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and production button LED It lights up during fluctuation, and the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example when there is an abnormality in the first movable member returning after power is restored)
FIG. 178 is a diagram illustrating a specific example where the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen on which the words "Reading" are displayed is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At timing T2, when the performance control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the return-to-origin process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are activated. A return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the image display device displays the performance symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and A second standby screen with the special symbol TZ displayed in a stopped state (static display) is displayed, and the audio output device 9 maintains silence.

In addition, when receiving the special figure reservation number designation command (the first special figure reservation number and the second reservation number = 0) as the power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each of the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed in a state where a return abnormality has occurred in the first movable member 73, the first movable member LED notifies the occurrence of the return abnormality. The second movable member 74 starts blinking in red (abnormality notification mode), and the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the second movable member LED and the production button LED maintain a state in which the lights are turned off.

At timing T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the production button 17 is started. At this time, the second movable member LED and the production button LED light up in blue as initial light emission.

At timing T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 ends, the initial emission of light in the production button LED ends and turns on while waiting for a customer (lights white), and at timing T6, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends. Then, the initial operation process ends without the initial operation of the first movable member 73 being performed, and the initial light emission of the second movable member LED ends and turns on while waiting for a customer (lights up white).

At the timing of T7, when the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is The first hold number becomes “1”, the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing “1”, and the audio output device 9 The winning sound “Pon♪” is output.

At timing T8, when a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reserved number in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and production button LED It lights up during fluctuation, and the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example when there is an abnormality in the production button returning after power is restored)
FIG. 179 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is a return abnormality in the production button 17 after the power is restored without initializing the main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen on which the words "Reading" are displayed is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At timing T2, when the performance control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the return-to-origin process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are activated. A return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the image display device displays the performance symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and A second standby screen with the special symbol TZ displayed in a stopped state (static display) is displayed, and the audio output device 9 maintains silence.

In addition, when receiving the special figure reservation number designation command (the first special figure reservation number and the second reservation number = 0) as the power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each of the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed with a return error occurring in the production button 17, the production button LED flashes red ( abnormality notification mode), and the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started. The operation will not start. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the second movable member LED lights up in blue as initial light emission.

When the initial movement of the first movable member 73 ends at timing T5, the initial movement of the second movable member 74 starts, and when the initial movement of the second movable member 74 ends at timing T6, the initial movement process ends. Then, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED end their initial light emission and turn on (white light) while waiting for a customer.

At the timing of T7, when the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is The first hold number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 The winning sound “Pon♪” is output.

At timing T8, when a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reserved number in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the production button LED ends, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and production button LED are fluctuating. The light is turned on, and the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example when the state after the power is restored is that the special symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner and there is a pending memory)
FIG. 180 is a diagram showing a specific example where the state after the power is restored without initialization of the main RAM 110c is in the special symbol fluctuation display (loss fluctuation display) and with pending memory.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen on which the words "Reading" are displayed is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At timing T2, when the production control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command for special figure fluctuations transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 The return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the image display device displays a recovery screen including the words "Please resume the game." , the audio output device 9 maintains silence.

In addition, when the command for specifying the number of reserved special drawings (first number of reserved special drawings = 3, number of second reserved number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the image display device displays the returning screen, so the A state is maintained in which the second reserved numbers are not displayed in the 1st special figure reserved number display area 70E and the 2nd special figure reserved number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 has a display mode showing "3", and the sub-second hold display 84 has a display mode showing "0".

At timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED maintain a state of being turned off.

At timing T5, the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, and at timing T6, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started, and at timing T7, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started. When the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED maintain the extinguished state.

At timing T8, when a special symbol stop designation command is received from the main control board 110, the image display device displays the stop display of the "753" production symbol 70a, which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and the special symbol TZ ( A stop screen (same as the second standby screen) in a static state (static display) is displayed, and a stop sound "Don♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

At this time, the three first pending icons are displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, but the icon display area 70C is secured in a state where the display area can display an effect image such as a background image ( (the pedestal image is displayed), but the icon is not displayed.

At timing T9, when a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reserved number in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E becomes "2". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED turn on during variation, and the sub-first pending display 83 , the display mode shows "2".

In addition, if the state after the power is restored is in the special symbol fluctuation display (loss fluctuation display) and there is no hold memory, "0" is displayed on the sub-first hold display 83 at the timing of T2, and at the timing of T9. The basic flow of operations from the timing T1 to the timing T8 described above is the same, except that the variable performance is not started upon receipt of the customer waiting state designation command.

(Specific example of when the power-on designation command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 181 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power-on designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on. Here, a case will be described in which the power is turned on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without any setting change processing being performed.

A case where the power-on designation command cannot be received normally means that power is being supplied to the production control board 130, but the power line of the main control board 110 is disconnected or the connector of the power line is not connected ( A first case in which power (main power supply and backup power supply) is not supplied due to the situation (including a half-plugged state), a second case in which the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the production control board 130 is disconnected, and the command Although there is a third case in which the communication line connector is in an unconnected state (including a half-plugged state), the first case will be described here.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, power is not supplied to the main control board 110, but power supply to the performance control board 130 is started. At this time, as an initial operation of the image display device, an initial screen displaying the words "Loading" is displayed, and after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed, the production control board 130 responds to the command. A control state is entered in which the performance can be executed.

At timing T2, when the power line to the main control board 110 is connected, processing is performed to initialize the control state of the game, and a power-on designation command is transmitted. Then, when the production control board 130 receives the power-on designation command, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 , and the operation of returning the production button 17 to its original position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the image display device displays the performance symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and A first standby screen is displayed in which the special symbol TZ is displayed in a stopped state (stationary display). Further, the audio output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of a warning and a voice saying "RAM is cleared."

In addition, when receiving the special figure reservation number designation command (the first special figure reservation number and the second reservation number = 0) as the power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each of the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED light up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights up in the order of red → green → blue as initial light emission.

At timing T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 ends, the initial emission of light in the production button LED ends and turns on while waiting for a customer (lights white), and at timing T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At timing T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the LED lights are turned on while waiting for a customer (lighted white). ). Thereafter, when the output period (for example, 60 seconds) of the initialization notification sound has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and the system becomes silent.

In addition, when the production control board 130 received the power-on designation command, the first standby screen was displayed, but instead of displaying the first standby screen immediately, a dark color display screen was displayed as a type of initial screen. The first standby screen may be displayed after being displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds). In this case, the initialization notification sound may be output from the start of displaying the dark color display screen, or may be output from the start of displaying the first standby screen.

(Specific example of when the power recovery designation command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 182 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a case where a power recovery designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on.

A case where the power recovery designation command cannot be received normally means that power is being supplied to the production control board 130, but the power line of the main control board 110 is disconnected or the connector of the power line is disconnected ( A first case in which power (main power only) is not supplied due to a situation (including a half-plugged state), a second case in which the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the production control board 130 is disconnected, and a command communication line Although there is a third case in which the connector is in an unconnected state (including a half-plugged state), the first case will be described here.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, power is not supplied to the main control board 110, but power supply to the performance control board 130 is started. At this time, as an initial operation of the image display device, an initial screen displaying the words "Loading" is displayed, and after a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed, the production control board 130 responds to the command. It becomes a control state in which it is possible to execute the desired effect.

At timing T2, when the power line to the main control board 110 is connected, processing is performed to restore the control state of the game, and a power restoration designation command for waiting for a customer is transmitted. Then, when the production control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command, a return-to-origin process is started, and the operation of returning the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the image display device displays the performance symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and A second standby screen is displayed in which the special symbol TZ is displayed in a stopped state (still display). Furthermore, the audio output device 9 becomes silent.

In addition, when receiving the special figure reservation number designation command (the first special figure reservation number and the second reservation number = 0) as the power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each of the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights up in blue as initial light emission.

At timing T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 ends, the initial emission of light in the production button LED ends and turns on while waiting for a customer (lights white), and at timing T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At timing T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the LED lights are turned on while waiting for a customer (lighted white). ).

In addition, when the production control board 130 received the power recovery designation command, the second standby screen was displayed, but instead of displaying the second standby screen immediately, it displayed a dark color display screen as a type of initial screen. The second standby screen may be displayed after being displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds). In this case, the initialization notification sound may be output from the start of displaying the dark color display screen, or may be output from the start of displaying the second standby screen.

In addition, the audio output device 9 was configured to be silent when receiving the power restoration designation command, but it now outputs a notification sound (alarm, etc.) indicating that the power has been turned on (so that it can be understood). You can do it like this. In this case, the alarm may be the same as when the power-on designation command is received, or it may be a different alarm.

(Specific example of when the power-on command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 183 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a case where a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be normally received when the power is turned on.

The case where the command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on is the first case where power is supplied to the production control board 130 but not to the main control board 110, and the production control is not performed from the main control board 110. Examples include a second case in which the command communication line to the board 130 is disconnected, and a third case in which the connector of the command communication line is in an unconnected state (including a half-plugged state). Case 3 will be explained.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, power supply to the main control board 110 and the performance control board 130 is started. At this time, as an initial operation of the image display device, an initial screen on which the words "Reading" are displayed is displayed.

At the timing of T2, the production control board 130 does not receive the power-on command (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command) sent from the main control board 110, and the command for specifying the number of reserved special drawings (first special drawing reservation) is sent from the main control board 110. number and the second pending number = 0), the image display device maintains the state where the initial screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED turn off. maintain.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

At the timing of T3, when the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the initial screen is displayed on the image display device. However, the sub-first hold display 83 changes to a display mode showing "1", and the winning sound "Pon♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

At timing T4, when a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the image display device displays the production symbol 70a of "753" which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration. , and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is displayed in a stopped state (stationary display) is displayed for a moment, and then the variable production (production symbol 70a, variable display of the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon, or the icon concerned) , BGM output) starts.

At this time, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED turn on during variation, and the sub-first pending display 83 , the display mode shows "0".

(Specific example 1 when restarting after only power supply to the main control board is stopped)
FIG. 184 shows only the power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the production control board 130) after the return-to-origin process and the initial operation process have already been completed. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a first specific example in which the system is restarted after being stopped.

The case where only the power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped is a case where the power line (main power line, backup power line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 is disconnected and then comes into contact with it due to an external factor. , the case where the connector of the power line (main power line, backup power line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 becomes connected after being disconnected (including half-plugged). Can be mentioned.

Here, during a customer waiting state (including execution of a customer waiting demonstration performance), which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute a performance according to a command, the main control board 110 is A case will be described in which the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) is restarted after the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) has stopped.

At the timing of T1, the various accessories have already finished their return operations, initial operations, and output of the initialization notification sound, and are now waiting for customers, and the image display device shows the initial pattern when the power is restored. A second standby screen or a customer waiting demo performance screen is displayed in which the production pattern 70a of "753" and the special symbol TZ are stopped (statically displayed), and the first movable member LED and the second movable The member LED and the performance button LED are lit while waiting for customers.

In addition, if the timing of T1 is the return operation of various accessories, the initial operation, and the customer waiting state after the end of the variable performance that was executed after the output of the initialization notification sound, the image display device In this case, a standby screen or a customer-waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed in which the losing effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped and displayed (statically displayed).

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T2, when only the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed. , sub-information display device 80 (sub-first fluctuation display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82, sub-first reservation display 83, sub-second reservation display 84, sub-general figure fluctuation display 85, sub-general figure The hold display 86) also maintains the displayed content.

Note that even if only the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the customer waiting state designation command can be executed while the standby screen is being displayed (regardless of whether or not after the fluctuating effect has finished). If the demonstration standby time has elapsed after the reception (or after the end of the previous customer waiting demonstration performance), the customer waiting demonstration performance is started.

At timing T3, when the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is resumed, the main RAM 110c is initialized and the game control state is initialized. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub The first hold display 83, the second sub-hold display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure pending display 86) also maintain their display contents.

At timing T4, when the production control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and production button 17 are returned to their origin positions. The operation begins.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED are turned off, and the image display device displays the power supply instead of the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration production screen. A first standby screen is displayed in which the production symbol 70a of "135" which is the initial symbol at the time of insertion and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display), and the audio output device 9 outputs an alarm and "RAM An initialization notification sound consisting of a voice saying "It's clear" is output.

In addition, when receiving the special figure reservation number designation command (the first special figure reservation number and the second reservation number = 0) as the power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each of the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED light up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights up in the order of red → green → blue as initial light emission.

At timing T7, when the initial operation of the production button 17 ends, the initial emission of light in the production button LED ends and turns on while waiting for a customer (lights white), and at timing T8, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At timing T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the LED lights are turned on while waiting for a customer (white light is lit). ), and when the output period (for example, 60 seconds) of the initialization notification sound has elapsed at timing T10, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent.

In addition, if the return movement, initial movement, or initialization notification sound output of various characters has already been completed, a variable effect (loss variable effect) is in progress, or a jackpot effect (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) is in progress. The timing of T4 also applies when restarting after only the power supply (including backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped during a control state in which the performance control board is able to execute a performance according to a command, such as during execution. The screens displayed on the image display device until the power-on designation command is received in ), except that the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped while waiting for a customer, and various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button The return operation and initialization operation described in step 17) are performed, and the audio output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound.

In addition, when there is a recovery abnormality in various accessories, the initial operation of various accessories and the light emission (flashing red) in the abnormality notification mode are similar to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 173, 174, or 175. will be held.

(Specific example 2 when restarting after only the power supply to the main control board has stopped)
FIG. 185 shows only the power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the production control board 130) after the return-to-origin process and the initial operation process have already been completed. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a second specific example in which the system is restarted after being stopped.

Here, during a customer waiting state (including execution of a customer waiting demonstration performance), which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute a performance according to a command, the main control board 110 is A case will be described in which the main power supply is restarted after the main power supply has stopped and the backup power supply continues.

At the timing of T1, the various accessories have already finished their return operations, initial operations, and output of the initialization notification sound, and are now waiting for customers, and the image display device shows the initial pattern when the power is restored. A second standby screen or a customer waiting demo performance screen is displayed in which the production pattern 70a of "753" and the special symbol TZ are stopped (statically displayed), and the first movable member LED and the second movable The component LED and the production button LED are lit while waiting for customers.

In addition, when the image display device is waiting for a customer after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound of various accessories have finished, the image display device will display a message indicating the loss. A standby screen or a customer-waiting demonstration performance screen in which the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ shown in FIG.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped, the image display device maintains the state where the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed, and displays the sub information. Device 80 (sub first fluctuation indicator 81, sub second fluctuation indicator 82, sub first hold indicator 83, sub second hold indicator 84, sub general figure fluctuation indicator 85, sub general figure pending indicator 86 ) also maintains the displayed content.

Note that even if the supply of main power to the main control board 110 is stopped, while the standby screen is being displayed (regardless of whether or not after the completion of the variable performance, after receiving the customer waiting state designation command, or If the demonstration standby time has elapsed (after the end of the previous customer waiting demonstration performance), the customer waiting demonstration performance is started.

At timing T3, when the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is resumed, the main RAM 110c is not initialized and processing is performed to restore the gaming control state. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub The first hold display 83, the second sub-hold display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure pending display 86) also maintain their display contents.

At timing T4, when the performance control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are activated. A return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are turned off, and the image display device displays a standby screen or a customer waiting demonstration performance screen when the power is restored. A second standby screen is displayed in which the production symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (still display), and the audio output device 9 becomes silent.

In addition, when receiving the special figure reservation number designation command (the first special figure reservation number and the second reservation number = 0) as the power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each of the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights up in blue as initial light emission.

At timing T7, when the initial operation of the production button 17 ends, the initial emission of light in the production button LED ends and turns on while waiting for a customer (lights white), and at timing T8, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At timing T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the LED lights are turned on while waiting for a customer (white light is lit). ).

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in various accessories, the initial operation of various accessories or light emission (flashing red) in the abnormality notification mode is similar to the specific example shown in FIG. 177, FIG. 178, or FIG. 179. will be held.

(Specific example 3 where power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped)
FIG. 186 shows the power supply to the main control board 110 during the execution of the variation effect after the return-to-origin process and the initial operation process (while power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130). It is a figure which shows the specific example 3 in the case where only supply is restarted after being stopped.

Here, during execution of a variable performance, which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute a performance according to a command, the supply of main power to the main control board 110 is stopped and the backup power supply is turned on. A case will be explained in which the supply of main power is restarted while the supply of power continues.

At timing T1, a variable effect is being executed, a variable effect screen is displayed on the image display device, and variable effect sounds (BGM, SE, etc.) are output from the audio output device 9. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED are lit during fluctuation. Further, a variable display is performed on the sub-first variable display 81, and a pending number “1” is displayed on the sub-first pending display 83.

At timing T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power source) is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the fluctuation effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation Display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82, sub-first reservation display 83, sub-second reservation display 84, sub-routine fluctuation display 85, sub-routine reservation display 86) also maintain the display contents. .

At timing T3, when the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is resumed, the main RAM 110c is not initialized and processing is performed to restore the gaming control state. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the variable effect screen is displayed, and the sub-information display device 80 (sub-first variable display 81, sub-second variable display 82, sub-first pending display 83, The sub-second hold display 84, the sub-normal pattern fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal pattern pending display 86) also maintain their display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the production control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command for the special figure fluctuation transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 The return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED are turned off, and the image display device displays a recovery screen that includes the words "Please resume the game." The audio output device 9 becomes silent, but the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, second sub variable display 82, first sub hold indicator 83, second sub hold indicator 84, The sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 and the sub-normal figure pending display 86) maintain the display contents.

At timing T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights up in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing T7, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial emission of light in the production button LED is completed and the light is turned off. At the timing T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the second movable member 73 is turned off. Initial operation of member 74 begins.

At timing T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends, the initial operation process ends, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED end their initial light emission and turn off.

At the timing of T10, when the production control board 130 receives the special figure stop designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, a confirmation display for the loss of the variable production is performed. At this time, the image display device displays a stop screen (same as the second standby screen) in which the production symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (still display). is displayed, and the stop sound "Don♪" is output from the audio output device 9. Further, "1" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second special figure reservation number display area 70F. Further, the sub-first variable display 81 takes a loss display mode (non-display mode) indicating that it is a loss.

In addition, if the result of the current variable performance is a jackpot, when the special figure stop designation command is received by the performance control board 130, a confirmation display of the variable performance as a jackpot is performed. At this time, the image display device displays a finalization screen in which the jackpot effect pattern 70a such as "777" and the special pattern TZ are stopped (statically displayed), and the sub-first variable display 81 Now, it becomes a jackpot display mode indicating that it is a jackpot.

At timing T11, when a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the first reserved number in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". ”, and the variable performance (variable display of the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED turn on during variation, and the sub-first pending display 83 , the display mode shows "0".

In addition, at the timing of T6, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED become the initial light emission mode when the power is restored, but they are turned off or have special light emission that is different from the initial light emission mode when the power is restored. In this manner, it may be possible to understand that a power recovery designation command has been received during a variable performance.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in various accessories, the initial operation of various accessories and the light emission (flashing red) in the abnormality notification mode are similar to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 177, 178, or 179. will be held.

In addition, even if the execution time of the variable production recognized by the production control board 130 has elapsed before receiving the special figure stop designation command, the temporary stop display or stop display of the production pattern 70a is not performed. , the variable display on the sub-first variable display and the sub-second variable display will not end.

(Specific example 4 when restarting after only the power supply to the main control board has stopped)
FIG. 187 shows the power supply to the main control board 110 during the execution of the jackpot effect after the origin return process and the initial operation process have already been completed (while power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130). It is a figure which shows the specific example 4 in the case where only supply is restarted after being stopped.

Here, during the execution of a jackpot performance, which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute a performance according to a command, the supply of main power to the main control board 110 is stopped and the backup power supply is turned on. A case will be explained in which the supply of main power is restarted while the supply of power continues.

At the timing of T1, the jackpot effect (here, the first round effect) is being executed, and the image display device displays the jackpot effect (round effect) screen, and the right hit effect is displayed at the top right of the screen. The suggestive right-hitting image MU is displayed, and at the bottom right of the screen, a jackpot special symbol TZ ("777") is displayed in a stopped state (still display). Further, "1" is displayed as the first reserved number in the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E, and "0" is displayed as the second reserved number in the second reserved number of special symbols display area 70F.

At this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a jackpot effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.), and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit during the jackpot. In addition, a jackpot display (lighting) is performed on the sub-first variable display 81.

At timing T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the jackpot effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variation Display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82, sub-first reservation display 83, sub-second reservation display 84, sub-routine fluctuation display 85, sub-routine reservation display 86) also maintain the display contents. .

At timing T3, when the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is resumed, the main RAM 110c is not initialized and processing is performed to restore the gaming control state. At this time, the image display device maintains the state where the jackpot effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub first pending display 83, The sub-second hold display 84, the sub-normal pattern fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal pattern pending display 86) also maintain their display contents.

At timing T4, when the production control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command for jackpots transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and production button 17 return to their origin. A return operation to the position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are turned off, and the image display device displays a jackpot that includes the words "Please restart the game (jackpot in progress)". The intermediate recovery screen is displayed, and the audio output device 9 becomes silent, but the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub first hold display 83, The sub-second hold display 84, sub-normal pattern fluctuation display 85, and sub-normal pattern pending display 86) maintain their display contents.

In addition, instead of displaying the returning screen during jackpot, the same returning screen as when the power supply to the main control board 110 (only the main power supply) is stopped during the fluctuating performance shown in FIG. 186 is displayed. You can do it like this.

At timing T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights up in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing T7, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial emission of light in the production button LED is completed and the light is turned off. At the timing T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the second movable member 73 is turned off. Initial operation of member 74 begins.

At timing T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends, the initial operation process ends, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED end their initial light emission and turn off.

At timing T10, when the performance control board 130 receives a round number designation command for the second opening (second round) transmitted from the main control board 110, the jackpot performance (round performance) is restarted. At this time, the image display device displays a special jackpot effect (round effect) screen instead of a normal jackpot effect screen, and the jackpot special symbol TZ ("777") is not displayed.

Further, "1" is displayed as the first reserved number in the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E, and "0" is displayed as the second reserved number in the second reserved number of special symbols display area 70F. Furthermore, jackpot performance sounds (BGM, SE, etc.) are output from the audio output device 9, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and production button LED light up during the jackpot.

After that, when the production control board 130 receives a round number designation command for the third opening (third round) transmitted from the main control board 110, a special jackpot production (round production) screen is displayed on the image display device. Then, the normal jackpot effect (round effect) screen is displayed.

Note that when the production control board 130 receives an ending specification command instead of when the production control board 130 receives a round number designation command while displaying a special jackpot production screen, the normal ending production is displayed. A screen will be displayed.

In addition, if a round number designation command is received while a special jackpot production screen is being displayed, instead of switching to the normal jackpot production screen, the special jackpot production will continue until the production control board 130 receives the ending specification command. The screen may be continued, or the special jackpot effect screen may be continued until the effect control board 130 receives a customer waiting state designation command or a fluctuation start command after the jackpot game ends.

Furthermore, at the timing of T6, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED become the initial light emitting mode when the power is restored, but the light is turned off or the special light emitting mode is different from the initial light emitting mode when the power is restored. It may also be possible to make it possible to recognize that a power restoration designation command has been received during a fluctuation performance.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in various accessories, the initial operation of various accessories and the light emission (flashing red) in the abnormality notification mode are similar to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 177, 178, or 179. will be held.

In addition, in FIGS. 184 to 187, various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) were performing the return operation when the power-on designation command or the power restoration designation command was received. However, the initial motion of various accessories may be performed without performing the return motion.

In this way, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 172 to 187, when the control state of the game is initialized, the identification characters (numbers, alphabets, etc.) in the plurality of performance symbols 70a are set to the first combination. When the first initial effect symbol ("135") is displayed and the control state of the game is restored, the second initial effect symbol ("135") in which the identification characters in the plurality of effect symbols 70a are the second combination is displayed. 753'') is displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to easily understand whether the gaming control state has been initialized or whether the gaming control state has been restored.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 172 to 187, when the control state of the game is restored, a specific display indicating that the power supply should be restarted is performed before displaying the effect pattern 70a on the image display device. is possible, and the display mode of the specific display displayed on the image display device when restoring to the customer waiting state (initial screen display only), and the restoration to the state where the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner and there is no pending memory/with pending memory. The display mode of the specific display later displayed on the image display device (initial screen + display of the returning screen) is made to be different. Therefore, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 172 to 187, the hold icon display area (first hold icon display area 70B, second hold icon display area 70D) and the sub hold display (sub first hold display It is possible to perform a hold display indicating the number of held memories on each of the sub-second hold display 84), and the power supply that was stopped while there is a held memory is restarted and the control state of the game is restored. In this case, when the image display device is displaying a specific display (resuming screen display) indicating that the power supply is to be resumed, the hold icon display area does not display the hold icon, but the sub hold display displays the hold display. It is possible. Therefore, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to know the number of pending memories before the end of the specific display, and it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing. becomes.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 172 to 187, when the power supply that was stopped during the customer waiting demonstration performance is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the customer waiting demonstration performance screen is displayed again. Instead, a second standby screen is displayed in which the production symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, is displayed in a stopped state (still display). Therefore, there is no need to be aware of whether or not the state before the power supply was stopped was during a demonstration while waiting for customers, reducing the processing load related to display control when restoring the game control state after the power supply is resumed. It becomes possible to do so.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 172 to 187, the power supply that was stopped during the fluctuation performance is restarted for the sub fluctuation display devices (sub first fluctuation display device 81, sub second fluctuation display device 82). When the control state of the game is restored, even if the special symbol is being fluctuated (returning screen is displayed), if the special symbol is being fluctuated, the fluctuating display ( (blinking display). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load when restoring the control state of the game after power supply is resumed.

In addition, when the control state of the game is restored and the special symbol fluctuation display is executed (returning screen is displayed), the sub fluctuation display (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82), a variable display (blinking display) may be performed. In this way, when the control state of the game is restored, it becomes easy to understand that the variable display of the special symbols is being executed.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 172 to 187, for the sub-hold display (the first sub-hold display 83, the second sub-hold display 84), the returning screen is displayed on the image display device. (before the variable display is performed on the sub-variable display and when the command for specifying the number of reserved special figures is received), the display mode starts to show the number of reserved numbers. Therefore, the player can be made aware of the number of pending games immediately after the control state of the game is restored, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In addition, when performing a variable display (blinking display) on the sub-variable display (sub-first variable display 81, sub-second variable display 82) while the recovery screen is displayed on the image display device, Alternatively, the sub-hold indicators (first sub-hold indicator 83, second sub-hold indicator 84) may be configured to display the number of holds in accordance with the start of this variable display. In this way, when the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to easily understand that the special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner and the number of reservations at that time.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 172 to 187, when power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c, power is restored to the customer waiting state without initialization of the main RAM 110c. The return operation of various accessories is performed at the same timing as in the case, that is, from the timing when the effect pattern 70a is displayed on the image display device (timing when the initial screen ends). Therefore, the control related to the return operation of various accessories does not become complicated, and it becomes possible to reduce the processing load related to the return operation of various accessories.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 172 to 187, when the power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c or when the power is restored without initialization of the main RAM 110c, various accessories (first movable member 73, During the return operation of the second movable member 74 and the production button 17), the light emitting parts of various accessories (the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED) are turned off. ing. Therefore, it is possible to distinguish it from the initial motion of various accessories, and it becomes possible to understand that it is in the process of returning to its original state.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 172 to 187, if any of the various accessories has a return abnormality, the light emitting part of the accessory that has the return error will blink red (abnormality notification mode). By doing so, an abnormality is notified. Therefore, it becomes possible to grasp the accessory that has had a return abnormality.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 172 to 187, if the abnormality is notified by flashing red on the light-emitting part of the accessory that has experienced a return abnormality, until the next variable performance is started. Abnormality notifications continue. Therefore, it is possible to reliably notify the user of the accessory that has experienced a return abnormality.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in the accessory, a return operation may be performed to return the accessory with the return abnormality to the original position at the timing when the next fluctuating performance is started. Further, in a case where the abnormality notification is performed by blinking the light emitting part of the accessory in which the recovery abnormality occurred in red, the abnormality notification may be canceled when the effect button 17 is operated.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 172 to 187, when the power supply that was stopped during the customer waiting state is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the effect pattern 70a is displayed on the image display device. The initial motion of various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) is started from the timing after the return operation is completed (when the return operation is completed immediately, the timing at which the production pattern 70a is displayed). However, if the power supply that was stopped during the variable display of the special symbol is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the timing before the effect symbol 70a is displayed on the image display device (the display of the recovery screen (Middle), the initial movements of various accessories are performed. Therefore, it is possible to perform initial operations of various accessories at appropriate timings depending on the state when power supply occurs.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 172 to 187, for the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74), power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c, and initialization of the main RAM 110c is performed. In the case of a power recovery without a power recovery, when the recovery screen is displayed on the image display device (during the special symbol fluctuation display and before the production symbol 70a is displayed), the sub-hold display (sub-first pending display 83 , the initial operation is performed after the sub-second hold display 84) changes to a display mode showing the number of holds. Therefore, the initial movement of the board accessory can be performed after the player grasps the number of reservations (the progress of the game in the future), and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 172 to 187, the frame accessory (effect button 17) is activated when the power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c or when the power is restored without initialization of the main RAM 110c. , When the returning screen is displayed on the image display device (during the special symbol fluctuation display and before the production symbol 70a is displayed), the sub-holding display (sub-first holding display 83, sub-second holding display 84) ) is designed to perform the initial operation after the display format changes to indicate the number of reservations. Therefore, after the player is made aware of the number of reservations (the progress of the game in the future), the initial movement of the frame accessory can be performed, and it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 172 to 187, when the power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c, the power is restored to the customer waiting state without initialization of the main RAM 110c. From the same timing as when the performance pattern 70a is displayed on the image display device (in case the return operation is completed immediately, the timing when the performance pattern 70a is displayed) to the initial stage of the various accessories It is designed to take action. Therefore, the control related to the initial movements of various accessories does not become complicated, and it becomes possible to reduce the processing load related to the initial movements of various accessories.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 172 to 187, even if the stop screen is displayed after the returning screen is displayed, the stop sound of the effect pattern 70a is output. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand that the variable performance that was being executed at the time the power supply was stopped has ended, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In addition, when displaying the stop screen after displaying the returning screen, the stop sound of the effect pattern 70a may not be output.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 172 to 187, if a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, various accessories can be restored by simply displaying the initial screen. The operation, initial operation, and initial light emission are not executed. Therefore, it is possible to know that an abnormality has occurred in which a command cannot be received when the power is turned on.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 172 to 187, even if the initial screen is displayed because the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, the When the control board 130 is in a control state in which it is possible to execute the production according to the command, and receives a command for specifying the number of special drawings reserved based on the winning of game balls to the starting port from the main control board 110, it emits a winning sound. It is designed to be output. Therefore, even when the initial screen is displayed, it is possible to accurately notify that a game ball has entered the starting hole.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 172 to 187, even if the initial screen is displayed because the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, the If the control board 130 receives a variation start command from the main control board 110 while it is in a control state in which it can execute a production according to the command, the variation production will be executed without displaying the standby screen. There is. Therefore, the start of the fluctuating performance is executed without delay, and it becomes possible to perform the fluctuating performance from beginning to end within the range of the varying time of the special symbol.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 172 to 187, even if the initial screen is displayed because the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, the If the control board 130 receives a fluctuation start command from the main control board 110 when it is in a control state in which it can execute a performance according to a command, the fluctuation performance will start without performing the return movement or initial movement of various accessories. is designed to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to perform performances using various accessories without being hindered by the return action or the initial action during the execution of the variable performance.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 172 to 187, the performance control board 130 responds to commands when it is in a customer waiting state after the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including initial light emission) have been completed. Even in the control state where the corresponding performance can be executed, the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and restarted, and the main control board 110 issues a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation. When the command is received again, the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including initial light emission) are executed again. Therefore, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130, the discrepancy can be resolved. This makes it possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the performance control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 172 to 187, the effect control board 130 responds to commands, such as during a variable effect after the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including initial light emission) have been completed. Even in a control state in which it is possible to execute a performance, the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped, and the power supply command or power recovery designation command is issued from the main control board 110. When received again, the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including initial light emission) are executed again. Therefore, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130, the discrepancy can be resolved. This makes it possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the performance control means.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 172 to 187, even if the main control board 11 When the power supply to the main control board 110 is received again from the main control board 110, such as by restarting the power supply after stopping, the restoration operation of various accessories and the initial operation ( (including initial light emission). Therefore, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130, the discrepancy can be resolved. This makes it possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the performance control means.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 172 to 187, it is possible for the performance control board 130 to execute a performance according to a command, such as during a customer waiting state after the initialization notification sound has already been output. Even in the control state, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped, and a power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. It is supposed to be done. Therefore, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130, the discrepancy can be resolved. This makes it possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the performance control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 172 to 187, control allows the performance control board 130 to execute a performance according to a command, such as during a variable performance after the output of the initialization notification sound has already finished. Even in this state, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then resumed, and a power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. It looks like this. Therefore, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130, the discrepancy can be resolved. This makes it possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the performance control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 172 to 187, the performance control board 130 responds to the command during a jackpot game (opening performance, round performance, ending performance) after the output of the initialization notification sound has already finished. Even if the main control board 110 is in a control state where it is possible to execute a performance, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped, and a power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110. , the initialization notification sound is output again. Therefore, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130, the discrepancy can be resolved. This makes it possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the performance control means.

Note that when a power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output from the audio output device 9 instead of performing the return operation and initial operation (including initial light emission) of various accessories. You can just output .

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 172 to 187, the performance control board 130 responds to commands when it is in a customer waiting state after the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including initial light emission) have been completed. Even if the controller is in a control state in which it is possible to execute the corresponding performance, the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped, and a power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110. In this case, the first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen, and when the power recovery designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. It looks like this. Therefore, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130, the discrepancy can be resolved. This makes it possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the performance control means.

In addition, even if the performance control board 130 is in a control state in which it is possible to execute a performance according to a command, such as during a variable performance after the output of the initialization notification sound has finished or during a jackpot game, the main control board 130 When the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped, the first standby screen is displayed instead of the initial screen. ing. Therefore, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130, the discrepancy can be resolved. This makes it possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the performance control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 172 to 187, the effect control board 130 responds to commands, such as during a variable effect after the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including initial light emission) have been completed. Even in a control state where it is possible to execute a performance, the main control board 110 may issue a power recovery designation command by stopping and restarting only the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110. When received, the returning screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. Therefore, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130, the discrepancy can be resolved. This makes it possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the performance control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 172 to 187, the performance control board 130 responds to commands such as during a jackpot performance after the return operation of various characters and the initial operation (including initial light emission) are completed. Even in a control state where it is possible to execute a performance, the main control board 110 may issue a power recovery designation command by stopping and restarting only the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110. When received, the returning screen for jackpots is displayed without displaying the initial screen. Therefore, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130, the discrepancy can be resolved. This makes it possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the performance control means.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 172 to 187, the performance control board 130 may execute a performance according to a command, such as during a variable performance or during a jackpot game after the output of the initialization notification sound has already finished. Even in a control state where power is enabled, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then resumed, and a power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110 again, the initial screen will be displayed. If the first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen and a power recovery designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. Therefore, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130, the discrepancy can be resolved. This makes it possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the performance control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 172 to 187, in a control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which the performance control board 130 can execute a performance according to a command, the performance Even if the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped while the power supply to the control board 130 continues, the previous display screen can continue to be displayed. Therefore, when the power supply to the main control means is stopped, the player is not made to feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 172 to 187, in a control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which the performance control board 130 can execute a performance according to a command, the performance Even if the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed after the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped while the power supply to the control board 130 continues, the previous display screen can be continuously displayed. . Therefore, when the power supply to the main control means is resumed, the player will not feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

(Modification 1 when only the power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped)
FIG. 188 shows only the power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the production control board 130) after the return-to-origin process and the initial operation process have already been completed. It is a figure which shows the modification 1 when restarting after stopping.

Here, during the customer waiting state, which is one of the control states in which the production control board 130 can execute production according to commands, only the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is turned off. A case will be described in which the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped.

At the timing of T1, the various accessories have already finished their return operations, initial operations, and output of the initialization notification sound, and are now waiting for customers, and the image display device shows the initial pattern when the power is restored. A second standby screen is displayed in which a certain "753" production symbol 70a and special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display), and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and production button LED are displayed. The lights are on while waiting for customers.

In addition, if the timing of T1 is the return operation of various accessories, the initial operation, and the customer waiting state after the end of the variable performance that was executed after the output of the initialization notification sound, the image display device In this case, a standby screen is displayed in which the loss effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped (statically displayed).

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T2, when only the power supply (including backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration production screen and displays the sub Information display device 80 (sub-first fluctuation display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82, sub-first reservation display 83, sub-second reservation display 84, sub-general fluctuation display 85, sub-general reservation display 86) also maintains the displayed content.

Note that even if only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, while the standby screen is being displayed (regardless of whether or not after the completion of the variable effect, after receiving the customer waiting state designation command, or If the demonstration standby time has elapsed (after the completion of the customer waiting demonstration performance), the customer waiting demonstration performance is started.

At timing T3, when power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, the main RAM 110c is initialized. At this time, the image display device displays an initial screen containing the words "Loading" instead of the second standby screen, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and production button LED are turned off. do.

At this time, the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first reservation display 83, sub second reservation display 84, sub regular fluctuation display 85, sub The general figure holding display 86) is hidden.

At timing T4, when the production control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and production button 17 are returned to their origin positions. The operation begins.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain off, and instead of the initial screen, "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, is displayed on the image display device. A first standby screen is displayed in which the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped (statically displayed), and the audio output device 9 issues an initialization notification consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared". Sound is output.

In addition, when receiving the special figure reservation number designation command (the first special figure reservation number and the second reservation number = 0) as the power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each of the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED light up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights up in the order of red → green → blue as initial light emission.

At timing T7, when the initial operation of the production button 17 ends, the initial emission of light in the production button LED ends and turns on while waiting for a customer (lights white), and at timing T8, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At timing T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the LED lights are turned on while waiting for a customer (white light is lit). ), and when the output period (for example, 60 seconds) of the initialization notification sound has elapsed at timing T10, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent.

In addition, during the execution of the customer waiting demonstration performance after the return operation of various characters, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound, or during the execution of variable effects (loss variable effect, jackpot variable effect), or jackpot Even in the case where the power supply (including backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped and then resumed during the performance (opening, round game, ending), the screen displayed on the image display device at the timing of T3 is 185 to 187 except that they are customer waiting demonstration production screens, variable production screens (loss variation production screen, jackpot variation production screen), and jackpot production screens (opening production screen, round game production screen, ending production screen). This is basically the same as the example shown.

(Modification 2 when only the power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped)
FIG. 189 shows only the power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the production control board 130) after the return-to-origin process and the initial operation process have already been completed. It is a figure which shows the modification 2 when restarting after stopping.

Here, during a customer waiting state, which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute a performance according to a command, the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the backup power supply is turned off. A case will be described in which the main power supply is restarted while the supply continues.

At the timing of T1, if the various accessories are already waiting for customers after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound have finished, the image display device will display the initial symbol when the power is restored. A second standby screen or a customer waiting demo performance screen is displayed in which the production pattern 70a of "753" and the special symbol TZ are stopped (statically displayed), and the first movable member LED and the second movable member The LED and the performance button LED are lit while waiting for customers.

In addition, when the image display device is waiting for a customer after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound of various accessories have finished, the image display device will display a message indicating the loss. A standby screen or a customer-waiting demonstration performance screen in which the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ shown in FIG.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped, the image display device maintains the state where the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed, and displays the sub information. Device 80 (sub first fluctuation indicator 81, sub second fluctuation indicator 82, sub first hold indicator 83, sub second hold indicator 84, sub general figure fluctuation indicator 85, sub general figure pending indicator 86 ) also maintains the displayed content.

Note that even if only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, while the standby screen is being displayed (regardless of whether or not after the completion of the variable effect, after receiving the customer waiting state designation command, or If the demonstration standby time has elapsed (after the completion of the customer waiting demonstration performance), the customer waiting demonstration performance is started.

At timing T3, when the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, the main RAM 110c is not initialized and processing is performed to restore the control state of the game. At this time, the image display device displays an initial screen including the words "Reading", and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED are turned off.

At this time, the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first reservation display 83, sub second reservation display 84, sub regular fluctuation display 85, sub The general figure holding display 86) is hidden.

At timing T4, when the performance control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are activated. A return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain off, and instead of the initial screen, "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, is displayed on the image display device. A second standby screen is displayed in which the production symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (still display).

In addition, when receiving the special figure reservation number designation command (the first special figure reservation number and the second reservation number = 0) as the power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each of the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights up in blue as initial light emission.

At timing T7, when the initial operation of the production button 17 ends, the initial emission of light in the production button LED ends and turns on while waiting for a customer (lights white), and at timing T8, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At timing T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the LED lights are turned on while waiting for a customer (white light is lit). ).

In addition, during the execution of the customer waiting demonstration performance after the return operation of various characters, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound, or during the execution of variable effects (loss variable effect, jackpot variable effect), or jackpot Even if the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding backup power supply) is stopped and restarted during the performance (opening, round game, ending), the screen displayed on the image display device at the timing of T3 is 185 to 187 except that they are customer waiting demonstration production screens, variable production screens (loss variation production screen, jackpot variation production screen), and jackpot production screens (opening production screen, round game production screen, ending production screen). This is basically the same as the example shown.

In addition, in FIGS. 188 to 189, the various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) were performing the return operation when the power-on designation command or the power restoration designation command was received. However, the initial motion of various accessories may be performed without performing the return motion.

In this way, according to the modification shown in FIGS. 188 and 189, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then resumed, the standby screen on which the effect pattern 70a is displayed is different from the standby screen. It is designed to switch to the initial screen. Therefore, it is possible to understand that the power supply to the main control board 110 has stopped (there is an abnormality in the main control board 110).

Furthermore, according to the modification shown in FIGS. 188 and 189, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are , and turn off the performance button LED. Therefore, it becomes easier to understand that the power supply to the main control board 110 has stopped (there is an abnormality in the main control board 110).

In addition, the initial movements of various accessories do not start from the timing when the initial screen switches to the standby screen, but from the timing when the initial screen switches to the initial screen, or from the timing before switching from the initial screen to the standby screen. The initial operation may be started.

In addition, instead of switching from the standby screen to the initial screen when the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, the standby screen is switched to the initial screen when a power-on command (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command) is received. It may also be possible to switch to a screen. In this case, the initial movements of various accessories may be started at the timing when the standby screen switches to the initial screen, or at the timing before switching from the initial screen to the standby screen, or from the initial screen to the standby screen. The initial movements of various accessories may be started at the switched timing.

Further, instead of switching from the standby screen to the initial screen when power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, the initial screen may be displayed after switching from the standby screen to the non-display state. In this case, the initial movements of various accessories may be started from the timing when the hidden state is switched to the initial screen, or from the timing before switching from the initial screen to the standby screen, or from the initial screen to the standby screen. The initial motion of various accessories may be started at the timing when the switch is made.

(Modified example when there is a return error in the second movable member after power is turned on)
FIG. 190 is a diagram illustrating a modification in a case where there is a return abnormality in the second movable member 74 after power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen on which the words "Reading" are displayed is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At timing T2, when the production control board 130 receives the power-on designation command sent from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and production button 17 are returned to their origin positions. The operation begins.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the image display device displays the performance symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and A first standby screen with the special symbol TZ displayed in a stopped state (static display) is displayed, and the audio output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared."

In addition, when receiving the special figure reservation number designation command (the first special figure reservation number and the second reservation number = 0) as the power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each of the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T4, when the return-to-origin process ends with a return abnormality occurring in the second movable member 74, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED flash red to notify the occurrence of a return abnormality. (abnormality notification mode), the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the performance button LED lights up in the order of red → green → blue as initial light emission.

At timing T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial emission of light in the production button LED is completed and the lighting is turned on while waiting for a customer (white lighting), and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 is completed. The initial operation process ends without any operation being performed.

At the timing T6, when the output period (for example, 60 seconds) of the initialization notification sound has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent, and at the timing T7, the game ball is not inserted into the first starting port 45. When receiving the first reserved number of special drawings designation command based on winning (first reserved number of special drawings = 1), the first reserved number in the first reserved number of special drawings display area 70E becomes "1", and the first reserved icon is displayed. The first hold icon is displayed in the area 70B, the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pon♪".

At timing T8, when a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reserved number in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED ends, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member The LED and the performance button LED light up during fluctuation, and the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

Note that even if there is a return error in the first movable member 73 when the power is turned on, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED will blink red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the return error. , the first movable member 73, and the second movable member 74 are configured to complete the initial motion processing without performing the initial motion.

Furthermore, even when the power is restored, if there is a return error in the first movable member 73 or the second movable member 74, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED will notify the occurrence of the return error. In order to do so, it flashes in red (abnormality notification mode), and the initial operation process ends without performing the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74.

In this way, according to the modification shown in FIG. 190, when there is a return error in one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, the return error is detected not only in the movable member with the return error. Initial operations are also not performed for movable members that are not present. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that one movable member collides with the other movable member and breaks down. In addition, it is possible to prevent the movable members (especially the movable member in which the return abnormality has not occurred) from ceasing to operate during the execution of the game (variable performance, jackpot game), thereby reducing the interest in the game. This makes it possible to prevent

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 190, when there is a return abnormality in one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, both the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED will flash red to notify you of a recovery error. Therefore, compared to the case where only the movable member LED provided on one of the movable members having the return abnormality blinks red, it becomes easier to understand that there is an abnormality in the movable member.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 190, even if one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 The initial operation is performed for the effect buttons 17 that have no risk of colliding with the member 74. Therefore, the operation of the performance button 17 can be confirmed, and it becomes possible to grasp an abnormality of the performance button 17.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 190, even if there is a return abnormality in one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, the production button LED provided on the production button 17 is restored. It is designed to emit initial light without flashing red to notify of an abnormality. Therefore, it is possible to easily understand that there is no return abnormality in the production button 17.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in the first movable member 73 or the second movable member 74, the initial operation process may be completed without performing the initial operation for the production button 17 as well. In this case, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED may blink red to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality.

Further, when there is a return abnormality in the production button 17, the initial operation process may be completed without performing the initial operation for the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 as well. In this case, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED may blink red to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality.

(Variation example of initial processing of accessories in lamp control unit)
A modification of the accessory initial processing performed by the lamp control unit 150 will be described with reference to FIG. 191. FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing a modification of the accessory initial processing performed by the lamp control unit 150.
Here, the same processes as the accessory initial process shown in FIG. 167 are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted, and the different processes will be explained.

In step R101A, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether there is a power ON flag set in the lamp RAM 150c at the time of starting power supply. If there is no power ON flag, the process moves to step R102A, and if there is a power ON flag, the power ON flag is cleared in step R101B.

In step R102A, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) transmitted from the main control board 110 has been received. Then, the process moves to step R102B, and if the power-on command has not been received, the process moves to step R104.

In step R102B, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed since the power was turned on. If a predetermined period of time has elapsed (for example, 60 seconds after the last power ON, when the return operation and initial operation should have been completed), the process moves to step R103, and if the predetermined time has not elapsed. If so, the process moves to step R104.

In step R103, the lamp CPU 150a executes the origin return process of the accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) at the initial processing number updated in each process of accessory initial processing. Set "1".

As described above, according to the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 191, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is started, the return operation and initial operation of various accessories are started. Therefore, there is no need to be aware of whether the control state of the game is initialized or restored, and the processing load associated with the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation after the start of power supply. It becomes possible to reduce the

Furthermore, according to the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. When a specified command is received, the various accessories return operations and initial operations are performed again. Therefore, the main control board 110 did not start up normally and the power-on command was sent later than usual (an abnormality occurred regarding the power line from the power board 160 to the main control board 110). It becomes possible to understand the

In addition, when a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) is received, the return operation of various accessories and , the initial operation may be performed. In this way, the player does not need to be aware of the period of time that has elapsed since power supply to the gaming machine 1 was started, and it becomes possible to simplify the process when the power-on command is received.

(Specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories after power is turned on)
FIG. 192 shows various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) after the power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c, based on the modified example of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 191. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no recovery abnormality.

Note that power-on with initialization of the main RAM 110c includes power-on where the main RAM 110c is initialized after the setting change process is performed, and power-on where the main RAM 110c is initialized without the setting change process being performed. However, here, a case will be described in which the power is turned on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without any setting change processing being performed.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, the origin return process is started and the operation of returning the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 to the origin position is started. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off. Further, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-normal fluctuation display 85 are in a non-display state. ing.

At timing T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started.

Furthermore, when the production control board 130 receives a power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED changes and lights up alternately in red and white. Then, the lighting mode of the production button LED changes and lights up in the order of red → green → blue.

At this time, the image display device displays a first standby screen in which the production symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display), and the sound The output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared."

Furthermore, upon receiving a command for specifying the number of reserved special drawings (first number of reserved special drawings and second number of reserved drawings = 0) as a power-on command, the first number of reserved special drawings display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each of the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

At the timing T4, the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, and at the timing T5, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At timing T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED are lit while waiting for a customer (lights white). Become. At timing T7, when the output period (for example, 60 seconds) of the initialization notification sound has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent.

At the timing of T8, when the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is The first hold number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 The winning sound “Pon♪” is output.

At timing T9, when a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reserved number in the first special symbol reserved number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED turn on during variation, and the sub-first pending display 83 , the display mode shows "0".

(Specific example when there is a return error in the second movable member after power is turned on)
FIG. 193 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is a return abnormality in the second movable member 74 after the power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c, based on the modified example of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 191. Here, a case will be described in which the power is turned on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without any setting change processing being performed.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, the origin return process is started and the operation of returning the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 to the origin position is started. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off. In addition, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-normal fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At timing T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T3, when the origin return process ends with a return abnormality occurring in the second movable member 74, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started. . Further, the second movable member LED blinks red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of a return abnormality.

Furthermore, when the production control board 130 receives a power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED changes and lights up alternately in red and white, and the production button LED changes from red to white. Lights up in the order of green → blue.

At this time, the image display device displays a first standby screen in which the production symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display), and the sound The output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared."

Furthermore, upon receiving a command for specifying the number of reserved special drawings (first number of reserved special drawings and second number of reserved drawings = 0) as a power-on command, the first number of reserved special drawings display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each of the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T4, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, and at timing T5, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation processing is performed without executing the initial operation of the second movable member 74. finish.

At timing T6, when the output period (for example, 60 seconds) of the initialization notification sound has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and a silent state occurs.

At the timing of T7, when the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is The first hold number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 The winning sound “Pon♪” is output.

At timing T8, when a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reserved number in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and production button LED It lights up during fluctuation, and the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example when there is a return error in the first movable member after power is turned on)
FIG. 194 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is a return abnormality in the first movable member 73 after the power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c, based on the modified example of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 191. Here, a case will be described in which the power is turned on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without any setting change processing being performed.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, the origin return process is started and the operation of returning the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 to the origin position is started. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off. In addition, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-normal fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At timing T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed in a state where a return abnormality has occurred in the first movable member 73, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED blinks red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of a return abnormality.

At timing T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the production button 17 is started.

Furthermore, when the production control board 130 receives a power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 as a power-on command, the light emitting mode of the second movable member LED changes and lights up alternately in red and white. , the lighting mode of the production button LED changes and lights up in the order of red → green → blue.

At this time, the image display device displays a first standby screen in which the production symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display), and the sound The output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared."

Furthermore, upon receiving a command for specifying the number of reserved special drawings (first number of reserved special drawings and second number of reserved drawings = 0) as a power-on command, the first number of reserved special drawings display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each of the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

At the timing T4, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, and at the timing T5, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is performed without the initial operation of the first movable member 73 being executed. finish.

At the timing of T7, when the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is The first hold number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 The winning sound “Pon♪” is output.

At timing T8, when a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reserved number in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and production button LED It lights up during fluctuation, and the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example of a case where there is a return error in the production button after the power is turned on)
FIG. 195 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is a return abnormality in the production button 17 after the power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c, based on the modified example of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 191. Here, a case will be described in which the power is turned on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without any setting change processing being performed.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, the origin return process is started and the operation of returning the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 to the origin position is started. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off. In addition, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-normal fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At timing T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed in a state where a return abnormality has occurred in the production button 17, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the performance button LED blinks red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of a recovery abnormality.

At timing T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started. The operation will not start.

Furthermore, when the production control board 130 receives a power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED changes and lights up alternately in red and white. do.

At this time, the image display device displays a first standby screen in which the production symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display), and the sound The output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared."

Furthermore, upon receiving a command for specifying the number of reserved special drawings (first number of reserved special drawings and second number of reserved drawings = 0) as a power-on command, the first number of reserved special drawings display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each of the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T4, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At timing T5, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are lit (white) while waiting for a customer. At timing T6, when the output period (for example, 60 seconds) of the initialization notification sound has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and a silent state occurs.

At the timing of T7, when the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is The first hold number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 The winning sound “Pon♪” is output.

At timing T8, when a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reserved number in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the production button LED ends, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and production button LED are fluctuating. The light is turned on, and the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

Note that in the specific examples shown in FIGS. 192 to 195, the case where the main RAM 110c is initialized when the power is turned on without any setting change processing being performed has been described; however, the main RAM 110c is initialized after the setting change is performed. In the case of power-on, after a dark screen (initial screen) is displayed, the production control board 130 receives a setting change designation command, and a setting changing screen is displayed, and then the power-on designation command is sent to production control. When the board 130 receives the signal, a first standby screen is displayed and the return operations and initial operations of various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) are started. . Note that the first standby screen may be displayed by receiving the setting value designation command.

(Specific example when there is no abnormality in various accessories returning after power is restored)
FIG. 196 shows various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17 ) is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no recovery abnormality.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, the origin return process is started and the operation of returning the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 to the origin position is started. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off. Further, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-normal fluctuation display 85 are in a non-display state. ing.

At timing T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started.

Furthermore, when the production control board 130 receives the first power recovery designation command as the power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED changes and lights up alternately in blue and white. At the same time, the light emitting manner of the second movable member LED and the performance button LED changes and lights up in blue.

At this time, the image display device displays a second standby screen in which the production symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (still display).

Furthermore, upon receiving a command for specifying the number of reserved special drawings (first number of reserved special drawings and second number of reserved drawings = 0) as a power-on command, the first number of reserved special drawings display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each of the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

At the timing T4, the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, and at the timing T5, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At timing T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED are lit while waiting for a customer (lights white). Become.

At the timing of T7, when the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is The first hold number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 The winning sound “Pon♪” is output.

At timing T8, when a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reserved number in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED turn on during variation, and the sub-first pending display 83 , the display mode shows "0".

(Specific example when there is an abnormality in the second movable member returning after power is restored)
FIG. 197 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is a return abnormality in the second movable member 74 after the power is restored without initializing the main RAM 110c, based on the modified example of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 191. .

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, the origin return process is started and the operation of returning the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 to the origin position is started. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off. In addition, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-normal fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At timing T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T3, when the origin return process ends with a return abnormality occurring in the second movable member 74, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started. . At this time, the second movable member LED blinks red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of a return abnormality.

Furthermore, when the performance control board 130 receives a power restoration designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emitting mode of the first movable member LED changes and lights up alternately in blue and white, and the performance The light emission mode of the button LED changes and lights up in blue.

At this time, the image display device displays a second standby screen in which the production symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (still display).

Furthermore, upon receiving a command for specifying the number of reserved special drawings (first number of reserved special drawings and second number of reserved drawings = 0) as a power-on command, the first number of reserved special drawings display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each of the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T4, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, and at timing T5, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation processing is performed without executing the initial operation of the second movable member 74. When the process is finished, the first movable member LED and the performance button LED are lit (white) while waiting for the customer.

At the timing of T6, when the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is The first hold number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 The winning sound “Pon♪” is output.

At timing T7, when a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reserved number in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and production button LED It lights up during fluctuation, and the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example when there is an abnormality in the first movable member returning after power is restored)
FIG. 198 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is a return abnormality in the first movable member 73 after the power is restored without initializing the main RAM 110c, based on the modified example of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 191. .

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, the origin return process is started and the operation of returning the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 to the origin position is started. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off.
In addition, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-normal fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At timing T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed in a state where a return abnormality has occurred in the first movable member 73, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED blinks in red to notify the occurrence of a return abnormality (abnormality notification mode), and the second movable member LED and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the production button 17 is started.

Furthermore, when the performance control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emitting manner of the second movable member LED and the performance button LED changes and lights up in blue. .

At this time, the image display device displays a second standby screen in which the production symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (still display).

Furthermore, upon receiving a command for specifying the number of reserved special drawings (first number of reserved special drawings and second number of reserved drawings = 0) as a power-on command, the first number of reserved special drawings display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each of the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

At the timing T4, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, and at the timing T5, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is performed without the initial operation of the first movable member 73 being performed. When the process is finished, the first movable member LED and the performance button LED are lit (white) while waiting for the customer.

At the timing of T6, when the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is The first hold number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 The winning sound “Pon♪” is output.

At timing T7, when a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reserved number in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and production button LED It lights up during fluctuation, and the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example when there is an abnormality in the production button returning after power is restored)
FIG. 199 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is a return abnormality in the performance button 17 after the power is restored without initializing the main RAM 110c, based on the modified example of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 191.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, the origin return process is started and the operation of returning the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 to the origin position is started. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off. In addition, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-normal fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At timing T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed in a state where a return abnormality has occurred in the production button 17, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the production button LED flashes red to notify the occurrence of a return abnormality (abnormality notification mode), and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED maintain the off state.

At timing T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started. The operation will not start.

Furthermore, when the production control board 130 receives a power restoration designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emitting mode of the first movable member LED changes and lights up alternately in blue and white. 2 The light emitting mode of the movable member LED changes and lights up in blue.

At this time, the image display device displays a second standby screen in which the production symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (still display).

Furthermore, upon receiving a command for specifying the number of reserved special drawings (first number of reserved special drawings and second number of reserved drawings = 0) as a power-on command, the first number of reserved special drawings display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each of the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T4, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At timing T5, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are lit (white) while waiting for a customer.

At the timing of T6, when the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is The first hold number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 The winning sound “Pon♪” is output.

At timing T7, when a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reserved number in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the production button LED ends, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and production button LED are fluctuating. The light is turned on, and the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example when the state after the power is restored is that the special symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner and there is a pending memory)
FIG. 200 assumes that the modified example of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 191 is used, and the state after the power is restored without initialization of the main RAM 110c is in the special symbol fluctuation display (loss fluctuation display) and with pending memory. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a specific example of the case.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, the origin return process is started and the operation of returning the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 to the origin position is started. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off. Further, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-normal fluctuation display 85 are in a non-display state. ing.

At timing T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started.

Furthermore, when the production control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command for special figure fluctuations transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emitting mode of the first movable member LED changes and lights up alternately in blue and white, The light emitting manner of the second movable member LED and the production button LED changes and lights up in blue. At this time, the image display device displays a returning screen including the words "Please resume the game," and the audio output device 9 remains silent.

In addition, when the command for specifying the number of reserved special drawings (first number of reserved special drawings = 3, number of second reserved number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the image display device displays the returning screen, so the A state is maintained in which the second reserved numbers are not displayed in the 1st special figure reserved number display area 70E and the 2nd special figure reserved number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the first sub-holding display 83 has a display mode showing "3", and the second sub-holding display 84 and the sub-universal drawing holding display 86 have a display mode showing "0".

At the timing T4, the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, and at the timing T5, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At timing T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED are turned off.

At timing T7, when a special symbol stop designation command is received from the main control board 110, the image display device displays the stop display of the "753" production symbol 70a, which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and the special symbol TZ ( A stop screen (same as the second standby screen) in a static state (static display) is displayed, and a stop sound is output from the audio output device 9.

At this time, the three first pending icons are displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, but the icon display area 70C is secured in a state where the display area can display an effect image such as a background image ( (the pedestal image is displayed), but the icon is not displayed.

At timing T8, when a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reservation number in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E becomes "2". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED turn on during variation, and the sub-first pending display 83 , the display mode shows "2".

(Specific example of when the power-on designation command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 201 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power-on designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on, based on the modified example of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 191.

A case where the power-on designation command cannot be received normally means that power is being supplied to the production control board 130, but the power line of the main control board 110 is disconnected or the connector of the power line is not connected ( A first case in which power (main power supply and backup power supply) is not supplied due to the situation (including a half-plugged state), a second case in which the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the production control board 130 is disconnected, and the command Although there is a third case in which the communication line connector is in an unconnected state (including a half-plugged state), the first case will be described here.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, power is not supplied to the main control board 110, but when power supply starts, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73, Then, the operation of returning the production button 17 to its original position is started.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off. In addition, a sub-first fluctuation indicator 81, a sub-second fluctuation indicator 82, a sub-first hold indicator 83, a sub-second hold indicator 84, a sub-normal figure fluctuation indicator 85, and a sub-normal figure hold indicator. 86 is in a non-display state.

At timing T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started, and then the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed. At the timing T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, at the timing T5, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started, and at the timing T6, the second movable member 74 is started. When the initial operation of the member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the effect control board 130 enters a control state in which it is possible to execute the effect according to the command.

At timing T7, when the power line to the main control board 110 is connected, a process for initializing the control state of the game is performed and a power-on designation command is transmitted. Then, when the production control board 130 receives the power-on designation command, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 , and the operation of returning the production button 17 to its original position is started.

At this time, the image display device displays a first standby screen in which the production symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display), and the sound The output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared."

Thereafter, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T8, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are lit alternately in red and white as initial light emission, and the production button LED is lit in the order of red → green → blue as initial light emission.

At timing T9, the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, and at timing T10, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At timing T11, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends, the initial operation process ends, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED ends, and the system is waiting for customers. When the initialization notification sound output period (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent.

In addition, when the production control board 130 received the power-on designation command, the first standby screen was displayed, but instead of displaying the first standby screen immediately, a dark color display screen was displayed as a type of initial screen. The first standby screen may be displayed after being displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds). In this case, the initialization notification sound may be output from the start of displaying the dark color display screen, or may be output from the start of displaying the first standby screen.

(Specific example of when the power recovery designation command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 202 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a case where a power recovery designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on, based on the modified example of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 191.

A case where the power recovery designation command cannot be received normally means that power is being supplied to the production control board 130, but the power line of the main control board 110 is disconnected or the connector of the power line is disconnected ( A first case in which power (main power only) is not supplied due to a situation (including a half-plugged state), a second case in which the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the production control board 130 is disconnected, and a command communication line Although there is a third case in which the connector is in an unconnected state (including a half-plugged state), the first case will be described here.

Note that the timing from T1 to T7 is the same as the timing from T1 to T7 in FIG. 201, so the explanation here will be omitted, and the timing after T7 will be explained.

At timing T7, when the power line to the main control board 110 is connected, processing for restoring the control state of the game is performed and a power restoration designation command is transmitted. Then, when the production control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 , and the operation of returning the production button 17 to its original position is started.

At this time, the image display device displays a second standby screen in which the production symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display), and the sound The output device 9 maintains a silent state.

Thereafter, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T8, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the second movable member LED and the production button LED light up in blue as initial light emission.

At timing T9, the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, and at timing T10, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At timing T11, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends, the initial operation process ends, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED ends, and the system is waiting for customers. It lights up (white light).

In addition, when the production control board 130 received the power recovery designation command, the second standby screen was displayed, but instead of displaying the second standby screen immediately, it displayed a dark color display screen as a type of initial screen. The second standby screen may be displayed after being displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds).

In addition, the audio output device 9 was set to be silent when receiving the power restoration designation command, but a notification sound (alarm, etc.) indicating that the power has been turned on (so that it can be understood) is emitted for a predetermined period of time. (For example, it may be output for 30 seconds). In this case, the alarm may be the same as when the power-on designation command is received, or it may be a different alarm.

In addition, in FIGS. 201 and 202, various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) were performing the return operation when receiving the power-on designation command or the power restoration designation command. However, the initial motion of various accessories may be performed without performing the return motion.

(Specific example of when the power-on command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
Figure 203 shows a specific example of the case where the power-on command (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command) cannot be received normally when the power is turned on, based on the modified example of the accessory initial processing shown in Figure 191. FIG.

Cases in which the power recovery designation command cannot be received normally include cases in which power is not supplied to the main control board 110, cases in which the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the production control board 130 is disconnected, and cases in which the command communication line Examples include cases where the connector is in an unconnected state (including a half-plugged state).

Note that the timing from T1 to T5 is the same as the timing from T1 to T5 in FIG. 201, so the explanation here will be omitted, and the timing after T5 will be explained.

At the timing of T5, the production control board 130 does not receive the first power recovery designation command as the power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110, and the special drawing reservation number designation command (the first special drawing reservation number and , second pending number=0), the image display device maintains the initial screen displayed.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends, the initial operation process ends, and the display modes of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED change and are turned off. becomes.

At the timing of T7, when the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the initial screen is displayed on the image display device. However, the sub-first hold display 83 changes to a display mode showing "1", and the winning sound "Pon♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

At timing T8, when a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the image display device displays the production symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored. , and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is displayed in a stopped state (stationary display) is displayed for a moment, and then the variable production (production symbol 70a, variable display of the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon, or the icon concerned) , BGM output) starts.

At this time, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED turn on during variation, and the sub-first pending display 83 , the display mode shows "0".

(Specific example 1 when restarting after only power supply to the main control board is stopped)
FIG. 204 shows a customer waiting state (main control board 110 and production control board 130 FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating a first example in which only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted during the power supply to the main control board 110.

The case where only the power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped is a case where the power line (main power line, backup power line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 is disconnected and then comes into contact with it due to an external factor. , the case where the connector of the power line (main power line, backup power line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 becomes connected after being disconnected (including half-plugged). Can be mentioned.

Here, during a customer waiting state (including execution of a customer waiting demonstration performance), which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute a performance according to a command, the main control board 110 is A case will be described in which the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) is restarted after the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) has stopped.

At the timing of T1, various accessories are already in the state of waiting for customers after the return operation and initial operation are completed, and the image display device shows the production symbol "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored. 70a, and a second standby screen or a customer waiting demonstration performance screen with the special design TZ being stopped and displayed (stationary display), and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button are displayed. The LED lights up while waiting for customers.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub 1 fluctuation display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82, sub-first reservation display 83, sub-second reservation display 84, sub-general fluctuation display 85, sub-general reservation display 86) also display contents. maintain.

At timing T3, when power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, the main RAM 110c is initialized. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub The first hold display 83, the second sub-hold display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure pending display 86) also maintain their display contents.

At timing T4, when the production control board 130 receives a power-on designation command as a power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 The return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are lit alternately in red and white as initial light emission, the production button LED is lit in white as initial light emission, and the image display device is powered on. A first standby screen is displayed in which the production symbol 70a of "135" which is the initial symbol at the time of insertion and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display), and the audio output device 9 outputs an alarm and "RAM An initialization notification sound consisting of a voice saying "It's clear" is output.

In addition, when receiving the special figure reservation number designation command (the first special figure reservation number and the second reservation number = 0) as the power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each of the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

At the timing T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started, and at the timing T6, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is finished. Then, the origin return process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started.

At the timing T7, the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, and at the timing T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At timing T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the LED lights are turned on while waiting for a customer (white light is lit). ), and when the output period (for example, 60 seconds) of the initialization notification sound has elapsed at timing T10, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent.

In addition, if the return movement, initial movement, or initialization notification sound output of various characters has already been completed, a variable effect (loss variable effect) is in progress, or a jackpot effect (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) is in progress. The timing of T4 also applies when restarting after only the power supply (including backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped during a control state in which the performance control board is able to execute a performance according to a command, such as during execution. The screens displayed on the image display device until the power-on designation command is received in ), except that the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped while waiting for a customer, and various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button The return operation and initialization operation described in step 17) are performed, and the audio output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound.

In addition, when there is an abnormality in various accessories, the initial operation of various accessories and the light emission (flashing red) in the abnormality notification mode are similar to the specific examples shown in Figures 193, 194, or 195 It will be done.

(Specific example 2 when restarting after only the power supply to the main control board has stopped)
FIG. 205 shows a customer waiting state (main control board 110 and performance control board 130 FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a second specific example in which only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted during the power supply to the main control board 110.

Here, during a customer waiting state (including execution of a customer waiting demonstration performance), which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute a performance according to a command, the main control board 110 is A case will be described in which the main power supply is restarted after the main power supply has stopped and the backup power supply continues.

At the timing of T1, if the various accessories are already waiting for customers after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound have finished, the image display device will display the initial symbol when the power is restored. A second standby screen or a customer waiting demo performance screen is displayed in which the production pattern 70a of "753" and the special symbol TZ are stopped (statically displayed), and the first movable member LED and the second movable member The LED and the performance button LED are lit while waiting for customers.

In addition, when the image display device is waiting for a customer after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound of various accessories have finished, the image display device will display a message indicating the loss. A standby screen or a customer-waiting demonstration performance screen in which the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ shown in FIG.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped, the image display device maintains the state where the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed, and displays the sub information. Device 80 (sub first fluctuation indicator 81, sub second fluctuation indicator 82, sub first hold indicator 83, sub second hold indicator 84, sub general figure fluctuation indicator 85, sub general figure pending indicator 86 ) also maintains the displayed content.

At timing T3, when the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, processing for restoring the control state of the game is performed. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub The first hold display 83, the second sub-hold display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure pending display 86) also maintain their display contents.

Note that even if the supply of main power to the main control board 110 is stopped, while the standby screen is being displayed (regardless of whether or not after the completion of the variable performance, after receiving the customer waiting state designation command, or If the demonstration standby time has elapsed (after the end of the previous customer waiting demonstration performance), the customer waiting demonstration performance is started.

At timing T4, when the production control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command as the power ON command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and production button 17 The return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights up in white as initial light emission, On the image display device, instead of the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration production screen, the production symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display). A second standby screen of the status is displayed.

In addition, when receiving the special figure reservation number designation command (the first special figure reservation number and the second reservation number = 0) as the power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each of the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started, and when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is performed. After that, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started.

At timing T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started.

At the timing T7, the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, and at the timing T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At timing T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED, and the system is waiting for customers. It lights up (white light).

In addition, in the case where various accessory objects have a return abnormality, the initial operation and initial light emission of the various accessory objects will be performed in the same way as the specific example shown in FIG. 197, FIG. 198, or FIG. 199.

(Specific example 3 where power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped)
FIG. 206 is based on the modified example of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a third specific example in which only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted during the power supply to the board 130). FIG.

Here, during execution of a variable performance, which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute a performance according to a command, the supply of main power to the main control board 110 is stopped and the backup power supply is turned on. A case will be explained in which the supply of main power is restarted while the supply of power continues.

At timing T1, a variable effect is being executed, a variable effect screen is displayed on the image display device, and variable effect sounds (BGM, SE, etc.) are output from the audio output device 9. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED are lit during fluctuation. Further, a variable display is performed on the sub-first variable display 81, and a pending number “1” is displayed on the sub-first pending display 83.

At timing T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power source) is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the fluctuation effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation Display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82, sub-first reservation display 83, sub-second reservation display 84, sub-routine fluctuation display 85, sub-routine reservation display 86) also maintain the display contents. .

At timing T3, when the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is resumed, the main RAM 110c is not initialized and processing is performed to restore the gaming control state. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the variable effect screen is displayed, and the sub-information display device 80 (sub-first variable display 81, sub-second variable display 82, sub-first pending display 83, The sub-second hold display 84, the sub-normal pattern fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal pattern pending display 86) also maintain their display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the production control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command for the special figure fluctuation transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 The return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights up in white as initial light emission, The image display device displays a return screen including the words "Please resume the game," and the audio output device 9 becomes silent, but the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub The second fluctuation display 82, the first sub-pending display 83, the second sub-pending display 84, the sub-privilege fluctuation display 85, and the sub-pending pending display 86) maintain their display contents.

At the timing T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started, and at the timing T6, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is finished. Then, the origin return process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started.

At the timing T7, the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, and at the timing T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At timing T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends, the initial operation process ends, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED end the initial light emission and turn off. becomes.

At the timing of T10, when the production control board 130 receives the special figure stop designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, a confirmation display for the loss of the variable production is performed. At this time, the image display device displays a stop screen in which the production symbol 70a of “753”, which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special symbol TZ are stopped (statically displayed), and the audio output device 9 A stop sound is output. Further, "1" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second special figure reservation number display area 70F. Further, the sub-first variable display 81 takes a loss display mode (non-display mode) indicating that it is a loss.

In addition, if the result of the current variable performance is a jackpot, when the special figure stop designation command is received by the performance control board 130, a confirmation display of the variable performance as a jackpot is performed. At this time, the image display device displays a stop screen in which the jackpot effect pattern 70a such as "777" and the special pattern TZ are stopped (statically displayed), and the sub-first variable display 81 In this case, the jackpot display mode shows that it is a jackpot, and a stop sound is output from the audio output device 9.

At timing T11, when a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the first reserved number in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". ”, and the variable performance (variable display of the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED turn on during variation, and the sub-first pending display 83 , the display mode shows "0".

Note that at the timing of T4, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED become the initial light emitting mode when the power is restored, but they must be turned off or have a special light emitting mode different from the initial light emitting mode when the power is restored. It may also be possible to make it possible to recognize that a power restoration designation command has been received during a fluctuation performance.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in various accessories, the initial operation of various accessories and the light emission (flashing red) in the abnormality notification mode are similar to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 197, 198, or 199. It will be done.

In addition, even if the execution time of the variable production recognized by the production control board 130 has elapsed before receiving the special figure stop designation command, the temporary stop display or stop display of the production pattern 70a is not performed. , the variable display on the sub-first variable display and the sub-second variable display will not end.

(Specific example 4 when restarting after only the power supply to the main control board has stopped)
207 is based on the modified example of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 191, and shows that the main control board 110 and the effect 13 is a diagram illustrating a fourth specific example in which only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted during the power supply to the board 130). FIG.

Here, during the execution of a jackpot performance, which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute a performance according to a command, the supply of main power to the main control board 110 is stopped and the backup power supply is turned on. A case will be explained in which the supply of main power is restarted while the supply of power continues.

At the timing of T1, the jackpot effect (here, the first round effect) is being executed, and the image display device displays the jackpot effect (round effect) screen, and the jackpot special symbol TZ ("777") is displayed in a stopped state (static display). Further, "1" is displayed as the reserved number in the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E, and "0" is displayed as the second reserved number in the second reserved number of special symbols display area 70F.

At this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a jackpot effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.), and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit during the jackpot. In addition, a jackpot display (lighting) is performed on the sub-first variable display 81.

At timing T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the jackpot effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variation Display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82, sub-first reservation display 83, sub-second reservation display 84, sub-routine fluctuation display 85, sub-routine reservation display 86) also maintain the display contents. .

At timing T3, when the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is resumed, the main RAM 110c is not initialized and processing is performed to restore the gaming control state. At this time, the image display device maintains the state where the jackpot effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub first pending display 83, The sub-second hold display 84, the sub-normal pattern fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal pattern pending display 86) also maintain their display contents.

At timing T4, when the production control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command for jackpots transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and production button 17 return to their origin. A return operation to the position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights up in white as initial light emission, The image display device displays a returning screen for jackpots that includes the words "Please restart the game (during jackpots)", and the audio output device 9 becomes silent. In addition, the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first reservation display 83, sub second reservation display 84, sub general figure fluctuation display 85, sub ordinary The figure pending display 86) maintains the displayed content.

In addition, instead of displaying the returning screen for the jackpot, the same returning screen as when the power supply to the main control board 110 (only the main power supply) is stopped during the fluctuating performance shown in FIG. 206 is displayed. You can do it like this.

At the timing T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started, and at the timing T6, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is finished. Then, the origin return process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started.

At the timing T7, the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, and at the timing T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At timing T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends, the initial operation process ends, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED end the initial light emission and turn off. becomes.

At timing T10, when the performance control board 130 receives a round number designation command for the second opening (second round) transmitted from the main control board 110, the jackpot performance (round performance) is restarted. At this time, the image display device displays a special jackpot effect (round effect) screen instead of a normal jackpot effect screen, and the jackpot special symbol TZ ("777") is not displayed.

Further, "1" is displayed as the reserved number in the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E, and "0" is displayed as the second reserved number in the second reserved number of special symbols display area 70F. Furthermore, jackpot performance sounds (BGM, SE, etc.) are output from the audio output device 9, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and production button LED light up during the jackpot.

After that, when the production control board 130 receives a round number designation command for the third opening (third round) transmitted from the main control board 110, a special jackpot production (round production) screen is displayed on the image display device. Then, the normal jackpot effect (round effect) screen is displayed.

Note that when the production control board 130 receives an ending specification command instead of when the production control board 130 receives a round number designation command while displaying a special jackpot production screen, the normal ending production is displayed. A screen will be displayed.

In addition, if a round number designation command is received while a special jackpot production screen is being displayed, instead of switching to the normal jackpot production screen, the special jackpot production will continue until the production control board 130 receives the ending specification command. The screen may be continued, or the special jackpot effect screen may be continued until the effect control board 130 receives a customer waiting state designation command or a fluctuation start command after the jackpot game ends.

Furthermore, at the timing of T4, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED become the initial light emitting mode when the power is restored, but they are turned off or have a special light emitting mode different from the initial light emitting mode when the power is restored. It may also be possible to make it possible to recognize that a power restoration designation command has been received during a fluctuation performance.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in various accessories, the initial operation of various accessories and the light emission (flashing red) in the abnormality notification mode are similar to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 197, 198, or 199. It will be done.

In addition, in FIGS. 204 to 207, various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) were performing the return operation when receiving the power-on designation command or the power restoration designation command. However, the initial motion of various accessories may be performed without performing the return motion.

In this way, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 192 to 207, when the control state of the game is initialized, the identification characters (numbers, alphabets, etc.) in the plurality of performance symbols 70a are set to the first combination. When the first initial effect symbol ("135") is displayed and the control state of the game is restored, the second initial effect symbol ("135") in which the identification characters in the plurality of effect symbols 70a are the second combination is displayed. 753'') is displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to easily understand whether the gaming control state has been initialized or whether the gaming control state has been restored.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 192 to 207, when the control state of the game is restored, a specific display indicating that the power supply should be restarted is performed before displaying the effect pattern 70a on the image display device. is possible, and the display mode of the specific display displayed on the image display device when restoring to the customer waiting state (initial screen display only), and the restoration to the state where the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner and there is no pending memory/with pending memory. The display mode of the specific display later displayed on the image display device (initial screen + display of the returning screen) is made to be different. Therefore, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 192 to 207, the hold icon display area (first hold icon display area 70B, second hold icon display area 70D) and the sub hold display (sub first hold display It is possible to perform a hold display indicating the number of held memories on each of the sub-second hold display 84), and the power supply that was stopped while there is a held memory is restarted and the control state of the game is restored. In this case, when the image display device is displaying a specific display (resuming screen display) indicating that the power supply is to be resumed, the hold icon display area does not display the hold icon, but the sub hold display displays the hold display. It is possible. Therefore, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to know the number of pending memories before the end of the specific display, and it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing. becomes.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 192 to 207, when the power supply that was stopped during the customer waiting demonstration performance is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the customer waiting demonstration performance screen is displayed again. Instead, a second standby screen is displayed in which the production symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, is displayed in a stopped state (still display). Therefore, there is no need to be aware of whether or not the state before the power supply was stopped was during a demonstration while waiting for customers, reducing the processing load related to display control when restoring the game control state after the power supply is resumed. It becomes possible to do so.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 192 to 207, the power supply that was stopped during the fluctuation performance is restarted for the sub-variation display devices (sub-first fluctuation display device 81, sub-second fluctuation display device 82). When the control state of the game is restored, even if the special symbol is being fluctuated (returning screen is displayed), if the special symbol is being fluctuated, the fluctuating display ( (blinking display). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load when restoring the control state of the game after power supply is resumed.

In addition, when the control state of the game is restored and the special symbol fluctuation display is executed (returning screen is displayed), the sub fluctuation display (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82), a variable display (blinking display) may be performed. In this way, when the control state of the game is restored, it becomes easy to understand that the variable display of the special symbols is being executed.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 192 to 207, for the sub-hold display (the first sub-hold display 83, the second sub-hold display 84), the returning screen is displayed on the image display device. (before the variable display is performed on the sub-variable display and when the command for specifying the number of reserved special figures is received), the display mode starts to show the number of reserved numbers. Therefore, the player can be made aware of the number of pending games immediately after the control state of the game is restored, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In addition, when performing a variable display (blinking display) on the sub-variable display (sub-first variable display 81, sub-second variable display 82) while the recovery screen is displayed on the image display device, Alternatively, the sub-hold indicators (first sub-hold indicator 83, second sub-hold indicator 84) may be configured to display the number of holds in accordance with the start of this variable display. In this way, when the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to easily understand that the special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner and the number of reservations at that time.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 192 to 207, when power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c, power is restored to the customer waiting state without initialization of the main RAM 110c. The return operation of various accessories is performed at the same timing as in the previous case, that is, immediately after the power is turned on (timing when the initial screen is displayed). Therefore, the control related to the return operation of various accessories does not become complicated, and it becomes possible to reduce the processing load related to the return operation of various accessories.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 192 to 207, when the power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c or when the power is restored without initialization of the main RAM 110c, various accessories (first movable member 73, During the return operation of the second movable member 74 and the production button 17), the light emitting parts of various accessories (the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED) are turned off. ing. Therefore, it is possible to distinguish it from the initial motion of various accessories, and it becomes possible to understand that it is in the process of returning to its original state.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 192 to 207, if there is a return abnormality in any of the various accessories, the light emitting part of the accessory that has the return error will blink red (abnormality notification mode). By doing so, an abnormality is notified. Therefore, it becomes possible to grasp the accessory that has had a return abnormality.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 192 to 207, if the abnormality is notified by flashing red on the light-emitting part of the accessory that has returned abnormally, until the next fluctuating effect is started. Abnormality notifications continue. Therefore, it is possible to reliably notify the user of the accessory that has experienced a return abnormality.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in the accessory, a return operation may be performed to return the accessory with the return abnormality to the original position at the timing when the next fluctuating performance is started. Further, in a case where the abnormality notification is performed by blinking the light emitting part of the accessory in which the recovery abnormality occurred in red, the abnormality notification may be canceled when the effect button 17 is operated.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 192 to 207, when power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c, power is restored to the customer waiting state without initialization of the main RAM 110c. The initial operations of various accessories are performed at the same timing as in the previous case, that is, immediately after the power is turned on (the timing at which the initial screen is displayed). Therefore, the control related to the initial movements of various accessories does not become complicated, and it becomes possible to reduce the processing load related to the initial movements of various accessories.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 192 to 207, for the board accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74), the power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c, and the main RAM 110c is initialized. In the case of power restoration without a power recovery, the sub-hold display (the first sub-hold display 83, the second sub-hold display 84) changes to the display mode showing the number of holds (the image display device does not display the recovery screen). Initial operations are performed before Therefore, it becomes easier to avoid inconveniences such as the progress of the performance being hindered by the initial movements of the board accessories. It becomes possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 192 to 207, the frame accessory (effect button 17) is activated when the power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c or when the power is restored without initialization of the main RAM 110c. , performs an initial operation before the sub-hold display (first sub-hold display 83, second sub-hold display 84) changes to the display mode indicating the number of holds (returning screen is displayed on the image display device). It looks like this. Therefore, it becomes easier to avoid inconveniences such as the progress of the performance being hindered by the initial movements of the frame accessories. It becomes possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 192 to 207, even if the stop screen is displayed after the returning screen is displayed, the stop sound of the production symbol 70a is output. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand that the variable performance that was being executed at the time the power supply was stopped has ended, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In addition, when displaying the stop screen after displaying the returning screen, the stop sound of the effect pattern 70a may not be output.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 192 to 207, even if the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, the return operation, initial operation, etc. of various accessories, Then, while performing initial light emission, the initial screen continues to be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to know that an abnormality has occurred in which a command cannot be received when the power is turned on.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 192 to 207, even if the initial screen continues to be displayed because the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, , When the production control board 130 is in a control state in which it is possible to execute the production according to the command, and receives a command for specifying the number of special drawings reserved based on the winning of the game ball to the starting hole from the main control board 110, the prize is won. It is designed to output sound. Therefore, even when the initial screen is displayed, it is possible to accurately notify that a game ball has entered the starting hole.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 192 to 207, even if the initial screen is displayed because the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, the When the control board 130 receives a variation start command from the main control board 110 after it is in a control state in which it can execute a production according to the command, the variation production is executed without displaying the standby screen. There is. Therefore, the start of the fluctuating performance is executed without delay, and it becomes possible to perform the fluctuating performance from beginning to end within the range of the varying time of the special symbol.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 192 to 207, the performance control board 130 responds to commands when it is in a customer waiting state after the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including initial light emission) have been completed. Even in the control state where the corresponding performance can be executed, the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and restarted, and the main control board 110 issues a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation. When the command is received again, the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (initial light emission) are executed again. Therefore, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130, the discrepancy can be resolved. It becomes possible.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 192 to 207, the performance control board 130 responds to commands, such as during a variable performance after the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including initial light emission) have been completed. Even in a control state in which it is possible to execute a performance, the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped, and the power supply command or power recovery designation command is issued from the main control board 110. When received again, the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (initial light emission) are executed again. Therefore, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130, the discrepancy can be resolved. It becomes possible.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 192 to 207, the performance control board 130 responds to commands during a jackpot game after the return operation of various characters and the initial operation (including initial light emission) have already been completed. Even in a control state in which it is possible to execute a performance, the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped, and the power supply command or power recovery designation command is issued from the main control board 110. When received again, the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including initial light emission) are executed again. Therefore, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130, the discrepancy can be resolved. becomes possible

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 192 to 207, it is possible for the performance control board 130 to execute a performance according to a command, such as during a customer waiting state after the initialization notification sound has already been output. Even in the control state, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped, and a power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. It is supposed to be done. Therefore, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130, the discrepancy can be resolved. It becomes possible.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 192 to 207, control allows the performance control board 130 to execute a performance according to a command, such as during a variable performance after the output of the initialization notification sound has already finished. Even in this state, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then resumed, and a power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. It looks like this. Therefore, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130, the discrepancy can be resolved. It becomes possible.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 192 to 207, control allows the performance control board 130 to execute a performance according to a command, such as during a jackpot game after the output of the initialization notification sound has already finished. Even in the state, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped, and a power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. It is supposed to be done. Therefore, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130, the discrepancy can be resolved. It becomes possible.

Note that when the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output from the audio output device 9 instead of executing the return operation, initial operation, and initial light emission of various accessories. You can just do it.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 192 to 207, the performance control board 130 responds to commands when it is in a customer waiting state after the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including initial light emission) have been completed. Even if the controller is in a control state in which it is possible to execute the corresponding performance, the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped, and a power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110. In this case, the first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen, and when the power recovery designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. It looks like this. Therefore, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130, the discrepancy can be resolved. It becomes possible.

In addition, the performance control board 130 is capable of executing a performance according to a command, such as during a variable performance or a jackpot performance after the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including initial light emission) have ended. Even in this state, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped, and a power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the initial screen is not displayed. The first standby screen is displayed. Therefore, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130, the discrepancy can be resolved. It becomes possible.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 192 to 207, the performance control board 130 responds to commands, such as during a variable performance after the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including initial light emission) have been completed. Even in a control state where it is possible to execute a performance, the main control board 110 may issue a power recovery designation command by stopping and restarting only the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110. When received, the returning screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. Therefore, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130, the discrepancy can be resolved. It becomes possible.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 192 to 207, the performance control board 130 responds to commands during the jackpot performance after the return operation of various characters and the initial operation (including initial light emission) are completed. Even in a control state where it is possible to execute a performance, the main control board 110 may issue a power recovery designation command by stopping and restarting only the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110. When received, the returning screen for jackpots is displayed without displaying the initial screen. Therefore, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130, the discrepancy can be resolved. It becomes possible.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 192 to 207, the performance control board 130 may execute a performance according to a command, such as during a variable performance or during a jackpot game after the output of the initialization notification sound has already finished. Even in a control state where power is enabled, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then resumed, and a power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110 again, the initial screen will be displayed. If the first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen and a power recovery designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. Therefore, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130, the discrepancy can be resolved. It becomes possible.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 192 to 207, in a control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which the performance control board 130 can execute a performance according to a command, the performance Even if the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped while the power supply to the control board 130 continues, the previous display screen can continue to be displayed. Therefore, when the power supply to the main control means is stopped, the player is not made to feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 192 to 207, in a control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which the performance control board 130 can execute a performance according to a command, the performance Even if the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed after the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped while the power supply to the control board 130 continues, the previous display screen can be continuously displayed. . Therefore, when the power supply to the main control means is resumed, the player will not feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

Note that the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute performances according to commands are a customer waiting state, a fluctuating performance, and a jackpot performance. The state of waiting for a command (for example, while the initial screen is being displayed) may also be included in the control state in which the performance control board 130 can execute a performance according to the command.

(Specific example when the connection status of various detection means changes)
FIGS. 208(a) and 208(b) are diagrams showing specific examples when the connection states of various detection means change during the customer waiting state.

Here, the wiring from the first starting port detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a are combined into one connector, and this connector is connected to the connector of the main control board 110. shall be.

First, FIG. 208(a) will be explained.
FIG. 208(a) is a diagram showing a specific example when the connection state of the first starting port detection switch 45a changes during the customer waiting state.

It is assumed that the first starting port detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a are normally connected to the main control board 110 at timing T1. At this time, the image display device displays a first standby screen in which the production symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display). .

At timing T2, for example, if the connector connected to the main control board 110 becomes half-plugged and only the first starting port detection switch 45a becomes unconnected, the main control board 110 detects the occurrence of a connection error. Then, connection error notification is executed by the production control board 130.

At this time, the image display device displays an error notification image EG including the words "Connection error detected" indicating that a connection error has occurred, and the audio output device 9 outputs an alarm and a message "Connection error detected." A connection error notification sound consisting of the voice is output.

At timing T3, when the half-insertion of the connector connected to the main control board 110 is released and the first starting port detection switch 45a returns to the connected state, the main control board 110 detects that the connection error has been released. However, the connection error notification continues until the gaming machine 1 is powered off.

Next, FIG. 208(b) will be explained.
FIG. 208(b) is a diagram showing a specific example when the connection state of the first starting port detection switch 45a, magnetic detection sensor 53a, and radio wave detection sensor 54a changes during the customer waiting state.

It is assumed that the first starting port detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a are normally connected to the main control board 110 at timing T1. At this time, the image display device displays a first standby screen in which the production symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display). .

At timing T2, for example, if the connector connected to the main control board 110 is in a half-plugged state and the first starting port detection switch 45a, magnetic detection sensor 53a, and radio wave detection sensor 54a are in an unconnected state, The main control board 110 detects the occurrence of a magnetic error, a radio wave error, and a connection error, and the production control board 130 executes a magnetic error notification, a radio wave error notification, and a connection error notification.

At this time, the image display device displays the words "Magnetic error detected" indicating the occurrence of a magnetic error, the words "Radio wave error detected" indicating the occurrence of a radio wave error, and the words "Connection error detected" indicating the occurrence of a connection error. An error notification image EG including the words ``Detection'' is displayed, and the audio output device 9 outputs a magnetic error notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying ``Magnetic error.''

At timing T3, when the half-insertion of the connector connected to the main control board 110 is released and the magnetic detection sensor 53a, the radio wave detection sensor 54a, and the first starting port detection switch 45a return to the connected state, the main control board 110, it is detected that the magnetic error, radio wave error, and connection error have been canceled, but various error notifications continue until the gaming machine 1 is powered off.

Note that if the signal line for command communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 changes from a connected state to an unconnected state, the main control board 110 will not detect the occurrence of a connection error and will not issue an error. Notification is not executed.

As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 208, specific detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection When the sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a change from a connected state to a disconnected state, an error notification is performed. Therefore, the occurrence of an abnormality (partially inserted connector, wire breakage, fraudulent activity) can be detected, and prompt response can be taken.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 208, specific detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a) for detecting a predetermined event (starting prize, magnetism, radio waves, etc.) is non-operating. Even when the connected state is restored from the connected state, error notification of magnetic errors and radio wave errors continues until the gaming machine 1 is powered off. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts against the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 208, even if the payout control board 120 changes from a connected state to an unconnected state, no error notification is performed. Therefore, in cases where the possibility of fraudulent activity is low, the game can be continued as is, and it is possible to prevent the game from becoming less interesting.

Note that this also applies when power supply to the gaming machine 1 is started while the specific detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a) connected to the main control board 110 is not connected. , various error notifications (connection error notification, magnetic error notification, in the same notification mode as in FIG. Radio wave error notification) may also be performed.

In this case, even if the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a change from the unconnected state to the connected state, the error notification (magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification) continues, but the first starting port detection switch 45a The connection error notification may be canceled when the state changes from the unconnected state to the connected state. In this way, the game can be continued as is in cases where the possibility of fraudulent activity is low, and it is possible to prevent the game from becoming less interesting.

In addition, the radio wave error notification sound related to a radio wave error that has a lower priority (importance) than a magnetic error, and the connection error notification sound related to a connection error that has a lower priority (importance) than a radio wave error, are considered to be magnetic errors. Although the notification sounds are not output when they occur simultaneously, the notification sounds related to the errors that have occurred may be output in order.

Furthermore, in magnetic error notification, radio error notification, and connection error notification, an error notification sound may be output without displaying the error notification image EG, or an error notification sound may be output while the error notification image EG is displayed. You may also choose not to output it.

In addition, when the first starting port detection switch 45a changes from the unconnected state to the connected state, it is assumed that a starting winning has occurred and special symbol determination information is acquired, and the first special symbol pending number (U1) is increased, thereby causing the special symbol A variable display or a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a, variable display of the special symbol) may be executed.

In addition, if the signal line for command communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 changes from a connected state to an unconnected state, the main control board 110 will not detect the occurrence of a connection error, and the error will occur. Although it has been described that the notification is not executed, the occurrence of an error may be detected and the error notification may be executed.

For example, if there are multiple signal lines for command communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120, and the first signal line changes from a connected state to an unconnected state, or When the main power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on while the line changes from a connected state to an unconnected state, it is detected that a certain payout abnormality has occurred (for example, some abnormality has occurred in the payout control board). ), the abnormality may be notified.
The notification is assumed to be, for example, a display or audio notification such as "Please check the payout control board."

In addition, if the second signal line among the plurality of signal lines goes from a connected state to an unconnected state, or when the second signal line goes from a connected state to an unconnected state, the main power supply of the gaming machine 1 When turned on, it may be possible to detect that a radio wave abnormality has occurred and notify that there is a radio wave error.

In addition, if the third signal line among the plurality of signal lines goes from a connected state to an unconnected state, or when the third signal line goes from a connected state to an unconnected state, the main power supply of the gaming machine 1 When turned on, the occurrence of an unrecoverable error may be detected and a notification may be made that the error is an unrecoverable error.
The notification is assumed to be, for example, a display or audio notification such as "Setting error, please change settings."

(Specific example of operating the operation panel while waiting for a customer)
Using FIG. 209, a specific example will be described in which the operation unit (production button 17, cross key 18) is operated while waiting for a customer.

As shown in FIG. 209(a), when the state shifts to a customer waiting state in which variable effects and jackpot effects are not executed, effective suggestion effects (introductory effects) indicating that a valid period may occur are not executed. Valid period while waiting for a customer during which the operations of the production button 17 and cross key 18 are valid (since the valid period while waiting for a customer is maintained until the fluctuating performance starts, it is longer than the various valid periods that occur during the fluctuating performance. (which can occur over a long period of time) is initiated.

At this time, a guide image AG (operation promotion image) is displayed on the lower right side of the first image display device 70 to guide the game assistance function started by operating the effect button 17 and the cross key 18. Specifically, a first image (an image imitating the effect button 17) suggesting that a menu is displayed by operating the effect button 17, and a volume adjustment possible by operating the up and down buttons of the cross key 18. A second image suggesting that the light intensity can be adjusted by operating the left and right buttons of the cross key 18 (an image that imitates the cross key 18 with bright up and down buttons) and a third image (an image that imitates the cross key 18 with bright colored up and down buttons) and a third image that suggests that the light amount can be adjusted by operating the left and right buttons of the A light-colored image imitating the cross key 18) is displayed.

When the production button 17 is operated in this state, the menu image MG is displayed so as to overlap in front of the production pattern 70a without the production button 17 vibrating, as shown in FIG. 209(b), and the menu image MG The display sound is output.

The menu image MG includes an "end" item for ending the menu display, a "model explanation" item for explaining the model, a "performance customization" item for setting the appearance rate of a predetermined effect (for example, confirmed effect, etc.), A "Pachilog" item has been set up to manage gaming history in conjunction with a mobile device (smartphone, etc.), and currently selected items are displayed in bright colors, while currently unselected items are displayed in dark colors. It is now displayed.

When the effect button 17 is operated with the "end" item selected, the menu image MG is erased without the effect button 17 vibrating, as shown in FIG. 209(c). Further, a sound for erasing the menu image MG is output, and the guide image AG is displayed again.

When the upper button of the cross key 18 is operated in this state, the volume value image OG indicating the current volume value is displayed without the effect button 17 or the cross key 18 vibrating, as shown in FIG. 209(d). At the same time, a confirmation sound is output at a volume corresponding to the current volume value.

When the upper button of the cross key 18 is operated while the volume value image OG is displayed, the volume value of the effect sound is updated by +1 without the effect button 17 or the cross key 18 vibrating. Then, the volume value image OG is updated to a volume value image OG corresponding to the updated volume value, and a confirmation sound is output at a volume corresponding to the updated volume value.

If a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds) passes without the cross key 18 being operated in this state, the volume value image OG is erased and the guide image AG is displayed again, as shown in FIG. 209(f). .

Note that while it is possible to adjust the volume value (adjust the light intensity value) while the volume value image OG remains displayed while waiting for a customer, while the variable display is being executed, It is possible to adjust the volume value (adjust the light amount value) without displaying the volume value image OG except for a part of the period. Thereby, it is possible to prevent an image corresponding to the variation effect from becoming difficult to see when displayed on the volume value image OG.

On the other hand, the confirmation sound at a volume corresponding to the current volume value is output while the variable display is being executed, as well as during the customer waiting state. This makes it possible to audibly recognize that the volume has been adjusted even while the variable display is being performed.
Note that while the variable display is being performed, the confirmation sound does not have to be output at a volume corresponding to the current volume value. This allows the player to concentrate on the variable performance sound.

In this way, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 209, the production buttons 17 related to various preview productions (line preview production, pseudo continuous production, development production, cut-in production, final production, etc.) that occur during the variable production are Even if the effect button 17 or cross key 18 is operated during the customer waiting period, which can occur for a period longer than the valid period, a vibration effect that causes the effect button 17 to vibrate (because the effect button 17 vibrates) (including indirect vibrations of the cross key 18 that are transmitted) are not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being surprised when the production button 17 or cross key 18 is operated while waiting for a customer, and it is possible to avoid inconveniences that may cause discomfort to the player. becomes.

In addition, the valid period of the cross key 18 related to the volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment that occur during the fluctuating performance (variable display of special symbols) and the jackpot performance (jackpot game) also differs depending on the various preview performances (speech lines) that occur during the fluctuating performance. This can occur over a period longer than the validity period of the preview performance, pseudo-sequence performance, development performance, cut-in performance, final performance, etc.), but during the validity period of the cross key 18 related to volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment. Even if the cross key 18 is operated, the vibration effect that causes the effect button 17 to vibrate (including the indirect vibration of the cross key 18 transmitted by the vibration of the effect button 17) is not executed. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being surprised during the variable performance or the jackpot performance, and it is possible to avoid inconveniences that may cause discomfort to the player.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 209, regarding the validity period while waiting for a customer, the validity suggestion effect (introduction performance) that suggests that the validity period may occur before the validity period occurs is not executed. It looks like this. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming defensive even though information useful to the player (effects that make the player expect a jackpot game to be executed) is not executed, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. This makes it possible to avoid inconveniences such as

In addition, regarding the valid period of the cross key 18 related to the volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment that occur during variable effects (variable display of special symbols) and jackpot effects (jackpot games), effective suggestion effects (introduced) before the effective period occurs. (direction) will not be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming defensive even though information useful to the player (effects that make the player expect a jackpot game to be executed) is not executed, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. This makes it possible to avoid inconveniences such as

Furthermore, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 209, during the customer waiting period that can occur for a period longer than the period of validity of the performance button 17 (the display period of the operation promotion image) that occurs during the variable performance, The effective period (operation) of the production button 17 related to various preview productions (line preview production, pseudo-continuation production, development production, cut-in production, final production, etc.) that occur during variable production is more important than when the production button 17 is operated. When the effect button 17 is operated during the display of the promotion image, the vibration effect that causes the effect button 17 to vibrate is more likely to be executed. Therefore, the performance effect of the variable performance can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 209, the effective period of the performance button 17 related to various preview performances that occur during the variable performance includes a relatively short first valid period (operation promotion related to dialogue preview performances, etc.). There is a relatively long second validity period (validity period accompanied by the display of images) and a relatively long second validity period (validity period accompanied by the display of operation promotion images related to fixed performances, etc.), but the validity period of the production button 17 that occurs during variable production When the performance button 17 is operated during the second valid period, the performance button 17 will be It is easier to perform a vibrating effect. Therefore, the performance effect of the variable performance can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Note that when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period while waiting for a customer, a vibration effect may be executed in which the effect button 17 vibrates at a predetermined rate. At a lower rate than when the production button 17 is operated during the effective period of the production button 17 related to various preview productions (line preview production, pseudo-continuation production, development production, cut-in production, decisive production, etc.) that occur during the period. It is best to perform a vibration effect.

(Specific example when variable performance starts from customer waiting state)
A specific example of when a variable performance is started from a customer waiting state will be described using FIGS. 210 to 212. FIG. 210 is a timing chart in which the variable performance is started from the customer waiting state, and FIGS. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance corresponding to.

First, the timing T0 is the 0th frame after the start of the customer waiting state. At this timing, subtraction of the waiting time (30 seconds) for starting the customer waiting demonstration performance is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 211(a), on the first image display device 70, the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are in a stopped display state. In addition, "0" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F, and the reservation icon and the icon TI are not displayed. .

The timing of T1 is the timing when the first special figure pending number (U1) increases from "0" to "1" (4th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, a non-animated increase display of the first special figure reservation number and a non-animation increase display of the first reservation icon (completed in one frame) are performed, and the first occurrence, which is the notification sound when the icon occurs, is performed. The output of the notification sound starts.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 211(b), in the first image display device 70, the first special symbol reservation number displayed in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1". ", and the first pending icon (white icon) H11 is displayed in the normal size on the first display section 70B1. Further, the audio output device 9 outputs a first occurrence notification sound (picot).

The timing of T2 is the timing when the number of reserved special symbols (U1) decreases from "1" to "0" and the variable performance (variable display of special symbols) based on the normal variable pattern starts (start of customer waiting state). 5th frame). At this timing, the production symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a variable manner, the first special symbol pending number is displayed as a non-animated decrease, and the first pending icon is displayed as an animated change (decrease display). will be started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 211(c), in the first image display device 70, the first special symbol reservation number displayed in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0". ”, and the first pending icon (white icon) H11 displayed on the first display section 70B1 starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Moreover, the special symbol TZ starts scrolling at the same time that the performance symbol 70a starts to be reduced in size (preparation operation) in a state where it is not scrolled (updated to another performance symbol).

The timing of T3 is the 10th frame after the output of the first notification sound starts (the 14th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the output of the first occurrence notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 211(d), in the first image display device 70, the movement (shift) of the first pending icon (white icon) H11 to the icon display area 70C continues, and the presentation The reduced display (preparation operation) of the symbol 70a continues.

The timing of T4 is the 20th frame after the change display (decreasing display) of the first hold icon starts (the 25th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the changing display of the first pending icon ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 211(e), in the first image display device 70, the first pending icon H11 that has moved from the first display section 70B1 is located at the center of the icon display area 70C, and When the icon becomes TI, the reduced display (preparation operation) of the production pattern 70a stops.

The timing of T5 is the 40th frame after the start of the variable effect (45th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 211(f), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling (downward movement) of the effect pattern 70a in the left variable display area, the center variable display Scroll (downward movement) of the effect pattern 70a in the area is started.

The timing of T6 is the 50th frame after the start of the variable effect (55th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 212(g), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling (downward movement) of the effect pattern 70a in the center variable display area, the right variable display Scrolling (downward movement) of the effect pattern 70a in the area is started, and the effect pattern 70a is in a scrolling state in all the variable display areas.

The timing of T7 is the 225th frame from the start of the variable effect (230th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 212(h), in the first image display device 70, the "3" effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped (in a swinging state) in the left variable display area, and The effect pattern 70a continues to scroll in the center and right side variable display areas.

The timing of T8 is the 255th frame after the start of the variable effect (260th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 212(i), in the first image display device 70, the "5" effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped (in a swinging state) in the right-hand variable display area, and The effect pattern 70a continues to scroll in the central variable display area.

The timing of T9 is the 285th frame after the start of the variable effect (290th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 212(j), in the first image display device 70, the "6" effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped (in a swaying state) in the central variable display area, and the result is a loss. A state is reached in which a combination of effect patterns 70a indicating a certain thing is displayed.

The timing of T10 is the 300th frame after the start of the variable effect (305th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the variable display of the special symbol TZ end.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 212(k), in the first image display device 70, the effect pattern 70a that had been temporarily stopped in the left center right variable display area is stopped and displayed, and the special pattern TZ is It is stopped and displayed at the same combination "365" as the symbol 70a. Furthermore, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

In this way, when the number of reserved special drawings increases (changes from "0" to "1") while waiting for a customer, the number of reserved numbers and the non-animated increase of the reserved icon will be displayed for the shortest time, 1 frame. Since it ends in a period (hour) of minutes, it is possible to immediately shift to a variable effect (displaying a decrease in the pending number and displaying a change in the pending icon) to avoid delays, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. becomes.

In addition, the occurrence notification sound that is output in synchronization with the start of the increasing display of the pending digits and the pending icon is a frame after the timing (frame update) at which the increasing display of the pending digits and the pending icon ends (frame update). Since this continues until the update timing, it is possible to make the player reliably aware that the number of reserved special symbols has increased, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the number of reserved special drawings decreases (changes from "1" to "0"), a non-animated reduction display of the reserved number and an animated change display of the reserved icon to the corresponding icon are performed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player reliably aware that the number of reserved special figures has decreased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, since the timing at which the display of the decrease in the number of pending numbers is completed (frame update) is earlier than the timing at which the change display of the pending icon to the corresponding icon is completed (frame update), the special figure is pending. While presenting the effect that the number changes, it becomes easier for the player to understand that the number of reserved special symbols has decreased due to the reserved numbers, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, until the change display of the pending icon to the corresponding icon is completed, the effect pattern will not scroll (not updated to the next effect pattern), and the effect pattern will be changed at the timing when the change display of the pending icon is completed (frame update). Since the scrolling (updating to the next effect symbol) starts, it becomes easier to understand the progress of the game, in which the variable effect starts after the pending memory decreases, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

In addition, when the number of special drawings on hold increases (changes from "0" to "1") while waiting for a customer, instead of displaying an increase in the number of hold icons without animation, it is displayed instead of increasing the number on hold. The animation may be executed over multiple frames (for example, 5 frames) so as to continue for a long time. By doing so, it becomes easier for the player to understand the increase in the number of reserved special drawings, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, instead of starting the display of a decrease in the pending number and the display of the change of the pending icon to the corresponding icon (decrease display) at the same timing (frame update), the display of the decrease in the pending number is completed (frame update). You can start either one first, if it's faster. By doing this, it is possible to grasp at an early stage that the number of reserved special figures has decreased while improving the degree of freedom in display control, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, instead of starting the scrolling of the effect symbols (updating to the next effect symbol) at the timing when the change display of the pending icon is completed (frame update) (the start is delayed than usual), the change display of the pending icon is It may be possible to start scrolling (updating to the next effect pattern) of the effect pattern at a timing slightly before completion (frame update).

(Specific example when the number of reservations increases during variable performance)
A specific example when the number of reservations increases during a variable performance will be explained using FIGS. 213 and 214. FIG. 213 is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases during a variable performance, and FIGS. 214(a) to (c) are diagrams showing examples of performances corresponding to (a) to (c) in FIG. 213.

First, the timing T1 is the 50th frame after the start of the variation effect based on the normal variation pattern. At this timing, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 214(a), in the first image display device 70, the effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are scrolled (moved downward). Further, "0" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F, and the corresponding icon (white icon) TH is displayed.

The timing of T2 is the timing when the first special figure reservation number (U1) increases from "0" to "1" (60th frame from the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the non-animated increasing display of the first special figure pending number and the animated increasing display of the first pending icon are started, and the output of the first occurrence notification sound, which is the notification sound when the icon occurs, is started. Ru.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 214(b), in the first image display device 70, the first special symbol reservation number displayed in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1". '', and the first hold icon (white icon) H11 is displayed in a very small size on the first display section 70B1, and enlarged display starts. Further, the audio output device 9 outputs a first occurrence notification sound (picot).

The timing of T3 is the 10th frame after the start of increasing display of the first pending icon (70th frame from the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the increasing display of the first hold icon ends, and the output of the first occurrence notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 214(c), in the first image display device 70, the enlarged display of the first pending icon (white icon) displayed on the first display section 70B1 is finished, and the first pending icon (white icon) is displayed in the normal size. Is displayed.

In this way, when the number of special drawings on hold increases, the number on hold is displayed non-animated and the number on hold is displayed as an animation. This makes it possible to make the game more interesting.

In addition, the number of reserved special drawings changes because the timing at which the increase in the number of pending numbers is completed (frame update) is earlier than the timing at which the increase in the number of pending icons is completed (frame update). While presenting this effect, it becomes easier for the player to understand that the number of reserved special symbols has increased based on the reserved numbers, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Additionally, if the number of special drawings on hold increases during the execution of a variable effect, the increased display of the holding icon will be executed for a longer period of time compared to the case where the number of special drawings on hold increases while waiting for a customer. Therefore, it is possible to make the player reliably aware that the number of reserved special figures has increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, since the notification sound that is output in synchronization with the start of the increasing display of the pending number and the pending icon ends in synchronization with the timing when the increasing display of the pending icon ends (frame update), the special figure pending It is possible to effectively represent the increase in the number of games, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the period for displaying an increase in the number of pending icons (10 frames) is shorter than the period for displaying a change in the number of pending icons (20 frames), so it is easy to know that the variable effect will start. This makes it possible to enhance the interest of the game.

In addition, instead of starting the increasing display of the pending digits and the increasing display of the pending icon at the same timing (frame update), if the timing for the increasing display of the pending digits to complete (frame updating) is earlier, which one? may be started first. By doing so, it is possible to grasp at an early stage that the number of reserved special drawings has increased, while improving the degree of freedom in display control, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, instead of making the period for displaying an increase in the number of pending icons shorter than the period for displaying a change in the number of pending icons, the period for displaying an increasing number of pending icons may be made longer. By doing so, it is possible to emphasize that the number of reserved special drawings has increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, instead of making the period for displaying an increase in the number of pending icons shorter than the period for displaying a change in the number of pending icons, both periods may be made to have the same length.

(Specific example when the number of reservations increases immediately after decreasing)
A specific example in which the number of reservations increases immediately after decreasing will be described with reference to FIGS. 215 and 216. FIG. 215 is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases immediately after decreasing, and FIGS. 216(a) to (f) are diagrams showing examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (f) in FIG. 215.

First, the timing T0 is the fifth frame after the effect pattern 70a is stopped and displayed. At this timing, the stop display of the effect pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 216(a), on the first image display device 70, the effect symbols 70a of "4", "6", "8" indicating a loss, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state. It becomes. Further, "2" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second special figure reservation number display area 70F. Further, a first hold icon (white icon) H11 is displayed on the first display section 70B1, a first hold icon (white icon) H12 is displayed on the second display section 70B2, and the icon TI is not displayed. It is in a state.

The timing of T1 is the timing at which the variable performance (variable display of special symbols) based on the normal variation pattern is started (the 20th frame after the performance symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a variable manner, the first special symbol pending number is displayed as a non-animated decrease, the first pending icon is displayed as an animated change to the corresponding icon, and the first pending icon is displayed as a non-animated change. Animated display of decrease starts.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 216(b), in the first image display device 70, the first special symbol reservation number displayed in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1". ”. Further, the first pending icon (white icon) H11 displayed on the first display section 70B1 starts to move (shift) toward the icon display area 70C, and the first pending icon (white icon) H11 that was displayed on the second display section 70B2 1 hold icon (white icon) H12 starts moving (shifting) toward the first display section 70B1. Further, the performance symbol 70a starts to be reduced in size (preparation operation) without being scrolled (updated to another performance symbol), and the special symbol TZ starts scrolling.

The timing of T2 is the timing when the first special symbol reservation number (U1) increases from "1" to "2" (30th frame after the production symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the non-animated increasing display of the first special figure pending number starts, but since the first pending icon is changing and decreasing, the first pending icon is increasing and the icon The output of the occurrence notification sound, which is the notification sound at the time of occurrence, is put on standby.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 216(c), in the first image display device 70, the first special symbol reservation number displayed in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2". ”, and the reduced display (preparatory action) of the effect pattern 70a continues.

The timing of T3 is the 20th frame after the change display of the first pending icon and the start of the decrease display (40th frame after the production pattern 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the change display and the decrease display of the first pending icon end. Further, the animation of the first pending icon that has been on standby starts to be displayed in increasing numbers, and the output of the first occurrence notification sound, which is the notification sound when the icon is generated, is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 216(d), in the first image display device 70, the first pending icon H11 that has moved from the first display section 70B1 is located at the center of the icon display area 70C, and When the icon becomes TI, the first pending icon H12 that has moved from the second display section 70B2 is located at the center of the first display section 70B1, and the reduced display (preparation operation) of the performance symbol 70a stops. Further, the first hold icon (white icon) H13 is displayed in a very small size on the second display section 70B2 and starts to be enlarged, and at the same time, the output of the first occurrence notification sound (picot) from the audio output device 9 is started. Ru.

The timing of T4 is the 5th frame after the start of increasing display of the first pending icon (45th frame after the effect pattern 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the increasing number of the first hold icons and the output of the first occurrence notification sound continue.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 216(e), in the first image display device 70, the first pending icon (white icon) H13 is displayed in a small size on the second display section 70B2, and the enlarged display continues. At the same time, the output of the first occurrence notification sound (pico) from the audio output device 9 continues. Further, scrolling (downward movement) of the effect pattern 70a in the left variable display area is started.

The timing of T5 is the 10th frame after the start of increasing display of the first pending icon (50th frame after the effect pattern 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the increasing display of the first hold icon ends, and the output of the first occurrence notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 216(f), in the first image display device 70, the enlarged display of the first pending icon (white icon) displayed on the first display section 70B1 is finished, and the first pending icon (white icon) is displayed in the normal size. Is displayed. Further, scrolling (downward movement) of the effect pattern 70a in the central variable display area is started.

In this way, if the number of special drawings on hold increases while displaying a change in the pending icon to the corresponding icon and displaying a decrease in the number of pending icons, this change display and decrease display will be completed. (Frame update) Even before the timing, the number on hold will start to increase, so even if the number on hold icon is changing and displaying a decrease, the player will be able to see that the number on hold has increased. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, if the number of special drawings on hold increases while displaying a change in the hold icon to the corresponding icon and displaying a decrease in the number of hold icons, the display of an increase in the hold icon and the output of the occurrence notification sound will be on standby ( (restriction), and at the timing when the change display and decrease display of the hold icon is completed (frame update), the increase display of the hold icon and the output of the occurrence notification sound are started, so the change in the number of special drawings held It is possible to prevent the game from becoming difficult to grasp, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, instead of outputting the occurrence notification sound in synchronization with the increase display of the hold icon that is executed after the increase display of the hold number, the occurrence notification sound is output in synchronization with the increase display of the hold number. Good too.

In addition, instead of starting to display an increase in the number of pending icons and outputting the occurrence notification sound at the timing when the display of the pending icon changes and decreasing display is completed (frame update), (the start is delayed from normal), The increasing display of the pending icon and the output of the occurrence notification sound may be started at a timing (frame update) slightly before the changing display of the pending icon and the decreasing display are completed (frame update). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the change in the number of reserved special drawings from becoming difficult to grasp, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, even if the number of special drawings on hold increases while the number of hold icons is increasing, the display of the number of hold icons will increase and the output of the occurrence notification sound will be on standby in the same way as when the number of hold icons is changing or decreasing. On the other hand, it is sufficient to start displaying an increasing number of pending digits, and to start displaying an increasing number of pending icons and outputting an occurrence notification sound at the timing when displaying an increasing number of pending icons is completed (frame update).

(Specific example when the number of reservations increases during a specific reach performance)
A specific example when the number of reservations increases during a specific reach performance will be explained using FIGS. 217 and 218. FIG. 217 is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases during a specific reach effect, and FIGS. 218(a) to (f) are diagrams showing examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (f) in FIG. 217. .

First, the timing T1 is the 400th frame after the start of the variation effect based on the SP reach variation pattern. At this timing, the normal reach effect executed before the SP reach effect and the variable display of the special symbol TZ continue.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 218(a), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "5" is temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas, and the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped in the center variable display area. The variable display of 70a continues. Further, "1" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second special figure reservation number display area 70F. Furthermore, the first hold icon (white icon) H11 is displayed on the first display section 70B1, and the icon (white icon) TH is also displayed.

The timing of T2 is the 90th frame from the start of the normal reach effect (430th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the development performance for developing into the SP reach performance is started.

Specifically, in the first image display device 70, the "5" effect pattern 70a temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas and the effect pattern 70a scrolling in the center variable display area are displayed on the screen. The movement to the upper left and the reduced display are started, and the effect pattern 70a changes to a simple display mode in which only the numbers are enlarged.

The timing of T3 is the 15th frame after the start of the development effect (the 445th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the development performance for developing into the SP reach performance is continuing.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 218(b), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "75" is temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas, and the effect symbol 70a is displayed in the center variable display area. The scrolling performance pattern 70a is displayed at a position close to the upper left of the screen, and is also displayed in a smaller size than the normal size.

The timing of T4 is the 30th frame after the start of the development effect (460th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, while the development performance ends, the SP reach performance starts.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 218(c), in the first image display device 70, the effect pattern 70a in the variable display area at the center left is displayed in a reduced size at the upper left of the screen, and at the center of the screen. A confrontation performance in which an ally character C2 and an enemy character C3 confront each other begins. In addition, the pending icons (here, (only the first hold icon) is hidden together with the hold icon display area. Furthermore, the special symbol TZ becomes a ready-to-reach state with the same “7” symbol as the performance symbol 70a.

The timing of T5 is the timing when the first special figure reservation number (U1) increases from "1" to "2" (820th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the non-animated increasing display of the first special figure pending number starts, but since the SP reach effect (showdown effect) is being executed, the first pending icon increases and the icon occurs at this timing. The output of the occurrence notification sound, which is the notification sound of the time, will not be performed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 218(d), in the first image display device 70, the first special symbol reservation number displayed in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2". ”, and the final performance of the showdown performance (a decisive performance to notify whether or not it is a jackpot) is executed.

The timing of T6 is the 420th frame after the start of the SP reach effect (confrontation effect) (880th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the result of the final performance (decisive performance) of the confrontation performance is derived.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 218(e), on the first image display device 70, an effect is performed in which the ally character C2 wins against the enemy character C3, and the effect pattern 70a that is displayed in a reduced size at the upper left of the screen is displayed. The game will temporarily stop (it will be in an oscillating state) at the combination ("555") that indicates a jackpot.

The timing of T7 is the 450th frame after the start of the SP reach effect (confrontation effect) (910th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the SP reach effect (confrontation effect) ends, and the first pending icon is returned to the non-animated state and is displayed in an increased manner.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 218(f), in the first image display device 70, the effect pattern 70a that had been displayed in a reduced size at the top left of the screen is enlarged and displayed in the center of the screen and temporarily stopped (in a swaying state). become). Further, the first pending icon (white icon) H11 is redisplayed on the first display section 70B1, and the first pending icon (white icon) H12 is displayed in normal size on the second display section 70B2.

Then, the effect pattern 70a, which had been temporarily stopped in the left-center right variable display area, returns to the display mode consisting of characters and numbers, and finally, the effect pattern 70a stops displaying, and the special pattern TZ It is stopped and displayed at the same combination "555" as the production pattern 70a. Furthermore, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

In this way, if the number of reserved special symbols increases during the execution of a specific production (SP reach production), even before the timing when this specific production ends (frame update), the number of pending numbers will increase. Since the increase display starts, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the number of reserved special drawings increases during the execution of a specific performance (SP reach performance), the execution of the increase display of the pending icon is put on standby (restricted), and the specific performance ends (the display is reduced). Since the number of pending icons starts to be displayed at the same time as the loss effect symbol or the jackpot effect symbol is enlarged (frame updated), it is possible to prevent the change in the number of reserved special symbols from becoming difficult to grasp, improving the interest of the game. It becomes possible to do so.

In addition, when starting to display an increase in the number of pending icons at the timing when a specific performance (SP reach performance) ends, the number of pending icons is increased by non-animation that can be completed in one frame, so the timing when the number of reserved special drawings increases Even if there is an extreme lag between the timing of displaying an increased number of pending icons and the timing of displaying an increased number of pending icons, it is possible to reduce the player's discomfort and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when starting to display an increasing number of pending icons at the timing when a specific performance (SP reach performance) ends, the occurrence notification sound is not output, so the number of special symbols on hold increases at the timing when the specific performance ends due to the occurrence notification sound. This makes it difficult for players to misunderstand that they have played the game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, even if the number of special drawings on hold increases multiple times during the execution of a specific performance (SP reach performance), while displaying an increase in the number of reservations, the system waits for the display of an increase on the reservation icon to be executed (restriction). It is preferable to display the increased number of pending icons in one frame at the timing when the specific effect is finished (frame update).

In addition, if the number of special symbols on hold increases during the execution of a specific performance (SP reach performance), instead of not outputting the occurrence notification sound, the occurrence notification sound is output in synchronization with the display of the increase in the number of reservations. Good too.

Moreover, although the SP reach-to-reach performance has been illustrated as the specific performance, the specific performance may include the SPSP reach-to-reach performance or may include the full-rotation reach-to-reach performance.

(Specific example of when the number of reservations increases or decreases before and after the end of a specific gaming state)
A specific example in which the number of reservations increases or decreases before and after the end of a specific gaming state will be explained using FIGS. 219 to 221. FIG. 219 is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases and decreases before and after the end of a specific gaming state, and FIGS. 220(a) to (f) and FIGS. 221(g) to (i) are shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance corresponding to (i).

First, the timing T1 is the 400th frame after the last (100th) variable performance in the specific gaming state is started. At this timing, the variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 220(a), "1" is displayed in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E, and "4" is displayed in the second special symbol reservation number display area 70F. ing. In addition, the first pending icon display area 70B is erased, and second pending icons (white icons) H21 to H24 are displayed in the first display section 70D1 to fourth display section 70D4 of the second pending icon display area 70D, respectively. and the icon TI is displayed. Furthermore, at the top of the screen, the number of variable effects that can be performed in a specific gaming state (here, "0 times remaining") is displayed, and at the top right of the screen, the game ball is displayed toward the right area of the game area 5a. A right-handed image MU is displayed that encourages firing.

The timing of T2 is the timing when the first special figure reservation number (U1) increases from "1" to "2" (415th frame after the start of the variable production). At this timing, the non-animated increasing display of the first special figure pending number starts, but since the first pending icon display area 70B is erased, the increasing display of the first pending icon and the notification sound when the icon occurs Therefore, the output of the occurrence notification sound will not be performed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 220(b), in the first image display device 70, the first special symbol reservation number displayed in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2". ”, and the scrolling of the effect pattern 70a continues.

The timing of T3 is the 430th frame after the start of the variable effect. At this timing, the performance symbols 70a that have been variably displayed in the left-center-right variable display area temporarily stop at the same time.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 220(c), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "285" is temporarily stopped (in a swaying state) in the variable display area at the center left, and A state is reached in which a combination of performance symbols 70a indicating a loss is displayed.

The timing of T4 is the 15th frame after the effect pattern 70a temporarily stops (445th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, a result display is started showing the results of the game during a predetermined advantageous period (while the jackpot game and the specific game state continue).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 220(d), in the first image display device 70, the background image HG becomes dark, and "Special Time End" indicating the end of the specific gaming state and a predetermined advantageous period are displayed. The characters "Jackpot x 1" are displayed, indicating the number of jackpot games played during the game. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is displayed in a reduced size at the upper left of the screen.

The timing of T5 is the 15th frame after the start of the result display (460th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the result display continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 220(e), the first image display device 70 displays the words "TOTAL 1200pt" indicating the number of game balls acquired (paid out) during a predetermined advantageous period. Additional information will be displayed.

The timing of T6 is the 30th frame after the start of the result display (475th frame from the start of the variable performance). At this timing, the variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the variable display of the special symbol TZ end.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 220(f), in the first image display device 70, the effect pattern 70a that was temporarily stopped at the upper left of the screen moves to the center of the screen and is stopped, and the special pattern TZ It is stopped and displayed at the same combination "285" as the production pattern 70a. Furthermore, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

The timing of T7 is the timing when the last (100th) variable performance in the specific gaming state ends and the first variable performance in the normal gaming state starts (490th frame from the start of the variable performance). At this timing, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a variable manner, the second pending number is displayed as a non-animated decrease, the second pending icon changes to the corresponding icon through animation, and the second pending icon is decreased due to animation. display, non-animated return display of the first pending icon, and non-animated increased display of the first pending icon.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 221(g), in the first image display device 70, the second reservation number in the second special symbol reservation number display area 70F changes from "4" to "3", The second hold icon (white icon) H21 displayed on the first display section 70D1 starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C, and is displayed on the second display section 70D2 to fourth display section 70D4. The second pending icons (white icons) H22 to H24 that have been displayed start moving (shifting) toward the next adjacent display section.

In addition, the first pending icon display area returns and the first pending icon (white icon) H11 is restored and displayed on the first display section 70B1, and the first pending icon (white icon) H12 is displayed on the second display section 70B2. Displayed in normal size. Further, the performance symbol 70a starts to be reduced in size (preparation operation) without being scrolled (updated to another performance symbol), and the special symbol TZ starts scrolling. Further, a left-handed hitting image HU is displayed at the upper left of the screen, which prompts the user to shoot the game ball toward the left side area of the game area 5a.

The timing of T8 is the 20th frame after the start of the change display and the decrease display of the second pending icon (510th frame from the start of the previous variation effect). At this timing, the change display and the decrease display of the second pending icon end.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 221(h), in the first image display device 70, the second pending icon H21 that has moved from the first display section 70D1 is located at the center of the icon display area 70C, and As soon as the icon becomes TI, the second pending icons H22 to H24 that have been moved from the second display section 70D2 to the fourth display section 70D4 are located at the center of the adjacent display section, and the reduced display (preparation operation) of the performance symbol 70a is Stop.

The timing of T9 is the 10th frame after the end of the change display and the decrease display of the second pending icon (520th frame from the start of the previous fluctuating effect). At this timing, the scrolling (downward movement) of the effect pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 221(i), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling of the effect pattern 70a in the left variable display area, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled in the center variable display area. Scrolling (downward movement) is started.

In this way, when the first special figure pending number (U1) increases during a specific gaming state, while waiting (restricting) the increasing display of the first pending icon, the increasing display of the first special figure pending number is Therefore, the player can be made aware that the number of reserved special symbols has increased even during execution of a specific performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the first special figure pending number (U1) increases during a specific gaming state, an increase in the first pending icon will be displayed at the timing when the specific gaming state (the last variable effect) ends (frame update). Even if you miss the display of an increase in the number of reserved first special drawings that was executed before, you can recognize that the number of reserved first special drawings has increased, increasing the interest of the game. It becomes possible to improve the performance.

In addition, when starting to display an increasing number of first pending icons at the timing when a specific gaming state (the last variable effect in) ends, the number of pending icons is increased by non-animation that can be completed in one frame, so the special figure pending Even if there is an extreme difference between the timing at which the number increases and the timing at which the display of an increased number of pending icons is executed, the player's sense of discomfort can be reduced and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, when starting to display an increasing number of pending icons at the timing when a specific gaming state (the last variable effect) ends, the occurrence notification sound is not output, so the special image is displayed at the timing when the specific gaming state ends due to the occurrence notification sound. This makes it difficult to mislead people into thinking that the number of reservations has increased, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, until the change display of the pending icon to the corresponding icon is completed, the effect pattern will not scroll (not updated to the next effect pattern), and the effect pattern will be changed at the timing when the change display of the pending icon is completed (frame update). Since the scrolling (updating to the next performance symbol) is started, it becomes easier to grasp the progress of the performance during the variable performance, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, even if the number of first special figures on hold increases by multiple numbers during a specific gaming state, while displaying an increase in the number of pending numbers, the display of an increase in the number of pending icons is on standby (restricted). It is only necessary to display an increase in the number of pending icons in one frame at the timing when the specific game state (the last variable effect) ends (frame update).

Further, when the number of first special symbols on hold increases during a specific gaming state, instead of not outputting the occurrence notification sound, the occurrence notification sound may be output in synchronization with the display of the increase in the number on hold.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the normal gaming state, the first pending icon display area 70B and the second pending icon display area 70D are set (displayed), but the second pending icon display area 70D is set (displayed). ), only the first pending icon display area 70B may be set (displayed).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the icon display area 70C is set (displayed) regardless of whether or not a specific performance (SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance, full rotation reach performance) is being executed during the variable performance. However, the icon may be hidden without setting (displaying) the icon display area 70C during execution of a specific effect, or the icon may be hidden without setting (displaying) the icon display area 70C during execution of a specific effect. The icon may be hidden.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the first special figure reserved number display area 70E and the second special figure reserved number display area 70F were set (displayed) on the first image display device 70, but the second image display device 71 It may be set (displayed) on a dedicated display different from the image display device (for example, a 7-segment LED, a dot matrix, a dedicated LED, etc.). If a dedicated LED is used, the number of reserved special symbols may be displayed by the lighting color and lighting/blinking mode of the LED.

(Example of performance when pre-reading action performance and step-up notice performance are executed)
With reference to FIGS. 222 and 223, an example of a performance when a prefetch action performance and a step-up notice performance are executed will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 222(a), on the first image display device 70, the production symbol 70a of "468" indicating a loss and the special symbol TZ are in a stopped state. Further, "3" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, and three white icons HI are displayed in the first reservation icon display area 70B. At this time, since the player is not waiting for a customer, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs (part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting dramatic light (a light emitting mode other than rainbow light).

When the fluctuation performance (corresponding to advance fluctuation) is started from this state, as shown in FIG. 222(b), the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E changes from "3" to "2", The two pending icons HI start moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the effect pattern 70a starts to be displayed in a reduced size (preparation operation), and the special pattern TZ starts to scroll.

At this timing, the first performance of the look-ahead motion performance that spans three variable performances is started. Specifically, as a weak preview of the look-ahead motion effect, the second movable member 74 emits blue light, performs a weak motion of moving toward the front of the first image display device 70, and outputs a weak motion sound effect. be done.

After that, immediately after the movement of the hold icon HI is completed, when the hold icon (left end in the figure) that is the preview target of the look-ahead action effect changes to a blue icon, the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a reduced size, as shown in FIG. 222(c). (Preparation operation) is completed, a scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) in the normal size is started, and then the second movable member 74 returns to the initial position and the first performance of the pre-reading action performance is completed. In addition, the prize opening lamp NR (not shown) emits light in the same blue color as the blue icon, and a lamp change effect is started.

Then, when the variable time period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 222(d), the production pattern 70a stops displaying when a losing number is "365", and the special symbol TZ stops displaying when a losing number shows "365". .

Furthermore, when the stop time of the production symbol has elapsed and the next variable production (corresponding to advance variation) is started, the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E is set to "2" as shown in FIG. 222(e). to "1", and the two pending icons HI start moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the effect pattern 70a starts to be displayed in a reduced size (preparation operation), and the special pattern TZ starts to scroll.

At this timing, the second performance of the look-ahead motion performance is started. Specifically, as a weak preview of the look-ahead motion effect, the second movable member 74 emits blue light, performs a weak motion of moving toward the front of the first image display device 70, and outputs a weak motion sound effect. be done.

After that, immediately after the movement of the hold icon HI is completed, when the hold icon that is the preview target of the look-ahead action effect changes to a red icon, the reduced display (preparation action) of the effect pattern 70a is displayed as shown in FIG. 222(f). After finishing, a scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) in the normal size is started, and then the second movable member 74 returns to the initial position, and the second performance of the look-ahead motion performance is completed. In addition, the winning opening lamp NR (not shown) emits the same red color as the red icon, and the lamp change effect continues.

Then, when the variable time period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 223(g), the performance symbol 70a stops displaying at the losing number of "635", and the special symbol TZ stops displaying at the losing number of "635". .

Furthermore, when the stop time of the production symbol has elapsed and the variation production (corresponding to the variation) that is the subject of advance notice of the look-ahead motion production is started, as shown in FIG. 223(h), the number of reserved special symbols is displayed. As the area 70E changes from "1" to "0", one pending icon HI starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the effect pattern 70a starts to be displayed in a reduced size (preparation operation), and the special pattern TZ starts to scroll.

At this timing, the third performance of the look-ahead motion performance is started. Specifically, as a strong preview of the look-ahead motion performance, the second movable member 74 emits red light, performs a strong motion of moving toward the front of the first image display device 70, and outputs a strong motion sound effect. be done.

After that, when the movement of the hold icon HI is completed, as shown in FIG. 223(i), the reduction display (preparation operation) of the effect pattern 70a ends, the scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) in the normal size starts, and then The second movable member 74 returns to the initial position, and the third performance of the pre-reading motion performance is completed.

Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) of the performance symbol 70a, the first step performance of the step-up preview performance is started, as shown in FIG. 223(j). Specifically, the first step image is displayed on the first image display device 70, and the first step sound effect is output. After that, the second to fourth step effects are sequentially executed.

Furthermore, when the fourth step effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 223(k), the fifth step effect is started, the fifth step image is displayed on the first image display device 70, and the fifth step sound effect is is output. In addition, a weak vibration effect is started in which the effect button 17 is weakly vibrated for one second while the effect button 17 remains off. However, since the execution of this weak vibration effect does not involve the effective period of the effect button 17, the sound effect when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the effect when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period. Although the effect sound (sound effect) at the time of the game is not output, the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the lamp change effect continue.

When one second passes, as shown in FIG. 223(l), the weak vibration of the effect button 17 stops and the weak vibration effect ends, and two seconds after that, the fifth step effect ends. After that, according to the variable performance pattern, the SP ready-to-reach performance is executed after the normal ready-to-reach performance is performed, or the SPSP ready-to-reach performance is performed after the normal reach performance is performed.

As described above, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 222 and 223, after the number of reserved special symbols displayed in the special symbol reserved number display area decreases with the start of the variable production (the production pattern 70a starts the preparation operation). The pre-reading operation effect (light emission and operation of the second movable member 74) is started before the scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) of the effect pattern 70a is started. Therefore, while letting the player know that the variable performance has started, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice that the pre-read motion performance is being executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the example effects shown in FIGS. 222 and 223, after the movement (shift) of the pending icon is started with the start of the variable effect, but before the movement of the pending icon is completed, the look-ahead motion effect is performed. (Light emission and operation of the second movable member 74) is started. Therefore, while letting the player know that the variable performance has started, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice that the pre-read motion performance is being executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 222 and 223, the vibration production is not performed during the first to fourth step production of the step-up notice production, but the vibration production is performed during the fifth step production, which has the highest expectation level. It is set to run. Therefore, it is possible to effectively improve the player's sense of expectation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 222 and 223, the execution period (1 second) of the vibration production executed during the 5th step production is longer than the execution period (3 seconds) of the 5th step production of the step-up notice production. seconds) is shorter. Therefore, the vibration effect does not surpass the appearance of the fifth step effect, and it is possible to improve the effect of the step-up notice effect. In addition, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the long vibration performance causes the player to misunderstand that a jackpot has been won, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 222 and 223, since the vibration production executed during the fifth step production does not involve the valid period of the production button 17 (display of the operation promotion image), the operation promotion image ( The sound effect when displaying the opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the effect sound when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period (operation sound effect, movable member operation sound effect, etc.) are no longer output. There is. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an inconvenience that confuses the player during the vibration performance without the validity period of the performance button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the example effects shown in FIGS. 222 and 223, even during the vibration effect of the effect button 17, the effect light emission and lamp change effects by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs continue. Therefore, by not performing processing such as temporarily stopping the effect light emission or lamp change effect due to the vibration effect accompanied by the valid period of the effect button 17, the effect can be maintained and the interest of the game can be improved. Become.

In addition, the production button 17 is designed not to emit light in the vibration production executed during the fifth step production in the step-up notice production, but the production button 17 can be held in a predetermined mode (for confirmation of jackpot) during the execution period of the vibration production. It may be made to emit light in a color other than the rainbow color that is the emitted light color, and in a light emitting manner different from the light emitting manner during the effective period of the effect button 17 (for example, white blinking, yellow blinking, etc.). In this way, it becomes easier to understand that the vibration effect is being executed, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, during a vibration effect that does not involve the effective period of the effect button 17, it is possible to draw attention to the effect button 17 by the lighting mode of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs (for example, moving light emitting light toward the effect button 17, etc.). It may also be possible to emit light for a dramatic effect.

(Example of production when pre-reading vibration production and dialogue preview production are executed)
With reference to FIGS. 224 and 225, an example of a performance when a pre-read vibration performance and a dialogue preview performance are executed will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 224(a), on the first image display device 70, the performance symbol 70a of "468" indicating a loss and the special symbol TZ are in a stopped display state. Further, "3" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, and three white icons HI are displayed in the first reservation icon display area 70B. At this time, since the player is not waiting for a customer, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs (part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting dramatic light (a light emitting mode other than rainbow light).

When the fluctuation performance (corresponding to advance fluctuation) is started from this state, as shown in FIG. 224(b), the first special symbol reserved number display area 70E changes from "3" to "2", The two pending icons HI start moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the effect pattern 70a starts to be displayed in a reduced size (preparation operation), and the special pattern TZ starts to scroll.

At this timing, the first performance of the pre-reading vibration performance that spans three variable performances is started. Specifically, as a weak preview of the pre-read vibration effect, the effect button 17 vibrates weakly for one second, and the effect button 17 flashes white for one second. However, since the execution of this weak vibration does not involve the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect sound when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) or the effect when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period Although the effect sound (sound effect) of the time is not output, the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs continues.

Thereafter, immediately after the movement of the hold icon HI is completed, when the hold icon (left end in the figure) that is the preview target of the pre-read vibration effect changes to a blue icon, the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a reduced size, as shown in FIG. 224(c). (Preparation operation) is completed, a scroll display in normal size (high-speed fluctuation) is started, and then the weak vibration and white blinking of the performance button 17 are stopped, and the first performance of the pre-read vibration performance is completed. In addition, the prize opening lamp NR (not shown) emits light in the same blue color as the blue icon, and a lamp change effect is started.

Then, when the variable time period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 224(d), the performance symbol 70a stops displaying when a losing number is "365", and the special symbol TZ stops displaying when a losing number shows "365". .

Furthermore, when the stop time of the production symbol has elapsed and the next variable production (corresponding to advance variation) is started, the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E is set to "2" as shown in FIG. 224(e). to "1", and the two pending icons HI start moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the effect pattern 70a starts to be displayed in a reduced size (preparation operation), and the special pattern TZ starts to scroll.

At this timing, the second performance of the pre-read vibration performance is started. Specifically, as a weak preview of the pre-read vibration effect, the effect button 17 vibrates weakly for one second, and the effect button 17 flashes white for one second. However, since the execution of this weak vibration does not involve the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect sound when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) or the effect when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period Although the effect sound (sound effect) of the time is not output, the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the lamp change effect continue.

After that, immediately after the movement of the hold icon HI is completed, when the hold icon that is the preview target of the pre-reading vibration effect changes to a red icon, the reduced display (preparatory action) of the effect pattern 70a is displayed as shown in FIG. 224(f). After the end, a scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) is started, and then the weak vibration and white blinking of the performance button 17 are stopped, and the second performance of the pre-reading vibration performance is completed. In addition, the winning opening lamp NR (not shown) emits the same red color as the red icon, and the lamp change effect continues.

Then, when the variable time period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 225(g), the performance symbol 70a stops displaying at the losing number of "635", and the special symbol TZ stops displaying at the losing number of "635". .

Furthermore, when the stop time of the performance symbol has elapsed and the fluctuation performance (corresponding to the fluctuation) that is the preview target of the pre-read vibration performance is started, as shown in FIG. 225(h), the number of reserved special symbols is displayed. As the area 70E changes from "1" to "0", one pending icon HI starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the effect pattern 70a starts to be displayed in a reduced size (preparation operation), and the special pattern TZ starts to scroll.

At this timing, the third performance of the pre-reading vibration performance is started. Specifically, as a strong preview of the pre-read vibration performance, the performance button 17 strongly vibrates for 3 seconds, and the performance button 17 flashes in red for 3 seconds. However, since the execution of this strong vibration does not involve the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect sound when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the sound effect when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period. Although the effect sound (sound effect) of the time is not output, the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the lamp change effect continue.

After that, when the movement of the hold icon HI is completed, as shown in FIG. 225(i), the reduction display (preparation operation) of the effect pattern 70a ends and the scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) starts, but the pre-reading vibration effect The strong warning will remain in place. Thereafter, the strong vibration and white flashing of the performance button 17 are stopped, and the third performance of the pre-read vibration performance is completed.

Then, when the third performance of the pre-reading vibration performance is completed and a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 225(j), the valid period of the performance button 17 (single press 3 seconds) occurs and the dialogue preview performance starts. be done. Specifically, an operation promotion image SG consisting of an opaque production button image imitating the production button 17 and a gauge image indicating the remaining validity period is displayed in the dialogue window image SW, and the operation promotion image SG is At the same time as the display sound effect is output, the effect button 17 emits white light.

Thereafter, when the production button 17 is operated or the validity period has elapsed, the heat line "What is this!? It's hot!!" is displayed in red letters, as shown in FIG. 225(k). , a sound (direction sound) corresponding to the heated dialogue is output. In addition, a weak vibration effect is started in which the effect button 17 is weakly vibrated for one second while the effect button 17 is turned off, but the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow emission) by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and The lamp change performance continues.

After one second has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 225(l), the weak vibration of the effect button 17 stops and the weak vibration effect ends. After that, a pseudo continuous effect is executed according to the variable effect pattern, a normal reach effect is executed, an SP reach effect is executed after a normal reach effect, or an SP SP reach effect is executed after a normal reach effect. It will be executed.

In this way, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 224 and 225, after the number of reserved symbols displayed in the first special symbol reserved number display area decreases with the start of the variable production (the production pattern 70a moves to prepare) The pre-reading vibration effect (vibration of the effect button 17, flashing white) is started before the start of the scroll display (high-speed fluctuation). Therefore, it is possible to make the player aware that the pre-read vibration performance is being executed while letting the player know that the variable performance has started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 224 and 225, the pre-reading vibration production is performed after the movement (shift) of the pending icon is started with the start of the variable production, but before the movement of the pending icon is completed. (Vibration of production button 17, flashing white) is started. Therefore, it is possible to make the player aware that the pre-read vibration performance is being executed while letting the player know that the variable performance has started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 224 and 225, when performing the pre-read vibration effect, the effect button 17 is made to flash white, although the effect period of the effect button 17 is not accompanied. Therefore, even when the performance button 17 is not operated, it is possible to easily make the player aware that the pre-read vibration performance is being executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 224 and 225, the lighting mode of the production button 17 in the pre-reading vibration production is different from that of the preview production (line preview production, pseudo continuous production, development production, cut-in production) with the occurrence of the valid period. This is different from the lighting mode of the performance button 17 during the valid period in (performance, fixed performance, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of causing the player to misunderstand that the effective period of the performance button 17 has expired in the pre-read vibration performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the performance examples shown in FIGS. 224 and 225, the pre-reach preview performance (line preview performance, step-up preview performance) is not executed until the pre-read vibration performance ends. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that it becomes difficult to notice due to the pre-ready notice performance that a pre-read vibration performance that is difficult to judge visually is being executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the example effects shown in FIGS. 224 and 225, the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed until the pre-reading vibration effect is completed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that it becomes difficult to notice that a pre-reading vibration performance that is difficult to judge visually is being executed due to the pseudo-continuous performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 224 and 225, the execution period (1 second) of the vibration production performed during the dialogue preview production is shorter than the execution period (3 seconds) of the speech preview production. ing. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the dialogue preview performance without the vibration performance being superior to the appearance of the dialogue preview performance. In addition, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the long vibration performance causes the player to misunderstand that a jackpot has been won, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the example effects shown in FIGS. 224 and 225, the vibration effect executed during the pre-reading vibration effect does not involve the valid period of the effect button 17 (display of the operation promotion image), so the operation promotion image (opaque The display sound effect when displaying the production button image, gauge image) and the production sound when the production button 17 is operated during the valid period (operation sound effect, movable member operation sound effect, etc.) are no longer output. There is. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an inconvenience that confuses the player during the vibration performance without the validity period of the performance button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 224 and 225, the vibration production performed during the speech preview production is accompanied by the valid period of the production button 17 (display of the operation promotion image), so the operation promotion image (opaque production A display sound effect when displaying a button image, a gauge image) and a production sound (operation sound effect, dialogue voice, etc.) when the production button 17 is operated during the valid period are output. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the dialogue preview performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 224 and 225, the execution period of the vibration production executed during the dialogue preview production is the same regardless of whether or not the production button 17 is operated during the valid period and the operation timing. ing. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to fully experience the vibration performance depending on whether or not the performance button 17 is operated and the timing of the operation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the example effects shown in FIGS. 224 and 225, even during the vibration effect accompanied by the valid period of the effect button 17, the effect light emission and lamp change effect by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs continue. There is. Therefore, by not performing processing such as temporarily stopping the effect light emission or lamp change effect due to the vibration effect accompanied by the valid period of the effect button 17, the effect can be maintained and the interest of the game can be improved. Become.

In addition, the production button 17 is designed not to emit light in the vibration production that is executed during the dialogue preview production, but the production button 17 is set in a predetermined mode (rainbow color, which is the emitting color that guarantees a jackpot) for the duration of the vibration production. It is also possible to emit light in a color other than the above, and in a light emitting manner different from the light emitting manner during the effective period of the effect button 17 (for example, white blinking, yellow blinking, etc.).

Furthermore, regarding the vibration performance that is executed during the dialogue preview performance, the timing is the same regardless of whether or not the performance button 17 is operated during the valid period and the operation timing (for example, the timing when the valid period expires when the performance button 17 is not operated) The vibration effect may be executed until 0.5 seconds after (the execution period of the vibration effect is variable).

In addition, during a vibration effect that does not involve the effective period of the effect button 17, it is possible to draw attention to the effect button 17 by the lighting mode of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs (for example, moving light emitting light toward the effect button 17, etc.). It may also be possible to emit light for a dramatic effect.

(Example of performance when pseudo continuous performance is executed before reach performance)
An example of a performance in a case where a pseudo-continuous performance is executed before a ready-to-reach performance will be described using FIG. 226.

First, as shown in FIG. 226(a), in the first image display device 70, a "6" effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped in the left area, a "5" effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped in the right area, In the middle area, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a continues. At this time, the pseudo consecutive success performance is started without the validity period of the performance button 17 occurring. Specifically, an inciting effect is executed in the middle region to incite whether or not a pseudo pattern suggesting the execution of a pseudo continuous effect will be temporarily stopped. At this time, since the player is not waiting for a customer, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs (part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting dramatic light (a light emitting mode other than rainbow light).

Thereafter, when the inciting effect ends, the pseudo symbol temporarily stops in the middle area and a success sound effect is output, as shown in FIG. 226(b). In addition, as shown in FIG. 226(c), the second movable member 74 emits blue light and makes a weak movement toward the front of the first image display device 70, and the effect pattern 70a changes again. “×2” indicating the number of pseudo fluctuations (the progress of the production stage) is displayed in blue.

Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 226(d), in the first image display device 70, the "6" effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped in the left area, and the "5" effect pattern is temporarily stopped in the right area. 70a is temporarily stopped, the fluctuating display of the performance pattern 70a continues in the middle area, and a pseudo-inciting performance is executed in the medium area to incite whether or not the pseudo pattern suggesting the execution of a pseudo series is temporarily stopped. At this time, the validity period of the production button 17 occurs, and an operation promotion image SG consisting of an opaque production button image imitating the production button 17 that emits white light and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the validity period is displayed, and the operation promotion image SG is displayed. The display sound effect of the promotion image SG is output, and the production button 17 emits white light.

After that, when the effect button 17 is operated or the validity period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 226(e), the pseudo symbol is temporarily stopped in the middle area as a pseudo continuous success effect, and a success sound effect is output. . In addition, a weak vibration effect is started in which the effect button 17 is turned off and the effect button 17 is vibrated weakly for one second, but the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow emission) by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs continues. are doing.

After one second has passed, as shown in FIG. 226(f), the weak vibration of the effect button 17 stops and the weak vibration effect ends. In addition, the second movable member 74 emits red light and makes a strong movement toward the front of the first image display device 70, and the effect pattern 70a changes again and the number of pseudo changes (the stage of the effect progresses). ``x3'' indicating what has been done) is displayed in red.

Thereafter, when the strong operation time (1 second) of the second movable member 74 has elapsed, the pseudo consecutive success effect ends, and as shown in FIG. is temporarily stopped and a normal reach effect is executed, and then, depending on the variable effect pattern, a normal reach effect is executed and then an SP reach effect is executed, or a normal reach effect is executed and then an SP SP reach effect is executed. It turns out.

(Example of a performance when a pseudo continuous performance is executed after a reach performance)
With reference to FIG. 227, an example of a performance in a case where a pseudo continuous performance is executed after a ready-to-reach performance will be described. Note that FIGS. 227(a) to 227(c) are the same as FIGS. 226(a) to 226(c), so a description thereof will be omitted here.

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the state of FIG. 227(c), as shown in FIG. 227(d), the "5" effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped in the left area and the right area, and the normal reach effect is started. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 227(e), when the pseudo-continuation effect is started, a pseudo-inciting effect is executed to incite whether or not the pseudo-symbols suggesting the execution of the pseudo-continuation will temporarily stop in the middle area. At this time, the validity period of the production button 17 occurs, and an operation promotion image SG consisting of an opaque production button image imitating the production button 17 that emits white light and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the validity period is displayed, and the production promotion image SG is displayed. Button 17 emits white light. At this time, since the player is not waiting for a customer, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs (part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting dramatic light (a light emitting mode other than rainbow light).

Thereafter, when the effect button 17 is operated or the validity period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 227(f), the pseudo symbols are temporarily stopped in the middle area as a pseudo continuous success effect, and a success sound effect is output. In addition, a weak vibration effect is started in which the effect button 17 is turned off and the effect button 17 is vibrated weakly for one second, but the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow emission) by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs continues. are doing.

After one second has passed, the weak vibration of the effect button 17 stops and the weak vibration effect ends, as shown in FIG. 227(g). In addition, the second movable member 74 emits red light and makes a strong movement toward the front of the first image display device 70, and the effect pattern 70a changes again and the number of pseudo changes (the stage of the effect progresses). ``x3'' indicating what has been done) is displayed in red.

After that, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 227(h), the "5" effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped in the left area and the right area, and the normal reach effect is executed, and thereafter, according to the variable effect pattern. After the normal reach effect is executed, the SP reach effect is executed, or after the normal reach effect is executed, the SPSP reach effect is executed.

In this way, according to the example effects shown in FIGS. 226 and 227, the vibration effect can be executed when the pseudo continuous effect is executed when the effective period of the effect button 17 occurs in the pseudo continuous effect. Therefore, it is possible to effectively improve the player's sense of expectation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 226 and 227, the execution period (1 second) of the vibration production executed during the pseudo consecutive success production is longer than the execution period (2 seconds) of the pseudo consecutive success production. It's shorter. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the pseudo consecutive success performance without the vibration performance being superior to the appearance of the pseudo consecutive success performance. In addition, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the long vibration performance causes the player to misunderstand that a jackpot has been won, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 226 and 227, since the vibration production executed during the pseudo continuous production is accompanied by the valid period of the production button 17 (display of the operation promotion image), the operation promotion image (opaque production Display sound effects when displaying a button image, gauge image) and performance sounds (operation sound effects, success sound effects, etc.) when the performance button 17 is operated during the valid period are output. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the pseudo continuous performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 226 and 227, the execution period of the vibration production executed in the pseudo-sequence production is the same regardless of whether or not the production button 17 is operated during the valid period and the operation timing. ing. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to fully experience the vibration performance depending on whether or not the performance button 17 is operated and the timing of the operation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 226 and 227, when the pseudo-continuous production is executed after the ready-to-reach production, the type of production symbol that forms the ready-to-win state after the execution of the pseudo-continuous production is the pseudo-continuous production. Downgrade from the type of production symbol that formed the reach state before execution (downgrade from reach with odd numbered symbols to reach with even numbered symbols, reach from reach with "7" symbol to reach with even numbered symbols or odd numbered symbols other than "7") (downgrade to 1). Therefore, the player will not feel dissatisfied with the execution of the pseudo-continuous performance, and the interest in the game will not be improved.

Furthermore, according to the example effects shown in FIGS. 226 and 227, even during the vibration effect accompanied by the valid period of the effect button 17, the effect light emission by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs continues. Therefore, the performance effect can be maintained by not performing processing such as temporarily stopping the performance light emission due to the vibration performance accompanied by the valid period of the performance button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the production button 17 is designed not to emit light in the vibration production executed during the pseudo continuous production, but the production button 17 is set in a predetermined mode (rainbow color, which is the emitting color that guarantees a jackpot) over the execution period of the vibration production. It is also possible to emit light in a color other than the above, and in a light emitting manner different from the light emitting manner during the effective period of the effect button 17 (for example, white blinking, yellow blinking, etc.).

In addition, regarding the vibration performance executed during the pseudo continuous performance, the timing is the same regardless of whether or not the performance button 17 is operated during the valid period and the operation timing (for example, the timing when the valid period expires when the performance button 17 is not operated) The vibration effect may be executed until 0.5 seconds after (the execution period of the vibration effect is variable).

Furthermore, although the effective period of the effect button 17 is generated during the pseudo continuous effect and the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed, the effective period of the effect button 17 is not generated during the pseudo continuous effect. The vibration effect may be executed, or the effect period of the effect button 17 may be made to occur, but the vibration effect may not be executed.

(Example of production when development production is executed and SP reach production is executed)
With reference to FIG. 228, an example of a performance in a case where the development performance is executed and the SP ready-to-reach performance is executed will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 228(a), the performance symbol 70a of "5" is temporarily stopped in the left area and the right area, and the normal reach performance is executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 228(b), when the SP development effect is started, the SPSP development symbol that suggests the development to the SP SP reach effect, the SP development symbol that suggests the development to the SP reach effect, the pseudo continuous effect A roulette performance is performed in which a plurality of special performance symbols, such as a pseudo symbol that suggests the execution of the ``game'' and a waste symbol that suggests that the performance will not develop (a loss), are displayed in a diagonal direction at low speed. At this time, since the player is not waiting for a customer, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs (part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting dramatic light (a light emitting mode other than rainbow light).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 228(c), an effect is performed in which SPSP development symbols, SP development symbols, pseudo symbols, and waste symbols are displayed in a high-speed variable manner. Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 228(d), it is reported that the SP development symbol temporarily stops in the middle area and develops into an SP ready-to-reach effect. In addition, in the roulette performance, the type of special performance symbols that are variably displayed changes depending on the fluctuation performance pattern, so the special performance symbols that are variably displayed (special performance symbols that are not ultimately temporarily stopped and special performance symbols that are temporarily stopped) Depending on the type of performance, it suggests whether or not it will develop into a production with high expectations for jackpots (expectation level for jackpots).

After that, the screen whites out and the development effect ends, and as shown in FIG. It will be displayed in a reduced size in the corner and the SP reach effect will start. It should be noted that the icon becomes hidden with the start of the SP reach effect.

(Example of production when development production is executed and SPSP reach production is executed)
With reference to FIG. 229, an example of a performance in a case where the development performance is executed and the SPSP reach performance is executed will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 229(a), the "5" effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped in the left area and the right area, and the normal reach effect is executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 228(b), when the SPSP development effect is started, the SP development symbol that suggests the development to the SP reach effect, the SPSP development symbol that suggests the development to the SPSP reach effect, and the full rotation reach effect. A roulette performance is performed in which a plurality of special performance symbols, such as full rotation symbols that suggest the development of a performance, are displayed diagonally and at low speed. At this time, since the player is not waiting for a customer, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs (part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting dramatic light (a light emitting mode other than rainbow light).

After that, as shown in FIG. 229(c), an effect is performed in which the SP development symbol, the SPSP development symbol, and the full rotation symbol are displayed in a high-speed variable manner, and the operation of the production button 17 may become effective. An effective suggestive performance that suggests that is started. Specifically, a plurality of translucent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are moved and displayed, and an effect is performed in which the translucent effect button images are gathered toward a specific position at the lower right of the screen.

Then, when the translucent effect button images gather at a specific position at the bottom right of the screen, the effective period of the effect button 17 (long press for 4 seconds) occurs, as shown in FIG. An operation promotion image SG consisting of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 that emits red light and a gauge image indicating the remaining validity period is displayed, and the display sound effect of the operation promotion image SG is output. , the production button 17 emits red light. Note that the words "long press" are displayed on the opaque effect button image.

After that, when the production button 17 is pressed and held for a long time, a production is performed in which the speed of the variable display of various development symbols is gradually slowed down, and the time of the long press reaches a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) or the valid period has passed. Then, as shown in FIG. 229(e), the SPSP development pattern temporarily stops in the middle area, a temporary stop sound effect is output, and a strong action effect is executed in which the first movable member 73 emits blue light and moves. be done. In addition, a weak vibration effect is started in which the effect button 17 is turned off and the effect button 17 is vibrated weakly for one second, but the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow emission) by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs continues. are doing.

After one second has passed, the weak vibration of the effect button 17 stops and the weak vibration effect ends. After that, the screen whites out and the development effect ends, and as shown in FIG. 229(f), the effect pattern 70a in the middle area changes again, and the three effect patterns 70a are displayed in a reduced size at the upper left of the screen. SPSP reach performance starts. It should be noted that with the start of the SPSP reach effect, the pending icon and the icon are hidden.

In this way, according to the performance examples shown in FIGS. 228 and 229, depending on the type of special performance symbols (special performance symbols that are not ultimately temporarily stopped, special performance symbols that are temporarily stopped) that are variably displayed in the roulette performance, , suggests whether or not the performance will develop into a production with high expectations for jackpots (jackpot expectations). Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding the types of special effect symbols that are variably displayed in the roulette effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 228 and 229, an effective suggestion production may be executed in the development production, thereby increasing the player's expectations for the development of a reach production with high expectations for a jackpot. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 228 and 229, the execution period (1 second) of the vibration production executed during the development production is shorter than the execution period (3 seconds) of the development production. . Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the development performance without the vibration performance being superior to the appearance of the development performance. In addition, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the long vibration performance causes the player to misunderstand that a jackpot has been won, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 228 and 229, the vibration production performed during the advanced production is accompanied by the valid period of the production button 17 (display of the operation promotion image), so the operation promotion image (opaque production button Display sound effects when displaying images (images, gauge images) and performance sounds (operation sound effects, temporary stop sound effects, etc.) when the performance button 17 is operated during the valid period are output. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the development performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 228 and 229, the execution period of the vibration production executed during the advanced production is the same regardless of whether or not the production button 17 is operated during the valid period and the operation timing. There is. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the vibration effect cannot be fully experienced depending on the operation timing of the effect button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the example effects shown in FIGS. 228 and 229, even during the vibration effect accompanied by the valid period of the effect button 17, the effect light emission by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs continues. Therefore, the performance effect can be maintained by not performing processing such as temporarily stopping the performance light emission due to the vibration performance accompanied by the valid period of the performance button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the production button 17 is designed not to emit light in the vibration production executed during the advanced production, but the production button 17 can be set in a predetermined mode (other than rainbow color, which is the emitting color that guarantees a jackpot) over the execution period of the vibration production. The light may be emitted in a different color from the light emission mode during the effective period of the effect button 17, such as white blinking, yellow blinking, etc.

In addition, the vibration performance that is executed during the development performance will be performed at the same timing regardless of whether or not the performance button 17 is operated during the valid period and regardless of the operation timing (for example, from the timing when the valid period expires when the performance button 17 is not operated). The vibration effect may be executed until after 0.5 seconds (the execution period of the vibration effect is variable).

Furthermore, during the development performance, the valid period of the performance button 17 is generated and the vibration performance of the performance button 17 is executed, but during the development performance, the vibration performance is performed without generating the validity period of the performance button 17. Alternatively, the vibration effect may be generated during the effective period of the effect button 17, but the vibration effect may not be executed.

(Example of performance when cut-in performance is executed during SP reach performance and becomes a jackpot)
With reference to FIGS. 230 and 231, an example of a performance in which a cut-in performance is executed during the SP ready-to-win performance in variable performance pattern 13 and results in a jackpot will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 230(a), the effect symbols 70a in the left and right areas are reduced and displayed in the left and right corners of the upper part of the screen, and the SP ready-to-reach effect is being executed. At this time, since the player is not waiting for a customer, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs (part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting dramatic light (a light emitting mode other than rainbow light).

When the SP reach effect approaches the final stage from this state, as shown in FIG. 230(b), an effective suggestion effect indicating that the operation of the effect button 17 may be effective for the cut-in effect appears. will be started. Specifically, an effect is performed in which two translucent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are brought together from the left and right lower portions of the screen toward a specific position in the center of the screen.

Then, when the semi-transparent effect button images gather at a specific position in the center of the screen, the effective period of the effect button 17 (single click 4 seconds) occurs, and the image protrudes at a specific position in the center of the screen, as shown in FIG. 230(c). An operation promotion image SG consisting of an opaque production button image imitating the production button 17 that emits red light and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the validity period is displayed, and a display sound effect of the operation promotion image SG is output. At the same time, the effect button 17 is in a protruding state and emits red light.

Thereafter, when the effect button 17 is operated or the validity period has elapsed, the red cut-in effect is started as shown in FIG. 230(d). Specifically, a red frame cut-in image is displayed on the first image display device 70, and a third cut-in sound effect is output. In addition, a weak vibration effect is started in which the effect button 17 is turned off and the effect button 17 is vibrated weakly for 3 seconds, but the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow emission) by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs continues. are doing.

After that, when one second passes after the output of the third cut-in sound effect ends, the cut-in effect and the weak vibration effect end, and as shown in FIG. 230(e), the effect of "5" in the middle area is An effect is performed in which the symbol 70a stops or the effect symbol 70a of "6" stops.

After a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 230(f), it is temporarily stopped with three "5" production symbols 70a aligned (symbols aligned), and the production button 17 is pressed strongly for 4 seconds. At the same time as a strong vibration performance (big hit confirmation vibration performance) is started, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and performance buttons 17 emit light in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect does not involve the effective period of the effect button 17, the sound effect when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the effect when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period. The production sound (sound effect) when playing is not output.

After 4 seconds have elapsed, as shown in FIG. 231(g), the strong vibration effect ends, but the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the effect button 17 continue to emit light in rainbow colors. Further, when one second has elapsed, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs resume emitting light for effect, and the effect button 17 turns off.

After that, as shown in FIG. 231(h), the re-lottery effect is started. Specifically, when three "5" production symbols 70a are aligned (designs aligned), they are moved to the back direction and displayed in a reduced size, and the validity period of the production button 17 (single hit 3 seconds) occurs, An operation promotion image SG consisting of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 that emits white light and a gauge image indicating the remaining validity period is displayed at a specific position in the center of the screen, and a display sound effect of the operation promotion image SG is displayed. is output, and the effect button 17 emits white light.

Thereafter, when the effect button 17 is operated or the validity period has elapsed, a promotion failure effect is started as shown in FIG. 231(i). Specifically, when three of the "5" production symbols 70a, which had been displayed in a reduced size, are aligned (designs aligned), they are moved to the front of the screen and enlarged, and a non-promoted sound effect is output, but multiple The effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by the game board decoration LED continues.

Then, as shown in FIG. 231(j), the performance symbol 70a is temporarily stopped at the normal size, and the promotion failure performance ends. Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 231(k), an eye-catching effect suggesting that the effect pattern 70a is stopped and displayed is executed. Specifically, the eye-catching image IC is displayed so as to cover the three performance symbols 70a.

Thereafter, when the eye-catching image IC is erased and the eye-catching effect is completed, the effect pattern 70a returns to the display mode including the character and becomes temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG. 231(l), and the first special image If there is a pending number, the pending icon will be redisplayed. In addition, a strong vibration performance (jackpot confirmation vibration performance) in which the performance button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second without the validity period of the performance button 17 is started, and a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the performance button 17 are activated. It glows in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect does not involve the effective period of the effect button 17, the sound effect when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the effect when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period. The production sound (sound effect) when playing is not output.

When one second has passed, as shown in FIG. 231(m), the strong vibration effect and the rainbow emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are completed, the effect pattern 70a is stopped at "555", and the special The symbol TZ is also stopped at "555".

After that, when the stop time (0.5 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. A strong vibration performance (opening vibration performance) in which the performance button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second without any accompanying movement is started, and the performance button 17 emits light in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect does not involve the effective period of the effect button 17, the sound effect when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the effect when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period. The production sound (sound effect) when playing is not output. Thereafter, when one second has elapsed, the strong vibration effect and the rainbow emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are finished, the opening effect of the jackpot game is finished, and the round game is started.

In addition, in the case of the variable performance pattern in which the re-lottery performance is not executed, the process moves to FIG. 231(k) after FIG. 231(g), and the eye-catching performance is executed.

In this way, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 230 and 231, effective suggestion production may be executed in the cut-in production, and in addition to the occurrence of the validity period, there is a high expectation of jackpot. This can be suggested to the player, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 230 and 231, the execution period (3 seconds) of the cut-in production is the same as the execution period (3 seconds) of the vibration production performed during the cut-in production. . Therefore, it is possible to effectively improve the production effect of the cut-in production. In addition, the vibration effect can suggest to the player that the expectation of a jackpot is high, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 230 and 231, the vibration production executed during the cut-in production is accompanied by the valid period of the production button 17 (display of the operation promotion image), so the operation promotion image (opaque production Display sound effects when displaying a button image, gauge image) and performance sounds (operation sound effects, cut-in sound effects, etc.) when the performance button 17 is operated during the valid period are output. Therefore, the effect of the cut-in performance can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 230 and 231, when the production patterns 70a in the display mode that does not include characters are temporarily stopped in a state where three of them are aligned (designs aligned), the vibration during the cut-in production Since the strong vibration performance (big hit confirmation vibration performance) is executed for a longer period of time than the performance, it is possible to effectively inform the player that a jackpot has been won, increasing the interest of the game. It becomes possible to do so.

In addition, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 230 and 231, when the production pattern 70a of the display mode including characters is temporarily stopped in a state where three of them are aligned (C symbols aligned), a strong vibration production (jackpot confirmation (vibration effect) is now executed. Therefore, the player can reconfirm that he or she has won the jackpot, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 230 and 231, a strong vibration production (jackpot confirmation vibration production, jackpot confirmation vibration production, jackpot confirmation vibration production, Vibration effects, opening vibration effects) do not involve the validity period of the production button 17 (display of operation promotion images), so the display sound effects and validity period when displaying operation promotion images (opaque production button images, gauge images) During the operation, the effect sound (operation sound effect, other sound effect, etc.) when the effect button 17 is operated is not output. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an inconvenience that confuses the player during the vibration performance without the validity period of the performance button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 230 and 231, the execution period of the vibration production executed during the cut-in production is the same regardless of whether or not the production button 17 is operated during the valid period and the operation timing. ing. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the vibration effect cannot be fully experienced depending on the operation timing of the effect button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the effects shown in FIGS. 230 and 231, when the SP reach effect results in a jackpot, while the vibration effect is executed while the effect pattern 70a that becomes the jackpot is temporarily stopped, The vibration effect is not executed during the main stop. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the fluctuating performance is still continuing due to the vibration performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIGS. 230 and 231, even during the vibration effect accompanied by the valid period of the effect button 17, the effect light emission by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs continues. Therefore, the performance effect can be maintained by not performing processing such as temporarily stopping the performance light emission due to the vibration performance accompanied by the valid period of the performance button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the production button 17 is designed not to emit light during the vibration production executed during the cut-in production, but the production button 17 is set in a predetermined mode (rainbow color, which is the luminous color that guarantees a jackpot) over the execution period of the vibration production. It is also possible to emit light in a color other than the above, and in a light emitting manner different from the light emitting manner during the effective period of the effect button 17 (for example, white blinking, yellow blinking, etc.).

In addition, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs were designed to continue emitting light during the validity period related to the cut-in performance, but if the performance button 17 is operated immediately before or from the start of the validity period, the validity period will expire. Until the elapse of time, some or all of the plurality of board decoration LEDs may be turned off, and then the effect light emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs may be restarted. In this way, it is possible to make the operation promotion image SG displayed on the first image display device 70 stand out, and to inform the player that the scene is tense, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

In addition, when executing the promotion success effect, multiple game board decoration LEDs and the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 were started at the same time, but the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 was started first, and then the multiple game board decoration LEDs were started simultaneously. The rainbow light emission of the game board decoration LED may be started, or the rainbow light emission of the production button 17 may be started first, and then the rainbow light emission of a plurality of game board decoration LEDs may be started.

Moreover, when the SP reach effect is executed, the effect of the eye-catching effect or the effect of returning the effect pattern 70a to the display mode including the character is executed, and then the effect pattern 70a is stopped. If the result of the reach effect is a loss, the eye-catching effect or the effect of returning the effect pattern 70a to the display mode including the character is executed, and then the effect pattern 70a is stopped. Alternatively, the performance pattern 70a may be stopped in the display mode of only numbers without performing the eye-catching effect or the effect of returning the performance pattern 70a to the display mode including characters.

In addition, the vibration effect executed during the cut-in effect will be performed at the same timing regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and regardless of the operation timing (for example, the timing when the effective period expires when the effect button 17 is not operated) The vibration effect may be executed until 2 seconds after the start (the execution period of the vibration effect is variable).

Furthermore, although the vibration effect is executed during the cut-in effect or promotion success effect, it is also possible to execute the vibration effect during the cut-in effect, but not to perform the vibration effect during the promotion success effect. The reverse may be done, or the vibration effect may not be performed during the cut-in effect and promotion success effect.

In addition, the vibration effect is executed when a jackpot is temporarily stopped by the effect pattern 70a containing only numbers, or when a jackpot is temporarily stopped by the effect pattern 70a including a character. While the vibration effect is executed when a jackpot is temporarily stopped, the vibration effect may not be executed when a jackpot is temporarily stopped by the effect pattern 70a including a character, or vice versa, or only numbers The vibration effect may not be executed when the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped for a jackpot and when the effect pattern 70a including a character is temporarily stopped for a jackpot effect.

In addition, when the lamp change effect is being executed, the lamp change effect continues until the effect symbol 70a stops displaying (even during the cut-in effect, the winning opening lamp NR corresponds to the display mode of the icon) However, the light may be emitted and turned off in conjunction with the light emitting mode of a plurality of game board decoration LEDs.

(Example 1 of the effect when the decisive effect is executed during the SPSP reach effect and results in a jackpot)
With reference to FIGS. 232 and 233, performance example 1 in which a deciding performance is executed during the SPSP ready-to-win performance in the variable performance pattern 20 and results in a jackpot will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 232(a), the three effect symbols 70a form a ready-to-win state and are displayed in a reduced size at the upper left of the screen, thereby executing the SPSP ready-to-reach effect. At this time, since the player is not waiting for a customer, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs (part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting dramatic light (a light emitting mode other than rainbow light).

When the SPSP reach effect reaches its final stage from this state, as shown in FIG. 232(b), an effective suggestion effect indicating that the operation of the effect button 17 may be effective for the deciding effect is displayed. will be started. Specifically, an effect is performed in which four translucent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are gathered from the four corners of the screen toward a specific position in the center of the screen.

Then, when the semi-transparent effect button images gather at a specific position in the center of the screen, the effective period (single-click 5 seconds) of the effect button 17 occurs, as shown in FIG. An operation promotion image SG consisting of an opaque production button image imitating the production button 17 that emits red light and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the validity period is displayed, and a display sound effect of the operation promotion image SG is output. At the same time, the effect button 17 is in a protruding state and emits red light.

Thereafter, when the performance button 17 is operated or the validity period has elapsed, the success performance is started as shown in FIG. 232(d). Specifically, the first movable member 73 moves to the maximum operating position located in front of the first image display device 70 while emitting rainbow light, and the first image display device 70 displays the success effect image SEF. At the same time, a success sound effect is output. In addition, after strongly vibrating the production button 17 for 4 seconds, a strong vibration production (decision success vibration production) is started in which the production button 17 is strongly vibrated for 5 seconds with an interval of 1 second in between, and at the top left of the screen. It temporarily stops when three "5" performance symbols 70a are aligned. Furthermore, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and performance buttons 17 emit light in rainbow colors.

After that, when the first movable member 73 returns to the standby position and the winning success effect and strong vibration effect are completed, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the effect buttons 17 are displayed in rainbow colors, as shown in FIG. A celebration performance will begin to celebrate the jackpot while the light continues to emit light. Then, when the blessing performance ends, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs restarts the performance light emission, and the performance button 17 turns off.

After that, as shown in FIG. 232(f), a temporary stop is made when the three "5" performance symbols 70a are aligned (designs are aligned), and a strong vibration performance (which makes the performance button 17 vibrate strongly for 4 seconds) is performed. At the same time as the jackpot confirmation vibration performance is started, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and performance buttons 17 emit light in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect does not involve the effective period of the effect button 17, the sound effect when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the effect when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period. The production sound (sound effect) when playing is not output.

After 4 seconds have elapsed, the strong vibration effect ends, but the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the effect button 17 continue to emit light in rainbow colors. Further, when one second has elapsed, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs resume emitting light for effect, and the effect button 17 turns off.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 233(g), the re-lottery effect is started. Specifically, when three "5" production symbols 70a are aligned (designs aligned), they are moved to the back direction and displayed in a reduced size, and the validity period of the production button 17 (single hit 3 seconds) occurs, An operation promotion image SG consisting of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 that emits red light and a gauge image indicating the remaining validity period is displayed at a specific position in the center of the screen, and a display sound effect of the operation promotion image SG is displayed. is output, and the production button emits red light.

Thereafter, when the performance button 17 is operated or the validity period has elapsed, a promotion success performance is started as shown in FIG. 233(h). Specifically, the "7" production symbol 70a, which has been switched from the "5" production symbol 70a that had been displayed in a reduced size, is moved to the front of the screen in a state where three of the "7" production symbols 70a are aligned (designs are aligned) and is enlarged and displayed. , a promotion sound effect is output. Further, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the performance button 17 emit light in rainbow colors, and a strong vibration performance (promotion vibration performance) in which the performance button 17 is strongly vibrated for 3 seconds is started.

Then, when the strong vibration effect ends and a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has elapsed after the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped at the normal size, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs will emit effect light (other than rainbow light). At the same time, the effect button 17 turns off.

Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 233(j), an eye-catching effect that suggests that the effect pattern 70a is stopped and displayed is executed. Specifically, the eye-catching image IC is displayed so as to cover the three performance symbols 70a.

Thereafter, when the eye-catching image IC is erased and the eye-catching effect is completed, the effect pattern 70a returns to the display mode including the character and becomes temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG. 233(k), and the icon is displayed again. At the same time, if there is a first special figure pending number, the pending icon is redisplayed. In addition, a strong vibration performance (jackpot confirmation vibration performance) in which the performance button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second without the validity period of the performance button 17 is started, and a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the performance button 17 are activated. It glows in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect does not involve the effective period of the effect button 17, the sound effect when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the effect when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period. The production sound (sound effect) when playing is not output.

When one second has passed, as shown in FIG. 233(l), the strong vibration effect and the rainbow emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are completed, the effect pattern 70a is stopped at "777", and the special The symbol TZ is also stopped at "777".

After that, when the stop time (0.5 seconds) has passed, as shown in FIG. A strong vibration performance (opening vibration performance) in which the performance button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second without any accompanying movement is started, and the performance button 17 emits light in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect does not involve the effective period of the effect button 17, the sound effect when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the effect when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period. The production sound (sound effect) when playing is not output. Thereafter, when one second has elapsed, the strong vibration effect and the rainbow emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are finished, the opening effect of the jackpot game is finished, and the first round game is started.

(Example 2 of the performance when the decisive performance is executed during the SPSP reach performance and it becomes a jackpot)
With reference to FIGS. 234 and 235, performance example 2 will be described in which a deciding performance is executed during the SPSP ready-to-win performance in the variable performance pattern 16 and a jackpot is achieved. Note that FIGS. 234(a) to 234(c) are the same as FIGS. 232(a) to 232(c), so a description thereof will be omitted here.

When the production button 17 is operated from the state shown in FIG. 234(c) or the validity period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 234(d), a state where three "5" production symbols 70a are aligned (symbols aligned) A temporary stop is performed at , and a jackpot is notified by the performance symbol 70a, but no strong vibration performance is performed at this point. At this time, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs (part of the board illumination device) continue to emit light (a light emitting mode other than rainbow light).

Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed, a successful decision performance is started, as shown in FIG. 234(e). Specifically, the first movable member 73 moves to the maximum operating position located in front of the first image display device 70 while emitting rainbow light, and the first image display device 70 displays the success effect image SEF. At the same time, a success sound effect is output. In addition, after strongly vibrating the production button 17 for 4 seconds, a strong vibration production (decision success vibration production) is started in which the production button 17 is strongly vibrated for 5 seconds with an interval of 1 second in between. It temporarily stops when three "5" performance symbols 70a are aligned. Furthermore, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and performance buttons 17 emit light in rainbow colors.

After that, when the first movable member 73 returns to the standby position and the winning success effect and strong vibration effect are completed, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the effect buttons 17 are displayed in rainbow colors, as shown in FIG. A celebration performance will begin to celebrate the jackpot while the light continues to emit light. Then, when the blessing performance ends, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs restarts the performance light emission, and the performance button 17 turns off.

Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 235(g), an eye-catching effect suggesting that the effect pattern 70a is stopped and displayed is executed. Specifically, the eye-catching image IC is displayed so as to cover the three performance symbols 70a.

Then, when the eye-catching image IC is erased and the eye-catching effect ends, the effect pattern 70a returns to the display mode including the character and becomes temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG. 235(h), and the icon is displayed again. At the same time, if there is a first special figure pending number, the pending icon is redisplayed. In addition, a strong vibration performance (jackpot confirmation vibration performance) in which the performance button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second without the validity period of the performance button 17 is started, and a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the performance button 17 are activated. It glows in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect does not involve the effective period of the effect button 17, the sound effect when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the effect when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period. The production sound (sound effect) when playing is not output.

When one second has passed, as shown in FIG. 235(i), the strong vibration effect and the rainbow emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are completed, the effect pattern 70a is stopped at "555", and the special The symbol TZ is also stopped at "555".

After that, when the stop time (0.5 seconds) has passed, as shown in FIG. A strong vibration performance (opening vibration performance) in which the performance button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second without any accompanying movement is started, and the performance button 17 emits light in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect does not involve the effective period of the effect button 17, the sound effect when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the effect when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period. The production sound (sound effect) when playing is not output. Thereafter, when one second has elapsed, the strong vibration effect and the rainbow emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are finished, the opening effect of the jackpot game is finished, and the round game is started.

In addition, if the performance button 17 is operated during the validity period related to the winning performance, or if the validity period has elapsed and a failure performance is performed, the first movable member 73 is turned off and does not operate, and the first movable member 73 is turned off and does not operate. A failure effect image is displayed on the single-image display device 70, and a failure sound effect is output. Furthermore, part or all of the performance button 17 and the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are turned off, and then the three performance symbols are temporarily stopped when the number of reach misses (for example, "565") is rolled. After that, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, an eye-catching effect that suggests that the effect pattern 70a is to be displayed in a stopped state is executed, and when the eye-catching effect is completed, the effect pattern 70a returns to the display mode including the character and is temporarily stopped. Then, the icon is re-displayed, and if there is a number of reserved first special symbols, the reserved icon is re-displayed. When one second has elapsed, the performance symbol 70a is permanently stopped when the reach is missed, and the special symbol TZ is also permanently stopped when the reach is missed.

In this way, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 232 to 235, the effective suggestion production may be executed in the deciding production, and in addition to the occurrence of the validity period, the expectation level of jackpot is high. It is possible to suggest this to the player, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 232 to 235, there is a success production in which the first movable member 73 operates before the symbols are aligned, and a successful production in which the first movable member 73 operates after the symbols are aligned. Since there is a winning success performance, it is possible to effectively improve the performance effect of the winning performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 232 to 235, there is a success production in which the first movable member 73 operates before the symbols are aligned, and a successful production in which the first movable member 73 operates after the symbols are aligned. The period from when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period to when the vibration effect (successful vibration effect) is executed is different between the success effect and effect. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a feeling of elation from the beginning, or to give the player a feeling of elation after stirring up the player's anxiety, and the contrasting effect can effectively improve the interest in the game. .

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 232 to 235, the operation period (10 seconds) of the first movable member 73 in the successful decision production and the execution period (10 seconds) of the vibration production executed at the successful decision production. are the same. Therefore, it is possible to effectively improve the performance effect of the success performance. In addition, the vibration effect can indicate to the player that he has won a jackpot, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 232 to 235, the vibration production (decision success vibration production) executed at the time of the decision production is accompanied by the valid period of the production button 17 (display of the operation promotion image), so the operation Display sound effects when displaying promotion images (opaque effect button images, gauge images) and effect sounds when the effect button 17 is operated during the validity period (operation sound effects, success sound effects, operation sound effects of movable members, etc.) ) is now output. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the winning success performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 232 to 235, when the production symbols 70a in the display mode that does not include characters are temporarily stopped in a state where three symbols are aligned (designs are aligned), a strong vibration production (jackpot confirmation vibration) Since the player can effectively notify the player that he or she has won a jackpot, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 232 to 235, when the production patterns 70a of the display mode including characters are temporarily stopped in a state where three of them are aligned (C symbols aligned), a strong vibration production (jackpot confirmation vibration) performance) is now executed. Therefore, the player can reconfirm that he or she has won the jackpot, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 232 to 235, the vibration production (opening vibration production) that is executed at the time of a temporary stop when three production symbols 70a are aligned or at the opening of a jackpot game can be performed by pressing the production button 17 does not have a valid period (display of operation promotion image), so the display sound effect when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the effect when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period. Sounds (operation sound effects, other sound effects, etc.) are not output. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an inconvenience that confuses the player during the vibration performance without the validity period of the performance button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 232 to 235, the execution period of the vibration production that is executed at the time of a successful decision production is the same regardless of whether or not the production button 17 is operated during the valid period and regardless of the operation timing. ing. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the vibration effect cannot be fully experienced depending on the operation timing of the effect button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs were configured to continue emitting light during the validity period related to the fixed performance, but if the performance button 17 is operated immediately before the validity period occurs or from the start of the occurrence, or the validity period changes. Until the time elapses, some or all of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are turned off, and when a successful performance is determined by operating the performance button 17 or by elapse of the valid time, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are turned off. It may also be made to emit light. In this way, it is possible to make the operation promotion image SG displayed on the first image display device 70 stand out, and to inform the player that the scene is tense, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

In addition, the first movable member 73, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs, and the effect button 17 were configured to emit rainbow light when the game board was successfully executed. Some or all of the game board decoration LEDs may be turned off, or the first movable member 73 may emit rainbow light, while the production button 17 and some or all of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs may be turned off. It's okay.

Furthermore, when executing the success effect, the first movable member 73, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs, and the effect button 17 started emitting the rainbow light at the same time, but the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 was started first. After the start, the first movable member 73 and the plurality of game board decoration LEDs may start emitting rainbow light, or the first movable member 73 may first start emitting rainbow light, and then the plurality of game board decoration LEDs start emitting rainbow light. And the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 may be started, or the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 is started first, and then the rainbow emission of the first movable member 73 and the plurality of game board decoration LEDs is started. You can.

In addition, after the blessing performance ended, the multiple game board decoration LEDs resumed their light emission and the performance button 17 turned off, but even after the blessing performance ended, the game board decoration LEDs continued to emit rainbow light. The effect light emission may be restarted before the start of the re-lottery effect, or the effect light emission may be restarted before the start of the eye-catching effect, or the rainbow emission may be restarted until the main stop of the effect pattern 70a. may be continued.

In addition, when executing the promotion success effect, multiple game board decoration LEDs and the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 were started at the same time, but the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 was started first, and then the multiple game board decoration LEDs were started simultaneously. The rainbow light emission of the game board decoration LED may be started, or the rainbow light emission of the production button 17 may be started first, and then the rainbow light emission of a plurality of game board decoration LEDs may be started.

In addition, when the SPSP reach effect is executed, the effect of the eye-catching effect or the effect of returning the effect pattern 70a to the display mode including the character is executed, and then the effect pattern 70a is stopped. If the result of the reach effect is a loss, the eye-catching effect or the effect of returning the effect pattern 70a to the display mode including the character is executed, and then the effect pattern 70a is stopped. Alternatively, the performance pattern 70a may be stopped in the display mode of only numbers without performing the eye-catching effect or the effect of returning the performance pattern 70a to the display mode including characters.

In addition, regarding the vibration performance that is executed at the time of successful decision performance, the timing is the same regardless of whether or not the performance button 17 is operated during the valid period and the operation timing (for example, the timing when the valid period expires when the performance button 17 is not operated) (The execution period of the vibration effect may be varied) until 3 seconds later.

In addition, although the vibration effect is executed when a successful decision is made or when a promotion is successful, the vibration effect may be executed when a successful decision is made, but not when the promotion is successful. The reverse may be done, or the vibration presentation may not be performed during the successful decision presentation and the promotion successful presentation.

Further, a vibration effect is executed when a jackpot is temporarily stopped by the effect pattern 70a containing only numbers after a blessing effect, or when a jackpot is temporarily stopped by the effect pattern 70a including a character after an eye-catching effect. However, when a jackpot roll is temporarily stopped by the number-only performance pattern 70a after the blessing performance, a vibration performance is executed, while a vibration performance is executed when a jackpot roll is temporarily stopped by the performance pattern 70a including a character after an eye-catching performance. You may choose not to do so, or vice versa, or when a jackpot is temporarily stopped by the number-only performance pattern 70a after the blessing performance, and a jackpot by the performance pattern 70a including characters after the eye-catching performance. The vibration effect may not be performed during the temporary stop.

In addition, when the lamp change effect is being executed, the lamp change effect continues until the effect pattern 70a stops displaying (even during the deciding effect, the icon before the winning opening lamp NR is hidden) Although the light is emitted in a color corresponding to the display mode, the light may be emitted and turned off in conjunction with the light emission mode of a plurality of game board decoration LEDs.

(Example of production when a fixed mission production is executed during a jackpot)
With reference to FIG. 236, an example of a performance will be described when a variable probability mission performance is executed to determine whether or not a variable probability game state will occur during a jackpot (round game).

As shown in FIG. 236(a), when the opening performance of the jackpot game starts, a strong vibration performance (opening vibration performance) in which the performance button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second without the validity period of the performance button 17 is started. ) is started, and the effect button 17 emits light in rainbow colors. Thereafter, when one second has elapsed, the strong vibration performance ends, the opening performance of the jackpot game ends, and the first round game begins.

After that, when the interval period after the first round game ends and the second round game starts, as shown in FIG. is started, and the words ``You are guaranteed to defeat the enemy'' are displayed until the second round game ends.

Then, when the interval period after the second round game ends and the third round game starts, the effective period of the production button 17 (single press for 5 seconds) occurs, as shown in FIG. 236(c). The mission performance will begin. Specifically, the words "Destroy" are displayed, and an operation promotion image SG consisting of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the validity period is displayed. , the display sound effect of the operation promotion image SG is output, and the production button 17 emits white light. At this time, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs (part of the board illumination device) continue to emit light (a light emitting mode other than rainbow light).

Thereafter, when the effect button 17 is operated or the validity period has elapsed, the mission success effect is started as shown in FIG. 236(d). Specifically, the first movable member 73 moves to the maximum operating position located in front of the first image display device 70 while emitting rainbow light, and the first image display device 70 displays the success effect image SEF. At the same time, a success sound effect is output. Further, a strong vibration performance (promotional vibration performance) in which the performance button 17 is strongly vibrated for 5 seconds is started, and a part or all of the performance button 17 and the plurality of game board decoration LEDs emit rainbow light.

After that, when the mission success effect ends, as shown in FIG. 236(e), the word "defeated" is displayed indicating that the mission was successful, the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 ends, and multiple game board decorations are displayed. The effect light emission of the LED is restarted, and when the third round game ends, the words "defeated" are erased and the round effect is restarted.

Then, when the ninth round game is started, as shown in FIG. A time period of at least 11 seconds (from the start until 5 seconds has elapsed) occurs, and mode selection performance for selecting the performance mode in the variable probability game state is started. Specifically, the option image for production mode D and the option image for production mode E are displayed, and the text "Please select the mode that is currently changing with the cross key and confirm with the button!" is displayed as an operation promotion image, and the white text is displayed. An opaque effect button image imitating the light emitting effect button 17 is displayed.

After that, when the right button of the cross key 18 is operated, the option image of production mode D is selected (the option image of production mode E is displayed in dark color), as shown in FIG. 236(g). A state is reached in which the option image of presentation mode E is selected (the option image of presentation mode D is displayed in dark color).

Then, when the performance button 17 is operated or the validity period has elapsed, the option image of the performance mode E is enlarged and displayed as shown in FIG. E is notified and the mode selection performance ends. Thereafter, when the 10th round game ends, an ending performance is executed, and when the ending performance ends, a variable probability game state is started.

Note that when the mission failure effect is executed, the first movable member 73 is turned off and does not operate, and the first image display device 70 displays a failure effect image and outputs a failure sound effect. . Furthermore, the mode selection effect is not executed and the ending effect is shifted to.

As described above, according to the production example shown in FIG. 236, the operation period (5 seconds) of the first movable member 73 in the mission success production and the execution period of the vibration production (promotion vibration production) executed during the mission success production. (5 seconds) are the same. Therefore, it is possible to effectively improve the presentation effect of the mission success presentation. Further, the vibration effect can suggest to the player that the result is advantageous to the player, that is, that a probability change state will occur, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production example shown in FIG. 236, since the vibration production (promotion vibration production) executed at the time of mission success production is accompanied by the validity period of the production button 17, the operation promotion images (opaque production button image, gauge image ) when displaying the display sound effect and the effect sound (success sound effect) when the effect button 17 is operated during the validity period are output. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the winning success performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production example shown in FIG. 236, the execution period of the vibration production (promotion vibration production) executed at the time of the mission success production is the same regardless of whether or not the production button 17 is operated during the valid period and the operation timing. It becomes. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the vibration effect cannot be fully experienced depending on the operation timing of the effect button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIG. 236, even if the production button 17 or the cross key 18 is operated during the mode selection production, the vibration production is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconveniences in which players are misled into thinking that the jackpot expectation is higher in the selected presentation mode than in the unselected presentation mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. becomes. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the player from being surprised, and it is possible to avoid inconveniences that may cause discomfort to the player.

In addition, multiple game board decoration LEDs were designed to continue emitting light during the validity period related to the variable mission production, but if the production button 17 is operated immediately before or from the start of the validity period, the validity period will change. Until the elapse of time, some or all of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are turned off, and when performing a mission success effect by operating the effect button 17 or by elapse of the effective time, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are turned off. It may be possible to emit rainbow light. In this way, it is possible to make the operation promotion image SG displayed on the first image display device 70 stand out, and to inform the player that the scene is tense, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

Furthermore, during the mission success presentation, the first movable member 73, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs, and the presentation button 17 were configured to emit rainbow light; Some or all of the game board decoration LEDs may be turned off, or the first movable member 73 may emit rainbow light, while the production button 17 and some or all of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs may be turned off. It's okay.

In addition, when executing the mission success effect, the first movable member 73, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs, and the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 were started at the same time, but the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 was started first. After the start, the first movable member 73 and the plurality of game board decoration LEDs may start emitting rainbow light, or the first movable member 73 may first start emitting rainbow light, and then the plurality of game board decoration LEDs start emitting rainbow light. And the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 may be started, or the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 is started first, and then the rainbow emission of the first movable member 73 and the plurality of game board decoration LEDs is started. It's okay.

In addition, the vibration effect that is executed during the mission success effect will be performed at the same timing regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and regardless of the operation timing (for example, the timing when the effective period expires if the effect button 17 is not operated) (The execution period of the vibration effect may be varied) until 3 seconds later.

Further, although the vibration effect is executed when the mission is successful, the vibration effect may not be executed when the mission is successful.

(Example of a performance when the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted after being stopped during the execution of the icon change performance and lamp change performance)
An example of a performance when restarting after the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped during execution of the icon change performance and the lamp change performance will be described using FIGS. 237 and 238.

As shown in FIG. 237(a), when the first pending icon (white icon) is displayed on the first display section 70B1 and the second display section 70B2 of the first pending icon display area 70B, "728 ” is displayed in a stopped state.

After that, when the variable effect in which the SPSP reach effect is started, as shown in FIG. The first pending icon (white icon) displayed in the section 70B2 is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display section 70B1, respectively.

Here, the display mode of the icon shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C changes to a red icon, thereby starting the icon change effect, and accordingly, the winning opening lamp NR changes from the off state to blinking red. When the state changes, the lamp change effect starts.

After that, as shown in FIG. 237(c), while the effect pattern 70a of "3" is stopped (temporarily stopped) displayed in the left and right variable display areas of the effect pattern 70a that was being displayed in a variable manner, the center variable display area is A reach effect (normal reach) in which the effect pattern 70a is displayed variably is executed.

Then, when it develops into SP reach, as shown in FIG. 237(d), the SP reach effect is started, and the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a reduced size at the upper left of the screen, and the first pending icon display area 70B and the second The pending icon display area 70D is erased together with the pending icon.

Thereafter, when the SPSP reaches reach, as shown in FIG. 237(e), the SPSP reach effect is started, and the icon display area 70C in which the icon is displayed is erased together with the icon. At this time, the winning a prize opening lamp NR does not turn off as the icon disappears, and the lamp change performance in the winning a prize opening lamp NR continues.

When the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped at this timing, as shown in FIG. 237(f), the image display device becomes non-displayed and the prize opening lamp NR is turned off.

After that, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is resumed, as shown in FIG. 238(g), an initial screen including the words "Loading" is displayed on the image display device, but the winning slot lamp NR is turned off. maintain the condition.

Then, when the production control board 130 receives the second power restoration designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, as shown in FIG. The returning screen including is displayed for the duration of the SPSP reach effect (including the execution period of the re-lottery effect to determine whether or not the temporarily stopped jackpot effect symbol will be promoted to a jackpot effect symbol with higher value for the player). However, the winning opening lamp NR remains in the off state here as well.

After that, when the execution period of the SPSP reach effect that results in a loss ends (the effect control board 130 receives a special symbol stop designation command indicating a loss), as shown in FIG. 238(i), a temporary stop display of the effect pattern 70a ( A stop screen (second standby screen) is displayed in which the production pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern when the power is restored, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display) without any shaking fluctuation). , the variable effect ends without restarting the lamp change effect.

At this time, the same white icon as before the power supply was stopped is displayed on the first display section 70B1 of the first pending icon display area 70B, and the icon is not displayed in the icon display area 70C, but a rectangular icon is displayed. By displaying the area image, a display space (display area) for the icon is secured in a state where an effect image such as a background image can be displayed.

After that, when the next variable effect is started, as shown in FIG. 238(j), the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started and is displayed on the first display section 70B1 and the second display section 70B2. The first pending icon (white icon) shown in FIG.

On the other hand, when the execution period of the SPSP reach effect that results in a jackpot ends (the effect control board 130 receives a special pattern stop designation command indicating a jackpot), as shown in FIG. 238(k), a temporary stop display of the effect pattern 70a ( The jackpot effect pattern 70a of "777" (which formed the reach state before the power cutoff) indicates the type of the current jackpot game (here, the first jackpot game) without performing any swing fluctuation/swing display). A combination of performance symbols different from the reach combination according to the production symbol "3↓3") and a stop screen with the special symbol TZ displayed in a stopped state (static display) will be displayed, and a lamp change effect will be displayed with the winning opening lamp NR. The variable performance ends without restarting.

In addition to the variation production in which the SPSP reach performance is executed, other variation productions (variation production in which a normal variation is executed, variation production in which a shortened variation is executed, variation production in which a normal reach production is executed, SP reach production) Regarding the fluctuating performance), when the power supply that was stopped during the execution is restarted and the execution period of the performance ends, the temporary stop display (swinging fluctuation/swinging display) of the performance pattern 70a is not performed and " 753'' loss effect pattern 70a, or a jackpot effect pattern that is the same combination of effect patterns or a combination of different effect patterns as the reach combination based on the effect patterns that formed the reach state before the power cut-off is displayed in a stopped state (static display). will be done.

In addition, regarding the special symbol TZ, it depends on whether the game control state is initialized or restored, whether the subsequent state is the normal gaming state, or the specific gaming state (low accuracy time-saving gaming state, high-accuracy time-saving gaming state). Regardless of whether there is a special symbol TZ, the special symbol TZ has the same display mode (shape, design) and is statically displayed (statically displayed) with numbers that are the same combination as the performance symbol 70a.

After that, when the opening of the jackpot game starts, as shown in FIG. 238(l), the image display device displays information indicating the type of jackpot game ("MAX jackpot" indicating that it is the first jackpot game). The opening performance including the first pending icon display area 70B, the second pending icon display area 70D, and the icon display area 70C are erased together with the icons.

Although the winning slot lamp NR remains off while the initial screen and/or returning screen is displayed, the lighting mode (for example, white lighting) that is not used in the lamp change effect (does not indicate the level of expectation of winning a jackpot) ) may turn on the winning opening lamp NR.

As described above, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 237 and 238, the power supply that was stopped during execution of the fluctuating production in which the production symbol 70a is temporarily stopped and displayed (shaking variation) and then stopped is restarted. After the control state of the game is restored, the special symbol stop designation command is issued after the special symbol fluctuation time has passed (if the special symbol stop designation command is missed and the state then shifts to the customer waiting state, the customer waiting state When a state designation command) is received, the performance pattern 70a is not temporarily stopped (swaying fluctuation/swinging display) but is displayed stopped (still display). Therefore, the player can be made aware that the variable performance that was being executed at the time the power supply stopped has ended, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 237 and 238, the production symbols 70a are displayed in a stopped state (static display) after the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the loss variation production is restarted and the control state of the game is restored. In this case, the combination of performance symbols that are the initial symbols when the power is restored is displayed in a stopped state (stationary display) instead of the normal loss performance symbols. Therefore, there is no need to perform complicated processing such as determining by lottery the performance symbols to be displayed statically, and the power restoration restores the control state of the game, and is executed when the power supply stops. It becomes possible to understand that the fluctuating performance that was being performed has ended.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 237 and 238, the production symbols are stopped and displayed (stationary display) after the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the jackpot fluctuation production is restarted and the control state of the game is restored. In this case, the jackpot effect symbol combination is displayed in a stopped state (static display). Therefore, it is possible to understand that the control state of the game is restored due to the power supply restoration, and that the fluctuating performance that was being executed at the time the power supply stopped was a jackpot fluctuating performance.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 237 and 238, when the combination of jackpot production symbols is displayed in a stopped state (static display) after the control state of the game is restored, a reach state is formed before the power supply is stopped. It is possible to stop display (still display) a combination of jackpot effect symbols that is different from the reach combination based on the effect patterns that were previously used. Therefore, it is not necessary to be aware of the jackpot effect symbols that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed before the power supply is stopped, and it is possible to reduce the processing load related to display control after the power supply is restarted.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 237 and 238, if the fluctuating production that was being executed at the time the power supply stopped includes the execution period of the promotion production described above, the power supply is resumed and the control is performed. After the state is restored, the jackpot effect symbols are stopped and displayed (stationary display) without executing the promotion effect. Therefore, since no unnecessary effects are performed before the effect symbols are stopped and displayed (statically displayed), the player is immediately informed that the variable effect that was being executed at the time the power supply stopped was a jackpot variable effect. It becomes possible to understand the

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 237 and 238, there are two cases in which the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the loss variation production is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, and a case in which the power supply that stopped during the execution of the jackpot variation production is restored, and a case in which the power supply is stopped during the execution of the jackpot variation production. The display mode (type of display screen, display order of display screens) of the image display device after power supply is restarted is the same as when power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored. Therefore, it is possible to perform simple display control without being aware of whether a loss fluctuation effect or a jackpot fluctuation effect is being executed, and the processing load associated with display control after power supply is resumed. It becomes possible to reduce the

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 237 and 238, for the special symbol TZ, after the power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the display mode is the same as before the power supply was stopped. Then, numbers that are in the same combination as the effect pattern 70a are displayed in a stopped state (statically displayed). Therefore, it becomes easier to understand that the fluctuating performance that was being executed at the time the power supply stopped has ended.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 237 and 238, if the power supply that was stopped while the icon was being displayed is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the next screen is displayed after the display of the returning screen is finished. Until the fluctuation effect (scrolling of the effect pattern 70a) starts, a rectangular area image is displayed in the icon display area 70C, so that the display space (display area) of the icon is changed to a background image, etc. The effect image is secured in a state where it can be displayed, but the icon is not displayed. Therefore, the player can be made aware that the variable performance that was being executed at the time the power supply stopped has ended, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

Furthermore, according to the example effects shown in FIGS. 237 and 238, if the power supply that was stopped while the pending icon was being displayed is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the next Until the fluctuation effect starts, a rectangular area image is displayed in the hold icon display area, so that the display space (display area) of the hold icon is in a state where it is possible to display a effect image such as a background image. It is now reserved and a pending icon is displayed. Therefore, even if the power supply is stopped, it is possible to know that the suspended variable performance has not disappeared, and it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

In addition, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 237 and 238, the variable production (winning opening lamp NR) corresponding to the icon that triggered the execution of the lamp change production is changed to the lighting color (blue, red, etc.) with high expectation of winning the jackpot. If the power supply that was stopped during the memorization of the special figure judgment information that will change to , rainbow) is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the winning opening lamp NR will be hit as a jackpot without restarting the lamp change effect. The notification mode (lights off or lit in white) does not indicate the degree of expectation of winning. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load after the power supply is restarted, and to avoid a situation where the player is confused, such as the lamp change performance being restarted even though the fluctuating performance has not been executed.

In addition, after the execution period of the jackpot fluctuation effect ends, a stop screen with the jackpot effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ stopped is displayed, but as in the case of a loss, when the power is restored, A second standby screen may be displayed in which the initial symbol "753" production symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (still display).

In addition, after the execution period of the jackpot fluctuating effect ends, a stop screen in which the jackpot effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped and displayed is displayed, but the jackpot effect pattern 70a is displayed without displaying the stop screen. It is also possible to start an opening performance of a jackpot game in which the is not displayed. In addition, information indicating the type of jackpot game may be displayed in the opening performance, a jackpot special symbol TZ of "777" may be displayed, or a special symbol "753" which is the initial symbol when the power is restored. TZ may also be displayed.

In addition, after the execution period of the loss fluctuation performance ends, the performance symbol 70a, which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and the special symbol TZ are displayed, and after the execution period of the jackpot fluctuation performance ends, the jackpot The opening performance of the jackpot game may be started without displaying the stop screen in which the performance symbols 70a and the special symbols TZ are stopped and displayed.

In addition, if it is possible to perform a specific performance that incites whether or not a jackpot game will be executed without displaying the production symbol 70a in a reach state in a variable production (makes people expect that a jackpot game will be executed), the specification After the power supply that was stopped during execution of the performance is resumed and the control state is restored, if it is a loss, the performance symbol 70a which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration is stopped (statically displayed), and if it is a jackpot, the performance symbol 70a is displayed in a stopped state (static display). The jackpot effect pattern 70a may be displayed in a stopped state (stationary display).

In addition, when the combination of jackpot effect symbols is stopped and displayed (statically displayed) after the control state of the game is restored, one of the combinations of jackpot effect symbols corresponding to the type of jackpot game to be executed thereafter. may be stopped and displayed.

In this case, for example, the combination of jackpot effect symbols suggesting execution of the first jackpot game is "333" and "777", and the combination of jackpot effect symbols suggesting execution of the second jackpot game is "222" and " 444'', ``666'', and ``888'', and the combination of jackpot effect symbols suggesting execution of the third jackpot game is ``111'', ``555'', and ``999''.

If the reach combination before the power supply is stopped is "1↓1" which constitutes a part of the jackpot effect symbol combination that suggests the execution of the third jackpot game, then the jackpot game to be executed after that is the first jackpot game. In the case of a jackpot game, either "333" or "777" (a combination of jackpot effect symbols that is different from the reach combination based on the effect symbols that formed the reach state) is stopped and displayed, and then the game is executed. If the jackpot game is the third jackpot game, any one of "111", "555", and "999" (a combination of jackpot effect symbols that is the same as or different from the reach combination of the effect symbols that formed the reach state) It is a good idea to stop and display the .

In addition, regarding the special symbol TZ, after the power supply is resumed and the control state is restored, instead of being displayed in a stopped state (stationary display) with numbers that are the same combination as the production symbol 70a, it becomes a combination different from the production symbol 70a. The display may be displayed in a stopped state (stationary display) using numbers.

In addition, if the normal gaming state and the customer waiting state occur after the power supply is resumed and the control state is restored, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (stationary display), while the power supply is stopped. After restarting and restoring the control state, if the specific gaming state (low-accuracy time-saving gaming state, high-accuracy time-saving gaming state) and customer waiting state, the production pattern 70a is not displayed in a stopped state (static display), The special symbol TZ may be displayed in a stopped state (stationary display).

(Example of effects when restarting after power supply to the gaming machine is stopped during execution of look-ahead effect effect, pending icon change effect, and lamp change effect)
FIGS. 239 and 240 are diagrams illustrating an example of a performance when the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted after being stopped during execution of the look-ahead effect performance, the pending icon change performance, and the lamp change performance.

As shown in FIG. 239(a), the first pending icon (white icon) is displayed on the first display section 70B1, second display section 70B2, and third display section 70B3 of the first pending icon display area 70B. Suppose that the loss effect pattern 70a of "728" is stopped and displayed when the player is in the game.

After that, when the pre-variation variation effect is started, as shown in FIG. 239(b), the variation display of the production pattern 70a is started, and the first display section 70B1, the second display section 70B2, and The first pending icon (white icon) displayed on the third display section 70B3 is shifted and displayed on the icon display area 70C, the first display section 70B1, and the second display section 70B2, respectively.

Here, the effect image EF is displayed around the effect symbol 70a that starts the variable display, thereby starting the first effect of the look-ahead effect, and the first pending icon ( When the display mode of the final icon display mode (red icon) changes to a blue icon, the pending icon change effect starts, and accordingly, the winning slot lamp NR changes from an off state to a blinking blue state, and the lamp changes to a blue icon. The change production begins.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 239(c), the effect image EF displayed around the effect symbol 70a is erased, and the effect image 70a starts scrolling at high speed. Then, when the variable time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 239(d), after the performance symbol 70a indicating a loss is temporarily stopped and displayed, the loss performance symbol 70a of "259" and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. .

After that, when the pre-variation variation effect is started, as shown in FIG. 239(e), the variation display of the effect pattern 70a is started, and the first display part 70B1 and the second display part 70B2 The displayed first pending icon is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display section 70B1, respectively.

Here, by displaying the effect image EF around the effect symbol 70a that starts the variable display, the second look-ahead effect effect is started, and the pending icon change effect and lamp change effect continue. Become.

Then, as shown in FIG. 239(f), the effect image EF displayed around the performance symbol 70a is erased, and the performance symbol 70a starts scrolling at high speed. When the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped at this timing, as shown in FIG. 239(g), the image display device becomes non-display and the winning slot lamp NR is turned off.

After that, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is resumed, as shown in FIG. To maintain a state where the lights are turned off without restarting the change performance.

Then, when the production control board 130 receives the second power restoration designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, as shown in FIG. A returning screen including the above is displayed during the execution period of the advance variation, but the winning a prize opening lamp NR remains in the off state here as well.

After that, when the execution period of the advance variation ends (the production control board 130 receives a special symbol stop designation command indicating a loss), as shown in FIG. Without doing so, a stop screen with the initial symbol 753, the initial symbol when the power is restored, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (statically displayed), and the lamp change effect is restarted beforehand. The fluctuation ends.

At this time, the first display section 70B1 of the first pending icon display area 70B displays a white icon instead of the blue icon before the power supply is stopped, and the icon is not displayed in the icon display area 70C. By displaying a rectangular area image, a display space (display area) for the icon is secured in a state where an effect image such as a background image can be displayed.

After that, when the variable effect in which the SPSP reach effect is started, as shown in FIG. 240(k), the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started, and the 1 pending icon (white icon) is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C.

Here, if a lottery regarding the newly executed icon change performance is won, the display mode of the icon shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C changes to a blue icon according to the result, and the icon changes. The performance begins. On the other hand, since the lottery related to the lamp change effect is not newly executed, the prize opening lamp NR remains in the off state and the lamp change effect is not restarted.

In addition, if you win the lottery regarding the alternative preview performance that will be held when the power supply is resumed, the mini character MCB will be displayed on the image display device according to the result, and the mini character MCB will move out of the frame and replace it. A preview performance is performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 240(l), the lines uttered by ally A are displayed in the lines window displayed on the image display device, and the voice output device 9 emits a voice corresponding to the lines, "Your chance has arrived!" When the is displayed, the dialogue preview performance is executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 240(m), while the effect pattern 70a of "3" is stopped (temporarily stopped) displayed in the left and right variable display areas of the effect pattern 70a that was being displayed in a variable manner, the center variable display area is A reach effect (normal reach) in which the effect pattern 70a is displayed variably is executed.

After that, when it develops into SP reach, as shown in FIG. The pending icon display area 70D is erased.

Then, when the SPSP reaches reach, as shown in FIG. 240(o), the SPSP reach effect is started and the icon display area 70C is erased together with the icon.

After that, when the execution period of the SPSP reach effect that becomes a jackpot ends (the effect control board 130 receives a special figure stop designation command indicating a jackpot), as shown in FIG. 240(p), the current jackpot game (here, the first The jackpot effect pattern 70a of "333" indicating the type of one jackpot game (1 jackpot game) and the special pattern TZ are temporarily stopped and displayed (fluctuation fluctuation) and then stopped and displayed, and the fluctuation performance ends.

Although the winning slot lamp NR remains off while the initial screen and/or returning screen is displayed, the lighting mode (for example, white lighting) that is not used in the lamp change effect (does not indicate the level of expectation of winning a jackpot) ) may turn on the winning opening lamp NR.

In addition, if the special figure stop designation command cannot be received during the fluctuation performance (temporary stop display (shaking fluctuation) of the performance pattern 70a), the performance pattern 70a that is temporarily stopped displaying (shaking fluctuation) will not be displayed stop. , the temporary stop display (shaking fluctuation) will continue.

In this way, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 239 to 240, when the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the look-ahead effect production is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the special figure that was stored at the time of restoration is restored. In the variable performance corresponding to the determination information, an alternative preview performance different from the continuous preview performance can be executed without restarting the continuous preview performance. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the dissatisfaction of the player caused by the termination of the continuous notice performance due to the stoppage of power supply, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. The same applies to the case where the power supply that was stopped during the execution of another continuous notice performance is restarted and the control state of the game is restored.

In addition, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 239 to 240, the display as a special icon (including cases where the final display mode has not changed and cases where the final display mode has changed) is pending. When the power supply that was stopped while the icon was being displayed is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the pending icon that was displayed as a special icon is displayed as a normal icon. Therefore, the user does not need to be aware of the display mode of the pending icon when the power supply is stopped, and it is possible to reduce the processing load related to display control after the power supply is restarted.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 239 to 240, when the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the icon change production is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the special figure determination information that was stored at the time of recovery In the variable performance corresponding to , the pending icon change performance is not executed, but the icon change performance can be executed again. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the player's dissatisfaction caused by the termination of the icon change effect due to the stop of power supply, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 239 to 240, even when the icon change production is executed again while the variation production corresponding to the special figure determination information stored at the time of restoration is being executed, The process will no longer continue from the stage that was suggested before the power supply was cut off. Therefore, it is possible to execute an icon change performance that matches the content of the current variation performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 239 to 240, the variable production (winning opening lamp NR) corresponding to the pending icon that triggered the execution of the lamp change production is changed to the lighting color (blue, red, etc.) with high expectation of winning the jackpot. Even if the power supply that was stopped during the memorization of the special figure judgment information that will cause the lamp to change to a rainbow) is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the winning slot will not restart without restarting the lamp change effect. The lamp NR is set in a notification mode (unlit or lit white) that does not suggest the degree of expectation of winning a jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load after the power supply is restarted, and to avoid a situation where the player is confused, such as the lamp change performance being restarted even though the fluctuating performance has not been executed.

(Specific example 1 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 1 in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described using FIGS. 241 and 242. FIG. 241 is a timing chart 1 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 242(a) to (j) correspond to (a) to (j) in the timing chart 1 of FIG. 241. This is an example of a performance.

First, at timing T0, as the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", the variable display of the first special symbol starts. Ru. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "2" to "1", and a process for starting a variable production is performed.

At this time, while the fluctuating BGM is being output, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in a specific update mode. ", and the two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as an animation of 20 frames toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. will be displayed as . In addition, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation). In addition, the icon TI is in a state where it is performing a rotating action (acting action).

In addition, the "specific update mode" when switching the special figure reservation number (corresponding to the second reservation display) displayed on the first reservation number display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is the reservation icon This display mode is different from the display mode when additionally displaying (corresponding to the first pending display) (increasing display) or shifting display (decrease display). Specifically, the display mode is such that the display contents are switched using one frame of non-animation.

Further, the variable display of the first lamp pattern LZ is performed by blinking the LED of the sub-first variable display 81, but since blinking cannot be expressed in the drawing, the variable display is expressed by double circles. It shall be. Further, the LED of the sub-first hold display 83 is also indicated by a double circle to indicate that it is blinking.

Next, at timing T1, a game ball enters the first starting port 45, and the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2". . When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (the first special figure pending number designation command as the winning signal, the pre-reading designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m memorizes (recognizes) ), the number of reserved first special drawings changes from "1" to "2".

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is increased from "1" to "2" in a specific update mode, and A pending icon HI (white icon) is additionally displayed in a normal additional manner at the second position in the pending icon display area 70B, and a winning sound based on the current winning is output (see FIG. 242(a)).

In addition, the "normal addition mode" when additionally displaying the pending icon refers to the "normal addition mode" when additionally displaying the pending icon HI when a winning command (winning signal) that increases the pending number by one is received. This is the display mode. Specifically, the display mode is such that only one pending icon HI is additionally displayed in an area corresponding to the number of reserved special figures in an animation of 10 frames so that the pending icon HI gradually increases from a very small size.

Thereafter, at timing T2, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the pending icon HI and the icon TI are in a state where they are performing a rotating action (acting action) (see FIG. 242(b)).

Then, at timing T3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, the special pattern TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ changes to a loss mode (lights out). The main stop is made at (see FIG. 242(c)).

Next, at timing T4, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "2" to "1", and a process for starting a variable production is performed.

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is decreased from "2" to "1" in a specific update mode, and The two pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. In addition, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ starts, but the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 242(d)). .

Thereafter, at timing T5, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the shift display of the icons was completed, the effect pattern 70a is in a state of being scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to be scrolled. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon and the icon are in a state where they are performing a rotation operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 242(e)).

Then, at timing T6, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("531"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (rendering operation) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 242(f)).

Next, at timing T7, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (a command error has occurred), the variable production will be terminated. processing will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue, the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the first lamp pattern LZ is displayed in a variable manner. period is extended, and the BGM output is maintained during the fluctuation accordingly (see FIG. 242(f)).

Thereafter, at timing T8, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 1. The variable display of special symbols starts. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0" and a process for starting a variable production is performed.

At this time, the first special figure pending number displayed on the sub-first pending display 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E is decreased from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode, and the first One hold icon HI displayed in the hold icon display area 70B is shifted and displayed as an animation of 20 frames toward the icon display area 70C and displayed as the icon TI. In addition, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbol 70a that is shifted from the stop position are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position (see FIG. 242(g)).

Then, the variable display of the production pattern 70a starts while the variable display of the special pattern TZ and the first lamp pattern LZ continues, and the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation) (FIG. 242) (see g)).

Then, at timing T9, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the icon is in a state where it is performing a rotation operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 242(h)).

Next, at timing T10, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("962"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the icon TI continues to rotate (actual effect) (see FIG. 242(i)).

Thereafter, at timing T11, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (a command error has occurred), the variable production will be terminated. processing will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI continue, the periods of temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, variable display of the special pattern TZ, and variable display of the first lamp pattern LZ are extended. (See FIG. 242(i)).

Then, at timing T12, when the stop time of the special symbols has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m is "0", so the state is set to a customer waiting state (game waiting state). to move to. When the performance control unit 130m receives the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit 130m performs processing to end the variable performance.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as one frame of non-animation. In addition, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbol 70a that is shifted from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (actual stop), and the special symbols TZ comes to a final stop in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ comes to a real stop in a losing mode (extinguished) (see FIG. 242(j)).

In addition, at the timing of T7, although the production control unit 130m was able to successfully receive the command (stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m, the production command sent from the production control unit 130m based on the reception of this command. Even if the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot receive the commands normally (command abnormality has occurred), the production control unit 130m will receive the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m. The same processing as in the case where the command cannot be received normally (command error has occurred) will be performed.

Here, specific example 1 has been described in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command in the normal gaming state (command abnormality has occurred), but the gaming state is a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, variable probability gaming state) Even when a game ball enters the second starting hole 47 and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the basic flow is the same as described above.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub-first reservation display 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, and the first starting port 45, respectively, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special symbol, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure It may be read as the pending number display area 70F, the second pending icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47.

In addition, if the connector of a predetermined detection sensor (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.) is disconnected, an abnormality notification (error notification) is immediately performed, but the main control In the case of a command abnormality due to disconnection of the connector of the command line for communication between the board 110 and the production control board 130, no abnormality notification is performed.

(Specific example 2 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A second specific example in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described with reference to FIGS. 243 and 244. FIG. 243 is a timing chart 2 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 244(a) to (i) correspond to (a) to (i) in the timing chart 2 of FIG. 243. This is example 1 of the performance.

First, at timing T0, as the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", the variable display of the first special symbols starts. Ru. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "4" to "3", and a process for starting a variable production is performed.

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is decreased from "4" to "3" in a specific update mode, and The four pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. In addition, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation).

Next, at timing T1, a game ball enters the first starting port 45, and the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "3" to "4". . When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (the first special figure pending number designation command as the winning signal, the pre-reading designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m memorizes (recognizes) ), the number of reserved first special drawings changes from "3" to "4".

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is decreased from "3" to "4" in a specific update mode, and A pending icon HI (white icon) is additionally displayed in a normal additional manner at the fourth position in the pending icon display area 70B, and a winning sound based on the current winning is output (see FIG. 244(a)).

Thereafter, at timing T2, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the pending icon HI and the icon TI are in a state where they are performing a rotating motion (acting motion) (see FIG. 244(b)).

Then, at timing T3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, the special pattern TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ changes to a loss mode (lights out). The main stop is made at (see FIG. 244(c)).

Next, at timing T4, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "4" to "3", and a process for starting a variable production is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation, and the first The four pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Further, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, and the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 244(d)).

Thereafter, at timing T5, when the icon shift display is completed, a pre-read zone effect (normal zone effect) is started. Specifically, the background image changes to a prefetch zone background, a blue zone image in which the text "ZONE" scrolls in the horizontal direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, the pending icon and the icon are in a state where they are performing a rotational movement (effect movement) (Fig. 244(e)).

Then, at timing T6, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("531"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (effecting operation) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 244(f)).

Next, at timing T7, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (a command error has occurred), the variable production will be terminated. processing will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue, the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the first lamp pattern LZ is displayed in a variable manner. period will be extended. Further, the zone effect (display of the prefetch zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of zone BGM) is maintained, and the prefetch zone effect continues (see FIG. 244(g)).

Thereafter, at timing T8, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the 1. The variable display of special symbols starts. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. If this is not possible (a command abnormality has occurred), the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m will remain at "3", and the process to start the variable production will not be performed. Become. At this time, the state shown in FIG. 244(g) is maintained.

Then, at timing T9, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (a command error has occurred), the variable production will be terminated. processing will not be performed. At this time, the state shown in FIG. 244(g) is maintained.

Next, at timing T10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "3" to "1", and a process for starting a variable production is performed.

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is decreased from "3" to "1" in a specific update mode, and The surplus hold icon HI displayed third in the hold icon display area 70B is erased with one frame of non-animation, and all the effect patterns 70a (past fluctuations) including the effect pattern 70a that is shifted from the stop position are erased. The effect pattern 70a) that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the effect is displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position (see FIG. 244(h)).

Then, the necessary two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Is displayed. In addition, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started while the variable display of the look-ahead zone effect, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ continues, and the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation). (See Figure 244(h)).

Note that when the surplus reservation icons are deleted and the necessary reservation icons are displayed in a shifted manner, the surplus reservation icons may be left as they are and the necessary reservation icons are displayed in a shifted manner.

Thereafter, at timing T11, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the shift display of the icons is completed, the effect pattern 70a is in a state of being scrolled at high speed while the look-ahead zone effect and the scrolling of the background image are continued. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon and the icon are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 244(i)).

After that, if the production control unit 130m is able to normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the variable production is executed while the special symbol is displayed with the first special symbol pending number being “0”. Also in (target of expectation suggestion by look-ahead zone effect), normal zone effects (display of look-ahead zone background, display of blue zone image, output of zone BGM) are executed according to the preview scenario, and the effect pattern 70a is the main one. The look-ahead zone effect ends when it stops.

Note that at timings T7 to T9, the production control unit 130m successfully received the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but based on reception of this command, the production control unit 130m Even when the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command sent from the main control unit 110m (command abnormality has occurred), the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m The same process as in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (command abnormality has occurred) will be performed.

Here, at the timing of T10, a case has been described in which the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "3" to "1", but the number of reserved first special symbols is "1". 4" to "2", and when the number of reserved first special drawings changes from "2" to "0", that is, the number of reservations grasped by the main control unit 110m and the number grasped by the production control unit 130m. If the deviation from the current number of reservations is "2", the basic flow will be the same as the above explanation.

In addition, here, specific example 2 was explained where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command in the normal gaming state (a command abnormality has occurred), but the gaming state is in a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, variable probability gaming). Even if a game ball enters the second starting port 47 in the state) and a variable display of the second special symbol is performed, the basic flow is the same as the above explanation.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub-first reservation display 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, and the first starting port 45, respectively, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special symbol, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure It may be read as the pending number display area 70F, the second pending icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47.

(Specific example 3 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A third specific example in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described with reference to FIGS. 243 and 245. FIG. 243 is a timing chart 2 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 245(a) to (i) correspond to (a) to (i) in timing chart 2 of FIG. 243. This is a second example of a performance.

Note that FIG. 244 and FIG. 245 differ in that a look-ahead effect performance is performed instead of a look-ahead zone performance as a continuous preview performance, and an icon change performance is also performed, so a description of the common parts will be omitted here. However, only the different parts will be explained.

At timing T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", and the first special symbol is Variable display of symbols starts. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "4" to "3", and a process for starting a variable production is performed.

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is decreased from "4" to "3" in a specific update mode, and The four pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI (FIG. 245). d)).

In addition, the variable display of the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, and a pre-read effect performance is executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF is displayed at the lower rear of the production pattern 70a, and an effect sound is output. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 245(d)).

Thereafter, at timing T5, when the shift display of the icon is completed, the effect image EF is erased, the pre-reading effect production is temporarily stopped, and the icon change production is started. Specifically, the third hold icon displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B changes to a blue icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, the pending icon and the icon are in a state where they are performing a rotational movement (effect movement) (Fig. 245(e)).

Then, at timing T6, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("531"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). Furthermore, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (actual performance operation) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 245(f)).

Next, at timing T7, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (a command error has occurred), the variable production will be terminated. processing will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue, the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the first lamp pattern LZ is displayed in a variable manner. period will be extended. Further, the blue icon is maintained and the icon change effect continues (see FIG. 245(g)).

Thereafter, at timing T8, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the 1. The variable display of special symbols starts. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. If this is not possible (a command abnormality has occurred), the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m will remain at "3", and the process to start the variable production will not be performed. Become. Therefore, the state shown in FIG. 245(g) is maintained without performing the prefetch effect production (displaying the effect image EF, outputting the effect sound effect).

Then, at timing T9, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (a command error has occurred), the variable production will be terminated. processing will not be performed. Therefore, the state shown in FIG. 245(g) is maintained.

Next, at timing T10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "3" to "1", and a process for starting a variable production is performed.

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is decreased from "3" to "1" in a specific update mode, and The surplus hold icon HI displayed second in the hold icon display area 70B is erased with one frame of non-animation, and the third hold icon HI displayed is erased with one frame of non-animation. Displayed second. In addition, all the performance symbols 70a (performance symbols 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable production) including the performance symbol 70a that is shifted from the stop position are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position ( (See FIG. 245(h)).

Then, the necessary two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Is displayed. Moreover, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ continues, the variable display of the production symbol 70a is started, and the pre-read effect production is executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF is displayed at the lower rear of the production pattern 70a according to the preview scenario, and an effect sound is output. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 245(h)).

Thereafter, at timing T11, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the completion of the shift display of the icon, the effect image EF is erased, the pre-reading effect production is temporarily stopped, the icon change production is executed, and the production pattern 70a is moved at high speed. will be in a scrolled state. Specifically, the first pending icon displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B changes to a red icon in accordance with the change scenario, and a changing sound is output. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon and the icon are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 245(i)).

After that, if the production control unit 130m is in a state where it can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the variation that is executed during the variation display of the special symbol where the first special symbol pending number becomes “0” Also in the performance (the object of which the expectation level is suggested by the pre-read preview performance), the pre-read effect performance (display of the effect image EF, output of the effect sound effect) and the icon change performance (the icon change performance) are executed. Then, the look-ahead effect performance ends at the timing when the performance pattern 70a scrolls at high speed, and the icon is erased at the timing when the performance pattern 70a stops displaying, and the icon change performance ends.

Note that at timings T7 to T9, the production control unit 130m successfully received the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but based on reception of this command, the production control unit 130m Even when the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command sent from the main control unit 110m (command abnormality has occurred), the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m The same process as in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (command abnormality has occurred) will be performed.

Here, at the timing of T10, a case has been described in which the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "3" to "1", but the number of reserved first special symbols is "1". 4" to "2", and when the number of reserved first special drawings changes from "2" to "0", that is, the number of reservations grasped by the main control unit 110m and the number grasped by the production control unit 130m. If the deviation from the current number of reservations is "2", the basic flow will be the same as the above explanation.

In addition, here, specific example 3 was explained in which the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command in the normal gaming state (command abnormality has occurred). Even if a game ball enters the second starting port 47 in the state) and a variable display of the second special symbol is performed, the basic flow is the same as the above explanation.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub-first reservation display 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, and the first starting port 45, respectively, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special symbol, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure It may be read as the pending number display area 70F, the second pending icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47.

As described above, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 243 to 245, in the hold icon display area, a specific number (for example, three) of hold icons (first hold information), if the production control unit 130m receives a start command (start signal) for a variable display in which the number of reserved special drawings reaches a predetermined number, the surplus reserved icons out of the specific number of reserved icons are displayed. (For example, the third pending icon) is not shifted and displayed, but the required number of pending icons (for example, the first and second pending icons) are displayed in a shifted manner. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 243 to 245, in the hold icon display area, a specific number (for example, three) of hold icons (first hold information) that is two more than a predetermined number (for example, one) If the production control unit 130m receives a start command (start signal) for a variable display in which the number of reserved special drawings reaches a predetermined number while displaying the number, the production control unit 130m displays a number of reserved icons that are one less than the specific number. A predetermined number of pending icons are displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 243 to 245, in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E, a specific number (for example, one) that is two more than a predetermined number (for example, one) is displayed. For example, if the production control unit 130m receives a start command (start signal) for a variable display in which the number of reserved special drawings becomes a predetermined number while displaying the number of pending special drawings (for example, 3), the number is one less than the specific number. Instead of displaying the number of pending items, a predetermined number of pending items is displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, since the accurate number of pending games is displayed immediately, it is possible to quickly notify the player of the pending number.

(Specific example 4 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A fourth specific example in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described with reference to FIGS. 246 and 247. FIG. 246 is timing chart 3 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command, and FIGS. 247(a) to (i) correspond to (a) to (i) in timing chart 3 of FIG. 246. This is example 1 of the performance.

First, at timing T0, as the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", the variable display of the first special symbols starts. Ru. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "4" to "3", and a process for starting a variable production is performed.

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is decreased from "4" to "3" in a specific update mode, and The four pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. In addition, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation).

Next, at timing T1, a game ball enters the first starting port 45, and the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "3" to "4". . When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (the first special figure pending number designation command as the winning signal, the pre-reading designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m memorizes (recognizes) ), the number of reserved first special drawings changes from "3" to "4".

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is decreased from "3" to "4" in a specific update mode, and A hold icon HI is additionally displayed in the fourth place of the hold icon display area 70B in a normal addition mode, and a winning sound based on the current winning is output (see FIG. 247(a)).

Thereafter, at timing T2, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the pending icon HI and the icon TI are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (acting operation) (see FIG. 247(b)).

Then, at timing T3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, the special pattern TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ changes to a loss mode (lights out). The main stop is made at (see FIG. 247(c)).

Next, at timing T4, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "4" to "3", and a process for starting a variable production is performed.

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is decreased from "4" to "3" in a specific update mode, and The four pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Further, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, and the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 247(d)).

Thereafter, at timing T5, when the icon shift display is completed, a pre-read zone effect (normal zone effect) is started. Specifically, the background image changes to a prefetch zone background, a blue zone image in which the text "ZONE" scrolls in the horizontal direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, the pending icon and the icon are in a state where they are performing a rotational movement (effect movement) (Fig. 247(e)).

Then, at timing T6, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("531"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). Further, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (actual performance operation) of the pending icon HI and the relevant icon TI continue (see FIG. 247(f)).

Next, at timing T7, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (a command error has occurred), the variable production will be terminated. processing will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue, the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the first lamp pattern LZ is displayed in a variable manner. period will be extended. Furthermore, the zone effect (display of the prefetch zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of zone BGM) is maintained, and the prefetch zone effect continues (see FIG. 247(g)).

Thereafter, at timing T8, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the 1. The variable display of special symbols starts. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. If this is not possible (a command abnormality has occurred), the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m will remain at "3", and the process to start the variable production will not be performed. Become. At this time, the state shown in FIG. 247(g) is maintained.

Then, at timing T9, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (a command error has occurred), the variable production will be terminated. processing will not be performed. At this time, the state shown in FIG. 247(g) is maintained.

Next, at timing T10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. If this is not possible (a command abnormality has occurred), the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m will remain at "3", and the process to start the variable production will not be performed. Become. At this time, the state shown in FIG. 247(g) is maintained.

Then, at timing T11, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (a command error has occurred), the variable production will be terminated. processing will not be performed. At this time, the state shown in FIG. 247(g) is maintained.

Next, at timing T12, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "3" to "0" and a process is performed to start the variable production.

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is decreased from "3" to "0" in a specific update mode, and The surplus hold icons HI displayed in the second and third positions of the hold icon display area 70B are erased with one frame of non-animation, and all the effect patterns 70a (including the effect pattern 70a that is shifted from the stop position) are erased. The effect pattern 70a) that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable effect is displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position (see FIG. 247(h)).

Then, one necessary hold icon HI displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B is shifted and displayed as an animation of 20 frames toward the icon display area 70C and displayed as the icon TI. In addition, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started while the variable display of the look-ahead zone effect, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ continues, and the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation). (See Figure 247(h)).

Thereafter, at timing T13, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the shift display of the icons is completed, the effect pattern 70a is in a state of being scrolled at high speed while the look-ahead zone effect and the scrolling of the background image are continued. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon and the icon are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 247(i)).

Thereafter, if the performance control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the look-ahead zone performance ends when the performance symbol 70a comes to a final stop.

In addition, at the timing of T7 to T11, the production control unit 130m was able to normally receive the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but based on the reception of this command, the production control unit 130m Even when the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command sent from the main control unit 110m (command abnormality has occurred), the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m The same process as in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (command abnormality has occurred) will be performed.

Here, at the timing of T12, a case has been described in which the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "3" to "0", but the number of reserved first special symbols is "0". If the difference between the number of reservations known by the main control unit 110m and the number of reservations known by the production control unit 130m is ``3'', the basic flow changes from ``4'' to ``1''. is the same as the explanation above.

In addition, here, specific example 4 has been described in which the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command in the normal gaming state (command abnormality has occurred). Even if a game ball enters the second starting port 47 in the state) and a variable display of the second special symbol is performed, the basic flow is the same as the above explanation.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub-first reservation display 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, and the first starting port 45, respectively, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special symbol, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure It may be read as the pending number display area 70F, the second pending icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47.

(Specific example 5 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 5 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described with reference to FIGS. 246 and 248. FIG. 246 is timing chart 3 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command, and FIGS. 248 (a) to (i) correspond to (a) to (i) in timing chart 3 of FIG. 246. This is a second example of a performance.

Note that FIG. 247 and FIG. 248 differ in that a prefetching effect performance is performed instead of the prefetching zone performance as a continuous preview performance, and an icon change performance is also performed, so a description of the common parts will be omitted here. However, only the different parts will be explained.

At timing T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", and the first special symbol is Variable display of symbols begins. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "4" to "3", and a process for starting a variable production is performed.

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is decreased from "4" to "3" in a specific update mode, and The four pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI.

In addition, the variable display of the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, and a pre-read effect performance is executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF is displayed at the lower rear of the production pattern 70a, and an effect sound is output. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 248(d)).

Thereafter, at timing T5, when the shift display of the icon is completed, the effect image EF is erased, the pre-reading effect production is temporarily stopped, and the icon change production is started. Specifically, the third hold icon displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B changes to a blue icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, the pending icon and the icon are in a state where they are performing a rotational movement (effect movement) (Fig. 248(e)).

Then, at timing T6, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("531"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). Further, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (actual performance operation) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 248(f)).

Next, at timing T7, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (a command error has occurred), the variable production will be terminated. processing will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue, the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the first lamp pattern LZ is displayed in a variable manner. period will be extended. Further, the blue icon is maintained and the icon change effect continues (see FIG. 248(g)).

Thereafter, at timing T8, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the 1. The variable display of special symbols starts. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. If this is not possible (because a command error has occurred), the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m will remain at "3", and the process to start the variable production will not be performed. Become. Therefore, the state shown in FIG. 248(g) is maintained without performing the prefetch effect production (displaying the effect image EF, outputting the effect sound effect).

Then, at timing T9, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (a command error has occurred), the variable production will be terminated. processing will not be performed. Therefore, the state shown in FIG. 248(g) is maintained.

Next, at timing T10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. If this is not possible (a command abnormality has occurred), the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m will remain at "3", and the process to start the variable production will not be performed. Become. Therefore, the state shown in FIG. 248(g) is maintained without performing the prefetch effect production (displaying the effect image EF, outputting the effect sound effect).

Thereafter, at timing T11, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (a command error has occurred), the variable production will be terminated. processing will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue, the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the first lamp pattern LZ is displayed in a variable manner. period is extended (see Figure 248(g)).

Thereafter, at timing T12, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 1. The variable display of special symbols starts. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "3" to "0" and a process is performed to start the variable production.

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is decreased from "3" to "0" in a specific update mode, and The surplus hold icons HI displayed first and second in the hold icon display area 70B are erased with one frame of non-animation, and the third hold icon HI is erased with one frame of non-animation. Displayed first in non-animated form. In addition, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a that are shifted from the stop position (performance symbols 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position.

Then, one necessary hold icon HI displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B is shifted and displayed as an animation of 20 frames toward the icon display area 70C and displayed as the icon TI. Moreover, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ continues, the variable display of the production symbol 70a is started, and the pre-read effect production is executed. Specifically, a red effect image EF is displayed at the lower rear of the production pattern 70a, and an effect sound is output. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 248(h)).

Thereafter, at timing T13, the icon change performance is executed at the same time as the shift display of the icon is completed, the effect image EF is erased, the pre-reading effect performance is completed, and the performance pattern 70a is in a state of being scrolled at high speed. Specifically, the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C changes to a red icon in accordance with the change scenario, and a change sound is output. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the icon is in a state where it is performing a rotation operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 248(i)).

Thereafter, when the performance control unit 130m is in a state where it can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the icon is erased at the timing when the performance pattern 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change performance ends.

In addition, at the timing of T7 to T11, the production control unit 130m was able to normally receive the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but based on the reception of this command, the production control unit 130m Even when the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command sent from the main control unit 110m (command abnormality has occurred), the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m The same process as in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (command abnormality has occurred) will be performed.

Here, at the timing of T12, a case has been described in which the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "3" to "0", but the number of reserved first special symbols is "0". If the difference between the number of reservations known by the main control unit 110m and the number of reservations known by the production control unit 130m is ``3'', the basic flow changes from ``4'' to ``1''. is the same as the explanation above.

In addition, here, specific example 5 was explained in which the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command in the normal gaming state (command abnormality has occurred). Even if a game ball enters the second starting port 47 in the state) and a variable display of the second special symbol is performed, the basic flow is the same as the above explanation.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub-first reservation display 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, and the first starting port 45, respectively, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special symbol, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure It may be read as the pending number display area 70F, the second pending icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47.

As described above, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 246 to 248, in the hold icon display area, a specific number (for example, four) of hold icons (first hold icon) that is three more than a predetermined number (for example, one) information), if the production control unit 130m receives a start command (start signal) for a variable display in which the number of reserved special drawings reaches a predetermined number, a number of reserved icons one less than the specific number will be displayed. A predetermined number of pending icons are displayed without having to do so. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 246 to 248, in the hold icon display area, a specific number (for example, four) of hold icons (first hold information) that is three more than a predetermined number (for example, one) If the production control unit 130m receives a start command (start signal) for a variable display in which the number of reserved special drawings reaches a predetermined number while the number of reserved special drawings reaches a predetermined number, the number of reserved icons that is one less than the specific number is displayed. The number of pending icons that are two less than the specific number is displayed, and then a predetermined number of pending icons are displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 246 to 248, in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E, a specific number (for example, one) that is three more than a predetermined number (for example, one) is displayed. For example, when the performance control unit 130m receives a start command (start signal) for a variable display in which the number of reserved special drawings becomes a predetermined number while displaying the number of pending special drawings (for example, 4), one and two A predetermined number of pending numbers is displayed without displaying a smaller number of pending numbers. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, since the accurate number of pending games is displayed immediately, it is possible to quickly notify the player of the pending number.

(Specific example 6 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 6 in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described using FIGS. 249 and 250. FIG. 249 is a timing chart 4 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 250(a) to (h) correspond to (a) to (h) in timing chart 4 of FIG. 249. This is an example of a performance.

First, at timing T0, as the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", the variable display of the first special symbols starts. Ru. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "4" to "3", and a process for starting a variable production is performed.

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is decreased from "4" to "3" in a specific update mode, and The four pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. In addition, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation).

Next, at timing T1, a game ball enters the first starting port 45, and the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "3" to "4". . When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (the first special figure pending number designation command as the winning signal, the pre-reading designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m memorizes (recognizes) ), the number of reserved first special drawings changes from "3" to "4".

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is decreased from "3" to "4" in a specific update mode, and A pending icon HI (white icon) is additionally displayed in a normal additional manner at the fourth position in the pending icon display area 70B, and a winning sound based on the current winning is output (see FIG. 250(a)).

Thereafter, at timing T2, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the pending icon HI and the icon TI are in a state where they are performing a rotating motion (acting motion) (see FIG. 250(b)).

Then, at timing T3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, the special pattern TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ changes to a loss mode (lights out). The main stop is made at (see FIG. 250(c)).

Next, at timing T4, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "4" to "3", and a process for starting a variable production is performed.

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is decreased from "4" to "3" in a specific update mode, and The four pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Further, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, and the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 250(d)).

Thereafter, at timing T5, when the shift display of the icons is completed, the pre-read zone effect (normal zone effect) and the icon change effect are started. Specifically, the background image changes to a prefetch zone background, a blue zone image in which the text "ZONE" scrolls in the horizontal direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. Additionally, the third hold icon displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B changes to a blue icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, the pending icon and the icon are in a state where they are performing a rotational movement (effect movement) (Fig. 250(e)).

Then, at timing T6, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("531"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). Further, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (actual performance operation) of the pending icon HI and the relevant icon TI continue (see FIG. 250(f)).

Next, at timing T7, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (a command error has occurred), the variable production will be terminated. processing will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue, the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the first lamp pattern LZ is displayed in a variable manner. period will be extended. In addition, the zone effect (display of the prefetch zone background, display of the blue zone image, and output of zone BGM) is maintained to continue the prefetch zone effect, and the blue icon is maintained and the icon change effect continues (Fig. 250 ( (see g)).

Thereafter, at timing T8, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the 1. The variable display of special symbols starts. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. If this is not possible (a command abnormality has occurred), the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m will remain at "3", and the process to start the variable production will not be performed. Become. Therefore, the state shown in FIG. 250(g) is maintained.

Then, at timing T9, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (a command error has occurred), the variable production will be terminated. processing will not be performed. Therefore, the state shown in FIG. 250(g) is maintained.

Next, at timing T10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. If this is not possible (a command abnormality has occurred), the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m will remain at "3", and the process to start the variable production will not be performed. Become. Therefore, the state shown in FIG. 250(g) is maintained.

Thereafter, at timing T11, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (a command error has occurred), the variable production will be terminated. processing will not be performed. Therefore, the state shown in FIG. 250(g) is maintained.

Then, at timing T12, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 1. The variable display of special symbols starts. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. If this is not possible (a command abnormality has occurred), the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m will remain at "3", and the process to start the variable production will not be performed. Become. Therefore, the state shown in FIG. 250(g) is maintained.

Next, at timing T13, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (a command error has occurred), the variable production will be terminated. processing will not be performed. Therefore, the state shown in FIG. 250(g) is maintained.

Thereafter, at timing T14, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, the game enters a customer waiting state (game waiting state). When the production control unit 130m receives the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "3" to "0". ” and a process is performed to set a waiting timer until the customer waiting demonstration performance starts.

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is decreased from "3" to "0" in a specific update mode, and The surplus pending icons HI displayed in the first to third positions of the pending icon display area 70B and the icons displayed in the icon display area 70C are erased with one frame of non-animation, and the icon change effect and The look-ahead zone performance ends. In addition, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbol 70a that is shifted from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (momentarily derived and displayed), and , the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop in a predetermined loss mode (“248”), and the first lamp symbol LZ comes to a final stop in a loss mode (extinguished) (see FIG. 250(h)).

Note that at timings T7 to T13, the production control unit 130m was able to successfully receive the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m. Even when the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command sent from the main control unit 110m (command abnormality has occurred), the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m The same process as in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (command abnormality has occurred) will be performed.

Here, a case has been described in which the production control unit 130m receives the customer waiting state designation command in a state where the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) is "3" at timing T14. Even when the customer waiting state designation command is received when the number of reservations is ``4'', ``2'', or ``1'', the basic flow is the same as described above.

In addition, here, specific example 6 has been described in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command in the normal gaming state (command abnormality has occurred), but the gaming state is in a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, variable probability gaming Even if a game ball enters the second starting port 47 in the state) and a variable display of the second special symbol is performed, the basic flow is the same as the above explanation.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub-first reservation display 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, and the first starting port 45, respectively, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special symbol, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure It may be read as the pending number display area 70F, the second pending icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47.

As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 249 to 250, if the production control unit 130m normally receives the customer waiting state designation command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the production pattern 70a, the predetermined All the performance symbols 70a (performance symbols 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable production), including the performance symbols 70a that are shifted from the stop position that has been set, are now displayed at the stop position (actual stop). ing. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player that the variable performance has ended (transition to the customer waiting state), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Specific example 7 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 7 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described with reference to FIGS. 251 and 252. FIG. 251 is timing chart 5 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive commands, and FIGS. 252(a) to (h) correspond to (a) to (h) in timing chart 5 of FIG. 251. This is an example of a performance.

Note that FIG. 249 and FIG. 251 differ only in that the command received at timing T14 is a customer waiting designation command or an opening designation command, so the explanation of the common parts will be omitted here, and the differences will be omitted here. Only parts will be explained.

At timing T14, when the stop time of the special symbols has elapsed, a jackpot game (special game) is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the opening designation command sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains “3”, and it is a jackpot. Processing for starting the opening performance of the game is performed.

At this time, the first special symbol reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E remains "3", and is displayed on the production pattern 70a and the icon display area. The pending icon HI and the corresponding icon are deleted, and the icon change effect and the look-ahead zone effect are completed. In addition, the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop in a predetermined loss mode (“248”), the first lamp symbol LZ comes to a final stop in a loss mode (extinguished), and the opening effect image is displayed (Fig. 252 ( h)).

After that, during the jackpot game or after the end of the jackpot game (time-saving game state, variable probability game state), if the production control unit 130m can normally receive the first special figure reservation number designation command from the main control unit 110m. , the number of reserved first special symbols displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is updated (increased) to the number corresponding to the number of first reserved special symbols designation command in a specific update mode. display, decrease display).

Note that at timings T7 to T13, the production control unit 130m was able to successfully receive the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m. Even when the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command sent from the main control unit 110m (command abnormality has occurred), the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m The same process as in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (command abnormality has occurred) will be performed.

Here, a case has been described in which the opening designation command is received at the timing of T14 when the first special figure pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m is "3". Even when the opening designation command is received when the number is "4", "2", or "1", the basic flow is the same as described above.

In addition, here, specific example 7 was explained where the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command in the normal gaming state (command abnormality has occurred), but the gaming state is in a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, variable probability gaming Even if a game ball enters the second starting port 47 in the state) and a variable display of the second special symbol is performed, the basic flow is the same as the above explanation.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub-first reservation display 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, and the first starting port 45, respectively, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special symbol, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure It may be read as the pending number display area 70F, the second pending icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47.

As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 251 and 252, if the production control unit 130m normally receives the opening designation command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the production pattern 70a, the predetermined All of the performance symbols 70a (performance symbols 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance), including the performance symbols 70a that are shifted from the stop position, are not displayed at the stop position (actual stop), and the jackpot game The opening performance image is displayed. Therefore, the opening performance is not hindered by the performance symbols, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Specific example 8 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 8 in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described using FIGS. 253 and 254. FIG. 253 is a timing chart 6 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 254(a) to (j) correspond to (a) to (j) in the timing chart 6 of FIG. 253. This is an example of a performance.

First, at timing T0, as the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", the variable display of the first special symbol starts. Ru. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "2" to "1", and a process for starting a variable production is performed.

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is decreased from "2" to "1" in a specific update mode, and The two pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. In addition, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation).

Next, at timing T1, when the shift display of the icons is completed, a pre-read zone effect (normal zone effect) and an icon change effect are started. Specifically, the background image changes to a prefetch zone background, a blue zone image in which the text "ZONE" scrolls in the horizontal direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. Further, the first hold icon displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B changes to a blue icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, the pending icon and the icon are in a state where they are performing a rotational movement (effect movement) (Fig. 254(a)).

Then, at the timing of T2, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2". At this timing, the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the winning command (the first special figure pending number designation command as the winning signal, the pre-reading designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m (command abnormality has occurred). In this case, the processing for updating the first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "1" (see FIG. 254(b)).

Thereafter, at timing T3, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). Further, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (actual performance operation) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 254(c)).

Next, at timing T4, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (a command error has occurred), the variable production will be terminated. processing will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue, the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the first lamp pattern LZ is displayed in a variable manner. period will be extended. In addition, the zone effect (display of the prefetch zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of zone BGM) is maintained, the prefetch zone effect continues, the blue icon is maintained, and the icon change effect continues (Fig. 254 ( d)).

Thereafter, at timing T5, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", and the number of reserved symbols decreases from "2" to "1". 1. The variable display of special symbols starts. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. Then, the first special figure reservation number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "1", that is, the process for starting the variable production without changing the first special figure reservation number. will be held.

At this time, the first special symbol reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E is maintained at "1", and the second number of the first reservation icon display area 70B is displayed. A hold icon HI (white icon) is additionally displayed in a special additional manner. In addition, all the performance symbols 70a (performance symbols 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable production) including the performance symbol 70a that is shifted from the stop position are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position ( (See FIG. 254(e)).

In addition, the "special additional mode" when additionally displaying (increasingly displaying) the hold icon (corresponding to the first hold display) upon reception of the start time command (start time signal) means that the production control unit 130m is connected to the main control unit 110m. This is a display mode when the number of reserved special drawings changes, which cannot occur unless the command from the player is normally received. Specifically, the display mode is such that the hold icon (corresponding to the first hold display) is additionally displayed as one frame of non-animation so that it has a normal size from the beginning. In addition, the special addition modes include a special addition mode that displays one additional hold icon, a special addition mode that additionally displays two hold icons at the same time, a special addition mode that additionally displays three hold icons at the same time, and a special addition mode that displays three hold icons at the same time. There is a special addition mode in which two items are additionally displayed at the same time.

Then, the necessary two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Is displayed. Further, the variable display of the production pattern 70a is started while the variable display of the special pattern TZ and the first lamp pattern LZ continues, and the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation) (FIG. 254) (see e)).

Thereafter, at timing T6, when the icon shift display is completed, the icon change effect (the icon change effect) is started. Specifically, the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C changes to a red icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the pending icon and the icon are rotated (either added in the normal addition mode or special Regardless of whether it is additionally displayed in the additional mode, the same operation mode is used to perform the performance operation (see FIG. 254(f)).

Next, at timing T7, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance (the SP ready-to-win performance ends), the performance symbol 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a reach-missing mode ("878"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). Further, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (actual performance operation) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 254(g)).

Then, at timing T8, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, the special pattern TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ changes to a loss mode (lights out). The main stop is made at (see FIG. 254(h)).

Thereafter, at timing T9, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 1. The variable display of special symbols starts. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0" and a process for starting a variable production is performed.

At this time, the first special figure pending number displayed on the sub first pending display 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in one frame of non-animation, and the first One hold icon HI displayed in the hold icon display area 70B is shifted and displayed as an animation of 20 frames toward the icon display area 70C and displayed as the icon TI. Further, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, and the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 254(i)).

Next, at timing T10, when the icon shift display is completed, the icon change effect is started. Specifically, the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C (the icon corresponding to the first pending memory in which the production control unit 130m could not normally receive the winning command) changes to a blue icon, and A changing sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, the icon is in a state where it is performing a rotational movement (effect movement) (Fig. 254(j) )reference).

Thereafter, when the performance control unit 130m is in a state where it can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the icon is erased at the timing when the performance pattern 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change performance ends.

Note that at timings T2 to T4, the production control unit 130m was able to successfully receive the commands (commands at the time of winning, commands at the time of stopping) sent from the main control unit 110m, but based on reception of this command, the production control unit 130m Even when the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command sent from the main control unit 110m (command abnormality has occurred), the commands sent from the main control unit 110m (winning command, stop command) The same process as in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (command abnormality has occurred) will be performed.

Here, at the timing of T5, a case has been described in which the first special figure pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "1", but the first special figure pending number is "1". 0" to "0", when the number of reserved 1st special drawings changes from "2" to "2", when the number of 1st reserved special drawings changes from "3" to "3", in other words, the main control If the number of reservations stored (understood) by the section 110m and the number of reservations stored (understood) by the production control section 130m are the same, the basic flow will be the same as the above explanation.

In addition, here, specific example 8 has been described in which the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command in the normal gaming state (command abnormality has occurred), but the gaming state is in a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, variable probability gaming Even if a game ball enters the second starting port 47 in the state) and a variable display of the second special symbol is performed, the basic flow is the same as the above explanation.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub-first reservation display 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, and the first starting port 45, respectively, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special symbol, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure It may be read as the pending number display area 70F, the second pending icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47.

As described above, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 253 and 254, while a predetermined number (for example, one) of reservation icons (first reservation information) are displayed in the reservation icon display area, the number of reserved special drawings is set to a predetermined number. When the production control unit 130m receives a start command (start signal) for a variable display that is a number, it displays one more (for example, two) hold icons than the predetermined number, and then displays those hold icons. By shifting and displaying, a predetermined number of pending icons are displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 253 and 254, when a predetermined number (for example, one) of reserved numbers is displayed on the sub-first reserved display 83 or the first special symbol reserved number display area 70E, When the production control unit 130m receives a start command (start signal) for a variable display in which the number of pending figures becomes a predetermined number, the number of pending figures that is one more (for example, two) than the predetermined number is not displayed. , a predetermined number of pending items is displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, since the accurate number of pending games is displayed immediately, it is possible to quickly notify the player of the pending number.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 253 and 254, although the reservation icon (first reservation information) is not displayed in the reservation icon display area, the number of reserved special drawings is "0" while the icon is being displayed. When the production control unit 130m receives a start command (start signal) for a variable display, it displays a hold icon one more than "0" (for example, 1), and then By using shift display, the hold icon is not displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 253 and 254, while the sub-first reservation display 83 or the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E is displaying the number of reservations of "0", the number of special symbols reservation is When the production control unit 130m receives a start command (start signal) for a variable display that becomes "0", the number of pending events that is one more than "0" (for example, one) is not displayed, and "0" is displayed. 0" is displayed (maintained). Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, since the accurate number of pending games is displayed immediately, it is possible to quickly notify the player of the pending number.

(Specific example 9 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 8 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described using FIGS. 255 and 256. FIG. 255 is a timing chart 7 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 256(a) to (f) correspond to (a) to (f) in the timing chart 7 of FIG. 255. This is an example of a performance.

First, at timing T0, as the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", the loss fluctuation display of the first special symbol starts. be done. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "2" to "1", and a process is performed to start a variable production.

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is decreased from "2" to "1" in a specific update mode, and The two pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. In addition, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation).

Next, at timing T1, when the shift display of the icons is completed, a pre-read zone effect (normal zone effect) and an icon change effect are started. Specifically, the background image changes to a prefetch zone background, a blue zone image in which the text "ZONE" scrolls in the horizontal direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. Further, the first hold icon displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B changes to a blue icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, and the pending icon and the icon are in a state where they are performing a rotational movement (effect movement) (Fig. 256 (see (a)).

Then, at the timing of T2, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2". At this timing, the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the winning command (the first special figure pending number designation command as the winning signal, the pre-reading designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m (command abnormality has occurred). In this case, the process of updating the first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "1" (see FIG. 256(b)).

Furthermore, at the timing of T3, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "2" to "3" as a game ball enters the first starting port 45. At this timing, the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the winning command (the first special figure pending number designation command as the winning signal, the pre-reading designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m (command abnormality has occurred). In this case, the process of updating the first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "1".

Thereafter, at timing T4, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (effecting operation) of the pending icon HI and the relevant icon TI continue (see FIG. 256(c)).

Next, at timing T5, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (command abnormality has occurred), processing to end the variable production. is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue, the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the first lamp pattern LZ is displayed in a variable manner. period will be extended. In addition, the zone effect (display of the prefetch zone background, display of the blue zone image, and output of zone BGM) is maintained, the prefetch zone effect continues, the blue icon is maintained, and the icon change effect continues (Fig. 256 ( d)).

After that, at timing T6, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the 1. The variable display of special symbols starts. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. Then, the first special symbol reservation number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "2", that is, the first special symbol reservation number increases by 1 and a process is performed to start the variable production. be exposed.

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is increased from "1" to "2" in a specific update mode, and Hold icons HI (white icons) are additionally displayed in the second and third positions of the hold icon display area 70B in a special addition mode (two icons at the same time) (see FIG. 256(e)).

In addition, all the performance symbols 70a (performance symbols 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable production) including the performance symbol 70a that is shifted from the stop position are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position ( (See FIG. 256(e)).

Then, the necessary three pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Is displayed. Further, the variable display of the production pattern 70a is started while the variable display of the special pattern TZ and the first lamp pattern LZ continues, and the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation) (FIG. 256) (see e)).

Thereafter, at timing T7, when the icon shift display is completed, the icon change effect (the icon change effect) is started. Specifically, the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C changes to a red icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the fluctuating display of the production pattern 70a has started, and the pending icon and the icon are rotated (either added in the normal addition mode or special addition). Regardless of whether it is additionally displayed in the mode or not, the state is that the performance operation) is performed in the same motion mode (see FIG. 256(f)).

Note that at timings T2 to T5, the production control unit 130m was able to normally receive the commands (commands at the time of winning, commands at the time of stopping) sent from the main control unit 110m, but based on reception of this command, the production control unit 130m Even when the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command sent from the main control unit 110m (command abnormality has occurred), the commands sent from the main control unit 110m (winning command, stop command) The same process as in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (command abnormality has occurred) is performed.

Here, at the timing of T6, a case has been described in which the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "2", but the number of reserved first special symbols changes from "1" to "2". When the number of reserved first special drawings changes from "0" to "1", when the number of reserved first special drawings changes from "2" to "3", when the number of reserved first special drawings changes from "3" to "4", in other words, the main control If the number of reservations stored (understood) by the production control section 110m is one more than the number of reservations stored (understood) by the production control section 130m, the basic flow is the same as the above explanation. becomes.

Specifically, when the production control unit 130m receives a start command (a first special symbol reservation number command as a start signal, a special symbol designation command, a special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m. , the first special figure pending number displayed on the sub first pending display 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E is increased by "1" in the specific update mode, and the production control unit 130m memorizes (understands) ), when the number of reserved first special drawings changes from "2" to "3", the reserved icons HI (white icons) are displayed in a special additional mode in the third and fourth positions of the first reserved icon display area 70B. (Two at the same time) will be additionally displayed. Then, the pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI.

In addition, here, specific example 9 was explained where the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command in the normal gaming state (command abnormality has occurred), but the gaming state is in a specific gaming state (time saving gaming state, variable probability gaming Even if a game ball enters the second starting port 47 in the state) and a variable display of the second special symbol is performed, the basic flow is the same as the above explanation.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub-first reservation display 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, and the first starting port 45, respectively, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special symbol, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure It may be read as the pending number display area 70F, the second pending icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47.

(Specific example 10 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A tenth specific example in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described with reference to FIGS. 257 and 258. FIG. 257 is a timing chart 8 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 258(a) to (f) correspond to (a) to (f) in the timing chart 8 of FIG. 257. This is an example of a performance.

First, at timing T0, as the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", the loss fluctuation display of the first special symbol starts. be done. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "2" to "1", and a process for starting a variable production is performed.

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is decreased from "2" to "1" in a specific update mode, and The two pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. In addition, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation).

Next, at timing T1, when the shift display of the icons is completed, a pre-read zone effect (normal zone effect) and an icon change effect are started. Specifically, the background image changes to a prefetch zone background, a blue zone image in which the text "ZONE" scrolls in the horizontal direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. Further, the first hold icon displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B changes to a blue icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, and the pending icon and the icon are in a state where they are performing a rotational movement (effect movement) (Fig. 258 (see (a)).

Then, at the timing of T2, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2". At this timing, the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the winning command (the first special figure pending number designation command as the winning signal, the pre-reading designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m (command abnormality has occurred). In this case, the process of updating the first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "1" (see FIG. 258(b)).

After that, at the timing of T3, the game ball enters the first starting port 45, and the number of first special symbols reserved that is stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "2" to "3". At this timing, the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the winning command (the first special figure pending number designation command as the winning signal, the pre-reading designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m (command abnormality has occurred). In this case, the process of updating the first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "1" (see FIG. 258(b)).

Next, at timing T4, the game ball enters the first starting port 45, and the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "3" to "4". . At this timing, the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the winning command (the first special figure pending number designation command as the winning signal, the pre-reading designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m (command abnormality has occurred). In this case, the process of updating the first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "1" (see FIG. 258(b)).

Then, at timing T5, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (presentation operation) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 258(c)).

Thereafter, at timing T6, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (a command error has occurred), the variable production will be terminated. processing will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue, the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the first lamp pattern LZ is displayed in a variable manner. period will be extended. In addition, the zone effect (display of the pre-read zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of zone BGM) is maintained, the pre-read zone effect continues, the blue icon is maintained, and the icon change effect continues (Fig. 258 ( d)).

Thereafter, at timing T7, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". 1. The variable display of special symbols starts. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. Then, the first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "3", and a process is performed to start a variable production.

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is increased from "1" to "3" in a specific update mode, and Hold icons HI (white icons) are additionally displayed in the second to fourth positions of the hold icon display area 70B in a special addition mode (three at the same time). In addition, all the performance symbols 70a (performance symbols 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable production) including the performance symbol 70a that is shifted from the stop position are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position ( (See FIG. 258(e)).

Then, the necessary four pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Is displayed. In addition, the variable display of the production pattern 70a is started while the variable display of the special pattern TZ and the first lamp pattern LZ continues, and the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation) (Fig. 258 ( (see e)).

Thereafter, at timing T8, when the icon shift display is completed, the icon change effect (the icon change effect) is started. Specifically, the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C changes to a red icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the pending icon and the icon are rotated (either added in the normal addition mode or special Regardless of whether it is additionally displayed in the additional mode, the same operation mode is used to perform the performance operation (refer to FIG. 258(f)).

Thereafter, when the performance control unit 130m is in a state where it can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the icon is erased at the timing when the performance pattern 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change performance ends.

It should be noted that at timings T2 to T6, the production control unit 130m was able to normally receive the commands (command at the time of winning, command at the time of stopping, command at the time of starting) sent from the main control unit 110m, but based on the reception of this command, Even when the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command sent from the production control unit 130m (command abnormality has occurred), the command sent from the main control unit 110m (winning command, The same process as in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command at the time of stopping and the command at the time of starting (command abnormality has occurred) is performed.

Here, at the timing of T7, a case has been described in which the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "3", but the number of reserved first special symbols is "3". When the number of reserved first special symbols changes from "0" to "2", when the number of reserved first special symbols changes from "2" to "4", in other words, the number of reservations stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m is higher than the number reserved for production control. If there are two more reservations than the number stored (kept) by the unit 130m, the basic flow is the same as the above explanation.

In addition, at the timing of T7, if the first special figure pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "0" to "3", the first special figure pending number changes from "1" to "4". ”, that is, the number of reservations stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m is 3 more than the number of reservations stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m. The flow is similar to the explanation above.

Specifically, when the production control unit 130m receives a start command (a first special symbol reservation number command as a start signal, a special symbol designation command, a special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m. , the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70
The number of reserved first special symbols displayed in E is increased to "3" in the specific update mode, and the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "0" to "3". ”, the first special figure reservation number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from “1” to “4” in the first to fourth positions of the first reservation icon display area 70B. In this case, hold icons HI (white icons) are additionally displayed in the second to fourth positions of the first hold icon display area 70B in a special addition mode (three at the same time). Then, the pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI.

In addition, here, specific example 10 was explained in which the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command in the normal gaming state (command abnormality has occurred). Even if a game ball enters the second starting port 47 in the state) and a variable display of the second special symbol is performed, the basic flow is the same as the above explanation.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub-first reservation display 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, and the first starting port 45, respectively, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special symbol, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure It may be read as the pending number display area 70F, the second pending icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47.

In this way, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 255 to 258, when a start command (start signal) indicating that the number of reserved special drawings is one more than the number of displayed reservation icons is received. , there is a special addition mode (display mode in which the pending icon HI is displayed in a 10-frame animation that gradually increases from a very small size to an additional display mode), which is different from the normal addition mode (display mode in which the pending icon HI gradually increases from a very small size to an additional display mode of 10 frames). The pending icon is additionally displayed (increased display) in a display mode in which one frame of non-animation is additionally displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 255 to 258, when a start command (start signal) indicating that the number of reserved special drawings is more than the displayed number of reserved icons is received, A special addition mode (display mode in which only one additional hold icon HI is displayed in 10 frames of animation so that the hold icon HI gradually increases from a very small size) is different from the normal addition mode (a display mode in which the pending icon HI gradually increases in size from a very small size to an additional display mode). The pending icon is additionally displayed (increased display) in the non-animated additional display mode). Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 255 to 258, when a start time command (start time signal) indicating that the number of special drawings on hold is greater than the number of displayed hold icons is received, the reception After adding and displaying (increasing display) the number of reservation icons that are one more than the number of reserved special drawings received, the number of reservation icons corresponding to the number of special drawings reservation received is displayed by shifting and displaying those reservation icons (decreasing display). A hold icon is now displayed. Therefore, it is possible to correct the discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations while informing the player that the number of reservations has decreased, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(Summary of specific examples shown in Figures 241 to 258)
As described above, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 241 to 258, the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (stop signal) during the temporary stop of the production symbol 70a (command abnormality occurs). In this case, the temporary stop period of the performance symbol 70a, the fluctuation period of the special symbol TZ and the lamp symbol LZ, and the output period of the fluctuating BGM are extended (continued) from the normal period. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a period in which no performance is performed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 241 to 258, during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the production pattern 70a, the scrolling of the background image, the pending icon, and the rotation of the icon continue. ing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the performance from becoming extremely static and boring during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the performance symbols 70a, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 241 to 258, even during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the presentation pattern 70a, the pre-reading notice presentation (icon change presentation, pre-reading zone presentation) is continued (executed). It looks like this. Therefore, even if a command abnormality occurs in which the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, the pre-read preview performance will not end, and the game can be improved by avoiding inconveniences that may cause player dissatisfaction. It becomes possible to improve the interest of

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 241 to 258, when the pre-reading notice presentation (icon change presentation, pre-reading zone presentation) is continued (executed) during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the presentation pattern 70a, Even if there is, the preview mode (type of icon, type of zone performance) of the pre-read preview performance does not change during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the performance pattern 70a. Therefore, there is no abnormality in the progress of the pre-read preview performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game by avoiding inconveniences that may increase player dissatisfaction.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 241 to 258, if the production control unit 130m normally receives the start command (start signal) during the extension of the temporary stop period of the production pattern 70a, All the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a that are deviated from the predetermined stop position (the performance symbols 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (instantly derived and displayed). The variable display starts from. Therefore, the appearance at the start of the variable performance can be made better than when the variable display is started with the performance symbols 70a deviated from the stop position, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 241 to 258, if the production control unit 130m normally receives the start command (start signal) during the extension of the temporary stop period of the production pattern 70a, the special The symbol TZ and the lamp symbol LZ are not stopped and displayed, but continue to be displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform complicated processing such as stopping and displaying the special symbol TZ and the lamp symbol LZ, and it is possible to reduce the control load. Furthermore, even if the performance symbol 70a is displayed at the stop position (momentarily derived and displayed), the special symbol TZ and the lamp symbol LZ can inform the player that a variable performance is being performed, which increases the interest of the game. It becomes possible to improve the

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 241 to 258, if the production control unit 130m normally receives the start command (start signal) during the extension of the temporary stop period of the production pattern 70a, the relevant The icon is erased in a shorter time (1 frame of non-animation) than the normal time (10 frames of animation when a stop command is received). Therefore, it is possible to make the newly executed variable performance less likely to be hindered by the deletion of the icon, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 241 to 258, the performance control unit 130m is in use during the extension of the temporary stop period of the performance pattern 70a in which the prefetch notice performance (icon change performance, prefetch zone performance) is continued (executed). If the start time command (start time signal) is normally received, the pre-read preview performance can be executed even in the newly executed variable performance. Therefore, even if a command abnormality occurs in which the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, the pre-read preview performance will not end, and the game can be improved by avoiding inconveniences that may cause player dissatisfaction. It becomes possible to improve the interest of

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 241 to 258, the performance control unit 130m is in use during the extension of the temporary stop period of the performance pattern 70a in which the prefetch notice performance (icon change performance, prefetch zone performance) is continued (executed). When the start time command (start time signal) is normally received, in the newly executed variable performance, it is possible to execute a performance with contents corresponding to the scenario of the pre-read preview performance. Therefore, even if a command abnormality occurs in which the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, the progress of the pre-read preview performance will not be abnormal, thereby avoiding inconveniences that may increase player dissatisfaction. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Specific example 11 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 11 in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described using FIGS. 259 and 260. FIG. 259 is a timing chart 9 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 260 (a) to (j) correspond to (a) to (j) in the timing chart 9 of FIG. 259. This is an example of a performance.

First, at timing T0, as the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", the loss fluctuation display of the first special symbol starts. be done. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "2" to "1", and a process is performed to start a variable production.

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is decreased from "2" to "1" in a specific update mode, and The two pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. In addition, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation).

Next, at timing T1, the icon shift display is completed. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, and the pending icon and the icon are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (presentation operation).

Then, at the timing of T2, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2". At this timing, the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the winning command (the first special figure pending number designation command as the winning signal, the pre-reading designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m (command abnormality has occurred). In this case, the process for updating the first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "1".

At this time, since the winning command for which the first special figure reservation number is "2" has not been received, the first special figure reservation displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E. The number of reserved figures remains "1", and the reserved icon HI is not displayed in the second position corresponding to the first reserved special figure number "2" in the first reserved icon display area 70B (FIG. 260(a)) reference).

After that, at the timing of T3, the game ball enters the first starting port 45, and the number of first special symbols reserved that is stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "2" to "3". When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (the first special figure pending number designation command as the winning signal, the pre-reading designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m memorizes (recognizes) ), the number of reserved first special drawings changes from "1" to "3".

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is increased from "1" to "3" in a specific update mode, and A hold icon HI (white icon) is additionally displayed in the hold icon display area 70B in a special addition mode, and a winning sound based on the current winning (the same sound as when the hold icon is additionally displayed in the normal addition mode) is output. (See FIG. 260(b)).

In addition, the "special addition mode" when additionally displaying the pending icon upon reception of the winning command (winning signal) cannot occur unless the production control section 130m cannot normally receive the command from the main control section 110m. This is a display mode when there is a change in the number of reserved special drawings. Specifically, the pending icons HI for those for which the winning command could not be received normally are not displayed, and the pending icons HI for those for which the winning command was received correspond to the number of reserved special drawings in the pending icon display area. The display mode is such that 10 frames of animation are additionally displayed in the area, starting from a very small size and gradually increasing in size. In addition, special addition modes include a special addition mode that adds and displays hold icons one by one (with a gap of one icon), and a special addition mode that adds hold icons by skipping two hold icons (with a gap of two icons). There are various types, such as a special addition mode in which the icons are displayed, and a special addition mode in which the pending icons are displayed in skips of three pending icons (with an interval of three icons).

Next, at timing T4, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the pending icon HI and the icon TI are in a state where they are performing a rotating motion (acting motion) (see FIG. 260(c)).

Then, at timing T5, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, the special pattern TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode ("814"), and the first lamp pattern LZ changes to a loss mode (lights out). The main stop is made at (see FIG. 260(d)).

After that, at timing T6, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the 1. Loss fluctuation display of special symbols starts. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "3" to "2", and a process is performed to start a variable production.

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is decreased from "3" to "2" in a specific update mode, and A pending icon HI is added as a non-animated frame of 1 frame to the second reserved icon HI corresponding to the first special figure pending number "2" in which the winning command (winning signal) could not be received normally in the pending icon display area 70B. The three currently displayed pending icons HI are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Further, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, and the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 260(e)).

Thereafter, at timing T7, the shift display of the icons is completed. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the pending icon and the icon are rotated (either added in the normal addition mode or special Regardless of whether it is additionally displayed in the additional mode, the same operation mode is used to perform the performance operation (see FIG. 260(f)).

Next, at timing T8, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("225"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). Further, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (actual performance operation) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 260(g)).

Then, at timing T9, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the production control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing to end the variable production is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a final stop at the stop position, the special symbol TZ comes to a permanent stop in the same losing mode as the production pattern ("225"), and the first lamp pattern LZ changes to a losing mode (lights out). The main stop is made at (see FIG. 260(h)).

Thereafter, at timing T10, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", and the number of reserved symbols decreases from "2" to "1". 1. The variable display of special symbols starts. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "2" to "1", and a process is performed to start a variable production.

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is decreased from "2" to "1" in a specific update mode, and The two pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Further, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, and the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 260(i)).

Next, at timing T11, when the icon shift display is completed, the icon change effect is started. Specifically, the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C (the icon corresponding to the first pending memory in which the production control unit 130m could not normally receive the winning command (winning signal)) is a blue icon. At the same time, a changing sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, and the icon is in a state where it is performing a rotational movement (effect movement) (FIG. 260(j)) reference).

Thereafter, when the performance control unit 130m is in a state where it can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the icon is erased at the timing when the performance pattern 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change performance ends.

Note that at timing T2, the production control unit 130m was able to successfully receive the command (winning command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but the production command sent from the production control unit 130m based on reception of this command Even if the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the command (command abnormality has occurred), the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (winning command) sent from the main control unit 110m. The same processing as when a command error occurs is performed.

Here, at the timing of T3, when the first special figure pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m is "1", the winning time command (winning prize command) in which the first special figure pending number becomes "3" is executed. As explained above, the case where the first special figure pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m is "0" and the first special figure pending number becomes "2" is won. When the time command (win signal) is received, the number of reserved first special symbols becomes "4" when the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m is "2". Even when the time command (win signal) is received, the basic flow is the same as described above.

In addition, here, we have explained a specific example 11 in which the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command in the normal gaming state (command abnormality has occurred). Even if a game ball enters the second starting port 47 in the state) and a variable display of the second special symbol is performed, the basic flow is the same as the above explanation.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub-first reservation display 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, and the first starting port 45, respectively, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special symbol, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure It may be read as the pending number display area 70F, the second pending icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47.

In addition, if the winning command based on the winning to the first starting opening 45 cannot be received normally and the number of pending special drawings is displayed (holding icon, etc.) smaller than the number of reserved special drawings, the second starting If the prize-winning command based on the prize entered into the slot 47 is successfully received, the reservation display corresponding to the first special symbol reservation number is not updated, and vice versa.

(Specific example 12 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 12 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described with reference to FIGS. 261 and 262. FIG. 261 is a timing chart 10 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 262(a) to (j) correspond to (a) to (j) in the timing chart 10 of FIG. 259. This is an example of a performance.

First, at timing T0, as the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", the loss fluctuation display of the first special symbol starts. be done. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "2" to "1", and a process is performed to start a variable production.

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is decreased from "2" to "1" in a specific update mode, and The two pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. In addition, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation).

Next, at timing T1, the icon shift display is completed. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image is continuing and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the pending icon and the icon are in a state where they are performing a rotation operation (production operation).

Then, at the timing of T2, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2". At this timing, the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the winning command (the first special figure pending number designation command as the winning signal, the pre-reading designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m (command abnormality has occurred). In this case, the process of updating the first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "1".

At this time, since the winning command (winning signal) for which the first special drawing reservation number is "2" has not been received, the number is displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special drawing reservation number display area 70E. The number of reserved first special symbols remaining at "1" remains at "1", and the reservation icon HI is not displayed at the second location corresponding to the number of first reserved special symbols "2" in the first reservation icon display area 70B ( (See FIG. 262(a)).

Furthermore, at the timing of T3, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "2" to "3" as a game ball enters the first starting port 45. At this timing, the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the winning command (the first special figure pending number designation command as the winning signal, the pre-reading designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m (command abnormality has occurred). In this case, the process of updating the first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "1".

At this time, since the winning command (winning signal) for which the first special drawing reservation number is "3" has not been received, the number is displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special drawing reservation number display area 70E. The number of reserved first special drawings remaining at "1" will remain at "1", and the holding icon HI will not be displayed at the third position corresponding to the number of first reserved special drawings "3" in the first reservation icon display area 70B ( (See FIG. 262(b)).

Thereafter, at timing T4, the game ball enters the first starting port 45, and the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "3" to "4". When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (the first special figure pending number designation command as the winning signal, the pre-reading designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m memorizes (recognizes) ), the number of reserved first special drawings changes from "1" to "4".

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is increased from "1" to "4" in a specific update mode, and A hold icon HI (white icon) is additionally displayed in the hold icon display area 70B in a special addition mode (skipping two icons), and a winning sound based on the current winning (same sound as when the hold icon is additionally displayed in the normal addition mode) is displayed. ) is output (see FIG. 262(c)).

Next, at timing T5, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the pending icon HI and the icon TI are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (acting operation) (see FIG. 262(d)).

Then, at timing T6, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a final stop at the stop position, the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop in the same losing mode as the production pattern ("814"), and the first lamp pattern LZ stops in the losing mode (lights out). The main stop is made at (see FIG. 262(e)).

Thereafter, at timing T7, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". 1. Loss fluctuation display of special symbols starts. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "4" to "3", and a process is performed to start a variable production.

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is decreased from "4" to "3" in a specific update mode, and In the pending icon display area 70B, the pending icon HI is 1 at the second and third locations corresponding to the first special drawing pending numbers "2" and "3" for which the winning command (winning signal) could not be received normally. Two frames of non-animation are added and displayed at the same time, and the displayed four pending icons HI are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Is displayed. Further, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, and the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 262(f)).

Thereafter, at timing T8, the shift display of the icons is completed. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the fluctuating display of the production pattern 70a has started, and the pending icon and the icon are rotated (either added in the normal addition mode or special addition). Regardless of whether it is additionally displayed in the mode or not, the performance operation) is performed in the same motion mode (see FIG. 262(g)).

Next, at timing T9, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("225"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (presentation operation) of the pending icon HI and the relevant icon TI continue (see FIG. 262(h)).

Then, at timing T10, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the production control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing to end the variable production is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a final stop at the stop position, the special symbol TZ comes to a permanent stop in the same losing mode as the production pattern ("225"), and the first lamp pattern LZ changes to a losing mode (lights out). The main stop is made at (see FIG. 262(i)).

Thereafter, at timing T11, when the stop time of the special symbols has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the 1. Loss fluctuation display of special symbols starts. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "3" to "2", and a process is performed to start a variable production.

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is decreased from "3" to "2" in a specific update mode, and The three pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Further, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, and the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 262(j)).

In addition, at timings T2 and T3, the production control unit 130m was able to successfully receive the command (winning command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but the production control unit 130m was able to successfully receive the command sent from the production control unit 130m based on the reception of this command. Even if the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command (command abnormality has occurred), the production control unit 130m will normally receive the command (winning command) sent from the main control unit 110m. The same processing as when reception is not possible (command error has occurred) is performed.

Here, at the timing of T4, when the first special figure pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m is "1", the winning time command (winning prize command) in which the first special figure pending number becomes "4". As explained above, the case where the number of reserved first special symbols is "3" when the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m is "0" is won. When the time command (win signal) is received or when the first special figure pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m is “0”, the first special figure pending number becomes “4”. Even when a winning command (winning signal) is received, the basic flow is the same as described above.

In addition, here, specific example 12 has been explained in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command in the normal gaming state (command abnormality has occurred), but the gaming state is in a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, variable probability gaming Even if a game ball enters the second starting port 47 in the state) and a variable display of the second special symbol is performed, the basic flow is the same as the above explanation.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub-first reservation display 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, and the first starting port 45, respectively, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special symbol, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure It may be read as the pending number display area 70F, the second pending icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47.

In addition, if the winning command based on the winning to the first starting opening 45 cannot be received normally and the number of pending special drawings is displayed (holding icon, etc.) smaller than the number of reserved special drawings, the second starting If the prize-winning command based on the prize entered into the slot 47 is successfully received, the reservation display corresponding to the first special symbol reservation number is not updated, and vice versa.

In this way, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 259 to 262, when a winning command (winning signal) indicating that the number of reserved special drawings is more than the displayed number of reserved icons is received, is a special addition mode (display mode in which only one pending icon is added and displayed in the area corresponding to the number of reserved special drawings), which is different from the normal addition mode (display mode in which only one pending icon is additionally displayed in the area corresponding to the number of reserved special drawings). In addition, the reserved icons are additionally displayed (increased display) in a display mode in which only one reserved icon is additionally displayed with a gap in the area corresponding to the number of reserved special drawings. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, it is possible to add and display a hold icon naturally without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 259 to 262, a winning command (winning command) indicating that the number of reserved special drawings is more than one number displayed in the sub-holding display or the number of reserved special drawings display area. time signal) is received, the number of pending displays on the sub-holding display and the special figure pending number display area will be increased and displayed in a specific update mode (the same mode as when no command is missed at the time of winning). There is. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, since the accurate number of pending games is displayed immediately, it is possible to quickly notify the player of the pending number.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 259 to 262, when the performance control unit 130m does not display the hold icon for the part that cannot normally receive the winning command (winning signal), When the production control unit 130m receives a command (start signal), it displays the pending icons for which the winning command (winning signal) could not be received in one frame of non-animation, and then displays all pending icons. It is designed to be displayed in shift. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 259 to 262, after the performance control unit 130m fails to normally receive the winning command (winning signal), the next winning command (winning signal) is normally sent. If the winning command (winning signal) is successfully received, it is possible to perform an icon change effect for the icon corresponding to the winning command (winning signal) that was successfully received. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the icon change effect is not executed due to failure to receive the winning command (winning signal) normally, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 259 to 262, for the icons for which the production control unit 130m could not normally receive the winning command (winning signal), while they are displayed as pending icons, Although the icon change effect is not executed (restricted), the icon change effect can be executed while the icon is being displayed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the icon change effect is not executed due to failure to receive the winning command (winning signal) normally, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Note that the icon change effect may not be executed even while the icon is being displayed.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 259 to 262, when a game ball enters the starting slot, the winning command ( If the winning signal) is received, the increasing effect (outputting the winning sound) based on the winning signal at the current starting opening is executed without executing the increasing effect (outputting the winning sound) multiple times. (output of the winning sound for the target) is performed once. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the player is confused due to the overlapping of multiple increase effects, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 259 to 262, when a game ball enters the starting slot, the winning command ( When a winning signal) is received, an increase performance (output of winning sound) is performed in the same performance mode (sound type, volume, sound length) regardless of the number of increases. Therefore, the player does not make the mistake of thinking that he or she has high expectations for a jackpot, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, instead of outputting the winning sound as the effect at the time of increase, for example, a predetermined light emitting means (for example, the winning opening lamp NR) may be made to emit light in a predetermined manner, or while outputting the winning sound. A predetermined light emitting means may be made to emit light in a predetermined manner. Even in this case, it is preferable to perform an increase effect in the same effect mode (sound type, volume, sound output time, light emission color, light emission amount, light emission time) regardless of the increase in the number of pending icons.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 259 to 262, when a game ball enters the starting slot, the winning command ( When a winning command (winning signal) is received, the number of reserved special drawings increases by one.Increase performance (output of winning sound) is performed in the same manner as when receiving a winning command (winning signal). is designed to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to perform an increase effect (output of a winning sound) without giving the player a sense of discomfort, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 259 to 262, whether the hold icon is additionally displayed in the normal addition mode or the hold icon is additionally displayed in the special addition mode, the same presentation mode is used. The hold icon performs a performance operation at certain points (rotation center position, rotation speed, etc.). Therefore, the player does not make the mistake of thinking that the pending icon additionally displayed in the special additional mode has a high expectation of a jackpot, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Modification example 1 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A modification of the specific example 2 described in FIGS. 243 and 244 (modification 1 in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command) will be described using FIGS. 243 and 263. 263(a) to (i) are examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (i) in timing chart 2 of FIG. 243.

Note that since FIG. 244 and FIG. 263 are the same up to the presentation at timings T0 to T9, explanation of the common parts will be omitted here, and only the different parts will be explained.

At timing T10, when the stop time of the special symbol passes, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", and the first special symbol is The symbol loss fluctuation display starts. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "3" to "1", and a process is performed to start a variable production.

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is decreased from "3" to "1" in a specific update mode, and the main control There is an inconsistency caused by a command abnormality between the number of reserved first special symbols notified from the section 110m and the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control section 130m (ordinarily there is a discrepancy of 1). However, since an abnormality (deviation of 2 or more) has occurred, the look-ahead zone performance is terminated.

Specifically, the pre-fetch zone background is switched to the background image corresponding to production mode A, the display of the zone image and the output of the zone BGM are finished, and the changing BGM is output (see FIG. 263(h)).

In addition, the surplus hold icon HI displayed second in the first hold icon display area 70B is erased as a non-animation for one frame, and the hold icon HI displayed third is erased for one frame. It is displayed second in non-animation. All the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a that are shifted from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position (FIG. 263) (see (h)).

Then, the necessary two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Is displayed. Moreover, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp pattern LZ continues. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 263(h)).

Thereafter, at timing T11, when a predetermined period of time has passed after the shift display of the icons is completed, the effect pattern 70a is in a state of being scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to be scrolled. At this time, since the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon and the icon are in a state where they are performing a rotating motion (performance motion) (see FIG. 263(i)).

(Modification 2 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A modified example (modified example 2 in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command) of the specific example 3 described in FIGS. 243 and 245 will be described using FIGS. 243 and 264. 264(a) to (i) are examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (i) in timing chart 2 of FIG. 243.

Note that since FIG. 245 and FIG. 264 are the same up to the presentation at timings T0 to T9, explanation of the common parts will be omitted here, and only the different parts will be explained.

At timing T10, when the stop time of the special symbol passes, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", and the first special symbol is The symbol loss fluctuation display starts. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "3" to "1", and a process is performed to start a variable production.

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is decreased from "3" to "1" in a specific update mode, and the main control There is an inconsistency caused by a command abnormality between the number of reserved first special symbols notified from the section 110m and the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control section 130m (ordinarily there is a discrepancy of 1). However, since an abnormality (deviation of 2 or more) has occurred, the icon change performance and the look-ahead effect performance are terminated.

Specifically, the surplus hold icon HI (blue icon) displayed third in the first hold icon display area 70B is erased with one frame of non-animation. In addition, all the performance symbols 70a (performance symbols 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable production) including the performance symbol 70a that is shifted from the stop position are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position ( (See Figure 264(h)).

Then, the necessary two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Is displayed. Moreover, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp pattern LZ continues. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 264(h)).

Thereafter, at timing T11, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the shift display of the icons is completed, the effect pattern 70a will be in a state of being scrolled at high speed. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon and the icon are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 264(i)).

After that, if the production control unit 130m is in a state where it can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, a variable production is executed to display a variable display of a special symbol whose first special symbol reservation number becomes “0”. (The target of the expectation level suggestion by the pre-read preview presentation) also, the pre-read effect presentation and the icon change presentation will not be executed.

In this way, according to the modified examples shown in FIGS. 263 and 264, the number of reserved first special symbols notified from the main control unit 110m and the number of reserved first special symbols stored in the production control unit 130m are If an inconsistency occurs due to a command abnormality (normally a deviation of 1 in the decreasing direction, but an error of 2 or more in the decreasing direction), a pre-reading notice effect (pre-reading zone effect) , icon change performance, look-ahead effect performance). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconveniences such as the execution of a pre-read preview effect during the execution of a variable effect that is not normally subject to execution of the pre-read preview effect, thereby preventing a decrease in the interest of the game. It becomes possible to suppress this.

(Variation 3 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A modification of the specific example 8 described in FIGS. 253 and 254 (modification 3 in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command) will be described using FIGS. 253 and 265. 265(a) to (j) are examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (j) in the timing chart 6 of FIG. 253.

Note that since FIG. 254 and FIG. 265 are the same up to the effects at timings T0 to T4, explanations of the common parts will be omitted here, and only the different parts will be explained.

At timing T5, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", and the first special symbol is The symbol loss fluctuation display starts. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. Then, the first special figure reservation number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "1", that is, the process of starting the variable production without changing the first special figure reservation number is performed. be exposed.

At this time, the first special figure pending number displayed on the sub-first pending display 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E is maintained and displayed from "1" to "1" in a specific update mode, and the first A hold icon HI (white icon) is additionally displayed in a special additional manner (one frame of non-animation) second in the hold icon display area 70B. In addition, all the performance symbols 70a (performance symbols 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable production) including the performance symbol 70a that is shifted from the stop position are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position ( (See FIG. 265(e)).

In addition, there is an inconsistency caused by the command abnormality between the number of reserved first special symbols notified from the main control unit 110m and the number of reserved first special symbols stored in the production control unit 130m (original number is decreasing). Since an abnormality in which there is a deviation of 1 from 1 to 1 (the number is the same) has occurred, the icon change effect and the look-ahead zone effect are terminated. Specifically, the pre-read zone background is switched to the background image corresponding to production mode A, the display of the zone image and the output of the zone BGM are finished, and the changing BGM is output. Further, the first blue icon in the first pending icon display area 70B returns to a white icon with one frame of non-animation (see FIG. 265(e)).

Then, the necessary two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Is displayed. Further, the variable display of the production pattern 70a is started while the variable display of the special pattern TZ and the first lamp pattern LZ continues, and the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an expansion/contraction operation (preparation operation) (Fig. 265 ( (see e)).

Thereafter, at timing T6, the icon shift display is completed. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the pending icon and the icon are rotated (either added in the normal addition mode or special Regardless of whether it is additionally displayed in the additional mode, the same operation mode is used to perform the performance operation (see FIG. 265(f)).

Next, at timing T7, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the left center right performance symbol 70a temporarily stops in a reach-miss mode ("878"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). Further, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (actual performance operation) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 265(g)).

Then, at timing T8, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, the special pattern TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ changes to a loss mode (lights out). The main stop is made at (see FIG. 265(h)).

Thereafter, at timing T9, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 1. Loss fluctuation display of special symbols starts. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0" and a process is performed to start a variable production.

At this time, the first special figure pending number displayed on the sub-first pending display 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E is decreased from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode, and the first One hold icon HI displayed in the hold icon display area 70B is shifted and displayed as an animation of 20 frames toward the icon display area 70C and displayed as the icon TI. Further, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, and the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 265(i)).

Next, at timing T10, the icon shift display is completed. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, the icon is in a state where it is performing a rotational movement (effect movement) (Fig. 265(j) )reference).

Thereafter, when the performance control unit 130m is in a state where it can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the icon is erased at the timing when the performance pattern 70a is stopped and displayed.

In this way, according to the modification shown in FIG. 265, a command is created between the first special figure reservation number notified from the main control unit 110m and the first special figure reservation number stored in the production control unit 130m. If an inconsistency occurs due to an abnormality (normally a deviation of 1, but an abnormality where the number is the same), the pre-reading notice presentation (pre-reading zone presentation, icon change presentation, pre-reading effect presentation) will be terminated. It has become. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconveniences such as the execution of a pre-read preview effect during the execution of a variable effect that is not normally subject to execution of the pre-read preview effect, thereby preventing a decrease in the interest of the game. It becomes possible to suppress this.

(Variation 4 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A modification of the specific example 9 described in FIGS. 255 and 256 (modification 4 in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command) will be described with reference to FIGS. 255 and 266. 266(a) to (f) are examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (f) in the timing chart 7 of FIG. 255.

Note that since FIG. 256 and FIG. 266 are the same up to the presentation at timings T0 to T5, explanation of the common parts will be omitted here, and only the different parts will be explained.

At the timing of T6, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the first special symbol is The symbol loss fluctuation display starts. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. Then, the first special symbol reservation number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "2", that is, the first special symbol reservation number increases by 1 and a process is performed to start the variable production. be exposed.

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is increased from "1" to "2" in a specific update mode, and Hold icons HI (white icons) are additionally displayed in the second and third positions of the hold icon display area 70B in a special addition mode (two icons at the same time). In addition, all the performance symbols 70a (performance symbols 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable production) including the performance symbol 70a that is shifted from the stop position are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position ( (See FIG. 266(e)).

In addition, there is an inconsistency caused by the command abnormality between the number of reserved first special symbols notified from the main control unit 110m and the number of reserved first special symbols stored in the production control unit 130m (original number is decreasing). Since an abnormality (deviation of 1 in the increasing direction) has occurred, the icon change performance and the look-ahead zone performance are terminated. Specifically, the pre-read zone background is switched to the background image corresponding to production mode A, the display of the zone image and the output of the zone BGM are finished, and the changing BGM is output. Furthermore, the first blue icon in the first pending icon display area 70B returns to a white icon with one frame of non-animation (see FIG. 266(e)).

Then, the necessary three pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Is displayed. In addition, the variable display of the production pattern 70a is started while the variable display of the special pattern TZ and the first lamp pattern LZ continues, and the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation) (Fig. 266 ( (see e)).

Thereafter, at timing T6, the icon shift display is completed. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the fluctuating display of the production pattern 70a has started, and the pending icon and the icon are rotated (either added in the normal addition mode or special addition). Regardless of whether it is additionally displayed in the mode or not, the state is that the performance operation) is performed in the same motion mode (see FIG. 266(f)).

Thereafter, when the performance control unit 130m is in a state where it can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the icon is erased at the timing when the performance pattern 70a is stopped and displayed.

In this way, according to the modification shown in FIG. 266, a command is created between the first special figure reservation number notified from the main control unit 110m and the first special figure reservation number stored in the production control unit 130m. If an inconsistency occurs due to an abnormality (an abnormality in which there is a deviation of 1 in the increasing direction instead of a deviation of 1 in the decreasing direction), a pre-reading notice effect (pre-reading zone effect, icon change effect) , look-ahead effect production). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconveniences such as the execution of a pre-read preview effect during the execution of a variable effect that is not normally subject to execution of the pre-read preview effect, thereby preventing a decrease in the interest of the game. It becomes possible to suppress this.

(Variation 5 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A modification of the specific example 10 described in FIGS. 257 and 258 (modification 5 in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command) will be described using FIGS. 257 and 267. 267(a) to (f) are examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (f) in the timing chart 7 of FIG. 257.

Note that since FIG. 258 and FIG. 267 are the same up to the effects at timings T0 to T6, explanations of the common parts will be omitted here, and only the different parts will be explained.

At timing T7, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", and the first special symbol is The symbol loss fluctuation display starts. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. Then, the first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "3", and a process is performed to start a variable production.

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is increased from "1" to "3" in a specific update mode, and Hold icons HI (white icons) are additionally displayed in the second to fourth positions of the hold icon display area 70B in a special addition mode (three at the same time). In addition, all the performance symbols 70a (performance symbols 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable production) including the performance symbol 70a that is shifted from the stop position are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position ( (See FIG. 267(e)).

In addition, there is an inconsistency caused by a command abnormality (original For example, an abnormality in which there is a deviation of 1 in the decreasing direction but a deviation of 1 or more in the increasing direction has occurred, so the icon change effect and the look-ahead zone effect are terminated. Specifically, the pre-read zone background is switched to the background image corresponding to production mode A, the display of the zone image and the output of the zone BGM are finished, and the changing BGM is output. Further, the first blue icon in the first pending icon display area 70B returns to a white icon with one frame of non-animation (see FIG. 267(e)).

Then, the necessary four pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Is displayed. In addition, the variable display of the production pattern 70a is started while the variable display of the special pattern TZ and the first lamp pattern LZ continues, and the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation) (Fig. 267 ( (see e)).

Thereafter, at timing T8, the shift display of the icons is completed. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the fluctuating display of the production pattern 70a has started, and the pending icon and the icon are rotated (either added in the normal addition mode or special addition). Regardless of whether it is additionally displayed in the mode or not, the state is such that the performance operation) is performed in the same motion mode (see FIG. 267(f)).

Thereafter, when the performance control unit 130m is in a state where it can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the icon is erased at the timing when the performance pattern 70a is stopped and displayed.

In this way, according to the modification shown in FIG. 267, a command is created between the first special figure reservation number notified from the main control unit 110m and the first special figure reservation number stored in the production control unit 130m. If an inconsistency occurs due to an abnormality (normally a deviation of 1 in the decreasing direction, but an error of 2 or more in the increasing direction), a pre-reading notice effect (pre-reading zone effect, icon change) It is designed to end the performance (pre-read effect performance). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconveniences such as the execution of a pre-read preview effect during the execution of a variable effect that is not normally subject to execution of the pre-read preview effect, thereby preventing a decrease in the interest of the game. It becomes possible to suppress this.

(Variation 6 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A modification of the specific example 11 described in FIGS. 259 and 260 (modification 6 in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command) will be described using FIGS. 259 and 268. 268(a) to (j) are examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (j) in timing chart 9 of FIG. 259.

Note that since the effects at the timings T6 to T11 are the same in FIGS. 260 and 268, a description of the common parts will be omitted here, and only the different parts will be described.

First, at timing T0, as the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", the loss fluctuation display of the first special symbol starts. be done. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "2" to "1", and a process is performed to start a variable production.

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is decreased from "2" to "1" in a specific update mode, and The two pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. In addition, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation).

Next, at timing T1, the icon shift display is completed. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, and the pending icon and the icon are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (presentation operation).

Then, at the timing of T2, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2". At this timing, the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the winning command (the first special figure pending number designation command as the winning signal, the pre-reading designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m (command abnormality has occurred). In this case, the process of updating the first special symbol pending number stored (ascertained) by the production control unit 130m remains at "1" (see FIG. 268(a)).

After that, at the timing of T3, the game ball enters the first starting port 45, and the number of first special symbols reserved that is stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "2" to "3". When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (the first special figure pending number designation command as the winning signal, the pre-reading designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m memorizes (recognizes) ), the number of reserved first special drawings changes from "1" to "3".

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is increased from "1" to "3" in a specific update mode, and A hold icon HI (white icon) is additionally displayed in the hold icon display area 70B in a special addition mode (two icons at the same time), and a winning sound based on the current winning (same sound as when the hold icon is additionally displayed in the normal addition mode) is displayed. ) is output (see FIG. 268(b)).

Specifically, the pending icon HI for one frame in which the winning command (winning signal) could not be received normally and the pending icon HI for the part in which the winning command (winning signal) was normally received are displayed in one frame. It is additionally displayed (increased display) in a non-animated manner (see FIG. 268(b)).

Next, at timing T4, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the pending icon HI and the icon TI rotate (regardless of whether they are additionally displayed in the normal addition mode or in the special addition mode, they perform the same operation mode) (See FIG. 268(c)).

Then, at timing T5, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a final stop at the stop position, the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop in the same losing mode ("814") as the production pattern 70a, and the first lamp pattern LZ stops in the losing mode (lights out). ), the main stop is made (see FIG. 268(d)).

In addition, if the winning command based on the prize entered into the first starting port 45 cannot be received normally and a number of pending special drawings (holding icons, etc.) smaller than the first number of reserved special drawings is displayed, the second starting If the prize-winning command based on the prize entered into the slot 47 is successfully received, the reservation display corresponding to the first special symbol reservation number is not updated, and vice versa.

(Modification 7 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A modification of the 12th specific example described in FIGS. 261 and 262 (modification 7 in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command) will be described with reference to FIGS. 261 and 269. 269(a) to (j) are examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (j) in the timing chart 9 of FIG. 261.

262 and FIG. 269 have the same effect at the timings T8 to T11, so the explanation of the common parts will be omitted here, and only the different parts will be explained here.

First, at timing T0, as the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", the loss fluctuation display of the first special symbol starts. be done. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "2" to "1", and a process is performed to start a variable production.

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is decreased from "2" to "1" in a specific update mode, and The two pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. In addition, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation).

Next, at timing T1, the icon shift display is completed. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, and the pending icon and the icon are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (presentation operation).

Then, at the timing of T2, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2". At this timing, the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the winning command (the first special figure pending number designation command as the winning signal, the pre-reading designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m (command abnormality has occurred). In this case, the process of updating the first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "1".

At this time, since the winning command (winning signal) for which the first special drawing reservation number is "2" has not been received, the number is displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special drawing reservation number display area 70E. The number of reserved first special symbols remaining at "1" remains at "1", and the reservation icon HI is not displayed at the second location corresponding to the number of first reserved special symbols "2" in the first reservation icon display area 70B ( (See FIG. 269(a)).

Furthermore, at the timing of T3, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "2" to "3" as a game ball enters the first starting port 45. At this timing, the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the winning command (the first special figure pending number designation command as the winning signal, the pre-reading designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m (command abnormality has occurred). In this case, the process of updating the first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "1".

At this time, since the winning command (winning signal) for which the first special drawing reservation number is "3" has not been received, the number is displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special drawing reservation number display area 70E. The number of reserved first special drawings remaining at "1" will remain at "1", and the holding icon HI will not be displayed at the third position corresponding to the number of first reserved special drawings "3" in the first reservation icon display area 70B ( (See FIG. 269(b)).

Thereafter, at timing T4, the game ball enters the first starting port 45, and the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "3" to "4". When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (the first special figure pending number designation command as the winning signal, the pre-reading designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m memorizes (recognizes) ), the number of reserved first special drawings changes from "1" to "4".

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is increased from "1" to "4" in a specific update mode, and Hold icons HI (white icons) are additionally displayed in the hold icon display area 70B in a special addition mode (three icons at the same time), and a winning sound based on the current winning (the same sound as when hold icons are additionally displayed in the normal addition mode) is displayed. ) is output (see FIG. 269(c)).

Specifically, the two pending icons HI for which the winning command (winning signal) could not be received normally and the pending icon HI for the one that successfully received the winning command (winning signal) are one frame. It is additionally displayed (increased display) in a non-animated manner (see FIG. 269(c)).

Next, at timing T5, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the pending icon HI and the icon TI rotate (regardless of whether they are additionally displayed in the normal addition mode or in the special addition mode, they perform the same operation mode) (See FIG. 269(d)).

Then, at timing T6, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a final stop at the stop position, the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop in the same losing mode ("814") as the production pattern 70a, and the first lamp pattern LZ stops in the losing mode (lights out). ), the main stop is made (see FIG. 269(e)).

Thereafter, at timing T7, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". 1. Loss fluctuation display of special symbols starts. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "4" to "3", and a process is performed to start a variable production.

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is decreased from "4" to "3" in a specific update mode, and The four pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Further, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, and the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 269(f)).

Here, at the timing of T4, when the first special figure pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m is "1", the winning time command (winning prize command) in which the first special figure pending number becomes "4". As explained above, the case where the number of reserved first special symbols is "3" when the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m is "0" is won. When the time command (win signal) is received or when the first special figure pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m is “0”, the first special figure pending number becomes “4”. Even when a winning command (winning signal) is received, the basic flow is the same as described above.

In addition, here, specific example 12 has been explained in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command in the normal gaming state (command abnormality has occurred), but the gaming state is in a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, variable probability gaming Even if a game ball enters the second starting port 47 in the state) and a variable display of the second special symbol is performed, the basic flow is the same as the above explanation.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub-first reservation display 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, and the first starting port 45, respectively, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special symbol, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure It may be read as the pending number display area 70F, the second pending icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47.

In addition, if the winning command based on the winning to the first starting opening 45 cannot be received normally and the number of pending special drawings is displayed (holding icon, etc.) smaller than the number of reserved special drawings, the second starting If the prize-winning command based on the prize entered into the slot 47 is successfully received, the reservation display corresponding to the first special symbol reservation number is not updated, and vice versa.

In this way, according to the modified examples shown in FIGS. 268 and 269, when a winning command (winning signal) indicating that the number of reserved special drawings is two more than the displayed number of reserved icons is received. , the first special addition mode (a display mode in which only one reserved icon is additionally displayed in the area corresponding to the number of reserved special figures) is different from the normal addition mode (a display mode in which only one reserved icon is additionally displayed in the area corresponding to the number of reserved special figures). In the display mode in which two pending icons are displayed simultaneously in an animation), the pending icons are additionally displayed (increased display). Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, it is possible to naturally additionally display the hold icon that should have been displayed without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Furthermore, according to the modified examples shown in FIGS. 268 and 269, when a winning command (winning signal) indicating that the number of reserved special drawings is three more than the displayed number of reserved icons is received, , a second special addition mode (display mode in which only one reserved icon is added and displayed in the area corresponding to the number of reserved special drawings) is different from the normal addition mode (a display mode in which only one reserved icon is added and displayed in the area corresponding to the number of reserved special drawings). In the display mode in which three pending icons are additionally displayed at the same time, the pending icons are additionally displayed (increased display). Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, it is possible to naturally additionally display the hold icon that should have been displayed without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 268 and 269, the winning command (winning command) indicating that the number of reserved special drawings is more than the number of reserved drawings displayed in the sub-holding display or the number of reserved special drawings display area. time signal) is received, the number of pending displays on the sub-holding display and the special figure pending number display area will be increased and displayed in a specific update mode (the same mode as when no command is missed at the time of winning). There is. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, since the accurate number of pending games is displayed immediately, it is possible to quickly notify the player of the pending number.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 268 and 269, for the icons for which the presentation control unit 130m could not normally receive the winning command (winning signal), while they are displayed as pending icons, Although the icon change effect is not executed (restricted), the icon change effect can be executed while the icon is being displayed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the icon change effect is not executed due to failure to receive the winning command (winning signal) normally, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Note that the icon change effect may not be executed even while the icon is being displayed.

Furthermore, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 268 and 269, when a game ball enters the starting slot, the winning command ( If the winning signal) is received, the increasing effect (outputting the winning sound) based on the winning signal at the current starting opening is executed without executing the increasing effect (outputting the winning sound) multiple times. (output of the winning sound for the target) is performed once. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the player is confused due to the duplicate performance (output of the winning sound) when increasing the number of times, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, instead of outputting the winning sound as the increase effect, for example, a predetermined light emitting means (for example, the winning opening lamp NR) may be made to emit light in a predetermined manner, or while outputting the winning sound. A predetermined light emitting means may be made to emit light in a predetermined manner. Even in this case, regardless of the increase in the number of pending icons, the increase effect is executed with the same effect (sound type, volume, sound output time, light emitting color, light emitting amount, light emitting time). Good too.

Furthermore, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 268 and 269, when a game ball enters the starting slot, the winning command ( When a winning signal) is received, an increase performance (output of a winning sound) is performed in the same performance mode regardless of the number of increases. Therefore, the player does not make the mistake of thinking that he or she has high expectations for a jackpot, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 268 and 269, when a game ball enters the starting slot, the winning command ( When a winning command (winning signal) is received, the number of reserved special drawings increases by one.Increase performance (output of winning sound) is performed in the same manner as when receiving a winning command (winning signal). is designed to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to perform an increase effect (output of a winning sound) without giving the player a sense of discomfort, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 268 and 269, whether the hold icon is additionally displayed in the normal addition mode or the hold icon is additionally displayed in the special addition mode, the same presentation mode is used. The hold icon performs a performance operation at certain points (rotation center position, rotation speed, etc.). Therefore, the player does not make the mistake of thinking that the pending icon additionally displayed in the special additional mode has a high expectation of a jackpot, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when additionally displaying pending icons in the special addition mode, multiple pending icons are added and displayed at the same time with 1 frame of non-animation, but 10 frames of animation (same time as in the normal addition mode) You may add multiple hold icons at the same time. Furthermore, only the latest hold icon may be displayed as a 10-frame animation, and the hold icon that should have been originally displayed may be displayed as a 1-frame non-animation.

(Specific example 13 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 13 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described using FIG. 270. The upper diagram in FIG. 270 is a timing chart 11 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command in the normal gaming state, and FIGS. 270(a) to (f) are ( This is an example of a performance corresponding to a) to (f).

First, at timing T0, the first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", and the loss fluctuation display of the first special symbol starts. be done. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0" and a process is performed to start the first variable production.

At this time, while the fluctuating BGM is being output, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. ", and one pending icon HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B is shifted (decreased) displayed as a 20-frame animation and displayed as the icon TI. In addition, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, but the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation). In addition, the icon TI is in a state where it is performing a rotating action (acting action).

Next, at timing T1, an auxiliary game is executed by the player hitting right, or a second starting opening is performed in an auxiliary game executed during a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state) before entering the normal gaming state. When a game ball enters the second starting port 47 due to reasons such as the ball biting occurring in the movable member 47 (movable member 48) being resolved, the second special figure hold stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m is activated. The number increases from "0" to "1". When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (the first special figure pending number designation command as the winning signal, the pre-reading designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m memorizes (recognizes) ) The number of reserved second special drawings changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F is increased and displayed from "0" to "1" in a specific update mode, Since the second pending icon display area 70D is not displayed, the pending icon HI is not additionally displayed (increased display), and the winning sound based on the current winning is a winning to the second starting port 47 during the normal gaming state. will not be output (see FIG. 270(a)).

Thereafter, at timing T2, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the first variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). Further, the rotation operation of the icon TI continues (see FIG. 270(b)).

Then, at timing T3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (command abnormality has occurred), the first variation production will be executed. The process to terminate is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI continue, the periods of temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, variable display of the special pattern TZ, and variable display of the first lamp pattern LZ are extended. Accordingly, the BGM output is maintained during the fluctuation (see FIG. 270(c)).

Thereafter, at timing T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 2. Loss fluctuation display of special symbols starts. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. If this is not possible (a command abnormality has occurred), the second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "1", and the process to start the second variable production is not performed (Fig. 270(d)).

Thereafter, at timing T5, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first Processing to end the variable performance is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation regardless of whether it is a normal icon or a special icon. . In addition, the temporarily stopped performance symbol 70a in the losing mode comes to a final stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop at "814", which is the same as the performance symbol 70a. Further, the first lamp pattern LZ that was being displayed in a variable manner on the sub-first variable display 81 stops being displayed (turns off) in a losing manner (see FIG. 270(e)). It should be noted that if the continuous notice performance is being executed for the loss fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the continuous notice performance will end at this timing.

After that, at timing T6, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of second reserved symbols stored in the main control unit 110m are "0", so the customer Shifts to a waiting state (game standby state). When the production control unit 130m receives the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved second special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0". ”.

At this time, the second special figure pending number displayed on the sub second pending display 84 and the second special figure pending number display area 70F is decreased from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode, and the customer is waiting. The player waits until the demonstration effect is executed or the variable display of the special symbol starts (see FIG. 270(f)).

In addition, at the timing of T3 and timing of T4, the production control unit 130m was able to normally receive the command (stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but based on the reception of this command, the production control unit 130m did not send the command. Even if the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the directed production command (command abnormality has occurred), the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m are produced. The same process as in the case where the control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (command abnormality has occurred) is performed.

In addition, at the timing of T5, the production control unit 130m could not properly receive the stop command (stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m, and at the timing of T6, the customer waiting command sent from the main control unit 110m If the production control unit 130m successfully receives the state designation command, at this timing, processing is performed to end the first variable production that was started in response to the variable display of the first special symbol, and the production control unit The number of reserved second special drawings stored (kept) by 130m changes from "1" to "0".

Then, although the background image continues to scroll, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as one frame of non-animation, regardless of whether it is a normal icon or a special icon. . In addition, the temporarily stopped production symbol 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ permanently stops at “814”, which is the same as the production symbol 70a, and the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special symbol reservation number are displayed. The number of reserved second special symbols displayed in the display area 70F will be displayed decreasing from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. It should be noted that if the continuous notice performance is being executed for the loss fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the continuous notice performance will end at this timing.

(Specific example 14 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 14 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described using FIG. 271. The upper diagram in FIG. 271 is a timing chart 12 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command in the normal gaming state, and FIGS. 271(a) to (f) are ( This is an example of a performance corresponding to a) to (f).

First, at timing T0, the first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", and the loss fluctuation display of the first special symbol starts. be done. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0" and a process is performed to start the first variable production.

At this time, while the fluctuating BGM is being output, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. ", and one pending icon HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B is shifted (decreased) displayed as a 20-frame animation and displayed as the icon TI. In addition, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ starts, but the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation), and the icon TI rotates. (direction action) is in progress.

Next, at timing T1, an auxiliary game is executed by the player hitting the right hand, or a second starting opening is performed in an auxiliary game executed during a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state) before entering the normal gaming state. When a game ball enters the second starting port 47 due to reasons such as the ball biting occurring in the movable member 47 (movable member 48) being resolved, the second special figure hold stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m is activated. The number increases from "0" to "1". When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (second special figure reservation number designation command as a winning signal, pre-reading designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m memorizes (recognizes) ) The number of reserved second special drawings changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F is increased and displayed from "0" to "1" in a specific update mode, Since the second pending icon display area 70D is not displayed, the pending icon HI is not additionally displayed (increased display), and the winning sound based on the current winning occurs because the winning is entered into the second starting port 47 during the normal gaming state. will not be output (see FIG. 271(a)).

Thereafter, at timing T2, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the first variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). Further, the rotation operation of the icon TI continues (see FIG. 271(b)).

Then, at timing T3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (command abnormality has occurred), the first variation production will be executed. The process to terminate is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI continue, the periods of temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, variable display of the special pattern TZ, and variable display of the first lamp pattern LZ are extended. Accordingly, the BGM output is maintained during the fluctuation (see FIG. 271(c)).

Thereafter, at timing T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 2. The jackpot fluctuation display of special symbols starts. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (2nd special symbol pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. If this is not possible (a command abnormality has occurred), the second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "1", and the process to start the second variable production is not performed (Fig. 271(d)).

Thereafter, at timing T5, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first Processing to end the variable performance is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation regardless of whether it is a normal icon or a special icon. . In addition, the temporarily stopped performance symbol 70a in the losing mode comes to a final stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop at "814", which is the same as the performance symbol 70a. Furthermore, the first lamp pattern LZ that was being displayed in a variable manner on the sub-first variable display 81 stops displaying (turns off) in a losing mode, but the second lamp pattern LZ in a jackpot mode is displayed on the sub-second variable display 82. It becomes a state where it is not stopped and displayed (see FIG. 271(e)). It should be noted that if the continuous notice performance is being executed for the loss fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the continuous notice performance will end at this timing.

Thereafter, at timing T6, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, the opening period of the jackpot game starts. When the performance control unit 130m receives the opening designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit 130m performs a process of starting the opening performance.

At this time, an opening image consisting of an opening background and the words "Jackpot" is displayed. In addition, "1" of the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F is when a prize is newly won based on a prize in the second start opening 47. The command (winning signal) is normally received, or the start command based on the start of the variable display of the second special symbol (2nd special symbol pending number designation command as the start signal, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation) This is maintained until the production control unit 130m receives the pattern specification command (see FIG. 271(f)).

In other words, a new winning command (winning signal) based on a winning in the first start opening 45, a starting command based on the start of the variable display of the first special symbol (first special symbol pending number as a starting signal), etc. Even if the performance control unit 130m receives a specified command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command), it is displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special symbol reservation number display area 70F. The number of second special drawings reserved is maintained at "1".

In addition, at the timing of T3 and timing of T4, the production control unit 130m was able to normally receive the command (stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but based on the reception of this command, the production control unit 130m did not send the command. Even if the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the directed production command (command abnormality has occurred), the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m are produced. The same process as in the case where the control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (command abnormality has occurred) will be performed.

In addition, at the timing of T5, the production control unit 130m could not properly receive the stop command (stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m, and at the timing of T6, the opening designation sent from the main control unit 110m. If the command is successfully received by the production control unit 130m, at this timing, processing is performed to end the first variable production that was started in response to the variable display of the first special symbol and start the opening production. .

Then, the relevant icon TI displayed in the relevant icon display area 70C is changed to one frame's worth without stopping and displaying the temporarily stopped loss mode production pattern 70a and the fluctuatingly displayed special design TZ. The opening image will be displayed without being erased as an animation (actually, the effects other than the opening effect will end).

As described above, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 270 and 271, in the normal gaming state, during the execution of the first variable performance that is started in response to the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol When a command (stop signal) for stopping the variable display of the second special symbol that is started after the end of the variable display of the second special symbol is received, the first variable performance is ended. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, since the first variable performance ends at the timing when the stop command is received, it is possible to end the first variable performance without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 270 to 271, in the normal gaming state, during the execution of the first variable performance that is started in response to the loss variation display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol is If a stop command (stop signal) for the jackpot fluctuation display of the second special symbol that was started after the end of the fluctuation display is received, the first fluctuation performance (fluctuation display of the performance symbol 70a, special symbol TZ) is received in a loss mode. (fluctuating display). Therefore, it is not necessary to perform processing such as switching the performance symbols from a losing mode to a jackpot mode, and it is possible to end the first variable performance without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 270 to 271, in the normal game state, during the variable display of the first lamp symbol LZ that is started in response to the loss variable display of the first special symbol, the first special If a stop command (stop signal) for the jackpot fluctuation display of the second special symbol that is started after the end of the symbol fluctuation display is received, the sub-first fluctuation display 81 will display the loss state (lights out) as a stop. In this way, the sub-second variable display 82 does not stop displaying the jackpot mode (lit) lamp symbol LZ. Therefore, it is not necessary to carry out processing such as switching the lamp pattern from a loss mode (lights out) to a jackpot mode, and it is possible to end the variable display of the first lamp pattern LZ without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 270 to 271, in the normal gaming state, while the icon (first running information) corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed, the first special symbol is When a command (stop signal) for stopping the variable display of the second special symbol that is started after the end of the variable display is received, the icon is erased. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Further, since the icon is deleted at the timing when the stop command is received, it is possible to delete the icon without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 270 to 271, in the normal game state, the first special symbol changes while the icon (first running information) corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed. When the stop command (stop signal) is received, and when the stop command for the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed while the corresponding icon (first running information) corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed. (stop signal) is received, the icon is erased in the same manner as when the stop signal is received. Therefore, it becomes possible to naturally erase the icon without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 270 and 271, in the normal gaming state, the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F is When a customer waiting state designation command indicating that the number of reserved special drawings is "0" is received when the number is not "0", the number of reserved special drawings is displayed on the sub-second holding display 84 and the second number of reserved special drawings display area 70F. The number of reserved 2nd special drawings is reduced to "0" and displayed. Therefore, the player is not given any doubt that the variable performance will not be executed even though the second special figure reservation number is not "0".

In addition, in the normal gaming state, during the execution of the first variable performance that started in response to the jackpot variable display of the first special symbol, the loss of the second special symbol that started after the end of the variable display of the first special symbol. When a stop command (stop signal) for the variable display is received, the first variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a, variable display of the special symbol TZ) may be ended in a jackpot mode.

(Specific example 15 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 15 in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described using FIG. 272. The upper diagram in FIG. 272 is the timing chart 13 when the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command in the normal gaming state, and FIGS. This is an example of a performance corresponding to a) to (f).

First, at timing T0, the specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state) changes to the normal gaming state, and the second special symbol pending number stored in the main control unit 110m during the specific gaming state changes from "1" to "0". As the second special symbol decreases, a loss fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (second special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0" and a process is performed to start the second variable production.

At this time, while the fluctuating BGM is being output, the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F changes from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. ” is displayed. Furthermore, since the second pending icon display area 70D is not displayed, the icon TI is not displayed in the icon display area 70C without being shifted (reduced) from the second pending icon display area 70D. Displayed as a 10-frame animation. In addition, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the second lamp pattern LZ starts, but the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation), and the icon TI rotates. (direction action) is in progress.

Next, at timing T1, a game ball enters the first starting port 45, so that the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "0" to "1". . When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (the first special figure pending number designation command as the winning signal, the pre-reading designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m memorizes (recognizes) ), the number of reserved first special drawings changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is increased and displayed from "0" to "1" in a specific update mode, and A pending icon HI is additionally displayed (increased display) in the first display section 70B1 of the pending icon display area 70B in a normal addition mode, and the winning is based on the current winning since it is a winning to the first start opening 45 during the normal gaming state. Sound is output (see FIG. 272(a)).

Thereafter, at timing T2, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). Further, the rotation operation of the icon TI continues (see FIG. 272(b)).

Then, at timing T3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (a command error has occurred), the second variable production will be executed. No termination processing will be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI continue, the periods of temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, variable display of the special pattern TZ, and variable display of the second lamp pattern LZ are extended. Accordingly, the BGM output is maintained during the fluctuation (see FIG. 272(c)).

Here, continuing scrolling of the background image means that if, for example, an image of a "castle" taken from the front is displayed as the mode A background at timing T3, scrolling will continue and the "castle" will be displayed. It is intended that the background image will continue to change (moving the camera's viewpoint), such as displaying an image taken from the side and displaying an image of the "castle" from the back.
In other words, the display mode is such that the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, but the background image continues to change.

However, although the scrolling of the background image continues, in FIGS. 272(c) and 272(d), the execution of the "background preview effect" described above is restricted (not performed).

Furthermore, if the icon TI continues to rotate, for example, if it rotates clockwise and the icon TI is at the reference position (12 o'clock direction) at timing T3, the icon TI continues to rotate. It is intended to rotate in the 1 o'clock direction.
In other words, the presentation pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, but the icon TI continues to rotate.

Further, when a pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B at timing T3, the pending icon also continues to rotate in the same manner as the above-mentioned continuation of the rotating operation of the icon TI.

However, although the rotation operation of the icon TI and the rotation operation of the pending icon continue, in FIGS. 272(c) and 272(d), the above-mentioned "approximate icon change effect" and "hold icon change effect" are not executed. It is now restricted (not performed).

Note that the rotation motion of the icon TI and the rotation motion of the pending icon may be synchronized, or the rotation motion of the icon TI and the rotation motion of the pending icon may not be synchronized.

Further, although the output of the fluctuating BGM is maintained at the timing of T3, it may be stopped without being maintained. In this case, the period after the timing T3 may be a silent period.
On the other hand, instead of outputting the fluctuating BGM at the timing of T3, special BGM (BGM that is output when a command cannot be received normally) may be output.

After that, at timing T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 1. Loss fluctuation display of special symbols starts. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. If it is not possible (a command abnormality has occurred), the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "1", and the process to start the first variable production is not performed (Fig. 272(d)).

Thereafter, at timing T5, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the second special figure is started in response to the fluctuating display of the second special symbol. Processing to end the variable performance is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation regardless of whether it is a normal icon or a special icon. . In addition, the temporarily stopped performance symbol 70a in the losing mode comes to a final stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop at "814", which is the same as the performance symbol 70a. Furthermore, the second lamp pattern LZ that was being variably displayed on the sub-second variable display 82 is stopped and displayed (turned off) in a losing manner (see FIG. 272(e)). In addition, in the case where the continuous notice performance has been executed for the loss fluctuation display of the second special symbol, the continuous notice performance will end at this timing.

At timing T5, although the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted, the pending icon displayed in the first display section 70B1 of the first pending icon display area 70B is not deleted (updated). It has become.
Although the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number display area 70E of special symbols is It is no longer updated.

The reservation icon displayed in the first reservation icon display area 70B, the sub-first reservation display 83, and the first special figure reservation number displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E are changed at the timing of T5. May be updated.

After that, at timing T6, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of second reserved symbols stored in the main control unit 110m are "0", so the customer Shifts to a waiting state (game standby state). When the production control unit 130m receives the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0". ”.

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is displayed (updated) decreased from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. , the player waits until a customer waiting demonstration performance is executed or a new variable display of special symbols starts (see FIG. 272(f)).

In addition, at the timing of T3 and timing of T4, the production control unit 130m was able to normally receive the command (stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but based on the reception of this command, the production control unit 130m did not send the command. Even if the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the directed production command (command abnormality has occurred), the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m are produced. The same process as in the case where the control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (command abnormality has occurred) is performed.

In addition, at the timing of T5, the production control unit 130m could not properly receive the stop command (stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m, and at the timing of T6, the customer waiting command sent from the main control unit 110m If the production control unit 130m successfully receives the state designation command, at this timing, a process is performed to end the second variable production that was started in response to the variable display of the second special symbol, and the production control unit The number of reserved first special drawings stored (kept) by 130m changes from "1" to "0".

Then, although the background image continues to scroll, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as one frame of non-animation, regardless of whether it is a normal icon or a special icon. . In addition, the temporarily stopped production symbol 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a permanent stop at "814", which is the same as the production symbol 70a, and the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special symbol reservation number are displayed. The number of reserved first special symbols displayed in the display area 70E will be displayed (updated) decreased from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. It should be noted that if the continuous notice performance is being executed for the loss fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the continuous notice performance will end at this timing.

In addition, here, specific example 15 was explained where the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command in the normal gaming state (command abnormality has occurred), but the gaming state is in a specific gaming state (time saving gaming state, variable probability gaming). Even if a game ball enters the second starting port 47 in the state) and a variable display of the second special symbol is performed, the basic flow is the same as the above explanation.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub-first reservation display 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, and the first starting port 45, respectively, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special symbol, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure It may be read as the pending number display area 70F, the second pending icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47.

Furthermore, when scrolling the background image is continued in a specific gaming state, the display of the right-handed game image MU (see FIG. 332, etc.) is also continued. Thereby, even if the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (command abnormality has occurred), it is possible to encourage the player to play the game that is most suitable for the player (right-handed play).
In addition, when displaying not only the right-handed image MU but also the number of successive jackpot games (so-called consecutive number of wins), this may be continued, and the game media obtained from the jackpot games may be displayed continuously. If the number is displayed, this may be continued. Thereby, even if the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (command abnormality has occurred), it is possible to give the player a certain sense of satisfaction.

(Specific example 16 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 16 in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described using FIG. 273. The upper diagram in FIG. 273 is the timing chart 14 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command in the normal gaming state, and FIGS. This is an example of a performance corresponding to a) to (f).

First, at timing T0, the specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state) changes to the normal gaming state, and the second special symbol pending number stored in the main control unit 110m during the specific gaming state changes from "1" to "0". As the second special symbol decreases, a loss fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (second special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0" and a process is performed to start the second variable production.

At this time, while the fluctuating BGM is being output, the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F changes from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. ” is displayed. Furthermore, since the second pending icon display area 70D is not displayed, the icon TI is not displayed in the icon display area 70C without being shifted (reduced) from the second pending icon display area 70D. Displayed as a 10-frame animation. In addition, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the second lamp pattern LZ starts, but the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation), and the icon TI rotates. (direction action) is in progress.

Next, at timing T1, a game ball enters the first starting port 45, so that the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "0" to "1". . When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (the first special figure pending number designation command as the winning signal, the pre-reading designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m memorizes (recognizes) ), the number of reserved first special drawings changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is increased and displayed from "0" to "1" in a specific update mode, and A pending icon HI is additionally displayed (increased display) in the first display section 70B1 of the pending icon display area 70B in a normal addition mode, and the winning is based on the current winning since it is a winning to the first start opening 47 during the normal gaming state. Sound is output (see FIG. 273(a)).

Thereafter, at timing T2, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the second variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). Further, the rotation operation of the icon TI continues (see FIG. 273(b)).

Then, at timing T3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (a command error has occurred), the second variable production will be executed. The process to terminate is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI continue, the periods of temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, variable display of the special pattern TZ, and variable display of the second lamp pattern LZ are extended. Accordingly, the BGM output is maintained during the fluctuation (see FIG. 273(c)).

After that, at timing T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 1. The jackpot fluctuation display of special symbols starts. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. If it is not possible (a command abnormality has occurred), the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "1", and the process to start the first variable production is not performed (Fig. 273(d)).

Thereafter, at timing T5, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the second special figure is started in response to the fluctuating display of the second special symbol. Processing to end the variable performance is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation regardless of whether it is a normal icon or a special icon. . In addition, the temporarily stopped performance symbol 70a in the losing mode comes to a final stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop at "814", which is the same as the performance symbol 70a. Furthermore, the second lamp pattern LZ that was being variably displayed on the sub-second fluctuation display 82 stops displaying (turns off) in a loss mode, but the first lamp pattern LZ in a jackpot mode is displayed on the sub-first fluctuation display 81. It becomes a state where it is not stopped and displayed (see FIG. 273(e)). In addition, in the case where the continuous notice performance has been executed for the loss fluctuation display of the second special symbol, the continuous notice performance will end at this timing.

Thereafter, at timing T6, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, the opening period of the jackpot game starts. When the performance control unit 130m receives the opening designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit 130m performs a process of starting the opening performance.

At this time, an opening image consisting of an opening background and the words "Jackpot" is displayed. In addition, "1" of the first special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is when a prize is newly won based on a prize in the first start opening 45. The command (win signal at the time of winning) is normally received, or the start command based on the start of the variable display of the first special symbol (first special symbol pending number designation command as the start signal, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation) This is maintained until the effect control unit 130m receives the pattern designation command (see FIG. 273(f)).

In other words, a new winning command (winning signal) based on a winning in the second starting port 47, a starting command based on the start of the variable display of the second special symbol (second special symbol pending number as a starting signal), etc. Even if the production control unit 130m receives a specified command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command), it is displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E. The number of reserved first special drawings that is "1" is maintained.

In addition, at the timing of T3 and timing of T4, the production control unit 130m was able to normally receive the command (stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but based on the reception of this command, the production control unit 130m did not send the command. Even if the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the directed production command (command abnormality has occurred), the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m are produced. The same process as in the case where the control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (command abnormality has occurred) will be performed.

In addition, at the timing of T5, the production control unit 130m could not properly receive the stop command (stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m, and at the timing of T6, the opening designation sent from the main control unit 110m. If the command is successfully received by the production control unit 130m, at this timing, processing is performed to end the second variable production that was started in response to the variable display of the second special symbol and start the opening production. .

Then, the relevant icon TI displayed in the relevant icon display area 70C is changed to one frame's worth without stopping and displaying the temporarily stopped loss mode production pattern 70a and the fluctuatingly displayed special design TZ. The opening image will be displayed without being erased as an animation (actually, the effects other than the opening effect will end).

As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 272 and 273, in the normal gaming state, during the execution of the second variable performance that is started in response to the variable display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol When a stop command (stop signal) for the first special symbol variable display that is started after the end of the first special symbol variable display is received, the second variable performance is ended. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Further, since the second variable performance ends upon reception of the stop command, it is possible to end the second variable performance without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 272 and 273, in the normal gaming state, during the execution of the second variable performance that is started in response to the loss variation display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol is If a stop command (stop signal) for the jackpot fluctuation display of the first special symbol that was started after the end of the fluctuation display is received, the second fluctuation performance (variation display of the performance symbol 70a, special symbol TZ) is received in a loss mode. (fluctuating display). Therefore, it is not necessary to perform processing such as switching the performance symbols from a losing mode to a jackpot mode, and it is possible to end the second variable performance without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 272 and 273, in the normal gaming state, during the variable display of the second lamp symbol LZ that is started in response to the loss variable display of the second special symbol, the second special When a stop command (stop signal) for the jackpot fluctuation display of the first special symbol that is started after the end of the symbol fluctuation display is received, the sub-second fluctuation display 82 will display a stop state of loss (lights out). However, the sub-first variable display 81 is configured not to stop displaying the jackpot mode (lit) lamp symbol LZ. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform processing such as switching the lamp pattern from a loss mode (lights out) to a jackpot mode, and it is possible to end the variable display of the second lamp pattern LZ without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 272 and 273, in the normal gaming state, while the icon (second running information) corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed, the second special symbol is When a command (stop signal) for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol that is started after the end of the variable display is received, the icon is erased. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Further, since the icon is deleted at the timing when the stop command is received, it is possible to delete the icon without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 272 and 273, in the normal gaming state, the second special symbol changes while the icon (second running information) corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed. When the stop command (stop signal) is received, and when the stop command for the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed while the corresponding icon (second running information) corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed. (stop signal) is received, the icon is erased in the same manner as when the stop signal is received. Therefore, it becomes possible to naturally erase the icon without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 272 and 273, in the normal gaming state, the first special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is When a customer waiting state designation command indicating that the number of special drawings on hold is "0" is received when the number is not "0", the number of reserved special drawings is displayed on the sub-first holding display 83 and the first number of special drawings on hold display area 70E. The number of reserved first special drawings is reduced to "0" and displayed. Therefore, the player is not given any doubt that the variable performance will not be executed even though the first special figure reservation number is not "0".

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 272, in the normal gaming state, the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped during execution of the second variable performance that is started in response to the variable display of the second special symbol. If the hour command (stop signal) cannot be received, the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, but the scrolling of the background image is continued. Therefore, even if the performance symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bored due to a change in the background image.
On the other hand, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the execution of the "background preview effect" is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the user from feeling dissatisfied due to the performance pattern 70a being temporarily stopped and making it difficult to see the execution of the "background preview performance".

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 272, in the normal gaming state, the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped during execution of the second variable performance that is started in response to the variable display of the second special symbol. When the time command (stop signal) cannot be received, the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, but the rotation of the icon TI and the rotation of the pending icon are continued. Therefore, even if the performance symbol 70a is in a temporarily stopped state, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bored due to the rotational movement of the icon TI or the rotational movement of the pending icon.
In addition, since the rotational movement of the icon TI and the rotational movement of the pending icon are performed in synchronization, the appearance is improved to prevent players from feeling bored. be able to.
On the other hand, although the rotation operation of the icon TI and the rotation operation of the pending icon are continued, the execution of "the icon change effect" and the "pending icon change effect" is restricted. Therefore, the performance pattern 70a is in an irregular state where it remains temporarily stopped, and it is possible to prevent the performance from becoming too excessive.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 272, in the normal gaming state, the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped during execution of the second variable performance that is started in response to the variable display of the second special symbol. If the time command (stop signal) cannot be received, the BGM output is maintained during fluctuation. Therefore, the player can be aurally entertained, and the player can be prevented from feeling bored.

In addition, when adopting a configuration in which the output of the fluctuating BGM is stopped at the timing of T3 or a special BGM is output in place of the fluctuating BGM output, it is necessary to understand that the system is in an irregular state. It can be made easier.

In addition, in the normal gaming state, during the execution of the second variable performance that was started in response to the jackpot variable display of the second special symbol, the loss of the first special symbol that was started after the end of the variable display of the second special symbol. When a stop command (stop signal) for the variable display is received, the second variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a, variable display of the special symbol TZ) may be ended in a jackpot mode.

(Specific example 17 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 17 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described using FIG. 274. The upper diagram in FIG. 274 is a timing chart 15 when the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command in a specific gaming state, and FIGS. 274(a) to (f) are ( This is an example of a performance corresponding to a) to (f).

First, at timing T0, a game ball enters the first starting port 45 by the player hitting left, or a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 during the normal gaming state before entering the specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, variable probability gaming state). As the number of reserved first special symbols stored in the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0" due to reasons such as a game ball entering the first starting hole 45, the number of reserved first special symbols decreases from "1" to "0". Loss fluctuation display starts. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0" and a process is performed to start the first variable production.

At this time, while the fluctuating BGM is being output, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. ” is displayed. Furthermore, since the first pending icon display area 70B is not displayed, the icon TI is not displayed in the icon display area 70C without being shifted (reduced) from the first pending icon display area 70B. Displayed as a 10-frame animation. In addition, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ starts, but the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation), and the icon TI rotates. (direction action) is in progress.

Next, at timing T1, a game ball enters the second starting port 47, and the number of reserved second special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "0" to "1". . When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (second special figure pending number designation command as a winning signal, pre-reading designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m memorizes (recognizes) ) The number of reserved second special drawings changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F is increased from "0" to "1" in a specific update mode, and the second A pending icon HI is additionally displayed (increased display) in the first display section 70D1 of the pending icon display area 70D, and a winning sound based on the current winning is output because the winning is entered into the second starting port 47 during the specific gaming state. (See Figure 274(a)).

Thereafter, at timing T2, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). Further, the rotation operation of the icon TI continues (see FIG. 274(b)).

Then, at timing T3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (command abnormality has occurred), the first variation production will be executed. The process to terminate is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI continue, the periods of temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, variable display of the special pattern TZ, and variable display of the first lamp pattern LZ are extended. Accordingly, the BGM output is maintained during the fluctuation (see FIG. 274(c)).

Thereafter, at timing T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 2. Loss fluctuation display of special symbols starts. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (2nd special symbol pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. If this is not possible (a command abnormality has occurred), the second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "1", and the process to start the second variable production is not performed (Fig. 274(d)).

Thereafter, at timing T5, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first Processing to end the variable performance is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation regardless of whether it is a normal icon or a special icon. . In addition, the temporarily stopped performance symbol 70a in the losing mode comes to a final stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop at "814", which is the same as the performance symbol 70a. Furthermore, the first lamp pattern LZ that was being variably displayed on the sub-first variable display 81 is stopped and displayed (extinguished) in a losing manner (see FIG. 274(e)).

After that, at timing T6, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of second reserved symbols stored in the main control unit 110m are "0", so the customer Shifts to a waiting state (game standby state). When the production control unit 130m receives the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved second special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0". ”.

At this time, the second special figure pending number displayed on the sub second pending display 84 and the second special figure pending number display area 70F is decreased from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode, and the customer is waiting. The player waits until a demonstration effect is executed or a new variable display of special symbols starts (see FIG. 274(f)).

In addition, at the timing of T3 and timing of T4, the production control unit 130m was able to normally receive the command (stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but based on the reception of this command, the production control unit 130m did not send the command. Even if the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the directed production command (command abnormality has occurred), the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m are produced. The same process as in the case where the control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (command abnormality has occurred) is performed.

In addition, at the timing of T5, the production control unit 130m could not properly receive the stop command (stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m, and at the timing of T6, the customer waiting command sent from the main control unit 110m If the production control unit 130m successfully receives the state designation command, at this timing, processing is performed to end the variable production that was started in response to the variable display of the first special symbol, and the production control unit 130m The stored number of reserved second special symbols changes from "1" to "0".

Then, although the background image continues to scroll, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as one frame of non-animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production symbol 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ permanently stops at “814”, which is the same as the production symbol 70a, and the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special symbol reservation number are displayed. The number of reserved second special symbols displayed in the display area 70F will be displayed decreasing from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode.

(Specific example 18 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 18 in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command will be described using FIG. 275. The upper diagram in FIG. 275 is the timing chart 16 when the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command in a specific game state, and FIGS. This is an example of a performance corresponding to a) to (f).

First, at timing T0, a game ball enters the first starting port 45 by the player hitting left, or a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 during the normal gaming state before entering the specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, variable probability gaming state). As the number of reserved first special symbols stored in the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0" due to reasons such as a game ball entering the first starting hole 45, the number of reserved first special symbols decreases from "1" to "0". Loss fluctuation display starts. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0" and a process is performed to start the first variable production.

At this time, while the fluctuating BGM is being output, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. ” is displayed. Furthermore, since the first pending icon display area 70B is not displayed, the icon TI is not displayed in the icon display area 70C without being shifted (reduced) from the first pending icon display area 70B. Displayed as a 10-frame animation. In addition, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ starts, but the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation), and the icon TI rotates. (direction action) is in progress.

Next, at timing T1, a game ball enters the second starting port 47, and the number of reserved second special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "0" to "1". . When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (second special figure pending number designation command as a winning signal, pre-reading designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m memorizes (recognizes) ) The number of reserved second special drawings changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F is increased from "0" to "1" in a specific update mode, and the second A pending icon HI is additionally displayed (increased display) in the first display section 70D1 of the pending icon display area 70D in a normal addition mode, and the winning is based on the current winning since the winning is in the second start opening 47 during the specific gaming state. Sound is output (see FIG. 275(a)).

Thereafter, at timing T2, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, the effect pattern 70a slightly swings (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position. Further, the rotation operation of the icon TI continues (see FIG. 275(b)).

Then, at timing T3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (command abnormality has occurred), the first variation production will be executed. The process to terminate is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI continue, the periods of temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, variable display of the special pattern TZ, and variable display of the first lamp pattern LZ are extended. Accordingly, the BGM output is maintained during the fluctuation (see FIG. 275(c)).

Thereafter, at timing T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 2. The jackpot fluctuation display of special symbols starts. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (2nd special symbol pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. If this is not possible (a command abnormality has occurred), the second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "1", and the process to start the second variable production is not performed (Fig. 275(d)).

Thereafter, at timing T5, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first Processing to end the variable performance is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation regardless of whether it is a normal icon or a special icon. . In addition, the temporarily stopped performance symbol 70a in the losing mode comes to a final stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop at "814", which is the same as the performance symbol 70a. Furthermore, the first lamp pattern LZ that was being displayed in a variable manner on the sub-first variable display 81 stops displaying (turns off) in a losing mode, but the second lamp pattern LZ in a jackpot mode is displayed on the sub-second variable display 82. It becomes a state where it is not stopped and displayed (see FIG. 275(e)).

Thereafter, at timing T6, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, the opening period of the jackpot game starts. When the performance control unit 130m receives the opening designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit 130m performs a process of starting the opening performance.

At this time, an opening image consisting of an opening background and the words "Jackpot" is displayed. In addition, "1" of the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F is when a prize is newly won based on a prize in the second start opening 47. The command (winning signal) is normally received, or the start command based on the start of the variable display of the second special symbol (2nd special symbol pending number designation command as the start signal, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation) This is maintained until the effect control unit 130m receives the pattern designation command (see FIG. 275(f)).

In other words, a new winning command (winning signal) based on a winning in the first start opening 45, a starting command based on the start of the variable display of the first special symbol (first special symbol pending number as a starting signal), etc. Even if the performance control unit 130m receives a specified command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command), it is displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special symbol reservation number display area 70F. The number of second special drawings reserved is maintained at "1".

In addition, at the timing of T3 and timing of T4, the production control unit 130m was able to normally receive the command (stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but based on the reception of this command, the production control unit 130m did not send the command. Even if the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the directed production command (command abnormality has occurred), the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m are produced. The same process as in the case where the control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (command abnormality has occurred) is performed.

In addition, at the timing of T5, the production control unit 130m could not properly receive the stop command (stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m, and at the timing of T6, the opening designation sent from the main control unit 110m. If the command is successfully received by the performance control unit 130m, processing is performed to end the variable performance started in response to the variable display of the first special symbol and start the opening performance at this timing.

Then, the relevant icon TI (normal icon, special icon ) will be displayed as one frame of non-animation, and the opening image will be displayed (actually, the effects other than the opening effect will end).

As described above, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 274 and 275, in a specific game state, during the execution of the first variable performance that is started in response to the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol When a command (stop signal) for stopping the variable display of the second special symbol that is started after the end of the variable display of the second special symbol is received, the first variable performance is ended. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, since the first variable performance ends upon reception of the stop command, it is possible to end the first variable performance without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 274 and 275, in a specific game state, during the execution of the first variable performance that is started in response to the loss variation display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol is If a stop command (stop signal) for the jackpot fluctuation display of the second special symbol that was started after the end of the fluctuation display is received, the first fluctuation performance (fluctuation display of the performance symbol 70a, special symbol TZ) is received in a loss mode. (fluctuating display). Therefore, it is not necessary to perform processing such as switching the performance symbols from a losing mode to a jackpot mode, and it is possible to end the first variable performance without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 274 and 275, in a specific game state, during the variable display of the first lamp symbol LZ that is started in response to the loss variable display of the first special symbol, the first special When a stop command (stop signal) for the jackpot fluctuation display of the second special symbol that is started after the end of the symbol fluctuation display is received, the sub-first fluctuation display 81 and the sub-second fluctuation display 82 are In any case, the lamp pattern LZ in the jackpot mode (lit) is not displayed in a stopped state. Therefore, it is not necessary to carry out processing such as switching the lamp pattern from a loss mode (lights out) to a jackpot mode, and it is possible to end the variable display of the first lamp pattern LZ without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 274 and 275, in a specific game state, while the icon (first running information) corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed, the first special symbol is When a command (stop signal) for stopping the variable display of the second special symbol that is started after the end of the variable display is received, the icon is erased. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Further, since the icon is deleted at the timing when the stop command is received, it is possible to delete the icon without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 274 and 275, in a specific game state, the first special symbol changes while the icon (first running information) corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed. When a command to stop the display (stop signal) is received, and a command to stop the variable display of the second special symbol while the icon (first running information) corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed. (stop signal) is received, the icon is erased in the same manner as when the stop signal is received. Therefore, it becomes possible to naturally erase the icon without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 274 and 275, in the specific game state, the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F is When a customer waiting state designation command indicating that the number of reserved special drawings is "0" is received when the number is not "0", the number of reserved special drawings is displayed on the sub-second holding display 84 and the second number of reserved special drawings display area 70F. The number of reserved 2nd special drawings is reduced to "0" and displayed. Therefore, the player is not given any doubt that the variable performance will not be executed even though the second special figure reservation number is not "0".

In addition, in a specific gaming state, during the execution of the first variable performance that was started in response to the jackpot variable display of the first special symbol, the loss of the second special symbol that was started after the end of the variable display of the first special symbol. When a stop command (stop signal) for the variable display is received, the first variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a, variable display of the special symbol TZ) may be ended in a jackpot mode.

(Specific example 19 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 19 in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described using FIG. 276. The upper diagram in FIG. 276 is a timing chart 17 when the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command in a specific game state, and FIGS. 276(a) to (f) are ( This is an example of a performance corresponding to a) to (f).

First, at timing T0, the second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", and the loss fluctuation display of the second special symbol starts. be done. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (second special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0" and a process is performed to start the second variable production.

At this time, while the fluctuating BGM is being output, the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F changes from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. ” is displayed. Further, one pending icon HI displayed in the second pending icon display area 70D is shifted and displayed (reduced) as a 20-frame animation and displayed as the icon TI. Further, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the second lamp pattern LZ is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation). In addition, the icon TI is in a state where it is performing a rotating action (acting action).

Next, at timing T1, a game ball enters the first starting port 45 due to reasons such as the player hitting left-handed, and the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases. Increases from "0" to "1". When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (the first special figure pending number designation command as the winning signal, the pre-reading designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m memorizes (recognizes) ), the number of reserved first special drawings changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is increased and displayed from "0" to "1" in a specific update mode, Since the first pending icon display area 70B is not displayed, the pending icon HI is not additionally displayed (increased display), and the winning sound based on the current winning is a winning to the first start opening 45 during the specific gaming state. will not be output (see FIG. 276(a)).

Thereafter, at timing T2, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, the effect pattern 70a slightly swings (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position. Further, the rotation operation of the icon TI continues (see FIG. 276(b)).

Then, at timing T3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (command abnormality has occurred), the first variation production will be executed. The process to terminate is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI continue, the periods of temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, variable display of the special pattern TZ, and variable display of the second lamp pattern LZ are extended. Accordingly, the BGM output is maintained during the fluctuation (see FIG. 276(c)).

After that, at timing T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 1. Loss fluctuation display of special symbols starts. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. If it is not possible (a command abnormality has occurred), the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "1", and the process to start the first variable production is not performed (Fig. 276(d)).

Thereafter, at timing T5, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the second special figure is started in response to the fluctuating display of the second special symbol. Processing to end the variable performance is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped performance symbol 70a in the losing mode comes to a final stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop at "814", which is the same as the performance symbol 70a. Furthermore, the second lamp pattern LZ that was being variably displayed on the sub-second variable display 82 stops being displayed (turns off) in a losing manner (see FIG. 276(e)).

After that, at timing T6, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of second reserved symbols stored in the main control unit 110m are "0", so the customer Shifts to a waiting state (game standby state). When the production control unit 130m receives the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0". ”.

At this time, the second special figure pending number displayed on the sub second pending display 84 and the second special figure pending number display area 70F is decreased from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode, and the customer is waiting. The player waits until a demonstration effect is executed or a new variable display of special symbols starts (see FIG. 276(f)).

In addition, at the timing of T3 and timing of T4, the production control unit 130m was able to normally receive the command (stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but based on the reception of this command, the production control unit 130m did not send the command. Even if the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the directed production command (command abnormality has occurred), the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m are produced. The same process as in the case where the control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (command abnormality has occurred) is performed.

In addition, at the timing of T5, the production control unit 130m could not properly receive the stop command (stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m, and at the timing of T6, the customer waiting command sent from the main control unit 110m If the production control unit 130m successfully receives the state designation command, at this timing, a process is performed to end the variable production that was started in response to the variable display of the second special symbol, and the production control unit 130m The stored number of reserved first special symbols changes from "1" to "0".

Then, although the background image continues to scroll, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as one frame of non-animation, regardless of whether it is a normal icon or a special icon. . In addition, the temporarily stopped production symbol 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a permanent stop at "814", which is the same as the production symbol 70a, and the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special symbol reservation number are displayed. The number of reserved first special symbols displayed in the display area 70E will be displayed decreasing from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. In addition, in the case where the continuous notice performance has been executed for the loss fluctuation display of the second special symbol, the continuous notice performance will end at this timing.

(Specific example 20 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A specific example 20 in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described using FIG. 277. The upper diagram in FIG. 277 is a timing chart 18 when the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command in a specific game state, and FIGS. 277(a) to (f) are ( This is an example of a performance corresponding to a) to (f).

First, at timing T0, the second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", and the loss fluctuation display of the second special symbol starts. be done. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (second special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0" and a process is performed to start the second variable production.

At this time, while the fluctuating BGM is being output, the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F changes from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. ” is displayed. Furthermore, the pending icon HI displayed in the second pending icon display area 70D is shifted and displayed (reduced) as a 20-frame animation in the icon display area 70C and displayed as the icon TI. In addition, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ starts, but the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation), and the icon TI rotates. (direction action) is in progress.

Next, at timing T1, a game ball enters the first starting port 45 due to reasons such as the player hitting left-handed, and the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases. Increases from "0" to "1". When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (the first special figure pending number designation command as the winning signal, the pre-reading designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m memorizes (recognizes) ), the number of reserved first special drawings changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is increased and displayed from "0" to "1" in a specific update mode, Since the first pending icon display area 70B is not displayed, the pending icon HI is not additionally displayed (increased display), and the winning sound based on the current winning is a winning to the first start opening 45 during the specific gaming state. will not be output (see FIG. 277(a)).

Thereafter, at timing T2, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, the effect pattern 70a slightly swings (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position. Further, the rotation operation of the icon TI continues (see FIG. 277(b)).

Then, at timing T3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (command error has occurred), the second variable production will end. processing is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI continue, the periods of temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, variable display of the special pattern TZ, and variable display of the second lamp pattern LZ are extended. Accordingly, the BGM output is maintained during the fluctuation (see FIG. 277(c)).

After that, at timing T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 1. The jackpot fluctuation display of special symbols starts. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. If it is not possible (a command abnormality has occurred), the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains "1", and the process to start the variable production is not performed (Fig. 277 ( d)).

Thereafter, at timing T5, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the second special figure is started in response to the fluctuating display of the second special symbol. Processing to end the variable performance is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation regardless of whether it is a normal icon or a special icon. . In addition, the temporarily stopped performance symbol 70a in the losing mode comes to a final stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop at "814", which is the same as the performance symbol 70a. Furthermore, the second lamp pattern LZ that was being variably displayed on the sub-second fluctuation display 82 stops displaying (turns off) in a loss mode, but the first lamp pattern LZ in a jackpot mode is displayed on the sub-first fluctuation display 81. It becomes a state where it is not stopped and displayed (see FIG. 277(e)). In addition, in the case where the continuous notice performance has been executed for the loss fluctuation display of the second special symbol, the continuous notice performance will end at this timing.

Thereafter, at timing T6, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, the opening period of the jackpot game starts. When the performance control unit 130m receives the opening designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit 130m performs a process of starting the opening performance.

At this time, an opening image consisting of an opening background and the words "Jackpot" is displayed. In addition, "1" of the first special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is when a prize is newly won based on a prize in the first start opening 45. The command (win signal at the time of winning) is normally received, or the start command based on the start of the variable display of the first special symbol (first special symbol pending number designation command as the start signal, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation) This is maintained until the effect control unit 130m receives the pattern designation command (see FIG. 277(f)).

In other words, a new winning command (winning signal) based on a winning in the second starting port 47, a starting command based on the start of the variable display of the second special symbol (second special symbol pending number as a starting signal), etc. Even if the production control unit 130m receives a specified command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command), it is displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E. The number of reserved first special drawings that is "1" is maintained.

In addition, at the timing of T3 and timing of T4, the production control unit 130m was able to normally receive the command (stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but based on the reception of this command, the production control unit 130m did not send the command. Even if the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the directed production command (command abnormality has occurred), the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m are produced. The same process as in the case where the control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (command abnormality has occurred) is performed.

In addition, at the timing of T5, the production control unit 130m could not properly receive the stop command (stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m, and at the timing of T6, the opening designation sent from the main control unit 110m. If the command is successfully received by the production control unit 130m, at this timing, processing is performed to end the second variable production that was started in response to the variable display of the second special symbol and start the opening production. .

Then, the relevant icon TI displayed in the relevant icon display area 70C is changed to one frame's worth without stopping and displaying the temporarily stopped loss mode production pattern 70a and the fluctuatingly displayed special design TZ. The opening image will be displayed without being deleted as an animation (effectively, all productions other than the opening production will end).

As described above, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 276 and 277, in a specific game state, during the execution of the second variable performance that is started in response to the variable display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol When a stop command (stop signal) for the first special symbol variable display that is started after the end of the first special symbol variable display is received, the second variable performance is ended. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, since the second variable effect ends at the timing when the stop command is received, it is possible to end the second variable effect without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 276 and 277, in a specific game state, during the execution of the second variation performance that is started in response to the loss variation display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol is If a stop command (stop signal) for the jackpot fluctuation display of the first special symbol that was started after the end of the fluctuation display is received, the second fluctuation performance (fluctuation display of the performance symbol 70a, special symbol TZ) is received in a loss mode. (fluctuating display). Therefore, it is not necessary to perform processing such as switching the performance symbols from a losing mode to a jackpot mode, and it is possible to end the second variable performance without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 276 and 277, in a specific game state, during the variable display of the second lamp symbol LZ that is started in response to the loss variable display of the first special symbol, the second special When a stop command (stop signal) for the jackpot fluctuation display of the first special symbol that is started after the end of the symbol fluctuation display is received, the sub-first fluctuation display 81 and the sub-second fluctuation display 82 are In either case, the lamp pattern LZ in the jackpot mode (lit) is not displayed in a stopped state. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform processing such as switching the lamp pattern from a loss mode (lights out) to a jackpot mode, and it is possible to end the variable display of the second lamp pattern LZ without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 276 and 277, in a specific game state, while the icon (second running information) corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed, the second special symbol is When a command (stop signal) for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol that is started after the end of the variable display is received, the icon is erased. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, since the icon is deleted upon reception of the stop command, it is possible to delete the icon without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 276 and 277, in a specific game state, the second special symbol changes while the icon (second running information) corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed. When the stop command (stop signal) is received, and when the stop command for the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed while the corresponding icon (second running information) corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed. (stop signal) is received, the icon is erased in the same manner as when the stop signal is received. Therefore, it becomes possible to naturally erase the icon without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 276 and 277, in the specific gaming state, the first special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is When a customer waiting state designation command indicating that the number of special drawings on hold is "0" is received when the number is not "0", the number of reserved special drawings is displayed on the sub-first holding display 83 and the first number of special drawings on hold display area 70E. The number of reserved first special drawings is reduced to "0" and displayed. Therefore, the player is not given any doubt that the variable performance will not be executed even though the first special figure reservation number is not "0".

In addition, in a specific gaming state, during the execution of the second variable performance that was started in response to the jackpot variable display of the second special symbol, the loss of the first special symbol that was started after the end of the variable display of the second special symbol. When a stop command (stop signal) for the variable display is received, the second variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a, variable display of the special symbol TZ) may be ended in a jackpot mode.

(Example of variable performance)
FIGS. 278 to 281 are diagrams showing examples of variable effects executed in the normal gaming state.
In the examples of variable effects shown in FIGS. 278 to 281, variable effects are performed three times in the normal gaming state. The first variable presentation among these three variable presentations is a variable presentation based on a loss in the jackpot judgment result and winning in the second starting opening 47, and is a variable presentation in which an SP reach effect is executed. . In addition, the second and third variable performances of the three variable performances are variable performances based on the jackpot determination result being a loss and winning the first starting opening 45, and the reach performance is executed. It is a fluctuating performance that does not occur.

As shown in FIG. 278(a), as the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the performance symbol 70a is permanently stopped at the stop position in the first image display device 70. The effect pattern 70a on the left-center right side being displayed at this time is displayed in a highly decorative display mode consisting of numbers (identification characters), a character image CG, a tactile image SK, and a pattern effect image ZE. . In addition, the special symbol TZ has stopped in the same losing mode "285" as the performance symbol 70a. In addition, both the first lamp pattern LZ and the second lamp pattern LZ are in a losing state (extinguished) and are permanently stopped.

Further, the sub-first reservation display 83 displays "1" which is the first special figure reservation number, and the sub-second reservation display 84 displays "1" which is the second special figure reservation number. has been done. Moreover, "1" is displayed as a reservation number in both the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E and the second special symbol reservation number display area 70F.
Furthermore, in the first image display device 70, one pending icon HI is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B. On the other hand, since the second reservation icon display area 70D is not displayed, the reservation icon HI corresponding to the second special figure reservation is not displayed. Further, the hold icon HI is performing a rotation operation (acting operation). In the illustrated example, as the rotation operation, the hold icon HI is periodically rotated clockwise in the display area. The cycle of rotation by the hold icon HI, that is, the time required for one rotation of the hold icon HI, may be any time, but is, for example, 2 seconds.

Further, in this variable performance example, performance mode A is set in the normal gaming state, and a background image HG corresponding to performance mode A is displayed on the first image display device 70. Furthermore, the first image display device 70 displays a mode identification image MSG and a variation number identification image HSG. The mode identification image MSG shows information for identifying the set production mode. In the illustrated example, the mode identification image MSG shows the text "Mode A" that identifies that the set production mode is production mode A. The variation number identification image HSG is an image that notifies the number of variable displays of special symbols (number of variable effects) executed after the establishment of a predetermined condition (RAM clearing, reset of the number of variations). In the illustrated example, the text "100 GAME" indicating that the variable display of the special symbol has been executed 100 times since the establishment of a predetermined condition is shown as the variation number identification image HSG. The mode identification image MSG and the variation number identification image HSG are displayed on the first image display device 70 in a layer behind the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ.

Further, the lamp LA emits light in a light emitting manner corresponding to the stoppage of fluctuation of the special symbol (the fluctuation performance is not executed). Examples of the light emitting mode in response to the stoppage of variation of the special symbol (the fact that the variation effect is not being performed) include emitting white light. In addition, the light emission mode according to the special symbol fluctuation stop (fluctuating effect is not executed) is a different light emission mode from the light emission mode while the special symbol is changing (variable effect is being executed) and the light emission mode in the customer waiting state. Any light emission mode may be used.
Further, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to the stoppage of fluctuation of the special symbol (the fact that the fluctuation effect is not executed). The sound corresponding to the stoppage of fluctuation of the special symbols (when the fluctuation performance is not executed) may include BGM exclusively for when the fluctuation of the special symbols is stopped (when the fluctuation performance is not executed). In addition, the sound corresponding to the stop of fluctuation of the special symbol is BGM while the special symbol is fluctuating (during execution of fluctuation production), and is a sound with a lower volume than when the special symbol is fluctuating (during execution of fluctuation production). It may be. In addition, the sound corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation stop (the fluctuation effect is not executed) is the same BGM as during the special symbol fluctuation (the fluctuation effect is in progress), and the sound corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation stop (the fluctuation effect is not executed) The sound may have the same volume as that during execution of the performance. Further, while the special symbols are not changing (when the changing effect is not being executed), the sound output device 9 may not output the sound.

Next, as the number of reserved second special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", a loss fluctuation display of the second special symbols is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (second special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0" and a process is performed to start the second variable production.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 278(b), the second special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F changes from "1" in the specific update mode. The icon TI is reduced to "0" and displayed as an animation of 10 frames. This icon TI is performing a periodic rotation operation (preparation operation). Further, the icon TI and the pending icon HI are aligned in the rotation direction when the rotation operation is performed. That is, the icon TI and the pending icon HI perform a rotating motion (acting motion) in synchronization with each other in motion display. Further, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the second lamp pattern LZ is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation).

Further, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the execution of the variable effect (variable display). Examples of the light emission mode during execution of the variable effect (variable display) include yellow light emission. Note that the lighting mode that corresponds to when the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) is being executed is different from the light emitting mode when the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) is not being executed or the light emitting mode when the customer waiting effect is being executed. It may also be a color-based light emission. Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 is outputting a sound corresponding to the execution of the fluctuating effect (fluctuation display). Examples of the sounds that correspond to the execution of the variable performance include BGM related to content (idol, anime characters, etc.) that is the subject matter of the gaming machine 1.
Next, as shown in FIG. 278(c), the effect symbol 70a of "5" is temporarily stopped in the left area. At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound effect accompanying the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a in the left area.

Note that different sounds may be output from the audio output device 9 until the sound effect associated with the stop (temporary stop, permanent stop) of the performance symbol 70a is output (see FIG. 278(b)). In this case, the sound being output continues to be output even during or after the output of the sound effect associated with the temporary stop. That is, the sound outputted from the audio output device 9 until the sound effect associated with the temporary stop of the performance symbol 70a is output is not interrupted by the sound effect associated with the temporary stop.

Next, as shown in FIG. 278(d), the "5" effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped in the right area and the normal reach effect is executed. At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action).
Also, at this time, an icon change effect is executed. In the icon change effect, the icon TI changes from white to blue. Further, at this time, as an operation accompanying the icon change effect, an effect in which the icon TI moves around is performed. More specifically, the icon TI moves around within the icon display area 70C. The movement of the icon TI accompanying the icon change effect is a different movement from the periodic rotation movement (rendering movement) of the icon TI. When an action accompanying the icon change effect is being executed, a change action image HAG is displayed. The change action image HAG is displayed in the area where the icon TI has moved around. In addition, the blue icon TI continues its periodic rotational movement (direction movement).
Also, at this time, a strong action effect is executed in which the first movable member 73 emits blue light and moves. Further, at this time, the lamp LA continues to emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the execution of the variable effect. Moreover, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound effect accompanying the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a in the right area. Furthermore, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound according to the normal reach performance. Examples of sounds that correspond to the normal reach effect include a sound effect specific to when a reach is achieved, a voice saying "reach", and the like.

Next, as shown in FIG. 278(e), the effect symbols 70a in the left and right areas are reduced and displayed in the upper left and right corners of the first image display device 70, and the SP ready-to-reach effect is started. At this time, the effect patterns 70a in the left and right areas are displayed in a less decorative manner consisting only of numbers (identification characters). Further, with the start of the SP ready-to-reach effect, the icon TI and the pending icon HI are hidden. Also, at this time, the zone effect is started, and the zone effect image ZEG is displayed on the upper side of the first image display device 70. The zone effect image ZEG is an image that notifies that a zone effect is being executed. Furthermore, the zone effect image ZEG has a band shape, and the displayed color suggests the level of expectation. The illustrated example zone effect image ZEG is displayed in blue. Further, the zone effect image ZEG shows the text "ZONE" scrolled left and right.
Note that the display mode of the less decorative performance pattern 70a is not limited to the display mode consisting only of numbers (identification characters). Even the effect pattern 70a with low decorativeness may have a decorative image in addition to numbers (identification characters). That is, the less decorative performance pattern 70a may have a display mode that is less decorative than the highly decorative performance pattern 70a. In other words, the presentation pattern 70a with low decorativeness may be displayed in a display mode that mainly includes numbers (identification characters).

Also, at this time, a background image HG corresponding to the SP reach effect is displayed. The background image HG corresponding to the SP reach effect is, for example, an image (video) in which characters appearing in the content that is the subject of the gaming machine 1 play mini-games or battles. This video will not be repeated. That is, the background image HG according to the SP reach effect does not operate periodically.
Moreover, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode according to the SP reach effect. Examples of the light emission mode according to the SP reach effect include purple light emission. Moreover, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound according to the SP reach effect. Examples of the sounds corresponding to the SP ready-to-win performance include BGM related to the character displayed on the first image display device 70 in the SP ready-to-reach performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 278(f), the effective period of the effect button 17 (single hit 3 seconds) occurs. At this time, an operation promotion image SG is displayed. The operation promotion image SG displays the text "Press!", an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17, and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the validity period. Also, although not shown, the effect button 17 emits white light at this time. Moreover, at this time, the effect pattern 70a on the right in the left is displayed at the upper left corner of the first image display device 70 in a further reduced form.
Thereafter, when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective period of the effect button 17 has elapsed, the effect pattern 70a of "6" is temporarily stopped in the middle area, as shown in FIG. 279(g). Note that at this time, the sound accompanying the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a is not output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 279(h), a transition image IG is displayed. The transition image IG is an image that is displayed when transitioning from the background image HG according to the SP ready-to-win effect to the background image HG before the start of the SP ready-to-reach effect. Examples of the transition image IG include the logo of the content that is the subject of the gaming machine 1. The transition image IG is displayed on the entire surface of the first image display device 70. In addition, the transition image IG is a layer on the rear side of the special symbol TZ, the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E, and the second special symbol reservation number display area 70F in the first image display device 70, and is It is displayed on a layer in front of 70a. Therefore, when the transition image IG is displayed, the production pattern 70a is hidden (hard to see), while the special pattern TZ, the first special pattern reservation number display area 70E, and the second special pattern reservation number display area 70F continues to be displayed. Note that the transition image IG may be displayed as the background image HG.
Further, at this time, the lamp LA switches from a light emission mode corresponding to the SP ready-to-reach effect to a light emission mode corresponding to the execution of the variable effect. Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs sound effects accompanying the display of the transition image IG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 279(i), the performance symbols 70a in the left and right regions are displayed in an enlarged manner, and the performance symbols 70a in the middle region are displayed in a reduced size. At this time, the effect pattern 70a on the left-center right side is displayed in a highly decorative manner and is temporarily stopped. At this time, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the performance pattern 70a perform a fluctuation motion (performance motion). Also, at this time, the icon TI and the pending icon HI are displayed again. Both the icon TI and the pending icon HI perform periodic rotational motions (presentation motions) in a state in which their motion displays are synchronized. Also, at this time, the mode identification image MSG is displayed again. Moreover, at this time, the background image HG corresponding to the SP reach effect is changed to the background image HG corresponding to the effect mode A again. Further, at this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 9. That is, the sound accompanying the temporary stop of the effect pattern 70a in the middle area is not output.

Then, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed.
In this case, as shown in FIG. 279(j), although the background image HG continues to be played in a loop, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a final stop at the stop position, the special symbol TZ comes to a permanent stop in the same losing mode as the production pattern 70a, "565", and the second lamp pattern LZ is in a losing mode (lights out). Stop the book.

Also, at this time, the display content of the variation number identification image HSG is updated to "101GAME". Further, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the stoppage of fluctuation of the special symbol (the fluctuation effect is not being executed). Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to the stop of variation of the special symbol (the fact that the variation effect is not executed).
Note that the timing at which the display content of the variation number identification image HSG is updated is not limited to when the variation effect ends. In other words, the trigger for updating the display content of the variation number identification image HSG is not limited to the presentation control unit 130m receiving a stop command. For example, when the variation effect is started, the display content of the variation number identification image HSG may be updated. In other words, the display content of the variation number identification image HSG may be updated when the production control unit 130m receives a start command.

Next, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", and the number of the first special symbols is reduced from "1" to "0". Fluctuation display starts. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0" and a process for starting a variable production is performed.
In this case, as shown in FIG. 279(k), the number of reserved first special symbols displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E changes from "1" in the specific update mode. The hold icon HI displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B is reduced to "0" and is shifted and displayed as an animation of 20 frames toward the icon display area 70C and displayed as the icon TI. In addition, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation). Further, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the execution of the variable effect. Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to the execution of the variable effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 279(l), a mode change image MHG is displayed. The mode change image MHG is an image that notifies that the set production mode will be changed. Examples of the mode change image MHG include images related to content (idol, anime characters, etc.) that is the subject of the gaming machine 1. The mode change image MHG is a layer on the rear side of the special symbol TZ, the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E, and the second special symbol reservation number display area 70F in the first image display device 70, It is displayed on a layer in front of the . Therefore, when the mode change image MHG is displayed, the production pattern 70a is hidden (hard to see), while the special pattern TZ, the first special pattern reservation number display area 70E, and the second special pattern reservation number display area 70F continues to be displayed. Note that the mode change image MHG may be displayed as a background image HG.

Next, the production mode set in the gaming machine 1 is changed from production mode A to production mode B. In this case, as shown in FIG. 280(m), a background image HG corresponding to production mode B is displayed. Further, the display content of the mode identification image MSG is updated to "mode B" according to the set production mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 280(n), the effect pattern 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in the losing mode "814". At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the icon TI is in a state where it is performing a rotating action (acting action). Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound effect indicating that the production symbol 70a has temporarily stopped.

Then, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed.
In this case, as shown in FIG. 280(o), the background image HG continues to be played in a loop, but the icon TI is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, the special symbol TZ comes to a permanent stop in the same losing mode as the production pattern 70a "814", and the first lamp pattern LZ is in a losing mode (lights out). Stop the book. Also, at this time, the display content of the variation number identification image HSG is updated to "102 GAME". Further, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the stoppage of fluctuation of the special symbol (the fluctuation effect is not being executed). Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to the stop of variation of the special symbol (the fact that the variation effect is not executed).

The above-mentioned fluctuating performance (the fluctuating performances shown in FIGS. 279(k), 279(l), and 280(m) to 280(o)) is a fluctuating performance in which the three performance symbols 70a temporarily stop in order. Alternatively, it may be a variable effect in which the three effect symbols 70a temporarily stop at the same time.
When the three performance symbols 70a temporarily stop in sequence, first, when the performance symbol 70a in the left area temporarily stops, the sound effect of the temporary stop is output, and then the performance pattern in the right area When 70a temporarily stops, a sound effect indicating that it has temporarily stopped is output, and further thereafter, when the production pattern 70a in the middle area temporarily stops, a sound effect indicating that it has temporarily stopped is output. In addition, when the three performance symbols 70a come to a permanent stop after the temporary stop, the sound associated with the stop of the performance symbols 70a is not output.
In addition, in the case of a variable performance in which the three performance symbols 70a temporarily stop at the same time, when the three performance symbols 70a temporarily stop at the same time, the sound effect of the temporary stop of the three performance symbols 70a is output once. be done. Even in this case, the output sound effect is regarded as a sound effect associated with the temporary stop of the effect pattern 70a in the left area, the effect pattern 70a in the middle area, and the effect pattern 70a in the right area. In addition, when the three performance symbols 70a come to a permanent stop after the temporary stop, the sound associated with the stop of the performance symbols 70a is not output.
Further, this variable performance may be a variable performance in which the three performance symbols 70a are permanently stopped all at once without going through a temporary stop. In this case, when the three performance symbols 70a come to a real stop all at once, a sound effect accompanying the real stop is output.

After that, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, the game enters a customer waiting state (game waiting state). When the performance control unit 130m receives the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing is performed to set a standby timer until the customer waiting demonstration performance is started.
In this case, the guide image AG is displayed as shown in FIG. 280(p). Specifically, a first image (an image imitating the effect button 17) suggesting that a menu is displayed by operating the effect button 17, and a volume adjustment possible by operating the up and down buttons of the cross key 18. A second image suggesting that the light intensity can be adjusted by operating the left and right buttons of the cross key 18 (an image that imitates the cross key 18 with bright up and down buttons) and a third image (an image that imitates the cross key 18 with bright colored up and down buttons) and a third image that suggests that the light amount can be adjusted by operating the left and right buttons of the A bright-colored image imitating the cross key 18) is displayed.

When the upper button of the cross key 18 is operated in this state, the volume of the sound output from the audio output device 9 is changed to a higher volume than before the upper button was operated, as shown in FIG. 280(q). , a volume value image OG showing the changed volume value is displayed. Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs the sound corresponding to the operation of the upper button of the cross key 18 at the changed volume. If a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds) passes without the cross key 18 being operated in this state, the volume value image OG is erased and the guide image AG shown in FIG. 280(p) is displayed again.
As described above, if the upper button of the cross key 18 is operated while the guide image AG is displayed, the volume value image OG indicating the current volume value is displayed, and the current volume value A confirmation sound may be output at a volume corresponding to the volume.

When the left button of the cross key 18 is operated in this state, the light intensity of the lamp LA is changed to a lower light intensity than before the left button was operated, as shown in FIG. A light amount value image KG indicating the value is displayed. Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to the operation of the left button of the cross key 18. If a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds) passes without the cross key 18 being operated in this state, the light amount value image KG is erased and the guide image AG shown in FIG. 280(p) is displayed again.

In addition, if the demonstration standby time has elapsed after the display of the guide image AG started (after the standby timer was set), as a customer waiting demonstration performance, a customer waiting demonstration is performed as shown in FIG. 281(s). Image KMG is displayed. Examples of the customer waiting demo image KMG include videos related to content (idol, anime characters, etc.) that is the subject matter of the gaming machine 1. This video consists of a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds), and when it reaches the end, it is loop-played again from the beginning. That is, the video reproduction of the customer waiting demo image KMG continues to be performed at a predetermined cycle. The customer waiting demo image KMG is displayed in a layer in front of the production pattern 70a and in a layer behind the special pattern TZ, the first special pattern reservation number display area 70E, and the second special pattern reservation number display area 70F. be done.
Further, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the customer waiting demonstration effect. The light emitting mode according to the customer waiting demonstration performance may be any light emitting mode, and examples thereof include white light emission, lights out, etc. Moreover, at this time, the audio output device 9 does not output sound.

Next, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45, the first special symbol reservation number (U1) increases from "0" to "1". In this case, in the first image display device 70, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1", and the first reservation icon display area A hold icon HI is displayed at 70B.
Next, as the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", variable display of the first special symbols is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0" and a process for starting a variable production is performed.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 281(t), the customer waiting demonstration effect ends and the customer waiting demonstration image KMG is hidden. In addition, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is decreased from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode, and The pending icon HI displayed in the icon display area 70B is shifted and displayed as an animation of 20 frames toward the icon display area 70C and displayed as the icon TI. In addition, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation). Further, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the execution of the variable effect. Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to the execution of the variable effect.

Then, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed.
In this case, as shown in FIG. 281(u), the background image HG continues to be played in a loop, but the icon TI is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the production pattern 70a comes to a final stop at the stop position, the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop in the same losing mode as the production symbol 70a, ``365'', and the first lamp pattern LZ makes a permanent stop in a losing mode (extinguished). Also, at this time, the display content of the variation number identification image HSG is updated to "103GAME". Further, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the stoppage of fluctuation of the special symbol (the fluctuation effect is not being executed). Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound effect accompanying the stop of the left center right production symbol 70a. Furthermore, a sound corresponding to the stoppage of the variation of the special symbol (the fact that the variation effect is not being performed) is output.

(Modification 1)
FIG. 282 is a diagram showing a modification (modification 1) of the variation effect example described using FIGS. 278 to 281.
Next, a modification example (modification example 1) of the variation effect example described using FIGS. 278 to 281 will be described using FIG. 282. Modification 1 is an example of a performance when the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command. In this modification example 1, in the case where the variable display of the special symbol is performed three times as explained using FIG. 278 to FIG. This is an example of a performance performed when the time command is not normally received by the performance control unit 130m.

As shown in FIG. 282(a), as the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, the first lamp symbol LZ, and the second lamp symbol LZ are at a full stop. Further, the sub-first reservation display 83 displays "1" which is the first special figure reservation number, and the sub-second reservation display 84 displays "1" which is the second special figure reservation number. has been done. Moreover, "1" is displayed as a reservation number in both the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E and the second special symbol reservation number display area 70F. Further, one hold icon HI is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B. Furthermore, a background image HG corresponding to production mode A is displayed. Furthermore, a mode identification image MSG and a variation number identification image HSG are displayed. Further, the lamp LA emits light in a light emitting manner corresponding to the stoppage of fluctuation of the special symbol (the fluctuation performance is not executed). Further, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to the stoppage of fluctuation of the special symbol (the fact that the fluctuation effect is not executed).
Note that FIG. 282(a) is in the same state as that in FIG. 278(a).

Next, as the number of reserved second special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", a loss fluctuation display of the second special symbols is started. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (2nd special symbol pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. If it is not possible (command abnormality has occurred), the second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "1", and the process of starting the second variable production is not performed.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 282(b), the second lamp pattern LZ continues to be in a permanently stopped state. Moreover, the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F maintains "1". Furthermore, based on the fact that the start time command cannot be received normally, the performance control unit 130m executes a predetermined performance (start time predetermined performance) in order to increase the interest of the game. Specifically, the performance control unit 130m uses the performance symbol 70a, the hold icon HI, the zone effect image ZEG, the background image HG, the lamp LA, and the audio output device 9 to execute a predetermined performance at the start.

The performance pattern 70a moves up and down in a predetermined performance at the start. When the predetermined performance is started, the performance symbol 70a moves upward from the stop position, moves below the stop position, and then moves above the stop position again. While the predetermined performance is being executed at the start, the performance symbol 70a periodically repeats such movement above the stop position and below the stop position. The period of operation of the performance pattern 70a in the predetermined performance at the start, that is, the performance pattern 70a starts moving from the stop position, then moves upwards from the stop position and moves downwards from the stop position. The time it takes to reach the stop position again may be any time, but is, for example, 1 second.
Further, although not shown, in the predetermined performance at the start, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE may perform a fluctuation motion (performance motion) as the above-mentioned performance symbol 70a moves.

The hold icon HI moves left and right in a predetermined effect at the start. When the predetermined effect at the time of start is started, the hold icon HI moves toward the icon display area 70C, and then moves toward the first hold icon display area 70B. While the predetermined effect at the start is being executed, the hold icon HI periodically repeats such movement to the icon display area 70C and movement to the first hold icon display area 70B. At what time does the cycle of operation of the hold icon HI in the predetermined performance at the start, that is, the time from when the hold icon HI moves to the icon display area 70C until it returns to the first hold icon display area 70B again? For example, it may be 2 seconds.
Note that when the icon TI performs a predetermined effect at the time of start, the same content as the predetermined effect at the time of start by the pending icon HI is executed.

The zone effect image ZEG is displayed in a manner corresponding to the case where the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command at the start in the predetermined performance at the start. More specifically, the display color of the zone effect image ZEG in the predetermined effect at the time of start is brown, etc., of the zone effect image ZEG that is displayed only when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command at the time of start. It's a color. In addition, in the predetermined effect at the start, the zone effect image ZEG includes not only the text "ZONE" but also the text "missed at the start" as shown in the example shown in the figure. An image may be displayed indicating that the message could not be received normally. While the predetermined effect is being executed at the start, the text displayed in the zone effect image ZEG continues to be scrolled left and right.

In the background image HG, a moving image is displayed in response to the fact that the performance control unit 130m could not normally receive the command at the start in the predetermined performance at the start. The video in response to the fact that the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command includes a background video that is displayed only when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command. . In addition, the background image HG for the predetermined performance at the start includes a video in which the text “The performance control unit could not normally receive the command at the start” scrolls from the right end to the left end of the first image display device 70. may be included. The moving image as the background image HG in the predetermined effect at the start consists of a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds), and when it reaches the end, it continues to be displayed again from the beginning. That is, while the predetermined effect is being executed at the start, loop playback of the moving image as the background image HG is continued.

The lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the failure of the performance control unit 130m to normally receive the start time command in the predetermined performance at the time of start. The lighting mode in response to the fact that the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command is, for example, flashing at a cycle that is executed only when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command. , switching of the light emitting color that is executed only when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command, and execution only when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command. Continuation of lighting for a certain period of time, etc. can be mentioned. While the predetermined start effect is being executed, the lamp LA continues to emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the fact that the effect control unit 130m has not been able to properly receive the start command.

The audio output device 9 outputs a sound in response to the fact that the performance control section 130m has not been able to properly receive the start command in the predetermined performance at the time of start. For example, the sound in response to the production control unit 130m not being able to properly receive the start command may be a voice that says ``The production control unit was unable to properly receive the start command,'' or a sound that the production control unit 130m may make. Examples include a sound that is output only when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command, such as a sound effect indicating that the start command cannot be received normally. Further, while the predetermined start effect is being executed, the audio output device 9 repeatedly outputs a sound corresponding to the fact that the effect control unit 130m has not been able to properly receive the start command at a predetermined period. . The predetermined period may be any time, but is, for example, 10 seconds.

The performance control unit 130m may execute a predetermined performance at the time of start based on having identified an abnormality in the received command at the time of start. In addition, for example, in the case where the production control unit 130m stores (keeps track of) the first special figure reservation number or the second special figure reservation number of "1" or more, the production control unit 130m is configured for a predetermined period of time from the end of the previous variable production. If the start command cannot be received normally within (for example, 0.5 seconds), a predetermined start effect may be executed. Furthermore, after transmitting the start command, the main control unit 110m may transmit a confirmation command to confirm the transmission of the start command. Then, when the production control unit 130m receives the confirmation command but does not receive the start command, it may execute the predetermined production at the start time.

Thereafter, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the predetermined production at the start is performed.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 282(c), the performance symbol 70a that has been moving up and down comes to a final stop at the stop position. Further, the second lamp pattern LZ continues to be in a permanently stopped state. Further, the hold icon HI that has been moving left and right is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, and resumes its periodic rotation operation (presentation operation). Furthermore, the zone effect image ZEG is hidden. Furthermore, the background image HG corresponding to the production mode A is displayed again. Further, the display content of the variation number identification image HSG is updated to "101GAME". Further, the lamp LA emits light in a light emitting manner corresponding to the stoppage of fluctuation of the special symbol (the fluctuation performance is not executed). Further, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to the stoppage of variation of the special symbol (the fact that the variation effect is not executed). That is, the predetermined performance at the start ends. On the other hand, the sound accompanying the stop of the production pattern 70a is not output.

In addition, the production control unit 130m updates the display content of the variation number identification image HSG when the start command is not normally received and the stop command is normally received. Not limited. The effect control unit 130m does not need to update the display content of the variation number identification image HSG when the start command is not normally received and when the stop command is normally received.
In addition, when the display content of the fluctuation number identification image HSG is updated when the fluctuation performance is started, the performance control unit 130m sends the stop command if the start command cannot be received normally. It is not necessary to update the display content of the variation number identification image HSG regardless of whether or not it is received normally.

Next, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", and the number of the first special symbols is reduced from "1" to "0". Fluctuation display starts. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0" and a process for starting a variable production is performed.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 282(d), the number of reserved first special symbols displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E changes from "1" in the specific update mode. The hold icon HI displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B is reduced to "0" and is shifted and displayed as an animation of 20 frames toward the icon display area 70C and displayed as the icon TI. In addition, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation). Further, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the execution of the variable effect. Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to the execution of the variable effect.
On the other hand, the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F maintains "1".

After this, FIG. 279(l), FIG. 280( The same variation effects as those described using FIGS. 280(m) to 280(o) are executed. Then, when the variable production is finished and the production control unit 130m normally receives the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special symbol reservation number display area 70F are displayed. The displayed number of reserved second special drawings is displayed decreasing from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. Further, a guide image AG is displayed on the first image display device 70. This results in the same state as in FIG. 280(p). After this, the same effects as those described using FIGS. 280(q), 280(r), and 281(s) to 281(u) are performed.

(Modification 2)
FIG. 283 is a diagram showing another modification (modification 2) of the variation effect example described using FIGS. 278 to 281.
Next, using FIG. 283, another modification (modification 2) of the variation effect example described using FIGS. 278 to 281 will be described. Modification 2 is a diagram showing an example of a performance when the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command. In this modification example 2, in the case where the variable display of the special symbol is performed three times as explained using FIGS. This is an example of a performance performed when the time command is not normally received by the performance control unit 130m.

First, by performing the same effects as those explained using FIGS. 278(a) to 278(f), FIG. 279(g), and FIG. 279(h), as shown in FIG. 283(a), , the effect pattern 70a on the left-center right is temporarily stopped. FIG. 283(a) is the same state as FIG. 279(i).
Thereafter, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (a command error has occurred), the variable production will be terminated. processing will not be performed.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 283(b), the variable display of the second lamp pattern LZ continues. Based on the fact that the command at stop cannot be received normally, the performance control unit 130m executes a predetermined performance (predetermined performance at stop) in order to increase the interest of the game. More specifically, the production control unit 130m uses the production pattern 70a, the icon TI, the hold icon HI, the zone effect image ZEG, the background image HG, the lamp LA, and the audio output device 9 to perform a predetermined production at the time of stop. Execute.

The performance pattern 70a moves left and right in a predetermined performance when stopped. When the predetermined effect at the time of stop is started, the effect pattern 70a moves to the left side from the stop position, moves to the right side of the stop position, and then moves to the left side of the stop position again. While the predetermined effect at the time of stop is being executed, the effect pattern 70a periodically repeats such movement to the left side of the stop position and movement to the right side of the stop position. The period of operation of the performance symbol 70a in the predetermined performance at the time of stop, that is, the performance symbol 70a starts moving from the stop position, moves to the left side of the stop position, and moves to the right side of the stop position. The time it takes to reach the stop position again may be any time, but is, for example, 1 second.
Further, although not shown, in the predetermined performance at the time of stop, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE may perform a fluctuation motion (performance motion) as the above-described performance symbol 70a moves. Further, while the predetermined effect is being executed at the time of stop, the special symbol TZ continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

The icon TI and the pending icon HI move up and down in a predetermined effect at the time of stop. When the predetermined stop performance is started, the icon TI moves above the icon display area 70C and then returns to the icon display area 70C. Further, when the predetermined effect at the time of stop is started, the hold icon HI moves above the first hold icon display area 70B and then moves back to the first hold icon display area 70B. While the predetermined effect at the time of stop is being executed, the icon TI and the pending icon HI are moved above the icon display area 70C or the first pending icon display area 70B and returned to their original display positions. The return movement is repeated periodically. Further, in the predetermined effect at the time of stop, the icon TI and the pending icon HI are moving in a state in which the operation display is synchronized. The period of operation of the icon TI and the pending icon HI in the predetermined effect at the time of stop, that is, after the icon TI and the pending icon HI move above the icon display area 70C or the first pending icon display area 70B, The time it takes to return to the original display position may be any time, but is, for example, 2 seconds.

The zone effect image ZEG is displayed in a manner corresponding to the case where the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command in the predetermined stop performance. More specifically, the display color of the zone effect image ZEG in the predetermined effect at the time of stop is a color such as white, which is displayed only when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command at the time of stop. It's a color. In addition, in the predetermined performance when stopped, the zone effect image ZEG includes not only the text "ZONE" but also the text "missed when stopped", as shown in the example shown in the figure, so that the performance control unit 130m can display the stop command. An image may be displayed indicating that the message could not be received normally. While the predetermined stop effect is being executed, the text displayed in the zone effect image ZEG continues to be scrolled left and right.

In the background image HG, a moving image corresponding to the fact that the performance control unit 130m could not normally receive the stop command in the predetermined stop performance is displayed. The video in response to the fact that the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command includes a background video that is displayed only when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command. . In addition, the background image HG in the predetermined performance at the time of stop is a video in which the text "The performance control unit could not normally receive the command at stop" scrolls from the right end to the left end of the first image display device 70. may be included. The moving image as the background image HG in the predetermined effect at the time of stop consists of a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds), and when it reaches the end, it continues to be displayed again from the beginning. That is, while the predetermined effect is being executed at the time of stop, loop playback of the moving image as the background image HG is continued.

The lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode in response to the failure of the performance control unit 130m to normally receive the stop command in the predetermined stop performance. The lighting mode in response to the fact that the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command is, for example, flashing at a cycle that is executed only when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command. , switching of the light emitting color which is executed only when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command, and execution only when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command. Continuation of lighting for a certain period of time, etc. can be mentioned. While the predetermined effect at the time of stop is being executed, the lamp LA continues to emit light in the light emission mode corresponding to the fact that the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command at the time of stop.

The audio output device 9 outputs a sound in response to the fact that the performance control section 130m has not been able to properly receive the stop command in the predetermined stop performance. For example, the sound in response to the production control unit 130m not being able to properly receive the stop command may be a voice that says "The production control unit could not normally receive the stop command" or a sound that the production control unit 130m may make. Examples include a sound that is output only when the production control section 130m cannot normally receive the stop command, such as a sound effect indicating that the stop command cannot be received normally. Furthermore, while the predetermined stop effect is being executed, the audio output device 9 repeatedly outputs a sound corresponding to the fact that the effect control unit 130m has not been able to properly receive the stop command at a predetermined period. . The predetermined period may be any time, but is, for example, 10 seconds.

The performance control unit 130m may execute a predetermined performance at the time of stop based on having identified an abnormality in the received command at the time of stop. In addition, the production control unit 130m may, for example, control the predetermined production at the time of stop when the command at the time of stop is not received even after the execution time of the variation production corresponding to the special figure variation pattern designation command received as the command at the time of start. may be executed. Further, after transmitting the stop command, the main control unit 110m may transmit a confirmation command to confirm the transmission of the stop command. Then, when the production control unit 130m receives the confirmation command but does not receive the command at the time of stop, it may execute the predetermined production at the time of stop.

After that, when the stop time of the special symbol passes, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", and the first special symbol changes. Display starts. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. Then, the first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0", and a process is performed to start a variable production.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 283(c), the effect pattern 70a that has been moving left and right comes to a final stop with its display position switched to the stop position, and then expands and contracts (prepare) in the sequence of "565". Start scrolling after performing the action). Further, the second lamp pattern LZ comes to a final stop in a losing mode (lights out). On the other hand, the special symbol TZ continues to be displayed in a variable manner without being stopped and displayed. Further, the icon TI and the pending icon HI are erased with one frame of non-animation, and the icon TI corresponding to the started variable effect is displayed in the icon display area 70C with one frame of non-animation. Ru. This icon TI periodically rotates (acts as an effect). Furthermore, the zone effect image ZEG is hidden. Furthermore, the background image HG corresponding to the production mode A is displayed again. Further, the lamp LA emits light in a light emitting mode corresponding to the period when the special symbol is changing (during execution of the fluctuation effect). Further, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to when the special symbols are changing (while the changing effect is being executed). That is, the predetermined performance ends when stopped.
Note that, at this time, no sound is output due to the stoppage of the effect pattern 70a. Further, the display content of the variation number identification image HSG is not updated and maintains "100 GAME".

After this, FIG. 279(l), FIG. 280(m) to FIG. 280(r), and FIG. 281(s) to FIG. 281(u) are used, except that the display contents of the variation number identification image HSG are different. The same performance as described above will be performed. In addition, when the second variation effect is completed (see FIG. 280(o)), the display content of the variation number identification image HSG is updated to "101GAME". Further, when the third variation effect is completed (see FIG. 281(u)), the display content of the variation number identification image HSG is updated to "102 GAME".

As described above, in the present embodiment, the production control unit 130m does not restrict the display of the mode identification image MSG when the start command is not received normally, but the production mode change (see FIG. 279(l)) and Switching of the display contents of the mode identification image MSG (see FIG. 280(m)) is restricted.
In this case, while preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the switching of the display contents of the mode identification image MSG, maintaining the display of the mode identification image MSG prevents the player from becoming unable to grasp the state of the production. can.

(Modification 3)
FIG. 284 is a diagram showing another modification (modification 3) of the variation effect example described using FIGS. 278 to 281.
Next, using FIG. 284, another modification (modification 3) of the variation effect example described using FIGS. 278 to 281 will be described. Modification 3 is a diagram showing an example of a performance when the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command. In this third modification, when the special symbol is displayed three times in a variable manner as explained using FIGS. 278 to 281, the start signal is transmitted from the main control unit 110m at the timing when the second variable display is started. This is an example of a performance performed when the time command is not normally received by the performance control unit 130m.

First, by performing the same effects as those described using FIGS. 278(a) to 278(f) and FIGS. 279(g) to 279(i), as shown in FIG. 284(a). , the production pattern 70a comes to a real stop at the stop position. FIG. 284(a) is the same state as FIG. 279(j).
Next, as the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", a loss fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. If it is not possible (command abnormality has occurred), the first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "1", and the process of starting the first variable production is not performed.

In this case, the first lamp pattern LZ continues to be in a permanently stopped state. Further, the first special symbol reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E maintains "1". Furthermore, the performance control unit 130m executes a predetermined performance (predetermined performance at the start time) based on the fact that the command at the time of starting cannot be received normally. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 284(b), the production control unit 130m uses the production pattern 70a, the hold icon HI, the zone effect image ZEG, the background image HG, the lamp LA, and the audio output device 9, A predetermined effect is executed at the start.
While the predetermined performance is being executed at the start, the performance pattern 70a periodically moves up and down, and the hold icon HI periodically moves left and right. Further, while the predetermined start effect is being executed, the zone effect image ZEG and the background image HG are displayed in a manner corresponding to the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command. Further, while the predetermined effect at the time of start is being executed, the lamp LA emits light in a light emitting manner corresponding to the fact that the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command at the time of start. Further, while the predetermined start effect is being executed, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound in response to the fact that the effect control section 130m has not been able to properly receive the start command.

In addition, the start time to be executed depends on whether the start time command that cannot be received normally by the production control unit 130m is a start time command related to the first special symbol or a start time command related to the second special symbol. The content of the predetermined performance may be different. For example, when the start command that cannot be received by the production control unit 130m normally is a start command related to the second special symbol, the production pattern 70a is better than when it is a start command related to the first special symbol. The vertical movement distance of the icon TI and the horizontal movement distance of the icon TI and the pending icon HI may be long. In this case, the start command that cannot be received normally by the production control unit 130m is the start command related to the first special symbol, or the start command related to the second special symbol. The period of operation in the predetermined effect at the start of the icon TI and the pending icon HI may be the same. Further, for example, in the zone effect image ZEG and background image HG displayed in a predetermined effect at the start, the start command that the effect control unit 130m could not receive normally is the start command related to the first special symbol. Alternatively, text may be displayed to identify whether the command is a start time command related to the second special symbol or the second special symbol. Also, for example, when the start time command that cannot be received normally by the production control unit 130m is a start time command related to the second special symbol than when it is a start time command related to the first special symbol, the blinking The cycle and duration of lighting may be long. In addition, in the predetermined performance at the start time, whether the start time command that the performance control unit 130m could not normally receive from the audio output device 9 is the start time command related to the first special symbol or the start time command related to the second special symbol. A voice identifying whether it is a start command may be output.

Thereafter, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the predetermined production at the start is performed.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 284(c), the performance symbol 70a that has been moving up and down comes to a final stop at the stop position. More specifically, "565", which is the performance symbol 70a that was fully stopped in the previous variable performance, is fully stopped again. Further, the hold icon HI that has been moving left and right is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, and resumes its periodic rotation operation (presentation operation). Furthermore, the zone effect image ZEG is hidden. Furthermore, the background image HG corresponding to the production mode A is displayed again. Further, the display content of the variation number identification image HSG is updated to "102 GAME". Further, the lamp LA emits light in a light emitting manner corresponding to the stoppage of fluctuation of the special symbol (the fluctuation performance is not executed). Further, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to the stoppage of variation of the special symbol (the fact that the variation effect is not executed). That is, the predetermined performance at the start ends. On the other hand, the sound accompanying the stop of the production pattern 70a is not output. Further, the first lamp pattern LZ continues to be in a permanently stopped state.

After that, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, the game enters a customer waiting state (game waiting state). When the performance control unit 130m normally receives the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process is performed to set a standby timer until the customer waiting demonstration performance is started.
At this time, the guide image AG is displayed as shown in FIG. 284(d). Further, the first special symbol reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E becomes "0".

After this, the text "Mode A" is displayed as the mode identification image MSG, the background image HG corresponding to the production mode A is displayed, and the arrangement of the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ is "565". 280(q), FIG. 280(r), and FIG. 281(s) to FIG. 281(u).

(Modification 4)
FIG. 285 is a diagram showing another modification (modification 4) of the variation effect example described using FIGS. 278 to 281.
Next, using FIG. 285, another modification example (modification example 4) of the variation effect example described using FIGS. 278 to 281 will be described. Modification 4 is a diagram showing an example of a performance when the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command. In this modification example 4, when the special symbol is displayed three times in a variable manner as explained using FIGS. 278 to 281, a stop signal is transmitted from the main control unit 110m at the timing when the first variable display is stopped. This is an example of a production performed when the production control unit 130m does not normally receive the time command and the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at the timing when the second variable display is started.

First, by performing the same effects as those described using FIGS. 278(a) to 278(f), FIG. 279(g), and FIG. 279(h), as shown in FIG. 285(a), , the effect pattern 70a on the left-center right is temporarily stopped. FIG. 285(a) is the same state as FIG. 279(i).
Thereafter, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (a command error has occurred), the variable production will be terminated. processing will not be performed.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 285(b), the variable display of the second lamp pattern LZ continues. In addition, based on the fact that the stop command cannot be received normally, the production control unit 130m controls the production pattern 70a, the icon TI, the hold icon HI, the zone effect image ZEG, the background image HG, the lamp LA, and the audio output device 9. is used to execute a predetermined performance when stopped. FIG. 285(b) is the same state as FIG. 283(b).

Next, as the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", a loss fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. If it is not possible (command abnormality has occurred), the first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "1", and the process of starting the first variable production is not performed.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 285(c), the first lamp pattern LZ continues to be in a permanently stopped state, and the second lamp pattern LZ continues to fluctuate and display. Further, the first special symbol reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E maintains "1". In addition, based on the fact that the start command cannot be received normally, the production control unit 130m uses the production pattern 70a, the hold icon HI, the zone effect image ZEG, the background image HG, the lamp LA, and the audio output device 9, A predetermined effect is executed at the start. Further, at this time, the special symbol TZ continues to be displayed in a variable manner.
While the predetermined performance is being executed at the start, the performance symbol 70a periodically moves up and down, and the icon TI and the pending icon HI periodically move left and right with their operation displays synchronized. Further, while the predetermined start effect is being executed, the zone effect image ZEG and the background image HG are displayed in a manner corresponding to the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command. Further, while the predetermined effect at the time of start is being executed, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the fact that the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command at the time of start. Further, while the predetermined start effect is being executed, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound in response to the fact that the effect control section 130m has not been able to properly receive the start command.

Thereafter, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the predetermined production at the start is performed.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 285(d), the performance symbol 70a that has been moving up and down comes to a final stop at the stop position. More specifically, "565", which is the performance symbol 70a that was temporarily stopped in the previous variable performance, is permanently stopped. In addition, the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop in the same losing mode as the performance symbol 70a "565". Furthermore, the icon TI is erased with one frame of non-animation, and the pending icon HI that has been moving left and right is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B. Further, the hold icon HI restarts the periodic rotation operation (performance operation). Furthermore, the zone effect image ZEG is hidden. Furthermore, the background image HG corresponding to the production mode A is displayed again. Further, the display content of the variation number identification image HSG is updated to "101GAME". Further, the lamp LA emits light in a light emitting manner according to the stoppage of fluctuation of the special symbol (the fluctuation performance is not executed). Further, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to the stoppage of variation of the special symbol (the fact that the variation effect is not executed). That is, the predetermined performance at the start ends.
On the other hand, the sound accompanying the stop of the production pattern 70a is not output. Moreover, at this time, the second lamp pattern LZ comes to a permanent stop in a losing mode (extinguished). In addition, the first special symbol reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E maintains "1".

After that, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, the game enters a customer waiting state (game waiting state). When the performance control unit 130m receives the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing is performed to set a standby timer until the customer waiting demonstration performance is started.
In this case, the guide image AG is displayed as shown in FIG. 285(e). Further, at this time, the first special symbol reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E is decreased from "1" to "0".

After this, the text "Mode A" is displayed as the mode identification image MSG, the background image HG corresponding to the production mode A is displayed, and the arrangement of the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ is "565". ", and the display content of the variation number identification image HSG is "101GAME", using FIG. The same effects as those described above will be performed. In addition, when the third variation effect ends (see FIG. 281(u)), the display content of the variation number identification image HSG is updated to "102 GAME".

(Modification 5)
FIG. 286 is a diagram showing another modification (modification 5) of the variation effect example described using FIGS. 278 to 281.
Next, using FIG. 286, another modification (modification 5) of the variation effect example described using FIGS. 278 to 281 will be described. Modification 5 is a diagram showing an example of a performance when the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command. This modification 5 is a customer waiting state that is transmitted from the main control unit 110m after the second variable display has stopped when the special symbol is displayed three times as described with reference to FIGS. 278 to 281. This is an example of a performance performed when the designated command is not normally received by the performance control unit 130m.

First, the same effects as those described using FIGS. 278(a) to 278(f), FIGS. 279(g) to 279(l), FIGS. 280(m) and 280(n) are performed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 286(a), the effect pattern 70a is completely stopped at the stop position. FIG. 286(a) is in the same state as FIG. 280(o).
After that, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, the game enters a customer waiting state (game waiting state). If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the customer waiting state designation command sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (command error has occurred), the standby timer until the customer waiting demonstration performance starts will not be set. , the process to start the customer waiting demonstration performance is not performed.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 286(b), the guide image AG (see FIG. 280(p)) is not displayed on the first image display device 70. Furthermore, based on the fact that the customer waiting state designation command cannot be received normally, the performance control unit 130m executes a predetermined performance (customer waiting predetermined performance) in order to increase the interest of the game. Specifically, the performance control unit 130m uses the background image HG, the lamp LA, and the audio output device 9 to execute a predetermined customer waiting performance.

In the background image HG, a moving image is displayed in response to the fact that the performance control unit 130m could not normally receive the customer waiting state designation command in the predetermined customer waiting performance. The video in response to the fact that the performance control unit 130m was unable to normally receive the customer waiting state designation command is a background video that is displayed only when the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the customer waiting state designation command. Videos can be mentioned. In addition, in the background image HG of the predetermined performance while waiting for a customer, the text “The performance control unit could not normally receive the command for specifying the customer waiting state” is scrolled from the right end to the left end of the first image display device 70. It may also include videos. The moving image as the background image HG in the predetermined customer waiting performance consists of a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds), and when it reaches the end, it continues to be displayed again from the beginning. That is, while the predetermined customer waiting effect is being executed, the loop playback of the moving image as the background image HG is continued.

The lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode in accordance with the failure of the performance control section 130m to normally receive the customer waiting state designation command in the predetermined customer waiting performance. For example, the lighting mode in response to the fact that the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the customer waiting state designation command is executed only when the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the customer waiting state designation command. blinking at different intervals, switching of the luminescent color that is executed only when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the customer waiting state designation command, and lighting color switching that is executed only when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the customer waiting state designation command. For example, the continuation of lighting for a certain period of time is executed only when there is no problem. While the predetermined customer waiting effect is being executed, the lamp LA continues to emit light in the light emission mode corresponding to the fact that the effect control section 130m has not been able to normally receive the customer waiting state designation command.

The audio output device 9 outputs a sound in response to the fact that the performance control section 130m cannot normally receive the customer waiting state designation command in the predetermined customer waiting performance. Examples of sounds in response to the performance control unit 130m not being able to properly receive the customer waiting state designation command include a voice that says "The performance control unit could not normally receive the customer waiting state designation command," or Examples include sound effects that indicate that the control unit 130m has not been able to normally receive the customer waiting state designation command, and sounds that are output only when the production control unit 130m has not been able to normally receive the customer waiting state designation command. . Further, while the predetermined customer waiting performance is being executed, the audio output device 9 repeats a sound in response to the fact that the performance control unit 130m has not been able to normally receive the customer waiting state designation command at a predetermined period. Output. The predetermined period may be any time, but is, for example, 10 seconds.

The performance control unit 130m may execute a predetermined customer waiting performance based on identifying an abnormality in the received customer waiting state designation command. In addition, for example, when the production control unit 130m remembers (understands) that the first special figure reservation number and the second special figure reservation number are "0", the production control unit 130m If the customer waiting state designation command cannot be normally received within a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds), a predetermined customer waiting effect may be executed. Furthermore, after transmitting the customer waiting state designation command, the main control unit 110m may transmit a confirmation command to confirm the transmission of the customer waiting state designation command. Then, when the performance control unit 130m receives the confirmation command but does not receive the customer waiting state designation command, it may execute a predetermined customer waiting performance.

Note that while the predetermined customer waiting performance is being executed, the performance pattern 70a continues to be in a permanently stopped state. That is, the predetermined customer waiting performance is not executed in the performance pattern 70a. In addition, when the customer waiting predetermined effect is being executed, the icon TI, the hold icon HI, and the zone effect image ZEG are not displayed, and the customer waiting predetermined effect is not displayed in the relevant icon TI, the hold icon HI, and the zone effect image ZEG. The performance is not performed.

Here, for example, when the player operates the upper button of the cross key 18, the volume of the sound output from the audio output device 9 is changed to a higher volume than before the operation of the upper button, as shown in FIG. 286(c). As shown in , a volume value image OG showing the changed volume value is displayed. Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs the sound corresponding to the operation of the upper button of the cross key 18 at the changed volume. On the other hand, in the background image HG, the loop playback of the moving image is continued in response to the fact that the production control unit 130m was unable to normally receive the customer waiting state designation command. In addition, the lamp LA continues to emit light in a light emitting mode corresponding to the fact that the production control unit 130m has not been able to normally receive the customer waiting state designation command. If a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds) passes without the cross key 18 being operated in this state, the volume value image OG is erased and the state returns to the state shown in FIG. 286(b) again.

In this state, for example, when the player operates the left button of the cross key 18, the light intensity of the lamp LA is changed to a lower light intensity than before operating the left button, as shown in FIG. 286(d). , a light amount value image KG showing the changed light amount value is displayed. Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to the operation of the left button of the cross key 18. On the other hand, in the background image HG, the loop playback of the moving image is continued in response to the fact that the production control unit 130m was unable to normally receive the customer waiting state designation command. In addition, the lamp LA continues to emit light in a light emitting mode corresponding to the fact that the production control unit 130m has not been able to normally receive the customer waiting state designation command. If a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds) passes without the cross key 18 being operated in this state, the light amount value image KG is erased and the state returns to the state shown in FIG. 286(b).
Furthermore, even when the sound corresponding to the operation of the cross key 18 is being output, the output of the sound corresponding to the failure of the production control unit 130m to normally receive the customer waiting state designation command continues. Good too.

Next, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45, the first special symbol reservation number (U1) increases from "0" to "1". In this case, in the first image display device 70, the first special symbol reservation number displayed in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1", and the first display section 70B1 changes from "0" to "1". A hold icon HI is displayed.
Next, as the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", variable display of the first special symbols is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0" and a process for starting a variable production is performed.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 286(e), the background image HG according to the production mode B is displayed again. Further, the lamp LA emits light in a light emitting mode corresponding to the period when the special symbol is changing (during execution of the fluctuation effect). Further, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to when the special symbols are changing (while the changing effect is being executed). In other words, the predetermined performance for waiting for the customer ends.
Also, at this time, the number of first special symbols on hold displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special symbol on hold number display area 70E is displayed to be decreased from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode, The hold icon HI displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B is shifted and displayed as an animation of 20 frames toward the icon display area 70C and displayed as the icon TI. In addition, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation). Further, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the execution of the variable effect. Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to the execution of the variable effect.
After this, the same effect as that described using FIG. 281(u) is performed.

(Modification 6)
FIG. 287 is a diagram showing another modification (modification 6) of the variation effect example described using FIGS. 278 to 281.
Next, another modification example (modification example 6) of the variation effect example described using FIGS. 278 to 281 will be described using FIG. 287. Modification 6 is a diagram showing an example of a performance when the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command. In this modification example 6, in the case where the special symbol is displayed three times in a variable manner as explained using FIGS. This is an example of a performance performed when the time command is not normally received by the performance control unit 130m.

First, the same effects as those described using FIGS. 278(a) to 278(f), FIGS. 279(g) to 279(l), and FIGS. 280(m) to 280(o) are performed. As a result, the guide image AG is displayed on the first image display device 70, as shown in FIG. 287(a). FIG. 287(a) is in the same state as FIG. 280(p).
Next, if the demonstration standby time has elapsed after the display of the guide image AG started (after the standby timer was set), as a customer waiting demonstration effect, as shown in FIG. 287(b), A demo image KMG is displayed. Further, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode according to the customer waiting demonstration effect. Moreover, the audio output device 9 does not output sound.

Next, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45, the first special symbol reservation number (U1) increases from "0" to "1".
Next, as the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", a loss fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. If it is not possible (command abnormality has occurred), the first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "1", and the process of starting the first variable production is not performed. In other words, the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive both the winning command (the special symbol reservation number designation command and the pre-reading designation command as the winning signal) and the start command associated with the winning to the first starting opening 45.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 287(c), the first special symbol reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E maintains "0". Further, the first lamp pattern LZ continues to be in a permanently stopped state. Furthermore, the first image display device 70 continues to display the customer waiting demo image KMG. Further, the lamp LA continues to emit light in a light emitting mode according to the customer waiting demonstration effect. Furthermore, the audio output device 9 continues to output no sound.
Thereafter, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the performance control unit 130m receives a stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process is performed to end the customer waiting demonstration performance.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 287(d), the customer waiting demonstration image KMG is hidden, and "814", which is the performance symbol 70a that was fully stopped in the previous variable performance, is fully stopped. Furthermore, the background image HG corresponding to the production mode B is displayed again. Further, the display content of the variation number identification image HSG is updated to "103GAME". Further, the lamp LA emits light in a light emitting manner corresponding to the stoppage of fluctuation of the special symbol (the fluctuation performance is not executed). On the other hand, the audio output device 9 continues to output no sound.

As described above, in this embodiment, the start command is normally received during execution of the customer waiting effect in the normal gaming state (see FIG. 281(t)), and then the stop command is normally received (see FIG. 281(t)). (see FIG. 281(u)), the sound is output even after the special symbols stop changing (see FIG. 281(u)). On the other hand, if the start command is not normally received during execution of the customer waiting performance in the normal gaming state (see FIG. 287(c)), but the stop command is normally received (see FIG. 287(d)), No sound is output after the special symbols stop changing (see FIG. 287(d)).
In this case, even though the performance control unit 130m does not normally receive the start command in the normal gaming state, the lingering sound of the performance sound is output even after the special symbols stop changing, giving the player a sense of discomfort. can be suppressed.

FIG. 288 and FIG. 289 are diagrams showing the relationship between the effects executed in the variable effect example and each modification and the timing at which the effects are executed.

(Execution timing of performance in variable performance example)
In the variable performance examples shown in FIGS. 278 to 281, at time T1, the performance control unit 130m sends a start time command related to the second special symbol (a second special symbol reservation number designation command as a start time signal, a special symbol Specified command, special figure fluctuation pattern specified command) is received normally.
Next, at time T2, a second variation effect is started. Also, at this time, the effect pattern 70a is expanded/contracted. Moreover, at this time, the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F is updated. Further, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the execution of the variable effect (variable display). Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to the execution of the fluctuating effect (fluctuation display). Time T2 is the time shown in FIG. 278(b).

Next, at time T3, the highly decorative performance pattern 70a temporarily stops. Also, at this time, a sound effect accompanying the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a is output. Time T3 is the time shown in FIG. 278(c).
Next, at time T4, a ready-to-reach effect is started. Moreover, at this time, a fluctuation motion is performed in the effect pattern 70a. Also, at this time, an icon change effect and a strong action effect are performed. Also, at this time, a sound corresponding to the normal reach effect is output. Time T4 is the time shown in FIG. 278(d).

Next, at time T5, the SP ready-to-reach effect is started. Also, at this time, the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a reduced size. Also, at this time, a zone effect is started. Also, at this time, a background image HG corresponding to the SP reach effect is displayed. Moreover, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode according to the SP reach performance. Moreover, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound according to the SP reach effect. Time T5 is the time shown in FIG. 278(e).
Next, at time T6, a promotion image is displayed. Time T6 is the time shown in FIG. 278(f).
Next, at time T7, the less decorative performance pattern 70a temporarily stops in the middle area. Time T7 is the time shown in FIG. 279(g).

Next, at time T8, transition image IG is displayed. Further, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the execution of the variable effect. Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs sound effects accompanying the display of the transition image IG. Time T8 is the time shown in FIG. 279(h).
Next, at time T9, the highly decorative performance pattern 70a temporarily stops in the middle area. At this time, sound is no longer output from the audio output device 9. Time T9 is the time shown in FIG. 279(i).

Next, at time T10, the performance control unit 130m normally receives a stop command (special symbol stop designation command as a stop signal) regarding the second special symbol.
Next, at time T11, the production pattern 70a comes to a full stop. Also, at this time, the icon TI is deleted. Also, at this time, the display content of the variation number identification image HSG is updated. Further, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the stoppage of fluctuation of the special symbol (the fluctuation effect is not being executed). Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to the stop of variation of the special symbol (the fact that the variation effect is not executed). Time T11 is the time shown in FIG. 279(j).

Next, at time T12, the production control unit 130m issues a start time command related to the first special symbol (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command as a start time signal). Received normally.
Next, at time T13, the first variation effect is started. Moreover, at this time, the expansion/contraction operation of the effect pattern 70a and the shift display of the hold icon HI are performed. Moreover, at this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is updated. Further, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the execution of the variable effect. Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to the execution of the variable effect. Time T13 is the time shown in FIG. 279(k).

Next, at time T14, a background image HG according to production mode B is displayed. Time T14 is the time shown in FIG. 280(m).
Next, at time T15, the highly decorative left-center-right performance pattern 70a temporarily stops. At this time, a sound effect accompanying the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a is output. Time T15 is the time shown in FIG. 280(n).
Next, at time T16, the production control unit 130m normally receives a stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal).

Next, at time T17, the production pattern 70a comes to a full stop. Also, at this time, the icon TI is deleted. Also, at this time, the display content of the variation number identification image HSG is updated. Further, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the stoppage of fluctuation of the special symbol (the fluctuation effect is not being executed). Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to the stop of variation of the special symbol (the fact that the variation effect is not executed). Time point T17 is the time point shown in FIG. 280(o).

Next, at time T18, the performance control unit 130m normally receives the customer waiting state designation command.
Next, at time T19, a customer waiting demonstration image KMG is displayed. Further, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the customer waiting demonstration effect. Moreover, at this time, the audio output device 9 does not output sound. Time T19 is the time shown in FIG. 281(s).

Next, at time T20, the production control unit 130m sends a start time command related to the first special symbol (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command as a start time signal). Received normally.
Next, at time T21, the first variation effect is started. Moreover, at this time, the expansion/contraction operation of the effect pattern 70a and the shift display of the hold icon HI are performed. Further, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the execution of the variable effect. Moreover, at this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is updated. Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to the execution of the variable effect. Time T21 is the time shown in FIG. 281(t).

Next, at time T22, the production control unit 130m normally receives a stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal).
Next, at time T23, the production pattern 70a comes to a full stop. Also, at this time, the icon TI is deleted. Also, at this time, the display content of the variation number identification image HSG is updated. Further, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the stoppage of fluctuation of the special symbol (the fluctuation effect is not being executed). Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to the stop of variation of the special symbol (the fact that the variation effect is not executed). Time T23 is the time shown in FIG. 281(u).

(Execution timing of performance in modification 1)
In addition, in Modification 1, at time T1, the production control unit 130m issues a start time command related to the second special symbol (a second special symbol reservation number designation command as a start signal, a special symbol designation command, a special symbol variation command, etc.). (pattern specification command) is not received correctly.
Next, at time T2, a predetermined performance is started using the performance pattern 70a, the hold icon HI, the zone effect image ZEG, the background image HG, the lamp LA, and the audio output device 9. Time T2 is the time shown in FIG. 282(b).
Next, at time T10, the performance control unit 130m normally receives a stop command (special symbol stop designation command as a stop signal) regarding the second special symbol.

Next, at time T11, the predetermined performance at the start ends. That is, the predetermined effect at the start is executed from time T2 to time T11. In the first modification, execution of each performance that was performed from time point T2 to time point T10 in the variable performance examples shown in FIGS. 278 to 281 is restricted.
Further, at time T11, the production pattern 70a comes to a final stop. Also, at this time, the display content of the variation number identification image HSG is updated. Further, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the stoppage of fluctuation of the special symbol (the fluctuation effect is not being executed). Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to the stop of variation of the special symbol (the fact that the variation effect is not executed). Time T11 is the time shown in FIG. 282(c).

Next, at time T18, the production control unit 130m normally receives the customer waiting state designation command.
Next, at time T19, the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F is updated.

(Execution timing of performance in modification 2)
In addition, in the second modification, at time T10, the production control unit 130m does not normally receive the stop command (special symbol stop designation command as a stop signal) regarding the second special symbol.
Next, at time T11, a predetermined effect at the time of stop using the effect pattern 70a, the hold icon HI, the zone effect image ZEG, the background image HG, the lamp LA, and the audio output device 9 is started. Time T11 is the time shown in FIG. 283(b).

Next, at time T12, the production control unit 130m sends a start time command related to the first special symbol (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command as a start time signal). Successfully received.
Next, at time T13, the predetermined stop performance ends. That is, the predetermined effect at the time of stop is executed from time T11 to time T13. In the second modification, execution of each performance that was performed from time point T11 to time point T12 in the variable performance examples shown in FIGS. 278 to 281 is restricted. Time T13 is the time shown in FIG. 283(c).

(Execution timing of performance in modification 3)
In addition, in the third modification, at time T12, the production control unit 130m issues a start time command related to the first special symbol (a first special symbol reservation number designation command as a start signal, a special symbol designation command, a special symbol fluctuation (pattern specification command) is not received correctly.
Next, at time T13, a predetermined performance is started using the performance pattern 70a, the hold icon HI, the zone effect image ZEG, the background image HG, the lamp LA, and the audio output device 9. Time T13 is the time shown in FIG. 284(b).
Next, at time T16, the production control unit 130m normally receives a stop command (special symbol stop designation command as a stop signal) regarding the first special symbol.

Next, at time T17, the predetermined performance at the start ends. That is, the predetermined performance at the start is executed from time T13 to time T17. In the third modification, execution of each effect that was performed from time point T13 to time point T16 in the variable effect examples shown in FIGS. 278 to 281 is restricted.
Further, at time T17, the production pattern 70a comes to a final stop. Also, at this time, the display content of the variation number identification image HSG is updated. Further, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the stoppage of fluctuation of the special symbol (the fluctuation effect is not being executed). Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to the stop of variation of the special symbol (the fact that the variation effect is not executed). Time T17 is the time shown in FIG. 284(c).

Further, at time T18, the customer waiting state designation command is normally received.
Next, at time T19, the hold icon HI is deleted. Moreover, at this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is updated. Time T19 is the time shown in FIG. 284(d).

(Execution timing of production in modification 4)
In addition, in modification 4, at time T10, the production control unit 130m does not normally receive the stop command (special symbol stop designation command as a stop signal) regarding the second special symbol.
Next, at time T11, a predetermined effect at the time of stop using the effect pattern 70a, the hold icon HI, the zone effect image ZEG, the background image HG, the lamp LA, and the audio output device 9 is started. Time T11 is the time shown in FIG. 285(b).
Next, at time T12, the production control unit 130m sends a start time command related to the first special symbol (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command as a start time signal). Not received correctly.

Next, at time T13, the predetermined stop performance ends. That is, the predetermined effect at the time of stop is executed from time T11 to time T13. In the fourth modification, execution of each performance that was performed from time T11 to time T13 in the variable performance examples shown in FIGS. 278 to 281 is restricted.
Further, at time T13, a predetermined effect at the time of start using the effect pattern 70a, the hold icon HI, the zone effect image ZEG, the background image HG, the lamp LA, and the audio output device 9 is started. Time T13 is the time shown in FIG. 285(c).
Next, at time T16, the production control unit 130m normally receives a stop command (special symbol stop designation command as a stop signal) regarding the first special symbol.

Next, at time T17, the predetermined performance at the start ends. That is, the predetermined performance at the start is executed from time T13 to time T17. In the fourth modification, execution of each performance that was performed from time point T13 to time point T16 in the variable performance examples shown in FIGS. 278 to 281 is restricted.
Further, at time T17, the production pattern 70a comes to a final stop. Also, at this time, the icon TI is deleted. Further, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the stoppage of fluctuation of the special symbol (the fluctuation effect is not being executed). Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to the stop of variation of the special symbol (the fact that the variation effect is not executed). Time T17 is the time shown in FIG. 285(d).

Further, at time T18, the customer waiting state designation command is normally received.
Next, at time T19, the hold icon HI is deleted. Moreover, at this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is updated. Time T19 is the time shown in FIG. 285(e).

Although the production control unit 130m was able to normally receive the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m at the timing of time T10 and the timing of time T12, based on the reception of this command, Even when the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command sent from the production control unit 130m (command abnormality has occurred), the command sent from the main control unit 110m (stop command, The same process as in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command) (command abnormality has occurred) is performed.

In addition, at the timing of time T10 and the timing of time T12, the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m, and furthermore, at the timing of time T16, The production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m, and at time T18, the production control unit uses the customer waiting state designation command sent from the main control unit 110m. If the part 130m is able to receive the data normally, at this timing, processing is performed to end the second variable performance that was started in response to the variable display of the second special symbol, and the performance control unit 130m memorizes (understands) The number of reserved first special drawings changes from "1" to "0".
Although the loop reproduction of the background image HG continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as one frame of non-animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production symbol 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ permanently stops at "565", which is the same as the production symbol 70a, and the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special symbol reservation number are displayed. The number of reserved second special symbols displayed in the display area 70F will be displayed decreasing from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. It should be noted that if the continuous notice performance is being executed for the loss fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the continuous notice performance will end at this timing. Further, at this time, no sound is outputted when the effect pattern 70a stops.

(Execution timing of performance in modification 5)
Furthermore, in the fifth modification, the production control unit 130m does not normally receive the customer waiting state designation command at time T18.
Further, at time T19, a predetermined customer waiting effect using the background image HG, the lamp LA, and the audio output device 9 is started. Time T19 is the time shown in FIG. 286(b).
Next, at time T20, the production control unit 130m sends a start time command related to the first special symbol (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command as a start time signal). Received normally.

Next, at time T21, the predetermined performance for waiting for the customer ends. That is, the predetermined customer waiting performance is executed from time T19 to time T21. In modification 5, execution of each performance that was performed from time point T19 to time point T20 in the variable performance examples shown in FIGS. 278 to 281 is restricted. In addition, the restricted effects include the display of the guide image AG (see FIG. 280(p)) that was executed at the timing between time T18 and time T19 in the variable effect examples shown in FIGS. 278 to 281. It will be done. Time T21 is the time shown in FIG. 286(e).

(Execution timing of production in modification 6)
In addition, in modification 6, at time T20, the production control unit 130m issues a start time command related to the first special symbol (a first special symbol reservation number designation command as a start signal, a special symbol designation command, a special symbol variation command, etc.). Pattern specification command) is not received correctly.
Next, at time T22, the production control unit 130m normally receives a stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal).
Next, at time T23, the customer waiting demonstration image KMG is hidden. Further, the production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop. Further, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the stoppage of fluctuation of the special symbol (the fluctuation performance is not executed). Moreover, at this time, the audio output device 9 is not outputting sound. Here, in modification 6, execution of each performance that was performed from time point T21 to time point T22 in the variable performance examples shown in FIGS. 278 to 281 is restricted. Time T23 is the time shown in FIG. 287(d).

As described above, in this embodiment, regardless of which variable performance is restricted due to the performance control unit 130m not being able to properly receive the start command, the predetermined performance at the start is limited to the performance control unit 130m. If the start command is normally received, the fluctuation effect that is being executed is performed from the start timing to the end timing. Therefore, the predetermined performance at the time of start is started at a timing before any performance performed after the start of the variable performance that was being executed when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the command at the time of start.

In addition, in this embodiment, no matter which variable production is restricted due to the production control unit 130m not being able to normally receive the command at the time of start, the predetermined production at the time of start is started by the production control unit 130m. If the time command is received normally, the fluctuation effect that is being executed is performed from the start timing to the end timing. In this case, when comparing the predetermined effect at the start in Modification 1 with the predetermined effect at start in Modification 3 and 4, it is found that the predetermined effect in Modification 1 is higher than the predetermined effect at start in Modification 3 and 4. The predetermined effect at the start takes longer to execute. In other words, the execution time of the variable effects limited in Modification 1 is longer than that of the variable effects limited in Variations 3 and 4 by the amount of time required for the reach effect etc. The execution time of the predetermined performance at the start, which is performed from the start timing to the end timing of the performance, also becomes longer. That is, the execution time of the predetermined performance at the time of start differs depending on the variable performance that is limited due to the fact that the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command at the time of start.

On the other hand, regardless of which variable performance is restricted due to the fact that the performance control unit 130m could not normally receive the start command related to the first special symbol in the normal gaming state, the predetermined performance at the start The contents of are the same. In addition, regardless of which variable performance is restricted due to the fact that the performance control unit 130m could not normally receive the start time command related to the second special symbol in the normal gaming state, the predetermined performance at the start time is limited. The contents are the same.

Further, the total time of the stop-time predetermined performance and the start-time predetermined performance executed in the fourth modification differs depending on the variable performance that is limited due to the performance control unit 130m not being able to normally receive the start-time command. For example, a variable performance that is restricted due to the performance control unit 130m not being able to properly receive a command at the start is a variable performance in which the jackpot determination result is a loss and the reach effect is not executed (first variable performance). Rather, the total time of the predetermined performance at stop and the predetermined performance at start is longer in a variable performance (second variable performance) in which the jackpot determination result is a loss or a jackpot and a ready-to-win performance is executed.

(Example of variable performance)
FIG. 290 and FIG. 291 are diagrams showing examples of variable effects executed in the normal gaming state.
Next, an example of a variable performance executed by the performance control unit 130m will be described using FIGS. 290 and 291. In the examples of variable effects shown in FIGS. 290 and 291, variable effects are performed twice in the normal gaming state. The first variable performance of these two variable performances is a variable performance based on a loss in the jackpot determination result and winning in the second starting opening 47, and is a variable performance in which a ready-to-win performance is not executed. Furthermore, the second variable presentation of the two variable presentations is a variable presentation based on the jackpot determination result being a jackpot and winning in the first starting opening 45.

As shown in FIG. 290(a), as the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are permanently stopped in a losing mode "285". In addition, both the first lamp pattern LZ and the second lamp pattern LZ are in a losing state (extinguished) and are permanently stopped. Further, the sub-first reservation display 83 displays "1" which is the first special figure reservation number, and the sub-second reservation display 84 displays "1" which is the second special figure reservation number. has been done. Moreover, "1" is displayed as a reservation number in both the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E and the second special symbol reservation number display area 70F. Furthermore, one pending icon HI is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B. This hold icon HI is performing a periodic rotation operation (acting operation). Furthermore, a background image HG, a mode identification image MSG, and a variation number identification image HSG corresponding to the production mode A are displayed. Further, the lamp LA emits light in a light emitting manner corresponding to the stoppage of fluctuation of the special symbol (the fluctuation performance is not executed). Further, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to the stoppage of fluctuation of the special symbol (the fact that the fluctuation effect is not executed).

Next, as the number of reserved second special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", a loss fluctuation display of the second special symbols is started. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (2nd special symbol pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. Then, the second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0", and a process is performed to start the second variable production.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 290(b), the second special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F changes from "1" in the specific update mode. The icon TI is reduced to "0" and displayed as an animation of 10 frames. Further, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the second lamp pattern LZ is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation). Further, the icon TI and the pending icon HI perform periodic rotational movements (preparatory movements) in a state in which the operation displays are synchronized. Further, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the execution of the variable effect. Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 is outputting a sound corresponding to the execution of the variable effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 290(c), "814", which is the effect pattern 70a on the left center right, temporarily stops. At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). Moreover, at this time, a sound effect accompanying the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a is output.

Then, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the production control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed.
At this time, as shown in FIG. 290(d), the background image HG continues to be played in a loop, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, the special pattern TZ comes to a permanent stop in the same losing mode as the production pattern 70a, "814", and the second lamp pattern LZ is in the losing mode (lights out). Stop the book. Also, at this time, the display content of the variation number identification image HSG is updated to "101GAME". Further, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the stoppage of fluctuation of the special symbol (the fluctuation effect is not being executed). Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to the stop of variation of the special symbol (the fact that the variation effect is not executed).

In addition, the above-mentioned fluctuating performance (the fluctuating performance shown in FIGS. 290(b) to 290(d)) may be a fluctuating performance in which the three performance symbols 70a temporarily stop in order, or the three performance symbols 70a may temporarily stop. It may also be a fluctuating effect in which the characters temporarily stop all at once.
When the three performance symbols 70a temporarily stop in sequence, first, when the performance symbol 70a in the left area temporarily stops, the sound effect of the temporary stop is output, and then the performance pattern in the right area When 70a temporarily stops, a sound effect indicating that it has temporarily stopped is output, and further thereafter, when the production pattern 70a in the middle area temporarily stops, a sound effect indicating that it has temporarily stopped is output. In addition, when the three performance symbols 70a come to a permanent stop after the temporary stop, the sound associated with the stop of the performance symbols 70a is not output.
In addition, in the case of a variable performance in which the three performance symbols 70a temporarily stop at the same time, when the three performance symbols 70a temporarily stop at the same time, the sound effect of the temporary stop of the three performance symbols 70a is output once. be done. In addition, when the three performance symbols 70a come to a permanent stop after the temporary stop, the sound associated with the stop of the performance symbols 70a is not output.
Further, this variable performance may be a variable performance in which the three performance symbols 70a are permanently stopped all at once without going through a temporary stop. In this case, when the three performance symbols 70a come to a real stop all at once, a sound effect accompanying the real stop is output.

Next, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", and the number of the first special symbols is reduced from "1" to "0". Fluctuation display starts. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0" and a process for starting a variable production is performed.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 290(e), the first special figure pending number displayed in the sub-first pending display 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E changes from "1" in the specific update mode. The hold icon HI displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B is reduced to "0" and is shifted and displayed as an animation of 20 frames toward the icon display area 70C and displayed as the icon TI. In addition, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation). Further, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the execution of the variable effect. Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to the execution of the variable effect.
Also, at this time, an icon change effect is executed. In the icon change effect, the icon TI changes from white to red. Also, at this time, an effect is executed in which the icon TI moves around, and a changing action image HAG is displayed in the area where the icon moves around. In addition, the red pending icon HI continues its periodic rotation operation (actual performance operation). Also, at this time, the zone effect is started, and the zone effect image ZEG is displayed on the upper side of the first image display device 70. The zone effect image ZEG is displayed in blue. Further, the zone effect image ZEG shows the text "ZONE" scrolled left and right.

Next, as shown in FIG. 290(f), the "7" effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped in the left area and the right area, and the normal reach effect is executed. At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). Further, at this time, the lamp LA continues to emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the execution of the variable effect. Moreover, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound effect accompanying the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a. Furthermore, it outputs a sound according to the normal reach effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 291(g), the effect patterns 70a in the left area and the right area are displayed in a reduced size at the upper left and right corners of the first image display device 70 in a display mode with low decorativeness, and SP The reach performance begins. Further, the icon TI becomes hidden with the start of the SP reach effect. Also, at this time, the display color of the zone effect image ZEG changes from blue to red. Also, at this time, a background image HG corresponding to the SP reach effect is displayed. Moreover, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode according to the SP reach effect. Moreover, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound according to the SP reach effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 291(h), the effective period of the effect button 17 (single hit 5 seconds) occurs. At this time, an operation promotion image SG is displayed. The operation promotion image SG displays the text "Press!", an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 in a protruding state, and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the validity period. Also, although not shown, the effect button 17 emits red light at this time. Moreover, at this time, the effect pattern 70a on the right in the left is displayed at the upper left corner of the first image display device 70 in a further reduced form.

Thereafter, when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective period of the effect button 17 has elapsed, the success effect is started as shown in FIG. 291(i). Specifically, the first movable member 73 moves to the maximum operating position located in front of the first image display device 70 while emitting rainbow light, and the success effect image SEF is displayed on the first image display device 70. . Although not shown, a strong vibration effect (decision success vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for 4 seconds and then strongly vibrated for 5 seconds with a 1 second interval in between. . In addition, the screen temporarily stops when three performance symbols 70a of "7" are aligned at the upper left of the screen.
Moreover, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode according to the jackpot determination result being a jackpot. Examples of the light emission mode in response to the jackpot determination result include light emission in which the light switches to seven colors in order so that it appears rainbow-colored. Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to the jackpot determination result being a jackpot. Examples of sounds corresponding to the jackpot determination result being a jackpot include BGM that is output only when the jackpot determination result is a jackpot, and sound effects indicating that the jackpot determination result is a jackpot. Note that at this time, the sound accompanying the temporary stop of the effect pattern 70a is not output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 291(j), the effect pattern 70a returns to the display mode including the character image CG, etc., and enters a temporarily stopped state. On the other hand, the icon TI is not redisplayed. Further, a strong vibration performance (big hit confirmation vibration performance) is started in which the performance button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second without the validity period of the performance button 17. Further, at this time, the lamp LA continues to emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the jackpot determination result being a jackpot. Moreover, the audio output device 9 continues to output the sound in accordance with the jackpot determination result being a jackpot. On the other hand, the sound accompanying the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a is not output.
Also, at this time, a background image HG corresponding to the jackpot determination result being a jackpot is displayed. The background image HG corresponding to the jackpot determination result being a jackpot is, for example, an image (video) showing that a character appearing in the content that is the subject of the gaming machine 1 has succeeded in a mini-game or won a battle. It is.

Thereafter, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first Processing to end the variable performance is performed.
In this case, as shown in FIG. 291(k), the strong vibration performance is completed and the performance symbol 70a is fully stopped at "777", and the special symbol TZ is also fully stopped at "777". Further, the first lamp pattern LZ is stopped in a jackpot mode (lit). In addition, the lamp LA continues to emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the jackpot determination result being a jackpot. Moreover, the audio output device 9 continues to output the sound in accordance with the jackpot determination result being a jackpot.
Incidentally, when the performance symbol 70a in the jackpot mode comes to a final stop, the sound output device 9 may no longer output the sound.

Thereafter, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, a jackpot game (special game) is started. When the performance control unit 130m receives the opening designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for starting the opening performance of the jackpot game is performed.
In this case, the opening effect is executed as shown in FIG. 291(l). In the opening performance, an opening image OPG is displayed. The opening image OPG is an image for notifying the player of the start of the jackpot game. In the illustrated example, the text "BIG Bonus! Congratulations" indicating the start of a jackpot game is displayed as the opening image OPG. This opening image OPG has contents that suggest the type of jackpot (for example, the total number of rounds) and the gaming state after the jackpot game ends. In addition, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E and the second special figure reservation number displayed in the second special figure reservation number display area 70F maintain "0". do.

Further, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode according to the opening effect. The light emission mode according to the opening performance may be the same as the light emission mode according to the jackpot determination result being a jackpot. Further, the lighting mode depending on the opening performance may have a longer lighting time for each light emitting color than the lighting mode depending on the jackpot determination result being a jackpot.
Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs sound according to the opening performance. Examples of the sound corresponding to the opening performance include BGM that is output only when the opening performance is performed.

(Modification 1)
FIG. 292 is a diagram showing a modification (modification 1) of the variation effect example explained using FIGS. 290 and 291.
Next, a modification example (modification example 1) of the variation effect example described using FIGS. 290 and 291 will be described using FIG. 292. Modification 1 is an example of a performance when the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command. In this modification example 1, when the variable display of the special symbol is performed twice as described using FIGS. 290 and 291, the start signal is transmitted from the main control unit 110m at the timing when the second variable display is started. This is an example of a performance performed when the time command is not normally received by the performance control unit 130m.

First, by performing the same effect as that described using FIGS. 290(a) to 290(c), the effect pattern 70a comes to a final stop at the stop position, as shown in FIG. 292(a). FIG. 292(a) is the same state as that described using FIG. 290(d).
Next, as the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", a jackpot fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. If it is not possible (command abnormality has occurred), the first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "1", and the process of starting the first variable production is not performed.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 292(b), the first lamp pattern LZ continues to be in a permanently stopped state. In addition, the first special symbol reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E maintains "1". In addition, based on the fact that the start command cannot be received normally, the production control unit 130m uses the production pattern 70a, the hold icon HI, the zone effect image ZEG, the background image HG, the lamp LA, and the audio output device 9, A predetermined effect is executed at the start.
While the predetermined performance is being executed at the start, the performance symbol 70a periodically moves up and down, and the hold icon HI periodically moves left and right. Further, while the predetermined start effect is being executed, the zone effect image ZEG and the background image HG are displayed in a manner corresponding to the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command. Further, while the predetermined effect at the time of start is being executed, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the fact that the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command at the time of start. Further, while the predetermined start effect is being executed, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound in response to the fact that the effect control section 130m has not been able to properly receive the start command.

Thereafter, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the predetermined production at the start is performed.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 292(c), the effect pattern 70a that has been moving up and down comes to a final stop at the stop position. More specifically, "814", which is the performance symbol 70a that was fully stopped in the previous variable performance, is fully stopped again. Also, at this time, the special symbol TZ has stopped at "814". Further, the hold icon HI that has been moving left and right is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, and resumes its periodic rotation operation (presentation operation). Furthermore, the zone effect image ZEG is hidden. Furthermore, the background image HG corresponding to the production mode A is displayed again. Further, the display content of the variation number identification image HSG is updated to "102 GAME". Further, the lamp LA emits light in a light emitting manner corresponding to the stoppage of fluctuation of the special symbol (the fluctuation performance is not executed). Further, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to the stoppage of variation of the special symbol (the fact that the variation effect is not executed). That is, the predetermined performance at the start ends.
On the other hand, the sound accompanying the stop of the production pattern 70a is not output. In addition, the first lamp pattern LZ continues to be in a stopped state in a losing manner. Further, the first special symbol reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E maintains "1".

Thereafter, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, a jackpot game (special game) is started. When the performance control unit 130m receives the opening designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing to start the opening performance of the jackpot game is performed.
In this case, the opening image OPG is displayed as shown in FIG. 292(d). Further, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode according to the opening effect. Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs sound according to the opening performance. On the other hand, the first lamp pattern LZ continues to be in a completely stopped state in a losing manner. Further, the first special symbol reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E maintains "1".

Here, "1", which is the first special figure pending number displayed on the sub-first pending display 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E, is based on the new winning in the first starting opening 45. If the winning command (winning signal) is normally received, or the start command based on the start of the variable display of the first special symbol (first special symbol reservation number designation command as the start signal, special symbol designation command, special This is maintained until the production control unit 130m receives the figure variation pattern designation command). In other words, a new winning command (winning signal) based on a winning in the second starting port 47, a starting command based on the start of the variable display of the second special symbol (second special symbol pending number as a starting signal), etc. Even if the production control unit 130m receives a specified command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command), it is displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E. The number of reserved first special drawings that is "1" is maintained.

(Modification 2)
FIG. 293 is a diagram showing another modification (modification 2) of the variation effect example described using FIGS. 290 and 291.
Next, using FIG. 293, another modification (modification 2) of the variation effect example described using FIGS. 290 and 291 will be described. Modification 2 is an example of a performance when the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command. In this modification example 2, in the case where the special symbol variable display is performed twice as explained using FIG. 290 and FIG. This is an example of a production performed when the production control unit 130m does not normally receive the hour command and the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at the timing when the second variable display is started.

First, by performing the same effect as that described using FIGS. 290(a) and 290(b), the effect pattern 70a temporarily stops in the losing mode "814" as shown in FIG. 293(a). are doing. FIG. 293(a) shows the same state as that described using FIG. 290(c).
Thereafter, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (a command error has occurred), the variable production will be terminated. processing will not be performed.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 293(b), the variable display of the second lamp pattern LZ continues. In addition, based on the fact that the stop command cannot be received normally, the production control unit 130m uses the production pattern 70a, the icon TI, the hold icon HI, the background image HG, the lamp LA, and the audio output device 9 to stop the command. At this time, a predetermined performance is executed.
While the predetermined performance at the time of stop is being executed, the performance pattern 70a periodically moves left and right, and the pending icon HI and the icon TI periodically move up and down while the operation display is synchronized. Further, while the predetermined effect at the time of stop is being executed, the background image HG is displayed in a manner corresponding to the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command at the time of stop. Further, while the predetermined effect at the time of stop is being executed, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the fact that the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command at the time of stop. Further, while the predetermined effect at the time of stop is being executed, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound in response to the fact that the effect control section 130m has not been able to normally receive the command at the time of stop. On the other hand, in the predetermined stop effect, the zone effect image ZEG (see FIG. 283(b)) is not displayed.

Next, as the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", a jackpot fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. If it is not possible (command abnormality has occurred), the first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "1", and the process of starting the first variable production is not performed.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 293(c), the first lamp pattern LZ continues to be in a permanently stopped state, and the second lamp pattern LZ continues to be in a fluctuating state. Further, the first special symbol reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E maintains "1". In addition, based on the fact that the start command cannot be received normally, the production control unit 130m uses the production pattern 70a, the hold icon HI, the zone effect image ZEG, the background image HG, the lamp LA, and the audio output device 9, A predetermined effect is executed at the start.
While the predetermined performance is being executed at the start, the performance pattern 70a periodically moves up and down, and the icon TI and the pending icon HI periodically move left and right with their operation displays synchronized. Further, while the predetermined start effect is being executed, the zone effect image ZEG and the background image HG are displayed in a manner corresponding to the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command. Further, while the predetermined effect at the time of start is being executed, the lamp LA emits light in a light emitting manner corresponding to the fact that the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command at the time of start. Further, while the predetermined start effect is being executed, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound in response to the fact that the effect control section 130m has not been able to properly receive the start command.

Thereafter, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the second special figure is started in response to the fluctuating display of the second special symbol. Processing to end the variable performance is performed.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 293(d), the effect pattern 70a that has been moving up and down comes to a final stop in the losing mode "814". Also, at this time, the special symbol TZ stops at "814", which is the same as the performance symbol 70a. Moreover, both the first lamp pattern LZ and the second lamp pattern LZ are stopped in a losing manner. Furthermore, the icon TI is erased with one frame of non-animation. Further, the hold icon HI that has been moving left and right is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, and resumes its periodic rotation operation (presentation operation). Furthermore, the zone effect image ZEG is hidden. Furthermore, the background image HG corresponding to the production mode A is displayed again. Further, the display content of the variation number identification image HSG is updated to "101GAME". Further, the lamp LA emits light in a light emitting manner corresponding to the stoppage of fluctuation of the special symbol (the fluctuation performance is not executed). Further, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to the stoppage of variation of the special symbol (the fact that the variation effect is not executed). That is, the predetermined performance at the start ends.
On the other hand, the sound accompanying the stop of the production pattern 70a is not output. Further, the first special symbol reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E maintains "1".

Thereafter, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, a jackpot game (special game) is started. When the performance control unit 130m receives the opening designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing to start the opening performance of the jackpot game is performed.
At this time, the opening image OPG is displayed as shown in FIG. 293(e). Further, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode according to the opening effect. Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs sound according to the opening performance. Further, the first special symbol reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E maintains "1".

Here, "1", which is the first special figure pending number displayed on the sub-first pending display 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E, is based on the new winning in the first starting opening 45. If the winning command (winning signal) is normally received, or the start command based on the start of the variable display of the first special symbol (first special symbol reservation number designation command as the start signal, special symbol designation command, special This is maintained until the effect control unit 130m receives the figure variation pattern designation command). In other words, a new winning command (winning signal) based on a winning in the second starting port 47, a starting command based on the start of the variable display of the second special symbol (second special symbol pending number as a starting signal), etc. Even if the production control unit 130m receives a specified command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command), it is displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E. The number of reserved first special drawings that is "1" is maintained.

FIG. 294 is a diagram showing the relationship between the performance executed in the variable performance example and each modified example and the timing at which the performance is executed.

(Execution timing of performance in variable performance example)
In the variable performance examples shown in FIGS. 290 and 291, at time T1, the performance control unit 130m issues a start time command related to the second special symbol (a second special symbol reservation number designation command as a start time signal, a special symbol Specified command, special figure fluctuation pattern specified command) is received normally.
Next, at time T2, a second variation effect is started. Also, at this time, the effect pattern 70a is expanded/contracted. Moreover, at this time, the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F is updated. Further, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the execution of the variable effect (variable display). Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to the execution of the fluctuating effect (fluctuation display). Time T2 is the time shown in FIG. 290(b).

Next, at time T3, the highly decorative performance pattern 70a temporarily stops. Also, at this time, a sound effect accompanying the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a is output. Time point T3 is the time point shown in FIG. 290(c).

Next, at time T4, the production control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (special symbol stop designation command as a stop signal) regarding the second special symbol.
Next, at time T5, the production pattern 70a comes to a full stop. Also, at this time, the icon TI is deleted. Also, at this time, the display content of the variation number identification image HSG is updated. Further, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the stoppage of fluctuation of the special symbol (the fluctuation effect is not being executed). Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to the stop of variation of the special symbol (the fact that the variation effect is not executed). Time T5 is the time shown in FIG. 290(d).

Next, at time T6, the production control unit 130m sends a start time command related to the first special symbol (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command as a start time signal). Received normally.
Next, at time T7, the first variation effect is started. Moreover, at this time, the expansion/contraction operation of the effect pattern 70a and the shift display of the hold icon HI are performed. Moreover, at this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is updated. Also, at this time, an icon change effect is performed. Also, at this time, a zone effect is started. Further, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the execution of the variable effect. Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to the execution of the variable effect. Time T7 is the time shown in FIG. 290(e).

Next, at time T8, a reach effect is started. Moreover, at this time, a fluctuation motion is performed in the effect pattern 70a. Also, at this time, a sound effect accompanying the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a is output. Also, at this time, a sound corresponding to the normal reach effect is output. Time T8 is the time shown in FIG. 290(f).

Next, at time T9, the SP ready-to-reach effect is started. Also, at this time, the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a reduced size. Also, at this time, the display color of the zone effect image ZEG changes. Also, at this time, a background image HG corresponding to the SP reach effect is displayed. Moreover, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode according to the SP reach performance. Moreover, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound according to the SP reach performance. Time T9 is the time shown in FIG. 291(g).
Next, at time T10, a promotion image is displayed. Time T10 is the time shown in FIG. 291(h).

Next, at time T11, a successful decision performance is performed. Moreover, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode according to the jackpot determination result being a jackpot. Moreover, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to the jackpot determination result being a jackpot. Time T11 is the time shown in FIG. 291(i).
Next, at time T12, the highly decorative left-center-right performance pattern 70a temporarily stops. Also, at this time, a background image HG corresponding to the jackpot determination result being a jackpot is displayed. Note that at this time, the sound accompanying the temporary stop of the effect pattern 70a is not output. Time T12 is the time shown in FIG. 291(j).

Next, at time T13, the production control unit 130m normally receives a stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal).
Next, at time T14, the production pattern 70a comes to a full stop. Also, at this time, the display content of the variation number identification image HSG is updated. Time T14 is the time shown in FIG. 291(k).

(Execution timing of performance in modification 1)
In addition, in the first modification, at time T6, the production control unit 130m issues a start time command related to the first special symbol (a first special symbol reservation number designation command as a start signal, a special symbol designation command, a special symbol variation command, etc.). Pattern specification command) is not received correctly.
Next, at time T7, a predetermined performance is started using the performance symbol 70a, the hold icon HI, the zone effect image ZEG, the background image HG, the lamp LA, and the audio output device 9. Time T7 is the time shown in FIG. 292(b).
Next, at time T13, the production control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (special symbol stop designation command as a stop signal) regarding the first special symbol.

Next, at time T14, the predetermined performance at the start ends. That is, the predetermined performance at the start is executed from time T7 to time T14. In the first modification, execution of each effect that was performed from time T7 to time T13 in the variable effect examples shown in FIGS. 290 and 291 is restricted.
Further, at time T14, the production pattern 70a comes to a final stop. Further, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the stoppage of fluctuation of the special symbol (the fluctuation performance is not executed). Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to the stop of variation of the special symbol (the fact that the variation effect is not executed). Time T14 is the time shown in FIG. 292(c).

(Execution timing of performance in modification 2)
In addition, in the second modification, at time T4, the production control unit 130m does not normally receive the stop command (special symbol stop designation command as a stop signal) regarding the second special symbol.
Next, at time T5, a predetermined effect at the time of stop using the effect pattern 70a, the icon TI, the pending icon HI, the background image HG, the lamp LA, and the audio output device 9 is started. Time T5 is the time shown in FIG. 293(b).
Next, at time T6, the production control unit 130m sends a start time command related to the first special symbol (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command as a start time signal). Not received correctly.

Next, at time T7, the predetermined stop performance ends. That is, the predetermined effect at the time of stop is executed from time point T5 to time point T7. In the second modification, execution of each effect that was performed from time T5 to time T7 in the variable effect examples shown in FIGS. 290 and 291 is restricted.
Further, at time T7, a predetermined performance is started using the performance pattern 70a, the icon TI, the hold icon HI, the zone effect image ZEG, the background image HG, the lamp LA, and the audio output device 9. Time T7 is the time shown in FIG. 293(c).
Next, at time T13, the performance control unit 130m normally receives a stop command (special symbol stop designation command as a stop signal) regarding the first special symbol.

Next, at time T14, the predetermined performance at the start ends. That is, the predetermined effect at the start is executed from time T7 to time T14. In the second modification, execution of each performance that was performed from time T7 to time T13 in the variable performance examples shown in FIGS. 290 and 291 is restricted.
Further, at time T14, the production pattern 70a comes to a final stop. Also, at this time, the icon TI is deleted. Further, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the stoppage of fluctuation of the special symbol (the fluctuation effect is not being executed). Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to the stop of variation of the special symbol (the fact that the variation effect is not executed). Time T14 is the time shown in FIG. 293(d).

In addition, although the production control unit 130m was able to normally receive the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m at the timing of time T4 and the timing of time T6, based on the reception of this command, Even when the display control unit 140 and lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command sent from the production control unit 130m (command abnormality has occurred), the command sent from the main control unit 110m (stop command, The same process as in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command) (command abnormality has occurred) is performed.

In addition, at the timing of time T4 and the timing of time T6, the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m, and furthermore, at the timing of time T13, The production control unit 130m was unable to properly receive the stop command (stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m, and thereafter, at a predetermined timing, the production control unit 130m received an opening designation command sent from the main control unit 110m. If it can be received normally, a process is performed at this timing to end the second variable performance that was started in response to the variable display of the second special symbol and to start the opening performance.
Then, the relevant icon TI displayed in the relevant icon display area 70C is changed to one frame's worth without stopping and displaying the temporarily stopped loss mode production pattern 70a and the fluctuatingly displayed special design TZ. The opening image will be displayed without being erased as an animation (actually, the effects other than the opening effect will end).

As described above, in this embodiment, if the performance control unit 130m normally receives a specific signal at a predetermined timing in the normal gaming state, it is possible to execute a specific performance at the specific timing, If the signal is not received normally, execution of a specific effect at a specific timing is restricted and a predetermined effect is executed. Examples of the specific signal include a start command, a stop command, a customer waiting state designation command, and the like. Further, examples of the predetermined effects include a predetermined effect at the time of start, a predetermined effect at the time of stop, a predetermined effect while waiting for customers, and the like.
In this case, when the performance control unit 130m does not normally receive the specific signal at a predetermined timing in the normal gaming state, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game because the performance is not executed, and to improve the interest of the game. can.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives a specific signal at a predetermined timing in the normal gaming state, it is possible to execute a specific display performance regarding the pending icon HI (the icon TI) at the specific timing. If a specific signal is not normally received at a predetermined timing in the normal gaming state, execution of a specific display effect at the specific timing is restricted, and a predetermined display effect regarding the pending icon HI (the icon TI) is executed. Specific display effects include, for example, icon change effects, shift display of a pending icon HI, deletion of the icon TI, and the like. In addition, examples of the predetermined display effects include, for example, a predetermined effect at the time of start and a predetermined effect at the time of stop using the hold icon HI (the icon TI).
In this case, when the performance control unit 130m does not normally receive the specific signal at a predetermined timing in the normal gaming state, the performance based on the hold icon HI (the icon TI) is not executed and the player can be prevented from getting bored with the game. , it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In particular, in this embodiment, in the normal gaming state, the predetermined display effect is a periodic (repeatable) operation display by the hold icon HI (the icon TI). Therefore, the player can recognize the predetermined display effects without missing them, and can improve the interest of the game.
Furthermore, in the normal gaming state, the predetermined display effect is started before the specific timing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game before the predetermined display effect is started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives a specific signal at a predetermined timing in the normal gaming state, it is possible to execute a specific special performance regarding the background image HG, etc. at the specific timing, If the specific signal is not normally received at a predetermined timing in , execution of a specific special effect at the specific timing is restricted, and a predetermined special effect regarding the background image HG etc. is executed. Specific special effects include, for example, displaying the background image HG in accordance with the SP reach effect, changing the background image HG in accordance with a change in the set effect mode, and the like. Furthermore, examples of the predetermined special effects include a predetermined effect at the time of start, a predetermined effect at the time of stop, a predetermined effect while waiting for a customer, etc. using the background image HG.
In this case, when the performance control unit 130m does not normally receive the specific signal at a predetermined timing in the normal gaming state, the performance based on the background image HG is not executed, which prevents the player from getting bored with the game, and increases the interest of the game. can be improved.

In particular, in this embodiment, in the normal gaming state, the predetermined special performance is a periodic (repeatable) action display using the background image HG. Therefore, the player can recognize the predetermined special performance without missing it, and can improve the interest of the game.
Further, the predetermined special performance is started before the specific timing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game before a predetermined special performance is started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a specific signal is normally received at a predetermined timing in the normal gaming state, it is possible to execute a specific symbol production regarding the production symbol 70a at the specific timing, and the specific signal is received at a predetermined timing in the normal gaming state. If the reception is not normal, execution of a specific symbol presentation at a specific timing is restricted, and a predetermined symbol presentation regarding the presentation symbol 70a is executed. Specific symbol effects include, for example, an expansion/contraction movement of the effect pattern 70a when a variable effect is started, a fluctuation movement of the effect pattern 70a when a reach effect is started, a reduction of the effect pattern 70a in an SP reach effect, etc. Can be mentioned. In addition, examples of the predetermined symbol presentation include a predetermined presentation at the time of start and a predetermined presentation at the time of stop using the presentation pattern 70a.
In this case, when the performance control unit 130m does not normally receive the specific signal at a predetermined timing in the normal gaming state, the performance by the performance symbols 70a is not executed and the player can be prevented from getting bored with the game, thereby increasing the interest of the game. can be improved.

In particular, in this embodiment, in the normal gaming state, the predetermined symbol performance is a periodic (repeatable) movement display by the performance symbol 70a. Therefore, the player can recognize the predetermined symbol presentation without missing it, and can improve the interest of the game.
Further, the predetermined symbol presentation is started before the specific timing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game before the predetermined symbol presentation is started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives a specific signal at a predetermined timing in the normal gaming state, it is possible to execute a specific light emitting performance regarding the light emission of the light emitting unit at the specific timing, If the specific signal is not normally received at a predetermined timing, execution of a specific light emitting effect at the specific timing is restricted, and a predetermined light emitting effect regarding light emission of the light emitting unit is executed. Examples of the light emitting section include a lamp LA. In addition, as specific lighting effects, for example, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode according to the SP reach effect, the lamp LA lights up in a light emission mode according to the jackpot judgment result, and during execution of a variable effect. Examples include light emission from the lamp LA in a corresponding light emission mode. Furthermore, examples of the predetermined light emitting effects include a predetermined start effect using the lamp LA, a predetermined stop effect, a predetermined effect while waiting for a customer, and the like.
In this case, when the performance control unit 130m does not normally receive the specific signal at the predetermined timing in the normal gaming state, the performance by the lamp LA is not executed and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game, thereby improving the interest of the game. can be done.

In particular, in this embodiment, in the normal gaming state, the predetermined light emitting effect is started before the specific timing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game before the predetermined light emitting effect is started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command related to a specific variable production after successfully receiving the start command related to the specific variation production (modification of FIG. 285 Cases such as Example 4) exist. Even in this case, a specific sound effect accompanying the stop of the effect pattern 70a is executed as an effect executed in a specific variable effect. Specific sound effects include, for example, the output of a sound effect when the effect pattern 70a stops as shown in FIG. 278(c), the output of a sound effect as the effect pattern 70a stops as shown in FIG. 278(d), etc. It will be done. On the other hand, after the start of the predetermined effect at the time of stop, although the effect pattern 70a is displayed, the specific sound effect is not executed. That is, in the present embodiment, if the production control unit 130m does not normally receive the stop signal at a predetermined timing in the normal gaming state, the production control unit 130m executes a specific sound production in conjunction with the stop of the production symbol 70a before the predetermined timing. However, although the effect pattern 70a is displayed after a predetermined timing, a specific sound effect is not executed. Examples of the stop signal include a stop command.
In this case, the performance after the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the predetermined signal in the normal gaming state is suppressed from becoming excessively conspicuous, and the performance pattern 70a is not displayed and the player is prevented from getting bored with the game. It is possible to suppress this and improve the interest of the game.

Note that while the gaming machine 1 is provided with a start command, it may not be provided with a stop command. In such a case, the production control unit 130m controls the start time of a specific variation production (for example, the variation production shown in FIGS. 278(b) to 278(f) and 279(g) to 279(j)). While the command is normally received, the start command related to the next variable effect (for example, the variable effects shown in FIG. 279(k), FIG. 279(l), FIG. 280(m) to FIG. 280(o)) It may not be possible to receive it normally (in the case of modification 4 in FIG. 285, etc.). Even in this case, certain fluctuations may occur, such as the output of a sound effect accompanying the stop of the production pattern 70a shown in FIG. 278(c) or the output of a sound effect accompanying the stop of the production pattern 70a shown in FIG. A specific sound performance in the performance is executed. On the other hand, the specific sound effect (the output of the sound effect accompanying the stop of the effect pattern 70a shown in FIG. 280(n)) that was supposed to be executed in the next variable effect after the specific variable effect is not executed. Therefore, if the production control unit 130m does not normally receive the start signal (start command) at a predetermined timing in the normal gaming state, the production control unit 130m performs a specific sound production upon stopping the production symbol 70a before the predetermined timing. After a predetermined timing, the production pattern 70a is displayed, but the specific sound production is not executed. That is, the stop signal (stop command) includes a start signal (start command).

Furthermore, as in the fourth modification shown in FIG. 285 and the second modification shown in FIG. Sometimes commands cannot be received correctly. In this case, even if the production control unit 130m successfully receives the stop command for the variable display of the first special symbol, the display of the reservation icon HI of the first special symbol reservation continues, and the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E and the sub-first reservation display 83 maintain the display of "1" (see FIGS. 285(d) and 293(d)). That is, in the present embodiment, the production control unit 130m controls the performance control unit 130m even if the variable display of the first special symbol to be executed next starts after the start of the second variable production based on the variable display of the second special symbol in the normal gaming state. In the case where a new first variable performance is not started, if a predetermined signal is normally received, the hold icon HI based on the first special figure hold can be continuously displayed without being erased. An example of the predetermined signal is a stop command.
In this case, even though the new first variable effect has not started, the hold icon HI based on the first special figure hold is deleted, which can prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable and improve the interest of the game. can be done.

In the present embodiment, the production control unit 130m also controls whether the variable display of the first special symbol is started after the start of the second variable production based on the variable display of the second special symbol in the normal gaming state. When a new first variation performance is not started, second suspension information is not updated when a predetermined signal is normally received. Examples of the second reservation information include the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the sub-first reservation display 83, and the like.
In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the decreased display of the second pending information even though the new first variable performance has not started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, as described above, as in the modification 4 shown in FIG. 285 and the modification 2 shown in FIG. The command at the start of a variable display may not be received correctly. Furthermore, if the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command at the time of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol, the second variation production continues, and the display of the hold icon HI of the first special symbol is suspended. The display of "1" in the first hold icon display area 70B and the sub-first hold display 83 is maintained. Further, after this, for example, when a game ball enters the second starting port 47, a command at the time of starting a new variable display of the second special symbol is transmitted from the main control unit 110m. When the production control unit 130m normally receives this start command, the continued second variation production ends and a new second variation production starts, while the first special figure is put on hold. The display of the hold icon HI is maintained, and the display of "1" is maintained in the first hold icon display area 70B and the sub-first hold display 83.
In other words, the production control unit 130m controls whether the new first special symbol is displayed even if the variable display of the first special symbol that is executed next after the start of the second variable production based on the variable display of the second special symbol in the normal gaming state is started. When a start command is normally received when a variable performance is not started, a reservation icon HI based on first special symbol reservation can be continuously displayed without being erased, and second reservation information is not updated. That is, the predetermined signal also includes the start command.

Moreover, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 130m terminates the specific performance when the predetermined signal is normally received without normally receiving the start time signal during execution of the specific performance in the normal gaming state. Examples of the specific performance include a customer waiting performance and the like. Furthermore, examples of the predetermined signal include a stop command and the like.
In this case, when the performance control section 130m normally receives the predetermined signal, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game because the customer waiting performance does not end, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the performance control unit 130m does not normally receive the start command but normally receives the winning command during execution of the customer waiting performance in the normal gaming state, it ends the customer waiting performance (customer waiting image KMG ), and display the pending icon HI corresponding to the winning prize. In addition, during the execution of the customer waiting performance in the normal gaming state, the performance control unit 130m does not normally receive the start time command and the stop time command related to the fluctuation in which the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, and sends the opening designation command. It may be received normally. In this case, the performance control unit 130m ends the customer waiting performance (hides the customer waiting image KMG) and displays the opening image OPG. Therefore, during the execution of the customer waiting performance in the normal gaming state, the command that the performance control unit 130m needs to receive normally in order to end the customer waiting performance without normally receiving the start command is not received at the time of stopping. The command is not limited to this, and may be a winning command or an opening designation command. That is, the predetermined signal includes a winning command, an opening designation command, and the like.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives a stop command without normally receiving a start command during execution of the customer waiting performance in the normal gaming state, the performance control unit 130m controls the stopped performance symbol 70a. is displayed (see FIG. 287(d)). In addition, the performance control unit 130m may not normally receive the start time command but normally receive the prize winning command during execution of the customer waiting performance in the normal gaming state. In this case, the performance control unit 130m ends the customer waiting performance (hides the customer waiting image KMG), and displays the hold icon HI corresponding to the winning prize and the performance pattern 70a. Furthermore, in this case, the displayed performance symbol 70a is stopped until the hold icon HI is shifted and displayed (until the variable performance is started). That is, in the present embodiment, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives a predetermined signal without normally receiving the start command during execution of a specific performance in the normal gaming state, the performance control unit 130m displays the stopped performance symbol 70a. let Examples of the predetermined signal include a stop command, a winning command, and the like.
In this case, even if the start command cannot be received normally during execution of the customer waiting performance in the normal gaming state, it is possible to suggest that the performance related to the performance symbol 70a has been performed or will be performed in the future. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game due to the lack of performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, if the performance control unit 130m does not normally receive a specific signal at a predetermined timing in the normal gaming state, the production control unit 130m restricts the execution of a specific operation production at a specific timing, but does not limit the performance of the operation means. Predetermined settings can be made accordingly. Examples of the operation means include the cross key 18 and the like. Examples of the specific signal include a customer waiting state designation command and the like. Moreover, as a specific operation effect, for example, displaying a guide image AG, etc. can be mentioned. Furthermore, examples of the predetermined settings include changing the volume, changing the amount of light, and the like.
In this case, when the performance control unit 130m does not normally receive the specific signal, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game due to not being able to make a predetermined setting according to the operation of the operating means, and to improve the interest of the game. Can be done.

In particular, in the present embodiment, in the normal gaming state, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives a start command related to a specific variable display in which an SP reach effect or a winning success effect is executed as a variable effect, the promotion control unit 130m displays a promotion image. SG is displayed (see FIGS. 278(f) and 291(h)), and a performance is executed according to the operation of the performance button 17 (see FIGS. 279(g) and 291(i)). On the other hand, the performance control unit 130m controls the display of the promotion image SG when it does not normally receive the start command related to a specific variable display in which the SP reach performance or the winning success performance is executed as a variable performance in the normal gaming state. Even if the performance button 17 is operated at this time, the performance corresponding to the operation of the performance button 17 is not executed.
In this way, when the production control unit 130m does not normally receive a command in the normal gaming state, by validly accepting or disabling the operation depending on the target operated by the player, a production that feels strange can be prevented. This prevents player's dissatisfaction from accumulating by suppressing the player's operation from being executed and not accepting the player's operation.

In addition, in this embodiment, although the guidance image AG is displayed based on the performance control part 130m normally receiving the customer waiting state designation command, it is not limited to this. The production control unit 130m may display the guide image AG based on receiving the stop command. In this case, if the stop command is not normally received at a predetermined timing in the normal gaming state, the production control unit 130m limits the display of the guide image AG, and adjusts the volume and volume according to the operation of the cross key 18. The amount of light may be changed. Therefore, the display of the guide image AG is restricted if the production control unit 130m does not receive it normally, but the commands that allow predetermined settings according to the operation of the operating means are not limited to the customer waiting state designation command, It may also be a stop command. That is, the specific signal also includes a stop command.
In addition, if the performance control unit 130m does not normally receive a specific signal at a predetermined timing in the normal gaming state, it limits the execution of the operation performance at the specific timing, but the performance control unit 130m restricts the execution of the operation performance at the specific timing, but the predetermined setting is It may be possible. For example, if the performance button 17 is operated while the display of the guide image AG is restricted because the performance control unit 130m does not normally receive a specific signal, the execution rate of the reach performance in the variable performance will change. It may also be possible to customize the effects, such as settings. That is, the operation means also includes the production button 17.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the production control unit 130m limits execution of the ready-to-win production at a specific timing when a new variation production is not started even if a specific variation display is started in the normal gaming state. Examples of the specific fluctuation display include a jackpot fluctuation display and the like.
In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable that the ready-to-win performance is executed even though a new variable performance has not been started in the normal gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a new variable performance is not started even if a jackpot variation display in which the jackpot determination result is a jackpot is started in the normal gaming state, while the jackpot variation display is being executed, the jackpot determination result is The jackpot notification effect that notifies you of a jackpot is not executed (see FIG. 293(d)).
In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable that the jackpot notification performance is executed even though the variable performance corresponding to the jackpot fluctuation display has not started.

In addition, in this embodiment, the variation effects shown in FIGS. 279(k), 279(l), 280(m) to 280(o), and the variations shown in FIGS. 290(b) to 290(d) It has been explained that the performance may be a variable performance in which the three performance symbols 70a temporarily stop in order. Furthermore, in this case, it has been explained that the sound effect accompanying the stop of the highly decorative performance pattern 70a that is the last in the stop order, that is, the highly decorative performance pattern 70a in the middle area, is output. On the other hand, in the variable effects shown in FIGS. 278(b) to 278(f) and FIGS. 279(g) to 279(j), a sound effect is output when the highly decorative effect pattern 70a in the middle area stops. I explained that it would not be possible. That is, in the present embodiment, in the normal gaming state, a variable performance in which a jackpot game is not executed and a reach effect is not executed is more effective than a variable effect in which a jackpot game is not executed and a specific effect is executed. It is easy to perform sound effects. Examples of the specific performance include SP reach performance and the like. Moreover, as a specific sound effect, for example, the output of a sound accompanying the stop of the effect pattern 70a which is the last in the stop order of the three effect patterns 70a with high decorativeness.
In this case, even if the result of the jackpot determination is a loss and it is a variable performance in which no reach performance is performed, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game by the extent that a specific sound performance is likely to be performed, and improve the interest of the game. can be done.

In addition, in this embodiment, in a variable production in which a special game is not executed as a result of the determination and a specific production is executed, a specific sound production is not executed (0%), and a special game is not executed as a result of the determination. Furthermore, although it has been explained that the specific sound production is always executed (100%) in the variable production in which the specific production is not executed, the present invention is not limited to this.
A variable performance in which a special game is not performed and a specific performance is not performed as a result of the determination is better than a variable performance in which a special game is not performed as a result of the determination and a specific performance is performed. If it is easy to do so, a specific sound production may be executed in a variable production in which a special game is not executed as a result of the determination and a specific production is executed, or a specific sound production may be executed in a variable production in which a special game is not executed as a result of the determination and a specific production is performed. There is no need for a specific sound performance to be performed in a variable performance in which a specific sound performance is not performed. In addition, ``a variable performance in which a special game is not performed as a result of the determination and a specific performance is not performed is better than a variable performance in which a special game is not performed as a result of the determination and a specific performance is performed. "The effect is likely to be executed" means that in variable effects where a special game is not executed as a result of the judgment and a specific effect is executed, a specific sound effect is not executed (0%), and a special game is not executed as a result of the judgment. Variable effects that are not executed and specific effects are not executed include that specific sound effects are always executed (100%).

(Example of variable performance)
FIGS. 295 and 296 are diagrams showing examples of variable effects executed in the normal gaming state.
Next, an example of a variable performance executed by the performance control unit 130m will be described using FIGS. 295 and 296. In the examples of variable effects shown in FIGS. 295 and 296, variable effects are performed twice in the normal gaming state. The first variable performance of these two variable performances is a variable performance based on a loss in the jackpot determination result and winning in the first starting opening 45, and is a variable performance in which a ready-to-win performance is not executed. Moreover, the second variable presentation of the two variable presentations is a variable presentation based on the jackpot determination result being a jackpot and winning in the second starting opening 47.

As shown in FIG. 295(a), as the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are permanently stopped in the losing mode "285". Moreover, both the first lamp pattern LZ and the second lamp pattern LZ are in a losing state (unlit) and have stopped. Further, one hold icon HI is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B. This hold icon HI is performing a periodic rotation operation (presentation operation). Further, the sub-first reservation display 83 displays "1" which is the first special figure reservation number, and the sub-second reservation display 84 displays "0" which is the second special figure reservation number. has been done. Further, "1" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second special figure reservation number display area 70F. Further, a background image HG, a mode identification image MSG, and a variation number identification image HSG corresponding to the production mode A are displayed. Further, the lamp LA emits light in a light emitting manner corresponding to the stoppage of fluctuation of the special symbol (the fluctuation performance is not executed). Further, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to the stoppage of fluctuation of the special symbol (the fact that the fluctuation effect is not executed).

Next, as the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", a loss fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0" and a process is performed to start the first variable production.
In this case, as shown in FIG. 295(b), the number of reserved first special symbols displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E changes from "1" in the specific update mode. The hold icon HI displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B is reduced to "0" and is shifted and displayed as an animation of 20 frames toward the icon display area 70C and displayed as the icon TI. Further, the icon TI is performing a periodic rotation operation (preparation operation). In addition, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation). Further, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the execution of the variable effect. Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 is outputting a sound corresponding to the execution of the variable effect.

In addition, at this time, the second starting port 47 (movable When a game ball enters the second starting port 47 due to reasons such as the ball biting that occurred in the member 48) being resolved, the second special symbol reservation number stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m is changed to " Increases from 0 to 1. When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (the first special figure pending number designation command as the winning signal, the pre-reading designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m memorizes (recognizes) ) The number of reserved second special drawings changes from "0" to "1".
At this time, the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F is increased and displayed from "0" to "1" in a specific update mode, Since the second pending icon display area 70D is not displayed, the pending icon HI is not additionally displayed (increased display), and the winning sound based on the current winning is a winning to the second starting port 47 during the normal gaming state. will not be output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 295(c), "814", which is the effect pattern 70a on the left center right, temporarily stops. At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). Moreover, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound effect accompanying the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a.

Then, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed.
In this case, as shown in FIG. 295(d), the background image HG continues to be played in a loop, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, the special symbol TZ comes to a permanent stop in the same losing mode as the production pattern 70a "814", and the first lamp pattern LZ is in a losing mode (lights out). Stop the book. Also, at this time, the display content of the variation number identification image HSG is updated to "101GAME". Further, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the stoppage of fluctuation of the special symbol (the fluctuation effect is not being executed). Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to the stop of variation of the special symbol (the fact that the variation effect is not executed).

In addition, the above-mentioned fluctuating performance (the fluctuating performance shown in FIGS. 295(b) to 295(d)) may be a fluctuating performance in which the three performance symbols 70a temporarily stop in order, or the three performance symbols 70a may temporarily stop. It may also be a fluctuating effect in which the characters temporarily stop all at once.
When the three performance symbols 70a temporarily stop in sequence, first, when the performance symbol 70a in the left area temporarily stops, the sound effect of the temporary stop is output, and then the performance pattern in the right area When 70a temporarily stops, a sound effect indicating that it has temporarily stopped is output, and further thereafter, when the production pattern 70a in the middle area temporarily stops, a sound effect indicating that it has temporarily stopped is output. In addition, when the three performance symbols 70a come to a permanent stop after the temporary stop, the sound associated with the stop of the performance symbols 70a is not output.
In addition, in the case of a variable performance in which the three performance symbols 70a temporarily stop at the same time, when the three performance symbols 70a temporarily stop at the same time, the sound effect of the temporary stop of the three performance symbols 70a is output once. be done. In addition, when the three performance symbols 70a come to a permanent stop after the temporary stop, the sound associated with the stop of the performance symbols 70a is not output.
Further, this variable performance may be a variable performance in which the three performance symbols 70a are permanently stopped all at once without going through a temporary stop. In this case, when the three performance symbols 70a come to a real stop all at once, a sound effect accompanying the real stop is output.

Next, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", and the second special symbol is Fluctuation display starts. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (second special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0" and a process for starting a variable production is performed.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 295(e), the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F changes from "1" in the specific update mode. The value will be decreased to "0" and displayed. In addition, since the hold icon HI is not displayed, the icon TI is displayed as a 10-frame animation in the icon display area 70C without shifting display (reducing display) of the hold icon HI. Further, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the second lamp pattern LZ is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation). Further, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the execution of the variable effect. Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to the execution of the variable effect.
Also, at this time, an icon change effect is executed. In the icon change effect, the icon TI changes from white to red. Also, at this time, an effect is executed in which the icon TI moves around, and a changing action image HAG is displayed in the area where the icon moves around. In addition, the red icon TI continues its periodic rotational movement (presentation movement). Also, at this time, the zone effect is started, and the zone effect image ZEG is displayed on the upper side of the first image display device 70. The zone effect image ZEG is displayed in blue. Further, the zone effect image ZEG shows the text "ZONE" scrolled left and right.

Next, as shown in FIG. 295(f), the "7" effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped in the left area and the right area, and the normal reach effect is executed. At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). Further, at this time, the lamp LA continues to emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the execution of the variable effect. Moreover, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound effect accompanying the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a. It also outputs a sound according to the normal reach performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 296(g), the effect patterns 70a in the left area and the right area are displayed in a reduced size at the upper left and right corners of the first image display device 70 in a display mode with low decorativeness, and SP The reach performance begins. Further, the icon TI becomes hidden with the start of the SP reach effect. Also, at this time, the display color of the zone effect image ZEG changes from blue to red. Also, at this time, a background image HG corresponding to the SP reach effect is displayed. Moreover, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode according to the SP reach performance. Moreover, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound according to the SP reach performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 296(h), the effective period of the effect button 17 (single hit 5 seconds) occurs. At this time, an operation promotion image SG is displayed. The operation promotion image SG displays the text "Press!", an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 in a protruding state, and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the validity period. Also, although not shown, the effect button 17 emits red light at this time. Moreover, at this time, the effect pattern 70a on the right in the left is displayed at the upper left corner of the first image display device 70 in a further reduced form.

Thereafter, when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective period of the effect button 17 has elapsed, as shown in FIG. The first image display device 70 moves to the maximum operation position located in front of the first image display device 70, and the success effect image SEF is displayed on the first image display device 70. Although not shown, a strong vibration effect (decision success vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for 4 seconds and then strongly vibrated for 5 seconds with a 1 second interval in between. . Further, the game temporarily stops when three "7" performance symbols 70a are aligned at the upper left of the screen. Further, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the jackpot determination result being a jackpot. Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to the jackpot determination result being a jackpot. Note that at this time, the sound accompanying the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a is not output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 296(j), the effect pattern 70a returns to the display mode including the character image CG, etc., and enters a temporarily stopped state. On the other hand, the icon TI is not redisplayed. Further, a strong vibration performance (big hit confirmation vibration performance) is started in which the performance button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second without the validity period of the performance button 17. Also, at this time, a background image HG corresponding to the jackpot determination result being a jackpot is displayed. Further, at this time, the lamp LA continues to emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the jackpot determination result being a jackpot. Moreover, the audio output device 9 continues to output the sound in accordance with the jackpot determination result being a jackpot. Note that at this time, the sound accompanying the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a is not output.

Thereafter, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the second special figure starts in response to the fluctuating display of the second special symbol. Processing to end the variable performance is performed.
At this time, as shown in FIG. 296(k), the strong vibration performance is completed and the performance symbol 70a is fully stopped at "777", and the special symbol TZ is also fully stopped at "777". Further, the first lamp pattern LZ is stopped in a jackpot mode (lit). In addition, the lamp LA continues to emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the jackpot determination result being a jackpot. Moreover, the audio output device 9 continues to output the sound in accordance with the jackpot determination result being a jackpot.
Note that when the performance symbol 70a that notifies the jackpot comes to a final stop, the sound output device 9 may not output the sound.

Thereafter, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, a jackpot game (special game) is started. When the performance control unit 130m receives the opening designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for starting the opening performance of the jackpot game is performed.
At this time, the opening image OPG is displayed as shown in FIG. 296(l). In addition, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E and the second special figure reservation number displayed in the second special figure reservation number display area 70F maintain "0". do. Further, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode according to the opening effect. Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs sound according to the opening performance.

(Modification 1)
FIG. 297 is a diagram showing a modification (modification 1) of the variation effect example explained using FIGS. 295 and 296.
Next, a modification example (modification example 1) of the variation effect example described using FIGS. 295 and 296 will be described using FIG. 297. Modification 1 is an example of a performance when the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command. In this modification example 1, when the variable display of the special symbol is performed twice as described using FIGS. 295 and 296, the start signal is transmitted from the main control unit 110m at the timing when the second variable display is started. This is an example of a performance performed when the time command is not normally received by the performance control unit 130m.

First, the same effect as that described using FIGS. 295(a) to 295(c) is performed, and as shown in FIG. 297(a), the effect pattern 70a is in the losing mode "814" Stop. FIG. 297(a) is the same state as FIG. 295(d).
Next, as the number of reserved second special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", a loss fluctuation display of the second special symbols is started. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (2nd special symbol pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. If it is not possible (command abnormality has occurred), the second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "1", and the process of starting the second variable production is not performed.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 297(b), the second lamp pattern LZ continues to be in a permanently stopped state. Moreover, the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F maintains "1". In addition, based on the fact that the start command cannot be received normally, the production control unit 130m uses the production pattern 70a, the zone effect image ZEG, the background image HG, the lamp LA, and the audio output device 9 to create a predetermined production at the start time. Execute.
While the predetermined performance is being executed at the start, the performance pattern 70a periodically moves up and down. Further, while the predetermined start effect is being executed, the zone effect image ZEG and the background image HG are displayed in a manner corresponding to the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command. Further, while the predetermined effect at the time of start is being executed, the lamp LA emits light in a light emitting manner corresponding to the fact that the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command at the time of start. Further, while the predetermined start effect is being executed, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound in response to the fact that the effect control section 130m has not been able to properly receive the start command. On the other hand, the hold icon HI and the icon TI are not displayed, and the predetermined effect at the time of start by the hold icon HI and the icon TI is not executed.

Thereafter, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the predetermined production at the start is performed.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 297(c), the performance symbol 70a that has been moving up and down comes to a final stop at the stop position. More specifically, "814", which is the performance symbol 70a that was fully stopped in the previous variable performance, is fully stopped again. Furthermore, the zone effect image ZEG is hidden. Furthermore, the background image HG corresponding to the production mode A is displayed again. Further, the display content of the variation number identification image HSG is updated to "102 GAME". Further, the lamp LA emits light in a light emitting manner according to the stoppage of fluctuation of the special symbol (the fluctuation performance is not executed). Further, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to the stoppage of variation of the special symbol (the fact that the variation effect is not executed). That is, the predetermined performance at the start ends.
On the other hand, the sound accompanying the stop of the production pattern 70a is not output. In addition, the second lamp pattern LZ continues to be in a stopped state in a losing manner. Moreover, the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F maintains "1".

Thereafter, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, a jackpot game (special game) is started. When the performance control unit 130m receives the opening designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for starting the opening performance of the jackpot game is performed.
In this case, the opening image OPG is displayed as shown in FIG. 297(d). Further, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode according to the opening effect. Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs sound according to the opening performance. Further, the second special figure reservation number displayed in the second special figure reservation number display area 70F maintains "1". Further, the sub-second reservation display 84 continues to display "1" as the second special figure reservation number.

Here, "1" which is the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F is based on the new winning in the second starting opening 47. The winning command (winning signal) is normally received, or the start command based on the start of the variable display of the 2nd special symbol (2nd special symbol pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol as the start signal) This is maintained until the effect control unit 130m receives the figure variation pattern designation command). In other words, a new winning command (winning signal) based on a winning in the first start opening 45, a starting command based on the start of the variable display of the first special symbol (first special symbol pending number as a starting signal), etc. Even if the performance control unit 130m receives a specified command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command), it is displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special symbol reservation number display area 70F. The number of second special drawings reserved is maintained at "1".

(Modification 2)
FIG. 298 is a diagram showing another modification (modification 2) of the variation effect example explained using FIGS. 295 and 296.
Next, using FIG. 298, another modification (modification 2) of the variation effect example described using FIGS. 295 and 296 will be described. Modification 2 is an example of a performance when the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command. In this modification example 2, when the special symbol is displayed twice as described with reference to FIGS. 295 and 296, a stop signal is transmitted from the main control unit 110m at the timing when the first variable display is stopped. This is an example of a production performed when the production control unit 130m does not normally receive the hour command and the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at the timing when the second variable display is started.

First, by performing the same effect as that described using FIGS. 295(a) and 295(b), the effect pattern 70a is tentatively displayed in the losing mode "814" as shown in FIG. 298(a). It's stopped. FIG. 298(a) is the same state as FIG. 295(c).
Thereafter, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (a command error has occurred), the variable production will be terminated. processing will not be performed.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 298(b), the variable display of the first lamp pattern LZ continues. Furthermore, based on the fact that the command at stop cannot be received normally, the production control unit 130m uses the production pattern 70a, the icon TI, the background image HG, the lamp LA, and the audio output device 9 to perform a predetermined production at the time of stop. Execute.
While the predetermined effect is being executed at the time of stop, the effect pattern 70a periodically moves left and right, and the icon TI periodically moves up and down. Further, while the predetermined effect at stop is being executed, the background image HG is displayed in a manner corresponding to the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command at stop. Further, while the predetermined effect at the time of stop is being executed, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the fact that the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command at the time of stop. Further, while the predetermined effect at the time of stop is being executed, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound in response to the fact that the effect control section 130m has not been able to normally receive the command at the time of stop.

Next, as the second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", the jackpot fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (2nd special symbol pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. If it is not possible (command abnormality has occurred), the second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "1", and the process of starting the second variable production is not performed.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 298(c), the first lamp pattern LZ continues to be displayed in a variable manner, and the second lamp pattern LZ continues to be in a permanently stopped state. Moreover, the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F maintains "1". In addition, based on the fact that the start command cannot be received normally, the production control unit 130m uses the production pattern 70a, the icon TI, the zone effect image ZEG, the background image HG, the lamp LA, and the audio output device 9, A predetermined effect is executed at the start.
While the predetermined performance is being executed at the start, the performance pattern 70a periodically moves up and down, and the icon TI periodically moves left and right. Further, while the predetermined start effect is being executed, the zone effect image ZEG and the background image HG are displayed in a manner corresponding to the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command. Further, while the predetermined effect at the time of start is being executed, the lamp LA emits light in a light emitting manner corresponding to the fact that the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command at the time of start. Further, while the predetermined start effect is being executed, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound in response to the fact that the effect control section 130m has not been able to properly receive the start command.

Thereafter, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the predetermined production at the start is performed.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 298(d), the first lamp pattern LZ comes to a final stop in a losing manner. In addition, the effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ that have been moving up and down come to a stop in the losing mode "814". Furthermore, the icon TI is erased with one frame of non-animation. Furthermore, the zone effect image ZEG is hidden. Furthermore, the background image HG corresponding to the production mode A is displayed again. Further, the display content of the variation number identification image HSG is updated to "101GAME". Further, the lamp LA emits light in a light emitting manner corresponding to the stoppage of fluctuation of the special symbol (the fluctuation performance is not executed). Further, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to the stoppage of variation of the special symbol (the fact that the variation effect is not executed). That is, the predetermined performance at the start ends.
On the other hand, the sound accompanying the stop of the production pattern 70a is not output. In addition, the second lamp pattern LZ continues to be in a stopped state in a losing manner. Moreover, the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F maintains "1".

Thereafter, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, a jackpot game (special game) is started. When the performance control unit 130m receives the opening designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing to start the opening performance of the jackpot game is performed.
At this time, the opening image OPG is displayed as shown in FIG. 298(e). Further, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode according to the opening effect. Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs sound according to the opening performance. Moreover, the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F maintains "1".

Here, "1" which is the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F is based on the new winning in the second starting opening 47. The winning command (winning signal) is normally received, or the start command based on the start of the variable display of the 2nd special symbol (2nd special symbol pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol as the start signal) This is maintained until the effect control unit 130m receives the figure variation pattern designation command). In other words, a new winning command (winning signal) based on a winning in the first start opening 45, a starting command based on the start of the variable display of the first special symbol (first special symbol pending number as a starting signal), etc. Even if the performance control unit 130m receives a specified command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command), it is displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special symbol reservation number display area 70F. The number of second special drawings reserved is maintained at "1".

Furthermore, the relationship between the performance execution timing in the variable performance example shown in FIGS. 295 and 296 and the performance execution timing in the modification example 1 shown in FIG. 297, and the relationship between the performance execution timing in the variable performance example shown in FIGS. 295 and 296 The relationship between the execution timing and the execution timing of the effect in Modification Example 2 shown in FIG. 298, the effects restricted in Modification Example 1 shown in FIG. 297, and the effects restricted in Modification Example 2 shown in FIG. 298 are as follows. , the relationship between the performance execution timing in the variable performance examples shown in FIGS. 290 and 291 and the performance execution timing in modification example 1 shown in FIG. 292 (see FIG. 294), and the fluctuation performance shown in FIGS. 290 and 291 The relationship between the performance execution timing in the example and the performance execution timing in modification example 2 shown in FIG. 293, the performance limited in modification example 1 shown in FIG. 292, and the performance restricted in modification example 2 shown in FIG. 293. The production is basically the same.
Specifically, in the above explanation using FIG. 294, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub-first reservation display 83, the first special figure reservation number The display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, and the first starting port 45 are each controlled by the second special symbol reservation number, the second special symbol reservation number designation command, the second special symbol, and the sub-number. 2 reservation display 84, 2nd special figure reservation number display area 70F, 2nd reservation icon display area 70D, 2nd lamp pattern LZ, and 2nd starting port 47. In addition, in the explanation described above using FIG. 294, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special symbol, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure reservation number display area 70F , the second reservation icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47, respectively, the first special symbol reservation number, the first special symbol reservation number designation command, the first special symbol, and the sub-first reservation display. 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, and the first starting port 45. However, in the normal game state, since the hold icon HI based on the second special figure hold is not displayed, the performance by the hold icon HI based on the second special figure hold is not executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the inner performance symbol 70a temporarily stops in the variable performance in the normal game state where the SP reach performance is executed, when the performance symbol 70a temporarily stops before the transition image IG is displayed. (See FIG. 279(g)) and when the effect pattern 70a temporarily stops after the transition image IG is displayed (See FIG. 279(i)). Although described above, the invention is not limited thereto.
For example, when the inner performance symbol 70a temporarily stops in a variable performance in the normal game state where the SP reach performance is executed, when the performance symbol 70a temporarily stops before the transition image IG is displayed (FIG. 279(g) )), a temporary stop sound effect is output, while when the production pattern 70a temporarily stops after the transition image IG is displayed (see FIG. 279(i)), a sound accompanying the temporary stop is output. You may choose not to do so.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the performance symbol 70a that notifies a jackpot temporarily stops in the normal gaming state, when the performance symbol 70a with low decorativeness temporarily stops (FIG. 291(i), FIG. 296(i) )) and when the highly decorative performance pattern 70a temporarily stops (see FIGS. 291(j) and 296(j)), it has been explained that no sound is output when the highly decorative effect pattern 70a temporarily stops. , but not limited to.
For example, in the normal game state, when a low-decoration performance pattern 70a temporarily stops (see FIGS. 291(i) and 296(i)), no sound is output as a result of the temporary stop; When the performance symbol 70a temporarily stops (see FIGS. 291(j) and 296(j)), a temporary stopping sound effect may be output.

(Example of variable performance)
FIGS. 299 to 301 are diagrams showing examples of variable effects executed in a specific gaming state.
Next, an example of a variable performance executed by the performance control unit 130m will be described using FIGS. 299 to 301. In the examples of variable effects shown in FIGS. 299 to 301, variable effects are performed three times in a specific game state. The first variable presentation among these three variable presentations is a variable presentation in which the jackpot judgment result is a loss and is based on winning in the first starting opening 45, and is a variable presentation in which an SP reach effect is executed. . In addition, the second and third variable presentations among the three variable presentations are variable presentations based on the loss of the jackpot judgment result and winning in the second starting opening 47, and the reach presentation is executed. It is a fluctuating performance that does not occur.

As shown in FIG. 299(a), as the special symbols are stopped and displayed, the performance symbols 70a and the special symbols TZ are permanently stopped in the losing mode "285" in the first image display device 70. The effect pattern 70a on the left-center right side being displayed at this time is displayed in a display mode with low decorativeness. In addition, both the first lamp pattern LZ and the second lamp pattern LZ are in a losing state (extinguished) and are permanently stopped. Further, the sub-first reservation display 83 displays "1" which is the first special figure reservation number, and the sub-second reservation display 84 displays "0" which is the second special figure reservation number. has been done. That is, in a specific gaming state, when the player hits the ball to the left, a game ball enters the first starting hole 45, or the first game ball enters the first starting slot 45 during the normal gaming state before entering the specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, variable probability gaming state). Due to reasons such as a game ball hitting the starting slot 45, the first special drawing is on hold. Further, "1" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

Further, in this variable performance example, performance mode D is set in the specific game state, and a background image HG corresponding to performance mode D is displayed. Further, a right-hand hitting image MU, a mode identification image MSG, and a remaining number of times image ZKG are displayed. The mode identification image MSG shows the text "Mode D" that identifies that the set production mode is production mode D. Further, the remaining number of times image ZKG is an image showing the remaining number of fluctuations in a specific gaming state. In the illustrated example, the text "90 remaining" indicating that the remaining number of fluctuations in the specific gaming state is 90 is displayed as the remaining number of times image ZKG. The remaining number of times image ZKG is displayed on a layer of the first image display device 70 on the rear side of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ. Further, the lamp LA emits light in a light emitting manner corresponding to the stoppage of fluctuation of the special symbol (the fluctuation performance is not executed). Further, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to the stoppage of fluctuation of the special symbol (the fact that the fluctuation effect is not executed).

It should be noted that in the normal game state and the specific game state, the light emitting mode of the lamp LA in response to the stoppage of variation of the special symbols (not executing the variation performance) may be the same or may be different. Furthermore, the output sound of the audio output device 9 in response to the stoppage of fluctuation of the special symbol (not executing the fluctuation performance) may be the same or different between the normal game state and the specific game state.

Next, as the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", a loss fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0" and a process is performed to start the first variable production.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 299(b), the first special figure pending number displayed in the sub-first pending display 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E changes from "1" in the specific update mode. The icon TI is reduced to "0" and displayed as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation). Further, the display content of the remaining number of times image ZKG is updated to "89 remaining". Further, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the execution of the variable effect. Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 is outputting a sound corresponding to the execution of the variable effect.
Furthermore, when the game ball enters the second starting port 47, the number of reserved second special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "0" to "1". When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (second special figure pending number designation command as a winning signal, pre-reading designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m memorizes (recognizes) ) The number of reserved second special drawings changes from "0" to "1". At this time, the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F is increased from "0" to "1" in a specific update mode, and the second The hold icon HI is additionally displayed (increased display) on the first display section 70D1 of the hold icon display area 70D. Further, the icon TI and the pending icon HI are performing a periodic rotation operation (preparation operation) with their operation displays synchronized.

Note that the timing at which the display content of the remaining number of times image ZKG is updated is not limited to when the variable performance is started. In other words, the trigger for updating the display content of the remaining number of times image ZKG is not limited to the presentation control unit 130m receiving the start time command. For example, the display content of the remaining number of times image ZKG may be updated when the variable effect ends. In other words, the display content of the remaining number of times image ZKG may be updated when the effect control unit 130m receives a stop command.
Further, the light emission mode of the lamp LA during execution of the variable performance may be the same or different between the normal game state and the specific game state. Further, the output sound of the audio output device 9 during execution of the variable performance may be the same or different between the normal game state and the specific game state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 299(c), the effect symbol 70a of "5" is temporarily stopped in the left area. At this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound effect accompanying the temporary stop of the production symbol 70a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 299(d), the "5" effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped in the right area and the normal reach effect is executed. At this time, the effect pattern 70a slightly swings (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position. Also, at this time, an icon change effect is executed. In the icon change effect, the icon TI changes from white to blue. Also, at this time, an effect is executed in which the icon TI moves around, and a changing action image HAG is displayed in the area where the icon moves around. In addition, the blue icon TI continues its periodic rotational movement (direction movement). Further, at this time, the lamp LA continues to emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the execution of the variable effect. Moreover, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound according to the normal reach performance. Note that the output sound of the audio output device 9 according to the normal reach effect may be the same or different between the normal game state and the specific game state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 299(e), the performance symbols 70a in the left and right areas are reduced and displayed in the upper left and right corners of the first image display device 70, and the SP ready-to-reach performance is started. Further, with the start of the SP ready-to-reach effect, the icon TI and the pending icon HI are hidden. Also, at this time, the zone effect is started, and the zone effect image ZEG is displayed on the upper side of the first image display device 70. The illustrated example zone effect image ZEG is displayed in blue. Further, the zone effect image ZEG shows the text "ZONE" scrolled left and right. Also, at this time, a background image HG corresponding to the SP reach effect is displayed. Moreover, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode according to the SP reach performance. Moreover, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound according to the SP reach performance.

Note that in the normal game state and the specific game state, the moving image displayed as the background image HG according to the SP reach effect may be the same or different. Furthermore, the display content of the zone effect image ZEG may be the same or different between the normal gaming state and the specific gaming state. Furthermore, the light emitting mode of the lamp LA depending on the SP reach effect may be the same or different between the normal gaming state and the specific gaming state. Moreover, the output sound of the audio output device 9 according to the SP reach performance may be the same or different between the normal gaming state and the specific gaming state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 299(f), the effective period of the effect button 17 (single hit 3 seconds) occurs. At this time, an operation promotion image SG is displayed. The operation promotion image SG displays the text "Press!", an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17, and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the validity period. Also, although not shown, the effect button 17 emits white light at this time. Moreover, at this time, the effect pattern 70a on the right in the left is displayed at the upper left corner of the first image display device 70 in a further reduced form.
Thereafter, when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective period of the effect button 17 has elapsed, the effect pattern 70a of "6" is temporarily stopped in the middle area, as shown in FIG. 300(g). At this time, the sound associated with the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a is not output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 300(h), a transition image IG is displayed. Further, at this time, the lamp LA switches from a light emission mode corresponding to the SP ready-to-reach effect to a light emission mode corresponding to the execution of the variable effect. Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs sound effects accompanying the display of the transition image IG.
Next, as shown in FIG. 300(i), the performance symbols 70a in the left and right areas are displayed in an enlarged manner. At this time, the effect pattern 70a on the left-center right side is temporarily stopped and performs a fluctuating motion (presentation motion). Also, at this time, the icon TI and the pending icon HI are displayed again. The icon TI and the pending icon HI perform a periodic rotational motion (actual performance motion) in a state where the motion display is synchronized. Also, at this time, the mode identification image MSG and the remaining number of times image ZKG are displayed again. Also, at this time, a background image HG corresponding to the production mode D is displayed. Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 again outputs a sound corresponding to the execution of the variable effect. Note that the sound accompanying the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a is not output.

Then, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed.
At this time, as shown in FIG. 300(j), the background image HG continues to be played in a loop, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, the special symbol TZ comes to a permanent stop in the same losing mode as the production pattern 70a, "565", and the first lamp pattern LZ is in a losing mode (lights out). Stop the book. Further, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the stoppage of fluctuation of the special symbol (the fluctuation performance is not executed). Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to the stop of variation of the special symbol (the fact that the variation effect is not executed).

Next, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", and the second special symbol is Fluctuation display starts. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (second special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0" and a process for starting a variable production is performed.
In this case, as shown in FIG. 300(k), the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F changes from "1" in the specific update mode. The hold icon HI displayed in the second hold icon display area 70D is reduced to "0" and is shifted and displayed as an animation of 20 frames toward the icon display area 70C and displayed as the icon TI. The icon TI is performing a periodic rotation motion (rendering motion). Further, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the second lamp pattern LZ is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation). Further, the display content of the remaining number of times image ZKG is updated to "88 remaining". Further, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the execution of the variable effect. Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to the execution of the variable effect.

Then, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed.
In this case, as shown in FIG. 300(l), the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ come to a permanent stop in the losing mode "814", and the second lamp symbol LZ comes to a permanent stop in the losing mode (extinguished). Further, although the background image HG continues to be played in a loop, the icon TI is erased as 10 frames of animation. Further, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the stoppage of fluctuation of the special symbol (the fluctuation performance is not executed). Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound accompanying the stop of the production symbol 70a. In addition, a sound corresponding to the stoppage of the variation of the special symbol (the fact that the variation effect is not executed) is output.

Note that the fluctuating effects shown in FIGS. 300(k) and 300(l) may be variable effects in which the three effect symbols 70a temporarily stop in order, or may be variable effects in which the three effect symbols 70a stop all at once. It may be a performance.
When the three performance symbols 70a temporarily stop in sequence, first, when the performance symbol 70a in the left area temporarily stops, the sound effect of the temporary stop is output, and then the performance pattern in the right area When 70a temporarily stops, a sound effect indicating that it has temporarily stopped is output, and further thereafter, when the production pattern 70a in the middle area temporarily stops, a sound effect indicating that it has temporarily stopped is output.
Further, in the case of a variable performance in which the three performance symbols 70a stop all at once, when the three performance symbols 70a stop simultaneously, a sound effect indicating that the three performance symbols 70a have stopped is output. Even in this case, the output sound effects are regarded as sound effects accompanying the stop of the performance symbols 70a in the left region, the performance symbols 70a in the middle region, and the performance symbols 70a in the right region. Moreover, the stop performed by the three performance symbols 70a at the same time may be a temporary stop or a permanent stop. If the stop that the three production symbols 70a perform at once is a temporary stop, a sound effect accompanying this temporary stop is output, and when the three production symbols 70a make a permanent stop after that, the sound accompanying the stop of the production symbol 70a is output. Not done. Furthermore, if the stop performed by the three production symbols 70a at the same time is the final stop (if the three production symbols 70a make the final stop all at once without going through a temporary stop), a sound effect accompanying this final stop is output. .

After that, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, the game enters a customer waiting state (game waiting state). When the performance control unit 130m receives the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process of setting a standby timer until the customer waiting demonstration performance is started is performed.
In this case, the guide image AG is displayed as shown in FIG. 301(m).

When the upper button of the cross key 18 is operated in this state, the volume of the sound output from the audio output device 9 is changed to a higher volume than before the upper button was operated, as shown in FIG. 301(n). , a volume value image OG showing the changed volume value is displayed. Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs the sound corresponding to the operation of the upper button of the cross key 18 at the changed volume. If a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds) passes without the cross key 18 being operated in this state, the volume value image OG is erased and the guide image AG shown in FIG. 301(m) is displayed again.

When the left button of the cross key 18 is operated in this state, the light intensity of the lamp LA is changed to a lower light intensity than before the left button was operated, as shown in FIG. A light amount value image KG indicating the value is displayed. Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to the operation of the left button of the cross key 18. If a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds) passes without the cross key 18 being operated in this state, the light amount value image KG is erased and the guide image AG shown in FIG. 301(m) is displayed again.

Furthermore, if the demonstration waiting time has elapsed since the display of the guide image AG started (after the waiting timer was set), the customer waiting demonstration image KMG is displayed as shown in FIG. 301(p). . Further, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the customer waiting demonstration effect. Moreover, at this time, the audio output device 9 does not output sound.

Next, when a game ball enters the second starting port 47, the second special symbol reservation number (U2) increases from "0" to "1". In this case, in the first image display device 70, the second special figure reservation number displayed in the second special figure reservation number display area 70F changes from "0" to "1", and the second reservation icon display area A hold icon HI is displayed on 70D.
Next, the variable display of the second special symbol is started as the second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (second special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0" and a process is performed to start the variable production.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 301(q), the customer waiting demonstration effect ends and the customer waiting demonstration image KMG is hidden. In addition, the second special figure pending number displayed on the sub second pending display 84 and the second special figure pending number display area 70F is decreased from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode, and the second reserved number is displayed as The pending icon HI displayed in the icon display area 70D is shifted and displayed as an animation of 20 frames toward the icon display area 70C and displayed as the icon TI. Further, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the second lamp pattern LZ is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation). Further, the display content of the remaining number of times image ZKG is updated to "87 remaining". Further, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the execution of the variable effect. Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to the execution of the variable effect.

Then, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed.
In this case, as shown in FIG. 301(r), the background image HG continues to be played in a loop, but the icon TI is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the production pattern 70a "365" comes to a final stop at the stop position, the special symbol TZ makes a final stop in the same losing mode as the production symbol 70a, "365", and the second lamp pattern LZ comes to a final stop in the losing mode (lights out). do. Further, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the stoppage of fluctuation of the special symbol (the fluctuation performance is not executed). Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound effect accompanying the stop of the production symbol 70a. In addition, a sound corresponding to the stoppage of the variation of the special symbol (the fact that the variation effect is not executed) is output.

(Modification 1)
FIG. 302 is a diagram showing a modification (modification 1) of the variation effect example described using FIGS. 299 to 301.
Next, a modification example (modification example 1) of the variation effect example described using FIGS. 299 to 301 will be described using FIG. 302. Modification 1 is an example of a performance when the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command. In this modification example 1, when the variable display of the special symbol is performed three times as explained using FIGS. This is an example of a performance performed when the time command is not normally received by the performance control unit 130m.

As shown in FIG. 302(a), as the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the performance symbol 70a is at a full stop. Note that FIG. 302(a) is in the same state as that in FIG. 299(a).
Next, as the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", a loss fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. If it is not possible (command abnormality has occurred), the first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "1", and the process of starting the first variable production is not performed.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 302(b), the first lamp pattern LZ continues to be in a permanently stopped state. Further, the first special symbol reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E maintains "1". In addition, based on the fact that the start command cannot be received normally, the production control unit 130m uses the production pattern 70a, the zone effect image ZEG, the background image HG, the lamp LA, and the audio output device 9 to create a predetermined production at the start time. Execute.
While the predetermined performance is being executed at the start, the performance pattern 70a periodically moves up and down. Further, while the predetermined start effect is being executed, the zone effect image ZEG and the background image HG are displayed in a manner corresponding to the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command. Further, while the predetermined effect at the time of start is being executed, the lamp LA emits light in a light emitting manner corresponding to the fact that the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command at the time of start. Further, while the predetermined start effect is being executed, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound in response to the fact that the effect control section 130m has not been able to properly receive the start command. On the other hand, the hold icon HI and the icon TI are not displayed, and the predetermined effect at the start by the hold icon HI and the icon TI is not executed.

Thereafter, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the predetermined production at the start is performed.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 302(c), the effect pattern 70a that has been moving up and down comes to a final stop at the stop position. Furthermore, the zone effect image ZEG is hidden. Furthermore, the background image HG corresponding to the production mode D is displayed again. Further, the lamp LA emits light in a light emitting manner corresponding to the stoppage of fluctuation of the special symbol (the fluctuation performance is not executed). Further, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to the stoppage of variation of the special symbol (the fact that the variation effect is not executed). That is, the predetermined performance at the start ends.
On the other hand, the sound accompanying the stop of the production pattern 70a is not output. Further, the first special symbol reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E maintains "1".

Next, when the game ball enters the second starting port 47, the number of reserved second special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "0" to "1". When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (second special figure pending number designation command as a winning signal, pre-reading designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m memorizes (recognizes) ) The number of reserved second special drawings changes from "0" to "1". At this time, the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F is increased from "0" to "1" in a specific update mode, and the second A hold icon HI is additionally displayed (increased display) on the first display section 70D1 of the hold icon display area 70D. Further, the hold icon HI periodically performs a rotation operation (preparation operation).

Next, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", and the second special symbol is Fluctuation display starts. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (second special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0" and a process for starting a variable production is performed.
In this case, as shown in FIG. 302(d), the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F changes from "1" in the specific update mode. The hold icon HI displayed in the second hold icon display area 70D is reduced to "0" and is shifted and displayed as an animation of 20 frames toward the icon display area 70C and displayed as the icon TI. Further, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the second lamp pattern LZ is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation). Further, the display content of the remaining number of times image ZKG is updated to "89 remaining". Further, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the execution of the variable effect. Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to the execution of the variable effect. Further, the first special symbol reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E maintains "1".

After this, the first special symbol reservation number “1” is displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E, and the display content of the remaining number image ZKG is “89 left”. "The same variation effect as that described using FIG. 300(l) and FIG. 301(m) to FIG. 301(r) is executed.
In addition, when the second variable performance is finished and the performance control unit 130m receives the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special symbol reservation number display area The number of reserved first special drawings displayed in 70E is displayed decreasing from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. Further, when the third variable performance starts (see FIG. 301(q)), the display content of the remaining number of times image ZKG is updated to "88 remaining".

Note that the contents of the predetermined performance at the start time that are executed in the normal game state and the specific game state may be the same or different. Further, when the content of the predetermined effect at the start time to be executed is different between the normal gaming state and the specific game state, the following contents can be cited as the predetermined effect at the start time in the specific game state.
The performance symbol 70a may move to the diagonally upper right side and the diagonally lower left side in a predetermined performance at the start of a specific game state. When the predetermined performance is started, the performance pattern 70a moves from the stop position to the upper right side, then moves to the lower left side from the stop position, and then again to the upper right side from the stop position. Moving. While the predetermined performance is being executed at the start, the performance pattern 70a periodically repeats such movement to the upper right side of the stop position and movement to the lower left side of the stop position. . The period of operation of the performance symbol 70a in the predetermined performance at the start, that is, the performance symbol 70a starts moving from the stop position, then moves diagonally upward to the right of the stop position and diagonally downward to the left of the stop position. The time it takes to reach the stop position again after the movement to the stop position may be any time, but is, for example, 1 second. Further, although not shown, in a predetermined performance at the start of a specific game state, the tactile image SK and the symbol effect image ZE may perform a fluctuation motion (performance motion) as the above-described performance symbol 70a moves. In this way, the display mode (operation mode) of the performance symbol 70a in the predetermined performance at the start may be different between the normal game state and the specific game state. In the normal game state and the specific game state, the period of operation of the performance symbol 70a in the predetermined performance at the start may be the same.

The zone effect image ZEG may be displayed in a manner corresponding to the case where the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command at the start in the specific game state in the predetermined performance at the start. More specifically, the display color of the zone effect image ZEG as the predetermined effect at the start in the specific gaming state is a color different from the display color of the zone effect image ZEG as the predetermined effect at the start in the normal gaming state, such as gray. It may be. In addition, in the predetermined effect at the start in a specific gaming state, as in the example shown in the figure, the zone effect image ZEG includes not only the text "ZONE" but also the text "missed at the start in the specific gaming state", An image suggesting that the performance control unit 130m could not normally receive the start command in the specific game state may be displayed. While the predetermined effect is being executed at the start, the text displayed in the zone effect image ZEG continues to be scrolled left and right. In this way, the display mode of the zone effect image ZEG in the predetermined effect at the start may be different between the normal game state and the specific game state.

The background image HG may display a moving image corresponding to the fact that the performance control unit 130m has not been able to normally receive the start time command in the specific game state in the predetermined performance at the start time in the specific game state. The animation in response to the fact that the production control unit 130m could not normally receive the start command in a specific gaming state is displayed only when the production control unit 130m could not normally receive the start command in a specific gaming state. An example of this is the background video. In addition, in the background image HG of the predetermined performance at the start, the text “The performance control unit could not normally receive the command at the start in the specific game state” scrolls from the right end to the left end of the first image display device 70. It may also include videos such as: The moving image as the background image HG in the predetermined effect at the start consists of a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds), and when it reaches the end, it continues to be displayed again from the beginning. That is, while the predetermined effect is being executed at the start, loop playback of the moving image as the background image HG is continued. In this way, the display mode (operation mode) of the background image HG in the predetermined effect at the start may be different between the normal game state and the specific game state. The period of operation of the background image HG in the predetermined effect at the start may be the same in the normal game state and the specific game state.

The lamp LA may emit light in a light emitting manner in accordance with the fact that the performance control unit 130m has not been able to normally receive the command at the start in the specific game state in the predetermined performance at the start. The light emission mode in response to the fact that the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command in a specific gaming state is, for example, when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command in a specific gaming state. Flashing with a cycle that is only executed when the production control unit 130m is in a specific game state, switching of the light emitting color that is executed only when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command in a specific game state, Continuation of lighting for a period of time, etc., which is executed only when the start command cannot be received normally, can be mentioned. While the predetermined performance at the start time is being executed, the lamp LA continues to emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the fact that the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command at the time of start in the specific game state. In this way, the light emitting manner of the lamp LA in the predetermined effect at the start (aspect of the light emitting effect) may be different between the normal game state and the specific game state.

The audio output device 9 may output a sound in response to the fact that the performance control section 130m has not been able to normally receive the command at the start in the specific game state in the predetermined performance at the start in the specific game state. For example, the sound in response to the production control unit 130m not being able to properly receive the start command in a specific gaming state is the sound "The production control unit was unable to properly receive the start command in a specific gaming state." Only when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command in a specific game state, such as audio or sound effects indicating that the production control unit 130m has not been able to properly receive the start command in a specific game state. Examples include the sound that is output. In addition, while the predetermined performance at the time of start is being executed in the specific game state, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound in response to the fact that the performance control unit 130m has not been able to normally receive the command at the time of start at a predetermined period. is output repeatedly. The predetermined period may be any time, but is, for example, 10 seconds. In this way, the form of the sound output in the predetermined effect at the start (the form of the effect sound) may be different between the normal game state and the specific game state.

(Modification 2)
FIG. 303 is a diagram showing another modification (modification 2) of the variation effect example described using FIGS. 299 to 301.
Next, using FIG. 303, another modification (modification 2) of the variation effect example described using FIGS. 299 to 301 will be described. Modification 2 is an example of a performance when the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command. In this modification example 2, in the case where the variable display of the special symbol is performed three times as explained using FIG. 299 to FIG. This is an example of a performance performed when the time command is not normally received by the performance control unit 130m.

First, by performing the same effects as those described using FIGS. 299(a) to 299(f), FIG. 300(g), and FIG. 300(h), as shown in FIG. 303(a). , the effect pattern 70a on the left-center right is temporarily stopped. FIG. 303(a) shows the same state as that described using FIG. 300(i).
Thereafter, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (a command error has occurred), the variable production will be terminated. processing will not be performed.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 303(b), the first lamp pattern LZ continues to be displayed in a variable manner. In addition, based on the fact that the stop command cannot be received normally, the production control unit 130m uses the production pattern 70a, the hold icon HI, the zone effect image ZEG, the background image HG, the lamp LA, and the audio output device 9, Executes a predetermined effect when stopped.
While the predetermined effect at the time of stop is being executed, the effect pattern 70a periodically moves left and right, and the hold icon HI periodically moves up and down. Further, while the predetermined stop effect is being executed, the zone effect image ZEG and the background image HG are displayed in a manner corresponding to the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command. Further, while the predetermined effect at the time of stop is being executed, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the fact that the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command at the time of stop. Further, while the predetermined effect at the time of stop is being executed, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound in response to the fact that the effect control section 130m has not been able to normally receive the command at the time of stop. On the other hand, the predetermined effect at the time of stop by the icon TI is not executed.

After that, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0" and the second special symbol changes. Display starts. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (2nd special symbol pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. Then, the second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0", and a process is performed to start a variable production.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 303(c), the first lamp pattern LZ comes to a final stop in a losing manner. Further, the performance pattern 70a that had been moving left and right changes its display position to the stop position and stops, performs an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation) at the "565" arrangement, and then starts scrolling. On the other hand, the special symbol TZ continues to be displayed in a variable manner without being stopped and displayed. Further, the icon TI and the pending icon HI are erased with one frame of non-animation, and the icon TI corresponding to the started variable effect is displayed in the icon display area 70C with one frame of non-animation. Ru. This icon TI periodically rotates (acts as an effect). Furthermore, the zone effect image ZEG is hidden. Furthermore, the background image HG corresponding to the production mode D is displayed again. Further, the lamp LA emits light in a light emitting mode corresponding to the period when the special symbol is changing (during execution of the fluctuation effect). Further, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to when the special symbols are changing (while the changing effect is being executed). That is, the predetermined performance ends when stopped. Further, the display content of the remaining number of times image ZKG is updated to "88 remaining". Moreover, the sound accompanying the actual stop of the production pattern 70a is not output.
After this, the same effects as those described using FIG. 300(l) and FIG. 301(m) to FIG. 301(r) are performed.

Note that the content of the predetermined performance at the time of stop that is executed in the normal game state and the specific game state may be the same or different. Further, when the contents of the stop-time predetermined effect to be executed are different between the normal game state and the specific game state, the following contents can be cited as the stop-time predetermined effect in the specific game state.
The performance symbol 70a may move to the diagonally upper left side and the diagonally lower right side in a predetermined performance when stopped in a specific game state. When the predetermined effect at the time of stop is started, the effect pattern 70a moves from the stop position to the upper left side, then moves to the lower right side from the stop position, and then again to the upper left side from the stop position. Moving. While the predetermined effect at the time of stop is being executed, the effect pattern 70a periodically repeats such movement to the upper left side of the stop position and movement to the lower right side of the stop position. . The period of operation of the performance symbol 70a in a predetermined performance at the time of stopping, that is, after the performance symbol 70a starts moving from the stop position, it moves diagonally upward to the left of the stop position and diagonally downward to the right of the stop position. The time it takes to reach the stop position again after the movement to the stop position may be any time, but is, for example, 1 second. Further, although not shown, in a predetermined performance at the start of a specific game state, the tactile image SK and the symbol effect image ZE may perform a fluctuation motion (performance motion) as the above-described performance symbol 70a moves. In this way, the display mode (operation mode) of the performance symbol 70a in the predetermined performance at the time of stop may be different between the normal game state and the specific game state. Further, the period of operation of the performance symbol 70a in the predetermined performance at the time of stop may be the same in the normal game state and the specific game state.

The hold icon HI may move diagonally to the upper left side in a predetermined effect at the time of stopping in a specific game state. When the predetermined performance at the time of stop is started, the hold icon HI moves diagonally to the upper left side of the second hold icon display area 70D, and then moves back to the second hold icon display area 70D. While the predetermined effect at the time of stop is being executed, the hold icon HI periodically moves to the upper left side of the second hold icon display area 70D and returns to the original display position. repeat. The period of operation of the hold icon HI in a predetermined performance when stopped in a specific gaming state, that is, from when the hold icon HI moves diagonally to the upper left side of the second hold icon display area 70D until it returns to the original display position. Although the time may be any time, for example, it is 2 seconds. In this way, the display mode (operation mode) of the hold icon HI in the predetermined effect at the time of stop may be different between the normal game state and the specific game state. In the normal game state and the specific game state, the period of operation of the hold icon HI in the predetermined effect at the time of stop may be the same.
Further, when the icon TI performs a predetermined performance when stopped in a specific gaming state, the same performance as the pending icon HI in the specific gaming state is performed.

The zone effect image ZEG may be displayed in a manner corresponding to the case where the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command in the specific game state in the predetermined performance at the time of stop in the specific game state. More specifically, the display color of the zone effect image ZEG as the predetermined effect at the time of stop in the specific gaming state is a color different from the display color of the zone effect image ZEG as the predetermined effect at the time of stop in the normal gaming state, such as pink. It may be. In addition, in the predetermined performance when stopping in a specific gaming state, as shown in the example shown in the figure, the zone effect image ZEG includes not only the text "ZONE" but also the text "missing when stopping in a specific gaming state". An image may be displayed that suggests that the performance control unit 130m could not normally receive the stop command in the specific gaming state. While the predetermined stop effect is being executed, the text displayed in the zone effect image ZEG continues to be scrolled left and right. In this way, the display mode of the zone effect image ZEG in the predetermined effect at the time of stop may be different between the normal game state and the specific game state.

In the background image HG, a moving image may be displayed in response to the fact that the performance control unit 130m was unable to normally receive the command at the time of stop in the specific game state in the predetermined performance at the time of stop in the specific game state. The animation in response to the fact that the production control unit 130m could not normally receive the stop command in a specific gaming state is displayed only when the production control unit 130m could not normally receive the stop command in a specific gaming state. An example of this is the background video. In addition, in the background image HG for the predetermined performance at the time of stopping, the text “The performance control unit could not normally receive the command at the time of stopping in the specific game state” scrolls from the right end to the left end of the first image display device 70. It may also include videos such as The moving image as the background image HG in the predetermined effect at the time of stop consists of a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds), and when it reaches the end, it continues to be displayed again from the beginning. That is, while the predetermined effect is being executed at the time of stop, loop playback of the moving image as the background image HG is continued. In this way, the display mode (operation mode) of the background image HG in the predetermined performance at the time of stop may be different between the normal game state and the specific game state.

The lamp LA may emit light in a light emitting manner in response to the fact that the performance control section 130m has not been able to normally receive the stop command in the specific game state in the predetermined performance at the time of stop in the specific game state. For example, when the production control unit 130m is unable to normally receive the stop command in a specific gaming state, for example, when the production control unit 130m is unable to normally receive the stop command in the specific gaming state. Flashing with a period that is only executed when the production control unit 130m is in a specific game state, switching of the light emitting color that is executed only when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command in a specific gaming state, Continuation of lighting for a period of time, etc., which is executed only when the stop command cannot be received normally, can be mentioned. While the predetermined performance at stop is being executed, the lamp LA continues to emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the fact that the performance control unit 130m has not been able to normally receive the command at stop in the specific game state. In this way, the light emitting manner of the lamp LA in the predetermined effect at the time of stop (aspect of the light emitting effect) may be different between the normal game state and the specific game state.

The audio output device 9 may output a sound in response to the fact that the performance control section 130m has not been able to normally receive the command at the time of stop in the specific game state in the predetermined performance at the time of stop in the specific game state. For example, the sound in response to the production control unit 130m not being able to properly receive the stop command in a specific gaming state is "The production control unit was unable to normally receive the stop command in a specific gaming state." Only when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command in a specific gaming state, such as audio or sound effects indicating that the production control unit 130m could not normally receive the stop command in a specific gaming state. Examples include the sound that is output. In addition, while the predetermined performance at stop is being executed in the specific gaming state, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound at a predetermined period in response to the fact that the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command. is output repeatedly. The predetermined period may be any time, but is, for example, 5 seconds. In this way, the mode of the sound output in the predetermined effect at the time of stop (the mode of the effect sound) may be different between the normal game state and the specific game state. Furthermore, the frequency of the sound performance that is repeated in the predetermined performance at the time of stop may be different between the normal game state and the specific game state. However, the period of the sound performance repeated in the predetermined performance at the time of stop may be the same in the normal game state and the specific game state.

(Modification 3)
FIG. 304 is a diagram showing another modification (modification 3) of the variation effect example explained using FIGS. 299 to 301.
Next, using FIG. 304, another modification (modification 3) of the variation effect example described using FIGS. 299 to 301 will be described. Modification 3 is an example of a performance when the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command. In this modification example 3, in the case where the special symbol variable display is performed three times as explained using FIG. 299 to FIG. This is an example of a performance performed when the time command is not normally received by the performance control unit 130m.

First, by performing the same effects as those described using FIGS. 299(a) to 299(f) and FIGS. 300(g) to 300(i), as shown in FIG. 304(a). , the production pattern 70a comes to a stop with the losing mode "565". FIG. 304(a) is the same state as that described using FIG. 300(j).
Next, as the second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", a loss fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (2nd special symbol pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. If it is not possible (command abnormality has occurred), the second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "1", and the process of starting the second variable production is not performed.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 304(b), the second lamp pattern LZ continues to be in a fully stopped state. Moreover, the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F maintains "1". In addition, based on the fact that the start command cannot be received normally, the production control unit 130m uses the production pattern 70a, the hold icon HI, the zone effect image ZEG, the background image HG, the lamp LA, and the audio output device 9, A predetermined effect is executed at the start.
While the predetermined performance is being executed at the start, the performance symbol 70a periodically moves up and down, and the hold icon HI periodically moves left and right. Further, while the predetermined start effect is being executed, the zone effect image ZEG and the background image HG are displayed in a manner corresponding to the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command. Further, while the predetermined effect at the time of start is being executed, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the fact that the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command at the time of start. Further, while the predetermined start effect is being executed, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound in response to the fact that the effect control section 130m has not been able to properly receive the start command.

Thereafter, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the predetermined production at the start is performed.
In this case, as shown in FIG. 304(c), the effect pattern 70a that has been moving up and down comes to a final stop again at "565". Further, the hold icon HI that has been moving left and right is displayed in the second hold icon display area 70D, and resumes the periodic rotation operation (acting operation). Furthermore, the zone effect image ZEG is hidden. Furthermore, the background image HG corresponding to the production mode D is displayed again. Further, the lamp LA emits light in a light emitting manner according to the stoppage of fluctuation of the special symbol (the fluctuation performance is not executed). Further, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to the stoppage of fluctuation of the special symbol (the fact that the fluctuation effect is not executed). That is, the predetermined performance at the start ends.
On the other hand, the sound accompanying the stop of the production pattern 70a is not output. Moreover, the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F maintains "1".

After that, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, the game enters a customer waiting state (game waiting state). When the production control unit 130m receives the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process of setting a standby timer until the customer waiting demonstration performance is started is performed.
In this case, the guide image AG is displayed as shown in FIG. 304(d). In addition, the second special symbol reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special symbol reservation number display area 70F is displayed decreased from "1" to "0". Further, the pending icon HI is deleted as one frame of non-animation.

After this, except that the arrangement of the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ is "565" and the display content of the remaining number of times image ZKG is "89 remaining", The same effects as those described using FIGS. 301(m) to 301(r) are executed. In addition, when the third variation performance is started (see FIG. 301(q)), the display content of the remaining number of times image ZKG is updated to "88 remaining".

Note that the content of the predetermined effect at the start by the hold icon HI may be the same or different between the normal game state and the specific game state. Further, when the content of the predetermined performance at the start time by the hold icon HI is different between the normal game state and the specific game state, the following contents can be cited as the predetermined performance at the start time in the specific game state.
The hold icon HI may move diagonally to the upper right side in a predetermined effect at the start of a specific game state. When the predetermined effect at the time of start is started, the hold icon HI moves diagonally to the upper right side of the second hold icon display area 70D, and then moves back to the second hold icon display area 70D. While the predetermined effect at the start is being executed, the hold icon HI periodically moves to the upper right side of the second hold icon display area 70D and returns to the original display position. repeat. The period of operation of the hold icon HI in a predetermined effect at the start of a specific gaming state, that is, from when the hold icon HI moves diagonally to the upper right side of the second hold icon display area 70D until it returns to the original display position. Although the time may be any time, for example, it is 2 seconds. In this way, the display mode (operation mode) of the hold icon HI in the predetermined effect at the start may be different between the normal game state and the specific game state. Furthermore, the period of operation of the hold icon HI in the predetermined effect at the start may be the same in the normal game state and the specific game state.

(Modification 4)
FIG. 305 is a diagram showing another modification (modification 4) of the variation effect example described using FIGS. 299 to 301.
Next, using FIG. 305, another modification example (modification example 4) of the variation effect example described using FIGS. 299 to 301 will be described. Modification 4 is an example of a performance when the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command. This modification 4 is a stop command that is sent from the main control unit 110m at the timing when the first variable display is stopped when the special symbol is displayed three times as shown in FIGS. 299 to 301. This is an example of a production performed when the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at the timing when the second variable display is started is not normally received by the production control unit 130m.

First, by performing the same effects as those explained using FIGS. 299(a) to 299(f), FIG. 300(g), and FIG. 300(h), as shown in FIG. 305(a), , the effect pattern 70a on the left-center right is temporarily stopped. FIG. 305(a) shows the same state as that described using FIG. 300(i).
Thereafter, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (a command error has occurred), the variable production will be terminated. processing will not be performed.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 305(b), the first lamp pattern LZ continues to be displayed in a variable manner. In addition, based on the fact that the stop command cannot be received normally, the production control unit 130m uses the production pattern 70a, the hold icon HI, the zone effect image ZEG, the background image HG, the lamp LA, and the audio output device 9, Executes a predetermined performance when stopped.
While the predetermined effect at the time of stop is being executed, the effect pattern 70a periodically moves left and right, and the hold icon HI periodically moves up and down. Further, while the predetermined effect at stop is being executed, the zone effect image ZEG and the background image HG are displayed in a manner corresponding to the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command at stop. Further, while the predetermined effect at the time of stop is being executed, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the fact that the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command at the time of stop. Further, while the predetermined effect is being executed at the time of start, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound in response to the fact that the effect control section 130m has not been able to normally receive the command at the time of stop. On the other hand, the predetermined effect at the time of stop by the icon TI is not executed.

Next, as the number of reserved second special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", a loss fluctuation display of the second special symbols is started. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (2nd special symbol pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. If it is not possible (command abnormality has occurred), the second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "1", and the process of starting the second variable production is not performed.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 305(c), the first lamp pattern LZ continues to be displayed in a variable manner, and the second lamp pattern LZ continues to be in a permanently stopped state. Moreover, the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F maintains "1". In addition, based on the fact that the start command cannot be received normally, the production control unit 130m uses the production pattern 70a, the hold icon HI, the zone effect image ZEG, the background image HG, the lamp LA, and the audio output device 9, A predetermined effect is executed at the start.
While the predetermined performance is being executed at the start, the performance symbol 70a periodically moves up and down, and the hold icon HI periodically moves left and right. Further, while the predetermined start effect is being executed, the zone effect image ZEG and the background image HG are displayed in a manner corresponding to the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command. Further, while the predetermined effect at the time of start is being executed, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the fact that the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command at the time of start. Further, while the predetermined start effect is being executed, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound in response to the fact that the effect control section 130m has not been able to properly receive the start command. On the other hand, the predetermined effect at the start by the icon TI is not executed.

Thereafter, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the predetermined production at the start is performed.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 305(d), the first lamp pattern LZ comes to a final stop in a losing manner. Further, the performance symbol 70a that was moving up and down is stopped permanently at the loss mode "565" which was temporarily stopped in the previous variable performance. In addition, the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop in the same losing mode as the performance symbol 70a "565". Further, the icon TI is erased with one frame of non-animation, and the pending icon HI that has been moving left and right is displayed in the second pending icon display area 70D. Further, the hold icon HI restarts the periodic rotation operation (performance operation). Furthermore, the zone effect image ZEG is hidden. Furthermore, the background image HG corresponding to the production mode D is displayed again. On the other hand, the display content of the remaining number of times image ZKG is maintained as "89 remaining". Further, the lamp LA emits light in a light emitting manner corresponding to the stoppage of fluctuation of the special symbol (the fluctuation performance is not executed). Further, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to the stoppage of variation of the special symbol (the fact that the variation effect is not executed). That is, the predetermined performance at the start ends.
On the other hand, the sound accompanying the stop of the production pattern 70a is not output. Moreover, at this time, the second special symbol reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special symbol reservation number display area 70F maintains "1".

After that, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, the game enters a customer waiting state (game waiting state). When the production control unit 130m receives the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process of setting a standby timer until the customer waiting demonstration performance is started is performed.
In this case, the guide image AG is displayed as shown in FIG. 305(e). Further, at this time, the pending icon HI is deleted as one frame of non-animation. Moreover, at this time, the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F is displayed decreased from "1" to "0".

300(l) and 301( The same effects as those described using m) to FIG. 301(r) are performed. To add, when the third variable performance is started (see FIG. 301(q)), the display content of the remaining number of times image ZKG is updated to "88 remaining".

(Modification 5)
FIG. 306 is a diagram showing another modification (modification 5) of the variation effect example described using FIGS. 299 to 301.
Next, another modification example (modification example 5) of the variation effect example described using FIGS. 299 to 301 will be described using FIG. 306. Modification 5 is an example of a performance when the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command. This modification 5 is a customer waiting state that is transmitted from the main control unit 110m after the second variable display stops when the special symbol is displayed three times as explained using FIGS. 299 to 301. This is an example of a performance performed when the designated command is not normally received by the performance control unit 130m.

First, by performing the same effects as those described using FIGS. 299(a) to 299(f) and FIGS. 300(g) to 300(k), as shown in FIG. 306(a). , the production pattern 70a comes to a real stop at the stop position. FIG. 306(a) is the same state as that described using FIG. 300(l).
After that, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, the game enters a customer waiting state (game waiting state). If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the customer waiting state designation command sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (command error has occurred), the standby timer until the customer waiting demonstration performance starts will not be set. , the process to start the customer waiting demonstration performance is not performed.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 306(b), the guide image AG (see FIG. 301(m)) is not displayed on the first image display device 70. Furthermore, based on the fact that the customer waiting state designation command cannot be received normally, the performance control unit 130m executes a predetermined customer waiting performance using the background image HG, the lamp LA, and the audio output device 9.
While the customer waiting predetermined performance is being executed, the background image HG is displayed in a manner corresponding to the fact that the performance control unit 130m has not been able to normally receive the customer waiting state designation command. Further, while the predetermined customer waiting effect is being executed, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the fact that the effect control section 130m has not been able to normally receive the customer waiting state designation command. Further, while the customer waiting predetermined effect is being executed, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to the fact that the effect control section 130m has not been able to normally receive the customer waiting state designation command.

Note that while the predetermined customer waiting performance is being executed, the performance pattern 70a continues to be in a permanently stopped state. That is, the predetermined customer waiting performance is not executed in the performance pattern 70a. In addition, when the customer waiting predetermined effect is being executed, the icon TI, the hold icon HI, and the zone effect image ZEG are not displayed, and the customer waiting predetermined effect is not displayed in the relevant icon TI, the hold icon HI, and the zone effect image ZEG. The performance is not performed.

Here, for example, when the player operates the upper button of the cross key 18, the volume of the sound output from the audio output device 9 is changed to a higher volume than before the operation of the upper button, as shown in FIG. 306(c). As shown in , a volume value image OG showing the changed volume value is displayed. Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs the sound corresponding to the operation of the upper button of the cross key 18 at the changed volume. On the other hand, in the background image HG, the display of the moving image in response to the fact that the performance control unit 130m was unable to normally receive the customer waiting state designation command continues. In addition, the lamp LA continues to emit light in a light emitting mode corresponding to the fact that the production control unit 130m has not been able to normally receive the customer waiting state designation command. If a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds) passes without the cross key 18 being operated in this state, the volume value image OG is erased and the state returns to the state shown in FIG. 306(b).

In this state, for example, when the player operates the left button of the cross key 18, the light intensity of the lamp LA is changed to a lower light intensity than before operating the left button, as shown in FIG. 306(d). , a light amount value image KG showing the changed light amount value is displayed. Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to the operation of the left button of the cross key 18. On the other hand, in the background image HG, the display of the moving image in response to the fact that the performance control unit 130m was unable to normally receive the customer waiting state designation command continues. In addition, the lamp LA continues to emit light in a light emitting mode corresponding to the fact that the production control unit 130m has not been able to normally receive the customer waiting state designation command. If a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds) passes without the cross key 18 being operated in this state, the light amount value image KG is erased and the state returns to the state shown in FIG. 306(b).

Next, when a game ball enters the second starting port 47, the second special symbol reservation number (U2) increases from "0" to "1". In this case, in the first image display device 70, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the second special figure reservation number display area 70F changes from "0" to "1", and the second reservation icon display area A hold icon HI is displayed on 70D.
Next, as the second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", variable display of the second special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (second special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0" and a process for starting a variable production is performed.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 306(e), the background image HG according to the production mode D is displayed again. Further, the lamp LA emits light in a light emitting mode corresponding to the period when the special symbol is changing (during execution of the fluctuation effect). Further, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to when the special symbols are changing (while the changing effect is being executed). In other words, the predetermined performance for waiting for the customer ends.
In addition, the second special figure pending number displayed on the sub second pending display 84 and the second special figure pending number display area 70F is decreased from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode, and the second reserved number is displayed as The pending icon HI displayed in the icon display area 70D is shifted and displayed as an animation of 20 frames toward the icon display area 70C and displayed as the icon TI. Further, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the second lamp pattern LZ is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation). Further, the display content of the remaining number of times image ZKG is updated to "87 remaining". Further, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the execution of the variable effect. Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to the execution of the variable effect.
After this, the same effect as that described using FIG. 301(r) is performed.

Note that the content of the customer waiting predetermined effect executed in the normal gaming state and the specific gaming state may be the same or different. Further, when the content of the customer waiting predetermined performance to be executed is different between the normal gaming state and the specific gaming state, the following contents can be cited as the customer waiting predetermined performance in the specific gaming state.

The background image HG may display a moving image corresponding to the failure of the performance control unit 130m to normally receive the customer waiting state designation command in the specific gaming state in the customer waiting predetermined performance in the specific gaming state. The animation in response to the fact that the performance control unit 130m could not normally receive the customer waiting state designation command in a specific gaming state is that the performance control unit 130m could not normally receive the customer waiting state designation command in a specific gaming state. One example is a background video that is only displayed when In addition, in the background image HG for the customer waiting predetermined performance, the text "The performance control unit could not normally receive the customer waiting state designation command in the specific game state" is displayed from the right end to the left end of the first image display device 70. It may also include a video that scrolls. The moving image as the background image HG in the predetermined customer waiting performance consists of a predetermined time (for example, 70 seconds), and when it reaches the end, it continues to be displayed again from the beginning. That is, while the predetermined customer waiting effect is being executed, the loop playback of the moving image as the background image HG is continued. In this way, the display mode (operation mode) of the background image HG in the customer waiting predetermined performance may be different between the normal gaming state and the specific gaming state. Furthermore, the cycle of the moving image repeated as the background image HG in the predetermined customer waiting performance may be different between the normal gaming state and the specific gaming state. However, the cycle of the moving image repeated as the background image HG in the customer waiting predetermined effect may be the same in the normal game state and the specific game state.

The lamp LA may emit light in a light emitting manner in response to the fact that the performance control section 130m has not been able to normally receive the customer waiting state designation command in the specific gaming state in a predetermined performance of waiting for a customer in a specific gaming state. For example, the lighting mode in response to the fact that the performance control unit 130m could not normally receive the customer waiting state designation command in a specific gaming state is, for example, when the performance control unit 130m successfully received the customer waiting state designation command in the specific gaming state. Flashing according to the period that is executed only when the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the customer waiting state designation command in a specific gaming state, Examples include the continuation of lighting for a period of time that is executed only when 130m cannot normally receive a customer waiting state designation command in a specific gaming state. While the predetermined customer waiting effect is being executed, the lamp LA continues to emit light in a light emitting manner corresponding to the failure of the effect control section 130m to normally receive the customer waiting state designation command in the specific game state. In this way, the light emitting manner of the lamp LA in the customer waiting predetermined effect (the light emitting effect mode) may be different between the normal game state and the specific game state.

The audio output device 9 may output a sound in response to the fact that the performance control section 130m has not been able to normally receive the customer waiting state designation command in the specific gaming state in the customer waiting predetermined performance in the specific gaming state. For example, the sound in response to the performance control unit 130m not being able to properly receive the customer waiting state designation command in a specific gaming state is, for example, “The performance control unit cannot normally receive the customer waiting state designation command in a specific gaming state. ” and sound effects indicating that the production control unit 130m could not normally receive the customer waiting state designation command in a specific gaming state. Examples include sounds that are output only when the signal cannot be received. In addition, while the customer waiting predetermined performance is being executed in the specific gaming state, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound in response to the fact that the performance control unit 130m has not been able to normally receive the start command at a predetermined period. is output repeatedly. The predetermined period may be any time, but is, for example, 15 seconds. In this way, the form of the sound output in the predetermined performance while waiting for a customer (the form of the performance sound) may be different between the normal game state and the specific game state. Further, the frequency of the sound performance repeated in the customer waiting predetermined performance may be different between the normal game state and the specific game state. However, the frequency of the sound performance repeated in the customer waiting predetermined performance may be the same in the normal game state and the specific game state.

(Modification 6)
FIG. 307 is a diagram showing another modification (modification 6) of the variation effect example described using FIGS. 299 to 301.
Next, using FIG. 307, another modification (modification 6) of the variation effect example described using FIGS. 299 to 301 will be described. Modified example 6 is an example of a performance when the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command. In this modification example 6, in the case where the special symbol is displayed three times in a variable manner as described using FIGS. This is an example of a performance performed when the time command is not normally received by the performance control unit 130m.

First, by performing the same effects as those described using FIGS. 299(a) to 299(f) and FIGS. 300(g) to 300(l), as shown in FIG. 307(a). , the first image display device 70 displays the effect pattern 70a and the guide image AG of the losing mode "814" which was stopped in the previous variable effect. FIG. 307(a) is the same state as FIG. 301(m).
Next, if the demonstration standby time has elapsed after the display of the guide image AG started (after the standby timer was set), as a customer waiting demonstration effect, as shown in FIG. 307(b), A demo image KMG is displayed. Further, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode according to the customer waiting demonstration effect. Moreover, the audio output device 9 is not outputting sound.

Next, when a game ball enters the second starting port 47, the second special symbol reservation number (U2) increases from "0" to "1".
Next, as the second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", a loss fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (2nd special symbol pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. If it is not possible (command abnormality has occurred), the second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "1", and the process of starting the second variable production is not performed. In other words, the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive both the winning command (the special figure reservation number designation command as the winning signal, the pre-reading designation command) and the start command associated with the winning to the second starting opening 47.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 307(c), the second lamp pattern LZ continues to be in a permanently stopped state. Further, the first special symbol reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E maintains "0". Furthermore, the first image display device 70 continues to display the customer waiting demo image KMG. Further, the lamp LA continues to emit light in a light emitting mode according to the customer waiting demonstration performance. Furthermore, the audio output device 9 continues to output no sound.
Thereafter, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the performance control unit 130m receives a stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing is performed to end the customer waiting demonstration performance.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 307(d), the customer waiting demonstration image KMG is hidden, and "814", which is the performance symbol 70a that was fully stopped in the previous variable performance, is fully stopped. Furthermore, the background image HG corresponding to the production mode D is displayed again. Further, the display content of the remaining number of times image ZKG maintains "88 remaining". Further, the lamp LA emits light in a light emitting manner corresponding to the stoppage of fluctuation of the special symbol (the fluctuation performance is not executed). On the other hand, the audio output device 9 continues to output no sound.

As described above, in this embodiment, after the start command is normally received during execution of the customer waiting effect in a specific gaming state (see FIG. 301(q)), the stop command is normally received (see FIG. 301(q)). r), the sound is output even after the special symbols stop changing (see FIG. 301(r)). On the other hand, if the start command is not received normally (see FIG. 307(c)) and the stop command is normally received (see FIG. 307(d)) during execution of the customer waiting effect in a specific gaming state, No sound is output after the special symbols stop changing (see FIG. 307(d)).
In this case, even though the performance control unit 130m does not normally receive the start command in the specific game state, the lingering sound of the performance sound is output even after the special symbols stop changing, giving the player a sense of discomfort. can be suppressed.

FIG. 308 and FIG. 309 are diagrams showing the relationship between the effects executed in the variable effect example and each modification and the timing at which the effects are executed.

(Execution timing of performance in variable performance example)
In the variable performance examples shown in FIGS. 299 to 301, at time T1, the performance control unit 130m issues a start time command related to the first special symbol (a first special symbol reservation number designation command as a start time signal, a special symbol Specified command, special figure fluctuation pattern specified command) is received normally.
Next, at time T2, the first variable effect is started. Also, at this time, the effect pattern 70a is expanded/contracted. Moreover, at this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is updated. Further, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the execution of the variable effect (variable display). Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to the execution of the fluctuating effect (fluctuation display). Time T2 is the time shown in FIG. 299(b).

Next, at time T3, the production pattern 70a temporarily stops. Also, at this time, a sound effect accompanying the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a is output. Time T3 is the time shown in FIG. 299(c).
Next, at time T4, a ready-to-reach effect is started. Also, at this time, a swinging motion is performed in the production pattern 70a. Also, at this time, an icon change effect is performed. Also, at this time, a sound corresponding to the normal reach effect is output. Time T4 is the time shown in FIG. 299(d).

Next, at time T5, the SP ready-to-reach effect is started. Also, at this time, the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a reduced size. Also, at this time, a zone effect is started. Also, at this time, a background image HG corresponding to the SP reach effect is displayed. Moreover, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode according to the SP reach effect. Moreover, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound according to the SP reach effect. Time T5 is the time shown in FIG. 299(e).
Next, at time T6, a promotion image is displayed. Time T6 is the time shown in FIG. 299(f).
Next, at time T7, the effect pattern 70a temporarily stops in the middle area. Time T7 is the time shown in FIG. 300(g).

Next, at time T8, transition image IG is displayed. Further, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the execution of the variable effect. Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs sound effects accompanying the display of the transition image IG. Time T8 is the time shown in FIG. 300(h).
Next, at time T9, the effect pattern 70a temporarily stops. Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to the execution of the variable effect. Time T9 is the time shown in FIG. 300(i).

Next, at time T10, the performance control unit 130m normally receives a stop command (special symbol stop designation command as a stop signal) regarding the first special symbol.
Next, at time T11, the production pattern 70a comes to a full stop. Also, at this time, the icon TI is deleted. Further, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the stoppage of fluctuation of the special symbol (the fluctuation performance is not executed). Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to the stop of variation of the special symbol (the fact that the variation effect is not executed). Time T11 is the time shown in FIG. 300(j).

Next, at time T12, the production control unit 130m sends a start time command related to the second special symbol (second special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command as a start time signal). Received normally.
Next, at time T13, the second variation effect is started. Moreover, at this time, the expansion/contraction operation of the effect pattern 70a and the shift display of the hold icon HI are performed. Moreover, at this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F is updated. Further, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the execution of the variable effect. Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to the execution of the variable effect. Time T13 is the time shown in FIG. 300(k).

Next, at time T14, the production control unit 130m normally receives a stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal).

Next, at time T15, the production pattern 70a comes to a full stop. Also, at this time, the icon TI is deleted. Further, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the stoppage of fluctuation of the special symbol (the fluctuation performance is not executed). Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound accompanying the stop of the production symbol 70a. In addition, a sound corresponding to the stoppage of the variation of the special symbol (the fact that the variation effect is not executed) is output. Time T15 is the time shown in FIG. 300(l).

Next, at time T16, the performance control unit 130m normally receives the customer waiting state designation command.
Next, at time T17, a customer waiting demonstration image KMG is displayed. Further, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the customer waiting demonstration effect. Moreover, at this time, the audio output device 9 does not output sound. Time T17 is the time shown in FIG. 301(p).

Next, at time T18, the production control unit 130m sends a start time command related to the second special symbol (second special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command as a start time signal). Received normally.
Next, at time T19, a second variation effect is started. Moreover, at this time, the expansion/contraction operation of the effect pattern 70a and the shift display of the hold icon HI are performed. Further, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the execution of the variable effect. Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to the execution of the variable effect. Time T19 is the time shown in FIG. 301(q).

Next, at time T20, the production control unit 130m normally receives a stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal).
Next, at time T21, the performance symbol 70a comes to a full stop. Further, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the stoppage of fluctuation of the special symbol (the fluctuation effect is not being executed). Also, at this time, the icon TI is deleted. Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to the stop of variation of the special symbol (the fact that the variation effect is not executed). Time T21 is the time shown in FIG. 301(r).

(Execution timing of performance in modification 1)
In addition, in Modification 1, at time T1, the performance control unit 130m sends a start time command related to the first special symbol (a first special symbol reservation number designation command as a start signal, a special symbol designation command, a special symbol fluctuation (pattern specification command) is not received correctly.
Next, at time T2, a predetermined performance is started using the performance pattern 70a, the hold icon HI, the zone effect image ZEG, the background image HG, the lamp LA, and the audio output device 9. Time T2 is the time shown in FIG. 302(b).
Next, at time T10, the production control unit 130m normally receives a stop command (special symbol stop designation command as a stop signal) regarding the first special symbol.

Next, at time T11, the predetermined performance at the start ends. That is, the predetermined effect at the start is executed from time T2 to time T11. In the first modification, execution of each performance that was performed from time point T2 to time point T10 in the variable performance examples shown in FIGS. 299 to 301 is restricted.
Further, at time T11, the production pattern 70a comes to a final stop. Further, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the stoppage of fluctuation of the special symbol (the fluctuation performance is not executed). Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to the stop of variation of the special symbol (the fact that the variation effect is not executed). Time T11 is the time shown in FIG. 302(c).

Next, at time T16, the performance control unit 130m normally receives the customer waiting state designation command.
Next, at time T17, the first special symbol reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E is updated.

(Execution timing of performance in modification 2)
In addition, in the second modification, at time T10, the production control unit 130m does not normally receive the stop command (special symbol stop designation command as a stop signal) regarding the first special symbol.
Next, at time T11, a predetermined effect at the time of stop using the effect pattern 70a, the hold icon HI, the zone effect image ZEG, the background image HG, the lamp LA, and the audio output device 9 is started. Time T11 is the time shown in FIG. 303(b).

Next, at time T12, the production control unit 130m sends a start time command related to the second special symbol (second special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command as a start time signal). Successfully received.
Next, at time T13, the predetermined stop performance ends. That is, the predetermined performance at the time of stop is executed from time T11 to time T13. In the second modification, execution of each performance that was performed from time T11 to time T12 in the variable performance examples shown in FIGS. 299 to 301 is restricted. Time T13 is the time shown in FIG. 303(c).

(Execution timing of performance in modification 3)
In addition, in the third modification, at time T12, the performance control unit 130m issues a start time command related to the second special symbol (a second special symbol reservation number designation command as a start signal, a special symbol designation command, a special symbol fluctuation command, etc.). (pattern specification command) is not received correctly.
Next, at time T13, a predetermined performance is started using the performance pattern 70a, the hold icon HI, the zone effect image ZEG, the background image HG, the lamp LA, and the audio output device 9. Time T13 is the time shown in FIG. 304(b).
Next, at time T14, the performance control unit 130m normally receives a stop command (special symbol stop designation command as a stop signal) regarding the second special symbol.

Next, at time T15, the predetermined performance at the start ends. That is, the predetermined performance at the start is executed from time T13 to time T15. In the third modification, execution of each performance that was performed from time point T13 to time point T14 in the variable performance examples shown in FIGS. 299 to 301 is restricted.
Further, at time T15, the production pattern 70a comes to a final stop. Further, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the stoppage of fluctuation of the special symbol (the fluctuation effect is not being executed). Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to the stop of variation of the special symbol (the fact that the variation effect is not executed). Time T15 is the time shown in FIG. 304(c).

Further, at time T16, the customer waiting state designation command is normally received.
Next, at time T17, the hold icon HI is deleted. Moreover, at this time, the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F is updated. Time T17 is the time shown in FIG. 304(d).

(Execution timing of production in modification 4)
In addition, in modification 4, at time T10, the performance control unit 130m does not normally receive the stop command (special symbol stop designation command as a stop signal) related to the first special symbol.
Next, at time T11, a predetermined effect at the time of stop using the effect pattern 70a, the hold icon HI, the zone effect image ZEG, the background image HG, the lamp LA, and the audio output device 9 is started. Time T11 is the time shown in FIG. 305(b).
Next, at time T12, the production control unit 130m sends a start time command related to the second special symbol (second special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command as a start time signal). Not received correctly.

Next, at time T13, the predetermined stop performance ends. That is, the predetermined performance at the time of stop is executed from time T11 to time T13. In the fourth modification, execution of each performance that was performed from time T11 to time T13 in the variable performance examples shown in FIGS. 299 to 301 is restricted.
Further, at time T13, a predetermined effect at the time of start using the effect pattern 70a, the hold icon HI, the zone effect image ZEG, the background image HG, the lamp LA, and the audio output device 9 is started. Time T13 is the time shown in FIG. 305(c).
Next, at time T14, the production control unit 130m normally receives a stop command (special symbol stop designation command as a stop signal) regarding the second special symbol.

Next, at time T15, the predetermined performance at the start ends. That is, the predetermined performance at the start is executed from time T13 to time T15. In modification example 4, execution of each effect that was performed from time point T13 to time point T14 in the variable effect examples shown in FIGS. 299 to 301 is restricted.
Further, at time T15, the production pattern 70a comes to a final stop. Also, at this time, the icon TI is deleted. Further, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the stoppage of fluctuation of the special symbol (the fluctuation effect is not being executed). Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to the stop of variation of the special symbol (the fact that the variation effect is not executed). Time T15 is the time shown in FIG. 305(d).

Further, at time T16, the customer waiting state designation command is normally received.
Next, at time T17, the hold icon HI is deleted. Moreover, at this time, the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F is updated. Time T17 is the time shown in FIG. 305(e).

Although the production control unit 130m was able to normally receive the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m at the timing of time T10 and the timing of time T12, based on the reception of this command, Even when the display control unit 140 and lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command sent from the production control unit 130m (command abnormality has occurred), the command sent from the main control unit 110m (stop command, The same process as in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command) (command abnormality has occurred) is performed.

In addition, at the timing of time T10 and the timing of time T12, the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m, and furthermore, at the timing of time T14, The production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m, and at time T16, the production control unit uses the customer waiting state designation command sent from the main control unit 110m. If the part 130m is able to receive it normally, at this timing, a process is performed to end the first variable performance that was started in response to the variable display of the first special symbol, and the performance control unit 130m memorizes (understands) The number of reserved first special drawings changes from "1" to "0".
Although the loop reproduction of the background image HG continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as one frame of non-animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production symbol 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ permanently stops at “565”, which is the same as the production symbol 70a, and the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special symbol reservation number The number of reserved first special symbols displayed in the display area 70E will be displayed decreasing from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. It should be noted that if the continuous notice performance is being executed for the loss fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the continuous notice performance will end at this timing. Moreover, at this time, the sound accompanying the actual stop of the production pattern 70a is not output.

(Execution timing of performance in modification 5)
Furthermore, in the fifth modification, the performance control unit 130m does not normally receive the customer waiting state designation command at time T16.
Further, at time T17, a predetermined customer waiting effect using the background image HG, the lamp LA, and the audio output device 9 is started. Time T17 is the time shown in FIG. 306(b).
Next, at time T18, the production control unit 130m sends a start time command related to the second special symbol (second special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command as a start time signal). Successfully received.

Next, at time T19, the predetermined performance for waiting for the customer ends. That is, the predetermined customer waiting performance is executed from time T17 to time T19. In modification 5, execution of each performance that was performed from time point T17 to time point T18 in the variable performance examples shown in FIGS. 299 to 301 is restricted. In addition, the limited effects include the display of the guide image AG (see FIG. 301(m)) that was executed at the timing between time T16 and time T17 in the variable effect examples shown in FIGS. 299 to 301. It will be done. Time T19 is the time shown in FIG. 306(e).

(Execution timing of production in modification 6)
In addition, in modification 6, at time T18, the production control unit 130m sends a start time command related to the second special symbol (second special symbol reservation number designation command as a start signal, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation (pattern specification command) is not received correctly.
Next, at time T20, the production control unit 130m normally receives a stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal).
Next, at time T21, the customer waiting demonstration image KMG is hidden. Further, the production pattern 70a comes to a final stop. Further, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the stoppage of fluctuation of the special symbol (the fluctuation effect is not being executed). Moreover, at this time, the audio output device 9 is not outputting sound. Here, in modification 6, execution of each performance that was performed from time point T19 to time point T20 in the variable performance examples shown in FIGS. 299 to 301 is restricted. Time T19 is the time shown in FIG. 307(d).

(Example of variable performance)
FIG. 310 and FIG. 311 are diagrams showing examples of variable effects executed in a specific game state.
Next, an example of a variable performance executed by the performance control unit 130m will be described using FIGS. 310 and 311. In the examples of variable effects shown in FIGS. 310 and 311, variable effects are performed twice in a specific gaming state. The first variable performance of these two variable performances is a variable performance based on a loss in the jackpot determination result and winning in the first starting opening 45, and is a variable performance in which a ready-to-win performance is not executed. Moreover, the second variable presentation of the two variable presentations is a variable presentation based on the jackpot determination result being a jackpot and winning in the second starting opening 47.

As shown in FIG. 310(a), as the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are permanently stopped in the losing mode "285". In addition, both the first lamp pattern LZ and the second lamp pattern LZ are in a losing state (extinguished) and are permanently stopped. Further, the sub-first reservation display 83 displays "1" which is the first special figure reservation number, and the sub-second reservation display 84 displays "0" which is the second special figure reservation number. has been done. Further, "1" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second special figure reservation number display area 70F. Furthermore, a background image HG, a right-handed image MU, a mode identification image MSG, and a remaining number of times image ZKG corresponding to the performance mode D are displayed. Further, the lamp LA emits light in a light emitting manner corresponding to the stoppage of fluctuation of the special symbol (the fluctuation performance is not executed). Further, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to the stoppage of fluctuation of the special symbol (the fact that the fluctuation effect is not executed).

Next, as the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", a loss fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0" and a process is performed to start the first variable production.
At this time, as shown in FIG. 310(b), the first special figure pending number displayed in the sub-first pending display 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E changes from "1" in the specific update mode. The icon TI is reduced to "0" and displayed as an animation of 10 frames. Further, the icon TI periodically performs a rotation operation (preparation operation). In addition, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation). Further, the display content of the remaining number of times image ZKG is updated to "89 remaining". Further, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the execution of the variable effect. Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 is outputting a sound corresponding to the execution of the variable effect.

Furthermore, when the game ball enters the second starting port 47, the number of reserved second special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "0" to "1". When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (second special figure pending number designation command as a winning signal, pre-reading designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m memorizes (recognizes) ) The number of reserved second special drawings changes from "0" to "1". At this time, the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F is increased from "0" to "1" in a specific update mode, and the second The hold icon HI is additionally displayed (increased display) on the first display section 70D1 of the hold icon display area 70D. In addition, the icon TI and the pending icon HI periodically perform a rotation operation (preparation operation) with their operation displays synchronized.

Then, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed.
At this time, as shown in FIG. 310(c), the effect pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ come to a permanent stop in the losing mode "814", and the first lamp pattern LZ comes to a permanent stop in the losing mode (extinguished). Further, although the background image HG continues to be played in a loop, the icon TI is erased as 10 frames of animation. Further, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the stoppage of fluctuation of the special symbol (the fluctuation effect is not being executed). Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound effect accompanying the stop of the production symbol 70a. In addition, a sound corresponding to the stoppage of fluctuation of the special symbol (fluctuation performance is not executed) is output.

Note that the fluctuating effects shown in FIGS. 310(b) and 310(c) may be variable effects in which the three effect symbols 70a temporarily stop in order, or may be variable effects in which the three effect symbols 70a stop all at once. It may be a performance.
When the three performance symbols 70a temporarily stop in sequence, first, when the performance symbol 70a in the left area temporarily stops, the sound effect of the temporary stop is output, and then the performance pattern in the right area When 70a temporarily stops, a sound effect indicating that it has temporarily stopped is output, and further thereafter, when the production pattern 70a in the middle area temporarily stops, a sound effect indicating that it has temporarily stopped is output.
Further, in the case of a variable performance in which the three performance symbols 70a stop all at once, when the three performance symbols 70a stop simultaneously, a sound effect indicating that the three performance symbols 70a have stopped is output. Moreover, the stop performed by the three performance symbols 70a at the same time may be a temporary stop or a permanent stop. If the stop that the three production symbols 70a perform at once is a temporary stop, a sound effect accompanying this temporary stop is output, and when the three production symbols 70a make a permanent stop after that, the sound accompanying the stop of the production symbol 70a is output. Not done. Furthermore, if the stop performed by the three production symbols 70a at the same time is the final stop (if the three production symbols 70a make the final stop all at once without going through a temporary stop), a sound effect accompanying this final stop is output. .

Next, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", and the second special symbol is Fluctuation display starts. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (second special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0" and a process for starting a variable production is performed.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 310(d), the second special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F changes from "1" in the specific update mode. The hold icon HI displayed in the second hold icon display area 70D is reduced to "0" and is shifted and displayed as an animation of 20 frames toward the icon display area 70C and displayed as the icon TI. Further, the icon TI periodically performs a rotation operation (presentation operation). Further, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the second lamp pattern LZ is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation). Further, the display content of the remaining number of times image ZKG is updated to "88 remaining". Further, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the execution of the variable effect. Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to the execution of the variable effect.
Also, at this time, an icon change effect is executed. In the icon change effect, the icon TI changes from white to red. Also, at this time, an effect is executed in which the icon TI moves around, and a changing action image HAG is displayed in the area where the icon moves around. In addition, the red icon TI continues its rotation operation (presentation operation). Also, at this time, the zone effect is started, and the zone effect image ZEG is displayed on the upper side of the first image display device 70. The zone effect image ZEG is displayed in blue. Further, the zone effect image ZEG shows the text "ZONE" scrolled left and right.

Next, as shown in FIG. 310(e), the "7" effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped in the left area and the right area, and the normal reach effect is executed. At this time, the effect pattern 70a slightly swings (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position. Further, at this time, the lamp LA continues to emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the execution of the variable effect. Moreover, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound effect accompanying the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a. Also, at this time, a sound corresponding to the normal reach effect is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 310(f), the effect symbols 70a in the left and right areas are displayed in a reduced size at the upper left and right corners of the first image display device 70, and the SP ready-to-reach effect is started. Further, the icon TI becomes hidden with the start of the SP reach effect. Also, at this time, the display color of the zone effect image ZEG changes from blue to red. Also, at this time, a background image HG corresponding to the SP reach effect is displayed. Moreover, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode according to the SP reach effect. Moreover, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound according to the SP reach effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 311(g), the effective period of the effect button 17 (single hit 5 seconds) occurs. At this time, an operation promotion image SG is displayed. The operation promotion image SG displays the text "Press!", an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 in a protruding state, and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the validity period. Also, although not shown, the effect button 17 emits red light at this time. Moreover, at this time, the effect pattern 70a on the right in the left is displayed at the upper left corner of the first image display device 70 in a further reduced form.

Thereafter, when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective period of the effect button 17 has elapsed, the success effect is started as shown in FIG. 311(h). Specifically, the first movable member 73 moves to the maximum operating position located in front of the first image display device 70 while emitting rainbow light, and the first image display device 70 displays the success effect image SEF. . Although not shown, a strong vibration effect (decision success vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for 4 seconds and then strongly vibrated for 5 seconds with a 1 second interval in between. . In addition, the screen temporarily stops when three performance symbols 70a of "7" are aligned at the upper left of the screen. Further, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the jackpot determination result being a jackpot. Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to the jackpot determination result being a jackpot. Note that at this time, the sound accompanying the stoppage of the effect pattern 70a is not output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 311(i), the effect pattern 70a is displayed in an enlarged manner and becomes temporarily stopped. On the other hand, the icon TI is not redisplayed. Further, a strong vibration performance (big hit confirmation vibration performance) is started in which the performance button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second without the validity period of the performance button 17. Also, at this time, a background image HG corresponding to the jackpot determination result being a jackpot is displayed. Further, at this time, the lamp LA continues to emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the jackpot determination result being a jackpot. Moreover, the audio output device 9 continues to output the sound in accordance with the jackpot determination result being a jackpot. Note that at this time, the sound accompanying the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a is not output.

Thereafter, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the second special figure starts in response to the fluctuating display of the second special symbol. Processing to end the variable performance is performed.
In this case, as shown in FIG. 311(j), the strong vibration performance is completed and the performance symbol 70a is fully stopped at "777", and the special symbol TZ is also fully stopped at "777". Moreover, the second lamp pattern LZ is stopped in a jackpot mode (lit). In addition, the lamp LA continues to emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the jackpot determination result being a jackpot. Moreover, the audio output device 9 continues to output the sound in accordance with the jackpot determination result being a jackpot.

Thereafter, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, a jackpot game (special game) is started. When the performance control unit 130m receives the opening designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for starting the opening performance of the jackpot game is performed.
In this case, the opening effect is executed as shown in FIG. 311(k). In the opening performance, an opening image OPG is displayed. In addition, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E and the second special figure reservation number displayed in the second special figure reservation number display area 70F maintain "0". do. Further, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode according to the opening effect. Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs sound according to the opening performance.

(Modification 1)
FIG. 312 is a diagram showing a modification (modification 1) of the variation effect example described using FIGS. 310 and 311.
Next, a modification example (modification example 1) of the variation effect example described using FIGS. 310 and 311 will be described using FIG. 312. Modification 1 is an example of a performance when the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command. In this modification example 1, in the case where the variable display of the special symbol is performed twice as described using FIG. 310 and FIG. This is an example of a performance performed when the time command is not normally received by the performance control unit 130m.

First, by performing the same effect as that described using FIGS. 310(a) and 310(b), the effect pattern 70a comes to a final stop at the stop position, as shown in FIG. 312(a). FIG. 312(a) is in the same state as FIG. 310(c).
Next, as the second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", the jackpot fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (2nd special symbol pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. If it is not possible (command abnormality has occurred), the second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "1", and the process of starting the second variable production is not performed.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 312(b), the second lamp pattern LZ continues to be in a permanently stopped state. Moreover, the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F maintains "1". In addition, based on the fact that the start command cannot be received normally, the production control unit 130m uses the production pattern 70a, the hold icon HI, the zone effect image ZEG, the background image HG, the lamp LA, and the audio output device 9, A predetermined effect is executed at the start.
While the predetermined performance is being executed at the start, the performance pattern 70a periodically moves up and down, and the hold icon HI periodically moves left and right. Further, while the predetermined start effect is being executed, the zone effect image ZEG and the background image HG are displayed in a manner corresponding to the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command. Further, while the predetermined effect at the time of start is being executed, the lamp LA emits light in a light emitting manner corresponding to the fact that the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command at the time of start. Further, while the predetermined start effect is being executed, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound in response to the fact that the effect control section 130m has not been able to properly receive the start command.

Thereafter, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the predetermined production at the start is performed.
In this case, as shown in FIG. 312(c), the performance symbol 70a that has been moving up and down comes to a final stop again in the losing mode "814" that was fully stopped in the previous variable performance. Further, the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop in the same losing mode “814” as the performance symbol 70a. In addition, the second lamp pattern LZ continues to be in a stopped state in a losing manner. Further, the hold icon HI that has been moving left and right is displayed in the second hold icon display area 70D, and resumes the periodic rotation operation (acting operation). Furthermore, the zone effect image ZEG is hidden. Furthermore, the background image HG corresponding to the production mode D is displayed again. On the other hand, "89 remaining" is maintained as the display content of the remaining number of times image ZKG. Further, the lamp LA emits light in a light emitting manner corresponding to the stoppage of fluctuation of the special symbol (the fluctuation performance is not executed). Further, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to the stoppage of variation of the special symbol (the fact that the variation effect is not executed). That is, the predetermined performance at the start ends.
On the other hand, the sound accompanying the stop of the production pattern 70a is not output. Moreover, the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F maintains "1".

Thereafter, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, a jackpot game (special game) is started. When the performance control unit 130m receives the opening designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing to start the opening performance of the jackpot game is performed.
In this case, the opening image OPG is displayed as shown in FIG. 312(d). Further, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode according to the opening effect. Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs sound according to the opening performance. Moreover, at this time, the display of "1" is maintained as the second special symbol reservation number in the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special symbol reservation number display area 70F.

Here, "1" which is the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F is based on the new winning in the second starting opening 47. The winning command (winning signal) is normally received, or the start command based on the start of the variable display of the 2nd special symbol (2nd special symbol pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol as the start signal) This is maintained until the production control unit 130m receives the figure variation pattern designation command). In other words, a new winning command (winning signal) based on a winning in the first start opening 45, a starting command based on the start of the variable display of the first special symbol (first special symbol pending number as a starting signal), etc. Even if the performance control unit 130m receives a specified command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command), the special symbol reservation command is displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special symbol reservation number display area 70F. “1” is maintained as the second special figure reservation number.

(Modification 2)
FIG. 313 is a diagram showing another modification (modification 2) of the variation effect example described using FIGS. 310 and 311.
Next, using FIG. 313, another modification (modification 2) of the variation effect example described using FIGS. 310 and 311 will be described. Modification 2 is an example of a performance when the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command. In this modification example 2, when the variable display of the special symbol is performed twice as explained using FIG. 310 and FIG. This is an example of a production performed when the production control unit 130m does not normally receive the hour command and the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at the timing when the second variable display is started.

First, by performing the same effect as that described using FIG. 310(a), the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started as shown in FIG. 313(a). FIG. 313(a) is in the same state as FIG. 310(b).
Thereafter, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (a command error has occurred), the variable production will be terminated. processing will not be performed.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 313(b), the first lamp pattern LZ continues to be displayed in a variable manner. In addition, based on the fact that the command at stop cannot be received normally, the production control unit 130m uses the production pattern 70a, the hold icon HI, the background image HG, the lamp LA, and the audio output device 9 to perform a predetermined production at the time of stop. Execute.
While the predetermined effect at the time of stop is being executed, the effect pattern 70a periodically moves left and right, and the hold icon HI periodically moves up and down. Further, while the predetermined effect at stop is being executed, the background image HG is displayed in a manner corresponding to the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command at stop. Further, while the predetermined effect at the time of stop is being executed, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the fact that the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command at the time of stop. Further, while the predetermined effect at the time of stop is being executed, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound in response to the fact that the effect control section 130m has not been able to normally receive the command at the time of stop. On the other hand, the predetermined effect at the time of stop by the icon TI is not executed.

Next, as the second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", the jackpot fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (2nd special symbol pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. If it is not possible (command abnormality has occurred), the second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "1", and the process of starting the second variable production is not performed.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 313(c), the first lamp pattern LZ continues to be displayed in a variable manner, and the second lamp pattern LZ continues to be in a permanently stopped state. Moreover, the display of "1" is maintained as the second special symbol reservation number in the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special symbol reservation number display area 70F. In addition, based on the fact that the start command cannot be received normally, the production control unit 130m uses the production pattern 70a, the hold icon HI, the zone effect image ZEG, the background image HG, the lamp LA, and the audio output device 9, A predetermined effect is executed at the start.
While the predetermined performance is being executed at the start, the performance pattern 70a periodically moves up and down, and the hold icon HI periodically moves left and right. Further, while the predetermined start effect is being executed, the zone effect image ZEG and the background image HG are displayed in a manner corresponding to the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command. Further, while the predetermined effect at the time of start is being executed, the lamp LA emits light in a light emitting manner corresponding to the fact that the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command at the time of start. Further, while the predetermined start effect is being executed, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound in response to the fact that the effect control section 130m has not been able to properly receive the start command. On the other hand, the predetermined effect at the time of start by the icon TI is not executed.

Thereafter, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the predetermined production at the start is performed.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 313(d), the first lamp pattern LZ comes to a final stop in a losing manner. In addition, the second lamp pattern LZ continues to be in a stopped state in a losing manner. In addition, the effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ that have been moving up and down come to a stop in the losing mode "814". Furthermore, the icon TI is erased with one frame of non-animation. Further, the hold icon HI that has been moving left and right is displayed in the second hold icon display area 70D, and resumes its periodic rotation operation (presentation operation). Furthermore, the zone effect image ZEG is hidden. Furthermore, the background image HG corresponding to the production mode D is displayed again. Further, the lamp LA emits light in a light emitting manner according to the stoppage of fluctuation of the special symbol (the fluctuation performance is not executed). Further, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to the stoppage of variation of the special symbol (the fact that the variation effect is not executed). That is, the predetermined performance at the start ends.
On the other hand, the sound accompanying the stop of the production pattern 70a is not output. Further, "89 remaining" is maintained as the display content of the remaining number of times image ZKG. Moreover, the display of "1" is maintained as the second special symbol reservation number in the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special symbol reservation number display area 70F.

Thereafter, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, a jackpot game (special game) is started. When the performance control unit 130m receives the opening designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for starting the opening performance of the jackpot game is performed.
At this time, the opening image OPG is displayed as shown in FIG. 313(e). Further, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode according to the opening effect. Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs sound according to the opening performance. Moreover, the display of "1" is maintained as the second special symbol reservation number in the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special symbol reservation number display area 70F.

Here, "1" which is the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F is based on the new winning in the second starting opening 47. The winning command (winning signal) is normally received, or the start command based on the start of the variable display of the 2nd special symbol (2nd special symbol pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol as the start signal) This is maintained until the effect control unit 130m receives the figure variation pattern designation command). In other words, a new winning command (winning signal) based on a winning in the first start opening 45, a starting command based on the start of the variable display of the first special symbol (first special symbol pending number as a starting signal), etc. Even if the performance control unit 130m receives a specified command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command), the special symbol reservation command is displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special symbol reservation number display area 70F. “1” is maintained as the second special figure reservation number.

As described above, in this embodiment, if a specific signal is not normally received in a specific gaming state, the display of the guide image AG is restricted, but the volume and light intensity can be set according to the operation of the cross key 18. be.
In particular, in the present embodiment, in a specific gaming state, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives a start command related to a specific variable display in which an SP reach effect or a winning success effect is executed as a variable effect, the promotion control unit 130m displays a promotion image. SG is displayed (see FIGS. 299(f) and 311(g)), and a performance is executed according to the operation of the performance button 17 (see FIGS. 300(g) and 311(h)). On the other hand, in a specific gaming state, if the start command related to a specific variable display in which an SP reach effect or a winning success effect is executed as a variable effect is not normally received, the effect control unit 130m controls the display of the promotion image SG. Even if the performance button 17 is operated at this time, the performance corresponding to the operation of the performance button 17 is not executed.
In this way, when the production control unit 130m does not normally receive a command in a specific game state, by validly accepting or disabling the operation depending on the target operated by the player, a production that feels strange can be prevented. This prevents player's dissatisfaction from accumulating by suppressing the player's operation from being executed and not accepting the player's operation.

In addition, in this embodiment, in a specific game state, if the performance control unit 130m does not normally receive the stop command related to the variable display of the first special symbol (FIG. 303(b), FIG. 305(b), 313(b)), the predetermined effect at the time of stop by the icon TI is not executed. Furthermore, during execution of the first variable performance in a specific gaming state, if the performance control unit 130m does not normally receive the start command related to the variable display of the second special symbol (Fig. 305(c), Fig. 313(c) )), the predetermined effect at the start by the icon TI is not executed.
In this case, in a specific game state in which right-handed players should play, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effects unique to the specific gaming state by suppressing the excessive effects caused by the icon TI that occur when winning a prize by left-handed players. can.

FIG. 314 is a diagram showing the relationship between the performance executed in the variable performance example and each modified example and the timing at which the performance is executed.

(Execution timing of performance in variable performance example)
In the variable performance example shown in FIG. 314, at time T1, the performance control unit 130m issues a start time command related to the first special symbol (a first special symbol reservation number designation command as a start time signal, a special symbol designation command, Special figure fluctuation pattern specification command) is received normally.
Next, at time T2, the first variable effect is started. Also, at this time, the effect pattern 70a is expanded/contracted. Moreover, at this time, the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F is updated. Further, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the execution of the variable effect (variable display). Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to the execution of the fluctuating effect (fluctuation display). Time T2 is the time shown in FIG. 310(b).

Next, at time T3, the production control unit 130m normally receives a stop command (special symbol stop designation command as a stop signal) regarding the first special symbol.
Next, at time T4, the production pattern 70a comes to a full stop. Also, at this time, the icon TI is deleted. Further, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the stoppage of fluctuation of the special symbol (the fluctuation effect is not being executed). Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound effect accompanying the stop of the production symbol 70a. Also, at this time, a sound corresponding to the stoppage of the variation of the special symbol (the fact that the variation effect is not being performed) is output. Time T4 is the time shown in FIG. 310(c).

Next, at time T5, the production control unit 130m sends a start time command related to the second special symbol (second special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command as a start time signal). Successfully received.
Next, at time T6, a second variation effect is started. Moreover, at this time, the expansion/contraction operation of the effect pattern 70a and the shift display of the hold icon HI are performed. Also, at this time, an icon change effect is performed. Also, at this time, a zone effect is started. Moreover, at this time, the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F is updated. Further, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the execution of the variable effect. Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to the execution of the variable effect. Time T6 is the time shown in FIG. 310(d).

Next, at time T7, a reach effect is started. Also, at this time, a swinging motion is performed in the production pattern 70a. Also, at this time, a sound effect accompanying the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a is output. Also, at this time, a sound corresponding to the normal reach effect is output. Time T7 is the time shown in FIG. 310(e).

Next, at time T8, the SP ready-to-reach effect is started. Also, at this time, the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a reduced size. Also, at this time, the display color of the zone effect image ZEG changes. Also, at this time, a background image HG corresponding to the SP reach effect is displayed. Moreover, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode according to the SP reach performance. Moreover, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound according to the SP reach performance. Time T8 is the time shown in FIG. 310(f).
Next, at time T9, a promotion image is displayed. Time T9 is the time shown in FIG. 311(g).

Next, at time T10, a successful decision performance is performed. Moreover, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode according to the jackpot determination result being a jackpot. Moreover, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to the jackpot determination result being a jackpot. Time T10 is the time shown in FIG. 311(h).
Next, at time T11, the left center right effect pattern 70a temporarily stops. Also, at this time, a background image HG corresponding to the jackpot determination result being a jackpot is displayed. Note that at this time, the sound accompanying the temporary stop of the effect pattern 70a is not output. Time T11 is the time shown in FIG. 311(i).

Next, at time T12, the production control unit 130m normally receives a stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal).
Next, at time T13, the performance symbol 70a comes to a full stop. Time T14 is the time shown in FIG. 311(j).

(Execution timing of performance in modification 1)
In addition, in the first modification, at time T5, the production control unit 130m issues a start time command related to the second special symbol (a second special symbol reservation number designation command as a start signal, a special symbol designation command, a special symbol fluctuation command, etc.). (pattern specification command) is not received correctly.
Next, at time T6, a predetermined performance is started using the performance pattern 70a, the hold icon HI, the zone effect image ZEG, the background image HG, the lamp LA, and the audio output device 9. Time T6 is the time shown in FIG. 312(b).
Next, at time T12, the production control unit 130m normally receives a stop command (special symbol stop designation command as a stop signal) regarding the second special symbol.

Next, at time T13, the predetermined performance at the start ends. That is, the predetermined effect at the start is executed from time T6 to time T13. In the first modification, execution of each effect that was performed from time T6 to time T12 in the variable effect examples shown in FIGS. 310 and 311 is restricted.
Further, at time T13, the production pattern 70a comes to a final stop. Further, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the stoppage of fluctuation of the special symbol (the fluctuation performance is not executed). Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to the stop of variation of the special symbol (the fact that the variation effect is not executed). Time T13 is the time shown in FIG. 312(c).

(Execution timing of performance in modification 2)
In addition, in the second modification, at time T3, the production control unit 130m does not normally receive the stop command (special symbol stop designation command as a stop signal) related to the first special symbol.
Next, at time T4, a predetermined effect at the time of stop using the effect pattern 70a, the hold icon HI, the background image HG, the lamp LA, and the audio output device 9 is started. Time T4 is the time shown in FIG. 313(b).
Next, at time T5, the production control unit 130m sends a start time command related to the second special symbol (second special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command as a start time signal). Not received properly.

Next, at time T6, the predetermined stop effect ends. That is, the predetermined effect at the time of stop is executed from time point T4 to time point T6. In the second modification, execution of each effect that was performed from time point T4 to time point T6 in the variable effect example shown in FIGS. 310 and 311 is restricted.
Further, at time T6, a predetermined performance is started using the performance pattern 70a, the hold icon HI, the zone effect image ZEG, the background image HG, the lamp LA, and the audio output device 9. Time T6 is the time shown in FIG. 313(c).
Next, at time T12, the production control unit 130m normally receives a stop command (special symbol stop designation command as a stop signal) regarding the second special symbol.

Next, at time T13, the predetermined performance at the start ends. That is, the predetermined effect at the start is executed from time T6 to time T13. In the second modification, execution of each effect that was performed from time T6 to time T12 in the variable effect examples shown in FIGS. 310 and 311 is restricted.
Further, at time T13, the production pattern 70a comes to a final stop. Also, at this time, the icon TI is deleted. Further, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the stoppage of fluctuation of the special symbol (the fluctuation effect is not being executed). Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to the stop of variation of the special symbol (the fact that the variation effect is not executed). Time T13 is the time shown in FIG. 313(d).

Note that at the timing of time T3 and time T5, the production control unit 130m was able to normally receive the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m. Even when the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command sent from the production control unit 130m (command abnormality has occurred), the command sent from the main control unit 110m (stop command, The same process as in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command) (command abnormality has occurred) is performed.

In addition, at the timing of time T3 and the timing of time T5, the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m, and furthermore, at the timing of time T12, The production control unit 130m was unable to properly receive the stop command (stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m, and thereafter, at a predetermined timing, the production control unit 130m received an opening designation command sent from the main control unit 110m. If it is successfully received, a process is performed at this timing to end the first variable performance that was started in response to the variable display of the first special symbol and to start the opening performance.
Then, the relevant icon TI displayed in the relevant icon display area 70C is changed to one frame's worth without stopping and displaying the temporarily stopped loss mode production pattern 70a and the fluctuatingly displayed special design TZ. The opening image will be displayed without being erased as an animation (actually, the effects other than the opening effect will end).

As described above, in this embodiment, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives a specific signal at a predetermined timing in a specific gaming state, it is possible to execute a specific performance at a specific timing, If the signal is not received normally, execution of a specific effect at a specific timing is restricted and a predetermined effect is executed. Examples of the specific signal include a start command, a stop command, a customer waiting state designation command, and the like. Further, examples of the predetermined effects include a predetermined effect at the time of start, a predetermined effect at the time of stop, a predetermined effect while waiting for customers, and the like.
In this case, when the performance control unit 130m does not normally receive the specific signal at the predetermined timing in the specific gaming state, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game because the performance is not executed, and to improve the interest of the game. can.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives a specific signal at a predetermined timing in a specific gaming state, it is possible to execute a specific display performance regarding the pending icon HI (the icon TI) at the specific timing. If a specific signal is not normally received at a predetermined timing in a specific gaming state, execution of a specific display effect at the specific timing is restricted, and a predetermined display effect regarding the pending icon HI (the icon TI) is executed. Specific display effects include, for example, icon change effects, shift display of a pending icon HI, deletion of the icon TI, and the like. In addition, examples of the predetermined display effects include, for example, a predetermined effect at the time of start and a predetermined effect at the time of stop using the hold icon HI (the icon TI).
In this case, if the performance control unit 130m does not normally receive a specific signal at a predetermined timing in a specific gaming state, the performance based on the hold icon HI (the icon TI) is not executed and the player can be prevented from getting bored with the game. , it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In particular, in this embodiment, in a specific game state, the predetermined display effect is a periodic (repeatable) operation display by the hold icon HI (the icon TI). Therefore, the player can recognize the predetermined display effects without missing them, and can improve the interest of the game.
Further, in the specific game state, the predetermined display effect is started before the specific timing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game before the predetermined display effect is started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives a specific signal at a predetermined timing in a specific gaming state, it is possible to execute a specific special performance regarding the background image HG, etc. at the specific timing, and If the specific signal is not normally received at a predetermined timing in , execution of a specific special effect at the specific timing is restricted, and a predetermined special effect regarding the background image HG etc. is executed. Specific special effects include, for example, displaying the background image HG in accordance with the SP reach effect, changing the background image HG in accordance with a change in the set effect mode, and the like. Furthermore, examples of the predetermined special effects include a predetermined effect at the time of start, a predetermined effect at the time of stop, a predetermined effect while waiting for a customer, etc. using the background image HG.
In this case, when the performance control unit 130m does not normally receive the specific signal at the predetermined timing in the specific gaming state, the performance based on the background image HG is not executed, which prevents the player from getting bored with the game, and increases the interest of the game. can be improved.

In particular, in this embodiment, in a specific game state, the predetermined special performance is a periodic (repeatable) action display using the background image HG. Therefore, the player can recognize the predetermined special performance without missing it, and can improve the interest of the game.
Further, the predetermined special performance is started before the specific timing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game before the predetermined special performance is started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a specific signal is normally received at a predetermined timing in a specific gaming state, it is possible to execute a specific symbol production regarding the production symbol 70a at the specific timing, and the specific signal is received at a predetermined timing in the specific gaming state. If the reception is not normal, execution of a specific symbol presentation at a specific timing is restricted, and a predetermined symbol presentation regarding the presentation symbol 70a is executed. Specific symbol effects include, for example, an expansion/contraction movement of the effect pattern 70a when a variable effect is started, a fluctuation movement of the effect pattern 70a when a reach effect is started, a reduction of the effect pattern 70a in an SP reach effect, etc. Can be mentioned. Furthermore, examples of the predetermined symbol presentation include a predetermined presentation at the time of start and a predetermined presentation at the time of stop using the presentation pattern 70a.
In this case, when the production control unit 130m does not normally receive the specific signal at the predetermined timing in the specific gaming state, the production by the production symbols 70a is not executed and the player can be prevented from getting bored with the game, thereby increasing the interest of the game. can be improved.

In particular, in this embodiment, in a specific game state, the predetermined symbol performance is a periodic (repeatable) movement display by the performance symbol 70a. Therefore, the player can recognize the predetermined symbol presentation without missing it, and can improve the interest of the game.
Further, the predetermined symbol presentation is started before the specific timing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game before the start of the predetermined symbol presentation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives a specific signal at a predetermined timing in a specific gaming state, it is possible to execute a specific light emission performance regarding light emission of the light emitting unit at the specific timing, and If the specific signal is not normally received at a predetermined timing in , execution of a specific light emitting effect at the specific timing is restricted, and a predetermined light emitting effect regarding light emission of the light emitting unit is executed. Examples of the light emitting section include a lamp LA and the like. In addition, as specific light-emitting effects, for example, the lamp LA emits light in a light-emitting manner according to the SP reach effect, the lamp LA emits light in a light-emitting manner according to the jackpot determination result, and during execution of a variable effect. Examples include light emission from the lamp LA in a corresponding light emission mode. Furthermore, examples of the predetermined light emitting effects include a predetermined start effect using the lamp LA, a predetermined stop effect, a predetermined effect while waiting for a customer, and the like.
In this case, when the performance control unit 130m does not normally receive the specific signal at the predetermined timing in the specific gaming state, the performance by the lamp LA is not executed and the player can be prevented from getting bored with the game, thereby improving the interest of the game. can be done.

In particular, in this embodiment, in a specific game state, the predetermined light emission effect is started before the specific timing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game before the predetermined light emitting effect is started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command related to a specific variable production after successfully receiving the start command related to the specific variation production (modification of FIG. 305 Cases such as Example 4) exist. Even in this case, a specific sound effect accompanying the stop of the effect pattern 70a is executed as an effect executed in a specific variable effect. Specific sound effects include, for example, the output of a sound effect when the effect pattern 70a stops as shown in FIG. 299(c), the output of a sound effect as the effect pattern 70a stops as shown in FIG. 299(d), etc. It will be done. On the other hand, after the start of the predetermined effect at the time of stop, although the effect pattern 70a is displayed, the specific sound effect is not executed. That is, in this embodiment, if the production control unit 130m does not normally receive the stop signal at a predetermined timing in a specific gaming state, the production control unit 130m executes a specific sound production in conjunction with the stop of the production symbol 70a before the predetermined timing. However, although the effect pattern 70a is displayed after a predetermined timing, a specific sound effect is not executed. Examples of the stop signal include a stop command.
In this case, the performance after the performance control unit 130m fails to normally receive the predetermined signal in a specific game state is suppressed from becoming excessively noticeable, and the performance pattern 70a is not displayed and the player is prevented from getting bored with the game. It is possible to suppress this and improve the interest of the game.

Note that while the gaming machine 1 is provided with a start command, it may not be provided with a stop command. In such a case, the performance control unit 130m controls the start time of a specific variable performance (for example, the variable performance shown in FIGS. 299(b) to 299(f) and 300(g) to 300(j)). While the command is received normally, the start command related to the next variable effect (for example, the variable effects shown in FIG. 300(k) and FIG. 300(l)) may not be received normally (the modification of FIG. 305). Example 4). Even in this case, a specific sound effect in a specific variable effect, such as the output of a sound effect accompanying the stop of the effect pattern 70a shown in FIG. 299(c), is executed. On the other hand, the specific sound effect (the output of the sound effect accompanying the stop of the effect pattern 70a shown in FIG. 300(l)) that was supposed to be executed in the next variable effect after the specific variable effect is not executed. Therefore, if the production control unit 130m does not normally receive the start signal (start command) at a predetermined timing in the normal gaming state, the production control unit 130m performs a specific sound production upon stopping the production symbol 70a before the predetermined timing. After a predetermined timing, the production pattern 70a is displayed, but the specific sound production is not executed. That is, the stop signal (stop command) includes a start signal (start command).

Moreover, in this embodiment, the production control unit 130m ends the specific production when the predetermined signal is normally received without normally receiving the start time signal during execution of the specific production in the specific gaming state. Examples of the specific performance include a customer waiting performance and the like. Furthermore, examples of the predetermined signal include a stop command and the like.
In this case, when the performance control section 130m normally receives the predetermined signal, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game because the customer waiting performance does not end, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the performance control unit 130m does not normally receive the start command and normally receives the winning command while executing the customer waiting performance in a specific gaming state, it ends the customer waiting performance (customer waiting image KMG ), and display the pending icon HI corresponding to the winning prize. In addition, during the execution of the customer waiting performance in a specific gaming state, the performance control unit 130m does not normally receive the start time command and stop time command related to the fluctuation in which the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, and sends the opening designation command. It may be received normally. In this case, the performance control unit 130m ends the customer waiting performance (hides the customer waiting image KMG) and displays the opening image OPG. Therefore, during the execution of the customer waiting performance in a specific gaming state, the command that must be received normally in order to end the customer waiting performance without the performance control unit 130m normally receiving the start command is not received at the time of stopping. The command is not limited to this, and may be a winning command or an opening designation command. That is, the predetermined signal includes a winning command, an opening designation command, and the like.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives a stop command without normally receiving a start command during execution of a customer waiting performance in a specific gaming state, the performance control unit 130m controls the performance pattern 70a that has been stopped. is displayed (see FIG. 307(d)). In addition, the performance control unit 130m may not normally receive the start time command but normally receive the prize winning command while executing the customer waiting performance in a specific gaming state. In this case, the performance control unit 130m ends the customer waiting performance (hides the customer waiting image KMG), and displays the hold icon HI corresponding to the winning prize and the performance pattern 70a. Furthermore, in this case, the displayed performance symbol 70a is stopped until the hold icon HI is shifted and displayed (until the variable performance is started). That is, in this embodiment, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives a predetermined signal without normally receiving a start command during execution of a specific performance in a specific gaming state, the performance control unit 130m displays the stopped performance symbol 70a. let Examples of the predetermined signal include a stop command, a winning command, and the like.
In this case, even if the start command cannot be received normally during execution of the customer waiting performance in a specific gaming state, it is possible to suggest that the performance related to the performance symbol 70a has been performed or will be performed in the future. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game due to the lack of performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, if the performance control unit 130m does not normally receive a specific signal at a predetermined timing in a specific gaming state, the performance control unit 130m restricts the execution of a specific operation performance at a specific timing, but Predetermined settings can be made accordingly. Examples of the operation means include the cross key 18 and the like. Examples of the specific signal include a customer waiting state designation command and the like. Moreover, as a specific operation performance, for example, displaying a guide image AG, etc. can be mentioned. Furthermore, examples of the predetermined settings include changing the volume, changing the amount of light, and the like.
In this case, when the performance control unit 130m does not normally receive the specific signal, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game due to not being able to make a predetermined setting according to the operation of the operating means, and to improve the interest of the game. I can do it.

In particular, in the present embodiment, in a specific gaming state, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives a start command related to a specific variable display in which an SP reach effect or a winning success effect is executed as a variable effect, the promotion control unit 130m displays a promotion image. SG is displayed (see FIGS. 299(f) and 311(g)), and a performance is executed according to the operation of the performance button 17 (see FIGS. 300(g) and 311(h)). On the other hand, the performance control unit 130m controls the display of the promotion image SG when it does not normally receive the start command related to a specific variable display in which the SP reach performance or the winning success performance is executed as a variable performance in the normal gaming state. Even if the performance button 17 is operated at this time, the performance corresponding to the operation of the performance button 17 is not executed.
In this way, when the production control unit 130m does not normally receive a command in a specific game state, by validly accepting or disabling the operation depending on the target operated by the player, a production that feels strange can be prevented. This prevents player's dissatisfaction from accumulating by suppressing the player's operation from being executed and not accepting the player's operation.

In addition, in this embodiment, although the guidance image AG is displayed based on the performance control part 130m normally receiving the customer waiting state designation command, it is not limited to this. The production control unit 130m may display the guide image AG based on receiving the stop command. In this case, if the stop command is not normally received at a predetermined timing in a specific gaming state, the production control unit 130m limits the display of the guide image AG, and adjusts the volume and volume according to the operation of the cross key 18. The amount of light may be changed. Therefore, the display of the guide image AG is restricted if the production control unit 130m does not receive it normally, but the commands that allow predetermined settings according to the operation of the operating means are not limited to the customer waiting state designation command, It may also be a stop command. That is, the specific signal also includes a stop command.
In addition, if the performance control unit 130m does not normally receive a specific signal at a predetermined timing in a specific gaming state, it restricts the execution of the operation performance at the specific timing, but the performance control unit 130m restricts the execution of the operation performance at the specific timing, It may be possible. For example, if the performance button 17 is operated while the display of the guide image AG is restricted because the performance control unit 130m does not normally receive a specific signal, the execution rate of the reach performance in the variable performance will change. It may be possible to customize the effects such as settings. That is, the operation means also includes the production button 17.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the production control unit 130m limits execution of the ready-to-win production at a specific timing when a new variation production is not started even if a specific variation display is started in a specific gaming state. Examples of the specific fluctuation display include a jackpot fluctuation display and the like.
In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable that the ready-to-win performance is executed even though a new variable performance has not been started in the specific game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a new variable performance is not started even if a jackpot variation display in which the jackpot determination result is a jackpot is started in a specific gaming state, while the jackpot variation display is being executed, the jackpot determination result is The jackpot notification effect that notifies you of a jackpot is not executed (see FIG. 313(d)).
In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable that the jackpot notification performance is executed even though the variable performance corresponding to the jackpot fluctuation display has not started.

(Example of variable performance)
FIGS. 315 and 316 are diagrams showing examples of variable effects executed in a specific game state.
Next, an example of a variable performance executed by the performance control unit 130m will be described using FIGS. 315 and 316. In the examples of variable effects shown in FIGS. 315 and 316, variable effects are performed twice in a specific gaming state. The first variable performance of these two variable performances is a variable performance based on a loss in the jackpot determination result and winning in the second starting opening 47, and is a variable performance in which a ready-to-win performance is not executed. Furthermore, the second variable presentation of the two variable presentations is a variable presentation based on the jackpot determination result being a jackpot and winning in the first starting opening 45.

As shown in FIG. 315(a), as the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are permanently stopped in the losing mode "285". In addition, both the first lamp pattern LZ and the second lamp pattern LZ are in a losing state (extinguished) and are permanently stopped. Furthermore, "1" is displayed on the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84. Moreover, "1" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F. Further, one hold icon HI is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B. This hold icon HI periodically performs a rotation operation (presentation operation). Further, a background image HG, a mode identification image MSG, and a remaining number of times image ZKG corresponding to the production mode D are displayed. Further, the lamp LA emits light in a light emitting manner corresponding to the stoppage of fluctuation of the special symbol (the fluctuation performance is not executed). Further, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to the stoppage of fluctuation of the special symbol (the fact that the fluctuation effect is not executed).

Next, as the number of reserved second special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", a loss fluctuation display of the second special symbols is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (second special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0" and a process is performed to start the second variable production.
In this case, as shown in FIG. 315(b), the second special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F changes from "1" in the specific update mode. The hold icon HI displayed in the second hold icon display area 70D is reduced to "0" and is shifted and displayed as an animation of 20 frames toward the icon display area 70C and displayed as the icon TI. Further, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the second lamp pattern LZ is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation). Further, the icon TI periodically performs a rotation operation (preparation operation). Further, the display content of the remaining number of times image ZKG is updated to "89 remaining". Further, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the execution of the variable effect. Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 is outputting a sound corresponding to the execution of the variable effect.

Then, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed.
In this case, as shown in FIG. 315(c), the background image HG continues to be played in a loop, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the production pattern 70a comes to a final stop at the stop position, the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop in the same losing mode as the production symbol 70a "814", and the second lamp pattern LZ makes a permanent stop in a losing mode (lights out). Further, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the stoppage of fluctuation of the special symbol (the fluctuation effect is not being executed). Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound effect accompanying the main stop of the production pattern 70a. Also, at this time, a sound corresponding to the stoppage of the variation of the special symbol (the fact that the variation effect is not being performed) is output.

Note that the fluctuating effects shown in FIGS. 315(b) and 315(c) may be a variable effect in which the three effect symbols 70a temporarily stop in order, or a variable effect in which the three effect symbols 70a stop all at once. It may be a performance.
When the three performance symbols 70a temporarily stop in sequence, first, when the performance symbol 70a in the left area temporarily stops, the sound effect of the temporary stop is output, and then the performance pattern in the right area When 70a temporarily stops, a sound effect indicating that it has temporarily stopped is output, and further thereafter, when the production pattern 70a in the middle area temporarily stops, a sound effect indicating that it has temporarily stopped is output.
Further, in the case of a variable performance in which the three performance symbols 70a stop all at once, when the three performance symbols 70a stop simultaneously, a sound effect indicating that the three performance symbols 70a have stopped is output. Moreover, the stop performed by the three performance symbols 70a at the same time may be a temporary stop or a permanent stop. If the stop that the three production symbols 70a perform at once is a temporary stop, a sound effect accompanying this temporary stop is output, and when the three production symbols 70a make a permanent stop after that, the sound accompanying the stop of the production symbol 70a is output. Not done. Furthermore, if the stop performed by the three production symbols 70a at the same time is the final stop (if the three production symbols 70a make the final stop all at once without going through a temporary stop), a sound effect accompanying this final stop is output. .

Next, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", and the number of the first special symbols is reduced from "1" to "0". Fluctuation display starts. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0" and a process for starting a variable production is performed.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 315(d), the number of reserved first special symbols displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E changes from "1" in the specific update mode. The icon TI is reduced to "0" and displayed as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the icon TI performs a periodic rotation operation (rendering operation). In addition, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation). Further, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the execution of the variable effect. Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to the execution of the variable effect.
Also, at this time, an icon change effect is executed. In the icon change effect, the icon TI changes from white to red. Also, at this time, an effect is executed in which the icon TI moves around, and a changing action image HAG is displayed in the area where the icon moves around. In addition, the red icon TI continues its periodic rotational movement (presentation movement). Also, at this time, the zone effect is started, and the zone effect image ZEG is displayed on the upper side of the first image display device 70. The zone effect image ZEG is displayed in blue. Further, the zone effect image ZEG shows the text "ZONE" scrolled left and right.

Next, as shown in FIG. 315(e), the "7" effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped in the left area and the right area, and the normal reach effect is executed. At this time, the production pattern 70a performs a slight swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position. Further, at this time, the lamp LA continues to emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the execution of the variable effect. Moreover, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound effect accompanying the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a. Also, at this time, a sound corresponding to the normal reach effect is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 315(f), the effect symbols 70a in the left and right areas are reduced and displayed in the upper left and right corners of the first image display device 70, and the SP ready-to-reach effect is started. Further, the icon TI becomes hidden with the start of the SP reach effect. Also, at this time, the display color of the zone effect image ZEG changes from blue to red. Also, at this time, a background image HG corresponding to the SP reach effect is displayed. Moreover, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode according to the SP reach performance. Moreover, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound according to the SP reach performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 316(g), the effective period of the effect button 17 (single hit 5 seconds) occurs. At this time, an operation promotion image SG is displayed. The operation promotion image SG displays the text "Press!", an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 in a protruding state, and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the validity period. Also, although not shown, the effect button 17 emits red light at this time. Moreover, at this time, the effect pattern 70a on the right in the left is displayed at the upper left corner of the first image display device 70 in a further reduced form.

Thereafter, when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective period of the effect button 17 has elapsed, as shown in FIG. The first image display device 70 moves to the maximum operation position located in front of the first image display device 70, and the success effect image SEF is displayed on the first image display device 70. Although not shown, a strong vibration effect (decision success vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for 4 seconds and then strongly vibrated for 5 seconds with a 1 second interval in between. . Further, the game temporarily stops when three "7" performance symbols 70a are aligned at the upper left of the screen. Further, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the jackpot determination result being a jackpot. Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to the jackpot determination result being a jackpot. Note that at this time, the sound accompanying the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a is not output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 316(i), the effect pattern 70a is displayed in an enlarged manner and becomes temporarily stopped. On the other hand, the icon TI is not redisplayed. Further, a strong vibration performance (big hit confirmation vibration performance) is started in which the performance button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second without the validity period of the performance button 17. Also, at this time, a background image HG corresponding to the jackpot determination result being a jackpot is displayed. Further, at this time, the lamp LA continues to emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the jackpot determination result being a jackpot. Moreover, the audio output device 9 continues to output the sound in accordance with the jackpot determination result being a jackpot. Note that at this time, the sound accompanying the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a is not output.

Thereafter, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first Processing to end the variable performance is performed.
At this time, as shown in FIG. 316(j), the strong vibration performance is completed and the performance symbol 70a is fully stopped at "777", and the special symbol TZ is also fully stopped at "777". Further, the first lamp pattern LZ is stopped in a jackpot mode (lit). In addition, the lamp LA continues to emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the jackpot determination result being a jackpot. Moreover, the audio output device 9 continues to output the sound in accordance with the jackpot determination result being a jackpot.
It should be noted that when the performance symbol 70a notifying the jackpot comes to a final stop, the sound output device 9 may not output the sound.

Thereafter, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, a jackpot game (special game) is started. When the performance control unit 130m receives the opening designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for starting the opening performance of the jackpot game is performed.
At this time, the opening image OPG is displayed as shown in FIG. 316(k). In addition, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E and the second special figure reservation number displayed in the second special figure reservation number display area 70F maintain "0". do. Further, at this time, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode according to the opening effect. Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs sound according to the opening performance.

(Modification 1)
FIG. 317 is a diagram showing a modification (modification 1) of the variation effect example described using FIGS. 315 and 316.
Next, a modification example (modification example 1) of the variation effect example described using FIGS. 315 and 316 will be described using FIG. 317. Modification 1 is an example of a performance when the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command. In this modification example 1, when the variable display of the special symbol is performed twice as described using FIG. 315 and FIG. This is an example of a performance performed when the time command is not normally received by the performance control unit 130m.

First, the same effect as that described using FIGS. 315(a) and 315(b) is performed, and as shown in FIG. 317(a), the effect pattern 70a is in the losing mode "814" Stop. FIG. 317(a) is the same state as FIG. 315(c).
Next, as the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", a jackpot fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. If it is not possible (command abnormality has occurred), the first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "1", and the process of starting the first variable production is not performed.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 317(b), the first lamp pattern LZ continues to be in a permanently stopped state. Further, the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E maintain the display of "1" as the first special symbol reservation number. In addition, based on the fact that the start command cannot be received normally, the production control unit 130m uses the production pattern 70a, the zone effect image ZEG, the background image HG, the lamp LA, and the audio output device 9 to create a predetermined production at the start time. Execute.
While the predetermined performance is being executed at the start, the performance pattern 70a periodically moves up and down. Further, while the predetermined start effect is being executed, the zone effect image ZEG and the background image HG are displayed in a manner corresponding to the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command. Further, while the predetermined effect at the time of start is being executed, the lamp LA emits light in a light emitting manner corresponding to the fact that the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command at the time of start. Further, while the predetermined start effect is being executed, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound in response to the fact that the effect control section 130m has not been able to properly receive the start command.

Thereafter, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the predetermined production at the start is performed.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 317(c), the performance symbol 70a that has been moving up and down comes to a final stop again in the loss mode "814" that was fully stopped in the previous variable performance. Furthermore, the zone effect image ZEG is hidden. Furthermore, the background image HG corresponding to the production mode D is displayed again. Further, the lamp LA emits light in a light emitting manner corresponding to the stoppage of fluctuation of the special symbol (the fluctuation performance is not executed). Further, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to the stoppage of variation of the special symbol (the fact that the variation effect is not executed). That is, the predetermined performance at the start ends.
On the other hand, the sound accompanying the stop of the production pattern 70a is not output. Further, the first lamp pattern LZ continues to be in a permanently stopped state. Further, the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E maintain the display of "1" as the first special symbol reservation number. Further, "89 remaining" is maintained as the display content of the remaining number of times image ZKG.

Thereafter, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, a jackpot game (special game) is started. When the performance control unit 130m receives the opening designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for starting the opening performance of the jackpot game is performed.
In this case, the opening image OPG is displayed as shown in FIG. 317(d). Further, the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E maintain the display of "1" as the first special symbol reservation number.

Here, "1", which is the first special figure pending number displayed on the sub-first pending display 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E, is based on the new winning in the first starting opening 45. If the winning command (winning signal) is normally received, or the start command based on the start of the variable display of the first special symbol (first special symbol reservation number designation command as the start signal, special symbol designation command, special This is maintained until the effect control unit 130m receives the figure variation pattern designation command). In other words, a new winning command (winning signal) based on a winning in the second starting port 47, a starting command based on the start of the variable display of the second special symbol (second special symbol pending number as a starting signal), etc. Even if the performance control unit 130m receives a specified command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command), the special symbol reservation command is displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E. “1” is maintained as the first special figure reservation number.

(Modification 2)
FIG. 318 is a diagram showing another modification (modification 2) of the variation effect example described using FIGS. 315 and 316.
Next, using FIG. 318, another modification (modification 2) of the variation effect example described using FIGS. 315 and 316 will be described. Modification 2 is an example of a performance when the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command. In this modification example 2, when the special symbol variable display is performed twice as explained using FIG. 315 and FIG. This is an example of a production performed when the production control unit 130m does not normally receive the hour command and the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at the timing when the second variable display is started.

First, the same effect as that described using FIG. 315(a) is performed, and as shown in FIG. 318(a), the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started. FIG. 318(a) is the same state as that of FIG. 315(b).
Thereafter, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (a command error has occurred), the variable production will be terminated. processing will not be performed.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 318(b), the second lamp pattern LZ continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Furthermore, based on the fact that the command at stop cannot be received normally, the production control unit 130m uses the production pattern 70a, the icon TI, the background image HG, the lamp LA, and the audio output device 9 to perform a predetermined production at the time of stop. Execute.
While the predetermined effect at the time of stop is being executed, the effect pattern 70a periodically moves left and right, and the icon TI periodically moves up and down. Further, while the predetermined effect at the time of stop is being executed, the background image HG is displayed in a manner corresponding to the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command at the time of stop. Further, while the predetermined effect at the time of stop is being executed, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the fact that the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command at the time of stop. Further, while the predetermined effect at the time of stop is being executed, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound in response to the fact that the effect control section 130m has not been able to normally receive the command at the time of stop.

Next, as the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", a jackpot fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. If it is not possible (command abnormality has occurred), the first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "1", and the process of starting the first variable production is not performed.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 318(c), the first lamp pattern LZ continues to be permanently stopped, and the second lamp pattern LZ continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E maintain the display of "1" as the first special symbol reservation number. In addition, based on the fact that the start command cannot be received normally, the production control unit 130m uses the production pattern 70a, the icon TI, the zone effect image ZEG, the background image HG, the lamp LA, and the audio output device 9, A predetermined effect is executed at the start.
While the predetermined performance is being executed at the start, the performance pattern 70a periodically moves up and down, and the icon TI periodically moves left and right. Further, while the predetermined start effect is being executed, the zone effect image ZEG and the background image HG are displayed in a manner corresponding to the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command. Further, while the predetermined effect at the time of start is being executed, the lamp LA emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the fact that the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command at the time of start. Further, while the predetermined start effect is being executed, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound in response to the fact that the effect control section 130m has not been able to properly receive the start command.

Thereafter, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the predetermined production at the start is performed.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 318(d), the second lamp pattern LZ comes to a permanent stop. In addition, the effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ that have been moving up and down come to a stop in the losing mode "814". Furthermore, the icon TI that was moving left and right is erased with one frame of non-animation. Furthermore, the zone effect image ZEG is hidden. Furthermore, the background image HG corresponding to the production mode D is displayed again. Further, the lamp LA emits light in a light emitting manner according to the stoppage of fluctuation of the special symbol (the fluctuation performance is not executed). Further, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to the stoppage of variation of the special symbol (the fact that the variation effect is not executed). That is, the predetermined performance at the start ends.
On the other hand, the sound accompanying the stop of the production pattern 70a is not output. In addition, the first lamp pattern LZ continues to be in a stopped state in a losing manner. Further, the display of “89 remaining” is maintained in the remaining number of times image ZKG. Further, the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E maintain the display of "1" as the first special symbol reservation number.

Thereafter, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, a jackpot game (special game) is started. When the performance control unit 130m receives the opening designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for starting the opening performance of the jackpot game is performed.
In this case, the opening image OPG is displayed as shown in FIG. 318(e). Further, the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E maintain the display of "1" as the first special symbol reservation number.

Here, "1", which is the first special figure pending number displayed on the sub-first pending display 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E, is based on the new winning in the first starting opening 45. If the winning command (winning signal) is normally received, or the start command based on the start of the variable display of the first special symbol (first special symbol reservation number designation command as the start signal, special symbol designation command, special This is maintained until the effect control unit 130m receives the figure variation pattern designation command). In other words, a new winning command (winning signal) based on a winning in the second starting port 47, a starting command based on the start of the variable display of the second special symbol (second special symbol pending number as a starting signal), etc. Even if the performance control unit 130m receives a specified command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command), the special symbol reservation command is displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E. “1” is maintained as the first special figure reservation number.

As described above, in this embodiment, even if the first special symbol is on hold in the normal gaming state and the variable display of the first special symbol is started after the start of the second variable effect, a new first variable effect is not started. In the case where there is not, even if the command at the time of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol is normally received, the hold icon HI related to the first special symbol is displayed (see FIG. 293(d)). On the other hand, in a case where the first special symbol is on hold in a specific gaming state and a new first variable presentation has not started even if the variable display of the first special symbol is started after the start of the second variable presentation, the first When the command to stop the variable display of special symbols is received normally, the hold icon HI related to the first special symbol is not displayed (see FIG. 318(d)).
In this case, in a normal gaming state where you should play left-handed, it is possible to emphasize the existence of a reservation caused by winning when hitting left-handed, and in a specific gaming state where you should play right-handed, it is possible to emphasize the existence of a reservation caused by winning when hitting left-handed. The presence of reservations can be made less noticeable.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in the case where there is a first special symbol pending in the normal gaming state and a new first variable effect has not started even if the variable display of the first special symbol is started after the start of the second variable effect. In this case, even if the command to stop the variable display of the first special symbol is received normally, the number of reservations in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E or the sub-first reservation display 83 is not displayed as decreasing, A hold icon HI related to the first special symbol is displayed (see FIG. 293(d)). On the other hand, in a case where the first special symbol is on hold in a specific gaming state and a new first variable presentation has not started even if the variable display of the first special symbol is started after the start of the second variable presentation, the first If the stop command for the special symbol fluctuation display is normally received, the number of reservations in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E and the sub-first reservation display 83 will not be displayed decreased, but the number of reservations related to the first special symbol The hold icon HI is not displayed (see FIG. 318(d)).
In this case, in a normal gaming state where you should play left-handed, it is possible to emphasize the existence of a reservation caused by winning when hitting left-handed, and in a specific gaming state where you should play right-handed, it is possible to emphasize the existence of a reservation caused by winning when hitting left-handed. The presence of reservations can be made less noticeable. On the other hand, in the specific game state, it is possible to suppress the disappointment of the player due to the display of the number of reservations decreased in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E even though the new first variable performance has not started.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the production control unit 130m does not normally receive the stop command and start command related to a specific variable display in the normal gaming state (or specific gaming state), the production symbol 70a does not operate ( (oscillating motion, expansion/contraction motion, etc.), but does not restrict any motion (fluctuating display) for the special symbol TZ.
In this case, if the production control unit 130m does not normally receive the stop command and start command related to the specific variable display in the normal gaming state (or specific gaming state), the production by the special symbol TZ is not executed, and the player can prevent people from getting bored with gaming machines.

(Other production examples)
Next, other production examples will be explained.
FIG. 319 is a diagram showing an effect performed when the jackpot determination result is a jackpot.
First, it is the same as the variable effect example shown in FIGS. 290(a) to 290(f) and FIGS. 291(g) to 291(j), except that the effect pattern 70a to be stopped is "6". As the effect is performed, the effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ come to a final stop in a jackpot notification mode, as shown in FIG. 319(a).

On the other hand, a stop command is transmitted from the main controller 110m at the timing when the first variable display is stopped, and a start command is transmitted from the main controller 110m at the timing when the second variable display is started. This is the same as the modification 2 shown in FIGS. 293(a) to 293(c), except that the effect pattern 70a that is stopped when normally received by the effect control unit 130m is "6". As the performance is performed, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ come to a final stop at "814" as shown in FIG. 319(b).

In either case shown in FIGS. 319(a) and 319(b), when the production control unit 130m receives the opening designation command thereafter, the first image is displayed as shown in FIG. 319(c). An opening image OPG is displayed on the display device 70. In the illustrated example, the text "Bonus!" is displayed in the opening image OPG. This opening image OPG has content that suggests that it is less advantageous for the player (for example, the total number of rounds is smaller) than when the opening image OPG shown in FIG. 291(l) is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 319(d), an acquisition effect is executed. The acquisition performance is a performance that encourages whether or not to obtain a benefit (for example, the total number of rounds) when the opening image OPG shown in FIG. 291(l) is displayed. In the acquisition performance, an acquisition image KTG and an operation promotion image SG are displayed.

Thereafter, when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective period of the effect button 17 has elapsed, the state becomes either of FIG. 319(e) or FIG. 319(f).
In FIG. 319(e), the successfully acquired image SEG is displayed. The successful acquisition image SEG is an image that notifies that the privilege (for example, the total number of rounds) has been acquired when the opening image OPG shown in FIG. 291(l) is displayed.
In FIG. 319(f), the failed acquisition image SIG is displayed. The acquisition failure image SIG is an image that notifies that the privilege (for example, the total number of rounds) could not be acquired when the opening image OPG shown in FIG. 291(l) is displayed.

In addition, in FIG. 319, the effect when the jackpot determination result in the normal gaming state is a jackpot has been explained, but in the specific gaming state, the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at the timing when the jackpot fluctuation display is started. The effects shown in FIG. 319(c) and thereafter may be executed regardless of whether or not the effect is normally received by the effect control unit 130m.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 319, the acquisition performance is a performance that encourages whether or not to acquire a benefit (for example, the total number of rounds) in a round game, but is not limited to this.
The acquisition performance may be, for example, a performance that incites whether the gaming state controlled after the end of the round game is a variable probability gaming state or a time saving gaming state. In this case, the acquisition success image SEG is an image that informs that the game state will be controlled to the variable probability game state after the end of the round game, and the unsuccessful acquisition image SIG is an image that informs that the game state will be controlled to the time saving game state after the end of the round game. It may also be an image for notification.
Moreover, instead of the acquisition performance shown in FIG. 319, the variable mission performance (privilege acquisition performance) described using FIG. 236 may be executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, if the stop command sent from the main control unit 110m at the timing when a specific variable display is stopped is not normally received by the performance control unit 130m, and the predetermined stop performance is executed. In this case, if the start command sent from the main control unit 110m at the timing when the next variable display after the specific variable display is not normally received by the production control unit 130m, the production control unit 130m executes Although the presentation is switched from the predetermined presentation at the time of stop to the predetermined presentation at the time of start (see FIG. 285(b), FIG. 285(c), etc.), the present invention is not limited thereto.
A stop command is sent from the main controller 110m at the timing when a specific variable display is stopped, and a start command is sent from the main controller 110m at the timing when the next variable display after the specific variable display is started. If the performance control unit 130m does not receive the performance normally, the performance control unit 130m continues the predetermined performance at stop (the same predetermined performance) without switching the performance to be executed from the predetermined performance at stop to the predetermined performance at start. Good too. Then, when the stop command sent from the main control unit 110m at the timing when the next variable display is stopped is normally received by the performance control unit 130m, the predetermined stop performance (the same predetermined performance) ends. Good too.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, it has been explained that the predetermined performance at the time of stopping, the predetermined performance at the start, and the predetermined performance while waiting for customers all have different performance contents, but the present invention is not limited to this.
The predetermined performance at the time of stopping, the predetermined performance at the time of start, and the predetermined performance while waiting for customers may all have the same performance content.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the modified examples of the variable performance examples shown in FIGS. 278 to 281 (modified example 3 shown in FIG. 284, modified example 4 shown in FIG. 285), the performance control unit 130m correctly executes the start command Although the variable performance that is restricted due to failure to receive is a variable performance in which the jackpot determination result is a loss and the reach performance is not executed, the present invention is not limited to this.
In the modified examples (Modified Example 3 shown in FIG. 284 and Modified Example 4 shown in FIG. 285), the variable performance that is limited due to the fact that the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command at the start may result in a loss in the jackpot determination result. It may also be a variable effect (the variable effects shown in FIGS. 278(b) to 278(f) and FIGS. 279(g) to 279(j)) in which SP reach effect is executed. In this case, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the start time command, it limits the execution of each performance (each performance such as SP reach performance) that was being executed during the variable performance.
In addition, in the modified examples (Modified Example 3 shown in FIG. 284 and Modified Example 4 shown in FIG. 285), the variable performance that is restricted due to the fact that the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command at the start is limited as a result of the jackpot determination. It may be a variable effect (the variable effect shown in FIG. 290(e), FIG. 290(f), FIG. 291(g) to FIG. 291(l)) that is a jackpot. In this case, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the start time command, it limits the execution of each performance (each performance such as a successful decision performance) that was being executed during the variable performance.
In addition, in the modified examples (Modified Example 3 shown in FIG. 284 and Modified Example 4 shown in FIG. 285), which variable effects are restricted due to the effect that the effect control unit 130m could not normally receive the start command. Even if there is, the predetermined performance at the time of start is performed from the start timing to the end timing of the variable performance being executed when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the command at the time of start.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the modified examples of the variable performance examples shown in FIGS. 290 and 291 (modified example 1 shown in FIG. 292, modified example 2 shown in FIG. Although the variable performance that is restricted due to the failure to receive is a variable performance in which the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the present invention is not limited to this.
In the modified examples (Modified Example 1 shown in FIG. 292 and Modified Example 2 shown in FIG. 292), the variable performance that is restricted due to the fact that the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command at the time of start, the result of the jackpot determination is a loss. It may also be a variable effect (the variable effects shown in FIGS. 278(b) to 278(f) and FIGS. 279(g) to 279(j)) in which SP reach effect is executed. In this case, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the start time command, it limits the execution of each performance (each performance such as SP reach performance) that was being executed during the variable performance.
In addition, in the modified examples (Modified Example 1 shown in FIG. 292 and Modified Example 2 shown in FIG. 292), the variable performance that is restricted due to the fact that the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command at the start is limited to the result of the jackpot determination. It may be a variable effect (the variable effect shown in FIG. 279(k), FIG. 279(l), FIG. 280(m) to FIG. 280(o)) in which the player loses and the reach effect is not executed. In this case, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the start command, it limits the execution of each performance (performances such as a performance that changes the performance mode) that was being executed during the variable performance.
In addition, in the modified examples (Modified Example 1 shown in FIG. 292 and Modified Example 2 shown in FIG. 293), which variable effects are restricted due to the effect that the effect control unit 130m could not normally receive the start command. Even if there is, the predetermined performance at the time of start is performed from the start timing to the end timing of the variable performance being executed when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the command at the time of start.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the modified examples of the variable production examples shown in FIGS. 295 and 296 (Modification 1 shown in FIG. 297, Modification 2 shown in FIG. 298), the production control unit 130m correctly issues the start command. Although the variable performance that is restricted due to the failure to receive is a variable performance in which the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the present invention is not limited to this.
In the modified examples (Modified Example 1 shown in FIG. 297 and Modified Example 2 shown in FIG. 298), the variable performance that is limited due to the fact that the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command at the time of start, the result of the jackpot determination is a loss. It may also be a variable effect (the variable effects shown in FIGS. 278(b) to 278(f) and FIGS. 279(g) to 279(j)) in which SP reach effect is executed. In this case, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the start time command, it limits the execution of each performance (each performance such as SP reach performance) that was being executed during the variable performance.
In addition, in the modified examples (Modified Example 1 shown in FIG. 297 and Modified Example 2 shown in FIG. 298), the variable performance that is restricted due to the fact that the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command at the time of start is limited as a result of the jackpot determination. It may be a variable effect (the variable effect shown in FIG. 279(k), FIG. 279(l), FIG. 280(m) to FIG. 280(o)) in which the player loses and the reach effect is not executed. In this case, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the start command, it limits the execution of each performance (performances such as a performance that changes the performance mode) that was being executed during the variable performance.
In addition, in the modified examples (Modified Example 1 shown in FIG. 297 and Modified Example 2 shown in FIG. 298), which variable effects are restricted due to the effect that the effect control unit 130m could not normally receive the start command. Even if there is, the predetermined performance at the time of start is performed from the start timing to the end timing of the variable performance being executed when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the command at the time of start.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the modified examples of the variable performance examples shown in FIGS. 299 to 301 (Variation 3 shown in FIG. 304, Modification 4 shown in FIG. 305), the performance control unit 130m correctly executes the start command. Although the variable performance that is restricted due to failure to receive is a variable performance in which the jackpot determination result is a loss and the reach performance is not executed, the present invention is not limited to this.
In the modified examples (Modified Example 3 shown in FIG. 304 and Modified Example 4 shown in FIG. 305), the variable performance that is limited due to the fact that the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command at the start may result in a loss in the jackpot determination result. It may also be a variable effect (the variable effects shown in FIGS. 299(b) to 299(f) and FIGS. 300(g) to 300(j)) in which SP reach effect is executed. In this case, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the start time command, it limits the execution of each performance (each performance such as SP reach performance) that was being executed during the variable performance.
In addition, in the modified examples (Modified Example 3 shown in FIG. 304 and Modified Example 4 shown in FIG. 305), the variable performance that is restricted due to the fact that the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command at the start is limited as a result of the jackpot determination. It may be a variable effect (the variable effects shown in FIGS. 310(d) to 310(f) and FIGS. 311(g) to 311(k)) in which the winning result is a jackpot. In this case, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the start time command, it limits the execution of each performance (each performance such as a successful decision performance) that was being executed during the variable performance.
In addition, in the modified examples (Modified Example 3 shown in FIG. 304 and Modified Example 4 shown in FIG. 305), which variable effects are restricted due to the effect that the effect control unit 130m could not normally receive the start command. Even if there is, the predetermined performance at the time of start is performed from the start timing to the end timing of the variable performance being executed when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the command at the time of start.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the modified examples of the variable production examples shown in FIGS. 310 and 311 (Modification 1 shown in FIG. 312, Modification 2 shown in FIG. 313), the production control unit 130m correctly issues the start command. Although the variable performance that is restricted due to the failure to receive is a variable performance in which the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the present invention is not limited to this.
In the modified examples (Modified Example 1 shown in FIG. 312 and Modified Example 2 shown in FIG. 313), the variable performance that is limited due to the fact that the performance control unit 130m could not normally receive the command at the start, the result of the jackpot determination is a loss. It may also be a variable effect (the variable effects shown in FIGS. 299(b) to 299(f) and FIGS. 300(g) to 300(j)) in which SP reach effect is executed. In this case, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the start time command, it limits the execution of each performance (each performance such as SP reach performance) that was being executed during the variable performance.
In addition, in the modified examples (Modified Example 1 shown in FIG. 312 and Modified Example 2 shown in FIG. 313), the variable performance that is restricted due to the fact that the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command at the start is limited to the result of the jackpot determination. It may be a variable effect (the variable effect shown in FIG. 300(k) and FIG. 300(l)) in which the player loses and the reach effect is not executed. In this case, if the performance control unit 130m normally receives the start command, the execution of each performance (such as the output of sound effects when the performance pattern 70a stops) that was being executed during the variable performance is restricted. do.
In addition, in the modified examples (Modified Example 1 shown in FIG. 312 and Modified Example 2 shown in FIG. 313), which variable effects are restricted due to the effect that the effect control unit 130m could not normally receive the start command. Even if there is, the predetermined performance at the time of start is performed from the start timing to the end timing of the variable performance being executed when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the command at the time of start.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the modified examples of the variable performance examples shown in FIGS. 315 and 316 (modified example 1 shown in FIG. 317, modified example 2 shown in FIG. 318), the performance control unit 130m correctly sends the start command. Although the variable performance that is restricted due to the failure to receive is a variable performance in which the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the present invention is not limited to this.
In the modified examples (Modified Example 1 shown in FIG. 317 and Modified Example 2 shown in FIG. 318), the variable performance that is restricted due to the fact that the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command at the time of start, the result of the jackpot determination is a loss. It may also be a variable effect (the variable effects shown in FIGS. 299(b) to 299(f) and FIGS. 300(g) to 300(j)) in which SP reach effect is executed. In this case, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the start time command, it limits the execution of each performance (each performance such as SP reach performance) that was being executed during the variable performance.
In addition, in the modified examples (Modified Example 1 shown in FIG. 317 and Modified Example 2 shown in FIG. 318), the variable performance that is restricted due to the fact that the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command at the time of starting is limited as a result of the jackpot determination. It may be a variable effect (the variable effect shown in FIG. 300(k) and FIG. 300(l)) in which the player loses and the reach effect is not executed. In this case, if the performance control unit 130m normally receives the start command, the execution of each performance (such as the output of sound effects when the performance pattern 70a stops) that was being executed during the variable performance is restricted. do.
In addition, in the modified examples (Modified Example 1 shown in FIG. 317 and Modified Example 2 shown in FIG. 318), which variable effects are restricted due to the effect that the effect control unit 130m could not normally receive the start command. Even if there is, the predetermined performance at the time of start is performed from the start timing to the end timing of the variable performance being executed when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the command at the time of start.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, in the modification example (modification 6 shown in FIG. 287) of the variable performance examples shown in FIGS. 278 to 281, the performance control unit 130m successfully receives the start command during execution of the customer waiting performance. Although it has been explained that the variable performance that is limited due to failure is a variable performance in which the jackpot determination result is a loss and the reach performance is not executed, the present invention is not limited to this.
In the modified example (modified example 6 shown in FIG. 287), the fluctuating performance that is restricted due to the fact that the performance control unit 130m could not normally receive the start command during the execution of the customer waiting performance may result in a loss in the jackpot determination result. It may be a variable effect (the variable effect shown in FIGS. 278(a) to 278(f) and FIG. 279(g) to FIG. 279(j)) in which the SP reach effect is executed. In this case, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the start time command, it limits the execution of each performance (each performance such as SP reach performance) that was being executed during the variable performance.
In addition, in the modified example (modified example 6 shown in FIG. 287), the variable performance that is restricted due to the fact that the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command during the execution of the customer waiting performance, the result of the jackpot determination is It may be a variable effect that is a jackpot (the variable effects shown in FIGS. 290(e), 290(f), and 291(g) to 291(l)). In this case, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the start time command, it limits the execution of each performance (each performance such as a successful decision performance) that was being executed during the variable performance.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, in the modification example (modification 6 shown in FIG. 307) of the variable performance examples shown in FIGS. 299 to 301, the performance control unit 130m successfully receives the start command during execution of the customer waiting performance. Although it has been explained that the variable performance that is limited due to failure is a variable performance in which the jackpot determination result is a loss and the reach performance is not executed, the present invention is not limited to this.
In the modified example (modified example 6 shown in FIG. 307), the variable performance that is restricted due to the fact that the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command during the execution of the customer waiting performance, the result of the jackpot determination is a loss. It may be a variable effect (the variable effect shown in FIGS. 299(a) to 299(f) and FIGS. 300(g) to 300(j)) in which there is an SP ready-to-reach effect. In this case, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the start time command, it limits the execution of each performance (each performance such as SP reach performance) that was being executed during the variable performance.
In addition, in the modified example (modified example 6 shown in FIG. 307), the variable performance that is restricted due to the fact that the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command during the execution of the customer waiting performance, the result of the jackpot determination is It may be a variable effect that is a jackpot (the variable effects shown in FIGS. 310(d) to 310(f) and FIGS. 311(g) to 311(j)). In this case, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the start time command, it limits the execution of each performance (each performance such as a successful decision performance) that was being executed during the variable performance.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the icon TI and the pending icon HI execute a predetermined effect at the time of start or a predetermined effect at the time of stop, it is explained that the predetermined effect at the start and the predetermined effect at the time of stop are executed in synchronization with the operation display. did.
Here, a plurality of hold icons HI may be displayed on the first image display device 70. When a predetermined start effect or a predetermined stop effect is executed when a plurality of hold icons HI are displayed, the operation display of the plurality of hold icons HI is synchronized with the start time predetermined effect or the stop time predetermined effect. may be executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the hold icon HI is displayed, the production control unit 130m does not normally receive the stop command related to a specific variable display and normally sends the start command related to the next variable display. , the pending icon HI is erased with one frame of non-animation, and the icon TI corresponding to the started variation effect is displayed in the icon display area 70C with one frame of non-animation. Although described above, the invention is not limited thereto.
When the hold icon HI is displayed, the production control unit 130m does not normally receive the stop command related to a specific variable display, but normally receives the start command related to the next variable display; Alternatively, the production control unit 130m may shift and display the hold icon HI as an animation of 20 frames toward the icon display area 70C and display it as the icon TI.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, it has been explained that when the cross key 18 is operated while the guide image AG is displayed, the volume and light amount are adjusted, and the volume image OG and the light amount image KG are displayed.
Here, even if the cross key 18 is operated when the guide image AG is not displayed, the volume and light amount may be adjusted and the volume image OG and the light amount image KG may be displayed. Further, if the cross key 18 is operated when the guide image AG is not displayed, the volume and light amount may not be adjusted, and the volume image OG and the light amount image KG may not be displayed. In other words, adjustments to the volume and light amount by operating the cross key 18 may be effectively accepted only when the guide image AG is displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, in both the normal gaming state and the specific gaming state, if the performance control unit 130m does not normally receive the start time command while the customer waiting performance is being executed, the predetermined performance at the start time is not executed. No, but not limited to. In both the normal game state and the specific game state, if the performance control unit 130m does not normally receive the command at the time of start while executing the customer waiting performance, the performance control unit 130m performs the predetermined performance at the start using the background image HG. Alternatively, a predetermined effect may be performed at the start using the lamp LA. On the other hand, in both the normal game state and the specific game state, if the performance control unit 130m does not normally receive the start command during execution of the customer waiting performance, the performance symbol 70a, the hold icon HI, the icon TI, The zone effect image ZEG and the audio output device 9 may not execute the predetermined effect at the start.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, it has been explained that in the normal gaming state, a predetermined effect at the start and a predetermined effect at the time of stop are executed by the icon TI based on the winning in the second starting port 47, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the normal gaming state, while a predetermined start performance and a predetermined stop performance are executed by the icon TI based on winning in the first starting port 45, a start by the icon TI based on winning in the second starting port 47 is executed. The predetermined presentation at the time of the game or the predetermined presentation at the time of the stop may be prevented from being executed.

Moreover, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the effect pattern 70a stops. Here, the "stop" of the performance symbol 70a includes both a temporary stop and a permanent stop.
Further, in the present embodiment, it has been explained that the periodic performance motion of the pending icon HI (the icon TI) is a rotating motion, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the periodic presentation operation of the pending icon HI (the icon TI) may be repeated vertical and horizontal movements, repeated horizontal and vertical movements, and the like. Further, the periodic presentation operation of the pending icon HI (the relevant icon TI) may be different for each presentation mode, and the periodic presentation operation of the pending icon HI (the relevant icon TI) may be different between the normal gaming state and the specific gaming state. may be different. Furthermore, even if the periodic presentation operations of the pending icon HI (the icon TI) are different, the periodicity of each presentation operation may be the same.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in the predetermined effect at start and the predetermined effect at stop, the white hold icon HI (the icon TI) and the red or blue hold icon HI (the icon TI) perform the same effect. However, it is not limited to this.
In the predetermined performance at the start, the white pending icon HI (the relevant icon TI) and the red or blue pending icon HI (the relevant icon TI) perform different periodic performance operations such as different moving distances and moving directions. It's okay. In addition, in the predetermined effect when stopped, the white hold icon HI (the icon TI) and the red or blue hold icon HI (the icon TI) have different periodic effect movements such as different moving distances and moving directions. You may do so. On the other hand, the white pending icon HI (the icon TI) may perform the same periodic effect in the start-time predetermined effect and the stop-time predetermined effect. Further, in the predetermined effect at the start and the predetermined effect at the time of stop, the red or blue pending icon HI (the icon TI) may perform the same periodic effect.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the inner performance symbol 70a temporarily stops in a variable performance in a specific game state where the SP reach performance is executed, when the performance symbol 70a temporarily stops before the transition image IG is displayed. (See FIG. 300(g)) and when the effect pattern 70a temporarily stops after the transition image IG is displayed (See FIG. 300(i)). Although described above, the invention is not limited thereto.
For example, when the inner performance symbol 70a temporarily stops in a variable performance in a specific game state in which the SP reach performance is executed, when the performance symbol 70a temporarily stops before the transition image IG is displayed (FIG. 300(g) ), the sound effect of a temporary stop is output, while when the production pattern 70a temporarily stops after the transition image IG is displayed (see FIG. 300(i)), a sound accompanying the temporary stop is output. You may choose not to do so.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the effect pattern 70a of the mode of notifying a jackpot temporarily stops in a specific gaming state, when the effect pattern 70a with a small display size temporarily stops (FIG. 311(h), FIG. 316(h) )) and when the large display size performance pattern 70a temporarily stops (see FIGS. 311(i) and 316(i)), it has been explained that the sound accompanying the temporary stop is not output. , but not limited to.
For example, in a specific game state, when a performance symbol 70a with a small display size temporarily stops (see FIGS. 311(h) and 316(h)), no sound is output due to the temporary stop; When the production symbol 70a temporarily stops (see FIG. 311(i) and FIG. 316(i)), a temporary stop sound effect may be output.

In addition, in this embodiment, if the production control unit 130m does not normally receive the stop command related to a specific variable display and the start command related to the "next variable display" (FIG. 285(c), FIG. 293(c) ), FIG. 298(c), FIG. 305(c), FIG. 313(c), and FIG. 318(c)), the effect sound is output while the "next variable display" is being executed (see FIG. 285( c), FIG. 293(c), FIG. 298(c), FIG. 305(c), FIG. 313(c), and FIG. 318(c)), but are not limited thereto.
For example, in production mode A, if the production control unit 130m does not normally receive the stop command related to a specific variable display and the start command related to the "next variable display", if the "next variable display" is being executed. While the production sound is output in production mode B, if the production control unit 130m does not normally receive the stop command related to the specific variable display and the start command related to the "next variable display", the " The effect sound may not be output during the execution of "Next variable display". In addition, in the normal gaming state, if the production control unit 130m does not normally receive the stop command related to the loss variation display in which the reach production is not executed and the start command related to the "next variation display", the "next variation display" While the production sound is output during the execution of ``, the production control unit 130m in the normal gaming state outputs the stop command related to the loss variation display in which the SP reach production is executed and the start command related to the ``next variation display.'' If it is not received normally, the effect sound may not be output while the "next variable display" is being executed. In addition, if the performance control unit 130m does not normally receive the stop command related to the loss variable display and the start command related to the "next variable display" in a specific gaming state, during the execution of the "next variable display" While the production sound is output, if the production control unit 130m does not normally receive the stop command related to the loss variation display and the start command related to the "next variation display" in the normal gaming state, the "next variation display" is output. The effect sound may not be output during the execution of "Fluctuating Display". In this way, depending on whether or not specific conditions are met, if the production control unit 130m does not normally receive the stop command related to the losing variable display and the start command related to the "next variable display", the "next variable display" By executing or not executing the sound production during the execution of "Fluctuating Display", even if the production control unit 130m does not normally receive the stop command, it is possible to make different production modes depending on the situation. , it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
In any case, if the production control unit 130m does not normally receive the stop command related to a specific variable display and the start command related to the "next variable display", the "next variable display" The sound production accompanying the stop of the production pattern 70a that is performed after the start of " is not performed (Fig. 285 (e), Fig. 293 (d), Fig. 298 (d), Fig. 305 (d), Fig. 313 (d), (See Figure 318(d)).

In addition, in this embodiment, if the production control unit 130m does not normally receive the start command related to the jackpot variation display, the execution of any production that notifies the jackpot is restricted while the jackpot variation display is being executed. However, the invention is not limited to this.
For example, in the normal gaming state (or specific gaming state), the production control unit 130m normally issues a start command related to the jackpot variation display during execution of the first variation production (or second variation production). If not received, the execution of any performance that notifies the jackpot is restricted while the jackpot fluctuation display is being executed. On the other hand, in the normal gaming state (specific gaming state), if the production control section 130m does not normally receive the start command related to the jackpot variation display while executing the customer waiting production, the production control unit 130m controls the jackpot variation display. During execution, the light emission of the lamp LA according to the light emission mode according to the jackpot determination result is a jackpot, and the output of the sound by the audio output device 9 according to the jackpot determination result is a jackpot. A display may be performed using a combination of effect patterns 70a (such as "777") to be notified.
For example, the production control unit 130m may issue a start command related to the jackpot variation display while the first variation production (or second variation production) is being executed in the normal gaming state (or specific gaming state). If the jackpot is not received normally, the execution of any performance that notifies the jackpot is restricted while the jackpot fluctuation display is being executed. On the other hand, in the normal gaming state (specific gaming state), if the production control section 130m does not normally receive the start command related to the jackpot variation display during execution of the customer waiting production, the production control unit 130m controls the jackpot variation display. During execution, the display of images in response to the jackpot determination result being a jackpot and the output of sounds by the audio output device 9 in response to the jackpot determination result being a jackpot are limited; The lamp LA may be executed in a light emission mode depending on a certain situation.
In this case, even while the customer waiting performance is being executed, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, it has been explained that in the normal gaming state (or specific gaming state), the lamp LA executes a predetermined effect at the start, a predetermined effect at the time of stopping, and a predetermined effect while waiting for a customer.
Here, the lamp LA normally executes a predetermined performance at the start (start time command related to the variable display of the first special symbol or start time command related to the variable display of the second special symbol) in the normal game state (or specific game state). Even if the light emission mode (emission color, light emission state) is switched from the first mode (for example, red, lit) to the second mode (for example, blue, blinking) during the execution of the predetermined effect at the start that is executed when no reception is received. good. In addition, the lamp LA normally receives a predetermined stop effect (stop command related to the variable display of the first special symbol or stop command related to the variable display of the second special symbol) in the normal gaming state (or specific gaming state). The light emitting mode may be switched from the third mode (for example, green, lit) to the fourth mode (for example, yellow, blinking) during the execution of the predetermined effect at the time of stop, which is executed when the light is not displayed. In addition, the lamp LA switches the light emission mode from the fifth mode (for example, white, lit) to the sixth mode (for example, purple, blinking) during execution of a predetermined customer waiting effect in the normal gaming state (or specific gaming state). Good too. In addition, the predetermined performance at the start time (executed when the start time command related to the variable display of the first special symbol or the start time command related to the variable display of the second special symbol is not received normally in the normal game state or the specific game state) The prescribed performance at the start) and the prescribed performance at the stop (the stop command related to the variable display of the first special symbol or the stop command related to the variable display of the second special symbol in the normal gaming state or specific gaming state are not received normally) The light emission mode of the lamp LA may be the same before switching, or may be the same after switching between the predetermined effect at the time of stopping (predetermined effect executed when the vehicle is stopped) and the predetermined effect performed while waiting for a customer. .

In addition, in the second embodiment, the variation effects shown in FIGS. 279(k), 279(l), 280(m) to 280(o), and the variations shown in FIGS. 290(b) to 290(d) The variable effects shown in FIGS. 295(b) to 295(d), the variable effects shown in FIGS. 300(k) and 300(l), the variable effects shown in FIGS. 310(b) and 310(c), It has also been explained that the variable effects shown in FIGS. 315(b) and 315(c) may be variable effects in which the three effect symbols 70a are permanently stopped all at once without going through a temporary stop. Here, if the start time commands related to these variable effects are normally received by the effect control unit 130m, but the stop commands related to these variable effects are not normally received by the effect control unit 130m, the effect control unit 130m may temporarily stop the three performance symbols 70a and continue the temporary stop state until a start command, a stop command, a customer waiting state designation command, an opening designation command, etc. are normally received. That is, if the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time commands related to these variable productions, the production control unit 130m will not execute the "production pattern 70a" that would not be executed if the stop commands related to these variable productions were normally received. "temporary stop" may be executed, and the manner in which the production pattern 70a stops may be made different depending on whether the stop command related to these variable productions is successfully received or not. . Then, when the production control unit 130m normally receives the start time commands related to these variable productions but cannot normally receive the stop commands related to these variable productions, it temporarily stops the three production symbols 70a. At this time, a sound effect accompanying the temporary stop may be output. This sound effect is the same sound as the "sound effect accompanying the main stop of the production pattern 70a" that is output when the start command and stop command related to these variable productions are normally received by the production control unit 130m. or a different sound.

Furthermore, in the variation presentation examples shown in FIGS. 278 to 281 and the modified examples shown in FIGS. 282 to 287, it is explained that the first variation presentation is a second variation presentation based on winning in the second starting opening 47. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first variable performance may be a first variable performance based on winning in the first start opening 45. That is, the plurality of variable effects described in the variable effect examples shown in FIGS. 278 to 281 and the modified examples shown in FIGS. 282 to 287 may all be the first variable effect. Even in this case, the effects that are executed and the effects that are restricted are basically the same as the effects described using FIGS. 278 to 287.
In addition, in the variation presentation examples shown in FIGS. 278 to 281 and the modified examples shown in FIGS. 282 to 287, the second variation presentation and the third variation presentation are the Although it has been described that the variable performance is a variable performance, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second variable performance and the third variable performance may be a second variable performance based on winning in the second start opening 47. That is, the plurality of variable effects described in the variable effect examples shown in FIGS. 278 to 281 and the modified examples shown in FIGS. 282 to 287 may all be the second variable effect. Even in this case, the effects that are executed and the effects that are restricted are basically the same as the effects described using FIGS. 278 to 287. However, in the normal game state, since the hold icon HI based on the second special figure hold is not displayed, the performance by the hold icon HI based on the second special figure hold is not executed.

Furthermore, in the variation presentation examples shown in FIGS. 290 and 291 and the modified examples shown in FIGS. Although described above, the first variable performance may be a first variable performance based on winning in the first start opening 45 without being limited thereto. In other words, the plurality of variable effects described in the variable effect examples shown in FIGS. 290 and 291 and the modified examples shown in FIGS. 292 and 293 may all be the first variable effect. Even in this case, the effects that are executed and the effects that are limited are basically the same as the effects described using FIGS. 290 to 293.
Furthermore, in the variation presentation examples shown in FIGS. 290 and 291 and the modified examples shown in FIGS. 292 and 293, the second variation presentation is the first variation presentation based on winning in the first starting opening 45. has been described, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and the second variable performance may be a second variable performance based on winning in the second start opening 47. That is, the plurality of variable effects described in the variable effect examples shown in FIGS. 290 and 291 and the modified examples shown in FIGS. 292 and 293 may all be the second variable effect. Even in this case, the effects that are executed and the effects that are limited are basically the same as the effects described using FIGS. 290 to 293. However, in the normal game state, since the hold icon HI based on the second special figure hold is not displayed, the performance by the hold icon HI based on the second special figure hold is not executed.

Furthermore, in the variation presentation examples shown in FIGS. 299 to 301 and the modified examples shown in FIGS. 302 to 307, it is explained that the first variation presentation is the first variation presentation based on winning in the first starting opening 45. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first variable performance may be a second variable performance based on winning in the second start opening 47. That is, the plurality of variable effects described in the variable effect examples shown in FIGS. 299 to 301 and the modified examples shown in FIGS. 302 to 307 may all be the second variable effect. Even in this case, the effects that are executed and the effects that are limited are basically the same as the effects described using FIGS. 299 to 307.
In addition, in the variation presentation examples shown in FIGS. 299 to 301 and each modification shown in FIGS. 302 to 307, the second variation presentation and the third variation presentation are Although it has been described that the variable performance is a variable performance, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second variable performance and the third variable performance may be the first variable performance based on winning in the first start opening 45. That is, the plurality of variable effects described in the variable effect examples shown in FIGS. 299 to 301 and the modified examples shown in FIGS. 302 to 307 may all be the first variable effect. Even in this case, the effects that are executed and the effects that are limited are basically the same as the effects described using FIGS. 299 to 307. However, in the specific game state, since the reservation icon HI based on the first special symbol reservation is not displayed, the performance by the reservation icon HI based on the first special symbol reservation is not executed.

Furthermore, in the variation presentation examples shown in FIGS. 310 and 311 and each modification shown in FIGS. Although described above, the first variable performance may be a second variable performance based on winning in the second start opening 47 without being limited thereto. In other words, the plurality of variable effects described in the variable effect examples shown in FIGS. 310 and 311 and the modified examples shown in FIGS. 312 and 313 may all be the second variable effect. Even in this case, the effects that are executed and the effects that are restricted are basically the same as the effects described using FIGS. 310 to 313.
Furthermore, in the variation presentation examples shown in FIGS. 310 and 311 and the modified examples shown in FIGS. has been described, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and the second variable performance may be the first variable performance based on winning in the first start opening 45. In other words, the plurality of variable effects described in the variable effect examples shown in FIGS. 310 and 311 and the modified examples shown in FIGS. 312 and 313 may all be the first variable effect. Even in this case, the effects that are executed and the effects that are restricted are basically the same as the effects described using FIGS. 310 to 313. However, in the specific game state, since the reservation icon HI based on the first special symbol reservation is not displayed, the performance by the reservation icon HI based on the first special symbol reservation is not executed.

Furthermore, in the variable performance in which the SP ready-to-win performance is executed in the second embodiment, not only the SP ready-to-win performance but also the SPSP ready-to-win performance may be performed.

(Specific example 21 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 21 in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described using FIG. 320. Since FIGS. 320(a) to 320(f) correspond to FIGS. 272(a) to 272(f), the description will be omitted as appropriate.

In FIG. 320(a), the volume value can be adjusted (effect adjustment). Specifically, when the player operates the right button of the cross key (performance adjustment operation is performed), the volume value increases, indicating that the volume value has been changed from 2 to 3, for example.
Although the volume value has been adjusted (effect adjustment), the volume value image OG is not displayed, and a confirmation sound is being output at a volume corresponding to the current volume value (not shown). .

In FIG. 320(b), the volume value continues to be 3. Note that FIG. 320(b) corresponds to the end of the above-mentioned variable performance, so although it is possible to adjust the volume and light intensity using the changeover switch 22 that can be operated by the game clerk, the volume cannot be adjusted using the cross key 19 that can be operated by the player. Adjustment and light amount adjustment are now regulated (limited).

In FIG. 320(c), the volume value can be adjusted (effect adjustment). Specifically, when the player operates the right button of the cross key (performance adjustment operation is performed), the volume value increases, indicating that the volume value has been changed from 3 to 4, for example.
Although the volume value has been adjusted (effect adjustment), the volume value image OG is not displayed, and a confirmation sound is being output at a volume corresponding to the current volume value (not shown). .

In FIG. 320(d), the volume value can be adjusted (effect adjustment). Specifically, when the player operates the right button of the cross key (performance adjustment operation is performed), the volume value increases, indicating that the volume value has been changed from 4 to 5, for example.
Although the volume value has been adjusted (effect adjustment), the volume value image OG is not displayed, and a confirmation sound is being output at a volume corresponding to the current volume value (not shown). .
Strictly speaking, FIG. 320(d) corresponds to the start of the above-mentioned fluctuation effect, so after the volume adjustment and light amount adjustment are regulated (restricted) for a certain period, the state shown in FIG. 320(d) is reached. (The performance can be adjusted).

In FIG. 320(e), the volume value continues to be 5. Note that FIG. 320(e) corresponds to the end of the above-mentioned variable performance, so although it is possible to adjust the volume and light intensity using the changeover switch 22 that can be operated by the game clerk, the volume cannot be adjusted using the cross key 19 that can be operated by the player. Adjustments and light intensity adjustments are now regulated (limited).
Note that in FIG. 320(e) as well, it may be possible to adjust the volume and the amount of light using the cross key 19 that can be operated by the player.

In FIG. 320(f), the volume value continues to be 5, and the volume value can be adjusted (effect adjustment).

As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 320, in the normal gaming state, during the execution of the second variable performance that is started in response to the variable display of the second special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol is Even if the stop command (stop signal) cannot be received, the right button of the cross key is operated by the player as shown in FIGS. 320(c) and 320(d) (performance adjustment operation). ) and the volume value can be adjusted. Therefore, even in an irregular state, it is possible to prevent loss of flexibility and convenience in adjusting the performance.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 320, in the normal gaming state, the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped during execution of the second variable performance that is started in response to the variable display of the second special symbol. Even if the time command (stop signal) cannot be received, the right button of the cross key is operated by the player (the performance adjustment operation is performed) as shown in FIGS. 320(c) and 320(d). The volume value image OG can be adjusted without displaying the volume value image OG. Therefore, although the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, it is actually being displayed in a variable manner, so by performing the same display control as when the variable display is being performed (control of not displaying the volume value image OG), It is possible to save the effort of changing the display control depending on whether or not the production control section normally receives the command.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 320, in the normal gaming state, the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped during execution of the second variable performance that is started in response to the variable display of the second special symbol. Even if the time command (stop signal) cannot be received, the right button of the cross key is operated by the player (the performance adjustment operation is performed) as shown in FIGS. 320(c) and 320(d). Although the volume value image OG is not displayed, a confirmation sound is output at a volume corresponding to the current volume value. Therefore, it is possible to easily recognize that the player's performance adjustment operation is reflected.

(Specific example 22 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A specific example 22 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described with reference to FIGS. 321 and 322. FIG. 321 is a timing chart 19 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command in the normal gaming state, and FIGS. 322(a) to (h) are (a) to (h) in the timing chart 19 of FIG. This is an example of a performance corresponding to h). Note that FIGS. 321 and 322 differ from FIG. 272 only in the number of pending events, and other events are common, so the description will be omitted as appropriate.

First, at timing T0, the specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state) changes to the normal gaming state, and the second special symbol pending number stored in the main control unit 110m during the specific gaming state changes from "1" to "0". As the second special symbol decreases, a loss fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (second special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0" and a process is performed to start the second variable production.

At this time, while the fluctuating BGM is being output, the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F changes from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. ” is displayed. Furthermore, since the second pending icon display area 70D is not displayed, the icon TI is not displayed in the icon display area 70C without being shifted (reduced) from the second pending icon display area 70D. Displayed as a 10-frame animation. In addition, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the second lamp pattern LZ starts, but the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation), and the icon TI rotates. (direction action) is in progress.

Next, at timing T1, a game ball enters the first starting port 45, so that the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "0" to "1". . When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (the first special figure pending number designation command as the winning signal, the pre-reading designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m memorizes (recognizes) ), the number of reserved first special drawings changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is increased from "1" to "2" in a specific update mode, and A pending icon HI is additionally displayed (increased display) in the first display section 70B1 of the pending icon display area 70B in a normal addition mode, and the winning is based on the current winning since it is a winning to the first start opening 45 during the normal gaming state. Sound is output (see FIG. 322(a)).

Thereafter, at timing T2, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). Further, the rotation operation of the icon TI continues (see FIG. 322(b)).

Then, at timing T3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (a command error has occurred), the second variable production will be executed. No termination processing will be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI continue, the periods of temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, variable display of the special pattern TZ, and variable display of the second lamp pattern LZ are extended. Accordingly, the BGM output is maintained during the fluctuation (see FIG. 322(c)).

Further, when a plurality of pending icons are displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B at timing T3, the plural pending icons also continue to rotate in the same manner as the above-mentioned continuation of the rotating operation of the icon TI. At this time, the rotation operations of the plurality of pending icons are synchronized with each other. For example, when the hold icon displayed on the first display part 70B1 of the first hold icon display area 70B is located at the reference position, the hold icon displayed on the second display part 70B2 of the first hold icon display area 70B is also located at the reference position, and when the hold icon displayed on the first display section 70B1 of the first hold icon display area 70B is located in the 3 o'clock direction, the second display section of the first hold icon display area 70B The hold icon displayed on 70B2 is also located at the 3 o'clock direction.

However, although the rotation operation of the icon TI and the rotation operation of the plurality of pending icons continue, in FIGS. Execution is restricted (not performed).

Note that the rotational motion of the icon TI and the rotational motion of the plurality of pending icons may be synchronized, or the rotational motion of the icon TI and the rotational motion of the plurality of pending icons may not be synchronized.

Thereafter, at timing T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". 1. Loss fluctuation display of special symbols starts. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. If this is not possible (a command error has occurred), the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "2", and the process to start the first variable production is not performed (Fig. 322(d)).

Then, at timing T5, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (a command error has occurred), the second variable production will be executed. No termination processing will be performed.

Thereafter, at timing T6, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 1. Loss fluctuation display of special symbols starts. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. If this is not possible (a command error has occurred), the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "2", and the process to start the first variable production is not performed (Fig. 322(f)).

Thereafter, at timing T7, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the second special figure is started in response to the fluctuating display of the second special symbol. Processing to end the variable performance is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation regardless of whether it is a normal icon or a special icon. . In addition, the temporarily stopped performance symbol 70a in the losing mode comes to a final stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop at "814", which is the same as the performance symbol 70a. Furthermore, the second lamp pattern LZ that was being variably displayed on the sub-second variable display 82 stops being displayed (turns off) in a losing manner (see FIG. 322(g)). In addition, in the case where the continuous notice performance has been executed for the loss fluctuation display of the second special symbol, the continuous notice performance will end at this timing.

At timing T7, although the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased, the pending icon displayed in the first display section 70B1 of the first pending icon display area 70B and the first pending icon display area The pending icon displayed on the second display section 70B2 of 70B is not erased (updated).
Although the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number display area 70E of special symbols is It is no longer updated.

In addition, the reservation icon displayed in the first reservation icon display area 70B, the reservation icon displayed on the second display part 70B2 of the first reservation icon display area 70B, the sub-first reservation display 83, and the first special figure reservation number The first special symbol pending number displayed in the display area 70E may be updated at the timing of T5.

After that, at timing T8, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of second reserved symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m are "0", so the customer Shifts to a waiting state (game standby state). When the production control unit 130m receives the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "2" to "0". ”.

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is displayed (updated) decreased from "2" to "0" in a specific update mode. , the player waits until a customer waiting demonstration performance is executed or a new variable display of special symbols starts (see FIG. 322(h)).

In addition, at the timing of T3 and timing of T4, the production control unit 130m was able to normally receive the command (stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but based on the reception of this command, the production control unit 130m did not send the command. Even if the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the directed production command (command abnormality has occurred), the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m are produced. The same process as in the case where the control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (command abnormality has occurred) is performed.

In addition, at the timing of T7, the production control unit 130m could not properly receive the stop command (stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m, and at the timing of T8, the customer waiting command sent from the main control unit 110m If the production control unit 130m successfully receives the state designation command, at this timing, a process is performed to end the second variable production that was started in response to the variable display of the second special symbol, and the production control unit The number of reserved first special drawings stored (kept) by 130m changes from "1" to "0".

In addition, here, specific example 15 was explained where the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command in the normal gaming state (command abnormality has occurred), but the gaming state is in a specific gaming state (time saving gaming state, variable probability gaming). Even if a game ball enters the second starting port 47 in the state) and a variable display of the second special symbol is performed, the basic flow is the same as the above explanation.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub-first reservation display 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, and the first starting port 45, respectively, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special symbol, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure It may be read as the pending number display area 70F, the second pending icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47.

Furthermore, when scrolling the background image is continued in a specific gaming state, the display of the right-handed game image MU (see FIG. 332, etc.) is also continued. Thereby, even if the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (command abnormality has occurred), it is possible to encourage the player to play the game that is most suitable for the player (right-handed play).
In addition, when displaying not only the right-handed image MU but also the number of successive jackpot games (so-called consecutive number of wins), this may be continued, and the game media obtained from the jackpot games may be displayed continuously. If the number is displayed, this may be continued. Thereby, even if the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (command abnormality has occurred), it is possible to give the player a certain sense of satisfaction.

As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 321 and 322, in the normal gaming state, during the execution of the second variable performance that is started in response to the variable display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol When a stop command (stop signal) for the first special symbol variable display that is started after the end of the first special symbol variable display is received, the second variable performance is ended. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Further, since the second variable performance ends upon reception of the stop command, it is possible to end the second variable performance without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 321 and 322, in the normal gaming state, while the icon (second running information) corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed, the second special symbol is When a command (stop signal) for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol that is started after the end of the variable display is received, the icon is erased. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Further, since the icon is deleted at the timing when the stop command is received, it is possible to delete the icon without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 321 and 322, in the normal gaming state, the second special symbol changes while the icon (second running information) corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed. When the stop command (stop signal) is received, and when the stop command for the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed while the corresponding icon (second running information) corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed. (stop signal) is received, the icon is erased in the same manner as when the stop signal is received. Therefore, it becomes possible to naturally erase the icon without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 321 and 322, in the normal gaming state, the first special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is When a customer waiting state designation command indicating that the number of special drawings on hold is "0" is received when the number is not "0", the number of reserved special drawings is displayed on the sub-first holding display 83 and the first number of special drawings on hold display area 70E. The number of reserved first special drawings is reduced to "0" and displayed. Therefore, the player is not given any doubt that the variable performance will not be executed even though the first special figure reservation number is not "0".

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 321 and 322, in the normal gaming state, during the execution of the second variable performance that is started in response to the variable display of the second special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol If the display stop command (stop signal) cannot be received, the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, but the scrolling of the background image is continued. Therefore, even if the performance symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bored due to a change in the background image.
On the other hand, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the execution of the "background preview effect" is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the user from feeling dissatisfied due to the performance pattern 70a being temporarily stopped and making it difficult to see the execution of the "background preview performance".

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 321 and 322, in the normal gaming state, during the execution of the second variable performance that is started in response to the variable display of the second special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol If the display stop command (stop signal) cannot be received, the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, but the rotation of the icon TI and the rotation of the plurality of pending icons are continued. Therefore, even if the performance symbol 70a is in a temporarily stopped state, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bored due to the rotational movement of the icon TI or the rotational movement of the plurality of pending icons.
In addition, since the rotation of the icon TI and the rotation of the plurality of pending icons are performed in synchronization with each other, in order to prevent players from feeling bored, the appearance should be improved. can do well.
On the other hand, although the rotation operation of the icon TI and the rotation operation of the plurality of pending icons are continued, the execution of "the icon change effect" and the "hold icon change effect" is restricted. Therefore, the performance pattern 70a is in an irregular state where it remains temporarily stopped, and it is possible to prevent the performance from becoming too excessive.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 321 and 322, in the normal gaming state, during the execution of the second variable performance that is started in response to the variable display of the second special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol If the display stop command (stop signal) cannot be received, the BGM output is maintained during fluctuation. Therefore, the player can be aurally entertained, and the player can be prevented from feeling bored.

In addition, when adopting a configuration in which the output of the fluctuating BGM is stopped at the timing of T3 or a special BGM is output in place of the fluctuating BGM output, it is necessary to understand that the system is in an irregular state. It can be made easier.

In addition, in the normal gaming state, during the execution of the second variable performance that was started in response to the jackpot variable display of the second special symbol, the loss of the first special symbol that was started after the end of the variable display of the second special symbol. When a stop command (stop signal) for the variable display is received, the second variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a, variable display of the special symbol TZ) may be ended in a jackpot mode.

(Specific example 23 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A specific example 23 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described with reference to FIGS. 323 and 324. FIG. 323 is a timing chart 20 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command in the normal gaming state, and FIGS. 324(a) to (f) are (a) to (f) in the timing chart 20 of FIG. This is an example of a performance corresponding to f). Note that since the events in FIGS. 323 and 324 are common to those in FIG. 272, the description will be omitted as appropriate.

First, at timing T0, the specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state) changes to the normal gaming state, and the second special symbol pending number stored in the main control unit 110m during the specific gaming state changes from "1" to "0". As the second special symbol decreases, a loss fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (second special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0" and a process is performed to start the second variable production.

At this time, while the fluctuating BGM is being output, the second special symbol reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special symbol reservation number display area 70F changes from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. ” is displayed. Furthermore, since the second pending icon display area 70D is not displayed, the icon TI is not displayed in the icon display area 70C without being shifted (reduced) from the second pending icon display area 70D. Displayed as a 10-frame animation. In addition, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the second lamp pattern LZ starts, but the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation), and the icon TI rotates. (direction action) is in progress.
Further, the lighting devices (the frame lighting device 10, the board lighting device 76) normally emit light during fluctuation.

Next, at timing T1, a game ball enters the first starting port 45, so that the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "0" to "1". . When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (the first special figure pending number designation command as the winning signal, the pre-reading designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m memorizes (recognizes) ), the number of reserved first special drawings changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is increased and displayed from "0" to "1" in a specific update mode, and A pending icon HI is additionally displayed (increased display) in the first display section 70B1 of the pending icon display area 70B in a normal addition mode, and the winning is based on the current winning since it is a winning to the first start opening 45 during the normal gaming state. Sound is output (see FIG. 324(a)).
Further, the lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 76) normally emit light (for example, blue) during fluctuation (see FIG. 324(a)).

Thereafter, at timing T2, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). Further, the rotation operation of the icon TI continues (see FIG. 324(b)).
In addition, the lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76) switch from normal light emission (for example, blue) during fluctuation to light emission during stop (for example, blue and white) (see FIG. 324(b)).

Then, at timing T3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (a command error has occurred), the second variable production will be executed. No termination processing will be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI continue, the periods of temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, variable display of the special pattern TZ, and variable display of the second lamp pattern LZ are extended. Accordingly, the BGM output is maintained during the fluctuation (see FIG. 324(c)).
Further, the light emission (for example, blue-white) during stop in the lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76) is also maintained (see FIG. 324(c)).

Although it is assumed that the light emission is maintained during the stop at the timing T3, the light emission may be stopped without being maintained. In this case, after the timing T3, the light may be emitted during normal fluctuation (for example, blue). Further, the light may be turned off after the timing T3.
On the other hand, instead of the light emission during stoppage, a special light emission mode (light emission mode when a command cannot be received normally) may be executed at the timing T3.

After that, at timing T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 1. Loss fluctuation display of special symbols starts. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. If it is not possible (a command abnormality has occurred), the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "1", and the process to start the first variable production is not performed (Fig. 324(d)).

Thereafter, at timing T5, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the second special figure is started in response to the fluctuating display of the second special symbol. Processing to end the variable performance is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation regardless of whether it is a normal icon or a special icon. . In addition, the temporarily stopped performance symbol 70a in the losing mode comes to a final stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop at "814", which is the same as the performance symbol 70a. Furthermore, the second lamp pattern LZ that was being variably displayed on the sub-second variable display 82 stops being displayed (turns off) in a losing manner (see FIG. 324(e)). In addition, in the case where the continuous notice performance has been executed for the loss fluctuation display of the second special symbol, the continuous notice performance will end at this timing.
Further, the lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 76) switch from emitting light while stopped (for example, blue and white) to emitting light while waiting for a customer (for example, white) (see FIG. 324(e)).

After that, at timing T6, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of second reserved symbols stored in the main control unit 110m are "0", so the customer Shifts to a waiting state (game standby state). When the production control unit 130m receives the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0". ”.

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is displayed (updated) decreased from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. , the player waits until the customer waiting demonstration effect is executed or the variable display of special symbols starts (see FIG. 324(f)).
Further, the lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76) maintain light emission (for example, white) while waiting for customers (see FIG. 324(f)).

In addition, at the timing of T3 and timing of T4, the production control unit 130m was able to normally receive the command (stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but based on the reception of this command, the production control unit 130m did not send the command. Even if the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the directed production command (command abnormality has occurred), the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m are produced. The same process as in the case where the control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (command abnormality has occurred) is performed.

In addition, at the timing of T5, the production control unit 130m could not properly receive the stop command (stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m, and at the timing of T6, the customer waiting command sent from the main control unit 110m If the production control unit 130m successfully receives the state designation command, at this timing, a process is performed to end the second variable production that was started in response to the variable display of the second special symbol, and the production control unit The number of reserved first special drawings stored (kept) by 130m changes from "1" to "0".

Then, although the background image continues to scroll, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as one frame of non-animation, regardless of whether it is a normal icon or a special icon. . In addition, the temporarily stopped production symbol 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a permanent stop at "814", which is the same as the production symbol 70a, and the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special symbol reservation number are displayed. The number of reserved first special symbols displayed in the display area 70E will be displayed (updated) decreased from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. It should be noted that if the continuous notice performance is being executed for the loss fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the continuous notice performance will end at this timing.

In addition, here, specific example 23 was explained in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command in the normal gaming state (command abnormality has occurred), but the gaming state is in a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, variable probability gaming Even if a game ball enters the second starting port 47 in the state) and a variable display of the second special symbol is performed, the basic flow is the same as the above explanation.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub-first reservation display 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, and the first starting port 45, respectively, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special symbol, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure It may be read as the pending number display area 70F, the second pending icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47.

As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 323 and 324, in the normal gaming state, during the execution of the second variable performance that is started in response to the variable display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol When a stop command (stop signal) for the first special symbol variable display that is started after the end of the first special symbol variable display is received, the second variable performance is ended. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Further, since the second variable performance ends upon reception of the stop command, it is possible to end the second variable performance without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 323 and 324, in the normal gaming state, while the icon (second running information) corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed, the second special symbol is When a command (stop signal) for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol that is started after the end of the variable display is received, the icon is erased. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Further, since the icon is deleted at the timing when the stop command is received, it is possible to delete the icon without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 323 and 324, in the normal gaming state, the second special symbol changes while the icon (second running information) corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed. When the stop command (stop signal) is received, and when the stop command for the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed while the corresponding icon (second running information) corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed. (stop signal) is received, the icon is erased in the same manner as when the stop signal is received. Therefore, it becomes possible to naturally erase the icon without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 323 and 324, in the normal gaming state, the first special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is When a customer waiting state designation command indicating that the number of special drawings on hold is "0" is received when the number is not "0", the number of reserved special drawings is displayed on the sub-first holding display 83 and the first number of special drawings on hold display area 70E. The number of reserved first special drawings is reduced to "0" and displayed. Therefore, the player is not given any doubt that the variable performance will not be executed even though the first special figure reservation number is not "0".

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 323 and 324, in the normal gaming state, during the execution of the second variable performance that is started in response to the variable display of the second special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol is If the display stop command (stop signal) cannot be received, the lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76) keep emitting light while the display is stopped. Therefore, it is possible to visually entertain the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bored.

In addition, the configuration is configured to turn off the lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 76) or execute a special light emission mode (light emission mode when a command cannot be received normally) at the timing of T3. When adopting this method, it is possible to make it easier to understand that the system is in an irregular state.

Although it was decided to perform the light emission while stopped from the timing T2 to the timing T5, the light emission while stopped is ended at the timing when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the timing T2, and the light emission while stopped is performed in other light emission modes (e.g., light emission while waiting for customers). It may also be made to emit light.

(Specific example 24 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 24 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described using FIG. 325. 325(a) to 325(f) correspond to FIGS. 323 and 324(a) to 324(f), so the description will be omitted as appropriate.

In FIG. 325(a), the light amount value can be adjusted (effect adjustment). Specifically, when the player operates the upper button of the cross key (performance adjustment operation is performed), the light amount value increases, indicating that the light amount value has been changed from 2 to 3, for example.
Although the light amount value has been adjusted (effect adjustment), the light amount value image (not shown) is not displayed, and a confirmation sound is output according to the current light amount value (not shown). .

In FIG. 325(b), the light amount value continues to be 3. Note that since FIG. 325(b) corresponds to the end of the above-mentioned variable performance, it is possible to adjust the volume and light intensity using the changeover switch 22 that can be operated by the game clerk, but the volume cannot be adjusted using the cross key 19 that can be operated by the player. Adjustment and light amount adjustment are now regulated (limited).

In FIG. 325(c), the light amount value can be adjusted (effect adjustment). Specifically, when the upper button of the cross key is operated by the player (performance adjustment operation is performed), the light amount value increases, indicating that the light amount value has been changed from 3 to 4, for example.
Although the light amount value has been adjusted (effect adjustment), the light amount value image (not shown) is not displayed, and a confirmation sound is output according to the current light amount value (not shown). .

In FIG. 325(d), the light amount value can be adjusted (effect adjustment). Specifically, when the player operates the upper button of the cross key (performance adjustment operation is performed), the light amount value increases, indicating that the light amount value has been changed from 4 to 5, for example.
Although the light amount value has been adjusted (effect adjustment), the light amount value image (not shown) is not displayed, and a confirmation sound is output according to the current light amount value (not shown). .
Strictly speaking, FIG. 325(d) corresponds to the start of the above-mentioned fluctuating effect, so after the volume adjustment and light amount adjustment are regulated (restricted) for a certain period, the state shown in FIG. 325(d) is reached. (The performance can be adjusted).

In FIG. 325(e), the light amount value continues to be 5. Note that FIG. 325(e) corresponds to the end of the above-mentioned variable performance, so although it is possible to adjust the volume and light intensity using the changeover switch 22 that can be operated by the game clerk, the volume cannot be adjusted using the cross key 19 that can be operated by the player. Adjustment and light amount adjustment are now regulated (limited).
Note that in FIG. 325(e) as well, it may be possible to adjust the volume and the amount of light using the cross key 19 that can be operated by the player.

In FIG. 325(f), the light amount value continues to be 5, and the light amount value can be adjusted (effect adjustment).

As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 325, in the normal gaming state, during the execution of the second variable performance that is started in response to the variable display of the second special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol is Even if the stop command (stop signal) cannot be received, the upper button of the cross key is operated by the player as shown in FIGS. 325(c) and 325(d) (performance adjustment operation ) and the light intensity value can be adjusted. Therefore, even in an irregular state, it is possible to prevent loss of flexibility and convenience in adjusting the performance.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 325, in the normal gaming state, the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped during execution of the second variable performance that is started in response to the variable display of the second special symbol. Even if the time command (stop signal) cannot be received, the upper button of the cross key is operated by the player (the effect adjustment operation is not performed), as shown in FIGS. 325(c) and 325(d). It is now possible to adjust the light intensity value (see below), but the light intensity value image is not displayed. Therefore, although the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, it is actually being displayed in a variable manner. It is possible to save the effort of changing the display control depending on whether the control unit has received the command normally.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 325, in the normal gaming state, the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped during execution of the second variable performance that is started in response to the variable display of the second special symbol. Even if the time command (stop signal) cannot be received, the upper button of the cross key is operated by the player (the effect adjustment operation is not performed), as shown in FIGS. 325(c) and 325(d). Although the light intensity value image is not displayed, a confirmation sound is output according to the current light intensity value. Therefore, it is possible to easily recognize that the player's performance adjustment operation is reflected.

(Specific example 1 when the production control unit normally receives the command, and specific example 25 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
Specific example 1 in the case where the production control unit 130m normally receives the command, and specific example 25 in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command will be described using FIGS. 326 and 327. In other words, regarding the "predetermined effect" that can be executed in the "specific variation pattern (special figure variation pattern 01)", if the effect control unit 130m successfully receives the command (FIG. 326), and if the effect control unit 130m receives the command The execution mode will be explained in comparison with the case where normal reception is not possible (FIG. 327).
FIG. 326 (top) is timing chart 1 when the production control unit 130m normally receives a command in the normal gaming state, and FIG. 326 (bottom) corresponds to timing chart 1 (a) to (d). This is an example of a performance.
FIG. 327 (top) is the timing chart 21 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive commands in the normal gaming state, and FIG. 327 (bottom) corresponds to (a) to (f) of the timing chart 21. This is an example of a performance.

First, at timing T0 in FIG. 326, a starting winning occurs during the normal gaming state, and the loss fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, Processing to start the first variation effect is performed.
Here, it is assumed that the special figure variation pattern 01 is transmitted as the special figure variation pattern designation command, and the variable effect pattern 1 is executed as the first variable effect.
It should be noted that until T0 is reached, the normal gaming state may be used, or the specific gaming state may be used.

Next, at timing T1, a "predetermined effect" is executed before the effect pattern 70a temporarily stops. The "predetermined performance" is a performance in which the performance pattern 70a performs an effect performance (a performance accompanied by light emission), temporarily stops at a temporary stop position while performing an effect performance (a performance accompanied by light emission), and all of the left center right If the production pattern 70a temporarily stops at a temporary stop position while performing an effect production (production accompanied by light emission), it will develop, for example, to SP reach (in this case, special pattern variation pattern 04, variation production pattern 5, etc. ” is executed).

On the other hand, when only the left presentation pattern 70a temporarily stops at the temporary stop position while performing an effect presentation (a presentation accompanied by light emission), and the middle right presentation pattern 70a does not perform an effect presentation (a presentation accompanied by light emission). Or, if the left and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop at the temporary stop position while performing an effect performance (a performance that involves light emission), and the inner performance pattern 70a does not perform an effect performance (a performance that involves light emission), it remains as it is. After performing a temporary stop, the main stop is performed. In other words, the "predetermined performance" is a performance in which at least one performance symbol 70a temporarily stops at a temporary stop position while performing an effect performance (a performance accompanied by light emission), regardless of the presence or absence of development (FIG. 326(a)) reference).

Thereafter, at timing T2, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). Further, the rotation operation of the icon TI continues (see FIG. 326(b)).

Then, at timing T3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing to end the first variable production is performed. become.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation regardless of whether it is a normal icon or a special icon. . In addition, the temporarily stopped performance symbol 70a in the losing mode comes to a final stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop at "814", which is the same as the performance symbol 70a. Furthermore, the first lamp pattern LZ that was being variably displayed on the sub-first variable display 81 is stopped and displayed (turned off) in a losing manner (see FIG. 326(c)).
Then, at timing T4, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the customer waiting designation command, the customer waiting performance starts (see FIG. 326(d)).

Next, a case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described.
First, at timing T0 in FIG. 327, the specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state) changes to the normal gaming state, and the second special symbol pending number stored in the main control unit 110m during the specific gaming state changes from "1". As the number decreases to "0", a loss fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (second special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0" and a process is performed to start the second variable production.
Here, it is assumed that the special figure variation pattern 12 is transmitted as the special figure variation pattern designation command, and the variable effect pattern 25 is executed as the second variable effect.

At this time, while the fluctuating BGM is being output, the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F changes from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. ” is displayed. Furthermore, since the second pending icon display area 70D is not displayed, the icon TI is not displayed in the icon display area 70C without being shifted (reduced) from the second pending icon display area 70D. Displayed as a 10-frame animation. In addition, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the second lamp pattern LZ starts, but the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation), and the icon TI rotates. (direction action) is in progress.

Next, at timing T1, a game ball enters the first starting port 45, so that the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "0" to "1". . When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (the first special figure pending number designation command as the winning signal, the pre-reading designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m memorizes (recognizes) ), the number of reserved first special drawings changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is increased and displayed from "0" to "1" in a specific update mode, and A pending icon HI is additionally displayed (increased display) in the first display section 70B1 of the pending icon display area 70B in a normal addition mode, and the winning is based on the current winning since it is a winning to the first start opening 45 during the normal gaming state. Sound is output (see FIG. 327(a)).

Thereafter, at timing T2, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). Further, the rotation operation of the icon TI continues (see FIG. 327(b)).

Then, at timing T3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (a command error has occurred), the second variable production will be executed. No termination processing will be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI continue, the periods of temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, variable display of the special pattern TZ, and variable display of the second lamp pattern LZ are extended. Accordingly, the BGM output is maintained during the fluctuation (see FIG. 327(c)).

After that, at timing T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 1. Loss fluctuation display of special symbols starts. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. If it is not possible (a command abnormality has occurred), the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "1", and the process to start the first variable production is not performed (Fig. 327(d)).

Here, it is assumed that special figure variation pattern 01 was transmitted as a special figure variation pattern designation command, but the production control unit 130m could not receive it normally.
In this case, the fluctuation performance pattern (for example, fluctuation performance pattern 1) corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation pattern 01 is not executed, and the second fluctuation performance that was started in response to the fluctuation display of the second special symbol continues (Fig. 327(d)).

Thereafter, at timing T5, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the second special figure is started in response to the fluctuating display of the second special symbol. Processing to end the variable performance is performed.

In other words, from the timing of T4 to the timing of T5, the "predetermined effect" that can be executed in the variable effect pattern (for example, variable effect pattern 1) corresponding to the special figure variable pattern 01 will not be executed (FIG. 327(d) ~See Figure 327(e)).

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation regardless of whether it is a normal icon or a special icon. . In addition, the temporarily stopped performance symbol 70a in the losing mode comes to a final stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop at "814", which is the same as the performance symbol 70a. Furthermore, the second lamp pattern LZ that was being variably displayed on the sub-second variable display 82 is stopped and displayed (turned off) in a losing manner (see FIG. 327(e)). In addition, in the case where the continuous notice performance has been executed for the loss fluctuation display of the second special symbol, the continuous notice performance will end at this timing.

After that, at timing T6, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of second reserved symbols stored in the main control unit 110m are "0", so the customer Shifts to a waiting state (game standby state). When the production control unit 130m receives the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0". ”.

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is displayed (updated) decreased from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. , the player waits until a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed or a new variable display of special symbols starts (see FIG. 327(f)).

In addition, at the timing of T3 and timing of T4, the production control unit 130m was able to normally receive the command (stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but based on the reception of this command, the production control unit 130m did not send the command. Even if the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the directed production command (command abnormality has occurred), the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m are produced. The same process as in the case where the control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (command abnormality has occurred) is performed.

In addition, at the timing of T5, the production control unit 130m could not properly receive the stop command (stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m, and at the timing of T6, the customer waiting command sent from the main control unit 110m If the production control unit 130m successfully receives the state designation command, at this timing, a process is performed to end the second variable production that was started in response to the variable display of the second special symbol, and the production control unit The number of reserved first special drawings stored (kept) by 130m changes from "1" to "0".

Then, although the background image continues to scroll, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as one frame of non-animation, regardless of whether it is a normal icon or a special icon. . In addition, the temporarily stopped production symbol 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a permanent stop at "814", which is the same as the production symbol 70a, and the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special symbol reservation number are displayed. The number of reserved first special symbols displayed in the display area 70E will be displayed (updated) decreased from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. It should be noted that if the continuous notice performance is being executed for the loss fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the continuous notice performance will end at this timing.

In addition, here, we will discuss specific example 1 when the production control section normally receives a command in the normal gaming state, and specific example 25 when the production control section cannot receive the command normally (command abnormality has occurred). As explained above, even if the game ball enters the second starting port 47 in a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) and a variable display of the second special symbol is performed, the basic The flow is similar to the explanation above.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub-first reservation display 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, and the first starting port 45, respectively, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special symbol, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure It may be read as the pending number display area 70F, the second pending icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47.

Note that the "predetermined performance" of the performance pattern 70a performed prior to the temporary stop is not limited to an effect performance (a performance accompanied by light emission), and may be any other performance. For example, it may be an effect in which the character (decoration part) of the effect pattern 70a takes an action prior to the temporary stop (for example, an action of raising the weapon in the case of a character holding a weapon), or an effect in which the character (decoration part) of the effect pattern 70a performs an action prior to the temporary stop. It may also be an effect where the entire lights are turned off.

In this way, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 326 and 327, a specific variation pattern (special figure variation pattern 01) and a variation effect pattern (for example, variation effect pattern 1) corresponding to the special figure variation pattern 01 are In the case of execution, if the production control unit normally receives the command, it is possible to execute the “predetermined production” using the production pattern 70a, but if the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command, that is, T3 At the timing of T4, the production control section 130m could not normally receive the stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) sent from the main control section 110m (a command error occurred), and at the timing of T4. , the production control unit sends the start commands (first special symbol reservation number designation command as a start signal, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command (special symbol variation pattern 01)) transmitted from the main control unit 110m. If 130m cannot be received normally (command abnormality has occurred), execution of the "predetermined effect" by the effect pattern 70a is restricted (not executed). Therefore, in the non-irregular state (FIG. 326), the player can be entertained by executing the "predetermined performance" using the performance symbol 70a, while the second variable performance in the irregular state (FIG. 327) is continuing (FIG. 327). 327(d) to FIG. 327(e), it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the "predetermined performance" being suddenly performed using the performance pattern 70a.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 327, in the normal gaming state, the variable display of the second special symbol ends during the execution of the second variable performance that is started in response to the variable display of the second special symbol. When a stop command (stop signal) for the variable display of the first special symbol that is started later is received, the second variable performance is ended. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Further, since the second variable performance ends upon reception of the stop command, it is possible to end the second variable performance without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 327, in the normal gaming state, while the icon (second running information) corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed. When a stop command (stop signal) for the variable display of the first special symbol that is started after the end is received, the icon is erased. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Further, since the icon is deleted at the timing when the stop command is received, it is possible to delete the icon without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Furthermore, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 327, in the normal gaming state, the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped while the icon (second running information) corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed. When the time command (stop signal) is received, and when the icon (second running information) corresponding to the fluctuating display of the second special symbol is displayed, the stop command (stop signal) of the fluctuating display of the first special symbol is received. When a signal) is received, the icon is erased in the same manner. Therefore, it becomes possible to naturally erase the icon without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 327, in the normal gaming state, the first special figure pending number displayed on the sub-first pending display 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E is "0". When a customer waiting state designation command indicating that the number of special drawings on hold is "0" is received when the number of special drawings on hold is "0", the first The number of reserved special drawings is now displayed as being reduced to "0". Therefore, the player is not given any doubt that the variable performance will not be executed even though the first special figure reservation number is not "0".

(Specific example 2 when the production control unit normally receives the command and specific example 26 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
Specific example 2 in the case where the production control unit 130m normally receives the command, and specific example 26 in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command will be described using FIGS. 328 and 329. In other words, "decision success production (movement of the first movable member 73 to the maximum operation position)", "decision success vibration production", and "decision success light emission" that can be executed in the "specific variation pattern (special figure variation pattern 08)" Regarding the effect (the frame lighting device 10 and board lighting device 76 emit light in rainbow colors), the effect control unit 130m normally receives the command (Fig. 328), and the effect control unit 130m normally receives the command. The execution mode will be explained in comparison with the case where it is not possible (FIG. 329).
FIG. 328 (top) is timing chart 2 when the production control unit 130m normally receives a command in the normal gaming state, and FIG. 328 (bottom) corresponds to timing chart 2 (a) to (c). This is an example of a performance.
FIG. 329 (top) is the timing chart 22 when the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive commands in the normal gaming state, and FIG. 329 (bottom) corresponds to (a) to (f) of the timing chart 22. This is an example of a performance.

First, at timing T0 in FIG. 328, a starting prize occurs during the normal gaming state, and the jackpot fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, Processing to start the first variation effect is performed.
Here, it is assumed that the special figure variation pattern 08 is transmitted as the special figure variation pattern designation command, and any one of the variable production patterns 15 to 17 is executed as the first variation production.
It should be noted that until T0 is reached, the normal gaming state may be used, or the specific gaming state may be used.

Further, from the timing T0 to the timing T1, the first movable member 73 is at the origin position, the production button 17 is in a non-vibrating state, and the lighting device emits light during normal variation if it is in normal variation. If it is in normal reach, it will emit light during normal reach, if it is in SP reach, it will emit light during SP reach, and if it is in SPSP reach, it will emit light during SPSP reach.

Additionally, various preview effects can be executed from timing T0 to timing T2. The various preview performances include the above-mentioned dialogue preview performance, step-up preview performance, pseudo-continuation performance, development performance, cut-in performance, final performance, the icon change performance, and the pending icon change performance.
In other words, when the main control unit 110m executes the first special pattern jackpot variation and the production control unit 130m executes the first variation production corresponding to the first special pattern jackpot variation, various preview productions can be executed. It is.

In addition, when the main control unit 110m executes the first special pattern jackpot variation and the production control unit 130m executes the first variation performance corresponding to the first special pattern jackpot variation, normal reach → SP reach → SPSP reach is possible.

Next, at the timing of T1, the effect pattern 70a starts a temporary stop (for example, starts a temporary stop at 555), and "decision success effect (movement of the first movable member 73 to the maximum operation position)" is performed. 328(a)).

Then, at timing T2, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode. If the production control unit 130m successfully receives the stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing to end the first variable production is performed. become.
At this time, a jackpot (555) is formed by the effect pattern 70a in the display mode including the character, and the main stop is made, and the main stop is made when the special pattern TZ is "555", which is the same as the effect pattern 70a. Further, the first movable member 73 returns to the initial position (origin position), the production button 17 becomes non-vibrating, and the frame lighting device 10 and board lighting device 76 are turned off (see FIG. 328(b)). .

Thereafter, at timing T3, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the opening period of the jackpot game starts. When the performance control unit 130m receives the opening designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit 130m performs a process of starting the opening performance.
At this time, an opening image consisting of an opening background and the words "Jackpot" is displayed. Further, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 start emitting light during the jackpot game (see FIG. 328(c)).

Next, a case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described.
First, at timing T0 in FIG. 329, the specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state) changes to the normal gaming state, and the second special symbol pending number stored in the main control unit 110m during the specific gaming state changes from "1". As the number decreases to "0", a loss fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (second special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0" and a process is performed to start the second variable production.
Here, it is assumed that the special figure variation pattern 12 is transmitted as the special figure variation pattern designation command, and the variable effect pattern 25 is executed as the second variable effect.

Further, at timing T0, the first movable member 73 is at the origin position, the effect button 17 is in a non-vibrating state, and the lighting device emits light during normal fluctuation.

Additionally, various preview effects can be executed from timing T0 to timing T3. The various preview performances include the above-mentioned dialogue preview performance, step-up preview performance, pseudo-continuation performance, development performance, cut-in performance, final performance, the icon change performance, and the pending icon change performance.

At this time, while the fluctuating BGM is being output, the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F changes from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. ” is displayed. Furthermore, since the second pending icon display area 70D is not displayed, the icon TI is not displayed in the icon display area 70C without being shifted (reduced) from the second pending icon display area 70D. Displayed as a 10-frame animation. In addition, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the second lamp pattern LZ starts, but the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation), and the icon TI rotates. (direction action) is in progress.

Next, at timing T1, a game ball enters the first starting port 45, so that the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "0" to "1". . When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (the first special figure pending number designation command as the winning signal, the pre-reading designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m memorizes (recognizes) ), the number of reserved first special drawings changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is increased and displayed from "0" to "1" in a specific update mode, and A pending icon HI is additionally displayed (increased display) in the first display section 70B1 of the pending icon display area 70B in a normal addition mode, and the winning is based on the current winning since it is a winning to the first start opening 45 during the normal gaming state. Sound is output (see FIG. 329(a)).

Thereafter, at timing T2, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). Further, the rotation operation of the icon TI continues (see FIG. 329(b)).
Further, the lighting device usually finishes emitting light during fluctuation and then emitting light during stop.

Then, at timing T3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (a command error has occurred), the second variable production will be executed. No termination processing will be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI continue, the periods of temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, variable display of the special pattern TZ, and variable display of the second lamp pattern LZ are extended. Accordingly, the BGM output is maintained during the fluctuation (see FIG. 329(c)).

Furthermore, execution of various preview performances is restricted from timing T3 to timing T6. In other words, if the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command, even though the main control unit 110m is executing the first special pattern jackpot variation, the production control unit 130m will be able to perform the first special pattern jackpot variation corresponding to the first special pattern jackpot variation. The variable performance will not be executed, and the execution of various preview performances will be restricted (not executed).

For example, in FIG. 328, execution of the final performance is possible at a predetermined timing of the first variable performance, but in FIG. 329, execution of the final performance is restricted at a predetermined timing.
Further, in FIG. 328, the execution of the pseudo continuous effect is possible at a predetermined timing of the first variable effect, but in FIG. 329, the execution of the pseudo continuous effect is restricted at a predetermined timing.
Further, in FIG. 328, execution of the pending icon change effect is possible at a predetermined timing of the first variable effect, but in FIG. 329, execution of the pending icon effect is restricted at a predetermined timing.

In addition, in FIG. 328, at a predetermined timing of the first variable effect, it is possible to execute normal reach → SP reach → SPSP reach, but in FIG. 329, execution of these reach effects is restricted at a predetermined timing.

After that, at timing T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 1. Loss fluctuation display of special symbols starts. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. If it is not possible (a command abnormality has occurred), the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "1", and the process to start the first variable production is not performed (Fig. 329(d)).

Here, it is assumed that the special figure variation pattern 08 was transmitted as a special figure variation pattern designation command, but the production control unit 130m could not receive it normally.
In this case, the variable performance pattern (for example, any of variable performance patterns 15 to 17) corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation pattern 08 is not executed, and the second variable performance that is started in response to the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed. continues (see FIG. 329(d)).

Thereafter, at timing T5, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the second special figure is started in response to the fluctuating display of the second special symbol. Processing to end the variable performance is performed.

In other words, from the timing of T4 to the timing of T5, the "decision success performance" (first movable member 73 ``movement to the maximum operation position'', ``successful vibration performance'', and ``successful light emission performance'' will not be executed. That is, the first movable member 73 is at the initial position (origin position), the production button 17 is in a non-vibrating state, and the frame lighting device 10 and board lighting device 76 emit light while stopped (Fig. 329(d) ) to Figure 329(e)).

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation regardless of whether it is a normal icon or a special icon. . In addition, the temporarily stopped performance symbol 70a in the losing mode comes to a final stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop at "814", which is the same as the performance symbol 70a. Furthermore, the second lamp pattern LZ that was being variably displayed on the sub-second variable display 82 stops being displayed (turns off) in a losing manner (see FIG. 329(e)). In addition, in the case where the continuous notice performance has been executed for the loss fluctuation display of the second special symbol, the continuous notice performance will end at this timing.

Thereafter, at timing T6, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, the opening period of the jackpot game starts. When the performance control unit 130m receives the opening designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit 130m performs a process of starting the opening performance. In other words, the opening performance is started without executing the reach performance such as normal reach, SP reach, or SPSP reach.

At this time, an opening image consisting of an opening background and the words "Jackpot" is displayed. Further, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 start emitting light during the jackpot game (see FIG. 329(f)). In addition, from the timing of T6, a notice during a jackpot game (for example, if there is something indicating a jackpot in the pending information, a "pending continuous notice" indicating that a jackpot will occur consecutively after the jackpot game ends), etc. ) can be executed.

In addition, at the timing of T3 and timing of T4, the production control unit 130m was able to normally receive the command (stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but based on the reception of this command, the production control unit 130m did not send the command. Even if the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the directed production command (command abnormality has occurred), the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m are produced. The same process as in the case where the control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (command abnormality has occurred) is performed.

In addition, at the timing of T5, the production control unit 130m could not properly receive the stop command (stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m, and at the timing of T6, the opening designation sent from the main control unit 110m. If the command is successfully received by the production control unit 130m, a process is performed to end the second variable production that was started in response to the variable display of the second special symbol at this timing, and the production control unit 130m The stored number of reserved first special symbols changes from "1" to "0".

Then, although the background image continues to scroll, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as one frame of non-animation, regardless of whether it is a normal icon or a special icon. . In addition, the temporarily stopped production symbol 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a permanent stop at "814", which is the same as the production symbol 70a, and the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special symbol reservation number are displayed. The number of reserved first special symbols displayed in the display area 70E will be displayed (updated) decreased from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. It should be noted that if the continuous notice performance is being executed for the loss fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the continuous notice performance will end at this timing.

In addition, here, we will discuss specific example 1 when the production control section normally receives a command in the normal gaming state, and specific example 25 when the production control section cannot receive the command normally (command abnormality has occurred). As explained above, even if the game ball enters the second starting port 47 in a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) and a variable display of the second special symbol is performed, the basic The flow is similar to the explanation above.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub-first reservation display 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, and the first starting port 45, respectively, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special symbol, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure It may be read as the pending number display area 70F, the second pending icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47.

As described above, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 328 to 329, a specific variation pattern (special symbol variation pattern 08) and a variation production pattern corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern 01 (for example, variation production patterns 15 to 17) ), if the production control unit successfully receives the command, it will execute "decision success production (movement of the first movable member 73 to the maximum operation position)", "decision success vibration production", Although it is possible to execute the "determined successful light emission effect," if the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command, that is, at the timing of T3, the stop command (as a stop signal) is sent from the main control unit 110m. The production control unit 130m could not normally receive the special figure stop designation command (special figure stop designation command) (a command error occurred), and at the timing of T4, the start command (the first signal as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the special figure reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command (special symbol fluctuation pattern 08) (command abnormality has occurred), the "determined successful performance" (Movement of the first movable member 73 to the maximum operating position)," "Successful decision vibration performance," and "Successful decision light emission performance" were restricted (not executed). Therefore, in the non-irregular state (FIG. 328), the player is stimulated by executing the "successful decision effect (movement of the first movable member 73 to the maximum operating position)", "successful decision vibration effect", and "successful decision light emission effect". On the other hand, during the continuation of the second variable performance (FIGS. 329(d) to 329(e)) in the irregular state (FIG. 329), there is a sudden change in the "decisive success performance (the maximum of the first movable member 73)". It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to execution of "movement to the operating position", "successful decision vibration effect", and "successful decision light emission effect".

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 328 to 329, a specific variation pattern (special figure variation pattern 08) and a variation effect pattern corresponding to special figure variation pattern 01 (for example, any of the variation effect patterns 15 to 17) ), if the production control unit successfully receives the command, it is possible to execute various preview productions (for example, pseudo-continuation production, pending icon change production); If it cannot be received normally, that is, at the timing of T3, the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m (command abnormality). has occurred), at the timing of T4, the start commands (first special symbol reservation number designation command as a start signal, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command (special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m When the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the variation pattern 08)) (command abnormality has occurred), execution of various preview performances is restricted. Therefore, in the non-irregular state (Fig. 328), expectations for a jackpot can be improved by executing various preview performances, while in the irregular state (Fig. 329), while the second variable performance is continuing (Fig. 329 (d) ) to FIG. 329(e)), it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to sudden execution of various preview effects (for example, pseudo-continuous effect, pending icon change effect).

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 328 to 329, a specific variation pattern (special figure variation pattern 08) and a variation effect pattern corresponding to special figure variation pattern 01 (for example, any of the variation effect patterns 15 to 17) ), if the production control unit normally receives the command, it is possible to execute the reach production, but if the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command, that is, at the timing of T3, The production control unit 130m could not normally receive the stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m (a command error occurred), and at the timing of T4, the main control unit The production control unit 130m correctly receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command as a start signal, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command (special symbol variation pattern 08)) transmitted from 110m. If the command could not be received (a command error occurred), the execution of the reach effect was restricted. Therefore, in the non-irregular state (Fig. 328), the expectation of a jackpot can be improved by executing the reach effect, while in the irregular state (Fig. 329), while the second variable effect is continuing (Fig. 329 (d) ~FIG. 329(e)), it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the sudden execution of the reach effect.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 329, in the normal gaming state, the variable display of the second special symbol ends during execution of the second variable performance that is started in response to the variable display of the second special symbol. When a stop command (stop signal) for the variable display of the first special symbol that is started later is received, the second variable performance is ended. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Further, since the second variable performance ends upon reception of the stop command, it is possible to end the second variable performance without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 329, in the normal gaming state, while the icon (second running information) corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed. When a stop command (stop signal) for the variable display of the first special symbol that is started after the end is received, the icon is erased. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Further, since the icon is deleted at the timing when the stop command is received, it is possible to delete the icon without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 329, in the normal gaming state, the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped while the icon (second running information) corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed. When the time command (stop signal) is received, and when the icon (second running information) corresponding to the fluctuating display of the second special symbol is displayed, the stop command (stop signal) of the fluctuating display of the first special symbol is received. When a signal) is received, the icon is erased in the same manner. Therefore, it becomes possible to naturally erase the icon without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 329, in the normal gaming state, the first special figure pending number displayed in the sub-first pending display 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E is "0". When a customer waiting state designation command indicating that the number of special drawings on hold is "0" is received when the number of special drawings on hold is "0", the first The number of reserved special drawings is now displayed as being reduced to "0". Therefore, the player is not given any doubt that the variable performance will not be executed even though the first special figure reservation number is not "0".

(Specific example 27 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 27 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described using FIG. 330. FIG. 330 is a diagram illustrating the performance mode during the jackpot game after the event of FIG. 271 occurs. In other words, FIG. 271(e) and FIG. 330(e) are the same scene. In addition, in Figure 271, "1st special chart loss is changing" and "2nd special chart jackpot is changing" can be read as "2nd special chart losing is changing" and "1st special chart jackpot is changing". Similarly, the effect mode shown in FIG. 330 is obtained.

First, the case of a jackpot with "special symbol 02" will be explained. If "special symbol 02" has been determined, after the combination of the production symbol 70a of "814" has stopped in FIG. 330(e), an image such as "Super Jackpot" is displayed in FIG. 330(f). The opening performance is performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 330(g), during the execution of the round game, a character image KG and a character introduction image KSG are displayed to perform an effect that introduces the characters displayed in the reach effect, etc. ing.

In other words, when "special symbol 02" is determined, "777" can be permanently stopped as a combination of the corresponding production symbols 70a, and "777" can be permanently stopped as a combination of production symbols 70a. After that, the effect that introduces the characters shown in FIG. 330(g) is executed.
However, although "special symbol 02" has been determined, if it is impossible to permanently stop "777" as a combination of the corresponding effect symbols 70a (for example, when the event shown in FIG. 271 occurs), , as a combination of the corresponding performance symbol 70a, "777" is not brought to a final stop, but during a jackpot game, the same performance (performance introducing the character) as when "777" is originally brought to a final stop is performed. There is.

On the other hand, when "Special symbol 01" or "Special symbol 03" is determined, after the combination of the production symbol 70a of "814" in FIG. 330(e) comes to a final stop, "Jackpot" appears in FIG. 330(f). An opening performance is performed in which an image such as '' is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 330(g), during the execution of the round game, the probability variable mission performance described in FIG. 78 is executed.

In other words, when "special symbol 01" or "special symbol 03" is determined, it is possible to make a combination of even number symbols (zero), for example, as the combination of the corresponding production symbols 70a, and to make the production stop. After the combination of even symbols as the combination of the symbols 70a is finally stopped, the variable probability mission performance shown in FIG. 330(g) is executed.
However, if "special symbol 01" or "special symbol 03" has been determined, but it is impossible to make a combination of even symbols as a combination of the corresponding production symbols 70a (for example, as shown in FIG. 271) If an event occurs), the combination of even symbols is not stopped as the combination of the corresponding performance symbols 70a, but the same performance as when the combination of even symbols is originally stopped during a jackpot game (probable variable mission performance) is designed to be executed.
Then, when "special symbol 01" is determined, the variable probability mission presentation is a failure, and when "special symbol 03" is determined, the variable probability mission presentation is successful.

As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 330, when the event shown in FIG. 271 occurs, the combination that notifies you of a jackpot is not stopped as the combination of production symbols 70a, but the determined special It is possible to perform performances during the jackpot game according to the symbols. Therefore, when the combination of performance symbols 70a stops, it is difficult to know which special symbol it is, but depending on the performance executed during the jackpot game (character introduction performance, variable mission performance), which special symbol is the one? It becomes easier to understand whether it is a symbol (special symbol 02, special symbol 01, or special symbol 03). Furthermore, when a variable mission performance is executed, it becomes easier to understand which special symbol (special symbol 01 or special symbol 03) it is, depending on the result. Therefore, even if the combination of the performance symbols 70a corresponding to the special symbols cannot be completely stopped, a certain sense of satisfaction can be given to the player.

(Specific example 28 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 28 in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described using FIG. 331. The upper diagram in FIG. 331 is the timing chart 23 when the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command in the normal gaming state, and FIGS. This is an example of a performance corresponding to a) to (f).

First, at timing T0, the specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state) changes to the normal gaming state, and the second special symbol pending number stored in the main control unit 110m during the specific gaming state changes from "1" to "0". As the second special symbol decreases, a loss fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (second special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0" and a process is performed to start the second variable production.

At this time, while the fluctuating BGM is being output, the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F changes from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. ” is displayed. Furthermore, since the second pending icon display area 70D is not displayed, the icon TI is not displayed in the icon display area 70C without being shifted (reduced) from the second pending icon display area 70D. Displayed as a 10-frame animation. In addition, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the second lamp pattern LZ starts, but the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation), and the icon TI rotates. (direction action) is in progress.

Next, at timing T1, a game ball enters the first starting port 45, so that the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "0" to "1". . When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (the first special figure pending number designation command as the winning signal, the pre-reading designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m memorizes (recognizes) ), the number of reserved first special drawings changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is increased and displayed from "0" to "1" in a specific update mode, and A pending icon HI is additionally displayed (increased display) in the first display section 70B1 of the pending icon display area 70B in a normal addition mode, and the winning is based on the current winning since it is a winning to the first start opening 47 during the normal gaming state. Sound is output (see FIG. 331(a)).

Thereafter, at timing T2, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the second variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). Further, the rotation operation of the icon TI continues (see FIG. 331(b)).

Then, at timing T3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (a command error has occurred), the second variable production will be executed. The process to terminate is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI continue, the periods of temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, variable display of the special pattern TZ, and variable display of the second lamp pattern LZ are extended. Accordingly, the BGM output is maintained during the fluctuation (see FIG. 331(c)).

After that, at timing T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 1. The jackpot fluctuation display of special symbols starts. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. If it is not possible (a command abnormality has occurred), the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "1", and the process to start the first variable production is not performed (Fig. 331(d)).

Thereafter, at timing T5, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the second special figure is started in response to the fluctuating display of the second special symbol. Processing to end the variable performance is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation regardless of whether it is a normal icon or a special icon. . In addition, the temporarily stopped performance symbol 70a in the losing mode comes to a final stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop at "814", which is the same as the performance symbol 70a. Furthermore, the second lamp pattern LZ that was being variably displayed on the sub-second fluctuation display 82 stops displaying (turns off) in a loss mode, but the first lamp pattern LZ in a jackpot mode is displayed on the sub-first fluctuation display 81. It becomes a state where it is not stopped and displayed (see FIG. 331(e)). In addition, in the case where the continuous notice performance has been executed for the loss fluctuation display of the second special symbol, the continuous notice performance will end at this timing.

Thereafter, at timing T6, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, the opening period of the jackpot game starts. When the performance control unit 130m receives the opening designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit 130m performs a process of starting the opening performance.

At this time, an opening image consisting of an opening background and the words "Jackpot" is displayed. In addition, "1" of the first special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is when a prize is newly won based on a prize in the first start opening 45. The command (win signal at the time of winning) is normally received, or the start command based on the start of the variable display of the first special symbol (first special symbol pending number designation command as the start signal, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation) This is maintained until the effect control unit 130m receives the pattern designation command (see FIG. 331(f)).

In other words, a new winning command (winning signal) based on a winning in the second starting port 47, a starting command based on the start of the variable display of the second special symbol (second special symbol pending number as a starting signal), etc. Even if the production control unit 130m receives a specified command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command), it is displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E. The number of reserved first special drawings that is "1" is maintained.

In addition, at the timing of T3 and timing of T4, the production control unit 130m was able to normally receive the command (stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but based on the reception of this command, the production control unit 130m did not send the command. Even if the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the directed production command (command abnormality has occurred), the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m are produced. The same process as in the case where the control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (command abnormality has occurred) will be performed.

In addition, at the timing of T5, the production control unit 130m could not properly receive the stop command (stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m, and at the timing of T6, the opening designation sent from the main control unit 110m. If the command is successfully received by the production control unit 130m, at this timing, processing is performed to end the second variable production that was started in response to the variable display of the second special symbol and start the opening production. .

Then, the relevant icon TI displayed in the relevant icon display area 70C is changed to one frame's worth without stopping and displaying the temporarily stopped loss mode production pattern 70a and the fluctuatingly displayed special design TZ. The opening image will be displayed without being erased as an animation (actually, the effects other than the opening effect will end).

As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 331, in the normal gaming state, during the execution of the second variable performance that is started in response to the variable display of the second special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol is When a stop command (stop signal) for the variable display of the first special symbol that is started after the end of the first special symbol is received, the second variable performance is ended. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Further, since the second variable performance ends upon reception of the stop command, it is possible to end the second variable performance without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 331, in the normal gaming state, during the execution of the second variable performance that is started in response to the loss variable display of the second special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol is If a stop command (stop signal) is received for the jackpot variation display of the first special symbol that was started after the end, the second variation production (variation display of the production symbol 70a, variation display of the special symbol TZ) in a loss mode is received. ). Therefore, it is not necessary to perform processing such as switching the performance symbols from a losing mode to a jackpot mode, and it is possible to end the second variable performance without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 331, in the normal gaming state, during the variable display of the second lamp pattern LZ that is started in response to the loss variable display of the second special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol When a stop command (stop signal) for the jackpot fluctuation display of the first special symbol that has been started after the end of the display is received, the sub-second fluctuation display 82 is caused to stop displaying the losing mode (lights out); The sub-first variable display 81 is configured not to stop displaying the jackpot mode (lit) lamp pattern LZ. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform processing such as switching the lamp pattern from a loss mode (lights out) to a jackpot mode, and it is possible to end the variable display of the second lamp pattern LZ without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 331, in the normal gaming state, while the icon (second running information) corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed. When a stop command (stop signal) for the variable display of the first special symbol that is started after the end is received, the icon is erased. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Further, since the icon is deleted at the timing when the stop command is received, it is possible to delete the icon without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 331, in the normal gaming state, the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped while the icon (second running information) corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed. When the time command (stop signal) is received, and when the icon (second running information) corresponding to the fluctuating display of the second special symbol is displayed, the stop command (stop signal) of the fluctuating display of the first special symbol is received. When a signal) is received, the icon is erased in the same manner. Therefore, it becomes possible to naturally erase the icon without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 331, in the normal gaming state, the first special figure pending number displayed on the sub-first pending display 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E is "0". When a customer waiting state designation command indicating that the number of special drawings on hold is "0" is received when the number of special drawings on hold is "0", the first The number of reserved special drawings is now displayed as being reduced to "0". Therefore, the player is not given any doubt that the variable performance will not be executed even though the first special figure reservation number is not "0".

In addition, in the normal gaming state, during the execution of the second variable performance that was started in response to the jackpot variable display of the second special symbol, the loss of the first special symbol that was started after the end of the variable display of the second special symbol. When a stop command (stop signal) for the variable display is received, the second variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a, variable display of the special symbol TZ) may be ended in a jackpot mode.

(Specific example 29 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 29 in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described using FIG. 332. The upper diagram in FIG. 332 is the timing chart 24 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command in a specific game state, and FIGS. This is an example of a performance corresponding to a) to (f).

First, at timing T0, a game ball enters the first starting port 45 by the player hitting left, or a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 during the normal gaming state before entering the specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, variable probability gaming state). As the number of reserved first special symbols stored in the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0" due to reasons such as a game ball entering the first starting hole 45, the number of reserved first special symbols decreases from "1" to "0". Loss fluctuation display starts. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0" and a process is performed to start the first variable production.

At this time, while the fluctuating BGM is being output, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. ” is displayed. Furthermore, since the first pending icon display area 70B is not displayed, the icon TI is not displayed in the icon display area 70C without being shifted (reduced) from the first pending icon display area 70B. Displayed as a 10-frame animation. In addition, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ starts, but the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation), and the icon TI rotates. (direction action) is in progress.

Next, at timing T1, a game ball enters the second starting port 47, and the number of reserved second special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "0" to "1". . When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (second special figure pending number designation command as a winning signal, pre-reading designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m memorizes (recognizes) ) The number of reserved second special drawings changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F is increased from "0" to "1" in a specific update mode, and the second A pending icon HI is additionally displayed (increased display) in the first display section 70D1 of the pending icon display area 70D, and a winning sound based on the current winning is output because the winning is entered into the second starting port 47 during the specific gaming state. (See Figure 332(a)).

Thereafter, at timing T2, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). Further, the rotation operation of the icon TI continues (see FIG. 332(b)).

Then, at timing T3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (command abnormality has occurred), the first variation production will be executed. The process to terminate is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI continue, the periods of temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, variable display of the special pattern TZ, and variable display of the first lamp pattern LZ are extended. Accordingly, the BGM output is maintained during the fluctuation (see FIG. 332(c)).

Thereafter, at timing T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 2. Loss fluctuation display of special symbols starts. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (2nd special symbol pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. If this is not possible (a command abnormality has occurred), the second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "1", and the process to start the second variable production is not performed (Fig. 332(d)).

Thereafter, at timing T5, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first Processing to end the variable performance is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation regardless of whether it is a normal icon or a special icon. . In addition, the temporarily stopped performance symbol 70a in the losing mode comes to a final stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop at "814", which is the same as the performance symbol 70a. Furthermore, the first lamp pattern LZ that was being displayed in a variable manner on the sub-first variable display 81 stops being displayed (turns off) in a losing manner (see FIG. 332(e)).

After that, at timing T6, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of second reserved symbols stored in the main control unit 110m are "0", so the customer Shifts to a waiting state (game standby state). When the production control unit 130m receives the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved second special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0". ”.

At this time, the second special figure pending number displayed on the sub second pending display 84 and the second special figure pending number display area 70F is decreased from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode, and the customer is waiting. The player waits until a demonstration effect is executed or a new variable display of special symbols starts (see FIG. 332(f)).

In addition, at the timing of T3 and timing of T4, the production control unit 130m was able to normally receive the command (stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but based on the reception of this command, the production control unit 130m did not send the command. Even if the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the directed production command (command abnormality has occurred), the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m are produced. The same process as in the case where the control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (command abnormality has occurred) is performed.

In addition, at the timing of T5, the production control unit 130m could not properly receive the stop command (stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m, and at the timing of T6, the customer waiting command sent from the main control unit 110m If the production control unit 130m successfully receives the state designation command, at this timing, processing is performed to end the variable production that was started in response to the variable display of the first special symbol, and the production control unit 130m The stored number of reserved second special symbols changes from "1" to "0".

Then, although the background image continues to scroll, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as one frame of non-animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production symbol 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ permanently stops at “814”, which is the same as the production symbol 70a, and the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special symbol reservation number are displayed. The number of reserved second special symbols displayed in the display area 70F will be displayed decreasing from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode.

(Specific example 30 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A specific example 30 in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described using FIG. 333. The upper diagram in FIG. 333 is a timing chart 25 when the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command in a specific game state, and FIGS. 333(a) to (f) are ( This is an example of a performance corresponding to a) to (f).

First, at timing T0, a game ball enters the first starting port 45 by the player hitting left, or a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 during the normal gaming state before entering the specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, variable probability gaming state). As the number of reserved first special symbols stored in the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0" due to reasons such as a game ball entering the first starting hole 45, the number of reserved first special symbols decreases from "1" to "0". Loss fluctuation display starts. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0" and a process is performed to start the first variable production.

At this time, while the fluctuating BGM is being output, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. ” is displayed. Furthermore, since the first pending icon display area 70B is not displayed, the icon TI is not displayed in the icon display area 70C without being shifted (reduced) from the first pending icon display area 70B. Displayed as a 10-frame animation. In addition, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ starts, but the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation), and the icon TI rotates. (direction action) is in progress.

Next, at timing T1, a game ball enters the second starting port 47, and the number of reserved second special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "0" to "1". . When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (second special figure pending number designation command as a winning signal, pre-reading designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m memorizes (recognizes) ) The number of reserved second special drawings changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F is increased from "0" to "1" in a specific update mode, and the second A pending icon HI is additionally displayed (increased display) in the first display section 70D1 of the pending icon display area 70D in a normal addition mode, and the winning is based on the current winning since the winning is in the second start opening 47 during the specific gaming state. Sound is output (see FIG. 333(a)).

Thereafter, at timing T2, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, the effect pattern 70a slightly swings (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position. Further, the rotation operation of the icon TI continues (see FIG. 333(b)).

Then, at timing T3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (command abnormality has occurred), the first variation production will be executed. The process to terminate is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI continue, the periods of temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, variable display of the special pattern TZ, and variable display of the first lamp pattern LZ are extended. Accordingly, the BGM output is maintained during the fluctuation (see FIG. 333(c)).

Thereafter, at timing T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 2. The jackpot fluctuation display of special symbols starts. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (2nd special symbol pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. If this is not possible (a command abnormality has occurred), the second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "1", and the process to start the second variable production is not performed (Fig. 333(d)).

Thereafter, at timing T5, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first Processing to end the variable performance is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation regardless of whether it is a normal icon or a special icon. . In addition, the temporarily stopped performance symbol 70a in the losing mode comes to a final stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop at "814", which is the same as the performance symbol 70a. Furthermore, the first lamp pattern LZ that was being displayed in a variable manner on the sub-first variable display 81 stops displaying (turns off) in a losing mode, but the second lamp pattern LZ in a jackpot mode is displayed on the sub-second variable display 82. It becomes a state where it is not stopped and displayed (see FIG. 333(e)).

Thereafter, at timing T6, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, the opening period of the jackpot game starts. When the performance control unit 130m receives the opening designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit 130m performs a process of starting the opening performance.

At this time, an opening image consisting of an opening background and the words "Jackpot" is displayed. In addition, "1" of the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F is when a prize is newly won based on a prize in the second start opening 47. The command (winning signal) is normally received, or the start command based on the start of the variable display of the second special symbol (2nd special symbol pending number designation command as the start signal, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation) This is maintained until the effect control unit 130m receives the pattern designation command (see FIG. 333(f)).

In other words, a new winning command (winning signal) based on a winning in the first start opening 45, a starting command based on the start of the variable display of the first special symbol (first special symbol pending number as a starting signal), etc. Even if the performance control unit 130m receives a specified command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command), it is displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special symbol reservation number display area 70F. The number of second special drawings reserved is maintained at "1".

In addition, at the timing of T3 and timing of T4, the production control unit 130m was able to normally receive the command (stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but based on the reception of this command, the production control unit 130m did not send the command. Even if the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the directed production command (command abnormality has occurred), the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m are produced. The same process as in the case where the control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (command abnormality has occurred) is performed.

In addition, at the timing of T5, the production control unit 130m could not properly receive the stop command (stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m, and at the timing of T6, the opening designation sent from the main control unit 110m. If the command is successfully received by the performance control unit 130m, processing is performed to end the variable performance started in response to the variable display of the first special symbol and start the opening performance at this timing.

Then, the relevant icon TI (normal icon, special icon ) will be displayed as one frame of non-animation, and the opening image will be displayed (actually, the effects other than the opening effect will end).

As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 332 and 333, in a specific game state, during the execution of the first variable performance that is started in response to the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol When a command (stop signal) for stopping the variable display of the second special symbol that is started after the end of the variable display of the second special symbol is received, the first variable performance is ended. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, since the first variable performance ends upon reception of the stop command, it is possible to end the first variable performance without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 332 and 333, in a specific game state, during the execution of the first variable performance that is started in response to the loss variation display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol is If a stop command (stop signal) for the jackpot fluctuation display of the second special symbol that was started after the end of the fluctuation display is received, the first fluctuation performance (fluctuation display of the performance symbol 70a, special symbol TZ) is received in a loss mode. (fluctuating display). Therefore, it is not necessary to perform processing such as switching the performance symbols from a losing mode to a jackpot mode, and it is possible to end the first variable performance without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 332 and 333, in a specific game state, during the variable display of the first lamp symbol LZ that is started in response to the loss variable display of the first special symbol, the first special When a stop command (stop signal) for the jackpot fluctuation display of the second special symbol that is started after the end of the symbol fluctuation display is received, the sub-first fluctuation display 81 and the sub-second fluctuation display 82 are In any case, the lamp pattern LZ in the jackpot mode (lit) is not displayed in a stopped state. Therefore, it is not necessary to carry out processing such as switching the lamp pattern from a loss mode (lights out) to a jackpot mode, and it is possible to end the variable display of the first lamp pattern LZ without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 332 and 333, in a specific game state, while the icon (first running information) corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed, the first special symbol is When a command (stop signal) for stopping the variable display of the second special symbol that is started after the end of the variable display is received, the icon is erased. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Further, since the icon is deleted at the timing when the stop command is received, it is possible to delete the icon without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Furthermore, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 332 and 333, in a specific game state, the first special symbol changes while the icon (first running information) corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed. When a command to stop the display (stop signal) is received, and a command to stop the variable display of the second special symbol while the icon (first running information) corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed. (stop signal) is received, the icon is erased in the same manner as when the stop signal is received. Therefore, it becomes possible to naturally erase the icon without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 332 and 333, in the specific gaming state, the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F is When a customer waiting state designation command indicating that the number of reserved special drawings is "0" is received when the number is not "0", the number of reserved special drawings is displayed on the sub-second holding display 84 and the second number of reserved special drawings display area 70F. The number of reserved 2nd special drawings is reduced to "0" and displayed. Therefore, the player is not given any doubt that the variable performance will not be executed even though the second special figure reservation number is not "0".

In addition, in a specific gaming state, during the execution of the first variable performance that was started in response to the jackpot variable display of the first special symbol, the loss of the second special symbol that was started after the end of the variable display of the first special symbol. When a stop command (stop signal) for the variable display is received, the first variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a, variable display of the special symbol TZ) may be ended in a jackpot mode.

(Specific example 31 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A specific example 31 in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described using FIG. 334. The upper diagram in FIG. 334 is a timing chart 26 when the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command in a specific game state, and FIGS. 334(a) to (f) are ( This is an example of a performance corresponding to a) to (f).

First, at timing T0, the second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", and the loss fluctuation display of the second special symbol starts. be done. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (second special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0" and a process is performed to start the second variable production.

At this time, while the fluctuating BGM is being output, the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F changes from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. ” is displayed. Further, one pending icon HI displayed in the second pending icon display area 70D is shifted and displayed (reduced) as a 20-frame animation and displayed as the icon TI. Further, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the second lamp pattern LZ is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation). In addition, the icon TI is in a state where it is performing a rotating action (acting action).

Next, at timing T1, a game ball enters the first starting port 45 due to reasons such as the player hitting left-handed, and the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases. Increases from "0" to "1". When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (the first special figure pending number designation command as the winning signal, the pre-reading designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m memorizes (recognizes) ), the number of reserved first special drawings changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is increased and displayed from "0" to "1" in a specific update mode, Since the first pending icon display area 70B is not displayed, the pending icon HI is not additionally displayed (increased display), and the winning sound based on the current winning is a winning to the first start opening 45 during the specific gaming state. will not be output (see FIG. 334(a)).

Thereafter, at timing T2, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, the effect pattern 70a slightly swings (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position. Further, the rotation operation of the icon TI continues (see FIG. 334(b)).

Then, at timing T3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (command abnormality has occurred), the first variation production will be executed. The process to terminate is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI continue, the periods of temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, variable display of the special pattern TZ, and variable display of the second lamp pattern LZ are extended. Accordingly, the BGM output is maintained during the fluctuation (see FIG. 334(c)).

After that, at timing T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 1. Loss fluctuation display of special symbols starts. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. If it is not possible (a command abnormality has occurred), the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "1", and the process to start the first variable production is not performed (Fig. 334(d)).

Thereafter, at timing T5, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the second special figure is started in response to the fluctuating display of the second special symbol. Processing to end the variable performance is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped performance symbol 70a in the losing mode comes to a final stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop at "814", which is the same as the performance symbol 70a. Furthermore, the second lamp pattern LZ that was being variably displayed on the sub-second variable display 82 is stopped and displayed (turned off) in a losing manner (see FIG. 334(e)).

After that, at timing T6, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of second reserved symbols stored in the main control unit 110m are "0", so the customer Shifts to a waiting state (game standby state). When the production control unit 130m receives the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0". ”.

At this time, the second special figure pending number displayed on the sub second pending display 84 and the second special figure pending number display area 70F is decreased from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode, and the customer is waiting. The player waits until a demonstration effect is executed or a new variable display of special symbols starts (see FIG. 334(f)).

In addition, at the timing of T3 and timing of T4, the production control unit 130m was able to normally receive the command (stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but based on the reception of this command, the production control unit 130m did not send the command. Even if the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the directed production command (command abnormality has occurred), the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m are produced. The same process as in the case where the control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (command abnormality has occurred) is performed.

In addition, at the timing of T5, the production control unit 130m could not properly receive the stop command (stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m, and at the timing of T6, the customer waiting command sent from the main control unit 110m If the production control unit 130m successfully receives the state designation command, at this timing, a process is performed to end the variable production that was started in response to the variable display of the second special symbol, and the production control unit 130m The stored number of reserved first special symbols changes from "1" to "0".

Then, although the background image continues to scroll, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as one frame of non-animation, regardless of whether it is a normal icon or a special icon. . In addition, the temporarily stopped production symbol 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a permanent stop at "814", which is the same as the production symbol 70a, and the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special symbol reservation number are displayed. The number of reserved first special symbols displayed in the display area 70E will be displayed decreasing from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. In addition, in the case where the continuous notice performance has been executed for the loss fluctuation display of the second special symbol, the continuous notice performance will end at this timing.

(Specific example 32 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 32 in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command will be described using FIG. 335. The upper diagram in FIG. 335 is a timing chart 27 when the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command in a specific game state, and FIGS. 335(a) to (f) are ( This is an example of a performance corresponding to a) to (f).

First, at timing T0, the second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", and the loss fluctuation display of the second special symbol starts. be done. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (second special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0" and a process is performed to start the second variable production.

At this time, while the fluctuating BGM is being output, the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F changes from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. ” is displayed. Furthermore, the pending icon HI displayed in the second pending icon display area 70D is shifted and displayed (reduced) as a 20-frame animation in the icon display area 70C and displayed as the icon TI. In addition, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ starts, but the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation), and the icon TI rotates. (direction action) is in progress.

Next, at timing T1, a game ball enters the first starting port 45 due to reasons such as the player hitting left-handed, and the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases. Increases from "0" to "1". When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (the first special figure pending number designation command as the winning signal, the pre-reading designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m memorizes (recognizes) ), the number of reserved first special drawings changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is increased and displayed from "0" to "1" in a specific update mode, Since the first pending icon display area 70B is not displayed, the pending icon HI is not additionally displayed (increased display), and the winning sound based on the current winning is a winning to the first start opening 45 during the specific gaming state. will not be output (see FIG. 335(a)).

Thereafter, at timing T2, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, the effect pattern 70a slightly swings (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position. Further, the rotation operation of the icon TI continues (see FIG. 335(b)).

Then, at timing T3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (command error has occurred), the second variable production will end. processing is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI continue, the periods of temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, variable display of the special pattern TZ, and variable display of the second lamp pattern LZ are extended. Accordingly, the BGM output is maintained during the fluctuation (see FIG. 335(c)).

After that, at timing T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 1. The jackpot fluctuation display of special symbols starts. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. If this is not possible (a command abnormality has occurred), the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "1", and the processing to start the variable production is not performed (Fig. 335 ( d)).

Thereafter, at timing T5, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the second special figure is started in response to the fluctuating display of the second special symbol. Processing to end the variable performance is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation regardless of whether it is a normal icon or a special icon. . In addition, the temporarily stopped performance symbol 70a in the losing mode comes to a final stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop at "814", which is the same as the performance symbol 70a. Furthermore, the second lamp pattern LZ that was being variably displayed on the sub-second fluctuation display 82 stops displaying (turns off) in a loss mode, but the first lamp pattern LZ in a jackpot mode is displayed on the sub-first fluctuation display 81. It becomes a state where it is not stopped and displayed (see FIG. 335(e)). In addition, in the case where the continuous notice performance has been executed for the loss fluctuation display of the second special symbol, the continuous notice performance will end at this timing.

Thereafter, at timing T6, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, the opening period of the jackpot game starts. When the performance control unit 130m receives the opening designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit 130m performs a process of starting the opening performance.

At this time, an opening image consisting of an opening background and the words "Jackpot" is displayed. In addition, "1" of the first special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is when a prize is newly won based on a prize in the first start opening 45. The command (win signal at the time of winning) is normally received, or the start command based on the start of the variable display of the first special symbol (first special symbol pending number designation command as the start signal, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation) This is maintained until the effect control unit 130m receives the pattern designation command (see FIG. 335(f)).

In other words, a new winning command (winning signal) based on a winning in the second starting port 47, a starting command based on the start of the variable display of the second special symbol (second special symbol pending number as a starting signal), etc. Even if the production control unit 130m receives a specified command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command), it is displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E. The number of reserved first special drawings that is "1" is maintained.

In addition, at the timing of T3 and timing of T4, the production control unit 130m was able to normally receive the command (stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but based on the reception of this command, the production control unit 130m did not send the command. Even if the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the directed production command (command abnormality has occurred), the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m are produced. The same process as in the case where the control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (command abnormality has occurred) is performed.

In addition, at the timing of T5, the production control unit 130m could not properly receive the stop command (stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m, and at the timing of T6, the opening designation sent from the main control unit 110m. If the command is successfully received by the production control unit 130m, at this timing, processing is performed to end the second variable production that was started in response to the variable display of the second special symbol and start the opening production. .

Then, the relevant icon TI displayed in the relevant icon display area 70C is changed to one frame's worth without stopping and displaying the temporarily stopped loss mode production pattern 70a and the fluctuatingly displayed special design TZ. The opening image will be displayed without being erased as an animation (actually, the effects other than the opening effect will end).

As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 334 and 335, in a specific game state, during the execution of the second variable performance that is started in response to the variable display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol When a stop command (stop signal) for the first special symbol variable display that is started after the end of the first special symbol variable display is received, the second variable performance is ended. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, since the second variable effect ends at the timing when the stop command is received, it is possible to end the second variable effect without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 334 and 335, in a specific game state, during the execution of the second variation performance that is started in response to the loss variation display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol is If a stop command (stop signal) for the jackpot fluctuation display of the first special symbol that was started after the end of the fluctuation display is received, the second fluctuation performance (variation display of the performance symbol 70a, special symbol TZ) is received in a loss mode. (fluctuating display). Therefore, it is not necessary to perform processing such as switching the performance symbols from a losing mode to a jackpot mode, and it is possible to end the second variable performance without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 334 and 335, in a specific game state, during the variable display of the second lamp symbol LZ that is started in response to the loss variable display of the first special symbol, the second special When a stop command (stop signal) for the jackpot fluctuation display of the first special symbol that is started after the end of the symbol fluctuation display is received, the sub-first fluctuation display 81 and the sub-second fluctuation display 82 are In either case, the lamp pattern LZ in the jackpot mode (lit) is not displayed in a stopped state. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform processing such as switching the lamp pattern from a loss mode (lights out) to a jackpot mode, and it is possible to end the variable display of the second lamp pattern LZ without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 334 and 335, in a specific game state, while the icon (second running information) corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed, the second special symbol is When a command (stop signal) for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol that is started after the end of the variable display is received, the icon is erased. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, since the icon is deleted upon reception of the stop command, it is possible to delete the icon without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 334 and 335, in a specific game state, the second special symbol changes while the icon (second running information) corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed. When the stop command (stop signal) is received, and when the stop command for the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed while the corresponding icon (second running information) corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed. (stop signal) is received, the icon is erased in the same manner as when the stop signal is received. Therefore, it becomes possible to naturally erase the icon without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 334 and 335, in the specific gaming state, the first special figure pending number displayed on the sub-first pending display 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E is When a customer waiting state designation command indicating that the number of special drawings on hold is "0" is received when the number is not "0", the number of reserved special drawings is displayed on the sub-first holding display 83 and the first number of special drawings on hold display area 70E. The number of reserved first special drawings is reduced to "0" and displayed. Therefore, the player is not given any doubt that the variable performance will not be executed even though the first special figure reservation number is not "0".

In addition, in a specific gaming state, during the execution of the second variable performance that was started in response to the jackpot variable display of the second special symbol, the loss of the first special symbol that was started after the end of the variable display of the second special symbol. When a stop command (stop signal) for the variable display is received, the second variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a, variable display of the special symbol TZ) may be ended in a jackpot mode.

(Specific example 33 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A specific example 33 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described using FIG. 336. Note that since FIGS. 336(a) to 336(d) correspond to the scenes in FIGS. 272(a) to 272(d), the description will be omitted as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 336(a), a background image HG imitating a mountain is displayed as the mode A background. Then, a temporary stop is performed in FIG. 336(b), and if the stop command cannot be received normally in FIG. 336(c), the display of the background image HG imitating a mountain that was displayed as the mode A background is terminated. Then, a background image HG imitating the ocean is displayed as a mode A special background.

This background image HG imitating the sea is a background image that is displayed only when, for example, the stop command cannot be received normally and the variable performance cannot be ended. If the start command cannot be received normally in FIG. 336(d), the background image HG imitating the sea is subsequently displayed as the mode A special background.

For example, if the start command in Figure 336(d) is received normally, or if the start command in Figure 336(d) is not received normally, the next command (for example, stop command, customer waiting state) If the specified command (opening specified command) is received normally, at that point, the background image HG imitating a mountain is restored as the mode A background.

In addition, when displaying the background image HG imitating the sea as the mode A special background, for example, a timer counter is provided on the effect control board 130 side, and the command at the start (especially the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) is After determining the fluctuation time through reception, the timer counter is set to a time corresponding to the determined fluctuation time. When the timer counter becomes 0 as a result of the subtraction, it is determined whether a stop command has been received, and if a stop command has not been received, a background imitating the ocean is set as a mode A special background. Processing such as displaying the image HG is assumed.

In this way, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 336, when the stop command cannot be received normally, a background image that is displayed only when the event occurs is displayed. This makes it easier for the user to understand that some kind of irregularity has occurred due to the display of an unfamiliar background image.

Note that the display of the Mode A special background is just an example, and the display of the background image HG that imitates the mountains of the Mode A background continues, but it is possible to understand that some irregularities have occurred due to changes in other displayed objects. You may make it easier. For example, the effect pattern 70a may be erased, or the hold icon may be erased. Similar effects can be expected with such a method.

(Specific example 34 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 34 in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described using FIG. 337. The upper diagram in FIG. 337 is the timing chart 28 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command, and FIGS. 337(a) to (e) are the timing chart 28 in the timing chart 28 in FIG. This is an example of a performance corresponding to e). In addition, in FIG. 337, the normal gaming state will be explained as an example, but it can also be read as a specific gaming state.

First, at timing T0, it is shown that a customer waiting state is in the normal gaming state, and at this time, the first image display device 70 is executing a customer waiting demonstration performance, and in the customer waiting demonstration performance, , while the production pattern 70a, the icon display area 70C, the first pending icon display area 70B, and the background corresponding to the mode (for example, mode A background) are hidden (hard to see), the main stop display of the special pattern TZ , the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F are displayed (visibly displayed).
It is assumed that the combination of performance symbols 70a displayed on the first image display device 70 before the start of the customer waiting demonstration performance is "814", and the combination of special symbols TZ is "814".

Next, at timing T1, while a customer waiting demonstration performance (for example, a display such as "Pachinko ABC" indicating the model name) is being executed, the main control board 110 and the performance control board 130 are damaged due to an impact or the like. It is assumed that a disconnection or the like (for example, a disconnected connector) has occurred in the signal line for command communication (from the main control board 110 to the production control board 130) (see FIG. 337(a)).
Further, even if the signal line is disconnected, the first image display device 70 does not notify that the disconnection has occurred, and continues to perform the customer waiting demonstration performance.

Next, at timing T2, when the game ball enters the first starting port 45, the main control unit 110m sends a winning command (first special figure reservation number designation command and pre-reading designation command as a winning signal). However, since the disconnection that occurred at timing T0 has not been resolved, the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the winning command.

For this reason, the first image display device 70 continues to execute the customer waiting demonstration performance (for example, a display such as "Beware of getting addicted!" that urges to prevent excessive involvement in the game), and the icon display area 70C and the first reservation icon display area 70B remain hidden (hard to see), and although the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E are visible, they are not updated. Therefore, it is difficult to grasp that a game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 45.

Next, at the timing of T3, the main control unit 110m transmits a start time command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command as a start time signal), but the timing Since the disconnection, etc. that occurred at T0 has not been resolved, the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the winning command.

Therefore, the first image display device 70 continues to execute the customer waiting demonstration performance (for example, displaying the character image KG), the performance pattern 70a is not displayed (hard to see), and the special pattern TZ is also not displayed. It is in a stopped state at "814", the sub-first variable display 81 remains off, the icon display area 70C also remains hidden (hard to see), and the audio output device 9 is also silent. Therefore, unless one watches the first special symbol display 60, it is difficult to understand that the variable display is currently being performed.

Next, at timing T4, it is assumed that the disconnection of the signal line (for example, disconnection of the connector) has been resolved. That is, at this timing, the production control section 130m is in a state where it can normally receive the command transmitted from the main control section 110m.

Next, at timing T5, a stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) is transmitted from the main control unit 110m, and the production control unit 130m normally receives the stop command. In this case, the first image display device 70 ends the execution of the customer waiting demonstration performance, and displays the performance pattern 70a, the icon display area 70C, the first pending icon display area 70B, and the background corresponding to the mode (for example, the mode A background). Display (visibly display).
At this time, the production pattern 70a is displayed in a permanently stopped state (displayed visually) without making a temporary stop, and for example, a losing combination of "814" is made to make a real stop. On the other hand, in the special pattern TZ, since the main stop display of "814" has been visible since the start of the customer waiting demonstration performance, the main stop display of "814" is continued here as well.
In other words, from the player's viewpoint, the customer waiting demonstration effect was visible, but suddenly the effect pattern 70a becomes visible in the fully stopped state (only the result is visible).
Thereafter, at timing T6, when a customer waiting state designation command is transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the performance control unit 130m executes a customer waiting performance.

As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 337, the main control board 110 and the performance control board 130 perform command communication (from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130) during execution of the customer waiting demonstration performance. If there is a break in the signal line (for example, a disconnected connector, etc.) and a start winning occurs in that state, and then the disconnect, etc. (for example, a disconnected connector, etc.) is resolved and the stop command is normally received, The customer-waiting demonstration performance was promptly ended, and the performance pattern 70a was made visible in the fully stopped state (only the result was visible). Therefore, by promptly notifying the player of the result of the jackpot determination, it is possible to prevent the player from continuing to feel uncomfortable.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 337, even if the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command at the time of prize winning or the command at the time of start, execution of the customer waiting demonstration performance is continued. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a great deal of discomfort, and it is possible to eliminate the feeling of boredom by executing the customer waiting demonstration performance.

In addition, in the customer waiting demonstration production, the main stop display of the special symbol TZ, the first special symbol pending number display area 70E, and the second special symbol pending number display area 70F may also be hidden (hard to see).

In addition, in FIG. 337(d), both the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ have the loss display mode "814" different from the initial roll stopped (the symbol combination indicating the result of the previous fluctuating display) However, in FIG. 337(d), the initial roll (for example, 135) may be brought to a final stop.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily understand that some kind of abnormality has occurred by displaying the initial result.

In addition, in FIG. 337(d), both the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ have the loss display mode "814" different from the initial roll stopped (the symbol combination indicating the result of the previous fluctuating display) However, in FIG. 337(d), a special display mode different from the lose display mode or the initial roll may be performed. For example, both the effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ may be displayed as "???" or may be displayed as "XXXX".
According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily understand that some kind of abnormality has occurred by displaying the special display mode.

Further, in FIG. 337, the explanation has been given using the example of "the first special pattern loss is changing", but this may also be "the first special pattern jackpot is changing". Even in that case, the above-mentioned symbol combinations (e.g. "814", e.g. "135", e.g. "???", e.g. "XX The opening performance of the jackpot game may be started without any delay.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to save the effort of performing the process of displaying the jackpot display mode such as "555", so the control process can be simplified.

In addition, in FIG. 337, the sound (BGM) output from the audio output device 9 is "silent" from beginning to end, but when the stop command is normally received at timing T5, the BGM is output for a predetermined period of time. You may also do so.
According to such a configuration, in addition to displaying the effect pattern 70a so that it is visible in the fully stopped state, it is possible to make it easier to recognize that the irregular state has returned to the normal state.

In addition, in FIG. 337, the sound (sound effect) output from the audio output device 9 is "silent" from beginning to end, but the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a is caused by the normal reception of the stop command at timing T5. A stop sound that is output at the same time may also be output.
According to such a configuration, even if the production pattern 70a suddenly becomes visible in the state of the main stop, it is possible to make it easy to recognize that the main stop has occurred.
On the other hand, the stop sound may not be output uniformly.

In the above explanation, the game machine was explained as having a "stop command" (a special figure stop command as a stop signal), but it also has a "stop command" (a special figure stop command as a stop signal). The same thing as described above is also possible for gaming machines that do not have the above-mentioned system.
For example, if a "stop command" is not provided, it is assumed that the production control board 130 is provided with a timer counter. Then, when a special figure variation pattern designation command is received from the main control board 110, since the variation time can be specified, the specified variation time is set in the timer counter. Then, when the set timer reaches "0", the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ can be stopped without requiring a "stop command" (special pattern stop command as a stop signal).

In addition, it may happen that the timer counter itself is out of order, or that the special figure variation pattern designation command itself is abnormal and the timer is set to exceed the actual variation time. In this case, the same situation as the above-described "stop command" (special figure stop command as a stop signal) may not be received normally. In other words, the display mode is as shown in FIG. 272(c).
Even in such a case, if the command at the start of the next fluctuating display is normally received or the subsequent customer waiting state designation command is normally received, the production pattern 70a and special pattern TZ will be stopped. can be done.

(Third embodiment)
A third embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described below with reference to the drawings. The third embodiment differs from the second embodiment in that a production lever device 23 is provided in addition to the production button 17 as an operation means that can be operated by the player.

First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be explained using FIG. 338. FIG. 338 is an example of a front view of the gaming machine 1 in the third embodiment. Note that description of the same parts as in the second embodiment will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 338, a production lever device 23 functioning as an input device is provided on the central bottom side of the upper plate 11 so as to be on the front and back sides of the production button device 16.
The production lever device 23 is provided on the center bottom side of the upper tray 11 so as to be on the opposite side of the production button device 16, and includes a production lever 24 that can be pulled toward the front by the player, and a production lever 24. A production lever detection switch (not shown) that detects an operation on the production lever 24 and a lever vibration motor (not shown) that vibrates the production lever 24 are provided. Predetermined information can be input to 1.

The effect button device 16 and the effect lever device 23 are provided on the upper plate 11, so when the button vibration motor that vibrates the effect button 17 is driven, the vibrations cause the upper plate 11 to act as a transmission member. The signal is transmitted to the production lever 24 via. On the other hand, when the lever vibration motor that vibrates the production lever 24 is driven, the vibration is transmitted to the production button 17 via the upper plate 11. In other words, when the player is manually operating one operation part, the other operation part vibrates (pre-reading vibration performance, dialogue preview performance, step-up preview performance, pseudo-continuation performance, development performance, cut). When a vibration performance with/without the validity period of the operation part related to an in-performance, final performance, re-lottery performance, confirmed performance, etc. is executed, the vibration is transmitted to the player's hand via the other operation part. It is supposed to be done.

In addition, since the production button device 16 and production lever device 23 are provided on the upper plate 11 attached to the glass frame 4, when the button vibration motor that vibrates the production button 17 is driven, the vibration acts as a transmission member. It is also transmitted to the firing handle via the upper plate 11 and the glass frame 4, which perform the function. Further, when the lever vibration motor that vibrates the effect lever 24 is driven, the vibration is transmitted to the effect button 17 via the upper plate 11 and the glass frame 4.

(Decision performance pattern determination table)
FIG. 339 is a diagram showing a fixed effect pattern determination table that is referred to when determining the effect pattern of the fixed effect in the third embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 339, the performance mode, jackpot determination result, variable performance pattern type, selection rate (%) of each successive performance pattern, and selected performance pattern are associated with the final performance pattern determination table. For reference, the production structure (effective suggestion production, validity period, production content) of each fixed production pattern is described.

"Effective suggesting effect" is an introductory effect that suggests that a valid period may occur. Specifically, it includes a semi-transparent effect button image imitating the effect button 17 and a semi-transparent effect imitating the effect lever 24. This is an effect in which a transparent effect lever image is moved and displayed on the first image display device 70, and a translucent effect button image and a translucent effect lever image are gathered toward a specific position.
"Validity period (single hit 5 seconds)" indicates that the validity period in the fixed performance ends when the performance button 17 or the performance lever 24 is operated once or when 5 seconds elapse.

The "operation target" in the valid period column indicates the type of the operation part (effect button 17, effect lever 24) whose operation is valid during the valid period. The operation becomes valid, and if it is the "production lever", the operation of the production lever 24 becomes valid.
"Promotional performance" is a performance that prompts the operation of the operation unit (performance button 17, performance lever 24) during the valid period, and specifically, it is a performance that prompts the operation of the operation part (performance button 17, performance lever 24), and specifically, it is a performance that prompts the operation of the operation part (performance button 17, performance lever 24), and specifically, it is a performance that encourages the operation of the operation part (performance button 17, production lever 24). As a result, an opaque effect button image or an opaque effect lever image is displayed at a specific position, and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the validity period by the length of the gauge is displayed.

"Normal Button White" in the promotion effect column means that a button image imitating the effect button 17 in its normal state without protrusion and emitting white light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image. 17 indicates that white light is emitted.
"Protruding button red" means that a button image imitating the effect button 17 that is in a protruding state and emits red light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image, and the effect button 17 emits red light. It is shown that.
"Protruding button rainbow" means that a button image imitating the effect button 17 that is in a protruding state and emitting rainbow light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image, and the effect button 17 also emits a rainbow light. It is shown that.

The "normal lever" indicates that a production lever image imitating the production lever 24 of a predetermined size is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque production lever image.
"Large lever rainbow" indicates that a production lever image imitating the production lever 24 larger than a predetermined size is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque production lever image.

“Operation unit status” in the valid period column indicates the status of the operation unit (production button 17, production lever 24) during the validity period, and “normal” means that the target operation unit is the production button 17. If so, it is a normal state in which it does not protrude, and "protruding" indicates that if the target operation section is the production button 17, it is in a protruding state in which it protrudes. In addition, since the production lever 24 does not have a protruding state, it is only in a normal state.

"Failure" in the column of winning presentation mode refers to a failed presentation indicating that the jackpot game will not be executed because the first movable member 73 does not operate and the screen of the first image display device 70 changes to a dark color. indicates that it will be executed.
"Success" means that the first movable member 73 moves to the maximum operating position and emits rainbow-colored light, and a success effect image is displayed on the first image display device 70, so that a jackpot game is executed. This indicates that a successful performance will be executed.

"Strong vibration (4 seconds → 5 seconds)" in the button vibration column is determined by the vibrator to vibrate the performance button 17 and is determined by the start of a successful performance (= when the performance button 17 is operated or the valid period ends) This shows that a strong vibration performance (decision success vibration performance) is executed in which strong vibrations are performed for 4 seconds and then strong vibrations are performed for 5 seconds with an interval of 1 second in between.

"Rainbow light emission (11 seconds)" in the button light emission column is determined by the effect button LED for causing the effect button 17 to emit light and starts from the start of a successful effect (= when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period ends). This shows that rainbow light is emitted for 11 seconds (longer period than the strong vibration of the production button 17). Note that even if the operation target is the effect lever 24, the effect button 17 emits a rainbow light.

The expected jackpot for each promotional effect is ``normal button white'' < ``protruding button red'' < ``normal lever'' < ``protruding button rainbow'' = ``large lever rainbow.'' Furthermore, the jackpot expectation level for each operation unit state is "normal" < "prominent".

The first feature of the deciding performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that the performance (direction) is executed. Therefore, it becomes possible to effectively notify that a jackpot game will be executed, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

A second feature of the fixed performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 339 is that the valid period occurs over the longest period of time that occurs during the variable performance. Therefore, inconveniences such as the player missing the operation of the performance button 17 can be suppressed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A third feature of the fixed performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 339 is that the performance button 17 or the performance lever 24 vibrates for the longest period as a strong vibration performance that occurs during a variable performance. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the player's sense of exhilaration at the time of successful performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A fourth feature of the fixed effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 339 is that the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 is performed for a longer period than the vibration period of the effect button 17 or the effect lever 24. Therefore, even after the vibration of the performance button 17 or the performance lever 24 ends, the player's sense of elation can be maintained, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Frame accessory initial movement pattern determination table)
FIG. 340 is a diagram showing a frame accessory initial motion pattern determination table that is referred to when determining the initial motion pattern of the frame accessory (production button 17, production lever 24) in the third embodiment.

In the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table, the type of power-on command and the initial operation pattern to be selected are associated, and the operation mode at the initial operation and the number of steps for the initial operation are listed for reference. ing.

"Initial operation pattern 01" is determined when a power-on designation command is received, and the production button 17 rises greatly, and the production button 17 and production lever 24 continuously vibrate for 2.5 seconds, After that, the production button 17 returns to its origin, and then the production button 17 and the production lever 24 vibrate intermittently for 2.5 seconds (1.25 seconds of vibration → 1 second interval → 1.25 seconds of vibration). During that period, the effect button 17 lights up (lights up) in the order of red → green → blue.

"Initial operation pattern 02" is determined when the first power recovery designation command indicating that the customer is waiting is received, and the production button 17 is raised greatly, and the production button 17 and production lever 24 are The effect button 17 vibrates continuously for 2 seconds, after which the effect button 17 returns to its origin, and during this period, the effect button 17 lights up (lights up) in blue.

"Initial operation pattern 03" is determined when receiving the second power recovery designation command indicating that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner or the third power recovery designation command indicating that the jackpot game is in progress, As the performance button 17 rises greatly, the performance button 17 and the performance lever 24 vibrate continuously for 2 seconds, and then the performance button 17 returns to its original position, and during that period, the performance button 17 is turned off.

Note that the continuous vibration time (2.5 seconds) and the intermittent vibration time (2.5 seconds) of the production button 17 and production lever 24 are based on the vibration duration (dialogue) of the vibration production performed during the variable production. Vibration performance during preview performance, vibration performance during step-up preview performance, vibration performance during pseudo-sequence performance, vibration performance during development performance, vibration performance during cut-in performance, vibration performance during decisive performance, vibration performance during re-lottery performance The time is different from the vibration performance (vibration performance at the time of confirmation performance).

The first feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 340 is that the frame accessory (Production button 17, production lever 24) are different in the initial operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step). Therefore, it is possible to easily understand whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the control state of the game has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the control state of the game has been restored).

The second feature of the frame accessory initial movement pattern determination table shown in FIG. One of the points is that it is designed to allow Therefore, it is possible to more easily understand whether the initial operation is due to the power being turned on (the control state of the game has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the control state of the game has been restored). .

Note that the initial operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the production button 17 may be the same when the power is turned on and when the power is restored. In this way, it becomes possible to appropriately confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the frame accessory, regardless of whether the power is turned on or the power is restored.

The third feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. The difference lies in the light emission mode of the initial light emission. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the control state of the game has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the control state of the game has been restored).

The fourth feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 340 is that the board accessory The difference is that the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of (the first movable member and the second movable member) is different. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the control state of the game has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the control state of the game has been restored).

In addition, the performance button LED is designed to turn off when the power is restored while changing special symbols are displayed or during a jackpot game, but this is the same as when the power is restored to restore the performance button LED to the customer waiting state. It may be made to light up in a light emitting manner.

The fifth feature of the frame accessory initial movement pattern determination table shown in FIG. One point is that the numbers are different. Therefore, it is possible to more easily understand whether the initial operation is due to the power being turned on (the control state of the game has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the control state of the game has been restored). .

Note that the number of colors emitted in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on is greater than the number of emitted light colors in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored, but this may be reversed.

As a sixth feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. One point is that it includes luminescent colors that are not present in other models. Therefore, it is possible to more easily understand whether the initial operation is due to the power being turned on (the control state of the game has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the control state of the game has been restored). .

Note that the light emitting color in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored may include a light emitting color that is not included in the light emitting color in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on.

The seventh feature of the frame accessory initial movement pattern determination table shown in FIG. Vibration time (vibration performance during dialogue preview performance, vibration performance during step-up preview performance, vibration performance during pseudo-sequence performance, vibration performance during development performance, vibration performance during cut-in performance, vibration performance during decisive performance) , vibration performance during re-lottery performance, vibration performance during confirmed performance). Therefore, it is possible to understand that the vibration is caused by the initial operation of the performance button 17 or the performance lever 24.

The eighth feature of the frame accessory initial movement pattern determination table shown in FIG. One point is that the execution is performed over the initial operation of the effect button 17, in which the presence or absence of the effect is detected. Therefore, the operation of the production button 17 and the operation of the button vibration motor and lever vibration motor can be checked at the same time, and the time required for operation confirmation can be shortened.

Note that the production lever 24 may be movable between the normal position and the production position, and may be operated (moved, vibrated) at the same time as the production button 17 during the initial operation, or in a predetermined order (for example, the production button 17 →It may be operated (moved, vibrated) using the production lever 24 or vice versa. In this case, the production lever 24 may be arranged at the normal position when the "normal lever" is used in the final performance, and moved to the production position when the performance is the "large lever".

In addition, although the effective period of the production lever 24 was only 5 seconds for a single hit related to a determined production, the production lever 24 was made to be operated multiple times, for example, for 5 seconds in a row, and each time the production lever 24 was operated. As the performance progresses (for example, by increasing the level gauge), when the number of operations reaches a predetermined number (for example, 5 times), a success performance or a failure performance may be executed. The production lever 24 is caused to continue to be operated, and while the production lever 24 continues to be operated, the production progresses (for example, by increasing the level gauge), and the duration is determined to be a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). A success performance or a decided failure performance may be executed.

In addition, during the validity period related to the advanced performance or the pseudo continuous performance, the performance lever 24 may be operated once when a performance with high expectation of jackpot is executed, or the performance lever 24 may be operated continuously. Alternatively, the production lever 24 may be held down for a long time (for example, 2 seconds). In the case of consecutive pulls, the performance advances each time the performance lever 24 is operated (for example, by increasing the level gauge), and when the number of operations reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3 times), an SPSP development performance or a pseudo continuous success performance is executed. It is a good idea to do so. In addition, if the effect lasts for a long time, the effect is advanced while the effect lever 24 continues to be operated (for example, by increasing the level gauge), and when the duration reaches a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds), the SPSP development effect is started. It is preferable that a pseudo continuous success effect be executed.

Furthermore, when the effect button 17 or the effect lever 24 is extended or continuously pulled, the effect button 17 or the effect lever 24 may be made to vibrate weakly each time the effect progresses (the level gauge increases to the next stage). good.

In addition, the vibration intensity of the production button 17 has weak vibrations and strong vibrations, and the vibration intensity of the production lever 24 has strong vibrations, but even with the same strong vibration, the production lever 24 has a higher vibration intensity than the production button 17. The stronger vibration may have a higher vibration intensity, or the stronger vibration of the effect button 17 may have a higher vibration intensity than that of the effect lever 24.

Further, the type of vibration (vibration time, vibration intensity) may be varied depending on the type of validity period (operation promotion image: single press, long press, repeated press, prolonged press, continuous press). For example, a single press of the production button 17 for 3 seconds during a dialogue preview production or a pseudo-continuous production will result in a weak vibration of 1 second, and a long press of the production button 17 for 4 seconds during a development production will result in a weak vibration of 1 second, followed by a cut. A single press of the production button 17 for 4 seconds during the in-performance will result in a weak vibration of 3 seconds, a single press of the production button 17 for 5 seconds during the final production will result in a strong vibration of 4 seconds → 5 seconds, and a production during the advanced production. If you press and hold the lever 24 for 4 seconds, it will be considered as a strong vibration for 1 second.

Further, when the pending icon or the icon changes to a display mode with high expectation of jackpot (for example, red or rainbow), the production button 17 or production lever 24 may be vibrated weakly or strongly for one second. .

In this embodiment, all three performance symbols 70a temporarily stop (shaking motion) after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, but the left and right performance symbols 70a stop and the center performance Only the symbol 70a may be temporarily stopped (swinging motion). At this time, all three performance symbols 70a may perform a fluctuation motion (performance motion), or the left and right performance symbols 70a may not perform a fluctuation motion (performance motion), and only the center performance symbol 70a may perform a fluctuation motion (performance motion). ).

In addition, in this embodiment, when the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the decoration part are made to fluctuate (production movement). Only one of them may be made to perform a fluctuating motion (acting motion).

In addition, in this embodiment, when the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the identification section consisting of a hexagonal base image and a numeric part (identification character) does not perform a fluctuating motion (performance motion). The texture (surface pattern, etc.) may be made to perform a fluctuation motion (presentation motion), or the identification portion may be caused to perform a fluctuation motion (presentation motion) by adding a light emitting effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, the performance pattern 70a swings up and down as a temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, but the performance pattern 70a may be expanded/contracted. In this case, if a start command (start signal) is received during a temporary stop, if the production pattern 70a is deviated from the stop position in the direction of reduction (smaller than the normal size) or in the direction of enlargement. (larger than the normal size), it is preferable to display the normal size at the stop position.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance pattern 70a swings up and down as a temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, but the performance pattern 70a does not swing and the decorative part and number part protrude from the base image. It may also be made to fluctuate as shown in FIG. In this case, if a start command (start signal) is received during a temporary stop, if the decorative part or number part is out of the base image, it will fit within the base image and be displayed at the stop position. It is a good idea to do so.

In addition, in this embodiment, in a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state), since the effect pattern 70a is composed of only a number part (identification character), the decoration part fluctuates when the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped. Although the movement (performance movement) is not performed, the performance pattern 70a is composed of a number part (identification character) and a decoration part consisting of a pattern effect image, and the design effect image is displayed when the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped. It may also be made to perform a fluctuating motion (acting motion).

Further, in this embodiment, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 are not mentioned during the extension of the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, but the frame lighting device 76 is not mentioned during the extension of the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a. At least one of the plurality of light emitting parts configuring 10 may be set in the same mode as during the temporary stop before the extension (light emission mode with lower brightness than during fluctuation, light emission mode with less change or movement than during fluctuation). , at least one of the plurality of light emitting parts constituting the board lighting device 76 is set in the same light emission mode as during temporary stop before extension (light emission mode with lower brightness than during fluctuation, light emission with less change or movement than during fluctuation) mode, lights out). In this case, the next time a start time command (start time signal) is received, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76 will change (switch) to a light emission mode corresponding to the fluctuation.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the production pattern 70a in the losing mode stops, the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), but the special symbol TZ has the same number as the production pattern 70a. The actual stop may be performed in a manner of failure. In addition, when the special symbol TZ stops in a predetermined jackpot mode (“333”) when the performance symbol 70a in the jackpot mode stops, the special symbol TZ stops in the jackpot mode with the same number as the production symbol 70a. It may also be stopped.

In addition, in this embodiment, the start time commands (special symbol pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command as the start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m while the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped. ) is received by the production control unit 130m, the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the lamp symbol LZ continues, but similarly to the production symbol 70a, the variable display is started after being momentarily derived and displayed. You may also do so. In this case, regarding the special symbol TZ, it is preferable to display the special symbol TZ that is shifted from the predetermined stopping position at the stopping position.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, if a start command (start signal) or a customer waiting state designation command is received while the icon TI is displayed, the icon TI is erased with one frame of non-animation. However, it only needs to be shorter than the 10 frames required to erase the icon TI based on reception of the stop command (stop signal), the 20 frames required to shift the display of the hold icon HI, and the 10 frames required to additionally display the hold icon. , for example, it may be erased after five frames of animation.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a start command (start signal) is received while displaying more pending icons than the number of reserved special drawings, the excess pending icons HI are erased with one frame of non-animation. However, from the 10 frames required to erase the relevant icon TI based on reception of the stop command (stop signal), the 20 frames required to shift the display of the hold icon HI, and the 10 frames required to additionally display the hold icon. It is sufficient if the number of frames is short; for example, the animation may be erased after five frames of animation.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the production control unit 130m receives a start time command (start time signal) in which the number of reserved special pictures becomes a predetermined number, the number of reserved special pictures and production control notified from the main control unit 110m are controlled. If there is an inconsistency due to a command abnormality (an abnormality in which the number is the same, an abnormality in which there is a deviation in the increasing direction) between the number of reserved special drawings that the unit 130m has memorized (kept), a predetermined A predetermined number of hold icons is displayed after displaying hold icons that are one more than the predetermined number, but a predetermined number of hold icons is displayed without displaying hold icons that are one more than the predetermined number. may be displayed as is.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the production control unit 130m receives a start time command (start time signal) in which the number of reserved special pictures becomes a predetermined number, the number of reserved special pictures and production control notified from the main control unit 110m are controlled. If there is an inconsistency due to a command abnormality (an abnormality where the number is the same, an abnormality where there is a deviation in the increasing direction) between the number of reserved special drawings that the unit 130m has memorized (kept), this The icon is displayed during a variable performance that is executed in response to receiving a start command (start signal); The icon may not be displayed inside.

In addition, in this embodiment, the normal icon is a white icon regardless of the type of performance mode, but the form (shape, color, etc.) of the normal icon may be changed depending on the type of performance mode or gaming state. good. In this case, the special icon may be a character icon regardless of the type of performance mode, or the form (shape, color, etc.) of the special icon may be changed depending on the type of performance mode or game state.

In addition, when changing the form (shape, color, etc.) of the normal icon depending on the type of production mode or game state, the operation mode (performance movement mode) during the variable production should be changed depending on the form of the normal icon. Good too. Furthermore, even when changing the form (shape, color, etc.) of the special icon depending on the type of performance mode or game state, the operation mode (performance operation mode) during the variable performance can be changed depending on the form of the special icon. Good too.

In addition, in this embodiment, only the special icon was displayed as a result of the icon change effect, but special icons that suggest a change to a special icon (displayed in the process of changing to a special icon) and specific A specific icon indicating that a reach effect (for example, an SP reach effect or an SPSP reach effect) is to be executed may be provided. In this case, it is preferable to make the form and presentation operation of the special icon or specific icon different from the form and presentation operation of the normal icon or special icon.

In addition, in this embodiment, the hold icon is displayed when both the special figure hold number designation command and the pre-read designation command as the winning command (win signal) are successfully received. If the number designation command is received and the prefetch designation command is not received normally, a pending icon is displayed, while if the special drawing reservation number designation command is not received normally and the prefetch designation command is received normally. The hold icon may not be displayed, or vice versa. In addition, when displaying a pending icon by receiving only one of the special figure pending number designation command and the prefetch designation command, the icon change effect for this pending icon may not be executed.

Further, in this embodiment, the performance mode cannot be changed by operating the performance button 17 by the player, but the performance mode may be changed by operating the performance button 17. In this case, during the extension of the temporary stop period of the production pattern 70a based on the command abnormality in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, no operation for changing the production mode is accepted, that is, the production button 17 It is preferable to restrict changes in the production mode based on the operation.

Further, in this embodiment, the hold icon change effect is executed without operating the effect button 17, but the hold icon is displayed as a button icon that prompts the operation of the effect button 17, and An operation change effect may be executed in which the button icon is changed to any one of a normal icon, a special icon, and a specific icon in response to the effect button 17 being operated while the button icon is displayed. . In this case, in the operation change production, the production button 17 is changed at a predetermined rate from the first operation mode (non-vibration, non-protruding state in the standby position) to the second operation mode (vibration, protrusion state in the production position) You can do it like this. In this case, the rate at which the production button 17 changes from the first operation mode to the second operation mode in the operation change production is higher than the rate at which the production button 17 changes from the first operation mode to the second operation mode in the dialogue preview production or final production. It is better to make the rate of change higher.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the display mode of the effect button image executed in the effective suggestion effect is semi-transparent, but it may also be a effect button image that is not translucent but only an outline, or a effect button image that is only a silhouette. good.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a pre-reach preview performance (line preview performance, step-up preview performance) or a development performance is executed, a vibration performance of the performance button 17 (activation of the button vibration motor) can be executed. However, a movable frame member may be provided in the glass frame 4, and an action performance that moves the frame movable member may be performed when the vibration performance of the performance button 17 is executed in the pre-reach preview performance or development performance. Instead of the vibration effect, an action effect that moves the frame movable member may be performed.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to perform a vibrating effect of the effect button 17 when performing a post-reach preview effect (pseudo continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decisive effect, confirmed effect) or when the symbols are aligned. , a frame movable member may be provided in the glass frame 4, and when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed when the symbols are aligned, an action effect may be executed in which the frame movable member is operated, or instead of the vibration effect. It may also be possible to perform an action effect that moves the frame movable member.

In addition, in this embodiment, while the SP reach effect or SPSP reach effect is being executed, the title is not displayed to indicate that the reach effect is being performed, but the display format with different jackpot expectations (white characters, The title may be displayed using either red text, which has a higher jackpot expectation than white text, or rainbow text, which guarantees a jackpot, etc. After the title is displayed in white text, it changes to red text or rainbow text. You may also do so.

In addition, in this embodiment, the cut-in performance was performed at the end of the SP reach performance, but it is made to be performed in the middle (first period) or the end (second period) of the SP reach performance. Even if the production button 17 is more likely to be in the protruding state (the proportion of the protruding state is higher) when the cut-in production is performed at the end of the SP reach production than when the cut-in production is performed in the middle. good.

In addition, in this embodiment, a valid period is generated in which the performance button 17 is held down in the advanced performance, but a valid period in which the performance button 17 is pressed and held is generated as a jackpot preview performance other than the developed performance. At the same time, it may be possible to execute an operation progress effect that progresses the effect according to the long press period during the valid period. In this case, it is preferable to determine whether the long press continues at a plurality of determination timings during the validity period, and determine to which stage the performance should be advanced based on the determination result.

In addition, in this embodiment, the icon (running information) indicating that the variable display of the special symbol is being executed is displayed on the image display device, but instead of displaying the icon, a predetermined The light emitting section may be made to emit light. In this case, the predetermined light emitting section is caused to emit light at the display timing of the icon corresponding to the shift display (decreasing display) of the pending icon accompanying the start of the variable effect, and the predetermined light emitting section is emitted at the timing when the icon concerned is erased as the variable effect ends. It is a good idea to turn off the lights. Furthermore, in the case of a gaming machine that erases the icon immediately after the start of the variable display, it is preferable to turn off the predetermined light emitting section immediately after the start of the variable display.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first variable performance is terminated by receiving a command to stop the variable display of the first special symbol, a command to stop the variable display of the second special symbol, an opening designation command, a customer waiting designation command, etc. However, it may be configured to end upon reception of a command at the start of the variable display of the second special symbol, or it may be configured to end (stop) without receiving a command as the variable display time elapses. You may also do so. In addition, the second fluctuating performance will end (stop) upon reception of a command to stop the fluctuating display of the second special symbol, a command to stop the fluctuating display of the first special symbol, an opening designation command, a customer waiting designation command, etc. However, the variable display of the first special symbol may be terminated by receiving a command at the start of the variable display, or may be terminated (stopped) without receiving a command as the variable presentation time elapses.

(About combination with other irregular events)
In FIG. 272 and the like, it has been explained that a command abnormality occurs due to missing commands due to disconnection or half-disconnection, garbled commands due to noise, half-disconnection, etc.
Here, combinations with other irregular events will be explained.

First, when the main control board 110 and the production control board 130 (from the main control board 110 to the production control board 130) do not have a disconnection in the signal line for command communication, for example, if the main control board 110 is connected to the production control board 110, When a disconnection or the like (such as a disconnected connector) occurs in the magnetic detection sensor 53a or the radio wave detection sensor 54a, a magnetic error or radio wave error is reported. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the act of disconnecting the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a in advance so that they cannot detect magnetism or radio waves, and then using a magnet or the like to win a prize.

On the other hand, between timing T1 and timing T2 in FIG. 272, there is a disconnection, etc. (connector For example, if a disconnection occurs in the magnetic detection sensor 53a or radio wave detection sensor 54a connected to the main control board 110 (connector disconnection, etc.), a magnetic error or radio wave error will be notified. This means that you will not be able to do so. The command related to the error cannot be sent because the signal line for command communication between the main control board 110 and the production control board 130 (from the main control board 110 to the production control board 130) is disconnected (such as a disconnected connector). It's for a reason.

After that, while the main power supply (operating power supply) of the gaming machine 1 is ON, the signal line for command communication between the main control board 110 and the production control board 130 (from the main control board 110 to the production control board 130) is disconnected. If the error is resolved, a command related to the error may be sent to notify the magnetic error or radio wave error.

On the other hand, when the main power supply (operating power supply) of the gaming machine 1 is turned off, a disconnection occurs in the signal line for command communication between the main control board 110 and the production control board 130 (from the main control board 110 to the production control board 130). When the main power source (operating power source) of the game machine 1 is turned on after solving the problem (such as a disconnected connector), a notification of a magnetic error or a radio wave error may be made.

In any case, if the disconnection of the signal line for command communication between the main control board 110 and the production control board 130 (from the main control board 110 to the production control board 130) is resolved, magnetic errors and radio wave errors will not be reported. Therefore, it is possible to check whether there is any abnormality in the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a. This makes it possible to prevent fraudulent attempts.

Note that when the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a are disconnected (such as a disconnected connector), the main power supply (operating power supply) of the gaming machine 1 is turned off, and the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a are turned off. If the main power source (operating power source) of the gaming machine 1 is turned on after the disconnection or the like is resolved, an unrecoverable error may be generated.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the performance control unit 130m executes a predetermined performance at the start using the pending icon HI (or the icon TI) when the start command is not normally received in the normal gaming state (or the specific gaming state). Explained what to do. In addition, it was explained that the performance control unit 130m executes a predetermined performance at stop using the hold icon HI (or the icon TI) when the stop command is not normally received in the normal gaming state (or specific gaming state). .
Here, the predetermined effect at the time of start by the hold icon HI (or the relevant icon TI) in the normal gaming state (or specific game state) and the predetermined effect at the time of stop by the hold icon HI (or the relevant icon TI) are different from the normal game state (or 272 (c), 272 (d), 278 (b), FIG. 299(b), etc.). That is, the predetermined display effect regarding the information display (the hold icon HI, the icon TI) also includes the periodic rotational movement (actual effect) of the hold icon HI (or the icon TI) described above.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, it was explained that the effect control unit 130m executes a predetermined effect at the start using the background image HG when the start command is not normally received in the normal gaming state (or the specific gaming state). . Furthermore, it has been explained that the effect control unit 130m executes a predetermined effect during stop using the background image HG when the stop command is not normally received in the normal gaming state (or specific gaming state). Furthermore, it has been explained that the performance control unit 130m executes a predetermined customer waiting performance using the background image HG when the customer waiting state designation command is not normally received in the normal gaming state (or specific gaming state).
Here, the predetermined effect at the start, the predetermined effect at the time of stopping, and the predetermined effect while waiting for a customer using the background image HG in the normal gaming state (or the specific gaming state) are used during the fluctuating performance or during the fluctuating performance in the normal gaming state (or the specific gaming state). Even if the loop playback of the background image HG according to the production mode is performed when it is not being executed (see FIG. 272(c), FIG. 272(d), FIG. 278(b), FIG. 299(b), etc.) good. That is, the predetermined special effect regarding the special image (background image HG, etc.) includes loop reproduction of the background image HG described above.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, it has been explained that the performance control unit 130m executes a predetermined performance at the start using the performance symbol 70a when the start time command is not normally received in the normal game state (or specific game state). . Furthermore, it has been explained that the performance control unit 130m executes a predetermined performance at the time of stop using the performance symbol 70a when the command at the time of stop is not normally received in the normal game state (or the specific game state).
Here, the predetermined performance at start and the predetermined performance at stop by the performance symbol 70a in the normal game state (or specific game state) are the performance symbols performed while the performance symbol 70a is temporarily stopped in the normal game state (or specific game state). The oscillating motion (oscillating display) of 70a (see FIG. 272(c), FIG. 272(d), FIG. 279(i), FIG. 300(i), etc.) may be used. That is, the predetermined symbol performance regarding the performance symbol 70a also includes the swinging motion (swinging display) of the performance symbol 70a described above.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, it has been explained that the performance control unit 130m executes a predetermined performance at the start time using the lamp LA when the start time command is not normally received in the normal game state (or the specific game state). Furthermore, it has been explained that the performance control unit 130m executes a predetermined performance at the time of stop using the lamp LA when the command at the time of stop is not normally received in the normal game state (or the specific game state). Furthermore, it has been explained that the performance control unit 130m executes a predetermined customer waiting performance using the lamp LA when the customer waiting state designation command is not normally received in the normal gaming state (or specific gaming state).
Here, the predetermined effect at the start by the lamp LA in the normal gaming state (or specific gaming state) is the light emission mode when the customer waiting effect or variable effect is not being executed in the normal gaming state (or specific gaming state). (See FIG. 278(a), FIG. 281(s), FIG. 299(a), FIG. 301(p), etc.). In addition, the predetermined performance when stopped by the lamp LA in the normal gaming state (or specific gaming state) is the light emission of the lamp LA in the light emission mode during the variable performance in the normal gaming state (or specific gaming state) (FIG. 278(b), 299(b) etc.). In addition, the predetermined effect of waiting for customers by the lamp LA in the normal gaming state (or specific gaming state) is the light emission of the lamp LA in the light emission mode when the variable effect is not executed in the normal gaming state (or specific gaming state) (Fig. 278 (a), FIG. 299(a), etc.). That is, the predetermined light emitting effect regarding the light emission of the light emitting unit (lamp LA, etc.) includes the above-mentioned light emission of the lamp LA in the light emitting mode during execution of the customer waiting effect, light emission of the lamp LA in the light emitting mode during the fluctuating effect, and , includes the light emission of the lamp LA in the light emission mode when the variable effect is not being executed.

In addition, in the second embodiment, when the production control unit 130m does not normally receive the stop command related to the variable display of the first special symbol in a specific gaming state, or during the execution of the first variable production in the specific gaming state, As described above, if the performance control unit 130m does not normally receive the start time command related to the variable display of the second special symbol, the predetermined performance at the time of stop by the icon TI is not executed.
Here, in the specific game state, even if a game ball enters the first starting port 45, the icon TI (the icon TI related to the first special symbol) may not be displayed. In this case, if the production control unit 130m does not normally receive the stop command related to the variable display of the first special symbol in a specific gaming state, or if the production control unit 130m does not normally receive the stop command related to the variable display of the second special symbol, If the time command is not received normally, the icon TI (the icon TI related to the first special symbol) is not displayed, so the specified icon TI (the icon TI related to the first special symbol) is stopped. There is no need for the performance to be performed. In other words, "the specified effect at the time of stop by the icon TI related to the first special symbol is not executed in a specific gaming state" means that "the first special symbol TI is not displayed because the icon TI related to the first special symbol is not displayed." This also includes the fact that "the predetermined effect at the time of stop by the icon TI is not executed."

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, it has been explained that the first variable performance is executed in a specific gaming state.
Here, instead of the first variable performance in the specific gaming state described in the second embodiment, a variable performance based on winning in the first start opening 121 in the specific time-saving gaming state described in the first embodiment is executed. may be done. To give an example, instead of the first variable performance in the specific gaming state described in the second embodiment, in which the jackpot determination result is a loss, the specific time-saving gaming state described in the first embodiment A variation effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winnings in the first starting opening 121 is a loss (Fig. 103 (1) to Fig. 103 (6), Fig. 104 (7) to Fig. 104 (12), Fig. 105 (13) to Figure 105 (18), Figure 106 (19) to Figure 106 (24), Figure 107 (25) to Figure 107 (27), Figure 111 (1) to Figure 111 (6), Figure 112 (7) ) to FIG. 112(12), FIG. 113(13) to FIG. 113(18), FIG. 114(19), FIG. 114(20), etc.) may be executed. In addition, instead of the first variable performance in a specific gaming state described in the second embodiment in which the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the first variable performance in the specific time-saving gaming state described in the first embodiment A variable performance (see FIG. 109 (1) to FIG. 109 (4)) may be executed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winnings in the starting hole 121 is a jackpot.

Further, the embodiments disclosed herein are illustrative in all respects and should be considered not to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description, and it is intended that equivalent meanings to the claims and all changes within the scope be included.
Furthermore, various configurations in each of the embodiments described above may be combined.

<Contents 1 of the invention described in this embodiment>
In conventional gaming machines, determination information acquired when acquisition conditions are met is stored as a reserved memory, and based on the determination information, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player, and based on the determination result. It is common to perform variable effects based on this. Some of these gaming machines display an increase or decrease in the number of pending images corresponding to each pending memory, or display an execution image corresponding to a pending memory in which a variable performance has been executed. There are some that allow players to grasp the progress of the game (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-018225). However, the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 has a problem in that it is difficult to immediately grasp the number of pending games when the number of pending games changes.

◆The first configuration for solving the above problems includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a game effect that controls the performance of the game based on signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a slave control means (production control board 130), the main control means controls judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of an acquisition condition (entering of a game ball into a starting hole). ), a determining means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game), and a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a reserved memory; The slave control means includes a variable effect execution means that can execute a variable effect on an image display means (image display device) according to the result of the determination, and first hold information (hold information) indicating the number of hold memories. information display means capable of displaying second reservation information (reservation icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the reservation memories, and the image display means is configured to display information at a predetermined frame update timing (1/1). The display image is updated every 30 ms), and the information display means is capable of displaying a decrease in the first pending information and a decreasing display of the second pending information when the number of pending memories decreases. The display of the first pending information is decreased (subtracted by 1) before the frame update timing at which the decreased display of the second pending information (movement to the center of the adjacent display area in the pending icon display area) is completed. The frame update timing at which the update (update to the pending number) is completed is earlier. By doing this, it becomes easier to understand the number of reservations.

◆As a second configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance is controlled based on signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a slave control means (production control board 130), the main control means controls judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of an acquisition condition (entering of a game ball into a starting hole). ), a determining means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game), and a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a reserved memory; The slave control means includes a variable effect execution means that can execute a variable effect on an image display means (image display device) according to the result of the determination, and first hold information (hold information) indicating the number of hold memories. information display means capable of displaying second reservation information (reservation icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the reservation memories, and the image display means is configured to display information at a predetermined frame update timing (1/1). The display image is updated every 30 ms), and when the number of pending memories decreases, the information display means displays a decrease in the first pending information and displays the second pending information on which the fluctuating effect has started. It is possible to display a change to the execution information (the icon), and the change display of the second pending information to the execution information (movement from the pending icon display area to the center of the icon display area) is completed. The frame update timing at which the reduction display of the first pending information (updating to the pending number subtracted by 1) is completed is earlier than the corresponding frame update timing. By doing this, it becomes easier to understand the number of reservations.

◆As a third configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance is controlled based on signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a slave control means (production control board 130), the main control means controls judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of an acquisition condition (entering of a game ball into a starting hole). ), a determining means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game), and a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a reserved memory; The slave control means includes a variable effect execution means that can execute a variable effect on an image display means (image display device) according to the result of the determination, and first hold information (hold information) indicating the number of hold memories. information display means capable of displaying second reservation information (reservation icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the reservation memories, and the image display means is configured to display information at a predetermined frame update timing (1/1). The display image is updated every 30 ms), and the information display means is capable of displaying a decrease in the first pending information and a decreasing display of the second pending information when the number of pending memories decreases. When the number of pending memories increases, it is possible to display an increase in the first pending information and an increase in the second pending information, and when the number of pending memories increases, the number of pending memories increases while the second pending information is decreased. If the number increases, even before the frame update timing at which the reduction display of the second pending information (movement to the center of the adjacent display section in the pending icon display area) is completed, the first pending information Incremental display of information (updating to the pending number by adding 1) is started. By doing this, it becomes easier to understand the number of reservations.

◆As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance is controlled based on signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a slave control means (production control board 130), the main control means controls judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of an acquisition condition (entering of a game ball into a starting hole). ), a determining means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game), and a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a reserved memory; The slave control means includes a variable effect execution means that can execute a variable effect on an image display means (image display device) according to the result of the determination, and first hold information (hold information) indicating the number of hold memories. information display means capable of displaying second reservation information (reservation icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the reservation memories, and the image display means is configured to display information at a predetermined frame update timing (1/1). The display image is updated every 30 ms), and when the number of pending memories decreases, the information display means displays a decreasing display of the first pending information and displays the second pending information for which the variable display has started. It is possible to display a change in execution information (the icon), and when the number of pending memories increases, it is possible to display an increase in the first pending information and to display an increase in the second pending information. Yes, and if the number of pending memories increases during the change display of the second pending information, the reduction display of the second pending information (movement from the pending icon display area to the center of the icon display area) is completed. Even before the frame update timing becomes, the display of an increase in the first reservation information (updating to a reservation number incremented by 1) is started. By doing this, it becomes easier to understand the number of reservations.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance is controlled based on signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a slave control means (production control board 130), the main control means controls judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of an acquisition condition (entering of a game ball into a starting hole). ), a determining means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game), and a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a reserved memory; The slave control means includes a variable effect execution means that can execute a variable effect on an image display means (image display device) according to the result of the determination, and first hold information (hold information) indicating the number of hold memories. information display means capable of displaying second reservation information (reservation icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the reservation memories, and the image display means is configured to display information at a predetermined frame update timing (1/1). The display image is updated every 30 ms), and the information display means is capable of displaying an increasing number of the first pending information and an increasing display of the second pending information when the number of pending memories increases. Yes, and if the number of pending memories increases during execution of the fluctuating performance, the increasing display of the second pending information (enlargement of the pending icon additionally displayed in the pending icon display area to a normal size) is completed. The frame update timing at which the increment display of the first pending information (updating to the pending number added by 1) is completed is earlier than the frame updating timing at which the first pending information is displayed. By doing this, it becomes easier to understand the number of reservations.

◆As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance is controlled based on signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a slave control means (production control board 130), the main control means controls judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of an acquisition condition (entering of a game ball into a starting hole). ), a determining means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game), and a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a reserved memory; The slave control means includes a variable effect execution means that can execute a variable effect on an image display means (image display device) according to the result of the determination, and first hold information (hold information) indicating the number of hold memories. information display means capable of displaying second hold information (hold icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the hold memories, and the fluctuating effect execution means is configured to It is possible to execute a specific performance (SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance, full rotation reach performance) that makes the execution of the special game expected, and when the number of the pending memories increases, the information display means displays the first pending information. It is possible to display an increase in the number of pending memories and to display an increase in the second pending information, and when the number of pending memories increases during execution of the specific effect, an increased display of the first pending information (one added (updating to the pending number) is executed, but the increasing display of the second pending information is executed until a predetermined condition is satisfied (the specific effect is completed, the loss effect symbol or the jackpot effect symbol that was displayed in a reduced size is displayed in an enlarged manner) It is designed so that it will not happen. By doing this, it becomes easier to understand the number of reservations.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance is controlled based on signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a slave control means (production control board 130), the main control means controls judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of an acquisition condition (entering of a game ball into a starting hole). ), a determining means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game), and a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a reserved memory; A game state control means capable of controlling a normal game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and the slave control means controls an image of a variable performance according to the result of the determination. A variable performance execution means executable by a display means (image display device), first reservation information (reservation number) indicating the number of said reservation memories, and second reservation information (representing an identifier corresponding to each of said reservation memories). and information display means capable of displaying a hold icon), and when the number of hold memories increases, the information display means displays an increase in the first hold information and an increase in the second hold information. The storage means stores the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition (the entry of the game ball into the first starting port) as a first pending memory, and the storage means stores the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition (the entry of the game ball into the first starting port), and The judgment information based on (entering the game ball into the second starting port) is stored as a second pending memory, and when the number of the first pending memories increases in the specific gaming state, the first pending memory The increase display (update to the pending number added by 1) is executed, but the predetermined condition is satisfied for the increase display of the second pending information (the last variable performance in the specific gaming state is completed, and the normal gaming state is returned) It will not be executed until By doing this, it becomes easier to understand the number of reservations.

<Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 2>
Conventional gaming machines are generally capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and executing the special game according to the result of the determination. Among these gaming machines, there were gaming machines that initialized the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restored it to the state before the power supply was stopped (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-189604 (see publication). However, the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document has a problem in that it is difficult to determine whether the gaming control state has been initialized or whether the gaming control state has been restored.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine that can play games, movable presentation means (first movable member 73, second movable member 73, member 74, production button 17), and initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before power supply was stopped. , an effect control capable of performing an initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable effect means after the start of power supply, and performing an effect operation (presentation operation, effect emission) of the movable effect means during the execution of the game. means (effect control board 130), and the effect control means controls the operation mode of the initial operation (operation) when the control state of the game is initialized and when the control state of the game is restored. mode, light emission mode, etc.). Therefore, it becomes possible to easily understand whether the gaming control state has been initialized or whether the gaming control state has been restored.

◆As a second configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, an operating means (effect button 17) that can be operated by the player and can emit light in a predetermined manner, and a power source are provided. Initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before the stop of power supply, and the operation means after the start of power supply. A performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of performing initial light emission and effect light emission of the operation means during execution of the game, and the performance control means is configured to initialize the control state of the game. The light emission mode (light emission mode, etc.) of the initial light emission is made different depending on the case where the control state of the game is restored and the case where the control state of the game is restored. Therefore, it becomes possible to easily understand whether the gaming control state has been initialized or whether the gaming control state has been restored.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine that can play games, a movable effect means (first movable member 73 , a second movable member 74), and an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before power supply was stopped. , an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing the initial operation and initial light emission of the movable effect means after the start of power supply, and performing the effect operation and effect light emission of the movable effect means during the execution of the game; ), and the performance control means is configured to control the initial operation mode (number of steps and Although the operation mode, etc. of each step is the same, the light emission mode (light emission mode, etc.) of the initial light emission of the movable presentation means is made different. Therefore, it becomes possible to easily understand whether the gaming control state has been initialized or whether the gaming control state has been restored.

◆As a fourth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, a movable effect means (first movable member 73 , a second movable member 74), and an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before power supply was stopped. , effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing initial light emission of the movable effect means after the start of power supply and effect light emission of the movable effect means during execution of a game, The performance means includes a first movable performance means (first movable member 73) and a second movable performance means (second movable member 74), and the performance control means is configured to control the performance when the control state of the game is initialized. and when the control state of the game is restored, at least a part of the light emission mode of the initial light emission in the first movable effect means is the same, but the light emission mode of the initial light emission in the second movable effect means are designed to differ. Therefore, it becomes possible to easily understand whether the gaming control state has been initialized or whether the gaming control state has been restored.

◆As a fifth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the acquisition condition is satisfied, A determining means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game), and initializing the control state of the game after starting power supply, or stopping power supply. An initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of restoring to the previous state, and a variable display of a plurality of effect symbols displayed on a display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means. a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of performing a fluctuating performance accompanied by the performance; each of the plurality of performance patterns includes identification characters (numbers, alphabets, etc.) that enable each to be identified; When the control state of the game is initialized, the control means sets the identification characters in the plurality of performance symbols displayed on the display means to a first combination (for example, "135"), and adjusts the control state of the game. is restored, the identification characters in the plurality of effect patterns displayed on the display means are set to a second combination (for example, "753"). Therefore, it becomes possible to easily understand whether the gaming control state has been initialized or whether the gaming control state has been restored.

<Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 3>
Conventional gaming machines generally initialize the control state of the game after the power supply starts, or restore it to the state before the power supply was stopped. Among such gaming machines, there was a gaming machine that caused the movable performance means to perform an initial operation after the start of power supply (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-187648). However, the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document has a problem in that the movable presentation means may not be able to perform a suitable initial operation.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, there are a first position (origin position) and a second position (position near the center of the first image display device 70). The movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) that can operate between and an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of performing an initial operation of the movable performance means after the start of power supply, and a performance capable of performing the performance operation of the movable performance means during execution of a game. control means (effect control board 130), the effect control means is such that the movable effect means is in the second position at the time of start of power supply (power restoration) in which the control state of the game is restored. In this case, the initial operation is performed after the movable presentation means returns to the first position. Therefore, it becomes possible to perform a suitable initial operation for the movable presentation means.

◆As a second configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, there are a first position (origin position) and a second position (position near the center of the first image display device 70). The movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) that can operate between and an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of performing an initial operation of the movable performance means after the start of power supply, and a performance capable of performing the performance operation of the movable performance means during execution of a game. control means (effect control board 130), the effect control means is such that the movable effect means is in the second position at the time of start of power supply (power restoration) in which the control state of the game is restored. In this case, an operation is performed to return the movable presentation means to the first position, and when the movable presentation means returns to the first position, the initial operation is performed, but when the movable presentation means does not return to the first position, The above-mentioned initial operation is not performed. Therefore, it becomes possible to perform a suitable initial operation for the movable presentation means.

◆As a third configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, there are a first position (origin position) and a second position (position near the center of the first image display device 70). The movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) that can operate between and an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of performing an initial operation of the movable performance means after the start of power supply, and a performance capable of performing the performance operation of the movable performance means during execution of a game. control means (effect control board 130), the movable effect means includes a first movable effect means (first movable member 73) and a second movable effect means (second movable member 74), The effect control means is configured such that the first movable effect means is in the second position and the second movable effect element is in the first position at the time of start of power supply (power restoration) when the control state of the game is restored. If the first movable presentation means does not return to the first position, the initial operation of the first movable presentation means is Instead, the initial operation of the second movable effect means is performed. Therefore, it becomes possible to perform a suitable initial operation for the movable presentation means.

◆As a fourth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, there are a first position (origin position) and a second position (position near the center of the first image display device 70). The movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) that can operate between and an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of performing an initial operation of the movable performance means after the start of power supply, and a performance capable of performing the performance operation of the movable performance means during execution of a game. control means (effect control board 130), the movable effect means includes a first movable effect means (first movable member 73) and a second movable effect means (second movable member 74), The effect control means is configured such that the first movable effect means is in the second position and the second movable effect element is in the first position at the time of start of power supply (power restoration) when the control state of the game is restored. If the first movable presentation means does not return to the first position, perform the initial operation of the second movable presentation means. It is designed not to do this. Therefore, it becomes possible to perform a suitable initial operation for the movable presentation means.

◆As a fifth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, there are a first position (origin position) and a second position (position near the center of the first image display device 70). The movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) that can operate between and an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of performing an initial operation of the movable performance means after the start of power supply, and a performance capable of performing the performance operation of the movable performance means during execution of a game. control means (effect control board 130), the movable effect means includes a first movable effect means (first movable member 73) and a second movable effect means (second movable member 74), The effect control means is configured such that the first movable effect means is in the second position and the second movable effect means is in the first position at the time of start of power supply (power-on) at which the control state of the game is initialized. position, the first movable presentation means performs a return operation to the first position, and when the first movable presentation means does not return to the first position, the first movable presentation means initializes. Instead, the initial operation of the second movable presentation means is performed. Therefore, it becomes possible to perform a suitable initial operation for the movable presentation means.

◆As a sixth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, there are a first position (origin position) and a second position (position near the center of the first image display device 70). The movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) that can operate between and an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of performing an initial operation of the movable performance means after the start of power supply, and a performance capable of performing the performance operation of the movable performance means during execution of a game. A control means (effect control board 130), the movable effect means has a first movable effect means (first movable member 73), a second position of the first movable effect means, and a second position of the first movable effect means. and a second movable presentation means (second movable member 74) which has an overlapping portion, and the presentation control means is configured to perform the above operation at the time of start of power supply (power-on) to initialize the control state of the game. When the first movable presentation means is at the second position and the second movable presentation means is at the first position, the first movable presentation means performs a return operation to the first position, and If the presentation means does not return to the first position, the initial operation of the second movable presentation means is not performed. Therefore, it becomes possible to perform a suitable initial operation for the movable presentation means.

<Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 4>
In conventional gaming machines, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and the performance symbols displayed on the display means are changed depending on the result of the determination. Gaming machines that can perform performances are common. Among these gaming machines, there were gaming machines that initialized the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restored it to the state before the power supply was stopped (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-189604 (see publication). However, in the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document, there is room for improvement in the control of the display means when the power supply that was stopped during the variable performance is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, and the interest in the game decreases. The problem was that there was a possibility that

◆As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when acquisition conditions are satisfied, A determining means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game), and initializing the control state of the game after starting power supply, or stopping power supply. An initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of restoring to the previous state, and a fluctuation accompanied by a fluctuating display of the effect pattern displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means. A performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of performing a performance is provided, and in the fluctuating performance, the performance symbol being displayed in a fluctuating manner is oscillatedly displayed (temporarily stopped display) and then statically displayed ( When the power supply that was stopped during execution of the fluctuating performance in which the performance symbols are oscillatedly displayed is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the performance control means performs a predetermined display. At the timing of (when receiving a special figure stop designation command, when receiving a customer waiting command), the effect pattern can be displayed statically on the display means without being oscillatedly displayed. Therefore, the player can be made aware that the variable performance that was being executed at the time the power supply stopped has ended, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

◆As a second configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, judgment information (special figure judgment A determining means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on the information), and a determining means (main control board 110) that can determine the control state of the game after starting power supply. Initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing or restoring to the state before the power supply was stopped, and display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means. A performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of performing a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of a plurality of displayed performance symbols; It includes a reach variation effect that executes a reach effect by forming a formation display, and when the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the reach effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the effect control means controls the control at a predetermined timing ( When the special pattern stop designation command is received, when the customer wait command is received), it is possible to display on the display means in a static state a combination of the production symbols that is different from the ready-to-reach combination based on the production symbols that were forming and displaying the ready-to-reach state. There is. Therefore, the player can be made aware that the variable performance that was being executed at the time the power supply stopped has ended, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

<Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 5>
In conventional gaming machines, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and the performance symbols displayed on the display means are changed depending on the result of the determination. Gaming machines that can perform performances are common. Among these gaming machines, there were gaming machines that initialized the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restored it to the state before the power supply was stopped (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-189604 (see publication). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is room for improvement in the control of the display means when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, and there is a possibility that the interest in the game will decrease. There was a problem that there was.

◆As a first configuration to solve the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, judgment information (special figure judgment a storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing information) as a pending memory; and a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game) based on the determination information. a main control board 110), an initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped, and a determination by the determination means. A performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of performing a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of performance symbols displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the result, are a customer waiting state in which the fluctuating performance is not executed, a first state that is an execution period of the fluctuating performance without the pending memory, and an execution period of the fluctuating performance in a state with the pending memory. and a second state, and the performance control means is capable of performing a specific display (displaying an initial screen, etc.) before displaying the performance symbols on the display means when the control state of the game is restored. and the mode of the specific display (display of the initial screen only) when the power supply that was stopped in the customer waiting state is restarted and the power supply is restored to the customer waiting state, and the power supply stops in the first state or the second state. The display mode of the specific display (initial screen + display of the returning screen) is made different when the power supply is restarted and the first state or the second state is restored. Therefore, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

<Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 6>
In conventional gaming machines, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and the performance symbols displayed on the display means are changed depending on the result of the determination. Gaming machines that can perform performances are common. Among such gaming machines, there was a gaming machine that performs a customer waiting effect on a display unit when a player is not playing a game (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-064835). However, the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document has a problem in that the customer waiting effect is not executed at an appropriate time depending on the state of the gaming machine.

◆As a first configuration to solve the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, judgment information (special figure judgment A determining means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on the information), and a determining means (main control board 110) that can determine the control state of the game after starting power supply. Initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing or restoring to the state before the power supply was stopped, and display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means. A performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of performing a variable performance accompanied by a fluctuating display of the displayed performance design; When a predetermined period of time has elapsed, it is possible to execute a customer waiting performance (customer waiting demonstration performance) on the display means, and the case where the performance pattern is displayed statically after the elapse of the variable time of the variable performance, and the case where the control state It is possible to make the period until the customer waiting performance is executed different depending on the case where the performance pattern is statically displayed after the initialization or after the recovery of the control state. Therefore, the customer waiting effect can be executed at an appropriate time depending on the state of the gaming machine, and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

<Contents 7 of the invention described in this embodiment>
In conventional gaming machines, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and the performance symbols displayed on the display means are changed depending on the result of the determination. Gaming machines that can perform performances are common. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that displays execution information on a display means corresponding to determination information on whether a variable performance is being executed (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-064835). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is room for improvement in the control of the display means when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, and there is a possibility that the interest in the game will decrease. There was a problem that there was.

◆As a first configuration to solve the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, judgment information (special figure judgment A determining means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on the information), and a determining means (main control board 110) that can determine the control state of the game after starting power supply. An initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing or restoring the state to the state before the power supply was stopped, and an effect displayed on a display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means. A performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of performing a variable performance accompanied by a fluctuating display of symbols, and when the control state of the game is restored, the performance control means displays the performance on the display means. It is possible to perform a specific display (displaying an initial screen, etc.) before displaying a symbol, and to display the determination information during execution of the variable effect in a predetermined display area (the icon display area 70C) of the display means. It is possible to display the corresponding execution information (the relevant icon), and if the power supply that was stopped while the execution information was displayed is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the next Until the variable display starts, the predetermined display area is secured in a predetermined state (a state in which an effect image such as a background image can be displayed), but the execution information is not stored in the predetermined display area. It is not displayed. Therefore, the player can be made aware that the variable performance that was being executed at the time the power supply stopped has ended, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

<Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 8>
In conventional gaming machines, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and the performance symbols displayed on the display means are changed depending on the result of the determination. Gaming machines that can perform performances are common. Among these gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that executes a pre-read preview performance that spans multiple variable performances based on the preliminary determination result of the determination information (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-143904 reference). However, the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document has a problem that the interest in the game may decrease when the power supply that was stopped during the pre-read preview performance is restarted and the control state of the game is restored. there were.

◆As a first configuration to solve the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, judgment information (special figure judgment It is possible to determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on the storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing information) and the determination information. A determining means (main control board 110), a preliminary determining means (main control board 110) capable of determining the determination information before the determination by the determining means, and initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply. or an initial processing means (main control board 110) for restoring the state to the state before the power supply was stopped; A performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of performing a fluctuating performance accompanied by a fluctuating display; It is possible to execute a predetermined pre-reading notice performance (continuous notice performance) over a period of time, and if the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the pre-reading notice performance is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the above-mentioned pre-reading notice performance It is possible to execute a preview performance (for example, an alternative preview performance) different from the pre-read preview performance in the variable performance that is executed next to the fluctuating performance in which the power supply is stopped without restarting the power supply. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the dissatisfaction of the player caused by the termination of the continuous notice performance due to the stoppage of power supply, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 9>
In conventional gaming machines, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and the performance symbols displayed on the display means are changed depending on the result of the determination. Gaming machines that can perform performances are common. Among these gaming machines, there was a gaming machine that executed a specific performance that gradually indicated the degree of expectation that the special game would be executed over multiple variable performances (for example, -Refer to Publication No. 143904). However, the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document has a problem in that when the power supply that was stopped during a specific performance is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the interest in the game may decrease. Ta.

◆As a first configuration to solve the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, judgment information (special figure judgment It is possible to determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on the storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing information) and the determination information. A determining means (main control board 110), a preliminary determining means (main control board 110) capable of determining the determination information before the determination by the determining means, and initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply. or an initial processing means (main control board 110) for restoring the state to the state before the power supply was stopped; A performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of performing a variable performance accompanied by a variable display; It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, an icon change effect) suggested by Although the specific performance can be executed in the variable performance that is executed next to the stopped variable performance, it is not executed from the continuation of the stage that was suggested before the power supply was stopped. Therefore, it is possible to execute an icon change performance that matches the content of the current variation performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Contents 10 of the invention described in this embodiment>
In conventional gaming machines, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and the performance symbols displayed on the display means are changed depending on the result of the determination. Gaming machines that can perform performances are common. Among these gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that executes a specific effect that gradually changes the display mode of identification information that is displayed corresponding to each piece of judgment information for which execution of the variable effect has not been completed. (For example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-061728). However, in the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document, when the power supply that was stopped during a change performance is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the processing load related to display control after the power supply is restarted is high. There was a possibility that something would happen.

◆As a first configuration to solve the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, judgment information (special figure judgment It is possible to determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on the storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing information) and the determination information. A determining means (main control board 110), a preliminary determining means (main control board 110) capable of determining the determination information before the determination by the determining means, and initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply. or an initial processing means (main control board 110) for restoring the state to the state before the power supply was stopped; A performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of performing a fluctuating performance accompanied by a fluctuating display; It is possible to display identification information (the icon, the pending icon) corresponding to each piece of the judgment information that has not been started, and the special game can be executed by changing the display mode of the identification information in stages. It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, an icon change effect) that suggests the level of expectation for icon) and a third stage mode (red icon), and the power supply that was stopped during the display of the identification information in the second stage mode that changes up to the third stage mode is restarted and the gaming control state is restored, the identification information that was displayed in the second stage mode is displayed in the first stage mode. Therefore, the user does not need to be aware of the display mode of the pending icon when the power supply is stopped, and it is possible to reduce the processing load related to display control after the power supply is restarted.

<Contents 11 of the invention described in this embodiment>
In conventional gaming machines, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and the performance symbols displayed on the display means are changed depending on the result of the determination. Gaming machines that can perform performances are common. Among such gaming machines, there was a gaming machine that displayed the number of pending memories, which is determination information that has not yet been determined, in a display area (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-061728). However, in the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, it takes time to grasp the number of suspended memories, which reduces the interest in the game. There was a problem that there was a possibility that the

◆As a first configuration to solve the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, judgment information (special figure judgment a storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing information) as a pending memory; and a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game) based on the determination information. a main control board 110), an initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped, and a determination by the determination means. A performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of performing a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of performance symbols displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the result, and the control state of the game is controlled. In the case of restoration, it is possible to perform a specific display (display of the initial screen, etc.) before displaying the effect design on the display means, and the first display area (sub-first hold display 83, sub-second A hold display indicating the number of hold memories is displayed in each of a hold indicator 84) and a second display area different from the first display area (first hold icon display area 70B, second hold icon display area 70D). If the power supply that was stopped while the suspended memory exists is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the suspended display may be executed in the second display area while the specific display is being executed. However, the suspended display can be executed in the first display area. Therefore, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the number of pending memories can be grasped before the end of the specific display, and it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing. It becomes possible.

<Contents 12 of the invention described in this embodiment>
In conventional gaming machines, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and the performance symbols displayed on the display means are changed depending on the result of the determination. Gaming machines that can perform performances are common. Among these gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that executes a performance that suggests the degree of expectation that a special game will be executed (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-143904). However, in the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document, when the power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored after being stopped during a performance that indicates the degree of expectation that a special game will be executed, the interest in the game is lost. There was a problem that there was a possibility of a decline.

◆As a first configuration to solve the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, judgment information (special figure judgment It is possible to determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on the storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing information) and the determination information. A determining means (main control board 110), a preliminary determining means (main control board 110) capable of determining the determination information before the determining means, and initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply. or an initial processing means (main control board 110) for restoring the state to the state before the power supply was stopped; The performance control means includes a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of performing a variable performance accompanied by a variable display, and a light emitting means (winning hole lamp NR) that can be changed to any of a plurality of notification modes, The means is capable of executing a change effect (lamp change effect) that suggests the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed by changing the light emitting means to a specific notification mode, and during execution of the change effect. When the power supply that has been stopped is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the light emitting means is set to a notification mode (white lighting or extinguishment) different from the specific notification mode. Therefore, while reducing the control load after the power supply is resumed, it is possible to avoid a situation where the player is confused, such as when the lamp change effect is restarted even though the variable effect has not been executed. It becomes possible to suppress a decline in interest.

<Contents 13 of the invention described in this embodiment>
Conventional gaming machines are equipped with a main control means that can control the progress of the game, and a performance control means that can control performances according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. is common. Among such gaming machines, there was a gaming machine equipped with a movable performance means that can operate in a predetermined manner (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-187648). However, such a gaming machine does not take into consideration the case where the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means deviate from each other.

◆The first configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and an effect according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling the performance, movable performance means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17), and the production control means executes an initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable production means and a production operation (production operation, production light emission) of the movable production means. is possible, and a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command etc.), it is possible to perform said initial operation. Therefore, it becomes possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆As a second configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a performance according to a signal (command etc.) from the main control means are provided. In a gaming machine equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling the performance, movable performance means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17), and the production control means executes an initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable production means and a production operation (production operation, production light emission) of the movable production means. It is possible to perform a customer waiting effect in a standby state (a customer waiting state) in which no game is in progress, and during the execution of the customer waiting effect, a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.), the initial operation can be performed. Therefore, it becomes possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆As a third configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means are provided. In a gaming machine equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling the performance, movable performance means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17), and the production control means executes an initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable production means and a production operation (production operation, production light emission) of the movable production means. It is possible to execute a variable effect for informing the player whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, and during execution of the variable effect, the main control means When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received, the initial operation can be performed. Therefore, it becomes possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆As a fourth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means are provided. In a gaming machine equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling the performance, movable performance means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17), and the production control means executes an initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable production means and a production operation (production operation, production light emission) of the movable production means. It is possible to perform a special game performance (jackpot performance, opening performance, round performance, ending performance) during the execution of a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to perform special game performances (jackpot performance, opening performance, round performance, ending performance), and If a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during execution, the initial operation can be performed. Therefore, it becomes possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆As a fifth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a performance according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means In a gaming machine equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling , a second movable member 74), and an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before power supply was stopped. , the effect control means is capable of performing an initial operation and an initial light emission of the movable effect means, and is also capable of executing a effect operation and an effect light emission of the movable effect means. , The operation mode of the initial operation of the movable presentation means (operation mode such as the number of steps and the movement of each step) is the same when the control state of the game is initialized and when the control state of the game is restored. However, by changing the light emission mode (emission color, light emission pattern, etc.) of the initial light emission of the movable effect means, a control state (customer waiting state, variable effect, jackpot If a predetermined signal (a power-on designation command, a power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during the production (presentation), it is possible to execute the initial operation of the movable production means. Therefore, it becomes possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a performance according to a signal (command etc.) from the main control means In a gaming machine equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) that can control the performance, a performance means (first movable member 73) that can operate in a predetermined manner (operation, light emission, sound output, image display). , second movable member 74, production button 17, various LEDs, audio output device 9, image display device) and judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (game ball winning in the starting hole). ), a determining means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, and initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply. or initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of restoring the state to the state before the power supply was stopped; (initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and production operation of the movable production means (production operation, production light emission, production sound output, production image display), and the judgment of the judgment means Depending on the result, it is possible to execute a fluctuating performance accompanied by a fluctuating display of the performance symbols displayed on the display means (image display device), and in the fluctuating performance, the fluctuating performance symbol is shaken. It is possible to perform a static display (stop display) after a dynamic display (temporary stop display), and the production control means is capable of restarting power supply that was stopped during execution of the fluctuating production in which the production symbols are displayed in a oscillating manner. When the control state of the game is restored, the performance symbols may be statically displayed on the display means without being oscillated and displayed at a predetermined timing (when receiving a special symbol stop designation command, when receiving a customer waiting command). A predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is sent from the main control means during a control state (customer waiting state, fluctuating performance, jackpot performance) in which it is possible to perform a performance according to the signal. ), it is possible to perform said initial operation. Therefore, it becomes possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a performance according to a signal (command etc.) from the main control means In a gaming machine equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) that can control the performance, a performance means (first movable member 73) that can operate in a predetermined manner (operation, light emission, sound output, image display). , second movable member 74, production button 17, various LEDs, audio output device 9, image display device) and determination information (special figure determination a storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing information) as a pending memory; and a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game) based on the determination information. a main control board 110), and an initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or for restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped; The control means controls the initial operation of the effect means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and the effect operation of the effect means (effect operation, effect light emission, effect sound output, effect image display). According to the judgment result of the judgment means, it is possible to execute a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of the effect symbols displayed on the display means (image display device), and the The states include a customer waiting state in which the fluctuating performance is not executed, a first state that is an execution period of the fluctuating performance without the pending memory, and an execution period of the fluctuating performance in a state with the pending memory. and a second state in which the performance control means performs a specific display (displaying an initial screen, etc.) before displaying the performance symbols on the display means when the control state of the game is restored. is possible, and the display mode of the specific display (display of the initial screen only) when the power supply that was stopped during the customer waiting state is restarted and the customer waiting state is restored, and the first state or the first state When the power supply that was stopped during the second state is resumed and the first state or the second state is restored, the display mode of the specific display (initial screen + display of the returning screen) is made different, and according to the signal. If a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during a control state (customer waiting state, fluctuating performance, jackpot performance) in which the performance can be executed, the initial It is possible to perform the actuation. Therefore, it becomes possible to eliminate the gap between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆An eighth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a performance according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) that can control the performance, a performance means (first movable member 73) that can operate in a predetermined manner (operation, light emission, sound output, image display). , second movable member 74, production button 17, various LEDs, audio output device 9, image display device) and determination information (special figure determination a storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing information) as a pending memory; and a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game) based on the determination information. a main control board 110), and an initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or for restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped; The control means controls the initial operation of the effect means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and the effect operation of the effect means (effect operation, effect light emission, effect sound output, effect image display). According to the determination result of the determination means, it is possible to perform a fluctuating performance accompanied by a fluctuating display of the performance symbols displayed on the display means (image display device), and the display means When a predetermined period of time has elapsed after statically displaying the performance design, it is possible to perform a customer waiting performance (customer waiting demonstration performance) on the display means, and after the variable time of the variable performance has elapsed, the performance design can be displayed. The period until the customer waiting performance is executed can be made different between when the performance pattern is statically displayed and when the performance pattern is statically displayed after the control state is initialized or after the control state is restored; A predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during a control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which a performance can be executed in accordance with the signal. In this case, it is possible to carry out the initial operation. Therefore, it becomes possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆ As a ninth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a performance according to a signal (command etc.) from the main control means In a gaming machine equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) that can control the performance, a performance means (first movable member 73) that can operate in a predetermined manner (operation, light emission, sound output, image display). , second movable member 74, production button 17, various LEDs, audio output device 9, image display device) and determination information (special figure determination a storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing information) as a pending memory; and a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game) based on the determination information. a main control board 110), and an initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or for restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped; The control means controls the initial operation of the effect means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and the effect operation of the effect means (effect operation, effect light emission, effect sound output, effect image display). According to the determination result of the determination means, it is possible to perform a fluctuating performance accompanied by a fluctuating display of the performance design displayed on the display means (image display device), and the above-mentioned advance Based on the determination result of the determination means, it is possible to execute a predetermined prefetched preview performance (continuous preview performance) over a plurality of the variable performances, and the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the prefetched preview performance is restarted. When the control state of the game is restored, the prefetched preview performance is not restarted, and a different preview performance from the prefetched preview performance (for example, When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command , power restoration designation command, etc.), the initial operation can be performed. Therefore, it becomes possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆A tenth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a performance according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) that can control the performance, a performance means (first movable member 73) that can operate in a predetermined manner (operation, light emission, sound output, image display). , second movable member 74, production button 17, various LEDs, audio output device 9, image display device) and determination information (special figure determination a storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing information) as a pending memory, and a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game) based on the determination information. a main control board 110), and an initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or for restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped; The control means controls the initial operation of the effect means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and the effect operation of the effect means (effect operation, effect light emission, effect sound output, effect image display). According to the judgment result of the judgment means, it is possible to execute a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of the effect pattern displayed on the display means (image display device), It is possible to perform a specific performance (for example, an icon change performance) that gradually indicates the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed over the variable performance, and the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the specific performance is restarted. When the control state of the game is restored, the specific performance can be executed in the fluctuating performance that is executed next to the fluctuating performance for which the power supply has been stopped, but the specific performance that was suggested before the power supply was stopped is A predetermined signal (power-on designation command, When a power recovery designation command, etc.) is received, the initial operation can be performed. Therefore, it becomes possible to eliminate the gap between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆An eleventh configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a performance according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling (Operation, light emission, sound output, image display) Possible production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17, various LEDs, audio output device 9, image display device) and fulfillment of acquisition conditions A storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing the judgment information (special figure judgment information) obtained by (entering the game ball into the starting hole) as a reserved memory, and A determining means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute an advantageous special game (jackpot game), and initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or before the power supply is stopped. initial processing means (main control board 110) for restoring to the state of It is possible to execute the production operation of the means (production operation, production light emission, production sound output, production image display), and it is expected that the special game will be executed by changing the light emission means to a specific notification mode. It is possible to execute a change effect (lamp change effect) that suggests the degree of change, and when the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the change effect is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the light emitting means is The main control is performed during a control state (customer waiting state, fluctuating performance, jackpot performance) in which it is possible to control a notification mode (white lighting or turning off) different from a specific notification mode and execute a performance according to the signal. When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the means, the initial operation can be performed. Therefore, it becomes possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆As a twelfth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a performance according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means In a game machine equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling the performance, a sound output means (sound output device 9) capable of outputting game performance sound (BGM, SE, etc.) The effect control means is capable of outputting a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.) indicating the start of power supply from the sound output device, If a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during a control state in which the performance can be executed (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance), the predetermined signal It is possible to output notification sound. Therefore, it becomes possible to eliminate the gap between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆As a thirteenth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a performance according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means In a game machine equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling the game, a sound output means (sound output device 9) capable of outputting game performance sound (BGM, SE, etc.) The performance control means is capable of outputting a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.) indicating the start of power supply from the sound output means, and is capable of outputting a predetermined notification sound indicating the start of power supply, such as a power-on notification sound, a power restoration notification sound, etc., when the game is in progress. It is possible to execute a customer waiting effect in a standby state (a customer waiting state) where there is no customer waiting, and a predetermined signal (a power-on designation command, a power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means while the customer waiting performance is being executed. In this case, it is possible to output the predetermined notification sound. Therefore, it becomes possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆As a fourteenth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means In a game machine equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling the game, a sound output means (sound output device 9) capable of outputting game performance sound (BGM, SE, etc.) The performance control means is capable of outputting a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.) indicating the start of power supply from the sound output means, and is advantageous to the player. It is possible to execute a fluctuating performance to notify whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game), and during execution of the fluctuating performance, a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration command, etc.) is sent from the main control means. When a specified command, etc.) is received, the predetermined notification sound can be output. Therefore, it becomes possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆As a fifteenth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a performance according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means In a game machine equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling the game, a sound output means (sound output device 9) capable of outputting game performance sound (BGM, SE, etc.) The performance control means is capable of outputting a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.) indicating the start of power supply from the sound output means, and is advantageous to the player. It is possible to execute a special game performance (jackpot performance, opening performance, round performance, ending performance) while a special game (jackpot game) is being executed, and a predetermined signal is sent from the main control means during execution of the special game performance. When receiving a command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.), it is possible to output the predetermined notification sound. Therefore, it becomes possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

<Contents 14 of the invention described in this embodiment>
Conventional gaming machines generally include a main control means for controlling the progress of the game, and a performance control means for controlling the performance according to commands from the main control means. Among such gaming machines, there was a gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying an effect image (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-187648). However, such gaming machines do not take into consideration the case where the power supply to the main control means is stopped while the power supply to the performance control means continues.

◆The first configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and an effect according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. The gaming machine is equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling the performance, and is equipped with display means (image display devices 70, 71) capable of displaying performance images (variable performance, jackpot performance, etc.). , the performance control means is capable of displaying a game standby screen (a static display screen of performance symbols) on the display means in a standby state (a customer waiting state) in which a game is not in progress; If the power supply to the main control means is stopped during display, it is possible to continue displaying the game standby screen. Therefore, when the power supply to the main control means is stopped, the player is not made to feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

<Contents 15 of the invention described in this embodiment>
Conventional gaming machines generally include a main control means for controlling the progress of the game, and a performance control means for controlling the performance according to commands from the main control means. Among such gaming machines, there are those that execute an abnormality notification based on an input signal from a predetermined detection means (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-113441). However, in the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document, there is a possibility that an abnormality notification may not be properly performed.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine that can play games, detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.), and control means (main control board 110 and/or performance control board 130) that performs predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on input signals from the detection means. If the control means and the detection means are in a disconnected state (connector disconnected, wire breakage, etc.) when power supply to the gaming machine is started, a predetermined abnormality alarm (wire breakage alarm, magnetic wire breakage alarm, etc.) is provided. abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.). Therefore, it becomes possible to appropriately notify the abnormality.

◆As a second configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.), and a control means (main control board 110 and/or production control board 130) that performs predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means. If the control means and the detection means are in a disconnected state (connector disconnection, wire breakage, etc.) when power supply to the gaming machine is started, a predetermined abnormality notification (wire disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification) is issued. , radio wave abnormality notification, etc.), and if the control means and the detection means are in a connected state during the execution of the predetermined abnormality notification, for a predetermined period (30 seconds elapsed, until the power is turned off, etc.) The execution of the predetermined abnormality notification is continued. Therefore, it becomes possible to appropriately notify the abnormality.

◆As a third configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine that can play games, detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.), and a control means (main control board 110 and/or production control board 130) that performs predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means. If the control means and the detection means become disconnected (connector disconnected, wire breakage, etc.) while power is being supplied to the gaming machine, a predetermined abnormality notification (wire disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification) is issued. notification, etc.) was made possible. Therefore, it becomes possible to appropriately notify the abnormality.

◆As a fourth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.), and a control means (main control board 110 and/or production control board 130) that performs predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means. If the control means and the detection means become disconnected (connector disconnected, wire breakage, etc.) while power is being supplied to the gaming machine, a predetermined abnormality notification (wire disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification) is issued. notification, etc.), and if the control means and the detection means are connected while the predetermined abnormality notification is being executed, the predetermined notification will continue for a predetermined period of time (30 seconds elapse, until the power is turned off, etc.). Continue to perform abnormality notification. Therefore, it becomes possible to appropriately notify the abnormality.

<Contents 16 of the invention described in this embodiment>
In conventional gaming machines, it is determined whether or not to execute a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player based on the determination information obtained based on the winning of the game medium in the starting area, and the game performance is performed according to the result of the determination. Gaming machines that run the game are common. Some of these gaming machines were equipped with a main control means for controlling the progress of the game, and a performance control means for controlling the performance according to commands (signals) from the main control means (for example, , see Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2017-143904). However, the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document does not take into consideration the case where the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means deviate from each other.

◆The first configuration for solving the above problems includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect control that controls effects according to signals (commands) from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with means (performance control board 130), the main control means first judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of the first starting condition (ball entering the first starting opening). or a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the second starting condition is met (ball entering the second starting hole); , a variable display means for performing a variable display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means; A storage means for storing the second judgment information of execution as a second pending memory, and a state control means for controlling between a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) advantageous to the player. Preferably, the performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of a plurality of performance symbols in response to the variable display based on the determination result of the first determination information in the normal gaming state. The first pending information (first pending icon) is additionally displayed in the display area (image display device 70) in response to an increase in the first pending memory, and the first pending information (first pending icon) is additionally displayed in the display area (image display device 70) as the first pending memory decreases. Each of the pending information can be reduced by shifting display, and when the plurality of presentation symbols are temporarily stopped in the fluctuating presentation, the first pending information is subjected to a presentation operation (fluctuation, rotation, etc.). It is possible that the first suspension information indicates that the plurality of performance symbols that are performing a performance operation are temporarily stopped, and a specific number (for example, three) that is two more than a predetermined number (for example, one). During the display of the first reservation information, when the first reservation memory receives a signal at the start of the fluctuation display (a reservation number designation command, a special symbol designation command, a special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) in which the first reservation memory becomes the predetermined number; , without starting the fluctuation effect and shifting displaying the first pending information (the third pending icon from the icon display area side) corresponding to the specific number of the specific number of first pending information, The first hold information (at least the first hold icon from the icon display area) corresponding to the predetermined number is displayed in a shifted manner. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆A second configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect control that controls effects according to signals (commands) from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with means (performance control board 130), the main control means first judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of the first starting condition (ball entering the first starting opening). or a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the second starting condition is met (ball entering the second starting hole); , a variable display means for performing a variable display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means; A storage means for storing the second judgment information of execution as a second pending memory, and a state control means for controlling between a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) advantageous to the player. In the normal gaming state, the performance control means executes a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of a plurality of performance symbols in front of a background image so as to correspond to the variable display based on the determination result of the first determination information. It is possible to display the first pending information (first pending icon) corresponding to each of the first pending memories in the display area (image display device 70), and When a plurality of performance symbols are temporarily stopped, it is possible to perform a performance operation (scrolling, changing, etc.) on the background image, and it is possible to temporarily stop the plurality of performance symbols for which the background image is performing a performance operation. start of the fluctuating display in which the first pending memory becomes the predetermined number while displaying a specific number (for example, three) of the first pending information that is two more than a predetermined number (eg, one); When a time signal (pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special pattern fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, the fluctuation performance is started, and the first After displaying the hold information, the predetermined number (for example, one) of the first hold information is displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆As a third configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control that controls the performance according to the signal (command) from the main control means In the gaming machine equipped with means (performance control board 130), the main control means first judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of the first starting condition (ball entering the first starting opening). or a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the second starting condition is met (ball entering the second starting hole); , a variable display means for performing a variable display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means; A storage means for storing the second judgment information of execution as a second pending memory, and a state control means for controlling between a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) advantageous to the player. Preferably, the performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of a plurality of performance symbols in response to the variable display based on the determination result of the first determination information in the normal gaming state. A first pending number indicating the number of the first pending memories can be displayed in the first display area (sub-first pending display 83), and a first pending number corresponding to each of the first pending memories can be displayed. 1 hold information (first hold icon) can be displayed in a second display area (image display device 70), and when the plurality of effect symbols are temporarily stopped in the fluctuating effect, the effect symbols It is possible to make a predetermined element (a tactile image of a character, a pattern effect image) making a presentation movement (fluctuation movement, etc.), and the predetermined element is temporarily stopping the plurality of presentation patterns in which the predetermined element is performing a presentation movement. a signal at the start of the variable display in which the first pending memory becomes the predetermined number while displaying a specific number (for example, three) of the first pending information that is two more than a predetermined number (for example, one); (Pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special pattern fluctuation pattern designation command), the execution of the fluctuation effect is started, and the first reservation, which is one less than the specific number, is received in the first display area. Displaying the predetermined number of the first reserved number (for example, one) without displaying a number (for example, two), and displaying a number one less than the specific number (for example, two) in the second display area. The present invention is characterized in that after the first suspension information is displayed, the predetermined number (for example, one) of the first suspension information is displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆As a fourth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect control that controls the effect according to the signal (command) from the main control means In the gaming machine equipped with means (performance control board 130), the main control means first judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of the first starting condition (ball entering the first starting opening). or a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the second starting condition is met (ball entering the second starting hole); , a variable display means for performing a variable display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means; A storage means for storing the second judgment information of execution as a second pending memory, and a state control means for controlling between a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) advantageous to the player. Preferably, the performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of a plurality of performance symbols in response to the variable display based on the determination result of the first determination information in the normal gaming state. It is possible to display first reservation information (first reservation icon) corresponding to each of the first reservation memories in the display area (image display device 70), and in the variable performance, the plurality of performance symbols are displayed. It is possible to cause the first hold information to perform a performance operation (fluctuation, rotation, etc.) while temporarily stopping, and during the temporary stop of the plurality of performance symbols for which the first hold information is performing a performance operation. and while displaying a specific number (for example, four) of the first hold information that is three more than a predetermined number (for example, one), at the start of the variable display when the first hold memory becomes the predetermined number. When a signal (pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special pattern fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, the fluctuation performance is started, and the first reservation is performed in a number one (for example, three) less than the specific number. The predetermined number (for example, one) of the first pending information is displayed without displaying any information. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control that controls the performance according to a signal (command) from the main control means In the gaming machine equipped with means (performance control board 130), the main control means first judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of the first starting condition (ball entering the first starting opening). or a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the second starting condition is met (ball entering the second starting hole); , a variable display means for performing a variable display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means; A storage means for storing the second judgment information of execution as a second pending memory, and a state control means for controlling between a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) advantageous to the player. In the normal gaming state, the performance control means executes a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of a plurality of performance symbols in front of a background image so as to correspond to the variable display based on the determination result of the first determination information. It is possible to display the first pending information (first pending icon) corresponding to each of the first pending memories in the display area (image display device 70), and When a plurality of performance symbols are temporarily stopped, it is possible to perform a performance operation (scrolling, changing, etc.) on the background image, and it is possible to temporarily stop the plurality of performance symbols for which the background image is performing a performance operation. start of the variable display in which the first pending memory becomes the predetermined number while displaying a specific number (for example, four) of the first pending information that is three more than a predetermined number (for example, one); When a time signal (pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, the fluctuation performance is started, and the first Displaying the first pending information in a number two (for example, two) less than the specific number without displaying any pending information, and then displaying the predetermined number (for example, one) of the first pending information. . Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a production control that controls production according to a signal (command) from the main control means In the gaming machine equipped with means (performance control board 130), the main control means first judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of the first starting condition (ball entering the first starting opening). or a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the second starting condition is met (ball entering the second starting hole); , a variable display means for performing a variable display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means; A storage means for storing the second judgment information of execution as a second pending memory, and a state control means for controlling between a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) advantageous to the player. Preferably, the performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of a plurality of performance symbols in response to the variable display based on the determination result of the first determination information in the normal gaming state. A first pending number indicating the number of the first pending memories can be displayed in the first display area (sub-first pending display 83), and a first pending number corresponding to each of the first pending memories can be displayed. 1 hold information (first hold icon) can be displayed in a second display area (image display device 70), and when the plurality of effect symbols are temporarily stopped in the fluctuating effect, the effect symbols It is possible to make a predetermined element (a tactile image of a character, a pattern effect image) making a presentation movement (fluctuation movement, etc.), and the predetermined element is temporarily stopping the plurality of presentation patterns in which the predetermined element is performing a presentation movement. a signal at the start of the variable display in which the first pending memory becomes the predetermined number while displaying a specific number (for example, four) of the first pending information that is three more than a predetermined number (for example, one); (Pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command), the fluctuation effect is started, and the first storage number (which is two less than the specific number) in the first display area is received. The predetermined number of the first memory numbers (for example, one) are displayed without displaying the first memory number (for example, two), and the first memory number (for example, three) that is one less than the specific number is displayed in the second display area. Displaying the first pending information in a number two (for example, two) less than the specific number without displaying one pending information, and then displaying the predetermined number (for example, one) of the first pending information. do. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control that controls the performance according to a signal (command) from the main control means In the gaming machine equipped with means (performance control board 130), the main control means first judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of the first starting condition (ball entering the first starting opening). or a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the second starting condition is met (ball entering the second starting hole); , a variable display means that executes a variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means, and controls between a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state) advantageous to the player. and a state control means, wherein the performance control means performs a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of a plurality of performance symbols so as to correspond to the variable display based on the determination result of the first determination information in the normal gaming state. When the plurality of performance symbols are temporarily stopped in the fluctuating performance, predetermined elements (the tactile image of the character, the pattern effect image) constituting the performance symbol are subjected to a performance motion (fluctuation motion). etc.), and based on the determination result of the first determination information when the predetermined element is in the performance operation in the variable performance and the temporarily stopped performance symbol is deviated from the stop position. When a signal at the start of the fluctuating display (pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, the production symbols are displayed at the stop position with the start of the fluctuating production, and then Display fluctuations. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆An eighth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a production control that controls production according to signals (commands) from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with means (performance control board 130), the main control means first judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of the first starting condition (ball entering the first starting opening). or a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the second starting condition is met (ball entering the second starting hole); , a variable display means for performing a variable display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means; A storage means for storing the second judgment information of execution as a second pending memory, and a state control means for controlling between a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) advantageous to the player. The performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance (such as a variable display of the performance symbols 70a) in response to the variable display based on the determination result of the second determination information in the specific gaming state. The second pending information (second pending icon) is additionally displayed in the display area (image display device 70) as the second pending memory increases, and the second pending information is displayed as the second pending memory decreases. can be shifted and displayed to decrease by one, and while displaying a specific number (for example, three) of the second hold information that is two more than a predetermined number (for example, one), the second hold information is displayed in the second hold memory. When a signal at the start of the fluctuating display (pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, the fluctuating display is started, and the second display of the specific number is received. Without shifting and displaying the second hold information (the third hold icon from the icon display area side) that corresponds to the specific number of hold information, the second hold information (the icon display that corresponds to the predetermined number) Shift-display the first and second hold icons from the area side. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a ninth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect control that controls the effect according to the signal (command) from the main control means In the gaming machine equipped with means (performance control board 130), the main control means first judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of the first starting condition (ball entering the first starting opening). or a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the second starting condition is met (ball entering the second starting hole); , a variable display means for performing a variable display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means; and a variable display means for storing the first determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a first pending memory; A storage means for storing the second judgment information of execution as a second pending memory, and a state control means for controlling between a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) advantageous to the player. The performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance (such as a variable display of the performance symbols 70a) in response to the variable display based on the determination result of the second determination information in the specific gaming state. The second pending information (second pending icon) corresponding to each of the second pending memories can be displayed in the display area (image display device 70), and the second pending information (second pending icon) corresponding to each of the second pending memories can be displayed in the display area (image display device 70). While displaying a number (for example, three) of the second reservation information, a signal at the start of the fluctuation display when the second reservation memory becomes the predetermined number (reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern If a specified command) is received, the fluctuating effect is started, the second pending information is displayed one less than the specific number (for example, two), and then the predetermined number (for example, one) of the second pending information is displayed. Display the second pending information. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆A tenth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a production control that controls production according to signals (commands) from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with means (performance control board 130), the main control means first judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of the first starting condition (ball entering the first starting opening). or a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the second starting condition is met (ball entering the second starting hole); , a variable display means for performing a variable display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means; A storage means for storing the second judgment information of execution as a second pending memory, and a state control means for controlling between a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) advantageous to the player. The performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance (such as a variable display of the performance symbols 70a) in response to the variable display based on the determination result of the second determination information in the specific gaming state. It is possible to display a second storage number indicating the number of the second storage memories in the first display area (sub-second storage display 84), and to display a second storage number indicating the number of the second storage storages, and a second storage number corresponding to each of the second storage storages. 2 pending information (second pending icon) can be displayed in the second display area (image display device 70), and a specific number (for example, three) of the above information that is two more than a predetermined number (for example, one) During the display of the second reservation information, when the second reservation memory receives a signal at the start of the fluctuation display (a reservation number designation command, a special symbol designation command, a special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command), the second reservation memory becomes the predetermined number; The variable performance is started, and the second memory number (for example, one) is the predetermined number without displaying the second memory number (for example, two) that is one less than the specific number in the first display area. , display a number (for example, two) of the second reservation information that is one less than the specific number in the second display area, and then display the predetermined number (for example, one) of the second reservation information. indicate. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆An eleventh configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a production control that controls production according to a signal (command) from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with means (performance control board 130), the main control means first judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of the first starting condition (ball entering the first starting opening). or a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the second starting condition is met (ball entering the second starting hole); , a variable display means for performing a variable display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means; A storage means for storing the second judgment information of execution as a second pending memory, and a state control means for controlling between a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) advantageous to the player. The performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance (such as a variable display of the performance symbols 70a) in response to the variable display based on the determination result of the second determination information in the specific gaming state. The second pending information (second pending icon) corresponding to each of the second pending memories can be displayed in the display area (image display device 70), and the second pending information (second pending icon) corresponding to each of the second pending memories can be displayed in the display area (image display device 70). During the display of a specific number (for example, four) of the second pending information, the second pending memory becomes the predetermined number. If a figure fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, the fluctuation effect is started, and the predetermined number (for example, one ) is displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆As a twelfth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a production control that controls production according to a signal (command) from the main control means In the gaming machine equipped with means (performance control board 130), the main control means first judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of the first starting condition (ball entering the first starting opening). or a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the second starting condition is met (ball entering the second starting hole); , a variable display means for performing a variable display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means; A storage means for storing the second judgment information of execution as a second pending memory, and a state control means for controlling between a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) advantageous to the player. The performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance (such as a variable display of the performance symbols 70a) in response to the variable display based on the determination result of the second determination information in the specific gaming state. The second pending information (second pending icon) corresponding to each of the second pending memories can be displayed in the display area (image display device 70), and the second pending information (second pending icon) corresponding to each of the second pending memories can be displayed in the display area (image display device 70). During the display of a specific number (for example, four) of the second pending information, the second pending memory becomes the predetermined number. If a figure fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, the fluctuation effect is started, and the second hold information is one less than the specific number (for example, three) without displaying the second pending information, and the number is two than the specific number. A small number (for example, two) of the second reservation information is displayed, and then a predetermined number (for example, one) of the second reservation information is displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆As a thirteenth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect control that controls the effect according to a signal (command) from the main control means In the gaming machine equipped with means (performance control board 130), the main control means first judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of the first starting condition (ball entering the first starting opening). or a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the second starting condition is met (ball entering the second starting hole); , a variable display means for performing a variable display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means; A storage means for storing the second judgment information of execution as a second pending memory, and a state control means for controlling between a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) advantageous to the player. The performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance (such as a variable display of the performance symbols 70a) in response to the variable display based on the determination result of the second determination information in the specific gaming state. It is possible to display a second storage number indicating the number of the second storage memories in the first display area (sub-second storage display 84), and to display a second storage number indicating the number of the second storage storages, and a second storage number corresponding to each of the second storage storages. 2 hold information (second hold icon) can be displayed in the second display area (image display device 70), and a specific number (for example, four) of the During the display of the second reservation information, when the second reservation memory receives a signal at the start of the fluctuation display (a reservation number designation command, a special symbol designation command, a special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command), the second reservation memory becomes the predetermined number; The variable effect is started, and the second memory number (for example, one) is the predetermined number without displaying the second memory number (for example, two) that is two fewer than the specific number in the first display area. is displayed, and the second pending information that is one less than the specific number (for example, three) is displayed in the second display area, and the second pending information that is two less than the specific number (for example, two) is displayed. The second hold information is displayed, and then the predetermined number (for example, one) of the second hold information is displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆As a fourteenth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control that controls the performance according to a signal (command) from the main control means In the gaming machine equipped with means (performance control board 130), the main control means first judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of the first starting condition (ball entering the first starting opening). or a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the second starting condition is met (ball entering the second starting hole); , a variable display means that executes a variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means, and controls between a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state) advantageous to the player. and a state control means, wherein the performance control means executes a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of performance symbols in the specific gaming state so as to correspond to the variable display based on the determination result of the second determination information. When the performance symbol temporarily stopped in the fluctuation performance is shifted from the stop position, a signal at the start of the fluctuation display based on the determination result of the second determination information (pending number designation command, When a special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, the performance symbols are displayed at the stop position with the start of the fluctuation performance, and then the performance symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆As a fifteenth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means (performance control board 110) that controls the performance according to a signal from the main control means In the gaming machine equipped with a control board 130), the main control means executes a special game (jackpot game) based on determination information (special figure determination information) acquired upon establishment of a starting condition (ball entering the starting hole). a determining means for determining whether to execute or not; a variable display means for performing a variable display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determining means; and storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a pending memory. The production control means is capable of executing a variable production (such as a variable display of the production pattern 70a) to correspond to the variable display based on the determination result of the determination information, In accordance with the increase in the pending memory, additional pending information (pending icon) is displayed in the display area (image display device 70), and in accordance with the decrease in the pending memory, the pending information is shifted and displayed, and one of the pending information is displayed as execution information. (the icon), and while displaying a specific number (for example, three) of the pending information that is two more than a predetermined number (for example, one), the pending memory becomes the predetermined number. When a signal at the start of the fluctuation display (pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special pattern fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, the execution information is deleted, the fluctuation display is started, and the specified number of the suspension Without shifting and displaying the pending information corresponding to the specific number of information (the third pending icon from the icon display area side), the necessary amount of the pending information (the first to second pending icons from the icon display area side) (hold icons) are shifted and displayed, and one of them is displayed as the execution information. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆As a sixteenth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means (performance control board 110) that controls a performance according to a signal from the main control means In the gaming machine equipped with a control board 130), the main control means executes a special game (jackpot game) based on determination information (special figure determination information) acquired upon establishment of a starting condition (ball entering the starting hole). a determining means for determining whether to execute or not; a variable display means for performing a variable display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determining means; and storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a pending memory. and a storage means for performing a variable display, and the effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect (such as a variable display of the effect pattern 70a) corresponding to the variable display, and the effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect (such as a variable display of the effect pattern 70a), and the effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect (such as a variable display of the effect pattern 70a), and the effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect (such as a variable display of the effect pattern 70a), and the effect control means It is possible to display the pending information (pending icon) in the display area (image display device 70), and to display the pending information for which the variable display has started as execution information (the icon), During the display of a specific number (for example, 3) of the pending information that is two more than 1), a signal at the start of the fluctuating display when the pending memory becomes the predetermined number (pending number designation command, special symbol designation command , special figure variation pattern designation command), erases the execution information, starts the variation effect, and displays the pending information of the number one (for example, two) less than the specific number. The predetermined number (for example, one) of the pending information and the execution information are displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆As a seventeenth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means (performance control board 110) that controls a performance according to a signal from the main control means In the gaming machine equipped with a control board 130), the main control means executes a special game (jackpot game) based on determination information (special figure determination information) acquired upon establishment of a starting condition (ball entering the starting hole). a determining means for determining whether to execute or not; a variable display means for performing a variable display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determining means; and storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a pending memory. storage means for indicating the number of pending memories, and the production control means is capable of executing a variable production (such as a variable display of the production pattern 70a) to correspond to the variable display, and a storage unit that indicates the number of pending memories. It is possible to display the number in the first display area (sub-first reservation display 83, sub-second reservation display 84, first special figure reservation number display area 70E, second special figure reservation number display area 70F). Displaying the pending information (holding icon) corresponding to each of the holding memories in a second display area (holding icon display area), and displaying the holding information for which the variable display has started as execution information (the icon) and the start of the fluctuating display in which the pending memory becomes the predetermined number while displaying a specific number (for example, three) of the pending information that is two more than a predetermined number (eg, one). When a time signal (pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, the execution information is erased, the fluctuation performance is started, and the specific number is displayed in the first display area. The predetermined number of pending numbers (for example, 1) is displayed without displaying the pending number (for example, 2) that is one less than the specific number, and a number that is one less than the specific number (for example, 1) is displayed in the second display area. After the predetermined number (for example, one) of the pending information and the execution information are displayed, the predetermined number (for example, one) of the pending information is displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆As an eighteenth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means (performance control board 110) that controls the performance according to a signal from the main control means In the gaming machine equipped with a control board 130), the main control means executes a special game (jackpot game) based on determination information (special figure determination information) acquired upon establishment of a starting condition (ball entering the starting hole). a determining means for determining whether to execute or not; a variable display means for performing a variable display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determining means; and storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a pending memory. and a storage means for performing a variable display, and the effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect (such as a variable display of the effect pattern 70a) corresponding to the variable display, and the effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect (such as a variable display of the effect pattern 70a), and the effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect (such as a variable display of the effect pattern 70a), and the effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect (such as a variable display of the effect pattern 70a), and the effect control means It is possible to display the pending information (pending icon) in the display area (image display device 70), and to display the pending information for which the variable display has started as execution information (the icon), While displaying a specific number (for example, 4) of the pending information that is 3 more than 1), a signal at the start of the fluctuating display when the pending memory becomes the predetermined number (pending number designation command, special symbol designation command , special figure variation pattern designation command), erase the execution information, start the variation production, and display the pending information of the number one less than the specific number (for example, three). Instead, the predetermined number (for example, one) of the pending information and the execution information are displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆As a nineteenth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means (performance control board 110) that controls the performance according to a signal from the main control means In the gaming machine equipped with a control board 130), the main control means executes a special game (jackpot game) based on determination information (special figure determination information) acquired upon establishment of a starting condition (ball entering the starting hole). a determining means for determining whether to execute or not; a variable display means for performing a variable display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determining means; and storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a pending memory. and a storage means for performing a variable display, and the effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect (such as a variable display of the effect pattern 70a) corresponding to the variable display, and the effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect (such as a variable display of the effect pattern 70a), and the effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect (such as a variable display of the effect pattern 70a), and the effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect (such as a variable display of the effect pattern 70a), and the effect control means It is possible to display the pending information (pending icon) in the display area (image display device 70), and to display the pending information for which the variable display has started as execution information (the icon), While displaying a specific number (for example, 4) of the pending information that is 3 more than 1), a signal at the start of the fluctuating display when the pending memory becomes the predetermined number (pending number designation command, special symbol designation command , special figure variation pattern designation command), erase the execution information, start the variation production, and display the pending information of the number one less than the specific number (for example, three). Instead, two fewer (for example, two) pieces of the hold information than the specific number are displayed, and then the predetermined number (for example, one piece) of the hold information and the execution information are displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆A twentieth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means (performance control board 110) that controls the performance according to a signal from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with a control board 130), the main control means executes a special game (jackpot game) based on determination information (special figure determination information) acquired upon establishment of a starting condition (ball entering the starting hole). a determining means for determining whether to execute or not; a variable display means for performing a variable display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determining means; and storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a pending memory. storage means for indicating the number of pending memories, and the production control means is capable of executing a variable production (such as a variable display of the production pattern 70a) to correspond to the variable display, and a storage unit that indicates the number of pending memories. It is possible to display the number in the first display area (sub-first reservation display 83, sub-second reservation display 84, first special figure reservation number display area 70E, second special figure reservation number display area 70F). Displaying the pending information (holding icon) corresponding to each of the holding memories in a second display area (holding icon display area), and displaying the holding information for which the variable display has started as execution information (the icon) and the start of the fluctuating display in which the pending memory becomes the predetermined number while displaying a specific number (eg, 4) of the pending information that is three more than a predetermined number (eg, 1). When a time signal (pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, the execution information is erased, the fluctuation performance is started, and the specific number is displayed in the first display area. The predetermined number of pending numbers (for example, 1) is displayed without displaying the pending number (for example, 2) that is two fewer than the specified number, and the second display area displays a number that is one less than the specific number (for example, 1). 3) of the pending information is displayed, and then the predetermined number (eg, 1) of the pending information and the Display execution information. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆As a twenty-first configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a production control that controls production according to a signal (command) from the main control means In the gaming machine, the main control means executes a special game (jackpot) based on determination information (special figure determination information) acquired upon establishment of a starting condition (ball entering the starting hole). a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a game); and a fluctuation display means for performing a fluctuation display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means, and the performance control means is configured to It is possible to execute a fluctuating performance accompanied by a fluctuating display of performance symbols in accordance with the display, and the fluctuating display can be started when the temporarily stopped performance symbol in the fluctuating performance is deviated from the stop position. When a time signal (retention number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, the performance symbols are displayed at the stop position with the start of the fluctuation performance, and then are displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

<Contents 17 of the invention described in this embodiment>
In conventional gaming machines, a gaming machine determines whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on determination information acquired based on the establishment of a starting condition, and executes a game performance according to the result of the determination. is common. Among such gaming machines, there is also known a game machine that executes a performance using a predetermined performance device (performance button, movable member, etc.) (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2019-033816). However, the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document has a problem in that the game is not very interesting.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) advantageous to the player, operation means (performance button 17, performance lever 24) that can be operated by the player are provided. , an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of a game ball in the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47); A determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and a performance control means (performance control board 110) that executes a game performance (variable performance) according to the determination result of the determination means. 130), the performance control means is capable of executing a vibration performance that vibrates the operating means during execution of the game performance, and the game performance includes a first performance (pre-reach performance). The vibration performance includes a specific game performance (reach variation performance) in which a second performance (post-reach performance) is executed later, and the vibration performance includes a first vibration performance (during a line preview performance, a step-up preview performance, a pseudo continuous performance). , a 1-second vibration performance such as during a development performance), and a second vibration performance different from the first vibration performance (a vibration performance of 3 seconds or more during a cut-in performance, a successful decision performance, a confirmed performance, when the symbols are aligned, etc.) In the specific game performance, the first vibration performance is easier to execute during the first performance than during the second performance. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a second configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) advantageous to the player, operation means (performance button 17, performance lever 24) that can be operated by the player are provided. , an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of a game ball in the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47); A determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and a performance control means (performance control board 110) that executes a game performance (variable performance) according to the determination result of the determination means. 130), wherein the performance control means is capable of executing a vibration performance that vibrates the operating means during execution of the game performance, and the game performance is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, once or twice). The vibration performance includes a specific game performance (reach variation performance) in which a specific performance (reach performance) that makes people expect to execute the special game is executed after a predetermined performance (pseudo continuous performance) is executed, and the vibration performance includes a first A vibration performance (a 1-second vibration performance during a dialogue preview performance, a step-up preview performance, a pseudo continuous performance, a development performance, etc.) and a second vibration performance different from the first vibration performance (when a cut-in performance is performed, (vibration performance for 3 seconds or more at the time of a successful decision performance, at the time of a confirmed performance, when the symbols are aligned, etc.), and in the specific game performance, the first vibration performance is performed more than when the first vibration performance is not performed. In this case, the second vibration effect is more easily executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) that are advantageous to the player, operation means (performance button 17, performance lever 24) that can be operated by the player are provided. , an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of a game ball in the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47); A determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and a performance control means (performance control board 110) that executes a game performance (variable performance) according to the determination result of the determination means. 130), and the performance control means includes a suggestive performance (a look-ahead effect performance, a look-ahead motion performance) that suggests that the special game may be executed during the execution of the game performance; It is possible to perform a vibration effect that vibrates the operating means (a pre-reading vibration effect, a dialogue preview effect, a cut-in effect, a decision success effect, etc.), and the vibration effect includes a vibration effect in response to an operation of the operating means during an operation promotion display. A first vibration performance (a line preview performance, a cut-in performance, a decision success performance, etc.) that is executed with the above operation promotion display, and a second vibration performance (a pre-read vibration performance, etc.) that is performed without the operation promotion display, During a predetermined period after the start of the game performance (until the first high-speed fluctuation of the performance symbol 70a ends), the second vibration performance is more effective than the case where the suggestion performance is performed. The level of expectation that the special game will be executed is high. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a fourth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) advantageous to the player, operation means (performance button 17, performance lever 24) that can be operated by the player are provided. , an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of a game ball in the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47); A determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on information, a normal game state, and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. a game state control means (main control board 110) that controls the gaming state), and a performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a variable performance that variably displays a plurality of types of performance symbols according to the judgment result of the judgment means. ), the performance control means is capable of executing a vibration performance that vibrates the operating means during execution of the variable performance, and the fluctuation performance includes a first type of performance pattern (an even number pattern). A first specific variation performance in which a reach effect is executed, a second specific variation effect in which a reach effect is executed by a second type of effect pattern (an odd numbered pattern other than "7"), and a third type of effect pattern ("7"). 7" pattern), in which a reach effect is executed, and the vibration effects include a first vibration effect (at the time of a dialogue preview performance, during a step-up preview performance, during a pseudo-continuous performance, and during a development performance). 1 second vibration performance such as) and a second vibration performance different from the first vibration performance (vibration performance for 3 seconds or more such as at the time of cut-in performance, at the time of successful decision performance, at the time of confirmation performance, etc.), In the normal gaming state, the first specific variation performance is more likely to be executed than the second specific variation effect, the third specific variation effect is more difficult to execute than the first specific variation effect, and the first specific variation effect is more difficult to execute than the first specific variation effect. The second vibration effect is easier to execute when the third specific variation effect is executed than when it is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) that are advantageous to the player, operation means (performance button 17, performance lever 24) that can be operated by the player are provided. , an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of a game ball in the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47); A determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and a performance control means (performance control board 110) that executes a game performance (variable performance) according to the determination result of the determination means. 130), wherein the performance control means is capable of executing a vibration performance (pre-reading vibration performance, dialogue preview performance, cut-in performance, decision success performance, etc.) that vibrates the operating means during execution of the game performance. The vibration performance includes a first vibration performance (a line preview performance, a cut-in performance, a decision success performance, etc.) that is executed in response to an operation of the operating means during the operation promotion display, and the operation promotion display. When the first vibration effect is executed, a predetermined effect sound (display sound effect of an operation promotion image) corresponding to the operation of the operating means is included. , effect sounds corresponding to the operation of the effect buttons, and sound effects of the operation of the accessories), while the predetermined effect sounds are not output when the second vibration effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, operation means (performance button 17, performance lever 24) that can be operated by the player are provided. , an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of a game ball in the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47); A determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and a performance control means (performance control board 110) that executes a game performance (variable performance) according to the determination result of the determination means. 130), wherein the performance control means is capable of executing a vibration performance that vibrates the operating means during execution of the game performance, and the game performance includes a specific performance that makes the user expect to execute the special game. The vibration performance includes a first vibration performance (a dialogue preview performance) that is performed in response to the operation of the operating means during the operation promotion display. (cut-in effect, decision success effect, etc.) and a second vibration effect (pre-reading vibration effect, etc.) that is executed without the operation promotion display, and when the first vibration effect is executed, the operation means While a predetermined effect image (operation promotion image, effect image corresponding to the operation of the effect button) related to the operation of is displayed, when the second vibration effect is executed, the predetermined effect image is not displayed. , in the specific game performance (jackpot reach variation performance) in which the special game is executed, the number of times the second vibration performance is executed (maximum 3 times) before the start of the specific performance is greater than the number of times the second vibration performance is performed (up to 3 times) before the start of the specific performance. The number of times the second vibration effect is executed (maximum 7 times) is likely to increase. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) that are advantageous to the player, operation means (performance button 17, performance lever 24) that can be operated by the player are provided. , an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of a game ball in the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47); A determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and a performance control means (performance control board 110) that executes a game performance (variable performance) according to the determination result of the determination means. 130), the operation means includes a first operation means (effect button 17) and a second operation means (effect lever 24) different from the first operation means, and the effect control means includes: It is possible to perform a vibration effect (a pre-reading vibration effect, a dialogue preview effect, a cut-in effect, a decision success effect, etc.) that vibrates the first operating means during the execution of the game effect, and during the operation of the second operating means. When the vibration effect is executed, vibrations related to the vibration effect are transmitted to the player via the second operating means. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As an eighth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) that are advantageous to players, a gaming frame (a frame body consisting of a gaming board mounting frame 3 and a glass frame 4) is provided. The frame production unit (production button 17 (button vibration motor), production lever (lever vibration motor), frame movable member) provided on the front side of the an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the winning of game balls), and a determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information. control board 110), and performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a game performance (variable performance) according to the determination result of the determination means, and the performance control means is configured to control the performance during execution of the game performance. It is possible to execute a suggestion performance (jackpot notice performance) that suggests the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed, and an operation performance (vibration performance) that activates (moves, vibrates) the frame performance section while the suggestion performance is being executed. , action presentation, etc.), and the suggestion presentation includes a first suggestion presentation (weak notice, pre-reach notice presentation) and a second suggestion presentation (strong When the second suggestion effect is executed, the operation effect is more likely to be executed than when the first suggestion effect is executed, and the first suggestion effect is easier to execute than when the first suggestion effect is executed. The degree of expectation that the special game will be executed is higher when the operation effect is executed during execution of the first suggestion effect than when the operation effect is not executed during execution of the effect. . Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a ninth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) advantageous to the player, operation means (performance button 17, performance lever 24) that can be operated by the player are provided. , an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of a game ball in the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47); A determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and a performance control means (performance control board 110) that executes a game performance (variable performance) according to the determination result of the determination means. 130), the performance control means is capable of controlling a first performance mode (performance modes A to C) and a second performance mode (performance modes D to G), and the performance control means is capable of controlling a first performance mode (performance modes A to C) and a second performance mode (performance modes D to G), A vibration effect that vibrates the operating means can be executed, and the vibration effect includes a first vibration effect (when a line preview is displayed, a cut-in effect) that is executed in response to an operation of the operating means during an operation promotion display. a second vibration performance (a vibration performance such as a look-ahead vibration performance, a step-up notice performance, etc.) that is executed without the operation promotion display; The degree of expectation that the special game will be executed when the second vibration performance is executed is different between the performance mode and the second performance mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a tenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) advantageous to the player, operation means (performance button 17, performance lever 24) that can be operated by the player are provided. , an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of a game ball in the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47); A determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and a performance control means (performance control board 110) that executes a game performance (variable performance) according to the determination result of the determination means. 130), the performance control means is capable of controlling a first performance mode (performance modes A to C) and a second performance mode (performance modes D to G), and the performance control means is capable of controlling a first performance mode (performance modes A to C) and a second performance mode (performance modes D to G), A vibration effect that vibrates the operating means can be executed, and the vibration effect includes a first vibration effect (when a line preview is displayed, a cut-in effect) that is executed in response to an operation of the operating means during an operation promotion display. a second vibration performance (a vibration performance such as a look-ahead vibration performance, a step-up notice performance, etc.) that is executed without the operation promotion display; The degree of expectation that the special game will be executed when the first vibration performance is executed is different between the performance mode and the second performance mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As an eleventh configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) that are advantageous to players, a gaming frame (a frame body consisting of a gaming board mounting frame 3 and a glass frame 4) is provided. The frame production unit (production button 17 (button vibration motor), production lever (lever vibration motor), frame movable member) provided on the front side of the an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the winning of game balls), and a determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information. control board 110), and performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a game performance (variable performance) according to the determination result of the determination means, and the performance control means is configured to control the performance during execution of the game performance. , execute a change effect (vibration effect, action effect, light emission effect, etc.) that changes the frame effect part from a first state (standby state, extinguished state) to a second state (vibration state, operating state, predetermined light emitting state). It is possible, and the variable performance includes a specific game performance (reach variable performance) in which a second performance (post-reach performance) is executed after the first performance (pre-reach performance), and the execution of the first performance The degree of expectation that the special game will be executed is higher when the change effect is executed than when the change effect is not executed during the game, and the specific game effect (jackpot) in which the special game is executed is higher. In the reach variation effect), the change effect is executed during execution of the second effect regardless of whether or not the change effect is executed during execution of the first effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a twelfth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, operation means (performance button 17, performance lever 24) that can be operated by the player are provided. , an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of a game ball in the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47); A determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and a performance control means (performance control board 110) that executes a game performance (variable performance) according to the determination result of the determination means. 130), wherein the effect control means is capable of executing a vibration effect that vibrates the operating means during execution of the game effect, and the vibration effect includes an operation of the operating means during an operation promotion display. The first vibration performance (one of the vibration performances such as a dialogue preview performance, a pseudo-continuation performance, a development performance, a cut-in performance, etc.) is performed in accordance with the operation promotion display, and a first vibration performance is performed without accompanying the operation promotion display. The first vibration performance includes a second vibration performance (one of the vibration performances at the time of step-up notice performance, when the symbols are aligned, and when the C symbols are aligned), and the first vibration performance has a different degree of expectation that the special game will be executed. Multiple vibration modes (weak vibration or strong vibration for 1 second for vibration performances during dialogue previews, pseudo continuous performances, or advanced performances, weak vibrations or strong vibrations for 3 seconds for vibration performances during cut-in performances) The second vibration performance is performed in one of the predetermined vibration modes (vibration during step-up notice performance) when performing a predetermined performance (step-up notice performance, pattern alignment, C pattern alignment). A vibration performance is performed with a weak vibration for 1 second, a vibration performance when the symbols are aligned, a strong vibration for 4 seconds, and a strong vibration for 1 second when the C symbols are aligned. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a thirteenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) advantageous to the player, operation means (production button 17, production lever 24) that can be operated by the player are provided. , an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of a game ball in the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47); A determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on information, a normal game state, and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. A game state control means (main control board 110) that controls the gaming state), and a performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a game performance (variable performance) according to the determination result of the determination means. , the performance control means is capable of executing a vibration performance that vibrates the operating means during execution of the game performance, and the vibration performance includes a predetermined vibration performance (pre-read vibration performance, dialogue preview performance, step-up notice). The predetermined vibration performance includes a vibration performance for 1 second (at the time of performance, etc.) and a specific vibration performance different from the predetermined vibration performance (vibration performance for 3 seconds or more at the time of a successful decision performance, when the symbols are aligned, etc.). , a first vibration performance (vibration performance during dialogue preview performance) that is executed in response to the operation of the operating means during the operation promotion display, and a second vibration performance (pre-reading vibration) that is performed without the operation promotion display. In the game performance in which the special game is performed, the first vibration performance is executed, and the second vibration performance is The rate at which the specific vibration effect is subsequently executed differs depending on when it is executed, and the second vibration effect is more likely to be executed during the normal gaming state than during the specific gaming state. . Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a fourteenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) advantageous to the player, operation means (performance button 17, performance lever 24) that can be operated by the player are provided. , an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of a game ball in the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47); A determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and performance control that executes a variable performance that displays a plurality of types of performance symbols in a variable manner according to the determination result of the determination means. means (performance control board 130), the performance control means, during execution of the variable performance, a special performance (successful performance, confirmed performance, etc.) that suggests execution of the special game, and the operation means. A vibration performance that vibrates in one of several vibration modes (pre-reading vibration performance, dialogue preview performance, step-up preview performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, cut-in performance, successful decision performance, confirmed performance) When the special game is executed, the type of the performance symbol that suggests the execution of the special game ( The execution mode of the vibration performance (execution or nonexecution, execution timing, etc.) differs depending on the even number design, odd number design other than "7", and "7" design, and the vibration performance is performed in conjunction with the execution of the special performance. In this case, the vibration mode of the vibration performance is the same regardless of the type of performance symbol that suggests execution of the special game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a fifteenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) advantageous to the player, operation means (performance button 17, performance lever 24) that can be operated by the player are provided. , an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of a game ball in the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47); A determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and a performance control means (performance control board 110) that executes a game performance (variable performance) according to the determination result of the determination means. 130), the operation means includes a first operation means (effect button 17) and a second operation means (effect lever 24) different from the first operation means, and the effect control means includes: It is possible to perform a vibration performance (pre-reading vibration performance, dialogue preview performance, cut-in performance, decision success performance, etc.) that vibrates the first operating means during execution of the game performance, and the vibration performance includes an operation promotion display. A first vibration performance (vibration performance such as a dialogue preview performance, a cut-in performance, a decision success performance, etc.) that is executed in response to the operation of the first operating means in the middle, and a vibration performance that is executed without the operation promotion display. The first vibration performance includes a second vibration performance (a pre-read vibration performance, a vibration performance at the time of a step-up notice performance, etc.), and the first vibration performance has a vibration start timing that differs depending on the operation timing of the first operating means. In the two-vibration effect, the start timing of the vibration is predetermined, and when the vibration effect is executed during operation of the second operating means, the vibration related to the vibration effect is transmitted to the game via the second operating means. The information is now communicated to the public. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a sixteenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) advantageous to the player, operation means (performance button 17, performance lever 24) that can be operated by the player are provided. , an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of a game ball in the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47); A determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and a performance control means (performance control board 110) that executes a game performance (variable performance) according to the determination result of the determination means. 130), the effect control means is capable of executing a vibration effect that vibrates the operating means, and the effective period of the operating means includes a first effective period (a dialogue preview effect, a pseudo continuous effect, a development effect). during the second validity period (validity period related to performance, cut-in performance, fixed performance, re-lottery performance, etc.) and a second validity period (validity period while waiting for customers) different from the first validity period. The vibration effect is more easily executed when the operating means is operated during the first valid period than when the operating means is operated during the period. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a seventeenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, operation means (performance button 17, performance lever 24) that can be operated by the player are provided. , an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of a game ball in the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47); A determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and a performance control means (performance control board 110) that executes a game performance (variable performance) according to the determination result of the determination means. 130), wherein the effect control means is capable of executing a vibration effect that vibrates the operation means, and the validity period of the operation means includes a first validity period (validity period related to dialogue preview performance, etc.). , a second validity period (validity period related to cut-in performances, fixed performances, etc.) different from the first validity period, and a third validity period (validity period related to customer waiting) different from the first validity period and the second validity period. (a middle effective period), and the vibration effect is executed more when the operating means is operated during the second effective period than when the operating means is operated during the third effective period. It is becoming easier to Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As an eighteenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) that are advantageous to the player, a production section (production button 17 (button vibration motor) that can be operated in a predetermined manner) is provided. , production lever 24 (lever vibration motor), second movable member 74), and judgment information (special figure judgment information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47). ); a determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information; A performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a game performance (variable performance), and the performance control means has a first performance mode (performance mode A to C) and a second performance mode (performance mode D). ~G), and changes the performance section from a first state (standby state, light-off state) to a second state (vibration state, operating state, predetermined light emitting state) during execution of the game performance. It is possible to perform a change performance (vibration performance, movement performance, light emission performance, etc.), and the special game is expected to be executed when the change performance is executed in the first performance mode and the second performance mode. The degrees are different. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a nineteenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, the acquisition condition is satisfied (to the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47). an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the winning of game balls), and a determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information. control board 110), and performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a game performance (variable performance) according to the determination result of the determination means, and the performance control means is configured to operate in a first performance mode (performance mode). mode A to C) and a second performance mode (performance mode D to G), and can be controlled to any one of a plurality of stages with different expectations for the special game to be executed during the execution of the game performance. It is possible to execute a progressive stage performance (step-up preview performance, pseudo continuous performance), and in the first performance mode and the second performance mode, the stage performance is at a predetermined stage (in the case of a step-up preview performance, The degree of expectation that the special game will be executed when the game progresses to 3-step performance, 4th-step performance, 5th-step performance, or 1 time or 2 times in the case of pseudo-continuous performance is different. . Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a twentieth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, the acquisition condition is satisfied (to the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47). an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the winning of game balls), and a determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information. control board 110), and performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a game performance (variable performance) according to the determination result of the determination means, and the performance control means is configured to operate in a first performance mode (performance mode). modes A to C) and second production modes (production modes D to G), and continuous productions (pre-reading effect production, pre-reading action production, pre-reading (vibration performance, look-ahead zone performance, etc.), and in the game performance, it is possible to execute a specific performance (ready-to-reach performance) that makes you expect the execution of the special game, and a predetermined number of times (once) in the first performance mode. In the case where the continuous performance is executed the predetermined number of times in the second performance mode, the specific performance in the game performance that triggered the execution of the continuous performance is better than when the continuous performance is executed. is becoming more difficult to implement. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a twenty-first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) that are advantageous to the player, the acquisition condition is satisfied (to the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47). an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the winning of game balls), and a determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information. control board 110), and performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a game performance (variable performance) according to the determination result of the determination means, and the performance control means is configured to operate in a first performance mode (performance mode). modes A to C) and second production modes (production modes D to G), and continuous productions (pre-reading effect production, pre-reading action production, pre-reading vibration effects, look-ahead zone effects, etc.), and in the game effects, it is possible to execute a specific effect (ready-to-reach effect) that makes people expect to execute the special game, and in the second effect mode, it is possible to execute a specific effect (reach effect) for a predetermined number of times (two or The case where the continuous performance is executed the predetermined number of times in the first performance mode is better than the case where the continuous performance is performed three times) in the game performance that triggered the execution of the continuous performance. The specific performance is easier to execute. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a twenty-second configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, the acquisition condition is satisfied (to the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47). an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the winning of game balls), and a determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information. control board 110), and performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a game performance (variable performance) according to the determination result of the determination means, and the performance control means is configured to operate in a first performance mode (performance mode). modes A to C) and second production modes (production modes D to G), and continuous productions (pre-reading effect production, pre-reading action production, pre-reading vibration presentation, look-ahead zone presentation, etc.), and in the game presentation, it is possible to execute a specific presentation (reach presentation) that makes the execution of the special game expected, and the specific presentation includes a first specific presentation (normal reach presentation, etc.). performance) and a second specific performance (SP/SPSP reach performance) in which the degree of expectation for the special game to be executed is higher than that of the first specific performance, and the first performance mode is higher than the second performance mode. In this case, when the continuous performance is executed the first number of times, the specific performance is more likely to be executed in the game performance that triggered the execution of the continuous performance, and the second performance mode is more likely to be executed than in the first performance mode. In the performance mode, when the continuous performance is performed a second number of times greater than the first number of times, the second specific performance is more likely to be executed in the game performance that triggered the execution of the continuous performance. ing. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a twenty-third configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) advantageous to the player, operation means (performance button 17, performance lever 24) that can be operated by the player are provided. , a display means (image display device) capable of displaying a production image, and judgment information (special figure judgment information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of a game ball to the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47). an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires the information; a determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information; A performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a performance (variable performance), and the performance control means displays an operation promotion display (an opaque button image) that prompts the operation of the operation means during the execution of the game performance. ) at the same time, it is possible to execute an operation effect (development effect, cut-in effect, final effect, etc.) according to the operation of the operation means, and before performing the operation promotion display, the operation promotion display is displayed on the display means. It is possible to perform a suggestion display (semi-transparent button image) indicating that the operation may be performed, and the operation promotion display includes a first operation promotion display (white button image in normal state) and the operation promotion display (a white button image in a normal state). The first operation promotion display includes a second operation promotion display (a red button image in a normal state, a red button image in a protruding state, a rainbow button image in a protrusion state) having a different degree of expectation that the special game will be executed; The degree of expectation that the special game will be executed when the first operation promotion display is performed is different between the first performance mode and the second performance mode, and in the first performance mode, the suggestion display is not performed. The degree of expectation that the special game will be executed is higher when the operation promotion display is performed after the suggestion display is performed than when the operation promotion display is performed at the time. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Contents 18 of the invention described in this embodiment>
In conventional gaming machines, it is determined whether or not to execute a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player based on the determination information obtained based on the winning of the game medium in the starting area, and the game performance is performed according to the result of the determination. Gaming machines that run the game are common. Some of these gaming machines were equipped with a main control means for controlling the progress of the game, and a performance control means for controlling the performance according to commands (signals) from the main control means (for example, , see Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2017-143904). However, the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document does not take into consideration the case where the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means deviate from each other.

◆The first configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls the effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (performance control board 130), the main control means includes an acquisition means that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on winning of a game ball in a starting hole, and an acquisition means that acquires determination information (special figure determination information); a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination result; a variable display execution means for performing a variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determining means; a suspension storage means for storing the judgment information of execution as a suspension memory; When a command for specifying the number of pending figures is received, it is possible to additionally display a pending display (increase the number of pending icons), and a start signal (decreasing When receiving a command for specifying the number of reserved special figures at the time, it is possible to reduce the number of reserved displays (move the first reserved icon to the corresponding icon, reduce the number of reserved icons), and the number of reserved icons can be reduced. If the number of pending memories is increased by one, the award time signal is received, the pending display is additionally displayed in the normal addition mode (multiple frames of animation, one without a gap), and the pending display is If the entry award signal is received in which the number of the pending memories is greater than the number of pending memories, the pending display is additionally displayed in a special additional mode (multiple at the same time, one frame of non-animation, one with an interval). do. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆A second configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls the effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (production control board 130), the main control means includes an acquisition means for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on winning of a game ball in a starting hole; a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination result; a variable display execution means for performing a variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determining means; a suspension storage means for storing the judgment information of execution as a suspension memory; When a command for specifying the number of reservations is received, the first reservation display is additionally displayed (increasing the number of reservation icons), and the second reservation display is increased (increasing the number in the number of reservations display area, lighting mode of the sub-retention display). When the start time signal (the command for specifying the number of reserved special figures at the time of decrease) that is transmitted when the number of pending memories decreases with the start of the fluctuating display is received, the first pending display (moves the first pending icon to the corresponding icon, decreases the number of pending icons), and displays a decreased number of the second pending display (decreases the number in the pending number display area, switches the lighting mode of the sub pending display to decrease) ), and when receiving the entry award signal in which the number of pending memories is one more than the number of first pending displays, the first pending display may be changed to a normal additional mode (multiple frames). Animation, one without a gap) is additionally displayed, and at the same time, the second pending display is increased and displayed in a specific update mode (switching with one frame of non-animation), and the number of the second pending display is increased from the number of the first pending display. When the input award time signal with a large number of pending memories is received, the first pending display is additionally displayed in a special additional mode (multiple at the same time, one frame of non-animation, one with an interval), and , the second pending display is increased and displayed in the specific update mode. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance that controls the performance according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (production control board 130), the main control means includes an acquisition means for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on winning of a game ball in a starting hole; a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination result; a variable display execution means for performing a variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determining means; a suspension storage means for storing the judgment information of execution as a suspension memory; When a command to specify the number of pending figures is received, it is possible to additionally display a pending display (increase the number of pending icons), and a start signal (decreasing When receiving a command for specifying the number of reserved special figures at the time, it is possible to reduce the number of reserved displays (move the first reserved icon to the corresponding icon, reduce the number of reserved icons), and perform a production operation on the reserved display ( When the number of pending memories is one more than the number of pending displays, the pending display is changed to a normal additional mode (rotating motion, shaking motion). Animation of multiple frames (one without a gap) is additionally displayed, and if the entry award signal is received in which the number of pending memories is greater than the number of pending displays, the pending display is specially added. (multiple items at the same time, one frame of non-animation, one item at a time), and even if the pending display is additionally displayed in the normal addition mode, it is additionally displayed in the special addition mode. Even in the suspended display, it is possible to perform the performance operation in the same performance mode (position of the rotation axis, rotation speed, swing width, and swing speed). Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆As a fourth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls the effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (production control board 130), the main control means includes an acquisition means for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on winning of a game ball in a starting hole; a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination result; a variable display execution means for performing a variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determining means; a suspension storage means for storing the judgment information of execution as a suspension memory; When a command to specify the number of pending figures is received, it is possible to additionally display a pending display (increase the number of pending icons), and a start signal (decreasing When receiving a command for specifying the number of reserved special figures at the time, it is possible to reduce the number of reserved displays (move the first reserved icon to the corresponding icon, reduce the number of reserved icons), and the number of reserved displays can be reduced When the number of pending memories is one more than the entry award time signal, the pending display is additionally displayed in the normal addition mode (multiple frames of animation, one without a gap), and the pending display is If the entry award signal is received in which the number of pending memories is two more than the number of reserved memories, the pending display is changed to the first special additional mode (two at the same time, one frame of non-animation, one frame after one interval). If the number of pending memories is 3 more than the number of pending displays, the pending display is additionally displayed in a second special additional mode (3 simultaneous, 1 frame). Non-animation of , additionally displayed with 1 space between 2). Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆A fifth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls the effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (production control board 130), the main control means includes an acquisition means for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on winning of a game ball in a starting hole; a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination result; a variable display execution means for performing a variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determining means; a suspension storage means for storing the judgment information of execution as a suspension memory; When a command for specifying the number of reservations is received, the first reservation display is additionally displayed (increasing the number of reservation icons), and the second reservation display is increased (increasing the number in the number of reservations display area, lighting mode of the sub-retention display). When the start time signal (the command for specifying the number of reserved special figures at the time of decrease) that is transmitted when the number of pending memories decreases with the start of the fluctuating display is received, the first pending display (moves the first pending icon to the corresponding icon, decreases the number of pending icons), and displays a decreased number of the second pending display (decreases the number in the pending number display area, switches the lighting mode of the sub pending display to decrease) ), and when receiving the entry award signal in which the number of pending memories is one more than the number of first pending displays, the first pending display may be changed to a normal additional mode (multiple frames). Animation, one without a gap) is additionally displayed, and at the same time, the second pending display is increased and displayed in a specific update mode (switching with one frame of non-animation), and the number of the second pending display is increased compared to the number of the first pending display. If the input award signal with two more pending memories is received, the first pending display is changed to the first special addition mode (two at the same time, one frame of non-animation, one with one interval). and additionally display the second pending display in the specific update mode, and when receiving the entry award time signal in which the number of pending memories is three more than the number of the first pending displays, The first pending display is additionally displayed in a second special addition mode (three at the same time, one frame of non-animation, one with two intervals), and the second pending display is increased and displayed in the specific update mode. do. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (production control board 130), the main control means includes an acquisition means for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on winning of a game ball in a starting hole; a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination result; a variable display execution means for performing a variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determining means; a suspension storage means for storing the judgment information of execution as a suspension memory; When a command to specify the number of pending figures is received, it is possible to additionally display a pending display (increase the number of pending icons), and a start signal (decreasing When receiving a command for specifying the number of reserved special figures at the time, it is possible to reduce the number of reserved displays (move the first reserved icon to the corresponding icon, reduce the number of reserved icons), and perform a production operation on the reserved display ( When the number of pending memories is one more than the number of pending displays, the pending display is changed to a normal additional mode (rotating motion, shaking motion). If an animation of multiple frames (one without a gap) is additionally displayed, and the number of pending memories is two more than the number of pending displays, the award time signal is received, the pending display is 1 additional display in a special addition mode (two at the same time, one frame of non-animation, one with one interval), and the entered award time signal where the number of the pending memories is 3 more than the number of pending displays. If received, the pending display is additionally displayed in the second special addition mode (three at the same time, one frame of non-animation, one with a gap between two), and the above-mentioned pending display is additionally displayed in the normal addition mode. Whether it is a pending display or the pending display additionally displayed in the first special additional mode or the second special additional mode, the same production mode (rotary axis position, rotation speed, swing width, swing It is possible to perform the above-mentioned effect movement at a speed (speed). Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls the effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (production control board 130), the main control means includes an acquisition means for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on winning of a game ball in a starting hole; a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination result; a variable display execution means for performing a variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determining means; a suspension storage means for storing the judgment information of execution as a suspension memory; When a command to specify the number of pending figures is received, it is possible to additionally display a pending display (increase the number of pending icons), and a start signal (decreasing When receiving a command for specifying the number of reserved special figures at the time, it is possible to reduce the number of reserved displays (move the first reserved icon to the corresponding icon, reduce the number of reserved icons), and the number of reserved displays can be reduced When the number of pending memories is one more than the entry award time signal, the pending display is additionally displayed in the normal addition mode (multiple frames of animation, one without a gap), and the pending display is If the start signal is received in which the number of the suspended memories is greater than the number of suspended memories, the suspended display is additionally displayed in a special additional mode (multiple at the same time, one frame of non-animation, one at a time). do. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆An eighth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls the effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (production control board 130), the main control means includes an acquisition means for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on winning of a game ball in a starting hole; a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination result; a variable display execution means for performing a variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determining means; a suspension storage means for storing the judgment information of execution as a suspension memory; When a command for specifying the number of reservations is received, the first reservation display is additionally displayed (increasing the number of reservation icons), and the second reservation display is increased (increasing the number in the number of reservations display area, lighting mode of the sub-retention display). When the start time signal (the command for specifying the number of reserved special figures at the time of decrease) that is transmitted when the number of pending memories decreases with the start of the fluctuating display is received, the first pending display (moves the first pending icon to the corresponding icon, decreases the number of pending icons), and displays a decreased number of the second pending display (decreases the number in the pending number display area, switches the lighting mode of the sub pending display to decrease) ), and when receiving the entry award signal in which the number of pending memories is one more than the number of first pending displays, the first pending display may be changed to a normal additional mode (multiple frames). Animation, one without a gap) is additionally displayed, and at the same time, the second pending display is increased and displayed in a specific update mode (switching with one frame of non-animation), and the number of the second pending display is increased compared to the number of the first pending display. When the start time signal with a large number of pending memories is received, the first pending display is additionally displayed in a special additional mode (multiple at the same time, one frame of non-animation, one with an interval); , the second pending display is increased and displayed in the specific update mode. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ A ninth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls the effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (production control board 130), the main control means includes an acquisition means for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on winning of a game ball in a starting hole; a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination result; a variable display execution means for performing a variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determining means; a suspension storage means for storing the judgment information of execution as a suspension memory; When a command to specify the number of pending figures is received, it is possible to additionally display a pending display (increase the number of pending icons), and a start signal (decreasing When receiving a command for specifying the number of reserved special figures at the time, it is possible to reduce the number of reserved displays (move the first reserved icon to the corresponding icon, reduce the number of reserved icons), and perform a production operation on the reserved display ( When the number of pending memories is one more than the number of pending displays, the pending display is changed to a normal additional mode (rotating motion, shaking motion). Animation of multiple frames (one without a gap) is additionally displayed, and if the start signal is received where the number of pending memories is more than the number of pending displays, the pending display is specially added. (multiple items at the same time, one frame of non-animation, one item at a time), and even if the pending display is additionally displayed in the normal addition mode, it is additionally displayed in the special addition mode. Even in the suspended display, it is possible to perform the performance operation in the same performance mode (position of the rotation axis, rotation speed, swing width, and swing speed). Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆A tenth configuration for solving the above problems includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (production control board 130), the main control means includes an acquisition means for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on winning of a game ball in a starting hole; a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination result; a variable display execution means for performing a variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determining means; a suspension storage means for storing the judgment information of execution as a suspension memory; When a command to specify the number of pending figures is received, it is possible to additionally display a pending display (increase the number of pending icons), and a start signal (decreasing When receiving a command to specify the number of reserved special figures at the time, it is possible to reduce the number of reserved displays (move the first reserved icon to the corresponding icon, reduce the number of reserved icons), and change the number of reserved memory (for example, If the entry award time signal or the start time signal is received while displaying a smaller number of the reservation display (for example, "2") than the number of reservation displays (for example, "2"), the number corresponding to the number of reservation memories. Since the above-mentioned hold display is displayed, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆An eleventh configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls the effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (production control board 130), the main control means includes an acquisition means for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on winning of a game ball in a starting hole; a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination result; a variable display execution means for performing a variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determining means; a suspension storage means for storing the judgment information of execution as a suspension memory; When a command to specify the number of pending figures is received, it is possible to additionally display a pending display (increase the number of pending icons) and to perform an effect when the number of pending displays increases (output of winning sound, light emission when winning). , upon receiving a start signal (command for specifying the number of reserved special figures at the time of decrease) that is transmitted when the number of reservations stored decreases with the start of the variable display, the reservation display is decreased (the first reservation icon is changed to the corresponding icon). If the number of pending icons is decreased by one, and the number of pending icons is decreased by one, and the number of pending icons is increased by one, and the number of pending icons is When the input prize time signal that is to be increased is received, the increase performance is not performed multiple times but is performed once. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆A twelfth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls the effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (production control board 130), the main control means includes an acquisition means for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on winning of a game ball in a starting hole; a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination result; a variable display execution means for performing a variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determining means; The effect control means includes a holding storage means for storing the judgment information of execution as a holding memory, and a preliminary judgment means for pre-judging the judgment information before the judgment means, and the production control means When receiving the winning signal (command for specifying the number of reserved special drawings at the time of increase) that is sent when the number of reserved memories increases due to the increase in the number of reserved memories, additional reserved displays are displayed (the number of reserved icons is increased), and when the number of reserved displays increases, It is possible to execute effects (output of winning sound, light emission when winning), and a start signal (command for specifying the number of reserved special drawings at the time of decrease) that is sent when the holding memory decreases with the start of the fluctuating display. When receiving a predetermined signal indicating the result of the preliminary determination, it is possible to reduce the pending display (shift the first pending icon to the corresponding icon, reduce the number of pending icons), and when receiving a predetermined signal indicating the result of the preliminary determination, the special It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect (icon change effect, continuous notice effect) that makes players expect to play a game, and when the input award time signal that increases the pending display by one is received, the increase time effect is executed. (Output of winning sound, light emission when winning) is executed once, and if the winning signal that causes the number of pending displays to be increased multiple times is received, the increase effect is executed once instead of being executed multiple times. , when a plurality of the pending displays are increased, the pending memory corresponding to a specific pending display (the pending icon for which the winning command could not be received normally) among the increased pending displays is targeted. Execution of look-ahead effects is restricted. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆A thirteenth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (production control board 130), the main control means includes an acquisition means for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on winning of a game ball in a starting hole; a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination result; a variable display execution means for performing a variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determining means; a suspension storage means for storing the judgment information of execution as a suspension memory; When a command to specify the number of pending figures is received, it is possible to additionally display a pending display (increase the number of pending icons) and to perform an effect when the pending display increases (output of winning sound, light emission when winning). , upon receiving a start signal (command for specifying the number of reserved special figures at the time of decrease) that is transmitted when the number of reservations stored decreases with the start of the variable display, the reservation display is decreased (the first reservation icon is changed to the corresponding icon). If the input award time signal is received, which increases the number of pending displays, the system displays a plurality of additional pending displays, and also displays the pending icon in the latest pending memory. The increase effect is executed for the corresponding pending display. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆As a fourteenth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (production control board 130), the main control means includes an acquisition means for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on winning of a game ball in a starting hole; a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination result; a variable display execution means for performing a variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determining means; a suspension storage means for storing the judgment information of execution as a suspension memory; When a command to specify the number of pending figures is received, it is possible to additionally display a pending display (increase the number of pending icons) and to perform an effect when the pending display increases (output of winning sound, light emission when winning). , upon receiving a start signal (command for specifying the number of reserved special figures at the time of decrease) that is transmitted when the number of reservations stored decreases with the start of the variable display, the reservation display is decreased (the first reservation icon is changed to the corresponding icon). , and decrease the number of pending icons), and when receiving the winning signal that increases the pending display by one, the increase effect (output of winning sound, light emission when winning) is activated. If the input award signal is received which causes the number of pending displays to be increased by one after being executed once, the increase effect is not executed multiple times but is executed once and the number of pending displays is increased by one. Even if a plurality of the hold displays are increased, the increase performance is executed in the same performance mode (sound type, volume, sound length, light emitting color, light emitting time). Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆As a fifteenth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means In the gaming machine equipped with a control means (performance control board 130), the main control means executes a first symbol (first special A first variable display execution means executes a first variable display that causes a variable display of a symbol), and a second symbol (a second special symbol ), a second variable display execution means for executing a second variable display that causes a variable display to be displayed; ), and the production control means controls the first variation production (production symbols and/or special symbols) upon receiving the start signal (start command) of the first variation display. When a condition for ending the first variable display is satisfied (a command to stop the first variable display is received, a variable display time elapses), the first variable display can be ended; When the signal for starting the second variable display (command at start) is received, the second variable effect is started, and the condition for ending the second variable effect is satisfied (the command at the time of stopping the second variable display is received, the variable effect time is lapse), the second variable performance can be ended, and the start signal includes a first information signal (special figure designation command) and a second information signal (variation pattern designation command), The means is arranged such that in the normal gaming state, there is an abnormality in the first information signal or the second information signal which is the starting signal of the second variable display (the winnings or losses are not correct, the symbol is damaged, the special symbol is If the types are different, etc.), the second variable effect is not executed, but during the execution of the second variable effect, an end condition different from the end condition of the second variable effect is satisfied (stopping of the first variable display). (time command is received, second fluctuation display start time command is received, opening designation command is received, customer waiting state designation command is received, power on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.), the second fluctuation Finish the performance. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆As a sixteenth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means In the gaming machine equipped with a control means (performance control board 130), the main control means executes a first symbol (first special A first variable display execution means executes a first variable display that causes a variable display of a symbol), and a second symbol (a second special symbol ), a second variable display execution means for executing a second variable display that causes a variable display to be displayed; ), and the production control means controls the first variation production (production symbols and/or special symbols) upon receiving the start signal (start command) of the first variation display. When a condition for ending the first variable display is satisfied (a command to stop the first variable display is received, a variable display time elapses), the first variable display can be ended; When the signal for starting the second variable display (command at start) is received, the second variable effect is started, and the condition for ending the second variable effect is satisfied (the command at the time of stopping the second variable display is received, the variable effect time is has passed), the second variable effect can be ended, and in the normal gaming state, if the start signal of the second variable display cannot be received normally (within a predetermined time after receiving the special figure designation command), the second variable effect can be terminated. If the variation pattern specification command is not received, the variation pattern specification command is received even though the special figure specification command is not received, etc.), the second variation effect is not executed, but the second variation effect is being executed. An end condition different from the end condition of the second fluctuating effect is established (receiving the stop command of the first fluctuating display, receiving the start command of the second fluctuating display, receiving the opening designation command, and receiving the customer waiting state designation command). (such as a power-on designation command, a power restoration designation command, etc.), the second fluctuation effect is ended. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆As a seventeenth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means In the gaming machine equipped with a control means (performance control board 130), the main control means executes a first symbol (first special A first variable display execution means executes a first variable display that causes a variable display of a symbol), and a second symbol (a second special symbol ), a second variable display execution means for executing a second variable display that causes a variable display to be displayed; ), and the production control means controls the first variation production (production symbols and/or special symbols) upon receiving the start signal (start command) of the first variation display. When a condition for ending the first variable display is satisfied (a command to stop the first variable display is received, a variable display time elapses), the first variable display can be ended; When the signal for starting the second variable display (command at start) is received, the second variable effect is started, and the condition for ending the second variable effect is satisfied (the command at the time of stopping the second variable display is received, the variable effect time is lapse), the second variable performance can be ended, and the start signal includes a first information signal (special figure designation command) and a second information signal (variation pattern designation command), and the production control The means is arranged such that in the specific gaming state, there is an abnormality in the first information signal or the second information signal which is the starting signal of the first variable display (the winnings or losses do not match, the special symbol is damaged, If the types are different, etc.), the first variable effect is not executed, but during the execution of the first variable effect, an end condition different from the end condition of the first variable effect is satisfied (stopping of the second variable display). time command, first fluctuation display start time command, opening designation command, customer waiting state designation command, power on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.). 1. End the variation performance. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆An eighteenth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with a control means (performance control board 130), the main control means executes a first symbol (first special A first variable display execution means executes a first variable display that causes a variable display of a symbol), and a second symbol (a second special symbol ), a second variable display execution means for executing a second variable display that causes a variable display to be displayed; ), and the production control means controls the first variation production (production symbols and/or special symbols) upon receiving the start signal (start command) of the first variation display. When a condition for ending the first variable display is satisfied (a command to stop the first variable display is received, a variable display time elapses), the first variable display can be ended; When the signal for starting the second variable display (command at start) is received, the second variable effect is started, and the condition for ending the second variable effect is satisfied (the command at the time of stopping the second variable display is received, the variable effect time is has passed), the second variable effect can be terminated, and in the specific gaming state, if the start signal of the first variable display cannot be received normally (within a predetermined time after receiving the special symbol designation command), the second variable effect can be terminated. If the variation pattern specification command is not received, the variation pattern specification command is received even though the special figure specification command is not received, etc.), the first variation effect is not executed, but the first variation effect is being executed. An end condition different from the end condition of the first fluctuating effect is established (receiving the stop command of the second fluctuating display, receiving the start command of the first fluctuating display, receiving the opening designation command, and receiving the customer waiting state designation command). (such as a power-on designation command, a power restoration designation command, etc.), the first fluctuation effect is ended. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆A nineteenth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls the effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with a control means (performance control board 130), the main control means executes a first symbol (first special A first variable display execution means executes a first variable display that causes a variable display of a symbol), and a second symbol (a second special symbol ), a second variable display execution means for executing a second variable display that causes a variable display to be displayed; ), and the production control means controls the first variation production (production symbols and/or special symbols) upon receiving the start signal (start command) of the first variation display. When a condition for ending the first variable display is satisfied (a command to stop the first variable display is received, a variable display time elapses), the first variable display can be ended; When the signal for starting the second variable display (command at start) is received, the second variable effect is started, and the condition for ending the second variable effect is satisfied (the command at the time of stopping the second variable display is received, the variable effect time is lapse), the second variable performance can be ended, and the start signal includes a first information signal (special figure designation command) and a second information signal (variation pattern designation command), The means is arranged such that in the specific game state, there is an abnormality in the first information signal or the second information signal which is the start signal of the second variable display (the winnings or losses are not correct, the symbol is damaged, the special symbol is If the types are different, etc.), the second variable effect is not executed, but during the execution of the second variable effect, an end condition different from the end condition of the second variable effect is satisfied (stopping of the first variable display). (time command is received, second fluctuation display start time command is received, opening designation command is received, customer waiting state designation command is received, power on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.), the second fluctuation Finish the performance. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆A twentieth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with a control means (performance control board 130), the main control means executes a first symbol (first special A first variable display execution means executes a first variable display that causes a variable display of a symbol), and a second symbol (a second special symbol ), a second variable display execution means for executing a second variable display that causes a variable display to be displayed; ), and the production control means controls the first variation production (production symbols and/or special symbols) upon receiving the start signal (start command) of the first variation display. When a condition for ending the first variable display is satisfied (a command to stop the first variable display is received, a variable display time elapses), the first variable display can be ended; When the signal for starting the second variable display (command at start) is received, the second variable effect is started, and the condition for ending the second variable effect is satisfied (the command at the time of stopping the second variable display is received, the variable effect time is has passed), the second variable effect can be ended, and in the specific gaming state, if the start signal of the second variable display cannot be received normally (within a predetermined time after receiving the special symbol designation command), the second variable effect can be terminated. If the variation pattern specification command is not received, the variation pattern specification command is received even though the special figure specification command is not received, etc.), the second variation effect is not executed, but the second variation effect is being executed. An end condition different from the end condition of the second fluctuating effect is established (receiving the stop command of the first fluctuating display, receiving the start command of the second fluctuating display, receiving the opening designation command, and receiving the customer waiting state designation command). (such as a power-on designation command, a power restoration designation command, etc.), the second fluctuation effect is ended. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆A twenty-first configuration for solving the above problems includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with a control means (performance control board 130), the main control means executes a first symbol (first special A first variable display execution means executes a first variable display that causes a variable display of a symbol), and a second symbol (a second special symbol ), a second variable display execution means for executing a second variable display that causes a variable display to be displayed; ), and when the effect control means receives the start signal (start command) of the first variable display, the effect control means controls the execution information of the first variable display (the icon, When the condition for erasing the running information of the first variable display is satisfied (receiving a stop command, elapse of the variable production time), the running information can be erased, and the second variable display When the start signal (start command) is received, the running information (the icon, the lamp) of the second variable display is displayed, and the condition for erasing the running information of the second variable display is satisfied (stop command). is received, and the fluctuation production time has elapsed), the execution information can be deleted, and the start signal is a combination of a first information signal (special figure designation command) and a second information signal (variation pattern designation command). In the specific game state, the performance control means detects that there is an abnormality in the first information signal or the second information signal, which is the start signal of the second variable display (the winnings and losses do not match, are damaged, etc.). (the type of special symbol is different, etc.), the running information of the second fluctuating display is not displayed, but the running information of the second fluctuating display is displayed while the running information of the second fluctuating display is being displayed. An erasure condition different from the erasure condition of is established (receive command at stop of first variable display, receive command at start of second variable display, receive opening designation command, receive customer waiting state designation command, power on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.), the execution information in the second variable display is erased. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆A twenty-second configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls the effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with a control means (performance control board 130), the main control means executes a first symbol (first special A first variable display execution means executes a first variable display that causes a variable display of a symbol), and a second symbol (a second special symbol ), a second variable display execution means for executing a second variable display that causes a variable display to be displayed; ), and when the effect control means receives the start signal (start command) of the first variable display, the effect control means controls the execution information of the first variable display (the icon, When the condition for erasing the running information of the first variable display is satisfied (receiving a stop command, elapse of the variable production time), the running information can be erased, and the second variable display When the start signal (start command) is received, the running information (the icon, the lamp) of the second variable display is displayed, and the condition for erasing the running information of the second variable display is satisfied (stop command). When the start signal of the second variable display cannot be received normally (when a special figure designation command is received), the running information can be erased. If the variable pattern designation command is not received within a predetermined period of time, the fluctuation pattern designation command is received even though the special figure designation command has not been received, etc.), the execution information of the second fluctuation display is not displayed. , during the display of the running information of the second fluctuating display, a deletion condition different from the deletion condition of the running information of the second fluctuating display is established (when a stop command of the first fluctuating display is received, the second fluctuating display When a start command is received, an opening designation command is received, a customer waiting state designation command is received, a power-on designation command, a power restoration designation command, etc.), the execution information in the second variable display is erased. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

<Contents 19 of the invention described in this embodiment>
In conventional gaming machines, it is determined whether or not to execute a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player based on the determination information acquired based on the winning of the game medium in the starting area, and the game performance is performed according to the result of the determination. Gaming machines that run the game are common. Some of these gaming machines were equipped with a main control means that controlled the progress of the game, and an effect control means that controlled the effect according to commands (signals) from the main control means (for example, , see Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2017-143904). However, the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document does not take into consideration the case where the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means deviate.

◆The first configuration for solving the above problems includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (performance control board 130), the main control means is configured to control whether a starting condition is satisfied (for example, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45 or when a game ball enters the second starting port 47). a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the winning of the above-mentioned determination information; a variable display execution means for executing a variable display of the first special symbol and a variable display of the second special symbol; a storage means for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been performed as a pending memory (for example, a first pending memory); , a gaming state control means for controlling a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state; An icon (pending icon) based on the above can be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70), a variable effect is started in response to the start of the variable display, and a variable effect is ended in accordance with the end of the variable display. is possible, and when the main control means executes the next variable display based on the next judgment information stored in the hold, following the current variable display currently being executed in the normal gaming state, the effect control If a communication error occurs in which the means cannot receive a command (command at stop) while executing the current variation effect corresponding to the current variation display, the means displays the icon (the first one) that was displayed during the execution of the current variation effect. 1. Display of icons based on pending memory) can be continuously displayed without being erased even if the current variable display is finished and the next variable display is executed in the main control means, and the icon display can be continuously displayed. It is movable (fluctuation, rotation, etc.). Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆A second configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls the effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (performance control board 130), the main control means is configured to control whether a starting condition is satisfied (for example, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45 or when a game ball enters the second starting port 47). a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the winning of the above-mentioned determination information; a variable display execution means for performing a variable display of the first special symbol and a variable display of the second special symbol; a storage means for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been performed as a pending memory (for example, a second pending memory); , a gaming state control means for controlling a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state; An icon (pending icon) based on the above can be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70), a variable effect is started in response to the start of the variable display, and a variable effect is ended in accordance with the end of the variable display. is possible, and the main control means executes the next variable display based on the next judgment information stored in the hold, following the current variable display currently being executed in the specific gaming state, the effect control If a communication error occurs in which the means cannot receive a command (command at stop) while executing the current variation effect corresponding to the current variation display, the means displays the icon (the first one) that was displayed during the execution of the current variation effect. 2. Display of icons based on pending memory) can be continuously displayed without being erased even when the current variable display is finished and the next variable display is executed in the main control means, and the icon display can be continuously displayed. It is movable (fluctuation, rotation, etc.). Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance that controls the performance according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (performance control board 130), the main control means is configured to control whether a starting condition is satisfied (for example, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45 or when a game ball enters the second starting port 47). a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the winning of the above-mentioned determination information; a variable display execution means for executing a variable display of the first special symbol and a variable display of the second special symbol; a storage means for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been performed as a pending memory (for example, a first pending memory); , a gaming state control means for controlling a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state; An icon (pending icon) based on the above can be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70), a variable effect is started in response to the start of the variable display, and a variable effect is ended in accordance with the end of the variable display. is possible, and when the main control means executes the next variable display based on the next judgment information stored in the hold, following the current variable display currently being executed in the normal gaming state, the effect control If a communication error occurs in which the means cannot receive a command (command at stop) while executing the current variation effect corresponding to the current variation display, the means displays the icon (the first one) that was displayed during the execution of the current variation effect. 1 (display of icons based on pending storage) is not updated even when the current variable display is finished and the next variable display is executed in the main control means. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆As a fourth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls the effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (performance control board 130), the main control means is configured to control whether a starting condition is satisfied (for example, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45 or when a game ball enters the second starting port 47). a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the winning of the above-mentioned determination information; a variable display execution means for executing a variable display of the first special symbol and a variable display of the second special symbol; a storage means for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been performed as a pending memory (for example, a first pending memory); , a gaming state control means for controlling a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state; An icon (pending icon) based on the above can be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70), a variable effect is started in response to the start of the variable display, and a variable effect is ended in accordance with the end of the variable display. is possible, and when the main control means executes the next variable display based on the next judgment information stored in the hold, following the current variable display currently being executed in the normal gaming state, the effect control If a communication error occurs in which the means cannot receive a command (command at stop) while executing the current variation effect corresponding to the current variation display, the means displays the icon (the first one) that was displayed during the execution of the current variation effect. 1 (display of icons based on pending storage) is not updated even when the current variable display is finished and the next variable display is executed in the main control means, but can be updated at a subsequent predetermined timing. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆A fifth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls the effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (performance control board 130), the main control means is configured to control whether a starting condition is satisfied (for example, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45 or when a game ball enters the second starting port 47). a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the winning of the above-mentioned determination information; a variable display execution means for performing a variable display of the first special symbol and a variable display of the second special symbol; a storage means for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been performed as a pending memory (for example, a second pending memory); , a gaming state control means for controlling a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state; An icon (pending icon) based on the above can be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70), a variable effect is started in response to the start of the variable display, and a variable effect is ended in accordance with the end of the variable display. is possible, and the main control means executes the next variable display based on the next judgment information stored in the hold, following the current variable display currently being executed in the specific gaming state, the effect control If a communication error occurs in which the means cannot receive a command (command at stop) while executing the current variation effect corresponding to the current variation display, the means displays the icon (the first one) that was displayed during the execution of the current variation effect. 2 (display of icons based on pending storage) allows the main control means to not update the icons even if the current variable display ends and the next variable display is executed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (performance control board 130), the main control means is configured to control whether a starting condition is satisfied (for example, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45 or when a game ball enters the second starting port 47). a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the winning of the above-mentioned determination information; a variable display execution means for executing a variable display of the first special symbol and a variable display of the second special symbol; a storage means for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been performed as a pending memory (for example, a first pending memory); , a gaming state control means for controlling a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state; is capable of displaying an icon (holding icon) based on the holding memory, and holding information (for example, holding numbers, sub-first holding LED) based on the holding memory, and starts a fluctuating effect in response to the start of the fluctuating display, The variable performance can be ended in accordance with the end of the variable display, and the main control means is based on the next judgment information stored in the pending storage following the current variable display currently being executed in the normal gaming state. When executing the next variable display, if a communication error occurs in which the production control means cannot receive a command (stop command) while executing the current variation production according to the current variation display, the current variation display will be executed. The display of the hold information (for example, the hold number based on the first hold memory, the display of the sub-first hold LED) is changed to the next change display after the current change display ends in the main control means. It is not updated even if is executed, and can be updated at a predetermined timing thereafter. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls the effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (performance control board 130), the main control means is configured to control whether a starting condition is satisfied (for example, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45 or when a game ball enters the second starting port 47). a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the winning of the above-mentioned determination information; a variable display execution means for performing a variable display of the first special symbol and a variable display of the second special symbol; a storage means for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been performed as a pending memory (for example, a second pending memory); , a gaming state control means for controlling a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state; is capable of displaying an icon (holding icon) based on the holding memory, and holding information (for example, holding numbers, sub-second holding LED) based on the holding memory, and starts a fluctuating effect in response to the start of the fluctuating display, The variable performance can be ended in accordance with the end of the variable display, and the main control means is based on the next judgment information stored in the pending storage following the current variable display currently being executed in the specific gaming state. When executing the next variable display, if a communication error occurs in which the production control means cannot receive a command (stop command) while executing the current variation production according to the current variation display, the current variation display will be executed. The display of the hold information (for example, the hold number based on the second hold memory, the display of the sub-second hold LED) is changed to the next change display after the current change display ends in the main control means. It is not updated even if is executed, and can be updated at a predetermined timing thereafter. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆An eighth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls the effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (performance control board 130), the main control means is configured to control whether a starting condition is satisfied (for example, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45 or when a game ball enters the second starting port 47). a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the winning of the above-mentioned determination information; a variable display execution means for executing a variable display of the first special symbol and a variable display of the second special symbol; a storage means for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been performed as a pending memory (for example, a first pending memory); , a gaming state control means for controlling a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, and the effect control means includes a display means ( A predetermined display effect (e.g., background display effect) capable of changing display (e.g., background change display) can be executed in the first image display device 70), and the variable effect is started in response to the start of the variable display. and the variable performance can be terminated in accordance with the end of the variable display, and the main control means displays the next judgment information stored in the hold following the current variable display currently being executed in the normal gaming state. When executing the next variation display based on the current variation display, if a communication error occurs in which the production control means cannot receive a command (command at the time of stop) while executing the current variation production according to the current variation display, the current variation production The predetermined display effect (for example, background display effect) that was being displayed during the execution of is capable of being continuously displayed even when the current variable display ends and the next variable display is executed in the main control means, In addition, continuous change display is possible. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ A ninth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls the effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (performance control board 130), the main control means is configured to control whether a starting condition is satisfied (for example, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45 or when a game ball enters the second starting port 47). a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the winning of the above-mentioned determination information; a variable display execution means for performing a variable display of the first special symbol and a variable display of the second special symbol; a storage means for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been performed as a pending memory (for example, a second pending memory); , a gaming state control means for controlling a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, and the effect control means includes a display means ( A predetermined display effect (e.g., background display effect) capable of changing display (e.g., background change display) can be executed in the first image display device 70), and the variable effect is started in response to the start of the variable display. and the fluctuating performance can be ended in accordance with the end of the fluctuating display, and the main control means can display the next judgment information stored in the hold following the current fluctuating display currently being executed in the specific gaming state. When executing the next variation display based on the current variation display, if a communication error occurs in which the production control means cannot receive a command (command at the time of stop) while executing the current variation production according to the current variation display, the current variation production The predetermined display effect (for example, background display effect) that was being displayed during the execution of is capable of being continuously displayed even when the current variable display ends and the next variable display is executed in the main control means, In addition, continuous change display is possible. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆A tenth configuration for solving the above problems includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (performance control board 130), the main control means is configured to control whether a starting condition is satisfied (for example, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45 or when a game ball enters the second starting port 47). a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the winning of the above-mentioned determination information; a variable display execution means for executing a variable display of the first special symbol and a variable display of the second special symbol; a storage means for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been performed as a pending memory (for example, a first pending memory); , a gaming state control means for controlling a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state; Performs adjustments (increasing the volume value, decreasing the volume value, increasing the light amount value, decreasing the light amount value) regarding the predetermined production (sound production, light emission production) according to the production adjustment operation (cross key operation) It is possible to start a fluctuating performance in response to the start of the fluctuating display, and to end the fluctuating performance in response to the end of the fluctuating display; When executing the next variable display based on the next judgment information held in storage following the current variable display, the effect control means issues a command while executing the current variable effect corresponding to the current variable display. If a communication abnormality occurs in which a (stop command) cannot be received, the effect adjustment operation is enabled even if the current variable display is finished in the main control means and the next variable display is executed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆An eleventh configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls the effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (performance control board 130), the main control means is configured to control whether a starting condition is satisfied (for example, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45 or when a game ball enters the second starting port 47). a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the winning of the above-mentioned determination information; a variable display execution means for executing a variable display of the first special symbol and a variable display of the second special symbol; a storage means for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been performed as a pending memory (for example, a first pending memory); , a gaming state control means for controlling a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, and the effect control means controls the variable display. It is possible to start a variable effect according to the start of the variable display, and to end the variable effect according to the end of the variable display, and when the variable display is executed with a specific variation pattern (special figure variation pattern 01), a specific A variable performance (variable performance pattern 1) can be executed, and at a predetermined timing in the specific variable performance, a predetermined performance using a performance pattern (effect performance of the performance pattern, action performance of the performance pattern) can be performed, When the main control means executes the next variable display based on the next determination information stored in the hold, following the current variable display currently being executed in the normal gaming state, the effect control means If a communication error occurs in which a command (command at stop) cannot be received during the execution of the current variation effect corresponding to the current variation display, the main control means terminates the current variation display and displays the specific variation as the next variation display. Even if a pattern is executed, execution of a predetermined effect using the effect pattern can be restricted at the predetermined timing. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆A twelfth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls the effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (performance control board 130) and a movable performance device (first movable member 73) that is movable between an initial position and an operating position, the main control means is configured to control when a starting condition is satisfied ( For example, whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination information (special figure determination information) obtained by winning a game ball to the first starting port 45, winning a game ball to the second starting port 47) a determining means for determining whether the determination is made; a variable display execution means for executing a variable display (for example, a variable display of the first special symbol, a variable display of the second special symbol) based on the result of the determination of the determination information; A storage means for storing the unexecuted determination information as a suspended memory (for example, a first suspended memory), and a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state) more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. ), the effect control means is capable of starting a variable effect in response to the start of the variable display, and can end the variable effect in response to the end of the variable display, When the fluctuating display is executed in a specific fluctuating pattern (special figure fluctuating pattern 08), specific fluctuating effects (fluctuation rendering patterns 15 to 17) can be executed, and at a predetermined timing in the specific fluctuating rendering. , the movable performance device is capable of executing a moving performance (decision success performance), and the main control means executes the next judgment stored in the pending storage following the current variable display currently being executed in the normal gaming state. When executing the next variation display based on the information, if a communication error occurs in which the production control means cannot receive a command (stop command) while executing the current variation production according to the current variation display, the main control Even if the current variable display ends and the specific variable pattern is executed as the next variable display in the means, execution of the moving effect by the movable effect device can be restricted at the predetermined timing. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆A thirteenth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (performance control board 130) and a movable performance device (first movable member 73) that is movable between an initial position and an operating position, the main control means is configured to control when a starting condition is satisfied ( For example, whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination information (special figure determination information) obtained by winning a game ball to the first starting port 45, winning a game ball to the second starting port 47) a determining means for determining whether the determination is made; a variable display execution means for executing a variable display (for example, a variable display of the first special symbol, a variable display of the second special symbol) based on the result of the determination of the determination information; A storage means for storing the unexecuted determination information as a pending memory (for example, a second pending memory), and a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state) more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. ), the effect control means is capable of starting a variable effect in response to the start of the variable display, and can end the variable effect in response to the end of the variable display, When the fluctuating display is executed with a specific fluctuating pattern (special figure fluctuating pattern 44), specific fluctuating effects (fluctuation rendering patterns 46 to 48) can be executed, and at a predetermined timing in the specific fluctuating rendering. , the movable performance device can execute a moving performance (decision success performance), and the main control means executes the next judgment stored in the pending storage following the current variable display currently being executed in the specific game state. When executing the next variation display based on the information, if a communication error occurs in which the production control means cannot receive a command (stop command) while executing the current variation production according to the current variation display, the main control Even if the current variable display ends and the specific variable pattern is executed as the next variable display in the means, execution of the moving effect by the movable effect device can be restricted at the predetermined timing. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆As a fourteenth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (performance control board 130) and an operation means (performance button 17) which can be operated by a player and which can vibrate, the main control means is configured to control the performance when a starting condition is satisfied (for example, Whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by winning the game ball to the first starting port 45 and winning the game ball to the second starting port 47) a determination means for making a determination; a fluctuation display execution means for executing a variable display (for example, a variable display of a first special symbol, a variable display of a second special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination information; a storage means for storing the judgment information as a suspended memory (for example, a first suspended memory); a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state) more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state; and a game state control means for controlling the fluctuation performance, the performance control means being capable of starting the fluctuation performance in response to the start of the fluctuation display, and ending the fluctuation performance in response to the end of the fluctuation display, When the display is executed with a specific variation pattern (special figure variation pattern 08), it is possible to execute a specific variation effect (variation effect patterns 15 to 17), and at a predetermined timing in the specific variation effect, the The operating means can be vibrated, and the main control means executes the next variable display based on the next judgment information stored in the hold, following the current variable display currently being executed in the normal gaming state. If a communication error occurs in which the production control means cannot receive a command (stop command) while executing the current variation production according to the current variation display, the main control means terminates the current variation display and displays the current variation display. Even if the specific variation pattern is executed as the next variation display, vibration of the operating means can be limited at the predetermined timing. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆As a fifteenth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (performance control board 130) and an operation means (performance button 17) which can be operated by a player and which can vibrate, the main control means is configured to control the performance when a starting condition is satisfied (for example, Whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by winning the game ball to the first starting port 45 and winning the game ball to the second starting port 47) a determination means for making a determination; a fluctuation display execution means for executing a variable display (for example, a variable display of a first special symbol, a variable display of a second special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination information; a storage means for storing the judgment information as a pending memory (for example, a second pending memory); a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state) more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state; and a game state control means for controlling the fluctuation performance, the performance control means being capable of starting the fluctuation performance in response to the start of the fluctuation display, and ending the fluctuation performance in response to the end of the fluctuation display, When the display is executed with a specific variation pattern (special figure variation pattern 44), it is possible to execute a specific variation effect (variation effect patterns 46 to 48), and at a predetermined timing in the specific variation effect, the The operating means can be vibrated, and the main control means executes the next variable display based on the next judgment information stored in the hold, following the current variable display currently being executed in the specific gaming state. If a communication error occurs in which the production control means cannot receive a command (stop command) while executing the current variation production according to the current variation display, the main control means terminates the current variation display and displays the current variation display. Even if the specific variation pattern is executed as the next variation display, vibration of the operating means can be limited at the predetermined timing. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆As a sixteenth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means In a game machine equipped with a control means (performance control board 130) and a light emitting means (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76) capable of producing a predetermined light emission effect, the main control means is configured to A special game (jackpot game) is executed based on the determination information (special figure determination information) obtained by the establishment (for example, winning of a game ball to the first starting port 45, winning of a game ball to the second starting port 47). a determining means for determining whether or not the above-mentioned A storage means for storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a suspended memory (for example, a first suspended memory); a gaming state control means for controlling a gaming state), the performance control means being capable of starting a variable performance in response to the start of the variable display and ending the variable performance in response to the end of the variable display. Yes, and when the fluctuating display is executed with a specific fluctuating pattern (special figure fluctuating pattern 08), it is possible to execute a specific fluctuating production (fluctuation rendering patterns 15 to 17), and the predetermined variation display in the specific fluctuating rendering is It is possible to cause the light emitting means to emit a specific light (rainbow light emission) at the timing, and the main control means can display the next stored pending display following the current variable display currently being executed in the normal gaming state. When executing the next variation display based on the determination information, if a communication error occurs in which the production control means cannot receive a command (stop command) while executing the current variation production according to the current variation display, the main Even when the current variable display ends and the specific variable pattern is executed as the next variable display in the control means, it is possible to restrict the light emitting means from emitting a specific light at the predetermined timing. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆As a seventeenth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means In a game machine equipped with a control means (performance control board 130) and a light emitting means (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76) capable of producing a predetermined light emission effect, the main control means is configured to A special game (jackpot game) is executed based on the determination information (special figure determination information) obtained by the establishment (for example, winning of a game ball to the first starting port 45, winning of a game ball to the second starting port 47). a determining means for determining whether or not the above-mentioned A storage means for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not yet been performed as a pending memory (for example, a second pending memory); a gaming state control means for controlling a gaming state), the performance control means being capable of starting a variable performance in response to the start of the variable display and ending the variable performance in response to the end of the variable display. Yes, and when the fluctuating display is executed with a specific fluctuating pattern (special figure fluctuating pattern 44), it is possible to execute a specific fluctuating production (fluctuation rendering patterns 46 to 48), and the predetermined variation display in the specific fluctuating rendering is It is possible to cause the light emitting means to emit a specific light (rainbow light emission) at the timing, and the main control means may display the next stored pending display following the current variable display currently being executed in the specific gaming state. When executing the next variation display based on the determination information, if a communication error occurs in which the production control means cannot receive a command (stop command) while executing the current variation production according to the current variation display, the main Even when the current variable display ends and the specific variable pattern is executed as the next variable display in the control means, it is possible to restrict the light emitting means from emitting a specific light at the predetermined timing. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆An eighteenth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (performance control board 130), the main control means is configured to control whether a starting condition is satisfied (for example, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45 or when a game ball enters the second starting port 47). a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the winning of the above-mentioned determination information; a variable display execution means for executing a variable display of the first special symbol and a variable display of the second special symbol; a storage means for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been performed as a pending memory (for example, a first pending memory); , the effect control means is capable of starting the variable effect in response to the start of the variable display, and can end the variable effect in response to the end of the variable display, and the variable display is configured to match a specific variation pattern (specifically When executed in figure variation pattern 08), specific variation effects (variation effect patterns 15 to 17) can be executed, and at a predetermined timing in the specific variation effect, reach effects (normal reach, SP reach, SPSP When the main control means executes the next variation display based on the next determination information held and stored, following the current variation display that is currently being executed, If a communication error occurs in which the production control means cannot receive a command (stop command) while executing the current variation production according to the current variation display, the main control means ends the current variation display and starts the next variation. Even if the specific variation pattern is executed as a display, execution of the ready-to-reach effect can be restricted at the predetermined timing. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆A nineteenth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls the effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (performance control board 130), the main control means is configured to control whether a starting condition is satisfied (for example, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45 or when a game ball enters the second starting port 47). a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the winning of the above-mentioned determination information; a variable display execution means for executing a variable display of the first special symbol and a variable display of the second special symbol; a storage means for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been performed as a pending memory (for example, a first pending memory); , the effect control means is capable of starting the variable effect in response to the start of the variable display, and can end the variable effect in response to the end of the variable display, and the variable display is configured to match a specific variation pattern (specifically When executed in figure variation pattern 08), it is possible to execute a specific variation performance (variation performance patterns 15 to 17), and whether or not the special game is executed at a predetermined timing in the specific variation performance. It is possible to execute a suggestive effect (decision effect) suggesting that the main control means is capable of displaying the next change based on the next judgment information stored in the hold, following the current change display that is currently being executed. When executing the display, if a communication abnormality occurs in which the production control means cannot receive a command (command at the time of stop) while executing the current variation production according to the current variation display, the main control means Even if the specific variation pattern is executed as the next variation display after the display ends, execution of the suggestion effect can be restricted at the predetermined timing. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆A twentieth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (performance control board 130), the main control means is configured to control whether a starting condition is satisfied (for example, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45 or when a game ball enters the second starting port 47). a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the winning of the above-mentioned determination information; a variable display execution means for executing a variable display of the first special symbol and a variable display of the second special symbol; a storage means for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been performed as a pending memory (for example, a first pending memory); , the effect control means is capable of starting the variable effect in response to the start of the variable display, and can end the variable effect in response to the end of the variable display, and the variable display is configured to match a specific variation pattern (specifically When executed in figure variation pattern 08), a specific variation effect (variation effect patterns 15 to 17) can be executed, and a pseudo variation effect is performed a predetermined number of times at a predetermined timing in the specific variation effect. It is possible to execute a pseudo-continuous effect (pseudo-continuous effect), in which the main control means performs a next variable display based on the next judgment information held and stored, following the current variable display that is currently being executed. When performing the current variation display, if a communication error occurs in which the production control means cannot receive a command (stop command) while executing the current variation production according to the current variation display, the main control unit controls the current variation display. Even if the specific variation pattern is executed as the next variation display after completion, the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect can be restricted at the predetermined timing. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆A twenty-first configuration for solving the above problems includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (performance control board 130), the main control means is configured to control whether a starting condition is satisfied (for example, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45 or when a game ball enters the second starting port 47). a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the winning of the above-mentioned determination information; a variable display execution means for executing a variable display of the first special symbol and a variable display of the second special symbol; a storage means for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been performed as a pending memory (for example, a first pending memory); , the effect control means is capable of displaying an icon (pending icon) based on the pending memory on a display means (first image display device 70), and starts a variable effect in response to the start of the variable display. , the variable effect can be ended in accordance with the end of the variable display, and the icon is displayed in either a normal display mode (white icon) or a special display mode (red icon) different from the normal display mode. By doing so, it is possible to execute an icon change performance (pending icon change performance) that suggests the possibility that the special game will be executed, and when the fluctuation display is performed in a specific fluctuation pattern (special pattern fluctuation pattern 08). , a specific variable effect (variable effect patterns 15 to 17) can be executed, and the icon change effect can be executed at a predetermined timing in the specific variable effect, and the main control means: When executing the next variable display based on the next determination information stored in the hold storage following the current variable display that is currently being executed, the effect control means executes the current variable effect according to the current variable display. If a communication error occurs during which a command (command at stop) cannot be received, even if the current variation display ends in the main control means and the specific variation pattern is executed as the next variation display, the predetermined timing It is possible to restrict the execution of the icon change effect. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

<Contents 20 of the invention described in this embodiment>
◆The first configuration for achieving the above object of the present invention is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (for example, gaming machine 1) includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect control means that controls effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. (performance control board 130), the main control means is capable of controlling a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (for example, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous for the player than the normal gaming state. When the production control means normally receives a specific signal (for example, a start command) at a predetermined timing (for example, time T6 in FIG. 294) in the normal gaming state, When it is possible to perform a specific performance (for example, outputting a sound in response to the jackpot determination result being a jackpot) at time T11), and the specific signal is not normally received at the predetermined timing in the normal gaming state, The present invention is characterized in that execution of the specific effect at the specific timing is restricted, and a predetermined effect (for example, a predetermined effect at the start) is executed.

◆The second configuration that achieves the above objective is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (for example, gaming machine 1) includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect control means that controls effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. (performance control board 130), the main control means is capable of controlling a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (for example, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous for the player than the normal gaming state. When the performance control means normally receives a specific signal (for example, a start command) at a predetermined timing (for example, time T5 in FIG. 314) in the specific gaming state, It is possible to perform a specific effect (for example, outputting a sound in response to the jackpot determination result being a jackpot) at time T10), and if the specific signal is not normally received at the predetermined timing in the specific gaming state, the The present invention is characterized in that execution of the specific effect at a specific timing is restricted, and a predetermined effect (for example, a predetermined effect at the start) is executed.

◆The third configuration that achieves the above objective is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (for example, gaming machine 1) includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect control means that controls effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. (performance control board 130), the main control means can determine whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a starting condition, and the main control means can determine whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a starting condition, and It is possible to control to a specific gaming state (for example, a variable probability gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and the performance control means can display an information display (for example, a hold icon HI) suggesting the content of information based on the determination. When a specific signal (for example, start command) is normally received at a predetermined timing (for example, time T6 in FIG. 294) in the normal gaming state, the above signal is received at a specific timing (for example, time T7 in FIG. 294) If a specific display performance related to information display (for example, an icon change performance) is executable, and the specific signal is not normally received at the predetermined timing in the normal gaming state, execution of the specific display performance at the specific timing. The present invention is characterized in that a predetermined display effect regarding the information display (for example, a predetermined effect at the time of start using a hold icon HI) is executed.

◆The fourth configuration that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (for example, gaming machine 1) includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect control means that controls effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. (performance control board 130), the main control means can determine whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a starting condition, and the main control means can determine whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a starting condition, and It is possible to control to a specific gaming state (for example, a variable probability gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and the performance control means can display an information display (for example, a hold icon HI) suggesting the content of information based on the determination. If a specific signal (e.g., start command) is normally received at a predetermined timing (e.g., time T5 in FIG. 314) in the specific gaming state, the information is transmitted at a specific timing (e.g., time T6 in FIG. 314). It is possible to execute a specific display effect regarding display (for example, an icon change effect), and if the specific signal is not normally received at the predetermined timing in the specific gaming state, execution of the specific display effect at the specific timing is executed. The present invention is characterized in that a predetermined display effect regarding the information display (for example, a predetermined effect at the time of start using a hold icon HI) is executed.

◆The fifth configuration that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (for example, gaming machine 1) includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect control means that controls effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. (performance control board 130), the main control means is capable of executing a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition, and the main control means is capable of executing a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition, and a normal gaming state and a state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. It is possible to control a specific gaming state (for example, a variable probability gaming state), and the production control means displays production symbols (for example, production symbols 70a) on the display means (for example, the first image display device 70) along with the variable display. A special image (e.g., background image HG) can be displayed on the display means behind the effect symbols at a predetermined timing (e.g., FIG. 294) in the normal gaming state. When a specific signal (for example, a start command) is normally received at a time point T6), a specific special effect regarding the special image (for example, in response to an SP reach effect) is received at a specific timing (for example, a time point T9 in FIG. 294). If the specific signal is not normally received at the predetermined timing in the normal gaming state, the execution of the specific special effect at the specific timing is restricted, and the operation related to the special image It is characterized by executing a predetermined special effect (for example, a predetermined effect at the start using the background image HG).

◆The sixth configuration that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (for example, gaming machine 1) includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect control means that controls effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. (performance control board 130), the main control means is capable of executing a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition, and the main control means is capable of executing a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition, and a normal gaming state and a state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. It is possible to control a specific gaming state (for example, a variable probability gaming state), and the production control means displays production symbols (for example, production symbols 70a) on the display means (for example, the first image display device 70) along with the variable display. A special image (for example, a background image HG) can be displayed on the display means behind the effect symbols, and a predetermined timing (time point in FIG. 314) in the specific gaming state can be executed. When the specific signal is normally received at T5), it is possible to perform a specific special effect regarding the special image (for example, an operation of the background image HG according to the SP reach effect) at a specific timing (time T8 in FIG. 314). , if the specific signal is not normally received at the predetermined timing in the specific gaming state, the execution of the specific special effect at the specific timing is restricted, and the predetermined special effect regarding the special image (for example, based on the background image HG) is restricted. It is characterized by executing a predetermined effect at the start.

◆The seventh configuration that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (for example, gaming machine 1) includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect control means that controls effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. (performance control board 130), the main control means is capable of executing a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition, and the main control means is capable of executing a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition, and a normal gaming state and a state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. The performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance in which a performance symbol (for example, performance symbol 70a) is varied in accordance with the fluctuation display, and the performance control means is capable of performing a variable performance that varies a performance symbol (for example, the performance symbol 70a) in accordance with the fluctuation display. When a specific signal (for example, a start command) is normally received at a predetermined timing (for example, time T6 in FIG. 294) in the gaming state, a specific symbol related to the production symbol at a specific timing (for example, time T8 in FIG. 294) is received. If the performance (for example, the shaking motion of the performance symbol 70a in the ready-to-win performance in FIG. 290(f)) is executable and the specific signal is not normally received at the predetermined timing in the normal gaming state, the It is characterized in that execution of a specific symbol presentation is restricted, and a predetermined symbol presentation regarding the presentation pattern (for example, a predetermined presentation at the start using the presentation pattern 70a) is executed.

◆The eighth configuration that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (for example, gaming machine 1) includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect control means that controls effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. (performance control board 130), the main control means is capable of executing a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition, and the main control means is capable of executing a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition, and a normal gaming state and a state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. The production control means is capable of executing a variable production in which a production pattern (for example, production pattern 70a) is varied in accordance with the variation display, When a specific signal (e.g., start command) is normally received at a predetermined timing (e.g., time T5 in FIG. 314) in the gaming state, a specific symbol related to the production pattern is received at a specific timing (e.g., time T7 in FIG. 314). If the performance (for example, the shaking motion of the performance symbol 70a in the ready-to-win performance in FIG. 310(e)) is executable and the specific signal is not normally received at the predetermined timing in the specific gaming state, the It is characterized in that execution of a specific symbol presentation is restricted, and a predetermined symbol presentation regarding the presentation pattern (for example, a predetermined presentation at the start using the presentation pattern 70a) is executed.

◆The ninth configuration that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (for example, gaming machine 1) includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect control means that controls effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. (performance control board 130); and a performance body (e.g., first movable member 73) having a light-emitting portion capable of emitting light (e.g., first movable member LED); It is possible to control the normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (for example, variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous for the player than the normal gaming state, and the effect control means is configured to control the performance at a predetermined timing in the normal gaming state (for example, When a specific signal (for example, a start command) is normally received at a time point T6 in FIG. is a jackpot), and if the specific signal is not normally received at the predetermined timing in the normal gaming state, execution of the specific light emission effect at the specific timing is possible. The present invention is characterized in that a predetermined light emitting effect (for example, a predetermined effect at the start by the first movable member LED) regarding the light emission of the light emitting unit is executed.

◆The tenth configuration that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (for example, gaming machine 1) includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect control means that controls effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. (performance control board 130); and a performance body (e.g., first movable member 73) having a light-emitting portion capable of emitting light (e.g., first movable member LED); It is possible to control the normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (for example, variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous for the player than the normal gaming state, and the performance control means is configured to control the performance at a predetermined timing in the specific gaming state (for example, When a specific signal (for example, a start command) is normally received at a time point T5 in FIG. is a jackpot), and if the specific signal is not normally received at the predetermined timing in the specific gaming state, execution of the specific light emitting effect at the specific timing is possible. The present invention is characterized in that a predetermined light emitting effect (for example, a predetermined effect at the start by the first movable member LED) regarding the light emission of the light emitting unit is executed.

◆The eleventh configuration that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (for example, gaming machine 1) includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect control means that controls effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. (performance control board 130), the main control means is capable of executing a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition, and the main control means is capable of executing a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition, and a normal gaming state and a state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. It is possible to control a specific gaming state (for example, a variable probability gaming state), and the effect control means starts the variable effect when receiving a signal for starting the variable display (for example, a start command), and The fluctuating performance can be ended when a display stop signal (for example, a stop command) is received, and in the fluctuating performance, it is possible to change the performance symbol (for example, the performance symbol 70a) and then stop it. Yes, and if the stop signal is not normally received at a predetermined timing in the normal gaming state (for example, time T4 in FIG. 294), the production symbol at a time before the predetermined timing (for example, time T3 in FIG. 294) A specific sound effect (for example, the output of a sound effect accompanying the temporary stop of the effect pattern 70a) is executed when the effect pattern 70a stops, and the effect pattern is output after the predetermined timing (for example, from time T5 to time T14 in FIG. 294). is displayed, but the specific sound effect is not executed.

◆The twelfth configuration that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (for example, gaming machine 1) includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect control means that controls effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. (performance control board 130), the main control means is capable of executing a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition, and the main control means is capable of executing a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition, and a normal gaming state and a state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. It is possible to control a specific gaming state (for example, a variable probability gaming state), and the effect control means starts the variable effect when receiving a signal for starting the variable display (for example, a start command), and The fluctuating performance can be ended when a display stop signal (for example, a stop command) is received, and in the fluctuating performance, it is possible to change the performance symbol (for example, the performance symbol 70a) and then stop it. Yes, and if the stop signal is not normally received at a predetermined timing in the specific gaming state (for example, time T10 in FIG. 308), then the production symbol at a time before the predetermined timing (for example, time T3 in FIG. 308) A specific sound effect (for example, the output of a sound effect accompanying the temporary stop of the effect pattern 70a) is executed with the stop of the effect pattern 70a, and after the predetermined timing (for example, from time T11 in FIG. 308 to time T12 in FIG. 309). In T15), the production pattern is displayed, but the specific sound production is not executed.

◆The thirteenth configuration that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (for example, gaming machine 1) includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect control means that controls effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. (performance control board 130), the main control means is configured to control the first determination information or the It is possible to determine whether or not to execute a special game based on the second determination information obtained when the second start condition is satisfied (for example, the game ball enters the second start port 47), and the determination of the first determination information A first variable display can be executed based on the result of the determination of the second determination information, and a second variable display can be executed based on the result of the determination of the second determination information, and the first determination information for which the determination has not been performed is held in the first hold. It is possible to store the second determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a second pending memory, and to store the second determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a second reserved memory, and to store the information in a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state (for example, The production control means can display the first suspension memory and the second suspension memory on a display means as an icon (for example, a suspension icon HI), The first variable effect can be started in response to the start of the display, the first variable effect can be ended in response to the end of the first variable display, and the second variable effect can be started in response to the start of the second variable display. and the second variable performance can be ended in response to the end of the second variable display, and the second variable performance is executed next after the start of the second variable performance based on the second variable display in the normal gaming state. When the new first variable effect is not started even after the first variable display is started (for example, when the effect control unit 130m does not normally receive the command at the start of the first variable display after the start of the second variable effect) The icon is characterized in that when a predetermined signal (for example, a stop command) is normally received, the icon based on the first pending memory can be continuously displayed without being erased.

◆The fourteenth configuration that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (for example, gaming machine 1) includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect control means that controls effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. (performance control board 130), the main control means is configured to control the first determination information or the It is possible to determine whether or not to execute a special game based on the second determination information obtained when the second start condition is satisfied (for example, the game ball enters the second start port 47), and the determination of the first determination information A first variable display can be executed based on the result of the determination of the second determination information, and a second variable display can be executed based on the result of the determination of the second determination information, and the first determination information for which the determination has not been performed is held in the first hold. It is possible to store the second determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a second pending memory, and to store the second determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a second reserved memory, and to store the information in a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state (for example, The performance control means can display first reservation information (for example, a reservation icon HI) corresponding to the first reservation memory and the second reservation memory, and It is possible to display second reservation information (for example, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E) according to the number of the first reservation memory and the second reservation memory, and the first fluctuation is displayed according to the start of the first fluctuation display. The first variable effect can be started in response to the end of the first variable display, and the second variable effect can be started in response to the start of the second variable display, and the second variable display can be started. The second variable display can be ended in accordance with the end, and even if the first variable display to be executed next is started after the start of the second variable display based on the second variable display in the normal gaming state. In the case where the new first variable effect is not started (for example, when the effect control unit 130m does not normally receive the command at the time of starting the first variable display after the start of the second variable effect), a predetermined signal (for example, when stopping The second pending information based on the first pending memory is not updated when the command (command) is received normally.

◆The fifteenth configuration that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (for example, gaming machine 1) includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect control means that controls effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. (performance control board 130), the main control means is capable of executing a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition, and the main control means is capable of executing a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition, and a normal gaming state and a state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. It is possible to control a specific gaming state (for example, a variable probability gaming state), and the effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect when receiving a signal for starting the variable display (for example, a start command); A specific performance (for example, the customer waiting performance in FIG. 281(s)) can be executed when no performance is being executed, and the start signal is normally received during the execution of the specific performance in the normal gaming state. If a predetermined signal (for example, a stop command) is normally received without stopping, the specific performance is ended.

◆The sixteenth configuration that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (for example, gaming machine 1) includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect control means that controls effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. (performance control board 130), the main control means is capable of executing a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition, and the main control means is capable of executing a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition, and is capable of displaying a normal gaming state and a state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. It is possible to control a specific gaming state (for example, a variable probability gaming state), and the production control means is capable of executing a variation production when receiving a signal for starting the variation display (for example, a start command), When a performance is executed, it is possible to change the performance pattern (for example, the performance pattern 70a) and then stop it, and when the fluctuation performance is not performed, a specific performance (for example, FIG. 281(s) (customer waiting effect), and when a predetermined signal (for example, a stop command) is normally received without normally receiving the start signal during execution of the specific effect in the normal gaming state, It is characterized by displaying the stopped effect pattern.

◆The seventeenth configuration that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (for example, gaming machine 1) includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect control means that controls effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. (performance control board 130) and an operating means (for example, cross key 18) that can be operated by a player, the main control means is configured to control a normal game state and a game mode other than the normal game state. It is possible to control a specific gaming state (for example, a variable probability gaming state) that is advantageous for the user, and the performance control means controls a specific operation performance regarding the operating means (for example, displaying the guide image AG in FIG. 280(p)). and a predetermined setting regarding the performance (for example, the setting of the volume in FIG. 280(q)) is possible according to the operation of the operating means when the specific operation performance is being performed, When a specific signal (for example, a customer waiting state designation command) is normally received at a predetermined timing in the normal gaming state, the specific operation effect can be executed at the specific timing, and the If the specific signal is not normally received, execution of the specific operation effect at the specific timing is restricted, but the predetermined setting can be made in accordance with the operation of the operating means.

◆The eighteenth configuration that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (for example, gaming machine 1) includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect control means that controls effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. (performance control board 130), the main control means is capable of determining whether or not to perform a special game based on the establishment of a starting condition, and is capable of executing a variable display based on the result of the determination. It is possible to control a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (for example, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous for the player than the normal gaming state, and the effect control means is configured to control the start signal of the variable display ( For example, upon receiving a start command), it is possible to execute a fluctuating performance, and in the fluctuating performance, a plurality of symbols (for example, the performance symbol 70a) can be varied and then stopped, and among the plurality of symbols, It is possible to execute a reach effect in which some of the symbols are stopped and the remaining symbols continue to fluctuate, and the result of the determination is the execution of the special game (for example, a jackpot of the first special symbol). When the variable display) is executed, the ready-to-reach effect can be executed at a specific timing (for example, time T8 in FIG. 294), and even if the specific variable display is started in the normal gaming state, the new variable effect ( For example, if the first variable effect is not started, execution of the ready-to-reach effect at the specific timing is limited.

◆The nineteenth configuration that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (for example, gaming machine 1) includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect control means that controls effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. (performance control board 130), the main control means is capable of determining whether or not to perform a special game based on the establishment of a starting condition, and is capable of executing a variable display based on the result of the determination. It is possible to control a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (for example, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous for the player than the normal gaming state, and the effect control means is configured to control the start signal for the variable display ( For example, upon receiving a start command), it is possible to execute a fluctuating performance, and in the fluctuating performance, it is possible to fluctuate a plurality of symbols (for example, the performance symbol 70a) and then stop it, and among the plurality of symbols, It is possible to execute a reach effect in which some of the symbols are stopped and the remaining symbols continue to fluctuate, and the result of the determination is the execution of the special game (for example, a jackpot of the second special symbol). When a variable display) is executed, the ready-to-reach effect can be executed at a specific timing (for example, time T7 in FIG. 314), and even if the specific variable display is started in the specific gaming state, a new variable effect can be executed. If not started, execution of the ready-to-reach effect at the specific timing is restricted.

◆The 20th configuration that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (for example, gaming machine 1) includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect control means that controls effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. (performance control board 130), the main control means is capable of determining whether or not to perform a special game based on the establishment of a starting condition, and is capable of executing a variable display based on the result of the determination. It is possible to control a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (for example, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous for the player than the normal gaming state, and the performance control means can control a plurality of symbols according to the variable display. It is possible to execute a variation effect in which the effect pattern 70a (for example, the effect pattern 70a) is varied and then stopped, and it is possible to execute a reach effect in which some of the symbols among the plurality of symbols are stopped and the remaining symbols continue to fluctuate. , a specific effect (for example, the SP reach effect shown in FIG. 278(e)) can be executed during the execution of the above-mentioned reach effect, and the first identification information (e.g., characters) that can identify the symbol and the symbol can be identified. The plurality of patterns can be displayed by a specific display mode (for example, the highly decorative display mode of FIG. 278(a)) that combines second identification information (for example, character image CG) having a predetermined decorativeness. , in the variable production, a specific sound production (for example, an effect accompanying a temporary stop) occurs when the last symbol (for example, the production symbol 70a in the middle area) of the plurality of symbols in the specific display mode stops. 278(b) to 278. (f), FIGS. 279(g) to 279(j)), the special game is not executed as a result of the determination, and the reach effect is not executed (for example, FIG. 279(k)). ), FIG. 279(l), and the variable effects shown in FIGS. 280(m) to 280(o)) are characterized in that the specific sound effects are easier to execute.

Note that the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, but can also be used for a reel-type gaming machine (so-called slot machine). Furthermore, it can also be used in a jankyu game machine or an arranged ball game machine.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment shifts to a low probability gaming state after the end of the jackpot game when the type of jackpot special symbol is a normal symbol, and when the type of jackpot special symbol is a specific symbol. Although the game machine is configured to shift to a high-probability game state that continues until the next jackpot game after the end of a jackpot game, the game machine may shift to a high-probability game state for a predetermined number of times after the end of all jackpot games.

In addition, after all the jackpot games are finished, the high probability game state is entered, and if the player wins the falling lottery that is executed at the start of the special symbol fluctuation display in the high probability game state, the high probability game state is ended and the normal It is also possible to use a gaming machine that returns to a gaming state.

Furthermore, when a game ball passes through a specific area in a specific round game of a jackpot game, the gaming machine may be configured to shift to a high probability game state for a predetermined number of times after the jackpot game ends.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are not executed simultaneously (in parallel), and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority. However, a gaming machine may be used in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed simultaneously (in parallel).

Further, the embodiments disclosed herein are illustrative in all respects and should be considered not to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description, and it is intended that equivalent meanings to the claims and all changes within the scope be included.
Furthermore, various configurations in each of the embodiments described above may be combined.

Furthermore, the embodiments disclosed herein are illustrative in all respects and should be considered not to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description, and it is intended that equivalent meanings to the claims and all changes within the scope be included.

1 Game machine 5 Game board 44 General figure gate 45 First starting port 47 Second starting port 50 Big prize opening 70 First image display device 71 Second image display device 110 Main control board 110a Main CPU
120 Payout control board 130 Production control board 130a Sub CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine comprising a main control means for controlling the progress of a game, and a performance control means for controlling a performance according to a signal from the main control means,
The main control means includes:
Obtains judgment information when the starting conditions are met,
It is possible to determine whether or not to play a special game based on the determination information ,
A variable display can be performed based on the determination information ,
controllable into a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state different from the normal gaming state;
The performance control means is
It is possible to perform a fluctuating performance in which a plurality of performance symbols are varied and then stopped based on the determination information ,
It is possible to execute a reach effect during execution of the variable effect ,
The plurality of performance patterns can be displayed in a specific display mode that combines first identification information that allows the performance pattern to be identified and second identification information that has a predetermined decorativeness that allows the performance pattern to be identified,
In the variable performance in which the ready-to-reach performance is not performed , a specific sound performance can be performed as a stop mode of the plurality of performance symbols in the specific display mode with the stop of the last performance symbol,
In a customer waiting state where the variable performance is not being executed, a specific image that makes the performance pattern difficult to see can be displayed,
While displaying the specific image, if a predetermined state occurs in which the fluctuating display by the main control means is started but the fluctuating effect by the effect control means is not started, the display of the specific image can be continued;
A gaming machine that hides the specific image and makes predetermined performance symbols visible when a predetermined signal is normally received while the specific image is being displayed when the predetermined state occurs.

Images